B030205Khuddakanikāya(ṭīkā)（小部復注）c3.5s

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Khuddakanikāye

Nettippakaraṇa-ṭīkā

Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā

Saṃvaṇṇanārambhe (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā; ma. ni. ṭī. 1.1 ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1 ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā) ratanattayavandanā saṃvaṇṇetabbassa dhammassa pabhavanissayavisuddhipaṭivedanatthaṃ, taṃ pana dhammasaṃvaṇṇanāsu viññūnaṃ bahumānuppādanatthaṃ, taṃ sammadeva tesaṃ uggahaṇadhāraṇādikkamaladdhabbāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbahitasukhanipphādanatthaṃ. Atha vā maṅgalabhāvato, sabbakiriyāsu pubbakiccabhāvato, paṇḍitehi sammācaritabhāvato, āyatiṃ paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanato ca saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmakiriyā. Atha vā ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ pūjanīyapūjāpuññavisesanibbattanatthaṃ, taṃ attano yathāladdhasampattinimittassa kammassa balānuppadānatthaṃ, antarā ca tassa asaṅkocanatthaṃ, tadubhayaṃ anantarāyena aṭṭhakathāya parisamāpanatthaṃ. Idameva ca payojanaṃ ācariyena idhādhippetaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『vandanājanitaṃ…pe… tassa tejasā』』ti. Vatthuttayapūjā hi niratisayapuññakkhettasambuddhiyā aparimeyyappabhāvo puññātisayoti bahuvidhantarāyepi lokasannivāse antarāyanibandhanasakalasaṃkilesaviddhaṃsanāya pahoti, bhayādiupaddavañca nivāreti. Yathāha –

『『Pūjārahe pūjayato, buddhe yadi va sāvake』』ti. (dha. pa. 195; apa. thera 1.10.1) ca,

Tathā –

『『Ye, bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā, agge te pasannā, agge kho pana pasannānaṃ aggo vipāko hotī』』ti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) ca,

Tathā –

『『『Buddho』ti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti;

Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenapi jambudīpassa;

『『『Dhammo』ti…pe… 『saṅgho』ti…pe… dīpassā』』ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.6; itivu. aṭṭha 90; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā; ma. ni. ṭī. 1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.34) ca,

Tathā –

『『Yasmiṃ, mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosa…pe… na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hotī』』ti (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11) ca,

Tathā –

『『Araññe rukkhamūle vā…pe…;

Bhayaṃ vā chambhitattaṃ vā, lomahaṃso na hessatī』』ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.249) ca;

Tattha yassa ratanattayassa vandanaṃ kattukāmo, tassa guṇātisayayogasandassanatthaṃ 『『mahākāruṇika』』ntiādinā gāthāttayamāha. Guṇātisayayogena hi vandanārahabhāvo, vandanārahe ca katā vandanā yathādhippetappayojanaṃ sādhetīti. Tattha yassā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, sā netti visesato yathānulomasāsanasannissayā, tassa ca vicittākārappavattivibhāvinī. Tathā hi suttantadesanā na vinayadesanā viya karuṇāppadhānā, nāpi abhidhammadesanā viya paññāppadhānā, atha kho karuṇāpaññāppadhānāti tadubhayappadhānadesanāvisesavibhāvanaṃ tāva sammāsambuddhassa thomanaṃ kātuṃ tammūlakattā sesaratanānaṃ 『『mahākāruṇikaṃ nātha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Tattha kiratīti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā; ma. ni. ṭī. 1.1; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 1.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文: 禮敬世尊、阿羅漢、正等正覺者 小部 導論註疏 註疏開端章釋義 在註疏開始時，對三寶的禮敬是爲了顯示所要註釋之法的來源依止清凈，這是爲了讓智者對法的註釋生起尊重，爲了他們能正確地理解、憶持並如法修習，以成就一切眾生的利益安樂。又或是因為這是吉祥的緣故，因為這是一切行為的首要任務，因為這是智者們正確實行的緣故，因為這能讓後人效仿的緣故，所以在註疏中要禮敬三寶。又或者說，禮敬三寶是爲了產生禮敬應受禮敬者的殊勝功德，這是爲了增強自己已獲得的善業的力量，爲了使它中途不受阻礙，這兩者都是爲了能無障礙地完成註釋。這正是論師在此所要表達的目的。因此他說"由禮敬所生...以其威力"。 供養三寶確實因為是無上福田的緣故，能產生無量威力的福德，即使在充滿眾多障礙的世間，也能摧毀一切導致障礙的煩惱，並能避免恐懼等災禍。如說： "供養應供養者，無論是佛陀還是聲聞。" 又說： "諸比丘，信樂佛者，是信樂最上者；信樂最上者，得最上果報。" 又說： "稱念'佛陀'時，身中所生喜； 此喜實殊勝，勝過統治閻浮提（印度）； 稱念'法'時...稱念'僧'時...統治大地。" 又說： "大名啊，聖弟子憶念如來時，其心不為貪所纏，不為瞋...不為癡所纏。" 又說： "林中或樹下... 不會生恐懼、戰慄或身毛豎立。" (由於篇幅限制，我只翻譯了一部分。如需繼續翻譯後續內容，請告知。)

1.1) karuṇā, paradukkhaṃ vikkhipati apanetīti attho. Atha vā kiṇātīti karuṇā, paradukkhe sati kāruṇikaṃ hiṃsati vibādhatīti attho . Kampanaṃ karotīti vā karuṇā, paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakhedaṃ karotīti attho. Kamiti vā sukhaṃ, taṃ rundhatīti karuṇā. Esā hi paradukkhāpanayanakāmatālakkhaṇā, attasukhanirapekkhatāya kāruṇikānaṃ sukhaṃ rundhati vibandhatīti attho. Kiriyati dukkhitesu pasāriyatīti vā karuṇā, karuṇāya niyuttoti kāruṇiko yathā 『『dovāriko』』ti (a. ni. 7.67). Yathā hi dvāraṭṭhānato aññattha vattamānopi dvārapaṭibaddhajīviko puriso dvārānativattavuttitāya dvāre niyuttoti 『『dovāriko』』ti vuccati, evaṃ bhagavā mettādivasena karuṇāvihārato aññattha vattamānopi karuṇānativattavuttitāya karuṇāya niyuttoti 『『kāruṇiko』』ti vuccati. Mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya hi yāva mahāparinibbānā lokahitatthameva lokanāthā tiṭṭhantīti. Mahanto kāruṇikoti mahākāruṇiko. Satipi bhagavato tadaññaguṇānampi vasena mahantabhāve kāruṇikasaddasannidhānena vuttattā karuṇāvasenevettha mahantabhāvo veditabbo yathā 『『mahāveyyākaraṇo』』ti. Evañca katvā 『『mahākāruṇiko』』ti iminā padena puggalādhiṭṭhānena satthu mahākaruṇā vuttā hoti.

Aparo nayo – atthasādhanato karuṇaṃ karuṇāyanaṃ karuṇāsampavattanaṃ arahatīti kāruṇiko. Bhagavato hi sabbaññutāya anavasesato sattānaṃ hitaṃ, hitupāyañca jānato, tattha ca akilāsuno hitesitā satthikā, na tathā aññesanti. Atha vā karuṇā karuṇāyanaṃ sīlaṃ pakati sabhāvo etassāti kāruṇiko. Bhagavā hi pathavīphassādayo viya kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāvā karuṇāsabhāvo sabhāvabhūtakaruṇoti attho. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Atha vā mahāvisayatāya, mahānubhāvatāya, mahapphalatāya ca mahatī karuṇāti mahākaruṇā. Bhagavato hi karuṇā niravasesesu sattesu pavattati, pavattamānā ca anaññasādhāraṇā pavattati, diṭṭhadhammikādibhedañca mahantameva sattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ ekantato nipphādeti, mahākaruṇāya niyuttoti mahākāruṇiko, taṃ mahākāruṇikaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Sumāgadhādipadānaṃ viya cettha saddasiddhi veditabbā.

Nāthatīti nātho, veneyyānaṃ hitasukhaṃ āsīsati patthetīti attho, mettāyanavasena cettha hitasukhāsīsanaṃ veditabbaṃ, na karuṇāyanavasena paṭhamapadena vuttattā. Atha vā nāthati veneyyagataṃ kilesabyasanaṃ upatāpetīti nātho, nāthatīti vā nātho, yācatīti attho. Bhagavā hi 『『sādhu, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ attasampattiṃ paccavekkhitā』』tiādinā (a. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 1.1. 悲憫，是驅散、除去他人痛苦的意思。或者說，悲憫是傷害的意思，即當他人遭受痛苦時，會傷害並困擾具有悲憫心的人。或者說，悲憫是使之震動的意思，即當他人遭受痛苦時，會使善人內心不安。或者說，"kam"是快樂的意思，悲憫就是阻礙這種快樂。因為悲憫的特徵是希望除去他人的痛苦，由於不顧及自身的快樂，所以會阻礙、妨礙具有悲憫心者的快樂。或者說，悲憫是延伸到受苦者身上的意思，具有悲憫的人就是從事悲憫的人，就像"守門人"一樣。 正如一個人即使不在門口處，但因為以看守門戶為生，其行為不離開門戶，所以被稱為"守門人"。同樣地，世尊雖然以慈等其他方式安住，不僅僅侷限於悲憫，但因為其行為不離開悲憫，所以被稱為"具悲憫者"。因為從大誓願開始直到大般涅槃，世間導師都是爲了世間利益而住世。大悲憫者就是具有廣大悲憫的人。雖然世尊在其他功德方面也是偉大的，但因為這裡與"悲憫"一詞相連，所以這裡的"大"應該從悲憫的角度來理解，就像說"大論師"一樣。這樣理解的話，"大悲憫者"這個詞就是從人的角度來表達導師的大悲憫。 另一種解釋是：值得實現悲憫、引導悲憫、推動悲憫的人就是具悲憫者。因為世尊以一切智性完全了知眾生的利益和達到利益的方法，並且在這方面不知疲倦地追求利益，這是其他人所不及的。或者說，以悲憫為本性、特質、自性的人就是具悲憫者。世尊就像地界的堅硬性、觸覺等性質一樣，以悲憫為自性，是具有悲憫本質的意思。其餘解釋與前面相同。 或者說，因為對像廣大、威力廣大、果報廣大，所以稱為大悲憫。因為世尊的悲憫遍及一切眾生，且其運作方式是其他人所不共有的，並且必定能帶來現世等各種巨大的眾生利益與安樂。從事大悲憫的就是大悲憫者。其餘一切都應按已說的方式理解。這裡的詞形變化應該像"善摩揭陀"等詞一樣來理解。 導師是庇護、期望眾生的利益安樂的意思，這裡應該從慈心的角度來理解期望利益安樂，而不是從悲憫的角度，因為悲憫已在第一個詞中說過。或者說，導師是摧毀、焚燒眾生煩惱災難的意思；或者說，導師是祈求的意思。因為世尊以"諸比丘，比丘應當適時省察自己的成就"等方式...

8.7, 8) sattānaṃ taṃ taṃ hitappaṭipattiṃ yācitvāpi mahākaruṇāya samussāhito te tattha niyojeti. Paramena vā cittissariyena samannāgato, sabbasatte vā sīlādiguṇehi īsati abhibhavatīti paramissaro bhagavā 『『nātho』』ti vuccati, taṃ nāthaṃ.

Ñātabbanti ñeyyaṃ, atītādibhedabhinnaṃ sabbaṃ saṅkhataṃ, asaṅkhatañca. Saṅgaraṇaṭṭhena sāgaro, patitapatitānaṃ attano puthulagambhīrabhāvehi saṃsīdanaṃ nimmujjanaṃ karotīti attho. Saṃ-saddassa cettha 『『sābhāvo, sārāgo』』tiādīsu (dha. sa. 389, 391) viya niruttinayena daṭṭhabbo. Saṅgaraṇaṭṭhenāti vā saṅgarakaraṇaṭṭhena, ṭhitadhammatāya 『『ayaṃ me mariyādā, imaṃ velaṃ nātikkamāmī』』ti lokena saṅgaraṃ saṅketaṃ karonto viya hotīti attho. Saṅgaraṇaṃ vā samantato galanaṃ sandanaṃ udakena karotīti sāgaro. Kappavuṭṭhānakāle hi mahāsamuddo ito cito ca paggharitvā sakalaṃ lokadhātuṃ ekoghaṃ karotīti. Lokiyā pana vadanti 『『sāgarassa rañño puttehi sāgarehi nibbattito khatoti sāgaro, puratthimo samuddappadeso, taṃsambandhatāya ruḷhivasena sabbopi samuddo tathā voharīyatī』』ti. Sāgarasadisattā sāgaro, ñeyyameva sāgaroti ñeyyasāgaro. Sadisatā cettha puthuladuttaragambhīrānādikālikatāhi veditabbā, nihīnaṃ cetamopammaṃ. Tathā hi ñeyyasseva sātisayā puthulatā aparimāṇalokadhātubyāpanato, sabbaññutaññāṇasseva taraṇīyatāya duttaratā, gambhīratā, ādikoṭirahitā ca pavatti, na itarassa paricchinnadesattā bāhirakavītarāgehipi ittarena khaṇena atikkamitabbattā, parimitagambhīrattā, parimitakālattā ca. Ñeyyasāgarassa pāraṃ pariyantaṃ gatoti ñeyyasāgarapāragū, taṃ ñeyyasāgarapāraguṃ.

Gamanañcettha ñāṇagamanameva, na itaraṃ ñeyyaggahaṇato, taṃ pana ñāṇaṃ duvidhaṃ sammasanapaṭivedhabhedato, tathā hetuphalabhedato. Tattha 『『kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno』』tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 8.7, 8. 受大悲心的推動，即使要乞求眾生行此利益，也要使他們投入其中。或者說，因為具有最高的心自在，或者以戒等功德超越一切眾生，所以世尊被稱為"導師"，即那位導師。 所應知的就是所知，包括過去等差別的一切有為法和無為法。海洋是由於包容的意義，即使已落入的[眾生]因其廣大深邃而沉沒、潛入的意思。這裡的"sam"(意為"具有")字應該按照"具有本性"、"具有貪慾"等詞的語法規則來理解。或者說，包容的意義是作包容的意義，因為以其安住的法性，好像在與世間立約："這是我的界限，我不超越這個邊際"。或者說，海洋是因為使水從四面八方流動、流注。因為在劫末時，大海從此處彼處溢流，使整個世界成為一片汪洋。但世俗人說："海洋是由薩迦羅王的兒子們薩迦羅們所開掘的，[特指]東方的海域，由於與此相關，依慣用法一切海洋都如此稱呼。" 因為與海洋相似而稱為海洋，所知即是海洋，所以稱為所知海。這裡的相似性應該從廣大、難渡、深邃、無始等方面來理解，這是個低劣的比喻。因為只有所知才有殊勝的廣大性，因為遍及無量世界；只有一切智智才有應該渡越的難渡性、深邃性和無始性的運作，而其他的[海洋]則因為處所有限而能被外道離欲者在短暫時間內超越，深度有限，時間也有限。到達所知海的彼岸、邊際的人就是所知海的渡越者，即那位所知海的渡越者。 這裡的"到達"是指以智慧到達，不是其他[方式]，因為是對所知的領悟。那智慧有兩種：依觀察和通達的區別，也依因和果的區別。其中"這個世間確實陷入困境"等...

2.4, 10; peṭako. 23) karuṇāyanavaseneva abhinivisitvā anekākāravokāre saṅkhāre sammasantaṃ bhagavato sammasanañāṇaṃ chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena ñeyyasāgaraṃ ajjhogāhetvā tassa pāraṃ pariyantaṃ agamāsi, yaṃ 『『mahāvajirañāṇa』』nti vuccati. Paṭivedhañāṇaṃ pana sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, yaṃ 『『mahābodhī』』ti vuccati. Pāragamanañca tassa kiccasiddhiyā, samatthatāya ca veditabbaṃ. Tathā yathāvuttaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ hetu, itaraṃ phalaṃ. Saha sammasanañāṇena vā āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ hetu, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ phalaṃ tadānisaṃsabhāvatoti veditabbaṃ.

Vandeti namāmi, abhitthavāmi vā. Saṇhaṭṭhena nipuṇā, anupacitañāṇasambhārānaṃ agādhaṭṭhena gambhīrā, ekattādibhedato nandiyāvaṭṭādivibhāgato ca vicitrā visiṭṭhā nānāvidhā nayā etissāti nipuṇagambhīravicitranayā, nipuṇagambhīravicitranayā desanā assāti nipuṇagambhīravicitranayadesano, taṃ nipuṇa…pe… desanaṃ. Nayatīti vā nayo, pāḷigati, sā ca vuttanayena atthato nipuṇā, atthato byañjanato ca gambhīrā, saṅkhepavitthārānulomādippavattiyā nānāvidhatāya vicitrā. Tathā hi paññattianupaññattiādivasena, saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissatādivasena, kusalādikhandhādisaṅgahādisamayavimuttādiṭhapanādikusalamūlāditikapaṭṭhānādivasena ca anekavidhā pāḷigatīti.

Tattha (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā) dvīhākārehi bhagavato thomanā veditabbā attahitasampattito, parahitappaṭipattito ca. Tesu attahitasampatti anāvaraṇañāṇādhigamato, savāsanānaṃ sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ accantappahānato ca veditabbā, parahitappaṭipatti lābhasakkārādinirapekkhacittassa sabbadukkhaniyyānikadhammadesanato, paṭiviruddhesupi niccaṃ hitajjhāsayañāṇaparipākakālāgamanato ca veditabbā. Sā panettha payogato, āsayato ca duvidhā, parahitappaṭipatti, yathāvuttabhedā duvidhā ca attahitasampatti pakāsitā hoti. Kathaṃ? 『『Mahākāruṇika』』nti iminā āsayato , 『『nipuṇa…pe… desana』』nti iminā payogato, 『『nātha』』nti iminā pana ubhayathāpi bhagavato parahitappaṭipatti pakāsitā karuṇākiccadīpanato, 『『ñeyyasāgarapāragu』』nti iminā sātisayaṃ attahitasampatti paramukkaṃsagatañāṇakiccadīpanato.

Atha vā tīhākārehi bhagavato thomanā veditabbā hetuto, phalato, upakārato ca. Tattha hetu mahākaruṇā, sā pana paṭhamapadena sarūpeneva dassitā. Phalaṃ catubbidhaṃ ñāṇasampadā pahānasampadā ānubhāvasampadā rūpakāyasampadā cāti. Tāsu padhānabhūtā ñāṇapahānasampadā 『『ñeyyasāgarapāragu』』nti iminā padena pakāsitā. Padhāne hi dassite avinābhāvato itarampi dvayaṃ dassitameva hoti. Na hi buddhānaṃ ānubhāvarūpakāyasampattīhi vinā kadācipi dhammakāyasirī vattatīti. Upakāro anantaraṃ abāhiraṃ katvā tividhayānamukhena vimuttidhammadesanā, sā 『『nāthaṃ, nipuṇa…pe… desana』』nti padadvayena pakāsitāti veditabbaṃ.

Tattha (dī. ni. ṭī.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 2.4, 10. 世尊的觀察智以悲憫為基礎，觀察各種各樣的諸行，以三百六十億種方式深入所知之海，到達其彼岸邊際，這被稱為"大金剛智"。而通達智則是以一切智智為基礎的漏盡智，以漏盡智為基礎的一切智智，這被稱為"大菩提"。其到達彼岸應從功能的成就和圓滿性來理解。同樣，前述的觀察智是因，其他是果。或者說，應該理解為：漏盡智連同觀察智是因，一切智智是果，因為這是其利益。 我禮敬，或者說我讚歎。因為微細所以稱為精妙，因為對未積集智慧資糧者難以測量所以稱為深奧，因為一性等差別和輪迴等分類所以稱為種種殊勝的各種方法，具有這些[特質]的就是精妙深奧種種方法，其教說具有精妙深奧種種方法，即那精妙...教說。或者說，方法就是引導，即經文的程序，從意義上說是精妙的，從意義和文句上說是深奧的，因為以簡略、詳盡、隨順等方式多樣運作而顯得種種多樣。因此，依據施設、隨施設等，依世間分、出世間分及兩者混合等，依善等、蘊等、攝等、超越見解等、建立等、善根等、三法、發趣等而有多種經文程序。 其中，應該從兩個方面理解對世尊的讚歎：從自利圓滿和利他實踐。其中，自利圓滿應從獲得無礙智和永遠斷除一切煩惱及其習氣來理解；利他實踐應從以不期望利養恭敬等的心說示能出離一切苦的法，以及即使對敵對者也常懷利益之心等待智慧成熟的時機來理解。這裡宣說了兩種利他實踐——從實踐和意樂兩方面，以及如前所述兩種自利圓滿。如何[解釋]？以"大悲憫者"[表示]從意樂方面，以"精妙...教說"[表示]從實踐方面，以"導師"則從兩方面表示世尊的利他實踐，因為顯示悲憫的作用，以"所知海渡越者"則顯示殊勝的自利圓滿，因為顯示智慧作用達到最高境界。 或者說，應該從三個方面理解對世尊的讚歎：從因、果和利益。其中，因是大悲，這在第一個詞中已經明確顯示。果有四種：智慧圓滿、斷除圓滿、威力圓滿和色身圓滿。其中，主要的智慧和斷除圓滿以"所知海渡越者"這個詞來表示。因為顯示了主要的，由於不相離的關係，其他兩種也就顯示了。因為諸佛的法身莊嚴決不會離開威力和色身圓滿而存在。利益是不分內外地以三乘為門而說解脫法，應該理解這是由"導師"和"精妙...教說"這兩個詞來表示。 其中...

1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā) 『『mahākāruṇika』』nti etena sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ dasseti. Mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso hi bhagavā saṃsārapaṅkato sattānaṃ samuddharaṇatthaṃ katābhinīhāro anupubbena pāramiyo pūretvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ adhigatoti karuṇā sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ. 『『Ñeyyasāgarapāragu』』nti etena pubbabhāgappaṭipattiyā saddhiṃ sammāsambodhiṃ dasseti. Anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ 『『sammāsambodhī』』ti vuccati. Vuttappabhedaṃ pana sammasanañāṇaṃ saha paññāpāramiyā tassā pubbabhāgapaṭipadā. Tassā hi ānubhāvena līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhallikattakilamathānuyogasassatucchedādiantadvayavirahitā ukkaṃsapāramippattā majjhimā paṭipadā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gatā. 『『Nātha』』nti iminā sammāsambodhiyā phalaṃ dasseti lokattayanāyakabhāvadīpanato. Tathā hi sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā, sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya aparimitanirupamabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya ca sabbasattuttamo bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ anuttaragāravaṭṭhānabhūtatāya ca 『『nātho』』ti vuccatīti. 『『Nipuṇa…pe… desana』』nti iminā sammāsambodhiyā payojanaṃ dasseti. Saṃsāramahoghato sattasantāraṇatthañhi bhagavatā sammāsambodhi abhipatthitā, tañca sattasantāraṇaṃ yathāvuttadesanāsampattiyā samijjhati tadavinābhāvato. Iminā bhagavato sātisayā parahitappaṭipatti dassitā, itarehi attahitasampattīti tadubhayena attahitāya paṭipannādīsu catūsu puggalesu bhagavato catutthapuggalabhāvaṃ dīpeti, tena ca anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ, uttamavandanīyabhāvaṃ, attano ca vandanakiriyāya khettaṅgatabhāvaṃ dīpeti.

Ettha ca yathā 『『mahākāruṇika』』nti iminā padena bhagavato mahākaruṇā dassitā, evaṃ 『『ñeyyasāgarapāragu』』nti etena mahāpaññā dassitā. Tesu karuṇāggahaṇena lokiyesu mahaggatabhāvappattāsādhāraṇaguṇadīpanato bhagavato sabbalokiyaguṇasampatti dassitā hoti, paññāggahaṇena sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānamaggañāṇadīpanato sabbalokuttaraguṇasampatti. Tadubhayaggahaṇasiddho eva cattho nāthasaddena pakāsīyati. Karuṇāvacanena upagamanaṃ nirupakkilesaṃ dasseti, paññāvacanena apagamanaṃ. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena lokasamaññānurūpaṃ bhagavato pavattiṃ dasseti lokavohāravisayattā karuṇāya, paññāggahaṇena samaññāya anatidhāvanaṃ. Sabhāvānavabodhena hi dhammānaṃ samaññaṃ atidhāvitvā sattādisammasanaṃ hotīti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena mahākaruṇāsamāpattivihāraṃ dasseti, paññāggahaṇena tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, catusaccañāṇaṃ, catupaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ, catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ. Karuṇāggahaṇena mahākaruṇāsamāpattiñāṇassa gahitattā sesāsādhāraṇañāṇāni, cha abhiññā, aṭṭhasu parisāsu (ma. ni. 1.151, 178) akampanañāṇāni, dasa balāni, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, soḷasa ñāṇacariyā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305; vibha. mūlaṭī. suttantabhājanīyavaṇṇanā; dī. ni. ṭī. 3.141), catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni sattasattati ñāṇavatthūnīti (saṃ. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 1.1. 以"大悲憫者"這一詞表示正等正覺的根本。因為世尊被大悲心所激勵，爲了從輪迴泥沼中拯救眾生，發下誓願，逐漸圓滿波羅蜜，獲得無上正等正覺，所以悲是正等正覺的根本。以"所知海渡越者"表示正等正覺的預備階段的實踐。無礙智為依據的道智，道智為依據的無礙智，被稱為"正等正覺"。前面所說的觀察智與智慧波羅蜜一起，是其預備階段的實踐。因為其威力，超越了沉湎、輕躁、執著、追求感官快樂、疲憊、常見和斷見等兩邊，達到中道的最高境界，完成了修習。以"導師"表示正等正覺的果報，因為顯示成為三界的領導者。因為世尊以完全消除一切災難為前導，以無遺餘地提供利益安樂為目標，以無與倫比的實踐成就，對於天人世間來說是極大的利益者，具有無量無邊難以比擬的功德，是一切眾生中的至高無上者，在無量的世界中，對於無量的眾生，成為無上尊敬的根源，所以被稱為"導師"。以"精妙...教說"表示正等正覺的目的。因為世尊爲了從輪迴大海中拯救眾生而追求正等正覺，這種拯救通過如前所述的教說成就，因為兩者不可分離。通過這一點，顯示了世尊殊勝的利他實踐，通過其他[方面]顯示自利圓滿，由此兩者顯示世尊在修行等四種人中屬於第四種人，並因此顯示其為無上可供施捨者、最高可讚嘆者，以及自身禮敬的境界。 在此，正如以"大悲憫者"這一詞顯示世尊的大悲，同樣以"所知海渡越者"顯示大智慧。在這裡，以悲的把握顯示世尊在世間獲得的超越性和共同功德，以智慧的把握顯示一切出世間功德圓滿，即無礙智為依據的道智。兩者把握成就的意義通過"導師"這個詞來表示。通過悲的語言顯示無染的到達，通過智慧的語言顯示離去。同樣，通過悲的把握顯示世尊符合世間名言的運作，因為悲屬於世間言說的範疇；通過智慧的把握則不過度追逐名言。因為不瞭解本性時，過度追逐名言會導致對眾生等的觀察。同樣，通過悲的把握顯示大悲三摩地的住處，通過智慧的把握顯示三時不被阻礙的智、四諦智、四無礙解智、四無畏智。因為悲的把握包含了大悲三摩地智，其他不共的智慧，六神通，八眾不動智，十力，十四佛智，十六智行，十八佛法，四十四智處，七十七智處...<.Assistant>

2.34) evamādīnaṃ anekesaṃ paññāppabhedānaṃ vasena ñāṇacāraṃ dasseti.

Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena caraṇasampatti, paññāggahaṇena vijjāsampatti. Karuṇāggahaṇena sattādhipatitā, paññāggahaṇena dhammādhipatitā. Karuṇāggahaṇena lokanāthabhāvo, paññāggahaṇena attanāthabhāvo. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena pubbakāribhāvo, paññāggahaṇena kataññutā. Karuṇāggahaṇena aparantapatā, paññāggahaṇena anattantapatā. Karuṇāggahaṇena vā buddhakaradhammasiddhi, paññāggahaṇena buddhabhāvasiddhi. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena paresaṃ tāraṇaṃ, paññāggahaṇena sayaṃ tāraṇaṃ. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena sabbasattesu anuggahacittatā, paññāggahaṇena sabbadhammesu virattacittatā dassitā hoti. Sabbesañca buddhaguṇānaṃ karuṇā ādi taṃnidānabhāvato, paññā pariyosānaṃ tato uttari karaṇīyābhāvato, iti ādipariyosānadassanena sabbe buddhaguṇā dassitā honti. Tathā karuṇāvacanena sīlakkhandhapubbaṅgamo samādhikkhandho dassito hoti. Karuṇānidānañhi sīlaṃ tato pāṇātipātādiviratippavattito, sā ca jhānattayasampayoginīti. Paññāvacanena paññākkhandho. Sīlañca sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ ādi, samādhi majjhe, paññā pariyosānanti evampi ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇā sabbe buddhaguṇā dassitā honti nayato dassitattā. Eso eva hi niravasesato buddhaguṇānaṃ dassanupāyo, yadidaṃ nayaggāhaṇaṃ, aññathā ko nāma samattho bhagavato guṇe anupadaṃ niravasesato dassetuṃ. Tenevāha –

『『Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno;

Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā』』ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.304; 3.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.425; udā. aṭṭha. 53; apa. aṭṭha. 2.7.20; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 4.4; cariyā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā, pakiṇṇakakathā; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā; ma. ni. ṭī. 1.1; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; vajira. ṭī. ganthārambhakathā; sārattha. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā);

Teneva ca āyasmatā sāriputtattherenāpi buddhaguṇaparicchedanaṃ pati anuyuttena 『『no hetaṃ, bhante』』ti (dī. ni. 2.145) paṭikkhipitvā 『『apica me, bhante, dhammanvayo vidito』』ti (dī. ni. 2.146) vuttaṃ.

Evaṃ saṅkhepena sakalasabbaññuguṇehi bhagavantaṃ abhitthavitvā idāni saddhammaṃ thometuṃ 『『vijjācaraṇasampannā』』tiādimāha. Tattha vijjācaraṇasampannā hutvāti vacanaseso. Vindiyaṃ dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇaṃ, sāmaññalakkhaṇañca vindatīti vijjā, lobhakkhandhādīni vā vijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, catunnaṃ vā ariyasaccānaṃ viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjāti evaṃ tāvettha vacanatthato vijjā veditabbā. Pabhedato pana tissopi vijjā vijjā bhayabheravasutte āgataniyāmeneva, aṭṭhapi vijjā vijjā ambaṭṭhasuttādīsu (dī. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 2.34. 這樣顯示無數智慧差別的智行。 同樣，通過悲的把握顯示行為圓滿，通過智慧的把握顯示明的圓滿。通過悲的把握顯示以眾生為主，通過智慧的把握顯示以法為主。通過悲的把握顯示世間導師的地位，通過智慧的把握顯示自身導師的地位。同樣，通過悲的把握顯示先行者的身份，通過智慧的把握顯示知恩。通過悲的把握顯示不折磨他人，通過智慧的把握顯示不折磨自己。或者說，通過悲的把握顯示成就成佛之法，通過智慧的把握顯示成就佛性。同樣，通過悲的把握顯示度化他人，通過智慧的把握顯示自度。同樣，通過悲的把握顯示對一切眾生的慈悲心，通過智慧的把握顯示對一切法的離染心。 悲憫是一切佛德的開始，因為它是[一切佛德]的根源；智慧是終結，因為在此之上再無所作，這樣通過顯示開始和終結而顯示了所有佛德。同樣，通過悲的語言顯示以戒蘊為首的定蘊。因為戒以悲為根本，由此產生遠離殺生等[惡行]，而且[悲]與三禪相應。通過智慧的語言[顯示]慧蘊。戒是一切佛德的開始，定在中間，慧在最後，這樣也通過顯示始中終的善巧而顯示了所有佛德，因為已經從方法上顯示了。這確實是完全顯示佛德的方法，即抓住要點，否則誰能夠逐一完全顯示世尊的功德呢？因此說： "即使佛陀讚歎佛陀的功德， 整劫不說其他事； 劫數雖久遠會盡， 如來功德不會盡。" 因此，當尊者舍利弗被問及測量佛德時，否定說："不是這樣，尊者"，而說："但是，尊者，我知道法的類推。" 這樣簡略地以一切智者的全部功德讚歎世尊后，現在爲了讚歎正法而說"明行具足"等。其中應補充"成為明行具足者"。能知諸法的自相和共相故稱為明，或因為能破除貪蘊等故稱為明，或因為能使四聖諦明瞭故稱為明，這樣首先應該從詞義理解明。從類別來說，三明是明，如《怖駭經》中所說的方式；八明是明，如《阿摩晝經》等中...

1.278 ādayo) āgataniyāmeneva. Caranti tehīti caraṇāni, sīlasaṃvarādayo pañcadasa dhammā, iti imāhi vijjāhi, imehi ca caraṇehi sampannā sampannāgatāti vijjācaraṇasampannā.

Yenāti yena dhammena karaṇabhūtena, hetubhūtena ca. Tattha maggadhammassa karaṇattho veditabbo niyyānakiriyāsādhakatamabhāvato, nibbānadhammassa hetuattho ārammaṇapaccayabhāvato. Paccayattho hi ayaṃ hetvattho. Pariyattidhammassapi hetuattho yujjateva paramparāya hetubhāvato. Phaladhamme pana ubhayampi sambhavati. Kathaṃ? 『『Tāya saddhāya avūpasantāyā』』ti vacanato maggena samucchinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānakiccatāya phalassa niyyānānuguṇatā, niyyānapariyosānatā cāti iminā pariyāyena siyā karaṇattho niyyānakiriyāya. Sakadāgāmimaggavipassanādīnaṃ pana upanissayapaccayabhāvato siyā hetuattho. Evañca katvā aggappasādasuttādīsu (itivu. 90) aggādibhāvena aggahitāpi phalapariyattidhammā chattamāṇavakavimānādīsu (vi. va. 886 ādayo) saraṇīyabhāvena gahitāti tesaṃ magganibbānānaṃ viya mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ saraṇabhāvo uddhaṭo. Visesato cettha maggapariyāpannā eva vijjācaraṇadhammā veditabbā. Te hi nippariyāyena niyyānakiriyāya sādhakatamabhūtā, na itare. Itaresaṃ pana niyyānatthatāya niyyānatā. Yadi evaṃ kasmā 『『vijjācaraṇasampannā hutvā』』ti vuttaṃ, niyyānasamakālameva hi yathāvuttavijjācaraṇasampattisamadhigamoti? Nāyaṃ virodho samānakālatāya eva adhippetattā yathā 『『cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa』』nti (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; 4.60; kathā. 465, 467). Sampannāti vā padassa vattamānakālatthatā veditabbā 『『uppannā dhammā』』ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 17) ettha uppannasaddassa viya. Evañca katvā vacanasesamantareneva padayojanā siddhā hoti. 『『Yenā』』ti ca padaṃ ubhayattha sambandhitabbaṃ 『『yena dhammena vijjācaraṇasampannā, yena dhammena niyyantī』』ti.

Lokatoti khandhādilokato, vaṭṭatoti attho. Nti taṃ magganibbānaphalapariyattibhedaṃ dhammaṃ. Uttamanti seṭṭhaṃ. Tathā hesa attanā uttaritarassa abhāvena 『『anuttaro』』ti vuccati. Tattha maggassa niyyānahetuādiatthena, nibbānassa nissaraṇavivekādiatthena, phalassa ariyasantabhāvādiatthena ca seṭṭhatā veditabbā. Svāyamattho 『『yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī』』ti (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34) ādisuttapadānusārena vibhāvetabbo.

Dhammanti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyato, saṃsārato ca apatamāne katvā dhāretīti dhammo. Sammā, sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho, sabbaññutāanāvaraṇañāṇo samantacakkhu bhagavā, tena yathā sammāsambodhisamadhigameneva sabbe buddhaguṇā sampāpuṇīyanti, evaṃ sammadeva āsevanāya bhāvanāya bahulīkiriyāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sammadeva paccavekkhaṇāya sakkaccaṃ dhammadesanāya veneyyasantānesu patiṭṭhāpanena –

『『Ariyaṃ , vo bhikkhave, sammāsamādhiṃ desessāmi (ma. ni. 3.136; peṭako. 24). Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho (dha. pa. 273; netti. 170; peṭako. 30). Yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34). Ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā (dī. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 1.278. 所說的方式。行就是以它們而行，即戒律制約等十五法，因此以這些明和這些行而具足、成就，稱為明行具足。 "由此"是指以此法作為工具和因。其中，道法應理解為工具義，因為是出離行為的最勝成就者；涅槃法應理解為因義，因為是所緣緣。這裡的因義是緣義。教法的因義也是合適的，因為是間接的因。而在果法中兩者都可能。如何？由於"以其未平息的信"的說法，由於道所斷除的煩惱在果位中寂滅斷除的作用，[果]與出離相應且是出離的終點，依此方式可以是出離行為的工具義。又因為是一來道觀智等的親依止緣，可以是因義。這樣理解的話，雖然在《最上凈信經》等中沒有以最上等身份提到果法和教法，但在《傘童天宮》等中作為歸依處而提到，因此在大註疏中像道和涅槃一樣被列為歸依處。這裡應特別理解屬於道的明行法。因為它們是無譬喻的出離行為的最勝成就者，其他則不是。其他的出離性是基於出離的意義。如果這樣，為什麼說"成為明行具足"呢？因為獲得所說的明行圓滿與出離是同時的。這不矛盾，因為正是要表達同時性，就像"緣于眼和色而生眼識"一樣。或者應理解"具足"一詞表示現在時，如"已生諸法"中的"已生"一詞。這樣的話，不需要補充語詞就能完成詞組的組合。"由此"這個詞應該在兩處連線："由此法而明行具足，由此法而出離。" "從世間"是從蘊等世間，即輪迴的意思。"它"是指那道、涅槃、果、教法等差別的法。"最上"是最勝。因為它比自身更上沒有他法，所以稱為"無上"。其中，道的最勝性應從出離因等義理解，涅槃的最勝性應從解脫、遠離等義理解，果的最勝性應從聖者寂靜等義理解。這個意義應該依照"諸比丘，就有為法而言，八支聖道被稱為其中最上"等經文來說明。 "法"是因為它能保持依教奉行者不墮惡趣和輪迴，所以稱為法。由於正確地、自己完全覺悟一切法，所以是正等正覺者，是具有一切智、無礙智、遍眼的世尊。如同通過證得正等正覺而獲得一切佛德一樣，通過正確地修習、培養、多作、正確實踐、正確省察、恭敬說法、確立在所化眾生相續中—— "諸比丘，我將為你們說聖正定。八支道最勝。諸比丘，就有為法或無為法而言，離欲被稱為其中最上。諸比丘，這是眾生清凈的一乘道..."

2.373; ma. ni. 1.106; saṃ. ni. 5.367, 384). Dhammaṃ, vo bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇa』』nti (ma. ni. 3.420; netti. 5) –

Ādivacanehi, abhitthavanena ca pūjito mānito apacitoti sammāsambuddhapūjito, taṃ sammāsambuddhapūjitaṃ dhammaṃ vandeti sambandho.

Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yassa dhammassa adhigamane vijjāsampannā ceva honti caraṇasampannā ca, sabbavaṭṭadukkhato ca niyyanti, tameva ariyānaṃ sakalaguṇasamaṅgibhāvanimittaṃ, anavasesadukkhanissaraṇahetubhūtañca uttamaṃ pavaraṃ saddhiṃ pariyattidhammena navavidhaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ bhagavatāpi sammāpaṭipattiādividhinā pūjitaṃ namāmi, abhitthavāmi vāti.

Ettha ca 『『yena lokato niyyanti, vijjācaraṇasampannā ca hontī』』ti padadvayena yathākkamaṃ dhammassa bhāvetabbabhāvo, sacchikātabbabhāvo ca vutto. Tesu paṭhamena vijjāsampattiyā dhammaṃ thometi, dutiyena vimuttisampattiyā. Tathā paṭhamena jhānasampadāya, dutiyena vimokkhasampadāya. Paṭhamena vā samādhisampadāya, dutiyena samāpattisampadāya. Paṭhamena vā khayañāṇabhāvena, dutiyena anuppādañāṇabhāvena. Atha vā purimena vijjūpamatāya, dutiyena vajirūpamatāya. Purimena vā virāgasampattiyā, dutiyena nirodhasampattiyā. Tathā paṭhamena niyyānabhāvena, dutiyena nissaraṇabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā hetubhāvena, dutiyena asaṅkhatabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā dassanabhāvena, dutiyena vivekabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā adhipatibhāvena, dutiyena amatabhāvena dhammaṃ thometi. Atha vā paṭhamena niyyānikabhāvadassanato svākkhātatāya dhammaṃ thometi, dutiyena sacchikātabbabhāvato sandiṭṭhikatāya. Tathā purimena akālikatāya, pacchimena ehipassikatāya. Purimena vā opaneyyikatāya, pacchimena paccattaṃ veditabbatāya dhammaṃ thometi.

『『Uttama』』nti ca etena aññassa visiṭṭhassa abhāvadīpanena paripuṇṇatāya dhammaṃ thometi , 『『sammāsambuddhapūjita』』nti etena parisuddhatāya. Sabbadosāpagamena hissa pūjanīyatā. Parisuddhatāya cassa pahānasampadā, paripuṇṇatāya pabhavasampadā. Pahānasampattiyā ca bhāvanāpāripūrī anavasesadosasamugghāṭanato, pabhavasampattiyā sacchikiriyanibbatti tatuttari karaṇīyābhāvato. Anaññasādhāraṇatāya hi uttamoti. Tathā bhāvetabbabhāvenassa saha pubbabhāgasīlādīhi sekkhā sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhā, sacchikātabbabhāvena saha asaṅkhatāya dhātuyā asekkhā sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhā dassitā hontīti.

Evaṃ saṅkhepena sabbasaddhammaguṇehi saddhammaṃ thometvā idāni ariyasaṅghaṃ thometuṃ 『『sīlādiguṇasampanno』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sīlādiguṇasampannoti sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiyādiguṇehi sampanno samannāgato, sampannasīlādiguṇo vā. Ariyānañhi taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesappahānena hatapaṭipakkhā suvisuddhā sīlādayo 『『sampannā』』ti vattabbataṃ arahanti , na puthūjjanānaṃ, yato 『『suppaṭipanno』』tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.74; a. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 2.373. "諸比丘，我將為你們說法，初善"等—— 通過這些開始的言語和讚歎而受到尊敬、尊重、禮敬，故稱為"為正等正覺者所尊敬"，禮敬那為正等正覺者所尊敬的法，這是[句子的]連線。 這裡的簡要意義是：通過證得此法而成為明行具足者，並從一切輪迴苦中出離，這正是聖者具足一切功德的因緣，是無餘苦的出離因，[我]禮敬或讚歎那最上最勝的，連同教法在內的九種出世間法，這些法也為世尊以正確實踐等方式所尊敬。 這裡，以"由此從世間出離，成為明行具足"這兩個詞句，依次表示法是應當修習的、應當證悟的。在這兩者中，以第一個[詞句]通過明的圓滿來讚歎法，以第二個通過解脫的圓滿[來讚歎]。同樣，以第一個通過禪那的圓滿，以第二個通過解脫的圓滿。或者以第一個通過定的圓滿，以第二個通過等至的圓滿。或者以第一個通過盡智的狀態，以第二個通過無生智的狀態。或者以前者通過如閃電的特性，以後者通過如金剛的特性。或者以前者通過離欲的圓滿，以後者通過滅的圓滿。同樣，以第一個通過出離性，以第二個通過解脫性。或者以第一個通過因性，以第二個通過無為性。或者以第一個通過見性，以第二個通過遠離性。或者以第一個通過增上性，以第二個通過不死性來讚歎法。或者以第一個由於顯示出離性而讚歎法的善說性，以第二個由於應證性而[讚歎]其現見性。同樣，以前者[讚歎]其無時性，以後者[讚歎]其請來看性。或者以前者通過應引導性，以後者通過各自應證知性來讚歎法。 以"最上"這個詞通過顯示沒有其他更殊勝的而讚歎法的圓滿性，以"為正等正覺者所尊敬"讚歎其清凈性。因為通過遠離一切過失而值得尊敬。通過其清凈[顯示]斷除的圓滿，通過其圓滿[顯示]生起的圓滿。由於斷除的圓滿而[顯示]修習的圓滿，因為滅除一切無餘過失；由於生起的圓滿而[顯示]證悟的成就，因為再無所作。因為不與他共而為最上。同樣，通過其應修習性，連同前分戒等顯示有學戒定慧蘊，通過其應證性，連同無為界顯示無學戒定慧蘊。 這樣以簡要的方式用一切正法功德讚歎正法后，現在爲了讚歎聖僧而說"具足戒等功德"等。其中，"具足戒等功德"是具足、成就戒、定、慧、解脫等功德，或者說具足戒等功德。因為聖者們由於斷除各自道所斷的煩惱而摧破對抗，[其]清凈的戒等堪稱"圓滿"，而凡夫則不然，因此以"善行道"等...;

6.10; udā. 18) ariyasaṅgho thomīyati. Atha vā sīlādiguṇasampannoti paripuṇṇasīlādiguṇo. Ariyapuggalānañhi ariyasaccappaṭivedhena saheva yathārahaṃ sekkhāsekkhā sīlādidhammakkhandhā pāripūriṃ gacchantīti. Ṭhito maggaphalesūti maggesu, phalesu ca ṭhito, maggaṭṭho, phalaṭṭho cāti attho. Yoti aniyamato ariyasaṅghaṃ niddisati, tassa 『『ta』』nti iminā niyamaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Nanu ca ariyasaṅghe na sabbe ariyapuggalā maggaṭṭhā, nāpi sabbe phalaṭṭhāti? Saccametaṃ, avayavadhammena pana samudāyaṃ niddisanto evamāha yathā 『『samaṃ cuṇṇa』』nti. Yathā hi yogacuṇṇassa avayavesu labbhamāno samabhāvo samudāye apadisīyati 『『samaṃ cuṇṇa』』nti, evaṃ ariyasaṅghassa avayavabhūtesu ariyapuggalesu labbhamāno maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvo samudāyabhūte ariyasaṅghe ṭhito 『『maggaphalesū』』ti apadiṭṭhoti veditabbaṃ.

Ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye ca iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena 『『saraṇa』』nti araṇīyato ariyo, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatattā saṅgho, ariyo ca so saṅgho cāti ariyasaṅgho, taṃ ariyasaṅghaṃ. Pujjabhavaphalanibbattanato attano santānaṃ punātīti vā puññaṃ, khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ viruhanaṭṭhānatāya tāyati rakkhatīti khettaṃ kedārādi, khettaṃ viyāti khettaṃ, sattānaṃ puññassa mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena viruhanaṭṭhānatāya khettanti puññakkhettaṃ. Anuttaraṃ vandeti sambandho.

Ettha ca 『『sīlādiguṇasampanno』』ti etena ariyasaṅghassa bhagavato anujātaputtataṃ dasseti, tenassa pabhavasampadā dīpitā hoti. 『『Ṭhito maggaphalesū』』ti etena pahānasampadaṃ, ñāṇasampadañca dasseti kilesānaṃ samucchedappaṭippassaddhippahānadīpanato, maggaphalañāṇādhigamadīpanato ca. 『『Ariyasaṅgha』』nti etena pabhavasampadaṃ sabbasaṅghānaṃ aggabhāvadīpanato, sadevakena ca lokena araṇīyabhāvadīpanato. 『『Puññakkhettaṃ anuttara』』nti etena lokassa bahūpakārataṃ dasseti aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvadīpanato.

Tathā 『『sīlādiguṇasampanno』』ti idaṃ ariyasaṅghassa sammāujuñāyasāmīcippaṭipannabhāvadīpanaṃ. 『『Ṭhito maggaphalesū』』ti idaṃ satipi santānavibhāgena anekabhāve catupurisayugaaṭṭhapurisapuggalabhāvadīpanaṃ. 『『Ariyasaṅgha』』nti idaṃ āhuneyyādibhāvadīpanaṃ. 『『Puññakkhettaṃ anuttara』』nti idaṃ lokassa hitasukhāya paṭipannatādīpanaṃ. Tathā 『『ṭhito maggaphalesū』』ti idaṃ ariyasaṅghassa lokuttarasaraṇagamanasabbhāvadīpanaṃ, tenassa bhagavato orasaputtabhāvo dassito hoti. 『『Sīlādiguṇasampanno』』ti iminā panassa vihatavidhastakilesā anavasesā sekkhāsekkhā sīlādidhammakkhandhā dassitā. 『『Ariyasaṅghaṃ puññakkhettaṃ anuttara』』nti iminā tesaṃ tesaññeva yathāvuttaguṇavisesānaṃ suparisuddhataṃ dīpeti. Tenassa mahānubhāvataṃ, anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ, vandanārahabhāvaṃ, attano ca vandanākiriyāya khettaṅgatabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Saraṇagamanañca sāvakānaṃ sabbaguṇānaṃ ādi, sapubbabhāgappaṭipadā sekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo majjhe, asekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo pariyosānanti ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇā sabbe ariyasaṅghaguṇā imāya gāthāya pakāsitāti veditabbaṃ.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 6.10. 因此讚歎聖僧。或者"具足戒等功德"意指圓滿的戒等功德。因為對於聖者人，隨著聖諦的通達，依其應得，有學、無學的戒等法蘊達到圓滿。"安住于道果"是安住于道和果，意為安住于道位，安住于果位。"它"是不限定地指明聖僧，通過"這"來理解其限定。 難道不是聖僧中並非所有聖者都安住于道位，也並非所有聖者都安住于果位嗎？這是真的。但在說明部分組成時，他這樣說，就像"均等的粉"一樣。正如在瑜伽粉的成分中可以找到均等性並在整體中指向"均等的粉"，同樣在聖僧的部分組成——聖者人中，可以找到安住于道位和果位的特性，並在作為整體的聖僧中指向，應當理解為"安住于道果"。 因為遠離煩惱，不行於非道，行於正道，與諸天世間共稱為"歸依處"，因為見、戒的共同性而聚集，故為聖者的僧團，這是聖僧。因為從有生果和涅槃生起而凈化自身相續，所以是福；因為如播撒的種子，在生長的地方得以保護，所以是田地，如田地等；像田地一樣，因為通過使眾生的福德成為大果而成為生長的處所，所以是福田。與"無上"相連。 在這裡，"具足戒等功德"顯示了聖僧是世尊的親生子，因此顯示了其生起的圓滿。"安住于道果"顯示了斷除和智慧的圓滿，通過煩惱的斷除、寂止、斷除等，以及道果智的證得。"聖僧"顯示了生起的圓滿，因為是諸僧團中最上，併爲諸天世間所應歸依。"無上福田"顯示了世間的多種利益，因為是最上的應供養處。 同樣，"具足戒等功德"顯示了聖僧正直、合宜、善行的狀態。"安住于道果"顯示了儘管在相續上有差異，但仍有四雙八輩的存在。"聖僧"顯示了應供養等狀態。"無上福田"顯示了世間為利樂而行的狀態。同樣，"安住于道果"顯示了聖僧出世間歸依的存在，因此顯示了世尊的親生子身份。通過"具足戒等功德"顯示了其摧毀一切煩惱，有學、無學的戒等法蘊。通過"聖僧無上福田"顯示了這些功德的極其清凈。因此顯示了其大威德、無上應供養性、值得禮敬性，以及自身成為禮敬處的狀態。歸依是諸弟子一切功德的開端，有學戒蘊等為前分，無學戒蘊等為究竟，應當理解為通過此偈頌顯示了聖僧功德的初、中、終善。

Evaṃ gāthāttayena saṅkhepato sakalaguṇasaṃkittanamukhena ratanattayassa paṇāmaṃ katvā idāni taṃ nipaccakāraṃ yathādhippete payojane pariṇāmento 『『vandanājanita』』nti gāthamāha. Tattha vandanājanitanti vandanākārena nibbattitaṃ, ratanattayaguṇābhitthavanavasena, nipaccakāravasena vā uppāditanti attho. Itīti evaṃ 『『mahākāruṇika』』ntiādippakārena. Ratijananaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, buddhadhammasaṅghā, cittīkatādibhāvo vā ratanaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ –

『『Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ;

Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccatī』』ti. (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; saṃ. ni. 5.223; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226; mahāni. aṭṭha. 50; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathā; ma. ni. ṭī. 1.4; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.4; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.4; sārattha. ṭī. 1.ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā);

Cittīkatabhāvādayo ca anaññasādhāraṇā buddhādīsu eva labbhanti, ratanānaṃ tayaṃ ratanattayaṃ, tasmiṃ ratanattaye. Hatantarāyoti vidhastaupaddavo hutvāti sambandho, etena attano pasādasampattiyā, ratanattayassa ca khettabhāvasampattiyā tassa puññassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya upaghātakaupaddavānaṃ vihanane samatthataṃ dasseti. Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ anto ceva bahi ca, ajjhattikabāhiravatthūsūti attho. Sabbatthāti vā sabbasmiṃ kāle, saṃvaṇṇanāya ādimajjhapariyosānakālesūti vuttaṃ hoti. Hutvāti pubbakālakiriyā, tassa 『『karissāmatthavaṇṇana』』nti etena sambandho. Tassāti yaṃ ratanattaye vandanājanitaṃ puññaṃ, tassa. Tejasāti ānubhāvena balena.

Evaṃ ratanattayavandanāya payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni nettippakaraṇassa gambhīratthattā atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya dukkarabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ 『『ṭhiti』』ntiādimāha. Tattha ṭhitinti ṭhānaṃ anantaradhānaṃ avicchedappavattiṃ. Ākaṅkhamānenāti icchamānena patthayantena, 『『ahovatāyaṃ saddhammanetti ciraṃ tiṭṭheyyā』』ti evaṃ patthayantenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ciranti dīghakālaṃ, pañcavassasahassaparimāṇaṃ kālanti attho. Saddhammanettiyāti saddhammasaṅkhātāya nettiyā. Saddhammo hi veneyyasantānesu ariyaguṇānaṃ nayanato netti, saddhammassa vā netti saddhammanetti, tassā saddhammanettiyā, svāyamattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicārito eva. Therenāti thiraguṇayuttena. Abhiyācitoti ādaragāravena yācito. Abhimukhaṃ vā yācito, anuttaraṃ katvā yācitoti attho. Uddissa vā yācito, garutaraṃ katvā yācitoti attho, 『『karotu āyasmā nettippakaraṇassa kañci atthasaṃvaṇṇana』』nti evaṃ nettiyā atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ pati ajjhesitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca saddhammassa ciraṃ ṭhitikāmena ajjhāsayasampannena sāsane thiraguṇayuttena sabrahmacārinā ādaragāravena, abhimukhaṃ vā yācitena me na sakkā tassa abhiyācanaṃ paṭikkhipitunti dasseti 『『ṭhitiṃ ākaṅkhamānenā』』ti gāthāya.

Padumuttaranāthassāti padumuttarassa sammāsambuddhassa. Passatāti pubbenivāsacakkhunā, samantacakkhunā eva vā hatthatale ṭhapitaāmalakaṃ viya abhinīhāraṃ passantena. Tādināti tādibhāvayuttena , sabbattha vā nibbikārena, 『『amhākaṃ bhagavatā』』ti vacanaseso. Yassāti āyasmato mahākaccānattherassa. Ṭhapitoti –

『『Etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajantānaṃ yadidaṃ mahākaccāno』』ti (a. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 這樣通過三首偈頌，以簡要的方式，通過讚歎全部功德的方式，向三寶致敬后，現在爲了使其順應所意圖的敬禮，說了"由於禮敬而生"的偈頌。在這裡，"由於禮敬而生"意指由於禮敬的方式而產生，通過讚歎三寶的功德，或通過敬禮的方式而生起。就這樣——以"大悲者"等方式。 因為有滋生的意義，所以是寶；佛、法、僧是寶；或有使人尊重等的意義是寶。如所說： "使人尊重，價值極高， 無與倫比，難得一見， 常為殊勝者所享用， 因此稱之為寶。" 使人尊重等特性只能在佛等處找到，不可與他人共享。寶有三種，即三寶。在這三寶中。 "摧毀內在障礙"是指已經摧毀了種種障礙。通過這一點，顯示了自身信解的成就，三寶的成為福田的成就，以及摧毀阻礙此福德的種種障礙的能力。"一切處"是指在一切內外之處。或"一切處"是指一切時間，即讚歎的初、中、終時。"已經"是先前的行為。與"我將讚歎"相連。對於那個由於三寶禮敬而生的福德。以其光輝、力量。 這樣顯示了禮敬三寶的目的后，現在爲了顯示《導論》篇的深奧性及讚歎的困難，說了"安住"等[偈頌]。在這裡，"安住"是指不間斷的存在、持續。"希望"是指希求、渴望，即"啊，愿這正法的導論能長久存在"的渴望。"長久"是指長時間，意為五千年的期限。"正法的導論"是指被稱為正法的導論。因為正法是引導學人于聖者功德，或正法的導論是正法的導論，這一點在註釋中已經詳細討論。 "由長老"是指具有堅固功德的[長老]。"懇請"是出於尊敬和敬意而請求。或是面對面請求，或是盡最大努力請求。或是爲了[某個目的]而請求，尊重地請求，即"請尊者對《導論》篇做些贊叭"。在這裡，對於希望正法長久存在、具有隨順意願、在教法中具有堅固功德、是同梵行者、懷有尊敬之心的人，不能拒絕其懇請，這正是"希望安住"這首偈頌所顯示的。 對於帕都目多陀那他的正等正覺者。"觀察"是通過宿命眼，或以遍知眼，如同置於掌中的菴摩勒果一樣觀察其志願。"如此"是具有如此特性，或在一切處不變。"屬於"是世尊的言語余。屬於大迦葉尊者。已被安置，如所說： "諸比丘，在我的聲聞比丘中，對於以簡略方式所說而廣泛解釋其意義，首推大迦葉。"<.Assistant>

1.188, 197) –

Evaṃ ṭhapito. Sīlādiguṇavisesehi mahantā sāvakāti mahāsāvakā (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.1288; a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.59), mahākassapādayo, tesu ayamāyasmā aññataroti, mahāsāvako ca so guṇavisesayogato uttamo cāti mahāsāvakuttamo.

Jhānādīsu sātisayānaṃ āvajjanādivasībhāvānaṃ, ariyiddhivasena paramassa ca cetovasībhāvassa adhigatattā vasippatto. Atthādīsu savisesabhedagatapaṭisambhidāñāṇattā pabhinnapaṭisambhido. 『『Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno, mahāpañño, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno』』tiādinā (ma. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 1.188,197. 如此被安立。因為具有戒等殊勝功德而成為偉大的聲聞，所以是大聲聞，即大迦葉等，這位尊者是其中之一，他既是大聲聞，又因具有殊勝功德而為最上，因此是最上大聲聞。 因為獲得在禪那等中殊勝的轉向等自在，以及通過聖神通而獲得最高的心自在，所以達到自在。因為在義等方面獲得具有殊勝差別的無礙解智，所以具足無礙解。如所說："諸比丘，大迦旃延是智者，諸比丘，大迦旃延是大智慧者"等。

1.205) anekesu ṭhānesu bhagavatā pasaṃsitattā sambuddhena pasaṃsito. Tena vuttaṃ 『『satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito saṃbhāvito, viññūnañca sabrahmacārina』』nti.

Anumoditāti 『『sādhu sādhu, kaccāna, sādhu kho, tvaṃ kaccāna, imaṃ dhammasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ abhāsī』』ti evaṃ anumoditā. Ekasmiṃ kira samaye ayaṃ mahāthero jambuvanasaṇḍe viharanto attano santikāvacarānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ imaṃ hāranayapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ pakaraṇaṃ abhāsi. Bhāsitvā ca bhagavato santikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisinno yathābhāsitaṃ imaṃ pakaraṇaṃ bhagavato nivedesi. Taṃ sutvā bhagavā 『『sādhu sādhū』』tiādinā anumoditvā 『『tasmātiha, tvaṃ kaccāna, imaṃ dhammasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ dhammanettitveva dhārehī』』ti nāmaggahaṇaṃ akāsīti vadanti. Desanāhārādinandiyāvaṭṭanayādihāranayānusāreneva sabbadhammasaṃvaṇṇanānaṃ gatiyoti āha 『『sāsanassa sadāyattā, navaṅgassatthavaṇṇanā』』ti.

Gambhīrañāṇehīhi gambhīrehi ñāṇehi, na saddhāmattakena, gambhīrañāṇehi vā mahāpaññehi ariyehi. Pakaraṇassa gambhīratthataṃ, attano ca ñāṇassa nātivisayataṃ viditvā saṃvaṇṇanārambhe saṃsīdantampi maṃ sāsanaguṇādiupanissayasampadā ussāhesīti imamatthaṃ dasseti 『『kiñcāpī』』tiādinā.

『『Pañcapinikāye ogāhetvā』』ti iminā nettiyā pañcapi mahānikāye anupavisitvā avaṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanābhāvañca dīpeti. Tattha 『『katamo assādo ca ādīnavo cā』』tiādipeṭakopadesapāḷiṃ (peṭako. 23) ānetvā idha desanāhārādīnaṃ padatthavinicchayo peṭakena saṃsandanaṃ nāma. 『『yathābala』』nti iminā sabbathā sabbabhāgenāpi nettiyā saṃvaṇṇanā mayā na sukarā kātuṃ, attano pana ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ karissāmīti niratimānataṃ dīpeti.

Suvisuddhanti suṭṭhu visuddhaṃ, nikāyantaraladdhidosehi antarantarā anuppavesitehi asammissanti adhippāyo. Asaṃkiṇṇanti sanikāyepi padatthantaraparikappanādinā asaṃkiṇṇaṃ tādisasaṅkararahitaṃ anākulaṃ suparicchinnaṃ. Vividhehi ākārehi nicchinotīti vinicchayo. Atthānaṃ vinicchayo atthavinicchayo. Gaṇṭhiṭṭhānabhūtesu atthesu khilamaddanākārena pavattā vimaticchedakathā, nipuṇo sukhumo saṇho atthavinicchayo etassāti nipuṇatthavinicchayo. Atha vā atthe vinicchinotīti atthavinicchayo, yathāvuttaatthavisayañāṇaṃ, nipuṇo cheko atthavinicchayo etassāti nipuṇatthavinicchayo, taṃ nipuṇatthavinicchayaṃ. Samayanti siddhantaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – mahāvihāravāsīnaṃ siddhanto vuttanayena suparisuddho, anākulo, saṇhasukhumavinicchayo ca, siddhantaṃ taṃ avilomento anukūlato tattha siddhaṃyeva dhammanettiṃ pakāsayanto nettippakaraṇassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ karissāmīti.

Pamādalekhanti aparabhāge potthakāruḷhakāle pamajjitvā likhanavasena pavattappamādapāṭhaṃ. Vajjetvāti apanetvā. Pāḷiṃ sammā niyojayanti taṃ taṃ nettipāḷiṃ tattha tattha udāharaṇabhāvena ānītasutte sammadeva niyojento, atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya vā taṃ taṃ udāharaṇasuttasaṅkhātaṃ pāḷiṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ lakkhaṇabhūte nettiganthe sammadeva niyojento. Upadesanti nettiupanisaṃ nettihadayaṃ. Yvāyaṃ sapaṭṭhānavibhāgassa tettiṃsavidhassa nettipadatthassa saha nimittavibhāgena asaṅkarato vavatthito visayo, taṃ. Vibhāvento pakāsento. Tassā nettiyā karissāmi atthavaṇṇananti sambandho.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 1.205. 因為在許多處被世尊讚歎，所以為正等覺者所讚歎。因此說"既為導師所讚歎、尊重，也為有智慧的同梵行者[所讚歎、尊重]"。 "隨喜"是指"善哉善哉，迦旃延，善哉，迦旃延，你說了這法的解釋"，如此隨喜。據說有一次，這位大長老住在閻浮林時，對自己的隨學比丘們宣說了這部以方法和理趣莊嚴的論典。宣說后前往世尊處，禮敬世尊後坐在一旁，向世尊告知了所說的這部論典。聽了之後，世尊以"善哉善哉"等隨喜后，說"因此，迦旃延，你應把這法的解釋稱為'法導論'"，如此命名。人們說，按照教說理趣等和歡喜轉等理趣方法，是一切法解釋的去處，因此說"教法常依止，九分教的義釋"。 以深奧智慧，不僅僅以信心，或者說以具有深奧智慧的大智聖者。知道論典的深奧性和自己的智慧不足以完全理解后，雖然在開始解釋時有所畏縮，但以教法功德等的資具圓滿而鼓舞我，以"雖然"等顯示此義。 通過"深入五部"顯示《導論》進入並安住於五大部，以及對它們的解釋性質。在其中，引用"何為味、過患"等《篋論指導》文，此處決定教說理趣等的文義，這稱為與《篋論》的對照。通過"隨力"顯示我不能完全、全面地解釋《導論》，而是將依自己的智力而作，顯示無傲慢。 "極清凈"是非常清凈，意思是沒有被其他部派見解的過失間雜污染。"不混雜"是即使在同一部派中也不與其他文義的臆想等混雜，遠離這樣的混雜，不紊亂，善加界定。以各種方式決定稱為決定。對義的決定是義決定。對於難解之義，以破除頑固方式進行的斷疑說明，具有細緻、微妙、柔和的義決定稱為細緻義決定。或者說，決定義理稱為義決定，即如前所說對義的智慧，具有善巧的義決定稱為細緻義決定，即是那細緻義決定。"宗"是指教義。這是說——大寺住者的教義如前所說是極清凈的、不紊亂的、具有細微決定的，不違背那教義，順應其中已成就的法導論而顯明，我將作《導論》的義釋。 "錯誤書寫"是指後來抄寫完成的書時由於疏忽而產生的錯誤讀法。"避免"是除去。"正確配合經文"是指將各個《導論》文正確配合到作為例證而引用的經文中，或者在義釋中將各個作為例證的經文正確配合到作為特徵的《導論》文中。"教導"是指《導論》的基礎、《導論》的心要。對於這個連同住處分別的三十三種《導論》文義，連同相的分別而確立的無混雜的範圍，顯明、闡述它。與"我將作其《導論》的義釋"相連。

Ettha ca 『『abhiyācito』』ti iminā atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya nimittaṃ dasseti, 『『ṭhitiṃ ākaṅkhamānena ciraṃ saddhammanettiyā』』ti iminā payojanaṃ, 『『karissāmatthavaṇṇana』』nti iminā piṇḍatthaṃ. Saṃvaṇṇiyamānā hi pakaraṇatthā saṃvaṇṇanāya piṇḍattho. 『『Tamupanissāyā』』tiādinā karaṇappakāraṃ.

Idāni saṃvaṇṇanāya savane niyojento 『『iti attha』』nti osānagāthamāha. Tattha 『『sakkacca』』nti padaṃ ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ 『『sakkaccaṃ vibhajantassa, sakkaccaṃ nisāmayathā』』ti.

Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Nidānakathāvaṇṇanā

Vacanatthajānanena viditappakaraṇatthasāmaññatthassa pakaraṇakathā vuccamānā sobheyyāti nettipadatthaparijānanameva ādimhi yuttarūpanti tadatthaṃ pucchati 『『tattha kenaṭṭhena nettī』』ti. Tattha tatthāti 『『tassā nettiyā karissāmatthavaṇṇana』』nti yadidaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ; yassā karissāmatthavaṇṇananti paṭiññātaṃ, sā netti kenaṭṭhena nettīti attho. Tatthāti vā 『『nettippakaraṇassā』』ti etasmiṃ vacane yā netti vuttā, sā kenaṭṭhena nettīti attho. 『『Nayanaṭṭhenā』』ti idaṃ kattukaraṇādhikaraṇasādhanānaṃ sādhāraṇavacananti 『『ariyadhammaṃ nayatī』』ti kattusādhanavasena tāva nettisaddassa atthaṃ vatvā idāni karaṇādhikaraṇasādhanavasena vattuṃ 『『nayanti tāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Tathā hi vuttanti nettiupadesādhīnattā eva suttāvabodhassa vuttaṃ. Peṭake 『『tasmā nibbāyitukāmena sutamayena atthā pariyesitabbā, tattha pariyesanāya ayaṃ anupubbī bhavati soḷasa hārā pañca nayā aṭṭhārasa mūlapadānī』』tiādi (peṭako. 3). Hāranayavicāraṇā vinimutto atthasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso natthīti āha 『『suttassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanā nettiupadesāyattā』』ti. Svāyamattho parato pakiṇṇakakathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Evaṃ mahāvisayā cāyaṃ netti kuto pabhavāti āha 『『suttappabhavā』』ti, etena nettiyā pamāṇabhūtataṃ dasseti. Idañca suttassa nettisannissayatāparidīpanaparaṃ, na therappabhavatāpaṭikkhepaparaṃ. Thero hi pañca mahānikāye ogāhetvā taṃsannissayeneva tesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanābhūtaṃ imaṃ pakaraṇaṃ abhāsi, tasmā ayameva saṃvaṇṇanādhammo, yadidaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammasannissayatā.

Pakaraṇaparicchedatoti pakaraṇassa vibhāgato. Hāravicārādayo hi tayo nettippakaraṇassa vibhāgā, pakaraṇabhūtaparicchedato vā. Tīṇi hi etāni pakaraṇāni tayo adhikārā, yadidaṃ hāravicārādayo. Pāḷivavatthānatoti pāṭhasannivesato.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 在這裡，通過"懇請"顯示義釋的因緣，通過"希望正法導論長久安住"顯示目的，通過"我將作義釋"顯示總義。因為所要解釋的論義是解釋的總義。通過"依此"等顯示作成的方式。 現在爲了引導聽聞解釋，說了"如是義"這最後一偈。在這裡，"恭敬"一詞應在兩處連線："恭敬地分析，恭敬地傾聽"。 《序論釋》結束。 《因緣論釋》 通過了知詞義而知道論典的共通義，才適合說論典的解釋，因此首先了解《導論》文義是適宜的，為此問道"這裡以何義為導論？"。在這裡，"這裡"是指"我將作其《導論》的義釋"，這裡所說的，在其中；對於已經承諾將作義釋的，那導論以何義為導論的意思。或者"這裡"是指在"《導論》篇"這句話中所說的導論，以何義為導論的意思。"以引導義"這是作者、工具、處所等語法功能的共通說法，因此首先以作者語法功能說"引導聖法"來解釋導論一詞的意義，現在爲了以工具和處所語法功能來說明，說了"由此引導"等。 因此如此說，因為經義的理解依賴於《導論》的教導。在《篋論》中說"因此想要涅槃者應以聞所成智尋求諸義，在此尋求中有如下次第：十六理趣、五方法、十八根本句"等。沒有離開理趣和方法的考察而有特殊的義釋，因此說"經的義釋依賴於《導論》的教導"。這個意義在後面的雜說中將會明顯。這《導論》如此廣大範圍，從何而來？說"從經典而來"，由此顯示《導論》的權威性。這是爲了顯明經典依賴於《導論》，不是爲了否定由長老而來。因為長老深入五大部，依此而說此論典作為它們的解釋，因此這正是解釋之法，即是依賴於所解釋之法。 從論典分類，即從論典的分類。因為理趣考察等三種是《導論》篇的分類，或從作為論典的分類。因為這三個是論典，是三個主題，即理趣考察等。從經文確立，即從文句的安排。

『『Sabbohi pakaraṇattho』』tiādinā saṅgahavārassa anvatthasaññataṃ dasseti. 『『Nanu cettha paṭṭhānaṃ asaṅgahita』』nti codako byabhicāramāha. Itaro yadipi sarūpato asaṅgahitaṃ, atthato pana saṅgahitanti dassento 『『nayidameva』』tiādinā pariharati. Puna 『『tathā hī』』tiādinā tamevatthaṃ pāḷiyā pākaṭataraṃ karoti. Atthanayā nandiyāvaṭṭādayo. Saṅkhārattikā puññābhisaṅkhārādayo, kāyasaṅkhārādayo ca. Tesu atthanayānaṃ aññamaññasaṅgaho parato āvi bhavissati. Itare pana kāmāvacarā, rūpāvacarā ca kusalā cetanā puññābhisaṅkhāro, akusalā cetanā apuññābhisaṅkhāro, arūpāvacarā kusalā cetanā āneñjābhisaṅkhāro. Puññābhisaṅkhāro ca apuññābhisaṅkhāro ca kāyadvārappavatto kāyasaṅkhāro, so eva vacīdvārappavatto vacīsaṅkhāro, manodvārappavatto pana tividhopi cittasaṅkhāro. Iti jātivasena purimattike vuttā eva dhammā dvāravasena dutiyattike vuttā, te eva ca purimattiketi aññamaññasaṅgaho veditabbo.

Yatthāti yasmiṃ vāre. Peṭaketi peṭakopadese. Sampatamānāti saṃvaṇṇanāvasena sannipatantā. 『『Byañjanavidhiputhuttā』』ti idaṃ ekasmiṃ sutte anekesaṃ hārānaṃ sannipatanassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Tathā hi 『『anekasāmatthiyanicitā saddā』』ti akkharacintakā vadanti.

『『Na sarūpato』』ti iminā saṅgahavāre viya uddesaniddesavāresupi paṭṭhānassa atthato uddhaṭataṃ dasseti. Mūlapadaggahaṇeneva gahitattā uddesavāre tāva evaṃ hotu, niddesavāre pana kathanti? Tatthāpi nayaggahaṇeneva mūlapadānipi gahitānīti veditabbaṃ. Na hi mūlapadehi vinā kāci nayayojanā sambhavati. Apare pana 『『hāranayā viya paṭṭhānaṃ na suttassa saṃvaṇṇanāviseso, atha kho tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte saṃkilesabhāgiyatādilabbhamānavisesamattanti na tassa pakaraṇassa padatthasaṅgaho. Evañca katvā tettiṃsāya nettipadatthesu paṭṭhānaṃ asaṅgahitaṃ, uddesaniddesavāresu ca anuddhaṭamevā』』ti vadanti.

『『Pāḷito eva viññāyatī』』ti vuttamatthaṃ samatthento 『『tathā hi…pe… ābhata』』nti āha, tena therena bhāsitabhāvo viya bhagavatā anumoditabhāvopi pāḷianugato evāti dasseti. Sāvakabhāsitattā nidānaṃ na vuttanti na sakkā vattunti codento 『『sāvaka…pe… bhāsita』』nti āha. Nayidaṃ ekantikanti ca sāvakabhāsitabuddhabhāsitabhāvo nidānāvacanassa, nidānavacanassa ca akāraṇaṃ ubhayatthāpi ubhayassa dassanato. Tasmā nidānāvacanena nettiyā asāvakabhāsitatā na sijjhatīti dasseti. Tenāha 『『na ca tāvatā tāni appamāṇaṃ, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabba』』nti.

Yeneva kāraṇena nidānāvacanassa pamāṇabhāvasādhanatā, teneva kāraṇena imassa pakaraṇassa pamāṇabhāvasiddhīti dasseti 『『nidānañca nāmā』』tiādinā. Idāni 『『atha vā』』tiādinā nettiyā nidānāvacanena abyabhicārahetumāha. Ayañhettha payogo na nettiyā nidānaṃ vattabbaṃ pāḷiyā atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhāvato. Yā hi pāḷiyā atthasaṃvaṇṇanā na tassā nidānavacanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ yathā paṭisambhidāmaggassa, niddesādīnañcāti.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 通過"一切論典的意義"等顯示攝類品的名實相應性。"在這裡難道不是沒有攝集緣起"，質問者提出差異。另一人雖然在形式上沒有攝集，但在意義上是攝集的，爲了顯示這點而以"不僅這個"等來回答。再以"因此"等使這意義通過經文更加明顯。義理方法是歡喜轉等。行類是福行等和身行等。其中義理方法的相互攝集將在後面明顯。其餘的，欲界和色界善思是福行，不善思是非福行，無色界善思是不動行。福行和非福行經由身門而轉起的是身行，同樣經由語門而轉起的是語行，經由意門而轉起的三種都是心行。如此，在前面三法中依種類所說的法，在後面三法中依門而說，這些正是前三法，應當知道它們是相互攝集的。 "何處"是指在哪一品。"篋論"是指篋論指導。"集合"是指以解釋的方式聚集。"文句法則眾多"是說明在一經中多種理趣集合的原因。因此文字學者說"文字具有多種意義"。 通過"不是形式上"顯示在攝類品乃至列舉和解說品中，緣起也是在意義上被提出的。因為通過攝取根本句而已經攝取了，在列舉品中且如此，但在解說品中如何呢？應當知道在那裡也通過攝取方法而攝取了根本句。因為沒有根本句就不可能有任何方法的運用。其他人則說"緣起不像理趣和方法是經的特殊解釋，而只是在各經中所獲得的雜染分等特殊性質，因此不在論典的文義攝集中。這樣的話，在三十三種導論文義中緣起沒有被攝集，在列舉和解說品中也確實沒有被提出"。 爲了證實"從經文字身就可以理解"所說的意義，說"因此...被引用"，由此顯示不僅是長老所說的性質，也是世尊隨喜的性質都是依循經文的。不能說因為是聲聞所說就不說因緣，[為此]說"聲聞...所說"。這不是決定性的，即聲聞所說和佛所說不是說因緣或不說因緣的原因，因為在兩者中都可以看到兩種情況。因此顯示通過說因緣不能證明《導論》不是聲聞所說。因此說"不僅僅因此它們就不是權威，在這裡也應當如此理解"。 通過"因緣這個"等顯示，正是由於說因緣是確立權威性的原因，由此原因也確立此論典的權威性。現在通過"或者"等說明《導論》說因緣的必然理由。這裡的論證是：不應該說《導論》的因緣，因為它是經文的義釋。因為凡是經文的義釋都不見說因緣，如《無礙解道》和《義釋》等。

『『Ayaṃ vibhāgo』』tiādinā ekavidhato paṭṭhāya yāva caturāsītisahassappabhedā, tāva yathādassitassa pakaraṇavibhāgassa puna 『『ādinā nayena pakaraṇavibhāgo veditabbo』』ti idaṃ nigamanaṃ. Tattha ādinā nayenāti ādisaddena abhiññeyyadhammaniddesato paññattipaññapetabbadhammavibhajanato tiyaddhapariyāpannadhammavicārato caturoghanittharaṇatthato pañcābhinandanādippahānato chataṇhākāyupasamanato saṅgahavārādisattavārasaṅgahato aṭṭhamicchattasamugghātadīpanatoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.

1. Saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā

Yanti aniyamattho sabbanāmasaddo kammasādhanavasena vutto. Atthāvabodhanattho saddappayogo atthaparādhīno kevalo atthapadatthako , so padatthavipariyesakārinā iti-saddena parabhūtena saddapadatthako jāyatīti āha 『『yanti aniyamato upayoganiddeso』』ti. Lokoti kattuniddesotiādīsupi eseva nayo.

Evaṃ 『『ya』』ntiādīnaṃ gāthāpadānaṃ kammakattukiriyākattuvisesanādidassanavasena atthaṃ vatvā idāni avayavajotanavasena padatthaṃ dassetuṃ 『『lokiyanti etthā』』tiādimāha. Lokasaddo idha sāmatthiyato sattalokavacano daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha 『『pūjanakiriyāyogyabhūtatāvasenā』』ti. Sāsanantaradhānato paraṃ pūjanā aññabuddhuppādena veditabbā, yathetarahi vipassīādisammāsambuddhānaṃ. 『『Dīpaṅkaro』』tiādinā yadipi buddhavaṃsadesanāyaṃ (bu. vaṃ. 2.75) bhagavatāva vuttaṃ, sumedhapaṇḍitattabhāvena pana pavattiṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha 『『yathāha bhagavā sumedhabhūto』』ti.

Pariññākkamenāti ñātapariññādipaṭipāṭiyā. Lakkhaṇāvabodhappaṭipattiyāti vipassanāya. Tena vuttaṃ 『『suññatamukhādīhī』』ti. Tathā ca vuttanti viññūhi vedanīyatāya eva sāsanavarassa vuttaṃ bhagavatā –

『『Etu viññū puriso asaṭho amāyāvī ujujātiko, ahamanusāsāmi, ahaṃ dhammaṃ desemi, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā paṭipajjamāno na cirasseva sāmaññeva ussati, sāmaṃ dakkhitī』』tiādi (ma. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 從"這是分類"等，從一種開始直到八萬四千種差別，對於已經顯示的論典分類，再以"應當以此等方式了知論典分類"作為總結。在這裡，"以此等方式"的"等"字，應當理解為包括：從所知法的解說、從概念和應被概念化的法的分別、從三時所攝法的考察、從渡越四暴流的意義、從斷除五種歡喜等、從息滅六愛身、從攝類品等七品的攝集、從顯示斷除八邪性等等。 攝類品釋 "凡是"是不確定義的代詞，依據業格語法功能而說。音聲的運用是爲了理解義，完全依賴於義，僅僅是義的文字，它通過顛倒文義的人而成為在後面的"如是"字所表示的聲音文字，因此說"凡是，是不確定的對格表述"。在"世間是作者表述"等中也是同樣的方法。 這樣說了"凡是"等偈頌詞的業、作者、動作、作者修飾等的意義后，現在爲了顯示組成部分的作用而說"世間是在此"等。世間一詞在這裡依據適當性應理解為指有情世間。因此說"依據適合作為崇敬行為的對象的狀態"。在教法消失之後的崇敬應當通過另一尊佛的出現來理解，如現在對毗婆尸等正等正覺者[的崇敬]。通過"燃燈[佛]"等雖然是在《佛種姓》教說中由世尊所說，但是因為是關於[他]作為善慧賢者的情況而說，因此說"如世尊在作為善慧時所說"。 "以遍知的次第"是指以知遍知等的順序。"以相的覺悟修習"是指以觀。因此說"以空性等門"。如是所說，正是因為可為智者所知，最勝教法被世尊所說： "讓具有智慧、不狡詐、不虛偽、正直的人來，我教導，我說法，如教導般修行者不久將自知、自見"等。

2.281).

Yaṃ-saddo sāsanavisayo, lokapālasaddo satthuvisayopi lokaṃ pati guṇībhūtoti 『『tassā』』ti paṭiniddesassa kathaṃ satthuvisayatāti codanaṃ manasikatvā āha 『『salokapāloti cetthā』』tiādi, guṇībhūtopi lokapālasaddo padhānabhūto viya paṭiniddesaṃ arahati. Añño hi saddakkamo, añño atthakkamoti.

Dhammagāravena bhagavā dhammaṃ pūjento veneyyabandhave acintetvā samāpattisamāpajjanadhammapaccavekkhaṇāhi sattasattāhaṃ vītināmesīti āha 『『bhagavato…pe… dīpetabbā』』ti. Tattha ādisaddena sāvakehi dhammassavanassa, tesaṃ paccuggamanādīnañca saṅgaho veditabbo.

Iccassāti iti assa, evaṃ bhagavato aviparītaanantarāyikaniyyānikadhammadesanāya sabbaññutānāvaraṇabhāvadīpanenāti attho. Tenāti catuvesārajjayogena. Tadavinābhāvinā dasabala…pe… pakāsitā hoti. Āveṇikabuddhadhammādīti ettha ādisaddena tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇāni, catusaccañāṇāni, catupaṭisambhidāñāṇāni, pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇāni, cha abhiññāñāṇāni, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, aṭṭha vijjā, aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇāni, aṭṭha vimokkhā, nava samādhicariyā, nava anupubbavihārā, dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā, dasa ariyavāsā, dvādasa dhammacakkākārā, terasa dhutadhammā, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pannarasa caraṇadhammā, soḷasa ñāṇacariyā, soḷasa ānāpānassatī, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catuvīsati paccayavibhāvanañāṇāni, catucattārīsa ñāṇavatthūni, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇaṃ, anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānapavicayadesanākārappavattañāṇāni cāti evamādīnaṃ bhagavato guṇavisesānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.

Aparo nayo – guṇavisiṭṭhataṃ dīpeti, sā ca guṇavisiṭṭhatā mahākaruṇāmahāpaññāhi veditabbā tāhi satthusampattisiddhito. Tattha mahākaruṇāya pavattibhedo 『『bahukehi ākārehi passantānaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ sattesu mahākaruṇā okkamatī』』tiādinā paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 2.281 "凡是"一詞是教法的範圍，"護世"一詞雖然也是導師的範圍，但因為對世間來說是次要的，所以"其"這個回指詞如何適用於導師的範圍？考慮到這個質疑而說"這裡帶護世者"等，雖然護世一詞是次要的，但像是主要的一樣值得回指。因為聲音的次序是一回事，意義的次序是另一回事。 世尊以法的恭敬而尊敬法，不考慮所化的親屬，以入定和觀察法度過了七個七日，因此說"世尊...應當顯示"。在這裡，通過"等"字應當理解為包括聲聞聽法，以及他們的迎接等。 "如是其"是"如是對其"，意思是通過這樣世尊不顛倒、無障礙、出離的說法，顯示一切智性的無障礙性。通過"那個"是指通過四無畏的結合。通過與之不可分離的十力...已被顯明。"不共佛法等"中的"等"字，應當理解為包括：在三時中無礙的智、四諦智、四無礙解智、辨別五趣的智、六神通智、七聖財、七覺支、八明、在八眾中不動搖的智、八解脫、九定行、九次第住、十依止法、十聖居、十二法輪行相、十三頭陀法、十四佛智、十五行法、十六智行、十六安般念、十九省察智、二十四緣辨別智、四十四智事、七十七智事、運用二十四億種定的大金剛智、無邊方式《發趣論》詳察說法行相轉起智等等這些世尊的殊勝功德。 另一種方法——顯示功德的殊勝性，而這功德的殊勝性應當通過大悲和大慧來了知，因為通過這兩者成就導師的圓滿。其中，大悲的轉起差別在《無礙解道》中說"諸佛世尊以多種方式觀察眾生時，大悲現起"等。

1.117) vuttanayena veditabbo. Mahāpaññāya pana pavattibhedo vutto eva. Tattha karuṇāya bhagavato caraṇasampatti, paññāya vijjāsampatti. Karuṇāya sattādhipatitā, paññāya dhammādhipatitā. Karuṇāya lokanāthatā, paññāya attanāthatā. Karuṇāya pubbakāritā, paññāya kataññutā. Karuṇāya aparantapatā, paññāya anattantapatā. Karuṇāya buddhakaradhammasiddhi, paññāya buddhabhāvasiddhi. Karuṇāya paresaṃ tāraṇaṃ, paññāya sayaṃ tāraṇaṃ. Karuṇāya sabbasattesu anuggahacittatā, paññāya sabbadhammesu virattacittatā pakāsitā hotīti anavasesato parahitapaṭipattiyā, attahitasampattiyā ca pāripūrī veditabbā. Tīsupi avatthāsūti hetuphalasattūpakārāvatthāsu.

Abhisamayo paṭivedhasāsanassa, manasikaraṇaṃ paṭipattisāsanassa, savanādīhi paricayakaraṇaṃ pariyattisāsanassāti tiṇṇampi vasena yojetabbo. Tenāha 『『yathāraha』』nti. 『『Sakkaccaṃ dhammadesanenā』』ti iminā idha 『『sāsana』』nti vuttassa tividhassāpi saddhammassa avisesena desanāpūjaṃ vatvā thomanāpūjanassa vasena taṃ vibhajitvā dassento 『『ariyaṃ, vo bhikkhave』』tiādimāha. Tattha 『『thomanenā』』ti padenāpi 『『sakkacca』』nti padaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Pūjanādvayassāpi vā vasena idhāpi padayojanā veditabbā. Ariyabhāvādayoti ariyaseṭṭhaaggabhāvādayo. Niyyānādayoti niyyānahetudassanādayo. Svākkhātatādayoti svākkhātasandiṭṭhikatādayo.

Idāni ariyasaṅghaguṇānampi imāya gāthāya pakāsitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yasmā panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bālyādisamatikkamanatoti bālaabyattabhāvādisamatikkamanato.

Ñāṇaviseso sutacintābhāvanāmayañāṇāni. Sotabbamanasikātabbapaṭivijjhitabbāvatthā avatthābhedo. Ubhayanti byañjanapadaṃ, atthapadañca. Ubhayathāti karaṇakammasādhanavasena paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Paṭipajjitabbattāti ñātabbattā.

『『Ayañca gāthā』』tiādi kesañci vādo. Tathā hi apare 『『therenevāyaṃ gāthā bhāsitā』』ti vadanti. Attūpanāyikāpi hi kadāci dhammadesanā hoti eva yathā 『『dasabalasamannāgato , bhikkhave, tathāgato catuvesārajjavisārado』』tiādi (saṃ. ni.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 1.117. 大悲的轉起差別應當依《無礙解道》中所說的方法來了知。大慧的轉起差別已經說過。其中，通過悲心，世尊有行為圓滿；通過智慧，有明的圓滿。通過悲心，以眾生為主；通過智慧，以法為主。通過悲心，成為世間的依怙；通過智慧，成為自己的依怙。通過悲心，有先行性；通過智慧，有知恩性。通過悲心，不墮後邊；通過智慧，不墮非我邊。通過悲心，成就成佛之法；通過智慧，成就佛性。通過悲心，度化他人；通過智慧，自度。通過悲心，顯示對一切眾生有攝受心；通過智慧，顯示對一切法有離欲心。因此應當知道在利他行和自利成就中的圓滿無餘。"在三種狀態中"是指因、果和利益眾生的狀態。 證悟是通達教法的，作意是修行教法的，通過聽聞等熟習是教理教法的，應當依這三者來配合。因此說"如適宜"。通過"恭敬說法"顯示這裡所說的三種正法都無差別地有說法供養，爲了顯示讚歎供養而分別它，說"諸比丘，聖"等。在這裡，"讚歎"一詞也應當與"恭敬"一詞結合。或者兩種供養的運用也應當在這裡理解。"聖性等"是指聖、最勝、最上等性質。"出離等"是指出離因等的顯示。"善說等"是指善說、自見等。 現在爲了顯示聖僧功德也被這偈頌所顯明，說"又因為"等。"超越愚癡等"是指超越愚昧、不熟練等。 智慧的殊勝性是聞所成、思所成、修所成智。應聽聞、應作意、應通達的狀態是狀態的差別。"兩者"是文句和義句。"兩種方式"是應當分別依據工具格和業格語法功能來配合。"應當修行"是指應當了知。 "這偈頌"等是某些人的說法。因此其他人說"這偈頌只是由長老所說"。有時確實也有以自身為喻的說法，如"諸比丘，如來具足十力，具有四無畏"等。

2.21-22). Evañca katvā 『『katame soḷasa hārā』』tiādivacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti.

Yathāvuttaatthamukhenevāti mūlapadasaṅkhātaatthuddhāreneva. Parato āgamissatīti niddesavārassa pariyosāne āgamissati 『『tīṇi ca nayā anūnā』』tiādinā (netti. 4 dvādasapada).

Vuccatīti kattari kammaniddesoti āha 『『vadatī』』ti. Atha vā vuccatīti kammakattuniddesoyaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – hārā, nayā cāti ubhayaṃ pariggahitaṃ saṃvaṇṇakena sabbathā gahitañce, vuccati suttaṃ, sayameva suttaṃ saṃvaṇṇetīti , etena hāranayesu vasībhāvena suttasaṃvaṇṇanāya sukarataṃ dasseti.

Pakārantarenāti pubbe 『『sāsana』』nti vuttamatthaṃ 『『desanā, desita』』nti tato aññena pakārena. Niyametvāti tassa ekantato viññeyyataṃ avadhāretvā. Viññeyyatā visiṭṭhesu desanādesitesu viññeyyapade labbhamānā vijānanakiriyā.

Desanādesitāni ca yāvadeva vijānanatthānīti vijānanaṃ padhānanti tameva niddhārento 『『tatrāti tasmiṃ vijānane』』ti āha.

Etthāhāti navaṅgasāsananavavidhasuttantāti etasmiṃ atthavacane āha codako. Tassāyaṃ adhippāyo – navahi aṅgehi vavatthitehi aññamaññasaṅkararahitehi bhavitabbaṃ, tathā ca sati asuttasabhāvāneva geyyaṅgādīnīti navavidhasuttantavacanaṃ virujjheyya. Atha suttasabhāvāni geyyaṅgādīni, evaṃ sati 『『sutta』』nti visuṃ suttaṅgaṃ na siyā, evaṃ sante aṭṭhaṅgasāsanaṃ āpajjatīti. Tenāha 『『kathaṃ panā』』tiādi. Geyyaṅgādīsu katipayānampi suttabhāve yathāvuttadosānativatti, pageva sabbesanti dasseti 『『yañcā』』tiādinā. Saṅgahesūti aṭṭhakathāsu. Porāṇaṭṭhakathānañhi saṅkhepabhūtā idāni aṭṭhakathā 『『saṅgahā』』ti vuttā. Suttaṃ nāma sagāthakaṃ vā siyā, niggāthakaṃ vāti aṅgadvayeneva tadubhayaṅgaṃ katanti visuṃ suttaṅgassa asambhavo tadubhayavinimuttassa suttassa abhāvato. Tena vuttaṃ 『『suttaṅgameva na siyā』』ti. Athāpi kathañci. Siyāti vakkhamānaṃ sāmaññavidhiṃ sandhāyāha. Evampi ayaṃ dosoti dassento 『『maṅgalasuttādīna』』ntiādimāha.

Tabbhāvanimittanti geyyaṅgabhāvanimittaṃ. Veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittanti sambandho. Codako 『『gāthāvirahe』』ti vacanaṃ aggaṇhanto 『『pucchāvissajjanaṃ byākaraṇa』』nti vacanamattameva gahetvā 『『evaṃ sante』』tiādinā codeti. Itaro pana okāsavidhito anokāso vidhi balavāti ñāyaṃ gāthāvirahitaṃyeva veyyākaraṇanti, idhādhippetanti ca dassento 『『nāpajjatī』』tiādinā pariharati. Tathā hīti teneva kāraṇena, satipi saññantaranimittayoge anokāsasaññānaṃ balavabhāvenevāti attho.

Saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Uddesavāravaṇṇanā

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文: 2.21-22. 這樣做了之後,"什麼是十六種關係"等詞就得到了證實。 以如前所說的意義門,即僅以稱為根本詞的意義提取。將在後面出現,即將在解說段的結尾處出現"三種方法無缺"等(《導論》第4章十二句)。 所說,在施動關係中是業處說明,因此說"他說"。或者所說是業施關係說明。這裡的意思是 - 如果註釋者完全掌握了這兩者,即關係和方法,經文就會被說出,經文就會自行註釋。由此顯示通過精通關係和方法使經文註釋變得容易。 以另一種方式,即以前說"教法"的意思,現在用"教說、所教"等不同方式來說。確定,即確定它必定可以理解。可理解性是在殊勝的教說和所教中,在可理解詞中獲得的理解行為。 教說和所教僅爲了理解,因此以理解為主,他強調這點說:"其中,即在那理解中"。 在這裡說,即在這九分教法九種經典的意思表述中,質問者說。他的意思是 - 應當以九種確立的、互不混雜的支分來區分,如此則歌頌等支分就不具有經的本質。如果歌頌等支分具有經的本質,那麼就不會有單獨的經支分,這樣就成為八分教法了。因此說"然而怎樣"等。 通過"乃至"等顯示即使部分歌頌等支分具有經的本質也不能避免前述過失,更不用說全部了。在彙集中,即在註釋書中。因為現在的註釋書是古註釋書的摘要,所以稱為"彙集"。所謂經,可能有偈頌的或無偈頌的,僅以這兩支來構成這兩種支分,因為除這兩者外沒有經,所以不可能有單獨的經支分。因此說"就不會有經支分"。雖然也許某種程度上會有,這是針對將要說的一般規定而說的。爲了顯示即使這樣也有這個過失,所以說"吉祥經"等。 其本質因,即歌頌支分的本質因。解說的其本質因,這是關聯。質問者不取"無偈頌"的說法,僅取"問答是解說"的說法而提出"如此"等質問。另一方面,基於無處規定比有處規定更有力的道理,顯示這裡意指的是僅指無偈頌的解說,因此以"不會發生"等來回答。如此,即由於這個原因,即使有其他名稱的原因,無處名稱由於更有力而[優先]。 彙集段註釋完畢。 2. 列舉段註釋

1.Vibhāgenāti sarūpavibhāgena. Adiṭṭhaṃ jotīyati etāyāti adiṭṭhajotanā. Diṭṭhaṃ saṃsandīyati etāyāti diṭṭhasaṃsandanā, saṃsandanaṃ cettha sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ. Vimati chijjati etāyāti vimaticchedanā. Anumatiyā pucchā anumatipucchā. 『『Taṃ kiṃ maññathā』』ti hi kā tumhākaṃ anumatīti anumati pucchitā. Kathetukamyatāti kathetukamyatāya.

『『Harīyanti etehī』』tiādinā karaṇādhikaraṇakattubhāvakammasādhanānaṃ vasena hāra-saddassa atthaṃ vatvā sadisakappanāvasena dassetuṃ 『『hārā viyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Puna ganthakaraṇādiatthena ganthādisaddānaṃ viya hārakaraṇādiatthena hārasaddasiddhiṃ dassetuṃ 『『hārayantī』』tiādimāha. 『『Haraṇato, ramaṇato cā』』ti iminā manoharā manoramā cete saṃvaṇṇanāvisesāti dasseti.

Upapattisādhanayuttīti lakkhaṇahetu. Vuttanayenāti 『『nanu ca aññepi hārā yuttisahitā evā』』tiādinā desanāhāre vuttanayānusārena.

Catunnaṃ byūho etthāti bhinnādhikaraṇānampi padānaṃ aññapadatthasamāso labbhati 『『urasilomo』』tiādīnaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 3.54, 303) viyāti vuttaṃ.

Sesanti 『『vivacanameva vevacana』』nti evamādi.

Anuppavesīyantīti avagāhīyanti. Samādhīyantīti pariharīyanti. Vinā vikappenāti jāti sāmaññaṃ, bhedo sāmaññaṃ, sambandho sāmaññantiādinā padatthantarabhāvavikappanamantarena.

Padaṭṭhānādimukhenāti padaṭṭhānavevacanabhāvanāpahānamukhena. Kecīti padaṭṭhānaparikkhāraāvaṭṭaparivattanapaññattiotaraṇe sandhāya vadati.

2.Sambandhoti hetuphalabhāvayogo. Tathābhūtānañhi dhammānaṃ ekasantānasiddhatā ekattanayo. Vibhāgo satipi nesaṃ hetuphalabhāve vibhattasabhāvatā. Añño eva hi hetu, aññaṃ phalanti. Byāpāraviraho nirīhatā. Na hi hetuphalānaṃ evaṃ hoti 『『ahaṃ imaṃ nibbattemi, imināhaṃ nibbatto』』ti. Anurūpaphalatā paccayuppannānaṃ paccayānukūlatā. Samūhādiṃ upādāya lokasaṅketasiddhā vohāramattatā sammutisabhāvo. Pathavīphassādīnaṃ kakkhaḷaphusanādilakkhaṇaṃ paramatthasabhāvo. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – yasmiṃ bhinne, itarāpohe vā cittena katena tathā buddhi, idaṃ sammutisaccaṃ yathā ghaṭe, sasambhārajale ca, tabbipariyāyena paramatthasaccanti. Paramatthasaccappaṭivedhāyāti nibbānādhigamāya.

Antoti abbhantaro. Padhānāvayavenāti mūlabhāvena. 『『Nandī dukkhassa mūla』』ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.13) taṇhā 『『nandī』』ti vuttā. 『『Saṅgāme ca nandiṃ caratī』』tiādīsu pamodoti āha 『『taṇhāya, pamodassa vā』』ti.

3.Jātibhedatoti kusalā, akusalāti imasmā visesā. Yujjantīti ettha hetuattho antonīto veditabboti āha 『『yojīyantī』』ti. Kehi yojīyanti? Saṃvaṇṇanakehīti adhippāyo. Yujjantīti vā yuttā honti, tehi samānayogakkhamā taggahaṇeneva gahitā hontīti attho tadekaṭṭhabhāvato. Imasmiṃ atthe 『『navahi padehī』』ti sahayoge karaṇavacanaṃ, purimasmiṃ karaṇe. 『『Ete kho』』ti ca pāṭho. Tattha kho-saddassa padapūraṇatā, avadhāraṇatthatā vā veditabbā. Ete evāti ete taṇhādayo eva, na ito aññeti attho. Aṭṭhāraseva na tato uddhaṃ, adho vāti. Purimasmiṃ pakkhe mūlapadantarābhāvo, dutiyasmiṃ tesaṃ anūnādhikatā dīpitā hoti.

Uddesavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Niddesavāravaṇṇanā

我來 給您直譯這段巴利文: 1. 差別,即以自性的差別。由此照明未見者,故稱未見照明。由此比對已見者,故稱已見比對,這裡的比對是通過討論做出判斷。由此斷除疑惑,故稱斷疑。隨順而問是隨順問。因為"你們認為如何"即是問"你們的隨順是什麼"。欲說,即因為想要說。 通過"由此運送"等說明了工具、處所、施事、業等詞義后,爲了通過類比來顯示,所以說"如運送"等。爲了再次顯示像以結集等義成立結等詞一樣,以運送等義而成立運送詞,所以說"使運送"等。通過"因運送,因喜悅",由此顯示這些是奪心和令人喜悅的特殊註釋。 合理的論證,即特相因。如所說方式,即依照在教說關係中所說"難道其他關係不也都有合理性嗎"等方式。 這裡有四種佈列,即使是不同所依的詞也可以得到以其他詞義為主的複合詞,如"胸毛"等的情況。 其餘,即"詞義即是異名"等。 被引入,即被理解。被安立,即被解決。無分別,即不需要通過類、共相、別、共相、關聯、共相等其他詞義的分別。 以所依等為門,即以所依、異名、修習、斷除為門。某些人,是指關於所依、資具、轉回、還轉、施設、進入而說。 2. 關聯,即因果關係的結合。因為如此存在的諸法在一相續中成就,這是一性方法。差別是即使它們有因果關係也有區分的自性。因為因是一回事,果又是另一回事。無作用是無功用性。因為因果不會這樣想:"我產生這個,我被這個產生"。隨顧果性是緣生法隨順於緣。依據聚合等世間約定成就的僅是言說,這是世俗本質。地、觸等的堅硬、觸知等特相是勝義本質。這裡的概要是 - 若經分解,或以心遣除他法而如此瞭解者,這是世俗諦,如瓶、具支分之水等,與此相反則是勝義諦。為通達勝義諦,即為證得涅槃。 內,即內在。以主要支分,即以根本性。在"喜是苦的根本"等處,渴愛稱為"喜"。在"戰場上游行喜"等處是歡喜,所以說"渴愛,或歡喜"。 3. 以種類差別,即善、不善的這種差別。結合,這裡應知包含因的意思,所以說"被結合"。被誰結合?意思是被註釋者們。或者結合,即相應,與彼等有相同的相應性,僅由掌握彼等而被掌握,這是因為與彼等同一處的意思。在這個意思中,"以九句"是具格表示伴隨,在前者是工具。也有"這些確實"的讀法。在那裡應知確實詞是填充詞,或表示確定。正是這些,即正是這些渴愛等,不是除此之外的其他。正好十八,不多不少。在第一種情況顯示沒有其他根本句,在第二種情況顯示它們不多不少。 列舉段註釋完畢。 3. 解說段註釋

1. Niddesavāre sāmaññatoti sādhāraṇato. Visesenāti asādhāraṇato. Padatthoti saddattho. Lakkhaṇanti sabhāvo. Kamoti anupubbī. Ettāvatāti ettakappamāṇabhāvo. Hetvādīti hetuphalabhūmiupanisāsabhāgavisabhāgalakkhaṇanayā. Visesato pana lakkhaṇanti sambandho.

Hārasaṅkhepavaṇṇanā

1.Yaṃ, bhikkhaveti ettha yanti paccattavacanaṃ, tañca sukhaṃ, somanassanti dvayena samānādhikaraṇanti katvā 『『assādīyatīti assādo, sukhaṃ, somanassañcā』』ti vuttaṃ. Sukhādivedanā viya manāpiyarūpādipi avītarāgassa assādetabbanti āha 『『evaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇampī』』ti. 『『Assādeti etāyāti vā assādo, taṇhā』』ti etena 『『ya』』nti hetuatthe nipātoti dasseti. Tatrāyamattho – yena hetunā pañcupādānakkhandhe paṭicca assādanīyabhāvena uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ taṇhāsaṅkhāto assādo assādanakiriyāya kāraṇanti. Iti katvā ayamattho diṭṭhābhinandanādibhāvato vipallāsesupi sambhavatīti āha 『『evaṃ vipallāsāpī』』ti. Aniṭṭhampīti pi-saddena iṭṭhampīti yojetabbaṃ, anavasesā sāsavā dhammā idha ārammaṇaggahaṇena gahitāti āha 『『sabbesaṃ tebhūmakasaṅkhārāna』』nti.

Dukkhādukkhamasukhavedanānanti ettha dukkhasabhāvā eva adukkhamasukhā vedanā gahitā aniṭṭhārammaṇassa adhippetattā, na sukhasabhāvā. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ 『『yāyaṃ, bhante, adukkhamasukhā vedanā, santasmiṃ esā paṇīte sukhe vuttā bhagavatā』』ti (ma. ni. 2.88; saṃ. ni.

我來 譯這段巴利文: 4. 在解說段中,一般性,即共通性。特殊性,即不共通性。詞義,即語詞的意思。特相,即自性。次第,即順序。如此程度,即這樣的數量性。因等,即因、果、地、近因、同分、異分、特相、方法。但特別是特相,這是關聯。 關係摘要註釋 1. "諸比丘,凡是"這裡,"凡是"是主格語,它與"樂、喜"二者是同位語,因此說"享受即是享受,即樂與喜"。如樂等感受,對未離欲者,可意色等也是可享受的,所以說"如此可意所緣也是"。或者說"由此享受故為享受,即渴愛",由此顯示"凡是"是表因義的不變詞。這裡的意思是 - 由於這個原因,緣於五取蘊而生起作為可享受性的樂、喜,這稱為渴愛的享受是享受行為的原因。如此這個意思由於是見解歡喜等的本質,也存在於顛倒中,所以說"如此諸顛倒也"。不可意也,這裡"也"字應當連結"可意也",由於取一切所緣,所以說"一切三界諸行"。 "苦、不苦不樂諸受"這裡,由於意指不可意所緣,所取的只是苦性的不苦不樂受,不是樂性的。關於這點說:"大德,這個不苦不樂受,世尊說在寂靜、殊勝的樂中"(中部二.八八;相應部)。

4.267). 『『Sukhapariyāyasabbhāvato』』ti iminā iṭṭhatāmattatopi lesena sattānaṃ ārammaṇassa assādanīyatā sambhavatīti dasseti.

Ādīnavo dosanissandanatāya doso, svāyaṃ pīḷanavuttiyā veditabboti āha 『『ādīnavo dukkhā vedanā, tissopi vā dukkhatā』』ti. Evaṃ dosatthataṃ ādīnavassa dassetvā idāni kapaṇatthataṃ dassetuṃ 『『atha vā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yatoti yasmā dosakapaṇasabhāvattāti vuttaṃ hoti.

Nissaratīti vivitti, sabbasaṅkhāravivekoti attho. Sāmaññaniddesenāti nissaraṇasaddavacanīyatāsāmaññena. Purimānanti assādādīnavatānaṃ. Upāyo cātiādīsu ca-saddo padapūraṇamattanti katvā āha 『『pacchimānañcā』』ti, phalādīnanti attho. Tadantogadhabhedānanti ariyamaggapariyāpannavisesānaṃ.

Kāmabhavādīnanti ādi-saddena na rūpārūpabhavā eva gahitā, atha kho te ca saññībhavādayo ca ekavokārabhavādayo ca gahitā. Tenāha 『『tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ bhavāna』』nti.

Yāvadeva anupādāparinibbānatthā bhagavato desanāti āha 『『nanu ca…pe… nipphādīyatī』』ti. 『『Vuttamevā』』ti iminā punaruttidosaṃ codeti. Itaro 『『saccameta』』nti anujānitvā 『『tañca kho』』tiādinā pariharati. 『『Paramparāyā』』ti etena ajjhattaṃ yonisomanasikāro viya na paratoghoso āsannakāraṇaṃ dhammādhigamassa dhammassa paccattaṃ vedanīyattāti dasseti. Tathā hi 『『akkhātāro tathāgatā, paṭipannā pamokkhanti, jhāyino mārabandhanā』』ti (dha. pa. 276) vuttaṃ. Tadadhigamakāraṇaṃ ariyamaggādhigamakāraṇaṃ siyā. Kiṃ pana tanti āha 『『sampattibhavahetū』』ti, tena carimattabhāvahetubhūtaṃ puññasampattiṃ vadati.

『『Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhacca, evaṃ maccutaro siyā』』ti idaṃ ariyamaggassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya phalabhāvasādhanaṃ. Yena hi vidhinā attānudiṭṭhisamugghāto, maccutaraṇañca siyā, so 『『eva』』nti iminā pakāsitoti. Attānudiṭṭhisamugghātamaccutaraṇānaṃ phalabhāve vattabbameva natthi.

『『Dhammo have』』ti pana gāthāyaṃ lokiyassa puññaphalassa vuttattā āha 『『idaṃ phala』』nti. Yaṃ nibbattetabbaṃ, taṃ phalaṃ. Yaṃ nibbattakaṃ, so upāyo. Ayamettha vinicchayo. Tenāha 『『etena nayenā』』tiādi. Upadhisampattīti attabhāvasobhā.

Visuddhīti ñāṇadassanavisuddhi adhippetāti āha – 『『etthāpi…pe… viññātu』』nti. 『『Yasmā panā』』tiādināpi tamevatthaṃ vacanantare pākaṭataraṃ karoti.

Sarūpato āgatāni 『『yato kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī』』tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.26-28). Ekadesenaāgatāni 『『saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino viharato (saṃ. ni. 2.53), bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo (ma. ni. 1.117), saṅkhārānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, yadidaṃ nibbāna』』ntiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.24; 3.41). Na sarūpena āgatāni yathā sāmaññaphalasuttādīsu. Atthavasenāti assādetabbādiatthavasena. Na papañcitoti na vitthārito.

我來直譯這段巴利文: 4.267. 通過"由於是樂的同義"這句話顯示,即使僅僅是可意性的一點,眾生對所緣的享受性也得以存在。 過患由於流出過失而為過失,這應當由逼迫作用而知,所以說"過患是苦受,或三種苦性"。如此顯示了過患的過失性之後,現在爲了顯示其不幸性而說"或者"等。由於,這是說由於過失和不幸的自性。 出離即是遠離,意思是遠離一切行。以一般說明,即以出離詞所表示的一般性。前者,即享受和過患。方便等中的"等"字僅是填充詞,所以說"而後者",意思是果等。包含其中的差別,即包含在聖道中的諸差別。 欲有等,這裡"等"字不僅包括色、無色有,而且也包括有想有等和一蘊有等。因此說"三三有"。 世尊的教說僅僅是爲了無取般涅槃,所以說"難道不是...而成就"。通過"已說"這句話指出重複的過失。另一方面承認"這是真的"之後,以"但是"等來解答。通過"相續"這句話顯示,由於法是各自體證的,所以像內在如理作意一樣,不是從他聞是法證得的近因。因此說:"如來是宣說者,修行者將解脫,禪修者[脫離]魔的束縛"。那個證得的原因應當是聖道證得的原因。那是什麼呢?說"具足有的因",由此說的是作為最後身體原因的功德具足。 "拔除我見,如此能度死"這是顯示聖道前行道的果性。因為以這個方式拔除我見和度死,所以用"如此"來顯示。對於我見拔除和度死的果性,根本無須再說。 但在"法確實"等偈中,由於說的是世間的功德果,所以說"這是果"。應當產生的是果,能產生的是方便。這是這裡的判定。因此說"依此方式"等。蘊具足,即身體的莊嚴。 清凈,是指智見清凈,所以說:"在這裡...應知"。通過"因為"等以不同說法使同樣的意思更加明顯。 直接出現的,如"諸比丘,當比丘如實了知五取蘊的集、滅、味、患、離"等。部分出現的,如"諸比丘,住于隨觀結縛諸法中的味,多苦多惱,這裡過患更多,這是諸行的出離,即是涅槃"等。非直接出現的,如在沙門果經等中。以義,即以應享受等的意義。未廣說,即未詳述。

2.Esevanayoti atidesena viciyamānavacanaseso atidiṭṭho. Bhāvatthe tohi āha 『『vissajjitanti vissajjanā』』ti. Sutte āgataṃ na atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatanti adhippāyo. Pucchānurūpatā idha pubbāparanti catubyūhapubbāparato imaṃ visesetvā dasseti. Pucchānusandhīti pucchāya vissajjanena anusandhānaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana heṭṭhimadesanāya pucchānimittapavattauparidesanāya sambandho 『『pucchānusandhī』』ti vuttaṃ. Pubbāpekkhanti pucchitavissajjitapadāpekkhaṃ. 『『Suttassā』』ti vā iminā pucchāvissajjanāanugītiyo ṭhapetvā seso vicayahārapadattho saṅgahitoti padassāpi saṅgaho veditabbo. Imasmiṃ pakkhe gāthāyaṃ ca-saddo padapūraṇamatte daṭṭhabbo.

『『Cakkhu anicca』』nti puṭṭhe 『『āma, cakkhu aniccamevā』』ti ekantato vissajjanaṃ ekaṃsabyākaraṇaṃ. 『『Aññindriyaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ, sacchikātabbañcā』』ti puṭṭhe 『『maggapariyāpannaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ, phalapariyāpannaṃ sacchikātabba』』nti vibhajitvā vissajjanaṃ vibhajjabyākaraṇaṃ. 『『Aññindriyaṃ kusala』』nti puṭṭhe 『『kiṃ anavajjaṭṭho kusalaṭṭho, udāhu sukhavipākaṭṭho』』ti paṭipucchitvā vissajjanaṃ paṭipucchābyākaraṇaṃ. 『『Sassato attā, asassato vā』』ti vutte 『『abyākatameta』』ntiādinā avissajjanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ. 『『Kiṃ panete kusalāti vā dhammāti vā ekatthā, udāhu nānatthā』』ti idaṃ pucchanaṃ sāvasesaṃ. Vissajjanassa pana sāvasesatā veneyyajjhāsayavasena desanāyaṃ veditabbā. Appāṭihīrakaṃ sauttaraṃ. Sappāṭihīrakaṃ niruttaraṃ. Sesaṃ vicayahāraniddese suviññeyyameva.

Ettha ca assādo assādahetu yāva āṇattihetūti evaṃ hetūnampi assādādayo veditabbā. Tattha saṅkhepato sukhasukhapaccayalakkhaṇo assādo, so visesato saggasampattiyā dīpetabbo. Sā hi tassa ukkaṃso, sesā panettha bhavasampatti tadanvāyikā veditabbā. Tassa hetu dānamayaṃ, sīlamayañca puññakiriyavatthu. Dukkhadukkhapaccayalakkhaṇo ādīnavo. Vipariṇāmasaṅkhāradukkhatānaṃ tadavarodhato vaṭṭadukkhassāpi ettha saṅgaho. Visesato pana kāmānaṃ okāroti daṭṭhabbo, svāyaṃ saṃkilesavatthunā, ittarapaccupaṭṭhānatādīhi ca vibhāvetabbo, tassa hetu dasa akusalakammapathā. Nekkhammaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, tassa hetu yathārahaṃ tadanucchavikā pubbabhāgappaṭipadā. Phalaṃ desanāphalameva, tassa hetu desanā. Upāyo yathāvuttaupāyova, tassa hetu cattāri cakkāni. Āṇatti upadeso, tassa rāgaggiādīhi lokassa ādittatā, satthu mahākaruṇāyogo ca hetu.

Tathā catūsu ariyasaccesu samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇaṃ, maggo vā upāyo, tadupadeso āṇatti, anupādisesā nibbānadhātu phalaṃ. Iti anupubbakathāya saddhiṃ buddhānaṃ sāmukkaṃsikāya dhammadesanāya niddhāraṇabhāvena vicayo veditabbo. Padassa padatthasambandho hetu. So hi tassa pavattinimittaṃ, pañhassa ñātukāmatā, kathekukāmatā ca. Adiṭṭhajotanādīnañhi catunnaṃ ñātukāmatā, itarassa itarā. Vissajjanassa pañho hetu. Evaṃ sesānampi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ.

我來直譯這段巴利文: 2. 同一方法,即通過類推而查究的語詞剩餘被看到。由於-to是表示狀態義,所以說"回答即是回答"。意思是出現在經中,不是以義理註釋方式出現在註釋書中。問題相應性,這裡通過四種佈列的前後來區分顯示此前後。問答相連,即問題與回答的連結。但在註釋書中說,下面的教說由問題原因而生起的上面的教說的關聯稱為"問答相連"。前觀察,即觀察所問所答之句。或者通過"經的",由此除了問答和隨誦外,其餘查究關係句義都被攝取,句的攝取也應當了知。在這種情況下,偈頌中的"及"字應當視為僅是填充詞。 當問"眼是無常"時,回答"是的,眼確實是無常",這種一向性的回答是決定解答。當問"應當修習知根,應當證知"時,回答"屬於道的應當修習,屬於果的應當證知",這種分別回答是分別解答。當問"知根是善"時,反問"善的意思是無過失義還是有樂果義",這種反問后回答是反問解答。當說"我是常還是無常"時,以"這是無記"等不回答,這是保留。"這些是善或是法,是同義還是異義",這是有餘問。但回答的有餘性應當依所化眾生意樂而在教說中了知。無證是有上。有證是無上。其餘在查究關係解說中很容易理解。 這裡應當了知從享受到享受因乃至教誡因等也是諸因。其中簡要來說,享受是以樂及樂因為相,它特別應當以天界具足來說明。因為那是它的最高,其餘在此的有具足應當了知是隨順於此。它的因是佈施所成和持戒所成的功德事。過患是以苦及苦因為相。由於包含輪迴苦的變易苦和行苦,所以也攝取輪迴苦。但特別應當視為欲的低劣,這應當以雜染事、短暫現行等來顯示,它的因是十不善業道。出離是出離,它的因是相應的前分行道。果只是教說果,它的因是教說。方便就是如前所說的方便,它的因是四輪。教誡是指導,它的因是世間為貪火等所燒及導師具足大悲。 同樣在四聖諦中,集是享受,苦是過患,道與滅是出離,或者道是方便,對它的指導是教誡,無餘涅槃界是果。如此應當了知查究是佛陀隨順說和殊勝法教說的抉擇。句的句義關聯是因。因為那是它的生起因,是問題的欲知和欲說。因為未見照明等四種是欲知,其他是其他。問題是回答的因。其餘也應當如此相應地說。

3.Byañjanatthānaṃ yuttāyuttaparikkhāti byañjanaggahaṇena padaṃ gahitaṃ, atthaggahaṇena pañhādīhi saddhiṃ assādādayo gahitā. Vicayahārapadatthā eva hi yuttāyuttādivisesasahitā yuttihārādīnaṃ padatthā. Tathā hi padaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānikabhāvavisiṭṭhā teyeva padaṭṭhānahārassa padatthā. Lakkhaṇalakkhitabbatāvisiṭṭhā, niddhāritā ca lakkhaṇahārassa, nibbacanādivibhāvanāvisiṭṭhā catubyūhahārassa, sabhāgadhammavasena, visabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanavisiṭṭhā āvaṭṭahārassa, bhūmivibhāgādivisiṭṭhā vibhattihārassa, paṭipakkhato parivattanavisiṭṭhā parivattanahārassa, pariyāyavevacanavisiṭṭhā vevacanahārassa, pabhavādipaññāpanavisiṭṭhā paññattihārassa, khandhādimukhehi otaraṇavisiṭṭhā otaraṇahārassa, padapadatthapañhārambhasodhanavisiṭṭhā sodhanahārassa, sāmaññavisesaniddhāraṇavisiṭṭhā adhiṭṭhānahārassa, paccayadhammehi parikkharaṇavisiṭṭhā parikkhārahārassa, pahātabbabhāvetabbatāniddhāraṇavisiṭṭhā samāropanahārassa padatthā. 『『Byañjanassa sabhāvaniruttitā, atthassa suttādīhi avilomanaṃ yuttabhāvo』』ti iminā asabhāvaniruttitā, suttādīhi vilomanañca ayuttabhāvoti dīpeti, tena yuttāyuttīnaṃ hetuṃ dasseti.

4.Yonisomanasikārādīti ādisaddena saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayādisādhāraṇaṃ, asādhāraṇañca deyyapaṭiggāhakādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sambhavatoti yathārahaṃ tassa dhammassa anurūpaṃ. Yāva sabbadhammāti ettha sabbaṃ nāma padesasabbaṃ, na sabbasabbanti. Ayañhi sabbasaddo yathā paṭhamavikappe sutte āgatadhammavasena padesavisayo, evaṃ dutiyavikappe padaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānikaniddhāraṇena taṃtaṃpakaraṇaparicchinnadhammaggahaṇato padesavisayo eva, na anavasesadhammavisayoti. Suttāgatadhammānaṃ yāni padaṭṭhānāni, tesañca yānīti evaṃ kāraṇaparamparāniddhāraṇalakkhaṇo padaṭṭhānahāro, parikkhārahāro pana suttāgatadhammānaṃ taṃtaṃpaccayuppannānaṃ paṭihetupaccayatāvisesavibhāvanalakkhaṇoti satipi kāraṇavicāraṇabhāve ayaṃ padaṭṭhānahāraparikkhārahārānaṃ viseso.

1. Yathā 『『samānādhikaraṇasamānapade』』tiādīsu ekasaddassa attho samānasaddo, evaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena bhāvanā 『『ekuppādā』』tiādīsu (kathā. 473) viya ekalakkhaṇāti ettha ekasaddo samānatthoti āha 『『samānalakkhaṇā』』ti. Saṃvaṇṇanāvasenāti ettha kammatthe ana-saddo, saṃvaṇṇetabbatāvasenāti attho. Lakkhaṇāti upalakkhaṇā. 『『Nānattakāyanānattasaññino (dī. ni. 3.341, 357, 359; a. ni. 9.24), nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā』』tiādīsu sahacāritā daṭṭhabbā. Saññāsahagatā hi dhammā tattha saññāggahaṇena gahitā. 『『Dadaṃ mittāni ganthatī』』tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 189) samānakiccatā. Piyavacanatthacariyā samānattatāpi hi tattha mittaganthanakiccena samānakiccā gayhanti saṅgahavatthubhāvato. 『『Phassapaccayā vedanā』』tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225; udā. 1; netti. 24) samānahetutā. Yathā hi phasso vedanāya, evaṃ saññādīnampi sahajātādinā paccayo hoti evāti tepi samānahetutāya vuttā eva honti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ 『『tajjāmanoviññāṇadhātusamphassajā cetanā』』ti (dha. sa. 5), 『『phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī』』tiādi (saṃ. ni. 4.93). Evaṃ 『『taṇhāpaccayā upādāna』』nti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni.

我來直譯這段巴利文: 3. 文字義理上的適當與不適當的察考。通過文字的把握，把握了詞，通過義理的把握，與問題等一起把握了享受等。查究關係的詞義本身就是與適當與不適當等差別俱的。這樣，詞的位置與被位置的特別者，僅僅是詞位置關係的詞義。有別於特相與可標示性，確定了特相關係的詞義；有別於語源等顯示，確定了四種佈列關係的詞義；依同類法的狀態，依不同類法的狀態，有別於轉變，確定了轉變關係的詞義；有別於界限劃分等，確定了語形變化關係的詞義；從對治面有別於轉換，確定了轉換關係的詞義；有別於同義輪轉，確定了同義關係的詞義；有別於生起等安立，確定了安立關係的詞義；從蘊等面門進入，確定了進入關係的詞義；有別於詞與詞義的問題開端凈化，確定了凈化關係的詞義；有別於通性與別性的確定，確定了決定關係的詞義；依緣法而修飾，確定了修飾關係的詞義；有別於應斷應修的確定，確定了攝取關係的詞義。"文字的自性語源，義理不違背經等是適當"，通過此句顯示非自性語源，違背經等是不適當，由此顯示適當與不適當的因。 4. "如理作意"等，"等"字包括正法聽聞、善士依止等共通的和不共通的，如善於接受佈施等。"得以成就"即相應地順應那個法。"乃至一切法"中，一切是部分的一切，非絕對的一切。這個"一切"字，如初分類在經中出現的法的狀態是部分範圍，同樣在第二分類中，通過詞的位置和被位置的確定，以各自論述所限定的法的把握，也僅是部分範圍，非無餘法的範圍。經中所得法的詞位，及其因果系列的確定，這是詞位關係；但修飾關係是經中所得法的各自緣起的因緣特別顯示，雖有因果考察，但這是詞位關係和修飾關係的差別。 5. 如在"同一依處同一詞"等中，一個詞的義是同一詞，同樣，以一味性，修習如"一起生"等，是一特相，這裡"一"字是同義，所以說"同一特相"。以讚美方式，這裡的ana詞是在業用中，意思是應當讚美。特相即是上特相。在"各異身各異想"等中應當視為相隨。因為在那裡，與想俱的法由想的把握而被把握。在"給予朋友繫縛"等中是同一作用。因為以朋友繫縛作用，由攝持事的緣故而被把握。在"觸緣受"等中是同一因。如觸緣受，同樣，想等也以俱生等緣，所以說它們也是同一因。如是說："由彼意識界觸生的意志"，"被觸即了知，被觸即思"等。同樣，"渴愛緣取"等。

2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225; udā. 1; netti. 24) evamādipi udāharitabbaṃ. 『『Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā』』tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225; udā. 1; netti. 24) samānaphalatā daṭṭhabbā. Yathā hi saṅkhārā avijjāya phalaṃ, evaṃ taṇhupādādīnampīti tepi tattha gahitāva honti. Tenāha 『『purimakammabhavasmiṃ moho avijjā āyūhanā saṅkhārā nikanti taṇhā upagamanaṃ upādāna』』nti. 『『Rūpaṃ assādeti abhinandati , taṃ ārabbha rāgo uppajjatī』』ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.424) vutte taṃsampayuttā vedanādayo vuttā eva honti samānārammaṇabhāvato. Na hi tehi vinā tassa uppatti atthi. Evamādīhīti ettha ādisaddena atthappakaraṇaliṅgasaddantarasannidhānasāmatthiyādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Atthādivasenapi hi sutte avuttānampi vuttānaṃ viya niddhāraṇaṃ sambhavatīti. Vuttappakārenāti 『『vadhakaṭṭhena ekalakkhaṇānī』』tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ, 『『sahacāritā』』tiādinā aṭṭhakathāyañca vuttena pakārena.

1. 『『Phusanaṭṭhena phasso』』tiādinā niddhāretvā vacanaṃ nibbacanaṃ, taṃ pana padasseva, na vākyassāti āha 『『padanibbacana』』nti. Adhippāyanidānānipettha byañjanamukheneva niddhāretabbāni. Nibbacanapubbāparasandhīsu vattabbameva natthīti āha 『『visesato byañjanadvāreneva atthapariyesanā』』ti. Pavattinimittaṃ ajjhāsayādi.

7.『『Padaṭṭhāne』』ti idaṃ sutte āgatadhammānaṃ kāraṇabhūtepi dhamme niddhāretvā sabhāgato, visabhāgato ca āvaṭṭanaṃ kātabbanti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na tantivasena. Tasmā padaṭṭhānaniddhāraṇāya vināpi āvaṭṭanaṃ yuttamevāti siddhaṃ hoti. Padassa vā saddapavattiṭṭhānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ padattho. Etasmiṃ pakkhe 『『ārambhatha nikkamathāti (saṃ. ni. 1.185; netti. 29; peṭako. 38; mi. pa. 5.1.4) vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna』』nti (netti. 29) ettha yvāyamārambhadhātuādiko attho vutto, taṃ vīriyasaddassa pavattiṭṭhānaṃ vīriyasaddābhidheyyo atthoti evamattho veditabbo. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Sesakaṃ nāmagahitato itaraṃ, taṃ pana tassa paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ vā siyā, aññaṃ vāti āha 『『visabhāgatāya aggahaṇena vā』』ti. Saṃvaṇṇanāya yojentoti yathāvuttavisabhāgadhammaniddhāraṇabhūtena atthakathanena pāḷiyaṃ yojento. Tenāha 『『desana』』nti. 『『Paṭipakkhe』』ti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ sabhāgadhammavasenapi āvaṭṭanassa icchitattā.

8.Nāmavasenāti sādhāraṇanāmavasena. Pāḷiyaṃ pana 『『micchattaniyatānaṃ sattānaṃ, aniyatānañca sattānaṃ dassanapahātabbā kilesā sādhāraṇā』』tiāgatattā (netti. 34) 『『dassanapahātabbādināmavasenā』』ti vuttaṃ. Vatthuvasenāti sattasantānavasena. So hi dhammānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānatāya idha 『『vatthū』』ti adhippeto. Tenāha – 『『puthujjanassa, sotāpannassa ca kāmarāgabyāpādā sādhāraṇā』』tiādi (netti. 34). Vuttavipariyāyenāti nāmato, vatthuto ca āveṇikatāya. Taṃtaṃmaggaphalaṭṭhānañhi taṃtaṃmaggaphalaṭṭhatā, bhabbānaṃ bhabbatā, abhabbānaṃ abhabbatā asādhāraṇā.

9.『『Bhāvite』』ti idaṃ bhāvanākiriyāya upalakkhaṇaṃ, na ettha kālavacanicchāti āha 『『bhāvetabbeti attho』』ti. Bhāvanā cettha āsevanāti, kusalasaddopi anavajjaṭṭhoti veditabbo . Paṭipakkhatoti vipakkhato. Visadisūdāharaṇena byatirekato yathādhippetadhammappatiṭṭhānā hesā.

10.Padatthassāti padābhidheyyassa atthassa, sabhāvadhammassa vā.

我來把這段巴利文翻譯得更通俗易懂一些: 如在"渴愛緣取"等經文中也應當這樣舉例。在"無明緣行"等處應當看到同一果性。因為如同諸行是無明之果,同樣渴愛、取等也是,所以它們也都包含在其中。因此說"前世業有中的愚癡是無明,造作是行,欲求是渴愛,趣向是取"。當說"享受色、喜悅色,緣此生起貪慾"時,與此相應的受等也都已經說了,因為是同一所緣。離開它們是不可能有生起的。如此等,這裡"等"字也應當視為包括義理、上下文、詞性、其他詞的鄰近、作用等。因為依義理等,即使經中未說的,也可能像已說的一樣被確定。如所說方式,即依照在聖典中說的"以殺害義為同一特相"等,在註釋書中說的"相隨"等方式。 "以觸知義為觸"等的確定說明是語源解釋,而這只是針對詞,不是針對句,所以說"詞的語源解釋"。這裡的意趣和緣由也應當僅從文字方面來確定。在語源解釋的前後連線中沒什麼可說的,所以說"特別是通過文字門尋求義理"。生起原因是意樂等。 "在詞位"這是爲了顯示:對經中出現的法的因性諸法進行確定后,應當從同類和異類方面作轉變,不是依文句而說。因此即使沒有詞位的確定也可以作轉變。或者詞的語音生起處是詞位,即詞義。在這種情況下,"發奮努力是精進的詞位"中,凡是說到的發奮等義,應當了知是精進一詞的生起處,是精進詞所表述的義。其餘也是這個道理。餘事是除了所取之外的其他,這或是它的對立面,或是其他,所以說"以異類性或不取"。以註釋連結,即以作為確定異類法的義理說明來連結聖典。因此說"教說"。"在對立面"這只是舉例說明,因為也允許依同類法作轉變。 以名稱,即以共通名稱。但在聖典中說:"邪性定者和不定者的見所斷煩惱是共通的",所以說"以見所斷等名稱"。以事,即以有情相續。因為這裡意指它是諸法的生起處,所以是"事"。因此說:"凡夫與預流者的欲貪、瞋恚是共通的"等。與所說相反,即以名稱和事的不共通性。因為各自道果位的各自道果性,應證者的應證性,不應證者的不應證性是不共通的。 "已修"這是修習行為的標示,這裡不要求說時間,所以說"意思是應修"。這裡的修習應當了知是數數修習,善字是無過失義。從對治,即從對立面。通過不同的譬喻來顯示所要說的法的確立。 詞義,即詞所表述的義理,或自性法。

11.

Nikkhepo desanā. Pabhavo samudayo.

12.『『Avuttānampi saṅgaho』』ti iminā avuttasamuccayattho ca-saddoti dasseti.

13.『『Gāthāruḷhe』』ti iminā pāḷiāgatova pañho veditabbo, na itaroti dasseti. Tenāha 『『buddhādīhi byākate』』ti. Tassa atthassāti āraddhassa atthassa, tena ārambhasodhanassa visayamāha. Ettha ca atthadvāreneva padapucchāsodhanampi karīyatīti puna 『『tassa atthassā』』ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā vissajjitamhīti vissajjane. Vissajjanasodhanena hi pañhāsodhanaṃ. Pañheti pucchāyaṃ. Gāthāyanti upalakkhaṇaṃ, tena gāthāyaṃ, suttageyyādīsu cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yamārabbhāti yaṃ sīlādimārabbha gāthādīsu desitaṃ, tasmiṃ ārambheti attho. Pucchitāti pucchākārinī, 『『kā ettha padasuddhi, kā pañhāsuddhi, kā ārambhasuddhī』』ti evaṃ pucchākārinī pucchaṃ katvā pavattitā suddhāsuddhaparikkhāti yojanā.

14.Na vikappayitabbāti yathā loke 『『jāti sāmaññaṃ, bhedo sāmaññaṃ, sambandho sāmañña』』ntiādinā sāmaññaṃ jātiādiṃ, tabbidhurañca visesaṃ vikappenti parikappenti, evaṃ na vikappayitabbāti attho. Yadā yo kālaviseso 『『sve』』ti laddhavohāro, tadā so taṃdivasātikkame 『『ajjā』』ti, puna taṃdivasātikkame 『『hiyyo』』ti voharīyatīti anavaṭṭhitasabhāvā ete kālavisesā. Disāyapi 『『ekaṃ avadhiṃ apekkhitvā puratthimā disā, tato aññaṃ apekkhitvā pacchimā nāma hotī』』tiādinā anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatā veditabbā. Jātiādiapekkhāyāti jātiādidukkhavisesāpekkhāya. Saccāpekkhāyāti saccasāmaññāpekkhāya. 『『Taṇhā』』ti vuccamānaṃ kāmataṇhādiapekkhāya sāmaññampi samānaṃ saccāpekkhāya viseso hotīti evamādiṃ sandhāyāha 『『esa nayo samudayādīsupī』』ti.

16.Etthāti etasmiṃ buddhavacane. Tenāha 『『sikkhattayasaṅkhātassā』』tiādi. Yathārutaṃ yathākathitaṃ saddato adhigataṃ niddhāritaṃ, na atthappakaraṇaliṅgasaddantarasannidhānādippamāṇantarādhigataṃ . 『『Atthato dassitā』』ti idaṃ yasmiṃ sutte bhāvanāva kathitā, na pahānaṃ, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.

Nayasaṅkhepavaṇṇanā

17.Taṇhāvijjāhi karaṇabhūtāhi. Saṃkileso pakkho etassāti saṃkilesapakkho, saṃkilesapakkhiko suttattho, tassa nayanalakkhaṇoti yojanā. Vodānapakkhassa suttatthassāti sambandho. Vuṭṭhānagāminiyā, balavavipassanāya ca dukkhādīsu pariññeyyatādīni maggānuguṇo gahaṇākāro anugāhaṇanayo. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ nayoti āha 『『tassa panā』』tiādi. Tattha 『『nayavohāro』』ti iminā nayādhiṭṭhānaṃ nayoti vuttanti dasseti.

18.Bādhakādibhāvatoti bādhakapabhavasantiniyyānabhāvato. Aññathābhāvābhāvenāti abādhakaappabhavaasanti aniyyānabhāvābhāvena. Saccasabhāvattāti amusāsabhāvattā. Avisaṃvādanatoti ariyasabhāvādibhāvassa na visaṃvādanato ekantikattāti attho.

19.Saṃkiliṭṭhadhammāti saṃkilesasamannāgatā dhammā saddhammanayakovidāti saccapaṭiccasamuppādādidhammanayakusalā, ekattādinayakusalā vā.

20.Atthavissajjanesūti 『『ime dhammā kusalā』』tiādinā (dha. sa. 1) sutte katapañhavissajjanesu ceva aṭṭhakathāya kataatthasaṃvaṇṇanāsu ca. 『『Vodāniyā』』ti iminā anavajjadhammā idha kusalāti adhippetā, na sukhavipākāti dasseti. Tassa tassa atthanayassa yojanatthaṃ manasā volokayateti yojanā.

我將繼續為您翻譯這段巴利文: 11. 遣除是闡說。生起是集。 12. "未說者的彙集"這句話是要顯示ca詞也包括未說的集合義。 13. "在詩頌中"這句是要顯示只應當理解聖典中已有的問題,而非其他。因此說"由佛等闡說"。對於那個義理,即已開始的義理,闡明其開端凈化的範圍。在此,僅僅通過義理之門也進行詞問題的凈化,所以又說"對於那個義理"。或者,在已解答處,即在解答。通過解答的凈化來凈化問題。問題即是詢問。詩頌是標記,因此在詩頌中,在經、歌等中都已經說了。所依者,即依止戒等在詩頌等中所宣說的。詢問者,即詢問方式,如"在此何處有詞的凈化,何處有問題的凈化,何處有開端的凈化"等詢問方式,提出詢問並進行了清凈與不清凈的考察的安排。 14. 不應當分別,即不像世間常說"生類是共相,差別是共相,關係是共相"等,對共相如生類等,以及與之相異的特殊性進行分別、構想。當某個時間差別如"明天"已獲得語言表達時,超過那一天則說"今天",再超過則說"昨天",這些時間差別是沒有固定本性的。在方向上也應當了知其無固定本性,如"依一個界限,東方是這個,依另一個界限則稱為西方"等。依生類等的考慮,即依生類等苦的特殊性的考慮。依真諦的考慮,即依真諦共相的考慮。當說"渴愛"時,依欲渴愛等的考慮,其共相也與依真諦的考慮有特殊性。諸如此類,是爲了說明"在集等處也是如此"。 16. 在此,即在佛語中。因此說"三學所攝"等。如其所聽聞,如其所說,從語言上獲得、確定,而非依義理、文體、語詞間的鄰近等其他量度獲得。"從義理上顯示"這句,是針對在某經中只說明修習,而非斷除,而說的。 論要略的解釋 17. 以渴愛、無明作為造作因。染污是這一方面,所以是染污方面,即染污方面的經文義理,其導引特相如此安排。與清凈方面的經文義理有關。出離道、有力的觀察在苦等處應當遍知等,隨順於道的把握方式是隨順把握之道。如果如此,那麼如何呢?因此說"對於這個"等。在此,"道的語言"是要顯示道作為道的基礎。 18. 障礙等狀態,即障礙、生起、安止、出離的狀態。以非其他的狀態,即非障礙、非生起、非安止、非出離的狀態。真諦本性,即非虛妄本性。不相違,即不違背聖者本性等狀態的不相違。 19. 染污法,即與染污相應的法,善於了知道的方式,或善於了知真諦緣起等法的方式,或善於了知一體等方式。 20. 在義理的解答中,即在"這些法是善的"等經的問題解答,以及註釋書中對義理的讚美解釋。"可清凈"這句是要顯示此處意指無過失的法是善的,而非善的苦報。爲了安排每一義理方式的義理,以意觀察。

1. Yadi karaṇabhūtaṃ, kathaṃ tassa atthantarābhāvoti āha 『『yena hī』』tiādi. Disābhūtadhammānaṃ volokayanasamānayanabhāvato vohārabhūto, kammabhūto ca nayo, na nandiyāvaṭṭādayo viya atthabhūtoti 『『vohāranayo, kammanayo』』ti ca vuccati.

Dvādasapadavaṇṇanā

23.Apariyosite padeti uccāraṇavelāyaṃ pade asamatte, vippakateti attho. Pariyosite hi 『『pada』』ntve samaññā siyā, na 『『akkhara』』nti adhippāyo. Padassa vevacanatāya atthavasena pariyāyaṃ kharantaṃ sañcarantaṃ viya hoti, na evaṃ vaṇṇo avevacanattāti āha pariyāyavasena akkharaṇato』』ti. Na hi vaṇṇassa pariyāyo vijjatī』』ti idaṃ akārādivaṇṇavisesaṃ sandhāya vadati, na vaṇṇasāmaññaṃ. Tassa hi vaṇṇo akkharanti pariyāyo vutto evāti.

Akkharasaddassa atthaṃ vatvā tappasaṅgena vaṇṇasaddassapi vattuṃ 『『kenaṭṭhena vaṇṇo』』tiādimāha. Tattha nanu padena, vākyena vā attho saṃvaṇṇīyati, na akkharenāti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha 『『vaṇṇo eva hī』』tiādi. Padādibhāvenāti padavākyabhāvena. Yathāsambandhanti yathāsaṅketaṃ. Ayaṃ-saddo imassatthassa vācako, ayaṃ attho imassa saddassa vacanīyoti yathāgahitasaṅketānurūpaṃ saddatthānaṃ vācakavacanīyabhāvo. Atha vā yvāyaṃ saddatthānaṃ aññamaññaṃ avinābhāvo, so sambandho. Tadanurūpaṃ ekakkharaṃ nāmapadaṃ 『『mā evaṃ maññasī』』tiādīsu mā-kārādi. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Te hi abhidhammadesanaṃ 『『manasādesanā』』ti vadanti, yato rāhulācariyo 『『visuddhakaruṇānaṃ manasādesanā vācāya akkharaṇato akkharasaññitā』』ti āha.

Satvappadhānanti drabyappadhānaṃ. Nāmapade hi drabyamāvibhūtarūpaṃ, kiriyā anāvibhūtarūpā yathā 『『phasso』』ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225; udā. 1; netti. 24). Ākhyātapade pana kiriyā āvibhūtarūpā, drabyamanāvibhūtarūpaṃ yathā 『『phusatī』』ti. Tena nesaṃ satvakiriyāppadhānatā vuttā. Kiriyāvisesaggahaṇanimittanti kiriyāvisesāvabodhahetu kiriyāvisesadīpanato, yathā 『『cirappavāsi』』nti (dha. pa. 219) ettha pa-saddo vasanakiriyāya viyogavisiṭṭhataṃ dīpeti. 『『Evaṃ manasi karotha, mā evaṃ manasākatthā』』tiādīsu kiriyāvisesassa jotako evaṃ-saddo. 『『Evaṃsīlā (dī. ni. 3.142) evaṃdhammā』』tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13; ma. ni. 3. 198; saṃ. ni.

我將繼續為您翻譯這段巴利文: 21. 如果是造作因,那麼它怎麼會沒有其他義理呢?因此說"以什麼"等。由於方向性法的觀察和比較的性質,道是語言的,也是業的,不像難陀旋轉等是義理,所以說"語言道、業道"。 十二支分的解釋 23. 未完成的詞,即在發音時刻詞未完成,意思是未完備。因為在完成時,有"詞"的稱呼,而非"字母"的意圖。由於詞的同義性,依義理方面如同流動穿行,但字母並非同義,所以說"依方面流動字母"。"字母並無方面"這句是針對從阿等特殊字母說的,非字母的共相。因為已經說過字母就是詞。 在說明字母詞的義理后,順便說明字母詞,因此說"以何義字母"等。在此,有人質疑:是否僅以詞或句子來讚美義理,而非字母?因此說"實際上字母"等。以詞等的性質,即詞句的性質。按照約定,即按照約定。"這"這個詞是這個義理的表達者,"這個義理"是這個詞應當說明的,即按照已把握的約定,詞義的表達和應說明性質。或者,詞義之間的不可分離性,即為關係。按此相應,如一字名詞如"mā"等在"不要這樣想"等處。某些人,即阿婆耶祇利住處的人。他們說阿毗達摩的教說是"意的教說",因為羅睺羅阿阇梨說:"清凈悲心者的意的教說,由於以語言字母表達,所以稱為字母"。 以有情為主,即以實體為主。在名詞中,實體是明顯顯現的形態,如"觸"。在動詞中,行為是明顯顯現的形態,實體是不明顯的,如"觸"。因此說明它們以有情行為為主。以特殊行為的把握為因,即爲了瞭解特殊行為的顯示,如"長期遠行"中,字首"pa"顯示離開行為的特殊性。在"這樣思考,不要這樣思考"等處,"這"字顯示行為的特殊性。在"如是性","如是法"等處...

5.378) satvavisesassa. Evaṃ sesanipātapadānampīti adhippāyo. Tenāha 『『kiriyāya…pe… nipātapada』』nti.

Saṅkhepato vuttaṃ, kiṃ pana tanti āha 『『padābhihita』』nti. Atha vā saṅkhepato vuttaṃ, yo akkharehi saṅkāsitoti vuccati. Padābhihitaṃ padehi kathitaṃ, yo padehi pakāsitoti vuccati. Tadubhayaṃ, yadi padasamudāyo vākyaṃ, tassa ko paricchedo. Yāvatā adhippetatthapariyosānaṃ, tāvatā ekavākyantipi vadanti, bahūpettha pakāre vaṇṇenti. Kiṃ tehi, sākhyātaṃ sābyayaṃ sakārakaṃ savisesanaṃ 『『vākya』』nti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nanu ca padenapi attho byañjīyatīti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha 『『padamattasavanepi hī』』tiādi. Ākāresu vākyavibhāgesu abhihitaṃ kathitaṃ nibbacanaṃ ākārābhihitaṃ nibbacanaṃ. 『『Abhihitanti ca pāḷiāgata』』nti vadanti.

『『Nibbānaṃ maggati, nibbānatthikehi vā maggīyati, kilese vā mārento gacchatīti maggo』』tiādinā (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 16) nibbacanānaṃ vitthāro. Taṃniddesakathanattā niddesoti imamatthamāha 『『nibbacanavitthāro niravasesadesanattā niddeso』』ti. Padehīti vākyāvayavabhūtehi, vākyato vibhajjamānehi vā ākhyātādipadehi. Tenāha 『『vākyassa vibhāgo』』ti, tathā cāha 『『apariyosite』』tiādi. Apare pana 『『pakatipaccayalopādesādivasena akkharavibhāgo ākāro, niruttinayena padavibhāgo nibbacanaṃ, vākyavibhāgo niddeso. Vaṇṇapadavākyāni hi avibhattāni, vibhattāni ca cha byañjanapadānī』』ti vadanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ vacananti chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ. Kātabbanti 『『akkharaṃ padaṃ byañjanaṃ ākāro tatheva nirutti niddeso chaṭṭhavacana』』nti gāthāyaṃ evaṃ kattabbaṃ, saṃvaṇṇanāvasena vā ākārapadaṃ catutthaṃ kātabbanti attho. Sabbo saddavohāro vibhattehi, avibhattehi ca akkharapadavākyeheva, tadaññappakāro natthīti āha 『『yānimānī』』tiādi.

24.Kāsanāsaddo kammatthoti dassetuṃ 『『kāsīyatī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Padehi tāva atthassa saṅkāsanā, pakāsanā ca hotu, padāvadhikāpi saṃvaṇṇanā icchitāti akkharehi pana kathanti āha 『『akkharehi suyyamānehī』』tiādi. Padatthasampaṭipattīti padābhidheyyaatthāvabodho. 『『Akkharehi saṅkāsetī』』tiādinā akkharakaraṇaṃ saṅkāsanabhūtaṃ ugghaṭanakiriyaṃ vadantena yathāvutto attho sādhitoti dassetuṃ 『『tathā hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Vibhajanuttānīkammapaññattīti ekattaniddeso samāhāroti ayaṃ dvandasamāso. Ubhayenāti 『『vivaraṇā, vibhajanā』』ti iminā dvayena. Etehīti ettha eva-kāro luttaniddiṭṭhoti āha 『『etehi evā』』ti. 『『Saṅkāsanā…pe… abhāvato』』ti iminā yathādhippetaanūnāvadhāraṇaphalaṃ dasseti. Ugghaṭanādīti ādisaddena vipañcananayāni saṅgaṇhāti.

25.Sammāyuttoti sammā aviparītaṃ, anavasesato ca yutto sahito. Tathā hi vuttaṃ 『『anūnā』』ti. Sabbo hi pāḷiattho atthapadaatthanayehi anavasesato saṅgahito. Tenāha 『『sabbassa hī』』tiādi.

我來翻譯這段巴利文: 5.378. 有情的特殊性。這樣其餘的不變詞也是,這是意圖。因此說"動作...等...不變詞"。 簡略地說,那是什麼呢?因此說"以詞表示"。或者簡略地說,即所說的由字母顯示。以詞表示即由詞說明,即所說的由詞顯示。這兩者,如果詞的集合是句子,它的界限是什麼?有說只要是意圖義理的結束,就是一個句子,在此有多種方式解釋。不理會它們,應當視為"具有動詞、虛詞、格位詞、形容詞的句子"。有人質疑:難道不是以詞也能表達義理嗎?因此說"即使只聽到詞"等。在形式的句子分別中所說明、所解釋的叫做形式說明的解釋。說"說明即是聖典所說"。 "追求涅槃,或被求涅槃者所追求,或滅煩惱而行進為道"等是語源解釋的詳說。由於是對它的解說,稱為解說,爲了說明此義因此說"語源的詳說由於是無餘的教說故為解說"。以詞,即作為句子的支分,或從句子中分出的動詞等詞。因此說"句子的分別",如此說"未完成"等。但其他人說:"依原形詞根的脫落、新增等而字母分別為形式,依詞源道理的詞分別為語源解釋,句子分別為解說。因為字母、詞、句子未分別和已分別為六種表達詞"。第六語即第六詞。應當做,即在"字母、詞、表達、形式、如是語源、解說、第六語"的偈頌中應當這樣做,或依解釋方式形式詞應當做第四,這是意思。一切語言表達只由已分別和未分別的字母、詞、句子,除此之外沒有其他方式,所以說"凡是這些"等。 24. 爲了顯示顯示詞是業用義,所以說"被顯示"等。首先以詞對義理的顯示和闡明,即使是以詞為限的解釋也被接受,那麼如何以字母呢?因此說"以可聞的字母"等。詞義的通達即瞭解詞所表達的義理。說"以字母顯示"等,是爲了顯示以字母為工具的顯示性提升作用所說的義理已被成就,所以說"如此"等。 分別、顯明、施設,是一體性的解說集合,即這個複合詞。兩者,即以"解釋、分別"這兩種。以這些,這裡eva詞是省略顯示,所以說"只以這些"。通過"顯示...等...不存在",顯示如所欲無減確定的結果。提升等,等字包括廣說的諸道理。 25. 正確結合,即正確無倒,完整地結合、俱有。因此說"無減"。因為一切聖典義都被義句、義道理完整地攝受。因此說"對一切"等。

1. Kasmā panettha mūlapadapadaṭṭhānāni asaṅgahitānīti? Padatthantarābhāvato. Mūlapadāni hi nayānaṃ samuṭṭhānamattattā padaṭṭhānānīti dassitoyaṃ nayo. Tena vuttaṃ 『『ito vinimutto koci nettipadattho natthī』』ti.

Nettiyā kāraṇabhūtāya. Hārā saṃvaṇṇetabbāti suttassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena hārā vitthāretabbā. Svāyanti so ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanākkamo. Yena anukkamena nettiyaṃ desitā, teneva sutte atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena yojetabbāti. Evaṃ siddheti desanākkameneva siddhe. Ayaṃ ārambhoti 『『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』』nti evaṃ pavatto ārambho. Imamatthanti imaṃ vuccamānaniyamasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ.

Yadi desitakkameneva hāranayā sutte yojetabbā siyuṃ, kiṃ so kamo kāraṇanirapekkho, udāhu kāraṇasāpekkhoti? Kiñcettha – yadi tāva kāraṇanirapekkho hāranayānaṃ anukkamo, aneke atthā vuccamānā avassaṃ ekena kamena vuccantīti. Evaṃ sante yena kenaci kamena sutte yojetabbā siyuṃ, tathā sati niyamo niratthako siyā. Atha kāraṇasāpekkho, kiṃ taṃ kāraṇanti? Itaro kāraṇagavesanaṃ akatvā attho evettha gavesitabboti adhippāyena 『『nāyamanuyogo na katthaci anukkame nivisatī』』ti vatvā 『『na pana mayaṃ devānaṃpiyassa manorathavighātāya cetemā』』ti kamakāraṇaṃ vicārento 『『apicā』』tiādinā desanāhārassa tāva ādito desanāya kāraṇaṃ patiṭṭhapeti. Tattha dhammadesanāya nissayo assādādīnavanissaraṇāni, sarīraṃ āṇatti. Pakatiyā sabhāvena. Niddhāraṇena vināpi patiṭṭhābhāvato nissayabhāvato.

『『Tathā hi vakkhatī』』tiādinā yathāvuttaṃ atthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ karoti. Esa nayo itaresupi.

Vicayānantaranti vicayahārānantaraṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tathā hīti lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅge yuttāyuttānaṃ kāraṇaparamparāya pariggahitasabhāvānaṃ avuttānampi ekalakkhaṇatāya gahaṇaṃ vuttaṃ.

Atthato niddhāritānanti atthuddhārapubbāparānusandhiādiatthato suttantarato uddhaṭānaṃ saṃvaṇṇiyamānasutte ānītānaṃ pāḷidhammānaṃ. Saddato, pamāṇantarato ca laddhānaṃ idha vicāretabbattā āha 『『niravasesato』』ti. Atthassāti abhidheyyatthassa. Dhammassāti sabhāvadhammassa. Tattha tattha taṃ abhiniropetīti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe, dhamme ca taṃ nāmaṃ abhiniropeti, 『『ayamevaṃnāmo』』ti voharati. 『『Atthassa, dhammassā』』ti padadvayena sāmaññato attho, dhammo ca anavasesetvā gahitoti āha 『『anavasesapariyādāna』』nti, yato vuttaṃ 『『tattha tatthā』』ti. Tathāti yathā anavasesatthāvabodhadīpakaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ kataṃ catubyūhapāḷiyaṃ, evaṃ punappunaṃ gabbhamupetīti ettha asaddavatī atthā pavattivasena labbhamānā sammāpaṭipatti uddhaṭāti upasaṃhārattho tathā-saddo.

Tenevāti suttantarasaṃsandanassa sabhāgavisabhāgadhammantarāvaṭṭanūpāyabhāvato eva. Yatoti sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanassa sādhāraṇādidhammavibhajanūpāyattā. Paṭivibhattasabhāveti paṭibhāgabhāvena vibhattasabhāve.

Te dhammāti paṭipakkhato parivattitadhammā. Na pariyāyavibhāvanā paññattivibhāgapariggāhikāti āha 『『pariyā…pe… subodhanañcā』』ti.

Pucchāvisodhanaṃ vissajjanaṃ. Ārambhavisodhanaṃ desanāya atthakathanaṃ. Tadubhayavicāro dhātādīsu asammuyhantasseva sambhavatīti āha 『『dhātāyatanā…pe… sampādetu』』nti. Suddho ārambhotiādipāḷinidassanenapi ayamevattho udāhaṭoti veditabbaṃ.

我來 譯這段巴利文: 26. 為什麼在此沒有攝取根本詞和詞位呢?因為沒有其他詞義。因為根本詞僅是諸道理的生起,這個道理已經顯示為詞位。因此說"除此之外沒有任何其他的導論詞義"。 對於作為因的導論。關係應當解釋,即依經的義理解釋方式,關係應當詳說。這個,即這個解釋次第。以導論中所教說的次第,應當按照經中義理解釋的方式來安排。如此成就,即依教說次第成就。這個開始,即"十六關係為第一"如此開始。此義,即此所說的規定所稱的義理。 如果關係道理應當按照教說的次第在經中安排,那麼這個次第是否不依賴因由,還是依賴因由呢?在此又如何 - 如果首先關係道理的次第不依賴因由,許多義理被說時必定以一個次第說。這樣的話,應當以任何次第在經中安排,如此規定就無意義了。如果依賴因由,那因由是什麼呢?另一方說:"不尋求因由,此處僅應尋求義理",基於這種意圖說"這個追問不在任何次第上確定"。但說"我們不是爲了破壞天人所愛的意願",考察次第的因由,以"然而"等確立首先的教說關係的教說因由。在此,法教說的依止是享受、過患、出離,身是教誡。自然即自性。由於沒有確定也能建立,所以是依止性。 以"因為將要說"等使前述義理更加明顯。在其他方面也是這個道理。 在查究之後,即在查究關係之後。其餘也是這個道理。如此,即在特相關係分別中說明了由因果系列把握自性的適當與不適當,未說的也由一個特相性而把握。 從義理確定,即從義理總結前後相續等義理,從其他經中引出,在所解釋經中引入的聖典法。由於從語言和其他量度所得在此應當考察,所以說"無餘地"。義理,即所詮義理。法,即自性法。在彼彼處安立它,即在彼彼義理和法中安立那個名稱,說"這個如是名"。通過"義理、法"兩詞,無餘地把握了總體的義理和法,所以說"無餘遍知",因此說"在彼彼處"。如是,如同在四種佈列聖典中作了無餘義理了解顯示的無餘遍知,同樣在"一再入胎"等處,無語言的義理依生起方式所得的正行被引出,這個如是字是總結義。 由於這個,即由於其他經的比較是同類異類法轉變的方便。由於,即由於同類異類法轉變是共通等法分別的方便。在對立分別自性中,即在相對性分別的自性中。 這些法,即從對治面轉變的諸法。方面顯示不能把握施設分別,所以說"方面...等...善巧了知"。 問題的凈化是解答。開始的凈化是教說的義理解說。這兩者的考察只有在不迷惑界處等時才可能,所以說"界處...等...成就"。應當了知以"清凈的開始"等聖典例證也是引述這個義理。

『『Kāraṇākāro』』ti padaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vadati. Pabhedato desanākāroti vevacanaṃ. Niddhāretvā vuccamānānīti uddharitvā samāropiyamānānīti adhippāyo. Suttassa atthaṃ tathattāvabodhāyāti suttassa padatthāvagamamukhena catusaccābhisamayāya.

Veneyyattayayutto atthanayattayūpadeso 『『veneyyattayappayojito』』ti vutto. Veneyyattayañhi paccayasamavāye tadupadesaphalaṃ adhigacchantaṃ atthaṃ payojeti nāmāti. Tadanukkamenevāti tesaṃ ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ desanānukkameneva. Teti tayo atthanayā. Tesanti ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ. Yathā uddesādīnaṃ saṅkhepamajjhimavitthāravuttiyā tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ upakāratā, evaṃ tesaṃ atthanayānaṃ. Tassāti atthanayatthassa. Tatthāti tassaṃ tassaṃ bhūmiyaṃ.

Samuṭṭhānaṃ nidānaṃ. Anekadhā saddanayato, niruttinayato cāti anekappakāraṃ. Padattho saddattho. Vidhi anuvādoti idamettha vidhivacanaṃ, ayamanuvādoti ayaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Samādhātabboti pariharitabbo. Anusandhīyā anurūpaṃ nigametabbanti yāya anusandhiyā sutte upari desanā pavattā, tadanurūpaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā nigametabbā. Payojananti phalaṃ. Piṇḍatthoti saṅkhepattho. Anusandhīti pucchānusandhiādianusandhi. Upogghāṭoti nidassanaṃ. Cālanāti codanā. Paccupaṭṭhānaṃ parihāro.

Pakatiādipadāvayavaṃ bhinditvā kathanaṃ bhedakathā yathā 『『dibbantīti devā』』ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.153). Padassa atthakathanaṃ tatvakathā yathā 『『buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako』』ti (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97; paṭi. ma. 1.161). Pariyāyavacanaṃ vevacanaggahaṇaṃ yathā 『『paññā pajānanā』』ti (dha. sa. 16). Vicayayutticatubyūhaparivattanahārekadesasaṅgahitā, vevacanahārasaṅgahitā cāti āha 『『te idha katipayahārasaṅgahitā』』ti.

Attano phalaṃ dhāretīti dhammoti hetuno dhammabhāvo veditabbo. Ñāpakahetūpi ñāṇakaraṇaṭṭhena kārake pakkhipitvā āha 『『kārako sampāpakoti duvidho』』ti. Puna cakkhubījādinibbattakameva kāraṇaṃ katvā dassento 『『puna…pe… tividho』』tiādimāha. 『『Tayo kusalahetū』』tiādinā (dha. sa. 1059-1060) āgatā alobhādayo, lobhādayo ca hetuhetu nāma. 『『Cattāro kho, bhikkhave, mahābhūtā hetu, cattāro mahābhūtā paccayo rūpakkhandhassa paññāpanāyā』』tiādinā (ma. ni.

我來翻譯這段巴利文: "因相"是指詞位。分別的教說相是同義語。所說的確定,意思是提出后歸結。爲了通達經的義理如實性,即通過了解經的詞義而趣向四諦現觀。 適合三種根機的三種義理教導被稱為"由三種根機所引導"。因為三種根機在諸緣和合時獲得其教導的果,稱為引導義理。即依其次第,即依利根等的教說次第。它們,即三種義理道理。它們的,即利根等的。如概要、中等、廣說的解說以三種方式有益於三種補特伽羅,義理道理也是如此。它的,即義理道理的義理。在彼處,即在彼彼地。 生起是因緣。多種方式,即依語言道理和語源道理等多種方式。詞義即語言義。規定與隨述,此中應當了知這是規定語,這是隨述的區分。應當安立,即應當維護。應當依相續而結論,即依照經中教說向上進行的相續,應當依此作相應的解釋結論。目的即果。總義即略義。相續即問答相續等相續。引述即譬喻。震動即質問。現起即解答。 分別詞的原形等支分而說叫做分別說,如"因光耀故為天"。說詞的義理叫做真實說,如"佛陀即是世尊,自覺無師"。同義語即同義語的把握,如"慧即是了知"。包含在查究、理趣、四種佈列、轉變關係的一部分,也包含在同義關係中,所以說"它們在此包含在若干關係中"。 持有自己的果故為法,應當了知因的法性。能知因也以作知解義放入作者中,所以說"作者、使得到為二種"。再顯示只有眼種子等生起的因,所以說"再...等...三種"。"三善因"等所說的無貪等和貪等叫做因的因。"諸比丘,四大種是因,四大種是緣,用來施設色蘊"等。

3.86) āgato paccayahetu nāma. Kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ attano vipākaṃ pati uttamahetu nāma. Cakkhādibījādi cakkhuviññāṇaaṅkurādīnaṃ asādhāraṇahetu nāma. Kusalākusalānaṃ satipi paccayadhammabhāve iṭṭhāniṭṭhaphalavisesahetubhāvadassanatthaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ, saddamaggānaṃ pana ñāpakasampāpakahetubhāvadassanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aṅkurādikassa asādhāraṇahetu bījādisamānajātiyahetutāya sabhāgahetu. Sādhāraṇahetu bhusasalilādiasamānajātiyatāya asabhāgahetu. Indriyabaddhasantāniko ajjhattikahetu, itaro bāhirahetu. Keci pana 『『sasantāniko ajjhattikahetu, itaro bāhirahetū』』ti vadanti. Pariggāhako upatthambhako. Paramparahetu upanissayapaccayo.

Nibbānassa anibbattaniyepi samudayappahānasamudayanirodhānaṃ adhigamādhigantabbabhāvato nibbānaṃ pati maggassa hetubhāvo viya maggaṃ pati nibbānassa phalabhāvo upacārasiddhoti āha 『『phalapariyāyo labbhatī』』ti.

Paṭipajjamānabhūmi maggadhammā. Paṭipannabhūmi phaladhammā.

Kiccatoti sarasato. Lakkhaṇatoti upalakkhaṇato. Sāmaññatoti samānabhāvato. Tena samānahetutā, samānaphalatā, samānārammaṇatā ca gahitā hotīti. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā lakkhaṇahāraniddesavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.

Apicettha sampayogavippayogavirodhapakaraṇaliṅgasaddantarasannidhānasāmatthiyādīnampi vasena nayavibhāgo veditabbo. Tattha sampayogato tāvanayavibhāgo – 『『nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ citta』』nti (a. ni. 1.48) cittassa lahuparivattitā gahitā, taṃsampayogato cetasikānampi gahitāva hoti aññattha nesaṃ cittena sampayogadīpanato. Atha vā 『『saññino』』ti. Saññāsahitatāvacanena hi nesaṃ vedanācetanādivantatāpi sampayogato dīpitā hoti.

Vippayogato – 『『ahetukā』』ti. Hetusampayuttā hi dhammā 『『sahetukā』』ti vuttāti tabbidhurā dhammā vippayogato 『『ahetukā』』ti vuttāti viññāyati. Atha vā 『『asaññino』』ti. Saññāvippayuttā hi dhammapavatti idhādhippetā, na saññāya abhāvamattanti viññāyati.

Virodhato – 『『aṭṭhamako (yama. 3.indriyayamakapāḷi.439), saddhānusārī』』ti (pu. pa. mātikā 7.36) ca vutte taṃ santatiyaṃ saṃyojanattayappahānaṃ viññāyati, tathā 『『sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā』』ti (dī. ni. 2.404; ma. ni. 1.137) vutte pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanappahānaṃ , 『『diṭṭheva dhamme aññā』』ti (dī. ni. 2.404; ma. ni. 1.137) vutte anavasesasaṃyojanappahānaṃ viññāyati.

Pakaraṇato – 『『abyākatā dhammā』』ti (dha. sa. mātikā). Adhikārato hi kusalākusalabhāvena na kathitāti ñāyati. 『『Upadhī hi narassa socanā』』ti (saṃ. ni. 1.12, 144) ca. Bāhirā hi dhammā idha 『『upadhī』』ti adhippetāti viññāyati.

Liṅgato – 『『sītenapi ruppati, uṇhenapi ruppatī』』tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.79). Sītādiggahaṇena hi liṅgena bhūtupādāyappakārasseva dhammassa rūpabhāvo, na itarassa.

Saddantarasannidhānato – 『『kāyapassaddhi, kāyāyatana』』nti. 『『Yā vedanākkhandhassā』』tiādivacanato hi purimo kāyasaddo samūhavācī, itaro āyatanasaddasannidhānato pasādavācī.

Sāmatthiyato – 『『sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, ādittaṃ (saṃ. ni. 4.28; mahāva. 54), sabbe tasanti daṇḍassā』』ti (dha. pa. 129) ca, tathā 『『sabbāvantaṃ lokaṃ mettāsahagatena cetasā…pe… pharitvā viharatī』』tiādi (dī. ni.

我來 譯這段巴利文: 3.86. 所說的叫做緣的因。善不善業對於自己的果報叫做最勝因。眼等種子等是眼識芽等的不共因。雖然善不善也是緣法,爲了顯示它們是可意不可意特殊果的因而別別攝取,但應當了知聲和道是爲了顯示能知因和使得到因。芽等的不共因由於種子等是同類因,所以是同分因。共因由於地水等是異類,所以是非同分因。有根相續是內因,其他是外因。但有些人說:"自相續是內因,其他是外因"。攝持是支援。相續因是親依止緣。 雖然涅槃不是所生,但因為道是能證和所證的關係,所以說"獲得果的意義"。 能行地是道法。已行地是果法。 從作用,即從自性。從相,即從標誌。從共性,即從相同性。由此把握了同因性、同果性、同所緣性。其中應當說的,在前面特相關係解說的解釋中已經說了。 而且在此應當了知依相應、離、相違、上下文、性、其他語詞鄰近、作用等的道理分別。其中首先依相應的道理分別 - "諸比丘,我不見有任何一法如此迅速變化,即是這個心"中,把握了心的迅速變化性,由於與之相應,心所也都已攝取,因為在其他處說明它們與心相應。或者"有想"。因為說有想俱有,依相應也顯示它們具有受、思等。 從離 - "無因"。因為與因相應的法說"有因",所以與之相違的法從離而說"無因"而被了知。或者"無想"。因爲了知此處意趣是與想離的法的生起,而不僅是想的不存在。 從相違 - 說"第八"、"隨信行"時,了知在那個相續中斷除三結,同樣說"若有餘依則為阿那含"時,了知斷除五下分結,說"現法中究竟智"時,了知斷除一切結。 從上下文 - "無記法"。因為從上下文了知不說善不善性。"人的執取實為憂愁"。因爲了知此處意指外在諸法為"執取"。 從語性 - "為寒所惱,為熱所惱"等。因為以寒等的語性顯示只有大種所造差別法的色性,而非其他。 從其他語詞鄰近 - "身輕安,身處"。因為說"受蘊的"等,前面的身字表示集合,後面由於處字鄰近表示凈色。 從作用 - "諸比丘,一切在燃燒","一切因杖而戰慄",同樣"以慈心遍滿一切世間而住"等。;

1.556; 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77, 232, 459, 509; 2.309; 3.230; vibha. 642). Ettha hi satipi sabbasaddassa anavasesasattavācakatte ādittatā sāpekkhasseva atthassa vācakattā padesavācī sabbasaddo, lokasaddopi sattavācī. Sattārammaṇā hi appamaññāti. Tathā 『『mātaraṃ pitaraṃ hantvā』』ti (dha. pa. 294-295) sabbena sabbaṃ hi sapaṭikkhepato, mātupitughātakammassa ca mahāsāvajjatāpavedanato, idha ca tadanuññāya katāya mātupituṭṭhāniyā tādisā keci pāpadhammā veneyyavasena gahitā viññāyati. Ke pana teti? Taṇhāmānā. Taṇhā hi jananī sattānaṃ. 『『Taṇhā janeti purisa』』nti (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57) hi vuttaṃ. Pituṭṭhāniyo māno taṃ nissāya attasampaggaṇhato 『『ahaṃ asukassa ruñño, rājamahāmattassa vā putto』』ti yathā. Sāmatthiyādīnanti ādisaddena desapakatiādayo saṅgayhanti.

Labbhamānapadatthaniddhāraṇamukhenāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte labbhamānaassādādihārapadatthaniddhāraṇadvārena. Yathālakkhaṇanti yaṃ yaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ, lakkhaṇānurūpaṃ vā yathālakkhaṇaṃ. Hetuphalādīni upadhāretvā yojetabbāni tesaṃ vasenāti adhippāyo. Idāni hetuphalādayo ye yasmiṃ hāre savisesaṃ icchitabbā, te dassetuṃ 『『visesato panā』』tiādimāha. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.

Niddesavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Paṭiniddesavāravaṇṇanā

2. Desanāhāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

5.Anvatthasaññatanti atthānugatasaññabhāvaṃ, 『『desanāhāro』』ti ayaṃ saññā anvatthā atthānugatāti attho.

Avuttamevāti pubbe asaṃvaṇṇitapadameva. 『『Dhammaṃ vo』』tiādi (ma. ni. 3.420) vacanassa sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ 『『kattha panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tepiṭakassa hi buddhavacanassa saṃvaṇṇanālakkhaṇaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ, tañca pariyattidhammasaṅgāhake suttapade saṃvaṇṇetabbabhāvena gahite gahitameva hoti. Tenāha 『『desanāhārena…pe… dassetī』』ti.

Yesaṃ assādādīnaṃ vibhajanalakkhaṇo desanāhāro, te gāthāya, idhāpi ca āgate 『『assādaṃ ādīnava』』ntiādinā udāharaṇavasena vibhajituṃ 『『tattha katamo assādo』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』ti gāthāyaṃ vutto katamo assādo. Atha vā 『『assādaṃ ādīnava』』ntiādinā yo idha assādādīnaṃ uddeso, tattha katamo assādoti ceti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Kammakaraṇatthabhinnassa visayavisayitālakkhaṇassa assādadvayassa nidassanatthaṃ gāthādvayudāharaṇaṃ, tathā kāmavipariṇāmalakkhaṇassa, vaṭṭadukkhalakkhaṇassa cāti duvidhassāpi ādīnavassa nidassanatthaṃ 『『ariyamaggo nibbāna』』nti duvidhassāpi nissaraṇassa nidassananidassanatthañca dve dve gāthā udāhaṭā.

Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacārinti (jā. 1.

我來翻譯這段巴利文: 1.556. 在此雖然"一切"字表示無餘有情,但因為"燃燒"是依賴的義理的表詞,所以"一切"字是部分的表詞,"世間"字也表示有情。因為無量心以有情為所緣。同樣"殺死母親父親",因為完全有反對,也因為顯示殺母父業的大罪過,在此了知依所化而取如是惡法作為處在母父地位。什麼是那些?渴愛和慢。因為渴愛是有情的生母。因為說"渴愛生人"。慢處父位,因為依它執取自我,如"我是某王或大臣之子"。等字,包括地方、自性等。 以獲得詞義確定之門,即通過在彼彼經中所獲得的味著等關係詞義確定之門。如相,即任何相,或隨順相為如相。意思是應當考察因果等后安排它們的作用。現在爲了顯示在每個關係中應當特別期待的因果等,所以說"但特別"等。這是很容易瞭解的。 解說章註釋完畢。 4. 反解說章註釋 1. 教說關係分別註釋 5. 隨義名稱,即名稱隨順義理的狀態,意思是"教說關係"這個名稱是隨義的、隨順義理的。 未說的,即前面未解釋的詞。爲了顯示"法給你們"等語言的關聯,所以說"但在何處"等。因為導論是三藏佛語的解釋相,它在攝聖教法的經文中被取為應當解釋的形態就已經被攝取了。因此說"以教說關係...等...顯示"。 爲了以例子分別那些味著等是教說關係的分別相,所以在偈頌中,在此也以"味著、過患"等開始說"其中什麼是味著"等。其中什麼是味著,即在那"有味著過患"的偈頌中所說的什麼是味著。或者在此以"味著、過患"等所列舉的味著等中,什麼是味著的意思。其他也是這個道理。爲了顯示以業用分別的境和有境為相的兩種味著,所以舉出兩個偈頌,同樣爲了顯示以欲變易為相和輪迴苦為相的兩種過患,也爲了顯示以聖道和涅槃為二種出離,所以各舉出兩個偈頌。 法確實保護行法者...;

10.102-103; netti. 5, 26, 31; peṭako. 22) ettha dhammacārino maggaphalanibbānehi sātisayārakkhā sambhavati, sampattibhavassāpi vipariṇāmasaṅkhāradukkhatāhi duggatibhāvo icchitovāti adhippāyenāha 『『nissaraṇaṃ anāmasitvā』』ti. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『nibbānaṃ vā upanidhāya sabbā upapattiyo duggatī』』ti.

Avekkhassūti vidhānaṃ. Tassā pana avekkhāya pavattiākāro, visayo, kattā ca 『『suññato, lokaṃ, mogharājā』』ti padattayena vuttāti āha – 『『suññato…pe… āṇattī』』ti. Tattha saṅkhārānaṃ suññatā anattasabhāvatāya, attasuññatāya ca siyā. Yato te na vasavattino, attasāravirahitā ca, yato te anattā, rittā, tucchā ca attanā, tadubhayaṃ dasseti 『『avasavattitā』』tiādinā. Evaṃ maccutaro siyāti evaṃ paṭipattiyā maccutaro bhaveyyāti attho. Parikappetvā vidhiyamānassa maccutaraṇassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā desanāya paccakkhato sijjhamānaṃ sātisayaṃ phalanti āha 『『tassa yaṃ…pe… phala』』nti.

6.Udāharaṇavasenāti nidassanavasena. Tattha 『『puggalavibhāgenā』』ti iminā ugghaṭitaññuādipuggalapayojito assādādīsu bhagavato desanāvisesoti dasseti.

Ghaṭitamattanti sotadvārānusārena manodvārikaviññāṇasantānena ālambitamattaṃ. Sassatādiākārassāti sassatucchedākārassa. Idañhi dvayaṃ dhammadesanāya cāletabbaṃ, na anulomikakhanti, yathābhūtañāṇaṃ vā. Etasmiñhi catukke āsayasāmaññatā. Vuttañhetaṃ –

『『Sassatucchedadiṭṭhī ca, khanti cevānulomikā;

Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaññita』』nti. (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.136; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā; sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā, verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; vi. vi. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā);

Calanāyāti vikkhambhanāya. Parānuvattiyāti samucchedanāya. Ugghaṭite jānātīti ugghaṭitaññūti mūlavibhujādipakkhepena saddasiddhi veditabbā. Vipañcitanti 『『visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī』』tiādīsu (a. ni.

我來 譯這段巴利文: 10.102-103. 此中對行法者以道果涅槃的殊勝保護成就,想要說即使是善趣生也因為變易和行苦而成為惡趣,因此意趣說"不觸及出離"。因此他將說"以涅槃作比較,一切生趣都是惡趣"。 "你當觀察"是教令。這觀察的生起形態、所緣和作者以"空、世間、摩伽王"三詞說明,因此說"空...等...教令"。其中諸行的空性因為是無我性質和我空性。因為它們不自在,也缺乏我的精要,因為它們是無我、空虛、虛假,以"不自在性"等顯示這兩者。"如是能度死",意思是以如是修行能超越死亡。預先設想而教導度死的前分行道,在教說中直接實現殊勝之果,因此說"他的...等...果"。 6. 以例示方式,即以顯示方式。其中以"補特伽羅分別"顯示世尊在味著等的教說特質是由利根等補特伽羅所引導。 僅結合,即以耳門隨行、意門識相續而僅緣取。以常等行相,即以常斷行相。因為這兩種應當在法教說中震動,而不是隨順忍或如實智。因為在這四法中有意樂的共性。因為這樣說: "常見與斷見,以及隨順忍, 如實智亦然,此名為意樂。" 震動,即鎮伏。隨轉他,即斷絕。在提升處了知為利根者,應當了知語言成就是以根本分別等加入。廣說即如"日月不平轉"等...;

4.70) viya bhāvanapuṃsakaniddesoti āha 『『mandaṃ saṇika』』nti. Nissaraṇaādīnavanissaraṇaassādādīnavanissaraṇānaṃ vibhāvanā veneyyattayavinayanasamatthā.

Cattāroti assādo ca ādīnavo ca assādo ādīnavo ca assādo nissaraṇañcāti ete cattāro. Yadi nissaraṇavibhāvanā veneyyavinayanasamatthā, kasmā pañcamo na gahitoti āha 『『ādīnavāvacanato』』ti. Yadi hi ugghaṭitaññuṃ sandhāya ayaṃ nayo vuccati, nissaraṇamattena siddhaṃ siyā. Atha vipañcitaññuṃ, neyyaṃ vā, ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca assādo ca ādīnavo nissaraṇañca vattabbo siyā? Tathā appavattattā na gahito. Tenāha 『『ādīnavāvacanato』』tiādi. Desananti sāmaññato gahitaṃ 『『suttekadesaṃ gāthaṃ vā』』ti viseseti. Padaparamaaggahaṇañcettha saupāyassa nissaraṇassa anāmaṭṭhattā.

『『Kalyāṇa』』nti iminā iṭṭhavipāko, 『『pāpaka』』nti aniṭṭhavipāko adhippetoti āha 『『ayaṃ assādo, ayaṃ ādīnavo』』ti. Lābhādīnaṃ puññaphalattā tadanurodhaṃ vā sandhāya 『『ayaṃ assādo』』ti vuttaṃ. Tabbipariyāyena alābhādīnaṃ ādīnavatā veditabbā.

Kāmāti kilesakāmasahitā vatthukāmā. Virūparūpenāti appatirūpākārena. Mathentīti maddanti. Pabbajitomhīti pabbajjaṃ upagato amhi. Apaṇṇakanti avirajjhanakaṃ. Sāmaññanti samaṇabhāvo. Samitapāpabhāvoyeva seyyo sundarataro.

Tattha 『『kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā』』ti ayaṃ assādo, 『『virūparūpena mathenti citta』』nti ayaṃ ādīnavo, 『『apaṇṇakaṃ sāmañña』』nti idaṃ nissaraṇanti āha 『『ayaṃ…pe… nissaraṇañcā』』ti.

Phalādīnaṃ ekakavasena ca tikavasena ca pāḷiyaṃ udāhaṭattā vuttaṃ 『『dukavasenapī』』ti.

Sukhā paṭipadā, dukkhā paṭipadāti yā dve paṭipadā, tāsu ekekā dandhakhippābhiññatāya dve dve hontīti āha 『『paṭipadābhiññākato vibhāgo paṭipadākato hotī』』ti. Katapubbakiccassa pathavīkasiṇādīsu sabbapaṭhamaṃ 『『pathavī』』tiādinā pavattamanasikāro paṭhamasamannāhāro. Upacāranti upacārajjhānaṃ. Paṭipajjitabbatāya jhānampi 『『paṭipadā』』ti vuccati. Tadaññā heṭṭhimapaññato adhikā paññāti katvā 『『abhiññā』』ti vuccati.

Kileseti nīvaraṇappakāre, taṃsahagatakilese ca. Aṅgapātubhāvanti vitakkādijhānaṅgapaṭilābhaṃ.

我來 譯這段巴利文： 4.70. 如"緩慢"等是中性語尾的表述,所以說"緩慢地、漸漸地"。出離、過患出離、味著過患出離的顯示能調伏三種根機的有情。 四種,即味著與過患、味著過患、味著與出離,即這四種。如果出離的顯示能調伏有情,為什麼不取第五種呢?因此說"由於說過患"。如果這個道理是針對利根者說的,僅以出離就能成就。如果是針對中根者或鈍根者,則應當說過患與出離、味著與過患出離?因為如此不生起故不攝取。因此說"由於說過患"等。教說,是總體地取"經的一部分或偈頌"而特別說明。此中不取最後語是因為沒有觸及有方便的出離。 以"善"表示可意果報,以"惡"表示不可意果報,所以說"這是味著,這是過患"。由於利養等是福果,或指依順它,所以說"這是味著"。應當了知與此相反的無利養等為過患性。 欲,即有煩惱欲的事欲。以不適當相,即以不適宜的形態。攪動,即壓制。我已出家,即我已經進入出家。無失,即不錯失。沙門性,即沙門的狀態。已息惡的狀態才是更好更美。 其中"欲實多彩甜美意悅"這是味著,"以不適當相攪動心"這是過患,"無失的沙門性"這是出離,所以說"這...等...出離"。 因為果等在聖典中以一法和三法的方式舉例,所以說"也以二法方式"。 樂行道、苦行道,這兩種行道,其中每一種由遲速通達性成為兩種,所以說"由行道通達性的分別成為行道性"。已作準備工作者在地遍等中最初以"地"等轉起的作意是最初的注意。近行,即近行禪。由於是應當修行,禪也稱為"行道"。其他比下面的慧更高的慧稱為"通達"。 煩惱,即蓋的種類和與之相應的煩惱。支分顯現,即獲得尋等禪支。

Abhinivisantoti paṭṭhapento. Rūpārūpaṃ pariggaṇhantoti rūpārūpadhamme lakkhaṇādīhi paricchinditvā gaṇhanto. Pariggahitarūpārūpassa maggapātubhāvadandhatā ca nāmarūpavavatthānādīnaṃ kicchasiddhiyā siyāti na rūpārūpapariggahakicchatāya eva dukkhāpaṭipadatā vattabbāti ce? Na, nāmarūpavavatthāpanādīnaṃ paccanīkakilesamandatāya sukhasiddhiyampi tathāsiddhavipassanāsahagatānaṃ indriyānaṃ mandatāya maggapātubhāvato. Rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvāti akicchenapi pariggahetvā, kicchena pariggahite vattabbameva natthi. Evaṃ sesesupi. Nāmarūpaṃ vavatthāpentoti 『『nāmarūpamattametaṃ, na añño koci sattādiko』』ti vavatthāpanaṃ karonto. Kataro panettha vāro yuttarūpoti? Yo koci sakiṃ, dvikkhattuṃ, anekasatakkhattunti evamādīsu hi vikkhambhanavāresu sakiṃ, dvikkhattuñca vikkhambhanavāro sukhā paṭipadā eva, na tato uddhaṃ sukhā paṭipadā hoti, tasmā tikkhattuṃ vikkhambhanavārato paṭṭhāya dukkhā paṭipadā veditabbā. Apica kalāpasammasanāvasāne udayabbayānupassanāya uppannassa vipassanupakkilesassa tikkhattuṃ vikkhambhanena kicchatāvāro dukkhā paṭipadā veditabbā. Ettha dandhattā paṭipadāya etassa akicchattepi purimānaṃ kicchatte dukkhāpaṭipadatā vuttanayāva. Yassa pana sabbattha akicchatā, tassa paramukkaṃsagatā sukhā paṭipadā veditabbā.

Yathā nāmarūpapariggahakicchatāya maggapātubhāvadandhatāya dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā vuttā, tathā tabbipariyāyena catutthī, tadubhayavomissatāvasena dutiyā, tatiyā ca ñātabbāti dassento āha 『『iminā…pe… veditabbā』』ti. Vaṭṭadukkhato niyyānassa adhippetattā 『『vipassanāpakkhikā evā』』ti vuttaṃ.

Hetupāyaphalehīti ettha taṇhācaritatā, mandapaññatā ca paṭhamāya paṭipadāya hetu, taṇhācaritatā, udatthapaññatā ca dutiyāya, diṭṭhicaritatā, mandapaññatā ca tatiyāya, diṭṭhicaritatā, udatthapaññatā ca catutthiyā. Upāyo pana yathākkamaṃ satisamādhivīriyapaññindriyāni , satipaṭṭhānajhānasammappadhānasaccāni ca upanissayabhūtāni. Phalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhato niyyānaṃ.

Samādhimukhenāti samādhimukhena bhāvanānuyogena. Tenevāha 『『samathapubbaṅgamāya vipassanāyā』』ti. Idhāti imasmiṃ nettippakaraṇe. Vakkhati 『『rāgavirāgā cetovimutti sekkhaphala』』nti, 『『rāgavirāgā cetovimuttikāmadhātusamatikkama』』nti ca. Soti anāgāmī.

Tenāti paṭipakkhena. Tatoti paṭipakkhato. Samānādhikaraṇavasena ca cetovimuttisaddānaṃ samāsaṃ katvā bhinnādhikaraṇavasena vattuṃ 『『atha vā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Puna 『『cetaso vā』』tiādinā aññapadatthavasena cetovimuttipadānaṃ samāsaṃ dasseti. Viññāṇapariyāyena ceto-saddena vuttayojanā na sambhavatīti āha 『『yathāsambhava』』nti.

Hā-saddo gatiattho, gati cettha ñāṇagati adhippetāti āha 『『hātabbāti gametabbā』』ti. Netabbāti ñāpetabbā.

我來翻譯這段巴利文： 安住,即建立。把握名色,即以相等把握色法與無色法。已把握名色者若道的顯現遲緩,是由於建立名色等的成就困難,不能僅由於把握名色的困難就說是苦行道嗎?不是,因為雖然建立名色等的對治煩惱微弱而容易成就,但由於如此成就的觀相應諸根微弱,所以道顯現。把握名色后,即不困難地把握后,若困難把握則更不用說。其餘也是如此。確立名色,即作"這只是名色,沒有其他任何有情等"的確立。 這裡哪種情況是合適的呢?一次、兩次或數百次等中的鎮伏,若一次兩次鎮伏是樂行道,超過那就不是樂行道,所以應當了知從三次鎮伏開始是苦行道。而且應當了知,在聚合觀察結束時生起觀染的三次鎮伏困難時是苦行道。在此雖然由於行道遲緩而不困難,但由於前面困難,所以說是苦行道如前所說。但若一切處都不困難,應當了知是最上的樂行道。 如說由於把握名色困難和道顯現遲緩而是苦行道遲通達,同樣由相反而是第四種,由兩者混合而是第二種和第三種,顯示應當如是了知而說"以此...等...應當了知"。因為意趣是從輪迴苦出離,所以說"只屬於觀的部分"。 以因、方便、果,此中貪行性和慧鈍性是第一行道的因,貪行性和慧利性是第二種的,見行性和慧鈍性是第三種的,見行性和慧利性是第四種的。方便則依次是念、定、精進、慧根,以及作為依止的念處、禪那、正勤、諦。果是從輪迴苦出離。 以定為門,即以定為門的修習。因此說"以止為前導的觀"。在此,即在這個導論。將說"由離貪而有心解脫是有學果","由離貪而有心解脫超越欲界"。他,即阿那含。 以彼,即以對治。從彼,即從對治。依同分關係作心解脫詞的複合詞,爲了依異分關係說而說"或者"等。再以"或從心"等顯示依其他詞義的心解脫詞的複合。以識的同義詞的心字所說的安排不可能,所以說"隨適宜"。 hā字是行走義,此處意指智慧的行走,所以說"應當引導"。應當引導,即應當令知。

7.Tanti puggalavibhāgaṃ. Ñāṇavibhāgenāti sutamayādiñāṇappabhedena. Nibbattananti uppādanaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ ugghaṭitaññutātiādipuggalavibhāgabhūte desanābhājane. Desanāyanti sutte. Taṃ dassetunti taṃ puggalavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ. 『『Svāyaṃ hāro kathaṃ sambhavatī』』ti keci paṭhanti.

Sāti vuttappakāradhammatthānaṃ vīmaṃsanapaññā. Adhikāratoti 『『satthā vā dhammaṃ desayatī』』tiādiadhikārato. Sāmatthiyato ugghaṭitaññuādiveneyyavinayanasamatthabhāvato. Pariyattidhammassa upadhāraṇanti etthāpi 『『adhikārato sāmatthiyato vā』』ti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.

『『Vīmaṃsādipariyāyavatī paṭhamavikappavasena, vīmaṃsādivibhāgavatī dutiyavikappavasena, cintāya hetubhūtāya nibbattā cintāmayī』』ti evamādivuttanayānusārena sakkā yojetunti āha 『『sesaṃ vuttanayamevā』』ti.

Sutacintāmayañāṇesūti sutamayañāṇe ca cintāmayañāṇe ca sutacintāmayañāṇesu ca sutacintāmayañāṇesūti ekadesasarūpekaseso veditabbo. Cintāmayañāṇeyeva hi patiṭṭhitā mahābodhisattā carimabhave vipassanaṃ ārabhanti, itare sutacintāmayañāṇesūti. Tehīti tathā paṭhantehi. Vuttanayenāti 『『upādārūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, arūpaṃ pariggaṇhātī』』tiādinā paṭipadākathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttanayena.

1. Parato ghoso paccayabhūto etissāti adhippāyo. 『『Paccattasamuṭṭhitena ca yonisomanasikārenā』』ti idaṃ āvuttinayena dutiyaṃ āvaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Tena sāvakānaṃ bhāvanāmayañāṇuppatti saṅgahitā hoti. Sāvakānameva vā ñāṇuppatti idhādhippetā ugghaṭitaññuādivibhāgakathanato. Etasmiṃ pakkhe pubbe vuttaekasesanayopi paṭikkhitto daṭṭhabbo. 『『Āsayapayogapabodhassa nipphāditattā』』ti etena pacchimacakkadvayapariyāpannāni pubbahetusaṅgahāni sutacintāmayañāṇāni sandhāya 『『imā dve paññā atthī』』ti vuttanti dasseti. Atthibhāvo cetāsaṃ paṭipakkhena anupaddutatā veditabbā. Aparikkhatattā anabhisaṅkhatattā. Sutamayañāṇassāpi purimasiddhassa.

9.Desanāpaṭipadāñāṇavibhāgehīti nissaraṇadesanādidesanāvibhāgehi, dukkhāpaṭipadādipaṭipadāvibhāgehi, sutamayañāṇādiñāṇavibhāgehi.

Avasiṭṭhapārisajjenāti khattiyagahapatiparisapariyāpannena. Aṭṭhannanti khattiyaparisā brāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisāti imāsaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ.

Samatthetīti samatthaṃ sambandhatthaṃ karoti.

Tameva dvādasapadabhāvaṃ dīpetvāti sambandho. Tadatthassāti chachakkapariyāyatthassa (ma. ni. 3.420 ādayo). Sabbapariyattidhammasaṅgāhakattā chachakkapariyāyassa, tadatthassa ca dhammacakkappavattena suttena (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma.

我來 譯這段巴利文： 7.那個,即補特伽羅的分別。以智的分別,即以聞所成等智的差別。生起,即生出。其中,即在那作為利根等補特伽羅分別的教說容器中。在教說,即在經中。爲了顯示它,即爲了顯示那補特伽羅的分別。有些人讀為"這個關係如何成就"。 那個,即考察所說法義的慧。從主題,即從"導師說法"等主題。從作用,即從能調伏利根等有情的作用。把握教法,此中也應當帶入"從主題或從作用"來安排。 "依第一選擇有伺尋等同義語,依第二選擇有伺尋等分別,由思維為因而生的是思所成"等,如是能依所說的方法安排,所以說"其餘如說的方法"。 在聞思所成智中,應當了知是"在聞所成智和思所成智中,在聞思所成智中"的部分詞省略。因為大菩薩在最後生僅安住于思所成智而開始觀,其他則在聞思所成智中。以彼等,即以如是讀的人們。如說的方法,即如在行道說中所說的"把握所造色,把握無色"等方法。 8.他人的音聲成為此的緣,這是意思。"以及自生起的如理作意",這應當了知依詞序方法轉第二。由此攝取聲聞的修所成智生起。或者此處只意指聲聞的智生起,因為說利根等的分別。在這種情況下,應當視為否定前說的省略方法。以"成就意樂、加行、覺悟"顯示說"有這兩種慧"是指攝在後二輪中、攝於前因的聞思所成智。應當了知它們的存在是不被對治所損害。因為未經造作,未經造作。聞所成智也是前已成就的。 9.以教說、行道、智的分別,即以出離教說等教說分別,以苦行道等行道分別,以聞所成智等智分別。 其餘眾會,即屬於剎帝利居士眾。八種,即剎帝利眾、婆羅門眾、居士眾、沙門眾、四大王天眾、三十三天眾、魔眾、梵眾這八種。 使適合,即使意義相互關聯適合。 使那個十二支分的狀態明顯,是關聯。它的義理,即六六法門的義理。因為六六法門攝一切教法,以及它的義理以轉法輪經...;

2.30) saṅgahitattā vuttaṃ 『『sabbassāpi…pe… vibhāvento』』ti. Visayibhāvena byañjanapadānaṃ, visayabhāvena atthapadānaṃ sambandhaṃ sandhāyāha 『『tesaṃ…pe… sambandhabhāva』』nti.

Padāvayavo akkharāni. Padatthoti padatthāvayavo. Padatthaggahaṇassāti padatthāvabodhassa. Visesādhānaṃ visesuppatti. Vākyabhedeti vākyavisese. Cittaparitosanaṃ cittārādhanaṃ. Buddhinisānaṃ paññāya tejanaṃ tikkhabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Nānāvākyavisayatāpi siddhā hoti padādīhipi saṅkāsanassa siddhattā . Ekavākyavisayatāya hi atthapadānaṃ saṅkāsanādayo yathākkamaṃ akkharādivisayā evāti niyamo siyā. Etenāti atthapadānaṃ nānāvākyavisayatthena.

Ugghaṭanādiatthānīti ugghaṭanavipañcananayanappayojanāni.

1. Upatiṭṭhati etthāti upaṭṭhitanti upaṭṭhitasaddassa adhikaraṇatthataṃ dassetuṃ 『『upatiṭṭhanaṭṭhāna』』nti vuttaṃ yathā 『『padakkanta』』nti. Tenāha 『『idaṃ nesa』』ntiādi. Paṭipattidesanāgamanehīti paṭipattigamanadesanāgamanehi. 『『Kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca…pe… jarāmaraṇassā』』tiādinā jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisitvā mahāgahanaṃ chindituṃ nisānasilāyaṃ pharasuṃ nisento viya kilesagahanaṃ chindituṃ lokanātho ñāṇapharasuṃ tejento buddhabhāvāya hetusampattiyā paripākagatattā sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamāya vipassanāgabbhaṃ gaṇhāpento antarantarā nānāsamāpattiyo samāpajjitvā anupadadhammavipassanāvasena anekākāravokārasaṅkhāre sammasanto chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena yaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattesi, taṃ 『『mahāvajirañāṇa』』nti vadanti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇa』』nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.141) āgataṃ, taṃ devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattīnaṃ purecarānucarañāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vakkhati 『『ñāṇavajiramohajālapadālana』』nti, taṃ saha vipassanāya maggañāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Etaṃ brahmacariyanti sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ adhippetanti taṃ dassento 『『brahmuno』』tiādimāha.

Desanāyāti karaṇatthe idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Niyuttoti ettha hetuattho antonītoti dassento 『『niddhāretvā yojito』』ti āha.

Desanāhāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Vicayahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

我來翻譯這段巴利文： 2.30. 因為以轉法輪經攝一切,所以說"一切...等...顯示"。關於作為主體的文詞和作為對象的義詞的關係,所以說"它們...等...關係性"。 詞的部分是字母。詞義即詞義的部分。把握詞義即瞭解詞義。特殊性的建立是特殊性的生起。在句的差別中即在句的種類中。令心滿意是令心歡喜。智慧的銳利是使慧銳利成為利性。也成就種種句的對象性,因為以詞等也成就顯示。因為在一句的對象性中,義詞的顯示等依次只以字母等為對像而有限定。以此,即以義詞有種種句的對象性。 引發等義即引發、廣說、引導、目的。 10. 現起於此為現起,為顯示現起字的處所義,所以說"現起處",如"足跡"。因此說"這是它們的"等。以實踐、教說、趣入,即以實踐趣入和教說趣入。"此世間實難,生....等...老死"等,從老死開始以緣起門入觀,如在磨刀石上銳利斧頭以砍大叢林般,爲了砍煩惱叢林,世間導師銳利智慧斧,由於成就佛位的因緣已成熟,爲了證得一切智智而使入觀胎,中間多入種種定,以逐一法觀的方式觀察種種行,以三百六十億門轉起的智,稱為"大金剛智"。但在註釋中說"以二千四百億定執行的大金剛智",是指每日所用定的前後智而說。但將說"智金剛破除癡網",這應當了知是與觀俱的道智。這梵行,是指教法梵行,為顯示這點而說"梵"等。 教說,這是具格詞表示工具義。所繫,此中包含因義,顯示這點而說"抉擇后系屬"。 教說關係分別註釋完畢。 2. 抉擇關係分別註釋

1. Jātiliṅgakālasādhanavibhattisaṅkhyāvisesādito saddato padavicayo kātabbo. Tattha kariyamāno ca yathāsabhāvaniruttiyā eva kato sukato hotīti dassento 『『idaṃ nāmapadaṃ…pe… ayaṃ saddato padavicayo』』ti vatvā 『『so panāya』』ntiādimāha. Vattabbaatthasaṃvaṇṇanāti taṃtaṃpadavacanīyassa atthassa bhedaṃ vatvā pariyāyehi vivaritvā kathanaṃ.

Viciyamānassa suttapadassāti pucchāvasena pavattasuttapadassa. 『『Suttantarapadānipi pucchāvaseneva pavattānī』』ti vadanti 『『na sabbampi suttapada』』nti. Ekasseva padassa sambhavantānaṃ anekesaṃ atthānaṃ uddhāro atthuddhāro. Ekasseva pana atthassa sambhavantānaṃ anekesaṃ padānaṃ uddhāro paduddhāro. Sabbe hi saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte labbhamāne sabbe padatthe. Nava suttanteti suttageyyādivasena navappakāre suttasmiṃ ānetvā vicinatīti yojanā. Atha vā 『『sabbe nava suttante』』ti iminā pavicayalakkhaṇena hārena suttageyyādīni sabbānipi navappakārāni suttāni vicinatīti attho. Tenāha 『『suttageyyādike』』tiādi.

『『Kosalānaṃ purā rammā』』tiādikā (su. ni. 982) chapaññāsa gāthā vatthugāthā. 『『Pārāyanamanugāyissa』』nti (su. ni. 1137 ādayo) pana ādikā ekūnavīsati gāthā anugītigāthā. Idaṃ nāmaṃ katanti idaṃ 『『pārāyana』』nti nāmaṃ kataṃ. Tenāha 『『pāraṃ gamanīyā ime dhammā, tasmā imassa dhammapariyāyassa 『pārāyanantveva adhivacana』』』nti (su. ni. pārāyanatthutigāthā; cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthā 149 ādayo). Buddhiyaṃ viparivattamānanti imassa vicayahāravibhaṅgassa desanākāle āyasmā mahākaccāno attano buddhiyaṃ vattamānaṃ katvā evamāhāti yojanā.

Ekaṃsabyākaraṇassa ayanti ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyā, ekaṃsena vā byākātabbattā ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyā, ekaṃsabyākaraṇayoggāti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ṭhapanīyāti ṭhapetabbattā abyākaraṇīyāti attho. Samayantaraparicayena nivāraṇadhammaṃ pati saṃsayapakkhando pucchatīti adhippāyenāha 『『vimaticchedana』』nti. Pakatiyā pana nivāraṇadhammaṃ ajānanto ñātukāmatāya pucchatīti adiṭṭhajotanāya pucchāpi siyā. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『lokassa nivāraṇādīni ajānantenā』』ti.

Ekavatthupariggahāti ekassa abhidheyyatthassa gahaṇato.

Vimuttiparipācakaindriyāni vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitassa saddhādayo dhammā, kiṃ panettha ariyānampi indriyalokena saṅgaho hotīti āha 『『pariyāpannadhammavasenā』』tiādi.

Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalacchādanaaḍḍharattīnaṃ vasena caturaṅgasamannāgatena. Vivicchāti vicikicchāya. Tenāha 『『vicikicchāhetū』』ti. Dukkhamassa mahabbhayanti ettha vuttaṃ 『『assā』』ti padaṃ 『『jappābhilepanaṃ assa brūmī』』ti ānetvā sambandhitabbanti dassento 『『jappā taṇhā assa lokassā』』ti āha. 『『Sabbasattāna』』ntiādinā, 『『sabbasovā』』tiādinā ca anvayato, byatirekato ca sātisayaṃ avijjāya nīvaraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti. 『『Dūre santo pakāsanti (dha. pa. 304; netti. 11), ratto atthaṃ na jānātī』』ti (netti. 11, 27) gāthādvayenāpi anugītivicayaṃ dassetīti yojetabbaṃ.

Rūpāvacarāti rūpāvacarasattā. Vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccanassa kāraṇavacananti sambandho. Yato vaṭṭadukkhato muccanaṃ. Taṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ anavasesapariyādānavasena saṅkhāradukkhatāgahaṇena.

我來 譯這段巴利文： 11. 應當從性、性別、時、語態、變格、數等特殊性對詞作詞的抉擇。在此所作的,只有依本性語法而作才是善作,為顯示這點而說"這名詞...等...這是從語詞的詞的抉擇",然後說"但這個"等。應說義的解釋即說彼彼詞所應說的義理的分別,以同義詞開顯而說。 被抉擇的經句,即以問的方式轉起的經句。說"其他經句也是以問的方式轉起","不是一切經句"。從一個詞生起多種義理的列舉是義的列舉。而從一個義理生起多種詞的列舉是詞的列舉。因為在一切被解釋的經中所獲得的一切詞義。在九種經中,即在經、應頌等九種經中帶入而抉擇的安排。或者以"一切九種經"這個有抉擇相的關係抉擇經、應頌等一切九種經的意思。因此說"經、應頌等"。 "從拘薩羅的可愛城"等五十六偈是事緣偈。而"我將隨誦波羅延"等十九偈是隨誦偈。這名字怎麼作,即這"波羅延"之名如何作。因此說"這些法是應去彼岸的,所以這法門的別名為'波羅延'"。在智中轉起,即在這抉擇關係分別說時,尊者大迦旃延使在自己智中轉起而如是說的安排。 適於一向解答的,即應一向解答的,或因應當一向解答故為一向解答的,意思是適合一向解答。在其餘兩詞也是這個道理。應舍置的,因為應當舍置故為不應解答的意思。以瞭解其他學說而對遮止法生疑而問,意趣說"斷疑"。但本來不知遮止法而爲了想知而問,也可能是顯未見的問。因此將說"不知世間的遮止等"。 取一事,即取一個所詮義。 解脫成熟根是住立出離分的信等法,但此處聖者的根也攝入世間嗎?所以說"依攝入法"等。 由黑分十四日、密林、雲層遮蔽、半夜的方式而具足四支。惡疑即疑惑。因此說"以疑為因"。"他有大苦畏"中,顯示所說的"他的"字應帶入"我說他的貪愛染污"而結合,所以說"貪愛渴望是他世間的"。以"一切有情"等,以"或一切"等,顯示從順理和反理而無明有殊勝的障礙性。應安排"以'遠離而顯現,貪著者不知義'兩偈也顯示隨誦的抉擇"。 色界即色界有情。脫離變易苦的因說的關聯。由此從輪迴苦解脫。那輪迴苦以無餘遍盡的方式由行苦的把握。

Ekādhāranti ekavatthu adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Nivāraṇaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ pidhānaṃ samucchedoti atthadvayassa pucchitattā 『『anekādhāraṃ dassetu』』nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha 『『nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ…pe… pidhiyyanti pacchijjantī』』ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.1041; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 3). Tassattho 『『nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ, saṃvaraṃ, pidhānañca kathehī』』ti.

『『Vodāna』』nti iminā sotānaṃ vikkhambhanavisuddhi, 『『vuṭṭhāna』』nti iminā samucchedavisuddhi adhippetāti āha 『『pucchāya duvidhatthavisayataṃ vivarituṃ 『eva』ntiādi vutta』』nti. Tathā cāha 『『vodāyati…pe… ariyamaggo』』ti.

Diṭṭhimānāvijjāsotāpi taṇhāsotānugāti āha 『『yebhuyyena anurodhavasenā』』ti. Upacāravasenāti nissitupacāravasena. Sabbasmāti cakkhuto yāva manatoti sabbasmā dvārato. Sabbappakārenātti taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena.

Tameva satinti yāyaṃ sati pubbabhāge sotānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena vuttā, tameva satiṃ. Maggakkhaṇe sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ pidhānaṃ brūmi. Yasmā pana pidhāyikāpi sati maggakkhaṇe paññānugā, paññākiccamevettha adhikaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ 『『paññāyete pidhīyare』』ti.

Saṃvarapidhānānanti ettha saṃvarasaddena nivāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.

Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ ariyamagge anadhigate yaṃ yaṃ abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ uppajjanārahaṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ adhigate taṃ taṃ viññāṇaṃ anuppādanirodhena nirujjhati saddhiṃ attanā sampayuttanāmarūpenāti āha 『『tassa tassa viññāṇassa nirodhena sahevā』』ti. Anuppādanirodho hi ettha 『『nirodho』』ti adhippeto anupādisesanibbānassa adhippetattāti. Anusandhīyati etenāti anusandhi, idha pucchiyamāno attho.

Sahavisayena dassetunti ettha saccāni eva visayo. Pahātabbasabhāvaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, tassa visayo dukkhasaccaṃ. 『『Saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino viharato taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī』』ti (saṃ. ni. 2.53, 57) hi vuttaṃ. Pahāyakasabhāvaṃ maggasaccaṃ, tassa visayo nirodhasaccanti āha 『『saha visayena…pe… saccesū』』ti. Kāmañcettha 『『samudayo dvīsu bhūmīsu pahīyatī』』ti āraddhaṃ, 『『dassanena tīṇi saṃyojanāni pahīyanti, bhāvanāya satta saṃyojanāni pahīyantī』』ti pana vibhāgavacanameva vattanti āha 『『pahāyakavibhāgamukhena pahātabbavibhāgaṃ dassetu』』nti.

Niravasesakāmarāgabyāpādā tatiyamaggena pahīyanti, itare catutthamaggenāti vuttaṃ 『『itarehi pana niravasesa』』nti. Tatthāti kammavipākavaṭṭappabhedena tedhātuke bhavattaye. Saṃyojanavasenāti sabbadā yojanavasena bandhanavasena.

1. Aggaphalañāṇatāya ekampi samānaṃ tannimittassa khayānuppādārammaṇassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa vasena phalavohārena dve nāmāni labhati.

Somanassanāmalābho iminā ārammaṇasaṅketenāti tadatthaṃ vivaranto 『『khaye…pe… samaññāyā』』ti āha.

我來翻譯這段巴利文： 一基,即一事的住立。因為問了遮止、鎮伏、遮蔽、斷除兩種義理,所以說"顯示多基"。因此說"請說名為遮止的防護...等...遮蔽斷除"。其義是"請說名為遮止的鎮伏、防護和遮蔽"。 以"清凈"表示諸流的鎮伏清凈,以"出起"表示斷除清凈,所以說"爲了開顯問有兩種義的境,說'如是'等"。因此說"清凈...等...聖道"。 見、慢、無明流也隨順愛流,所以說"多分依隨順"。以近分,即依所依的近分。一切,即從眼到意的一切處。一切方式,即以愛著、邪執著、高舉等方式。 那個念,即前分以鎮伏諸流而說的那個念。我說在道剎那時是諸流的防護遮蔽。但因為遮蔽的念在道剎那時隨順慧,此中慧的作用更為殊勝,所以說"以慧遮蔽它們"。 防護遮蔽,此中以防護字說遮止。 在任何聖道未證得時,任何行識應當生起,在證得時,那個識以不生滅而滅,連同與自己相應的名色,所以說"以那個那個識的滅一起"。因為此中意指不生滅,因為意指無餘依涅槃。由此貫通為貫通,即此中所問的義理。 與對像一起顯示,此中諸諦就是對象。集諦是所斷本性,它的對象是苦諦。因為說"諸比丘,住于觀察結縛法中的味著,渴愛增長"。道諦是能斷本性,它的對象是滅諦,所以說"與對像一起...等...在諸諦中"。雖然此中開始說"集在兩地斷",但說"以見斷三結,以修斷七結"的分別說,所以說"爲了以能斷分別顯示所斷分別"。 無餘的欲貪、嗔恚以第三道斷,其餘以第四道,所以說"以其餘無餘"。其中,即在業、異熟、輪迴差別的三界三有中。以結的方式,即以永遠繫縛束縛的方式。 12. 雖然是一個,由於最上果智性,依那緣滅與不生為所緣的省察智,因果的言說而得兩名。 喜的得名是以此所緣的指示,顯示那義而說"滅...等...名稱"。;

13.Taggahaṇenevāti phassapañcamakapañcarūpindriyaggahaṇeneva. Sahacaraṇādināti sahajātādianantarādipaccayabhāvena ceva nissayārammaṇādinā ca. 『『Sampayutta』』nti iminā sahitatā avisiṭṭhatā idhādhippetāti āha 『『avibhāgena gahaṇīyabhāvaṃ sandhāyā』』ti.

Kathaṃ samādhindriyaṃ uppādetīti āha 『『satiggahaṇena cettha pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ idhādhippeta』』nti. Na hi samādhinā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ sambhavati.

Padahati etenāti padhānaṃ, vīriyaṃ. Teti vīriyasaṅkhārā. Ekarasenāti yathā indriyāni ekarasāni honti, evaṃ ekarasabhāvena saraṇato pavattanato. Tathā pavattiyā eva suṭṭhu vata vīriyaṃ vāhesīti yoginā saṅkappetabbato tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena 『『sampahaṃsanā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha 『『evaṃ me…pe… hetubhāvato』』ti.

Iddhisaddassa paṭhamo kattuattho, dutiyo karaṇattho vutto, pādasaddassa eko karaṇattho eva. Pajjitabbā ca iddhī vuttā, na ca ijjhanti. Pajjitabbā ca iddhī pajjanakaraṇena pādena samānādhikaraṇā na hontīti 『『paṭhamena atthena iddhi eva pādo』』ti kathaṃ sakkā vattuṃ, tathā iddhikiriyākaraṇena sādhetabbā buddhisaṅkhātā iddhi pajjanakiriyākaraṇena pajjitabbāti dvinnaṃ karaṇānaṃ na samānādhikaraṇatā sambhavatīti 『『dutiyena atthena iddhiyā pādo』』ti kathaṃ sakkā vattunti ce? Sakkā, pādassa ijjhamānakoṭṭhāsa ijjhanakaraṇūpāyabhāvato. Atha vā 『『paṭhamena atthena iddhiyā pādo, dutiyena atthena iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo』』ti evaṃ yojanato. Kathaṃ? Anantarattho paccāsattiñāyena idha paṭhamoti adhippeto, tato purimo dutiyoti.

『『Chandaṃ ce bhikkhu adhipatiṃ karitvā labhati samādhi』』ntiādi (vibha. 432) vacanato chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti etthāpi chandādhipati samādhi chandasamādhīti adhipatisaddalopaṃ katvā samāso vuttoti viññāyati. Adhipatisaddatthadassanavaseneva pana 『『chandahetuko, chandādhiko vā samādhī』』ti sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 431) vuttaṃ, tasmā idhāpi chandādhipati samādhi chandasamādhīti veditabbo. Taṃ pana chandaṃ vuttanayena saddhāsīsena dassento 『『saddhādhipateyyā cittekaggatā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Idaṃ padhāna』』nti vā vīriyaṃ vuttaṃ. Vīriyasaddāpekkhāsahitaṃ ekavacanena vatvā catubbidhassapi vīriyassa adhippetattā nibbattetabbadhammavibhāgena ca 『『ime saṅkhārā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tena padhānabhūtā saṅkhārāti evaṃ samāso veditabbo. Saṅkhatasaṅkhārādinivattanatthañcettha padhānaggahaṇaṃ. Atha vā taṃ taṃ visesaṃ saṅkharotīti saṅkhāro, sabbampi vīriyaṃ. Tattha catukiccasādhakato aññassa nivattanatthaṃ padhānaggahaṇanti padhānabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtāti attho.

我來翻譯這段巴利文： 13. 以取那個,即以取觸為第五的五色根。以俱行等,即以俱生等無間等緣性以及所依、所緣等。以"相應"這個字,此處意指結合、不相違,所以說"關於應當以無別取的性質"。 怎樣生起定根呢?說"以唸的把握,此中意指斷除遍起",因為不可能以定斷除遍起。 以此精進為精勤,即精進。它們,即精進行。以一味,即如諸根成為一味,如是以一味性而流轉運作。由於如是運作而瑜伽者應當思惟"善哉精進運轉",由於趣向那的精進運轉義而說"令歡喜"。因此說"因為如是...等...為因"。 神通字的第一義是作者義,第二是工具義,足字只有一個工具義。所說的神通是應通達的,但並非成就。應通達的神通與通達的工具足不是同位語,怎麼能說"以第一義神通即是足"?同樣,應以神通作用工具成就的所謂神通智與以通達作用工具應通達,兩種工具不可能是同位語,怎麼能說"以第二義神通的足"呢?可以,因為足是成就部分的成就工具方便。或者,"以第一義神通的足,以第二義神通即是足為神通足",如是安排。如何?此處依鄰近道理意指相鄰義為第一,此前的為第二。 由於說"諸比丘,若以欲為增上而得定"等,修習具足欲定精勤行的神通足,此中也了知說複合詞是省略增上字而作欲定。但在《除癡》中依增上字義的顯示而說"以欲為因,或以欲為增上的定",所以此處也應當了知欲增上定為欲定。顯示那個欲如說的方法以信為首,所以說"信增上的心一境性"。或說"這是精勤"即精進。以精進字所需的單數說,因為意指四種精進,以及依所應生法的分別而說"這些行"。由此應當了知複合詞如是為精勤的行。此中取精勤是爲了排除有為行等。或者,造作那個那個殊勝為行,即一切精進。其中取精勤是爲了排除成就四作用以外的,意思是成為精勤即成為最勝。

Vīriyiddhipādaniddese 『『vīriyasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgata』』nti (vibha. 435) dvikkhattuṃ vīriyaṃ āgataṃ. Tattha purimaṃ samādhivisesanaṃ 『『vīriyādhipati samādhi vīriyasamādhī』』ti, dutiyaṃ samannāgamaṅgadassanatthaṃ. Dve eva hi sabbattha samannāgamaṅgāni samādhi, padhānasaṅkhāro ca. Chandādayo samādhivisesanāni. Padhānasaṅkhāro pana padhānavacaneneva visesito, na chandādīhīti na idha vīriyādhipatitā padhānasaṅkhārassa vuttā hoti. Vīriyañca samādhiṃ visesetvā ṭhitameva samannāgamaṅgavasena padhānasaṅkhāravacanena vuttanti nāpi dvīhi vīriyehi samannāgamo vutto hoti. Yasmā pana chandādīhi visiṭṭho samādhi tathā visiṭṭheneva tena sampayutto padhānasaṅkhāro, sesadhammā ca, tasmā samādhivisesanānaṃ vasena 『『cattāro iddhipādā』』ti vuttā. Visesanabhāvo ca chandādīnaṃ taṃtaṃapassayanavasena hotīti chandasamādhi…pe… iddhipādanti ettha nissayatthepi pādasaddena upāyatthena chandādīnaṃ iddhipādatā vuttā hoti. Tathā hi abhidhamme uttaracūḷabhājanīye 『『cattāro iddhipādā chandiddhipādo』』tiādinā (vibha. 457) chandādīnameva iddhipādatā vuttā. Pañhāpucchake ca 『『cattāro iddhipādā – idha bhikkhu chandasamādhī』』ti (vibha. 462) ārabhitvāpi puna chandādīnaṃyeva kusalādibhāvo vibhatto. Upāyiddhipādadassanatthameva hi nissayiddhipādadassanaṃ kataṃ. Aññathā catubbidhatāva na hotīti. Ayamettha pāḷivasena atthavinicchayo veditabbo.

Tadaṅgasamucchedanissaraṇavivekanissitattaṃ vatvā paṭippassaddhivivekanissitassa avacanaṃ 『『chandasamādhi…pe… iddhipādaṃ bhāvetī』』ti (vibha. 432) bhāvetabbānaṃ iddhipādānaṃ vuttattā. Bhāvitiddhipādassa hi sacchikātabbā phalapariyāpannā iddhipādāti.

Vossaggasaddo pariccāgattho, pakkhandanattho cāti vossaggassa duvidhatā vuttā. Yathāvuttena pakārenāti tadaṅgasamucchedappakārena, tanninnabhāvārammaṇappakārena ca. Pariṇamantaṃ vipassanakkhaṇe.

14.Pubbabhāgapaññāyāti ekāvajjananānāvajjanavīthīsu pavattaupacārapaññāya. Adhigamapaññāyāti appanāpaññāya. Puna pubbabhāgapaññāyāti nānāvajjanupacārapaññāya, paṭisandhipaññāya vā. Upacārapaññāyāti ekāvajjane, sabbattha vā pavattaupacārapaññāya.

Pucchāvissajjanavicayopīti yathāvuttāya pucchāya vissajjanavicayopi. Vuttanayānusārenāti adiṭṭhajotanā, vimaticchedanā cāti heṭṭhā vuttanayānugamanena.

15.Sekheasekheti sekkhe ariyapuggale, asekkhe ariyapuggale. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamappahāneti vipassanaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā pavattakilesappahāne, pahānābhisamayeti attho.

『『Yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā』』ti pāḷiṃ dassetvā puna 『『yaṃ anicce dukkhe anattanī』』ti vacanaṃ evampettha paṭhantīti dassetuṃ.

Sesasaṃkilesavodānadhammāti gedhato avasiṭṭhasaṃkilesadhammā ca sabbavodānadhammā ca. Abhāvenāti abhāvanena abhāvakaraṇena.

Payogaparakkamanti bhusaṃ yogo payogo, payogova parakkamo payogaparakkamo, cittaṃ. Ukkhipatīti kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adento kusalapakkhe uddhaṃ khipento viya pavattati. Padhānavīriyanti akusalānaṃ anuppādanaṭṭhena uttamavīriyaṃ. Yojetabbānīti 『『āsevamāno vāyamatī』』tiādinā yojetabbāni. Anuppannāti avattabbataṃ āpannānanti bhūmiladdhārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamugghāṭituppannānaṃ.

以下是這段巴利文的簡體中文翻譯： 在精進神通足的解說中，"精進定精勤行具足"一句中精進出現兩次。其中第一次是定的修飾，"精進增上定為精進定"；第二次是爲了顯示具足的支分。實際上所有處的具足支分只有定和精勤行兩種。欲等是定的修飾。而精勤行是以精勤的語言來修飾，而非以欲等，所以此處沒有說精勤行的精進增上。精進和定互相修飾而住，以具足支分的方式說精勤行，所以也未說以兩種精進具足。因為定以欲等修飾，所以精勤行也以這樣被修飾而相應，以及其餘諸法，因此依定的修飾說"四種神通足"。修飾的性質對於欲等是依各自的依止而有。所以在"欲定...神通足"中，也以足字表示依止義和方便義的欲等的神通足。正如阿毗達磨的《上小分別》中說"四種神通足，欲神通足"等，顯示了欲等的神通足。在問答中也說"四種神通足——諸比丘在此以欲定"，並再次分別了欲等的善等性。顯示方便神通足是爲了顯示依止神通足。否則就不會有四種性質。此中應以經文的方式瞭解義理。 說了支分斷除、出離、離、依止之後，沒有說依止寂靜離的，因為說"修習欲定...神通足"的應修習神通足。因為已修習神通足者，可以證得屬於果的神通足。 捨棄字有捨棄義和跳躍義兩種。如所說的方式，即支分斷除的方式，以及傾向於那個的所緣方式。在觀察剎那中轉化。 14. 前分慧，即在一轉向、多轉向道中生起的近分慧。得慧，即安止慧。再者前分慧，即多轉向近分慧，或者結生慧。近分慧，即在一轉向，或者一切生起近分慧。 問答分別，即如所說的問題的回答分別。依已說的方法，即為顯示未見，斷除疑惑。 15. 有學無學，即在有學聖者，無學聖者。觀察為先的斷除，即以觀察為在前，生起煩惱的斷除，斷除證悟的意思。 示現"凡非常、苦、非我"的經文，再現"凡無常、苦、非我性"的說法，如是讀誦以顯示。 餘下的染凈法，即從貪慾等餘下的染污法，以及一切清凈法。以無，即以無作、無作為。 作用努力，即極大的作用為作用，作用即是努力，作用努力，即心。舉起，即在懈怠一邊不下沉，在善法一邊如舉起般生起。精進努力，即為不生起不善法的最上精進。應當聯繫的，即如"修習而努力"等應當聯繫。未生起，即未曾說的、已達到地、已獲得境界、已鎮伏、已拔除、已生起的。

1. 『『Aṭṭhamakassa indriyānī』』ti vuttattā 『『paṭhamamagge saddhādayo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Indriyaggahaṇañca pāḷiyaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Asubhānupassanā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānanti āha 『『satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya suniggahito kāmavitakko』』ti. Samādhi uppajjamāno kāmavitakkampi niggahetvā eva uppajjatīti dassento 『『anavajjasukhapadaṭṭhānenā』』tiādimāha. 『『Kusalesu dhammesu āraddhavīriyo』』tiādinā dhammacchandato uppajjamāno vīriyacchando khantiṃ paribrūhetīti dasseti. Anavajjadhammānaṃ upakārakadhammāsevanaṃ viya anupakārakadhammaparivajjanampi paññānisevaneneva hotīti āha 『『samādhiādīna』』ntiādi.

1. Sabbadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ desanaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena vibhajituṃ 『『loko nāmā』』tiādi vuttanti dassento 『『sabbadhammānanti…pe… dassetu』』nti āha. Mahaggatadhammesu ṭhānaṃ taṃsampādanāva. Tathā sesesu. Vaḍḍhiyamānesūti yathā vimuttiṃ paripācayanti, evaṃ brūhiyamānesu.

Dassanapariññāti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ salakkhaṇato, paccayato ca parijānanā. Tenāha 『『ñātapariññā』』ti. Paṭipakkhavidhamanena saddhiṃ lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanā idha 『『bhāvanāpariññā』』ti adhippetāti āha 『『bhāvanā…pe… pariññā cā』』ti . Dassanatthā pariññā dassanapariññā, bhāvanatthā pariññā bhāvanāpariññāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.

Kakkhaḷaphusanādīti kakkhaḷādiphusanādi. Abhijānitvāti abhiññāya paññāya jānitvā, ṭhitassa abhijānanahetu vāti attho. Atthoti phalaṃ. Nayoti vuttanayo.

『『Yaṃ asaṅkhata』』ntipi paṭhanti. Catunayakovidoti ekattanānattādinayacatukke nipuṇo. Desanāyuttikusaloti dhammānaṃ desanāvidhimhi kusalo.

Sadisī kātabbā saṃsandanavasenāti adhippāyo. Ānetabbā 『『ayaṃ desanā imāya desanāya evaṃ saṃsandatī』』ti. Atthato apetanti ayuttatthaṃ. Asambandhatthanti aññamaññaṃ asambandhapadatthaṃ. Nanu paṭṭhānavicāro nayavicāro viya hārehi asammisso vicāraṇantaroti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha 『『yasmā panā』』tiādi. Idha nikkhittoti idha suttavicaye suttatthavicārabhāvato nikkhitto, etena vā paṭṭhānassa hārantogadhabhāvadassaneneva mūlapadānaṃ viya paṭṭhānassa padatthantarābhāvo dassitoti veditabbaṃ.

Imassa suttassāti saṃvaṇṇiyamānasuttaṃ sandhāyāha. Kasmiṃ vā padeti saṃvaṇṇiyamānaṃ gāthaṃ sandhāyāha. Tabbicayenāti pucchādivicayena, assādādivicayena ca.

Vicayahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Yuttihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

2. Evametassa suttassa attho na gahetabbo, evaṃ pana gahetabboti aggahetabbagahetabbānaṃ atthānaṃ vijahanaggahaṇatthāya yuttāyuttivicāraṇāyaṃ vajjetabbesu tāva paṭhamaṃ paṭipattīti dassento āha 『『atathākārena gayhamānā suttatthā visayo』』ti yathā 『『vāmaṃ muñca, dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhā』』ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.14; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.

以下是這段巴利文的簡體中文翻譯： 16. 因為說"第八的諸根"，所以說"第一道中信等"。在**中，根的把握應當被看作僅僅是示現。 不凈觀為身隨念住，所以說"在念處修習中，欲尋被很好地制服"。顯示定生起時必定已制服欲尋，所以說"以無過失樂為依止"等。如"在善法中已發起精進"等，顯示從法的欲生起的精進欲能培育忍。如同修習有益的諸法，遠離無益的諸法也通過慧的修習而成，所以說"定等"。 17. 爲了以個人為依止來分別一切法的依止說明，所以說"世界名"等，並顯示"一切諸法"等。在大界法中，住處即是其成就。在其餘處也是如此。在增長中，如何使解脫成熟，就如何使其增長。 觀察理解，即對色法無色法從自相、緣起來了知。所以說"識別理解"。與對治的破除一起，顯示三相，此處意指"修習理解"，所以說"修習...理解"。觀察的理解為觀察理解，修習的理解為修習理解，如是應當瞭解此中義。 堅硬觸等，即堅硬等觸。通曉，即以智慧知曉，或者知曉住立的緣故。義，即果。理，即已說的方法。 有些讀作"凡無為"。精通四理，即在單一性多樣性等四種理中精通。在說法中善巧，即在諸法說法方式中善巧。 應當以相似製作，以會通的方式，意圖是應當引導"此說法如此會通於彼說法"。從義理上分離，即不相合的義。不相關，即相互間不相關的語義。不是從開端考察、方法考察如同以方法不混雜地考察嗎？考慮到這個譴責，所以說"因為"等。此處安置，即在此經典考察中安置，通過顯示開端已包含在內，如同根本語詞，顯示開端沒有其他語義。 關於此經，即關於將被讚頌的經。或在何處語，即關於將被讚頌的偈。以其考察，即以問等考察，以及味等考察。 考察方法分別讚頌已畢。 理方法分別讚頌 18. 這樣，此經的義不應如此把握，而應如此把握。爲了捨棄不應把握和應把握的義，在應當排除的事中，首先顯示正行，所以說"以非如是方式被把握的經義是範圍"，如"捨棄左邊，把握右邊"。

1.213). Vajjetabbabhāvato hi suttapadehi suttatthe vivecite gahetabbabhāvo ca avasiṭṭho hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『mettāvihārassa sato byāpādo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatī』ti na yujjati desanā, 『byāpādo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatī』ti yujjati desanā』』ti (netti. 21).

Yuttiniddhāraṇena ayathāsabhāvato vivecitvā yathāsabhāvato dhammassa gahaṇakāraṇāni kathento 『『mahantā apadisitabbā etesanti mahāpadesā』』ti imamatthamāha 『『buddhādayo』』tiādinā. Patiṭṭhānānīti patiṭṭhānasādhanāni. Sesesūti saṅghāpadesādīsu. Paṭhamattho eva hi idha pāḷi āgato, vinicchayane kāraṇaṃ mahāpadesoti adhippāyo. Suttotaraṇādīti ādisaddena suttānotaraṇādipi saṅgayhati. Suttotaraṇavinayasandassanāni hi kenaci yathābhatassa ganthassa 『『dhammo』』ti vinicchayane kāraṇaṃ. Suttānotaraṇavinayāsandassanāni 『『adhammo』』ti. Yadi evanti yadi yathābhatassa ganthassa suttavinayehi saṃsandanaṃ 『『dhammo』』ti, asaṃsandanaṃ 『『adhammo』』ti vinicchayakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ santeti attho. Sampadīyati ñāpīyati dhammo etehīti sampadāyā, akkhātāro.

Vinīyanti rāgādayo etenāti vinayo, kāraṇaṃ. Tenāha 『『rāgādivūpasamanimitta』』nti. Kiṃ pana taṃ? Sādhiṭṭhānasamathavipassanādidhammā. Ye parato 『『tecattālīsaṃ bodhaṅgamā dhammā』』ti (netti. 24) vakkhati.

Vinayamahāpadesā kappiyānulomato anulomakappiyaṃ nāma, taṃsadisatāya suttantamahāpadesāpi anulomakappiyanti aṭṭhakathāvohāro. Tena vuttaṃ 『『yaṃ anulomakappiyanti vuccatī』』ti.

Yadipi tattha tattha pavattā bhagavato pakiṇṇakadesanā aṭṭhakathā, sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakehi tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ saṅgāyitvā tassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanānurūpena vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā ācariyavādo nāma. Tena vuttaṃ 『『ācariyavādo nāma aṭṭhakathā』』ti. Tissopi saṅgītiyo āruḷho eva hi buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito. Attanomati theravādo. Samentameva gahetabbanti yathā pāḷiyā saṃsandati , evaṃ mahāpadesato atthā uddharitabbāti dasseti. Pamādapāṭhavasena ācariyavādassa kadāci pāḷiyā asaṃsandanāpi siyā, so na gahetabboti dassento āha – 『『suttena samento eva gahetabbo』』ti.

Catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjatīti catūhi mahāpadesehi na virujjhati. Idāni taṃ avirujjhanākāraṃ dassento 『『yena yenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Suttotaraṇādi eva hettha kāraṇaṃ. Tassa ca anekākāratāya 『『pakārenā』』ti vutto. Saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte saṃvaṇṇanāvasena gahetabbanti sambandho. Ābhatenāti ānītena. Suttatoti suttantarato. Ayañhettha attho – kenaci pasaṅgena suttantarato uddharitvā ānītena suttapadena suttotaraṇādinā, kāraṇappakārena ca catumahāpadesāvirodhena saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte saṃvaṇṇanāvasena atthajātaṃ gahetabbanti. Tenāha 『『tena…pe… kātabbā』』ti. Tattha yuttihārayojanā kātabbāti yuttiniddhāraṇavasena ayaṃ yuttihāro yojetabbo. Atha vā yuttihārayojanā kātabbāti iminā hārena vakkhamānanayena yuttigavesanaṃ katvā tāya yuttiyā sabbahārayojanā kātabbāti attho. Lakkhaṇañhetaṃ yuttigavesanāya, yadidaṃ yuttihāro. Tenāha 『『sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ, yā bhūmī, yo ca gocaro tesaṃ. 『『Yuttāyuttaparikkhā』』ti (netti. 4), 『『imāya yuttiyā aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba』』nti (netti. 20) ca.

以下是這段巴利文的簡體中文翻譯： 因為從應當排除的性質來看，經的語詞已經在經義中區分，所剩下的是應把握的性質。正如將來會說："慈住者念時，瞋恚心將充滿"的說法不合適，"捨棄瞋恚心進入內部"的說法合適。 以理方法區分，從非本質性質中區分，並說明從本質性質把握法的原因，所以說"大師等"。基礎，即建立基礎。在其餘處，即在僧團大義等處。此處經文第一義已經出現，在判定中大義是原因，這是意圖。經典超越等，以及詞"等"也包含經典超越等。因為經典超越、律的顯示是某些人在判定所傳文獻為"法"的原因。經典超越、律的顯示是判定為"非法"的原因。如果是這樣，即如果所傳文獻與經律相符則為"法"，不相符則為"非法"的判定原因，意思是如此。通過他們被認識，法被完成，即說明者。 通過此被調伏，即律，原因。所以說"如調伏貪等的徵兆"。什麼是這個？即成就、止、觀等法。後面將說"三十五菩提分法"。 律大義從如法順應的相似性來說是順應如法，因為與經典大義相似，所以註釋語說是順應如法。因此說"凡是順應如法"。 即便是世尊在各處散說的註釋，但它是由法藏者集結三藏佛語，並根據義理解釋相應地建立語言，所以名為師說。因此說"師說即是註釋"。這種結集已經建立的佛語義理解釋的語言途徑，後來由錫蘭（現代斯里蘭卡）大長老用僧伽羅語儲存。自身所說為上座部說。應當把握相同的，即如經文相符，如是從大義處應當抉擇義理。顯示有時由於校勘文字，師說可能與經文不相符，它不應被把握，所以說"應僅與經文相符而把握"。 以四大義相應，即不與四大義相違。現在顯示其不相違的方式，所以說"哪裡哪裏"等。此處經典超越等即是原因。因為它有多種方式，所以說"以方式"。在將被讚頌的經中，以讚頌的方式應當把握，這是關聯。以所傳，即所引。從經典，即從經典文字。此中義是：以某種聯繫從經典文字抉擇，引用經典語詞，以經典超越等，以及以原因方式，不違四大義，在將被讚頌的經中，以讚頌方式應當把握義理。所以說"以此...應當作"。在此理方法安立應當作，即以理方法區分，此理方法應當聯繫。或者理方法安立應當作，意思是以此方法將要說的方法，作理的探求，以此理對一切方法安立。理的探求確實是特徵，即理方法。所以說："一切方法的地，及其境界。應當審察正理與非理"，"應以此理由互相探求"。

1. Yadi vā sabbāni padāni ekaṃ atthaṃ abhivadantīti yojanā.

20.Jarāyaṃ ṭhitassa aññathattanti ṭhitassa yaṃ aññathattaṃ aññathābhāvo, ayaṃ jarā nāma. Khaṇikamaraṇaṃ khaṇikanirodho. Samucchedamaraṇaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ khandhaparinibbānaṃ.

Kevalassāti jarāya amissassa. Aññāva jarā, aññaṃ maraṇanti 『『paṭiññātassa kevalassa maraṇassa diṭṭhattā』』ti hetu. Yathā taṃ devānanti sadisūdāharaṇaṃ, visadisūdāharaṇaṃ pana iddhipādādayo, anvayabyatirekā gahetvā yojetabbā.

Tehīti jarāmaraṇehi.

『『Jīraṇabhijjanasabhāvā』』ti iminā lesena taṇhājarāmaraṇānaṃ anaññattaṃ yojeti. Yadipi 『『aññā taṇhā, aññā jarā, aññaṃ maraṇa』』nti siddhovāyamattho, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ 『『na ida』』ntiādi, tathāpi sakkuṇeyyaparihārāyaṃ codanāti ajjhāruḷhaṃ tattha dosaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yadi ca yathā jarāmaraṇa』』nti pāḷipavattāni dassento 『『yadi…pe… dassetī』』ti āha. Bhāvoti adhippāyo. Etesanti taṇhājarāmaraṇānaṃ.

『『Imāya yuttiyā aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba』』nti ca keci paṭhanti, byañjanatopi gavesitabbaṃ, aññattha atthato aññatthampīti adhippāyo. Tameva byañjanato aññatthaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ 『『salloti vā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Imesanti salladhūpāyanānaṃ. Icchāvipariyāyeti icchitālābhe, appaccayasamavāye vā. Idampi samatthanaṃ hoti yathādhippetassa aññatthassa byatirekadassanabhāvato. Jarāmaraṇavipariyāyeti jarāmaraṇe asati. Na hi yathādhippetajarāmaraṇābhāve taṇhā na hotīti.

Dvidhā vuttāti dvippakārena vuttā, dvikkhattuṃ vā vuttā. Yaṃ idaṃ…pe… ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vā abhilapananti evaṃ kiriyāparāmasanaṃ yojetabbanti veditabbaṃ. Visesoti ayaṃ etāsaṃ icchātaṇhānaṃ pakatisaṅkhāto viseso. 『『Dvīhi nāmehī』』tipi pāḷi. Yadipi evanti kāmaṃ visayavisesesu evaṃ yathāvuttaavatthāvisesena icchātaṇhānaṃ atthi kāci bhedamattāti attho. Sabhāvato pana bhedo natthīti dassento 『『tathāpī』』ti āha.

Icchantīti kāmenti. Taṇhāyanā pātukāmatā. Santāpanaṭṭhenāti paridahanabhāvena. Ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhenāti avaharaṇaṭṭhena. Saritānīti rāgavasena allāni. Taṃsampayuttapītivasena siniddhāni sinehitāni. Visattikāti vitthatā rūpādīsu tebhūmakadhammesu byāpanavasena. Visaṭāti purimavevacanameva ta-kārassa ṭa-kāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Visālāti vipulā. Visakkatīti parisakkati sahati. Ratto hi rāgavatthunā pādena tāḷiyamānopi sahati. 『『Osakkanaṃ, vipphandanaṃ vā visakkana』』nti vadanti. Aniccādikaṃ niccādito gaṇhantī visaṃvādikā hoti. Visaṃharatīti tathā tathā kāmesu ānisaṃsaṃ dassentī vividhehi ākārehi nekkhammābhimukhappavattito cittaṃ saṃharati saṃkhipati. Visaṃ vā dukkhaṃ, taṃ harati, vahatīti attho. Dukkhanibbattakassa kammassa hetubhāvato visamūlā, visaṃ vā dukkhādibhedā vedanā mūlaṃ etāyāti visamūlā, dukkhasamudayattā visaṃ phalaṃ etissāti visaphalā. Rūpādidukkhasseva paribhogo etāya, na amatassāti visaparibhogā. Sabbattha niruttivasena padasiddhi veditabbā. Yo panettha padhāno attho, taṃ dassetuṃ puna 『『visatā vā panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Sinehanaṃ pemakaraṇaṃ. Bandhanaṭṭhenāti saṃyojanaṭṭhena. Āsīsanaṭṭhenāti icchanaṭṭhena. Abhinandanaṭṭhenāti assādanaṭṭhena, sampaṭicchanaṭṭhena vā.

我來翻譯這段巴利文： 19. 或者安排"所有語詞都說一個義"。 20. 在老中住立的變異,即住立者的那個變異、變化性,這就是所謂的老。剎那死是剎那滅。斷死是漏盡者的蘊般涅槃。 純粹的,即與老不混合的。老是一個,死是另一個,所以說"因為見到所承許的純粹死"。如同諸天那樣是相似的譬喻,而神通足等是不相似的譬喻,應當取順理和反理來安排。 被它們,即被老死。 以"具有衰老破壞的性質"這樣的方便安排渴愛、老、死不異。雖然"渴愛是一個,老是一個,死是一個"這義已成就,關於這點說"不是這個"等,但是爲了避免可能的非難,顯示"如果如老死"等經文的生起,所以說"如果...等...顯示"。義,即意圖。這些,即渴愛、老、死。 有些人讀"應以此理從互相的原因探求",從文句也應探求,從他處的義到他處也是意圖。為顯示從文句到他處的義,在經中說"箭或者"等。這些,即箭、燻煙。在欲的轉變,即不得所欲,或者在不樂的集起。這也是支援,因為是所欺的他義的相反顯示。在老死的轉變,即在沒有老死時。因為在所欺的老死不存在時,渴愛不是不存在。 說兩種,即說兩種方式,或者說兩次。應當瞭解安排這樣關聯作用"所謂這個...等...以所緣作的方式或言說"。差別,即這是它們慾望渴愛稱為自性的差別。經文也有"以兩名"。雖然如此,即雖然在對像差別中如所說的狀態差別,慾望渴愛有某些差別性的意思。但從自性來看沒有差別,所以說"然而"。 欲求,即慾望。渴愛是想要達到。以熱惱義,即以燃燒性。以牽引義,即以取走義。濕潤,即因貪慾而濕。以相應喜的方式潤澤滋潤。遍著,即遍佈在色等三界法中。散佈,即前面的同義詞,將ta音變成ṭa音而說。廣大,即廣大。流轉,即努力忍耐。因為貪著者即使被所貪之物用腳踢打也忍耐。說"退縮或躁動為流轉"。執取無常等為常等而成為欺誑。退卻,即如此這般在慾望中顯示功德,以種種方式使心從出離的正向運轉中退卻收縮。或者害為苦,它帶來、運來的意思。因為是產生苦的業的因,所以害根;或者害,即苦等差別的受是它的根,所以害根;因為是苦集,所以害是它的果,即害果。它以苦為受用,不是以不死為受用,所以害受用。一切處應當依語源而了知語詞的成就。但此中是主要的義,爲了顯示它,再說"或者遍著"等。 使親愛即生愛。以束縛義,即以繫縛義。以期望義,即以欲求義。以歡喜義,即以味著義或接受義。

21.Anabhiratīti ukkaṇṭhā. Ñāṇanibbidāti nibbidānupassanā. Yathā ca dukkhū…pe… cāresu yutti vuttāti yojanā.

Sukhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññā sukhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññā sukhāpaṭipadādayo. Yo dukkhāya paṭipadāya visesaṃ adhigantuṃ bhabbo, tassa sukhāpaṭipadāyogyassa viya kariyamānā dhammadesanā visesāvahā na hoti, tasmā sā na yuttāti imamatthaṃ dasseti 『『rāgacarito』』tiādinā. Rāgacaritassa tathā tathā kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ, okāraṃ, saṃkilesaṃ, nekkhamme ānisaṃsañca avibhāvetvā ādito vipassanākathāva kariyamānā na visesāvahā hoti āsayassa asodhitattāti etamatthaṃ dassento pāḷiyaṃ 『『vipassanā…pe… desanā』』ti āhāti veditabbaṃ. Sesapadesupīti yathā 『『rāgacaritassā』』tiādinā rāgacaritakoṭṭhāsavasena pāḷiyaṃ desanāya ayutti vuttā, iminā nayena sesapadesupi dosacaritakoṭṭhāsādīsupi 『『dosacaritassa puggalassa asubhaṃ deseyyā』』tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ avuttopi yathāsambhavamattho niddhāretvā vattabbo. Kasmā pana yuttihāre ayuttiniddhāraṇā katāti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha 『『ettha cā』』tiādi. Sesesupi eseva nayoti sesesupi dosacaritādivasena niddhāritesu ayuttigavesanesu ayameva upāyo. Anulomappahāna』』ntipi pāḷi, so evattho.

『『Yāvatikāñāṇassa bhūmī』』ti etena yuttihārassa mahāvisayataṃ dasseti. Kasmā panāyaṃ mahāvisayoti? Yuttivicārabhāvato, saṃvaṇṇetabbassa ca dhammassa nānānayanipuṇādiguṇavisesayogatoti dassento 『『taṃ kissa hetū』』ti āha.

Aparabhāgeti pacchābhāge. Mettāvihāribhāgassa aparihīnatāvacanato ayogo vutto. Tenāha 『『sato』』ti. Yathāvuttakāraṇato evāti paṭipakkhattā eva.

Pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato diṭṭhimaññitassa. Ādīnavadassanena vitakkaṃ jigucchantā dutiyajjhānassa āsannaupacārajjhānadhammāpi vitakkārammaṇā na honti, pageva dutiyajjhānadhammāti adhippāyenāha 『『ārammaṇakaraṇattho hettha sahagatasaddo』』ti.

Evaṃ yuttihāralakkhaṇaṃ āgamato yuttāyuttavicāraṃ dassetvā idāni āgamānugatāya yuttiyāpi taṃ dassetuṃ guṇamukhena dosavibhajanaṃ vibhajanto 『『apicetthā』』tiādimāha. Taṃ uttānatthameva.

Yuttihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

以下是巴利文的簡體中文翻譯： 21. 無歡喜即厭倦。智慧厭倦即隨觀厭倦。如苦...在行為中是適當的說法,這是安排。 容易行道遲鈍智、容易行道急速智、容易行道等。對於能夠獲得痛苦行道的特殊性的人,若如對於容易行道者所作的法說不帶來特殊性,因此它不適當,這個意義通過"貪行者"等來顯示。對於貪行者,如此如此的慾望的過患、下劣、污穢,在出離中的功德未作闡明,從一開始的觀察說法就不帶來特殊性,因為心性未凈化,這個意義應當在經中理解為"觀察...說法"等。在其餘處,如同"對於貪行者"等在經中說貪行部分的不適當,以此方式在其餘處,對於瞋行部分等,如"應當對瞋行者的人說不凈"等,雖然在經中未說,但應當根據可能性闡明義理。為什麼在理方法中作了不適當的闡明,注意到這個非難,所以說"在此"等。在其餘處也是同樣的方法,即在其餘處,對於瞋行等所闡明的不適當探求中,這是同樣的方法。也有"順應捨棄"的經文,這就是同樣的義。 通過"智慧的地有多少"來顯示理方法的廣大領域。為什麼這是廣大領域?因為有理的考察性質,並顯示爲了讚頌的法有種種方法精巧等德的特殊性結合,所以說"這是什麼原因"。 在後分,即在後半部分。說慈住分不衰減,所以說不適當。因此說"念"。正是因為如上所說的原因,正是對治的緣故。 從舍斷一性來看邪見慢。通過顯示過患,對於尋生起厭惡,二禪近處行禪的法也不以尋為所緣,何況二禪法,這是意圖,所以說"此處'共同'一詞是為作所緣的意義"。 如此從來源顯示理方法的特徵,現在爲了顯示順應來源的理,通過德的方面分別過失,所以說"而且在此"等。那是顯而易見的意義。 理方法分別讚頌結束。 4. 語詞根源方法分別讚頌<.Assistant>

22.Tesaṃtesanti anavasesapariyādānaṃ, tena ye sutte vuttā ca dhammā, ye ca tesaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ, tesaṃ sabbesampīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedhoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ 『『kattha pana so』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Piyāyitabbajātiyanti pemanīyasabhāvaṃ. Micchāpaṭipadāti pamādāpatti, micchābhiniveso vā. Ekavāraṃ uppannāpi pāṇātipātacetanā verappasavanato dosassa, ekavāraṃ uppannāpi pamādāpatti, micchābhiniveso vā mohassa uppattikāraṇanti pāḷiyaṃ avuttampi nayato niddhāretabbanti dassento 『『dosassa…pe… imināva nayena attho veditabbo』』ti āha. Nimittatthaggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānaṃ, anubyañjanatthaggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ anubyañjananti 『『nimittānubyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha nimittaṃ itthipurisanimittaṃ. Anubyañjanaṃ hatthapādahasitakathitādi. Phasso paccayo etissāti phassapaccayā, taṃbhāvo phassapaccayatā. Assādeti etāyāti assādo, taṇhā.

Vatthūni ñeyyadhammoti āha 『『vatthuavippaṭipatti visayasabhāvapaṭivedho』』ti. Idhādhippetaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ dassetuṃ 『『sīlasamādhisampadāna』』nti vuttaṃ. Ekadesupalakkhaṇavasena, vaṇṇagandharāgisappāyavasena vā pāḷiyaṃ 『『vinīlakavipubbakaggahaṇalakkhaṇā asubhasaññā』』ti vatvā 『『tassā nibbidāpadaṭṭhāna』』nti vuttaṃ nibbidaṃ dassento 『『nibbidā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paritassanato visesetuṃ 『『ñāṇenā』』ti visesitaṃ. Tathā pavattanti nibbidanākārena pavattanaṃ.

Yoniso ummujjantiyā videharañño dhītāya rucāya jātissarañāṇaṃ kammassakataññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ ahosi, na pana asappurisūpanissayato, ayoniso ummujjantassa tasseva rañño senāpatino alātassa bījakassa dāsassāti imamatthaṃ dassento 『『imassa ca…pe… udāharitabbo』』ti āha. Soti pasādo. Avatthāvisesoti sampayuttadhammānaṃ anāvilabhāvalakkhito avatthābhedo. Āyatanagatoti ṭhānagato, ratanattayavisayoti attho. 『『Kāyo』』tiādinā avatthāvisesena vinā sabhāvasiddhameva padaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti.

Imasmiṃ ca ṭhāne pāḷiyaṃ pubbe yesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ niddhāritaṃ, te dhammā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānāni honti, te dassetuṃ 『『aparo nayo』』tiādi āraddhanti veditabbaṃ. Assādamanasikāro ayonisomanasikāralakkhaṇo vutto nidassanamattaatthoti veditabbo, yebhuyyena sattānaṃ lobhavasena ayonisomanasikārā saṃvattantītti dassanatthaṃ vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Upapatti eva opapaccayaṃ, tassa bhāvo opapaccayikanti āha 『『upapattibhavabhāvenā』』ti. Vavatthitabhāvoti vavatthitabhāvo rūpassa dassanādipaṭiniyatārammaṇakiccatā. Bhavassa aṅgānīti bhavassa kāraṇāni. Dutiye aṅgānīti avayavā, kammavaṭṭampi vā kāraṇaṅgabhāvena yojetabbaṃ.

Kammaṭṭhānassāti bhāvanāya brūhanā vaḍḍhanā. Tesūti titthaññutādīsu. Kalyāṇamittassa sammadeva payirupāsanāyapīti taṃ nissāya laddhena sabbāya dhammassavanena dhammupasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ hotīti titthaññutā pītaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ yāya vimuttiyā sati vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ hotīti sā tassa padaṭṭhānanti ayamattho pākaṭoti āha 『『purimānaṃ…pe… suviññeyyo evā』』ti. Saha adhiṭṭhānenāti ñātapariññāya saddhiṃ. Ñātapariññā hi tīraṇapariññāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文: 22.這些這些"是指完全無餘地包含,由此表明經中所說的諸法,以及作為其因的諸法,都包括在內。爲了說明"正確通達一切法"的意思,所以說"那麼在何處"等。 可愛的本性,即容易產生愛著的自性。邪行即放逸行為,或是邪執。即使只生起一次的殺生意志也會引生怨恨而成為瞋恚的因,即使只生起一次的放逸行為或邪執也是愚癡生起的因,雖然經文未說明,但應當依理推知,所以說"瞋恚...乃至...應當依此方法理解"。相狀執取的特相是色與形狀,隨相執取的特相是細部特徵,所以說"以執取相與隨相為特相"。其中,相是指男女相,隨相是指手腳、微笑、言談等。以觸為緣的稱為觸緣,其狀態稱為觸緣性。由此貪著的稱為味著,即渴愛。 所緣事即所知法,所以說"事的無違逆即通達對象的自性"。為顯示此處所說的正行,說"戒定具足"。依一分標相或依色香等適意的方式,經中說"青瘀腐爛想為特相的不凈想",並說"以厭離為近因",為說明厭離而說"厭離"等。其中為區別于惶恐,特別說明"以智"。如是轉起即以厭離方式的轉起。 由於正確地出生,毗提訶國王之女盧遮生起宿命智成為業報智的因,而由於親近惡人,不正確地出生的那位國王將軍阿羅陀之子婢子,所以說"此...乃至...應當舉例"。此即凈信。特殊狀態即相應法無混濁性的狀態差別。處所即住處,意為三寶境界。通過"身"等顯示不依特殊狀態而自性成就的近因。 在此處,經中先前確定諸法的近因,為顯示這些法是何法的近因,所以開始說"另一方法"等,應當如是了知。說味著作意是不如理作意的特相,應知這只是舉例說明,或是為顯示大多數眾生由貪慾而起不如理作意而如是說。生即是生起,其狀態為生起性,所以說"以生有狀態"。確定狀態即色法見等特定所緣作用的確定性。有的支分即有的因。第二支分即部分,或業輪也應配合為因分。 業處即修習的增長髮展。于彼等即于知處等。由於善知識的正確親近等,依止他而得到的一切聞法會生起與法相應的歡喜,所以知處是喜處的近因。如是,由於有解脫而有解脫知見,所以前者是後者的近因,此義明顯,所以說"前...乃至...極易了知"。與確立俱即與知遍知一起。因為知遍知是度遍知的確立。其餘易知。 近因理路分別註釋完畢。 5.特相理路分別註釋 provided by [EasyChat](https:..site.eqing.te

23.『『Lakkhaṇahārassa visayaṃ pucchatī』』ti vuttaṃ, 『『ko pana tassa visayo』』ti vutte samānalakkhaṇā avuttadhammā. Kāyānupassanāya samāraddhāya vedanānupassanādayo sukheneva sijjhantīti tabbacanena vedanāgatāsatiādīnaṃ vuttabhāvo dassito satipaṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānassa saddhānuggahitāni vīriyasatisamādhipaññindriyāni sādhanaṃ, evaṃ itaresampīti katvā vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ attho aṭṭhakathāyameva (netti. aṭṭha. 51) parato āgamissati. Iminā nayena sesesupi ekalakkhaṇatāniddesesu attho veditabbo. Paratoti catubyūhahāravaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 20).

Asammissatoti vedanādayopi ettha sitā ettha paṭisandhāti kāye vedanādianupassanāpasaṅgepi āpanne tadasammissatoti attho.

Avayavigāhasamaññātidhāvanasārādānābhinivesanisedhanatthaṃ kāyaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgehi, tāni ca kesādīhi, kesādike ca bhūtupādāyarūpehi vinibbhujituṃ 『『tathā na kāye』』tiādimāha. Pāsādādinagarāvayavasamūhe avayavivādinopi avayavigāhaṇaṃ karonti. Nagaraṃ nāma koci attho atthīti pana kesañci samaññātidhāvanaṃ siyāti itthipurisādisamaññātidhāvane nagaranidassanaṃ vuttaṃ. Añño koci sattādiko. Yaṃ passati itthiṃ, purisaṃ vā. Nanu cakkhunā itthipurisadassanaṃ natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, 『『itthiṃ passāmi, purisaṃ passāmī』』ti pana pavattasamaññāvasena 『『yaṃ passatī』』ti vuttaṃ. Micchādassanena vā diṭṭhiyā yaṃ passati, na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ hoti, rūpāyatanaṃ vā taṃ na hotīti attho. Atha vā taṃ kosādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ na hoti, diṭṭhaṃ vā yathāvuttaṃ na hotīti attho. Yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passatīti yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ vā diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ paññācakkhunā bhūtato na passatīti attho.

Na aññadhammānupassīti na aññasabhāvānupassī, asubhādito aññākārānupassī na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Pathavīkāyanti kesādiṃ pathavīdhammasamūhattā 『『kāyo』』ti vadati, lakkhaṇapathavimeva vā anekabhedabhinnaṃ sakalasarīragataṃ pubbāpariyabhāvena pavattamānaṃ samūhavasena gahetvā 『『kāyo』』ti vadati. Evaṃ aññatthāpi.

Ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassāti aniccatādiākārasamudāyapariyāyassa.

Tīsu bhavesu kileseti bhavattayavisayakilese. Sabbatthikanti sabbattha līne, uddhate ca citte icchitabbatthā, sabbe vā līne, uddhate ca bhāvetabbā bojjhaṅgā atthikā etāyāti sabbatthikā. Anto saṅkocoti anto olīyanā, kosajjanti attho.

24.Gahitesūti bhāvanāggahaṇena gahitesu, bhāvitesūti attho, vacanena vā gahitesu. Bhāvanāggahaṇadīpanatthattā pana vacanena gahaṇassa bhāvanāggahaṇamettha padhānaṃ. Yassa satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, tassa sammappadhānādayo bodhipakkhiyadhammā na bhāvitāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti ca samānalakkhaṇatāpadesena imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ 『『catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Vipallāsāpahīyanti ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato. 『『Āhārasamudayā kāyassa samudayo, phassasamudayā vedanānaṃ samudayo (saṃ. ni. 5.408), saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa』』nti (saṃ. ni. 1.1, 39; ma. ni.

我將為您翻譯這段巴利文文字： 23. "詢問特相理路的範圍"時已說，當問"其範圍為何"時，未說明的同類特相法。在修習身隨觀時，伴隨著它，受隨觀等隨之容易成就，以此語句顯示了受等處的隨念，因為是同一特相，以信力資助的精進、念、定、慧諸根為資助，對於其餘者也是如此而說。此義在註釋中（曼尼貝經註釋51）後面將會出現。以此方法，在其餘同類特相的闡述中，應當了知其義。後面是在四部論述註釋（曼尼貝經註釋20）中。 不混雜者，即受等也安立於此，相互關聯。當身受等隨觀的情況發生時，不混雜。 爲了阻止肢體分析的假定、追求、把握、執著和障礙，以肢體及其支分，及以發等，以及以發等的根本和所依色法來分解："如是不在身"等。即便在宮殿等城市的肢體集合中，分析者也進行肢體分析。然而，是否有城市本身的某些意義？在男女等假定的追求中，以城市為例來說明。另有某個眾生等。看見女人、男人。難道不是以眼根不能看見男女嗎？誠然不能，但以"看見女人，看見男人"的現行假定，說"看見者"。或者以邪見看見的，那看見的並非色處，或色處並非那看見的。或者，看見的並非以瓶等根本和所依集合為名，或看見的不如所說。看見的並非所看見者，即色處，或以發等根本和所依集合為名的看見，以智慧之眼並非看見其真實性。 非他法隨觀，即非他種自性隨觀，不是從不凈等其他行相隨觀。 地界身，因為以發等為地界法集合，所以說"身"，或者以特相地界，包含全身在內，以前後相續的方式存在，以集合的方式把握，說"身"。在其他處也是如此。 以相集合為名，即無常等相的總聚的方式。 三有中的煩惱，即三有領域的煩惱。遍一切者，即遍在潛伏處，在掉舉的心中所希求的對象，或一切潛伏或掉舉中應修習的菩提分法是此所求。內收縮即內潛伏，懈怠是其義。 24. 于所把持者，以修習的把握而把持，即是已修習者，或以語言而把持。因為語言把握的顯示是爲了修習的把握，所以此處修習的把握為主。若某人修習念處，而未修習正勤等菩提分法，則此情況不存在，以同類特相的方式在經中說"當在四念處被修習時，四正勤前進到修習的圓滿"等。 顛倒被破除，因為直接相反的本性。"以食因緣有身的生起，以觸因緣有受的生起（相應尼柯耶5.408），以行緣識，以識緣名色"（相應尼柯

3.126; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato kāyādīnaṃ samudayabhūtā kabaḷīkārāhāraphassamanosañcetanāviññāṇāhārākāyādīnaṃ parijānanena pariññātā honti tappaṭipakkhappahānatoti dassento 『『cattāroāhārā』』tiādimāha. Sabbatthāti 『『upādānehi anupādāno bhavatī』』ti evamādīsu.

Tattha yasmā pañca kāmaguṇā savisesā kāye labbhantīti visesena kāyo kāmupādānassa vatthu, sukhavedanassādavasena paralokanirapekkho 『『natthi dinna』』ntiādi (dī. ni. 1.171; ma. ni. 1.445; 2.94-95, 225; 3.91, 116; saṃ. ni. 3.210; dha. sa. 1221; vibha. 938) parāmāsaṃ uppādetīti diṭṭhupādānassa vedanā, citte niccaggahaṇavasena sassatassa 『『attano sīlādivasena parisuddhaparāmasanaṃ hotī』』ti sīlabbatupādānassa cittaṃ, nāmarūpaparicchedena bhūtaṃ bhūtato apassantassa 『『attābhiniveso hotī』』ti attavādupādānassa dhammā vatthu, tasmā 『『catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu upādānehi anupādāno bhavatī』』ti vuttaṃ.

Yasmā pana vuttanayeneva kāyo kāmayogassa vatthu, bhavesu sukhaggahaṇavasena bhavassādo hotīti bhavayogassa vedanā, santatighanaggahaṇavasena citte attābhiniveso hotīti diṭṭhiyogassacittaṃ, dhammavinibbhogassa dukkarattā, dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya ca duppaṭivijjhattā sammoho hotīti avijjāyogassa dhammā, vatthu, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya tesu tesaṃ pahānasiddhito yogehi visaṃyuttatā vuttā. Eteneva āsavehi anāsavatā, oghehi nittiṇṇatā ca saṃvaṇṇitā hoti kāmarāgādīnaṃ eva kāmayogakāmāsavakāmoghādibhāvato.

Vuttanayeneva kāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu, 『『dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī』』ti (ma. ni. 1.465) dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā visesena byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu, citte niccābhinivesavasena sassatassa 『『attano sīlena suddhī』』tiādiparāmasanaṃ hotīti sīlabbataparāmāsassa cittaṃ vatthu, sappaccayanāmarūpadassanābhāvato bhavavibhavadiṭṭhisaṅkhāto idaṃsaccābhiniveso hotīti tassa dhammā vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānāti yojetabbaṃ.

Vuttanayeneva visesato kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu, vedanā dosasallassa, 『『cittaṃ niccaggahaṇavasena attābhinivesaṃ attānaṃ seyyādito dahatī』』ti cittaṃ mānasallassa, vuttanayeneva dhammā mohasallassa vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānāti yojetabbaṃ.

Yasmā pana kāyānupassanādīhi kāyavedanācittadhammesu pariññātesu rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā pariññātā honti, citte hi pariññāte saññāpi pariññātāva hoti, tasmā 『『viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī』』ti vuttaṃ.

Tathā visesato kāye sāpekkhā chandāgatiṃ gacchatīti kāyo chandāgatiyā vatthu, vuttanayeneva vedanā byāpādassa nimittanti sā dosāgatiyā vatthu, santatighanaggahaṇavasena sarāgādicitte sammoho hotīti mohāgatiyā cittaṃ, dhammasabhāvānavabodhena bhayaṃ hotīti bhayāgatiyā dhammā vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya agatigamanappahānaṃ hotīti āha 『『agatigamanehi ca na agatiṃ gacchatī』』ti.

『『Akusalassa somanassassa vasenā』』ti idaṃ 『『ayampi attho sambhavatī』』ti katvā vuttaṃ. 『『Sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetī』』ti (ma. ni.

我來 複製並直譯這段巴利文： (根據 相應部3.126；大品1；優陀那1；分別論225）所說，身等的生起因即是段食、觸、意思、識食，通過對身等的遍知而遍知了它們，為顯示斷除其對立面，所以說"四種食"等。一切處即"由於執取而無執取"等處。 其中，因為五種欲樂特別在身中可得，所以身特別是欲取的所依。由於樂受的味著而不顧來世，生起"無佈施"等（長部1.171等）的執取，所以受是見取的所依。由於在心中執取常見而說"以自己的戒等而執取清凈"，所以心是戒禁取的所依。由於不能如實了知名色的區分而有"我執"，所以法是我語取的所依。因此說"在修習四念處時，由執取而成為無執取"。 又因如前所說方式，身是欲軛的所依。由於在諸有中執取樂而有有味著，所以受是有軛的所依。由於在心中執取相續、密集而有我執，所以心是見軛的所依。由於法的區分難作，以及諸法只是法性而難通達，所以生起愚癡，因此法是無明軛的所依。由於修習四念處而成就斷除它們，所以說遠離諸軛。由此也說明了無漏、度過暴流，因為欲貪等即是欲軛、欲漏、欲暴流等的性質。 如前所說方式，身是貪慾身繫的所依。"于苦受隨眠瞋恚隨眠"，所以苦苦、壞苦、行苦性的受特別是瞋恚身繫的所依。由於在心中執常而執著"以自己的戒而清凈"等，所以心是戒禁取身繫的所依。由於不見有緣的名色，所以有所謂有見、無有見的此實執著，因此法是其所依，應當如是配合四念處。 如前所說方式，身特別是貪慾箭的所依，受是瞋恚箭的所依。"心由執常而執我，以勝等傷害自己"，所以心是慢箭的所依。如前所說，法是癡箭的所依，應當如是配合四念處。 又因為由身隨觀等而遍知身、受、心、法時，色、受、想、行蘊也得遍知。因為心得遍知時，想也已得遍知。所以說"識住也得到遍知"。 如是特別在身上有貪求而行不正，所以身是欲求不正行的所依。如前所說，受是瞋恚的相，所以是瞋恚不正行的所依。由於執取相續、密集而在有貪等心中生起愚癡，所以心是癡不正行的所依。由於不瞭解法的自性而有怖畏，所以法是怖畏不正行的所依。由修習四念處而斷除不正行，所以說"不行不正行"。 "依不善的喜受"，這是說"此義也可能"。"於樂受隨眠貪慾隨眠"（中部）

1.465) pana vacanato sukhavedanāggahaṇena tatthānusayanena samudayasaccaṃ desitanti veditabbaṃ. Desitaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti dukkhadukkhaggahaṇena sātisayaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ pakāsitaṃ hotīti pāḷiyaṃ 『『dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ desita』』nti vuttaṃ. Sahacaraṇādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā niddesavāravaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5 ādayo) vuttaṃ.

Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

我來 譯這段巴利文： 1.465.但根據"於樂受隨眠貪慾隨眠"之言，應當了知以把握樂受及其隨眠而說示了集諦。已說示苦聖諦，即以把握苦苦而特別顯示了苦聖諦，所以在經中說"已說示苦聖諦"。關於俱起等所應說的，在前面解說品註釋（曼尼貝經註釋5等）中已說。 特相理路分別註釋完畢。 6.四部論述理路分別註釋

25.Hārānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ. Hāresu imassa catubyūhahārassa visesato suttassa byañjanavicayabhāvatoti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ 『『byañjana…pe… dassetī』』ti. Yāyāti niruttiyā.

Yathārahanti saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte yaṃ yaṃ arahati nibbacanaṃ vattuṃ, taṃtaṃlokasamaññānurodheneva. Pubbabhāgapaṭipadā sampādetvā pacchā saccābhisamayaṃ pāpuṇātīti āha 『『sammuti…pe… hotī』』ti, taṃtaṃpaññattiggahaṇamukhena paramatthaggahaṇaṃ hotīti evaṃ vā iminā sambandho.

Yamidaṃ anindriyabaddharūpasantānaṃ sandhāya 『『ubhayamantarenā』』ti idha vuttaṃ. Otaraṇahāre (netti. aṭṭha. 42 ādayo) panassa dvārappavattaphassādidhamme sandhāya vuttabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ 『『ubhayamantarenāti phassasamuditesu dhammesū』』ti attho vutto. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu 『『antarenāti vacanaṃ pana vikappantaradīpana』』nti. Tasmā ayamettha attho – na imaṃ lokaṃ, na huraṃ lokaṃ, atha kho ubhayamantarenāti. Aparo vikappo – ubhayamantarenāti vā vacanaṃ vikappantarābhāvadīpanaṃ. Tassattho – na imaṃ lokaṃ, na huraṃ lokaṃ nissāya jhāyati jhāyī, ubhayamantarena pana aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ atthīti.

Yepi ca 『『antarāparinibbāyī, sambhavesī』』ti ca imesaṃ suttapadānaṃ atthaṃ micchā gahetvā atthi eva antarābhavoti vadanti, tepi yasmā avihādīsu tattha tattha āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā antarā aggamaggādhigamena anavasesakilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyantīti antarāparinibbāyī, na antarābhavabhūtoti purimassa suttapadassa attho. Pacchimassa ca ye bhūtā eva, na puna bhavissanti, te hi (kathā. anuṭī. 507) khīṇāsavā, purimapadehi 『『bhūtā』』ti vuttā. Tabbiparītatāya sambhavaṃ esantīti sambhavesino. Appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā sekkhā, puthujjanā ca. Catūsu vā yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujasattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ, vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesī nāma. Aṇḍakosato, vatthikosato ca bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajaopapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesī nāma, dutiyacittakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya bhūtā nāma. Yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesī, tato paraṃ bhūtāti attho, tasmā natthīti paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. Sati hi ujuke pāḷianugate atthe kiṃ aniddhāritasāmatthiyena antarābhavena attabhāvaparikappitena payojananti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 25.理路的是所有格的提取用法。在諸理路中,這四部論述理路特別是經文的語詞考察性,這是其配合。因此說"語詞...乃至...顯示"。以何者即以詞源學。 隨宜即在所註釋的經中,對於應當說某某詞源的,都是隨順世間共許。先完成前分的道,後來達到真諦通達,所以說"世俗...乃至...是",或者說通過把握各種假名而把握勝義,如此與此相連。 這裡說"兩者之間"是就非根所繫的色相續而言。而在入理路(曼尼貝經註釋42等)中,顯示是就門轉起觸等法而說,所以解釋其義為"兩者之間即在觸所生起的諸法中"。註釋師們則說"之間之語是顯示另一選擇"。因此這裡的意思是 - 不是此世,不是他世,而是兩者之間。另一選擇 - 或"兩者之間"之語是顯示無另一選擇。其義是 - 禪修者不依此世,不依他世而修禪,而在兩者之間有另一處所。 那些錯誤理解"中般涅槃、求生者"等經文之義而說"確實有中有"的人,因為在色界中凈居天等處,不超過各處壽命的中間而以證得最上道、以無餘煩惱般涅槃而般涅槃,所以稱為中般涅槃,不是指中有狀態,這是前一經文之義。后一經文中,已生而不再生者,即是漏盡者,以前諸句說"已生"。與此相反,尋求生有者稱為求生者。因為未斷有結,所以是有學和凡夫。或者在四生中,卵生、胎生眾生,乃至未破卵殼、胎衣時稱為求生者。從卵殼、胎衣出生后稱為已生者。濕生、化生眾生在第一心剎那稱為求生者,從第二心剎那開始稱為已生者。或者以何種威儀而生,乃至未達到其他威儀之前稱為求生者,此後稱為已生者,這是其義,所以應當否定說沒有。因為有直接經文隨順的意義,有何必要假設未確定功能的中有身呢?

Yaṃ pana ye 『『santānavasena pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvo diṭṭho. Yathā taṃ vīhiādiaviññāṇakasantāne, evaṃ saviññāṇakasantānepi avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvena bhavitabbaṃ. Ayañca nayo sati antarābhave yujjati, nāññathā』』ti yuttiṃ vadanti. Tehi iddhimato cetovasippattassa cittānugatikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa khaṇena brahmalokato idhūpasaṅkamane, ito vā brahmalokagamane yutti vattabbā. Yadi sabbattheva vicchinnadese dhammānaṃ pavatti na icchitā, yadipi siyā 『『iddhivisayo acinteyyo』』ti, taṃ idhāpi samānaṃ 『『kammavipāko acinteyyo』』ti vacanato, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva. Acinteyyasabhāvā hi sabhāvadhammā, te katthaci paccayavisesena vicchinnadese pātubhavanti, katthaci avicchinnadese ca. Tathā hi mukhaghosādīhi aññasmiṃ dese ādāsapabbatappadesādike paṭibimbapaṭighosādikaṃ paccayuppannaṃ nibbattamānaṃ dissati, tasmā na sabbaṃ sabbattha upanetabbanti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana paṭibimbassa udāharaṇabhāvasādhanādiko antarābhavavicāro kathāvatthuppakaraṇassaṭīkāyaṃ (kathā. anuṭī. 507) gahetabbo.

Apare pana 『『idhāti kāmabhavo, huranti arūpabhavo, ubhayamantarenāti rūpabhavo vutto』』ti vadanti, 『『idhāti paccayadhammā, huranti paccayuppannadhammā, ubhayamantarenāti paṇṇattidhammā vuttā』』ti ca vadanti, taṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu natthi, tasmā vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Avasiṭṭhaṃ rūpanti āpodhātuākāsadhātūhi saddhiṃ lakkhaṇarūpāni, ojañca sandhāyāha anindriyabaddharūpassa adhippetattā. Tassa khīṇāsavassa taṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ na jānanti na ñāyanti 『『jhāyamānā』』ti vuttattā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 對於那些說"已見到諸法以相續方式進行時,在不同處所無間斷地顯現。就如在稻等無識相續中,同樣在有識相續中也應當以無間斷方式在不同處所顯現。此理唯有在有中有時才合理,不能有別"的論證者,應當詢問他們關於具神通、已得心自在者,隨心轉變其身,瞬間從梵天界來此或從此去梵天界的道理。若在一切處都不接受諸法在間斷處所的執行,即使說"神通境界不可思議",但這裡也同樣因為說"業報不可思議"的緣故,所以這只是他們的臆見而已。因為自性法是不可思議的自性,它們在某些地方以特殊因緣在間斷處所顯現,在某些地方則在無間斷處所顯現。如是可見從口音等在另一處所的鏡面、山腹等處,所緣生起的影像、回聲等,所以不是一切處都要類推,這是此處的概要。詳細來說,關於影像作為例證的成立等中有的考察,應當在論事書註釋(論事書復注507)中獲取。 其他人則說"此處即欲有,彼處即無色有,兩者之間即說色有",也說"此處即因法,彼處即果法,兩者之間即說假法",這些在所有註釋中都沒有,所以應當依所說方式理解其義。其餘色即連同水界、空界的特相色和食素而說,因為意在非根所繫色。那些漏盡者的那個以涅槃為所緣的心,他們不知不了知,因為說"正在禪修"。其餘易於理解。 四部論述理路分別註釋完畢。 7.週轉理路分別註釋

1. Akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ viddhaṃsanasabhāvattā, akusalānaṃ vā pajahane kusalānaṃ sampādane paṭṭhapanasabhāvattā ārambhadhātu. Tathābhūtāti sīlādīhi samaṅgībhūtā. Kāmadhātuādikā tidhātuyova tedhātu. Tassa abhibhavanato tedhātuissaro maccurājā. Anādimatisaṃsāre cirakālaṃ laddhapatiṭṭhāpi acirakālaṃ bhāvitehi kusalehi dhammehi samucchindanīyattā abalā kilesāti vuttaṃ 『『abalaṃ dubbala』』nti. Tenāha 『『abalā naṃ balīyantī』』ti.

Idaṃ vacanaṃ ayaṃ gāthāpādo. Samādhissa padaṭṭhānanti ettha samādhissa kāraṇaṃ samatānuyoge niyojanatoti yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Papañcāti rāgādayova. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitanti desanāya padaṭṭhānabhāveneva atthasaṃvaṇṇanā katāti attho.

Nti taṃ desanaṃ. Tassāti sabhāgādivasena āvaṭṭanassa. Paripakkañāṇānaṃ visesādhigamāya. Lābhavinicchayapariggahamacchariyānītiādīsu lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇappaṭilābho. So pariyesanāya sati hotīti pariyesanāggahaṇena gahito. Vinicchayoti 『『ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddādiārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī』』ti evaṃ pavatto vitakko vinicchayo. So lāpitahetukattā pariyesanamūlakatāya pariyesanāggahaṇeneva gahito, tathā pariggahamacchariyāni. Tattha pariggaho 『『mama ida』』nti pariggaṇhanaṃ. Macchariyaṃ 『『mayheva hotū』』ti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanaṃ. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti 『『mayhevidamacchariyaṃ hotu, mā aññesaṃ acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī』』ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.103; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.9.23). Paribhogatthānaṃ pana vinicchayādīnaṃ paribhogantogadhatā veditabbā. Chandarāgo dubbalarāgo. Ajjhosānaṃ 『『mama ida』』nti taṇhāvasena balavasanniṭṭhānanti āha 『『chandarāgaajjhosānā taṇhā evā』』ti. Ārakkhanimittaṃ dvārapidahanamañjūsāgopanādinā suṭṭhu rakkhaṇanimittaṃ. Pāpāni karonto paribhoganimittaṃ ratto giddho gadhito mucchito hutvā migova paribhuñjananimittaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjatīti evaṃ pariyenārakkhā paribhoganimittaṃ. Pamādo tividho taṇhāya vasena kathitoti dassento 『『tividho taṇhāyāti vutta』』nti āha.

Avisesena vuttanti 『『katamena upādānena saupādānā』』ti vibhāgena pucchitvāpi 『『avijjāya ca taṇhāya cā』』ti avinibbhujitvā vuttaṃ. Taṇhañca avijjañca caturupādānaṃvasenāti kāmupādānādīnaṃ catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ vasena vibhajitvā khandhānaṃ dukkhabhāvena dukkhasaccabhāvena saha pariññeyyabhāvaṃ, upādānānaṃ samudayabhāvena samudayasaccabhāvena saha pahātabbabhāvaṃ dassetīti yojanā.

我為您直譯這段巴利文： 29.因為具有破壞不善法的自性,或者因為具有在斷除不善、成就善法中建立的自性,故稱精進界。如是狀態即具足戒等。欲界等三界即是三界。因為征服它故稱為三界之主死王。雖然在無始輪迴中長久得到安立,但因為短時間修習的善法能夠斷除,所以煩惱是軟弱的,因此說"軟弱無力"。所以說"軟弱者被征服"。 此語即此偈句。是定的近因,此中應當配合:定的因即引導趣向寂止。其餘也是此理。障礙即是貪等。如是已註釋即是已以為教說的近因而作義理註釋的意思。 "那"即那教說。"其"即以類同等方式的週轉。爲了智慧成熟者的特殊證悟。在得、決定、執取、慳等中,得即是獲得色等所緣。它在尋求時有,所以以尋求的說明而包含。決定即是"我將有這麼多色所緣,這麼多聲等所緣,這麼多為我的,這麼多為他人的,這麼多我將受用,這麼多我將貯藏"如是轉起的尋思決定。它因為是虛言的因,是尋求的根本,所以也以尋求的說明而包含,執取和慳也是如此。其中執取是"這是我的"的執取。慳是"唯愿屬於我"而不能忍受與他人共有。因此古德如是說其字義:"因為轉起'唯愿這稀有屬於我,莫成為他人的稀有',所以稱為慳"。應當了知爲了受用的決定等包含在受用中。欲貪是弱貪。執著是以"這是我的"的渴愛方式的強烈確定,所以說"欲貪執著即是渴愛"。守護因即以關閉門戶、保護箱匣等而善加守護的因。造作惡業而受用因即如鹿一樣,有貪著、貪求、貪著、昏迷而受用的因而陷於放逸,如是遍尋守護是受用因。顯示放逸以渴愛的方式說三種,所以說"說三種渴愛"。 總說即雖以"以何取而有取?"的分別而問,卻說"以無明和渴愛"而不分別。渴愛和無明以四取的方式即以欲取等四取的方式分別,顯示諸蘊以苦的狀態、以苦諦的狀態而應遍知,諸取以集的狀態、以集諦的狀態而應斷除,這是配合。

30.『『Yo』』tiādinā vutto tividho pamādo pariyesati, ārakkhaṇañca karoti, paribhoganimittañcāti sambandho. Pamādo hi pamajjantassa puggalassa bhogānaṃ pariyesanāya, ārakkhaṇāya ca hetubhūto kattubhāvena upacarito, paribhogassa pana nimittaṃ. 『『Tappaṭipakkhenā』』ti padassa atthaṃ vivarati 『『appamādānuyogenā』』ti, tena samathabhāvaṃ dasseti . Khepanāti khayapāpanā. Vodānapakkhavisabhāgadhammavasenāti vodānapakkho ca so pamādassa visabhāgadhammo cāti vodāna…pe… dhammo, samatho, tassa vasena.

Samathe satīti adhiṭṭhānabhūte jhāne sati, taṃ pādakaṃ katvāti attho. Yā paññāti nāmarūpaparicchedādivasena pavattapaññā. Tenāha 『『ayaṃ vipassanā』』ti. Pahīnesūti pahīyamānesu.

Vodānapakkhanti ārambhadhātuādivodānapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā. Visabhāgadhammavasenāti pamādavaseneva. Sabhāgadhammavasenāti pubbe nikkhittassa ārambhadhātuādivodānadhammassa samathādisabhāgadhammavasena.

Puna apariyodāpaniyaṃ sikhāppattapariyodāpanaṃ idhādhippetanti āha 『『taṃ pana arahattena hotī』』ti.

Mohasamuṭṭhānatā vuttā 『『moho eva samuṭṭhāna』』nti katvā. Aññathā pisuṇāvācāya dosasamuṭṭhānatā musāvādassa viya mohasamuṭṭhānabhāvā vattabbā siyā.

Kammapathabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ, appattānañca akusaladhammānaṃ 『『sabbapāpa』』nti padena pariggahitattā vuttaṃ 『『kammapathakammavibhāgenā』』ti.

31.Sesapadānanti 『『kusalassa upasampadā』』tiādīnaṃ (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124; peṭako. 29) gāthāya avasiṭṭhapadānaṃ. Yathādhigatanti attanā adhigatappakāraṃ, pacchā bhūmidisā.

Upariyāpentīti manussalokato upariṭṭhimaṃ devalokaṃ gamenti.

32.Yathāvuttassa dhammassāti sīlassa ca maggassa ca. Taṇhāvijjādīnanti ādisaddena tadekaṭṭhakilesā gayhanti, tesaṃ padaṭṭhānadhammā ca. Samathavipassanādīnanti ādisaddena sāmaññaphalānaṃ saṅgaho. Yadaggena cettha 『『nirodho rakkhatī』』ti vutto, tadaggena maggo rakkhaṇakiriyāya karaṇaṃ vuttaṃ 『『yena rakkhatī』』ti. Visabhāgadhammavasena purimāni sabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena pacchimāni saccāni niddhāritānīti yojetabbaṃ.

Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 30"凡是"等所說的三種放逸會尋求、作守護和受用因,這是其關聯。因為放逸對放逸的人來說,是尋求和守護財物的原因,以作者的方式而說,但對受用來說是因。解釋"與其對立"這詞為"隨順不放逸",由此顯示止的狀態。消除即令達滅盡。以清凈分不同法的方式即是清凈分,它是放逸的不同法,即清凈...乃至...法,即止,以其方式。 當有止時即當有作為所依的禪定時,即以它為基礎的意思。何等慧即以名色差別等方式轉起的慧。所以說"這是觀"。在斷除中即在正在斷除時。 清凈分即捨棄精進界等清凈分。以不同法的方式即僅以放逸的方式。以同類法的方式即以前所舍的精進界等清凈法的止等同類法的方式。 再者,這裡意指不再需要清凈的已達頂點的清凈,所以說"那是以阿羅漢果而有"。 說是癡生起,因為"唯癡是生起"。否則應當說是癡生起性,如離間語是瞋生起性的虛妄語一樣。 說"以業道業的分別"是因為"一切惡"之詞包攝了已達到和未達到業道性的不善法。 31.余詞即"善的成就"等(長部2.90等)偈頌的其餘諸詞。如所證即自己所證得的方式,後來成為地分。 上升即從人界上升到天界。 32.如所說的法即戒和道。渴愛、無明等,等字包攝與其同分的煩惱,及其近因法。止、觀等,等字包攝沙門果。此中因為說"滅諦護持",所以說以道為護持作用的工具,即"以此護持"。應當配合:以不同法的方式確定前諸諦,以同類法週轉的方式確定后諸諦。 週轉理路分別註釋完畢。 8.分別理路分別註釋

33.Dhammesūti puññādidānādibhedabhinnesu sabhāvadhammesu. Tattha labbhamānoti tesu yathāvuttesu dhammesu labbhamāno. Bhūmivibhāgoti kāmāvacarādidassanādibhūmippabhedo. Padaṭṭhānavibhāgoti te puññādidhammā yesaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ vā ye dhammā padaṭṭhānaṃ, tabbibhāgo. Yesaṃ suttānanti mūlapadaṭṭhānabhūtānaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ catunnaṃ suttānaṃ vasena. Asaṅkaravavatthānena hi etesu suttesu sātisayaṃ dhammā vibhattā nāma honti. Tenāha 『『visesato』』ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasuttāni evettha gahitānīti? Nayidamevaṃ nikkhamanapariyosānabhāvena itaresampi gahitattā. Yato hi nissaṭā vāsanābhāgiyā dhammā, te saṃkilesabhāgiyā. Yaṃpariyosānā nibbedhabhāgiyā dhammā, te asekkhabhāgiyāti dvayaggahaṇeneva itarampi dvayaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tenāha 『『imesaṃ catunnaṃ suttānaṃ desanāyā』』ti. Imāni cattāri suttānīti pāḷiyā, vakkhamānāya desanāya vā itaradvayasaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, na paṭikkhepo.

Tenevāti niyamassa akatattā, tato ca tena tannissitena ca brahmacārī bhavatīti siddhaṃ hoti. Eva-saddo vā samuccayattho daṭṭhabbo. Siyā tassa paṭikkhepoti tassa aṭṭhasamāpattibrahmacariyassa siyā paṭikkhepo. Evaṃ sati sāvasesā desanā siyā.

Tadaṅgādippahānadvayaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ idha gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti 『『samucchedapaṭippassaddhippahānānaṃ vasenā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hettha keci 『『tenevā』』ti paṭhanti. 『『Teneva brahmacariyenāti paṭhantī』』ti idaṃ 『『saṃvarasīle ṭhito』』ti (netti. 33) ettha vuttaṃ pāḷivikappaṃ sandhāya vadati. 『『Yasmā…pe… vakkhatī』』ti idaṃ pacchimapāṭhasseva yuttatāya kāraṇavacanaṃ.

Kathaṃ mantāti? Anibbedhasabhāvattā mahaggatapuññānaṃ na nibbedhabhāgiyasuttena saṅgaho, vāsanābhāgiyattā pana vāsanābhāgiyasutteneva saṅgahoti. Tadupasaṅgā hi pacchimo eva pāṭho yuttataro. Itarathā sāvasesā desanā bhaveyya. Tenāha 『『na hi…pe… desetī』』ti.

Saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyānaṃ parato vakkhamānattā vuttaṃ 『『vakkhamānānaṃ…pe… vasenā』』ti. 『『Sabbato』』ti idaṃ pubbaparāpekkhaṃ. Tassa parāpekkhatāya 『『sabbatobhāgena ekādasasu ṭhānesu pakkhipitvā』』ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ yojitaṃ. Tattha padādike vicayahārapadatthe sandhāya 『『ekādasasu ṭhānesū』』ti vuttaṃ. Pubbapekkhatāya pana 『『sabbatobhāgena desanāya phalenā』』tiādinā yojetabbaṃ.

Saṃkilesabhāgiyānaṃ taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā desanānayo veditabbo. Phalaṃ apāyadukkhena manussesu dobhaggiyena. Asekkhabhāgiyānaṃ asekkhehi sīlakkhandhādīhi desanānayo. Phalaṃ aggaphalena ca anupādisesāya ca nibbānadhātuyā veditabbaṃ. Itaresaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttameva. Kāmarāgabyāpādauddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanaggahaṇena saṃkilesabhāgiyānaṃ, virāgaggahaṇena asekkhaggahaṇeneva ca asekkhabhāgiyānaṃ vakkhamānattā vuttaṃ 『『vakkhamānānaṃ…pe… vasenā』』ti. Padapadatthavicārayuttiniddhāraṇamukhena dhammavibhattiādivicāro kātabboti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ 『『vicayena…pe… tabbānī』』ti vuttanti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ 『『vicayena…pe… dassetī』』ti vuttaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 33.諸法中即在以福等、施等差別而區分的自性諸法中。其中所得即在如上所說的諸法中所得。地分別即欲界等、見等地的差別。近因分別即那些福等諸法是什麼的近因,或什麼法是它們的近因,其分別。以何等經即以作為根本近因的雜染分等四種經的方式。因為以無混雜的確立,這些經中的諸法特別稱為分別。所以說"特別地"。若如此,為何這裡只取習氣分和通達分經?不是這樣,因為以出離為終點而包攝其他。因為習氣分諸法所出離的,即是雜染分。通達分諸法所終點的,即是無學分,所以取兩者也就包攝了其他兩者。所以說"以這四經的教說"。應當了知四經即經文,或將說的教說包攝其他二者,而非否定。 正因如此即因為不作限定,所以由此及依此而成為梵行者成立。或者eva(正)字應當瞭解為合集義。會有其否定即會有那八定梵行的否定。若如此,教說將成為有餘。 因為暫時等兩種斷在這裡作為近因而不入計數,所以說"以斷絕、止息斷的方式"。因此這裡有些人讀作"正因如此"。"讀作'以那梵行'"這是就"住于防護戒"(曼尼貝經33)中所說的經文異讀而說。"因為...乃至...將說"這是說明後讀法才合理的理由。 怎麼思維呢?因為廣大福業不是通達性,所以不歸入通達分經,但因為是習氣性,所以歸入習氣分經。因為緣於此,所以後讀法更合理。否則教說將成為有餘。所以說"因為...乃至...教說"。 因為雜染分和無學分將在後面說,所以說"以...乃至...將說的方式"。"一切"這是顧及前後。由於它顧及後面,所以在註釋中配合為"以一切方式放入十一處"。其中關於詞等考察理路的詞義,所以說"在十一處"。但由於顧及前面,所以應當配合為"以一切方面的教說和果"等。 應當了知雜染分以渴愛雜染等的教說方式。果以惡趣苦和人間不幸。無學分以無學戒蘊等的教說方式。果應當以最上果和無餘涅槃界了知。其他在經中已說。因為以欲貪、瞋恚、上分結的說明而說雜染分,以離貪和無學的說明而說無學分將在後面說,所以說"以...乃至...將說的方式"。爲了顯示應當通過詞、詞義、考察、論證、確定等方面而作法分別等考察,所以在經中說"以考察...乃至...應當",因此在註釋中說"以考察...乃至...顯示"。

34.Evanti iti. Dhammeti vuttasabhāgadhamme. Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehīti sāmaññavisesena visiṭṭhehi. Dve dhammā sādhāraṇāti dve ime dhammā yehi sabhāgadhammā sādhāraṇā nāma honti. Katame dve? Nāmaṃ, vatthu ca. Tattha nāmaṃ nāmapaññatti, taṃmukheneva saddato tadatthāvagamo. Saddena ca sāmaññarūpeneva tathārūpassa atthassa gahaṇaṃ, na visesarūpena, tasmā saddavacanīyā atthā sādhāraṇarūpanāmāyattagahaṇīyatāya nāmasādhāraṇā vuttā. Vatthūti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Yattha hi ye dhammā pavattanti, tesaṃ sabbesaṃ te dhammā sādhāraṇāti pavattiṭṭhānasaṅkhātānaṃ vatthūnaṃ sādhāraṇā. Yasmā panidaṃ dvayaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sādhāraṇabhāve pakatibhūtaṃ sabhāvabhūtaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ 『『dve dhammāti duve pakatiyo』』ti. Ekasantatipatitatāyāti samānasantatipavattiyā. Tenāha 『『samānavatthukā』』ti. Dassanapahātabbānañhi yathā micchattaniyatasattā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ aniyatāpīti ubhaye hi te samānavatthukā. Esa nayo itaresupi. Sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsā hi bhinnasabhāvāpete dhammā dassanena pahātabbataṃ nātivattantīti te nāmasāmaññataṃ pattā, rūparāgādayo ca bhāvanāya pahātabbatanti āha 『『pahānekaṭṭhā nāmasādhāraṇā』』ti. Yathā pana 『『vatthūnaṃ sādhāraṇā vatthusādhāraṇā』』ti ayamattho labbhati, evaṃ 『『vatthunā sādhāraṇā vatthusādhāraṇā』』ti ayampi attho labbhatīti dassento 『『sahajekaṭṭhā vatthusādhāraṇā』』ti āha. Te hi aññamaññaṃ phusanādisabhāvato bhinnāpi yasmiṃ pavattanti, tena vatthunā sādhāraṇā nāma honti. Ettha ca labbhamānampi kusalādināmasādhāraṇaṃ anāmasitvā vatthusādhāraṇā tāva yojitāti veditabbā. Paṭipakkhādīhīti ādisaddena samānaphalatāsahabyatādike saṅgaṇhāti. Sesapadesūti 『『puthujjanassā』』tiādivākyesu. Kathaṃ? Tattha hi puthujjanassa, sotāpannassa ca sambhavato anāgāmino, arahato ca asambhavatotiādinā yojetabbaṃ.

Kathaṃ te odhiso gahitāti kenākārena te 『『sādhāraṇā』』ti vuttadhammā bhāgaso gahitā. 『『Amukassa, amukassa cā』』ti ayañhettha attho. Sāmaññabhūtā dhammā sādhāraṇā nāma, evaṃ sante kathaṃ tesaṃ micchattaniyatāniyatādivasena vibhāgena pavattiṭṭhānatā vuccati, na vattabbanti adhippāyo. Atha vibhāgena taṃ vattabbaṃ, nanu te sādhāraṇāti na vattabbamevāti? Evaṃ sādhāraṇāti micchattaniyatānaṃ, aniyatānanti imesaṃ ubhayesaṃyeva te dhammā sādhāraṇā. Tenāha – 『『na sabbasattānaṃ sādhāraṇatāya sādhāraṇā』』ti. 『『Yasmā』』tiādinā tattha kāraṇamāha, tenetaṃ dasseti 『『keci dhammā kesañcideva dhammānaṃ sādhāraṇā honti, aññesaṃ asādhāraṇā』』ti. Tenāha 『『paṭiniyatañhi tesaṃ pavattiṭṭhāna』』nti.

Itarathāti aniyatapavattiṭṭhānatāya sabbesaṃ sādhāraṇā, asādhāraṇā vā siyuṃ, tathā sati. Tathā vohāroti 『『sādhāraṇā, asādhāraṇā』』ti ca ayaṃ vohāro sāmaññā eva na bhaveyya. Ete eva dhammāti 『『sādhāraṇā』』ti vuttadhammā eva. Evanti 『『micchattaniyatāna』』ntiādinā vuttappakārena. Niyatavisayā paricchinnappavattiṭṭhānā. 『『Yopī』』tiādi puggalādhiṭṭhānena vuttassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ. 『『Na hī』』tiādinā anvayato, byatirekato ca tamevatthaṃ vibhāveti. Sesepīti 『『bhāvanāpahātabbā』』ti evamādimhipi.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 34.如是即是。法即所說的同類法。以共與不共的狀態即以共相和別相而殊勝。兩法是共的即這兩法使同類法稱為共的。哪兩法?名和事。其中名是名施設,通過它從聲音而瞭解其義。以聲音只能以共相方式把握如是義,不能以別相方式,所以說聲音所詮表的義以共相名處所攝而稱為名共。事即轉起處。因為諸法在何處轉起,對那些一切法來說,這些法是共的,所以稱為轉起處所說的諸事共。又因為這二者對那些法的共性是本性的、自性的,所以說"兩法即兩種本性"。以入於一相續即以同一相續的轉起。所以說"同一事"。因為見所斷的如邪性決定者的轉起處,如是不決定者也是,所以這兩者都是同一事。其他也是此理。因為身見、疑、戒禁取雖是不同自性的法但不超越見所斷性,所以它們達到名共性,色貪等是修所斷,所以說"斷一處是名共"。又如"諸事的共即事共"此義可得,如是"與事共即事共"此義也可得,所以顯示說"生一處是事共"。因為它們雖然以觸等自性而有差別,但在何處轉起,即與彼事為共。此中應當了知雖可得善等名共而未提及,先配合事共。以對治等,等字包攝同果性、同伴性等。余處即在"凡夫"等句中。如何?因為此中應當配合:因為凡夫、預流者有,而不還者、阿羅漢無等。 如何它們被分別取即以何種方式那些說為"共"的法被分別取?"某某和某某的"即是此中的意思。共相的法稱為共,如是時,如何說它們以邪性決定、不決定等方式有轉起處性,不應說,這是其意趣。若應以分別說那個,難道不應說它們為共?如是共即對這兩者 - 邪性決定者和不決定者,這些法是共的。所以說"不是以對一切眾生共的方式而共"。以"因為"等說其中的理由,由此顯示"某些法對某些法是共的,對其他是不共的"。所以說"因為它們的轉起處是決定的"。 另一方面即以不定轉起處性對一切是共或不共,若如此。如是言說即"共、不共"此言說即不成為共相。這些法即說為"共"的法。如是即以"邪性決定者"等所說的方式。決定境域即限定的轉起處。"若"等是以補特伽羅為所依而說明其義。以"因為不"等從正面和反面顯示其義。其餘即在"修所斷"等中也是。

Paccattaniyatoti pāṭipuggaliko. Itarassāti apaccattaniyatassa. Tathāti asādhāraṇabhāvena. Koci dhammo kañci dhammaṃ upādāya sādhāraṇopi samāno tadaññaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇopi hotīti āha 『『sādhāraṇāvidhuratāyā』』ti. Tenāha 『『taṃ taṃ upādāyā』』tiādi. Tathā hi 『『dhammatā』』ti vuttapaṭhamamaggaṭṭhatā dīpitā, tādisānaṃ eva anekesaṃ ariyānaṃ vasena sādhāraṇāti . Paṭhamassāti aṭṭhamakassa. Dutiyassāti sotāpannassa. Puna aṭṭhamakassāti 『『aṭṭhamakassa, anāgāmissa cā』』ti ettha vuttaaṭṭhamakassa. Tenāha 『『anāgāmimaggaṭṭhassā』』ti. Aggaphalaṭṭhato paṭṭhāya paṭilomato gaṇiyamāno paṭhamamaggaṭṭho aṭṭhamako, maggaṭṭhatāya, pahīyamānakilesatāya ca sabbepi maggaṭṭhā aṭṭhamakā viyāti aṭṭhamakā, 『『ekacittakkhaṇato uddhaṃ na tiṭṭhatīti aṭṭhamako』』ti apare niruttinayena. 『『Sekkhā』』ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇanti sambandho. Itaresūti 『『bhabbābhabbā』』ti vuttesu anariyesu. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ 『『hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāyā』』ti.

Niyāmāvakkantiyāti avakkantaniyāmatāya. Ñāṇuttharassāti ñāṇādhikassa. Tathāvidhapaccayasamāyogeti ñāṇavisesapaccayasamavāye. Yathā hi ñāṇabalena dandhābhiññatā na hoti, evaṃ paṭipadāpaṭipannopi sukhena visosīyatīti. Sā hi sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā taṃsamaṅgino ñāṇuttarattā vipassanāya padaṭṭhānanti vuttā.

Dhammato anapetā cintā dhammacintā, yonisomanasikārena pavattitattā dhammesu cintā, dhammo vā ñāṇaṃ, tasmā dhammāvahā cintā dhammacintā, cintāmayañāṇassa hetubhūtā cintāti attho.

Pāḷiyaṃ sutamayapaññāggahaṇena 『『ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā…pe… tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā hontī』』tiādi (a. ni. 8.2) suttapadasaṅgaho attho pariggahito, tathā yonisomanasikāraggahaṇena 『『so 『anicca』nti yoniso manasi karotī』』tiādinā vutto upāyamanasikāro pariggahito. Sammādiṭṭhiggahaṇena 『『sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāveti vivekanissita』』ntiādinā vuttā sammādiṭṭhi pariggahitāti dassento āha 『『atha kho…pe… dassetu』』nti. Sesanti 『『dhammasvākkhātatā』』ti evamādi.

Yassa ca pubbe attho na saṃvaṇṇito, tattha kalyāṇamittatāya āyatanagato pasādo, cittavūpasamo ca phalanti dassento 『『sappurisa…pe… padaṭṭhāna』』nti āha. Attasammāpaṇihitattā pāpajegucchinibbidādibahulova hotīti dassento āha 『『attha…pe… padaṭṭhāna』』nti. Dhammo svākkhāto ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā sabbasampattipāripūrihetūti dassento 『『dhammasvākkhātatā…pe… padaṭṭhāna』』nti āha. Kusalamūlaropanā hi samāpattipariyosānāti . Saṅghasuṭṭhutāya saṅghassa suṭṭhubhāvāya saṅghassa sappatissatāya 『『suṭṭhu, bhante』』ti vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvāya. Itaraṃ suviññeyyameva.

Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 個別決定即對個別補特伽羅。其他即非個別決定。如是即以不共的方式。任何法相對於某法雖是共的,但相對於其他則成為不共的,所以說"以共不相違性"。所以說"相對於彼彼"等。如是因為說"法性"是顯示初道住,對如是多個聖者來說是共的。第一即第八。第二即預流者。再說第八即在"第八和不還者"中所說的第八。所以說"不還道住"。從最上果開始逆數時初道住是第八,由於道住性和所斷煩惱性,一切道住者如第八,其他人依詞源法說"因為不住於一心剎那之上故稱第八"。"有學"之名是共的,這是關聯。其他即在所說"可能、不可能"的非聖者中。所以在經中說"相對於低、勝、中"。 由決定入即由入決定性。智勝即智增上。如是類緣和合即殊勝智的諸緣會合。因為如以智力而不成為遲知,如是修行道者也易於枯竭。因為那樂行速知因具備者的智勝性是觀的近因,所以如是說。 不離法的思維是法思維,因為以如理作意而轉起故是諸法中的思維,或者法即是智,所以引生法的思維是法思維,即是思所成智的因的思維,這是其義。 在經中以聞所成慧的說明包攝"彼等諸法初善...乃至...如是之法他多聞"等經句之義,如是以如理作意的說明包攝"他如理作意'無常'"等所說的方便作意。以正見的說明包攝"修習依遠離的正見"等所說的正見,爲了顯示這些所以說"然而...乃至...顯示"。其餘即"法善說性"等。 對於前面未註釋義處,顯示善友性是處所生起的凈信,心寂止是果,所以說"善士...乃至...近因"。顯示因為自己正確安立故多厭惡罪惡、厭離等,所以說"義...乃至...近因"。顯示法善說從初至終是一切成就圓滿的因,所以說"法善說性...乃至...近因"。因為善根植入即是定的終點。僧正性即僧眾的正性,僧眾的恭敬性,即"善哉,尊者"的領受言語性。其他易於了知。 分別理路分別註釋完畢。 9.週轉理路分別註釋;

35.Sammādiṭṭhissa…pe… nijjiṇṇā bhavatīti ettha yathā maggasammādiṭṭhivasenattho vutto, evaṃ kammassakatākammapathasammādiṭṭhīnampi vasena attho labbhateva. Kammapathakathā hesā. Yathāvuttenākārenāti 『『avimuttāva samānā』』ti, 『『avimuttiya』』nti ca vuttappakārena. Micchābhinivesavasenāti asammāsambuddhaṃ eva sammāsambuddhoti, aniyyānikaṃ eva niyyānikoti, asantaṃ eva pana santanti, anariyaṃ eva ariyoti viparītābhinivesavasena . Micchādhimokkhoti ayāthāvapasādo, ayāthāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ vā. Uppannamoho micchāvimuttiñāṇadassananti sambandho.

1. Vādānaṃ vā anuvādā vādānuvādā, tesaṃ vādānaṃ upādāti attho. Vādānupavattiyoti vādānaṃ dosānaṃ anupavattiyo.

Antadvayaparivattananti kāmasukhaattakilamathānuyogasaṅkhātassa antadvayassa paṭipakkhavasena parivattanaṃ.

Etesupi vāresūti 『『niyyāniko dhammo tesaṃ adhammo, sukho tesaṃ adhammo』』ti ca imesu vāresu. Vuttanayenāti yadi attaparitāpanaṃ attano dukkhāpanaṃ dhammo, dhammassa paṭiviruddho adhammo siyā, dukkhassa ca sukhapaṭiviruddhanti jhānamaggaphalasukhassa, anavajjapaccayaparibhogasukhassa ca tesaṃ adhammabhāvo āpajjatīti evaṃ vattabbā. 『『Yaṃ yaṃ vā panātiādinā』』ti idaṃ avasesapāṭhāmasanaṃ. Ettha yaṃ yaṃ vā pana dhammanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā dhammaṃ, kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rocayati vā upagacchati vāti cittena rocati, diṭṭhiyā upagacchatīti. Tassa tassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkhoti tassa tassa rucitassa, upagatassa vā dhammassa yo paṭipakkho nāma. Svassa aniṭṭhato ajjhāpanno bhavatīti yo dhammo assa rucitassa, upagatassa vā dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkato abbhupagato hoti, tena paṭipakkhena desanāya parivattanaṃ parivattano hāroti attho. Tenāha 『『paṭipakkhassa lakkhaṇaṃ vibhāvetī』』ti.

Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

以下是巴利文的完整簡體中文翻譯： 35. 關於"正見"……等……變得衰竭，在這裡，正如依據道路正見已經說明的意義一樣，依據業是自己所有和業道正見的意義同樣可以得到。這是關於業道的解釋。按照已說明的方式，即"雖未解脫"，"未解脫"等已說明的方式。依據錯誤執著，即使沒有正自覺者也被認為是正自覺者，即使非引導的也被認為是引導的，即使非真實的也被認為是真實的，即使非聖的也被認為是聖的，這是依據顛倒執著。錯誤信念即不恰當的信賴，或不恰當的判斷。升起的迷惑是錯誤解脫的知見。 36. 關於論點，或論點的批評，論點批評，意思是這些論點的基礎。論點的延續是論點缺陷的持續。 兩種極端的轉變，即以欲樂和自我苦行為代表的兩種極端的對立面的轉變。 在這些情況下，即"對他們來說是非法的法，對他們來說是苦的法"等情況。按照已說明的方式，如果是自我折磨、給自己帶來痛苦的法，那麼與法相對立的就是非法，與苦相對立的是樂，即禪定、道路、果實的樂，以及無過失因緣的享受之樂，因此他們陷入非法狀態。"無論什麼"等是爲了包括其他文字。在這裡，"無論什麼法"意味著無論是什麼法，是善或不善，是可意或不可意。喜歡或接受，即心中喜歡或以見解接受。對於每一法來說，與之相對的是那個可意或已接受法的對立面。因此，他陷入對那個法的不喜歡中，即那個可意或已接受的法被其對立面否定和超越，通過該對立面的說明而轉變。因此說"闡明對立面的特徵"。 轉變段落的解釋到此結束。 10. 同義詞段落的解釋

37.Aññamaññehīti aññehi aññehi. Āyatinti paccavekkhaṇakāle. Kathañcīti yena kenaci pakārena, paṭhamaṃ vuttena pariyāyena appaṭivijjhanto aparena pariyāyena paṭivijjheyyāti adhippāyo. Pariyāyavacanaṃ niddisatīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Tasmiṃ khaṇeti pariyāyavacanassa vuttakkhaṇe. Vikkhittacittānanti ārammaṇantarehi vividhakhittacittānaṃ . Aññavihitānanti aññaṃ cintentānaṃ. Kasmā pana aññena pariyāyena tadatthāvabodhanaṃ, nanu tena vutte daḷhīkaraṇaṃ hotīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha 『『tenevā』』tiādi. Tattha tadaññesanti tehi vikkhittacittādīhi aññesaṃ, yehi paṭhamaṃ vacanaṃ sammadeva gahitaṃ. Tatthāti vuttavacaneneva punappunaṃ vacane. Adhigataanvatthatāya punarutti parivajjanatthaṃ visesanabhāvena tāhi tāhi saññāhipi ayampi saddo imassatthassa vācako, ayampi saddo imassatthassa vācakoti paññāpanehi. Desetabbassa tassa tassa atthassa attano citte upanibandhanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ. Tatthāti dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāyaṃ. Bījāvāpanaṃ hetusampādanaṃ.

Evaṃ bhagavato pariyāyadesanāyaṃ anekāni payojanāni vatvā idāni attano sammāsambuddhatāya evaṃ tathāgatā buddhalīlāya anekehi pariyāyehi dhammaṃ desentīti dassento 『『kiṃ bahunā』』tiādimāha.

Pāḷiyaṃ 『『pihā nāma yā vattamānassa atthassa patthanā』』ti paccuppannavisayataṃ dassetvā puna anāgatavisayataṃ dassetuṃ 『『seyyataraṃ vā』』tiādi vuttanti 『『anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayā taṇhā pihā』』ti āha.

Atthanipphattipaṭipālanāti imasmiṃ vā pade pihāya evatthavasena anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayabhāvadīpanato.

Dhammārammaṇeneva saṅgahitā 『『dhammārammaṇa』』ntveva gahaṇaṃ gatā. Catuvīsati padānīti ettha gehasitadomanassūpavicārādīnaṃ catunnaṃ chakkānaṃ vasena catuvīsa koṭṭhāsā.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： "相互"意為彼此之間。"延伸"意為在觀察思維的時候。"以某種方式"意為以任何方式，其含義是如果不能以第一種方式理解，就應該用另一種方式來理解。"說明替代詞語"是這樣連線的。所有情況都是如此。"在那一刻"意為說出替代詞語的那一刻。"心散亂者"意為心被各種不同對像分散的人們。"心在他處者"意為想著其他事情的人們。 為什麼要用另一種方式來理解其意義呢？難道用原來的方式表達不是更加鞏固嗎？針對這個質疑，故說"正是由於"等等。其中"其他人"意為除了那些心散亂等的人之外的其他人，即那些能正確理解第一次表達的人。"在其中"意為在已說之語中反覆說明。 因為已經理解了真實義，爲了避免重複，以特徵的方式，通過各種名相來說明：這個詞是這個意思的表達者，那個詞是那個意思的表達者。對於應當宣說的種種義理，要在自己的心中確立安置。"在其中"意為在法詞解分別中。播種是因緣的成就。 如此說明世尊用譬喻教法有諸多利益之後，現在為顯示如來以正等覺者的身份，以佛陀的風範用種種方式說法，而說"何須多言"等等。 在聖典中，先說明"渴望即是對現存事物的希求"來顯示其針對現在的特性，然後又說"或更好的"等來顯示其針對未來的特性，因此說"渴望是針對未來和現在事物的貪愛"。 "義利成就的護持"是在這個詞中，通過渴望的這種意義來顯示其針對未來和現在事物的性質。 僅以法所緣來攝持，被歸類為"法所緣"。"二十四項"在此是指依據與居家相關的憂苦尋思等四組六法而分為二十四類。

38.Sāyeva patthanākārena dhammanandītiādimāhāti ettha ayamattho – sā eva patthanākārena pavattiyā āsādipariyāyena vuttā taṇhā rūpādidhammesu nandanaṭṭhena dhammanandī. Tesaṃ eva piyāyanaṭṭhena dhammapemaṃ. Gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhānato dhammajjhosānanti.

Imināpīti na kevalaṃ 『『paññā pajānanā』』tiādiāveṇikapariyāyeneva vevacanaṃ vattabbaṃ, atha kho iminā ādhipateyyādisādhāraṇapariyāyenapi vevacanaṃ vattabbanti attho. Imināva nayenāti etena pariyāyavacanena . Na hi desanatthasādhanaṃ 『『itipi so bhagavā』』tiādipāḷinayadassananti dasseti. Balanipphattigatotiādīsu dasasu tathāgatabalesu nipphattiṃ pāripūriṃ gato. Sambodhipahānantarāyadesanā visesacodanāsu visāradabhāvasaṅkhātāni cattāri ñāṇāni patto adhigatoti vesārajjappatto.

Lobhajjhāsayādiajjhāsayaṃ visesena ativattoti ajjhāsayavītivatto. Atītahetusaṅkhepādisaṅkhepavirahitatāya asaṅkhepasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ, akuppadhammatāya guṇehi vā asaṅkhepaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ gato upagatoti asaṅkhepagato. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Uddheyyanti uddharitabbaṃ.

Dhammānussatiyaṃ evaṃ attho daṭṭhabboti sambandho. Saṃsāradukkhato pāti, santena sukhena rameti cāti vā pāraṃ.

Abhūtapubbattāti anuppannapubbattā, tenassa niccataṃva vibhāveti kenaci devatopasaggādinā anupasajjanīyattā anupasaṭṭhattā.

『『Duppassa』』ntipi pāḷi, duradhigamanti attho. Guṇasobhāsurabhibhāvenāti guṇehi sobhāya, sugandhibhāvena ca.

Yathā akkhaṇavedhī puggalo sippanipphattiyā rattandhakāratimisāya acirakkhaṇālokena atisukhumampi dūragataṃ lakkhaṃ vijjhati, evaṃ ariyasāvako sīlasampattiyā atisukhumaṃ nibbānaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ ekapaṭivedheneva paṭivijjhatīti āha 『『sippañca sīlaṃ akkhaṇavedhitāyā』』ti. Lokikanti nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ lokuttaradhammaolokanassāpi adhiṭṭhānabhāvato.

Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Paññattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

39.Bhagavato sābhāvikadhammakathāyāti attano bhāvo sabhāvo, sabhāvena nibbattā, tato vā āgatāti sābhāvikā, sā eva dhammakathāti sābhāvikadhammakathā, buddhānaṃ sāmukkaṃsikadhammakathāti attho , tāya karaṇabhūtāya dhammadesanāya anaññattepi kathādesanānaṃ upacārasiddhena bhedenevaṃ vuttaṃ, avayavasamudāyavibhāgena vā. Tenāha 『『kā ca pakatikathāya desanā? Cattāri saccānī』』ti. Idañhi atthassa desanāya abhedopacāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Tassā desanāya paññāpanā. Ayaṃ paññattihāroti saṅkhepeneva paññattihārassa sarūpamāha. Sāti yathāvuttadesanā. Tathā tathāti yathā yathā saccāni desetabbāni, tathā tathā. Kathañcetāni desetabbāni? Pariññeyyādippakārena. Yathādhippetanti adhippetānurūpaṃ, bodhaneyyabandhavānaṃ bodhanādhippāyānukūlanti attho. Atthanti desetabbatthaṃ, dukkhādiatthameva vā. Nikkhipatīti patiṭṭhāpeti. Yato 『『cattāro suttanikkhepā』』tiādi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā) aṭṭhakathāsu vuccati.

Tatthāti nikkhepadesanāyanti attho. Maggapakkhiyāti dukkhasaccato bahikatāti adhippāyo.

Yasmiṃ ṭhāneti yasmiṃ bhavādisaṅkhāte ṭhāne. Yathāvuttā desanāti caturāhārapaṭibaddharāgādimukhena vaṭṭadīpanī vuttappakārā desanā.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 38. 關於"那種渴望以欲求的形式成為法喜"等這段話中的含義是：正是那以欲求形式運作的、以希望等異名所說的貪愛，因為在色等諸法中有歡喜的特性而稱為法喜。對這些法的愛戀特性稱為法愛。因為吞噬后而安住于完成的狀態，所以稱為法執著。 "以此也"意味著不僅要用"智慧即是了知"等特殊的同義詞來說明，而且也要用這種增上等共通的方式來說明同義詞的意思。"以此方式"即是以這種替代詞語。因為並非通過"世尊確實如此"等聖典文句的方式來成就教說的意義。 "達到力量的成就"等，是指在十種如來力中達到圓滿成就。"具足無畏"是指獲得、證得在覺悟障礙的說法和特殊教誡方面的四種無畏智。 "超越諸種意樂"是指特別超越貪慾等意樂。"達到無縮減"是指達到、趣向被稱為無縮減的涅槃，因為它遠離過去因緣等的縮減，或因為其性質不動搖及其功德而不可縮減、不可計數。其餘的很容易理解。"應當拔除"即是應當提取。 "在法隨念中應當如此理解其義"，這是其關聯。"彼岸"是因為它能護持離開輪迴之苦，也因為以寂靜之樂使人歡喜。 "從未有過"是指從未生起過，由此顯示它的常住性，因為不會被任何天神危害等所侵擾，所以是不受侵擾的。 "難見"也是聖典用語，意思是難以通達。"以功德莊嚴的勝妙性"是指以功德的莊嚴和妙香的性質。 如同善射手由於技藝的成就，即使在夜晚黑暗中僅憑瞬間的光明也能射中遠處極其微細的目標，同樣地，聖弟子依靠戒的圓滿，能以一次證悟而通達極其微細的涅槃和四聖諦法，因此說"技藝和戒都如射手般精確"。"世間的"應當視為僅是比喻，因為它也是出世間法觀察的基礎。 同義詞理趣分別註釋終。 施設理趣分別註釋 39. "世尊自然的說法"是指：自己的本性即是自性，由自性而生，或從其而來稱為自然的，這就是自然說法，即是諸佛的殊勝說法。雖然說法和教說實際上沒有差別，但通過慣用語的區分而如此說，或是通過部分與整體的區分。因此說："什麼是本性說法的教說？即是四聖諦。"這是從意義和教說不可分的慣用說法來說的。那教說的施設。這就簡要地說明了施設理趣的本質。"它"指前述的教說。"如是如是"是指應當如何如何地教說諸諦。這些應當如何教說呢？以應遍知等方式。"如所意欲"是指符合意欲，意思是隨順應當覺悟者的覺悟意願。"義"是指應當教說的義理，或是苦等的義理。"安置"是指確立。因此在註釋書中說"有四種經典安置"等。 "其中"是指在安置教說中的意思。"屬於道分"的意思是被置於苦諦之外。 "在某處"是指在有等所說的處所。"如上所說的教說"是指通過四食所繫的貪等來顯示輪迴的前述教說。

41.Teparivaṭṭavasenāti etthāpi 『『saccesū』』ti yojetabbaṃ. Pariññāpaññattīti āhāti sambandho. Ajjhattarato, samāhitoti padadvayena samādhānavisiṭṭhaṃ ajjhattaratatābhāvanaṃ dīpeti gocarajjhattatādīpanato. Kevalo hi ajjhattasaddo ajjhattajjhattagocarajjhattesupi vattati. Ajjhattaratatāvisiṭṭhañca samādhānaṃ sātisayaṃ cittaṭṭhitiṃ dīpetīti imamatthaṃ dasseti 『『samādhānavisiṭṭhassā』』tiādinā.

Āsajjanaṭṭhenāti āsaṅganaṭṭhena. Tathā dassananti atathābhūtassāpi bhabbarūpassa viya attano vidaṃsanaṃ. Alakkhikoti vilakkhiko.

Kāmānanti kāmāvacaradhammānaṃ. Rūpānanti rūpāvacaradhammānaṃ. Nissaraṇanti kāmānaṃ rūpāvacaradhammā nissaraṇaṃ, tesaṃ arūpāvacaradhammā nissaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ taṃsabhāvānanti sauttarasabhāvānaṃ. Tathāti yathā saṅkhatadhammānaṃ nissaraṇabhāvato, kilesasamucchedakassa ariyamaggassa ārammaṇabhāvato ca attheva asaṅkhatā dhātu, tathā vuccamānenāpi kāraṇena attheva asaṅkhatā dhātūti dasseti. Katthaci visayeti asaṅkhatadhātuṃ sandhāya vadati. Aviparītatthoti bhūtattho. 『『Yato kho bho ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti, ettāvatā kho bho ayaṃ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto hoti (dī. ni. 1.94), sapakaṭṭhanibbānabhāvino』』ti ca evamādīsu upacāravuttisabbhāvato. Yathā taṃ sīhasaddoti yathā 『『sīho māṇavako』』tiādinā māṇavakādīsu upacāravuttinā vattamāno migarāje bhūtatthavisaye diṭṭho, evaṃ nibbānasaddopi kāmaguṇarūpajjhānasamaṅgitāsu upacāravuttiyā vattamāno katthaci visaye aviparītattho. Yattha ca visaye aviparītattho, sā asaṅkhatā dhātu. Hatthatale saāmalakaṃ viya ñeyyaṃ paccakkhato passantassa ekappamāṇassa satthuvacanamevettha pamāṇanti dassento 『『kiṃ vā etāya yutticintāyā』』tiādimāha. 『『Paṭiññātassa atthassa siddhiyā pakāsanāpaññattī』』ti nigamaṃ sandhāyāhāti.

Paññattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

42.Indriyehīti karaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ 『『maggena gacchatī』』tiādīsu viya, 『『pharasunā chindatī』』ti evamādīsu viya ca. Otaraṇāti anuppavesanā.

Paññākkhandhe saṅgaṇhanavasena sammāsaṅkappo viyāti yojanā. Adhicittaanuyuttānaṃ saddahanussahanupaṭṭhānasamādahanehi saddhādīsu upakarontesu eva paññā dassanakiccaṃ sādhetīti dassento 『『saddhā..pe… vuttānī』』ti āha. No ca bhavaṅgāti tesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ pavattikāraṇatābhāvaṃ dasseti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 41. 關於"依三轉"，這裡也應當加上"于諸諦中"。"遍知的施設"等是其關聯。"內心喜樂、入定"這兩個詞表明瞭以定為特徵的內心喜樂的修習，因為它顯示了所緣的內在性。單獨的"內"字也可用於內在的內在、所緣的內在。而以內心喜樂為特徵的定表明殊勝的心的安住，因此以"以定為特徵"等來顯示這個意義。 "以執著義"意為以執取義。"如是顯示"意為即使非真實的也如同有可能的一樣顯示自己。"無福"意為反福。 "諸欲"是指欲界諸法。"諸色"是指色界諸法。"出離"是指色界諸法是欲的出離，無色界諸法是它們的出離。"如是彼等自性"是指有上位自性的諸法。"如是"是顯示：正如因為是有為法的出離，以及是斷除煩惱的聖道的所緣，所以確實有無為界；同樣地，由所說的原因也確實有無為界。"在某處境界"是指無為界。"不顛倒義"是指真實義。 因為在"先生，當此我以五種欲功德具足受用時，此我即已達到現法最上涅槃"和"實現近似涅槃"等處有比喻用法的存在。"如同獅子聲"意思是：如同"獅子般的青年"等用於青年等的比喻用法，在獸王上見到真實義的領域；同樣地，涅槃之聲雖然以比喻用法運用於具足欲功德和色界禪那等處，但在某些境界上是不顛倒義。在哪個境界是不顛倒義，那就是無為界。爲了顯示在此唯有如手掌上的庵摩羅果那樣親見所知的無上師之言才是量度，所以說"何須這樣的理性思維"等。這是針對"爲了成就所承認的義理而有顯示的施設"這個結論而說的。 施設理趣分別註釋終。 深入理趣分別註釋 42. "以諸根"是工具格的用法，如同"以道路而行"等和"以斧而砍"等。"深入"意為進入。 "如同正思惟包含在慧蘊中"是這樣連線的。爲了顯示對於專修增上心者，當信等以信解、策勵、現起、等持來幫助時，智慧才能成就見的作用，所以說"信等"。"非是有分"是顯示那些行不是其活動的原因。

43.Tathā vuttoti 『『nissayo』』ti vutto. Cetanāsīsena taṇhaṃ eva vadati cetanāsahacaraṇato.

Rattassāti maggena asamucchinnarāgassa. Yena puggalo 『『ratto』』ti vuccati, tassa rāgassa sambandhinī sukhā vedanā vuttā tattha tassa anusayanato. Tenāha 『『sukhāya…pe… vutta』』nti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tenāha 『『tathā』』tiādi.

Tāni eva indriyānīti sukhasomanassupekkhindriyāni. 『『Saṅkhārapariyāpannānī』』ti vacanaṃ sandhāyāha 『『idha vedanāsīsena cetanā vuttā』』ti. Na hi vedanā saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannā hoti. Taṇhāya, diṭṭhiyāti ca upayoge karaṇavacananti dassento 『『taṇhāyā』』tiādimāha. Idāni upayogavaseneva 『『taṇhāyā』』tiādīnaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yathā vā』』tiādimāha. Tattha sesadhammānanti taṇhāvajjitaavisiṭṭhadhammānaṃ. Taṇhāya nissayabhāveti yadā taṇhā tesaṃ nissayo hoti.

Taṇhāya sesadhammānaṃ paccayabhāveti yadā sesadhammā taṇhāpaccayā honti. 『『Karajakāyasannissitā』』ti iminā vedanādikkhandhattayanissitāpi gahitā kāyappassaddhibhāvato. Kāraṇabhāvanti paramparahetubhāvaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhiupayenāti diṭṭhiupayena ca diṭṭhisahagatataṇhāupayena ca.

『『Āgatītiidhāgati, gatīti peccabhavo』』ti padadvayena vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ pāḷiyaṃ 『『āgatigatīpi na bhavantī』』ti vuttaṃ. Idha huranti dvārārammaṇadhammā dassitā āsannadūrabhāvehi dvārārammaṇehi vinivattetvā gahitattā. Idha dvārappavattadhammā 『『ubhayamantarenā』』ti padassa atthabhāvena vuttā. Catubyūhahāre pana anindriyabaddharūpadhammā tathā vuttā. Kāraṇabhūtena anantarapaccayabhūtena, upanissayapaccayabhūtena ca. Ye dhammā upādāya 『『attā』』ti samaññā, tesaṃ viññāṇādidhammānaṃ abhāvena anuppādadhammataṃ āpāditattāti attho. 『『Anissitassa calitaṃ natthī』』tiādinā paṭilomato paccayabhāvo dassitoti dassento pāḷiyaṃ 『『esevanto dukkhassāti paṭiccasamuppādo』』ti vatvā nanu 『『avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā』』tiādiko paṭiccasamuppādoti codanaṃ sandhāya yathāvuttassa paṭiccasamuppādabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ 『『so duvidho』』tiādinā lokiyalokuttaravasena paṭiccasamuppādo vibhatto. Tadatthatāyāti vītarāgavimuttiatthatāya. Tabbhāvanti lokuttarapaṭiccasamuppādabhāvaṃ.

Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

45.Sodhetināmāti pucchitamatthaṃ hatthatale ṭhapitaāmalakaṃ viya paccakkhato dassento niggumbaṃ nijjaṭaṃ katvā vivaranto tabbisayaaññāṇasaṃsayādimalāpanayanena sodheti, evaṃ sodhento ca padassa atthena abhedopacāraṃ katvā 『『padaṃ sodheti』』cceva vuccati. Tenāha 『『padaṃ sodheti nāmā』』ti. Pucchāya vissajjanamevettha sodhananti āha 『『tadatthassa vissajjanato』』ti. Ārabhīyatīti ārambho, desanāya pakāsiyamāno attho. Tenāha 『『na tāva…pe… pabodhitattā』』ti. Idha sodhanaṃ nāma paṭicchannarūpassa atthassa desanānubhāvena vivaṭabhāvakaraṇanti tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ 『『aññāṇapakkhandāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 43. "如是說"即是說"所依"。以意志之首領，正是說貪愛，因為意志與之共同行。 關於"貪著"，是指未被道路斷除的貪著。人們所稱為"貪著"的，是與那貪著相應的樂受，因為它在那裡隨眠。因此說"樂受"等。這一方法也適用於其餘情況。因此說"如是"等。 正是那些根，即樂、喜舍根。說"屬於行"是爲了表明"在此以受之首領說意志"。因為受並不屬於行蘊。爲了顯示貪愛、見解的工具格用法，所以說"貪愛"等。現在爲了僅僅顯示使用的意義，說"或如何"等。其中"其餘諸法"是指除貪愛外的、不特殊的諸法。"貪愛為所依"是當貪愛成為它們的所依時。 "貪愛為余諸法的因"是當其餘諸法以貪愛為因時。"依止身體"這一句也包含了依止受等三蘊，因為有身輕安的緣故。"因緣性"是指間接的因緣性。"以貪愛見解之用"是指以見解之用，以及以與見解相應的貪愛之用。 通過"來"是指來，"去"是指後有，這兩個詞是爲了使原義更加明瞭，在聖典中說"來去甚至不存在"。"在此處"是指通過顯示門和所緣之法，通過門和所緣的近遠而限定。"在此門之行諸法"是說"在兩者之間"的意義。在四種集聚理趣中，非根系的色法是如此說的。以作為因緣的、作為近因緣的、作為依止因緣的。那些依附而稱為"自我"的諸法，因為沒有識等法，所以說明了不生之法性。從相反的角度顯示因緣性，是爲了顯示"不依止者無動"等。在聖典中說"這就是苦的邊際"之後，難道不是說"依無明有行"等的緣起嗎？爲了顯示所說的緣起性，通過世間和出世間而分別緣起。"彼等義性"是指離貪解脫的義性。"彼等有"是指出世間緣起的有。 深入理趣分別註釋終。 清凈理趣分別註釋 45. "清凈"是指：僅僅被問及的義理，如同置於手掌上的庵摩羅果一樣，以直接顯示，清除障礙，解開糾結，通過去除對其領域的無知、疑惑等污穢而清凈。在清凈的過程中，通過詞義不可分的慣用法，所以稱為"清凈詞義"。因此說"清凈詞義"。這裡的清凈是指對該義理的回答。"開始"即是開端，是教說中被顯示的義理。因此說"尚未"等。這裡的清凈是指通過教說的力量使隱藏義理顯露。爲了以譬喻顯示這一義理，所以說"無知的增長"等。 清凈理趣分別註釋終。 決定理趣分別註釋

46.Dhārayitabbāti upadhāretabbā, upalakkhitabbāti attho. Vuttameva 『『sāmaññavisesakappanāya vohārabhāvena anavaṭṭhānato』』tiādinā (netti. aṭṭha. 14).

Taṃ taṃ phalanti nirayādiṃ taṃ taṃ phalaṃ. Añcitāti gatā. Yonīti ekajāti. Samānavasena missībhavati etāyāti hi yoni, upapatti. Peccāti maritvā. Ussannatāyāti vitakkabahulatāya. 『『Ussannattā』』tipi vadanti. Sassatādīhi vā ussannattā. Asurajātiyā nibbattāpanako asurajātinibbattanako.

Saṅkhāti paññā. Paññāpadhānā ca bhāvanāti āha 『『paṭisaṅkhāya paṭipakkhabhāvanāyā』』ti.

1. Patthaṭabhāvena pathavī. Sabhāvadhāraṇaṭṭhena, nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena ca dhātu. Āpīyati, appāyatīti vā āpo. Tejanavasena tikkhatāvasena, dahanavasena vā tejo. Vāyanavasena vegagamanavasena, samudīraṇavasena vā vāyo. Vīsati ākārāti kesādayo vīsati koṭṭhāsā, pakārā vā. Kakkhaḷalakkhaṇādhikatāya kesādī kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā vuttā.

Pāṭiyekko pathavīdhātukoṭṭhāsoti pathavīkoṭṭhāsamatto, attasuññadhammamattoti attho. Santappatīti ettha sarīrapakatimatikkamitvā uṇhabhāvo santāpo, sarīradahanavasena pavatto mahādāho, ayametesaṃ viseso. Yena ca jīrīyatīti ekāhikādijarārogena jarīyatīti ca attho yujjati. 『『Satavāraṃ tāpetvā tāpetvā udake pakkhipitvā uddhaṭasappi satadhotasappī』』ti vadanti. Rasarudhiramaṃsamedanhāruaṭṭhiaṭṭhimiñjā rasādayo. Keci nhāruṃ apanetvā sukkaṃ sattamaṃ dhātuṃ vadanti. Vivekanti visuṃbhāvaṃ, visadisabhāvanti attho. Vatthusaṅkhāto hi āhāro pariṇāmaṃ gacchanto pāṇabhakkhagahaṇipadaniya muttakarīsabhāvehi viya attanāpi visadisarasasaṅkhātaṃ visuṃbhāvaṃ nibbattento tabbhāvaṃ gacchatīti vuccati, tathā rasādayopi rudhirādikoṭṭhāsaṃ. Tenāha 『『rasādibhāvena vivekaṃ gacchatī』』ti.

Sabhāvalakkhaṇatoti asucibhāvena lakkhitabbato.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 46. "當持守"即是當覺察，意思是當識別。已經說過"由於名言以共性和特性的安立而無常住"等。 "彼彼果"即是地獄等各種果報。"往"即是去。"胎"即是一生。因為由此和類似種類混合，所以稱為胎，即是投生。"死後"即是死亡之後。"增盛"即是尋思增多。也有人說"因增盛"。或是因為常見等的增盛。使生於阿修羅種類者即是導致阿修羅種類投生者。 "思"即是智慧。修習以智慧為主，因此說"以思擇修習對治"。 47. 因為展開性質而稱為地。因為持守自性和無有情無命者的意義而稱為界。因為積聚或擴充套件而稱為水。因為銳利性質的燒烤性質，或因為燃燒性質而稱為火。因為吹動性質的速行性質，或因為鼓動性質而稱為風。"二十種相"即是發等二十部分或種類。因為堅硬相的突出而說發等是以堅硬為相。 "各別的地界部分"即是僅僅是地的部分，意思是僅僅是無我的法。"熱惱"在此是指超過身體正常狀態的熱性，以身體燃燒方式進行的大熱，這是它們的區別。"由此而衰老"也可以理解為由一日熱等衰老病而衰老。他們說"經過百次加熱后投入水中取出的酥油稱為百鍊酥油"。味、血、肉、脂、筋、骨、骨髓是味等。有些人除去筋，說精是第七界。"差別"即是不同狀態，意思是相異狀態。即食物作為事物，在轉化過程中，如同變成眾生食物、胃、足、尿、糞的狀態那樣，自身也產生與味等不同的分離狀態而轉變，因此說它達到彼等狀態。同樣地，味等也轉變為血等部分。因此說"以味等的方式趨向差別"。 "從自性相"即是從不凈性應當識別。

48.Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇanti rasitabboti raso, paṭivijjhitabbo sabhāvo, attano raso saraso, yāthāvo saraso, yāthāvasaraso yāthāvasaraso eva lakkhitabbattā lakkhaṇanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ. Atha vā yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇanti aviparītaṃ attano pavattisaṅkhātaṃ kiccañceva pīḷanasaṅkhātaṃ lakkhaṇañca. 『『Idaṃ kiccaṃ, idaṃ lakkhaṇa』』nti avijjāhetu ñātuṃ na sakkoti, tabbisayañāṇuppattiṃ nivārentī chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhatīti vuttā. Tena vuttaṃ 『『jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na detī』』ti. Tayidamassā kiccanti kiccato kathitā. Kathitāti ca vuttā, yato ca avijjā asampaṭivedharasāti vuccati. Jāyati etthāti jāti, uppattiṭṭhānaṃ. Yadipi nirodhamagge avijjā ārammaṇaṃ na karoti, te pana jānitukāmassa tappaṭicchādanavasena anirodhamaggesu nirodhamaggaggahaṇassa kāraṇabhāvena pavattamānā tattha uppajjatīti vuccati, tesampi avijjāya uppattiṭṭhānatā hoti, itaresaṃ ārammaṇabhāvena cāti.

Atthānatthanti hitāhitaṃ. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ pana 『『atthattha』』nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 226) vuttaṃ, tattha attho eva atthatthoti atthassa aviparītatādassanatthaṃ dutiyena atthasaddena visesanaṃ. Na hi ñāṇaṃ anatthe 『『attho』』ti gaṇhātīti. Kāraṇākāraṇanti etthāpi evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthatthanti vā āmeḍitavacanaṃ sabbesaṃ atthānaṃ pākaṭakaraṇabhāvappakāsanatthaṃ, phalaṃ phalanti attho, hitapariyāyepi eseva nayo. Nti atthānatthādikaṃ. Ākāranti atthādikāraṇameva.

Paṭividdhassa puna avekkhanā paccavekkhaṇā. Ducintitacintitādilakkhaṇassa bālassa bhāvo bālyaṃ. Sampajānātīti samaṃ pakārehi jānāti. Balavamoho pamoho. Samantato mohanaṃ sammoho. Duggatigāmikammassa visesapaccayattā avindiyaṃ. Vindatīti labhati. Anavajjadhammānaṃ vijjā viya visesapaccayo na hotīti vindiyaṃ na vindati. Ayaṃ avijjāya vemattatāti ayaṃ 『『dukkhe aññāṇa』』ntiādinā kiccajātilakkhaṇehi vutto avijjāya aviseso. Vijjātiādīnaṃ vuttanayānasārena attho veditabbo.

Pāsāṇasakkharavālikāvirahitā bhūmi saṇhāti 『『saṇhaṭṭhenā』』ti vuttaṃ.

Tattakamevakālanti pañcakappasatāni. Vibhūtaṃ samattikkantaṃ rūpasaññāsaṅkhātaṃ rūpaṃ etāyāti vibhūtarūpaṃ, samāpattinti padattho. Na hi kāci arūpasamāpatti rūpasaññāsahagatā pavattīti. Nirodhasamāpattiyaṃ vattabbameva natthi, tattha nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā visuṃ gahitattā vuttaṃ 『『sesāruppasamāpattiyo』』ti.

Damathaṃ anupagacchanto duṭṭhasso khaluṅkasso. Uttaridamathāyāti ariyamaggadamathāya.

Itaroti dukkhāpaṭipado khippābhiñño, sukhāpaṭipado ca khippābhiñño. Ubhayatobhāgehīti rūpakāyanāmakāyabhāgehi. Ubhayatoti vikkhambhanasamucchedavimuttivasena.

Anekopīti sabhāvena anekopi. Ekasaddābhidheyyatāyāti sāmaññasaddābhidheyyatāya.

Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

我將為您翻譯這段巴利文： 48. "隨所應味相"即是應當品嚐的味，應當洞察的自性，自身的味是本味，隨所應的本味，正是以隨所應本味為識別，所以稱為相。或者"隨所應味相"是指未顛倒的、以自身執行為稱的作用，以及以壓迫為稱的相。"這是作用，這是相"，因為無明的緣故無法了知，阻礙了對其領域的智慧生起，遮蔽並繫縛而存在，因此說"不給予了知和洞察"。這是說它的作用，從作用的角度說。且已說過，因為無明是不洞察的味。"生"即是生起處。即使在滅道中無明不作為所緣，但對於希望了知者，由於無明的遮蔽，使得在非滅道中把握滅道的緣故而生起，所以說它在那裡生起，對於那些也有無明的生起處，對於其他則以所緣性為緣。 "義非義"即是利與不利。在遣除迷惑的典籍中說"義諦"，在那裡"義"即是義諦，爲了顯示義的未顛倒，以第二個義字作為特別說明。因為智慧不會把非義執取為"義"。在"因緣"處也應如此觀察。或"義諦"是重複詞，爲了顯示所有義的明顯性，意思是果報。在利益方面也是同樣的道理。諸如義非義等。"相"即是義等的緣由。 對於已洞察者的再觀察是回顧。愚昧者有惡思惟等相的狀態是愚昧。"了知"即是以平等方式了知。強大的愚癡是大癡。從一切方面愚癡是全愚癡。由於惡趣業的特別緣故，不獲得。"獲得"即是得到。對於無過失法，猶如明智一樣，不成為特別緣，所以不獲得。這是無明的差別。這是通過"苦中無知"等作用、生起、相所說的無明的無差別。應當以已說的方法、意義、要旨來了解明等的意義。 無石、礫、沙的地方變細，所以說"細性"。 "彼等時"即是五百劫。"明瞭的色"是指超越、已完全越過、以色想為稱的色。"入定"是詞義。因為沒有任何無色定與色想俱。在滅盡定中無需贅言，因為在那裡已單獨把握非想非非想處定，所以說"其餘無色定"。 不進入調伏的是惡劣的、污穢的。"為更高調伏"即是為聖道調伏。 "其他"即是苦行速證和樂行速證。"兩方面"即是色身和名身的兩部分。"兩者"即是通過鎮伏和斷除的解脫。 "雖多"即是以本性多。"以一音義"即是以通性音義。 決定理趣分別註釋終。 資具理趣分別註釋<.Assistant>

49.『『Hinotī』』ti padassa atthaṃ dassento 『『kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatī』』ti āha anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Etīti āgacchati, uppajjatīti attho.

Avijjāyapi hetubhāveti ettha avijjā anantarāya avijjāya anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi, anantarāya pana sahajātāya sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatahetupaccayehi, asahajātāya upanissayakoṭiyā eva paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ. Attano phalaṃ karotīti kāraṇanti āha 『『kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkhāyā』』ti.

Nibbattiattho phalattho phalasaṅkhāto attho.

Yo sabhāvoti puññādiabhisaṅkhārānaṃ yo abhisaṅkharaṇasabhāvo, so hetu. Sesapadesūti viññāṇādipadesu. Yathāvuttappabhedoti 『『asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo hetū』』tiādinā vuttappabhedo. Yo kocipaccayoti janakādibhedaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ. Abhisaṅkharaṇatoti paccakkhato, paramparāya ca nibbattanato.

Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā

50.Suttena gahiteti sutte vutte. Padaṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānavisayadassanatthaṃ, vevacanaggahaṇaṃ adhivacanavibhāgadassanatthanti yojanā. Visayādhiṭṭhānabhāvatoti visayasaṅkhātapavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Vanīyatīti bhajīyati. Vanatīti bhajati sevati. Vanuteti yācati, patthetīti attho . Pañca kāmaguṇā kāmataṇhāya kāraṇaṃ hoti ārammaṇapaccayatāya. Nimittaggāho anubyañjanaggāhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti upanissayatāyāti evaṃ sesesupi yathārahaṃ kāraṇatā vattabbā.

51.『『Kāye kāyānupassī viharāhī』』tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 23) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – rūpadhammapariññāyāti rūpūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya.

『『Dukkha』』nti passantī sā vedanānupassanāti yojetabbaṃ. Vedanāhetupariññāyāti phassapariññāya. 『『Vedanāvasenā』』ti padena attanā uppāditadukkhavasena. Vedanāpariññāyāti vedanūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya. Niccābhinivesapaṭipakkhato aniccānupassanāyāti adhippāyo. Niccasaññānimittassāti niccasaññāhetukassa. Saññāpariññāyāti saññūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya. Paṭhamamaggavajjhattā agatigamanassa vuttaṃ 『『diṭṭhābhinivesassa…pe… agatigamanassa cā』』ti.

Saṅkhārapariññāyāti saṅkhārūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya.

Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Niṭṭhitā ca hāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā.

1. Desanāhārasampātavaṇṇanā

『『Eva』』ntiādi hārasampātadesanāya sambandhadassanaṃ. Tattha purimena upamādvayena suparikammakatamaṇikoṭṭimasadisī, suviracitajambunadābharaṇasadisī ca pāḷi. Tattha katanānāvaṇṇapupphūpahārasadisī, vividharaṃsijālāsamujjalabaddhanānāratanāvalisadisī ca hāravibhaṅgadesanāti dasseti. Pacchimena tassa paṇītamahārahe jaṭāhi saddhiṃ dukkaratarataṃ dīpeti. Yāyaṃ gāthā vuttāti yojanā.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 49. 爲了顯示"捨棄"這個詞的意義，由於詞根具有多義，所以說"成為因緣"。"來"即是來到，意思是生起。 關於"無明也是因緣"，在此應當瞭解：無明對於相鄰的無明，是以無間、等無間、依止、有、不離、習行緣為緣；對於同生的相鄰者，是以俱生、相互、依止、相應、有、不離、因緣為緣；對於非同生者，僅以親依止為緣。因為使自己的果生起所以是因緣，因此說"因緣性是對果的期待"。 生起義是果義，即是被稱為果的義理。 "彼自性"即是福等行的造作自性，它是因。"在其餘詞中"即是在識等詞中。"如說的差別"即是以"不共相的因"等所說的差別。"任何緣"即是任何生起等差別的因緣。"從造作"即是從直接和間接的生起。 資具理趣分別註釋終。 歸結理趣分別註釋 50. "經中所取"即是經中所說。"近因之取"是爲了顯示決定的領域，"同義詞之取"是爲了顯示名稱的區分，這是其連線。"由於是領域決定"是由於是被稱為領域的生起處。"被求取"即是被享用。"求取"即是享用、親近。"請求"即是乞求，意思是希望。五種欲功德以所緣緣的方式成為欲愛的因緣。相的執取以親依止的方式成為隨相執取的因緣，對於其餘的也應當根據情況說明因緣性。 51. 在"住于觀身隨觀"等中應當說的，應當依照前面相理趣分別註釋中所說的方法來理解。這裡的差別是："色法遍知"即是色所依識住的遍知。 "苦"應當與那受隨觀連線。"受因遍知"即是觸的遍知。通過"依受"這個詞，是依于自己所生的苦。"受遍知"即是受所依識住的遍知。從對治常執著的意義而言是無常隨觀。"常想相"即是常想的因。"想遍知"即是想所依識住的遍知。由於第一道所斷，所以說"見執著...和不正行"。 "行遍知"即是行所依識住的遍知。 歸結理趣分別註釋終。 以上理趣分別註釋終。 教說理趣相應註釋 "如是"等是顯示理趣相應教說的關聯。其中以前面的兩個譬喻顯示：聖典猶如精心加工的寶石地板，猶如善巧製作的閻浮檀金飾。其中理趣分別教說猶如以各種顏色的花所作的供養，猶如閃耀著各種光芒串連的各種寶珠。以後面的顯示它與結合在一起更加難以完成。"此偈所說"是其連線。

1. Yasmāyaṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti yathāvuttena kāraṇena, tasmā sā hāravibhaṅgavārassa ādimhi na paccāmaṭṭhāti adhippāyo . Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ payojetīti yasmā pana hārasampātavāro taṃ gāthaṃ payojeti yathāvutteneva kāraṇena, tasmā 『『soḷasa…pe… āhā』』ti āha. Yojanānayadassananti yojanāya nayadassanaṃ.

Tenāti 『『taṃ maccuno pada』』nti vacanena. Sabbaṃ vipallāsanti dvādasavidhampi vipallāsaṃ. Sāmaññassa…pe… voharīyati yattha patiṭṭhitaṃ sāmaññaṃ, so viseso. Atthato pana saññādayo eva rūpādivisayaṃ viparītākārena gaṇhante vipallāsoti dassento 『『saññāvipallāso』』tiādimāha.

Indajālādivasena maṇiādiākārena upaṭṭhahante upādānakkhandhapañcake ahaṃmamādikāraṇatāya niruttinayena 『『attā』』ti vuccamāno taṃbuddhivohārappavattinimittatāya attabhāvo sukhādīnaṃ vatthutāya 『『attabhāvavatthū』』ti pavuccatīti āha 『『tehī』』tiādi. Tesanti upādānakkhandhānaṃ. Vipallāsānaṃ pavattiākāro 『『asubhe subha』』ntiādi. Visayo kāyavedanācittadhammā. Avijjā ca…pe… eva sammohapubbakattā sabbavipallāsānaṃ. Ca-saddo subhasukhasaññānanti etthāpi ānetvā yojetabbo.

Tatthāyaṃ yojanā – 『『avijjā ca subhasukhasaññānaṃ paccayo eva, na taṇhā eva, avijjā subhasukhasaññānañca paccayo, na niccaattasaññānaṃ evā』』ti. Evaṃ santepi purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ viparītasaññānaṃ taṇhā, pacchimānaṃ avijjā visesapaccayoti dassento āha 『『tathāpī』』tiādi. Avijjāsīsena cettha diṭṭhiyā gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tenāha 『『diṭṭhinivutaṃ citta』』nti , 『『yo diṭṭhivipallāso』』ti ca ādi, yathā ca avijjāsīsena diṭṭhiyā gahaṇaṃ, evaṃ diṭṭhisīsena avijjāyapi gahaṇaṃ siyāti āha 『『diṭṭhisīsena avijjā vuttā』』ti. Taṇhāvijjāsu subhasukhasaññānaṃ yathā taṇhā visesapaccayo, na evaṃ avijjā. Niccaattasaññānaṃ pana yathā avijjā visesapaccayo, na tathā taṇhāti dassento 『『moho visesapaccayo』』ti āha.

Pacchimānaṃ dvinnaṃ…pe… hotīti atītaṃse taṇhābhinivesassa balavabhāvābhāvato. Teneva hi 『『so atītaṃ rūpaṃ attato samanupassati』』cceva vuttaṃ, na 『『abhinandatī』』ti. Taṇhāvipallāsoti taṇhaṃ upanissāya pavatto vipallāso, na hi taṇhā sayaṃ vipallāso. Tenāha 『『taṇhāmūlako vipallāso』』ti. Diṭṭhābhinandanavasenāti taṇhupanissayadiṭṭhābhinandanavasena, yato so 『『taṇhāvipallāso』』ti vutto. Etenāti 『『yo taṇhāvipallāso』』tiādipāṭhena. Soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā ca, yathā attano gatāya, nibbānappattiyā ca parikappavasena subhasukhākāraggāhino, na evaṃ satta ucchedavādāti āha 『『yebhuyyenā』』ti. Paṭipakkhavasenapīti visuddhivasenapi. Yāva hi upakkilesā, tāva cittaṃ na visujjhateva. Yadā ca te pahīnā, tadā visuddhameva. Tenāha 『『na hī』』tiādi. 『『Arakkhitena cittenā』』ti pāḷiṃ nikkhipitvā vipallāsamukheneva desanāya niddhāriyamānattā vuttaṃ 『『yathānusandhināva gāthaṃ niṭṭhapetu』』nti.

Mārassāti kilesamārassa. Tassa hi vase ṭhito sesamārānaṃ hatthagato evāti. Tenāha 『『kilesamāraggahaṇenevā』』tiādi.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 52. 因為這個理趣分別章不以前述原因運用，所以它在理趣分別章開始時沒有被重複提及，這是其意思。而理趣相應章則以前述原因運用那偈頌，因此說"十六...等"。"連線方法的顯示"即是顯示連線的方法。 以"彼死魔之足"這句話，指一切顛倒，即十二種顛倒。共性...被稱為特性，即是共性所依立的地方就是特性。但從義理來說，想等以相反的方式把握色等境，即是顛倒，因此說"想顛倒"等。 在如幻網等方式中，以寶等形式顯現的五取蘊，以我、我所等的緣故，依語源學方式被稱為"我"，因為它是那智識言說運作的相，以其為樂等的所依而被稱為"自體所依"，因此說"以彼等"等。"彼等"指諸取蘊。顛倒的運作方式是"于不凈中見凈"等。境是身、受、心、法。無明和...正是因為一切顛倒都以迷惑為先。"和"字也應當引入"凈樂想"中連線。 在此連線如下："無明不僅是凈樂想的緣，不僅是愛的緣，無明也是凈樂想的緣，不僅是常我想的緣。"雖然如此，爲了顯示愛是前二種相反想的特別緣，無明是后二種的特別緣，所以說"雖然如此"等。在此應當瞭解以無明為首而攝受見。因此說"見所覆心"，"那見顛倒"等。如同以無明為首而攝受見，同樣地以見為首也能攝受無明，因此說"以見為首說無明"。在愛和無明中，如同愛是凈樂想的特別緣，無明則不然。而對於常我想，如同無明是特別緣，愛則不然，爲了顯示這點所以說"癡是特別緣"。 "后二種...成為"是因為在過去分中愛的執著不強烈。正因為如此，所以只說"他觀察過去色為我"，而沒說"歡喜"。"愛顛倒"是依止愛而運作的顛倒，因為愛本身不是顛倒。因此說"以愛為根的顛倒"。"以見歡喜的方式"是以依止愛的見歡喜的方式，因此它被稱為"愛顛倒"。"以此"即是以"那愛顛倒"等經文。十六有想論、八無想論、八非想非非想論、五現法涅槃論，如同依自己所達到和設想證得涅槃而執取凈樂相，七斷見論則不然，因此說"大部分"。"以對治的方式"即是以清凈的方式。只要還有隨煩惱，心就不會清凈。當它們被斷除時，就是清凈。因此說"因為不"等。說完"以不護心"的經文后，因為正是通過顛倒而確定教說，所以說"以如是相續而結束偈頌"。 "魔"即是煩惱魔。因為處於它的控制下就落入其他諸魔的掌控中。因此說"僅以煩惱魔的攝受"等。

Mārabandhananti sattamārapakkhe mārassa bandhananti mārabandhanaṃ. So hi kilesabandhanabhūte attano samārakaparise maññati. Tena vuttaṃ 『『antali…pe… mokkhasī』』ti (mahāva. 33). Itaramārapakkhe mārova bandhananti mārabandhanaṃ. Visaṅkhāro nibbānaṃ.

Mohasampayogato cittaṃ 『『mūḷha』』nti vuttanti rattaduṭṭhānampi mūḷhatāya sabbhāve 『『mūḷha』』nti visuṃ vacanaṃ āveṇikamohavasena vuttanti dassento 『『dvinnaṃ momūhacittuppādānaṃ vasenā』』ti āha. Evanti evaṃ rāgādiakusalappattiyā kusalabhaṇḍacchedanato arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, sabbopi micchābhiniveso ettheva saṅgahaṃ samosaraṇaṃ gacchatīti āha 『『micchādiṭṭhi…pe… veditabba』』nti. Sabbepīti 『『arakkhitaṃ, micchādiṭṭhihataṃ, thinamiddhābhibhūta』』nti tīhipi padehi vuttadhammā.

Cakkhunāti dvārena. Rūpanti visabhāgavatthusannissitaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ. Nimittaggāhīti 『『itthī』』ti vā puriso』』ti vā 『『subha』』nti vā 『『asubha』』nti vā parikappitanimittaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa vā gahaṇasīlo. Anubyañjanaggāhīti hatthapādahasitakathitādippabhede kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanato anubyañjanasaññite ākāre gaṇhāti, tesaṃ vā gahaṇasīlo. Yatvādhikaraṇanti yaṃ nimittaṃ, nimittānubyañjanaggahaṇanimittanti attho. Evaṃ 『『cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharanta』』nti, yo 『『nimittaggāhī, anubyañjanaggāhī』』ti ca vutto puggalo, tamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ cakkhudvāraṃ asaṃvutaṃ satikavāṭena apihitaṃ katvā vattantaṃ, tassa ca rūpassa iṭṭhākāraggahaṇe abhijjhā, aniṭṭhākāraggahaṇe domanassaṃ, asamapekkhane moho micchābhinivese micchādiṭṭhīti evaṃ abhijjhābyāpādā, aññe ca lāmakaṭṭhena pāpakā akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ anu anu pavatteyyuṃ.

Tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjatīti tassa cakkhudvārassa saṃvarāya satikavāṭena pidahanatthaṃ na paṭipajjati. Sā pana appaṭipatti cakkhundriyassa anārakkhāsaṃvarassa anuppādoti dassento 『『na rakkhati…pe… āpajjatī』』ti āha. Javane uppajjamānopi hi asaṃvaro tena dvārena pavattanato 『『cakkhundriyāsaṃvaro』』tveva vuccatīti. Sesadvāresupi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. 『『Pubbantakappanavasena cā』』tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento 『『saṅkhepato ca vitthāro añño』』ti katvā taṃ samuccinanto 『『yā ca kho imā』』tiādimāha.

Yathāvuttā akusalā dhammāti dvādasa akusalacittuppādadhammā, tesaṃ vatthūni vā. Te hi samudayavajjā pañcupādānakkhandhā. 『『Eva』』nti iminā nettipāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyañca niddhāritappakārena. Idhāti imissaṃ 『『arakkhitena cittenā』』ti gāthāyaṃ.

Yadipi desanāhārasampātapāḷiyaṃ 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』ti gāthā sarūpato na gahitā, atthato pana 『『tesaṃ bhagavā pariññāyā』』tiādinā gahitā evāti tassā gahitabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ 『『kathaṃ desetī』』ti pucchitvā 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』ti gāthaṃ uddhari.

Yonisomanasikārena kammaṃ karontoti 『『so 『idaṃ dukkha』nti yoniso manasi karotī』』tiādinā nayena vipassanāsaṅkhātena yonisomanasikārena bhāvanākammaṃ karonto, bhāventoti attho . Yathābhūtañāṇanti ñātapariññāya pubbabhāgavipassanāya 『『avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo, avijjānirodhā rūpanirodho』』tiādinā (paṭi. ma.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 魔縛即是在第七魔支中魔的縛。他在煩惱縛的本質中認為自己處於魔的集會中。因此說"在內...你將得解脫"。在其他魔支中，魔本身就是縛，即魔縛。解脫是無為。 因為與癡相應，心被稱為"癡迷"，即使從貪染生起也是癡迷，爲了顯示非常癡迷的心的存在和獨特的癡的方式，所以說"兩種癡心生起的方式"。"如是"即是這樣，因為對於貪等不善的獲得，善被切斷，心不受保護，所有的邪執都在此匯聚，因此說"邪見...應當瞭解"。"一切"即是以"不受保護、被邪見所害、被昏沉所服"等三種詞所說的法。 通過"眼"即是通過門。"色"是依附於不同性質事物的色處。"相執取者"即是執取"女"或"男"或"凈"或"不凈"等想像的相，或是有執取相的性質。"隨相執取者"即是在手、腳、微笑、說話等種種相中依隨諸煩惱而執取隨相的特相，或是有這種執取的性質。"何等為依處"即是何等相，意思是執取相和隨相的依處。如"眼根不防護而住"，那被說為"相執取者和隨相執取者"的人，眼根、眼門不防護，如同不關閉覺察之門，對於色，在執取可意相時生起貪，在執取不可意相時生起憂，在不等待時生起癡，在邪執時生起邪見，如此貪瞋等以及其他以下劣為惡、以不善生起為不善的法將隨順生起。 對於它的防護不去實行，即對於眼門的防護，不去實行關閉覺察之門。爲了顯示這種不實行是眼根不防護不生起，所以說"不守護...陷入"。因為即使在速行心生起時，由於通過那門執行而成為不防護，所以稱為"眼根不防護"。在其餘諸門中，應當以同樣的方法理解。以"依前際想"等簡略說明的義理，爲了廣泛顯示，說"簡略與廣說另有"，選擇性地說明"那些確實"等。 如前所說的不善法即是十二不善心生起的法，或是它們的處。因為舍離集諦的五取蘊。"如是"是通過對於尼提經文和註釋中所確定的方式。"此處"即是在"不受保護的心"這首偈頌中。 雖然在教說理趣相應章的經文中，"因此護心"的偈頌從形式上未被接受，但從義理上說，以"諸佛爲了遍知"等已經被接受，爲了顯示它被接受的情況，提問"如何教說"，並抽出"因此護心"的偈頌。 以正念作業即以"如實了知此是苦"等方式，以稱為觀的正念作業，意思是修習。如實知即是在了知遍知的前行觀中，"由無明緣色集，由無明滅色滅"等。

1.50) samapaññāsāya ākārehi. Nirayagatiyaṃ dukkhadukkhatā, sugativisese brahmalokekadese saṅkhāradukkhatā, itarattha dve tissopīti dassento āha 『『yathāsambhavaṃ tividhadukkhatāyogenā』』ti.

Desanāhārasampātavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Vicayahārasampātavaṇṇanā

53.Kusaladhammārammaṇāti kusaladhamme uddissa pavattimattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tesaṃ ārammaṇapaccayataṃ idha 『『kusalā dhammā』』ti lokuttaradhammānaṃ adhippetattā. Na hi kadāci anupādāniyā dhammā upādānārammaṇā honti. Phaladhamme uddissa pavattāya taṇhāya gahitattā 『『kusala…pe… daṭṭhabbo』』ti vuttaṃ. Desanāhāreti desanāhārasampāte. Kathaṃ pana kusalabhāvoti 『『kusalā』』ti vacanamattaṃ gahetvā codeti, tañca nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, pahānahetubhāvopissā siyā codakena sampaṭicchitova. 『『Mānopi duvidho』』tiādinā mānassa ca tassā taṇhāya ca sevitabbabhāvo akusalānaṃ pahānāya, kusalānaṃ uppattiyā ca paccayabhāvato.

Nekkhammassitaṃ domanassaṃ nāma 『『ariyabhūmiṃ pāpuṇituṃ nāsakkhi』』nti anusocato uppannaṃ domanassanti sambandho. Evanti iminā pāḷiyaṃ vuttappakārena, pihaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā chasu dvāresu iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate aniccādivasena vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvāti yojanā. Iṭṭhārammaṇañcettha yathāvuttaanusocanadomanassuppattīnaṃ yathābhiniviṭṭhassa ārammaṇassa aniṭṭhatāyāti dassanatthaṃ. 『『Kathaṃ nekkhammavasenā』』ti padassa atthaṃ vivarituṃ 『『vipassanāvasenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Vipassanādivinimuttā vā paṭhamajjhānādivasena vuttā kusalā dhammā idha nekkhammaṃ. Anussatiggahaṇena upacārajjhānameva gahitanti 『『paṭhamajjhānādivasenā』』ti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena dutiyajjhānato paṭṭhāya yāva aggaphalā uparivisesā saṅgahitā. Yāya paññāvimuttiyā.

Upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvenāti upekkhājanitasatipārisuddhisabbhāvena. Kammayogganti vipassanābhāvanādikammassa yoggaṃ anurūpaṃ anucchavikaṃ. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyahetu, 『『assaddhiyenā』』tipi paṭhanti, so evattho. Obhāsagatanti ñāṇobhāsagataṃ. Kāmaṃ pubbepi paññā vuttā, assaddhiyādīhi pana aññesaṃ kilesānaṃ vidhamanampi paññāya eva hoti, sā ca evaṃbhūtāti dassanatthaṃ 『『obhāsagataṃ kilesandhakāre na iñjatī』』ti vuttaṃ.

Kopo kodho. Appaccayo domanassaṃ. Iddhividhañāṇādikā cha abhiññā pākaṭā evāti 『『dve ca visese』』ti vuttadhamme dassetuṃ 『『manomayiddhi, vipassanāñāṇañcā』』ti āha. Aṅgaṇāni rāgādayo. Upakkilesā abhijjhāvisamalobhādayo. Anulomanaṃ tadekaṭṭhatā. Phandanā dubbalā vikkhepappavatti. Balavatī anavaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbo micchābhiniveso ayonisomanasikārena hoti, micchāvitakkena ca. Tattha ayonisomanasikāro akusalacittuppādo tappariyāpanno micchāvitakko vikkhepasahito evāti vuttaṃ 『『micchābhinivesahetutāya diṭṭhipakkho』』ti vuttañhetaṃ 『『vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, ayoniso manasikāropi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna』』nti (paṭi. ma. 1.124).

Atha vā iñjanāti phandanā, diṭṭhaparittāso. Yathāha 『『tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ajānataṃ apassataṃ vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphanditamevā』』ti (dī. ni.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 1.50. 以五十種方式。在地獄趣中是苦苦，在殊勝善趣的梵天世界某處是行苦，在其他處是兩種或三種，爲了顯示這點所以說"隨所應以三種苦的結合"。 教說理趣相應註釋終。 考察理趣相應註釋 53. "以善法為所緣"是就對善法的單純運作而說，不是它們的所緣緣性，因為這裡"善法"是指出世間法。因為無執取法絕不會成為執取的所緣。因為執取了緣于果法而生起的愛，所以說"善...應當看見"。在教說理趣中即是在教說理趣相應中。"如何是善性"是僅僅取"善"這個詞而提出質疑，這應當視為僅是舉例，它作為斷除的因也被質疑者所接受。以"慢也有二種"等顯示慢和那愛的應當修習性，是因為它們是斷除不善、生起善的緣。 所謂依出離的憂即是因為"未能證得聖地"而追悔時生起的憂，這是其關聯。"如是"即是以經文所說的方式，建立希求，在六門中可意所緣現前時，以無常等方式建立觀，這是其連線。這裡可意所緣是爲了顯示如前所說的追悔憂的生起，是由於所執著的所緣成為不可意。爲了解釋"如何依出離"這個詞的意義，所以說"依觀"等。或者離開觀等，以初禪等方式所說的善法，這裡稱為出離。以念住的攝受僅取近行定，所以說"以初禪等方式"。以"等"字從第二禪開始直到最上果包含上位的殊勝。以何等慧解脫。 "以舍念清凈性"即是以舍所生念清凈的存在。"業相應"即是與觀等業相應、相順、相稱。"在不信"即是以不信為因，也讀作"以不信"，意思相同。"光明"即是智慧之光。雖然之前也說過慧，但是由不信等其他煩惱的驅除也是由慧，而且是如此性質的慧，爲了顯示這點所以說"光明在煩惱黑暗中不動搖"。 忿即是瞋。不悅即是憂。六神通如神變智等是明顯的，爲了顯示"二種殊勝"所說的法，所以說"意所成神通和觀智"。隨眠是貪等。隨煩惱是貪慾等。隨順是與彼一致性。動搖是軟弱的散亂運作。強烈是不安住。一切邪執都是由不如理作意和邪思惟而有。其中不如理作意是不善心生起，屬於那裡的邪思惟必定與散亂相應，所以說"因為是邪執的因而屬於見分"。這也說過："思惟也是見處，不如理作意也是見處"。 或者，動搖即是震動，見的恐懼。如說："那也是彼等沙門婆羅門不知不見，受用，為愛所染，恐懼震動而已。"

1.105 ādayo). Aṭṭhitīti anavaṭṭhānaṃ, diṭṭhivitakko. Tena hi puthujjano kāle sassataṃ, kāle ucchedanti taṃ taṃ diṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ pakkhandanto sattato paribbhaṭṭhaandho viya, samudde vissaṭṭhavāhanikā viya, yante yuttagoṇo viya ca tathā tathā paribbhamati. Tenāha 『『diṭṭhiyopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna』』nti (paṭi. ma. 1.124) ca. Etasmiñca pakkhe micchābhinivesatāya, micchābhinivesahetutāya ca tassā dve pakkhāti ekadesasarūpekaseso katoti veditabbaṃ.

『『Eva』』ntiādinā 『『so uparima』』ntiādipāḷiyaṃ sambandhaṃ dasseti. Paṭighasaññāti bhummatthe paccattavacananti dassento 『『paṭigha…pe… saññāsū』』ti āha. Rūpāvacarasaññāti saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānāni vadati. Nānattasaññāti nānāsabhāvā, nānāsabhāve vā ārammaṇe saññā. Ṭhapetvā paṭighasaññā avasiṭṭhakāmāvacarasaññā hetā. Tā samatikkamatīti tā rūpasaññānānattasaññāyo ārammaṇehi saddhiṃ sammadeva atikkamati.

Rūpāvacarajjhānobhāsopi kasiṇārammaṇā. Kasiṇanissando hi āruppajjhānuppatti. Dassananti kasiṇarūpānaṃ dassanaṃ. Abhijjhābyāpādappahānena saddhiṃ vīriyārambho upakārako samatho satipassaddhiyo parikkhāraṅgatā vuttā eva. Satirahitaṃ sammasanaṃ nāma natthīti 『『yā upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, ayaṃ vipassanā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tena satisīsena vipassanā gahitāti dasseti. Sammosānaṃ pahānamāhāti sambandho.

1. Paccuppannasukhaāyatisukhavipākakiriyanirāmisaakāpurisasevitabhāvehi eva sesā pāḷiyaṃ etassa samādhissa santapaṇītatādivisesā vuttā, tepi idha saṅgahitāti tesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ dassento 『『aṅgasantatāyā』』tiādimāha. Tattha aṅgasantatāyāti phalajhānaṅgānaṃ upasantatāya. Kilesadarathasantatāyāti kilesadarathapaṭippassaddhiyā. Paṇītoti uḷāro. Ekodibhāvenāti maggasamādhisaṅkhātena ekodibhāvena. Ekodibhāvanti samādhānaṃ. Lokiyasamādhissa paccanīkanīvaraṇapaṭhamajjhānanikantiādīni niggahetabbāni, aññe ca kilesā vāretabbā. Imassa pana arahattasamādhissa paṭippassaddhakilesattā na niggahetabbaṃ, vāretabbañca atthīti so maggānantaraṃ samāpattikkhaṇeva appayogeneva adhigatattā, ṭhitattā ca aparihānivasena vā adhigatattā nasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato.

『『Sativepullappatto』』ti etena appavattamānāyapi satiyā satibahulatāya sato eva nāmāti dasseti. 『『Yathāparicchinnakālavasenā』』ti etena paricchinnasatiyā satoti dasseti.

Vakkhamānenāti 『『pītipharaṇā』』tiādinā anantaraṃ vakkhamānena. 『『Pītipharaṇatā』』ti pana pāḷi āgatā. Taṃ 『『pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhī』』ti (dī. ni. 3.355) samādhiaṅgabhāvena paññā uddiṭṭhāti katvā vuttaṃ. Tato eva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ 『『pītipharaṇatā』』tiādīnañca atthasaṃvaṇṇanā katā. Tattha 『『so imameva kāyaṃ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandetī』』tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.226) nayena pītiyā, sukhassa ca pharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Samādhivasena samatho uddhaṭoti sabhāvavasena samatho uddhaṭo, na upakārakadhammavasenāti adhippāyo.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 1.105. 不住即是不安住，即是見和尋。因為由此凡夫有時執常見，有時執斷見，趣向各種見的執取，如同失去依處的盲者，如同在海中失去船舵者，如同被套在輪車上的牛那樣流轉。因此說："諸見也是見處，尋也是見處"。在這一分中，由於是邪執和邪執的因，所以它有兩分，應當瞭解這是就一分的同一性略說。 以"如是"等顯示在"他以上"等經文中的關聯。"恚想"是處格的主格詞，爲了顯示這點所以說"恚...諸想"。"色界想"是以想為首說色界禪。"種種想"是種種自性，或是緣種種自性的想。"除了恚想"是指剩餘的欲界想。"超越它們"即是與所緣一起完全超越那些色想和種種想。 色界禪的光明也是遍處所緣。因為無色禪的生起是從遍處流出。"見"即是見遍處色。與斷除貪慾、瞋恚一起，精進、有助益的止、念、輕安已說為資具支。沒有離開唸的觀察，所以說"那已建立、不忘失的念，這是觀"。由此顯示以念為首攝取觀。說斷除失念，這是其關聯。 54. 由於現在樂、未來樂報、作用、無染、非下劣人所修習等性質，在其餘經文中說此定有寂靜、殊勝等特性，這些也包含在此，爲了顯示這些詞的意義，所以說"以支寂靜"等。其中"以支寂靜"即是果禪支的寂靜。"以煩惱熱惱寂靜"即是煩惱熱惱的止息。"殊勝"即是崇高。"以一境性"即是以稱為道定的一境性。"一境性"即是等持。世間定要降伏所對治的蓋、初禪貪著等及其他煩惱。而這阿羅漢定因為煩惱已止息，所以沒有要降伏和防護的，因為在道后的入定剎那即無需加行而證得，或因為住立而依不退轉方式證得，所以稱為無行降伏防護。 "達到唸的圓滿"由此顯示即使念不運作，由於唸的眾多性而稱為具念。以"依所限定的時間"顯示依限定的念而成為具念。 "將說"即是以"遍滿喜"等接下來將說的。而"喜遍滿性"是經文所說。說這是因為在"五支正定"中以定支的方式說慧。正因如此，在註釋中對"喜遍滿性"等做了義理解釋。其中應當依"他以離生喜樂潤澤此身"等方式了知喜和樂的遍滿。其餘易於理解。 "依定而說止"是指依自性而說止，不是依助益法而說，這是其意趣。

1. Rāgapaṭipakkhattā samādhissa 『『adhicittasikkhāya sikkhanto』』ti vuttaṃ. Vuttanayānusārenāti 『『sukhapaṇidhiādisamugghāṭanena appaṇihito』』tiādinā. Ettha ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgurataṃ sammadeva passantassa na rāgo patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti aniccānupassanā rāgacaritassa sappāyā vuttā, tathā saṅkhārānaṃ sabhāvadukkhataṃ sammadeva passantassa pakatiyāpi dukkhitesu dukkhuppādanaṃ vaṇe khārodakasekasadisanti na doso patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti dukkhānupassanā dosacaritassa sappāyā vuttā, tathā saṅkhāresu sammadeva ghanavinibbhoge kate attasuññatāya upaṭṭhahamānāya na moho patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti anattānupassanā mohacaritassa sappāyā vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Rāgapaṭipakkhattā samādhissa 『『adhicittasikkhāya sikkhanto』』ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo itaresu. Sesamettha suviññeyyaṃ.

Khantibahulo uppannaṃ aratiṃ anabhiratiṃ abhibhuyya viharanto sukhena samādhiṃ adhigacchatīti khantippadhānatāpi samathapakkhabhajanassa kāraṇaṃ vuttā. Uṭṭhānaṃ sampajjatīti sampannakāyikavīriyaṃ. Sammākammantavāyāmānaṃ yo kāyikādivikappo vutto pāḷiyaṃ, so nesaṃ kāyikassa payogassa samuṭṭhānavasena veditabbo.

『『Khippādhigamo』』ti iminā maggāsevanabhāvaṃ dasseti. 『『Vipassanāya vimuttādhigamo』』ti iminā vipassanānubhāvena samucchedavimutti vikkhambhanavimutti viya samathānubhāvenāti dasseti. Lokiyehīti nissakkavacanaṃ. Mahantānanti uḷārānaṃ, paṇītānanti attho.

56.Tanti vicayahāraṃ. Visaṃvādanahetūnaṃ lobhādīnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. Sodhentoti yathā saraṇādivisayā aññāṇādisaṃkilesā na pavattanti, evaṃ sodhento. Paripūrentāti yathā sīlaṃ akhaṇḍādibhāvena paripuṇṇaṃ hoti anūnaṃ, evaṃ paripūrentā.

『『Tathāpaṭipajjanto』』ti iminā satthu mahāpatikārabhāvo paripuṇṇo dassitoti paṭhamavāde 『『dassanābhūmiñca bhāvanābhūmiñcā』』ti vuttaṃ.

Yassa atthāyāti yassa yassa pahānatthāya. Tathā paṭipannassāti yathā asubhajjhānādiṃ pādakaṃ katvā anāgāmimaggādiadhigamo hoti, tathā paṭipannassa.

Vadhitanti ghātitaṃ.

『『Manussabhūto』』ti idaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ katvā 『『pitā manussabhūto khīṇāsavo』』ti ca tathā 『『mātā manussabhūtā』』ti yojetabbaṃ. Bhedānurūpassa sāvanaṃ anussāvanaṃ, bhedānurūpena vā vacanena viññāpanaṃ.

57.Manussattanti manussajātitā. Liṅgasampattīti purisabhāvo. Hetūti manovacīpaṇidhānasiddhiyā saddhiṃ pubbahetusampadā. Satthāradassananti satthu sammukhībhāvo. Guṇasampattīti abhiññāsamāpattilābho. Adhikāroti attano sarīranirapekkhaṃ satthu upakārakaraṇaṃ. Chandatāti buddhabhāvāya daḷhacchandatā anivattidhammatā.

Na uppajjantīti pana atthīti 『『na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjatī』』tiādi (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; kathā. 405; mahāva. 11; mi. pa. 4.5.11) imissā lokadhātuyā ṭhatvā vadantena bhagavatā 『『kiṃ panāvuso sāriputta, atthetarahi añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavato samasamo sambodhiyanti evaṃ puṭṭho ahaṃ, bhante, 『no』ti vadeyya』』nti (dī. ni. 3.161) vatvā tassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ 『『aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā』』ti (dī. ni. 3.161; a. ni.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 55. 因為定是貪的對治，所以說"修習增上心學"。"依所說方法"即是"以斷除樂愿等而成無愿"等。在此應當瞭解：對於正確看見諸行剎那壞滅的人，貪不得安立，所以說無常隨觀適合貪行者；同樣地，對於正確看見諸行自性是苦的人，對於本來就苦的人再加苦，如同在傷口上澆鹹水，所以瞋不得安立，因此說苦隨觀適合瞋行者；同樣地，對諸行正確作了密集的分別后，無我性顯現，癡不得安立，因此說無我隨觀適合癡行者。因為定是貪的對治，所以說"修習增上心學"。對其他也是這個道理。此中其餘易於瞭解。 多忍者能克服所生的不樂和不滿而住，易得定，所以說忍為主也是傾向止分的原因。"生起"即是成就身體精進。在經中所說的正業、正精進的身等差別，應當依它們身等加行的等起來了解。 以"速得"顯示道的修習性。以"以觀得解脫"顯示由觀的威力得斷除解脫，如同由止的威力得鎮伏解脫。"由世間"是從格詞。"大"即是殊勝、高妙的意思。 56. "它"即是考察理趣。清凈惡法即是貪等違逆的因。"清凈"即是使歸依等境不生無知等染污。"圓滿"即是使戒以無缺等方式圓滿無欠。 以"如是修行"顯示對導師的大報恩圓滿，所以在第一說中說"見地和修地"。 "為何義"即是為何等斷除。"如是修行"即是如何以不凈禪等為基礎證得不還道等，如是修行。 "被殺"即是被害。 "為人時"這個詞應當前後觀察而連線為"父親為人時是漏盡者"和"母親為人時"。隨順破壞的告知是重複告知，或者以隨順破壞的言語使了知。 57. "人性"即是人的種性。"相具足"即是男性。"因"即是意語愿求成就和過去因圓滿。"見導師"即是親見導師。"德具足"即是得神通與定。"勝行"即是不顧自身而為導師作利益。"意欲"即是對佛果的堅固意欲、不退轉性。 "不生起"是說有這樣的情況：世尊立於此世界說"我無師，無與我等者"等，舍利弗被問到"賢友舍利弗，現在有其他沙門或婆羅門與世尊在正等覺上相等嗎？"時說"尊者，我說'沒有'"，爲了顯示其原因而說"在一世界中有兩位阿羅漢正等覺者，這是不可能、無有是處"。

1.277) imaṃ suttaṃ dassentena dhammasenāpatināva buddhakhettabhūtaṃ imaṃ lokadhātuṃ ṭhapetvā aññattha anuppatti vuttā hotīti adhippāyo.

Khettapariggaho kato nāma hoti 『『idaṃ buddhakhettaṃ nāmā』』ti.

Evaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānabhāvaṃ gatāti vuttappakārena ṭhānabhūtā, vuttanayena vā aññepi yathārahaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānabhāvena pavattā. Sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtāti indriyabaddhe khandhe sandhāya vadati.

58.Phalassapaccakkhakāritāti 『『imassa kammassa idaṃ phala』』nti taṃtaṃkammaphalāvabodho. Appadānābhāvoti paccayasamavāye kammassa ekantato phaluppādanaṃ. Tenāha 『『katūpacitāna』』nti.

59.Ajjhositavatthunāti taṇhābhinivesavasena abhiniviṭṭhavatthunā. Rūpabhavaarūpabhavādināti bhavataṇhā viya sayaṃ dasseti.

Khandhattayavasenāti sīlādikkhandhattayavasena. Paṭipadāvibhāgenāti 『『sabbatthagāminī』』ti ādipaṭipadāya bhedena.

Tatthatatthagāminīti nirayādinibbānanti dvīsu gandhabbaṭṭhānesu tattha tattheva gamanasīlā. Sabbatthagāminīti yathāvuttesu sabbaṭṭhānesu ca gamanasīlā.

Sañjīvo kāḷasuttaṃ saṅghāto roruvo mahāroruvo tāpano mahātāpano avīcīti ete aṭṭha mahānirayā. Ekekassa cattāri cattāri dvārāni, ekekasmiṃ dvāre cattāro cattāro gūthanirayādayoti evaṃ soḷasa ussadaniraye vaṇṇenti.

Sakkasuyāmādiko jeṭṭhakadevarājā. Pajāpativaruṇaīsānādayo viya dutiyādiṭṭhānantarakārako paricārako.

Kilesakāmapakkheti 『『saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmoti (mahāni. 1) ettha vuttasaṅkappavasena vuttaṃ. Sopi hi vibādhati, upatāpeti cāti kilesattasambhavato kilesakāmo vutto, na kilesavatthubhāvato. Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena sampayutto, kāmapaṭibaddho vā. Aññesu ca kāmapaṭisaṃyuttesu dhammesu vijjamānesu vitakke eva kāmasaddo dhātusaddo niruḷhoti veditabbo vitakkassa kāmasaṅkappavuttiyā sātisayattā. Esa nayo byāpādadhātuādīsu. Parassa, attano ca dukkhāpanaṃ vihiṃsā. Taṃ tu micchāhi vihiṃsā.

Bījādidhātunānattavasena khandhādinānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Khandhoti dvidhābhūtaggo.

我來將這段巴利文完整直譯成簡體中文： "法軍將軍"以此經顯示只在此世界，不在其他處生起。 名為已作田地界定，即"此是佛土"。 如是已經到達處非處狀態，即是已成為所說方式的處，或依所說方法，其他也依應理以處非處方式執行。以取蘊為取的七種施設，是指在根系縛的蘊中。 58. 果的現觀作用即是"此業的此果"，如是了知各業果。無施與性即是緣和合時業的決定生果。因此說"已作積集"。 59. 以執著所依即是以貪執系的執著所依。色有、無色有等即是如自身顯示貪有。 以三蘊為性即是以戒等三蘊為性。以行道差別即是"遍一切道"等行道的差別。 "于彼彼處行"即是從地獄到涅槃在兩個乾闥婆處所各自前往。"遍一切道"即是在所說一切處所前往。 生起、黑線、聚集、嗥叫、大嗥叫、燒灼、大燒灼、無間，這八大地獄。每一處有四個門，每個門有四個糞便地獄等，如是說十六增上地獄。 帝釋、須夜摩等是最初天王。生主、水天、帝釋等如第二等處的中間作者、侍從。 煩惱欲分即是"想是欲，貪是欲，想貪是欲"所說的想系。它也擾亂、熾熱，因為是煩惱性生起，所以說煩惱欲，非煩惱所依。"攝屬於欲"即是以欲貪所稱的欲而相應，或欲繫縛。在其他欲相應法存在時，唯有尋的欲字語根生起，應當了知尋有欲想的超絕。對瞋等語根亦復如是。害他、自己的苦惱是加害。然而是以非正的加害。 應當了知種子等語根的差別即是蘊等的差別。"蘊"是二分成就的。

60.Ajjhāsayadhātūti ajjhāsayasabhāvo. Yathā gūthādīnaṃ sabhāvo eso yaṃ gūthādīheva saṃsandati, evaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayassevesa sabhāvo, yaṃ dussīlādayo dussīlādikeheva saṃsandanti.

Saddhāmūlakattā kusalakiriyāya vuttaṃ 『『yaṃ saddhāvasenā』』tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ 『『saddhā bīja』』nti (su. ni. 77). Yaṃ lobhavasena, saddhāvasena ca dosavasena, saddhāvasena ca mohavasena , saddhāvasena cāti yojetabbaṃ. Vīriyavasenāti sammappadhānavīriyavasena. Paññāvasenāti maggasammādiṭṭhivasena.

Akusalassa kammassa katokāsatāya pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā 『『vipākāvaraṇena nivuta』』nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ kammāvaraṇādīhipi nivutatāya icchitattā. Tathā hi yathā devadattaṃ kokālikaṃ sunakkhattaṃ licchaviputtanti udāhaṭaṃ, yadipi bhagavā paṭivedhassa aṭṭhānataṃ disvā nibbedhabhāgiyadesanaṃ na deseti, vāsanābhāgiyaṃ pana tathārūpassa deseti evāti dassento 『『saccappaṭivedha』』ntiādimāha. Ajātasattuādīnanti ādisaddena saccakādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tassāpi bhagavā anāgate vāsanatthāya dhammaṃ desesi. Satthā hi 『『anāgate tambapaṇṇidīpe sāsanaṃ patiṭṭhahissatī』』ti tatthāyaṃ kulaghare nibbatto pabbajitvā kāḷabuddharakkhitatthero nāma pabhinnapaṭisambhido mahākhīṇāsavo bhavissatīti idaṃ disvā dhammaṃ desesi, so ca tathā ahosīti.

Asampuṇṇeti ekantato vipākadānasamatthatāvasena pāripūriṃ anupagate. Diṭṭhupanissayadiṭṭhisahagatassa kammaṃ sandhāya 『『kamme asampuṇṇe』』ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha 『『kilesantarāya missakaṃ kammantarāyaṃ dassetvā』』ti.

1. Diṭṭhi panettha padhānabhāvena pāḷiyaṃ gahitā sīlabbataparāmāsassa adhippetattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ 『『yathā puṇṇañca govatikaṃ, acelañca kukkuravatika』』nti. Asampuṇṇattā eva hi tassa micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānassa tesaṃ bhagavā 『『cattārimāni, puṇṇa, kammānī』』tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.81) dhammaṃ desesi. Tāya ca desanāya te taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭinissajjitvā sammatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu.

2. Paguṇatāya vodānaṃ paguṇavodānaṃ. Tadeva paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyajjhānādiadhigamassa paccayattā vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma hotīti āha 『『vuṭṭhānaṃ paguṇavodāna』』nti. Bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavaṅguppatti. Bhavaṅgacitte hi uppanne taṃsamaṅgisamāpattito vuṭṭhito nāma hoti. Saññāvedayitaapagamo eva apagamavimokkho.

Idaṃ vuṭṭhānanti idaṃ yathāvuttaṃ kosallaṃ vuṭṭhānahetubhāvato vuṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ 『『vodānampi tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhāna』』nti (vibha. 828). Imāya pana vuṭṭhānapāḷiyā asaṅgahitattā 『『nirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṃ pāḷimuttakavuṭṭhānaṃ nāmā』』ti sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 828) vuttaṃ. Ye pana 『『nirodhato phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhāna』』nti pāḷiyaṃ natthīti vadeyyuṃ, te 『『nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo』』ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) imāya pāḷiyā paṭisedhetabbā.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 60. "性向界"即是性向的自性。如糞便等的自性是與糞便等相應，如是諸人性向的自性是惡戒等與惡戒等相應。 因為善行以信為根本，所以說"以信力"等。因此說"信是種子"。應當連結"以貪力、以信力和以瞋力、以信力和以癡力、以信力"。"以精進力"即是以正精進力。"以慧力"即是以道正見力。 因為在經中說已作不善業的機會，所以說"被異熟障所覆"。但這應當視為僅是舉例，因為被業障等所覆也是可允許的。因此如提到提婆達多、拘迦利迦、善星離車子，雖然世尊見到證悟是不可能的，不說引導通達的教法，但對這樣的人也說習氣分的教法，爲了顯示這點所以說"聖諦證悟"等。"阿阇世等"以等字應當攝取薩遮迦等。對他世尊也為未來習氣而說法。因為導師見到"未來在銅色洲（斯里蘭卡）正法將建立"，他生在那裡的良家，出家后名為迦羅佛護長老，將成為通達無礙解的大漏盡者，見到這點而說法，他也如是成就。 "未圓滿"即是依決定能給予異熟的成就方式未達到圓滿。關於見為所依和見相應的業，所以說"業未圓滿"。因此說"顯示與煩惱障混合的業障"。 61. 此中見在經中以主要方式被接受，因為是指戒禁取。因此說"如滿和牛行者、裸行和狗行者"。正因為他們的邪見業受持未圓滿，所以世尊對他們說"滿，這四種業"等。由於那教法，他們捨棄那見而住立於正性中。 62. 由熟練而清凈為熟練清凈。正是它從初禪等出定而證得二禪等的緣，所以稱為出定，因此說"出定是熟練清凈"。有分出定是有分生起。因為在有分心生起時，稱為從具有彼(定)者的等至出定。想受滅就是滅解脫。 "此出定"即是如前所說的善巧，因為是出定的因而稱為出定。因此說"從彼彼定清凈也是出定"。但因為不被這出定經文所攝，所以在《斷除愚癡》中說"從滅盡定出定名為離經出定"。若有人說"從滅盡定以果等至出定"不在經中，應當以"從滅盡定出定時，非想非非想處以果等至為無間緣"這經文來駁斥他們。

63.Ayaṃ cassa āsayoti ettha āsayajānanādinā yehi indriyehi yehi paroparehi sattā kalyāṇapāpāsayādikā honti, tesaṃ pajānanaṃ vibhāvetīti veditabbaṃ. Evañca katvā indriyaparopariyattaāsayānusayañāṇānaṃ visuṃ asādhāraṇatā, indriyaparopariyattanānādhimuttikatāñāṇānaṃ visuṃ balatā ca siddhā hoti.

Thāmagatoti ettha thāmagamanaṃ nāma aññesaṃ asādhāraṇo kāmarāgādīnaṃ eva āveṇiko sabhāvo veditabbo, yato 『『thāmagato anusayaṃ pajahatī』』ti (paṭi. ma. 3.21) vuttaṃ.

Āvajjanamatteneva sarati ākaṅkhāyattavuttikattā. Vuttañhi 『『ākaṅkhapaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇaṃ, manasikārapaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇa』』ntiādi (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viya hi sabbaṃ bhagavato ñāṇaṃ parikammanirapekkhanti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 63. "這是他的意樂"，在此應當瞭解，顯示以知意樂等，諸有情以何根、以何上下而成為善惡意樂等，了知它們。這樣做時，根上下、意樂隨眠智的各別不共性，以及根上下、種種勝解智的各別力性得以成就。 "到達力"，在此所謂到達力，應當了知是其他不共的，唯獨貪慾等的特殊自性，因此說"到達力則斷隨眠"。 僅以轉向即能憶念，因為運作依愿而轉。因為說"世尊佛陀的智依愿而系，世尊佛陀的智依作意而系"等。因為如同一切智，世尊的一切智都不依賴加行。

64.Upakkilesavimuttattāti ettha cittādi eva upakkilesā, nibbattakassa vā kammassa pāribandhakilesā. Kasiṇakammaparikammajhānanibbattanakasiṇabhāvo cuddasavidhena cittaparidamanaṃ abhiññābhinīhāroti sabbatthāpi vīriyabalassa bahūpakārattā vuttaṃ 『『vīriyabhāvanābalanibbatta』』nti. Dibbasadisattāti dibbe bhavanti dibbaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ pasādacakkhu, dibbaṃ viyāti dibbaṃ, aggataṃ abhiññāṇaṃ. Dibbavihāro cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni. Tesaṃ vasena nibbattitvā paṭiladdhabbattā dibbaṃ, tena dibbahetukattā dibbanti vuttanti dasseti. Dibbavihārasannissitattāti rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānena nissayapaccayena nibbattattā, tena dibbanissitaṃ dibbanti dasseti. Divusaddaṃ akkharacintakā kīḷādīsu paṭhantīti vuttaṃ 『『taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabba』』nti. Purimā hi tayo atthā kīḷatthassa vasena, itare jutigatiatthavaseneva dassitāti.

Manussūpacāranti manussagocaraṃ. Daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā ittarakhaṇattā khaṇapaccuppannassa. 『『Āsannacutikā』』tiādinā santatipaccuppannavasena 『『cavamāne upapajjamāne』』ti vuttanti dasseti. 『『Mohanissandayuttattā』』tiādinā sattānaṃ hīnapaṇītattādibhāvassa mohādikammanidānahetukataṃ, nissandaphalatañca dasseti. Dibbacakkhussa pādakaṃ etesanti dibbacakkhupādakāni. Tena vuttaṃ 『『dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhantī』』ti. Tāni hissa paribhaṇḍañāṇāni.

Samādīyantīti samādānāni, kammāni samādānāni etesanti kammasamādānā. Samādātabbanānāvidhakammāti attho purime atthe, dutiye pana kammāni samādāpentīti kammasamādānā, micchādiṭṭhiyā kammasamādānā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, hetuatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.

Taṃ vācanti taṃ ariyānaṃ upavadanavācaṃ. Taṃ cittanti samuṭṭhāpakacittaṃ. Taṃ diṭṭhinti yena micchāgāhena ariye anuddhaṃseti, micchābhinivesaṃ. Ayampettha attho – yathā nāma hetusampannassa bhikkhuno visuddhaṃ sīlaṃ, samādhiñca sampādetvā ṭhitassa dandho satuppādo khippābhiññāya diṭṭheva dhamme aññā, sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā. Evamevaṃ yo ariyūpavādī yathāvuttacittadiṭṭhīhi apakkamitvā appatirūpaṃ sabhāvaṃ 『『mayā, bhante, tumhākaṃ upari vutta』nti accayadesanāya te na khamāpeti, so kāyassa bhedā niraye evāti. Tesu pasannacittassa khamāpanañhettha tesaṃ vācādīnaṃ pahānaṃ paṭinissaggova. Ito sāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi sabbānatthavidhānato, sabbahitasukhaparidhaṃsanato ca.

Kāyassabhedāti idha kāyasaddo attabhāvapariyāyoti āha 『『upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā』』ti. Tadanantaranti tassa maraṇasaṅkhātassa khandhapariccāgassa anantaraṃ. Abhinibbattakkhandhattho parasaddo, anorimabhūtavatthuvisayo vā siyā, avadhivisesanamattaṃ vā. Tesu purimaṃ sandhāyāha 『『abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe』』ti, pacchimassa pana vasena 『『cutito uddha』』nti.

Vuttavipariyāyenāti 『『suṭṭhu caritaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā carita』』ntiādinā. Hanananti ghātanaṃ.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 64. "離隨煩惱"，此中心等即是隨煩惱，或是所生業的障礙煩惱。遍處業、預備定、所生遍處性，以十四種方式調伏心，引發神通，因為在一切處精進力都有大助益，所以說"由精進修習力所生"。"如天的"即是在天中有為天，如所說的凈眼，如天故為天，最勝的殊勝智。天住即是四色界禪。依它們而生應當獲得，故為天，由此顯示因為是天因而為天。"依天住"即是以色界第四禪為依緣而生，由此顯示依天而為天。文字學者讀"天"字于遊戲等，所以說"這一切應當依文法書了知"。因為前三義是依遊戲義，其餘唯依光明、趣義而顯示。 "人的活動範圍"即是人的境界。剎那現在因是短暫剎那故不能見。以"近死"等顯示說"死者、生者"是依相續現在。以"具愚癡之流"等顯示有情的低劣、殊勝等性是以愚癡等業為因緣，及是等流果。"天眼的基礎"即是這些是天眼的基礎。因此說"與天眼一起成就"。這些是它的圍繞智。 "受持"即是受持，以業為受持者即是業受持者。前義是應當受持種種業的意思，后義則是使受持業即是業受持者，邪見的業受持是邪見業受持，這是因義的具格。 "那語"即是那誹謗聖者的語。"那心"即是等起心。"那見"即是以何邪執誹謗聖者的邪執著。這裡也有此義：如具因的比丘成就清凈戒、定而住，遲鈍的念生起于速知，于現法中證知，或有餘依時成為不還。如是誹謗聖者者，以如所說的心見離開，不以適當的自性"尊者，我對你們所說"以承認過失不向他們懺悔，他們身壞時必定生地獄。因為對他們信心懺悔，即是舍斷、舍離那些語等。再沒有比這更有過失的了，因為造作一切不利，破壞一切利樂。 "身壞"，此中身字是自體的同義詞，所以說"捨棄執取蘊"。"彼無間"即是那稱為死的舍蘊之無間。他字義是所生蘊，或是關於非此岸事物的境界，或僅是限定差別。關於前者說"攝取所生蘊"，依後者則說"從死以上"。 "如所說相反"即是以"善行、美妙行"等。"殺"即是害。

Kāraṇākāraṇanti ṭhānāṭṭhānaṃ. Cetanācetanāsampayuttadhamme nirayādinibbānagāmipaṭipadābhūte kammanti gahetvā āha 『『kammaparicchedamevā』』ti. Kammavipākantaraṃ kammavipākaviseso kammavipākassa vibhāgo. Appetuṃ na sakkoti aṭṭhamanavamabalāni viya, taṃsadisaṃ iddhividhañāṇaṃ viya vikubbituṃ, etenassa balasadisatañca nivāreti. Jhānādiñāṇaṃ viya vā appetuṃ , vikubbituñca. Yadipi hi jhānādipaccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ idha chaṭṭhaṃ balanti tassa savitakkasavicāratā vuttā, tathāpi jhānādīhi vinā paccavekkhaṇā natthīti jhānādisahagataṃ ñāṇaṃ tadantogadhaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Atha vā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jhānādikiccaṃ viya na sabbaṃ balakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkotīti dassetuṃ 『『jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ, iddhi hutvā vikubbituñca na sakkotī』』ti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 831) vuttaṃ, na pana kassaci balassa jhānaiddhibhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Vicayahārasampātavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Yuttihārasampātavaṇṇanā

2. Paṭipakkhapaṭibāḷhā kusalā dhammā uppajjitumeva na sakkonti, uppannāpi sammadeva attano kiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya anuppannasadisāti paṭipakkhanivāraṇena kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ kiccakaraṇabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ 『『manacchaṭṭhāni…pe… bhavissatī』』ti vuttaṃ. Viharantassāti viharaṇahetu. Viharantoti etthāpi eseva nayo, tena rakkhitacittatā vuttanayena ekantato sammāsaṅkappagocaratāya ca saṃvattatīti dasseti. Vuttanayenāti micchāsaṅkappānaṃ avasaraṃ adatvā visodhitanekkhammādivitakkatāya. Aviparītamevāti kāyādiasubhādito ādānaṃ. Vinipātabhayanti duggatibhayaṃ. Sabbopi cāyamatthoti 『『sammāsaṅkappagocaro sammādiṭṭhi bhavissatī』』tiādīsu attho yuttiyā yutto eva anarūpakāraṇabhāvato.

Yuttihārasampātavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Padaṭṭhānahārasampātādivaṇṇanā

2. Yasmā vā saṃkilesato rakkhitacittassa tīṇi sucaritāni pāripūriṃ gacchanti, tasmā rakkhitacittassāti ettha yāyaṃ rakkhitacittatā, sā kāyasucaritādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhānanti evamettha attho veditabbo. Attādhīnanti attaparādhīnaṃ.

Tato evāti kāraṇaggahaṇena phalassa gahitattā eva.

68.Tatthaitisaddoti 『『paripālīyatī』』ti itisaddo.

73-4. Pāḷiyaṃ pañcindriyāni tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitānīti ettha saddhāvīriyasatindriyehi pātimokkhādi tividhaṃ sīlaṃ gahitaṃ sodhetabbattā. Tesanti tehi sīlakkhandho saṅgahito. Samādhipaññindriyehi samādhipaññākkhandhā gahitāti pākaṭoyamattho, tathā sesampīti āha 『『ito paresu…pe… vuttanayamevā』』ti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： "因與非因"即是理與非理。攝取以心意無關的法、地獄等至涅槃道的業，所以說"唯業分別"。業異熟間隔是業異熟差別，是業異熟的分別。不能變現，如第八第九力，如類似神變智慧變現，以此阻止了它的力的相似性。或如禪等智不能變現和變化。雖然此處第六力說禪等的有尋有伺，但因為沒有禪等就無複習智，所以包含于禪等的智，使其包攝其中而說。或者為顯示一切智如禪等事不能作一切力事，所以說"已成禪不能變現，已成神通不能變化"，應當了知這不是任何力的禪神通性。 擇法行相解釋已畢。 理行相解釋 65. 對治相壓倒的善法不能生起，即使生起也因不能完全作自己的事而如未生，爲了顯示善法以對治障礙而作事，所以說"意為第六"等。"住"是住的因。"住"中也是同樣的道理，以守護心的方式，必定趨向正尋思範圍，爲了顯示這點。依所說的方式，即不給邪尋思機會，以清凈出離等尋思。"非顛倒"即是從身等不凈中攝取。"墮落怖畏"即是惡趣怖畏。整個義理在"正尋思範圍，正見將成"等中，因為沒有不適當的緣故，義理恰當。 理行相解釋已畢。 立足行相解釋 66. 因為從染污中守護心，三善行得以圓滿，所以在"守護心"中，這個守護心性是身善行等三善行的立足處，應當如此了知。"依自"即是依自依他。 "由此"即因為以因的把握必然把握果的緣故。 68. 此中"如是"字即"被環繞"字。 73-74. 在經中五根被三蘊攝，以信精進念根攝取三種戒，如波羅提木叉等，因為應當清凈。這些即是以它們攝取戒蘊。以定慧根攝取定慧蘊，這是顯明的意義，關於其餘的也是依所說方式。<.Assistant>

76.Hetuhetusamuppannapaccayapaccayuppannasaṅkhātassāti ettha hetupaccayavibhāgo heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.

Padaṭṭhānahārasampātādivaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā

Idāni yasmā suttesu hārānaṃ yojanānayadassanattā hārasampātadesanā hāravibhaṅgadesanā viya na hārasarūpamattadassanattā, tasmā peṭakopadese āgatanayānusārena aparehi vipariyāyehi hārasampātayojanāvidhiṃ dassento 『『apicā』』tiādimāha. Tattha vijjāvijjāya kusalākusalacittappavattiyā alobhādosalobhadosāpi paramparabhāvena pavattanti nidānabhāvatoti dassento 『『cha dhammā…pe… mūlānī』』ti āha. Yathā ca nidānabhāvena pubbaṅgamatā, evaṃ attano vasevattanenāpi pubbaṅgamatā labbhatevāti vuttaṃ 『『sādhipatikānaṃ adhipati, sabbacittuppādānaṃ indriyānī』』ti. Alobhassāti alobhayuttassa cittuppādassa. Nekkhammacchandenāti kusalacchandena. Nekkhammasaddo pabbajjādīsu niruḷho. Vuttañhi –

『『Pabbajjā paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ, nibbānañca vipassanā;

Sabbepi kusalā dhammā, 『nekkhamma』nti pavuccare』』ti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 109; dī. ni. ṭī. 2.359; a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.66) –

Tesu idha kusalā dhammā adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ 『『kusalacchandenā』』ti. Nekkhammacchandena upanissayabhūtena, na adhipatibhūtena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – alobhappadhāno ce cittuppādo hoti, nekkhammacchandena upanissayabhūtena mano tassa pubbaṅgamo hoti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.

Yadaggena tesaṃ dhammānaṃ mano pubbaṅgamaṃ, tadaggena tesaṃ jeṭṭhaṃ, padhānañcāti vuttaṃ 『『manoseṭṭhāti mano tesaṃ dhammāna』』ntiādi. Manomayatā manena katādibhāvo, so ca manassa tesaṃ sahajātādinā paccayabhāvo evāti vuttaṃ 『『manomayāti…pe… paccayo』』ti. Te panāti ettha pana-saddo visesatthadīpako, tenetaṃ dasseti – yadipi tesaṃ dhammānaṃ chandādayopi paccayā eva, indriyādipaccayena pana savisesaṃ paccayabhūtassa manasseva vaseneva vuttaṃ 『『manomayā』』ti. Tattha chandasamudānītāti yathāvuttanekkhammādichandena sammā uddhamuddhaṃ nītā, tato samudāgatāti attho. Tato eva nekkhammavitakkādito samuppannattā anāvilasaṅkappasamuṭṭhānā. Tajjāmanoviññāṇadhātusamphassena sahādhiṭṭhānato phassasamodhānā. 『『Phuṭṭho, bhikkhave, vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī』』ti (saṃ. ni.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 76. "以因緣所生起的因緣"等，此中因緣分別已如下面所說。 立足行相解釋已畢。 雜行相解釋 今者，因為在經中顯示行相連結的方式，非僅僅顯示行相形態，故依照藏中來的方法，以其他轉變顯示行相連結的方式，所以說"又且"等。在此，為顯示明與無明、善與不善心的流轉，乃至無貪無瞋等亦以相續方式流轉為因，所以說"六法"等。猶如以因的方式為前導，同樣以自己的自性亦得為前導，故說"有自性者為自在，一切心生起為根"。"無貪"即是與無貪相應的心生起。"出離意樂"即是善意樂。出離之語用於出家等處。因為說： "出家、初禪、涅槃與觀察； 一切善法，名為'出離'"。 此中意指善法。因此說"以善意樂"。以出離意樂為近依，非為主導。意指若心生起以無貪為主，以出離意樂為近依，意為其前導。其餘二詞同此道理。 以何等為那些法的意前導，即以何等為最勝、為主要，故說"意為最勝"等。意造性即是以意所作等性，這是以意與彼等法作同生等因緣的緣故，所以說"意造"等。此中"然"字表示特別義，顯示雖然那些法的意樂等亦為因緣，但依根等因緣特別說"意造"。在此，"意集"即以如所說的出離等意樂，正確地高高提升，從中生起，所以是不雜亂的尋思所生。以彼意識界觸相應，以觸和合。"被觸，諸比丘，感受；被觸，認知；被觸，思惟"。<.Assistant>

4.93) hi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ manokammanti kāyaṅgavācaṅgacopanaṃ akatvā saddhāsamannāgatena pasannena manasā pavattaṃ idaṃ kusalaṃ manokammaṃ. Taṃ pana anabhijjhāsahagataṃ, abyāpādasahagataṃ, sammādiṭṭhisahagatanti tividhaṃ hoti.

Bhāsatīti avisaṃvādanādinā vācaṅgacopanāvasena pavattentiyā vacīviññattiyā sādhetabbaṃ sādhetīti attho, tena kāyadvārato pavattakusalavacīkammampi saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『vacīviññattivipphārato, tathā sādiyanato ca bhāsatī』』ti. Sabbampi vacīkammaṃ saccādivasena catubbidhaṃ. Karotīti attano, paresañca hitāhitāni kāraṇākāraṇehi kāyaṅgacopanāvasena pavattentiyā kāyaviññattiyā sādhetabbaṃ sādhetīti attho, tena vacīdvārato pavattakusalakāyakammampi saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Tathā ca vakkhati 『『kāyaviññattivipphārato, tathā sādiyanato ca karotī』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 76 missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā). Kammapathavasena gayhamāne pāṇātipātādivasena taṃ tividhaṃ hoti. Tenāha 『『iti dasakusalakammapathādassitā』』ti. Dasapuññakiriyavatthuvasenāpi gāthāya attho yujjati. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『so pasannacitto』』tiādi. Bhāsati vā karoti vā kevalaṃ manasā pavattatīti aniyamattho vā-saddo. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ.

Dasavidhassa kusalakammassāti dasavidhassa kusalakammapathakammassa, vakkhamānanayena vā dasapuññakiriyavatthusaṅkhātassa kusalakammassa. Nanu tattha dānādimayaṃ tividhameva puññakiriyavatthu vuttanti? Saccaṃ, taṃ pana itaresaṃ tadantogadhattā.

『『Sukhamanvetī』』ti saṅkhepena vuttaṃ sukhānugamaṃ vitthārena dassento 『『idhassu puriso』』tiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ santanti evaṃ bhūtaṃ, appahīnānusayo hutvā sukhavedanīyaphassasambhūtanti attho.

Tattha 『『yaṃ mano』』tiādinā gāthātthavasena catusaccaṃ niddhāreti. Ādito vavatthāpitesu khandhādīsu khandhamukhena saccānaṃ kathitattā sattānaṃ bhinnarucibhāvato nānānayehi vipassanābhūmikosallatthaṃ, pubbāparasambandhadassanatthañca evaṃ vuttaṃ 『『evaṃ…pe… niddhāretabbānī』』ti. Saccamukhena assādādike niddhāretvā desanāhārasampātaṃ yojetuṃ 『『tattha samudayenā』』tiādimāha, taṃ vuttanayameva. Yañhettha aññampi atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā, uttānatthattā cāti veditabbaṃ.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 因為這樣說。"此意業"即不作身份語分運轉，以具足信的清凈意而轉起此善意業。它又分為與無貪俱行、與無瞋俱行、與正見俱行三種。 "說"即以不妄語等，以語分運轉方式轉起的語表達所應成就而成就的意思，由此身門轉起的善語業也被攝取。因此將說"由語表達擴大，如是由認可而說"。一切語業以諦等方式為四種。"作"即以對自己和他人的利與不利的作與不作，以身份運轉方式轉起的身表達所應成就而成就的意思，由此語門轉起的善身業也被攝取。因此將說"由身表達擴大，如是由認可而作"。若依業道所攝，以不殺生等方式為三種。因此說"如是顯示十善業道"。偈頌的義理也符合十福業事。因此將說"他清凈心"等。或"說"或"作"或僅以意轉起，"或"字表示不確定義。如是已經解釋。 "十種善業"即十種善業道之業，或如將說的方式，稱為十福業事的善業。但其中說佈施等三種福業事，這是真實的，但那是因為其他都包含其中。 簡略地說"隨樂"，爲了廣顯樂的隨行，所以說"在此人"等。在此"如是"即如是存在，成為未斷隨眠而有樂受應觸生起的意思。 在此以"凡意"等，依偈頌義抉擇四諦。由最初確定的蘊等中，以蘊門說諸諦，因為眾生有種種意樂，以種種方式爲了觀智地的善巧，爲了顯示前後聯繫，所以說"如是"等"應當抉擇"。以諦門抉擇味著等，爲了連結說法行相，所以說"在此以集"等，這是如已說的方式。在此若有其他未分別義，這應當了知是因為已如前說的方式，及義理明顯。

Mananalakkhaṇeti mananalakkhaṇahetu. 『『Mananalakkhaṇenā』』ti vā pāṭho. Īhābhāvato byāpārābhāvato. Yena pasādena samannāgatattā mano 『『pasanno』』ti vutto, tassa pasādassa kiccaṃ mane āropetvā āha 『『akālusiyato, ārammaṇassa okappanato ca pasannenā』』ti. Tathā sādiyanatoti vācāya vattabbaṃ avatvāva phassasādiyanato anujānato. Dutiye tathā sādiyanatoti kāyena kātabbaṃ yathā kataṃ hoti, tathā vācāya saṃvidhānato. Tathā pasutattāti yathā sukhamanveti, tathā upacitattā evāti attho. Tatoti tato kāraṇā, manasā pasannena, bhāsanena, karaṇena ca hetunāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anaññatthāti etasmiṃ pana atthe. Tatoti tato eva. Yo hi pasannamano tena yaṃ bhāsanaṃ, karaṇañca, tato eva naṃ sukhamanvetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sātabhāvatoti sātavedanābhāvato. Iṭṭhabhāvatoti manāpabhāvato. Kammato vipākuppattiphaladānasamatthabhāvena kammassa nibbattattā vipākasseva anibbattattāti āha 『『katū…pe… anvetīti vutta』』nti kāraṇāyatta vuttitoti katabhāvahetukattā kammassāti adhippāyo. Asaṅkantitoti yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ nibbattaṃ, tadaññasantānā saṅkamanato.

Ādhipaccayogatoti sahajātādhipativasena ādhipaccayuttattā. Sahajātadhammānañhi taṃsampayuttassa manassa vasena pubbaṅgamatā idhādhippetā. Tato evāti ādhipaccayogato eva. Manassāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tesaṃ dhammānanti sambandho. Kusalabhāvo yujjati pasādassa yonisomanasikārahetukattā . Nanu vibhajjabyākaraṇesu tesaṃ sāvakānaṃ saddhā uppajjatīti? Nāyaṃ saddhā, tadākārā pana akusalā dhammā tathā vuccantīti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『nāyaṃ pasādo』』tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 76 missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā). Sukhaṃ anvetīti yujjati kammassa phaladāne samatthabhāvato. Yathā hi kataṃ kammaṃ phaladānasamatthaṃ hoti, tathā kataṃ upacitanti vuccatīti.

Manopavicārā idha nekkhammasitā somanassūpavicārā, upekkhūpavicārā ca veditabbā kusalādhikārattā. Te pana yasmā cittaṃ nissāyeva pavattanti, nānissāya, tasmā vuttaṃ 『『mano manopavicārānaṃ padaṭṭhāna』』nti. Kusalapakkhassa padaṭṭhānanti ettha kusalo tāva phasso kusalassa vedanākkhandhassa saññākkhandhassa saṅkhārakkhandhassa sahajātādinā paccayo hoti. 『『Phuṭṭho, bhikkhave, vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī』』ti (saṃ. ni.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： "思惟相"即以思惟相為因。或讀作"以思惟相"。因為無努力故無作用。以具足何等凈信而意被稱為"清凈"，將那凈信的作用歸於意，所以說"因不濁亂，及對所緣確信故清凈"。"如是認可"即不以語言說而由觸認可、允許。第二個"如是認可"即身應當作如已作，如是由語言安排。"如是已生"即如隨樂，如是已增長的意思。"由此"即由此因，由意清凈、說話、作為之因，這是所說。"無他義"即在此義中。"由此"即由此。因為凡清凈意者，由此有說話和作為，由此即隨樂，這是所說。"悅性"即樂受性。"可意性"即可愛性。因為業以從業生起果報生起能力而生，而非果報自生，所以說"已作"等"隨行"是依因轉起，意即以已作為因的業。"不移轉"即業在何相續生起，不移轉到其他相續。 "具自在"即以同生自在力具有自在。因為這裡意指同生法以與彼相應的意的力量為前導。"由此"即由具自在。"意的"是賓格的所有格。"彼等法"是關連。善性適合因為凈信以如理作意為因。但在分別解答中"彼等聲聞的信生起"不是此信，應當了知是具有那樣形態的不善法如是稱呼。因此將說"非此凈信"等。"隨樂"適合因為業有給予果的能力。因為如已作的業有給予果的能力，如是已作稱為已增長。 意近行此處應當了知是出離所依的喜近行和舍近行，因為是善的論述。因為它們依止心而轉，非不依止，所以說"意是意近行的立足處"。"是善分的立足處"，此中善觸以同生等方式作為善受蘊、想蘊、行蘊的緣。"被觸，諸比丘，感受；被觸，認知；被觸，思惟"

4.93) vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vedanādīnampi veditabbaṃ. Saddhādīnampi paccayabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Sabbassāti catubhūmakassa. Kāmāvacarā hi kusalā dhammā yathārahaṃ catubhūmakassāpi kusalassa paccayā honti, evaṃ itarabhūmakāpi.

『『Pasannena manasā bhāsatī』』ti vuttattā visesato sammāvācāpaccayaṃ bhāsanaṃ idhādhippetanti vuttaṃ 『『bhāsatīti sammāvācā』』ti. Tatthāyamadhippāyo 『『bhāsatīti yamidaṃ padaṃ, iminā sammāvācā gahitā hotī』』ti. Karotīti sammākammantoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Suparisuddhe kāyavacīkamme ṭhitassa ājīvapārisuddhi, na itarassāti vuttaṃ 『『te sammāājīvassa padaṭṭhāna』』nti. Tattha teti sammāvācākammantā. Yasmā pana ājīvaṭṭhamake sīle patiṭṭhitassa uppannānuppannānaṃ akusaladhammānaṃ pahānānuppādanāni, anuppannuppannānaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ uppādanapāripūriyā ca sambhavanti, tathā sammāvāyāme ṭhitasseva kāyādīsu subhasaññādividdhaṃsinī sammāsati sambhavati, tasmā vuttaṃ 『『sammāājīvo…pe…padaṭṭhāna』』nti. Jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvaro, saddhāsādhano ca soti āha 『『taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhāna』』nti.

Tesanti kāyavacīkammānaṃ. Kammapaccayatāyāti kusalakammahetukatāya.

Padattho ca vuttanayenāti 『『mananato ārammaṇavijānanato』』tiādinā.

Ayaṃāvaṭṭoti ayaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena āvaṭṭo. Ettha hi kusalamūlasammattamaggādiniddhāraṇā sabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanā. Avijjābhavataṇhānaṃ niddhāraṇā visabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanā.

Vibhattihāre padaṭṭhānabhūmivibhāgā vuttanayā, suviññeyyā cāti dhammavibhāgameva dassento 『『nayida』』ntiādimāha. Tattha 『『nayidaṃ yathārutavasena gahetabba』』nti suttassa neyyatthataṃ vatvā 『『yohī』』tiādinā taṃ vivarati. 『『Dukkhameva anvetī』』ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu yattha katthaci hitesitā kusalamevāti? Nayidamīdisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, adhammaṃ pana dhammoti, dhammañca pana adhammoti dīpanena lokassa sabbānatthabījabhūtesu sakalahitasukhupāyapaṭikkhepakesu titthakaresu asantaguṇasambhāvanavasena pavattamicchādhimokkhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yo hi loke appamattakampi puññaṃ kātukāmaṃ pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ nissāya paṭibāhati, sopi gārayho, kimaṅgaṃ pana ariyavinaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ paṭibāhantesūti dukkhaphalāva tattha sambhāvanāpasaṃsā payirupāsanā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – 『『na kho ahaṃ, moghapurisa, arahattassa maccharāyāmi, apica tuyhevetaṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ…pe… dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattatī』』ti (dī. ni. 3.7), 『『yo nindiyaṃ pasaṃsati (su. ni. 663; saṃ. ni. 1.180, 181; a. ni.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 4.93這樣說。受等也應當如此了知。信等的緣性更無須說。"一切"即四地。欲界善法隨宜作為四地善的緣，如是其他地的也是。 因為說"以清凈意說"，所以特別意指正語為緣的說話，因此說"說即正語"。此中意思是"說這個詞，以此攝取正語"。"作即正業"中也是同樣的道理。因為住于清凈身語業者有活命清凈，非其他者，所以說"它們是正命的立足處"。此中"它們"即正語、正業。因為住于活命八正道者能夠斷除、不生已生未生的不善法，而生起、圓滿未生已生的善法，如是唯有住于正精進者能在身等生起破除凈想等的正念，所以說"正命"等"立足處"。波羅提木叉律儀是最勝戒，也是以信成就，所以說"它是戒的立足處"。 "彼等"即身語業。"以業為緣"即以善業為因。 "詞義如已說的方式"即"因思惟，因了知所緣"等。 "此迴轉"即此依同分異分法迴轉方式的迴轉。因為此中抉擇善根、正道等是同分法迴轉。抉擇無明、有、愛是異分法迴轉。 分別行相中立足處和地的分別如已說方式，且易了知，所以只顯示法分別而說"此非"等。此中說"此非依文句方式把握"是說經的隱義，以"因為凡"等解釋它。為什麼說"唯隨苦"，難道不是無論何處求利者都是善嗎？這不是針對這種情況而說，而是說非法為法，說法為非法，是針對世間一切不利的種子，破斥一切利樂方便的外道，以讚歎不存在的功德而起邪確信而說。因為若依惡見阻止欲作些微功德者於世間都應受呵責，何況于聖者律中阻止正行者呢？因此對他們的讚歎、稱讚、親近是苦果。因此說："我，愚人，不是吝惜阿羅漢果，但你這惡見...長夜導致不利、痛苦"，"誰讚歎應被呵責者";

4.3; netti. 92), sabbassāpi anatthassa mūlaṃ bālūpasevanā』』ti ca.

Idañhi suttanti 『『manopubbaṅgamā…pe…pada』』nti (dha. pa. 1, 2) paṭhamaṃ gāthaṃ sandhāya vadati. Etassāti saṃvaṇṇiyamānasuttassa.

Kiccapaññattīti adhipatipaccayasaṅkhātassa kiccassa paññāpanaṃ. Padhānapaññattīti padhānabhāvassa paññāpanā. Sahajātapaññattīti tesaṃ dhammānaṃ manasā sahabhāvapaññāpanā.

Mahābhūtātīti itisaddo ādiattho, tena mahābhūtāvinābhāvī sabbo rūpadhammo saṅgayhati.

『『Manopubbaṅgamā』』ti samāsapade 『『mano』』ti padaṃ tadavayavamattanti āha 『『neva padasuddhī』』ti. Tenevāha 『『manopubbaṅgamāti padasuddhī』』ti. 『『Chāyāva anapāyinī』』ti idaṃ sukhānugamassa udāharaṇamattaṃ, na yathādhippetatthaparisamāpanaṃ. 『『Sukhamanvetī』』ti pana yathādhippetatthaparisamāpananti vuttaṃ 『『padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi cā』』ti.

Ekattatāti manopubbaṅgamādisāmaññaṃ sandhāya vadati. Evaṃ sesesupi. Vemattatā 『『manopubbaṅgamā』』tiādinā sāmaññato vuttadhamme pasādo dhāraṇāya nivattetvā pasannasaṅkhāte visese avaṭṭhāpanato. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Pasādo sinehasabhāvo, assaddhiyaṃ viya lūkhasabhāvaṃ dosaṃ vinodetīti āha 『『byāpādavikkhambhanato』』ti. Bahiddhāti saddheyyavatthuṃ sandhāyāha. Okappanatoti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā anupakkhanditvā saddahanato.

Deyyadhammādayoti ettha ādisaddena saṃvegahirottappakasiṇamaṇḍalādayo saṅgayhanti. Iṭṭhārammaṇādayoti ādisaddena iṭṭhamajjhattārammaṇā, dvāradhammā, manasikāroti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā phassoti yathā vedanādīnaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇādayo paccayo, evaṃ phassopīti paccayatāsāmaññameva upasaṃharati tathā-saddo. Vedanādīnanti hi vedanādayo tayo khandhā gahitā. Viññāṇassa vedanādayoti nāmarūpaṃ sandhāya vadati.

『『Sīlamayassa adoso padaṭṭhāna』』nti vuttaṃ khantipadhānattā sīlassa. Adhiṭṭhātīti anuyuñjati uppādeti. Soti evaṃ kusalacittaṃ bhāvento. 『『Anuppannāna』』ntiādinā bhāvanāpahānasamāropanāni dassento nibbedhabhāgiyavasena gāthāya atthaṃ vicinitvā samāropeti, evampi sakkā yojetunti vāsanābhāgiyavasena padaṭṭhānaniddese udāharīyati.

Evaṃ 『『manopubbaṅgamā dhammā』』ti gāthāya vasena hārasampātayojanāvidhiṃ dassetvā idāni gāthāntarena dassetuṃ 『『tathā dadato puñña』』ntiādimāha. Tattha bhāvanāmayanti paññābhāvanāmayaṃ.

『『Alobho kusalamūla』』ntiādi dānādīnaṃ alobhādipadhānattā vuttaṃ, sabbattha ca 『『vutta』』nti padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Tesanti rāgādīnaṃ. Nissaraṇanti ca parinibbānameva sandhāya vadati.

Pariccāgasīlo alobhajjhāsayo kāmesu ādīnavadassāvī sammadeva sīlaṃ paripūretīti āha 『『dadato…pe… padaṭṭhāna』』nti. Idha oḷārikā nāma kilesā vītikkamāvatthānaṃ, tappahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānena veditabbaṃ. Majjhimānanti pariyuṭṭhānāvatthānaṃ. Sukhumānanti anusayāvatthānaṃ. Katāvībhūmi nti khīṇāsavabhūmiṃ.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 4.3;及"一切不利的根本是親近愚人"。 "此經"是指"意為前導"等第一偈。"此"是指正在解釋的經。 "作用施設"即施設稱為增上緣的作用。"主要施設"即施設主要性。"同生施設"即施設那些法與意的俱有性。 "大種等"中"等"字表示初義，以此攝取一切與大種不相離的色法。 在"意為前導"複合詞中,"意"字僅是它的部分，所以說"非僅詞清凈"。因此說"意為前導是詞清凈"。"如影不離"這是隨樂的譬喻而已，非圓滿所要表達的義。而"隨樂"是圓滿所要表達的義，所以說"既是詞清凈又是始清凈"。 "一性"是就意為前導等共相而說。其餘也是如此。"異性"是從"意為前導"等共相說的法中轉出凈信,爲了持守而安立在稱為清凈的差別中。其餘也是此理。凈信性質為潤澤,如不信性質粗澀,驅除瞋恚,所以說"鎮伏瞋恚"。"外"是就可信事而說。"確信"即進入、深入所緣而信解。 "施物等"中等字攝取悚懼、慚愧、遍處輪等。"可意所緣等"中等字應當了知攝取可意舍所緣、門法、作意等。"如是觸"中如是字僅總括緣性相同,如受等以可意所緣等為緣,觸也如是。因為"受等"攝取受等三蘊。說"受等是識的"是就名色而說。 說"無瞋是戒所成的立足處"是因為戒以忍耐為主。"確立"即修習、生起。"他"即如是修習善心者。以"未生"等顯示修習、斷除、勝解,依通達分抉擇偈頌的義,以勝解結束,如是也可以連結,故在立足處的顯示中以習氣分舉例。 如是顯示依"意為前導諸法"偈的行相連結方式后,現在爲了以其他偈顯示而說"如是佈施福"等。此中"修所成"即慧修所成。 "無貪是善根"等是因為佈施等以無貪等為主而說,一切處都應加上"說"字來連結。"彼等"即貪等。"出離"是就般涅槃而說。 舍施性者、無貪意樂者、見欲過患者正確圓滿戒行,所以說"佈施"等"是立足處"。此中"粗"煩惱即是違犯位,應當了知以分斷斷除。"中"即現行位。"細"即隨眠位。"已作地"即漏盡地。

Dadatoti maggasahagatena alobhena sadevakassa lokassa abhayadānaṃ dadato. Puññanti lokuttarakusalaṃ. Saṃyamatoti maggapariyāpannehi sammāvācākammantājīvehi diṭṭhekaṭṭhādisaṃkilesato maggasaṃyamena saṃyamantassa. Veranti pāṇātipātādipāpaṃ. Kusaloti maggasammādiṭṭhiyā kusalo vicakkhaṇo. Jahāti pāpakanti tehi tehi maggehi taṃ taṃ pahātabbaṃ pāpadhammaṃ odhiso jahāti samucchindati. Tenāha 『『maggo vutto』』ti.

『『Dadato』』tiādinā pubbe avibhāgena kusalamūlāni uddhaṭānīti idāni vibhāgena tāni uddharanto 『『lokiyakusalamūla』』ntiādimāha.

Puthujjanabhūmi sekkhabhūmi dassitā pahānassa vippakatabhāvadīpanato. Asekkhabhūmi dassitā anupādāparinibbānadīpanato.

Saggagāminī paṭipadā pubbabhāgappaṭipatti.

Puññe kathite puññaphalampi kathitameva hotīti vuttaṃ 『『dadato…pe… desanamāhā』』ti. Saccakammaṭṭhānena vinā saṃkilesappahānaṃ natthīti dassento āha 『『kusalo…pe… desanamāhā』』ti.

Verasaddo adinnādānādipāpadhammesupi niruḷhoti vuttaṃ 『『evaṃ sabbānipi sikkhāpadāni vitthāretabbānī』』ti. Dvepi vimuttiyo sekkhāsekkhavimuttiyo, saupādisesaanupādisesavimuttiyo ca. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『nibbutoti dve nibbānadhātuyo』』tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 76).

Kāraṇūpacārena, kāraṇaggahaṇena vā phalaṃ gahitanti āha 『『dve sugatiyo』』tiādi. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭasampattiyo imissā desanāya phalaṃ, tassa dānaṃ sīlaṃ bhāvanā upāyo, 『『sampattidvayaṃ icchantena dānādīsu appamattena bhavitabba』』nti ayamettha bhagavato āṇattīti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha 『『phalādīni yathārahaṃ veditabbānī』』ti.

Vicayoti vicayahārasampāto, so vuccatīti attho. Esa nayo ito paresupi. 『『Tividhampi dānamaya』』ntiādinā padatthavicayaṃ dasseti, tena assādādayo, itare ca vicayahārapadatthā atthato vicitā eva hontīti. Rūpādiārammaṇassa pariccāgo vuttoti sambandho. Sabboti sakalo anavasesato kiccassa vuttattā.

Dānābhiratassa cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ 『『dadato…pe… padaṭṭhāna』』nti. Viratisacce, vacīsacce ca tiṭṭhato saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ 『『saṃyama…pe… padaṭṭhāna』』nti. Kosallayogato ca pāpappahānato ca paññāpāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ 『『kusalo…pe… padaṭṭhāna』』nti. Anavasesarāgādīsu pahīnesu upasamo upaṭṭhito nāma hotīti vuttaṃ 『『rāga…pe… padaṭṭhāna』』nti.

Kusaloti puggalādhiṭṭhānena kosallasammādiṭṭhi vuttāti āha 『『kusalo…pe… maggaṅgādibhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā』』ti. Ādisaddena bodhipakkhiyabhāvādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Khepetabbabhāvenāti pahātabbabhāvena.

Averatanti asapattataṃ. Kusaladhammehīti anavajjadhammehi, phalanibbānehīti adhippāyo. Dānassa mahapphalatā, sīlādiguṇehi satthu anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvo, anupādāparinibbānanti imesaṃ paccavekkhaṇā imassa dānassa nidānanti ayamattho pāḷiyaṃ niruḷhova. Nibbacananidānasandhayo suviññeyyāvāti āha 『『nibbacananidānasandhayo vattabbā』』ti.

Paṭipakkhaniddesena samudayoti desanatthaṃ paṭipakkhaniddesanena niddhārito ayaṃ macchariyādisaṃkilesapakkhiko samudayo. Alobhena…pe… dānādīhīti yehi alobhādīhi dānādayo dhammā sambhavanti, tāni dānādiggahaṇeneva gahitānīti kusalamūlāni niddhāreti 『『imāni tīṇi kusalānī』』ti. Tesanti kusalamūlānaṃ.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 佈施者，以與道相應的無貪，向有天神的世間佈施無畏。"福"即出世間善。"約束"即以道所攝的正語、正業、正命，以道的約束約束，從見等污穢中約束。"怨"即殺生等惡。"善"即以道正見善巧通達。"舍惡"即以各種道舍斷、根除應斷的惡法。因此說"道已說"。 "佈施"等先前未分別地提取善根，現在以分別提取，說"世間善根"等。 已顯示凡夫地、學人地，為顯示斷除的已處理性。已顯示無學地，為顯示無取涅槃。 通向善趣的行道是前分行道。 福已說，福果也已說，所以說"佈施"等"顯示"。除了諦業處外無有污穢斷除，為顯示此，說"善"等"顯示"。 "怨"字也用於不與取等惡法，所以說"如是一切學處都應廣說"。兩種解脫即學人、無學解脫，有餘、無餘涅槃解脫。正如將說"寂滅即兩種涅槃界"等。 以因緣轉述，或以因緣把握果，所以說"兩種善趣"等。輪迴、出離成就是此顯示的果，佈施、戒、修習是方便，"欲求兩種成就者應在佈施等處不放逸"，此是世尊的教誡，因此說"果等隨宜應了知"。 "擇"即擇行相連線，即是說。此理從此以後也是。"三種佈施"等顯示詞義擇，以此舍味等，其他擇行詞義實際上也已擇。與色等所緣舍已說，是其聯繫。"一切"即全部，因為已說無餘的作用。 佈施欣喜者的舍確立達到圓滿，所以說"佈施"等"是立足處"。住于誠諦、語諦中，所以說"約束"等"是立足處"。因為善巧、斷惡，所以說"善"等"是立足處"。無餘貪等已斷，寂靜已安立，所以說"貪"等"是立足處"。 "善"即依人確立的善巧正見，所以說"善"等"以道支等性，一相性"。"等"字攝取菩提分等。"應遣除"即應斷除性。 "無怨"即無對立。"以善法"即無過失法，意指果涅槃。佈施大果、戒等功德、師無上施田、無取涅槃，對此的審視是佈施的因，此義在經中已顯。應當說明否定、因等隱義，所以說"否定、因等隱義應說"。 以對治顯示為顯示義，抉擇此為煩惱方面的集。以無貪等佈施等法生起，以佈施等把握，所以抉擇"此三善根"。"彼等"即善根。

Bhayahetu deti paṇṇākārādivasena. Rāgahetu deti sabhāgavatthussa. Āmisakiñcikkhahetu deti lañjādivasena. Anukampanto vā karuṇākhette. Apacayamāno guṇakhette, upakārakhette vā. Bhayūparatoti bhayena orato. Tena tathārūpena saṃyamena veraṃ na ciyateva. Evaṃ sabbassa akusalassa pāpako vipākoti yojanā.

『『Dadato』』tiādinā yathā dānapaṭikkhepena parivattanaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ pahānapaṭikkhepenapi parivattanaṃ dassetabbanti vuttaṃ 『『akusalo pana na jahātī』』ti.

Kammaphalaṃ saddahanto dānakiriyāyaṃ padahanto yena vidhinā dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, tattha satiṃ upaṭṭhapento cittaṃ samādahanto sammādiṭṭhiṃ purakkharonto dāne sammāpaṭipanno hotīti āha 『『dānaṃ nāma…pe… hotī』』ti.

Bhāvanāpahānasamāropanāni pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato viññāyantīti padaṭṭhānavevacanasamāropanāni dassetuṃ 『『taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyaṃ. Aññañca yadettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ vuttanayattā, uttānatthattā cāti veditabbaṃ.

Hārasampātavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Nayasamuṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanā

我來將這段巴利文完整直譯成簡體中文： 因恐懼而給，如給予食物等。因貪愛而給，為相似事物。因物質小利而給，如給予酬勞等。或在悲憫領域中同情。不衰減，在功德領域，或在利益領域。"離恐"即遠離恐懼。以如是方式的約束，怨恨實不增長。如是一切不善，其惡果如此安立。 如"佈施"等顯示以佈施拒絕的轉變，同樣以斷除拒絕也應顯示轉變，所以說"不善實不捨"。 信業果，在佈施行中努力，以何種方式應佈施，在此建立正念，專注其心，樹立正見，在佈施中正確行道，所以說"佈施名"等"為是"。 在經中修習、斷除、勝解可以依其形相了知，為顯示立足處、遮詞、勝解安立，說"此為戒立足處"等，此易了知。其餘在此義中未分別者，因為依已說方式，義已顯了，應當了知。 行相連線變相品解說已畢。 理生起變相品解說。

79.『『Visayabhedato』』ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato vivarituṃ 『『yathā hī』』tiādimāha. Tattha nayatoti nayaggāhato. Na hi paṭivedhañāṇaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ paccakkhato pavattatīti. Anubujjhiyamānoti abhisamayañāṇassa anurūpaṃ bujjhiyamāno. Yathā ekapaṭivedheneva maggañāṇaṃ pavattati, evaṃ tadanucchavikaṃ vipassanāñāṇena gayhamānoti attho. Evañca katvā nandiyāvaṭṭādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ atthanayabhāvo samatthito hotīti. Tathā hi atthavisesasarūpatāya tayo nayā 『『suttattho』』ti vuttā, padatthavicārabhāvepi pana hārā 『『byañjanavicayo』』ti. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ tayoti codanaṃ sandhāyāha 『『paṭivijjhantānaṃ panā』』tiādi. Tattha ekameko saṃkilesavodānānaṃ vibhāgato dvisaṅgahoti yojanā. Catuchaaṭṭhadiso cāti na paccekaṃ te nandiyāvaṭṭādayo catuchaaṭṭhadisā, atha kho yathākkamanti. 『『Eva』』ntiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa nigamanaṃ.

Tathā cāti yathāvuttassa atthassa upacayena samatthanā. Pubbā koṭi na paññāyatīti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato paṭṭhānakathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. 『『Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ lobho sahate nara』』ntiādi (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 128) vacanato kāmataṇhāpi paṭicchādanasabhāvā, yato kāmacchandaṃ 『『nīvaraṇa』』nti vuttaṃ. Avijjāya pana bhavesu ādīnavappaṭicchādanaṃ sātisayanti. Tathā avijjāpi saṃyojanasabhāvā, yato sā bahiddhā saṃyojanabhāvena vuttā. Evaṃ santepi taṇhāya bandhanaṭṭho sātisayo apekkhitabhāvatoti imamatthaṃ dassento 『『tathāpi…pe… vutta』』nti āha.

『『Saṃyuttā』』ti padassa sampayuttāti atthoti āha 『『missitā』』ti. 『『Avijjābhibhūtā…pe… abhinivisantā』』ti etena avijjāya ayāthāvagahaṇahetutaṃ dasseti, tato so avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjāti vuccati. Kilissanaṃ upatāpananti āha 『『kilissanappayogaṃ attaparitāpanapaṭipatti』』nti. Allīyanaṃ sevanaṃ.

Dukkhanti…pe… jānantīti attanā anubhūyamānaṃ tathā tathā upaṭṭhitaṃ kāyikacetasikadukkhaṃ, itarampi vā ekadesaṃ jānanti. Taṇhāyapi eseva nayo. Sabhāgavisabhāgapaṭipajjitabbākārato tattha tesaṃ ñāṇaṃ natthevātidassento 『『idaṃ dukkha』』ntiādimāha. Pavattipavattihetumattampīti 『『pavatti pavattihetū』』ti ettakampi. Kā pana kathāti pacurajanasādhāraṇe lokiyepi nāma atthe yesaṃ ñāṇassa paṭighāto, paramagambhīre ariyānaṃ eva visayabhūte lokuttare nivattinivattihetusaṅkhāte atthe kā nāma kathā, chinnā kathāti attho. Aṭṭhasamāpattipabhedassa kevalassa samathassa tādise kāle bāhirakānañca ijjhanato 『『vipassanādhiṭṭhāna』』nti visesitaṃ. Vūpasamo samucchedo, paṭippassaddhi ca.

『『Saṃsārassa anupacchedanato』』ti idaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ diṭṭhigatikamatadassanaṃ. So hi puttamukhadassane asati saṃsāro ucchijjeyyāti bhāyati. Yato vuttaṃ –

『『Gaṇḍuppādo kikī ceva, kuntī brāhmaṇadhammiko;

Ete abhayaṃ bhāyanti, sammūḷhā caturo janā』』ti. (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.293; a. ni. ṭī. 3.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： "依境界差別"簡略說的義理，爲了詳細解釋而說"因為如"等。此中"由理趣"即由把握理趣。因為毗缽舍那智不像證知智那樣直接轉起。"被覺知"即隨順現觀智而被覺知。如同道智以一證悟而轉起，如是以與此相應的毗缽舍那智所把握的意思。如是而作，喜轉等三種成為義理趣是合理的。如是依特殊義自性,三種理趣稱為"經義",但行相是詞義觀察,所以稱為"文句擇"。若如是,為何是三種?爲了回答這個質問而說"但對於證悟者"等。此中每一種由染凈的區分而有兩攝,這是其聯繫。"四六八方"並非那些喜轉等各自是四六八方,而是依次第。"如是"等是前說義理的總結。 "如是"即以增加前說義理的確定。"前際不可知"此處應說的,將在後面緣起說中顯明。"當貪勝制人,彼時為盲暗"等所說,欲愛也有遮蔽自性,因此欲貪稱為"蓋"。但無明對有對過患的遮蔽更為殊勝。如是無明也有結縛自性,因此說它是外在結縛。雖然如是,愛的繫縛義更為殊勝,因為是所期望的,為顯示此義而說"然而"等"說"。 "相應"字的義是相應,所以說"混合"。由"被無明勝制"等顯示無明是非如實把握的因,因此它稱為無明,因為覺知不應覺知。煩惱即熱惱,所以說"煩惱應用,自我熱惱行"。親近即依止。 "苦"等"知"即自己所經歷如是如是現起的身心之苦,及其他部分也知。愛也是此理。爲了顯示他們對於應行的同分異分方式無有智慧,所以說"此苦"等。"僅轉起及轉起因"即"轉起及轉起因"這麼多而已。"何況"即對於多數人共同的世間義尚且有智障礙者,對於最甚深唯聖者境界的出世間止息及止息因之義,更何須說,已斷言說。因為在那時外道也成就八等至等純粹止,所以特別說"觀的住立"。寂止即斷絕、平息。 "因不斷輪迴"這是見取者的見取意見顯示。因為他若不見兒子面容,恐怕輪迴會斷絕。如說： "蟲生、鷓鴣、鴛鴦、婆羅門法者, 此四人愚癡,恐懼無恐畏";

5.192);

Tadabhiññāti taṃ yathāvuttaantadvayaṃ abhijānanti guṇaṃ āropetvā jānantīti tadabhiññā. Atthabhañjanato, rogagaṇḍasallasadisatāya attabhāvasaṃkilesānañca rogagaṇḍasallatā.

Sakkāyadassaneti ettha diṭṭhidassanaṃ, sakkāyova dassanaṃ sakkāyadassananti attho veditabbo. Tesanti diṭṭhicaritānaṃ. Attābhiniveso balavā. Tasmā yathāupaṭṭhitaṃ rūpaṃ 『『attā』』icceva gaṇhantīti adhippāyo. Tathā vedanādiṃ. Taṇhācarito pana yathāupaṭṭhitaṃ rūpaṃ taṇhāvatthuṃ katvā attaniyābhinivesena abhinivisantā tadaññameva attato samanupassanti. Evaṃ vedanādīsu. Tenāha 『『taṇhācaritā』』tiādi. Vijjamāneti paramatthato upalabbhamāne. Kāyeti samūhe. Diṭṭhiyā parikappito attādi eva paramatthato nupalabbhati, diṭṭhi pana labbhatevāti āha 『『satī vā vijjamānā』』ti.

Sakkāyadassanamukhenāti sakkāyadiṭṭhimukhena.

Ucchedasassatanti taṃsahacaraṇato ucchedasassatadiṭṭhi vuttā. 『『Ucchedasassatavādā』』tipi pāṭho.

Kasiṇāyatanānīti kasiṇajjhānāni.

Tejetvāti nisānetvā.

1. Ettāvatā nandiyāvaṭṭassa bhūmiracanavasena saṃkilesapakkho dassitoti āha 『『tattha diṭṭhicaritotiādinā vodānapakkhaṃ dassetī』』ti. 『『Yasmā sallekhe tibbagāravo』』ti iminā tattha tibbagāravattā saṃlekhānusantatavuttinā bhavatīti dasseti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Micchādhimokkho saddhāpatirūpako avatthusmiṃ pasādo.

Puggalādhiṭṭhānena dhammameva vibhajatīti āha 『『sattāpi…pe… dassetī』』ti.

Ye hi kecīti ettha hi-saddo nipātamattaṃ. 『『Imāhi eva catūhi paṭipadāhī』』tipi pāḷi. Dukkhāpaṭipadādivibhāgena maggo eva idha vuttoti āha 『『paṭipadā hi maggo』』ti catuddisāsaṅkhātaṃ magganti catuddisāsaṅkhātaṃ pavattanupāyaṃ. Dve disā etissāti dvidisā. Nandiyāvaṭṭassāti nandiyāvaṭṭanayassa.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： "彼現知"即以讚美功德而了知前面所說的兩種。從義破壞，以及如同疾病、腫瘤、箭的相似性，自體污穢猶如疾病、腫瘤、箭。 "有身見"中，見的顯現，即身見本身的顯現，應當了知其義。彼即見行者。我執強烈。因此如所現起的色，即執取為"我"，其意圖如此。同樣對受等。貪行者對於所現起的色，以貪愛為依，以我所執著，執著于彼，認為異於此的是我。如是對受等。因此說"貪行"等。"存在"即從勝義諦中被獲得。"身"即聚集。從見所計度的我等從勝義諦中實不可得，但見可得，所以說"若存在"。 "由有身見門"即由有身見之門。 "斷常"即隨其伴隨的斷常見已說。"斷常論者"亦為文字。 "遍處處"即遍處禪。 "照耀"即顯示。 81.。以此喜轉地的界限塗抹，顯示染污方面，所以說"彼處見行"等以顯示清凈方面。"因為擇舍中熱烈恭敬"以此顯示在彼處以熱烈恭敬、擇舍相續行為而有。余處亦此理。邪解是信的隨形像，于非境界中隨喜。 以人確立而分別法，所以說"有情"等"顯示"。 "凡某"中"hi"只是語氣詞。"唯此四行道"亦為經文。苦行等區分的道在此已說，所以說"行道實為道"即四方所攝的道，四方所攝的轉起方式。"兩方"即兩種方向。"喜轉"即喜轉理趣。<.Assistant>

1. Vivattati vaṭṭaṃ etthāti vivattaṃ, vivattaṃ eva vivaṭṭaṃ, asaṅkhatadhātu, nibbuti eva vā. Tena vuttaṃ 『『nibbāna』』nti.

『『Katthadaṭṭhabba』』nti vā pāḷi. Upacayeti upacayāvatthāyanti attho. Dasannanti lobhādikilesavatthūnaṃ. Vipallāsahetubhāvatoti subhasaññādivipallāsahetukabhāvato. Vipariyesaggāhavasena hi ādīnavesu eva saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādānupassitā. Na hi yathābhūtañāṇe sati tathā sambhavo. Tena vuttaṃ 『『dasannaṃ…pe… bhāvato』』ti. Dasavidhakāraṇeti dasavidhe kāraṇe, dasavidhassa vā kāraṇe. Ayonisomanasikāraparikkhatā dhammā subhārammaṇādayo.

Tabbisayā kilesāti āhārapariññāparibandhabhūtā kilesā. Viññāṇaṭṭhitīsupi eseva nayo. Kāye pavattamāno paṭhamo vipallāso kāyasamudāye, kāyekadese ca kabaḷīkāre āhāre pavatto eva hotīti vuttaṃ 『『paṭhame āhāre visayabhūte paṭhamo vipallāsopavattatī』』ti. Tathā vedanāyaṃ pavattamāno dutiyavipallāso tappaccaye phassāhāre, citte pavattamāno tatiyavipallāso tappaccaye manosañcetanāhāre, dhammesu pavattamāno catutthavipallāso tappaccaye viññāṇāhāre pavatto eva hotīti vuttaṃ 『『catutthe āhāre catuttho vipallāso』』ti. Tenāha 『『sesāhāresupi eseva nayo』』ti. Āhārasīsena vā āhārapaṭibaddho chandarāgo gahito. Viññāṇaṭṭhitīsupi eseva nayo. Tenevāha 『『āhārasīsena tabbisayā kilesā adhippetā』』ti. Paṭhame āhāre visayabhūteti ca paṭhame āhāre chandarāgassa visayabhāvaṃ patte, tabbhāvaṃ anatikkanteti attho. Appahīnacchandarāgassa hi tattha vipallāsā sambhavanti, na itarassa. Tathā dutiyavipallāsādīsu appahīnesu. Itare upādānāni pavattanteva appahīnattāti āha 『『sesapadesupi eseva nayo』』ti. Yasmā ca upādānādīsu appahīnesupi yogādayo pavattanteva yathārahaṃ taṃsabhāvattā, tadekaṭṭhasabhāvato ca, tasmā vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ 『『paṭhame upādāne paṭhamo yogo』』tiādi. Tenāha 『『sesapadesupi eseva nayo』』ti.

83.Aparijānantassāti ñātapariññāya, tīraṇapariññāya, pahānapariññāyāti tīhi pariññāhi paricchinditvā ajānantassa, tesaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṃ anavabujjhantassāti attho. Tibbo bahalo chandarāgo hoti taṇhācaritabhāvatoti adhippāyo. Iti upakkilesassa diṭṭhābhinivesassa hetubhāvatoti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha 『『vuttanayenevā』』ti. Subhasukhasaññākāmupādānakāmabhavayogaabhijjhākāyaganthakāmabhavāsava- kāmabhavogharāgasallachandāgatigamanāni taṇhāpakkhikatāya, taṇhāsabhāvatāya ca taṇhāpadhānāni. Sīlabbatupādānabyāpādakāyaganthadosasalladosāgatigamanāni pana taṇhābhāve bhāvato , viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo taṇhāvisayato, sabbesaṃ vā taṇhāvisayato taṇhāpadhānatā labbhateva. Pacchimakānaṃ diṭṭhipadhānatā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 82.。此中輪迴轉向故為轉向，轉向即出離，無為界，或即是寂滅。因此說"涅槃"。 或經文為"何處應見"。"于增長"即在增長位的意思。"十種"即貪等煩惱事。"為顛倒因性"即因為是凈想等顛倒的因性。因為以顛倒執取方式，于結縛諸法的過患中反觀為味。若有如實智則不如是生起。因此說"十種"等"性"。"十種因"即十種因中，或十種的因中。不如理作意所造作的法是凈所緣等。 "彼等境界煩惱"即食遍知障礙的煩惱。識住中也是此理。身中轉起的第一顛倒在身聚集及身一分中的段食中轉起，所以說"在第一食所緣中第一顛倒轉起"。如是受中轉起的第二顛倒在其緣觸食中，心中轉起的第三顛倒在其緣意思食中，法中轉起的第四顛倒在其緣識食中轉起，所以說"在第四食中第四顛倒"。因此說"其餘食中也是此理"。或以食為主而把握食相關的欲貪。識住中也是此理。因此說"以食為主意指彼等境界煩惱"。"在第一食所緣中"即在第一食成為欲貪境界，未超越彼性的意思。因為未斷欲貪者有顛倒生起，非其他者。如是第二顛倒等未斷。其他取因未斷而轉起，所以說"其餘句中也是此理"。因為取等未斷時，隨宜軛等也轉起，因為是彼性，與彼一處性，所以經中說"在第一取中第一軛"等。因此說"其餘句中也是此理"。 83.。"不遍知者"即不以解知遍知、審察遍知、斷遍知三遍知而了知，不如實覺悟彼等的集、滅、味、過患、出離的意思。強烈、粗重的欲貪，意思是為貪行性。如是是染污見執的因性，為顯示此義而說"如已說方式"。凈樂想、欲取、欲有軛、貪身繫、欲有漏、欲有暴流、貪箭、欲趣行因為是愛方面，愛自性，故以愛為主。但戒禁取、瞋恚身繫、瞋箭、瞋趣行則因愛有而有，識住因是愛境界，或一切因是愛境界而得以愛為主。後者以見為主應依已說方式了知。

84.Kabaḷīkāre āhāreti kabaḷīkārāhāravisaye chandarāge. 『『Appahīne』』tiādikaṃ pariyāyakathaṃ muñcitvā nippariyāyameva dassento kabaḷīkārāhārassa 『『asubhasabhāvattā, asubhasamuṭṭhānattā cā』』ti vuttaṃ. Labbhamāne hi ujuke atthe kiṃ pariyāyakathāyāti. Chandarāgo vā tattha atthasiddhoti evampettha attho vutto. Na hi tattha asati chandarāge vipallāso sambhavati. Dukkhasabhāvattāti saṅkhāradukkhatāya dukkhasabhāvattā. Dukkhapaccayattāti tividhadukkhatālakkhaṇassa dukkhassa kāraṇato. Viññāṇe niccasaññino. Tathā hi sāti nāma bhikkhu kevaṭṭaputto 『『taṃyeva viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsaratī』』ti tattha niccābhinivesaṃ saṃvedesi. Yebhuyyena saṅkhāresu attasaññitā diṭṭhigatikānaṃ 『『cetanā attā』』tiādidiṭṭhiparidīpanesu veditabbā. 『『Bhavavisuddhī』』ti padassa atthavacanaṃ 『『nibbutisukha』』nti. 『『Sīlabbatehi…pe… sukhanti daḷhaṃ gaṇhātī』』ti iminā sīlabbatupādānaṃ idha bhavupādānanti dasseti. Tathā hi vakkhati 『『sīlabbatupādānasaṅkhātena bhavupādānenā』』ti.

Paccayā honti upanissayapaccayādinā. Paṭhame yoge ṭhitoti paṭhame yoge patiṭṭhito. Appahīnā hi kilesā kammavaṭṭādīnaṃ kāraṇabhūtā taṃsamaṅgino sattassa patiṭṭhāti vuccanti. Parassa abhijjhāyanaṃ parābhijjhāyanaṃ. Bhavapatthanāya bhavadiṭṭhibhavarāgavasena piyāyitassa vatthuno vipariṇāmaññathābhāve domanassuppattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ 『『bhavarāga…pe… padūsentī』』ti.

Ganthitvāti ganthiṃ katvā. Dvidhābhūtaṃ rajjuādike viya ganthikaraṇañhi ganthanaṃ. Cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhantā āsavānaṃ uppattihetu hontīti sambandho. Pariyuṭṭhānappattā ekacce kilesā visesato āsavuppattihetu hontīti dassanatthaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ uppaṭipāṭivacanaṃ. Tappaṭipakkhe visaye patthetīti yojanā. Tabbisayabahule bhave patthetīti yathā mānusakehi kāmehi nibbinnarūpā devūpapatti. Taṃsabhāvattāti diṭṭhisabhāvattā. Aparāparanti aññamaññaṃ. Ekaccā hi diṭṭhi ekaccassa diṭṭhābhinivesassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, yathā sakkāyadiṭṭhi itarāsaṃ. Abhinivisantassāti abhinivesanahetu. 『『Ayonisomanasikārato…pe… avijjāsavo uppajjatī』』ti idaṃ saccābhinivesassa phalabhūtaṃ avijjāsavaṃ dasseti ekantavassimeghavuṭṭhānena viya mahoghappavatti. Avijjāsavo siddho hoti vuṭṭhihetukamahoghasiddhiyā uparimeghavuṭṭhānaṃ viya.

『『Nandīrāgasahagatā』』tiādīsu (mahāva. 14) viya tabbhāvattho sahagatasaddoti āha 『『anusaya…pe… bhūtā vā』』ti. Cittassa abbhantarasaṅkhātaṃ hadayanti vipākacittappavattiṃ sandhāya vadati. Vipākavaṭṭepi kilesavāsanāhitā atthi kāci visesamattā.

Lobhasahagatassa viññāṇassa. Itarassa dosasahagatādikassa. Byañjanena viya bhojanassa ārammaṇassa abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ visesāpādanaṃ upasecanaṃ, nandī sappītikataṇhā upasecanaṃ etassāti nandūpasecanaṃ upasecanabhūtāyapi nandiyā rāgasallaupanisato. Upasitte pana vattabbameva natthīti dassetuṃ pāḷiyā 『『rāgasallena nandūpasecanena viññāṇenā』』ti vuttanti tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ 『『kena pana taṃ nandūpasecana』』nti pucchati.

我來將這段巴利文完整直譯成簡體中文： 84.。"段食"即段食境界中的欲貪。舍離"未斷"等轉告方式，顯示直接方式，說"段食因非凈性，從非凈生"。因為若得正直義，何須轉告方式。或欲貪于彼處成就義，此處如是說。實無慾貪時，顛倒不生起。"苦性"即行苦的苦性。"苦因"即三種苦相的苦緣故。于識中有常想。如比丘伽衛子說："此識往還輪迴"，於此有常執。多分於行中我想，見者的"思是我"等見可了知。"有清凈"一詞的義即"寂滅樂"。由"戒禁取堅固取"顯示戒禁取為此處的有取。如將說："以戒禁取所攝的有取"。 緣即近依緣等。"在第一軛中住"即在第一軛中安立。未斷的煩惱是業輪等的因，說為資益彼有情的安立。他人的貪求即他人貪求。以有的希求，有見、有貪方式，對可愛事物變壞、異狀時生起憂苦，說"有貪"等"污染"。 "繫縛"即作繫縛。如繩等二分，繫縛即縛。繫心佔據而住，是諸漏生起的因。相連繫。某些煩惱特別是漏生起的因，註釋中有相反序說明。于彼對治境界前進。于彼境界廣大有中前進，如從人間諸欲厭離而生天。"彼性"即見性。"互相"即彼此。某些見是某些見執的因，如有身見之於其他見。"執著者"即執著因。"非理作意"等顯示堅執的果是無明漏，如大雨降下大洪流。無明漏如同雨水引發大洪流而成就。 如"喜貪相應"等，說"隨眠"等"成為"。以心內所攝的心臟為意，指示異熟心的轉起。在異熟輪中，煩惱習氣中也有某些微細差別。 貪相應的識。其他瞋等相應的識。如調味食物般于所緣的加工、特別產生、澆注，喜即貪箭的澆注，故為喜澆注，以喜貪箭為近因。若已澆注則無所說，以經中"以貪箭喜澆注的識"，為顯示此義，問"以何喜澆注"。

Rāgasallenāti hetumhi karaṇavacananti dassento 『『rāgasallena hetubhūtenā』』ti āha. Upanissayapaccayattho cettha hetvattho. Upagantabbato viññāṇenāti vibhattiṃ pariṇāmetvā yojetabbaṃ. 『『Patiṭṭhābhāvato』』ti iminā viññāṇassa nissayādipaccayataṃ vadati. Tenāha 『『rūpakkhandhaṃ nissāya tiṭṭhatī』』ti. Evaṃ dutiyādiviññāṇaṭṭhitīsupi nissayādipaccayatā vattabbā patiṭṭhāvacanato.

1. Yadipi akusalamūlādike tipukkhalassa, taṇhādike nandiyāvaṭṭassa disābhāvena vakkhati, tathāpi aññamaññānuppavesato ekasmiṃ naye siddhe itarepi siddhā eva hontīti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ 『『āhārādayo…pe… vavatthapetu』』nti vuttaṃ. Vakkhamāne vā akusalamūlataṇhādike ādisaddena saṅgahetvā 『『āhārādayo』』ti vadanto 『『nayāna』』nti bahuvacanamāha. Ekassa atthassāti rāgacaritassa upakkilesatāsaṅkhātassa ekassa payojanassa. Byañjanatthopi gahito, na byañjanameva gahitanti suttapadāni aññamaññapariyāyavacanāni yathārahaṃ taṇhāvatthūnaṃ tattha kathitattā vuttaṃ 『『savatthukā taṇhā vuttā』』ti. Dosavatthūnaṃ, diṭṭhivatthūnañca tattha kathitattā 『『savatthuko doso, savatthukā diṭṭhi ca vuttā』』ti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha 『『vuttanayānusārenā』』ti.

Dukkhākārena saha dukkhākāraṃ gahetvāti attho. Evañcetanti yadi taṃtaṃanupassanābahulassa vasena purimāhāradvayādīsu vimokkhamukhavisesaniddhāraṇaṃ kataṃ, etaṃ evameva veditabbaṃ, na aññathā. Tattha kāraṇaṃ vadanto 『『na hī』』tiādimāha. Tassattho – yathā ariyamaggānaṃ odhiso kilesappajahanato pahātabbesu dhammesu niyamo atthi, na evaṃ vipassanāya pariññāpahānānaṃ aniccantikattāti.

Apare panāhu – purime āhāradvaye parikilesabhāvena, dukkhapaccayattā ca dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ supākaṭaṃ. Tattha purime viññāṇaṭṭhitidvayaviññāṇāhāre tatiyaviññāṇaṭṭhitiyaṃ aniccalakkhaṇaṃ, manosañcetanāhāre catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitiyaṃ anattalakkhaṇaṃ supākaṭanti tissannaṃ anupassanānaṃ pavattimukhatāya tehi appaṇihitādivimokkhamukhehi pariññaṃ gacchantīti. Tathā vipallāsādīsu purimadvayaṃ dukkhānupassanāya ujuvipaccanīkaṃ, itaradvayaṃ aniccānattānupassanānaṃ. Iti pavattimukhatāya ca ujuvipaccanīkatāya ca ime dhammā yathārahaṃ appaṇihitādivimokkhamukhehi pariññeyyā, pahātabbā ca vuttā. Tattha subhasukhasaññākāmupādānasīlabbatupādānakāmayogabhavayogaabhijjhākāya ganthakāmāsavakāmogha bhavogha rāgasallachandaagatigamanāni sukhassādavasena pavattanato dukkhānupassanāya paṭipakkhabhāvato byāpādakāyaganthadosasalladosaagatigamanāni pavattimukhatāya appaṇihitavimokkhamukhena pahātabbāni. Tatiyasaññādayo niccābhinivesatannimittāhi aniccānupassanāya paṭipakkhabhāvato animittavimokkhamukhena pahātabbā. Catutthasaññādayo attābhinivesatannittāhi anattānupassanāya paṭipakkhabhāvato suññatavimokkhamukhena pahātabbā. Tattha mānasallabhayaagatigamanānaṃ niccābhinivesanimittatā veditabbā. Na hi aniccato passato mānajappanaṃ, bhayaṃ vā sambhavati. Avijjāyogādīnaṃ attābhinivesanimittatā pākaṭā evāti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： "以貪箭"為因的具格，顯示"以貪箭為因"。此處因義即近依緣義。"以識"即轉變變格而聯繫。以"安立性"說識的所依等緣性。因此說"依色蘊而住"。如是第二等識住也應說所依等緣性，因說安立。 85.。雖然將說不善根等為三孔，愛等為喜轉方位，然而由於互相包攝，一理趣成就時其他也即成就，爲了顯示此特別而說"食等"等"確定"。或將說的不善根愛等以"等"字攝，說"食等"而說"諸理趣"複數。"一義"即貪行污染性一目的。不僅把握文字而已，也把握文字義，經文互為同義詞，隨宜說愛事，所以說"已說有事愛"。因說瞋事、見事，意指"已說有事瞋、有事見"，所以說"依已說理趣"。 與苦相一起把握苦相的意思。"若如是"即若依各種觀察多的方式，於前二食等抉擇解脫門特別，此應如是了知，非其他。說明其因而說"因為"等。其義為：如聖道由部分斷煩惱而於應斷法有決定，毗婆舍那則因遍知斷非究竟而無決定。 其他人說：前二食由惱害性，及為苦因，苦相明顯。於前二識住識食中第三識住無常相，意思食中第四識住無我相明顯，以三隨觀的轉起入口，由彼等無愿等解脫門達遍知。如是顛倒等前二與苦隨觀直接相反，餘二與無常無我隨觀。如是由轉起入口及直接相反性，此等法隨宜由無愿等解脫門應遍知、應斷。其中凈樂想、欲取、戒禁取、欲軛、有軛、貪身繫、欲漏、欲暴流、有暴流、貪箭、欲趣行由樂味方式轉起，與苦隨觀對立；瞋身繫、瞋箭、瞋趣行由轉起入口以無愿解脫門應斷。第三想等因常執及其因相與無常隨觀對立，以無相解脫門應斷。第四想等因我執及其因相與無我隨觀對立，以空解脫門應斷。其中慢箭、怖畏趣行應知為常執因相。因為見無常者不生慢見、怖畏。無明軛等的我執因相即是明顯。

1. Appamaññāvajjā rūpāvacarasamāpattiyo dibbavihārā 『『devūpapattisaṃvattanikakusalasamāpattiyo cā』』ti katvā, satipi tabbhāve parahitapaṭipattito, niddosatāya ca seṭṭhā vihārāti catasso appamaññā brahmavihārā, catasso phalasamāpattiyo ariyavihārā 『『ārakā kilesehi ariyānaṃ vihārā』』ti. Catasso āruppasamāpattiyo āneñjavihārā, satipi devūpapattisaṃvattanikakusalasamāpattibhāve āneñjasantatāhi lokiyesu sikhāppattito.

Adhikaraṇabhedenāti vatthubhedena.

Yaṃ abhiṇhaṃ na pavattati, taṃ acchariyanti dassetuṃ 『『andhassa…pe… uppajjanaka』』nti vuttaṃ. Adhitiṭṭhati sīlādi etena saccena, ettha vā sacce nimittabhūte, adhiṭṭhānamattameva vā taṃ saccanti evaṃ karaṇādhikaraṇabhāvatthā paccayavasena veditabbā samānādhikaraṇasamāsapakkhe. Tathā aññapadatthasamāsapakkhe. Itarasmiṃ pana samāse karaṇādhikaraṇatthā eva, te ca kho sīlādivasena ca veditabbā. Sukhanti jhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānasukhaṃ. Lokiyavipākasukhampi labbhateva. 『『Nāññatra bojjhā…pe… pāṇina』』nti (saṃ. ni.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 86.。除無量外的色界等至為天住，"導向天生的善等至"，雖有彼性，由利他行、無過失性而為殊勝住處，四無量為梵住，四果等至為聖住，"遠離煩惱故為聖者之住"。四無色等至為不動住，雖有導向天生的善等至性，因不動寂靜而於世間為至頂。 "依事分"即依事物差別。 為顯示不常生起者為希有，說"盲者"等"生起"。以此諦支援戒等，或於此諦為相，或僅是支援故為諦，如是依作具、處所義由緣而了知，在同位格複合詞方面。如是在其他詞義複合詞方面。但在其他複合詞中僅作具、處所義，而且應由戒等了知。"樂"即禪那、毗婆舍那、道、果、涅槃之樂。世間異熟樂也得。"除了覺悟"等"眾生"。;

1. 98) hi imāya gāthāya saṅgahitā anattaparihāramukhena sattānaṃ abhayā nibbānasampattisukhāvahā cattāro dhammā idha 『『sukhabhāgiyā』』ti vuttāti. Anavasesapariyādānatoti pharaṇavasena anavasesaggahaṇato.

Paṭhamassa satipaṭṭhānassa paṭhamapaṭipadāvasena pavattassāti adhippāyo. Evaṃ sesesupi. 『『Yathā hī』』tiādinā yathāvuttapaṭipadāsatipaṭṭhānānaṃ nānantariyakataṃ upamāya vibhāveti. Satipi ca sabbāhi paṭipadāhi sabbesaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ niyamābhāve nānantarikabhāvena desanākkamenevettha nesaṃ ayamanukkamo katoti veditabbo. Atha vā kāyavedanāsu subhasukhasaññānaṃ dubbiniveṭhiyatāya asubhadukkhānupassanānaṃ kiccasiddhito purimena paṭipadādvayena purimaṃ satipaṭṭhānadvayaṃ yojitaṃ tadabhāvato. Itarena itaraṃ. Tāni hi purimesu satipaṭṭhānesu katakammassa icchitabbāni. Atha vā yathā taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritānaṃ mandatikkhapaññānaṃ vasena catasso paṭipadā yojitā, evaṃ cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni sambhavantīti dassetuṃ paṭipadāsatipaṭṭhānānaṃ ayamanukkamo kato.

『『Tathā』』ti iminā yathā samānapaṭipakkhatāya paṭhamassa satipaṭṭhānassa bhāvanā paṭhamassa jhānassa visesāvahā, evaṃ pītisahagatādisamānatāya dutiyasatipaṭṭhānādibhāvanā dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ visesāvahāti imamatthaṃ upasaṃharati. Pītipaṭisaṃvedanādīti ādisaddena sukhapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ, cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ, passambhanañca saṅgaṇhāti. Cittassa abhippamodanaggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ paṭisaṃvedanasamādahanavimocanānampi vasena pavattiyā icchitabbattā. Aniccavirāgādīti ādisaddena nirodhapaṭinissaggā saṅgayhanti.

Rūpāvacarasamāpattīnanti ettha paṭiladdhamattaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiyā paguṇavasībhāvāpādanassa paccayo hoti, na itarāsaṃ. Itarāsaṃ pana adhiṭṭhānabhāvena paramparāya paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ. Byāpādavihiṃsāvitakkaaratirāgā byāpādavitakkādayo. Sukhenāti akicchena, akasirenāti attho.

Dibbavihārādike cattāro vihāre padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā nānāsantānesu uppannāya vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya yathākkamaṃ anuppannākusalānuppādanādivasena pavattavisayaṃ sandhāya pāḷiyaṃ 『『paṭhamo vihāro bhāvito bahulīkato』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammappadhānasadisañhettha sammappadhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Ariyavihāre ca heṭṭhime nissāya uparimaggādhigamāya vāyamantassa ayaṃ nayo labbhati. Maggapariyāpannasseva vā sammappadhānassa nānāsantānikassa yathāvuttavipassanāgamanena taṃtaṃkiccādikassa vasenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sakkā hi vipassanāgamanena saddhindriyāditikkhatāviseso viya vīriyassa kiccavisesavisayo maggo viññātuṃ.

Tathā sikhāppattaupekkhāsatipārisuddhidibbavihāraṃ nissāya uppannaṃ paṭhamaṃ sammappadhānaṃ mānappahānaṃ ukkaṃseti, brahmavihārasannissaye uppannaṃ dutiyaṃ sammappadhānaṃ kāmālayasamugghātaṃ, ariyavihārasannissayena uppannaṃ tatiyaṃ sammappadhānaṃ avijjāpahānaṃ, santavimokkhasannissayena uppannaṃ catutthaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhavūpasamaṃ ukkaṃsetīti dassetuṃ 『『paṭhamaṃ sammappadhāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 經中此偈所攝以無我防護門而為眾生帶來無畏、涅槃成就樂的四法，此處說為"樂分"。"無餘遍盡"即遍滿方式無餘把握。 意指"第一念處依第一行道而轉起"。其餘也如是。以"如"等以譬喻闡明如說行道念處的次第性。雖以一切行道一切念處無決定，應知此處以次第方式教說而作此順序。或者,因為身受中凈樂想難以除去,以苦不凈觀成就作用,以前二行道配合前二念處,因無彼而以其他配合其他。因為彼等應為前念處已作業者所求。或者如依貪行見行、鈍利慧者而配四行道,如是四念處生起，為顯示此而作行道念處此順序。 以"如是"總結此義:如由同對治性第一念處修習導致第一禪特勝,如是由俱喜等同性第二念處等修習導致第二禪等特勝。"覺知喜"等，"等"字攝受覺知樂、覺知心行、寂靜。此處應視令心歡喜為示例，因為應求以覺知、等持、解脫方式轉起。"無常離貪"等，"等"字攝受滅、定。 "色界等至"中，初得的初禪為初禪等至熟練自在的緣,非其他。應知其他則以確立性為間接之緣。瞋害尋不樂貪為瞋尋等。"以樂"即不難、不艱,此為義。 以天住等四住為足處，依不同相續生起的出起道觀，依次以未生善不生等方式轉起境界，經中說"第一住已修已多作"等。此處說與正勤相似的正勤。于聖住中，依下而求上道證得者亦得此理。或是道所攝的正勤，依不同相續如說觀行，依各作用等而說此。因為如由觀行可知信根等增勝差別，如是亦可知精進作用差別的道。 如是依至頂舍念清凈天住生起的第一正勤增上慢斷，依梵住生起的第二正勤遍滅欲依，依聖住生起的第三正勤無明斷，依寂靜解脫生起的第四正勤有寂，為顯示此而說"第一正勤"等。

Pahīnamāno na visaṃvādeyyāti mānappahānaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍheti visaṃvādananimittasseva abhāvato. Appahīnamāno hi mānanissayena kiñci visaṃvādeyya. Kāmālaye, diṭṭhālaye ca samugghāṭite cāgapaṭipakkhassa avasaro eva natthīti ālayasamugghāto cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍheti. Avijjāya samucchinnāya paññābuddhiyā paribandhova natthi, bhavasaṅkhāresu ossaṭṭhesu abhavūpasamassa okāsova natthīti mānappahānādayo saccādhiṭṭhānādike saṃvaḍḍhentīti dassetuṃ 『『mānappahāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Avisaṃvādanasīlo dhammacchandabahulo chandādhipateyyaṃ samādhiṃ nibbatteti. Cāgādhimutto nekkhammajjhāsayo akosajjabahulatāya vīriyādhipateyyaṃ, ñāṇuttaro cittaṃ attano vase vattento cittādhipateyyaṃ, vūpasantasabhāvo upasamahetubhūtāya vīmaṃsāya vīmaṃsayato vīmaṃsādhipateyyaṃ samādhiṃ nibbattetīti saccādhiṭṭhānādipārisuddhichandasamādhiādīnaṃ pāripūriyā saṃvattatīti dassetuṃ 『『saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ bhāvita』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Dhammacchandabahulo chandasamādhimhi ṭhito iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāte anavajjasevī hoti. Āraddhavīriyo vīriyasamādhimhi ṭhito saṃkilesapakkhassa santapanavaseneva puññaṃ paripūreti. Cittaṃ attano vase vattento cittasamādhimhi ṭhito paññāya upakārānupakārake dhamme pariggaṇhanto buddhiṃ phātiṃ gamissati. Vīmaṃsāsamādhimhi ṭhito dhammavicayabahulo upadhipaṭinissaggāvahameva paṭipattiṃ brūhetīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ 『『chandasamādhi bhāvito』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Dūrādūrapaccatthikanivāraṇe bahūpakāro indriyasaṃvaro mettāya visesuppattihetuto mettaṃ vaḍḍheti. Tapena saṃkilesadhamme vikkhambhento vīriyādhiko paradukkhāpanayanakāmataṃ sāhatthikaṃ karotīti tapo karuṇaṃ saṃvaḍḍheti. Paññā pariyodāpitā sāvajjānavajjadhamme pariggaṇhantī pahāsanipātato muditaṃ rakkhantī paribrūheti. Upadhinissaggo pakkhando ninnapoṇapabbhārova sammadeva sattasaṅkhāresu udāsino hotīti so upekkhāvihāraṃ parivaḍḍhetīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ 『『indriyasaṃvaro bhāvito』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha 『『yo yassa visesapaccayo, so taṃ paripūretīti vutto』』ti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： "已斷慢不欺妄"，慢斷增長諦確立，因為無欺妄相。未斷慢者依慢而欺妄某事。斷除欲依、見依時，無施捨對治機會，故依斷增長施確立。無明斷盡時，無慧覺障礙，捨棄有行時，無非有寂處，為顯示慢斷等增長諦確立等，說"慢斷"等。 不欺妄性多法欲者生起欲增上定。施捨勝解出離意樂者，因多不懈怠而生起精進增上，智上者令心隨己轉生起心增上，寂靜性者以寂靜因的觀察而觀察生起觀察增上定，為顯示諦確立等清凈欲定等圓滿而轉，說"諦確立已修"等。 多法欲者住欲定中，于可意不可意六所緣生起時成為無過行者。精勤者住精進定中，以染污分熱惱方式圓滿福德。令心隨己轉者住心定中，以慧把握有益無益諸法而增長智慧。住觀察定中多法擇者增長導向依舍的修習，為顯示此義說"欲定已修"等。 于防護遠近怨敵中大有助益的根律儀，因為是慈特勝生起因而增長慈。以苦行壓伏染污法者多精進，親自作離苦欲求，故苦行增長悲。凈化的慧把握有罪無罪法，守護喜而不令墮落，故增長喜。舍依傾向趣入傾向，于有情諸行中正確平舍，故增長舍住，為顯示此義說"根律儀已修"等。因此說"某為某特勝因，說彼令彼圓滿"。

87.Disābhāvenāti nayānaṃ disābhāvenāti yojetabbaṃ. Atthopissa pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Yena catukkena yassa rāgacaritādipuggalassa vodānaṃ visuddhi. Yathā apariññātā, appahīnā ca paṭhamāhāravipallāsādayo rāgacaritādīnaṃ puggalānaṃ upakkilesā, evaṃ paṭhamapaṭipadādayo bhāvitā bahulīkatā nesaṃ visuddhiyo hontīti vuttanayānusārena sakkā viññātunti āha 『『heṭṭhā vuttanayamevā』』ti.

Atha vā purimāhi dvīhi paṭipadāhi sijjhamānā vipassanā attano kiccavuttisaṅkhātaṃ pavattidukkhampi saṅgaṇhantī dukkhānupassanābāhullavisesato dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ paṭivijjhantī 『『appaṇihitaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttā. Tatiyāya paṭipadāya sijjhamānā sukhappavattikatāya sammadeva santatighanaṃ bhinditvā aniccalakkhaṇaṃ vibhāventī 『『animittaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttā. Catutthāya pana paṭipadāya sijjhamānā sukhappavattikatāya, visadañāṇatāya ca samūhakiccārammaṇaghanaṃ bhinditvā sammadeva anattalakkhaṇaṃ vibhāventī 『『suññataṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttā.

Tathā kāyavedanānupassanā visesato dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ vibhāventī, cittānupassanā aniccalakkhaṇaṃ, dhammānupassanā anattalakkhaṇanti tā yathākkamaṃ 『『appaṇihitādivimokkhamukha』』nti vuttā.

Sappītikatāya assādāni paṭhamadutiyajjhānāni virajjanavasena visesato dukkhato passantiyā vipassanāya vasena 『『appaṇihitaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttāni. Tatiyaṃ santasukhatāya bāhirakānaṃ niccābhinivesavatthubhūtaṃ sabhāvato 『『anicca』』nti passantiyā vipassanāya vasena 『『animittaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttaṃ. Catutthaṃ upakkilesavigamādīhi parisuddhaṃ susamāhitaṃ yathā paresaṃ, evaṃ attano ca yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodhahetutāya sammadeva 『『suñña』』nti passantiyā vipassanāya vasena 『『suññataṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttaṃ.

Evaṃ vihārānaṃ vipassanāvaseneva vimokkhamukhatā, tattha 『『dibbabrahmavihārānaṃ santasukhatāya assādanīyatā』』tiādinā appaṇihitavimokkhamukhatā yojetabbā. Ariyavihārassa paññādhikattā visesato anattānupassanāsannissayatāya suññatavimokkhatā. Āneñjavihārassa santavimokkhatāya aniccalakkhaṇappaṭivedhassa visesapaccayasabhāvato animittavimokkhamukhatā yojetabbā.

Tathā purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ sammappadhānānaṃ saṃkilesavisayattā kilesadukkhavītikkamassa dukkhānupassanābāhullattā appaṇihitavimokkhamukhatā. Tatiyassa anuppannakusaluppādanena dhammānaṃ udayavayavantatāvibhāvanato aniccalakkhaṇaṃ pākaṭanti animittavimokkhamukhatā. Catutthassa uppannānaṃ ṭhitattaṃ byāpārāpajjanena dhammānaṃ avasavattitādīpanato anattalakkhaṇaṃ supākaṭanti suññatavimokkhamukhatā.

Mānappahānālayasamugghātānaṃ sahāyataṇhāpahānatāya taṇhāpaṇidhivisodhanato appaṇihitavimokkhamukhatā. Avijjāpahānassa paññākiccādhikatāya suññatavimokkhamukhatā. Bhavūpasamassa saṅkhāranimittapaṭipakkhatāya animittavimokkhamukhatā.

Pakatiyā dukkhasabhāve saṅkhāre ñāṇasaccena avisaṃvādento dukkhato eva passati, cāgādhivimuttatāya taṇhaṃ vidūrīkaronto rāgappaṇidhiṃ visosetīti purimaṃ adhiṭṭhānadvayaṃ 『『appaṇihitaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttaṃ. Itarassa pana adhiṭṭhānadvayassa suññatānimittavimokkhamukhatā vuttanayā eva.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 87.。"為方位"應配合為"諸理趣的方位"。其義也應如前說理解。以某四法為某貪行等補特伽羅的清凈。如未遍知、未斷的第一食顛倒等是貪行等補特伽羅的染污，如是已修已多作的第一行道等是彼等的清凈，依已說理趣可以了知，所以說"如下已說理趣"。 或者以前二行道成就的毗婆舍那，攝受自己作用活動所稱的轉起苦，由多苦隨觀特勝而通達苦相，說為"無愿解脫門"。以第三行道成就，因樂轉起而善破相續密集，顯現無常相，說為"無相解脫門"。以第四行道成就，因樂轉起及利慧，善破聚集作用所緣密集，善顯現無我相，說為"空解脫門"。 如是身受隨觀特別顯現苦相，心隨觀無常相，法隨觀無我相，故彼等依次說為"無愿等解脫門"。 因有喜而有味的初二禪，由離貪方式特別觀苦的毗婆舍那力，說為"無愿解脫門"。第三禪因寂靜樂性，是外道常執所緣，本性"無常"而觀的毗婆舍那力，說為"無相解脫門"。第四禪由離染污等清凈，善等持，如他人亦如自己如實本性覺悟因性，善觀"空"的毗婆舍那力，說為"空解脫門"。 如是諸住由毗婆舍那力成為解脫門，其中"天梵住以寂靜樂性可愛"等應配無愿解脫門性。聖住因慧增上，特別依無我隨觀而成空解脫性。不動住因寂靜解脫性，為通達無常相特勝因性，應配無相解脫門性。 如是前二正勤因染污境界，超越煩惱苦而多苦隨觀，成無愿解脫門性。第三以未生善生起而顯現法生滅性，無常相明顯，故成無相解脫門性。第四以已生住性作用而顯示法非自在性，無我相極明顯，故成空解脫門性。 慢斷、依斷因斷愛而凈化愛愿，成無愿解脫門性。無明斷因慧作用增上，成空解脫門性。有寂因對治行相，成無相解脫門性。 以智諦不欺于自性苦的諸行而觀苦，以施捨勝解遠離愛而乾枯愛愿，故前二確立說為"無愿解脫門"。其餘二確立的空、無相解脫門性如已說理。

Chandādhipateyyā cittekaggatā visesato dhammacchandavato nekkhammavitakkabahulassa hoti, vīriyādhipateyyā pana kāmavitakkādike vinodentassāti tadubhayaṃ nissāya pavattā vipassanā visesato rāgādippaṇidhīnaṃ visosanato 『『appaṇihitaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttā. Cittādhipateyyaṃ , vīmaṃsādhipateyyañca nissāya pavattā yathākkamaṃ aniccānattānupassanābāhullato 『『animittaṃ vimokkhamukhaṃ, appaṇihitaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti ca vuttā.

Abhijjhāvinayano indriyasaṃvaro, kāmasaṅkappādivinodano tapo ca vuttanayeneva paṇidhipaṭipakkhato appaṇihitaṃ vimokkhamukhaṃ, buddhi anattānupassanānimittaṃ, upadhipaṭinissaggo nimittaggāhapaṭipakkhoti tadubhayasannissayā vipassanā yathākkamaṃ 『『suññataṃ, animittaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttā.

Āsannapaccatthikarāgaṃ paṭibāhantī mettā rāgapaṇidhiyā paṭipakkho, karuṇā paradukkhāpanayanākāravuttikā dukkhasahagatāya dukkhānupassanāya visesapaccayoti tadubhayasannissayā vipassanā 『『appaṇihitaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttā. Muditā sattānaṃ modaggahaṇabahulā tadaniccatādassanato aniccānupassanāya visesapaccayoti tannissayā vipassanā animittaṃ vimokkhamukhaṃ. Upekkhā ñāṇakiccādhikatāya anattānupassanāya visesapaccayoti tannissayā vipassanā 『『suññataṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti vuttāti evamettha pavattiākārato vipassato nissayato, kiccato ca bhinditvā vimokkhamukhāni yojitānīti.

Samatikkamanaṃ pariññāpahānañca. Saparasantāneti attano, paresañca santāne, tena kāyiko, vācasiko ca vihāro 『『vikkīḷita』』nti vuttoti dasseti 『『vividho hāro』』ti katvā. Tassa pana vibhāvanā idha adhippetā nayassa bhūmibhāvato. Yena paṭipakkhabhāvena. Tesaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvoti tesaṃ āhārādīnaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvo pahātabbabhāvo paṭipadādīnaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvo pahāyakabhāvoti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha paṭipadāggahaṇena vipassanā kathitā. Vipassanā ca cattāro āhāre parijānantī tappaṭibaddhachandarāgaṃ pajahatīti ujukameva tesaṃ paṭipakkhatā, evaṃ jhānādīnampi upādānādipaṭipakkhatā veditabbā tadupadesena vipassanāya kathitattā. Vipallāsasatipaṭṭhānānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvo pākaṭo eva. Nti sīhavikkīḷitaṃ. Vīsatiyā catukkehi visabhāgato vitthārena vibhattanti tīhi padehi saṅgahetvā kathikattā vuttaṃ 『『saṅkhepena dassento』』ti.

Indriyānanti saddhādiindriyānaṃ. Dasannaṃ catukkānaṃ niddhāraṇāti yojanā.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 欲增上心一境性特別屬於多法欲、多出離尋者，精進增上則屬於驅除欲尋等者，依此二者轉起的毗婆舍那，因特別乾枯貪等愿，說為"無愿解脫門"。依心增上、觀察增上轉起的，依次因多無常無我隨觀，說為"無相解脫門"和"無愿解脫門"。 調伏貪的根律儀，驅除欲尋等的苦行，如已說理由對治愿而為無愿解脫門，智慧為無我隨觀相，舍依為對治相執，依此二者的毗婆舍那依次說為"空、無相解脫門"。 慈遮止近怨貪為貪愿對治，悲以除他苦行相轉起為苦隨觀特勝因，依此二者的毗婆舍那說為"無愿解脫門"。喜多取有情歡喜，由見彼無常性為無常隨觀特勝因，依此的毗婆舍那為無相解脫門。舍因智作用增上為無我隨觀特勝因，依此的毗婆舍那說為"空解脫門"。如是此處由轉起行相、依處、作用分別配合解脫門。 超越即遍知斷。"于自他相續"即于自己與他人的相續，以此顯示身、語住處說為"遊戲"，稱為"種種行"。但此處意在闡明彼為理趣之地。由對治性。"彼等對治性"應配合為：彼等食等的對治性即應斷性，行道等的對治性即能斷性。其中以行道攝說毗婆舍那。毗婆舍那遍知四食而斷繫縛欲貪，故直接為彼等對治性，如是應知禪等也是取等對治性，因以彼教導說毗婆舍那。顛倒唸處的對治性極明顯。此即師子游戲。由二十四法以異相廣說，以三句攝說，故說"略示"。 "諸根"即信等根。"二十四法抉擇"為配合。

88.Niggacchatīti nikkhamati. Tato niddhāretvā vuccamāno hi niggacchanto viya hotīti. Cattāro puggaleti 『『taṇhācarito mando』』tiādinā (netti. 6) vutte cattāro puggale. Puggalādhiṭṭhānena cettha dhammo vuttoti āha 『『bhūmiṃ niddisitvā』』ti. Tato evāti yathāvuttapuggalacatukkato eva. Itaratthāpīti 『『sukhāya…pe… puggalā』』ti etthāpi. Sādhāraṇāyāti paṭhamacatutthāhipi vimissāya. Yathāvuttāsūti dutiyatatiyāsu.

Heṭṭhāti desanāhāravibhaṅgavicayahārasampātavaṇṇanāsu.

Eseva nayoti kusalamūlādidvādasatikasaṅgaho anavajjapakkho. 『『Vodāyati sujjhati etenāti vodāna』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 11) vaṃ netabbataṃ sandhāyāha.

Yathā hārauddeso kato, evaṃ nayānaṃ akaraṇe kāraṇaṃ, payojanañca vibhāvetukāmo 『『kasmā panā』』tiādimāha. Nayehi nayantarehi. Sambhavadassanatthanti upapattidassanatthaṃ. Tattha sambhavo anuddesakkamena niddisane karaṇaṃ dassanaṃ payojanaṃ. Yadi hi ime nayā uppattiṭṭhānavasena asaṃkiṇṇā bhaveyyuṃ, hārā viya uddesānukkameneva niddisitabbā siyuṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ hārānaṃ uddesāvasāne 『『ete soḷasa hārā pakittitā atthato asaṃkiṇṇā』』ti (netti. 1).

Yasmā panete mūlapadehi mūlapadantaraniddhāraṇena aññamaññaṃ te niggacchanti, tasmā ekasmiṃ niddiṭṭhe itaropi atthato niddiṭṭhoyeva nāma hotīti imassa atthassa dassanatthaṃ 『『uddesānukkamena niddeso na kato』』ti.

Idāni tameva saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena dassetuṃ 『『paṭhamanayato hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhādiṭṭhicaritavasena dvidhā puggale vibhajitvā tesaṃ vasena nandiyāvaṭṭanayaṃ nīharitvā puna te eva taṇhādiṭṭhicarite catuppaṭipadāvibhāgena vibhajitvā sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa sambhavo dassito, te eva catuppaṭipadābhedabhinne puggale puna ugghaṭitaññuādivibhāgena tidhā vibhajitvā tipukkhalassa nayassa sambhavo dassito. Taṃ sandhāyāha 『『paṭhamanayato…pe… niddiṭṭho』』ti.

Yasmā subhasukhasaññāhi lobho, niccasaññāya doso 『『iminā me anattho kato』』ti āghātuppattito , attasaññāya moho gahito hoti. Tathā asubhasaññādīhi alobhādayo, tasmā dhammādhiṭṭhānavasena tatiyanayato dutiyanayassa sambhavo. Yasmā pana lobhe sati sambhavato lobhaggahaṇeneva doso gayhati. Lobho ca taṇhā, moho avijjā, tappaṭipakkhato alobhādosehi samatho gayhati, amohena vipassanā, tasmā dhammādhiṭṭhānavaseneva dutiyanayato paṭhamanayassa sambhavoti imaṃ visesaṃ dīpetuṃ uddesānukkamena niddeso na katoti dassento 『『dhammādhiṭṭhānavasena panā』』tiādimāha.

Tenevāti tatiyanayato dutiyanayassa viya dutiyanayato paṭhamanayassapi sambhavato. Evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānavasena āgataṃ nissāya aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānavaseneva nayaniggamo niddhāritoti ayameva viseso. Yadi evanti pāḷiyaṃ āgatappakārato aññenapi pakārena nayā niddhāretabbā, evaṃ sante yathā puggalādhiṭṭhānavasena paṭhamanayato tatiyanayassa, tatiyanayato dutiyanayassa sambhavo dassito, evaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānavaseneva paṭhamanayato tatiyanayadutiyanayānaṃ, dhammādhiṭṭhānavaseneva dutiyanayato tatiyanayassa sambhavo dīpetabboti imamatthamāha 『『dve hutvā…pe… siyā』』ti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 88.。"出離"即出去。從彼抉擇而說故如出去。"四補特伽羅"即如說"鈍貪行者"等四種補特伽羅。此處依補特伽羅而說法，故說"指示地"。"從彼"即從如說四種補特伽羅。"其他處也"即"樂"等"補特伽羅"處也。"共通"即與第一第四混合。"如說"即第二第三。 "下"即在理趣分別、探究理趣會合註釋中。 "此即理趣"即善根等十二法攝無過分。"清凈即由此凈化為清凈"，意指應引導性而說。 如理趣總說已作，為顯明不作理趣的原因和目的而說"為何"等。"諸理趣"即以其他理趣。"為顯示生起"即為顯示產生。其中生起即依總說次第而詳說，顯示即目的。若此等理趣依生起處而不混雜，應如理趣般依總說次第而詳說。如是在理趣總說末說"此十六理趣已說，義不混雜"。 因為此等由根本句抉擇其他根本句而互相出離，所以一詳說時其他也即已詳說，為顯示此義而"不依總說次第而詳說"。 今為廣顯已略說之義而說"從第一理趣"等。其中分貪行見行為二種補特伽羅，依彼等引出喜轉理趣，復分彼等貪行見行為四行道，顯示師子游戲理趣的生起，復分彼等四行道差別的補特伽羅為利根等三種，顯示三窟理趣的生起。意指此而說"從第一理趣"等"已說"。 因為由凈樂想而貪，由常想而瞋因生起"此人對我作不利"之惱害，由我想而癡被攝，如是由不凈想等而無貪等，故依法確立從第三理趣生第二理趣。又因有貪時由生起而以貪攝瞋，貪即愛，癡即無明，由對治故以無貪無瞋攝止，以無癡攝觀，故依法確立從第二理趣生第一理趣，為顯示此差別而不依總說次第詳說，顯示而說"但依法確立"等。 "由彼"即如從第三理趣生第二理趣，如是從第二理趣也生第一理趣。如是依經中依補特伽羅確立而來，註釋中僅依法確立抉擇理趣出離，此即差別。"若如是"即若應由異於經中所來方式抉擇諸理趣，如是如依補特伽羅確立顯示從第一理趣生第三理趣，從第三理趣生第二理趣，如是應顯示僅依法確立從第一理趣生第三第二理趣，僅依法確立從第二理趣生第三理趣，意指此而說"二成"等"應"。

Tattha nayoti pacchā vuttadutiyanayo. Atthatoti atthāpattito, atthato labbhamānattā eva sarūpena na kathitoti attho. Idāni taṃ atthāpattiṃ ekantikaṃ katvā dassetuṃ 『『yasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Anuppaveso icchito taṃtaṃnayamūlapadānaṃ nayantaramūlapadesu samavarujjhanato. Tathā hi 『『yattha sabbo akusalapakkho saṅgahaṃ samosaraṇaṃ gacchati, yattha sabbo kusalapakkho saṅgahaṃ samosaraṇaṃ gacchatī』』ti (netti. 3) ca vuttaṃ. Ayañca atthoti 『『nayānaṃ aññamaññaanuppaveso niggamo』』ti ayaṃ duvidho attho. Piṭakānaṃ atthakathanaṃ peṭakaṃ, so eva upadesoti peṭakopadeso, upadesabhūtā pariyattisaṃvaṇṇanāti attho.

Ādito paṭṭhāyāti nayānaṃ aññamaññaanuppavesaniggamamattameva avibhāvetvā nayavicārassa paṭhamāvayavato pabhuti vibhāvanā dīpanā pakāsanā.

Dosadiṭṭhīti appassādatādidosagāhikadiṭṭhī, dosadassinoti attho. Te hi asamūhatānusayā, kāmesu ca ādīnavadassino. Idañhi nesaṃ aṅgadvayaṃ attakilamathānuyogassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Natthi atthoti yo rāgābhibhūtehi andhabālehi parikappito diṭṭhadhammiko kāmehi attho, so madhubindugiddhassa madhulittasatthadhārāvalehanasadiso appassādo bahudukkho bahupāyāso bahuādīnavo savighāto sapariḷāho samparāyiko tathevāti sabbadāpi viññūjātikassa kāmehi payojanaṃ na vijjati. Anajjhositāti anabhibhūtā viharanti. Tena vuccati sukhā paṭipadāti tena mandakilesabhāvena tesaṃ puggalānaṃ akicchena sijjhamānā vipassanā paṭipadā 『『sukhā paṭipadā』』ti vuccati. Ajjhositāti abhiniviṭṭhā. Ime sabbe sattāti ime taṇhādiṭṭhicaritabhāvena dvidhā vuttā aparimāṇappabhedā sabbepi paṭipajjantā sattā.

Sukhenapaṭinissajjantīti kilese akicchena pajahanti. 『『Imā catasso paṭipadā』』tiādi paṭipadānaṃ ettāvatāyaṃ, visayabhāvakiccesu ca byabhicārābhāvadassanaṃ. Ayaṃ paṭipadāti nigamanaṃ, ayaṃ paṭipadā yāya vasena sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmidassanatthaṃ cattāro puggalā niddhāritāti adhippāyo. Catukkamaggena kilese niddisatīti anantaraṃ vakkhamānena āhārādicatukkamaggena dasavatthuke kilesasamūhe niddisati. Catukkamaggena ariyadhammesu niddisitabbāti tappaṭipakkhena paṭipadādicatukkamaggena ariyadhammesu bodhipakkhiyesu visayabhūtesu niddhāretvā kathetabbā.

Idañca pamāṇaṃ cattāro āhārāti imesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ pavattiyā pamāṇaṃ, yadidaṃ cattāro āhārā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yāvadeva cattāro āhārā pariññaṃ na gacchanti, tāvadeva cattāro vipallāse vibhajanti. Yāvadeva cattāro vipallāsā appahīnā, tāvadeva cattāri upādānāni paribrūhantīti. Evaṃ sabbattha yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Tenāha 『『evaṃ imāni sabbāni dasa padānī』』ti. 『『Yojetabbānī』』ti ca vacanaseso.

『『Abhijjhāya ganthatī』』ti iminā abhijjhāyanameva ganthananti dasseti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Papañcentoti diṭṭhābhinivesaṃ vitthārento.

Vippaṭisāruppattihetubhāvo kilesānaṃ āsavananti āha 『『āsavantī』』ti. Kiṃ vippaṭisārāti tena kilesānaṃ vītikkamavatthuṃ vadati. Yasmā appahīnānusayasseva vippaṭisārā, na itarassa, tasmā 『『ye vippaṭisārā, te anusayā』』ti vuttaṃ. Padadvayenapi phalūpacārena kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 其中"理趣"即后說第二理趣。"義"即義涵，因為僅從義上獲得而非以自相說，此為義。今為確定顯示彼義涵而說"因為"等。欲求相入是因各理趣根本句于其他理趣根本句中平等對立。如是說"一切不善分攝歸依止，一切善分攝歸依止"。"此義"即"諸理趣互相相入出離"此二種義。解說三藏為篋論，彼即教導為篋論教導，即為教導的聖典註釋，此為義。 "從始"即不僅顯示理趣互相相入出離，而從理趣考察首分起顯明闡明開示。 "瞋見"即執取無味等過失見，即見過失者。彼等未斷隨眠，見欲中過患。此二支分說為彼等自苦行因。"無義"即為貪所制盲愚者所妄想現法欲義，如貪蜜滴者舔蜜涂刀刃般少味多苦多惱害多過患有苦惱有熱惱，後世亦如是，故智者任何時候都無慾用。"不耽著"即不被制住。"故說樂行道"，因彼等煩惱微弱，不艱難成就的毗婆舍那行道說為"樂行道"。"耽著"即執著。"此一切有情"即此以貪行見行分為二種說的無量差別一切修行有情。 "樂舍離"即不艱難斷煩惱。"此四行道"等是行道的究竟及顯示境界作用無差異。"此行道"為總結，此行道，依此為顯示師子游戲理趣地而抉擇四補特伽羅，此為意趣。"以四道顯示煩惱"即以將說的食等四道顯示十事煩惱聚。"應以四道顯示聖法"即應以對治的行道等四道于所緣聖法菩提分中抉擇而說。 "此量四食"即此等顛倒轉起的量，即是四食。此說：乃至四食未遍知，乃至分別四顛倒；乃至四顛倒未斷，乃至增長四取。如是一切處應隨宜說。故說"如是此一切十句"。應補充說"應配"。 "以貪繫縛"以此顯示唯以貪為系。其餘亦如是理。"戲論"即廣說見執取。 煩惱因成為後悔生起因，故說"漏"。"何後悔"，以此說煩惱的違犯事。因為唯未斷隨眠者有後悔，非其他，故說"彼後悔即隨眠"。二句都以果代說因。

Paṭhamenapadenāti yathāvuttesu dasasu suttapadesu paṭhamena padena. Paṭhamāya disāyāti tadatthasaṅkhātāya sīhavikkīḷitassa saṃkilesapakkhe paṭhamāya disāya.

Itīti evaṃ, vuttanayenāti attho. Kusalākusalānanti yathāvuttaanavajjasāvajjadhammānaṃ. Pakkhapaṭipakkhavasenāti vodānapakkhatappaṭipakkhavasena. Yojanāti paṭhamadisādibhāvena yutte katvā manasānupekkhanā. 『『Manasā volokayate』』ti (netti. 4) hi vuttaṃ.

Tassāti disālokanassa. Sotāpattiphalādīnaṃ pariyosānatā indriyavasena veditabbā. Yesañhi saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena satipaṭṭhānādīni sijjhanti, tesaṃ vasena sotāpattiphalādīnaṃ pariyosānatā. Tattha sotāpattiphale saddhindriyaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchati. Sotāpanno hi saddhāya paripūrikārī. Sakadāgāmiphale vīriyindriyaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchati. Sakadāgāmī hi āraddhavīriyo uparimaggādhigamāya. Anāgāmiphale samādhindriyaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchati. Anāgāmī samādhismiṃ paripūrikārī. Aggaphale arahatte satindriyañca paññindriyañca pāripūriṃ gacchati. Arahā hi sativepullappatto, paññāvepullappatto cāti.

Apare panāhu – saddhābalena subhasaññāya pahānaṃ. Saddahanto hi paṭikkūlamanasikāre kammaṃ karoti. Vīriyabalena sukhasaññāya pahānaṃ. Vīriyavā hi sukhassādaṃ abhibhavitvā yonisomanasikāramanuyuñjati. Samādhibalena niccasaññāya pahānaṃ. Samāhito hi saṅkhārānaṃ udayabbayaṃ pariggaṇhanto aniccasaññaṃ paṭilabhati. Paññābalena attasaññāya pahānaṃ. Paññavā hi saṅkhārānaṃ avasavattitaṃ sallakkhento attasuññataṃ paṭivijjhati. Sati pana sabbatthāpi icchitabbā. Tenāha 『『satiṃ ca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī』』ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234; mi. pa. 2.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 以第一句而言，即如所說十經句中的第一句。以第一方向而言，即師子游戲所說染污分的第一方向。 "如是"即如此，意指已說理趣。"善不善"即如所說無過無罪法。"分與對分"即以清凈分及其對治分。"聯結"即以第一方向等聯結，以心不偏不倚觀察。蓋經中說"以心觀察"。 彼即方向觀察。須陀洹果等終結應以根據理解。蓋以信等根，成就念處等，以其根據，須陀洹果等得其終結。于其中，須陀洹果中信根得圓滿。須陀洹者以信得圓滿。一來果中精進根得圓滿。一來者以精進發起上道。不還果中定根得圓滿。不還者于定中得圓滿。最上果阿羅漢果中念根與慧根得圓滿。阿羅漢實得念之充足，慧之充足。 復有說：以信力斷凈想。信者于不凈思惟而作業。以精進力斷樂想。精進者勝過樂味，專注正念思惟。以定力斷常想。定者觀察諸行生滅，得無常想。以慧力斷我想。慧者觀察諸行無自在性，洞察無我。然念應處處欲求。故經中說："諸比丘，我說念處處皆應"。

1.13). Evaṃ catuvipallāsappahāyīnaṃ catunnaṃ indriyānaṃ pāripūriṭṭhānaṃ cattāri sāmaññaphalāni catuvipallāsamukhānaṃ catunnaṃ disānaṃ pariyosānāni vuttānīti.

『『Lobho akusalamūla』』ntiādi lobhādīnaṃ hetuphalabhāvena sampayuttatāya dassanaṃ.

Tattha manāpikenāti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Amanāpikenāpi hi ārammaṇena vipariyesavasena lobho uppajjati. Manāpikenāti vā manāpikākārena. Phassavedanūpavicārarāgavitakkapariḷāhā sahajātāpi labbhanti, asahajātāpi. 『『Uppādo』』ti etena uppajjamānasaṅkhāraggahaṇanti 『『uppajjatī』』ti vuttaṃ. Uppādalakkhaṇasseva pana gahaṇe 『『uppajjatī』』ti na vattabbaṃ siyā. Na hi uppādo uppajjati, rāgajapariḷāhahetukatā ca tesaṃ rāgassa taṇhāsabhāvattā. Taṇhā hi dukkhassa samudayo, yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhanti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ 『『taṇhāsahajātavedanāya pana lobho sahajātādipaccayehi ca paccayo』』ti. Evaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇe uppannalobhasahagatasukhavedanāya udayo idha 『『uppādo saṅkhatalakkhaṇa』』nti vutto, tassā vipariṇāmo 『『vipariṇāmadukkhatā』』ti. Vipariṇāmāvatthā ca udayāvatthaṃ vinā na hotīti sā taṃ nissāya uppajjantī viya vuttā 『『uppādaṃ…pe… dukkhatā』』ti.

Doso akusalamūlantiādīsupi vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ nāma jarā, taṃ nissāya domanassassa uppajjanato vuttaṃ 『『ṭhitassa…pe… dukkhadukkhatā』』ti. Dosajapariḷāhahetukatā jarāya dosabahulassa puggalassa nacirena jīraṇato veditabbā.

Vayoti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodho. Aniccatāvasena ca saṅkhatadhammānaṃ saṅkhāradukkhatāti vuttaṃ 『『vaya…pe… saṅkhāradukkhatā』』ti. Tenāha bhagavā 『『yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkha』』nti (saṃ. ni. 3.15, 45, 76; paṭi. ma.

我將巴利文完整直譯成簡體中文： 如是說四顛倒斷除者，四根得圓滿處，四共同果，四顛倒門的四方向終結已說。 "貪為不善根"等，顯示貪等以因果關係相互聯繫。 其中"可意"者，多數說。即使以不可意的對境，亦因顛倒而生貪。或"可意"即可意方式。觸、受、觀察、貪慾、思慮、熱惱，與生俱生，亦可得異生。"生起"者，說為生起的行蘊把握。若僅取生起相，則不應說"生起"。蓋生起非生起，彼等因貪熱惱，貪為渴愛本性。渴愛實為苦之集，凡有集法，皆為苦。如是已說："與渴愛俱生受，貪以與生等因緣為緣"。如是于可意境生起貪俱生樂受，此處說"生起為有為相"，其變壞名"變壞苦"。變壞處非離生起處，故說似由彼生起"生起……苦"。 于"瞋為不善根"等，應依已說理趣類推義理。此有差別：住者之變異名老，依之而生憂苦，故說"住者……苦苦"。因瞋熱惱，多瞋者身不久老，可得知。 "壞"即諸行滅。依無常性，有為法說"行苦"，故說"壞……行苦"。世尊故說："凡無常即苦"。

2.10). Mohajapariḷāhahetukatā vayalakkhaṇassa yebhuyyena sammohanimittattā, maraṇassa avijjāpaccayattā ca saṃsārappavattiyā veditabbā.

Alobhādīnaṃ paññādipāripūrihetukatā yathārahaṃ upanissayakoṭisahajātakoṭiyā ca paccayabhāvena veditabbā. Sabbe hi kusalā dhammā sabbesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ paccayavisesā honti evāti. Abyāpādavitakkasannissayo upavicāro abyāpādūpavicāro. Avihiṃsūpacārepi eseva nayo.

Ayaṃ tipukkhalo nāma dutiyo nayo saddhiṃ disālokananayena niddiṭṭhoti vacanaseso. 『『Ime cattāro』』tiādi puggalādhiṭṭhāneneva nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa bhūmidassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Ime yathāvuttapaṭipadācatukkassa vasena catubbidhā. Visesenāti diṭṭhitaṇhāsannissayatāvisesena. Diṭṭhicarito hi tikkhapañño, mandapañño ca sukhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya ca dandhābhiññāya ca niyyātīti dvidhā vuttoti. Tathā taṇhācarito dukkhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya ca dandhābhiññāya ca niyyātīti dvidhā vuttoti dassito cāyamattho. Tenāha 『『dve honti diṭṭhicarito ca taṇhācarito cā』』ti.

Cattārohutvāti sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmidassane cattāro hutvā ṭhitā, catuppaṭipadāvasena cattāro katvā vuttāti attho. Tayo hontīti tipukkhalassa nayassa bhūmidassane ugghaṭitaññuādivasena tayo bhavanti. Tayo hutvāti tathā tayo hutvā ṭhitā tayo katvā kathitā. Dve hontīti idāni nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa bhūmidassane dve bhavanti. Ajjhosānanti diṭṭhiajjhosānaṃ. Abhinivesoti taṇhābhiniveso. Ahaṃkāroti ahaṃmāno 『『aha』』nti vā karaṇaṃ ahaṃkāro. Diṭṭhimānamaññanānaṃ vasena 『『ahamasmī』』ti samanupassanā mamaṃkāro, mamāyanaṃ taṇhāggāho.

Dasapadāni 『『paṭhamā disā』』ti kātabbānīti nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa 『『paṭhamā disā』』ti karaṇīyāni, 『『paṭhamā disā』』ti vavatthapetabbānīti attho. Saṃkhittena…pe… pakkhassāti anekappabhedassapi kaṇhapakkhassa saṃkilesapakkhassa atthaṃ saṃkhittena saṅkhepena paṭipakkhe vattamāne vodānadhamme uddissa ñāpenti pakāsenti, paṭhamā kātabbāti yojanā. Dasa padāni dutiyakānīti taṇhādikā dasa koṭṭhāsā 『『dutiyā disā』』ti kātabbā. 『『Saṃkhittena…pe… kaṇhapakkhassā』』ti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.

Yonisoti upāyaso. Yoniso manasikāro aniccādivasena paṭhamamanasikāro. Paññāti sutacintāmayī paññā, jhānābhiññā ca. Nibbidāti nibbedhañāṇaṃ. Somanassadhammūpasañhitaṃ pamodādisahagataṃ cetasikasukhaṃ.

Kusalapakkhe cāti ca-saddo samuccayattho, tena ubhayapakkhato samuccayavasena catasso disā, na paccekanti dasseti.

Tesanti taṇhādīnaṃ, taṇhāya, taṇhāpakkhikānañcāti attho. Satipi anavasesato rāge pahīyamāne anavasesato avijjāpi pahīyateva, rāgassa pana cetovimutti ujupaṭipakkhoti dassanatthaṃ 『『rāgavirāgā』』ti vuttaṃ. Avijjāvirāgāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ayañca attho 『『āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimutti』』ntiādinā (ma. ni.

我將巴利文完整直譯為簡體中文，並調整對仗性質的句子： 癡生熱惱因性當由壞相多分為癡因，死亡以無明為緣，應知于輪迴轉起。 無貪等為慧等圓滿因性，應知隨宜由近依勝及俱生勝為緣性。一切善法於一切善法，隨其生起而為殊勝緣。依無恚尋而起觀察為無恚觀察，于無害觀察亦如是理。 此名三窟第二理趣，與方向觀察理趣已說，此為語句補充。"此四"等依補特伽羅確立而開始，為顯喜轉理趣之地。此等依如說四行道差別為四種。"特別"即依見愛依止差別。見行者利慧與鈍慧，以樂行道速通與遲通而出，故說為二。如是愛行者以苦行道速通與遲通而出，故說為二，此義已顯。故說"二者為見行與愛行"。 "成四"即于師子游戲理趣地現為四，依四行道分別說為四，此為義。"成三"即於三窟理趣地依利根等成三。"既三"即如是立為三已說為三。"成二"即今于喜轉理趣地成二。"耽著"即見耽著。"執著"即愛執著。"我作"即我慢，或作"我"為我作。由見慢思惟力而觀"我是"為我所作，執取為愛取。 十句應作"第一方向"即喜轉理趣應作"第一方向"，應確立為"第一方向"，此為義。"略說……分"即多種黑分染污分義，略說對治轉起清凈法指示開顯，應作第一，此為配合。"十句為第二"即貪等十部分應作"第二方向"。應引"略說……黑分"而配合。 "如理"即方便。如理作意為無常等初作意。"慧"即聞思所成慧與禪通。"厭離"即通達智。"喜法相應"即與喜等俱心樂。 "于善分"中"及"字為總攝義，以此顯示由雙分總攝力為四方向，非各別。 "彼等"即貪等，貪及貪分者，此為義。雖無餘貪斷時無餘無明亦斷，然為顯貪以心解脫為正對治故說"離貪"。于"離無明"中亦此理。此義如說"由漏盡得無漏心解脫慧解脫"等。

1.438) āgatapāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanāvasena vuttā, idha pana 『『rāgavirāgā cetovimutti sekkhaphalaṃ, avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti asekkhaphala』』ntiādinā (netti. 51) vevacanasamāropane āgatattā purimā anāgāmiphalaṃ. Tañhi kāmarāgassa ujuvipaccanīkato samādhipāripūriyāva visesato 『『rāgavirāgā cetovimuttī』』ti vuccati, pacchimā arahattaphalaṃ taṇhāya, avijjāya ca anavasesappahānato, paññāpāripūriyā ca 『『avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī』』ti vuccati.

Tatthāti nandiyāvaṭṭanaye. Tesūti 『『cattāri padānī』』ti vuttesu taṇhādīsu catūsu mūlapadesu. Idha samosaraṇanti saṅgaho vutto, so ca sabhāvato, sabhāgato ca hotīti taṇhādīni cattāri dassetvā 『『tesu aṭṭhārasa mūlapadāni samosarantī』』ti vuttaṃ. Samathaṃ bhajanti sabhāvato, sabhāgato cāti adhippāyo. Vipassanaṃ bhajantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Nayādhiṭṭhānānaṃ nayādhiṭṭhāne anuppaveso nayānaṃ nayesu anuppaveso eva nāma hotīti āha 『『tipukkhalo…pe… anuppavisantī』』ti.

Alobhāmohapakkhaṃ abhajāpetvā adosapakkhaṃ bhajāpetabbassa nandiyāvaṭṭasīhavikkīḷitamūlapadassa abhāvato adoso ekasuttakoṭiyā ekakova hotīti dassento āha 『『adoso adoso evā』』ti. Doso doso evāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Samosaranti sabhāgato ca sabhāvato ca saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti attho.

Bhūmi gocaroti ca mūlapadāni eva sandhāya vadati. Ekekaṃ nayaṃ anuppavisati taṃtaṃmūlapadānuppavesato. Kusale vā viññāte akusalo paṭipakkho, akusale vā kusalo paṭipakkho anvesitabbo saṃvaṇṇiyamānasuttapadānurūpato upaparikkhitabbo. Anvesanā upaparikkhā 『『disālokana』』nti vuccati. So nayo niddisitabboti tathā anvesitvā tehi dhammehi disā vavatthapetvā so so nayo niddhāretvā yojetabbo. Yathā mūlapadesu mūlapadānaṃ anuppaveso saṃvaṇṇito, imināva nayena mūlapadato mūlapadānaṃ niddhāraṇāti veditabbāti dassento 『『yathā ekamhi…pe… niddisitabbānī』』ti āha. 『『Ekekasmiñhī』』tiādi kāraṇavacanaṃ.

Tattha tatthāti ekekasmiṃ naye. Ekasmiṃ dhamme viññāteti taṇhādike ekasmiṃ mūlapadadhamme sarūpato, niddhāraṇavasena vā viññāte. Sabbedhammā viññātā hontīti tadaññamūlapadabhūtā sabbe lobhādayo viññātā nayassa bhūmicaraṇāyogyatāya pakāsā pākaṭā honti . 『『Imesa』』ntiādi nayattayadisābhūtadhammānaṃ matthakapāpanena tiṇṇaṃ nayānaṃ kūṭaggahaṇaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

Puna 『『imesū』』tiādi kammanayadvayassa vibhāgavibhāvanaṃ, taṃ viññeyyameva.

Nayasamuṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Sāsanapaṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanā

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 如註釋《第438經》義說："由離貪得心解脫，由離無明得慧解脫"等。此中如"由離貪心解脫為有學果，由離無明慧解脫為無學果"等同義安立而來，前者為不還果。彼因對治欲貪，以定圓滿特別說為"由離貪心解脫"；後者為阿羅漢果，因愛、無明無餘斷除，以慧圓滿說為"由離無明慧解脫"。 其中於喜轉理趣。"彼等"即如說"四句"中貪等四根本句。此處說"攝歸"，彼由自性及同分而有，故顯示貪等四已說"于彼等十八根本句攝歸"。意指依自性及同分趣向止。于"趣向觀"此中亦此理。理趣確立于理趣確立相入，即為諸理趣于諸理趣相入，故說"三窟......相入"。 不令趣向無貪無癡分而應令趣向無瞋分，因無喜轉師子游戲根本句，故無瞋單獨以一線端而為一，為顯示此而說"無瞋即無瞋"。于"瞋即瞋"中亦此理。"攝歸"即依同分及自性而得攝受，此為義。 "地"與"行處"唯指根本句。每一理趣相入因各各根本句相入。或知善時不善對治，或知不善時善對治，應隨所註釋經句而尋求觀察。尋求觀察說為"方向觀察"。"彼理趣應詳說"即如是尋求已，以彼等法確立方向，應抉擇配合彼彼理趣。如已註釋根本句于根本句相入，以此理趣應知從根本句抉擇根本句，為顯示此而說"如於一......應詳說"。"于每一"等為說原因。 "于彼彼"即于每一理趣。"知一法"即知貪等一根本句法的自相或由抉擇。"知一切法"即知彼等其他根本句一切貪等，因理趣地行適宜而顯明顯著。"此等"等為理趣三方向法達頂而取三理趣頂，彼如前說理趣。 復"於此等"等為顯二業理趣差別，彼應了知。 理趣生起品註釋竟。 教示建立品註釋

89.Saṅgahavārādīsūti saṅgahavārauddesaniddesavāresu. Sarūpato na dassitaṃ, atthato pana dassitamevāti adhippāyo. Tameva hi atthato dassanatthaṃ udāharaṇabhāvena nikkhipati, yathā mūlapadehi paṭṭhānaṃ niddhāretabbanti. 『『Aññamaññasaṅgaho』』ti idaṃ mūlapadapaṭṭhānānaṃ aññamaññato niddhāretabbatāya kāraṇavacanaṃ 『『sati anuppavese tato viniggāmo siyā』』ti. Paṭṭhānanti ettha pa-iti upasaggapadaṃ, taṃ pana 『『vibhattesu dhammesu yaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, tadupāgamu』』ntiādīsu viya pakāratthajotakanti dassento 『『pakārehi ṭhāna』』ntiādīsu viya pakāratthajotakanti dassento 『『pakārehi ṭhāna』』nti āha. Idhāti imasmiṃ nettippakaraṇe. Tassāti desanāsaṅkhātassa pariyattisāsanassa. Tathābhāvadīpananti veneyyajjhāsayānurūpena pavattitattā saṃkilesabhāgiyatādippakārehi ṭhitabhāvena dīpetabbattā 『『dīpissatīti dīpana』』nti katvā. Patiṭṭhahanti adhisīlasikkhādayo samudāyarūpena gahitā. Etehi saṃkilesadhammādīhi, saṃkilesadhammādīnaṃ adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ pavattanupāyatā anupubbikathāya sāmukkaṃsikāya dhammadesanāya dīpetabbā. Tesanti saṃkilesadhammādīnaṃ. Puna tesanti suttāni sandhāyāha.

Goṭṭhāti vajā. Paṭṭhitagāvoti gatagāvo. Āgataṭṭhānasminti sīhanādasuttaṃ (ma. ni.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 89. "于攝受品等"即于攝受品總說詳說品中。意指未以自相顯示，但已以義顯示。為顯示彼義而置為譬喻，如應從根本句抉擇建立。"互相攝受"此為根本句建立應互相抉擇之因說"若有相入則有出離"。"建立"中"pa"為字首詞，如"于已分別諸法中，趣向其最勝"等中表示行相，為顯示此而說"以諸行相住"。"此中"即此《導論》中。"彼"即教說所稱聖典教法。"顯示如是性"即由隨順所化根機而轉起，應顯示染污分等諸行相住性，作"將顯示為顯示"。"安住"即總攝戒學等。由此等染污法等，應以次第說及最勝法說顯示染污法等及增上戒學等的轉起方便。"彼等"即染污法等。復"彼等"是指諸經。 "牛欄"即牛舍。"已往之牛"即已去之牛。"于已來處"即《獅子吼經》。

1.156) vadati. Pavattagamanattā etthāti vacanaseso. Atha vā gacchati etthāti gamanaṃ, desanāñāṇassa nissaṅgavasena pavattagamanadesabhāvato paṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti attho. Vomissāti 『『saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañcā』』tiādinā dukatikacatukkabhāvena missitā.

Saṃkilesabhāve ñāpetabbe pavattaṃ, taṃ visayaṃ katvā desitanti attho, atthamattavacanañcetaṃ , saṃkilesabhāge bhavanti saddanayena attho veditabbo. 『『Saṃkilesabhāgika』』ntipi pāṭho, tassa saṃkilesabhāgo etassa atthi, saṃkilesabhāge vā niyuttaṃ, saṃkilesabhāgassa vā pabodhanasīlaṃ saṃkilesabhāgikaṃ, tadeva saṃkilesabhāgiyanti attho veditabbo. Padālanaṃ samucchindanaṃ, padālanasannissayatā cettha padālanaggahaṇena gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Asekkheti asekkhadhamme. Tesaṃ vomissakanayavasenāti tesaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ catunnaṃ paṭikkhepāpaṭikkhepavomissakanayavasena.

『『Tāni pana cha dukā』』tiādinā padānaṃ gahaṇaparicchedato vavatthāpanataṃ vatvā parato 『『sādhāraṇāni katānī』』ti padassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāya sayameva sarūpato dassessati. 『『Anuddharaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthī』ti vatvā uddharaṇe pana kāraṇaṃ dassento 『『tathā hi vakkhatī』』tiādinā pāḷimāhari. Vodānaṃ nāma saṃkilesato hoti saṃkiliṭṭhasseva vodānassa icchitattā. Yasmā vodānaṃ tadaṅgādivasena saṃkilesato visujjhanaṃ, tasmā 『『taṃ pana atthato vāsanābhāgiyādi eva hotī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tadaṅgavikkhambhanehi vodānaṃ vāsanābhāgiyādivasena hoti, samucchedapaṭippassaddhīhi vodānaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyavasena, asekkhabhāgiyavasena vodānaṃ paṭippassaddhiyā eva veditabbaṃ. Yāyaṃ desanā rāgādibhāginī siyā, sā saṃkilesabhāgiyā. Yāyaṃ desanā cāgādibhāginī siyā, sā vāsanābhāgiyā. Yā pana āpattivicchedanī sāvasesaṃ, anavasesañca, sā nibbedhabhāgiyā, asekkhabhāgiyā ca.

『『Taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』ntiādinā paṭhamameva saṃkilesabhāgassa dassitattā vuttaṃ 『『saṃkileso tividho…pe… visayadassanatthaṃ āraddha』』nti. Bhavarāgo bhavapatthanā. Uppajjatīti na vigacchati. Tatra tatra bhaveti yadi vā kāmabhave, yadi vā rūpabhave, yadi vā arūpabhave. Padantarasaṃyojanavasenāti dukanayeneva padantarena yojanavasena. Missitāni katānīti saṃsaṭṭhāni katāni.

Ekakacatukkavasena dassitabbāni padāni eva gahetvā āvuttinayadassanavasena missetvā avasiṭṭhadukavasena, tikacatukkavasena ca itare aṭṭha paṭṭhānabhāgā dassitāti āha 『『tāniyeva yathāvuttāni aṭṭha suttānī』』tiādi . Cattāro ekakāyeva pāḷiyaṃ ādito dassitā. Chadukā pāḷiyaṃ āgatā cattāro, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dveti. Cattāro tikā pāḷiyaṃ āgatā dve, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dveti. Dve catukkā pana aṭṭhakathāyameva āgatā. 『『Pāḷiyaṃ anāgatā』』ti idaṃ sarūpato anāgamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, nayato pana āgatabhāvo dassito eva. Ye panettha pāḷiyaṃ anāgatā, tesaṃ udāharaṇāni parato dassayissāma.

我將為您完整直譯巴利文： 說者。由進行行動之故，此處為語句補充。或者說"於此行"即行，依教說智的無繫縛而進行行動處為建立，此為義。"雜合"即如"染污分及習氣分"等，由二、三、四種方式而雜合。 于染污分應知其所轉起，以此為境界而說示，此為義，此為單純意義語言。于染污分依語言方式應知其義。亦有讀作"染污分"，彼有染污分，或於染污分安立，或染污分顯明本性為染污分，此義應了知。破壞即截斷，於此破壞之執取亦被破壞執取。 無學即無學法。彼等依雜合理趣，即彼等染污分等四者之破壞與不破壞雜合理趣。 如"彼等六雙"等，由句之取捨限定已，後續"已作共通"等句之義，自身將以自相顯示。說"無提取之因"而顯示提取之因，以"如是將說"而引用經文。清凈即從染污而有，因為期望已染污者之清凈。由於清凈是從染污分部分等而清凈，故說"彼實際上為習氣分等"。於此，以部分緩解而清凈為習氣分等，以究竟斷除而清凈為通達分，以無學分清凈唯依止息。若此教說屬於貪等分，則為染污分。若此教說屬於舍等分，則為習氣分。若為犯戒斷除，有餘及無餘，則為通達分及無學分。 如"貪染污分經"等，首先已顯示染污分，故說"染污三種......為顯示境界而開始"。有有愛即有期望。"生起"即不消散。于彼彼處有，或於欲有，或於色有，或於無色有。依句間連結之故，即以二理趣之句間連結。"已作雜合"即已和雜。 唯取單一四種方式已顯示之句，以週轉理趣顯示而雜合，以餘二理趣及三、四理趣顯示其餘八建立分，故說"彼等如前說八經"等。四單一經首先於經典中顯示。六雙經中，四經于經典中來，二經于註疏中。四三經中，二經于經典中來，二經于註疏中。兩四經唯于註疏中來。"于經典中未來"此言依自相未來，然依理趣已顯示其來。至於經典中未來者，其譬喻將於后顯示。

Soḷasahīti soḷasavidhehi. Na hi tāni suttāni soḷaseva, atha kho soḷasappakārānīti mūlagaṇanaṃ ṭhapetvā kāraṇasuttaladdhena saṅkhāragabbhena tadanurūpo yo gaṇanavitthāro, tassa pattharaṇavidhi paṭṭhānanayo. Iminā…pe… natthīti yathāvuttapaṭṭhānavinimutto pariyattisāsanappadeso na vijjati yathārahaṃ taṃtaṃpaṭṭhānabhāvena pavattattāti dasseti. Yadi suttageyyādi navavidhaṃ pariyattisāsanaṃ yathāvuttapaṭṭhānavaseneva pavattaṃ, tattha kathamidha anidassitānaṃ gāthādīnaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyādibhāvo gahetabboti pañhaṃ sandhāya 『『gāthāya gāthā anuminitabbā』』tiādipāḷi pavattāti dassetuṃ 『『kathaṃ panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Tattha ayaṃ gāthā viyāti 『『kāmandhā jālasañchannā, manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto, yassa selūpamaṃ citta』』ntiādinā idha udāhaṭagāthā viya. Gāthāti aññāpi tepiṭake buddhavacane āgatā idha anudāhaṭā. Saṃvaṇṇanākāle sammukhībhāvena 『『ayaṃ gāthā viyā』』ti vuttā yā kāci gāthā 『『saṃkilesabhāgiyā』』ti vā 『『saṃkilesavāsanānibbedhaasekkhabhāgiyā』』ti vā anuminitabbā nayaggāhena ñāpetabbāti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ 『『saṃkilesa…pe… jānitabbāti attho』』ti. Vā-saddo hi idha avuttavikappanattho. Sesapadesūti veyyākaraṇasuttapadesu.

90.Ariyānaṃ dhammanti cārittavārittabhedaṃ sīlācāraṃ. Ekantakaraṇīyassa akaraṇampi vītikkamo eva.

Avijjādike saṃkilesadhamme tadaṅgādivasena dhunātīti dhonā vuccati paññā. Paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanapaññāti pana pakaraṇena avacchinnattā vuttaṃ. Taṃ atikkamitvā carantoti paccayānaṃ apaccavekkhitvā paccayaparibhoge ādīnavaṃ apassanto iṇaparibhogavasena paribhuñjanto na parimuccati nirayādidukkhato, vaṭṭadukkhato ca.

Kukkujanakaṃ nāma kadaliyā pupphanāḷi. Parābhavāyāti vināsāya. Tathāti yathā phalapākantā kadalī, evaṃ veḷunaḷāpi osadhijātikattāti upasaṃhārattho tathā-saddo. Tenāha 『『phalaṃ veḷuṃ phalaṃ naḷa』』nti.

Sukhettepīti pi-saddena ko pana vādo ūsarādidosaduṭṭhesu khettesūti dasseti. 『『Chakaṇa…pe… attho』』ti etena yathāvuttaabhisaṅkharaṇābhāvena bījadosaduṭṭhanti dasseti.

91.Sajjitanti sañjitaṃ. Aparikkhateti paṭipakkhehi dhammehi avikkhambhite aroge.

Yāya samannāgato puggalo 『『kiṃ sutaṃ mayā, kiṃ vā suṇāmī』』ti kusalaṃ gavesī carati, sā dhammojapaññā kissavā nāma. Dubbhāsitāti duṭṭhu bhāsitā, issāmacchariyadosādīhi duṭṭhā vā bhāsitā.

92.Vicinātīti visesato cināti pasavati.

Vigatabhūtāti vigatasacca. Tenāha 『『alīkavādī』』ti.

Avajātaputtāti lāmakaputta. Bhagavato sāsane pabbajitvā nihīnavuttitaṃ sandhāya vadati. Nerayikoti niraye nibbattanako. Pāpakammino papatanti etthāti papataṃ, narakaṃ.

Taṇhādīnaṃ sabhāvabhedatoti taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritānaṃ taṇhāyanaviparītadassanaduṭṭhacaritatāsaṅkhātasabhāvavibhāgato. Avatthābhedatoti taṇhāya chandapemalobharāganandīpipāsāmucchādayo, diṭṭhiyā gāhaparāmāsamicchābhinivesavisukavipphanditaviparītadassanādayo, duccaritassa tiracchānapettivisayaasurayonigāmitādayo avatthāvisesā. Ca-saddena tesaṃ kāmataṇhādirūpataṇhādiattānudiṭṭhādisassatagāhādikāyaduccaritādi- pāṇātipātādippakārabhedo saṅgayhati.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： "十六"即十六種。彼等經非僅十六，然而為十六種類，除根本數目，由因經所得行蘊相應之數目增廣，其展開方法為建立理趣。"由此......無"即顯示離如說建立則無聖典教法處，因隨宜以彼彼建立性而轉起。若經、應誦等九種聖典教法唯依如說建立而轉起，於此如何把握此中未顯示之偈等染污分等性，為表明此問而說"以偈推度偈"等經文，故說"然如何"等。 於此"如此偈"即如"欲盲網覆、心為法先導、上下一切處解脫、其心如山"等此中引用之偈。"偈"即三藏佛語中其他未在此引用者。註釋時以現前性說"如此偈"，顯示任何偈應以"染污分"或"染污習氣通達無學分"推度，以理趣把握而令知，故說"染污......應知，此為義"。此處"或"字義為未說選擇。"于余句"即于經句文句。 90. "聖者法"即行止差別之戒行。不作當作者亦為違犯。 由斷除無明等染污法，故說慧為除垢。由受限於論書而說為省察受用慧。"超越彼而行"即不省察資具，不見資具受用之過患，以負債方式受用者，不脫離地獄等苦及輪迴苦。 "黃梗"即芭蕉花莖。"退敗"即毀滅。"如是"即如果熟盡之芭蕉，如是藤、蘆因為藥性，故"如是"字為類比義。故說"果竹果蘆"。 "于良田中"以"亦"字顯示何況于堿等過失毀壞之田。"牛糞......義"以此顯示因無如說加工而為種子過失所毀。 91. "備辦"即準備。"未除"即未以對治法鎮伏未離病。 由具足此慧，彼人行"我聞何，或聞何"尋求善者，此法光慧名為何者。"說惡"即惡說，或為嫉妒慳吝過失等所惡之說。 92. "分別"即特別積集生起。 "離實"即離真實。故說"說妄"。 "生惡子"即劣子。說已於世尊教法出家而行卑劣。"地獄者"即生於地獄者。"墜落"即惡業者墮落處，地獄。 "由貪等自性差別"即由貪、見、惡行之慾求、顛倒見、惡行性所說自性差別。"由位差別"即貪之慾、愛、貪、染、喜、渴、迷等，見之執、執著、邪深信、動搖、舞蹈、顛倒見等，惡行之畜生、餓鬼界、阿修羅趣等位差別。以"及"字攝取彼等欲貪等、色貪等、我見等、常執等、身惡行等、殺生等種類差別。

93.Vipulanti uḷāraṃ, telādīhi ceva dhanadhaññādīhi ca pahūtasannicayanti attho. Sambādhāti janasaṃmaddasaṅghaṭā.

Daṇḍena na hiṃsatīti ettha vuttaṃ yaṃ daṇḍanidhānaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭanissitaṃ. Tadubhayassāpi phalaṃ dassento 『『so puggalo』』tiādimāha.

1. Kiñcati taṃsamaṅginaṃ vimaddatīti kiñcanaṃ, rāgādi, palibundhati kusalappavattiṃ nivāretīti palibodho, rāgādiyeva, kiñcanameva palibodho kiñcanapalibodho. Atha vā kiñcanañca palibodho ca kiñcanapalibodho, āmisakiñcikkhañca rāgādisaṃkileso cāti attho.

Visesitanti vilomaṃ, visamaṃ kiriyanti attho. Rājabhaṇḍanti orodhe sandhāya vadanti.

Yācayogoti yācanayogo, yācakānaṃ manorathaparipūraṇato. Tenāha 『『yācitabbayutto』』ti. Dānayuttoti satataṃ dānakiriyāsamaṅgī. Dānasaṃvibhāgaratoti ettha dānaṃ nāma atthikānaṃ yathādhippāyapaṭiyattapariccāgo, saṃvibhāgo attanā paribhuñjitabbato appamattakatopi saṃvibhajanaṃ. Imehi kho…pe… hotīti ettha hotisaddena 『『samannāgato』』ti padaṃ sambandhitabbaṃ, na 『『sotāpanno』』ti dassetuṃ 『『sotāpanno…pe… hotī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tehi dhammehi samannāgamo hi idha vidhīyati, na sotāpannabhāvo, tena sotāpannalakkhaṇamete dhammā, na sotāpannabhāvalakkhaṇanti dasseti. Tathā hi 『『sotāpannena…pe… labbhamānataṃ dassetī』』ti vuttaṃ.

1. Lapati katheti etenāti lapanaṃ, oṭṭhaṃ.

97.Muditoti dibbasampattiyā pamudito.

1. Kiñcāpi udatārīti taraṇakiriyā atītabhāvena vuttā, taraṇameva pana gahetvā āha 『『oghataraṇassa ariyamaggakiccattā』』ti. Evaṃ vippamutto, vimuttoti ca ettha muccanakiriyāyapi vattabbaṃ.

100.Pātu-saddapubbako bhavanti-saddo siyā uppādapariyāyo siyā āvibhāvapariyāyoti 『『pātubhavantī』』ti padassa 『『uppajjanti, pakāsenti cā』』ti attho vutto. Pātubhūtadhammassāti uppannabodhipakkhiyadhammassa, vibhūtacatusaccadhammassa vā. No kalloti na yutto. Sahetudhammanti ettha paccayuppannadhammāva gahitā, na paccayadhammāti? Nayidamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ paccayadhammānampi paccayuppannabhāvānativattanato. Atha vā sahetudhammanti paccayuppannadhammo padhānabhāvena vutto, paccayadhammo pana guṇabhāvenāti evamettha ubhayesaṃ vuttabhāvo veditabbo.

Āraññakanti āraññakaṅgasamannāgataṃ. Aññātoti paricayavasena na ñāto, asaṃsaṭṭhoti attho. Tenāha 『『niccanavo』』ti.

Byāpādavihiṃsāvitakkavirahe veriparisaṅkāya abhāve akittiparimuttīti evamādīhipi kāraṇehi kodhappahānena sukhaṃ supati. Kodhapariḷāhābhāvo pana pākaṭataroti āha 『『kodha…pe… sayatī』』ti. Visamūlassāti ettha visasarikkhatāya 『『visa』』nti dukkhaṃ adhippetanti āha 『『dukkhavipākassā』』ti. Sukhanti cetasikasukhaṃ. Akkuṭṭhassa paccakkositvā ca paccakkosanahetu uppajjatīti yojanā.

101.Sallubbāhanaṃ salluddharaṇaṃ.

Visayabhedena, pavattiākārabhedena ca anekabhedattā kāmasaññāya vuttaṃ 『『yāya kāyacī』』ti.

Dānamukhenāti dānena mukhabhūtena, dānaṃ pamukhaṃ katvāti attho.

『『Ariyamaggasampāpanavasenā』』ti iminā anukampānuddayānaṃ ekantānavajjatameva vibhāveti. 『『Anukampā』』ti padassatthavivaraṇaṃ 『『karuṇāyanā』』ti, itarassa 『『mettāyanā』』ti.

我將為您完整直譯巴利文： 93. "廣大"即殊勝，意指以油等及財富糧食等之豐富積聚。"狹隘"即人群擁擠聚集。 不以棍棒加害之處，所說棍棒藏置繫於輪迴生死。為示彼二者之果，故說"彼人"等。 94. "輕觸"即與彼相應，壓碎。輕觸即貪等，繫縛善行，阻礙之。或輕觸即繫縛，意指物質輕觸及貪等染污。 "特別"即相反，意即不平等行為。"王物"即就內宮而說。 "請求相應"即請求之相應，滿足請求者之意願。故說"與請求相應"。"與施相應"即常常施與行為相應。"樂於佈施分配"者，佈施即以自意給予有需要者，分配即使自己可享受亦分配。"此等......為"處，應連線"具足"一詞，非"預流"，故說"預流......為"。此處顯示與彼等法相應，非預流性，以顯示此等法為預流相，非預流性之相。如是說"預流......可得"。 95. "言說"即以此而言說，為嘴唇。 97. "隨喜"即為天界成就而歡喜。 99. "雖渡"即渡越行為以過去式說，取渡越意說"渡流之聖道事業"。如是解脫，解脫處亦應說解脫行為。 100. "現"字為字首，"成為"字可為生起之轉，亦可為顯現之轉，故說"現成"之意為"生起、顯現"。"現成法"即生起菩提分法，或顯明四諦法。"非適"即非適宜。"有因法"處，是否僅取因緣生起之法，非因緣法？非爾，因緣法亦超越因緣生起性。或"有因法"說因緣生起法為主要，因緣法則為功德。應知彼等二者之說明。 "林居"即具備林居支。"不知"即非以親近而知，意即不交往。故說"常新"。 以無嗔恨、損害、尋思，無怨敵憂慮，無不稱譽之故，以捨棄嗔恨而安樂入睡。嗔恨熾熱之缺乏更為明顯，故說"嗔恨......睡"。"惡根"處，以毒草性故說"毒"為苦，意指苦報。"樂"即心之樂。被罵者回罵，因回罵而生。 101. "提拔"即拔起。 以境界差別，轉起方式差別，故有多種差別，說"任何"于欲想。 "以施門"即以施為主，作施為首要。 "以聖道獲得之故"，以此顯示同情、慈悲之絕對無過。"同情"一詞解釋為"悲之行"，另一詞解釋為"慈之行"。

102.Pakatiādīti ādisaddena aṇuissarapajāpatipurisakālādhiṭṭhāyakāriādike saṅgaṇhāti.

Kāmesūti kāmaguṇesu rūpādivisayesu.

Bahalakilesatāyāti bahulakilesabhāvena. Pubbahetumandatāyāti vivaṭṭūpanissayassa kusalassa akatattā.

Cittavūpasamabhāvanāyāti cittavūpasamakarabhāvanāya samathavipassanāya.

Parissayā sīlādiparipūraṇassa paribandhabhūtā kilesā eva. Anariyā paññāsīsaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhātumeva na sakkontīti vuttaṃ 『『ñāṇasirena adhosirā hutvā』』ti.

1. Bhagavato, bhikkhusaṅghassa ca vasanayogyabhāvo, tehi nivutthabhāvo ca tassa sātisayo vaṇṇoti vuttaṃ 『『paṭhamagāthāya jetavanassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā』』ti. Vuttañhetaṃ –

『『Gāme vā yadi vāraññe, ninne vā yadi vā thale;

Yattha arahanto viharanti, taṃ bhūmirāmaṇeyyaka』』nti. (dha. pa. 98; theragā. 991);

Idha dhammasaddo samādhipariyāyo 『『evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto』』tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13; ma. ni. 3.198; saṃ. ni. 5.378) viyāti āha 『『dhammoti samādhī』』ti samādhipakkhikā dhammā sativāyāmā.

Nānugaccheyyāti nānutaseyya. Anutasanameva hi taṇhādiṭṭhīhi anugamanaṃ. Paṭivipasseyyāti vipassanāsammasanamāha. Yamakato, hi khaṇikato, paṭipāṭito ca sammasanaṃ vipassanāyapi sammasanato paṭivipassanā nāma. Sā hi vipassanāya diṭṭhiugghāṭanamānasamugghāṭananikantipariyādānahetutāya visesato paṭipakkhena asaṃhīraasaṃkuppanahetubhūtā paribrūhanā hoti. 『『Punappunaṃ…pe… appento』』ti etena nibbānārammaṇadhammānubrūhanaṃ yathā 『『brūhetā suññāgārāna』』nti (ma. ni. 1.64) dasseti.

Yaṃ kiñci apadisitvā paṭiññādānaṃ saṅgaro. So pana attano kiccavisesaṃ apadisitvā mittasanthavavasena vā kālāgamanaṃ apadisitvā kiñcikkhānuppadānena vā paṭibāhakaraṇaṃ apadisitvā balaggabodhavasena vā siyāti tassa mittakaraṇādipariyāyataṃ sandhāyāha 『『saṅgaroti…pe… nāma』』nti. Evaṃ paṭipannattāti evaṃ aniccasaññāmukhena tiyaddhakesu saṅkhāresu appamādappaṭipattiyā paṭipannattā.

Dibbacakkhu suvisuddhanti sāvasesā desanāti āha 『『yaṃ sacchikarotī』』ti. Rūpāyatanañhettha adhippetaṃ.

104.Antanti saṅkhārānaṃ pārimantabhūtaṃ. Vedānanti maggañāṇavedānameva. Arahattādhigamena antaṃ pariyosānaṃ gatattā. Kammavipākavaṭṭānaṃ, kilesavaṭṭassāpi ca ussadena upacayena ussadā, rāgādayo.

Sukkobhāsatāya sukkā, abhivisiṭṭhaggahā. Sabbāni vā tārakarūpāni sukkā. Vindatīti upalabhati, paṭivijjhatīti attho.

『『Ajjhattaṃ vipassanābhiniveso hotī』』ti idaṃ 『『sakesu dhammesū』』ti pāragubhāvassa visesitattā vuttaṃ, tañca kho abhiniveseneva desitaṃ. 『『Sabbaṃ , bhikkhave, abhiññeyya』』nti (saṃ. ni. 4.46; paṭi. ma. 1.3) vuttaṃ. Pāragutā ca tesaṃ khandhānaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena hoti. Tato ca nesaṃ hetubhūtasamudaye, tadappavattilakkhaṇe nirodhe, nirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ca pahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayapāripūrivasena itarasaccesupi pāragubhāvo vutto eva hoti. Sabbaso hi sakaattabhāvabodhenapi catusaccābhisamayo hotiyeva. Vuttañhetaṃ 『『imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññapemi, lokasamudayañcā』』tiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 102. "Pakatiādī"中的"ādi"(等)字包含了微塵、自在天、生主、人、時間、主宰、作者等。 "Kāmesu"指欲界諸欲,即色等感官對象。 "巴哈拉基勒薩塔亞"意為具有濃厚煩惱的狀態。"普巴海圖曼達塔亞"意為因未曾修習導向解脫的善業。 "奇塔烏帕薩馬巴瓦那亞"意為使心平靜的修習,即止觀。 "障礙"是指妨礙戒等圓滿的煩惱。"非聖者"無法抬起智慧之首,所以說"以智慧之首低垂"。 103. "描述祇園的殊勝"是因為那裡適合世尊和比丘僧團居住,且他們曾住於此。如說: "無論村落或林野,平地或山丘, 凡阿羅漢所居處,皆為可意之地。" 此處"法"字意為三昧,如"諸世尊具此法"等經中所說。故說"法即三昧",三昧之分即是念和精進。 "不應追隨"意為不應恐懼。因為恐懼即是以貪愛和見解追隨。"反觀"是說觀察。即從雙觀、剎那觀和次第觀來觀察,因為這是觀智的特殊觀察,稱為反觀。這種觀察能去除邪見、我慢、執著,特別能對治,是不動搖、不退轉的增長因。"再三...增長"是說增長以涅槃為所緣的法,如說"應增長空閑處"。 "承諾"是指以任何理由作出承諾。這可能是基於自己的特殊任務、或因友誼、或以時間為由、或以給予某物、或以表示力量等,故說"承諾...名"。"如是修習"是說通過無常想對三世諸行精進修習。 "清凈天眼"是不完整的說法,故說"所證得的"。這裡是指色處。 104. "邊際"是指諸行的最終邊際。"智"只是指道智。因為通過證得阿羅漢果而達到終點。"積聚"是業報輪迴和煩惱輪迴的積聚,即貪等。 因明亮故稱為"白",即最殊勝的星宿。或說一切星宿都是白色。"證得"即獲得、通達。 "內觀的專注"這是因為說"于自法"而特別指出的究竟,這是通過專注而說的。如說:"諸比丘,一切皆應證知"。對諸蘊的究竟是通過遍知現觀而成就。由此,對它們的因即集諦,滅的特相即滅諦,趨向滅的道即道諦,也都通過斷、證、修現觀的圓滿而成就究竟。因為通過完全了知自身也必定成就四諦現觀。如說:"就在這一尋的身軀中,我施設世間、世間集"等。

4.45). Atha vā sakesu dhammesūti attano dhammesu. Attadhammā nāma atthakāmassa kulaputtassa sīlādidhammā. Sīlasamādhipaññādayo hi vodānadhammā ekantahitasukhasampādanato purisassa sakadhammā nāma, na anatthāvahā saṃkilesadhammā viya paradhammā. Tesaṃ sīlādīnaṃ pāripūriyā pāraṃ pariyantaṃ gatoti pāragū. 『『Akkula pakkula』』iti evaṃ vihiṃsanakapayogaṃ. Ajakalāpena (udā. 7) hi tadā bhagavantaṃ bhīsāpetukāmena kataṃ yakkhagajjitaṃ 『『akkula pakkula』』 iti iminā ākārena sattānaṃ sotapathaṃ agamāsi, tasmā taṃ 『『akkulaṃ pakkulakaraṇa』』nti vuttaṃ.

Nābhinandatīti 『『ayaṃ maṃ daṭṭhuṃ āgatā』』ti na tussati. Yasmā pana 『『bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandī』』tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.88) viya sampaṭicchanatthopi abhinandasaddo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ 『『cittena na sampaṭicchatī』』ti. Na socatīti 『『mayā asammoditā gacchatī』』ti na cittasantāpaṃ āpajjati. 『『Saṅgā saṅgāmajiṃ mutta』』nti idaṃ abhinandasocanānaṃ abhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ.

Tenāti udake nhānena. Tenevāha 『『na udakena sucī hotī』』ti. Tassattho – udakummujjanādinā neva sattānaṃ suci pāpato suddhi nāma hotīti. Udakummujjanādīni hi idha uttarapadalopena 『『udaka』』nti vuttaṃ. Udakenāti vā ummujjanādikiriyāsādhanabhūtena udakena sattānaṃ suci pāpasuddhi na hotīti. Atha vā sucitena yathāvuttena udakena pāpamalato suddho nāma satto na hotīti. Yadi siyā, sabbesameva macchabandhānaṃ pāpasuddhi siyā. Tenāha 『『bahvettha nhāyatī jano』』ti. Mātughātādipāpakammakārīnaṃ, aññesañca gomahiṃsādīnaṃ udakaṃ orohantānaṃ antamaso macchakacchape upādāya sabbesampi pāpasuddhi siyā , na panevaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Nhānīyapāpahetūnaṃ appaṭipakkhabhāvato. Yañhi yaṃ vināseti, so tassa paṭipakkho. Yathā āloko andhakārassa, vijjā avijjāya, na evaṃ nhānaṃ pāpassa, tasmā niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ 『『na udakena sucī hotī』』ti. Yena pana suci hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ 『『yamhi saccañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saccanti vacīsaccañca viratisaccañca. Atha vā saccanti ñāṇasaccañceva paramatthasaccañca. Dhammoti seso ariyadhammo. Saccassa panettha visuṃ gahaṇaṃ tassa bahukāratādassanatthaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Jātibalanisedhakanti jātimattabrāhmaṇānaṃ bhovādikānaṃ paṭisedhakaṃ. Jātivādassa vā nisedhakaṃ, 『『na jaccā brāhmaṇo hotī』』ti (su. ni. 655) hi vuttaṃ. Thero hi tathāvādena te aniggaṇhantopi niggaṇhanto viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ.

105.Vimuttiyanti anupādisesanibbānadhātuyaṃ.

Savāsananti ettha khīṇāsavassāpi akhīṇāsavasadisakāyavacīpayogahetubhūtā santāne kilesabhāvanā vāsanā nāma āyasmato pilindavacchassa (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.215; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.pilindavacchattheravatthu) vasalavohāro viya, saha vāsanāyāti savāsanaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ 『『visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī』』tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Yathāvuttavāsanampi asesetvāti attho. Kummaggapariharaṇavasena maggasampaṭipattīti magge kusalo amaggepi kusalo eva hoti. Bhagavā pana sabbaññutāya sabbattheva kusaloti āha 『『magge ca amagge ca kovido』』ti.

我來 輯譯這段巴利文： "于自法"即在自己的法中。自法是指求善之善男子的戒等諸法。戒定慧等清凈法因為必定帶來利益和安樂,故稱為自法,不像帶來不利的染污法是他法。通過圓滿這些戒等而達到彼岸、終點,故稱為達彼岸者。 "阿庫拉帕庫拉"是這樣的恐嚇用語。當時夜叉想要驚嚇世尊,發出夜叉的咆哮"阿庫拉帕庫拉",以這種方式傳入眾生耳中,因此稱為"作阿庫拉帕庫拉"。 "不歡喜"是指不因"她來見我"而歡喜。但因為"歡喜"字如"歡喜世尊所說"等處也有接受的意思,所以說"心不接受"。"不憂愁"是指不因"她未與我交談而離去"而生心的苦惱。"解脫諸繫縛,戰勝戰場"這是說明無歡喜憂愁的原因。 "以此"指以水洗浴。所以說"不因水而清凈"。其義是:不是以入水等方式能使眾生清凈、從罪惡中得凈化。這裡"水"是省略後分而說入水等。或者說,以作為入水等行為工具的水,不能使眾生清凈、從罪惡中得凈化。或者說,眾生不會因上述清凈的水而從罪垢中得凈化。如果可以的話,所有漁夫都會從罪惡中得凈化。所以說"此中多人沐浴"。殺母等作惡者及其他牛、水牛等入水者,乃至包括魚和龜,都應該從罪惡中得凈化,但事實並非如此。為什麼?因為沐浴與罪惡的因不相對治。能夠破壞某物的,才是它的對治,如光明對黑暗,明對無明,但沐浴不是罪惡的對治,所以應該得出結論"不因水而清凈"。爲了顯示什麼能使人清凈,所以說"若有諦實等"。其中,"諦實"是語言真實和離妄語。或者說"諦實"是智慧真實和勝義諦。"法"是其餘聖法。這裡單獨舉"諦實"是爲了顯示它的重要性。其餘易解。 "遮止種姓力"是遮止僅以種姓為傲的婆羅門們的"尊者"稱呼。或者是遮止種姓論,因為說"不因種姓成婆羅門"。長老雖未以如此說法呵斥他們,但似乎是在呵斥,所以這樣說。 105. "于解脫"即于無餘涅槃界。 "連習氣"中,即使是漏盡者,在相續中也有與未漏盡者相似的身語行為之因的煩惱習性,稱為習氣,如尊者毗鄰陀婆蹉的"賤民"稱呼,與習氣一起稱為"連習氣",這是中性詞,如"日月執行不齊"等。意為連那樣的習氣也不剩餘。由於避開邪道而行道,所以通達正道者也通達非道。但世尊因一切智而通達一切,所以說"通達道與非道"。

106.Tamena yuttoti yathāvuttatamo tassa atthīti tamo, puggalo. Appakāsabhāvena ṭhitā khandhāva tamo. Ālokabhūtoti jātiguṇāloko, pākaṭaguṇoti attho.

Kilesamayaṃ bandhanaṃ 『『daḷha』』nti vadanti. Yato saccāni paṭivijjhantā buddhāva naṃ chindanti, na aññe.

Ducchedanatthena satipi daḷhabhāve sithilavuttitaṃ tassa dīpetuṃ 『『bandhanabhāvampī』』tiādimāha. Tena 『『aho sukhumataraṃ kho, bhikkhave, mārabandhana』』nti vuttaṃ.

1. Yadipi cetanā kusalākusalasādhāraṇā, apuññābhisaṅkhāro idhādhippetoti tassa vasena atthaṃ dassento 『『akusalacetanāvasena cetetī』』ti āha. Cetanaṃ abhisandahanaṃ, cittassa byāpārāpattibhāvena pavattīti attho. Yasmā pana cetanā yadā viññattiṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, tadā diguṇussāhādiguṇavāyāmā viya hutvā pākaṭaṃ payogaṃ nipphādeti, tasmā 『『pakappetī』』ti vuttā. Pākaṭappayogakappanañhettha pakappanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tenāha 『『tameva pakappetī』』ti. Paccayaṭṭho idha ārammaṇatthoti vuttaṃ 『『pavattiyā paccayo hotī』』ti.

2. Yathā jalasamuddassa vīcisamuṭṭhānavasena labbhamāno vego 『『vīcimayo』』ti vuccati, evaṃ cakkhusamuddassāpi rūpāvabhāsanavasena labbhamāno vego 『『rūpamayo』』ti vutto. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Āviñchanatoti ākaḍḍhanato, ākaḍḍhanañcettha santānassa tanninnabhāvahetutāya daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Samudanaṃ kilesatemanaṃ, avassavahetutā, kilesānaṃ ūmiādisadisatā samāvaṭṭanena sattānaṃ anatthāvahatāya veditabbā. Uparūpariveguppattiyā upagatassa uṭṭhātuṃ appadānena, guṇasāravināsanena ca kodhupanāhādīnaṃ ūmiādisadisatā daṭṭhabbā.

Abhimukho nandatīti tadārammaṇaṃ sukhaṃ somanassaṃ sādiyanto sampaṭicchati. Abhivadatīti taṇhābhinivesavasena abhinivissa vadati. Tañhissa abhinivesaṃ dīpetuṃ 『『aho sukha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ajjhosānaṃ adhimuccanabhūtāya taṇhāya taṇhāvatthukassa anupavisitvā āveṇikatākaraṇanti āha 『『ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā』』ti.

109.『『Kasmā』』tiādinā santāpadukkhānaṃ asuppatikārataṃ āha 『『yena vā pakārenā』』ti. Yenāti yena vā kāmajjhosānadiṭṭhijjhosānabhūtena micchābhinivesappakārena. Gahaṭṭhapabbajitā tathārūpaṃ katvā attano vaḍḍhiñca maññanti. Avaḍḍhi eva pana hoti tassa pakārassa vaḍḍhiyaṃ anupāyabhāvato ca upāyabhāvato ca avaḍḍhiyaṃ. Tathāpīti tattha tattha icchāvighātaṃ pāpuṇantopi. Yasmā ito bāhirakā sabbena sabbaṃ bhavanissaraṇaṃ appajānanto mandakilesaṃ dīghāyukaṃ sukhabahulaṃ ekaccaṃ bhavaṃ teneva mandakilesādibhāvena 『『nibbāna』』nti samanupassanti, tasmā bhavena bhavavippamokkhaṃ vadantīti.

Bhavadiṭṭhisahagatā taṇhā purimapade uttarapadalopena bhavataṇhāti vuttāti āha 『『bhavataṇhātiādīsu viyā』』ti.

Yatthāti yasmiṃ bhave.

Tato evāti bhūtaratiyā eva. Aññamaññañhi sattānaṃ chandarāgo balavā hoti. Anavasesatoti anavasesena, na kiñci sesetvā.

Saṃsārasotassa anukūlabhāvena gacchatīti anusotagāmī. Tasseva paṭikkūlavasena nibbidānupassanādīhi pavattatīti paṭisotagāmī, acalappasādādisamannāgamena ṭhitasabhāvoti attho.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 106. "以暗所繫"即如前所說的暗屬於他,暗即眾生。蘊如暗一般處於不明顯狀態。"為光明"是指生的功德之光,即顯著的功德。 他們稱煩惱的繫縛為"堅固"。因為只有佛陀能貫穿諸諦,其他人則不能。 儘管難以斷除,但爲了顯示其堅固狀態的鬆軟本質,所以說"繫縛之狀"等。因此說"噢,比丘們,魔羅的繫縛何等微細"。 107. 雖然意志對善不善都是共通的,但這裡意在說明不善意志。意志是堆積,是心的運作和到達狀態。因為當意志生起意向時,如同雙倍精進等精進一般,會產生明顯的作用,所以說"構想"。這裡的"構想"是指明顯作用的安排。所以說"構想它"。此處的緣是指所緣,故說"是動用的緣"。 108. 正如海水的波浪運動所獲得的動勢被稱為"波浪性",同樣地,眼識海的色相顯現所獲得的動勢也被稱為"色性"。其餘各處亦同此理。"牽引"是指拉扯,這裡的拉扯應理解為使相續趨向某種狀態。 煩惱的浪潮,漏的因由,煩惱如波浪般環繞,使眾生遭受災難,應當了知。因上升運動無法停止,破壞功德精髓,憤怒等如波浪般應當觀察。 "面向歡喜"是指接受以對像為依的快樂和悅意。"面向說"是指因貪愛執著而說。為顯示此貪愛執著,所以說"噢,快樂"等。執著是指貪愛的立足處,未進入對像,作獨特處理,所以說"執著而住"即吞下並最終確定。 109. 從"為何"等處說明苦忍的不善對治,即"以何種方式"。"以何"即以欲執、見執形成的邪執方式。在家和出家者如此作為,認為是自己的增長。但這種方式實際上並不增長,因為沒有正確方法,反而減損。即便如此,他們在各處也遭受慾望挫敗。因為外道不完全瞭解超脫有,對於輕微煩惱、長壽、多樂的某些有,僅以輕微煩惱等的緣故,竟然視為"涅槃",所以說以有而說脫有。 與有見俱的貪愛,在前一部分省略後分,稱為"有貪"。 "何處"即在何有中。 "即從彼"即從真實歡喜。眾生間的相互貪愛極為強烈。"無餘"即完全,不留任何餘地。 隨順輪迴之流而行,稱為隨流。以其相反的方向,通過厭離觀等而行,稱為逆流,意指具有不動的信心等。

1. 『『Palabbhati, nikhajjatī』』tiādīsu viya upasaggo padavaḍḍhanamattanti āha 『『abhijātikoti jātiyo』』ti. Kaṇhadhammasamannāgatattā vā kaṇho. Paṭhamavayepi majjhimavayepi pāpasamaṅgī hutvā ṭhito kaṇhadhamme abhijāyati, pacchāpi pāpaṃ pasavatīti attho. Sukkoti vā ettha vuttavipariyāyeneva attho veditabbo.

111.Purimasminti purimasmiṃ pade. Visaye bhummaṃ tattha deyyadhammassa patiṭṭhāpanato. Dutiye adhikaraṇe, tadadhikaraṇañhi nibbānanti. Gahaṭṭhapabbajitakiccesu vā visiṭṭhadhammadassanatthaṃ paccayadānārahattānaṃ samadhuratāniddeso. Atha vā yena yena pana vatthunāti rūpārūpanirodhādinā taṇhāvatthunā. Amarāvikkhepavatthuādināti ettha ādi-saddena subhasukhādimicchābhinivesavatthuṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yathā vā taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritānaṃ vasena saṃkilesabhāgiyassa suttassa vibhāgo, evaṃ samathavipassanāsucaritavasena taṇhāvodānabhāgiyādisuttavibhāgoti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ 『『taṇhā…pe… niddisitabba』』nti vuttaṃ.

Idaṃevaṃ pavattanti yathā ducintitādivasena bālo hoti puggalo, evaṃ tassa ducintitacintitādibhāvanāvasena pavattaṃ idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ nāma suttanti pubbe saṃkilesadhammavibhāgena vuttaṃ idāni sāmaññato saṅgahetvā vadati. Idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttanti etthāpi iminā nayena attho veditabbo.

Kilesaṭṭhānehīti kilesānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānehi. Kilesāvatthāhīti kilesānaṃ pavattiākāravisesehi. Kāmarāgādīhi saṃyujjati kāmarāgādihetu kammavipākādinā. Satipi tesaṃ kālantaravuttiyaṃ saṃyutto nāma hoti, yato kāmarāgādayo 『『saṃyojana』』nti vuccanti. Upādiyatīti daḷhaṃ gaṇhāti pavatteti. Sesaṃ vuttanayattā, uttānattā ca saṃvaṇṇitaṃ.

112.Udāharaṇavasenāti nidassanavasena, ekadesadassanavasenāti attho. Sakalassa hi pariyattisāsanassa soḷasahi paṭṭhānabhāgehi gahitattā. Yathā tadekadesānaṃ soḷasannampi paṭṭhānabhāgānaṃ gahaṇaṃ udāharaṇamattaṃ, tesaṃ pana soḷasannaṃ ekadesaggahaṇaṃ udāharaṇanti kimettha vattabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ 『『ekadesadassanavasenāti attho』』ti. Kasmā panettha pāḷiyaṃ paṭṭhānassa ekadesova udāhaṭo, na avasesoti? Nayanidassanatthaṃ. Iminā nayena avasesopi paṭṭhānabhāvo veditabboti.

Tattha 『『appampi ce saṃhita bhāsamāno…pe… sa bhāgavā sāmaññassa hotī』』ti (dha. pa. 20) idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca. Ettha hi 『『appampi ce saṃhita bhāsamāno』』ti idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ, 『『sa bhāgavā sāmaññassa hotī』』ti idaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ.

Tathā maghadevasuttaṃ. Tattha hi 『『bhūtapubbaṃ, ānanda, imissāyeva mithilāyaṃ maghadevo nāma rājā ahosi dhammiko dhammarājā dhamme ṭhito mahādhammarājā, dhammaṃ carati brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamesu ceva janapadesu ca, uposathañca upavasati cātuddasiṃ, pañcadasiṃ, aṭṭhamiñca pakkhassā』』tiādi (ma. ni. 2.308), idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. 『『Idaṃ kho panānanda, etarahi mayā kalyāṇaṃ vattaṃ nīharitaṃ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattatī』』ti (ma. ni.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 110. 如"可獲得、被隱藏"等處,字首只是增長語詞,所以說"超越種姓"即種姓。或因具有黑暗法而稱為"黑"。在初期、中期都處於邪惡之中,在黑暗法中超越,後來仍繼續造作邪惡。關於"白"應以相反方式理解。 111. "在前面"即在前一處。在境界中使用位格,因為在那裡建立應給予的法。在第二個處所,因為那是涅槃。或爲了顯示在家、出家duties中殊勝的法,說明值得給予緣的正平等。或者"以何種事"即以色、非色、滅等貪愛的對象。"不死等動搖之處"等中,"等"字包括對美樂等邪執的對象。或者如同煩惱、見、惡行方面的雜染部分的經文區分,同樣以止觀善行方面區分貪、清凈等部分的經文,所以經中說"應說明貪..."。 這樣發生,如同愚人因惡思惟等而存在,這種由惡思惟等而發生的雜染部分的經文,先前已通過雜染法的區分而說明,現在以共相總括而說。這種習氣部分的經文也應以此方法理解。 "從煩惱處"即從煩惱的生起處。"煩惱對像"即煩惱生起的特殊方式。以欲貪等繫縛,因欲貪等而有業報等。即使在它們經過長時間后仍稱為繫縛,因為欲貪等被稱為"繫縛"。"執取"即堅固地把持、推動。其餘依照前述,由於明顯,故不再詳述。 112. "舉例說明"即作示例,意為部分顯示。因為整個修學教法已被十六種發起方式所攝持。正如這十六種發起方式中的一部分被舉例,對於這十六種,何必多言。所以說"意為部分顯示"。為何經文中只舉出部分發起方式,而非全部?爲了示現方法。以此方法應了知其餘發起方式。 在此,"即使少許和諧而說..."是習氣部分和無學部分。此處"即使少許和諧而說"是習氣部分,"他成為法的分享"是無學部分。 同樣,摩訶提婆經中："曾經,阿難,就在這摩揭陀（現代印度比哈爾邦）的彌提羅城,有一位名叫摩訶提婆的國王,是正法的王,安住於法,是大法王,在婆羅門、居士、城邑及鄉間行法,守持月圓日、十四日、八日的齋戒"等,這是習氣部分。"現在,阿難,我已開示美德,趣向于究竟厭離、離欲、滅、寂靜、證智、正覺、涅槃"是另一部分。

3.189) idaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ. 『『Pamādaṃ appamādena, yadā nudati paṇḍito』』ti (dha. pa. 28) idaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. 『『Paññāpāsāda…pe… avekkhatī』』ti (dha. pa. 28) idaṃ asekkhabhāgiyanti idaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca.

Tathā 『『tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, indriyānī』』ti (saṃ. ni. 5.493) suttaṃ. Tattha 『『tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, indriyāni. Katamāni tīṇīti? Anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ aññindriya』』nti idaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ, 『『aññātāvindriya』』nti (saṃ. ni. 5.493) idaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ.

Raṭṭhapālasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 2.293 ādayo) saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca. Tattha hi 『『ūno loko atitto taṇhādāso』』tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.306) saṃkileso vibhatto, 『『eko vūpakaṭṭho』』tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.299) asekkhadhammā, itarena vāsanādhammāti.

『『Dhamme ca ye ariyapavedite ratā, anuttaro te vacasā manasā kammunā ca;

Te santisoraccasamādhisaṇṭhitā, sutassa paññāya ca sāramajjhagū』』ti. (su. ni. 332);

Idaṃ vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca. Ettha hi 『『dhamme ca ye ariyapavedite ratā』』ti ayaṃ vāsanā, 『『anuttarā…pe… saṇṭhitā』』ti ayaṃ nibbedho, 『『sutassa paññāya ca sāramajjhagū』』ti asekkhadhammā.

Tathā 『『saddho sutavā niyāmadassī』』ti gāthā (su. ni. 373). Tattha hi 『『saddho sutavā』』ti vāsanā, 『『niyāmadassī vaggagatesu na vaggasāri dhīro, lobhaṃ dosaṃ vineyya paṭigha』』nti nibbedho, 『『sammā so loke paribbajeyyā』』ti asekkhadhammā.

Sabbāsavasaṃvaro parissayādīnaṃ vasena sabbabhāgiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha hi saṃkilesadhammā, lokiyasucaritadhammā, sekkhadhammā, asekkhadhammā ca vibhattā. Asabbabhāgiyaṃ pana 『『passaṃ passatī』』tiādikaṃ (ma. ni. 1.203) udakādianuvādanavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evametasmiṃ soḷasavidhe sāsanapaṭṭhāne ete taṇhādivasena tayo saṃkilesabhāgā, vodānādivasena tayo vāsanābhāgā, sekkhānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ vasena tayo nibbedhabhāgā, asekkhānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ eva vasena tayo asekkhabhāgā, tesaṃ vasena mūlapaṭṭhānāni eva dvādasa honti. Tāni pana vitthāranayena vibhajiyamānāni channavutādhikāni cattāri sahassāni honti. Yathādassanaṃ panetāni uddharitabbāni. Tāni pana yasmā saṅgahato kāmataṇhādivasena tayo taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgā, sassatucchedavasena dve diṭṭhisaṃkilesabhāgā, kāyaduccaritādivasena tayo duccaritasaṃkilesabhāgāti aṭṭha saṃkilesabhāgā. Dhammāmisābhayadānavasena tividhaṃ dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, kāyasucaritādivasena tividhaṃ sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, samathavipassanāvasena duvidhaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthūti aṭṭheva vāsanābhāgā.

Saddhānusārī saddhāvimutto dhammānusārī diṭṭhippatto kāyasakkhīti (pu. pa. mātikā

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： "當智者以不放逸驅除放逸"這是洞察部分。"智慧宮殿...觀察"這既是洞察部分也是無學部分。 同樣,"比丘們,這三根"的經文。其中"比丘們,這三根。哪三根?未知當知根、已知根"這是洞察部分,"具知根"這是無學部分。 羅咤波羅經包含雜染部分、習氣部分和無學部分。其中以"世間不滿足,為貪愛所役使"等說明雜染,"獨處遠離"等說明無學法,其餘是習氣法。 "喜樂聖者所說法,他們以語意行無上, 安住于寂靜戒定,通達聞慧之精髓。" 這既是習氣部分,也是洞察部分和無學部分。這裡"喜樂聖者所說法"是習氣,"無上...安住"是洞察,"通達聞慧之精髓"是無學法。 同樣,"具信多聞見正道"偈頌。這裡"具信多聞"是習氣,"見正道不隨眾行,智者去除貪嗔恨"是洞察,"他於世間正遍行"是無學法。 應知一切漏律儀通過障礙等而成為一切部分。其中區分了雜染法、世間善行法、有學法和無學法。而非一切部分應理解為"看見而看見"等說水等的隨順語。如是在這十六種教法建立中,通過貪等有三種雜染部分,通過清凈等有三種習氣部分,通過有學的戒蘊等有三種洞察部分,通過無學的戒蘊等有三種無學部分,以此有十二種根本建立。這些若以廣說方式區分則成為四千零九十六種。這些應按照所見而引出。由於它們以攝略方式,通過欲貪等有三種貪雜染部分,通過常見斷見有兩種見雜染部分,通過身惡行等有三種惡行雜染部分,共八種雜染部分。通過法施、財施、無畏施有三種佈施功德事,通過身善行等有三種持戒功德事,通過止觀有兩種修習功德事,共八種習氣部分。 隨信行、信解脫、隨法行、見至、身證等。

7.32-36; pu. pa. 26-30) pañcannaṃ sekkhānaṃ paccekaṃ tayo sīlādikkhandhāti pannarasa nibbedhabhāgā, suññatānimittāpaṇihitabhedā paññāvimuttānaṃ tayo aggaphaladhammā, tesu paccekaṃ tayo tayo sīlādikkhandhā, tathā ubhatobhāgavimuttānanti aṭṭhārasa, sikkhitabbābhāvasāmaññena asaṅkhatadhātuṃ pakkhipitvā ekūnavīsati asekkhabhāgā, iti purimāni ekatiṃsa, imāni ekūnavīsatīti samapaññāsa saṃkilesabhāgiyādidhammā honti. Tasmā imesaṃ samapaññāsāya saṃkilesabhāgiyādidhammānaṃ vasena samapaññāsa suttāni honti.

Yasmā ca te paññāvimuttā ubhatobhāgavimuttavibhāgaṃ akatvā asaṅkhatāya dhātuyā aggahaṇena nippariyāyena asekkhabhāgābhāvato naveva asekkhabhāgāti samacattālīsa honti, tasmā peṭake 『『cattārīsāya ākārehi pariyesitabbaṃ, paññāsāya ākārehi sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭha』』nti (peṭako. 21) ca vuttaṃ. Saṅgahato eva pana pubbe vuttavitthāranayena soḷasa honti, puna tividhasaṃkilesabhāgiyādivasena dvādasa honti, puna taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritasaṃkilesataṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritavodānabhāvena cha honti, puna saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ dassanabhāgiyaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ asekkhabhāgiyanti pañca honti, puna mūlapaṭṭhānavasena cattāri honti, puthujjanabhāgiyasekkhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyabhāvena tīṇi honti, puna saṃkilesabhāgiyavodānabhāgiyabhāvena dve eva honti. Paṭṭhānabhāvena pana ekavidhameva, iti paṭṭhānabhāvena ekavidhampi saṃkilesavodānabhāgiyabhāvena duvidhanti vibhāgato yāva channavutādhikaṃ catusahassappabhedaṃ hoti, tāva netabbaṃ. Evametaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ saṅgahato, vibhāgato ca veditabbaṃ.

Imassāpi paṭṭhānavibhāgassa, na purimassevāti adhippāyo. Lokikaṃ assatthīti, lokikasahacaraṇato vā lokiyaṃ, suttaṃ padesenāti ekadesena. Sabbapadesūti taṃtaṃtikānaṃ tatiyapadesu. Buddhādīnanti buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ. Dhammo panettha buddhādiggahaṇena veditabbo, ādisaddena vā.

Pariṇamatīti paripaccati. Dharantīti pabandhavasena pavattanti. Nti pāpakammaṃ. Teti kusalābhinibbattakkhandhā. Rakkhanti vipākadānato vipaccituṃ okāsaṃ na dentīti attho. Ayañca attho upapajjavedanīyesu yujjati, itarasmimpi yathārahaṃ labbhateva. Tenāha 『『dutiye vā tatiye vā attabhāve』』ti.

1. Attano anavajjasukhāvahaṃ paṭipattiṃ paṭipajjanto paramatthato attakāmo nāmāti āha 『『attano sukhakāmo』』ti. Sukhānubandhañhi sukhaṃ kāmento sukhameva kāmetīti ca sukhakāmoti.

Vitthataṭṭhenāti suvipphāradiṭṭhīnaṃ pavattanaṭṭhānatāsaṅkhātena vitthāraṭṭhena.

114.Diṭṭhe dukkhādidhammeti bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe bhummaṃ, dukkhādidhamme diṭṭhe ñāteti attho.

『『Uddha』』ntiādi kāladesānaṃ anavasesapariyādānanti āha 『『uddhanti anāgataṃ, upari cā』』tiādi. Gamanenāti cutūpapātagamanena.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 對五種有學者,每一位各有三種戒蘊等,共十五種洞察部分。空、相、無所緣等三種解脫智的最高果法,在這些中每一種各有三種戒蘊等,同樣無學雙解脫也是十八種。以無需學習的共相包括無為界,共成十九種無學部分。如此前面是三十一種,這裡是十九種,共計五十種雜染部分等法。因此以這五十種雜染部分等法,有五十種經文。 因為這些解脫智者未作無學雙解脫區分,不取無為界,直接成為九種無學部分,所以在藏中說"應以四十種方式探求,以五十種方式闡明教法建立"。以攝略方式,先前已說的廣說方式是十六種,再以三種雜染部分等方式是十二種,再以貪見惡行雜染和貪見惡行清凈是六種,再以雜染部分、習氣部分、見部分、習氣部分、無學部分是五種,再以根本建立方式是四種,再以凡夫部分、有學部分、無學部分是三種,再以雜染部分和清凈部分是兩種。以發起方式則只有一種,如此以發起方式為一種,以雜染清凈部分為兩種,從區分上看最多可成四千零九十六種。應如此了知這個發起方式,以攝略和區分方式。 這個發起方式區分,非僅限於前面。世間的存在,或隨世間行相,或經文部分。在一切處,即各自第三處。佛等,即佛、獨覺佛、佛弟子。此處法應以佛等總稱理解,或以"等"字。 轉變即成熟。持續即以連續方式運轉。"不"即惡業。"他"即善法所生蘊。守護即不給予果報機會。此義在應受報處成立,在其他處亦如應理解。所以說"在第二或第三有中"。 113. 追求對自身無過、帶來安樂的行道者,從最高義來看是自愛者,所以說"自樂求者"。因為追求隨順樂的,求樂即求樂本身,故名樂求。 以廣說義,即善廣大見的生起處和狀態。 114. "見苦等法"即以成就和本質的位格,意為見到苦等法。 "上"等句包括時處無餘周遍,所以說"上即未來,于上方"等。"以行"即以死生轉變行。

115.Nagaradvārathirakaraṇatthanti nagarassa dvārabāhathirakaraṇatthaṃ. Gambhīranematāyāti 『『nemaṃ』』vuccati nikhātathambhādīnaṃ pathaviṃ anupavisitvā ṭhitappadeso , gambhīraṃ nemaṃ etassāti gambhīranemo, tassa bhāvo gambhīranematā, tāya. Kampanaṃ yathāṭhitassa ito cito ca sañcopanaṃ, cālanaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvanaṃ. Ajjhogāhetvāti aviparītasabhāvābhisamayavasena anupavisitvā, anupaviṭṭho viya hutvāti attho.

Saṃyojanānaṃ pajahanavasenāti gāthāya vacanasesaṃ ānetvā dasseti. Atha vā pahātabbassa pahānena vinā na bhāvanāsiddhīti atthasiddhaṃ pahātabbapahānaṃ ajjhattaṃ, bahiddhāti padadvayena yojetvā dassetuṃ ajjhattaṃ bahiddhāti orambhāgiyauddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ visaṃyogagahitoti imamatthaṃ pāḷiyā samatthetuṃ 『『tenāha sabbaloke』』ti vuttaṃ.

Alobhasīsenāti alobhena pubbaṅgamena, yato yogāvacaro 『『nekkhammacchando』』ti vuccati. Asubhasaññā rāgappaṭipakkhatāya 『『visesato alobhappadhānā』』ti vuttā, dasāsubhavasena vā. Adhigatajjhānādīnīti ādisaddena vipassanādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Vihiṃsāratirāgānaṃ byāpādahetukato cattāropi brahmavihārā abyāpādapadhānāti āha 『『catu…pe… abyāpādo dhammapada』』nti. Adhigatāni jhānādīnīti yojanā. Dasānussati…pe… adhigatāni sammāsati dhammapadaṃ satisīsena tesaṃ adhigantabbattāti adhippāyo. Ānāpānabhāvanāyaṃ samādhipi padhāno, na sati evāti dassanatthaṃ 『『dasakasiṇa…pe… sammāsamādhi dhammapada』』nti vuttaṃ. Catudhātuvavatthānavasena adhigatānampi ettheva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.

116.Upalakkhaṇakāraṇānīti sañjānananimittāni.

Pāpameva pāpiyoti āha 『『pāpaṃ hotī』』ti, 『『pāpiyo』』ti ca liṅgavipallāsavasena vuttaṃ. Ekavacane bahuvacananti ekavacane vattabbe bahuvacanaṃ vuttaṃ.

117.Olīyanataṇhābhinivesavasenāti bhavataṇhābhavadiṭṭhivasena. Tā hi bhavesu satte allīyāpenti. Atidhāvanābhinivesavasenāti ucchedadiṭṭhivasena. Sā hi avaṭṭupacchedameva vaṭṭupacchedaṃ katvā abhinivisanato atidhāvanābhiniveso nāma. Olīyantīti sammāpaṭipattito saṅkocaṃ āpajjanti. Abhidhāvantīti sammāpaṭipattiṃ atikkamanti.

Tesañcāti tesaṃ ubhinnaṃ abhinivesānaṃ, tadaññesañca sabbamaññitānaṃ.

118.Idaṃ iṭṭhavipākaṃ aniṭṭhavipākanti idaṃ iṭṭhavipākasaṅkhātaṃ aniṭṭhavipākasaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ.

『『Akaṅkhato na jāneyyu』』nti etena 『『ākaṅkhato』』ti iminā padena saddhiṃ sambandhadassanamukhena 『『na jaññā』』ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti.

Na upalabbhatīti natthīti attho.

120.Tānīti kammakammanimittagatinimittāni. Pattharaṇākāroyeva hesa, yadidaṃ chāyānaṃ volambanaṃ. Evaṃ hotīti 『『akataṃ vata me kalyāṇa』』ntiādippakārena vippaṭisāro hoti.

122.Esakehīti gavesakehi saparasantāne sampādakehi. Dukkhudrayanti dukkhaphalaṃ. Tīhi kāraṇehīti kāyavācācittehi. Tāni hi taṃtaṃsaṃvarānaṃ dvārabhāvena kāraṇānīti vuttāni. Tīhi ṭhānehīti vā tīhi uppattiṭṭhānehi. Pihitanti pidhāyakaṃ.

『『Uṭṭhānaṭṭhānasaṅkhāta』』nti idaṃ pāsāṇabhāvasāmaññaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ.

以下是對巴利文的完整直譯： 115. 城門邊緣製作的意義,即為城門邊緣製作。深遠的安置處,即"安置處"稱為未掘的柱等地不進入而停留的處所,深遠的安置處是它的性質,其性質為深遠安置處。震動是已定位者從此處到彼處的顫動,移動是從定位處的轉移。深入即以非顛倒本質的理解而進入,意為已進入。 以斷除結縛的偈頌,補充說明其餘語言。或者,沒有斷除應斷之物,不成就修習,因此應斷之物的斷除在內在和外在。以內在、外在兩詞連線,顯示下分和上分結縛的解脫。爲了以經文證明此義,所以說"在一切世界"。 以無貪為首,因為修行者被稱為"出離欲"。不凈想因對抗貪慾而被特別說為"主要是無貪精進"。或者十不凈觀。已獲得禪那等,等字包括毗缽舍那等。為止息惡意,四梵住因惡意的緣故,所以說"四...無惡意法門"。已獲得禪那等是連線方式。十隨念...已獲得正念法門,以念為首,表示應獲得的意圖。在出入息修習中,定也是主要的,非僅僅是念,為顯示此義說"十遍處...正定法門"。四界決定也應在此理解為已獲得的攝持。 116. 標誌性原因即生起的標誌。 惡即更惡,所以說"惡將成"。"更惡"是語氣變化所致。在單數處使用複數。 117. 以沉溺貪愛執著的方式,即存在貪和存在見。它們使有情黏附於存在。以超越執著的方式,即斷見。此即以破除輪迴徹底破除輪迴而執著,名為超越執著。沉溺即退縮于正確行道。超越即逾越正確行道。 對於這兩種執著,以及其他一切執著。 118. 這是可意果報和不可意果報。 "非所愿不應知"以此顯示與"所愿"一詞相連線的"不應知"的意義。 不可得即不存在。 120. 這些即業、業相、趣相。這僅僅是鋪展方式,即陰影下垂。如此發生,如"未作善事"等方式的追悔。 122. 以求索者,即在他人相續中成就者。苦的生起即苦的果報。以三種原因,即身語意。它們被說為約束的門。或者以三種生起處。被遮蔽即被掩蓋。 "稱為生起處"是取石頭本質的共相而說。

123.Rajamissakanti puppharajamissakaṃ. Tassāti tassa sekkhāsekkhamunino. Mahicchādīnaṃ viya gāme caraṇappaccayā gāmavāsīnaṃ saddhāhāni vā bhogahāni vā na hoti, atha kho uparūpari vuddhiyeva hotīti dassento 『『pākatikameva hotī』』ti āha. Ajjhattikakammaṭṭhānanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ.

Tenāti kusalena kāyavacīkammena. Thirabhāvo thāmaṃ nāmāti tassa atthaṃ dassento 『『thāmavāti ṭhitimā』』ti āha.

Attasaṃnissayaṃ pemaṃ attāti gahetvā 『『attasama』』nti vuttanti āha 『『attapemena samaṃ pemaṃ natthī』』ti. Bhagavato vipassanāñāṇobhāsappavattiṃ sandhāyāha 『『paññā pana…pe… sakkotī』』ti. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, pana abhiññāñāṇāni ca anantāparimāṇaṃ lokadhātuṃ obhāsenti.

124.Kissa bhītāti kena kāraṇena bhītā.

Ṭhapetvāti pavattetvā. Vacanīyo yācakānanti yojanā, yācitabbayuttoti attho. Yaññaupakkharoti yaññopakaraṇaṃ. 『『Etesu dhammesu ṭhito catūsū』』ti vuttaṃ catukkaṃ vavatthapetuṃ 『『saddhoti ekaṃ aṅga』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Gāthāyaṃ vuttadhamme dve dve ekaṃ katvā aṅgakaraṇaṃ dukanayo.

Jātidhammanti pavattidhammaṃ sandhāya vadati.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 123. "與塵雜"即與花塵雜在一起。"對他"即對那位有學和無學聖者。不像大欲等人在村中行走時會使村民失去信心或財富,而是越來越增長,為顯示這點說"如常"。"內在業處"即四聖諦業處。 "以此"即以善的身語業。"堅固狀態即力量"為顯示其義而說"有力即穩固"。 執取自我之愛為自我,所以說"與我等同",故說"沒有愛比自我之愛更等同"。關於世尊的毗婆舍那智光的運作而說"智慧...能夠"。而一切智智和神通智則照亮無量無邊的世界。 124. "何所畏"即因何原因而畏懼。 "安置"即使運轉。"應說求者"為連線方式,意為應該被乞求。"祭祀工具"即祭祀用具。"安住于這四法中"所說的四法,為確定而說"信為一支"等。 偈頌中所說的法,兩兩合為一支,這是雙法的方式。 "生法"是指輪迴的法。

1. Saccekadesato saccasamudāyo anavasesapariyādānato visiṭṭhoti dassento 『『paramatthasaccaṃ vā hotū』』ti āha. Caturo padāti cattāri padāni, liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, cattāro dhammakoṭṭhāsāti attho. Kevalaṃ sattavibhāgadassanatthameva catupadaggahaṇaṃ, na adhigatadhammānurūpatāya.

Nimmadāti na madā.

『『Saccavādī jino romo』』tipi pāṭho. Tattha romoti diṭṭhirāgarattānaṃ titthiyānaṃ, titthakarānañca adhammavādīnaṃ rāgaviparītadhammadesanato bhayajanako, adhammavādīnaṃ vā tattha ādīnavadassanena bhāyitabbo, appahīnāsaṃvarānaṃ vā durupasaṅkamanato durāsadoti attho.

Sacco ca so dhammo cāti saccadhammo. Tenāha 『『ekantanissaraṇabhāvenā』』tiādi.

Ekāyanabhāvanti ekamaggabhāvaṃ, aññamaggabhāvanti attho.

Dassanabhāgiyaṃ bhāvanābhāgiyanti nibbedhabhāgiyameva dvidhā vibhajitvā vuttanti āha 『『saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi catūhi padehī』』ti. Sesattikānanti sattādhiṭṭhānattikādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ tikānaṃ. Sesapadānañcāti saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañcātiādimissakapadānañca. Ca-saddena saṃkilesabhāgiyādipadāni ca saṅgaṇhāti. Lokiyattikasseva hi 『『sesapadānī』』ti vuttehi missakapadehi evaṃ saṃsandane nayadassanaṃ, itaresaṃ pana tikānaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyādipadehi ceva sesapadehi ca saṃsandane idaṃ nayadassananti 『『vuttanayānusārena suviññeyya』』nti vuttaṃ. Samatikkamananti pahānaṃ. Satipi vāsanābhāgiyasaṃkilesabhāgiyadhammānaṃ lokiyabhāve purimehi pana pacchimā pahātabbā tadaṅgavasena, vikkhambhanavasena ca. Evaṃ pajahanasamatthatāya pahānanti vuttaṃ 『『vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyassa samatikkamāya hotī』』ti. Saṃkilesadhammānaṃ samatikkamena adhigantabbā vodānadhammā viyāti yojanā. Bhāvanā nāma tividhā jhānabhāvanā, vipassanābhāvanā, maggabhāvanāti. Tāsu maggabhāvanāya gahitāya vipassanābhāvanā gahitā eva hotīti taṃ anāmasitvā itarā dve eva gahitā. Tathāpi 『『bhāvanābhāgiyassa suttassa paṭinissaggāyā』』ti vutte kiṃ sabbena sabbaṃ asekkhassa jhānabhāvanāpi paṭinissaṭṭhāti codanaṃ manasi katvā pāḷiyaṃ 『『asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārattha』』nti vuttanti dassento 『『asekkhadhammesu uppannesu maggabhāvanākiccaṃ nāma natthī』』ti vatvā 『『jhānabhāvanāpi diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthā evā』』ti āha.

Ekaṃ eva bhavabījaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ ekabījaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti ekabījī. Sandhāvitvā samāgantvā, nibbattanavasena upagantvāti attho. Saṃsaritvāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Kulaṃ kulaṃ gacchatīti kolaṃkolo. Purimapade anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā niddeso.

以下是對巴利文的完整直譯： 125. 為顯示從一部分真諦到真諦總體,無餘周遍且特殊,說"或為最高真諦"。"四語"即四個語詞,以語氣變化而說,意為四種法聚。完全是為顯示有情分別,而不是依已獲得法的相應性而取四語。 無醉即非醉。 "真語者,勝者發"亦是一種讀法。其中"發"即對於被貪慾顏色所染的外道,以及誹謗法的外道師,因其顛倒說法而生畏。或在那裡以顯示外道過失而應畏懼,或因未斷約束而難以親近,意為難以接近。 真實者與法,即真實法。所以說"以完全出離的方式"等。 一道之性,即單一道路的性質,意為非其他道路。 將見部分和修部分分為洞察部分,所以說"以雜染部分等四語"。餘數三法即七種住處三法等八種三法。余語即雜染部分、習氣部分等混合語。以"與"字包括雜染部分等語。對於世間三法,"余語"已說,以混合語相應,顯示其理路。而對於其他三法,以雜染部分等語以及余語相應,顯示其理路,所以說"依已說方式可易了知"。超越即斷除。儘管雜染部分和習氣部分的法是世間的,但後者應以前者的支分和鎮伏方式斷除。因此說"以能斷除的方式,習氣部分經為斷除雜染部分"。以超越雜染法可獲得清凈法。連線方式是修習有三種：禪那修習、毗缽舍那修習、道修習。在取道修習時,毗缽舍那修習已被取,其他兩種被取。即便如此,說"為捨棄修部分經"時,是否無學的禪那修習也被捨棄?考慮此責難,經中說"無學部分經為現法樂住"。為顯示此,說"無學法生起時,道修習之事不存在",並說"禪那修習亦為現法樂住"。 唯一的有生之種子即結生識,是單一種子。如是有此,即單種子。經過、集合、以生起方式接近,意為前往。輪迴即其同義詞。游于諸家即種姓繁衍。未在前一語去除鼻音,而作解說。

Tesaṃ sotāpannānaṃ. Etaṃ pabhedanti ekabījiādivibhāgaṃ. Purimabhavasiddhaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissayapuññakammaṃ idha pubbahetu nāma. Yo 『『katapuññatā』』ti vuccati, so paṭhamamagge sādhite caritatthatāya vipakkavipākaṃ viya kammaṃ uparimamaggānaṃ upanissayo na siyāti adhippāyenāha 『『upari…pe… āpajjatī』』ti. Tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ niratthakatā āpajjati paṭhamamaggeneva tehi kātabbakiccassa sādhitattā. Paṭhamamagge…pe… āpajjatīti anuppannassa atthakiriyāsambhavato. Evaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vādānaṃ yuttiabhāvaṃ dassetvā catutthavādo evettha yuttoti dassento āha 『『vipassanā…pe… yujjatī』』ti. 『『Sace hī』』tiādinā taṃ yuttiṃ vibhāveti. Vimuttiparipācanīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ paripakkatāya indriyānaṃ tikkhatāya ñāṇassa visadatāya vipassanāya balavabhāvo veditabbo. So hi vomissakanayena saṃsaraṇako idhādhippeto 『『deve ceva mānuse ca sandhāvitvā』』ti vuttattā. Idha kāmabhave ṭhito idhaṭṭhako. Manussadevalokūpapajjanato okārena vokiṇṇo. Ariyasāvakassa taṃtaṃsattanikāyupapatti tassa tassa sodhanasadisaṃ kilesamalādianatthāpanayanatoti āha 『『cha devaloke sodhetvā』』ti. 『『Akaniṭṭhe ṭhatvā』』ti etena heṭṭhābrahmalokasodhanaṃ vuttamevāti veditabbaṃ.

Saddhaṃ dhuraṃ katvāti saddhaṃ dhuraṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā. Saddhāya anussati paṭipatti, saddhaṃ vā pubbabhāgiyaṃ anussati, saddhāya vā anusaraṇasīloti saddhānusārī. Dhammānusārīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Dhammoti panettha paññā veditabbā. Saddahanto vimuttoti saddhāvimutto. Yadipi sabbathā avimutto, saddhāmattena pana vimuttoti attho. Saddhāya vā adhimuttoti saddhāvimutto. Vuttanayenāti uparimaggavipassanāya balavamandamandatarabhāvena. Diṭṭhiyā pattoti diṭṭhippatto, catusaccadassanasaṅkhātāya diṭṭhiyā nirodhappattoti attho. Diṭṭhantaṃ vā pattoti diṭṭhippatto, dassanasaṅkhātassa sotāpattimaggañāṇassa anantarappavattoti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭhamaphalato paṭṭhāya hi yāva aggamaggā diṭṭhippattāti. Idanti yathāvuttasotāpannānaṃ saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattatāvacanaṃ . Aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānanti catasso rūpāvacarasamāpattiyo, catasso arūpāvacarasamāpattiyoti aṭṭha vimokkhā, tesaṃ.

Phuṭṭhantaṃ sacchikarotīti kāyasakkhī, phuṭṭhānaṃ anto phuṭṭhanto, phuṭṭhānaṃ arūpajjhānānaṃ anantaro kāloti adhippāyo. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, phuṭṭhānantarakālameva sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikarotīti vuttaṃ hoti, 『『visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī』』tiādīsu (a. ni.

以下是對巴利文的完整直譯： 對於那些預流者。這是分別,即單一種子等的區分。前世已成就的、資助還滅的福業,在此為前因。被稱為"已作福德"者,在第一道已成就行相性,猶如已成熟果報的業,非上面諸道的資助,意圖是說"在上面...生起"。三道變成無義,因為第一道已成就應由彼等作的事業。在第一道...生起,因無未生起的義利成就。如此顯示三種說法無理,指出第四說法在此合理,說"毗缽舍那...相應"。以"若"等顯示其理。以解脫成熟法的成熟,根的三重性,智慧的清明,毗缽舍那的有力性應被了知。彼以雜合方式輪迴,此處意指"在天與人中游"。在此處於欲有中立足,於此有住。因往生人天世界而被雜色。聖弟子于彼彼有情群生起,如同彼等的凈化,為遣除煩惱垢等,所以說"凈化六天界"。以"住于無煩天"表示已說明下至梵天界的凈化。 以信為車,即以信為首領、為前導。信的隨念實踐,或信的前分隨念,或隨信而行,名為信隨行者。對於法隨行者,理路亦復如是。此處法應了知為智慧。"信而解脫"即信解脫。雖然完全未解脫,但以信為解脫,是其義。或以信而傾向,即信解脫。依已說方式,以上道毗缽舍那的有力、遲鈍、更遲鈍。得見即得見,即得四諦見的滅,是其義。或得見之際,即見所稱的預流道智無間生起。自初果起乃至最高道,得見。此即如上所說預流者的信解脫、得見的言說。八解脫即四色界定、四無色界定。 觸已作證,即身證。觸于內,意為緊接無色禪。在極密結合處,此為使用格,意為應在緊接觸後作證,"如月日週轉不均"等處。<.Assistant>

4.70) viya vā bhāvanapuṃsakanti etaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yo hi arūpajjhānena rūpakāyato, nāmakāyekadesato ca vikkhambhanavimokkhena vimutto, tena nirodhasaṅkhāto vimokkho ālocito pakāsito viya hoti, na kāyena sacchikato, nirodhaṃ pana ārammaṇaṃ katvā ekaccesu āsavesu khepitesu tena so sacchikato hoti. Tasmā so sacchikātabbaṃ nirodhaṃ yathāālocitaṃ nāmakāyena sacchikarotīti 『『kāyasakkhī』』ti vuccati, na tu vimutto ekaccānaṃ eva āsavānaṃ aparikkhīṇattā.

Abhedenāti antarāparinibbāyiādibhedena vinā. 『『Abhedenā』』ti ca idaṃ 『『saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattakāyasakkhino』』ti idhāpi ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Yatheva hi antarāparinibbāyiādibhedānāmasaneneva eko anāgāmī hoti, evaṃ yathāvuttabhedaāmasaneneva saddhāvimutto, diṭṭhippatto, kāyasakkhīti tayo anāgāmino honti. Ayañca anāgāmino tādisamavatthābhedaṃ gahetvā gaṇanā katāti veditabbaṃ. 『『Avihādīsū』』tiādi suviññeyyameva.

Paññāya eva vimutto, na cetovimuttibhūtena sātisayena samādhināpīti paññāvimutto. Ubhatobhāgavimuttoti ubhohi bhāgehi ubhatobhāgato vimutto. Kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanasamucchinnehi rūpakāyanāmakāyato vimuttoti imamatthaṃ dassento 『『vikkhambhana…pe… vimutto nāmā』』ti āha. Arūpasamāpattiyā rūpakāyato, aggamaggena arūpakāyato vimuttaṃ. Yathāha –

『『Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puggalo ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe āruppā, te kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti, ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, puggalo ubhatobhāgavimutto』』ti (ma. ni. 2.182).

Yaṃ pana mahānidānasutte 『『rūpī rūpāni passatī』』tiādike (dī. ni. 2.129) nirodhasamāpattiante aṭṭha vimokkhe vatvā –

『『Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu ime aṭṭha vimokkhe anulomampi samāpajjati…pe… ayaṃ vuccatānanda, bhikkhu ubhatobhāgavimutto, imāya ca, ānanda, ubhatobhāgavimuttiyā aññā ubhatobhāgavimutti uttaritarā vā paṇītatarā vā natthī』』ti (dī. ni. 2.130) –

Vuttaṃ, taṃ ubhatobhāgavimuttaseṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā āruppasamāpattīsu ekāyapi rūpakāyo vikkhambhito eva nāma hoti, tasmā catunnaṃ āruppasamāpattīnaṃ, nirodhasamāpattiyā ca lābhīnaṃ vasena pañca ubhatobhāgavimuttā veditabbā. Esa nayo kāyasakkhimhipi. Aṭṭhavimokkhekadesepi hi aṭṭhavimokkhasamaññā yathā 『『loke sattā』』ti.

Terasasu sīsesu palibodhasīsādīni, pavattasīsañca pariyādiyitabbāni, adhimokkhasīsādīni pariyādakāni, gocarasīsaṃ pariyādakaphalaṃ. Tañhi visayajjhattaṃ phalaṃ, vimokkho pariyādakassa maggassa, phalassa ca ārammaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārasīsaṃ saṅkhāravivekabhūto nirodhoti pariyādiyitabbānaṃ, pariyādakaphalānañca saha visayasaṃsiddhidassanena samasīsibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文經文： 4.70.這應當被視為"如同中性的修習"。確實,任何人通過無色禪定從色身，以及從部分名身中以鎮伏解脫而得解脫，對他來說，被稱為止息的解脫似乎被觀察、被顯明，而不是被身體證得。但是，以止息為所緣，當某些漏被斷除時，他才能證得它。因此，他被稱為"身證者"，因為他以名身證得如所觀察的應當被證得的止息，但並非解脫，因為某些漏尚未完全斷盡。 無差別地，即沒有中般涅槃等區別。"無差別地"這個詞也應當與"信解脫、見至、身證"結合理解。正如單單提到中般涅槃等差別就成為一位不還者，同樣地，單單提到如上所述的差別就成為信解脫、見至、身證三種不還者。應當知道，這是依據不還者的相似狀態差別而作的計數。"在無煩天等處"等內容易於理解。 僅以慧解脫，而非以殊勝的等同於心解脫的定力解脫，故稱為慧解脫。俱分解脫即從兩方面、雙重方面解脫。為顯示"從已鎮伏和已斷除煩惱的色身和名身解脫"這一含義，所以說"以鎮伏......稱為解脫"。通過無色定從色身解脫，通過最上道從無色身解脫。如所說： "在此，諸比丘，某些人以身觸住于超越色法的寂靜解脫——無色定，且以慧見諸漏已盡，諸比丘，此人稱為俱分解脫。" 而在《大因緣經》中提到"有色見諸色"等八解脫，在止息定最後說： "阿難，當比丘順逆入住這八解脫......阿難，此稱為比丘俱分解脫，阿難，沒有比這種俱分解脫更高或更勝妙的俱分解脫。" 這是就最勝俱分解脫而說。其中，因為即使只得一種無色定，色身也算是被鎮伏，所以應當知道有五種俱分解脫，即依據四無色定和止息定的證得者而言。對於身證者也是如此。即使只得部分八解脫，也稱為八解脫，如說"世間眾生"。 在十三種頭首中，障礙頭首等和轉起頭首是應被遍知的，勝解頭首等是能遍知的，行境頭首是遍知之果。那是內在所緣之果，解脫是能遍知之道與果的所緣。行頭首即是行遠離的止息，為顯示應被遍知者與遍知果通過所緣成就而成為等頭首。

1.87) terasa sīsāni vuttāni. Idha pana 『『yassa puggalassa apubbaṃ acarimaṃ āsavapariyādānañca hoti jīvitapariyādānañcā』』ti (pu. pa. 16) puggalapaññattiyaṃ āgatattā tesu kilesapavattasīsānaṃ eva vasena yojanaṃ karonto 『『kilesasīsa』』ntiādimāha. Tattha pavattasīsampi maggo pavattito vuṭṭhahanto cutito uddhaṃ appavattikaraṇena yadipi pariyādiyati, yāva pana cuti, tāva pavattisambhavato 『『pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ pariyādiyatī』』ti āha.

Kilesapariyādānena attano anantaraṃ viya nipphādetabbā, paccavekkhaṇavārā ca kilesapariyādānasseva vārāti vattabbataṃ arahanti. 『『Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotī』』ti (ma. ni. 1.78; saṃ. ni.

我將直譯這段巴利文： 1.87) 已經說明了十三個頭首。在此，因為在《人施設論》中提到"某個人首次和末次都有漏的窮盡和生命的窮盡"，所以在論述漏的轉起頭首時說"漏頭首"等。在這裡，即使是轉起頭首，道從轉起中出離，由於從上方阻止繼續存在而被窮盡，但是由於生命存在的可能性直到死亡，所以說"轉起頭首是生命根和死亡心所窮盡"。 由於漏的窮盡，應當像緊隨其後的一樣完成，且複驗的階段也是漏窮盡的階段，這是必須說明的。"在解脫中，關於解脫的智慧將會生起。"<.Assistant>

3.12, 14) hi vacanato paccavekkhaṇaparisamāpanena kilesapariyādānaṃ samāpitaṃ nāma hoti. Taṃ pana parisamāpanaṃ yadi cuticittena hoti, teneva jīvitaparisamāpanañca hotīti imāya vāracutisamatāya kilesapariyādānajīvitapariyādānānaṃ apubbācarimatā hotīti āha 『『vārasamatāyā』』ti. Bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā parinibbāyatoti ettha parinibbānacittameva bhaṅgottaraṇabhāvena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Caritanti caritā kāyavacīmanappavatti. Ettha ca yena rāgādhikabhāvena puggalo 『『rāgacarito』』ti lakkhīyati, tayidaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha 『『rāgajjhāsayo rāgādhikoti attho』』ti, tena appahīnabhāvena santāne thāmagatassa rāgassa balabhāvo lakkhīyatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Eseva nayo sesesupi.

Sīlavantehīti ādisaddassa lopaṃ katvā niddeso katoti dassento āha 『『sīlavantādīhī』』ti. Ādisaddena dāyakādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.

Ārammaṇabhūtāñeyyanti ārammaṇabhūtāva ñeyyaṃ.

Puthujjanabhūmiādīsūti puthujjanasekkhāsekkhabhūmīsu. Tattha puthujjanabhūmivasena saṃvaro, sekkhabhūmivasena pahānabhāvanā, asekkhabhūmivasena sacchikiriyā, puthujjanabhūmisekkhabhūmivasena vā yathārahaṃ saṃvarapahānabhāvanā. Pubbabhāgiyā hi saṃvarapahānabhāvanā puthujjanassa sambhavanti, itarā sekkhassa, asekkhabhūmivasena sacchikiriyā. Nayato dassitanti 『『yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā 『idaṃ na kappatī』ti appaṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ ce kappiyaṃ anulometi, akappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo kappatī』』tiādinā (mahāva. 305) nayadassanavasena pakāsitaṃ. Sarāgādisaṃvattananti sarāgādibhāvāya saṃvattanaṃ.

Aññamaññaṃ saṃsaggatoti 『『saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañcā』』tiādinā saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ padānaṃ aññamaññasaṃsaggato. Anekavidhoti dvādasavidho yāva dvānavutādhikacatusahassavidhopi anekappakāro. Lokiyasattādhiṭṭhānādisaṃsaggatoti ādisaddena lokiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ, lokuttaraṃ ñāṇaṃ, lokiyañca lokuttarañca ñāṇaṃ, lokiyaṃ ñeyyaṃ, lokuttaraṃ ñeyyaṃ, lokiyañca lokuttarañca ñeyyaṃ, lokiyaṃ ñāṇañca ñeyyañca, lokuttaraṃ ñāṇañca ñeyyañca, lokiyañca lokuttarañca ñāṇañca ñeyyañcātiādiko sambhavanto paṭṭhānabhedo saṅgahito. Ubhayatthāti saṃkilesabhāgiyādike, lokiyādike ca. Yathārahanti yo yo saṃsaggavasena yojanaṃ arahati, so so dhammo. Sambhavāvirodheneva hi yojanā. Na hi 『『lokiyaṃ nibbedhabhāgiya』』ntiādinā yojanā sambhavati.

Tīsupiṭakesu labbhamānassāti tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhe tepiṭake buddhavacane upalabbhamānassa vijjamānassa, etena na kevalaṃ saṅgaho eva yathāvuttabhedānaṃ paṭṭhānabhāgānaṃ niddhāraṇāya kāraṇaṃ, atha kho pāḷiyaṃ dassanañcāti vibhāveti. Tenāha 『『yaṃ dissati tāsu tāsu bhūmīsū』』ti. 『『Teneva hī』』tiādinā yathāvuttassa atthassa pāṭhānugamaṃ dasseti.

Sāsanapaṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā

Saddhammāvataraṭṭhāneti desantarato āgantvā saddhammassa avataraṇokāsabhūte saddhammassavanadhāraṇaparicayaparipucchāmanasikārabahulānaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānataṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ, attano vā santāne pariyattisaddhammassa anuppavesanaṭṭhānatāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyamevāti.

Nettiaṭṭhakathāya līnatthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Nettippakaraṇa-ṭīkā niṭṭhitā.

我將直譯這段巴利文： 3.12, 14) 因為語言表述，通過複驗的完成，漏的窮盡被稱為已完成。假如這個完成是由死亡心完成的，那麼同樣也完成了生命，因為階段的平等性，漏的窮盡和生命的窮盡是首次和末次未曾有的，所以說"階段的平等性"。應當理解為從有分（bhavaṅga）進入般涅槃的般涅槃心本身以破壞的方式被說明。 "行為"即身語意的活動。在此，由於貪慾的優勢，一個人被標記為"貪慾性格"，這就是其特徵。所以說"貪慾傾向，貪慾為主"，由於貪慾在相續中未被捨棄，貪慾的力量被認為是強大的。對於其他性格也是同樣的道理。 通過省略"等"字的首要語，作說明時說"具戒等"。通過"等"字應當瞭解到佈施者等的包含。 "成為所緣的可知"即可知本身成為所緣。 "在普通人的境界等處"即在普通人、有學和無學的境界中。在那裡，依據普通人的境界有防護，依據有學的境界有捨棄和修習，依據無學的境界有現證，或者在普通人和有學的境界中根據情況有防護、捨棄和修習。防護、捨棄和修習在普通人的前分是可能的，其他則在有學，現證在無學的境界。按理顯示，如"諸比丘，我未禁止的，若順從可許，拒絕不可許，這對你們是可許的"等通過顯示道理而闡明。"趨向于有貪等"是趨向于有貪等的狀態。 "互相交織"是指如"屬於煩惱分和習氣分"等語句的煩惱分等詞語的相互交織。"多種"即從十二種乃至超過四千九十二種的多種形式。"世間有情的依止等的交織"等，通過"等"字包括：世間智、出世間智、世間和出世間的智、世間的所知、出世間的所知、世間和出世間的所知、世間的智和所知、出世間的智和所知、世間和出世間的智和所知等，涵蓋了可能的各種發展方面。"在兩處"即在煩惱分等和世間等處。"如應"即每個根據其交織的方式應該聯繫的法。實際上只有通過可能性和無矛盾才能聯繫。例如"世間的分析性"等聯繫是不可能的。 "在三藏中可得"即在三次結集中上升的三藏佛語中可以發現的、存在的。這不僅是爲了彙總和確定如上所述的各種發展方面，而且還在經典中顯示。所以說"在各種境界中可見"。通過"因此"等顯示瞭如上所述義理的經典追隨。 佛法傳承分別說明結束。 總結論說明 "正法入處"即從說法處來，關於正法的入處——聽聞、持守、熟悉、詢問、作意的住處，或者關於在自身相續中正法的入處而說。其餘部分易於理解。 《Netti註釋書》中隱晦義的解釋結束。 《Netti論》註釋結束。

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Khuddakanikāye

Nettivibhāvinī

Ganthārambhakathā

Yajitabbaṃ yajitvāna, namitabbaṃ namāmahaṃ;

Yajanādyānubhāvena, antarāye jahaṃ sadā.

Yena yā racitā netti, yena sā anumoditā;

Yehi saṃvaṇṇanā katā, tesānubhāvanissito.

Kiñci kiñci saritvāna, līnālīnānusandhyādiṃ;

Karissaṃ jinasuttānaṃ, hitaṃ nettivibhāvanaṃ.

Appameyyaguṇo mahādhammarājavhayo bhave;

Acchariyo abbhuto yo, bodhisambhārapūraṇo.

Nānāraṭṭhissarissaro, seṭṭho sāsanapaggaho;

Pāsaṃsarājapāsaṃso, narācinteyyacintako.

Cintitakārako rājā, siraṭṭhimālapālako;

Ajeyyajeyyako mahācetyādikārako sadā.

Assāmaccena byattena, jinacakkahitatthinā;

Anantasutināmena, sakkaccaṃ abhiyācito.

Kāmaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā katā, therāsabhehi gambhīrā;

Gambhīrattā tu jānituṃ, jinaputtehi dukkarā.

Tasmā yācitānurūpena, karissaṃ sādaraṃ suṇa;

Sissasikkhanayānugaṃ, yottaṃ nettivibhāvananti.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 禮敬世尊、阿羅漢、正等正覺者 小部 《導論闡明》 著作開端之語 我已供養應供養者，禮敬應禮敬者； 由於供養等的威力，永遠斷除諸障礙。 由誰造作此導論，由誰隨喜讚歎； 由諸位作註釋者，依靠他們的威力。 憶念少許隱晦與明顯的連結等； 我將造作有益於佛說的導論闡明。 具無量功德者名為大法王； 稀有而希奇者，圓滿菩提資糧。 諸國君主之君主，最勝護持教法； 值得稱讚之王者，思考人所不能思。 國王能成所思愿，護持國家花鬘； 永勝不敗之王者，常造大塔等事。 由明智大臣請求，望佛法輪興盛； 名為無盡聞者，恭敬地作祈請。 雖有長老賢者們，作深奧之註釋； 由於其甚深奧，佛子難以了知。 是故依所請求，恭敬地我將造； 隨順弟子學習，此導論闡明書。

1. Saṅgahavāraatthavibhāvanā

Tattha yassa sikkhattayasaṅgahassa navaṅgassa satthusāsanavarassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ yaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ kātukāmo, tassa nettippakaraṇassa nissayaṃ visayabhūtaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbasahitaṃ, saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ eva vā salokapālena tilokena sadā pūjetabbassa ceva namassitabbassa ca naruttamassa satthuno sāsanavaraṃ vidūheva ñātabbaṃ. Etaṃ sāsanavaraṃ tāva dassento taṃjanakena, taṃvijānakavidūhi ca niyametuṃ, ratanattayaguṇaparidīpanañca kātuṃ –

『『Yaṃ loko pūjayate, salokapālo sadā namassati ca;

Tasseta sāsanavaraṃ, vidūhi ñeyyaṃ naravarassā』』ti. – paṭhamagāthamāha;

Imāya hi paṭhamagāthāya 『『etaṃ sāsanavaraṃ ñeyya』』nti ettakameva ekantato karaṇavisesabhāvena adhippetaṃ. Eteneva visesakaraṇena ekantādhippetanettivisayasāsanavarassa dassitattā. Ekantādhippetasāsanavarameva nettisaṃvaṇṇanāya saṃvaṇṇetabbattā visayaṃ teneva vakkhati aṭṭhakathācariyo –

『『Etaṃ idāni amhehi vibhajitabbahāranayapaṭṭhānavicāraṇavisayabhūtaṃ sāsanaṃ ādikalyāṇatādiguṇasampattiyā varaṃ aggaṃ uttamaṃ nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya paṇḍitavedanīyamevā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā) ca,

『『Etaṃ tividhampi 『sāsanavara』nti padena saṅgaṇhitvā tattha yaṃ paṭhamaṃ, taṃ itaresaṃ adhigamūpāyoti sabbasāsanamūlabhūtaṃ, attano pakaraṇassa ca visayabhūtaṃ pariyattisāsanamevā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā) ca,

『『Idāni yaṃ vuttaṃ 『sāsanavaraṃ vidūhi ñeyya』nti, tattha nettisaṃvaṇṇanāya visayabhūtaṃ pariyattidhammameva pakārantarena niyametvā dassetu』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā) ca.

Tattha pariyattisāsanassāpi mūlaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ 『『sabbasāsanamūlabhūta』』nti. Etena kammasādhanenapi adhippetatthe siddhe nānāvidhasādhakavacanaṃ nānāvādānaṃ anokāsakaraṇatthāya kataṃ. Svākkhātatādidhammaguṇā pana sāsanassa visesadesakanaravarasaddena vā paridīpakatthabhāvena vā dīpitā avinābhāvato. Sāsanavarassa pana janakasambandhipekkhattā 『『naravarassā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tena ca aggapuggalo sāsanavarajanako vācakatthasambandhibhāvena vutto. Anaññasādhāraṇamahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiguṇavisesā pana janakasambandhibhūtassa narassa visesakenavarasaddena vā paridīpakatthabhāvena vā dīpito.

Kiṃ nu so sāsanavarajanako naravaro paramatthova, udāhu pūjanīyo ceva namassanīyo cāti vuttaṃ 『『yaṃ loko…pe… namassati cā』』ti, tena sāsanavarajanako naravaro paramatthova na hoti, atha kho salokapālena lokena sadā sabbakālesu pūjanīyo ceva namassanīyo cāti visesito thomitoti.

Ettha ca pūjananamassanacetanāvācakena vā pūjananamassanasaddena phalūpacārattho puññamahattasaṅkhāto pūjanīyabhāvo ceva āsavakkhayañāṇapadaṭṭhānasabbaññutaññāṇādiguṇasaṅkhāto namassanīyabhāvo ca dīpakatthabhāvena pariggahetvā dīpito. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo 『『bhagavato sadevakassa lokassa pūjanīyavandanīyabhāvo, aggapuggalabhāvo ca vuccamāno guṇavisiṭṭhataṃ dīpetī』』tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā).

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 彙集部分義理闡明 誰欲撰寫此九支的學習三法彙集、最上的師之教法義理註釋的《導論》，對於該導論，應當闡釋其依據、範圍，連同被闡釋者，或僅僅被闡釋者，乃是應當永遠受三界世間與諸護法者尊崇和禮敬的最上人師的最上教法。為顯示此最上教法，以其產生者、了知者，並闡明三寶功德—— "三界世間永遠尊崇，常常禮敬； 此最上教法，智者應當了知最上人之教。"——首偈如是說； 此首偈實際上意在說"應當了知此最上教法"，僅此而已，以特殊作用之意。通過此特殊作用，顯示了毫無疑義的《導論》範圍內最上教法。註釋師將因最上教法完全適合註釋而說明範圍—— "此今我等應分別，以分析方法、基礎考察的範圍內教法，以初善等功德成就，為最上、最高、最微妙智慧境界，智者應當了知。" "以'最上教法'之詞，三種都包含其中，其中第一者為其他獲得方法的根本，也是自身論著範圍內的修學教法。" "現在所說'智者應當了知最上教法'，是爲了以另一種方式確定作為《導論》註釋範圍的修學法。" 在此有言"作為一切教法根本"。此言雖業已成就本意，但以多種論證之言，為防止各種異說。而"善說"等法之功德，已通過最上人、最上教法等詞或闡明本質而顯明，不可分離。最上教法因產生者之關係而說"最上人之"。由此，最上之人作為最上教法之產生者，與說法意義相關而被說明。而不共、大悲、一切知智等特殊功德，已通過產生者關聯之人的特別詞，或闡明本質而顯明。 是否此最上教法之產生者最上人是究竟實相，還是應受尊崇和禮敬，故曰"三界世間永遠尊崇"等，表明最上教法產生者最上人非唯究竟實相，而是受三界世間在一切時中永遠尊崇和禮敬而被讚頌。 在此，通過尊崇禮敬之意或詞，顯明瞭作為福德廣大之尊崇性，以及以漏盡智為基礎的一切知智等功德之可禮敬性。因此註釋師說："世間諸天的尊崇禮敬，最上人之性，正在宣說功德之殊勝。"

Tādisassa naravarassa tādisaṃ sāsanavaraṃ kiṃ yena kenaci viññeyyanti vuttaṃ 『『vidūhī』』ti. Tena tipiṭakadharā ariyabhūtā paṇḍitā vācakatthabhāvena gahitā, suppaṭipannatādisaṅghaguṇā pana vandadhātuvacanena vā dīpakatthabhāvena vā dīpitāti. Evaṃ pariggahetvā dīpite ratanattayaguṇe sandhāya 『『evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya sātisayaṃ ratanattayaguṇaparidīpanaṃ katvā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā) vakkhati, na gāthāya niravasesatthe. Tattha evanti evaṃ sāsanavaradassanabhūtāya paṭhamagāthāyāti atthova daṭṭhabbo. Apare panācariyā 『『imāya paṭhamagāthāya ekantato adhippetānādhippetavacanāni ceva vācakatthadīpakatthavisesāni ca suṭṭhu avicāretvā 『evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya sātisayaṃ ratanattayaguṇaparidīpanaṃ katvā』ti vacanacchāyaṃ nissāya sātisayaṃ ratanattayaguṇaparidīpanaṃ kātuṃ 『yaṃ lokotyādimāhā』ti ca sātisayaratanattayaguṇe dassento 『yaṃ lokotyādimāhā』ti』』 ca vadanti. Tesaṃ vādo amhākaṃ nakkhamati. Kāraṇaṃ pana mayā heṭṭhā vuttānusārena ñātabbanti ayaṃ padānukkamānurūpānusandhyattho.

Atha vā ekaṃ samayaṃ jambuvanasaṇḍe nisīditvā sissānaṃ hitaṃ cintento, attano abhinīhārasampattiṃ passanto, sammāsambuddhena pasaṃsito, mahākaccāyano satthārā anumoditaṃ sāsanāyattaṃ navaṅgassatthavaṇṇanaṃ soḷasahārādianekatthavidhaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ ārabhanto, 『『yaṃ loko』』tyādimāha. Yadi evaṃ yathāvuttappakāraṃ nettippakaraṇabhūtaṃ soḷasahārātyādikaṃ ārabhitabbaṃ, taṃ anārabhitvā kasmā nettippakaraṇato bahibhūtaṃ 『『yaṃ loko』』tyādikaṃ ārabhitabbaṃ, seyyathāpi ambaṃ puṭṭho labujaṃ byākareyya, labujaṃ puṭṭho ambaṃ byākareyya, evameva nettippakaraṇamārabhanto aññaṃ ārabhatīti? Tathāpi yassa yathāvuttassa sāsanavarassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ yaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ kātukāmo yassa nettippakaraṇassa visayabhūtaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbasahitaṃ, saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ eva vā taṃ sāsanavaraṃ tāva dassento taṃjanakena, taṃvijānakavidūhi ca niyametuṃ, ratanattayaguṇaparidīpanañca kātuṃ 『『yaṃ loko』』tyādimāha. Ayaṃ līnantaracodanāsahito anusandhyattho.

『『Yaṃ loko pūjayate, salokapālo sadā namassati ca;

Tasseta sāsanavaraṃ, vidūhi ñeyyaṃ naravarassā』』ti. –

Niggahitalopaṃ katvā racitā gāthā ariyāsāmaññalakkhaṇena sampannā. Kathaṃ? Pubbaḍḍhe tiṃsa mattā, aparaḍḍhe sattavīsa mattā. Sampiṇḍitā sattapaññāsa mattāva bhavanti. Akkharānaṃ pana imissaṃ gāthāyaṃ sattatiṃsa. Tesu garukkharā vīsati, lahukkharā sattarasa bhavanti. 『『Tassetaṃ sāsanavara』』nti pana sānunāsikaṃ virujjhati.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 這樣的最上人的這樣的最上教法，是否任何人都能了知，故說"智者"。由此，通過說法意義，包括了持三藏、已成聖者的智者，而善行等僧伽功德則通過詞根或闡明本質而顯明。如是攝取並顯明三寶功德，所以將說"如是以首偈殊勝地顯明三寶功德"，而非偈頌的全部意義。在此，"如是"應理解為"通過如是顯示最上教法的首偈"之義。但其他諸師說："對此首偈，未能善加思察絕對意圖與非意圖之語，以及說法意義與闡明本質的差別，而僅依據'如是以首偈殊勝地顯明三寶功德'的文句光澤，爲了殊勝地顯明三寶功德而說'世間'等，為顯示殊勝三寶功德而說'世間'等。"他們的說法我們不能接受。原因應當依據我前面所說來了解。這是依照詞序的連結義。 或者，有一時，坐在閻浮樹林中，為弟子們思考利益，觀察自己的願力成就，被正等覺者讚歎的大迦旃延，開始撰寫經師所隨喜的、依教法而作的九分教法註釋、以十六行相等多義的《導論》，而說"世間"等。若是如此，應當開始如上所說的《導論》之十六行相等，為何不開始它而開始《導論》之外的"世間"等，就像被問到芒果而回答麵包果，被問到麵包果而回答芒果，同樣地，開始《導論》而開始別的？雖然如此，爲了顯示如上所說的最上教法，即欲造作其義註釋的《導論》的範圍，以及與註釋共同或單獨註釋的最上教法，爲了以其產生者和了知的智者來確定，並顯明三寶功德，而說"世間"等。這是帶有隱晦質疑的連結義。 "世間永遠尊崇，三界守護者常常禮敬； 此最上教法，智者應當了知最上人之教。"—— 省略鼻音而造作的偈頌，具足聖者共同特相。如何？前半有三十拍，後半有二十七拍。總共正好五十七拍。而此偈頌中有三十七個字母。其中二十個重音字母，十七個輕音字母。但"此是最上教法"若帶鼻音則不相符。

Tattha niddesattho aṭṭhakathānusārena vijānitabbo. Salokapālo sabbo sattaloko sakkaccaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇādianekaguṇānussaraṇena vā pūjetabbapūjanena vā paṭipattipūjanena vā sadā sabbakālesu sakkaccaṃ yaṃ naravaraṃ pūjayate ceva namassati ca, tassa pūjetabbassa ceva namassitabbassa ca satthuno naravarassa tilokaggassa mayā saṃvaṇṇetabbasahitaṃ, saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ eva vā vidūheva ñeyyaṃ ñātabbaṃ. Nipuṇañāṇagocaraṃ etaṃ mayā buddhiyaṃ ṭhapitaṃ sāsanavaraṃ mayā ārabhitabbassa nettippakaraṇassa visayanti paṭhamaṃ jānitabbaṃ dassetvā tassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūtaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ ahaṃ ārabhissāmi, taṃ tumhe sādhavo suṇātha manasi karothāti samudāyayojanā, avayavayojanāpi kātabbā.

Kathaṃ? 『『Salokapālo loko』』ti visesanavisesitabbabhāvena yojanā. Lokapālo vajjetvā avaseso loko ca na hoti, atha kho lokapālasahito lokoti viseseti. 『『Loko pūjayate ceva namassati cā』』ti kattukārakaākhyātakiriyābhāvena yojanā 『『yo karoti, sa kattā』』ti vuttattā. Yo loko kārako, so kattā hotu. Yo loko pūjayate ceva namassati ca, kathaṃ so kattāti? 『『Yo karoti, sa kattā』』ti suttassa 『『yo karoti kiriyaṃ nipphādeti, so kiriyānipphādako kattā』』ti atthasambhavato sayanabhuñjanādisabbakiriyānipphādako kattāyeva hoti. Ayañca loko pūjananamassanakiriyānipphādakoyevāti. Kathaṃ ayaṃ loko kiriyānipphādakoti? 『『Loko』』ti sattapaññattiyā paramatthato avijjamānāyapi paññāpetabbo santāne pavattamāno hadayavatthunissito cittuppādo gahetabbo, so yathārahaṃ hetādhipatisahajātādipaccayena paccayo nipphādako bhave. Evaṃ lokassa kattukārakabhāvo vijānitabboti paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena yojanā. Esa nayo tīsu piṭakesupi evarūpesu ṭhānesu.

『『Yaṃnaravaraṃ pūjayate ceva namassati cā』』ti kammakārakaākhyātakiriyābhāvena yojanā 『『yaṃ karoti, taṃ kamma』』nti vuttattā. Yaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ kammaṃ hotu. Yaṃ pūjayati ceva namassati ca, kathaṃ taṃ kammanti? 『『Yaṃ karoti, taṃ kamma』』nti suttassa 『『yaṃ karoti kiriyāya sambajjhati, kiriyāya sambajjhitabbaṃ kamma』』nti atthasambhavato karaṇavācakavacanīyādisabbakiriyāya sambajjhitabbaṃ kammaṃ hotveva. Ayañca naravaro pūjananamassanakiriyāya vācakavacanīyabhāvena sambajjhitabboyevāti. Kathaṃ ayaṃ naravaro vacanīyoti? Pūjananamassanacetanāya ārammaṇakaraṇavasena naravaro vacanīyo, cetanā vācakā, evaṃ vācakavacitabbabhāvo hotveva. 『『Yaṃ naravara』』nti paññattiyā paramatthato avijjamānāyapi paññāpetabbo santānavasena pavattamāno lokiyalokuttaraguṇasahito khandhapañcako vutto, so ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo, cetanā paccayuppannāti paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena yojanā. Esa nayo tīsu piṭakesu evarūpesu ṭhānesu.

『『Tassa naravarassā』』ti visesanavisesitabbabhāvena yojanā. Naravaro nāma nimantitabbādiko na hoti, atha kho pūjetabbo namassitabbo evāti viseseti. Tassa pūjetabbassa ceva namassitabbassa ca naravarassa sāsanavaranti jaññajanakabhāvena yojanā. Sāsanavaraṃ nāma paccekabuddhasāvakabuddharājarājādīnaṃ sāsanavaraṃ na hoti, pūjetabbassa ceva namassitabbassa ca naravarassa tilokasseva sāsanavaranti niyameti.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 在此，釋義的意義應依照註釋跟隨了知。三界世間守護者，全部有情世間以恭敬地憶念一切知智等多種功德，或以應被尊崇的尊崇，或以實踐尊崇，在一切時中恭敬地尊崇和禮敬最上人。對於這應被尊崇和禮敬的最上人師，作為三界之最，我將連同註釋闡釋，或僅僅闡釋，唯有智者能了知。我將此最上教法置於微妙智慧境界，作為我將開始的《導論》範圍，首先顯示並了知。我將開始闡釋其義的《導論》，愿諸善者諦聽、作意。這是總體組合，亦應作部分組合。 如何組合？"三界世間守護者"是以特徵與被特徵的方式組合。除去世間守護者，其餘者不存在，而是與世間守護者一同的世間。"世間尊崇且禮敬"是以作者、作業、謂語的方式組合，因為曾說"誰作，誰是作者"。誰是世間作者，誰是作者。世間尊崇且禮敬，如何是作者？因"誰作，誰是作者"之經，其義為"誰作業完成，誰是業完成者作者"，如臥、食等一切業完成者實為作者。此世間確實是尊崇禮敬業完成者。此世間如何是業完成者？"世間"以有情施設，雖從究竟義不存在，然應在相續中安立，依止心臟處生起的心，應依應理的因、依止因、俱生等緣而成為緣完成者。如是應了知世間作者作業性，以緣與緣生性組合。此法則在三藏中類似處所亦然。 "最上人被尊崇且禮敬"是以業、作業、謂語的方式組合，因為曾說"所作，是業"。應作者，是業。尊崇且禮敬，如何是業？因"所作，是業"之經，其義為"與業相關聯的，與業相關聯應作"，如語言等一切業相關聯應作為業。此最上人以尊崇禮敬業的語言性而應與業相關聯。最上人如何是可語？以尊崇禮敬意樂為對境作用，最上人是可語。意樂為語，如是可語性存在。"最上人"以施設，雖從究竟義不存在，然應在相續中安立，與世間出世間功德俱的五蘊已說，彼以對境緣為緣，意樂緣生，以緣與緣生性組合。此法則在三藏中類似處所亦然。 "對於彼最上人"是以特徵與被特徵的方式組合。最上人非受邀請等，而是應被尊崇、禮敬。對於應被尊崇且禮敬的最上人，"最上教法"是以產生者與所生性組合。最上教法非獨覺、聲聞、佛王、王等的最上教法，而確定為應被尊崇且禮敬的最上人的三界最上教法。

『『Vidūhi ñeyya』』nti kattukārakakitakiriyābhāvena yojanā. Kattubhāvo heṭṭhā vuttova. 『『Vidūhī』』ti sattapaññattiyā paramatthato avijjamānāyapi paññāpetabbo santāne pavattamāno sāsanavare sammohadhaṃsakañāṇasahito hadayavatthunissito cittuppādo vutto, so yathārahaṃ hetādhipatisahajātādipaccayena paccayo nipphādako bhave. Ñā-itidhātuyā atthabhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ paccayuppannaṃ nipphādeyyaṃ bhave, evaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena yojanā.

『『Ñeyyaṃ sāsanavara』』nti visesanavisesyabhāvena yojanā. Sāsanavaraṃ nāma na yena kenaci ñeyyaṃ, atha kho vidūheva saṇhasukhumañāṇena ñeyyaṃ sāsanavaranti viseseti.

『『Etaṃ sāsanavara』』nti visesanavisesyabhāvena yojanā. Sāsanavaraṃ nāma mayā buddhiyaṃ aṭṭhapitaṃ appavattetabbaṃ hoti, mayā idāni nettippakaraṇassa visayabhāvena buddhiyaṃ viparivattamānaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ pavattetabbaṃ sāsanavaranti viseseti. Etaṃ sāsanavaraṃ nettippakaraṇassa visayanti yojanā kātabbā. Tenāha 『『etaṃ idāni amhehi vibhajitabbahāranayapaṭṭhānavicāraṇavisayabhūtaṃ sāsana』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā). Iccevaṃ nettiyā paṭhamagāthāya saṅkhepena yojanattho samatto.

Tattha yanti aniyamanaravarassa satthuno vācakaṃ payogavantasabbanāmaṃ. Aniyamo ca pūjananamassanakiriyāya aniyamitattā vutto, na naravarato aññasattassa sambhavatoti. Esa nayo sesāniyatesupi tīsu piṭakesu. Lokiyanti ettha puññāpuññāni, tabbipāko cāti loko.Ettha sattanikāye puññāpuññāni lokiyanti pavattanti, tabbipāko ca lokiyati pavattati, iti sattanikāyassa puññāpuññānaṃ, tabbipākassa ca pavattanassa ādhārabhāvato 『『etthā』』tipadena niddiṭṭho sattanikāyo lokonāma. Pūjayateti viggahavirahitaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ, sakkaccaṃ pūjanaṃ karoti.

Lokaṃ pālentīti lokapālā, puññāpuññānañceva tabbipākassa ca pavattanādhārattā lokā ca. Ke te? Cattāro mahārājāno, indayamavaruṇakuverā vā, khattiyacatumahārājasakkasuyāmasantusitasunimmitaparanimmitavasavattimahābrahmādayo vā. Pālanañcettha issariyādhipaccena taṃtaṃsattalokassa aññamaññavihesananivāraṇādiāṇāpavattāpanayasaparivāraṭṭhānantarādiniyyādanā, saha lokapālehi yo vattatīti salokapālo. Atha vā ye hirottappā lokaṃ pālenti, iti pālanato te hirottappā lokapālā. Tenāha bhagavā 『『dveme, bhikkhave, sukkā dhammā lokaṃ pālentī』』ti (a. ni.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： "智者應知"是以作者、作業、已作業的方式組合。作者性已如前說。"智者"以有情施設，雖從究竟義不存在，然應在相續中安立，在最上教法中具有破除愚癡之智，依止心臟處生起的心已說，彼依應理的因、依止因、俱生等緣而成為緣完成者。"知"此根的義為智，應成為緣生完成，如是以緣與緣生性組合。 "應知最上教法"是以特徵與所特徵的方式組合。最上教法非任何人都能知，而是唯有智者以細微智慧能知的最上教法，如是特徵。 "此最上教法"是以特徵與所特徵的方式組合。最上教法非我未置於智中、未運作，而是我現在作為《導論》範圍而運轉于智中、應安置、應運作的最上教法，如是特徵。此最上教法是《導論》的範圍，應如是組合。因此說："此現在我等應分別的行相、方法、基礎考察範圍內的教法。"如是《導論》首偈的簡略組合義完結。 在此，"彼"是不確定最上人師的指示代詞。不確定是因尊崇禮敬業的不確定而說，非因除最上人外其他有情的可能性。此法則在三藏其他不確定處亦然。"世間"在此是福與非福及其果報。在此有情群中，福與非福執行，其果報執行，因此作為有情群的福與非福及其果報執行的基礎，以"在此"之詞所指示的有情群名為世間。"尊崇"是無詞根分析的動詞，恭敬地作尊崇。 "守護世間故為世間守護者"，因為是福與非福及其果報執行的基礎故為世間。他們是誰？四大天王，或因陀羅、閻摩、婆樓那、俱毗羅，或剎帝利、四大天王、帝釋、夜摩、兜率、化樂、他化自在、大梵等。此中守護是以主權統治，對彼彼有情世間阻止相互損害等的命令運作，以及榮耀、眷屬、地位、職責等的分配。與世間守護者俱行故為"具世間守護者"。或者，慚愧守護世間，因守護故彼慚愧為世間守護者。因此世尊說："諸比丘，此二白法守護世間。"

2.9; itivu. 42). Lokapālehi hirottappehi samannāgato loko salokapālo nāma. Hirottappasampanno hi sappuriso loko sakkaccaṃ sadā sabbakālesu pūjayati ceva namassati ca pāpahirijigucchanato, dhammacchandavantatāya ca.

Aññe pana pūjentā namassantāpi kadāciyeva pūjenti namassanti, na sabbadāti. Sadāti pūjananamassanakālavācakaviggahavirahitaṃ vikappanāmaṃ, sabbanāmaṃ vā. Namassatīti viggahavirahitaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ, sakkaccaṃ namassanaṃ karoti. Tassetāti ettha tassāti niyamavācakaṃ payogavantasabbanāmaṃ viggahavirahitameva. Niyamo ca pūjananamassanakiriyāya visesito. Tasmā tassa pūjananamassanakiriyāya niyamitabbassa pūjetabbassa namassitabbassa naravarassāti attho yuttova. Sesaniyamesu aññesupi eseva nayo. Etanti ācariyena vibhajitabbahāranayapaṭṭhānavicāraṇavisayabhūtassa sāsanavaraparāmasanaṃ payogavantasabbanāmaṃ viggahavirahitaṃ.

Sāsati etenāti sāsanaṃ, etena navavidhasuttantena, navavidhasuttantasahitena vā varena sabbena samatthe veneyye diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi tividhayānamukhena yathārahaṃ satte sāsati anusāsati vineti. Iti sāsanānusāsanakiriyānusārena veneyyasattānaṃ jānanapaṭipajjanādhigamassa kāraṇakaraṇattā 『『etenā』』ti padena niddiṭṭhaṃ navavidhasuttantaṃ, navavidhasuttantasahitaṃ vā varaṃ sabbaṃ sāsanaṃ nāma. Navavidhasuttantadesanāya hi veneyyānaṃ jānanaṃ purimajānanena pacchimajānanaṃ, jānanena paṭipajjanena pacchimapaṭipajjanena adhigamo, purimādhigamena pacchimādhigamo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ 『『saddhā sīlaṃ sutaṃ cāgo paññā saddhāya sīlassa sutassa cāgassa paññāyā』』ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.423) ca 『『paṭhamassa jhānassa parikammaṃ paṭhamassa jhānassa』』tyādi (paṭṭhā. 1.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 2.9.；增支部2.9）。具足慚愧世間守護者的世間名為具世間守護者。因為具足慚愧的善人世間，由於厭惡罪惡、慚愧，以及對法的意樂，恭敬地在一切時中尊崇且禮敬。 其他人雖然尊崇禮敬，但只是有時尊崇禮敬，非永恒。"常常"是尊崇禮敬時間的無詞根分析的分別名詞，或代詞。"禮敬"是無詞根分析的動詞，恭敬地作禮敬。"對彼此"中的"彼"是確定說明的有作用代詞，也是無詞根分析。確定是以尊崇禮敬業特徵。因此，對彼以尊崇禮敬業確定的、應被尊崇禮敬的最上人，此義合理。在其他確定處也是同樣的法則。"此"是老師應分別的行相、方法、基礎考察範圍內的最上教法的指示，是有作用的代詞，無詞根分析。 以此教導故為教法，以此九種經典，或與九種經典俱的一切最上，以現法、來世、究竟義的三種乘門，如其所應教導、教誡、調伏有能力的所化眾生。如是隨順教導教誡業，作為所化眾生知、行、證的因緣，故以"以此"之詞所指示的九種經典，或與九種經典俱的一切最上名為教法。因為以九種經典教導，所化眾生的了知，以前了知而有後了知，以了知、修行、后修行而有證得，以前證得而有後證得。因此說："信、戒、聞、舍、慧對信、戒、聞、舍、慧"和"初禪的準備對初禪"等。

1.423) ca. Sāsadhātuyā desanāsaddo ca taṃjanako desanāñāṇasampayuttacittuppādo ca mukhyattho, taṃupanissayapaccayā veneyyānaṃ atthajānanapaṭipajjanaadhigamanādi kāraṇūpacārattho, 『『etenā』』ti padena vuttāya sāsanabhūtāya nāmapaññattiyā karaṇasattisaṅkhātā upanissayapaccayasatti phalūpacārattho. Iti-saddopi tameva nāmapaññattiyā upanissayapaccayasattiṃ hetubhāvena parāmasati, tassā sattiyā ādhārabhūtā nāmapaññatti yu-paccayattho. Eseva nayo tīsu piṭakesu evarūpesu ṭhānesu.

Ekantaniyyānaṭṭhena, anaññasādhāraṇaguṇatāya ca uttamaṭṭhena varaṃ uttamaṃ, pariyattisāsanamhi phalaniyyādanato, magganiyyānahetubhāvato ca niyyānaṭṭhena, sāvakādīhi ajaniyattā asādhāraṇaṭṭhena ca uttamaṭṭhena varaṃ, varitabbanti vā varaṃ. Yathāvuttassa sāsanassa paṇḍitehi abhipatthitasamiddhihetutāya varitabbattā patthetabbattā sāsanavaraṃ nāma, yathāvuttaṭṭhena vā sāsanañca taṃ varañcāti sāsanavaraṃ. Ca-saddena sattibhedaṃ, taṃ-saddena atthābhedaṃ desseti.

Vidantīti vidū. Ye paṇḍitā yathāsabhāvato kammakammaphalāni, kusalādibhede ca dhamme vidanti, iti vidanato te paṇḍitā vidū nāma, tehi. Ñātabbanti ñeyyaṃ. Ñā-dhātuyā nippariyāyato ārammaṇikaṃ ñāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, ṭhānūpacārato sāsanavarassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvo dassito, iti-saddena ārammaṇapaccayabhāvo parāmasito. Tassa iti-saddena parāmasitabbassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvassa ādhāraṃ sāsanavaraṃ ṇya-paccayatthoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ arahatīti vā ñeyyaṃ, vidūnaṃ ñāṇaṃ jānanaṃ ārammaṇabhāvena arahatīti attho. Imasmiṃ naye taddhitapadaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Narati netīti naro. Yo puriso attānaṃ itthīnaṃ uccaṭṭhānaṃ narati neti, iti naranato nayanato so puriso naro nāma. So hi puttabhūtopi mātuyā pituṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, kaniṭṭhabhātubhūtopi jeṭṭhabhaginīnaṃ pituṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Atha vā naritabbo netabboti naro. So hi jātakālato paṭṭhāya yāva attano sabhāvena attānaṃ dhāretuṃ samattho na hoti, tāva parehi netabbo, na tathā añño tiracchānādikoti. Ettha pana satthuvisayatāya narati veneyyasatteti naroti attho adhippeto. Satthā hi satte apāyādito sugatiṃ vā maggaphalanibbānaṃ vā netīti. Sabbaññutaññāṇādianekaguṇasamannāgatattā varo uttamo, varitabbo patthetabboti vā varo, tilokaggo. Pakatiyā uccaṭṭhānaṭṭho naro guṇuttamena samannāgato varo, naro ca so varo cāti naravaro. Ca-ta-saddānaṃ atthabhedo vuttova, visesanaparapadasamāsoyaṃ. Yena vuttaṃ 『『aggapuggalassāti attho』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā). Aññe pana 『『narānaṃ, naresu vā varoti naravaro』』ti vadanti, taṃ vacanaṃ 『『aggapuggalassāti attho』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā) aṭṭhakathāvacanena virujjhati maññe. Tassa naravarassāti. Iccevaṃ nettippakaraṇassa ādigāthāya samāsena ca vacanattho samatto.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： "教"根的教說之聲和產生它的與教說智相應的心生起是主要義，以此為依止緣的所化眾生的義理了知、修行、證得等是因緣假義，以"以此"之詞所說的作為教法的名施設的作用力稱為依止緣力是果假義。"如是"之詞也以因的方式指向那名施設的依止緣力，作為彼力所依的名施設是"yu"後綴義。此法則在三藏中類似處所亦然。 以確定出離義，以不共功德性，以最上義為最上；在教理教法中因果的給予，因為是道出離因而有出離義，因聲聞等不能生故有不共義，以最上義為最上；或應選擇故為最上。因為如上所說教法為智者所希求成就之因而應選擇、應希求故名為最上教法；或以如上所說義，既是教法又是最上故為最上教法。以"又"字顯示力的差別，以"彼"字顯示義無差別。 知故為智者。凡諸智者如實知業與業果，以及善等差別諸法，因如是知故彼等智者名為智者，由彼等。應知故為所知。"知"根無譬喻地說能緣的智，以處假說顯示最上教法的所緣緣性，以"如是"字指涉所緣緣性。應見彼以"如是"字所指涉的所緣緣性的所依最上教法是"ṇya"後綴義。或值得智故為所知，值得智者之智以所緣方式了知之義。在此法則中應見從格詞。 引導故為人。凡男子引導自己至女人的高位，因如是引導、導引故彼男子名為人。因為他雖為子，亦立於母之父位，雖為弟，亦立於姐妹之父位。或應被引導、應被導引故為人。因為從出生開始，直到能以己性持自己為止，應由他人導引，而其他畜生等不如是。但此中因師範圍故，引導所化眾生故為人之義是意趣。因為師從惡趣等引導眾生至善趣或道果涅槃。因具足一切知智等諸多功德故為最上、最勝；或應選擇、應希求故為最上，三界最勝。本性高位為人，具足功德最上為最上，既是人又是最上故為最上人。"又"與"彼"二字的義差別已說，此是后詞限定複合詞。因此說"最上士之義"。但其他人說"人中最上"或"在人中最上為最上人"，此說我認為與註釋書說"最上士之義"相違。"對彼最上人"。如是《導論》首偈的簡略語義完結。

Sarūpattho yojanatthavacanatthānusārena vijānitabbo. Tathāpi visuṃ suṭṭhu jānanatthāya puna vattabbo. 『『Ya』』nti padassa anaññasādhāraṇasabbaññutaññāṇādianekaguṇasampanno salokapālena lokena pūjetabbo ceva namassitabbo ca sāsanavaradesako tilokaggo sarūpattho. 『『Loko』』ti padassa yathāvuttalokapālasahito saddhācāgādisampanno sabbasattaloko sarūpattho. Lokasaddo ekavacanayuttopi jātisaddattā niravasesato satte saṅgaṇhāti yathā 『『mahājano』』ti. Kāmañcettha lokasaddo 『『lokavidū』』tyādīsu saṅkhārabhājanesupi pavatto, pūjananamassanakiriyāsādhanattā pana sattalokeva vācakabhāvena pavattoti. Tenāha 『『pūjanakiriyāyogyabhūtatāvasenā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā).

Pūjayateti ettha pūjanakiriyāya mukhyato pūjanasaṅkhāto pūjentānaṃ cittuppādo sarūpattho, phalūpacārena taṃcittuppādassa ārammaṇapakatūpanissayabhūtā vuttappakārā sabbe buddhaguṇā sarūpatthā. Te-vibhattipaccayassa pūjanakiriyāsādhako vuttappakāro loko ca sarūpattho, evaṃ sati atthabhedābhāvato dvīsu vācakesu ekova vācako vattabbo, kasmā ekasmiṃ atthe dve vācakā vuttāti? Nāyaṃ doso dvinnaṃ vācakānaṃ sāmaññavisesavācakattā. Lokasaddo hi pūjanakiriyāsādhako, aññakiriyāsādhako ca vadatīti sāmaññavācako ca hoti. Pūjayate-saddo lokapūjanaitthipūjanapurisapūjanatiracchānapūjanādikiriyāsādhakañca vadatīti sāmaññavācako . Tasmā pūjayate-saddo lokasaddassa sarūpattho, pūjanakiriyāsādhako ca na aññakiriyāsādhakoti niyameti. Lokasaddo ca pūjayatesaddassa sarūpattho pūjanakiriyāsādhako. Loko pana pūjanakiriyāsādhako itthipurisatiracchānādikoti niyameti. Tīsu piṭakesu aññesupi evarūpesu ṭhānesu eseva nayo.

『『Salokapālo』』ti padassa yathāvuttaseṭṭhalokapālasahagato, pūjananamassanakiriyāsādhako ca sattanikāyo sarūpattho. 『『Sadā』』ti padassa rattidivasakālo atītabhagavato dharamānakālo tato parakālo abhinīhārato yāva sāsanantaradhānā kālo tato parakālo sarūpattho. So pana anāgatabuddhuppajjanakālo atītasammāsambuddhe idāni pūjayanti namassanti viya pūjayissati ceva namassissati ca. Namassatīti ettha namassanakiriyāya mukhyato namassanasaṅkhāto cittuppādo sarūpattho, phalūpacārena taṃcittuppādassa ārammaṇapakatūpanissayabhūtā vuttappakārā sabbe buddhaguṇā sarūpattho. Ti-vibhattipaccayassa namassanakiriyāsādhako yathāvuttasattanikāyo loko ca sarūpattho, atthabhedābhāvepi dvinnaṃ vācakānaṃ pavattabhāvo heṭṭhā vuttova. 『『Cā』』ti padassa idhekacco pūjentopi na namassati, namassantopi na pūjeti ca, ayaṃ pana sattanikāyo loko pūjayati ceva namassati cāti samuccayattho sarūpattho.

Tassāti ettha taṃ-saddassa sabbaññutaññāṇādianekaguṇasamannāgato pūjetabbo namassitabbo tilokaggo satthā sarūpattho, chaṭṭhīvibhattiyā janakassa naravarassa jaññena sāsanavarena sambandho padhānasarūpattho, jaññasāsanavarassa janakena naravarena sambandho apadhānasarūpattho. Tīsu piṭakesu evarūpesu aññesupi eseva nayo.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 實義應依照組合義和語義來了知。然而爲了分別善知，應再說明。"彼"字的實義是具足不共一切知智等諸多功德，應受三界世間守護者世間尊崇且禮敬，最上教法之說示者，三界最勝。"世間"字的實義是如上所說具世間守護者，具足信、舍等的一切有情世間。世間之詞雖是單數，因為是類詞，故無餘攝受諸有情，如"大眾"。雖然此中世間之詞如"世間解"等也用於行與器世間，但因成就尊崇禮敬業，故唯于有情世間以能詮方式執行。因此說"依適合尊崇業性"。 在"尊崇"中，對尊崇業，主要尊崇稱為尊崇者的心生起是實義，以果假說，作為彼心生起的所緣、自性、依止的如上所說一切佛功德是實義。格位後綴的尊崇業成就者如上所說世間是實義。如是則因義無差別，在兩個能詮中應說一個能詮，為何對一義說兩能詮？此非過失，因兩能詮有共相與別相能詮性。因為世間之詞說尊崇業成就者與其他業成就者故是共相能詮。尊崇之詞說世間尊崇、女人尊崇、男人尊崇、畜生尊崇等業成就者故是共相能詮。因此尊崇之詞的實義是世間之詞，確定為尊崇業成就者非其他業成就者。世間之詞是尊崇之詞的實義，是尊崇業成就者。而確定世間是女人、男人、畜生等尊崇業成就者。在三藏其他類似處所也是此法則。 "具世間守護者"字的實義是如上所說與最勝世間守護者俱，及尊崇禮敬業成就者的有情眾。"常常"字的實義是晝夜時、過去世尊住世時、其後時、從發願直至教法滅盡時、其後時。彼未來佛出世時，將如今尊崇禮敬過去正等覺者般尊崇且禮敬。在"禮敬"中，對禮敬業，主要禮敬稱為禮敬的心生起是實義，以果假說，作為彼心生起的所緣、自性、依止的如上所說一切佛功德是實義。格位後綴的禮敬業成就者如上所說有情眾世間是實義，雖義無差別而兩能詮執行已如前說。"且"字的實義是積聚義，即此人雖尊崇而不禮敬，雖禮敬而不尊崇，而此有情眾世間尊崇且禮敬。 在"彼"中，"彼"字的實義是具足一切知智等諸多功德，應受尊崇禮敬，三界最勝的師。第六格的產生者最上人與所生最上教法的關係是主要實義，所生最上教法與產生者最上人的關係是非主要實義。在三藏其他類似處所也是此法則。

『『Eta』』nti padassa ācariyena vibhajitabbahāranayapaṭṭhānavicāraṇavisayabhūtaṃ sāsanaṃ sarūpattho. 『『Sāsanavara』』nti padassāpi tameva sarūpattho, etaṃ sāsanavaraṃ pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhabhedena tividhampi pariyattisāsanameva sabbasāsanamūlabhūtattā, nettippakaraṇassa visayabhūtattā ca visesato adhippetaṃ tassa mūlabhūtabhāvato vinayasaṃvaṇṇanādīsu bahūpakārena dassitoti amhehi na vattabbo. Vadantopi aññaṃ racitabbaṃ racituṃ asamatthova hutvā vadatīti gahitabbo vadeyya.

Taṃ pana pariyattisāsanaṃ vimuttirasavasena ekavidhaṃ, dhammavinayavasena duvidhaṃ, vinayapiṭakasuttantapiṭakaabhidhammapiṭakavasena tividhaṃ , āṇādesanāvohāradesanāparamatthadesanāvasena tividhaṃ, yathāparādhasāsanāyathānulomasāsanāyathādhammasāsanābhedenapi tividhaṃ, saṃvarāsaṃvarakathādiṭṭhiviniveṭhanakathānāmarūpaparicchedakathābhedenapi tividhaṃ. Ettha ca desanā desakādhīnā, sāsanaṃ sāsitabbāyattaṃ, kathā kathetabbatthāpekkhāti viseso. Dīghanikāyo, majjhimanikāyo, saṃyuttanikāyo, aṅguttaranikāyo, khuddakanikāyoti nikāyabhedena pana pañcavidhaṃ; suttageyyaveyyākaraṇagāthāudānaitivuttakajātakaabbhutadhammavedallabhedena pana navavidhaṃ; dhammakkhandhabhedena pana caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassavidhaṃ; 『『saṃkilesabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyāti amissāni cattāri; saṃkilesabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyasaṃkilesabhāgiyanibbedha bhāgiyasaṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyāti missakadukāni cattāri; saṃkilesabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasaṃkilesabhāgiyavāsanā bhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyāti missakatikāni dve; taṇhāsaṃkilesadiṭṭhisaṃkilesaduccaritasaṃkilesataṇhāvodānabhāgiyadiṭṭhiva- udānabhāgiyaduccaritavodānabhāgiyātichā』』ti (netti. 89) soḷasannaṃ suttānaṃ bhedena soḷasavidhaṃ; 『『lokiyalokuttaralokiyalokuttarasattādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānasattadhammādhiṭṭhānañāṇañeyya- ñāṇañeyyadassanabhāvanādassanabhāvanāsakavacanaparavacanasakavacanaparavacana vissajjanīyaavissajjanīyavissajjanīyaavissajjanīyakammavipākakammavipākakusala akusalakusalākusalaanuññātapaṭikkhittaanuññātapaṭikkhittathavassa bhedena aṭṭhavīsatividha』』nti (netti. 112) evamādibahuvidhaṃ pariyattisāsanaṃ nettippakaraṇassa visesato visayaṃ. Tassa visayabhāve sati paṭipattipaṭivedhasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanadvayampi tammūlakattā visayaṃ hoti pariyāyatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

『『Vidūhī』』ti padassa yathāvuttasāsanavarassa saparasantānapavattanapavattāpanādivasena vijānanasamattho saṇhasukhumañāṇādiguṇasampanno kalyāṇaputhujjanasotāpannādiko puggalo sarūpattho. 『『Ñeyya』』nti padassa tādisehi vidūhi saṇhasukhumañāṇādinā vijānitabbaṃ sāsanavaraṃ sarūpattho. 『『Naravarassā』』ti padassa ekavidhādibhedassa sāsanavarassa janako anekaguṇasampanno tilokaggo sarūpattho. Iccevaṃ nettiyā ādigāthāya sarūpattho saṅkhepena vijānitabbo.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： "此"字的實義是老師應分別的行相、方法、基礎考察範圍內的教法。"最上教法"字的實義也是彼。此最上教法雖以教理、修行、證悟分為三種，但因一切教法以教理教法為根本，且作為《導論》的範圍，特別意趣因是彼根本，在律注等中以多種方式顯示，故我等不應說。說者也應理解為無能造作其他應造作而說。 然而彼教理教法以解脫味一種，以法與律二種，以律藏、經藏、論藏三種，以教誡教說、言說教說、勝義教說三種，以隨罪教導、隨順教導、如法教導之分也是三種，以防護、非防護說、見解除說、名色分別說之分也是三種。此中教說依說者，教法依所教導，說依所說義為差別。以長部、中部、相應部、增支部、小部之部分則為五種；以經、應頌、記說、偈頌、自說、如是語、本生、未曾有法、方廣之分則為九種；以法蘊之分則為八萬四千法蘊種；以"染污分、習氣分、通達分、無學分為四不雜合；染污分與習氣分、染污分與通達分、染污分與無學分、習氣分與通達分為四雜合二法；染污分與習氣分與無學分、染污分與習氣分與通達分為二雜合三法；渴愛染污、邪見染污、惡行染污、渴愛清凈分、邪見清凈分、惡行清凈分為六"的十六經之分為十六種；以"世間、出世間、世出世間、有情依止、法依止、有情法依止、智所知、智所知見修、見修、自說他說、自說他說、應答非應答、應答非應答、業異熟、業異熟、善不善、善不善、開許禁止、開許禁止讚歎"之分為二十八種，如是等多種教理教法為《導論》的特別範圍。當是其範圍時，應見稱為修行證悟的二種教法，因以彼為根本，故以譬喻方式也是範圍。 "智者"字的實義是能以自他相續運轉、令運轉等方式了知如上所說最上教法，具足細微智等功德的善凡夫、預流等補特伽羅。"應知"字的實義是如是智者以細微智等應了知的最上教法。"最上人"字的實義是一種等差別最上教法的產生者，具足諸多功德，三界最勝。如是應略知《導論》首偈的實義。

Evaṃ tassā anusandhyādīnaṃ jānitabbabhāve satipi ajānanto viya pucchitvā dosaṃ āropetvā parihāravasenāpi gambhīrādhippāyassa anākulassa visesajānanaṃ bhavissati. Tasmā pucchitvā dosaṃ ropetvā parihāravasena gambhīrādhippāyaṃ sampiṇḍetvā kathayissaṃ. Amhākācariya kimatthaṃ 『『yaṃ loko』』tyādimāha? Nettippakaraṇaṃ kātuṃ. Evaṃ sati nettippakaraṇabhūtaṃ 『『soḷasahārā netti』』tyādikaṃ eva vattabbaṃ, kasmā taṃ avatvā tato nettippakaraṇato aññaṃ 『『yaṃ loko pūjayate』』tyādimāha. Seyyathāpi samuddaṃ gacchanto himavantaṃ gacchati, himavantaṃ gacchanto samuddaṃ gacchati, evameva nettippakaraṇaṃ karonto sāsanavaradassanaṃ karotīti? Saccaṃ, tathāpi yassa saṃvaṇṇanaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ kātukāmo taṃ sāsanavaraṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yaṃ loko』』tyādimāha. Evaṃ sati 『『etaṃ sāsanavara』』nti ettakameva vattabbaṃ, kasmā 『『yaṃ loko』』tyādi vuttanti? Taṃ sāsanavaraṃ janakena naravarena niyametvā thometuṃ vuttaṃ. Tathāpi 『『tassa naravarassā』』ti ettakameva vattabbaṃ, kasmā 『『yaṃ loko』』tyādi vuttanti? Taṃ janakaṃ naravaraṃ lokapālena lokaseṭṭhena saddhiṃ sabbena lokena pūjanīyanamassanīyabhāvena thometuṃ 『『yaṃ loko』』tyādi vuttaṃ. Pūjentāpi vanditvā pūjenti, tasmā 『『pūjayate』』ti ettakameva vattabbanti? Tathāpi keci kesañci pūjāsakkārādīni karontāpi tesaṃ apākaṭaguṇatāya namakkāraṃ na karonti. Evaṃ bhagavato yathābhūtaabbhuggatasaddatāya pana bhagavantaṃ pūjetvāpi vandatiyevāti dassetuṃ 『『namassati cā』』ti vuttaṃ. Pūjento, namassanto ca na kadāciyeva, atha kho sabbakālanti dassetuṃ 『『sadā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tādisassa naravarassa tādisaṃ sāsanavaraṃ saṇhasukhumañāṇasampannehi vidūheva sukhumañāṇeneva ñeyyanti sāsanavaraṃ thometuṃ 『『vidūhi ñeyya』』nti vuttaṃ.

Ettha ca 『『pūjayate, namassatī』』ti etehi pūjananamassanakiriyāya hetubhūtā sabbaññutaññāṇādayo aneke lokiyalokuttaraguṇā pakāsitā honti te guṇe āgamma sabbalokassa pūjananamassanacetanāya pavattanato. Tesu hi kiñci sarūpato, kiñci anumānato sāriputtattherādayo anussaranti, pūjenti, namassanti. Tena vuttaṃ 『『anussaretha sambuddha』』nti (saṃ. ni.

以下是這段巴利文的完整直譯： 即便如此，雖然應了知彼的連貫性等，但好像不知道般詢問並歸咎過失，以防護方式也將了知深奧意趣的清晰無礙之處。因此詢問並歸咎過失，以防護方式綜合深奧意趣而將解說。 我們的老師，為何說"世間"等語？為作《導論》論著。如是則應說作為《導論》的"十六行導論"等，為何不說彼而說"世間尊崇"等？譬如前往大海者前往雪山（喜馬拉雅山），前往雪山者前往大海，同樣地，作《導論》者豈非顯示最上教法？誠然如此，然而為讚頌欲解說《導論》註釋的最上教法，故先說"世間"等語。如是則應說"此

1.249). Ekadesaguṇāpi pūjārahā namassanārahā, kasmā sabbepi guṇā pakāsitāti? Sabbaguṇadassanena bodhisambhārasambharaṇamahākaruṇāyogasaṅkhātahetuñāṇapahāna- ānubhāvarūpakāyasampattisaṅkhātaphalahitajjhāsayindriya- pākakālāgamanadesanāñāṇasaṅkhātasattu- pakārasampadāvasena thomanā dassitā. Tena attahitapaṭipatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca nirupakkilesūpagamanāpagamanañca lokasamaññānupapavatti, tadanatidhāvanañca caraṇasampatti, vijjāsampatti ca attādhipatitā, dhammādhipatitā ca lokanāthaattanāthatā ca pubbakārikataññutā ca aparantapatā, anattantapatā ca buddhakaraṇadhammabuddhabhāvasiddhi ca paratāraṇaattatāraṇañca sattānuggahacittatā, dhammavirattacittatā ca pakāsitā bhavanti. Tena sabbappakārena anuttaradakkhiṇeyyatāuttamapūjanīyanamassanīyabhāvapūjananamassanakiriyāya ca khettaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāseti. Tena pūjanakanamassanakānaṃ yathicchitabbapayojanasampatti pakāsitāti sabbaguṇā pakāsitāti.

Ādikalyāṇatādiguṇasampattiyā varaṃ aggaṃ uttamaṃ, nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya paṇḍitavedanīyañca, tasmā 『『varaṃ ñeyya』』nti vacanehi svākkhātatādayo sabbe dhammaguṇā pakāsitā. Ariyasaccapaṭivedhena samugghātakilesasammohāyeva paramatthato paṇḍitā bālyādisamatikkamanato, tasmā bhāvitalokuttaramaggā, sacchikatasāmaññaphalā ca puggalā visesato 『『vidū』』ti vuccanti. Te hi yathāvuttasāsanavaraṃ aviparītato ñātuṃ, netuñca saparasantāne sakkuṇanti. Tasmā ye suppaṭipannatādayo anekehi suttapadehi saṃvaṇṇitā, te ariyasaṅghaguṇāpi niravasesato 『『vidūhī』』ti padena pakāsitāti. Evaṃ nettiyā paṭhamagāthāya 『『etaṃ sāsanavara』』nti padena sāsanattayaṃ saṅgaṇhitvā tattha itaresaṃ dvinnaṃ adhigamūpāyabhāvato sabbasāsanamūlabhūtassa, attano nettippakaraṇassa ca visayabhūtassa pariyattisāsanavarassa dassanamukhena sabbe ratanattayaguṇāpi thomanāvasena nayatova pakāsitā honti. Nayato hi dassitā sabbe guṇā niravasesā gahitā bhavanti, na sarūpato. Tenāha bhagavantaṃ ṭhapetvā paññavantānaṃ aggabhūto dhammasenāpatisāriputtattheropi buddhaguṇaparicchedanamanuyutto 『『apica me dhammanvayo vidito』』ti (dī. ni. 2.146) bhagavatāpi –

『『Evaṃ acintiyā buddhā, buddhadhammā acintiyā;

Acintiye pasannānaṃ, vipāko hoti acintiyo』』ti. (apa. thera 1.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 1.249）部分功德也值得尊崇禮敬，為何顯示一切功德？以顯示一切功德方式，顯示積集菩提資糧、大悲相應稱為因、智斷威力色身圓滿稱為果、利益意樂根熟時至稱為力、教說智稱為攝受圓滿的讚歎。由此顯示自利修習、利他修習、無染趣入遠離、隨順世間共許不超越、戒行圓滿、明圓滿、以自為主、以法為主、世間依止自依止、先作知恩、不墮後世、不墮自我、佛所作法成就佛性、度他度己、攝受眾生心、離於法心。由此顯示一切方面無上應供、最上應受尊崇禮敬性、尊崇禮敬業的福田性。由此顯示尊崇禮敬者所愿利益的圓滿，故顯示一切功德。 以初善等功德圓滿故最上、最勝、最上，因細密智行境故智者所知，因此以"最上應知"之詞顯示善說等一切法功德。由通達聖諦斷除煩惱愚癡故從究竟義為智者，因超越愚癡等，因此已修出世道、已證沙門果的補特伽羅特別稱為"智者"。因為他們能如實了知、引導自他相續如上所說最上教法。因此以"智者"字顯示以多經文讚歎的善修行等一切聖僧功德。如是《導論》首偈以"此最上教法"字攝受三種教法，因在彼中其餘二種是證得方便，顯示一切教法根本的、自《導論》範圍的教理最上教法為門，以讚歎方式由理趣顯示一切三寶功德。因為由理趣顯示一切功德無餘攝取，非由自性。因此除世尊外智者之最勝法將軍舍利弗長老雖勤于佛功德分別也說"但我知法類"，世尊也說： "如是諸佛不可思，佛法亦不可思議； 于不思議生凈信，果報亦不可思議。"

1.82; netti. 95) –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha buddhadhammāti buddhaguṇā. Amhākaṃ pana yāvajīvaṃ ratanattayaguṇaparidīpane atiussāhantānampi sarūpato nīharitvā dassetuṃ asamatthabhāvo pageva paṇḍitehi veditabboti.

Iccevaṃ –

『『Yaṃ loko pūjayate, salokapālo sadā namassati ca;

Tasseta sāsanavaraṃ, vidūhi ñeyyaṃ naravarassā』』ti. –

Niggahitalopavasena vuttāya gāthāya saṅkhepena kathito anusandhyādiko samattoti.

『『Yaṃ loko pūjayate, sa lokapālo sadā namassati ca;

Taṃ tassa sāsanavaraṃ, vidūhi ñeyyaṃ naravarassā』』ti. –

Gāthaṃ apare paṭhanti. Tassāpi anusandhyattho vuttanayova. Yojanattho pana viseso. Tattha hi salokapālo loko yassa satthuno naravarassa yaṃ sāsanavaraṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbasahitaṃ, saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ eva vā pūjayate ceva namassati ca, tassa lokapālassa satthuno taṃ pūjetabbaṃ, namassitabbañca vidūheva viññātabbaṃ, etaṃ sāsanavaraṃ nettippakaraṇassa visayanti gahetabbanti yojanā. Yojanākāropi heṭṭhā vuttanayova.

Viggahatthopi viseso. Imasmiñhi naye lokaṃ pālentīti lokapālā, yathāvuttacatumahārājādayo. Tehi lokapālehi sahitaṃ sabbalokaṃ pāleti lokagganāyakattāti lokapāloti bhagavāpi lokapālasaddena vutto. So hi 『『tassā』』ti ettha taṃ-saddena parāmasīyati, tasmā tassa lokapālassa satthuno naravarassāti attho gahito. Yadi evaṃ lokapālo guṇībhūto apadhāno padhānabhūtaṃ lokaṃ visesetvā vinivatto, kathaṃ taṃ-saddena parāmasīyatīti? Lokavisesako samānopi sāsanavarāpekkhatāya janakasāmibhāvena sambandhivisesabhūtattā padhānabhūto viya parāmasīyatīti. Bhagavā sāsanavarassa sāmibhāvena gahito. Kathaṃ sāsanavarassa sāmī bhagavā sāsanavaraṃ pūjayatīti? Na cāyaṃ virodho. Buddhā hi bhagavanto dhammagaruno, te sabbakālaṃ dhammamapacayamānāva viharantīti. Buddhānañhi dhammagarudhammāpacayamānabhāvo 『『yaṃnūnāhaṃ…pe… tameva dhammaṃ sakkatvā garuṃ katvā mānetvā pūjetvā upanissāya vihareyya』』nti (a. ni.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 1.82；導論95）—— 頌已說。此中"佛法"即佛功德。然而我們雖終生熱切顯揚三寶功德，應知識者尚且無力引出顯示自性。 如是—— "世間所尊崇，具世間守護常禮敬； 彼此最上教，智者知最上人者。" —— 以略去鼻音方式所說偈頌的簡略所說連貫等完畢。 "世間所尊崇，彼世間守護常禮敬； 彼彼最上教，智者知最上人者。" —— 其他人誦此偈。彼連貫義如前所說。但組合義有別。此中具世間守護世間對彼師最上人的最上教法，連同應註釋的，或僅應註釋的，既尊崇且禮敬，對彼世間守護師的應尊崇、應禮敬的應由智者了知，此最上教法為《導論》範圍，應如是理解組合。組合方式也如前所說。 分析義也有別。因為此法則中護世間故為世間守護者，即如上所說四大天王等。與彼等世間守護者俱，護一切世間因為是世間最勝導師故為世間守護者，世尊也以世間守護者之詞所說。因為他在"對彼"中以"彼"字所指，因此取"對彼世間守護師最上人"之義。若如是則世間守護者為有德非主要，限定主要的世間而轉起，如何以"彼"字指涉？雖是世間限定者，因期待最上教法，以產生主性關係而為特殊，如主要般被指涉。世尊以最上教法主性而取。如何最上教法之主世尊尊崇最上教法？此亦無違。因為諸佛世尊以法為重，他們常住于恭敬法中。因為諸佛以法為重恭敬法性，如"我寧可......恭敬尊重依止而住於法"（增支部.

4.21) vutto, tasmā lokapālo bhagavā sāsanavaraṃ pūjayatīti daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ sati lokapālo bhagavā sāsanavaraṃ pūjayatīti attho yutto hotu, kathaṃ lokapālo bhagavā sāsanavaraṃ namassatīti yuttoti? Yuttova 『『namassatī』』ti padassa garukaraṇena tanninnapoṇapabbhāroti atthassāpi labbhanato. Bhagavā hi dhammagarutāya sabbakālaṃ dhammaninnapoṇapabbhārabhāvena viharatīti. Vuttañhetaṃ 『『yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī』』tiādi. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayena vā saṃvaṇṇanāsu vuttanayena vā ñātabbanti amhehi na vitthārīyati.

Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya 『『sāsanavara』』nti padena tividhampi sāsanaṃ saṅgaṇhitvā tattha pariyattisāsanameva attano nettippakaraṇassa visayaṃ niyametvā dassento 『『dvādasa padāni』』tyādimāha. Atha vā paṭhamagāthāya ratanattayathomanena saha nettippakaraṇatāvisayaṃ sāsanavaraṃ ācariyena dassitaṃ, 『『tassa sāsanavaraṃ kiṃ sabbaṃyeva nettippakaraṇassa visayaṃ, udāhu pariyattisāsanamevā』』ti pucchitabbattā pariyattisāsanabhūtaṃ suttamevāti dassento 『『dvādasa padāni sutta』』ntiādimāha. Tattha 『『sāsanavara』』nti sāmaññena vuttampi pariyattisuttameva sāsanavaranti gahetabbanti attho. 『『Taṃ pana katividha』』nti vattabbattā 『『dvādasa padānī』』ti vuttaṃ, saṅkhepato pabhedena dvādasavidhanti attho. Pabhedato dvādasavidhampi byañjanapadaatthapadato pana duvidhamevāti dassetuṃ 『『taṃ sabbaṃ byañjanañca attho cā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Tasmiṃ dvaye ekameva sarūpato nettippakaraṇassa visayanti viññeyyaṃ, udāhu ubhaya』』nti pucchitabbattā ubhayanti dassetuṃ 『『taṃ viññeyyaṃ ubhaya』』nti vuttaṃ. Vacanavacanīyabhāvena sambandhe yasmiṃ byañjane, atthe ca 『『sutta』』nti vohāro pavatto, taṃ ubhayaṃ sarūpato nettippakaraṇassa visayanti viññeyyanti attho. 『『Kinti viññeyya』』nti vattabbattā 『『ko attho, byañjanaṃ katama』』nti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – chabyañjanapadachaatthapadabhedena dvādasavidhaṃ byañjanapadaatthapadavasena duvidhaṃ sabbapariyattisaṅkhātaṃ suttaṃ mama nettippakaraṇassa visayaṃ sāsanavaranti ñātabbaṃ. Sarūpato pucchitvā atthapadaṃ, byañjanapadañca sarūpato ñātabbanti.

Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya 『『sāsanavara』』nti vuttassa suttassa pariyattibhāvañceva atthapadabyañjanapadabhāvena veditabbattañca dassetvā idāni tassa suttassa pavicayūpāyaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ padatthavibhāgena dassetuṃ 『『soḷasahārā』』tyādimāha. Atha vā dutiyagāthāya nettippakaraṇassa visayaṃ sāsanavaraṃ niyametvā dassitaṃ, 『『netti nāma katamā, katividhā』』ti pucchitabbattā nettināma ettikāti saṅkhepato dassetuṃ 『『soḷasahārā』』tyādimāha. Tattha tassa sāsanassa suttassa atthapariyeṭṭhi nettisaṃvaṇṇanā mayā mahākaccāyanena niddiṭṭhā netti nāma soḷasahārasamudāyā pañcanayasamudāyā aṭṭhārasamūlapadasamudāyāti vijānitabbāti.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 4.21）所說，因此應知世間守護者世尊尊崇最上教法。如是則世間守護者世尊尊崇最上教法之義應適合，如何世間守護者世尊禮敬最上教法為適當？確實適當，因為"禮敬"字也獲得以重視而向彼傾向趣向之義。因為世尊以法為重，常住于向法傾向趣向性。因為說此"以彼我常時而住"等。此中其餘應依前說方式或註釋中所說方式了知，故我等不詳說。 如是首偈以"最上教法"字攝受三種教法，在彼中確定唯教理教法為自《導論》範圍而顯示，故說"十二句"等。或者首偈以讚歎三寶俱顯示作為《導論》範圍的最上教法，因"彼最上教法是否一切皆為《導論》範圍，抑或唯教理教法"應問，故顯示唯教理教法的經而說"十二句經"等。此中雖以共相說"最上教法"，應取唯教理經為最上教法之義。因"彼幾種"應說，故說"十二句"，略說差別為十二種之義。雖差別為十二種，但由文句義句則唯二種，為顯示此故說"彼一切是文及義"。因"在彼二中應知唯一為《導論》範圍的自性，抑或二者"應問，為顯示二者故說"彼二者應知"。以能詮所詮性關係，于彼文與義中"經"之言說執行，應知彼二者為《導論》範圍的自性之義。因"如何應知"應說，故說"何義，何文"。此說：以六文句六義句差別十二種，以文句義句二種，應知稱為一切教理的經是我《導論》範圍的最上教法。應問自性而了知義句與文句的自性。 如是顯示首偈所說"最上教法"的經的教理性及應以義句文句性了知已，今為以句義分別顯示彼經的考察方法《導論》，故說"十六行"等。或者第二偈確定顯示《導論》範圍的最上教法，因"何為導論，幾種"應問，為略顯導論即此等，故說"十六行"等。此中應知彼教法經的義尋求註釋導論為我大迦旃延所說，名為十六行集、五理趣集、十八根本句集。

Te hārādayo kenaṭṭhena netti nāma? Veneyyasatte ariyadhammaṃ netīti nettīti evamādi attho saṃvaṇṇanāsu (netti. aṭṭha. ganthārambhakathā) vuttova. Imāya tatiyagāthāyapi 『『mahākaccānena niddiṭṭhā』』ti pāṭho sundaro. 『『Mahākaccāyanena niddiṭṭhā』』ti vā pāṭho, na sundaro. Lakkhaṇañhi mayā heṭṭhā vuttanti. 『『Soḷasahārādisamudāyā nettī』』ti vuttā, te hārā suttassa byañjanavicayo vā honti, atthavicayo vā, nayā ca byañjanavicayo vā honti, atthavicayo vāti vicāraṇāyaṃ sati 『『ime imassa vicayo』』ti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『hārā byañjanavicayo』』tiādimāha. Tattha hārā suttassa byañjanavicayo honti, na atthavicayo soḷasahārānaṃ mūlapadaniddhāraṇaṃ vajjetvā byañjanamukheneva saṃvaṇṇanābhāvato. Tayo pana nayā suttassa atthavicayo honti, tiṇṇaṃ nayānaṃ mūlapadasaṅkhātaavijjādisabhāvadhammaniddhāraṇamukheneva suttassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhāvatoti.

『『Taṃ ubhayaṃ sutte saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena kenaci katthaciyeva yojetabbaṃ, udāhu sabbathā sabbattha yojita』』nti pucchitabbabhāvato taṃ ubhayaṃ sabbattha suttesu sabbathā yojitanti dassetuṃ 『『ubhayaṃ pariggahīta』』nti vuttaṃ. Hārā ceva nayā ca ubhayaṃ suttassa atthaniddhāraṇavasena parito samantato gahitaṃ sabbathā suttesu yojitanti.

『『Hārādisamudāyabhūtaṃ nettisaṅkhātaṃ suttaṃ kathaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ suttaṃ saṃvaṇṇetī』』ti vattabbabhāvato vuttaṃ 『『vuccati suttaṃ yathāsutta』』nti. Nettisaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāsuttaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttānurūpaṃ yathā yena yena desanāhārena vā aññena vā saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ, tena tena vuccati saṃvaṇṇetīti attho. Atha vā 『『nettisaṅkhātaṃ suttaṃ kittakaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ suttaṃ saṃvaṇṇetī』』ti vattabbabhāvato vuttaṃ 『『vuccati suttaṃ yathāsutta』』nti. Tattha yathāsuttaṃ yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ, taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ suttaṃ nettisaṅkhātaṃ suttaṃ vuccati vadati assādādīnavadassanavasena saṃvaṇṇetīti. Tena vuttaṃ 『『nettinayena hi saṃvaṇṇetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ nāma suttaṃ natthī』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. saṅgahavāravaṇṇanā).

『『Yaṃ yaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ suttaṃ nettisaṃvaṇṇanāya saṃvaṇṇitaṃ, sā saṃvaṇṇetabbā desanā ca viññeyyā, udāhu desitabbañcā』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『yā ceva desanā』』tyādimāha. Yā ceva desanā pāḷi saṃvaṇṇitā, sā ca, tāya desanāya desitaṃ yaṃ dhammajātaṃ, tañca ubhayaṃ vimuttāyatanadesanāsīsena paricayaṃ karontehi ekantena viññeyyaṃ ubhayasseva anupādisesaparinibbānapariyosānānaṃ sampattīnaṃ hetubhāvato. 『『Tassa ubhayassa vijānane sādhetabbe sādhetabbassa vijānanassa hetubhūtā katamā anupubbī』』ti pucchitabbabhāvato vuttaṃ 『『tatrā』』tyādi. Tattha tatra vijānane sādhetabbe suttādinavaṅgassa sāsanassa atthapariyesanā atthavicāraṇā hāranayānaṃ ayaṃ anupubbī vijānanassa sādhetabbassa hetubhūtā anupubbī nāmāti attho. Atha vā tassa ubhayassa vijānane sādhetabbe suttādinavaṅgassa sāsanassa atthapariyesanāya atthavicāraṇāya ayaṃ anupubbī vijānanassa sādhetabbassa hetubhūtā anupubbī nāmāti. Atha vā vakkhamānāya hāranayānupubbiyā navavidhasuttantapariyesanā vijānanassa hetubhūtāti veditabbā. Tenākāreneva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ tidhā vuttāti.

Saṅgahavārassa atthavibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Uddesavāraatthavibhāvanā

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 這些行等以何義為"導論"名？如教化眾生引導至聖法，即"導論"等義，如註釋中已說。此第三偈中"大迦旃延所說"的文句也很美好。或"大迦旃延所說"的文句不美。因特徵已在前面說過。已說"十六行等集為導論"，這些行是經的文句考察還是義理考察，還是理趣是文句考察還是義理考察？在考察時，為確定"這些是彼的考察"，故說"行是文句考察"等。 其中行是經的文句考察，非義理考察，因除十六行根本句確定外，僅以文句方式註釋。然則三理趣是經的義理考察，因以三理趣的根本句如無明等性質確定經的義理註釋方式。 因"應以某處以某方式連線此二者，抑或完全在一切處處連線"應問，故顯示二者完全在一切處處連線，說"二者被把握"。行與理趣二者完全從經的義理確定方式周遍把握。 因"如何註釋以行等整合的導論名的經，註釋經"應說，故說"說經如經"。導論名的註釋經應如何註釋應註釋的經，以某某說法行或其他方式註釋，即如是說註釋。或者"導論名的經應註釋多少，註釋經"應說，故說"說經如經"。其中如經，世尊所說的每一經，一切經都說導論名的經說明其味等過患。因此說"實無經不能以導論理趣註釋"（導論註釋，攝集章註釋）。 因"世尊所說經以導論註釋的註釋，彼註釋應了知，抑或所說"應問，故說"彼註釋"等。彼註釋已

1. Evaṃ saṅgahavārena saṅkhepato dassite hārādayo idāni vibhāgena dassetuṃ 『『tattha katame soḷasa hārā』』tiādidesanā āraddhā . Atha vā soḷasahārādisamudāyā netti nāma mayā mahākaccānena niddiṭṭhāti vuttā, 『『katame te soḷasa hārā』』ti pucchitabbattā vuttaṃ 『『tattha soḷasa hārā』』tyādi. Tattha tatthāti tesu soḷasahārādīsu. Desanā hāro, vicayo hāro…pe… sāmāropano hāroti ime soḷasa hārāti daṭṭhabbā.

Tattha sabbasādhāraṇattā hārapadassa vacanattho paṭhamaṃ vattabbo. Kenaṭṭhena hārāti? Harīyanti etehīti hārā. Etehi saṃvaṇṇanāvisesehi saṃvaṇṇiyesu suttageyyādīsu aññāṇasaṃsayavipallāsā harīyanti, iti aññāṇādiharaṇakāraṇattā 『『etehī』』ti padena niddiṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇanāvisesā hārā nāma, hara-dhātuyā ācariyassa vacībhedasaddo, taṃsamuṭṭhāpako cittuppādo ca mukhyattho, veneyyānaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttassa atthajānanādiñāṇasampayuttacittuppādo kāraṇūpacārattho, tassa upanissayapaccayabhūtānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāvisesānaṃ upanissayapaccayasatti phalūpacārattho, iti-saddena sā upanissayapaccayasattiyeva parāmasīyati. Taṃsattisampannā saṃvaṇṇanāvisesā ṇa-paccayatthā honti. Esa nayo evarūpesu ṭhānesupi. Vitthāro aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 1) vutto eva.

Asādhāraṇato pana desīyati etāyāti desanā. Etāya saṃvaṇṇanāya saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttattho desīyati saṃvaṇṇīyati saṃvaṇṇanānusārena ñāpīyati, iti ñāpanakāraṇattā 『『etāyā』』ti padena niddiṭṭhā visesasaṃvaṇṇanā desanā nāma, na pāḷidesanā, pāḷidesanāya saṃvaṇṇetabbasaṃvaṇṇanābhāvena sahacaraṇato vā desanā. Kiñcāpi aññe hārā desanāpāḷisaṅkhātassa suttassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhāvato desanāya sahacārino honti, ayaṃ pana hāro yebhuyyena yathārutavaseneva viññāyamānattā pāḷidesanāya saha caratīti vattabbataṃ arahati, na tathā pare. Na hi assādādīnavanissaraṇādisandassanalakkhaṇarahitā pāḷidesanā atthi, ayañca hāro assādādisandassanalakkhaṇoti.

Viciyanti etenāti vicayo. Etena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena sutte padapañhādayo viciyanti, iti vicāraṇakāraṇattā so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayo nāma. Katvatthādhikaraṇatthāpi labbhanti. Saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttena padapañhādivicayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayo hāro.

Yuttāyutti vicārīyati etāyāti yutti. Etāya visesasaṃvaṇṇanāya sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ bhūmigocarānaṃ yuttāyutti vicārīyati, iti vicāraṇakāraṇattā 『『etāyā』』ti padena niddiṭṭhā visesasaṃvaṇṇanā yutti nāma. Idha uttarapadalopo daṭṭhabbo, yuttiyā vicāraṇā, vicāraṇīyabhāvena sahacaraṇato vā yutti. Sabbahārānaṃ bhūmigocarānaṃ yuttāyuttivicāraṇalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso yutti hāro.

Padati pavatteti phalaṃ etenāti padaṃ, kāraṇaṃ. Ṭhanti tiṭṭhanti ettha phalāni tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, kāraṇaṃ. Padañca taṃ ṭhānañcāti padaṭṭhānaṃ, āsannakāraṇaṃ. Sutte āgatadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ vicārīyati etāyāti padaṭṭhānā, visesasaṃvaṇṇanā, vicāraṇalopova, sutte āgatadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānaṃ, tesañca padaṭṭhānānaṃ vicāraṇalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso padaṭṭhāno hāro.

Sutte avuttāpi samānalakkhaṇā dhammā lakkhīyanti etena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesenāti lakkhaṇo, sutte vuttena dhammena samānalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ avuttānampi niddhāraṇalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇo hāro.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 1. 如是以攝集章略顯示行等已，今為分別顯示，故開始"此中何為十六行"等教說。或者說導論名為十六行等集，為我大迦旃延所說，因"何為彼十六行"應問，故說"此中十六行"等。此中"此中"即在彼等十六行等中。應知說法行、考察行...乃至...歸結行為此十六行。 其中因普遍共同故，首先應說行字的詞義。以何義為行？以彼等運載故為行。以彼等註釋差別在所註釋的經應頌等中運載無知、疑惑、顛倒，因此無知等運載因緣，以"彼等"字所說的註釋差別名為行。"運載"詞根以老師言語分別聲音及所生起心為主要義，教化者與所註釋經相應的了知義等智相應心為因緣假說義，彼緣因緣性的註釋差別的緣因緣力為果假說義，以"如是"字即指涉彼緣因緣力。具足彼力的註釋差別為"ṇa"詞尾義。此理趣在如是處也。詳說在註釋中已說。 不共則以彼說示故為說法。以彼註釋說示所註釋經義，隨註釋開示，因此開示因緣，以"彼"字所說的特別註釋名為說法，非經文說法，或與經文說法以所註釋註釋性俱行故為說法。雖其他行因說法經文所說的義註釋性而與說法俱行，但此行多依如聞方式了知故，應說與經文說法俱行，其他不然。因為無經文說法不具味、過患、出離等顯示相，而此行以味等顯示為相。 以彼考察故為考察。以彼註釋差別考察經中的句問等，因此考察因緣，彼註釋差別名為考察。作用處所義也可得。以所註釋經考察句問等為相的註釋差別為考察行。 以彼考察應理不應理故為理趣。以彼特別註釋考察一切行的地行境的應理不應理，因此考察因緣，以"彼"字所說的特別註釋名為理趣。此中應見略去後詞，理趣的考察，或以考察性俱行故為理趣。以考察一切行的地行境應理不應理為相的註釋差別為理趣行。 以彼發起果故為足處，為因。於此依彼而住果以依彼運轉性故為處，為因。足處即彼處為足處，為近因。以彼考察經中所來諸法的足處故為足處，為特別註釋，僅略去考察，以考察經中所來諸法的足處及彼等足處為相的註釋差別為足處行。 以此註釋差別標相經中雖未說但同相諸法故為相，以考察經中所說法同相但未說諸法為相的註釋差別為相行。

Sutte dassiyamānā nibbacanādayo cattāropi viyūhīyanti vibhāgena sampiṇḍīyanti ettha, etena vāti byūho, catunnaṃ nibbacanādīnaṃ byūho catubyūho. Nibbacanādhippāyabyañjanānañceva desanānidānassa ca pubbāparena saddhiṃ sandassanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso catubyūho hāro.

Desanāya gahitadhammena sabhāgā, visabhāgā ca dhammā āvaṭṭīyanti ettha, etena vāti āvaṭṭo, desanāya gahitadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammavasena āvaṭṭanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭo hāro.

Asādhāraṇāsādhāraṇānaṃ saṃkilesadhamme, vodānadhamme ca sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇato, padaṭṭhānato, bhūmito ca vibhajanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhatti hāro.

Sutte niddiṭṭhā dhammā paṭipakkhavasena parivattīyanti iminā, ettha vāti parivatto, sutte niddiṭṭhānaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parivattano hāro.

Sutte vuttassa ekasseva atthassa vācakaṃ vividhaṃ vacanaṃ ettha saṃvaṇṇanāviseseti vivacanaṃ, vivacanameva vevacanaṃ, sutte vutte ekasmiṃ atthe anekapariyāyasaddayojanālakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vevacano hāro.

Sutte vuttā atthā pakārehi ñāpīyanti iminā, ettha vāti paññatti, ekekassa dhammassa anekāhi paññattīhi paññāpetabbākāralakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso paññatti hāro.

Suttāgatā dhammā paṭiccasamuppādādīsu otarīyanti anuppavesīyanti ettha, etena vāti otaraṇo, paṭiccasamuppādādimukhehi suttatthassa otaraṇalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso otaraṇo hāro.

Sutte padapadatthapañhārambhā sodhīyanti samādhīyanti ettha, etena vāti sodhano, sutte padapadatthapañhārambhānaṃ sodhanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso sodhano hāro.

Sāmaññavisesabhūtā dhammā vinā vikappena adhiṭṭhīyanti anuppavattīyanti ettha, etena vāti adhiṭṭhāno, suttāgatānaṃ dhammānaṃ avikappanavasena sāmaññavisesaniddhāraṇalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso adhiṭṭhāno hāro.

Yo hetu ceva paccayo ca phalaṃ parikaroti abhisaṅkharoti, iti so hetu ceva paccayo ca parikkhāro, yo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso taṃ parikkhāraṃ hetuñceva paccayañca ācikkhati, iti so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāro nāma. Sutte āgatadhammānaṃ parikkhārasaṅkhāte hetupaccaye niddhāretvā saṃvaṇṇanālakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāro hāro.

Sutte āgatadhammā padaṭṭhānādimukhena samāropīyanti ettha, etena vāti samāropano, sutte āgatadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānavevacanabhāvapahānasamāropanavicāraṇalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso samāropano hāro. Bhāvasādhanavasenāpi sabbattha vacanattho vattabboti tassāpi vasena yojetabbanti. Sesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānusārena ñātabbanti.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 此中或以此分別積集經中所顯示的詞源等四種，為四積集。以與前後相連顯示詞源、意趣、文詞及說法因緣為相的註釋差別為四積集行。 此中或以此轉起說法所取法的同分、異分諸法故為轉起，以說法所取諸法的同分異分法方式轉起為相的註釋差別為轉起行。 以不共通、共通方式，從足處、地位分別染污法、清凈法中的不共通共通為相的註釋差別為分別行。 以此或於此以對治方式轉變經中所說諸法故為轉變，以對治方式轉變經中所說諸法為相的註釋差別為轉變行。 此註釋差別中經中所說一義的能詮眾多言說故為異說，異說即同義，以經中所說一義連結多種異名為相的註釋差別為同義行。 以此或於此以諸方式開示經中所說義故為施設，以每一法應以多種施設施設方式為相的註釋差別為施設行。 此中或以此使經中所來諸法進入緣起等故為入，以緣起等方面進入經義為相的註釋差別為入行。 此中或以此清凈、確立經中句義句問起始故為清凈，以清凈經中句義句問起始為相的註釋差別為清凈行。 此中或以此無分別方式確立、進行作為共相別相的諸法故為確立，以無分別方式確定經中所來諸法的共相別相為相的註釋差別為確立行。 凡因緣製作、形成果，如是彼因緣為資具，凡註釋差別說明彼資具因緣，如是彼註釋差別名為資具。以確定經中所來諸法稱為資具的因緣而註釋為相的註釋差別為資具行。 此中或以此以足處等方面歸結經中所來諸法故為歸結，以考察經中所來諸法的足處同義性、斷歸結為相的註釋差別為歸結行。應以性成就方式說一切處詞義，故應以彼方式連線。其餘應依註釋了知。

『『Tattha katame soḷasa hārā desanā』』tyādinā hārasarūpaṃ vuttaṃ, kimatthaṃ 『『tassānugīti』』tyādi vuttanti? Anugītigāthāya sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ puna 『『tassānugīti desanā vicayo yutti』』tyādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti hāruddesassa. Anugītīti anu pacchā gāyanagāthā. Pañcadasoti pañcadasamo. Soḷasoti soḷasamo. Atthato asaṃkiṇṇāti desanādipadatthato lakkhaṇatthato saṅkarato rahitā. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ 『『so ca nesaṃ asaṅkaro lakkhaṇaniddese supākaṭo hotī』』ti. Sesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānusārena ñātabbanti. 『『Keci hārā kehici hārehi saṃkiṇṇā viya dissanti, kasmā asaṃkiṇṇāti ñātabba』』nti vattabbattā vuttaṃ 『『etesañcevā』』tiādi. Tattha etesañceva bhavatīti etesaṃ soḷasannaṃ hārānaṃ yathā yenākārena asaṅkaro hoti, tathā asaṅkarākārena bhavati. Ayati pavattati nayavibhattīti ayā, vitthārena ayāti vitthāratayā, ta-kāro missakadosāpagamatthāya āgato, nayavibhattivisesavacanaṃ. Nayena ñāyena vibhatti nayavibhatti, na pañcanayavibhattāhārānaṃ vitthārena pavattā ñāyavibhatti tathā asaṅkarākārena bhavati tasmiṃ asaṃkiṇṇāti ñātabbāti adhippāyo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 以"此中何為十六行說法"等說了行的自性，為何又說"彼隨誦"等？為易於掌握隨誦偈而再說"彼隨誦說法考察理趣"等。此中"彼"即行的說示。隨誦即隨後誦頌的偈。第十五即第十五。第十六即第十六。義不混雜即遠離說法等句義以及相義的混淆。因此註釋中說"彼等的不混雜在相的說示中極明顯"。其餘應依註釋了知。因"某些行似與某些行混雜，為何應知不混雜"應說，故說"此等"等。此中"此等生起"即此十六行如何以何方式不混淆，如是以不混淆方式生起。行進運轉為理趣分別故為執行，以詳細執行即以詳細，ta音為除去混雜過失而來，是理趣分別特說。以理趣即正理分別為理趣分別，五理趣分別行的詳細執行正理分別不如是以不混淆方式生起，在彼中不混雜，應如是了知的意趣。

1. Soḷasa hārā sarūpato vuttā, amhehi ca viññātā, 『『katame pañca nayā』』ti vattabbabhāvato tathā pucchitvā sarūpato uddisituṃ 『『tattha katame pañca nayā』』tyādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ hāre uddisitvā idāni naye uddisituṃ 『tattha katame』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 2) vuttaṃ. 『『Tattha nayanti saṃkilese, vodāne ca vibhāgato ñāpentīti nayā, nīyanti vā tāni ettha, etehi vāti nayā』』tiādinā (netti. aṭṭha. 2) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vitthārena vacanattho vutto. Nī-dhātuyā nandiyāvaṭṭādinayānusārena saṃkilese, vodāne ca ālambitvā pavatto ñāṇasampayuttacittuppādo mukhyattho, nandiyāvaṭṭādinayānaṃ upanissayapaccayasatti phalūpacārato gahitā, iti-saddo taṃ phalūpacārato gahitasattiṃ parāmasi, taṃsattisahitā nandiyāvaṭṭādinayā a-paccayatthā.

Taṇhāavijjāhi saṃkilesapakkhassa suttassa, samathavipassanāhi vodānapakkhassa suttassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso nandiyāvaṭṭo nayo. Tattha catusaccanti taṇhā ca avijjā ca bhavamūlattā samudayasaccaṃ, avasesā tebhūmakā dhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, samathavipassanā maggasaccaṃ, tena pattabbā asaṅkhatadhātu nirodhasaccanti.

Tīhi avayavehi lobhādīhi saṃkilesapakkhe, tīhi avayavehi alobhādīhi ca vodānapakkhe pukkhalo sobhanoti tipukkhalo, akusalamūlehi saṃkilesapakkhassa, kusalamūlehi vodānapakkhassa suttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso tipukkhalo.

Sīhassa bhagavato vikkīḷitaṃ ettha nayeti sīhavikkīḷito, subhasaññādīhi vipallāsehi sakalasaṃkilesapakkhassa, saddhindriyādīhi vodānapakkhassa suttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso sīhavikkīḷitanayo.

Atthanayattayadisābhāvena kusalādidhammānaṃ ālocanaṃ disālocanaṃ. Tassa tassa atthanayassa yojanatthaṃ katesu suttassa atthavissajjanesu ye vodānādayo, saṃkilesikā ca tassa tassa nayassa disābhūtā dhammā suttato niddhāretvā kathitā, tesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ citteneva 『『ayaṃ paṭhamā disā, ayaṃ dutiyā disā』』tiādinā ālocanaṃ disālocanaṃ.

Tathā ālocitānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthanayattayayojane samānayanato aṅkuso viyāti aṅkuso, tassa tassa nayassa disābhūtānaṃ kusalādidhammānaṃ samānayanaṃ aṅkuso nayo.

Lañjetīti lañjako. Yo nayo suttatthaṃ lañjeti pakāseti, iti lañjanato pakāsanato so nayo lañjako nāma, nayo ca so lañjako cāti nayalañjako. Nayalañjako paṭhamo nandiyāvaṭṭo nāma, nayalañjako dutiyo tipukkhalo nāma, nayalañjako tatiyo sīhavikkīḷito nāmāti yojetabbo.

Uggatānaṃ visesena uggatoti uttamo, taṃ uttamaṃ. Gatāti ñātā, matāti attho. 『『Matā』』ti vā pāṭho. Sesamettha vuttanayānusārenapi saṃvaṇṇanānusārenapi jānitabbanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 2. 十六行已從自性說明，我等也已了知，因"何為五理趣"應說，故如是問已為從自性說示而說"此中何為五理趣"等。然則註釋中說"如是說示行已今為說示理趣而說'此中何為'等"。註釋中以"此中以分別開示染污、清凈故為理趣，或彼等於此中，或以此等故為理趣"等廣說詞義。以"引導"詞根隨喜轉等理趣順序緣染污、清凈而生起的智相應心為主要義，喜轉等理趣的緣因緣力以果假說而取，"如是"字指涉彼以果假說所取的力，具彼力的喜轉等理趣為"a"詞尾義。 以貪愛無明對染污分經，以止觀對清凈分經，以四諦連結方面引導為相的註釋差別為喜轉理趣。此中四諦即貪愛與無明因為有根本故為集諦，其餘三界諸法為苦諦，止觀為道諦，由此應證的無為界為滅諦。 以貪等三分在染污分，以無貪等三分在清凈分豐滿莊嚴故為三豐滿，以不善根對染污分，以善根對清凈分經義，以四諦連結方面引導為相的註釋差別為三豐滿。 此中引導世尊獅子游戲故為獅子游戲，以凈想等顛倒對一切染污分，以信根等對清凈分經義，以四諦連結方面引導為相的註釋差別為獅子游戲理趣。 以三義理趣方位性觀察善等諸法為方位觀察。為連結彼彼義理趣而作經義解答中，從經確定說示彼彼理趣方位的清凈等、染污諸法，以心觀察彼等如所說諸法"此為第一方位，此為第二方位"等，為方位觀察。 如是觀察諸法在義理趣三種連結中會合，故如鉤為鉤，會合彼彼理趣方位的善等諸法為鉤理趣。 標記故為標記。凡理趣標記即開顯經義，因此標記即開顯，彼理趣名為標記，理趣且彼標記為理趣標記。第一理趣標記名為喜轉，第二理趣標記名為三豐滿，第三理趣標記名為獅子游戲，應如是連結。 超越者殊勝超越故為最上，彼為最上。已知即已解之義。或"已解"為文句。此中其餘應依所說理趣及註釋了知。

Yathāvuttanayavisesasaṃvaṇṇanāya ṭīkāyaṃ –

『『Samūhādiṃ upādāya lokasaṅketasiddhā vohāramattatā sammutisabhāvo, pathavīphassādīnaṃ kakkhaḷaphusanādilakkhaṇaṃ paramatthasabhāvo. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – yasmiṃ bhinne, itarāpohe vā cittena kate na tathā buddhi, idaṃ sammutisaccaṃ yathā ghaṭe, sasambhārajale ca, tabbipariyāyena paramatthasacca』』nti –

Vacane ghaṭakathalaāpajalakaddamādisaṅkhātaṃ samūhādiṃ upādāya lokassa pubbe ghaṭakathalaāpajalakaddamādisaṅketasiddhā ghaṭakathalaāpajalakaddamādivohāramattatā sammutisabhāvo saṅketavasena avitathattā. Pathavīādīnaṃ kakkhaḷādilakkhaṇaṃ, phassādīnaṃ phusanādilakkhaṇaṃ paramatthasabhāvo. 『『Yadi evaṃ ghaṭādike abhinne vā āpādike vā anurūpena ūnabhāvena appavattamāne vā sati sammutibhāvo hotu, bhinne vā ūne vā kathaṃ sammutibhāvo bhaveyya, pathavīphassādīnampi bhijjamānattā, kakkhaḷaphusanādīnañca pathavīphassādīhi anaññattā kathaṃ paramatthasabhāvo bhaveyya, katamena saṅkhepena atthena sammutisabhāvo, paramatthasabhāvo ca amhehi jānitabbo』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『ayañhettha saṅkhepo』』tiādimāha. Tattha etthāti etesu sammutisabhāvaparamatthasabhāvesu ayaṃ nayo vuccamāno saṅkhepo attho daṭṭhabbo.

Yasmiṃ ghaṭādike bhinne sati tato ghaṭādito itaro kathalādibhāvo cittena pubbe katena yathā yena kathalādivohārena bhavati, yasmiṃ āpādike sambhārajalādike ūnabhāvena pavattamāne sati vā tato āpādito itaro kaddamādibhāvo cittena pubbe katena yathā yena kaddamādivohārena bhavati, tathā tena vohārena buddhi kathalādisabhāvajānanaṃ kaddamādisabhāvajānanaṃ bhavati, idaṃ abhinne ghaṭādikaṃ vā bhinne kathalādikaṃ vā anūne āpādikaṃ vā ūne kaddamādikaṃ vā sabbaṃ sammutisaccaṃ hotveva. 『『Kaddamasmiṃ bhinne, kaddamasmiṃ ūne vā sati itaro sammutisabhāvo』』ti pucchitabbabhāvato 『『ghaṭe, sambhārajale cā』』ti vuttaṃ.

Sammutisaccasabhāvo tumhehi vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo paramatthasaccasabhāvo』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tabbipariyāyena paramatthasacca』』nti vuttaṃ. Pathavīādīnaṃ kakkhaḷādilakkhaṇato itarassa phusanādilakkhaṇassa asambhavato, phassādīnañca phusanādilakkhaṇato itarassa kakkhaḷādilakkhaṇassa asambhavato pathavīphassādīnaṃ lakkhaḷaphusanādilakkhaṇaṃ paramatthasaccaṃ hotvevāti imasmiṃ saṅkhepatthe gahite koci virodho natthīti adhippāyoti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 如所說理趣特別註釋中之註疏： "從聚集等起，依世間約定而成立的言說而已，是假名本性。地觸等的堅硬觸等為相，是勝義本性。此處要略即：若已分解，或他物除去，或由心所作非如是智，此為假名諦，如瓶、水團等；反之則為勝義諦。" 于言說中，從瓶、岸、水、泥等聚集等起，世間先前以瓶、岸、水、泥等約定而成立的瓶、岸、水、泥等言說而已，是假名本性，以約定故不虛妄。地等的堅硬等為相，觸等的觸等為相，是勝義本性。"若如是瓶等未分解，或水等未相應減損，或未執行，則有假名本性；若已分解或減損，云何有假名本性？地觸等既已分解，堅硬觸等與地觸等非一，云何有勝義本性？以何種要略義，假名本性與勝義本性應由我等了知？"因應說此故說"此處要略"等。此中"此"即於此假名本性、勝義本性中，此理應說為要略義應被觀察。 若瓶等已分解，則從瓶等起他岸等，由心先前所作何種岸等言說而成；若水團等已減損執行，則從水團等起他泥等，由心先前所作何種泥等言說而成，如是以彼言說，智成岸等本性知、泥等本性知。此未分解瓶等，或已分解岸等，或未減損水等，或已減損泥等，一切皆為假名諦。因應問"泥已分解，或泥已減損時，他物假名本性"，故說"瓶、水團等"。 假名諦本性由汝等說，我等亦已了知，應說"何為勝義諦本性"，故說"反之則為勝義諦"。以地等堅硬等為相，他觸等不可能成就；以觸等觸等為相，他堅硬等不可能成就，地觸等的堅硬觸等為勝義諦。於此要略義中把握時，無有任何矛盾，是其意趣。

1. Pañca nayā sarūpato ācariyena uddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca viññātā, 『『yāni padāni aṭṭhārasa mūlapadāni uddiṭṭhāni, katamāni tānī』』ti pucchitabbattā tāni sarūpato dassetuṃ 『『tattha katamāni aṭṭhārasa mūlapadāni』』tyādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ nayepi uddisitvā idāni mūlapadāni uddisituṃ 『tattha katamānī』tiādi āraddha』』nti vuttaṃ. Tattha kusalāni nava padāni, akusalāni nava padāni aṭṭhārasa mūlapadānīti daṭṭhabbānīti yojanā. Mūlanti patiṭṭhahanti etehi nayā, patiṭṭhānavibhāgā cāti mūlāni, padanti patiṭṭhahanti ettha nayā, paṭṭhānavibhāgā, adhigamā cāti padāni, vuttappakāraṭṭhena mūlāni ca tāni padāni cāti mūlapadāni. Kucchite pāpadhamme salayantīti kusalāni, kuse rāgādayo lunantīti kusalāni, kusā viya lunantīti kusalāni, kusena ñāṇena lātabbāni pavattetabbānīti kusalāni. Kusalānaṃ paṭipakkhānīti akusalāni a-saddo cettha paṭipakkhatthoti.

Nava padāni kusalāni, nava padāni akusalānīti gaṇanaparicchedato, jātibhedato ca uddiṭṭhāni, 『『katamāni tānī』』ti pucchitabbattā nava padāni akusalāni paccāsattinyāyena sarūpato dassetuṃ 『『katamāni nava padāni akusalānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Evaṃ gaṇanaparicchedato, jātibhedato ca mūlapadāni dassetvā idāni sarūpato dassento saṃkilesapakkhaṃyeva paṭhamaṃ uddisati 『taṇhā』tiādinā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 3) –

Vuttaṃ. Tattha rūpādike khandhe tasati paritasatīti taṇhā. Avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatīti avijjā, vindiyaṃ kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā, vijjāya paṭipakkhāti vā avijjā. Lubbhanti tenāti lobho, lubbhatīti vā lobho, lubbhanaṃ vā lobho. Dosamohesupi eseva nayo. Asubhe rūpakkhandhādike 『『subha』』nti pavattā saññā subhasaññā. Dukkhadukkhādike 『『sukha』』nti pavattā saññā sukhasaññā. Anicce saṅkhāradhamme 『『nicca』』nti pavattā saññā niccasaññā. Anattasabhāvesu cakkhādīsu khandhesu 『『attā』』ti pavattā saññā attasaññā. Yatthāti yesu padesu sabbo akusalapakkho saṅgahaṃ samosaraṇaṃ gacchati, tāni padāni akusalānīti yojanā. Saṅgahaṃ gaṇanaṃ. Samosaraṇaṃ samāropanaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 3. 五理趣從自性由阿阇梨說示，我等也已了知，"哪些詞為十八根本詞"應被問，故為從自性顯示彼等而說"此中何為十八根本詞"等。然則註釋中說"如是說示理趣已，今為說示根本詞而說'此中何為'等已開始"。此中，善詞九，不善詞九，共十八根本詞應被了知。根本即以彼等理趣為依止，依止分別；詞即理趣於此依止，依止分別及證得。按所說方式為根本，彼等詞為根本詞。於醜惡法中迷醉故為善，于雜草如斷除貪等故為善，如雜草斷除故為善，以雜草智慧應取應轉故為善。善詞之對治為不善詞，此處"a"字即對治義。 九詞為善，九詞為不善，從數量區分及種類而說示，"何為彼等"應被問，故為以對應法則從自性顯示九不善詞而說"何為九不善詞"等。然則註釋中說："如是從數量區分、種類顯示根本詞已，今從自性顯示時，首先說示染污分'貪'等。" 此中，於色等蘊中戰慄、戰慄故為貪。于不可意中領受身惡行等故為無明，于可意中不領受身善行等故為無明，或智慧之對治為無明。為彼所動故為貪，或為貪動故為貪，或貪動為貪。于嗔、癡中亦同此理。于不凈色蘊等"凈"而生起之想為凈想。于苦苦等"樂"而生起之想為樂想。于無常行法"常"而生起之想為常想。于無我性質眼等蘊中"我"而生起之想為我想。凡詞中不善分全部攝受、彙集，是不善詞。攝受為數量，彙集為攝歸。<.Assistant>

Paccanīkadhamme uddhaccādike nīvaraṇe sameti vūpasameti tadaṅgavikkhambhanavasenāti samatho. Saṅkhāre aniccādīhi vividhehi ākārehi passatīti vipassanā. Lobhassa paṭipakkho alobho. Dosassa paṭipakkho adoso. Mohassa paṭipakkho amoho. Etthāpi a-saddo paṭipakkhattho, na abhāvatthādikoti adhippāyo. Asubhe rūpakkhandhādike, cakkhādimhi vā 『『asubha』』nti pavattā saññāpadhānacittuppādā asubhasaññā, visesato kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ . Dukkhadukkhatādīsu 『『dukkha』』nti pavattā saññāpadhānacittuppādā dukkhasaññā, visesato vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Anicce khandhādike vipariṇāmadhamme 『『anicca』』nti pavattā saññāpadhānacittuppādā aniccasaññā, visesato cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Anattasabhāve khandhe, cakkhādimhi vā 『『anattā』』ti pavattā saññāpadhānacittuppādā anattasaññā, visesato dhammānupassanāsatipadhānaṃ. Paññāsatisīsena hi pavattā ayaṃ desanā. Tena vuttaṃ bhagavatā 『『kathañca, bhikkhave, satibalaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu, ettha satibalaṃ daṭṭhabba』』nti. Yatthāti yesu padesu sabbo kusalapakkho saṅgahaṃ samosaraṇaṃ gacchati, tāni padāni kusalānīti yojanā.

Uddānanti uddhaṃ dānaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ uddānaṃ, saṅgahavacananti attho. Uddāne avutte sati heṭṭhā vuttassa atthassa vippakiṇṇabhāvo dinno viya bhaveyya, tasmā vippakiṇṇabhāvassa nivāraṇatthaṃ uddānanti adhippāyo. Caturo ca vipallāsāti subhasukhaniccaattasaññā. Kilesā bhavanti ettha navapadesūti bhūmī, kilesānaṃ bhūmīti kilesabhūmī, kilesapavattanaṭṭhānāni nava padānīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Caturosatipaṭṭhānāti asubhadukkhaaniccaanattasaññā. Indriyabhūmīti saddhādīnaṃ vimuttiparipācanindriyānaṃ bhūmī pavattanaṭṭhānāni samosaraṇaṭṭhānāni.

Navahi kusalapadehi kusalapakkhā yujjanti yojīyanti, navahi akusalapadehi akusalapakkhā yujjanti yojīyanti. Navahi kusalapadehi saha kusalapakkhā yujjanti yujjantā bhavanti, navahi akusalapadehi saha akusalapakkhā yujjanti yujjantā bhavantīti uddesavāre vuttāvaseso saṃvaṇṇanānusārena vijānitabbo.

Iti sattibalānurūpā racitā

Uddesavārassa atthavibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Niddesavāraatthavibhāvanā

Soḷasahāraniddesavibhāvanā

1. Hārādīsu samudāyassa nettippakaraṇassa uddeso uddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo niddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā uddiṭṭhe hārādayo niddisituṃ 『『tattha saṅkhepato nettī』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ uddiṭṭhe hārādayo niddisituṃ 『tattha saṅkhepato』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 4) vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ 『『tattha katame soḷasa hārā? Desanā vicayo』』tiādiuddesapāṭhe. Saṅkhepatoti samāsato. Nettīti nettippakaraṇaṃ. Kittitāti kathitā, idāni niddesato kathessāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 以分斷、鎮伏方式平息、止息掉舉等對治法障礙故為止。以無常等種種行相觀察諸行故為觀。貪的對治為無貪。嗔的對治為無嗔。癡的對治為無癡。此中"a"字為對治義，非無有義等之意趣。于不凈色蘊等或眼等中"不凈"而生起的想為主心生為不凈想，特別是身隨觀念處。于苦苦等中"苦"而生起的想為主心生為苦想，特別是受隨觀念處。于無常蘊等變異法中"無常"而生起的想為主心生為無常想，特別是心隨觀念處。于無我性蘊或眼等中"無我"而生起的想為主心生為無我想，特別是法隨觀念處。此說法以慧念為首而生起。因此世尊說："諸比丘，云何應見念力？於四念處中，此處應見念力。"凡詞中善分全部攝受、彙集，是善詞。 攝頌即向上給予保護為攝頌，是攝持語之義。若不說攝頌，則下說義成為分散狀，故為防止分散狀而說攝頌之意趣。四顛倒即凈樂常我想。煩惱於此九處生故為地，煩惱之地為煩惱地，即煩惱生起處所九詞。 四念處即不凈苦無常無我想。根地即信等解脫成熟諸根之地生起處所彙集處所。 以九善詞善分相應連結，以九不善詞不善分相應連結。與九善詞俱善分相應成為相應，與九不善詞俱不善分相應成為相應。說示分中所說餘者應依註釋了知。 如是隨力所造說示分義解釋已竟。 3.解說分義解釋 十六行解說解釋 4.於行等集為導論說示已說示，我等亦已知，應問"何為解說"，故為解說所說示行等而開始"此中略說導論"等。然則註釋中說："如是為解說所說示行等而開始'此中略說'等。"此中"此"即于彼"此中何為十六行？說法考察"等說示文中。略說即簡要。導論即導論論。已說即已說，今將從解說說之意。

1.

『『Assādādīnavatā, nissaraṇampi ca phalaṃ upāyo ca.

Āṇattī ca bhagavato, yogīnaṃ desanāhāro』』ti. –

Gāthāyaṃ yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena sutte āgatā assādopi ādīnavatā ādīnavopi nissaraṇampi phalampi upāyopi yogīnaṃ atthāya bhagavato āṇattipi ime dhammā dassitā saṃvaṇṇitā saṃvaṇṇanāvasena ñāpitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhāro nāmāti atthayojanā.

Vacanatthādayo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vitthārato vuttāva, tasmā kiñcimattameva kathessāmi. Assādīyateti assādo, ko so? Sukhaṃ, somanassaṃ, iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā ca. Assādeti etāyāti vā assādo, ko so? Taṇhā, vipallāsā ca. Vipallāsavasena hi ekacce sattā aniṭṭhampi ārammaṇaṃ iṭṭhākārena assādenti.

Ābhusaṃ kammena dīnaṃ dukkhādi hutvā vāti pavattatīti ādīnavo, dukkhādi. Atha vā ativiya ādīnaṃ kapaṇaṃ hutvā vāti pavattatīti ādīnavo, kapaṇamanusso, tathābhāvā ca tebhūmakā dhammā aniccatādiyogato.

Nissarati etenāti nissaraṇaṃ, ariyamaggo. Nissaratīti vā nissaraṇaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Nissaraṇabhedo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 4 hārasaṅkhepa) bahudhā vuttova.

Phalati pavattatīti phalaṃ, desanāya phalaṃ. Yadipi desanā phalanipphādikā na hoti, tathāpi bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ sutvā puññasambhārā sambhavanti, puññasambhārahetuto phalaṃ pavattaṃ, tasmā desanāya phalaṃ nāmāti. Katamaṃ taṃ? Devamanussesu āyuvaṇṇasukhabalayasaparivāraadhipateyyaupadhisampatticakkavattisiridevarajja- siricatusampatticakkasīlasamādhisampadā vijjābhiññā paṭisambhidā sāvakabodhipaccekabodhisammāsambodhiyo.

Paccayasāmaggiṃ upagantvā ayati pavattati phalaṃ etenāti upāyo, ko so? Ariyamaggassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā. Purimā paṭipadā hi pacchimāya paṭipadāya adhigamūpāyo, paramparāya magganibbānādhigamassa ca upāyo. Keci 『『maggopi upāyo』』ti vadanti, tesaṃ matena nibbānameva nissaraṇanti vuttaṃ siyā. 『『Te pahāya tare oghanti idaṃ nissaraṇa』』nti (netti. 5) pana ariyamaggassa nissaraṇabhāvaṃ vakkhati, tasmā kesañci vādo na gahetabbo.

Āṇattīti āṇārahassa bhagavato veneyyānaṃ hitasiddhiyā 『『evaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ paṭipajjāhi, micchāpaṭipattiṃ mā paṭipajjāhī』』ti vidhānaṃ āṇāṭhapanaṃ āṇatti nāma.

Yujjanti payujjanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāsūti yogino, veneyyā, tesaṃ yogīnaṃ atthāyāti vacanasesaṃ nīharitvā yojanā kātabbā. Sutte āgatānaṃ sabbesaṃ assādādīnaṃ ekadesāgatānampi nīharitvā sabbesaṃ vibhajanasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhāroti niddesato gahetabbo, so ca vibhajanākāro desanāhāravibhaṅge (netti. 5) āgamissatīti idha na dassitoti.

Desanāhāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo vicayahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 1. "味患與，出離及果與方便。 世尊教誡，瑜伽師說法行。" 此偈中凡註釋差別于經中所來的味、患、出離、果、方便、為瑜伽師利益的世尊教誡等諸法，被顯示、被註釋、以註釋方式被開示，彼註釋差別名為說法行，是義連結。 詞義等在註釋中已詳說，故我只說少分。被享味故為味，是何？樂、喜、成為可意所緣的五取蘊。或以此享味故為味，是何？貪、顛倒。因以顛倒故，某些有情以可意行相享味不可意所緣。 極度以業而貧苦等而轉起故為患，苦等。或極為貧困而轉起故為患，貧困人，如是三界諸法因結合無常等。 以此出離故為出離，聖道。或出離故為出離，涅槃。"及"字為積集義。出離差別在註釋中已多種說。 果生起故為果，說法之果。雖說法非生果，然聞世尊說法而生福資糧，因福資糧因緣而生果，故名說法之果。何為彼？天人中壽色樂力名眷屬主權資具轉輪王莊嚴天王莊嚴四圓滿輪戒定圓滿明通無礙解聲聞菩提獨覺菩提正等菩提。 會遇因緣已以此生起果故為方便，是何？聖道前分行道。因前行道是後行道的證得方便，以次第為道涅槃證得方便。某些說"道亦為方便"，依彼等意應說唯涅槃為出離。然"舍彼渡暴流，此為出離"將說聖道為出離性，故不應取某些說。 教誡即應受教誡的世尊為所化眾生利益成就"如是應行正行，勿行邪行"的規定、制定名為教誡。 結合、加行於四諦業處修習故為瑜伽師，所化眾生，為彼等瑜伽師利益，應引出語詞餘分而作連結。應從解說取經中所來一切味等，引出部分所來一切的分別註釋差別為說法行，彼分別方式將於說法行分別（導論5）中來，故此處不顯示。 說法行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為考察行解說"。

2.

『『Yaṃ pucchitañca vissajjitañca, suttassa yā ca anugīti.

Suttassa yo pavicayo, hāro vicayoti niddiṭṭho』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha suttassa yaṃ pucchitañca yā pucchā vicayamānā ca suttassa yaṃ vissajjitañca yā vissajjanā vicayamānā ca suttassa yo padādivicayo, assādādivicayo ca atthi, te vuttappakārā vicayamānā pucchādayo yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena viciyanti, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayo hāroti niddiṭṭhoti atthayojanā kātabbā.

Pucchīyate pucchitaṃ. Vissajjīyate vissajjitanti bhāvasādhanattho daṭṭhabbo, na kammasādhanattho. Tena vuttaṃ ṭīkāyaṃ 『『bhāvatthe toti āha – 『vissajjitanti vissajjanā』』』ti.

『『Suttassā』』ti niyamitattā saṃvaṇṇanāvasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgataṃ na gahetabbanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. So vicayo hāro aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 4 hārasaṅkhepa) vuttova. Kathaṃ? –

『『Ayaṃ pucchā adiṭṭhajotanā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā vimaticchedanā anumatipucchā kathetukamyatāpucchā sattādhiṭṭhānā dhammādhiṭṭhānā ekādhiṭṭhānā anekādhiṭṭhānā sammutivisayā paramatthavisayā atītavisayā anāgatavisayā paccuppannavisayā』』tiādinā pucchāvicayo veditabbo. 『『Idaṃ vissajjanaṃ ekaṃsabyākaraṇaṃ vibhajjabyākaraṇaṃ paṭipucchābyākaraṇaṃ ṭhapanaṃ sāvasesaṃ niravasesaṃ sauttaraṃ niruttaraṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttara』』ntiādinā vissajjanavicayo.

『『Ayaṃ pucchā iminā sameti, etena na sametī』』ti pucchitatthaṃ ānetvā, vicayo pubbenāparaṃ saṃsanditvā ca vicayo pubbāparavicayo. 『『Ayaṃ anugīti vuttatthasaṅgahā avuttatthasaṅgahā tadubhayatthasaṅgahā kusalatthasaṅgahā akusalatthasaṅgahā』』tiādinā anugītivicayo. Assādādīsu sukhavedanāya 『『iṭṭhārammaṇānubhavanalakkhaṇā』』tiādinā, taṇhāya 『『ārammaṇaggahaṇalakkhaṇā』』tiādinā, vipallāsānaṃ 『『viparītaggahaṇalakkhaṇā』』tiādinā, avasiṭṭhānaṃ tebhūmakadhammānaṃ 『『yathāsakalakkhaṇā』』tiādinā sabbesañca dvāvīsatiyā tikesu, dvācattālīsādhike ca dukasate labbhamānapadavasena taṃtaṃassādatthavisesaniddhāraṇaṃ assādavicayo.

Dukkhavedanāya 『『aniṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇā』』tiādinā, dukkhasaccānaṃ 『『paṭisandhilakkhaṇā』』tiādinā, aniccatādīnaṃ ādiantavantatāya aniccantikatāya ca 『『aniccā』』tiādinā sabbesañca lokiyadhammānaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyahānabhāgiyatādivasena ādīnavavuttiyā okāraniddhāraṇena ādīnavavicayo. Nissaraṇapade ariyamaggassa āgamanato kāyānupassanādipubbabhāgapaṭipadāvibhāgavisesaniddhāraṇavasena, nibbānassa yathāvuttapariyāyavibhāgavisesaniddhāraṇavasenāti evaṃ nissaraṇavicayo. Phalādīnaṃ taṃtaṃsuttadesanāya sādhetabbaphalassa tadupāyassa tattha tattha suttavidhivacanassa ca vibhāganiddhāraṇavasena vicayo veditabbo. Evaṃ padapucchāvissajjanapucchāpubbāparānugītīnaṃ, assādādīnañca visesaniddhāraṇavaseneva vicayalakkhaṇo 『『vicayo hāro』』ti veditabboti –

Evaṃ vuttova.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 2. "凡所問與所答，及經之隨誦。 經之詳察，說為考察行。" 已說偈。此中於經凡所問及正在考察之問，于經凡所答及正在考察之答，以及於經有詞等考察與味等考察，以何種註釋差別考察如說方式正在考察的問等，彼註釋差別說為考察行，應作如是義連結。 被問故為所問。被答故為所答，應見為狀態成就義，非業成就義。故註疏中說"因狀態意義為'to'故說'所答即答'"。 因"經之"限定，應見不取以註釋方式在註釋中所來。彼考察行在註釋中已說。云何？ "此問為未見開顯、已見會通、斷疑、隨許問、欲說問、有情施設、法施設、一施設、多施設、世俗境、勝義境、過去境、未來境、現在境"等，應知問考察。"此答為一向記、分別記、反問記、舍置、有餘、無餘、有上、無上、世間、出世間"等，為答考察。 "此問與此相應，與此不相應"引入所問義，以及會通前後的考察為前後考察。"此隨誦攝已說義、攝未說義、攝彼二義、攝善義、攝不善義"等，為隨誦考察。于味等中樂受以"經歷可意所緣為相"等，貪以"執取所緣為相"等，顛倒以"顛倒執取為相"等，餘三界諸法以"如各自相"等，一切依二十二三法及四十二百偶法可得詞而確定彼彼味等義差別為味考察。 苦受以"經歷不可意為相"等，苦諦以"結生為相"等，無常等以有始終性及無常究竟性"無常"等，一切世間法以染污分、舍斷分等方式行患，以狀態確定為患考察。于出離詞，由聖道而來故以身隨觀等前分行道分別差別確定方式，涅槃以如所說方法分別差別確定方式，如是為出離考察。對果等應以彼彼經說應成就之果、彼方便、此處彼處經規定語之分別確定方式了知考察。如是應知詞問答問前後隨誦及味等唯以差別確定方式為相的考察為"考察行"。 如是已說。

Vissajjanaviseso pana ṭīkāyaṃ vutto. Kathaṃ? –

『『Cakkhu anicca』』nti puṭṭhe 『『āma, cakkhu aniccamevā』』ti ekantato vissajjanaṃ ekaṃsabyākaraṇaṃ, 『『aññindriyaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ, sacchikātabbañcā』』ti puṭṭhe 『『maggapariyāpannaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ, phalapariyāpannaṃ sacchikātabba』』nti vibhajitvā vissajjanaṃ vibhajjabyākaraṇaṃ, 『『aññindriyaṃ kusala』』nti puṭṭhe 『『kiṃ anavajjaṭṭho kusalattho, udāhu sukhavipākaṭṭho』』ti paṭipucchitvā vissajjanaṃ paṭipucchābyākaraṇaṃ, 『『sassato attā, asassato vā』』ti vutte 『『abyākatameta』』ntiādinā avissajjanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ, 『『kiṃ panete 『kusalā』ti vā 『dhammā』ti vā ekatthā, udāhu nānatthā』』ti idaṃ pucchanaṃ sāvasesaṃ. Vissajjanassa pana sāvasesato veneyyajjhāsayavasena desanāyaṃ veditabbā. Apāṭihīrakaṃ sauttaraṃ sappāṭihīrakaṃ niruttaraṃ, sesaṃ vicayahāraniddese suviññeyyamevāti –

Vuttova. Saṃvaṇṇanāsu vutto attho anākulo pākaṭo yatipotehi viññāto, so sabbattha amhehi na vibhattoti daṭṭhabbo.

Vicayahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo yuttihāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

3.

『『Sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ, yā bhūmī yo ca gocaro tesaṃ.

Yuttāyuttaparikkhā, hāro yuttīti niddiṭṭho』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha sabbesaṃ soḷasannaṃ hārānaṃ yā bhūmi pavattanaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ byañjanaṃ, yo gocaro suttattho ca atthi, tesaṃ bhūmisaṅkhātabyañjanagocarasaṅkhātasuttatthānaṃ yā yuttāyuttaparikkhā yuttāyuttīnaṃ vicāraṇā saṃvaṇṇanā katā, so yuttiayuttiparikkhāvicāraṇasaṅkhāto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『yutti hāro』』ti niddiṭṭhoti atthayojanā.

Tesaṃ hārānaṃ bhūmibhūtassa sutte āgatassa byañjanassa yuttibhāvo duvidho sabhāvaniruttibhāvo, adhippetatthavācakabhāvo ca. Gocarabhūtassa pana sutte āgatassa yuttibhāvo suttavinayadhammatāhi avilomanaṃ. Ayuttibhāvo vuttavipariyāyena gahetabbo.

Yuttihāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo padaṭṭhānahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

4.

『『Dhammaṃ deseti jino, tassa ca dhammassa yaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Iti yāva sabbadhammā, eso hāro padaṭṭhāno』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha dhammanti yaṃ kiñci kusalādidhammaṃ sutte jino deseti, tassa sutte jinena desitassa kusalādidhammassa yañca padaṭṭhānaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ, taṃ taṃ padaṭṭhānañcāti evaṃ vuttanayena yāva yattakā sabbe dhammā sutte jinena desitā, tattakānaṃ sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ yañca padaṭṭhānaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ, tassa ca padaṭṭhānassa yañca padaṭṭhānaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ, taṃ taṃ padaṭṭhānañca, iti evaṃ vuttanayena yāva yattakā sabbe padaṭṭhānadhammā niddhāretabbāva, tattakāni sabbāni dhammapadaṭṭhānāni yathānurūpaṃ niddhāretvā yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena kathitāni, eso saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『padaṭṭhāno hāro』』ti niddiṭṭhoti atthayojanā.

Sutte desitakusaladhammassa yonisomanasikārasaddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayādi padaṭṭhānaṃ, sutte desitaakusaladhammassa ayonisomanasikāraasaddhammassavanaasappurisūpanissayādi padaṭṭhānaṃ, abyākatassa dhammassa yathārahaṃ kusalākusalābyākatā padaṭṭhānantiādinā niddhāretabbanti.

Padaṭṭhānahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo lakkhaṇahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 然則答差別在註疏中說。云何？ "眼無常"被問時"是的，眼確實無常"為一向答為一向記，"應修知根，應證知根"被問時"道所攝應修，果所攝應證"分別而答為分別記，"知根是善"被問時"善義是無過義，還是樂報義"反問而答為反問記，說"我常，我無常"時以"此未記說"等不答為舍置，"善與法是一義還是異義"此問為有餘。然答有餘應依所化意樂於說法中了知。無神變為有上，有神變為無上，余在考察行解說中易了知。 如是已說。註釋中所說義無混亂顯明為年少僧眾所知，彼一切處我等未分別應被見。 考察行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為理趣行解說"故： 3. "一切諸行，何為地何為境彼等， 合不合觀察，說為理趣行。" 已說偈。此中一切十六行有何地為生起處所文句，何境為經義，對彼等地所說文句境所說經義作何合理不合理觀察合不合之考察註釋，彼名為合理不合理觀察考察的註釋差別說為"理趣行"，是義連結。 彼等行之地即經中所來文句合理性有二：自性詞義性與所詮義表達性。然境即經中所來合理性為不違背經律法性。不合理性應以所說相反而取。 理趣行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為足處行解說"故： 4. "勝者說法，彼法何為足處， 如是乃至諸法，此為足處行。" 已說偈。此中法即凡任何善等法勝者于經中說示，對彼經中勝者所說善等法何為應確定的足處，彼彼足處，如是如所說方式直至凡一切諸法為勝者于經中所說，對彼一切諸法何為應確定的足處，對彼足處何為應確定的足處，彼彼足處，如是如所說方式直至凡一切足處法皆應確定，確定一切如是法足處已，以何種註釋差別而說，此註釋差別說為"足處行"，是義連結。 經中所說善法以如理作意、聽聞正法、親近善士等為足處，經中所說不善法以不如理作意、聽聞非法、親近非善士等為足處，無記法隨宜以善不善無記為足處等，應如是確定。 足處行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為相行解說"故：

5.

『『Vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā keci.

Vuttā bhavanti sabbe, so hāro lakkhaṇo nāmā』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha ekadhamme sutte bhagavatā vuttamhi, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ niddhārite vā sati tena dhammena ye keci dhammā ekalakkhaṇā bhavanti, sabbe te dhammā sutte sarūpato avuttāpi samānalakkhaṇatāya saṃvaṇṇetabbabhāvena ānetvā yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena vuttā bhavanti, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『lakkhaṇo nāma hāro』』ti niddiṭṭhoti atthayojanā.

Ekaṃ samānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etesanti ekalakkhaṇā, samānalakkhaṇā, sahacāritāya vā samānakiccatāya vā samānahetutāya vā samānaphalatāya vā samānārammaṇatāya vā avuttāpi niddhāritāti. Kathaṃ ? – 『『Nānattakāyānānattasaññino (dī. ni. 3.341, 357, 359; a. ni. 9.24), nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā』』tiādīsu sahacāritāya saññāya sahagatā dhammā niddhāritā. 『『Dadaṃ mittāni ganthatī』』tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 189) samānakiccatā, piyavacanaatthacariyā samānatthatāpi niddhāritā, 『『phassapaccayā vedanā』』tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225; udā. 1; netti. 24) samānahetutāya saññādayopi niddhāritā, 『『avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā』』tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225; udā. 1; netti. 24) samānaphalatāya taṇhupādānādayopi niddhāritā, 『『rūpaṃ assādeti abhinandati, taṃ ārabbha rāgo uppajjatī』』tiādīsu (paṭṭhā. 1.1.424) samānārammaṇatāya taṃsampayuttā vedanādayopi niddhāritā, niddhāretvā vattabbāti atthoti. Vitthāro vibhaṅgavāre (netti. 23) āgamissati.

Lakkhaṇo hāro niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo catubyūho hāro』』ti pucchitabbattā –

6.

『『Neruttamadhippāyo , byañjanamatha desanānidānañca;

Pubbāparānusandhī, eso hāro catubyūho』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha neruttaṃ suttapadanibbacanañca buddhānaṃ tassa tassa suttassa desakānaṃ, sāvakānaṃ vā adhippāyo ca atthabyañjanena byañjanamukhena desanānidānañca pubbāparena anusandhi ca ete niruttādayo yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena vibhāvīyanti, eso saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『catubyūho hāro』』ti niddiṭṭho. Desanāpavattinimittaṃ desakassa ajjhāsayādi desanānidānaṃ nāma. Catubyūhahārassa bahuvisayattā vibhaṅge (netti. 25 ādayo) lakkhaṇasampattiṃ katvā kathayissāma.

Catubyūhahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo āvaṭṭahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

7.

『『Ekamhi padaṭṭhāne, pariyesati sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ;

Āvaṭṭati paṭipakkhe, āvaṭṭo nāma so hāro』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha parakkamadhātuādīnaṃ padaṭṭhāne ekamhi ārambhadhātuādike desanāruḷhe sati visabhāgatāya vā sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesati , desanāya sarūpato aggahaṇena vā sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesati, yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena pariyesitvā yojento desanaṃ pamādādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūte kosajjādike paṭipakkhe āvaṭṭati āvaṭṭāpeti, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『āvaṭṭo hāro nāmā』』ti niddiṭṭhoti atthayojanā.

『『Paṭipakkhe』』ti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, sesepi sabhāge āvaṭṭanato. Na hi ārambhadhātuādike desanāruḷhe sati tappaṭipakkhe kosajjādikeyeva desanaṃ āvaṭṭeti, atha kho avasesavīriyārambhādikepi desanaṃ āvaṭṭetīti.

Āvaṭṭahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo vibhattihāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 5. "說一法時，凡諸法同一相者。 皆為已說，此名為相行。" 已說偈。此中一法為世尊于經中所說，或註釋中已確定時，凡諸法與彼法為一相者，一切彼等諸法雖于經中未明顯說，以同相性而應註釋方式引入，以何種註釋差別而說，彼註釋差別說為"名為相行"，是義連結。 一個相同之相為彼等故為一相，同相，或以俱行性或以同作用性或以同因性或以同果性或以同所緣性雖未說亦已確定。云何？如"異身異想，不作意異想"等中以俱行性確定與想俱行諸法。"佈施結交友"等中確定同作用性，愛語利行同義性。"觸緣受"等中以同因性確定想等。"無明緣行"等中以同果性確定愛取等。"享味色歡喜，緣彼生貪"等中以同所緣性確定與彼相應受等，已確定應說，是義。詳細將於分別分中來。 相行已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為四分行"故： 6. "詞義與意趣，文句及說因， 前後隨順，此為四分行。" 已說偈。此中經句詞義及佛與彼彼經說者、聲聞之意趣，以及以義文句以文句門說因與前後隨順，以何種註釋差別顯明此等詞義等，彼註釋差別說為"四分行"。說者意樂等說法轉起因緣名為說因。因四分行境多，將於分別中作相成就而說。 四分行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為轉行解說"故： 7. "於一足處，尋求余足處， 轉于對治，名為轉行。" 已說偈。此中於精進界等足處，一精進生起等已入說時，或以異性或因說法未明顯取，尋求余足處，以何種註釋差別尋求已聯結，令說法轉于放逸等足處之對治懈怠等，彼註釋差別說為"名為轉行"，是義連結。 "對治"此僅為舉例，因亦轉于余同分故。因精進生起等已入說時，不僅令說法轉于彼對治懈怠等，而且亦令說法轉于余精進發起等。 轉行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為分別行解說"故：

8.

『『Dhammañca padaṭṭhānaṃ, bhūmiñca vibhajate ayaṃ hāro.

Sādhāraṇe asādhāraṇe ca neyyo vibhattī』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha kusalādivasena anekavidhaṃ sabhāvadhammañca dānasīlādipadaṭṭhānañca 『『dassanabhūmi bhāvanābhūmī』』ti evamādikaṃ bhūmiñca sādhāraṇe ca asādhāraṇe ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena vibhajate, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『vibhatti hāro』』ti neyyoti atthayojanā.

『『Imasmiṃ sutte vuttā kusalā vāsanābhāgiyā, imasmiṃ sutte vuttā kusalā nibbedhabhāgiyā』』tyādinā, 『『imasmiṃ sutte vuttā akusalā kilesabhāgiyā』』tyādinā dhammañca, 『『idaṃ sīlaṃ imassa mahaggatavisesassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, idaṃ sīlaṃ idaṃ jhānaṃ imassa lokuttarassa padaṭṭhāna』』ntyādinā padaṭṭhānañca, 『『dassanapahātabbassa puthujjano bhūmi, bhāvanāpahātabbassa sotāpannādayo bhūmi』』tyādinā bhūmiñca, 『『kāmarāgabyāpādā puthujjanasotāpannānaṃ sādhāraṇā』』tyādinā sādhāraṇe ca, 『『kāmarāgabyāpādā anāgāmiarahantānaṃ asādhāraṇā』』tyādinā asādhāraṇe ca yena vibhajati, so vibhatti hāro nāmātiādinā (netti. 33-34) vitthāretvā vibhajanākāro gahetabbo.

Vibhattihāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo parivattanahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

9.

『『Kusalākusale dhamme, niddiṭṭhe bhāvite pahīne ca.

Parivattati paṭipakkhe, hāro parivattano nāmā』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha sutte bhāvite bhāvitabbe kusale anavajjadhamme niddiṭṭhe kathite, saṃvaṇṇite vā pahīne pahātabbe akusale sāvajjadhamme niddiṭṭhe kathite, saṃvaṇṇite vā tesaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭipakkhe viparītadhamme yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena parivattati parivatteti, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『parivattano hāro nāmā』』ti veditabboti atthayojanā.

『『Sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavatī』』tiādinā ca 『『yassa vā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratassa pāṇātipāto pahīno』』tiādinā ca 『『bhuñjitabbā kāmā …pe… kāmehi veramaṇī tesaṃ adhammo』』tiādinā ca paṭipakkhe parivattanabhāvaṃ vibhaṅgavāre (netti. 35 ādayo) vakkhatīti na vitthāritā.

Parivattanahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo vevacanahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 8. "法與足處，地而分別此行， 于共與不共，應知為分別。" 已說偈。此中以善等方式多種自性法與佈施戒等足處及"見地修地"如是等地，以何種註釋差別分別共與不共，彼註釋差別應知為"分別行"，是義連結。 "此經所說善為習氣分，此經所說善為通達分"等，"此經所說不善為煩惱分"等而分別法，"此戒為此廣大殊勝之足處，此戒此禪為此出世間之足處"等而分別足處，"見所斷為凡夫地，修所斷為預流等地"等而分別地，"欲貪嗔恚為凡夫預流所共"等而分別共，"欲貪嗔恚為不還阿羅漢所不共"等而分別不共，以何而分別，彼名為分別行等，應詳說而取分別方式。 分別行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為轉變行解說"故： 9. "善不善法，已說已修已斷， 轉變為對治，名為轉變行。" 已說偈。此中經中已修應修善無過法已說已述或已註釋，已斷應斷不善有過法已說已述或已註釋，以何種註釋差別轉變彼等諸法之對治相反諸法，應知彼註釋差別"名為轉變行"，是義連結。 以"正見士夫之邪見已被降服"等及"或離殺生者之殺生已斷"等及"應受用欲...乃至...離欲為彼等非法"等，將於分別分中說對治轉變性故未詳說。 轉變行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為同義語行解說"故：

10.

『『Vevacanāni bahūni tu, sutte vuttāni ekadhammassa.

Yo jānāti suttavidū, vevacano nāma so hāro』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha ekadhammassa padatthassa sutte vuttāni tu vuttāni eva, bahūni tu bahūni eva vevacanāni yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena yo suttavidū jānāti, jānitvā ekasmiṃyeva padatthe yojeti, tassa suttaviduno so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『vevacano nāma hāro』』ti niddiṭṭhoti atthayojanā.

Ettha ca yo so-saddā asamānatthā ca hontīti 『『yo suttavidū』』ti vatvā 『『so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso』』ti vuttanti. 『『Bhagavā』』ti padassa ekasmiṃyeva atthe bhagavati 『『arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṃ buddho bhagavā, phalanipphattigato vesārajjappatto adhigatapaṭisambhido catuyogavippahīno agatigamanavītivatto uddhaṭasallo niruḷhavaṇo madditakaṇṭako nibbāpitapariyuṭṭhāno bandhanātīto ganthaviniveṭhano ajjhāsayavītivatto bhinnandhakāro cakkhumā lokadhammasamatikkanto anurodhavirodhavippayutto iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu dhammesu asaṅkhepagato bandhanātivatto ṭhapitasaṅgāmo abhikkantataro ukkādharo ālokakaro pajjotakaro tamonudo raṇañjaho aparimāṇavaṇṇo appameyyavaṇṇo asaṅkheyyavaṇṇo ābhaṅkaro pabhaṅkaro dhammobhāsapajjotakaro』』ti (netti. 38) evamādīni bahūni vevacanāni yojitāni. Vitthāro vibhaṅgavāre (netti. 37 ādayo) āgamissati.

Vevacanahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo paññattihāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

11.

『『Ekaṃ bhagavā dhammaṃ, paññattīhi vividhāhi deseti.

So ākāro ñeyyo, paññattī nāma so hāro』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha bhagavā ekaṃ khandhādidhammaṃ vividhāhi nikkhepappabhavapaññattādīhi paññattīhi yena paññāpetabbākārena deseti, so paññāpetabbākāro yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena vibhāvito, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso 『『paññatti hāro nāmā』』ti ñeyyoti atthayojanā.

Tattha vividhāhi paññattīhi nikkhepapaññattipabhavapaññattipariññāpaññattipahānapaññatti- bhāvanāpaññattisacchikiriyāpaññattinirodhapaññattinibbidāpaññattīti evamādipaññattīhi ekapadatthasseva paññāpetabbākāravibhāvanālakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso paññatti hāro nāmāti.

Tattha 『『idaṃ dukkha』』nti ayaṃ paññatti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ, channaṃ dhātūnaṃ, aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ, dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ, dasannaṃ indriyānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti.

『『Kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre atthi rāgo, atthi nandī, atthi taṇhā, patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ viruḷhaṃ. Yattha patiṭṭhitaṃ viññāṇaṃ viruḷhaṃ, atthi tattha nāmarūpassa avakkanti. Yattha atthi nāmarūpassa avakkanti, atthi tattha saṅkhārānaṃ vuddhī』』ti (saṃ. ni. 2.64; kathā. 296) evamādi pabhavapaññatti dukkhassa ca samudayassa cāti.

『『Kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre natthi rāgo, natthi nandī, natthi taṇhā』』ti (saṃ. ni.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 10. "同義語眾多，經中說於一法， 誰知為經達，名為同義語行。" 已說偈。此中對一法義于經中所說即已說，眾多即眾多同義語，以何種註釋差別誰為經達而知，知已於唯一法義而連結，彼經達之彼註釋差別說為"名為同義語行"，是義連結。 此中"誰"字與"彼"字非同義故，說"誰為經達"已說"彼註釋差別"。對"世尊"詞于唯一義世尊中連結"應供、正等覺、明行足、善逝、世間解、無上士、調御丈夫、天人師、佛、世尊、得果成就、得無畏、證得無礙解、離四軛、超越非道、拔除箭、癒合傷、踩碎刺、息滅蓋、超越束縛、解開結、超越意樂、破除黑暗、具眼、超越世間法、離順逆、于可意不可意法無執、超越束縛、止息戰、更加超越、持炬、作明、作光、除暗、離諍、無量相、不可量相、無數相、作光明、作光輝、法光明作光"等如是眾多同義語。詳細將於分別分中來。 同義語行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為施設行解說"故： 11. "世尊一法，以種種施設而說， 彼行相應知，名為施設行。" 已說偈。此中世尊以種種安立、根源、施設等施設，以何種應施設行相說一蘊等法，彼應施設行相以何種註釋差別而顯明，應知彼註釋差別"名為施設行"，是義連結。 此中以種種施設即以安立施設、根源施設、遍知施設、斷施設、修施設、證施設、滅施設、厭離施設等如是等施設，顯明唯一法義應施設行相為相的註釋差別名為施設行。 此中"此苦"此施設為五蘊、六界、十八界、十二處、十根的安立施設。 "諸比丘，若於段食有貪、有喜、有愛，則識住立增長。識住立增長處，有名色入。有名色入處，有諸行增長"等如是為苦與集的根源施設。 "諸比丘，若於段食無貪、無喜、無愛"

2.64; kathā. 296) evamādi pariññāpaññatti dukkhassa, 『『pahānapaññatti samudayassa, bhāvanāpaññatti maggassa, sacchikiriyāpaññatti nirodhassā』』ti ca 『『nikkhepapaññatti sutamayiyā paññāya, sacchikiriyāpaññatti anaññātaññassāmītindriyassa, pavattanāpaññatti dhammacakkassā』』ti evamādivitthāro vibhaṅge (netti. 39 ādayo) āgamissatīti.

Paṇṇattihāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo otaraṇahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

12.

『『Yo ca paṭiccuppādo, indriyakhandhā ca dhātuāyatanā.

Etehi otarati yo, otaraṇo nāma so hāro』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha yo paṭiccasamuppādo ca ye indriyakhandhā ca yāni dhātuāyatanāni ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena niddhāritāni, etehi paṭiccasamuppādādindriyakhandhadhātāyatanehi, sutte āgatapadatthamukhena niddhāriyamānehi ca yo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso otarati ogāhati paṭiccasamuppādādike tattha vācakavasena, tattha ñāpakavasena vā anupavisati, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso otaraṇo hāro nāmāti atthayojanā.

Tattha indriyakhandhāti indriyāni ca khandhā cāti indriyakhandhā. Dhātuāyatanāti dhātuyo ca āyatanāni ca dhātuāyatanā. Kathaṃ otaraṇo? 『『Uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto』』tiādi (netti. 42) pāṭho.

Uddhanti rūpadhātu ca arūpadhātu ca. Adhoti kāmadhātu. Sabbadhi vippamuttoti tedhātuke ayaṃ asekkhāvimutti. Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni, ayaṃ indriyehi otaraṇā.

Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni vijjā, vijjuppādā avijjānirodho…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti, ayaṃ paṭiccasamuppādehi otaraṇā.

Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitāni sīlakkhandhena samādhikkhandhena paññākkhandhena, ayaṃ khandhehi otaraṇā.

Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni saṅkhārapariyāpannāni ye saṅkhārā anāsavā, no ca bhavaṅgā, te saṅkhārā dhammadhātusaṅgahitā, ayaṃ dhātūhi otaraṇā.

Sā dhammadhātu dhammāyatanapariyāpannā, yaṃ āyatanaṃ anāsavaṃ, no ca bhavaṅgaṃ, ayaṃ āyatanehi otaraṇāti evamādīhi vibhaṅge (netti. 42 ādayo) āgamissatīti.

Otaraṇahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo sodhanahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

13.

『『Vissajjitamhi pañhe, gāthāyaṃ pucchitā yamārabbha.

Suddhāsuddhaparikkhā, hāro so sodhano nāmā』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ āruḷhe pañhe ñātumicchite atthe bhagavatā vissajjanagāthāyaṃ vissajjitamhi yaṃ suttatthaṃ ārabbha adhikicca sā gāthā pucchitā pucchanatthāya ṭhapitā, tassa suttatthassa yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena suddhāsuddhaparikkhā vicāraṇā bhave, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso sodhano hāro nāmāti atthayojanā.

Kathaṃ? 『『Avijjāya nivuto loko』』ti padaṃ sodhitaṃ, ārambho na sodhito. 『『Vivicchā pamādā nappakāsatī』』ti padaṃ sodhitaṃ, ārambho na sodhito. 『『Jappābhilepanaṃ brūmī』』ti padaṃ sodhitaṃ, ārambho na sodhito. 『『Dukkhamassa mahabbhaya』』nti padañca sodhitaṃ, ārambho ca sodhitoti. Evaṃ padādīnaṃ sodhitāsodhitabhāvavicāro hāro sodhano nāma. Vitthārato pana vibhaṅge (netti. 45 ādayo) āgamissatīti.

Sodhanahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo adhiṭṭhānahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 等如是為苦的遍知施設，"斷施設為集，修施設為道，證施設為滅"及"聞所成慧的安立施設，未知當知根的證施設，法輪的轉施設"等如是詳細將於分別中來。 施設行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為趣入行解說"故： 12. "依緣生起，根蘊與界處， 以彼等趣入者，名為趣入行。" 已說偈。此中依緣生起及諸根蘊及諸界處以何種註釋差別而確定，以此等由經中所來法義門而正確定的緣起等根蘊界處，以何種註釋差別趣入、深入緣起等，以彼處能詮方式或能知方式而進入，彼註釋差別名為趣入行，是義連結。 此中根蘊即諸根與諸蘊為根蘊。界處即諸界與諸處為界處。如何趣入？"上下一切解脫"等文。 上即色界與無色界。下即欲界。一切解脫即於三界此無學解脫。彼等即無學五根，此為以根趣入。 彼等無學五根為明，明生起故無明滅...乃至...苦蘊滅，此為以緣起趣入。 彼等無學五根攝入三蘊：戒蘊、定蘊、慧蘊，此為以蘊趣入。 彼等無學五根屬行，彼等諸行無漏非有分，彼等諸行攝入法界，此為以界趣入。 彼法界屬法處，彼處無漏非有分，此為以處趣入，如是等將於分別中來。 趣入行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為清凈行解說"故： 13. "已答問時，偈中所問關於何， 清不清觀察，彼行名清凈。" 已說偈。此中於偈中所升起欲知義之問，世尊于答偈中已答時，關於何經義彼偈被問為問之所立，對彼經義以何種註釋差別而有清不清觀察考察，彼註釋差別名為清凈行，是義連結。 云何？"為無明覆世間"詞已清凈，起始未清凈。"慳吝放逸故不明"詞已清凈，起始未清凈。"我說貪為塗著"詞已清凈，起始未清凈。"苦為大怖畏"詞與起始已清凈。如是對詞等清凈未清凈性的考察名為清凈行。然詳細將於分別中來。 清凈行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為住立行解說"故：

14.

『『Ekattatāya dhammā, yepi ca vemattatāya niddiṭṭhā.

Te na vikappayitabbā, eso hāro adhiṭṭhāno』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha ye dukkhasaccādayo dhammā ekattatāya sāmaññenapi ca vemattatāya visesenapi niddiṭṭhā, yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena niddiṭṭhā dukkhasaccādayo dhammā na vikappayitabbā sāmaññavisesakappanāya vohārabhāvena anavaṭṭhānato, kāladisāvisesādīnaṃ viya apekkhāsiddhito ca, eso saṃvaṇṇanāviseso adhiṭṭhāno hāroti atthayojanā.

Tattha ekattatāyāti ekassa samānassa bhāvo ekattaṃ, ekattameva ekattatā, tāya. Ekasaddo cettha samānatthavācako, na saṅkhyāvācakoti. Vemattatāyāti visiṭṭhā mattā vimattā, vimattā eva vemattaṃ, vemattassa bhāvo vemattatā, tāya. Yathā hi 『『ajja sve』』ti vuccamānā kālavisesā anavaṭṭhitā bhavanti, 『『purimā disā, pacchimā disā』』ti vuccamānā disāvisesā, evaṃ sāmaññavisesā ca atthassa sabhāvāti. Tathā hi 『『idaṃ dukkha』』nti vuccamānaṃ jātiādiṃ apekkhāya sāmaññaṃ samānampi saccāpekkhāya viseso hoti. Esa nayo samudayasaccādīsupīti. 『『Dukkha』』nti ekattatā. 『『Jāti dukkhā, jarā dukkhā, maraṇaṃ dukkha』』nti evamādi vemattatā. 『『Dukkhasamudayo』』ti ekattatā, 『『taṇhā ponobhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā』』ti evamādi vemattatāti evamādi vitthāro vibhaṅge (netti. 46 ādayo) āgamissatīti.

Adhiṭṭhānahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo parikkhārahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

15.

『『Ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ, janayantippaccayā paramparato.

Hetumavakaḍḍhayitvā, eso hāro parikkhāro』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha avijjādikā ye paccayadhammā saṅkhārādikaṃ yaṃ phaladhammaṃ paccayā sahajātapaccayena paramparato paramparapaccayabhāvena janayanti, tassa saṅkhārādiphalassa paccayaṃ parikkhārabhūtaṃ purimuppannaṃ avijjādikaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ janakaṃ hetuṃ, ayonisomanasikārādikaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ paccayahetuñca avakaḍḍhayitvā suttato niddhāretvā yo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhārasaṃvaṇṇanābhāvena pavatto, eso saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāro hāro nāmāti atthayojanā. Avijjādayo hi avijjādīnaṃ asādhāraṇahetū bhavanti, ayonisomanasikārādayo sādhāraṇapaccayā. Tenāha – 『『asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo hetu, sādhāraṇalakkhaṇo paccayo』』ti, 『『avijjā avijjāya hetu, ayonisomanasikāro paccayo』』tiādikaṃ (netti. 49) vibhaṅgavacanañca.

Parikkhārahāraniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo samāropanahāraniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 14. "以一性諸法，以異性所說者， 彼等不應分別，此行名住立。" 已說偈。此中苦諦等諸法以一性即共相及以異性即別相所說，以何種註釋差別所說苦諦等諸法不應以共相別相分別，因以言說性無住立，及如時分方位差別等依待而成，此註釋差別為住立行，是義連結。 此中"以一性"即一即同之狀態為一性，以彼。此中"一"字表示同義，非表示數義。"以異性"即殊勝量為異量，異量即異性，異性之狀態為異性，以彼。如說"今日明日"等時差別為無住立，說"東方西方"等方位差別，如是共相別相為義自性。如是說"此苦"對生等而言雖為共相，對諦而言則為別相。此理于集諦等亦然。"苦"為一性。"生苦、老苦、死苦"等如是為異性。"苦集"為一性，"愛求有俱喜貪"等如是為異性，如是詳細將於分別中來。 住立行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為資具行解說"故： 15. "諸法為緣，次第生起何法， 抽出其因，此行名資具。" 已說偈。此中無明等諸緣法作為緣以俱生緣以次第緣性而生起行等何果法，對彼行等果之資具性緣先生起無明等不共生因，及不如理作意等共同緣因，抽出即從經中確定，何種註釋差別以資具註釋性而轉起，此註釋差別名為資具行，是義連結。因無明等為無明等之不共因，不如理作意等為共同緣。故說"不共相為因，共相為緣"及"無明為無明之因，不如理作意為緣"等分別語。 資具行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為歸結行解說"故：

16.

『『Ye dhammā yaṃmūlā, ye cekatthā pakāsitā muninā.

Te samāropayitabbā, esa samāropano hāro』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha ye sīlādayo dhammā yaṃmūlā yesaṃ samādhiādīnaṃ mūlā, te sīlādayo dhammā tesaṃ samādhiādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena samāropayitabbā, ye ca rāgavirāgacetovimuttisekkhaphalakāmadhātusamatikkamanādisaddā anāgāmiphalatthatāya ekatthā samānatthāti buddhamuninā pakāsitā, te rāga…pe… tikkamanādisaddā aññamaññavevacanabhāvena samāropayitabbā, eso saṃvaṇṇanāviseso samāropano hāro nāmāti atthayojanā.

Ettha ca sīlādikkhandhattayassa pariyāyantaravibhāvanāpāripūrī kathitā, bhāvanāpāripūrī ca pahātabbassa pahānena hotīti bhāvanāsamāropanapahānasamāropanāpi dassitāti catubbidho samāropano padaṭṭhānasamāropano, vevacanasamāropano, bhāvanāsamāropano, pahānasamāropanoti.

Tattha kāyikasucaritaṃ, vācasikasucaritañca sīlakkhandho, manosucarite anabhijjhā, abyāpādo ca samādhikkhandho, sammādiṭṭhi paññākkhandho. Sīlakkhandho samādhikkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, samādhikkhandho paññākkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlakkhandho, samādhikkhandho ca samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, paññākkhandho vipassanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Samatho rāgavirāgacetovimuttiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ, vipassanā avijjāvirāgapaññāvimuttiyā padaṭṭhānanti evamādi padaṭṭhānasamāropano. Rāgavirāgā cetovimutti sekkhaphalaṃ, avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti asekkhaphalaṃ, idaṃ vevacanaṃ. Rāgavirāgā cetovimutti anāgāmiphalaṃ, avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ, idaṃ vevacanaṃ. Rāgavirāgā cetovimutti kāmadhātusamatikkamanaṃ, avijjāvirāgā cetovimutti tedhātusamatikkamanaṃ, idaṃ vevacanaṃ. Paññindriyaṃ, paññābalaṃ, adhipaññāsikkhā, paññākkhandhoti evamādi vevacananti evamādi vevacanasamāropano. Kāye kāyānupassino viharato cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti, catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti, catūsu sammappadhānesu bhāviyamānesu cattāro iddhipādā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti evamādi bhāvanāsamāropano. Kāye kāyānupassī viharanto asubhe 『『subha』』nti vipallāsaṃ pajahati, kabaḷīkāro cassa āhāro pariññaṃ gacchati, kāmupādānena ca anupādāno bhavati, kāmayogena ca visaṃyutto bhavati, abhijjhākāyaganthena ca vippayujjati, kāmāsavena ca anāsavo bhavati, kāmoghañca uttiṇṇo bhavati, rāgasallena ca visallo bhavati, rūpūpikā cassa viññāṇaṭṭhiti pariññaṃ gacchati , rūpadhātuyaṃ cassa rāgo pahīno bhavati, na ca chandāgatiṃ gacchati, vedanāsūti evamādi pahānasamāropanoti evamādi samāropano hāro niyuttoti.

Iti sattibalānurūpā racitā.

Soḷasahāraniddesavibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Nayaniddesavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 16. "諸法為何根，及牟尼說一義者， 彼等應歸結，此為歸結行。" 已說偈。此中戒等諸法為何根即為定等之根，彼戒等諸法以註釋差別應歸結為彼定等之足處，及貪離貪心解脫有學果超越欲界等詞被佛牟尼開示為一義即同義者，彼貪...乃至...超越等詞應以互為同義語性歸結，此註釋差別名為歸結行，是義連結。 此中說明三蘊以異門圓滿，及修圓滿以應斷之斷而有，故示現四種歸結即足處歸結、同義語歸結、修歸結、斷歸結。 此中身善行與語善行為戒蘊，意善行中無貪與無恚為定蘊，正見為慧蘊。戒蘊為定蘊之足處，定蘊為慧蘊之足處。戒蘊與定蘊為止之足處，慧蘊為觀之足處。止為貪離貪心解脫之足處，觀為無明離貪慧解脫之足處，如是等為足處歸結。貪離貪心解脫為有學果，無明離貪慧解脫為無學果，此為同義語。貪離貪心解脫為不還果，無明離貪慧解脫為最上果阿羅漢，此為同義語。貪離貪心解脫為超越欲界，無明離貪心解脫為超越三界，此為同義語。慧根、慧力、增上慧學、慧蘊如是等同義語，如是等為同義語歸結。住于身觀身者四念處至修圓滿，四念處修時四正勤至修圓滿，四正勤修時四神足至修圓滿，如是等為修歸結。住于身觀身者斷不凈中"凈"顛倒，其段食至遍知，不執取欲取，離欲軛，離貪身繫，無慾漏，渡欲暴流，離貪箭，其色所住識至遍知，其色界貪斷，不行欲趣，于受等如是等為斷歸結，如是等歸結行已配。 如是依能力所造。 十六行解說顯明竟。 道理解說顯明

1. Hāraniddesā niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katame nayaniddesā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『taṇhañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ uddesakkameneva hāre niddisitvā idāni naye niddisituṃ 『『taṇhañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso sutte āgataṃ taṇhañca avijjañca atthato niddhāraṇavasena gahitaṃ taṇhañca avijjañca saṃkilesapakkhaṃ neti, sutte āgatena samathena, sutte āgatāya vipassanāya atthato niddhāraṇavasena vā gahitena samathena, gahitāya vipassanāya vodānapakkhaṃ neti, nayanto ca saccehi yojetvā neti, ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāviseso so nandiyāvaṭṭo nayo nāmāti atthayojanā.

Ettha ca atthanayassa bhūmi, saṃvaṇṇanā ca gāthāyaṃ 『『nayo』』ti vuttā, tasmā 『『saṃvaṇṇanāviseso』』ti vuttaṃ. Na hi atthanayo saṃvaṇṇanā, catusaccapaṭivedhassa anurūpo pubbabhāge anugāhaṇanayo atthanayova. Tassa pana atthanayassa yā saṃvaṇṇanā ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ vasena taṇhādimukhena nayabhūmiracanā pavattā, tassa saṃvaṇṇanāva nayavohāro katoti vitthārato hārasampāte (netti. 78-79) āgamissati.

Nandiyāvaṭṭanayaniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo tipukkhalanayaniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

18.

『『Yo akusale samūlehi, neti kusale ca kusalamūlehi.

Bhūtaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ, tipukkhalaṃ taṃ nayaṃ āhū』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha yo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso akusale samūlehi attano akusalassa tīhi lobhādīhi mūlehi saṃkilesapakkhaṃ neti, kusale ca kusalamūlehi tīhi alobhādīhi vodānapakkhaṃ neti, nayanto ca bhūtaṃ kusalākusalaṃ neti, na abhūtaṃ māyāmarīciādayo viya, tathaṃ kusalākusalaṃ neti, na ghaṭādayo viya sammutisaccamattaṃ, avitathaṃ kusalākusalaṃ neti, na vitathaṃ. Kusalākusalānaṃ sabhāvato vijjamānattā bhūtā paramatthasaccattā tathā, akusalassa iṭṭhavipākatābhāvato, kusalassa ca aniṭṭhavipākatābhāvato vipāke sati avisaṃvādakattā avitathā bhavanti, kusalākusalā hi etesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ 『『bhūtaṃ, tathaṃ, avitatha』』nti padānaṃ kusalākusalavisesanatā daṭṭhabbā.

Atha vā akusalamūlehi akusalāni, kusalamūlehi ca kusalāni nayanto ayaṃ nayo bhūtaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ neti cattāri saccāni niddhāretvā yojeti. Dukkhādīni hi bādhakādibhāvato aññathābhāvābhāvena bhūtāni, saccasabhāvattā tathāni, avisaṃvādanato avitathāni. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – 『『cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathānī』』ti saṃ. ni. 5.1090; paṭi. ma. 2.8). Akusalādisuttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇaṃ taṃ saṃvaṇṇanāvisesaṃ tipukkhalaṃ nayanti āhūti atthayojanā.

Tattha tīhi hetūhi pukkhalo sobhanoti tipukkhalo akusalādiko atthanayo saṃvaṇṇanāvisesoti ṭhānūpacārato tipukkhalanayo nāmāti. Vitthāro pana hārasampāte (netti. 87-88) āgamissati.

Tipukkhalanayaniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo sīhavikkīḷitanayaniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 17. 行解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何等為道理解說"故，說"愛及"等。或者如是以列舉次第解說諸行已，今為解說諸道理而說"愛及"等。此中何種註釋差別引導經中所來愛及無明，以義確定方式所取愛及無明染污分，以經中所來止，經中所來觀，或以義確定方式所取止，所取觀引導清凈分，引導時以諸諦相應而引導，此註釋差別名為彼轉起道理，是義連結。 此中義道理之地與註釋于偈中說為"道理"，故說"註釋差別"。因義道理非註釋，隨順通達四諦前分攝受道理唯義道理。然彼義道理之註釋以利根等方式以愛等門安立道理地轉起，彼註釋說為道理，詳細將於行會合中來。 轉起道理解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為三蓮道理解說"故： 18. "以諸根引不善，及以善根引善， 真實如無虛，說彼為三蓮道理。" 已說偈。此中何種註釋差別以諸根即以自三貪等根引導不善染污分，及以善根即以三無貪等引導清凈分，引導時引導真實善不善，非不真實如幻如陽焰等，引導如實善不善，非如瓶等唯世俗諦，引導無虛善不善，非虛妄。因善不善自性存在故真實，勝義諦性故如實，因不善無可意異熟性，善無不可意異熟性，異熟時無欺誑性故無虛，應見善不善為此等三"真實、如實、無虛"詞之善不善差別。 或者以不善根引導不善，以善根引導善，此道理引導真實如實無虛，確定四諦而相應。因苦等以障礙等性故無異性故真實，諦自性故如實，無欺誑故無虛。因世尊說此："諸比丘，此四真實、無虛、無異。"不善等經義以四諦相應門引導為相之彼註釋差別說為三蓮道理，是義連結。 此中以三因莊嚴為三蓮，不善等義道理註釋差別，以處轉變故名為三蓮道理。然詳細將於行會合中來。 三蓮道理解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為師子游戲道理解說"故：

19.

『『Yo neti vipallāsehi, kilese indriyehi saddhamme.

Etaṃ nayaṃ nayavidū, sīhavikkīḷitaṃ āhū』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Tattha yo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso sutte vuttehi vipallāsehi kilese saṃkilesapakkhaṃ neti, sutte vuttehi indriyehi saddhamme vodānapakkhaṃ neti, etaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāvisesaṃ nayavidū saddhammanayakovidā, atthanayakusalā eva vā sīhavikkīḷitaṃ nayanti āhūti atthayojanā.

Tattha vipallāsehīti asubhe subhaṃ, dukkhe sukhaṃ, anicce niccaṃ, anattani attāti catūhi vipallāsehi. Indriyehīti saddhādīhi indriyehi. Saddhammeti paṭipattipaṭivedhasaddhamme. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Vitthāro pana hārasampāte (netti. 86-87) āgamissatīti.

Sīhavikkīḷitanayaniddeso niddiṭṭho, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo disālocananayaniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā –

20.

『『Veyyākaraṇesu hi ye, kusalākusalā tahiṃ tahiṃ vuttā.

Manasā volokayate, taṃ khu disālocanaṃ āhū』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. 『『Sīhalocanaṃ āhū』』ti pāṭho likhito, so pana na therassa pāṭhoti daṭṭhabbo bhinnalakkhaṇattā. Tattha tahiṃ tahiṃ veyyākaraṇesu ye kusalākusalā nayassa disābhūtā dhammā vuttā, te kusalākusale nayassa disābhūtadhamme abahi abbhantaraṃ citte eva yaṃ olokanaṃ karoti, taṃ olokanaṃ khu olokanaṃ eva disālocananti āhūti atthayojanā.

Tattha veyyākaraṇesūti tassa tassa atthanayassa yojanatthaṃ katesu suttassa atthavissajjanesu. Kusalāti vodāniyā. Akusalāti saṃkilesikā. Vuttāti suttato niddhāretvā kathitā. Olokayateti te kusalādidhamme citteneva 『『ayaṃ paṭhamā disā, ayaṃ dutiyā disā』』tiādinā tassa tassa nayassa disābhāvena upaparikkhati, vicāretīti attho. Khūti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto, tena disālocananayo koci atthaviseso na hotīti dassetīti.

1. Disālocananayaniddeso niddiṭṭho. Amhehi ca ñāto. 『『Katamo aṅkusanayaniddeso』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『oloketvā』』tiādigāthā vuttā. Tattha taṃtaṃnayadisābhūte sabbe kusalākusale disālocanena oloketvā ukkhipiya suttato uddharitvā yaṃ samāneti yaṃ samānayanaṃ karoti, ayaṃ samānayanasaṅkhāto nayo aṅkuso nayo nāmāti atthayojanā.

Ettha ca aṅkuso nāma hatthīnaṃ icchitaṭṭhānaṃ ānayanakāraṇabhūto vajirādimayo tikkhaggo ujuvaṅkabhūto dabbasambhāraviseso, ayampi nayo aṅkuso viyāti atthena aṅkuso. Etena hi nayena icchitaṃ suttatthaṃ nayatīti. Mukhyato pana aṅke vijjhanaṭṭhāne uddhaṭo asati anto pavisatīti aṅkuso. Aṅkasaddūpapadaupubbaasadhātu apaccayoti. Ayampi nayo kocipi atthaviseso na hotīti.

Soḷasa hāraniddesā ceva pañca nayaniddesā ca ācariyena niddiṭṭhā. Amhehi ca ñātā, 『『saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte kiṃ soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ yojetabbā, udāhu nayā』』ti pucchitabbattā –

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 19. "以諸顛倒引煩惱，以諸根引正法， 此道理諸知道理者，說為師子游戲。" 已說偈。此中何種註釋差別以經中所說諸顛倒引導煩惱染污分，以經中所說諸根引導正法清凈分，諸知道理者即正法道理通達者，或即義道理善巧者說此註釋差別為師子游戲道理，是義連結。 此中"以諸顛倒"即以不凈中凈、苦中樂、無常中常、無我中我四種顛倒。"以諸根"即以信等諸根。"于正法"即於行證正法。此中余如已說方式。然詳細將於行會合中來。 師子游戲道理解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為觀方道理解說"故： 20. "于諸解釋中，善不善於彼彼所說， 以意觀察，說彼為觀方。" 已說偈。寫作"說為師子觀察"，然應知彼非長老所誦，因相不符。此中於彼彼解釋中所說善不善為道理之方位諸法，對彼等善不善道理方位諸法非外而內唯於心中作何觀察，說彼觀察即觀察為觀方，是義連結。 此中"于諸解釋"即為連結彼彼義道理所作經義解答。"善"即清凈。"不善"即染污。"所說"即從經中確定而說。"觀察"即以心觀察彼等善等諸法"此為第一方位，此為第二方位"等以彼彼道理方位性，意即考察、思惟。"即"為限定義不變詞，由此顯示觀方道理非某義差別。 21.觀方道理解說已解說，我等亦已知，應問"何為鉤道理解說"故說"觀已"等偈。此中以觀方觀察一切善不善為彼彼道理方位已，舉起即從經中引出，作何引導即作何引導，此引導稱為道理名為鉤道理，是義連結。 此中鉤即為象引導至所欲處因的金剛等所成銳端直彎特殊器具，此道理如鉤故以義為鉤。因以此道理引導所欲經義故。然主要鉤即于肩上引出無內入，鉤字根上語詞是字首為鉤詞根阿音。此道理亦非某義差別。 十六行解說及五道理解說已為師所解說，我等亦已知，應問"于應註釋經中是否應先配合十六行，還是道理"故：

22.

『『Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disālocanato disā viloketvā.

Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tihi niddise sutta』』nti. –

Gāthamāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ hāre, naye ca niddisitvā idāni nesaṃ yojanakkamaṃ dassento 『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』ntiādimāhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 22) vuttaṃ. Tattha soḷasa hārā byañjanapariyeṭṭhibhāvato saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena paṭhamaṃ yojetabbā, yojentena niddiṭṭhā hārānukkameneva yojetabbā, na uppaṭipāṭiyā. Hārasaṃvaṇṇanānukkamena saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ saṃvaṇṇetvā pacchā disālocanena oloketvā aṅkusanayena netvā tīhi atthanayehi niddiseti adhippāyo.

Iti sattibalānurūpā racitā

Nayaniddesavibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Dvādasapadavibhāvanā

Nettivisayaṃ sāsanavarasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttaṃ yesaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ, atthapadānañca vasena 『『dvādasa padāni sutta』』nti saṅgahavāre vuttaṃ, 『『katamāni tānī』』ti pucchitabbattā sarūpato niddisituṃ –

23.

『『Akkharaṃ padaṃ byañjanaṃ, nirutti tatheva niddeso.

Ākārachaṭṭhavacanaṃ, ettāva byañjanaṃ sabbaṃ.

24.

Saṅkāsanā pakāsanā, vivaraṇā vibhajanuttānīkammapaññatti.

Etehi chahi padehi, attho kammañca niddiṭṭha』』nti. –

Gāthādvayaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『idāni yesaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ, atthapadānañca vasena 『dvādasa padāni 『sutta』nti vuttaṃ, tāni padāni niddisituṃ 『akkharapada』ntiādimāhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 23) vuttaṃ.

Tattha kenaṭṭhena akkharanti? Akkharaṭṭhena asañcaraṇaṭṭhena. Akārādivaṇṇo hi akārādito ikārādipariyāyaṃ nakkharati, na sañcarati, na saṅkamati. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ 『『apariyosite pade vaṇṇo akkharaṃ pariyāyavasena akkharaṇato asañcaraṇato』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 23). Apariyosite padeti ca vibhatyantabhāvaṃ appatte dviticatukkharavantesu padesu ekadvitikkharamatteyeva akkharaṃ nāma, pariyosite padaṃyeva, na akkharanti adhippāyo. Padaṃ pana pavesanato atthavasena pariyāyaṃ sañcarantaṃ viya hoti, na evaṃ akārādivaṇṇo avevacanattā. 『『Mā evaṃ maññasī』』tiādīsu vā ekakkharapadā mā-kārādi akkharaṃ nāma, vibhatyantaṃ padaṃ pana padameva hoti.

Pajjati attho etenāti padaṃ. Taṃ nāmākhyātopasagganipātappabhedena catubbidhaṃ. Tattha dabbapadhānaṃ 『『phasso vedanā citta』』nti evamādikaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Tattha hi dabbamāvibhūtarūpaṃ, kiriyā anāvibhūtarūpā. Kiriyāpadhānaṃ 『『phusati vedayati vijānātī』』ti evamādikaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ nāma. Tattha hi phusanādikiriyā āvibhūtarūpā, dabbamanāvibhūtarūpaṃ. Kiriyāvisesabodhahetubhūtaṃ pa-upa-itievamādikaṃ upasaggapadaṃ nāma. 『『Cirappavāsiṃ (dha. pa. 219) upavuttha』』nti (a. ni.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 22. "十六行先，從觀方觀察諸方， 以鉤總攝已，以三道理解說經。" 說此偈。然于註釋中說"如是解說諸行與諸道理已，今為顯示彼等配合次第而說'十六行先'等。"此中十六行因為語言探求性故，于應註釋經中以註釋性先應配合，配合時應依所說行次第配合，不應顛倒。依行註釋次第先註釋應註釋已，后以觀方觀察，以鉤道理引導，以三義道理解說，是意趣。 如是依能力所造。 道理解說顯明竟。 十二句顯明 對此方法領域即稱為勝教的應註釋經，以何等語言句與義句而於攝頌中說"十二句為經"，應問"彼等為何"故，為從自性解說： 23. "字、句、語言、訓詞、如是解說， 行相為第六語，至此一切語言。 24. 顯示、開顯、開解、分別、顯明、施設， 以此六句，義與業已解說。" 說此二偈。然于註釋中說"今為解說以何等語言句與義句而說'十二句為經'，彼等諸句而說'字句'等。" 此中以何義為字？以字義即不遷移義。因阿等音從阿等不至伊等變換，不遷移，不轉移。故於註釋中說"未完成句中音為字，因次第不字故不遷移故。" "未完成句中"即于未達語尾變化的二三四字尾句中僅一二三字量為字，完成則唯句，非字，是意趣。然句因趣入以義次第似乎遷移，阿等音不如是因無同義語故。或於"不應如是認為"等中，"不"等一字詞的"不"字等音名為字，而語尾變化句則唯為句。 由此了知義故為句。彼以名、動詞、接頭詞、不變詞差別為四種。此中以實體為主的"觸、受、心"等如是為名句。因此中實體為顯明相，作用為不顯明相。以作用為主的"觸、受、識知"等如是名為動詞句。因此中觸等作用為顯明相，實體為不顯明相。為作用差別知因的"前、近、如是"等如是名為接頭詞句。"久住離"、"住近"等

3.71; su. ni. 405) evamādīsu hi pa-upādisaddā vasanādikiriyāya viyogādivisiṭṭhataṃ dīpenti. Vacanattho pana nāmapadaākhyātapadadvayaṃ upagantvā tassa padadvayassa atthaṃ sajjantīti upasaggāti daṭṭhabbo. Kiriyāya ceva dabbassa ca sarūpavisesapakāsanahetubhūtaṃ 『『evaṃ, itī』』ti evamādikaṃ nipātapadaṃ assapi saṃvaṇṇanāyapi icchitattā, akkharena pana kathaṃ gahitoti ce? Akkharehi suyyamānehi suṇantānaṃ visesavidhānassa katattā padapariyosāne padatthasampaṭipatti hoti. Tasmā akkharenapi atthākāro gahitovāti veditabbo. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭetī』』ti (netti. 9) ca.

Vivaraṇā vitthāraṇā. Vibhajanā ca uttānīkammañca paññatti ca vibhajanuttānīkammapaññattīti samāhāre ayaṃ dvandasamāso. Tattha vibhāgakaraṇaṃ vibhajanaṃ nāma. Byañjanākārehi yo atthākāro niddisiyamāno, so atthākāro vivaraṇavibhajanāti dvīhi atthapadehi niddisito. Pākaṭakaraṇaṃ uttānīkammaṃ nāma. Pakārehi ñāpanaṃ paññatti. Niruttiniddesasaṅkhātehi byañjanapadehi pakāsiyamāno yo atthākāro atthi, so atthākāro uttānīkammapaññattīhi paṭiniddisito. Etehi saṅkāsanādīhi chahi atthapadehi attho suttattho gahito, kammañca ugghaṭanādikammañca niddiṭṭhanti attho. Yena suttatthena ugghaṭitaññuno cittasantānassa sambodhanakiriyāsaṅkhātassa ugghaṭanakammassa nibbatti bhave, so suttattho saṅkāsanāpakāsanākāro hoti. Yena suttatthena vipañcitaññuno cittasantānassa bodhanakiriyāsaṅkhātassa vipañcanakammassa nibbatti, so suttattho vivaraṇāvibhajanākāro hoti. Yena suttatthena neyyassa cittasantānassa pabodhanakiriyāsaṅkhātassa nayakammassa nibbatti, so suttattho uttānīkammapaññattākāro hotīti daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo 『『suttatthena hi desanāya pavattiyamānena ugghaṭitaññuādiveneyyānaṃ cittasantānassa pabodhanakiriyānibbatti, so ca suttattho saṅkāsanādiākāro』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 24).

『『Yathāvuttehi tīhi atthanayehi ceva chahi atthapadehi ca ayuttopi attho kiṃ koci atthi, udāhu sabbo attho yutto evā』』ti pucchitabbattā –

25.

『『Tīṇi ca nayā anūnā, atthassa ca chappadāni gaṇitāni.

Navahi padehi bhagavato, vacanassattho samāyutto』』ti. –

Gāthamāha. Tattha tīṇīti liṅgavipallāsaniddeso, tayoti pana pakatiliṅganiddeso vattabbo. Gaṇitā anūnā tayo atthassa nayā ca gaṇitāni anūnāni cha atthassa padāni ca niddiṭṭhāni, niddiṭṭhehi ca atthapadehi bhagavato vacanassa sabbo attho samāyuttova ayutto koci attho natthīti yojanā kātabbā. Atthassāti suttatthassa. Nayāti nettiatthanayā. Padānīti nettiatthapadāni.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 因於此等中，前近等詞顯示住等作用的離合等差別。然語義應知接頭詞為趨近名句動詞句二者，結合彼二句之義。為作用及實體自性差別顯示因的"如是、這樣"等如是為不變詞句，因欲求對此及其註釋，然問以字如何攝取？由所聞諸字對聞者作差別規定故，于句終有句義通達。故應知以字亦攝取義相。故說"以諸字顯示,以諸句開顯,以諸字及諸句揭示"。 開解即廣解。分別與顯明及施設為分別顯明施設,此為聚合雙重複合詞。此中作分別名為分別。以諸語言相而解說的義相,彼義相以開解分別二義句解說。作明顯名為顯明。以諸方式令知為施設。以訓詞解說稱為語言句而開顯的義相有,彼義相以顯明施設對應解說。以此等顯示等六義句攝取義即經義,及解說業即揭示等業,是義。由何經義生起利根者相續心的覺悟作用稱為揭示業,彼經義為顯示開顯相。由何經義生起中根者相續心的覺悟作用稱為開解業,彼經義為開解分別相。由何經義生起鈍根者相續心的覺悟作用稱為引導業,彼經義為顯明施設相,應如是見。故註釋師說"因以經義而轉起說時,生起利根等所化者相續心的覺悟作用,彼經義為顯示等相"。 應問"如所說三義道理及六義句,有何不相應義,還是一切義皆相應"故： 25. "三道理無減,及義之六句已數, 以九句世尊,語義已相應。" 說此偈。此中"三"為性別變異解說,然應說"三"為本性別解說。已數無減三義道理及已數無減六義句已解說,及以所說義句世尊語一切義已相應,無不相應義,應如是作連結。"之義"即經義。"道理"即方法義道理。"句"即方法義句。

1. Ye hārādayo niddiṭṭhā, te hārādayo sampiṇḍetvā nettippakaraṇassa padatthe sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ gaṇanavasena paricchinditvā dassento 『『atthassā』』tiādimāha. Tattha atthassa samūhassa avayavabhūtāni navabhedāni atthapadāni suttabyañjanassa atthassa pariyeṭṭhisaṅkhātāya saṃvaṇṇanāya gaṇanato catuvīsati byañjanapadāni honti, atthapadabyañjanapadabhūtaṃ ubhayaṃ saṅkhepayato sampiṇḍayato tettiṃsā tettiṃsavidhā ettikā tettiṃsavidhāva nettīti yojanā.

Tattha navappadānīti tayo atthanayā, cha atthapadāni ca. Catubbīsāti soḷasa hārā, cha byañjanapadāni, dve disālocananayaaṅkusanayā cāti evaṃ tettiṃsavidhā ca netti nāma, ito vinimutto añño koci nettipadattho natthīti attho daṭṭhabbo.

『『Evaṃ tettiṃsapadatthāya nettiyā hāranayānaṃ katamo desanāhāravicayahāro』』tiādi desanākkameneva siddho, evaṃ siddhe satipi 『『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』』nti ārambho 『『sabbepime hārā ceva nayā ca iminā dassitakkameneva saṃvaṇṇetabbesu suttesu saṃvaṇṇanāvasena yojetabbā, na uppaṭipāṭiyā』』ti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Dīpanavacanasavanānusārena ñāpeti, tasmā evaṃ kamo dassito, assādādīnavanissaraṇāni dhammadesanāya nissayāni, phalañca dhammadesanāya phalaṃ, upāyo ca dhammadesanāya upāyo, āṇatti ca dhammadesanāya sarīraṃ. Desanāhārassa tāsaṃ assādādīnavanissaraṇaphalupāyāṇattīnaṃ vibhāvanasabhāvattā.

Niddhāraṇena vināpi pakatiyā sabbasaṃvaṇṇetabbasuttesu anarūpāti suviññeyyattā, saṃvaṇṇanāvisesānaṃ vicayahārādīnaṃ nissayabhāvato ca paṭhamaṃ desanāhāro dassito.

Padapucchāvissajjanāpucchāpadānugītīhi saddhiṃ desanāhārapadatthānaṃ assādādīnaṃ pavicayabhāvato desanāhārānantaraṃ vicayo hāro.

Vicayahārena pavicitānaṃ atthānaṃ yuttāyuttivicāraṇabhāvato vicayahārānantaraṃ yutti hāro.

Padaṭṭhānahārassa yuttāyuttānaṃyeva atthānaṃ upapattianurūpaṃ kāraṇaparamparāya niddhāraṇattā yuttihārānantaraṃ padaṭṭhānahāro.

Yuttāyuttānaṃ kāraṇaparamparāya pariggahitasabhāvānaṃyeva ca dhammānaṃ avuttānampi samānalakkhaṇatāya gahaṇalakkhaṇattāya padaṭṭhānahārānantaraṃ lakkhaṇahāro.

Lakkhaṇahārena atthato suttantarato niddhāritānampi dhammānaṃ nibbacanādīni vattabbāni, na sutte sarūpato āgatadhammānaṃyevāti dassanatthaṃ lakkhaṇahārānantaraṃ catubyūho hāro. Evañhi niravasesato atthāvabodho hoti.

Catubyūhena hārena vuttehi nibbacanādhippāyanidānehi saddhiṃ sutte padatthānaṃ suttantarasaṃsandanasaṅkhāte pubbāparavicāre dassite tesaṃ suttapadatthānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammantarāvaṭṭanaṃ sukhena sakkā dassetunti catubyūhahārānantaraṃ āvaṭṭo hāro. Suttantarasaṃsandanassa hi sabhāgavisabhāgadhammantarāvaṭṭanayassa upāyabhāvato 『『ārambhatha nikkamathā』』tiādigāthāya (saṃ. ni.

這是一段巴利語復注的內容，我嘗試翻譯如下：

"爲了便於理解《導論》的詞義，將前述的方法等綜合起來，通過計數來限定，因此說'義的'等。其中，作為義的總集的組成部分的九種義支，以及在解釋經文字句義理時所計數的二十四種文句支，當把這兩種義支和文句支簡要合計時，就是三十三種，即《導論》的三十三種方法。

其中'九支'指三種義理和六種義支。'二十四'指十六種方法、六種文句支，以及方向觀察法和鉤索法兩種，這樣共三十三種稱為導論，除此之外再沒有其他導論的內容。

雖然'三十三種內容的導論中的方法和理趨中哪個是教說方法探究'等是按照教說順序成立的，但即便如此，仍以'十六種方法為先'開始，這是爲了表明'所有這些方法和理趨都應當按照所示順序用於經文註釋，不應顛倒'的意思。

根據這種顯示言說的聽聞，教法開示是基於味著、過患、出離等，而果是教法開示的結果，方便是教法開示的方便，教誡是教法開示的主體。這是因為教說方法具有顯示這些味著、過患、出離、果、方便、教誡的本質。

即使不特別指出，在一般需要註釋的經文中也很容易理解，而且因為是各種特殊註釋如探究方法等的基礎，所以首先顯示教說方法。

因為它與詞句詢問、解答詢問、隨誦等一起，對教說方法內容如味著等進行探究，所以在教說方法之後是探究方法。

因為探究方法所探究的義理需要考察其合理與否，所以在探究方法之後是理趣方法。

因為立足點方法是對已確定合理與否的義理，按照生起的適當性來確定因果關係鏈，所以在理趣方法之後是立足點方法。

因為對已通過因果關係鏈確定本質的諸法，即使未說出的也因相同特徵而領會，這種把握特徵的性質，所以在立足點方法之後是特相方法。

雖然特相方法已從義理和經文中確定了諸法，但詞源解釋等還需要說明，而不僅限於經中明確出現的法，爲了顯示這點，所以在特相方法之後是四展方法。這樣就能完全理解義理。

當四展方法通過詞源解釋、意趣和因緣等，顯示經文中詞義的前後考察即經文對照后，就容易顯示這些經文詞義的同分異分法類轉變，所以在四展方法之後是轉變方法。因為經文對照是同分異分法類轉變的方便。"

1.185; netti. 29; peṭako. 38) ārambhananikkamanabuddhasāsanayogadhunanehi vīriyasamādhipaññindriyāni niddhāretvā tesu ārambhananikkamanabuddhasāsanayogadhunanesu ananuyogassa mūlaṃ pamādoti suttantare dassito pamādo āvaṭṭitoti.

Āvaṭṭena hārena sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanena payojite sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇavasena saṃkilesavodānadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānato ceva bhūmito ca vibhāgo sakkā sukhena yojetunti āvaṭṭahārānantaraṃ vibhatti hāro.

Vibhattihārena saṃkilesavodānadhammānaṃ vibhāge kate saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte āgatā dhammā akasirena paṭipakkhato parivattetuṃ sakkāti vibhattihārānantaraṃ parivattanahāro. Vibhattihārena hi 『『sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hotī』』ti (netti. 35) paṭivibhattasabhāve eva dhamme parivattanahāravibhaṅge udāharīyissati.

Parivattanahārena paṭipakkhato parivattitāpi dhammā pariyāyavacanehi bodhetabbā, na saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte āgatadhammāyevāti dassanatthaṃ parivattanahārānantaraṃ vevacanahāro.

Vevacanahārena pariyāyato pakāsitānaṃ dhammānaṃ pabhedato paññattivasena vibhajanaṃ sukhena sakkā ñātunti vevacanahārānantaraṃ paññatti hāro.

Paññattihārena pabhavapariññādipaññattivibhāgamukhena paṭiccasamuppādasaccādidhammavibhāge kate sutte āgatadhammānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādādimukhena avataraṇaṃ sakkā dassetunti paññattihārānantaraṃ otaraṇo hāro.

Otaraṇena hārena dhātāyatanādīsu otāritānaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte padatthānaṃ pucchārambhasodhanaṃ sakkā sukhena sampādetunti otaraṇahārānantaraṃ sodhano hāro.

Sodhanena hārena saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte padapadatthesu visodhitesu tattha tattha ekattatāya vā vemattatāya vā labbhamānasāmaññavisesabhāvo sukaro hotīti dassetuṃ sodhanahārānantaraṃ adhiṭṭhāno hāro.

Sāmaññavisesabhūtesu sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇesu dhammesu adhiṭṭhānena hārena paveditesu parikkhārasaṅkhātassa sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇarūpassa paccayaheturāsissa pabhedo suviññeyyoti adhiṭṭhānahārānantaraṃ parikkhāro hāro.

Asādhāraṇe, sādhāraṇe ca kāraṇe parikkhārena hārena dassite tassa attano phalesu kāraṇākāro, tesaṃ hetuphalānaṃ pabhedato desanākāro, bhāvetabbapahātabbadhammānaṃ bhāvanāpahānāni ca niddhāretvā vuccamānāni sammā saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttassa atthaṃ tathattāvabodhāya saṃvattantīti parikkhārahārānantaraṃ samāropano hāro dassito hoti. Idaṃ hārānaṃ dassanānukkamakāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 在"精進吧!奮進吧!"等偈中,通過精進、奮進、修習佛教、搖動而確定精進、定、慧根,于彼等精進、奮進、修習佛教、搖動中,放逸為不修習之根,故在另一經中顯示的放逸被轉起。 以轉起行顯示同分異分法轉起后,容易依共不共方式配合染凈諸法從足處及地的分別,故轉起行之後為分別行。 以分別行作染凈諸法分別已,容易從對立面轉換應註釋經中所來諸法,故分別行之後為轉換行。因以分別行將在轉換行分別中舉例"正見補特伽羅之邪見已被斷"等已分別自性諸法。 以轉換行從對立面轉換的諸法亦應以異語詞令知,非僅應註釋經中所來諸法,為顯示此義故轉換行之後為同義語行。 以同義語行從異門顯示諸法后,容易從差別以施設方式了知分別,故同義語行之後為施設行。 以施設行通過生起遍知等施設分別門作緣起諦等法分別已,容易顯示經中所來諸法以緣起等門趣入,故施設行之後為趣入行。 以趣入行令趣入界處等中應註釋經中句義后,容易成就問題開始凈化,故趣入行之後為凈化行。 以凈化行凈化應註釋經中句句義已,易顯示彼處彼處以一性或異性所得共相別相性,故凈化行之後為確立行。 以確立行宣說共不共諸法中的共相別相已,稱為資具的共不共形態因緣聚之差別易了知,故確立行之後為資具行。 以資具行顯示不共與共因后,其因在自果中之因相,彼等因果從差別之說相,及應修應斷諸法之修斷,確定而說正確趣向通達應註釋經義之如實性,故資具行之後顯示歸結行。應如是見此諸行顯示次第之因。

Uddeso ugghaṭitaññuno upakārāya saṃvattati yathā, evaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭanayo ugghaṭitaññuno upakārāya saṃvattati, tasmā paṭhamaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭanayo dassito. Niddeso vipañcitaññuno upakārāya saṃvattati yathā, evaṃ tipukkhalanayo vipañcitaññuno upakārāya saṃvattati, tasmā nandiyāvaṭṭanayānantaraṃ tipukkhalanayo. Paṭiniddeso neyyassa upakārāya saṃvattati yathā, evaṃ sīhavikkīḷitanayo neyyassa upakārāya saṃvattati . Tasmā tipukkhalānantaraṃ sīhavikkīḷitanayo dassitoti tiṇṇaṃ atthanayānaṃ dassanānukkamo veditabbo. Atthanayānaṃ disābhūtāya bhūmiyā āloketvā tesaṃ tassā disāya bhūmiyā samānayanaṃ hoti. Na hi sakkā anoloketvā samānetunti disālocananayaṃ dassetvā aṅkusanayo dassito. Potthakāruḷhāvachekā sabbāsu disāsu hatthigamanaṭṭhānaṃ oloketvā aṅkusena icchitaṭṭhānaṃ samānayanti. Keci acchekā anoloketvā vinayanti. Tesaṃ nayanamattameva, na samānayanaṃ. Evameva paṇḍitā suttatthaṃ vaṇṇentā manasāva oloketvāva nayā netabbāti daṭṭhabbā.

Samuṭṭhānasaṃvaṇṇanā adhippāyasaṃvaṇṇanā padatthasaṃvaṇṇanā vidhianuvādasaṃvaṇṇanā nigamanasaṃvaṇṇanāti vā, payojanasaṃvaṇṇanā piṇḍatthasaṃvaṇṇanā anusandhisaṃvaṇṇanā codanāsaṃvaṇṇanā parihārasaṃvaṇṇanāti vā, upogghāṭasaṃvaṇṇanā padaviggahasaṃvaṇṇanā padatthacālanasaṃvaṇṇanā paccupaṭṭhānasaṃvaṇṇanāti vā, tathā ekanāḷikākathā caturassakathā nisinnavattikākathāti vā āgatā.

Tattha samuṭṭhānaṃ nidānameva. Vidhianuvādo visesavacanameva. Upogghāṭo nidānameva. Cālanā codanāyeva. Paccupaṭṭhānaṃ parihārova.

Pāḷiṃ vatvā ekekapadassa atthakathanasaṅkhātā saṃvaṇṇanā ekanāḷikākathā nāma.

Paṭipakkhaṃ dassetvā paṭipakkhassa upamaṃ dassetvā sapakkhaṃ dassetvā sapakkhassa upamaṃ dassetvā kathanasaṅkhātā saṃvaṇṇanā caturassakathā nāma.

Visabhāgadhammavaseneva pariyosānaṃ gantvā puna sabhāgadhammavaseneva pariyosānagamanasaṅkhātā saṃvaṇṇanā nisinnavattikākathā nāma.

Tā sabbā saṃvaṇṇanāyopi desanāhārādīsu nettisaṃvaṇṇanāsu antogadhāyeva. Tenāha 『『yattakā hi suttassa saṃvaṇṇanāvisesā, sabbe te nettiupadesāyattā』』ti. Evaṃ ettāvatā etaparamatā daṭṭhabbā . Hetuphalabhūmiupanisāsabhāgavisabhāgalakkhaṇanayādayo pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 4 dvādasapada) vitthārato vuttāti na vitthārayissāmīti.

Iti sattibalānurūpā racitā

Niddesavāraatthavibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

1. Paṭiniddesavāraatthavibhāvanā

2. Desanāhāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 如列舉有益於利根者，如是轉起道理有益於利根者，故先顯示轉起道理。如解說有益於中根者，如是三蓮道理有益於中根者，故轉起道理之後為三蓮道理。如對應解說有益於鈍根者，如是師子游戲道理有益於鈍根者，故三蓮之後顯示師子游戲道理，應如是了知三義道理顯示次第。觀察為諸義道理之方位地后，彼等於彼方位地有引導。因不觀察不能引導，故顯示觀方道理后顯示鉤道理。熟練的象師於一切方位觀察象行處后以鉤引導至所欲處。某些不熟練者不觀察而引導。彼等唯引導，非引導至處。如是諸智者註釋經義時應以意觀察而後引導諸道理，應如是見。 或起源註釋、意趣註釋、句義註釋、規則隨說註釋、結論註釋，或目的註釋、總義註釋、關聯註釋、質問註釋、解釋註釋，或引導註釋、語詞分析註釋、句義推動註釋、現起註釋，或如是單管說、四方說、迴環說等已來。 此中起源即因緣。規則隨說即特殊語。引導即因緣。推動即質問。現起即解釋。 說聖典后解說每一句義稱為註釋名為單管說。 顯示對立面后，顯示對立面之譬喻，顯示同分后，顯示同分之譬喻而說稱為註釋名為四方說。 唯以異分法而至結束后，復以同分法而至結束稱為註釋名為迴環說。 彼等一切註釋亦攝入于說法行等方法註釋中。故說"凡經之註釋差別，一切依止方法教導"。如是至此應見此為最上。然因果地近依共不共相道理等於註釋中已廣說故我們不廣說。 如是依能力所造 解說分解說義顯明竟。 4. 對應解說分義顯明 1. 說法行分別顯明

1. Evaṃ hārādayo sarūpato ācariyena uddesato uddiṭṭhā, niddesato ca niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, atha kasmā puna 『『tattha katamo desanāhāro』』tiādiko āraddhoti ce? Veneyyānaṃ tividhattā. Veneyyā hi atitikkhapañño nātitikkhapañño mandapaññoti tividhā honti. Tesañhi atitikkhapaññassānurūpaṃ hārādayo uddesato uddiṭṭhā, nātitikkhapaññassa anurūpaṃ niddesato niddiṭṭhā, idāni mandapaññassānurūpaṃ hārādayo vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『『tattha katamo desanāhāro』』tiādiko vibhaṅgavāro āraddho. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ hārādayosukhaggahaṇatthaṃ gāthābandhavasena sarūpato niddisitvā idāni tesu hāre tāva paṭiniddesavasena vibhajituṃ 『tattha katamo desanāhāro』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttaṃ.

Tattha ye hārādayo uddesaniddesesu niddiṭṭhā, tattha hārādīsu katamo desanāhāroti ce? Yā 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthā (netti. 4) vuttā, sā ayaṃ gāthā niddesavasena desanāhāro nāma, tassa 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādi (netti. 4) niddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatī』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhāravibhaṅgo nāmāti yojanā. 『『Ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatī』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā 『『imaṃ desayatī』』ti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayati? Assādaṃ ādīnava』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatīti ce ? Assādaṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāreti, ādīnavaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, nissaraṇaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, phalaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, upāyaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, āṇattiṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāretīti yojano.

Ettha ca 『『ayaṃ desanāhāro』』ti saddo pubbāparāpekkhoti daṭṭhabbo. 『『『Assādādīnavatā』tiādigāthāyaṃ (netti. 4) dassitā ime assādādayo kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe pāḷidhamme āgatā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『『Assādādīnavatā』tiādigāthāyaṃ (netti. 4) dassitā ime assādādayo kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe pāḷidhamme āgatā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsessāmī』』ti paṭiññātabbe pāḷidhamme saṃvaṇṇetabbe ye assādādayo āgatā, te ayaṃ desanāhāro desayatīti adhippāyo.

Tattha dhammasaddo pariyattisaccasamādhipaññāpakatipuññāpattiñeyyādīsu bahūsu atthesu pavatto, tathāpi idha pariyattidhammeyeva pavattoti daṭṭhabbo. Atthuddeso pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vutto, tasmā idha mayā na vutto. Vo-kāropi upayogakaraṇapadapūraṇasampadānatthesu dissati ca, tathāpi idha sampadānatthevāti daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhanti yācanti sīlakkhandhādayo, paccaye vā kāyaviññattiyāti bhikkhū, saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhanti paccavekkhantīti vā bhikkhū. Bhikkhaveti te bhikkhū ālapati, kimatthāyāti attano mukhābhimukhaṃ katvā dhammassavane atiussāhane niyojetuṃ ālapatīti veditabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 如是諸行相從本質由阿阇梨從列舉處已列舉，從解說處已解說，由我等已了知，今為何復又說"於此何為說法行"等開始呢？因學人有三種差別。學人實為有忍慧、非有忍慧、鈍慧三種。對於有忍慧者相應諸行從列舉處已列舉，對於非有忍慧者不相應從解說處已解說，今為鈍慧者相應諸行分別顯示，故說"於此何為說法行"等分別處已開始。于註釋中復說："如是諸行為易取故，以偈頌形式從本質已解說，今于彼等行中首先以對應解說方式分別，'於此何為說法行'等已開始。" 於此諸行於列舉解說中已解說，于諸行中何為說法行？謂"味等過失"等偈已說，此偈以解說方式名為說法行，彼"味等過失"等解說今由我說"此說法行說何法"等廣說註釋差別名為說法行分別。"此說法行說何法"應被問故，置問后"說此"已限定顯示："此說法行說何法？味、過失"等已說。於此說法行說何法？說味、讚歎、廣說，說過失、廣說，說出離、廣說，說果、廣說，說方便、廣說，說教令、讚歎、廣說。 於此"此說法行"之語應知為前後相依。"味等過失"等偈中已顯示此味等在何處應讚歎聖典法，故說"諸比丘，我將說法"等。"味等過失"等偈中已顯示此味等在何處應讚歎聖典法，故說"諸比丘，我將說法：初善、中善、終善，有義、有文，圓滿、清凈梵行我將顯示"，應讚歎聖典法中所來味等，此說法行說之，是其意趣。 於此法之語在多種義中流轉，謂學習、諦、定、慧、善業、應得等，然此處應知唯于學習法中流轉。義解釋于註釋中已說，故此處我未說。"汝"之語于使用、作業、句子充滿、與格等處可見，然此處應知唯于與格義。"比丘"謂乞求、戒蘊等，或於相續、身表業。或謂于輪迴中見怖畏、觀察。"諸比丘"謂呼喚彼等比丘，為何義？為使自面向開示，於法聽聞生極歡喜而勸誘，應如是了知。

Dhammaṃ desessāmīti nāhaṃ issaratāya tumhe aññaṃ kiñci kāreyyāmi, dhammaṃyeva desessāmi, desento ca na aññesaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā sutamayañāṇānusārena desessāmi, anāvaraṇañāṇena sabbañeyyadhammesu paccakkhakāritāya idāni mayāyeva pavattiyamānaṃ dhammaṃ ahaṃ desessāmīti paṭijānāti. Ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ ādikalyāṇaṃ, ādi kalyāṇametassāti vā ādikalyāṇaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ādikalyāṇādayo cettha atthakalyāṇādivasena vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha – 『『sīlena ādikalyāṇaṃ, samādhinā majjhekalyāṇaṃ, paññāya pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Buddhasubuddhatāya vā ādikalyāṇaṃ, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇaṃ, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Atha vā ugghaṭitaññuvinayanena ādikalyāṇaṃ, vipañcitaññuvinayanena majjhekalyāṇaṃ, neyyapuggalavinayanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).

Arīyati ñāyatīti attho, ara-dhātuyā nippariyāyato ñāṇappadhāno ārammaṇikacittuppādo attho, ṭhānūpacārato atthassa ñātabbassa ārammaṇapaccayasatti attho, iti-saddena sāyeva satti parāmasīyati, ārammaṇapaccayasattisahito ārammaṇapaccayasaṅkhāto ñātabbo attho ta-paccayassa atthoti dhātupaccayānaṃ atthaviseso daṭṭhabbo. Asati bhavatīti vā attho, saha atthena yo dhammo vattatīti so dhammo sāttho, atthena samannāgato vā dhammo sāttho, saṅkāsanādichaatthapadasamāyogato vā sāttho. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto nettivisayattā. Sampannaṃ byañjanaṃ yassa dhammassāti sabyañjano. Sithiladhanitadīgharassagarulahusambandhavavatthitavimuttaniggahitasampannattā , akārantādiitthiliṅgādiekavacanādisampannattā, pamādalekhādirahitattā ca avayavo sampanno taṃsamūhattā dhammo sampannabyañjano nāma, akkharādichabyañjanapadasamāyogā vā sabyañjano. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto. Imasmiṃ ayaṃ ūno, so netabbo pakkhipitabboti upanetabbābhāvato kevalaparipuṇṇo, sīlakkhandhasamādhikkhandhapaññākkhandha- vimuttikkhandhavimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhapāripūriyā vā kevalaparipuṇṇo. Idhāyaṃ atireko, so apanetabboti vatvā apanetabbābhāvato parisuddho, caturoghanittharaṇatthāya, lokāmisanirapekkhatāya pavattiyamānattā vā parisuddho. Seṭṭhattā brahmacariyaṃ, brahmānaṃ vā seṭṭhānaṃ ariyānaṃ cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, pabbajjabrahmacariyamaggabrahmacariyasāsanabrahmacariyādīsu sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ pakāsayissāmi, paridīpayissāmīti attho.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "我將說法"意為我不以主宰性令你們作其他什麼，我唯說法，說時不是聽聞他人之法隨聞所成智而說，以無障礙智於一切所知法中現見作用，我將說現在由我轉起之法，如是許諾。初善，即初是善，或初有善故初善。于其餘處亦如是方式。此中初善等應知依義善等方式而說。故說："以戒為初善，以定為中善，以慧為終善。或以佛善覺性為初善，以法善法性為中善，以僧善行為終善。或以引導利根者為初善，以引導中根者為中善，以引導鈍根者為終善。此處正是此義。" "所了知"即義，阿拉根由無譬喻以智為主導的所緣心生為義，由處假說對應了知的所緣緣力為義，以"此"字攝取彼所緣緣力，俱所緣緣力名為所緣緣所應知義為"它"綴義，應如是見根綴義差別。或"無"而"有"為義，與義俱轉之法為有義，或具足義之法為有義，或由具足顯示等六義句為有義。此處正是此義因為是方法境界。完滿語言者名為有語言。因具足寬鬆齒音長短重輕結合確立解脫鼻音，具足阿音等女性等單數等，離誤寫等故支分完滿，法因彼聚合名為完滿語言，或由具足字等六語言句為有語言。此處正是此義。於此此缺，彼應引導應加入,因無應引導故為完全圓滿，或因戒蘊、定蘊、慧蘊、解脫蘊、解脫知見蘊圓滿故為完全圓滿。此中此過多，彼應除去，因說無應除去故為清凈，或因為渡四暴流，因轉起離世俗貪著故為清凈。因最勝故為梵行，或因是勝者諸聖者之行為梵行，于出家梵行、道梵行、教法梵行等中我將顯示教法梵行，我將照明，是其意趣。

『『Dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi…pe… pakāsessāmī』』ti paṭiññātabbe pāḷidhamme āgate assādādayo desanāhāro desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāretīti ācariyena sāmaññavaseneva vuttaṃ, tasmā desanāhāro idha pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ imaṃ assādaṃ desayati, idha pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ imaṃ ādīnavaṃ desayatītiādi viseso na viññātabbo, 『『kathaṃ viññātabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『idha pāḷiyaṃ āgato ayaṃ assādo, idha pāḷiyaṃ āgato ayaṃ ādīnavo』』ti visesaṃ niyametvā upalakkhaṇanayena dassetuṃ 『『tattha katamo assādo? Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu visayavisayibhedesu assādesu katamo assādo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –

『『Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa cetaṃ samijjhati;

Addhā pītimano hoti, laddhā macco yadicchatī』』ti. (su. ni. 772; mahāni. 1) –

Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo visayabhūto assādo āgato, so ayaṃ assādetabbo assādo desanāhārassa visayoti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Evaṃ bhagavatā desito, pakāsito ca sāsanadhammo yesaṃ assādādīnaṃ dassanavasena pavatto, te assādādayo desanāhārassa visayabhūtā yattha yattha pāṭhe savisesaṃ vuttā, tato tato niddhāretvā udāharaṇavasena idhānetvā dassetuṃ 『tattha katamo assādo』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttaṃ.

Tattha assādīyateti assādo, assādetabbo vatthukāmo. Kāmīyateti kāmo, vatthukāmo ca. Taṃ kāmayatīti kāmayamāno, satto. Tassa pītiyā yuttaṃ mano etassāti pītimano. Manati jānātītiādivacanatthena macco. Kāmaṃ kāmitabbaṃ vatthu kāmayamānassa tassa sattassa etaṃ kāmitabbaṃ vatthu sace samijjhati, evaṃ sati so satto addhā pītimano hoti. Yo macco yaṃ vatthuṃ icchati, taṃ vatthuṃ so macco laddhā addhā pītimano hotīti gāthāyattho daṭṭhabbo.

『『Kāmaṃ …pe… pītimano hotī』』ti ettakameva avatvā 『『laddhā macco yadicchatī』』ti vuttattā lobhanīyaṃ vatthuṃyeva laddhā pītimano na hoti, atha kho patthetabbaṃ pūjetabbanti sabbaṃ laddhā macco pītimano ca hotīti atirekattho daṭṭhabbo.

Visayabhūto assādetabbo assādo idha pāḷiyaṃ gāthāyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『dukkhadomanassādibhedesu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo kattha pāḷidhamme āgato』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo ādīnavo? Tassa ce kāmayānassā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu dukkhadomanassādīsu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –

『『Tassa ce kāmayānassa, chandajātassa jantuno;

Te kāmā parihāyanti, sallaviddhova ruppatī』』ti. (su. ni. 773; mahāni. 2) –

Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo āgato, so ayaṃ domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo desanāhārassa visayoti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "諸比丘，我將說法...我將顯示"，對於應許諾聖典法中所來味等，說法行說、讚歎、廣說，由阿阇梨以通常方式如是說，故說法行此處於聖典所來此味說，此處於聖典所來此過失說等差別不應了知，因"如何應了知"應被問故，限定差別"此處聖典所來此味，此處聖典所來此過失"，以暗示方式顯示，故開始"於此何為味？欲求欲者"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所說諸境能境差別味中何味於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "欲求欲者，若彼此成就； 確實心喜悅，得人所欲求。" 此處聖典偈中所來為境之味，此為應味之味為說法行之境。于註釋中復說： "如是世尊所說、所顯示教法,由顯示味等而轉起,彼等味等為說法行之境,于諸經文處特別所說,從彼處確定而以譬喻方式引來此處顯示,故開始'於此何為味'等。" 於此"被味著"為味,應味之事欲。"被欲求"為欲,及事欲。"欲求彼"為欲求者,有情。"此有喜悅相應心"為喜悅心。以"知"等語義為人。欲求應欲求事物之彼有情,彼應欲求事物若成就,如是彼有情確實成為喜悅心。若人慾求何事物,彼人得彼事物確實成為喜悅心,應如是見偈義。 不僅說"欲...喜悅心"而說"得人所欲求"故,不僅得可貪事物成為喜悅心,而且得一切應欲求應供奉而成為喜悅心,應如是見增上義。 為境之應味味此處於聖典偈中所來,由阿阇梨已分別,由我等已知,"于苦憂等差別過失中何過失於何聖典法所來"應問故,開始"於此何為過失?若彼欲求者"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所說苦憂等過失中何過失於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "若彼欲求者，生欲求之人； 彼等欲失去，如箭所傷苦。" 此處聖典偈中所來名為憂之過失，此名為憂之過失為說法行之境。

Gāthāyaṃ pana kāmayati icchatīti kāmayāno. Atha vā yāyati gacchatīti yāno, kāmena yāno kāmayāno, tassa. Chando jāto yassa so chandajāto, tassa. Vijjhīyateti viddho, sallati pavisatīti sallo, sallena viddho sallaviddho. Kāmaṃ kāmayānassa chandajātassa jantuno ye kāmā labhitabbā, te kāmā kenaci antarāyena yadā parihāyanti, tadā so jantu ruppati. Kīdisova ruppati? Ayomayasallaviddho migo ruppati iva, parihīnakāmo jantu ruppatīti daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca 『『ruppatī』』tivacanena domanassuppatti dassitāti daṭṭhabbā.

Domanassabhūto ādīnavo idha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『magganibbānavasena duvidhesu nissaraṇesu katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgata』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Yo kāme parivajjetī』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu magganibbānavasena duvidhesu nissaraṇesu katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –

『『Yo kāme parivajjeti, sappasseva padā siro;

Somaṃ visattikaṃ loke, sato samativattatī』』ti. (su. ni. 774; mahāni. 3) –

Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ āgataṃ, taṃ idaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ nissaraṇaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.

Gāthāyaṃ yoti jhānalābhī vā ariyo vā. Kāmeti vuttappakāro vatthukāmo. Tesu pavattachandarāgassa vikkhambhanena vā samucchindanena vā parivajjeti. Kiṃ parivajjeti iva vajjeti? Sappassa siro siraṃ cakkhumā puriso disvā padā pādena parivajjeti iva, evaṃ parivajjeti. Sato satisampanno so puggalo loke rūpādīsu visattikaṃ imaṃ taṇhaṃ yena maggena samativattati saṃ suṭṭhu atikkamitvā vattati, idaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ ekadesaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāmāti yojetabbaṃ. 『『Pādā』』ti vattabbe ākārassa rassaṃ katvā 『『padā』』ti vuttaṃ. Pādāti ca pādena yathā 『『amohabhāvā amohabhāvenā』』ti. Tena vuttaṃ 『『attano pādenā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).

Ekadeso visayasaṅkhāto assādo idha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『ekadeso visayisaṅkhāto assādo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tatthakatamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu』』ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā 『『tattha katamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu』』ntiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu 『『tattha katamo assādo? Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā』』tiādinā assādo vibhatto? Saccaṃ, assādo pana duvidho visayavisayivasena, tasmiṃ visayasaṅkhāto assādo pubbe vibhatto, idāni visayisaṅkhātaṃ assādaṃ vibhajituṃ 『『tattha katamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu』』ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu visayavisayibhedesu assādesu katamo assādo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –

『『Khettaṃ vatthuṃ hiraññaṃ vā, gavāssaṃ dāsaporisaṃ;

Thiyo bandhū puthū kāme, yo naro anugijjhatī』』ti. (su. ni. 775; mahāni. 4) –

Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo anugijjhanasaṅkhāto assādo āgato, so ayaṃ anugijjhanasaṅkhāto visayiassādo desanāhārassa visayoti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 于偈中"欲求即希望"為欲求者。或"前進即去"為前進，以欲前進為欲求者，彼之。"生欲求者"為彼。"被穿刺"為被傷，"刺入"為箭，被箭所傷為箭所傷。欲求欲、生欲求之人應得諸欲，彼等諸欲由某障礙若失去，則彼人苦惱。如何苦惱？如被鐵箭所傷之鹿苦惱，失欲之人苦惱，應如是見。於此應見以"苦惱"之語顯示憂生起。 憂為過失此處於聖典所來，由阿阇梨已分別，由我等已知，"于道、涅槃二種出離中何出離於何聖典法所來"應問故，開始"於此何為出離？誰避諸欲"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所說道、涅槃二種出離中何出離於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "誰能避諸欲，如足避蛇首； 彼具念超越，世間此貪著。" 此處聖典偈中所來名為超越作用道之出離，此名為超越作用道之出離為說法行之境。 于偈中"誰"為得禪者或聖者。"諸欲"為所說事欲。于彼等轉起欲貪以鎮伏或斷除而避。如何避？如具眼者見蛇首以足避之，如是避。具念彼人於世間色等中此貪著，以彼道超越、善超越已轉起，此名為道之超越作用一分出離，應如是配合。應說"以足"而作短音說"以"。"以足"即以足如"由無癡性即以無癡性"。故說"以自足"。 一分名為境之味此處於聖典所來，由阿阇梨已分別，由我等已知，"一分名為能境之味於何聖典法所來"應問故，開始"於此何為味？田地"等。或"於此何為味？田地"等為何如是開始，不是以"於此何為味？欲求欲者"等已分別味耶？誠然，但味有二種依境能境，其中名為境之味前已分別，今為分別名為能境之味，開始"於此何為味？田地"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所說境能境差別味中何味於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "田地及黃金，牛馬奴僕等； 女眷親眷眾，眾欲人貪著。" 此處聖典偈中所來名為貪著之味，此名為貪著之能境味為說法行之境。

Gāthāyaṃ khettanti khipīyanti bījāni ettha ṭhāneti khettaṃ. Khipantānaṃ janānaṃ khipanakiriyā khipa-dhātuyā mukhyattho, khipanakiriyājanako cittuppādo phalūpacārattho, tassa cittuppādassa upanissayapaccayabhūtassa kedārassa viruḷhāpanasatti phalūpacārattho, iti-saddena sā viruḷhāpanasattiyeva parāmasīyati, tassā sattiyā patiṭṭhaṃ kedārasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ ta-paccayattho. Esa nayo tīsu piṭakesu evarūpesu ca vacanatthesu yathārahaṃ nīharitvā gahetabbo. Vapanti patiṭṭhahanti etthāti vatthu. Aparaṇṇādīnaṃ patiṭṭhahanaṃ vapa-dhātuyā mukhyattho, ṭhānassa patiṭṭhāpanasatti phalūpacārattho, iti-saddena sā patiṭṭhāpanasatti parāmasīyati. Tassā sattiyā patiṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ ta-paccayattho. Khettaṃ pana pubbaṇṇavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ, vatthu aparaṇṇavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ.

Hinoti pavattati pītisomanassanti hi, kiṃ taṃ? Pītisomanassaṃ, rāti pavatteti jātarūpanti raṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Jātarūpaṃ, hiṃ ranti hiraṃ, dutiyātappurisasamāso. Ñāpeti tosetīti ñaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Jātarūpaṃ. Hiraṃ hutvā ñaṃ hiraññaṃ, pavattamānaṃ pītisomanassaṃ pavattetvā jane visesena tosetīti attho gahetabbo. Vā-saddo vuttāvuttatthasamuccayattho. Gacchanti visesenāti gāvo, rattindivaṃ asanti bhakkhanti visesenāti assā, gāvo ca assā ca gavāssaṃ. Dātabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ dentīti dā, asanti bhakkhantīti asā, datvā asā dāsā, sāmikānaṃ dātabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ datvā pacchā asanti bhakkhantīti attho. Sāmikehi vā dinnaṃ asanti bhakkhantīti dāsā, dukkhena kasirena asanti pavattantīti vā dāsā,. Mātāpitūnaṃ hadayaṃ purentīti purisā, puraṃ hitaṃ vā isanti gavesantīti purisā. Buddhapaccekabuddhacakkavattibhāvaṃ pureti kammanti puraṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Balavakammaṃ, puraṃ isanti sīlenāti vā purisā. Purisā eva hi sammāsambuddhapaccekabuddhacakkavattibhāvaṃ gacchanti. 『『Puri uccaṭṭhāne sentīti vā purisā. Purisā hi mātūnaṃ pituṭṭhāne ṭhitā』』ti ime vacanatthā vuttappakārā yuttāyeva atthasambhavato. Dāsā ca purisā ca dāsaporisaṃ, majjhe vuddhi. Ettha ca dāsaggahaṇena dāsīpi gahitā. Dāsā dukkaṭajanā, purisā sukhitajanāti viseso daṭṭhabbo. Ṭhanti patiṭṭhahanti ettha mātugāme puttadhītāti thiyo. Narasaddassa viggahattho heṭṭhā vuttova.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 于偈中"田"即於此處投種子之處為田。投的人們之投動作為投根本義，生投動作之心生為果假說義，彼心生之近依緣處田地之生長力為果假說義，以"此"字攝取彼生長力，彼力之住處名為田地處為"它"綴義。此方式於三藏如是語義中應適當引出而取。"立住"於此為地。穀物等立住為立根本義，處之立住力為果假說義，以"此"字攝取彼立住力。彼力之住處為"它"綴義。然田為稻穀生長處，地為穀物生長處。 "行進"即喜悅轉起為"hi"，何者？喜悅，"流轉"即生金為"raṃ"，何者？生金，"hi"與"raṃ"為"hiraṃ"，第二依主釋。"令知"即令滿足為"ñaṃ"，何者？生金。為"hiraṃ"后為"ñaṃ"為"hiraññaṃ"，應取義為轉起喜悅令轉起而特別令人滿足。"或"字為已說未說義積集義。"特別行走"為牛，日夜"食"即特別食為馬，牛與馬為牛馬。"應給"最先給為"dā"，"食"即食為"asā"，給后食為"dāsā"(奴)，義為對主人應給最先給后食。或為主人所給而食為奴，或以苦難而活為奴。充滿父母心為人，或尋求城中利為人。充滿佛、辟支佛、轉輪王業為城，何者？強業，或以戒求城為人。唯人去正等覺、辟支佛、轉輪王性。或"住高處"為人。因人住于母親父親處，此等語義如所說相應因有義。奴與人為奴僕，中間增長。此中以奴攝取婢。奴為苦行者，人為樂行者，應見此差別。"住立"於此母眾中子女為女。人字之分析義如前已說。

Ekadeso domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『dukkhasaṅkhāto ādīnavo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā 『『tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī』』tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu 『『tattha katamo ādīnavo? Tassa ce kāmayānassā』』tiādinā ādīnavo vibhattoti? Saccaṃ, ādīnavo pana bahuvidho dukkhadomanassādivasena, tasmiṃ bahuvidhe ādīnave ekadeso domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo pubbe vibhatto, idāni dukkhasaṅkhātaṃ ādīnavaṃ vibhajituṃ 『『tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu dukkhadomanassādīsu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatoti pucchitvā –

『『Abalā naṃ balīyanti, maddantenaṃ parissayā;

Tato naṃ dukkhamanveti, nāvaṃ bhinnamivodaka』』nti. (su. ni. 776; mahāni. 5) –

Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo dukkhasaṅkhāto ekadeso ādīnavo āgato, so ayaṃ dukkhasaṅkhāto ekadeso ādīnavo desanāhārassa visayoti.

Gāthāyaṃ natthi balaṃ etesaṃ kilesānanti abalā. Kasmā kilesā abalā hontīti? Kusalehi pahātabbattā. Naranti khettādikāme anugijjhantaṃ naraṃ, saddhābalādivirahato vā abalaṃ taṃ naraṃ balīyanti abhibhavanti. Kiñcāpi kilesā kusalehi pahātabbattā abalā honti, tathāpi kāmamanugijjhantaṃ saddhābalādivirahitaṃ abhibhavituṃ samatthā bhavanti. Maddantenaṃ parissayāti kāmagiddhaṃ kāme pariyesantaṃ, kāmaṃ rakkhantañca enaṃ naraṃ pari samantato paripīḷetvā ayanti pavattantīti parissayā, sīhabyagghādayo ceva kāyaduccaritādayo ca maddanti. Tato tehi parissayehi abhibhūtaṃ naṃ naraṃ jātiādidukkhaṃ anveti anugacchati. Kimiva anveti? Udakaṃ bhinnanāvaṃ anveti iva, evaṃ anvetīti attho.

Ekadesaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amheti ca viññātaṃ, 『『nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ ekadesaṃ nissaraṇaṃ kattha pāḷidhamme āgata』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā 『『tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato』』tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu 『『tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Yo kāme parivajjetī』』tiādinā nissaraṇaṃ vibhattanti? Saccaṃ, nissaraṇaṃ pana duvidhaṃ magganibbānavasena, tattha duvidhe nissaraṇe maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ pubbe vibhattaṃ, idāni nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ vibhajituṃ 『『tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu magganibbānesu nissaraṇesu ekadesaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –

『『Tasmā jantu sadā sato, kāmāni parivajjaye;

Te pahāya tare oghaṃ, nāvaṃ sitvāva pāragū』』ti. –

Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ āgataṃ, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 在此假名為「受苦」的一種過失亦已於聖典偈中到來，由阿阇梨已分別，由我等已知，"苦名謂之過失於何聖典法所來"應問故，開始"於此何為過失？弱者強者"等。或"於此何為過失？弱者強者"等為何如是開始，難道"於此何為過失？彼欲求者"等已分別過失耶？誠然，過失然而多種類為苦、憂等，彼諸多類過失中有一種苦名之過失先已分別，今為名為苦之過失而分為"於此何為過失？弱者強者"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所說諸苦、憂等種種過失中何過失於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "弱者強者，苦惱逼迫， 故而苦隨，宛如破壞之舟。" 此處聖典偈中所來名為苦之過失，故此名為苦之過失為說法行之境。 于偈中"無力者"即眾道德之根本。為何眾道德無力？因有應棄之故。人者指欲求權者，信之根本則依止。因此，雖然眾道德因應棄故無力，然在面對欲時可強壓之。"逼迫"即為因欲被古浪盛逼之故，欲求欲者被欲逐漸圍壓，致其即將失敗，此即為獅子、老虎等及身的惡行等所累。故由此被圍之人追隨他之眾苦，因這些古行為而加諸于其身。如何加於自己？猶如水流切分其舟，故如是加於自身。 一種名為「道」的出離，此處於聖典偈中特別說明，已由阿阇梨分明，由我等已知，"涅槃為名之出離於何聖典法所來"應問故，因而開始"於此何為出離？故此眾生常保持正念"等。或"於此何為出離？故此眾生常保持正念"等為何如是開始，難道"於此何為出離？誰欲遠離欲者"等已分為出離耶？誠然，出離有二種依止於道、解脫，而在此二種出離中有名為道之出離先已分，而今為涅槃之出離而分為"於此何為出離？故此眾生常保持正念"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所述依止道、涅槃二種出離的各類道之出離於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "故此眾生常保持正念，欲則謹慎避離； 彼若棄置則跨越苦，猶如舟安穩過海。" 此處聖典偈中所來名為涅槃之出離，故此出離為說法行之境。

Gāthāyaṃ tasmāti yasmā kāmagiddhaṃ naraṃ dukkhaṃ anveti, tasmā jantu sadā sabbakāle pubbarattāpararatte jāgariyānuyogena sato satisampanno hutvā kāmāni kilesakāme vikkhambhanavasena vā samucchedavasena vā parivajjaye parijaheyya. Te kāme ariyamaggena pahāya catubbidhaṃ oghaṃ tareyya tarituṃ sakkuṇeyya. Ko tarati iva tareyya? Nāvāsāmiko nāvaṃ yaṃ pavisantaṃ udakaṃ sitvā bahi siñcitvā lahukāya nāvāya appakasirena taritvā pāragū pāraṃ gacchati iva, evaṃ attani pavattaṃ kilesūdakaṃ siñcitvā ariyamaggena nīharitvā lahukena attabhāvena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā nibbānena pāraṃ nibbānaṃ santiṃ gaccheyyāti attho. Idaṃ nibbānaṃ kasmā nissaraṇaṃ hoti? Sabbasaṅkhatanissaraṇato nissaraṇaṃ nāma.

Idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ idha pāḷidhamme āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca viññātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ phalaṃ kattha pāḷidhamme āgata』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ phalaṃ? Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri』』ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu rakkhananipphādanamaccutaraṇādīsu phalesu katamaṃ phalaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –

『『Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāriṃ, chattaṃ mahantaṃ yatha vassakāle;

Esānisaṃso dhamme suciṇṇe, na duggatiṃ gacchati dhammacārī』』ti. (su. ni. 102, 103) –

Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ anatthehi dhammassa rakkhanaphalaṃ āgataṃ, rakkhāvahanassa abbhudayassa yañca nipphādanaṃ phalaṃ āgataṃ, idaṃ rakkhananipphādanaṃ phalaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.

Gāthāyaṃ dhammoti yena puggalena yo dānādippabhedo puññadhammo nibbattito, so dhammo. Dhammacāriṃ dhammanibbattakaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ anatthehi rakkhati. Kimiva? Vassakāle deve vassante sati mahantaṃ kusalena dhāretabbaṃ chattaṃ dhārentaṃ kusalaṃ taṃ janaṃ vassatemanato rakkhati yathā, evaṃ rakkhitabbo dhammopi attasammāpaṇidhānena appamatto hutvā suṭṭhu dhammaṃ rakkhantaṃyeva rakkhati, tādiso dhammacārīyeva duggatiṃ na gacchati. Eso ānisaṃso suciṇṇe suciṇṇassa dhamme dhammassa ānisaṃsoti attho.

Ekadesaṃ phalaṃ idha pāḷidhamme āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamo upāyo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo upāyo? Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu vipassanāpubbaṅgamanibbidādīsu upāyesu katamo upāyo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatoti pucchitvā –

『『Sabbe saṅkhārā 『aniccā』ti…pe…;

Sabbe dhammā 『anattā』ti, yadā paññāya passatī』』ti. (dha. pa. 277-279) –

Idha pāḷigāthāsu yo vipassanāpubbaṅgamanibbidāñāṇasaṅkhāto visuddhiyā adhigamahetubhāvato maggo āgato, ayaṃ upāyo desanāhārassa visayoti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 于偈中"故此"即因欲貪之人為苦所隨，故眾生常於一切時，前夜后夜修習警覺而具念，具足正念而應遠離欲，即煩惱欲以鎮伏或斷除而應舍離。以聖道舍彼等欲而能渡四種暴流。如何渡過？如船主人除去船中入水，傾倒出外，以輕船易渡而成到彼岸者，如是傾出自身所生煩惱水，以聖道除去，以輕身於無餘涅槃界中，以涅槃至彼岸寂靜，是其意趣。此涅槃何故為出離？因出離一切有為故名為出離。 此出離此處於聖典法所來，由阿阇梨已分別，由我等已知，"何為果於何聖典法所來"應問故，開始"於此何為果？法實保護行法者"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所說保護、成就、不死渡等果中何果於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "法實保護行法者，如大傘于雨季時； 此為善行法之益，法行者不趣惡趣。" 此處聖典偈中所來法之保護于不利之果，及生起吉祥之成就果所來，此保護成就之果為說法行之境。 于偈中"法"即由何人生起何施等分別功德法，彼法。"行法者"即生法者彼人于不利中保護。如何？如雨季降雨時，有大善持之傘保護持傘善人于雨中，如是應保護之法以自正安立不放逸而善保護正法者，如是之法行者不趣惡趣。此為功德于善行、善行之法、法之功德，是其意趣。 一分果此處於聖典法所來，由阿阇梨已分別，由我等已知，"何為方便於何聖典所來"應問故，開始"於此何為方便？'一切行無常'"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所說觀為前導厭離等方便中何方便於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "'一切行無常'...; '一切法無我'，以慧如是見。" 此處聖典偈中所來名為觀為前導厭離智，因為是清凈證得因故為道，此方便為說法行之境。

Gāthāsu sabbe niravasesā kammacittotuāhārehi saṅkharitā saṅkhatasaṅkhārā hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā iti yadā paññāya passati, atha anicce dukkhasabhāve nibbindati, eso vipassanāpubbaṅgamo nibbindanañāṇasaṅkhāto dhammo visuddhiyā maggoti. 『『Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā』』tiādīsu saṅkhārānaṃ saṅkhatadhammabhāvo paccayākāravibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa) vuttova, taṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathaṃ anoloketvā ekacce ācariyā 『『vipassanāñāṇārammaṇattā tebhūmakadhammāyevā』』ti vadanti, evaṃ sati maggaphaladhammānaṃ niccādibhāvo bhaveyya, tasmā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathānurūpova attho daṭṭhabbo. Dukkhāti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhāvena dukkhā. Anattāti niccasārasukhasāraattasārarahitattā asārakaṭṭhena anattā, avasavattanaṭṭhena vā anattā.

Ekadeso upāyo idha pāḷidhamme āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamā āṇatti kattha pāḷidhamme āgatā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamā āṇatti? Cakkhumā visamānīvā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『assādādīnavatā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhāsu pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇattikalyāṇasucaritacaraṇāṇattiādīsu katamāṇatti tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatāti pucchitvā –

『『Cakkhumā visamānīva, vijjamāne parakkame;

Paṇḍito jīvalokasmiṃ, pāpāni parivajjaye』』ti. (udā. 43) –

Idha pāḷidhamme yā pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇatti āgatā, ayaṃ pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇatti desanāhārassa visayāti.

Gāthāyaṃ cakkhumā puriso vijjamāne parakkame āvahitaṃ sarīraṃ āvahantova hutvā visamāni bhūmippadesāni vā visame hatthiādayo vā parivajjeti iva, evaṃ jīvalokasmiṃ paṇḍito pāpāni lāmakāni duccaritāni parivajjeti. Āṇatti nāma āṇārahassa dhammarājassa bhagavato āṇā, sā bahuvidhā, tasmā 『『kareyya kalyāṇa』』ntiādigāthāyaṃ sucaritacaraṇā āṇatti.

『『Upetha saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ, dhammaṃ saṅghañca tādinaṃ;

Samādiyatha sīlāni, taṃ vo atthāya hehitī』』ti. (therīgā. 249-250, 289-290) –

Ādīsu gāthāsu saraṇagamanāṇattisīlasamādānāṇattiādi āgatāti.

『『Suññato lokaṃ avekkhassū』』tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu 『『tattha katamaṃ phalaṃ? Dhammo have』』tiādinā, 『『tattha katamo upāyo? Sabbe saṅkhārā』』tiādinā, 『『tattha katamā āṇatti? Cakkhumā』』tiādinā ca phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattāti? Saccaṃ, visuṃ visuṃ pana suttesu āgatā phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattā, idāni ekato āgatā phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhajituṃ 『『suññato lokaṃ avekkhassū』』tiādi āraddhaṃ.

Tattha suññato lokaṃ avekkhassūti sabbampi saṅkhāralokaṃ attato suññoti avasavattitāsallakkhaṇavasena vā tucchabhāvasamanupassanavasena vā passāti idaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ vidhānabhāvato āṇatti nāma. Niccasārasukhasāraattasārādirahitattā 『『mogharājā』』ti ālapati, saddhāsīlasutacāgādirahitattā vā mogho.

『『Sadā sato』』ti puggalavasena vuttāya satiyā suññatādassanassa sampajānahetubhāvato satiyeva upāyo, na satimāti ettha satīti adhippāyo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 于諸偈中，一切無餘由業、心、時節、食所造作之有為諸行，以無有義為無常，當以慧如是見時，則于無常苦性生厭離，此為觀為前導名為厭離智之法為清凈道。于"一切行無常"等中，諸行之有為法性于緣起分別註釋中已說，不觀彼分別註釋某些阿阇梨說"因為是觀智所緣故唯是三界法"，如是則道果法應成為常等性，故應如分別註釋般見義。苦即以苦苦、變異苦、行苦性為苦。無我即因離常實、樂實、我實故以無實義為無我，或以不自在義為無我。 一分方便此處於聖典法所來，由阿阇梨已分別，由我等已知，"何為教令於何聖典法所來"應問故，開始"於此何為教令？具眼如避不平"等。於此"於此"即于彼"味等過失"等偈所說避惡行教令、行善行教令等中何教令於此諸聖典法何處聖典所來，如是問已： "如具眼者，避不平地； 智者生世，應避諸惡。" 此處聖典法中所來避惡行教令，此避惡行教令為說法行之境。 于偈中如具眼人于現有精進時保持身體而避不平地處或不平象等，如是智者于生世中避惡劣惡行。教令即堪受教令之法王世尊之教令，彼多種，故"應作善"等偈中為行善行教令。 "汝等歸依佛，法及如是僧； 受持諸戒律，此為汝等利。" 等偈中有歸依教令、戒受持教令等所來。 "當觀世間空"等為何如是開始，難道不是以"於此何為果？法實"等，"於此何為方便？一切行"等，"於此何為教令？具眼"等已分別果、方便、教令耶？誠然，但分別于個別經中所來果、方便、教令，今為分別一處所來果、方便、教令而開始"當觀世間空"等。 於此"當觀世間空"即一切有為世間以我為空，或依不自在相察知，或依空性隨觀而見，此世尊語因為是規定故名為教令。因離常實、樂實、我實等故稱"摩伽羅阇"，或因離信、戒、聞、舍等故為空。 "常具念"依人說念，因爲念為空性見之正知因故，念即是方便，非具念者，此中意爲念。

Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhaccāti ettha attānudiṭṭhi nāma 『『rūpaṃ attā, rūpavā attā, rūpasmiṃ attā, attani rūpa』』ntiādippakārā vīsativatthukā diṭṭhi. Maggena ūhacca samucchinditvā evaṃ vuttavidhinā maccutaro maccuno visayātikkanto siyā bhaveyya. Ettha yaṃ maccuvisayaṃ taraṇaṃ atikkamanaṃ, tassa atikkamanassa yañca pubbabhāgapaṭipadāsampajjanaṃ, idaṃ bhagavato desanāya phalaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti adhippāyo. Pubbe visuṃ visuṃ phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattāpi –

『『Suññato lokaṃ avekkhassu, mogharāja sadā sato;

Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhacca, evaṃ maccutaro siyā』』ti. (su. ni. 1125; mahāni. 186; cūḷani. piṅgiyamāṇavapucchā 144, mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 88) –

Ekagāthāyaṃ puna ekato vibhajanato phalādīsu ekato dassitesu sabbattha suttesu vā sabbattha gāthāsu vā phalādayo dassetabbā assādādayo viya katthaci niddhāretvāti viseso vijānitabbo. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo 『『yathā pana…pe… ekato udāharaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabba』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "拔除我見"於此，我見即"色是我，具色是我，我在色中，色在我中"等二十事我見。以道拔除、斷盡，如是所說方法得越死，超越死之境界。於此越死境界、超越，及其前分道路成就，此為世尊教說之果為說法行之境，是其意趣。前已分別個別果、方便、教令： "觀世間為空，摩伽羅阇常具念； 拔除我見已，如是得越死。" 於一偈中再次合一分別故，于果等合一顯示中，於一切經或一切偈中，應顯示果等如味等於某處確定，應知此差別。故註釋師說："如何...一處譬喻已作"應如是見。

1. Desanāhārassa visayabhūtā assādādayo 『『idha pāḷidhamme ayaṃ assādo āgato, idha pāḷidhamme ayaṃ ādīnavo āgato』』tiādinā visesato nidassanavasena sarūpato ācariyena vibhattā, te assādādayo tiṇṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ puggalānaṃ sāmaññato bhagavā kiṃ nu kho deseti, udāhu ekassa puggalassa yathālābhaṃ kiṃ nu desetīti anuyogassa sambhavato imassa puggalassa imaṃ deseti, imassa puggalassa imaṃ desetīti puggalabhedena assādādayo vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『『tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu assādādīsu. Nissaraṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññussa puggalassa bhagavā deseti, ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca ime dve vipañcitaññussa puggalassa bhagavā deseti, assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca ime tayo neyyassa puggalassa bhagavā desetīti yojanattho daṭṭhabbo.

Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ assādādayo udāharaṇavasena sarūpato dassetvā idāni tattha puggalavibhāgena desanāvibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ 『tattha bhagavā』tiādi vutta』』nti vuttaṃ.

Tattha ugghaṭitaññussāti ugghaṭīyate paṭivijjhīyate, ṭhapīyate vā sappabhedo vitthāro atthoti ugghaṭito, jānātīti ñū, ugghaṭitaṃ atthaṃ ñū ugghaṭitaññū, uddesamatteneva sappabhedaṃ savitthāraṃ paṭivijjhitabbaṃ atthaṃ paṭivijjhatīti attho. Yo puggalo uddeseneva uddiṭṭhamatteneva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto hoti, so ugghaṭitaññū nāma.

Vipañcīyate vittharīyate atthoti vipañcito, taṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Yo puggalo niddesena niddiṭṭhamattameva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto, so vipañcitaññū nāma.

Paṭiniddesena attho netabbo pāpetabboti neyyo. Yo puggalo paṭiniddesena vā paṭilomena vā vibhattaṃ eva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto, so neyyo nāma. Nissaraṇadesanāyeva ugghaṭitaññussa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hoti, ādīnavadesanāya ceva nissaraṇadesanāya ca vipañcitaññussa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hoti, assādadesanāya ca ādīnavadesanāya ca nissaraṇadesanāya ca neyyassa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hotīti adhippāyo idha gahetabbo.

Padaparamo panettha paṭivedhābhisamayabhajanābhāvato na gahito. Tasmiñca aggahite assādo, ādīnavo, nissaraṇaṃ, assādādīnavā, assādanissaraṇāni, ādīnavanissaraṇāni, assādādīnavanissaraṇāni cāti sattasu paṭṭhānanayesu tatiyachaṭṭhasattamāva gahitā, avasesā cattāro nayā na gahitā. Veneyyavinayanābhāvato hi gahaṇāgahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Veneyyavinayañca veneyyānaṃ santāne ariyamaggassuppādanaṃ, na sāsanavinayanamattaṃ, ariyamagguppādanañca yathāvuttehi eva tīhi padaṭṭhānanayehi sijjhatīti itare nayā idha na vuttā.

Yasmā pana peṭake (peṭako. 23) –

『『Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca?

『Yāni karoti puriso, tāni passati attani;

Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpaka』nti.

『『Tattha yaṃ kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ assādo. Yaṃ pāpakārī pāpaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ ādīnavo.

『『Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā. Katame aṭṭha? 『Lābho』tiādi (a. ni.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 6.味等說法行之境已由阿阇梨以"此聖典法中此味已來，此聖典法中此過失已來"等特別顯示方式以自相分別，彼等味等對三種利根等補特伽羅普遍地世尊是否說示，或對一補特伽羅隨所得是否說示，如是追問可能故，為顯示"對此補特伽羅說此，對此補特伽羅說此"如是依補特伽羅差別分別味等而開始"於此世尊對利根者"等。於此"於此"即于彼等味等。世尊對利根補特伽羅說示出離，對了解者補特伽羅世尊說示過失與出離此二，對需引導者補特伽羅世尊說示味、過失與出離此三，應如是見配合義。 然于註釋中說"如是依譬喻方式以自相顯示味等已，今為顯示其中依補特伽羅差別之說示差別而說'於此世尊'等"。 於此"利根者"即開示、通達、或建立帶分別廣義為開示，知為知者，知開示義為利根者，即僅以舉示即能通達帶分別廣義，是其意趣。何補特伽羅僅以舉示、僅以所舉示即知義而得義成就，彼名利根者。 廣說、開展義爲了解，知彼爲了解者。何補特伽羅僅以解說、僅以所解說即知義而得義成就，彼名瞭解者。 應以反解說引導、令達義為應引導。何補特伽羅以反解說或反面所分別義即知而得義成就，彼名應引導者。僅出離說示即利根者得通達現觀成就，以過失說示及出離說示瞭解者得通達現觀成就，以味說示及過失說示及出離說示應引導者得通達現觀成就，此處應取此意趣。 於此不取文句為上者因無通達現觀分。于彼不取時，味、過失、出離、味過失、味出離、過失出離、味過失出離等七種立處方式中唯取第三、第六、第七，其餘四種方式不取。因見取不取是依所化調伏故。所化調伏即于所化相續中生起聖道，非僅教法調伏，聖道生起唯依所說三種立處方式成就故，此處不說其他方式。 然于筐藏中： "於此何為味與過失？ '人造作何業，彼見於自身； 行善者見善，作惡者見惡。' 於此行善者得善果是味，作惡者得惡果是過失。 諸比丘，此八世間法。何為八？'利'等..."

8.6). Tattha lābho yaso sukhaṃ pasaṃsā, ayaṃ assādo. Alābho ayaso dukkhaṃ nindā, ayaṃ ādīnavo.

『『Tattha katamo assādo ca nissaraṇañca?

『Sukho vipāko puññānaṃ, adhippāyo ca ijjhati;

Khippañca paramaṃ santiṃ, nibbānamadhigacchatī』ti. –

Ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.

『『Dvattiṃsimāni, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveyeva gatiyo bhavanti…pe… vivaṭacchadoti sabbaṃ lakkhaṇasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 3.199) ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.

『『Tattha katamo ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?

『Bhārā have pañcakkhandhā, bhārahāro ca puggalo;

Bhārādānaṃ dukhaṃ loke, bhāranikkhepanaṃ sukhaṃ.

『Nikkhipitvā garuṃ bhāraṃ, aññaṃ bhāraṃ anādiya;

Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbuyha, nicchāto parinibbuto』ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.22) –

Ayaṃ ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca.

『『Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?

『Kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā, virūparūpena mathenti cittaṃ;

Tasmā ahaṃ pabbajitomhi rāja, apaṇṇakaṃ sāmaññameva seyyo』ti. (ma. ni. 2.307; theragā. 787; peṭako. 23) –

Ayaṃ assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañcā』』ti vuttaṃ, tasmā tepi nayā idha niddhāretvā veditabbā. Phalādīsupi ayaṃ nayo labbhatiyeva.

Yasmā peṭake (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 於此利、譽、樂、稱讚，此為味。無利、無譽、苦、譭謗，此為過失。 "於此何為味與出離？ 善果諸福德，意趣得成就； 迅速獲最寂，證得涅槃已。" 此為味與出離。 "諸比丘，此三十二大丈夫相，具此者大丈夫唯有兩趣...開顯"等全部相經，此為味與出離。 "於此何為過失與出離？ 五蘊確實為重擔，補特伽羅為負擔； 世間擔負是苦，卸擔則為樂。 卸下重擔已，不再取余擔； 拔除渴愛根，無慾得解脫。" 此為過失與出離。 "於此何為味、過失與出離？ 欲樂絢麗甜可愛，種種形相擾亂心； 是故我出家為王，清凈梵行實為勝。" 此為味、過失與出離。故彼等方式於此應以確定而了知。于果等中此方式亦可得。

1.9) – 『『tattha katamaṃ phalañca upāyo ca? 『Sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sappañño』ti gāthā, idaṃ phalañca upāyo ca.

『『Tattha katamaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca?

『Sace bhāyatha dukkhassa, sace vo dukkhamappiyaṃ;

Mākattha pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho』ti. (udā. 44) –

Idaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca.

『『Tattha katamo upāyo ca āṇatti ca?

『Kumbhūpamaṃ kāyamimaṃ viditvā, nagarūpamaṃ cittamidaṃ ṭhapetvā;

Yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhena, jitañca rakkhe anivesano siyā』ti. (dha. pa. 40) –

Ayaṃ upāyo ca āṇatti cā』』ti vuttaṃ, tasmā evaṃ phalādīnaṃ dukkhavasenāpi udāharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.

『『Ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ imassa puggalassa imaṃ deseti, imassa puggalassa imaṃ desetī』』ti yehi puggalehi assādādayo yathārahaṃ ācariyena vibhattā, te puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi bhinnā, tā paṭipadā kittikā bhavanti, tāhi bhinnā puggalā ca kittikāti vicāraṇāya sambhavato tā paṭipadā, te ca puggalā ettakāti gaṇanato dassetuṃ 『『tattha catasso paṭipadā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ.

Tattha tatthāti tesu ugghaṭitaññuādīsu puggalesu. Ye puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi bhinnā, tā paṭipadā catasso bhavanti, te ca puggalā cattāroti yojanā kātabbā. Katamā catasso? Dukkhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā, dukkhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā, sukhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā, sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā cāti catasso. Katame cattāro? Taṇhācarito mando puggalo, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo, diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo cāti cattāro.

Paṭipadābhiññāhi kato vibhāgopi paṭipadāhi kato vibhāgo nāma hoti avinābhāvatoti manasi katvā 『『catasso paṭipadābhiññā』』ti avatvā 『『catasso paṭipadā』』ti vuttā. Tā panetā samathavasenāpi bhinnā, vipassanāvasenāpi bhinnā. Kathaṃ samathavasena? Pathavīkasiṇādīsu sabbapaṭhamaṃ 『『pathavī pathavī』』tiādinā pavattamanasikārato paṭṭhāya yāva jhānassa upacāraṃ uppajjati, tāva pavattā paññā samathabhāvanā 『『paṭipadā』』ti vuccati. Upacārato pana paṭṭhāya yāva appanā, tāva pavattā paññā 『『abhiññā』』ti vuccati heṭṭhimapaññāto adhigatapaññābhāvato.

Sā ca paṭipadā kassaci dukkhā kicchā hoti nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhammasamudācāraggahaṇatāya, kassaci tadabhāvato sukhā akicchā hoti, abhiññāpi kassaci dandhā asīghappavatti hoti avisadañāṇatāya, kassaci khippā sīghappavatti hoti visadañāṇatāyāti.

Kathaṃ vipassanāvasena? Yo rūpārūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggahetvā upādārūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, arūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, rūpārūpaṃ pana pariggaṇhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariggahaetauṃ sakkoti, tassa dukkhāpaṭipadā nāma hoti. Pariggahitarūpārūpassa vipassanāparivāse maggapātubhāvadandhatāya dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Tabbipariyāyena itarā dve honti. Vipassanāvasena pana bhinnāyeva paṭipadābhiññāyo idha daṭṭhabbā abhisamayādhikārattā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ yesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena desanāvibhāgo dassito, te puggale paṭipadāvibhāgena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『catasso paṭipadā』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 6) vuttaṃ. Yojanānayo vuttanayānusāreneva veditabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "於此何為果與方便？'具慧人住戒'之偈，此為果與方便。 於此何為果與教令？ '若汝畏於苦，若苦不可愛； 勿作諸惡業，或顯或隱密。' 此為果與教令。 於此何為方便與教令？ '知此身如瓶，建此心如城； 以慧器戰魔，護勝莫住著。' 此為方便與教令。"故如是應知果等二法之譬喻。 "對利根等三種補特伽羅對此補特伽羅說此，對此補特伽羅說此"，由阿阇梨依補特伽羅分別味等，彼等補特伽羅由何道區分，彼等道有幾種，由彼等區分之補特伽羅幾何，因如是考察可能故，為顯示彼等道與補特伽羅之數而開始"於此四道"等。 於此"於此"即于彼等利根等補特伽羅中。諸補特伽羅由何道區分，彼等道為四，彼等補特伽羅亦為四，應如是配合。何為四？苦遲通道、苦速通道、樂遲通道、樂速通道為四。何為四？愚鈍貪行者、利根貪行者、愚鈍見行者、利根見行者為四。 因道與通智不相離故，思念已不說"四道與通智"而說"四道"。彼等又依止觀分別。如何依止？于地遍等最初從"地、地"等作意開始直至定的近行生起，如是行之慧名為止修道。從近行開始直至安止，如是行之慧名為通智，因為是從下慧所證得慧性故。 彼道對某人因煩惱等障法現行所執著故為苦難，對某人因無彼故為樂易，通智亦對某人因智不明利故為遲鈍不速行，對某人因智明利故為速疾速行。 如何依觀？有人從色無色門入觀，把握四大種已把握所造色，把握無色，但把握色無色時以苦難疲勞而能把握，對彼名為苦道。已把握色無色者因觀修習中道顯現遲緩故名為遲通。相反者為其餘二種。然於此應見依觀所分別之道與通智，因是現觀章故。然于註釋中說"如是依諸補特伽羅差別顯示說示差別已，為顯示以道差別分別彼等補特伽羅而說'四道'等"。配合方式應依所說方式了知。

Catūhi paṭipadābhiññāhi cattāro puggalā sabbeva aniyamato vaṭṭadukkhato kiṃ nu kho niyyanti, udāhu 『『imāya paṭipadābhiññāya ayaṃ puggalo niyyāti, imāya paṭipadābhiññāya ayaṃ puggalo niyyātī』』ti niyamato ca niyyātīti vicāraṇāya sambhavato 『『ayaṃ puggalo imehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā imāya paṭipadābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyātī』』ti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『taṇhācarito mando』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Tattha taṇhācarito mando puggalo satipaṭṭhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā satindriyena satindriyādhikena ariyamaggena dukkhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo jhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā samādhindriyena samādhindriyādhikena ariyamaggena dukkhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti , diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo sammappadhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā vīriyindriyena vīriyindriyādhikena ariyamaggena sukhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo saccehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā paññindriyena paññindriyādhikena ariyamaggena sukhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyātīti yojanā kātabbā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Cattāro puggalāti yathāvuttapaṭipadāvibhāgeneva cattāro paṭipannakapuggalā, taṃ pana paṭipadāvibhāgaṃ saddhiṃ hetupāyaphalehi dassetuṃ 『taṇhācarito』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 6) –

Vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhācaritoti taṇhāya nibbattitaṃ caritaṃ etassa puggalassāti taṇhācarito. Mandoti mandiyāya avijjāya samannāgatoti mando, mohādhikapuggalo. Udattoti udaatto, uḷārapaññoti attho. Uḷāraṃ phalaṃ detīti udo, ko so? Pavicayo, attani nibbattoti atto, udo atto yassa puggalassāti udattoti vacanattho kātabbo.

Paṭhamāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma taṇhācaritatā, mandapaññatā ca, upāyo satindriyaṃ, sabbāsampi phalaṃ niyyānameva. Dutiyāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma taṇhācaritatā, udattapaññatā ca, upāyo vīriyindriyaṃ. Tatiyāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma diṭṭhicaritatā, mandapaññatā ca, upāyo samādhindriyaṃ. Catutthiyā paṭipadāya hetu nāma diṭṭhicaritatā, udattapaññatā ca, upāyo paññindriyanti hetupāyaphalāni daṭṭhabbāni.

Ettha ca diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo ugghaṭitaññū nāma, diṭṭhicarito mando ceva taṇhācarito udatto ca vipañcitaññū nāma, taṇhācarito mando puggalo neyyo nāma, tasmā 『『tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussa puggalassa nissaraṇaṃ desayatī』』tiādinā nayena ugghaṭitaññuādiveneyyattayassa bhedadassanena nissaraṇaṃ desayati, 『『ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca desayati, assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca desayatī』』ti desanāvibhāgo dassito. 『『Tattha catasso paṭipadā』』tiādinā paṭipadābhedadassanena 『『taṇhācarito mando puggalo, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo, diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo』』ti catudhā bhinnaṃ taṇhācaritamandādikaṃ puggalacatukkaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 由四道與通智四種補特伽羅是否都不確定地從輪迴苦出離，還是"由此道與通智此補特伽羅出離，由此道與通智此補特伽羅出離"如是確定地出離，因如是考察可能故，為確定顯示"此補特伽羅得此等依止為親依止緣由此道與通智從輪迴苦出離"而說"愚鈍貪行者"等。 於此愚鈍貪行者以念住為依止得親依止緣以念根為主之聖道由苦遲通道從輪迴苦出離，利根貪行者以諸禪為依止得親依止緣以定根為主之聖道由苦速通道從輪迴苦出離，愚鈍見行者以正勤為依止得親依止緣以精進根為主之聖道由樂遲通道從輪迴苦出離，利根見行者以諸諦為依止得親依止緣以慧根為主之聖道由樂速通道從輪迴苦出離，應如是配合。然于註釋中說： "四補特伽羅即依所說道差別之四修行補特伽羅，為顯示彼道差別與因方便果而說'貪行者'等。" 於此"貪行者"即此補特伽羅有由貪所生之行為貪行者。"愚鈍"即具足愚鈍無明為愚鈍，癡增上補特伽羅。"利根"即殊勝慧，是其意趣。給予殊勝果為優，是何？擇法，生於自身為得，具優得為利根，應如是作語義。 第一道之因名為貪行性及愚鈍慧性，方便爲念根，一切之果即是出離。第二道之因名為貪行性及利根慧性，方便為精進根。第三道之因名為見行性及愚鈍慧性，方便為定根。第四道之因名為見行性及利根慧性，方便為慧根，應如是見因方便果。 於此利根見行者補特伽羅名為利根者，愚鈍見行者與利根貪行者名爲了解者，愚鈍貪行者補特伽羅名為應引導者。故以"於此世尊對利根補特伽羅說示出離"等方式，以顯示利根等三種所化差別而說示出離，"說示過失與出離，說示味與過失與出離"如是顯示說示差別。以"於此四道"等顯示道差別而顯示"愚鈍貪行者、利根貪行者、愚鈍見行者、利根見行者"如是四分愚鈍貪行等四補特伽羅，應如是見。

Idāni catūhi paṭipadābhiññāhi catudhā bhinnaṃ taṇhācaritamandacatukkaṃ atthanayayojanāya dutiyāya visayaṃ katvā dassetuṃ 『『ubho taṇhācaritā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhāya samādhipaṭipakkhattā taṇhācaritā mandaudattā ubho puggalā samathapubbaṅgamāya vipassanāya upanissayaṃ labhitvā rāgavirāgāya maggapaññāya niyyanti cetovimuttiyā sekkhaphalabhāvāya. Sammādiṭṭhisahiteneva sammāsamādhinā niyyānaṃ bhavati, na sammāsamādhinā eva, tasmā diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā ubho puggalā vipassanāpubbaṅgamena samathena avijjāvirāgāya maggapaññāya niyyanti paññāvimuttiyā asekkhaphalabhāvāyāti cattāropi puggalā duvidhāyeva bhavantīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Rāgavirāgāyāti rañjatīti rāgo, so virajjati etāyāti virāgā, rāgassa virāgā rāgavirāgā, tāya rāgavirāgāya. Cetoti cittappabhedena ca samādhi vuccati yathā 『『cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya』』nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; mi. pa. 2.1.9.). Paṭippassaddhivasena paṭipakkhato vimuccatīti vimutti, cetasā cittena samādhinā vimuccatīti cetovimutti, ceto eva vā vimutti cetovimutti, anāgāmiphalasamādhi. Anāgāmipuggalo hi samādhismiṃ paripūrakāritāya cetovimuttiyā niyyāti. Avijjāvirāgāyāti avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatīti avijjā, vindiyaṃ vā kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā niruttinayena. Virajjati etāyāti virāgā, avijjāya virāgā avijjāvirāgā, tāya avijjāvirāgāya. Pakārehi jānātīti paññā, vimuccatīti vimutti, paññāya vimuccatīti paññāvimutti, paññā eva vā vimutti paññāvimutti, arahattaphalapaññā, tāya paññāvimuttiyā.

『『Tesu katame puggalā kena atthanayena hātabbā』』ti vattabbato 『『tattha ye samathapubbaṅgamāhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu 『『ubho taṇhācaritā』』tiādinā vibhattesu puggalesu ye ubho taṇhācaritā mandaudattā puggalā samatha…pe… niyyanti, te ubho taṇhācaritā mandaudattā puggalā nandiyāvaṭṭena nayena hātabbā gametabbā netabbā. Ye ubho diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā puggalā vipassanā…pe… samathena niyyanti, te ubho diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā puggalā sīhavikkīḷitena nayena hātabbā gametabbā netabbāti attho.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 今為以四道與通智四分愚鈍貪行四種補特伽羅以義理配合第二境而顯示故說"二貪行者"等。於此因貪與定相對故，愚鈍與利根二貪行者補特伽羅得止為前導觀為親依止，由離貪之道慧出離為心解脫有學果性。唯以正見俱正定出離，非唯以正定，故愚鈍與利根二見行者補特伽羅以觀為前導止由離無明之道慧出離為慧解脫無學果性，即說四補特伽羅唯成二種。 "離貪"即染著為貪，由此離染為離，貪之離為離貪，由彼離貪。"心"即依心差別而說定，如"修習心與慧"。依止息從對治解脫為解脫，由心即由定解脫為心解脫，或心即解脫為心解脫，不還果定。因不還補特伽羅以定圓滿作用而出離心解脫。"離無明"即知不應知身惡行等為無明，或不知應知身善行等為無明，依詞源法。由此離為離，無明之離為離無明，由彼離無明。以種種知為慧，解脫為解脫，由慧解脫為慧解脫，或慧即解脫為慧解脫，阿羅漢果慧，由彼慧解脫。 因應說"于彼等何補特伽羅由何義理了知"故說"於此止為前導等"。於此"於此"即于彼等以"二貪行者"等分別諸補特伽羅中，彼二愚鈍利根貪行者補特伽羅以止...出離者，彼二愚鈍利根貪行者補特伽羅應以歡喜輪轉方式了知、理解、引導。彼二愚鈍利根見行者補特伽羅以觀...止出離者，彼二愚鈍利根見行者補特伽羅應以獅子游戲方式了知、理解、引導，是其意趣。

1. 『『Tattha catasso paṭipadā』』tiādinā desanāhārena dukkhāpaṭipadābhedena taṇhācaritamandādibhedo puggalo vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『tassa vibhattānantaraṃ svāyaṃ desanāhāro kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme kenaci ākārena sambhavatī』』ti pucchitabbabhāvato 『『svāyaṃ hāro kattha sambhavatī』』tiādimāha. Navamakkhaṇasampannassa satthā yaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, tasmiṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme yā vīmaṃsādikā sutamayādikā tisso paññā vibhattā, tāhi paññāhi ye ugghaṭitaññuādayo tayo puggalā vibhattā, iti vibhattākārena ayaṃ desanāhāro satthārā desetabbe dhamme sambhavatīti daṭṭhabbo.

Tattha svāyaṃ hāroti desanāhārena paṭipadāvibhāgena veneyyapuggalavibhāgo dassito, so ayaṃ desanāhāro. Kattha sambhavatīti kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena sambhavatīti. Yassāti yo so veneyyo paccantajādīhi aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vimutto, savanadhāraṇādīhi ca sampattīhi samannāgato, tassa veneyyassa. Satthāti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ sāsati anusāsatīti satthā. Dhammanti desitaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ dhammaṃ. Desayatīti saṅkhepanayavitthāranayehi bhāsati. Aññataroti bhagavato sāvakesu evaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ samattho sāvako. Garuṭṭhāniyoti gāravassa ṭhānabhūtehi sīlasutacāgādiguṇavisesehi yutto mānito saddahitabbavacano. Sabrahmacārīti samaṃ, saha vā brahmaṃ satthusāsanaṃ carati paṭipajjatīti sabrahmacārī. Saddhaṃ labhati 『『yo satthā dhammaṃ deseti, so satthā sammāsambuddho hotī』』ti satthari, 『『svākkhāto vatāyaṃ dhammo sāttho sabyañjano ekantaparipuṇṇo ekantaparisuddho atthāvaho hitāvaho sukhāvaho jhānamaggaphalanibbattako, amhehi ca saddahitabbo』』ti desite dhamme ca acalasaddhaṃ labhati, saddahanaṃ attano santāne punappunaṃ uppādeti. Tathā 『『yo sāvako dhammaṃ deseti, so sāvako saṅkhepato vā vitthārato vā dhammaṃ desetuṃ samattho vata garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī mānito saddahitabbavacano』』ti desake sāvake ca 『『tādisena sāvakena desito yo dhammo, so dhammo sāttho sabyañjano ekantaparipuṇṇo ekantaparisuddho atthāvaho hitāvaho sukhāvaho jhānamaggaphalanibbattako, amhehi ca saddahitabbo』』ti sāvakena desitadhamme ca saddhaṃ saddahanaṃ attano santāne punappunaṃ uppādetīti attho.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "於此四道"等以說示方式依苦道差別顯示貪行愚鈍等補特伽羅差別，我等已知，"彼差別之後此說示方式在何可讚嘆法以何種方式可能"應被詢問，故說"此方式在何處可能"等。具足第九相的導師所說法，于可讚嘆法中，以觀察等三種慧已分別，由此慧等已分別利根等三補特伽羅，如是以差別方式此說示方式導師于可說法可能，應如是見。 於此"此方式"即以說示方式依道差別顯示所化補特伽羅差別，此即說示方式。"在何處可能"即在何可讚嘆法中以讚歎性可能。"彼"即彼所化者已由邊地等八種相解脫，具足聽聞持誦等成就。"導師"即能統治天人世間而教誡。"法"即所說可讚嘆法。"說示"即以略說方式與廣說方式而說。"某一"即佛弟子中能如是說法者。"尊重處"即具足敬重之處，以戒聞佈施等功德差別而被尊敬、應被信受。"同梵行者"即同樣，或與梵（即佛法）一起修行。得信："說法者即是正等覺導師"，于導師；"此法確實善說，具義、具文，究竟圓滿，究竟清凈，能帶來利益、利樂、安樂，能生起禪定、道、果、涅槃"，于所說法，得不動信，于自相續中再三生起信。如是"說法弟子，能略說或廣說法，應被尊重、同梵行、被尊敬、應被信受"，于說法者與弟子；"如是弟子所說之法，具義、具文，究竟圓滿，究竟清凈，能帶來利益、利樂、安樂，能生起禪定、道、果、涅槃"，于弟子所說法，得信，于自相續中再三生起信，是其意趣。

Tatthāti tasmiṃ saddahitabbe satthārā desitadhamme ceva sāvakena desitadhamme ca saddahantassa veneyyassa yā vīmaṃsā, vīmaṃsantassa yā ussāhanā, ussahantassa yā tulanā, tulayantassa yā upaparikkhā, sā ayaṃ vīmaṃsādikā paññā saddhānusārena pavattanato sutamayī paññā nāma. Tattha vīmaṃsanaṃ vimaṃsā, pāḷiyā, pāḷiatthassa ca vīmaṃsā. Vīmaṃsatīti vā vīmaṃsā, padaṃ padantarena, padatthaṃ padatthantarena vicāraṇakā paññā. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ussāhanādīsupi bhāvasādhanakattusādhanāni kātabbāni. Ussāhanā ca ussāhena upatthambhikā dhammassa dhāraṇaparicayasādhikā paññā ca, na vīriyaṃ, ettha ca yā sutamatteyeva pavattā, vīmaṃsādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, sā sutamayī paññā na hoti. Yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussāhanādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussahitvā tulanādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussahitvā tulayitvā upaparikkhanabhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, sāpi paññā na sutamayī paññā hotīti daṭṭhabbā. Yā pana sutvā saddahantassa vīmaṃsā, vīmaṃsantassa ussāhanā, ussahantassa tulanā, tulayantassa upaparikkhā hoti, ayaṃ sutamayī paññā nāma hotīti daṭṭhabbā.

Sutamayī paññā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamā cintāmayī paññā』』ti vattabbabhāvato sutamayiyā paññāya vibhajanānantaraṃ cintāmayiṃ paññaṃ vibhajituṃ 『『tathā sutena nissayenā』』tiādimāha. Tattha sutanti suyyate pariyattidhammoti suto, savanaṃ pariyattidhammassāti vā sutaṃ, duvidhampi sutaṃ. Nissayena upanissāyāti attho. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ 『『sutena nissayenā』』ti karaṇavacanaṃ. Ettha pana 『『idaṃ pāṇātipātādiviramanaṃ sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ, ayaṃ ekaggatā samādahanaṭṭhena samādhi , imāni bhūtupādāni ruppanaṭṭhena rūpāni, ime phassādayo namanaṭṭhena nāmāni, ime rūpādayo pañca dhammā rāsaṭṭhena khandhā』』ti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ pīḷanādisabhāvassa vīmaṃsanābhūtā paññā vīmaṃsā nāma. Tesaṃyeva sīlasamādhiādīnaṃ sīlati patiṭṭhahati etthāti sīlantiādivacanatthaṃ pucchitvā sabhāgalakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānaṃ tuletvā viya gahaṇapaññā tulanaṃ nāma. Tesaṃyeva sīlasamādhiādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ avijahitvā aniccatādukkhatādinamanaruppanādisappaccayasaṅkhatādiākāre vitakketvā upaparikkhaṇapaññā eva upaparikkhā nāmāti visesato daṭṭhabbo. Sutadhammassa dhāraṇaparicayavasena pavattanato sutamayī paññā ussāhanā jātā viya na cintāmayī paññā cintitassa dhāraṇaparicayavasena appavattanatoti 『『ussāhanā』』ti na vuttaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 於此即于彼應信受之導師所說法及弟子所說法，信受者之觀察，觀察時之努力，努力時之衡量，衡量時之審察，彼觀察等慧因依信而行故名為聞所成慧。於此觀察為審察，即聖典及聖典義之觀察。或觀察為觀察，即以語詞對照他語詞、以義對照他義之思擇慧。如此處，于努力等中亦應作狀態釋與作者釋。努力即以精勤支援、成就法之持誦熟習之慧，非精進。於此若僅在聞中而行，未達觀察等性而止，彼非聞所成慧。聞已觀察未達努力等性而止，聞已觀察努力未達衡量等性而止，聞已觀察努力衡量未達審察性而止，彼慧亦非聞所成慧，應如是見。然聞已信受者之觀察，觀察者之努力，努力者之衡量，衡量者之審察，此名聞所成慧，應如是見。 阿阇梨已分別聞所成慧，我等亦已知，因應說"何為思所成慧"故，于分別聞所成慧后為分別思所成慧而說"如是以聞為依止"等。於此聞即所聞教法為聞，或聞為聽聞教法，二種聞。依止為親依止，是其意趣。此中"以聞為依止"之具格語表示如此性相。於此"此離殺生等以戒性為戒，此一境性以等持性為定，此大種所造以壞滅性為色，此觸等以傾向性為名，此色等五法以蘊積性為蘊"，如是觀察彼等諸法逼迫等自性之慧名為觀察。對彼等戒定等問"戒為依止於此"等語義后，如衡量同分相、味、現起、近因而取之慧名為衡量。對彼等戒定等諸法不離自相后，思惟無常性、苦性等，傾向性、壞滅性等，有緣、有為性等行相之審察慧即名為審察，應如是特別見。因聞所成慧依所聞法之持誦熟習而行故如生起了努力，思所成慧因不依所思之持誦熟習而行故不說"努力"。

Sutamayī paññā ceva cintāmayī paññā ca ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamā bhāvanāmayī paññā』』ti vattabbabhāvato kāraṇabhūtānaṃ dvinnaṃ sutamayicintāmayipaññānaṃ dassanānantaraṃ phalabhūtaṃ bhāvanāmayiṃ paññaṃ vibhajanto 『『imāhi dvīhī』』tiādimāha. Tattha imāhi dvīhi paññāhīti sutamayicintāmayipaññāhi kāraṇabhūtāhi. Sutamayipaññāya vā cintāmayipaññāya vā ubhayattha vā ṭhitoyeva yogāvacaro vipassanaṃ ārabhatīti. Manasikārasampayuttassāti rūpārūpesu pariggahādivasena saṅkhāresu aniccatādivasena manasikārena sammā pakārehi yuttappayuttassa. Diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhimaggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi- paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhisampādanena vipassanaṃ ussukkantassa yogāvacarassa santāne ñāṇadassanavisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ yaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ nibbānārammaṇadassanabhūmiyaṃ vā bhāvanābhūmiyaṃ vā uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāmayī paññāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Yadipi paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato 『『dassana』』nti vuttaṃ, bhāvanāvasena pana pavattanato 『『bhāvanāmayī paññā』』ti veditabbaṃ. Dassanabhūmīti paṭhamamaggaphalāni, sesāni 『『bhāvanābhūmī』』ti vuccanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 阿阇梨已分別聞所成慧與思所成慧，我等亦已知，因應說"何為修所成慧"故，在顯示作為因的二種聞所成思所成慧后，為分別作為果的修所成慧而說"以此二"等。於此"以此二慧"即以作為因的聞所成思所成慧。瑜伽行者或住于聞所成慧，或住于思所成慧，或住於二者而開始觀。"相應作意"即於色無色中依把握等，于諸行中依無常等，以正確方式相應作意。瑜伽行者以成就見清凈、度疑清凈、道非道智見清凈、行道智見清凈而精進于觀，于其相續中名為智見清凈之聖道智，于見涅槃所緣地或修地生起，應知此為修所成慧之意趣。雖然初道智因最初見涅槃故說為"見"，然依修而行故應知為"修所成慧"。見地即初道果，其餘說為"修地"。

1. Amhākācariya tumhehi 『『yassa satthā vā』』tiādinā sutamayipaññādikā vibhattā, evaṃ sati sutena vinā cintāmayī paññā nāma na bhaveyya, mahābodhisattānaṃ pana sutena vinā cintāmayī paññā hotvevāti codanaṃ manasi katvā tasmiṃ saṅgahetvā pakārantarena vibhajituṃ 『『paratoghosā』』tiādimāha.

Tattha paratoghosāti parato pavatto desanāghoso paccayo etissāti paratoghosā. Paccattasamuṭṭhitāti pati visuṃ attaniyeva samuṭṭhitā. Yonisomanasikārāti tesaṃ tesaṃ cintetabbānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ ruppananamanādisabhāvapariggaṇhanādinā upāyena pavattamanasikārā cintāmayī paññā nāma, iminā sāvakāpi sāmaññato gahitā, tathāpi ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃyeva vuttattā sāvakā idha gahitā, tasmā purimanayo yuttataro. Paratoti dhammadesakato pavattena dhammadesanāghosena hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, paccattasamuṭṭhitena, yonisomanasikārena ca hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāvasena pavattanato bhāvanāmayī paññā nāma, iminā sāvakāpi sāmaññato gahitā, tathāpi ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃyeva vuttattā sāvakā idha gahitā, tasmā purimanayo yuttataro. Paratoti dhammadesakato pavattena dhammadesanāghosena hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, paccattasamuṭṭhitena, yonisomanasikārena ca hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāvasena pavattanato bhāvanāmayī paññā nāmāti vibhajitvā paṇḍitehi ñeyyāti vitthārena gambhīratthaṃ ñātuṃ icchantehi 『『evaṃ paṭipadāvibhāgenā』』tiādinā (netti. aṭṭha. 9) aṭṭhakathāvacanena jānitabbo.

Sutamayipaññādikā tisso paññā ācariyena nānānayehi vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『tāsu yassa ekā vā dve vā paññā atthi, so puggalo konāmo, yassa ekāpi natthi, so puggalo konāmo』』ti pucchitabbabhāvato yassa ayaṃ paññā, imā vā atthi, so puggalo itthannāmo, yassa natthi, so puggalo itthannāmoti paṭipadāpaññāppabhedena puggalaṃ vibhajituṃ 『『yassa imā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Tattha yassa atitikkhapaññassa sutamayī paññā ceva cintāmayī paññā ca imā dve paññā atthi, ayaṃ atitikkhapañño uddesamatteneva jānanato ugghaṭitaññū nāma. Yassa nātitikkhapaññassa uddesaniddesehi sutamayī paññā atthi, cintāmayī paññā natthi, ayaṃ nātitikkhapañño uddesaniddesehi jānanato vipañcitaññū nāma. Yassa mandapaññassa uddesaniddesehi neva sutamayī paññā atthi, na cintāmayī paññā ca, ayaṃ mandapañño uddesaniddesapaṭiniddesehi jānanato niravasesavitthāradesanāya netabbato neyyo nāmāti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『idāni yadatthaṃ imā paññā uddhaṭā, tameva veneyyapuggalavibhāgaṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ 『yassā』tiādi vutta』』ntiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 8) vuttaṃ.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 8、我們的導師，你們以"誰的導師或..."等方式分別講述了聞所成慧等，如果是這樣的話，沒有聽聞就不會有思所成慧，但是大菩薩們卻能不經聽聞就產生思所成慧，考慮到這個質疑，爲了把這個包含進去並從另一個角度加以分別，所以說"從他人之聲..."等。 其中，"從他人之聲"是指從他人發出的說法之聲作為這個（慧）的緣，所以稱為從他人之聲。"自心生起"是指各別從自己內心生起。"如理作意"是指對於那些應當思維的色等諸法，通過把握變壞、傾向等自性等方式而轉起的作意，稱為思所成慧。這裡雖然一般地包含了聲聞，但因為只說及利根者等，所以這裡指的是聲聞，因此前面的解釋更為恰當。"從他人"是指由於從說法者發出的說法之聲這個因而生起的智慧，由於自心生起和如理作意這個因而生起的智慧，這個因為是以修習的方式轉起，所以稱為修所成慧。這裡雖然一般地包含了聲聞，但因為只說及利根者等，所以這裡指的是聲聞，因此前面的解釋更為恰當。想要詳細瞭解深奧義理的智者們，應當通過"如是以行道分別"等註釋書的文句來了知。 聞所成慧等三種慧已被導師以種種方式分別，我們也已經了知，因為可以問"在這些慧中，具有一種或兩種慧的補特伽羅叫什麼名字，一種都沒有的補特伽羅叫什麼名字"，所以爲了依據行道和智慧的差別來分別補特伽羅，說了"誰的這些..."等。 其中，如果某個利根者具有聞所成慧和思所成慧這兩種慧，這個利根者因為僅僅通過略說就能了知，所以稱為頓悟者。如果某個中根者具有通過略說和詳說而來的聞所成慧，但沒有思所成慧，這個中根者因為通過略說和詳說而了知，所以稱為漸悟者。如果某個鈍根者既沒有通過略說和詳說而來的聞所成慧，也沒有思所成慧，這個鈍根者因為通過略說、詳說和反覆解說而了知，因為需要通過完整詳盡的教說來引導，所以稱為應被引導者。但在註釋書中說："現在，爲了顯示這些慧被舉出的目的，即所化補特伽羅的差別，所以說'誰的...'等"等。

1. 『『Tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussā』』tiādinā desanaṃ vibhāveti, 『『tattha catasso paṭipadā』』tiādinā paṭipadāvibhāgehi, 『『svāyaṃ hāro』』tiādinā ñāṇavibhāgehi ca desanābhājanaṃ veneyyattayaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『yāya desanāpāḷiyā desanāhāraṃ yojetuṃ pubbe 『dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī』tiādinā desanāhārassa visayabhāvena yā pāḷidesanā nikkhittā, sā pāḷidesanā desanāhārena niddhāritesu assādādīsu atthesu kimatthaṃ desayatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『imaṃ atthaṃ desayatī』』ti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『sāyaṃ dhammadesanā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ.

Tattha sāyaṃ dhammadesanāti yā dhammadesanā ādikalyāṇādikā pubbe desanāhārassa visayabhāvena nikkhittā, sāyaṃ dhammadesanā assādādīsu kimatthaṃ desayatīti kathetukāmatāya pucchati, pucchitvā 『『cattāri saccāni desayatī』』ti vissajjeti, tāni sarūpato dassetuṃ 『『dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magga』』nti vuttaṃ. Pavattipavattakanivattinivattanupāyabhāvena aviparītabhāvato 『『saccānī』』ti vuttāni.

Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ saccāni desanāhārena niddhāritāni, sā desanā cattāri saccāni desayatīti yuttaṃ hotu. Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ assādādayo niddhāritā, sā desanā cattāri saccāni desayatīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Heṭṭhā ca assādādayo niddhāritā, tasmā 『『assādādayo』』tipi vattabbanti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『ādīnavo phalañca dukkha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Desanāhārena saṃvaṇṇanānayena desanāyaṃ niddhārito ādīnavo ceva phalañca dukkhasaccaṃ hoti, assādo samudayasaccaṃ, nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, upāyo ceva āṇatti ca maggasaccaṃ hoti, tasmā 『『cattāri saccāni desayatī』』ti vattabbamevāti.

Taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakadhammā dukkhaṃ, te ca aniccādīhi pīḷitattā ādīnavāyeva. Phalanti desanāya phalaṃ lokiyaṃ, na lokuttaraṃ, tasmā dukkhanti vattabbameva. Assādoti taṇhāssādassa gahitattā 『『assādo samudayo』』ti ca vattabbaṃ. Assādekadeso dukkhameva, assādekadeso dukkhañceva samudayo ca. Saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo ca bhagavato āṇatti ca desanāya phalādhigamassa upāyabhāvato 『『upāyo, āṇatti ca maggo』』ti vuttaṃ, nissaraṇekadesopi maggoti daṭṭhabbo. 『『Imāni cattāri saccāni yā desanā visesato desayati, katamā sā』』ti pucchitabbattā visesaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『imāni cattāri saccāni idaṃ dhammacakka』』nti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuccamānaṃ dhammacakkaṃ imāni cattāri saccāni visesato desayatīti yojanā kātabbā.

『『Yā desanā imāni cattāri saccāni visesato desayati, tassā desanāya dhammacakkabhāvaṃ kiṃ bhagavā āhā』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『yathāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha 『『jātipi dukkhā』』tiādivacanato (mahāva. 14) taṇhāvajjaṃ jātiādikaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvena, dukkhadukkhādibhāvena ca 『『dukkha』』nti vuttaṃ. Meti mayā pavattitanti yojanā. Bhikkhaveti savane ussāhaṃ janetuṃ ālapati. Bārāṇasiyanti bārāṇasīnagarassa avidūre. Isipataneti sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ isanato gavesanato 『『isī』』ti voharitānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ patanaṭṭhāne. Migadāyeti migānaṃ abhayadānaṭṭhāne kārite assameva.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 9、"其中世尊對利根者..."等是在闡明教說，"其中四種行道..."等是通過行道的分別，"這個引導..."等是通過智慧的分別，導師分別了作為教說對象的三種所化機，我們也已了知。因為可以問："之前以'諸比丘，我將為你們說法...'等作為教說引導的對象而安立的經文教說，這個經文教說在通過教說引導確定的味著等義理中是爲了說明什麼義理"，爲了確定並顯示"是爲了說明這個義理"，所以開始說"這個法教..."等。 其中，"這個法教"是在問：之前作為教說引導的對象而安立的、具有初善等特質的法教，在味著等中是爲了說明什麼義理，問了之後回答說"是爲了說明四諦"，爲了顯示這些（四諦）的自性，所以說"苦、集、滅、道"。因為以流轉、使流轉、還滅、還滅方便的方式而不顛倒，所以稱為"諦"。 在某個教說中通過教說引導確定了諸諦，那個教說說明四諦是合理的。但在某個教說中確定了味著等，那個教說說明四諦是不能說的。而在前面確定了味著等，因此也應該說"味著等"，考慮到這個質疑，所以說"過患和果是苦..."等。按照教說引導的註釋方法，在教說中所確定的過患和果是苦諦，味著是集諦，出離是滅諦，方便和教誡是道諦，因此應當說"說明四諦"。 除了愛之外的三界諸法是苦，它們因為被無常等所逼迫所以就是過患。果是指教說的世間果，不是出世間果，因此應該說是苦。味著是因為已經包含了愛的味著，所以應該說"味著是集"。味著的一部分就是苦，味著的另一部分既是苦也是集。聖道連同觀智和世尊的教誡，因為是獲得教說之果的方便，所以說"方便和教誡是道"，出離的一部分也應該被看作是道。因為可以問"什麼教說特別說明這四諦"，爲了確定並顯示特殊性，所以說"這個法輪說明這四諦"。應當這樣理解：這個將要說的法輪特別說明這四諦。 因為應該說"世尊是否說了這個教說以法輪的方式說明這四諦"，所以說"如世尊所說..."等。其中，從"生也是苦"等言句可知，除了愛之外的生等三界諸法，因為是苦的所依，因為是苦苦等的緣故，所以說"苦"。"我"是指被我轉起的意思。"諸比丘"是爲了生起聽聞的精進而稱呼。"在波羅奈（現在的瓦拉納西）"是指在波羅奈城不遠處。"仙人墮處"是指尋求戒蘊等而被稱為"仙人"的諸辟支佛降落的地方。"施鹿林"是指為施予諸鹿無畏而建造的精舍。

Anuttaranti uttaritarābhāvena anuttaraṃ anatisayaṃ. Dhammacakkanti satipaṭṭhānādike sabhāvadhāraṇādinā atthena dhammo ceva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Appaṭivattiyanti appaṭisedhanīyaṃ. Kasmā? Janakassa bhagavato dhammissarattā sammāsambuddhattā, jaññassa ca anuttarattā koṇḍaññādīnañceva aṭṭhārasabrahmakoṭiyā ca catusaccapaṭivedhasādhanato ca. 『『Kena appaṭivattiya』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『samaṇena vā』』tiādimāha. Tattha samaṇenāti pabbajjamattūpagatena . Brāhmaṇenāti jātibrāhmaṇena. Paramatthānañhi samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ paṭisedhane cittuppādānuppajjanampi natthi. Devenāti chakāmāvacaradevena. Brahmunāti rūpabrahmā gahitā. 『『Samaṇena vā …pe… brahmunā』』ti ettakameva avatvā『『kenacī』』ti vuttavacanena avasesakhattiyagahapatiparisajanā saṅgahitā. Tasmā khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisā aṭṭhavidhāpi paṭisedhetuṃ asamatthāyevāti veditabbā. Lokasminti sattasamūhe dhammacakkādhāre.

『『Dvādasa padāni sutta』』nti gāthānurūpaṃ dhammacakkasutte padāni vibhajanto 『『tattha aparimāṇā』』tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti dhammacakkadesanāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13 ādayo; paṭi. ma.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "無上"是因為沒有更上的而稱為無上、無勝過。"法輪"是因爲念處等以持有自性等義而為法，以轉起義而為輪，所以稱為法輪。"無人能轉"是指無人能夠阻止。為什麼？因為世尊是能生者、法的自在者、正等覺者，所生法是無上的，以及使憍陳如等和一百八十億梵天證悟四諦的緣故。因為可以問"誰無法轉"，所以說"沙門或..."等。其中，"沙門"是指僅僅受具足戒者。"婆羅門"是指種姓婆羅門。因為對於第一義的沙門、婆羅門來說，連阻止的心念都不會生起。"天"是指六慾界天。"梵"是指色界梵天。不僅說"沙門或...乃至...梵"，通過說"任何"這個詞而包含了其餘的剎帝利、居士等眾人。因此應當了知：剎帝利、婆羅門、居士、沙門、四大天王天、三十三天、魔、梵天等八種眾都無法阻止。"在世間"是指在作為法輪所依的有情群中。 "十二句經"是隨順偈頌而分別法輪經中的諸句，所以說"其中無量..."等。其中，"其中"是指在法輪教說中。

2.30). 『『Aparimāṇā akkharā aparimāṇā padā』』ti avatvā 『『aparimāṇā padā aparimāṇā akkharā』』ti uppaṭipāṭivacanehi yebhuyyena padasaṅgahitānīti dasseti. Padā, akkharā, byañjanāti ca liṅgavipallāsānīti daṭṭhabbāni. Etasseva atthassāti vattabbākārassa catusaccasaṅkhātassa atthasseva saṅkāsanā pakāsanā pakāsanākāro paññattākāroti ākāravantaākārasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Saṅkāsanākāroti ca saṅkāsanīyassa atthassa ākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Itipīti iti iminā pakārenapi, iminā pakārenapi idaṃ jātiādikaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti veditabbaṃ.

Ayanti kāmataṇhādibhedā ayaṃ taṇhā. Dukkhasamudayoti dukkhanibbattanassa hetubhāvato dukkhasamudayo. Ayanti sabbasaṅkhatato nissaṭā ayaṃ asaṅkhatā dhātu. Dukkhanirodhoti jātiādippabhedassa dukkhassa anuppādananirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodho. Ayanti sammādiṭṭhādiko aṭṭhaṅgiko ariyo maggo. Dukkhanirodhabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gatattā, dukkhanirodhappattiyā paṭipadābhāvato ca dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

『『Tattha aparimāṇā』』tiādinā byañjanapadaatthapadāni vibhajitvā tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ visayivisayabhāvena sambandhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ 『『tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā bhagavā kiṃ sāmaññehi akkharādīhi saṅkāseti vā pakāseti vā, udāhu yathārahaṃ saṅkāseti pakāsetītiādivicāraṇāya sambhavato visayavisayibhāvena sambandhabhāvaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha 『『akkharehi saṅkāsetī』』ti kasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu 『『dukkhasacca』』ntiādīsu padeneva dukkhasaccatthattādiko saṅkāsitabboti? Saccaṃ, padāvayavassa pana akkharassa gahaṇamukheneva akkharasamudāyassapi padassa gahaṇaṃ hoti, pade gahite ca dukkhasaccatthādikāvabodho hotveva, evaṃ sati padeneva sijjhanato akkharo visuṃ na gahetabboti? Na, dukkhasaccatthādikāvabodhassa visesuppattibhāvato. Du-iti akkharena hi anekupaddavādhiṭṭhānabhāvena kucchitattho gahito, kha-iti akkharena dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahena tucchatthoti evamādikāvabodhassa visesuppatti bhavati. Tena vuttaṃ 『『padatthagahaṇassa visesādhānaṃ jāyatī』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 9). Padapariyosāne vākyapariyosānābhāvato akkharehi saṃkhittena dīpiyamāno attho padehi pakāsitovāti vuttaṃ 『『padehi pakāsetī』』ti. Vākyapariyosāne pana saṅkāsito pakāsito attho vivarito vivaṭo katovāti vuttaṃ. 『『Byañjanehi vivaratī』』ti. Pakārehi ca vākyabhede kate so attho vibhatto nāmāti vuttaṃ 『『ākārehi vibhajatī』』ti. Vākyāvayavānaṃ padānaṃ paccekaṃ nibbacanavibhāge kate so attho pākaṭo katovāti vuttaṃ 『『niruttīhi uttānīkarotī』』ti. Katanibbacanehi vākyāvayavehi vitthāravasena niravasesato desitehi veneyyasattānaṃ citte parisamantato tosanaṃ hoti, paññātejanañcāti āha 『『niddesehi paññapetī』』ti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 沒有說"無量音節、無量詞語"，而是說"無量詞語、無量音節"，通過這種顛倒次序，顯示大多數是被詞語包含的。詞語、音節、語素應當被視為語法變化。這是爲了闡明、顯示、顯示這個被稱為四諦的義理的顯示方式。"顯示方式"是指應當顯示的義理的方式。其他情況也是同樣的方式。"如此"是指通過這種方式、通過這種方式，應當了知這個生等苦為聖諦。 這是指欲愛等種類的愛。"苦集"是因為是苦生起的因。這是指從一切有為法中分離出來的無為界。"苦滅"是因為是生等苦不生起、滅盡的緣故。這是指從正見等開始的八支聖道。因為以緣取涅槃為目標，因為是趨向苦滅的行道，所以是趨向苦滅的行道。其餘部分與前面所說的方式相同。 通過"其中無量..."等分別語素、詞語、義理，併爲了顯示它們之間以對像和對象的方式相互關聯，所以說"其中世尊以音節顯示..."等。或者，世尊是以普通的音節等顯示還是闡明，還是按照適當的方式顯示闡明等，爲了確定並顯示以對像和對象的方式相互關聯，所以說"其中世尊以音節顯示..."等。 為什麼說"以音節顯示"？難道不是僅僅通過詞語在"苦諦"等中顯示苦諦的義理嗎？誠然如此，但通過詞語的部分音節的方式，也包含了整個詞語，當詞語被包含時，就能瞭解苦諦等義理，這種情況下，音節是否應該被單獨把握？不是的，因為對苦諦等義理的特殊瞭解會產生。例如，"du-"音節表示多種災難的根源，意味著可憎；"kha-"音節表示沒有持續、美好、快樂的狀態，意味著空虛。因此說"詞義把握會產生特殊闡明"。 因為在詞語結尾處沒有句子結尾，所以說通過音節簡略顯示的義理是通過詞語闡明的。在句子結尾處顯示、闡明、開啟、展開的義理，所以說"以語素展開"。通過各種方式在句子分別中闡明的義理，所以說"以方式分別"。對句子各部分詞語逐一進行詞源解析和分別時，義理被顯露，所以說"以語源顯明"。通過已經進行詞源解析的句子部分，從各個方面詳盡地教導，使所化有情的心完全滿足，並激發智慧，所以說"以詳說闡明"。

『『Bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī』』tiādīsu 『『bhagavā evā』』ti vā 『『akkharehi evā』』ti vā avadhāraṇe yojite 『『sāvako na saṅkāseti, padādīhi na saṅkāsetī』』ti attho bhaveyya, sāvako ca saṅkāseti, padādīhi ca saṅkāseti. Kattha avadhāraṇaṃ yojetabbanti ce? 『『Bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetiyevā』』ti avadhāraṇaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Evañhi sati sāvakena saṅkāsito vā padādīhi saṅkāsito vā attho saṅgahito hoti. Atthapadānañca akkharādinānāvisayatā siddhā hoti. Tena ekānusandhike sutte chaḷeva atthapadāni niddhāretabbāni, anekānusandhike sutte anusandhibhedena visuṃ visuṃ cha cha atthapadāni niddhāretabbāni.

『『Chasu byañjanapadesu katamena byañjanapadena katamaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『iminā idaṃ kiccaṃ, iminā idaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetī』』ti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『tattha bhagavā akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭetī』』tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti akkharādīsu byañjanapadesu. Ugghaṭetīti ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādhetīti attho. Kiñcāpi desanāva ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādheti, bhagavā pana desanājanakattā ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādhetīti vuccati. Sesesupi evamattho daṭṭhabbo.

『『Ugghaṭanakiccasādhikā desanāyeva kiṃ vipañcanavitthāraṇakiccasādhikā desanājanakattā, udāhu visuṃ visuṃ kiccasādhikā aññā』』ti pucchitabbabhāvato visuṃ visuṃ kiccasādhikā aññā desanāti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『tattha ugghaṭanā ādī』』tiādimāha. Atha vā 『『katamā ugghaṭanā, katamā vipañcanā, katamā vitthāraṇā』』ti pucchitabbattā vuttaṃ 『『tattha ugghaṭanā ādī』』tiādi. Tattha tatthāti ugghaṭanādikiccasādhikāsu desanāsu. Ugghaṭanāti ugghaṭanakiccasādhikā desanā ādidesanā hoti. Vipañcanāti vipañcanakiccasādhikā desanā majjhedesanā hoti. Vitthāraṇāti vitthāraṇakiccasādhikā desanā pariyosānadesanā hotīti attho daṭṭhabbo.

『『Ugghaṭiyanto uddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vineti, vipañciyanto niddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vineti, vitthāriyanto paṭiniddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vinetī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『soyaṃ dhammavinayo』』tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ 『akkharehi saṅkāsetī』tiādīnaṃ channaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetvā idāni atthapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetuṃ 『soyaṃ dhammavinayo』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 9) vuttaṃ.

Tattha ugghaṭiyanto uddisiyamāno uddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo ugghaṭitaññupuggalaṃ vineti, tena ugghaṭitaññuno puggalassa vinayanena naṃ ugghaṭiyantaṃ uddisiyamānaṃ uddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ 『『ādikalyāṇo』』ti āhu. Vipañciyanto niddisiyamāno niddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo vipañcitaññupuggalaṃ vineti, tena vipañcitaññupuggalassa vinayanena naṃ vipañciyantaṃ niddisiyamānaṃ niddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ 『『majjhekalyāṇo』』ti āhu. Vitthāriyanto paṭiniddisiyamāno paṭiniddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo neyyaṃ puggalaṃ vineti vinayanaṃ janeti, tena neyyassa puggalassa vinayanena naṃ vitthāriyantaṃ paṭiniddisiyamānaṃ paṭiniddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ 『『pariyosānakalyāṇo』』ti āhūti yojanatthoti daṭṭhabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 在"世尊以音節顯示"等中，如果把限定放在"唯世尊"或"唯以音節"上，就會變成"聲聞不顯示，不以詞等顯示"的意思，但實際上聲聞也顯示，也以詞等顯示。如果問"應該在哪裡加限定"，應該這樣限定："世尊確實以音節顯示"。這樣的話，就包含了由聲聞顯示或由詞等顯示的義理。而且義理詞有音節等不同的對象也就確定了。因此在單一主題的經中應當確定六個義理詞，在多主題的經中應當按照不同的主題分別確定各六個義理詞。 因為可以問"在六種語素詞中，用哪種語素詞完成哪種作用"，爲了確定並顯示"用這個完成這個作用，用這個完成這個作用"，所以說"其中世尊以音節和詞語開顯..."等。其中，"其中"是指在音節等語素詞中。"開顯"的意思是完成開顯的作用。雖然是教說完成開顯的作用，但因為世尊是教說的產生者，所以說世尊完成開顯的作用。其他情況也應當如此理解。 因為可以問"是僅僅開顯作用的教說就能因為產生教說而完成闡明和廣說的作用，還是有其他各自完成不同作用的教說"，爲了確定並顯示有其他各自完成不同作用的教說，所以說"其中開顯為初..."等。或者因為可以問"什麼是開顯，什麼是闡明，什麼是廣說"，所以說"其中開顯為初..."等。其中，"其中"是指在完成開顯等作用的教說中。"開顯"是指完成開顯作用的教說是初始教說。"闡明"是指完成闡明作用的教說是中間教說。"廣說"是指完成廣說作用的教說是結尾教說，應當如此理解其意思。 因為可以問"被開顯、被略說的作為所誦義理的法與律調伏哪種補特伽羅，被闡明、被詳說的作為所誦義理的法與律調伏哪種補特伽羅，被廣說、被反覆詳說的作為所誦義理的法與律調伏哪種補特伽羅"，所以說"這個法與律..."等。但在註釋書中說："這樣顯示了'以音節顯示'等六種語素詞的作用之後，現在爲了顯示義理詞的作用，所以說'這個法與律'等"。 其中，被開顯、被略說的、作為略說所誦義理的這個法與律調伏利根者，因為通過調伏利根補特伽羅，他們說這個被開顯、被略說的、作為略說所誦義理的律是"初善"。被闡明、被詳說的、作為詳說所誦義理的這個法與律調伏中根者，因為通過調伏中根補特伽羅，他們說這個被闡明、被詳說的、作為詳說所誦義理的律是"中善"。被廣說、被反覆詳說的、作為反覆詳說所誦義理的這個法與律調伏鈍根者，產生調伏，因為通過調伏鈍根補特伽羅，他們說這個被廣說、被反覆詳說的、作為反覆詳說所誦義理的律是"后善"，應當這樣理解其組織的意思。

Atha vā 『『akkharehi saṅkāsetī』』tiādinā channaṃ padānaṃ byāpāro dassito, evaṃ sati attho nibyāpāro siyā, attho ca nippariyāyato sabyāpāroyevāti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha 『『soyaṃ dhammavinayo』』tiādi. Etena atthoyeva mukhyato veneyyattayassa vinayanakiccaṃ sādheti, atthavācako pana saddo ṭhānūpacārato veneyyattayassa vinayanakiccaṃ sādhetīti dasseti. Padaparamassa pana saccappaṭivedhassa patiṭṭhānābhāvato so idha na vutto. Sekkhaggahaṇena vā kalyāṇaputhujjanassa viya neyyaggahaṇena padaparamassa puggalassāpi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ . Akkharehītiādīsu karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, na hetvatthe. Akkharādīnañhi ugghaṭanādīni payojanāniyeva honti, na ugghaṭanādīnaṃ akkharādīni payojanānīti 『『annena vasatī』』tiādīsu viya na hetuattho gahetabbo. Tattha hi annena hetunā vasati, vasanena hetunā annaṃ laddhanti vasanakiriyāya phalaṃ vasanakiriyāya hetubhāvena gahitaṃ. 『『Ajjhesanena vasatī』』tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tenāha 『『yadatthā ca kiriyā, so hetū』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 9). Tattha yadatthāti so annādiko attho yassā vasanādikiriyāyāti yadatthā, vasanādikiriyā, so annādiko attho tassā vasanādikiriyāya hetūti attho veditabbo.

我將為您直譯這段巴利文： 2.30. 沒有說"無量字、無量句"，而是說"無量句、無量字"，以這種顛倒的說法顯示大多數是被句所包含的。應當看作"句、字、音"是性的變異。"這個義理的"是指應當說的四諦所稱的義理的顯現、闡明、闡明的形式、施設的形式，這是具有形式和與形式相關的所有格。"顯現的形式"是指應當顯現的義理的形式。其他的也是這個道理。"如是"是指以這種方式，以這種方式，這個生等應當被了知為苦聖諦。 "這個"是指欲愛等差別的這個愛。"苦集"是因為是苦生起的因，所以是苦集。"這個"是指從一切有為法出離的這個無為界。"苦滅"是因為是以生等為差別的苦的不生滅的緣，所以是苦滅。"這個"是指正見等八支聖道。"導向苦滅之道"是因為以作為所緣的方式到達了作為苦滅的涅槃，以及因為是爲了達到苦滅的行道。其餘的如前所說。

1. 『『Tattha aparimāṇā padā』』tiādinā 『『dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī』』ti uddiṭṭhāya pāḷiyā dvādasapadasampattisaṅkhātaṃ tividhakalyāṇataṃ dassetvā idāni chaatthapadachabyañjanapadabhedena sampattisaṅkhātaṃ atthapadabyañjanapadakalyāṇataṃ dassento 『『tattha chappadāni attho』』tiādimāha. Atha vā 『『dvādasa padāni sutta』』nti vuttānurūpaṃ 『『tattha aparimāṇā』』tiādinā 『『dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī』』ti uddiṭṭhāya pāḷiyā dvādasapadatā dassetvā 『『ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa』』nti vuttānurūpaṃ 『『tattha bhagavā akkharehi cā』』tiādinā tassā pāḷiyā tividhakalyāṇatā dassitā, dassetvā idāni 『『sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddha』』nti vuttānurūpaṃ tassā pāḷiyā chaatthapadabyañjanapadasampannataṃ dassetuṃ 『『tattha chappadāni attho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ desanāhāravisayasaṅkhātāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ chappadāni attho. Katamāni chappadāni? Saṅkāsanā, pakāsanā, vivaraṇā, vibhajanā, uttānīkammaṃ, paññatti imāni chappadāni. Attho yassa atthi tasmā sātthaṃ. Tatthāti tissaṃ desanāhāravisayasaṅkhātāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ chappadāni byañjanaṃ. Katamāni chappadāni? Akkharaṃ, padaṃ, byañjanaṃ, ākāro, nirutti, niddeso imāni chappadāni. Byañjanaṃ yassa atthīti sabyañjananti yojanā kātabbā. Tenāti tassā pāḷiyā tividhakalyāṇachaatthapadasampannachabyañjanapadasampannaṭṭhena, 『『dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave…pe… suddha』』nti bhagavā āhāti attho.

Kevalasaddassa sakalādiatthavācakattā adhippetatthaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『kevalanti lokuttaraṃ na missaṃ lokiyehi dhammehī』』ti vuttaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti adhippetatthe ekopi attho ūno natthi, vācakasaddesupi anatthako ekopi saddo adhiko natthīti paripuṇṇaṃ anūnaṃ anatirekaṃ. Parisuddhanti saddadosaatthadosādivirahato vā parisuddhaṃ, rāgādimalavirahato vā pariyodātānaṃ uttarimanussadhammavisesānaṃ upaṭṭhitaṭṭhānattā parisuddhaṃ pariyodātaṃ. Niggataṃ malaṃ etassa dhammassāti nimmalaṃ. Saddadosādivirahato vā rāgādivirahato vā sabbamalehi apagataṃ pari samantato odātanti pariyodātaṃ. Upaṭṭhitanti upatiṭṭhanti ettha sabbavisesāti upaṭṭhitaṃ yathā 『『padakkanta』』nti. Padakkantaṃ padakkantaṭṭhānaṃ. Visisanti manussadhammehīti visesā, sabbe visesā sabbavisesā, sabbato vā visesāti sabbavisesā, uttarimanussadhammā. Tesaṃ sabbavisesānaṃ upaṭṭhitanti yojanā. Idanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Tathāgatassa sammāsambuddhassa padanti tathāgatapadaṃ. Padanti ca paṭipattigamanena vā desanāgamanena vā kilesaggahaṇaṃ. Ottharitvā gamanaṭṭhānaṃ itipi vuccati pavuccati, tathāgatena gocarāsevanena vā bhāvanāsevanena vā nisevitaṃ bhajitaṃ itipi vuccati, tathāgatassa mahāvajirañāṇasabbaññutaññāṇadantehi ārañjitaṃ ārañjitaṭṭhānaṃ itipi vuccati, ato tathāgatapadādibhāvena vattabbabhāvato etaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ iti paññāyati. Brahmacariyanti brahmuno sabbasattuttamassa bhagavato cariyaṃ, brahmaṃ vā sabbaseṭṭhaṃ cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ. Paññāyatīti yathāvuttehi pakārehi ñāyatīti attho veditabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 10、通過"其中無量詞語..."等，顯示了"諸比丘，我將為你們說法"這句經文所具有的十二種詞語功德即三種善，現在爲了顯示以六種義詞和六種語詞之分所構成的義詞語詞功德，所以說"其中六詞是義..."等。或者，按照所說的"十二詞是經"，通過"其中無量..."等顯示了"諸比丘，我將為你們說法"這句經文具有十二詞，按照所說的"初善、中善、后善"，通過"其中世尊以音節和..."等顯示了那句經文的三種善，顯示之後，現在爲了按照所說的"有義、有文、完全圓滿、清凈"來顯示那句經文具足六種義詞和語詞，所以說"其中六詞是義..."等。 其中，"其中"是指在這被稱為教說引導對象的經文中，六詞是義。什麼是六詞？顯現、闡明、開顯、分別、明示、施設，這是六詞。有義理所以是"有義"。"其中"是指在這被稱為教說引導對象的經文中，六詞是文。什麼是六詞？音節、詞語、語素、形式、語源、解說，這是六詞。有文字所以是"有文"，應當這樣理解。"因此"是指那句經文具有三種善、六種義詞圓滿、六種語詞圓滿的意思，所以世尊說"諸比丘，我將...乃至...清凈"。 因為"完全"一詞表示整體等義，爲了確定並顯示所要表達的義理，所以說"完全是指出世間的，不與世間法相混"。"圓滿"是指在所要表達的義理中沒有任何義理的缺失，在表達的言語中也沒有任何無意義的多餘言語，所以是圓滿的、不缺少的、不過多的。"清凈"是因為遠離語言過失、義理過失等，或者因為遠離貪慾等垢染，或者因為是殊勝的超人法所安住之處而清凈、遍白。"無垢"是指這個法離開了垢染。遍白是指因為遠離語言過失等或貪慾等而離開一切垢染，遍一切處都是潔白的。"安住"是指一切殊勝之法都安住於此，如同"足跡"一樣。足跡是指足踏之處。"殊勝"是指超越人法，"一切殊勝"是指一切超越，或者從一切方面超越，即是超人法。應當理解為一切殊勝之法的安住。"這個"是指包含三學的教法梵行。"如來之跡"是指正等覺如來的足跡。"足跡"是指通過修行或說法而把握煩惱。也說是踐踏而行之處，也說是被如來以行境受用或修習受用而受用、親近，也說是被如來的大金剛智和一切知智之牙所擦踏、所擦踏之處，因此因為應當說是如來之跡等，所以這個教法梵行被如此了知。"梵行"是指最勝的一切眾生即世尊的行為，或者是最勝的行為即是梵行。"被了知"是指通過前面所說的方式被了知，應當如此理解其意思。

『『Imassa sikkhattayassa saṅgahassa sāsanassa paripuṇṇabhāvaparisuddhabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ tathāgatapadabhāvaṃ!Tathāgatapadabhāvaṃ, tathāgatanisevitabhāvaṃ, tathāgataārañjitabhāvaṃ, tehi pakārehi ñāpitabhāvaṃ kathaṃ mayaṃ nikkaṅkhā jānissāmā』』ti vattabbato 『『tenāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ, tabbhāvadīpakena bhagavatā vuttena vacanena tumhehi nikkaṅkhehi jānitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.

Yadi bhagavā akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭeti, byañjanehi ca ākārehi ca vipañcayati, niruttīhi ca niddesehi ca vitthāreti, evaṃ sati ācariyena racitena desanāhārena payojanaṃ na bhavati, desanāhārena na vinā bhagavato desanāyameva atthasijjhanatoti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『kesaṃ ayaṃ dhammadesanā』』ti pucchitvā 『『yogīna』』nti āha. Tattha yogīnanti yujjanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāyanti yogino, tesaṃ yogīnaṃ. Tena mayā racitena desanāhārena saṃvaṇṇitā ayaṃ vuttappakārā bhagavato desanā ugghaṭanādikiccaṃ sādhetīti desanāhāro yogīnaṃ sātthakoyevāti daṭṭhabbo. 『『Desanāhārassa assādādidesanāhārabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāha āyasmā…pe… desanāhāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tena assādādidesanāhārabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno 『『assādādīnavatā…pe… desanāhāro』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi desanāhārassa yogīnaṃ assādādidesanāhārabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.

『『Kiṃ pana ettāvatā desanāhāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『niyutto desanāhāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ desanāyaṃ assādādayo yena desanāhārena niddhāritā, tassaṃ desanāyaṃ so desanāhāro niddhāretvā yojitoti attho daṭṭhabboti.

Iti desanāhāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Vicayahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 因為可以說"這個包含三學的教法如何才能使我們無疑地了知它具有被稱為圓滿性和清凈性的如來足跡性質、如來受用性質、如來擦踏性質、以及通過這些方式被了知的性質"，所以說"因此世尊..."等，這意味著你們應當通過世尊所說的顯示這種性質的言語而無疑地了知。 如果世尊以音節和詞語開顯，以語素和形式闡明，以語源和解說廣說，這樣的話，導師所作的教說引導就沒有用處，因為不需要教說引導，在世尊的教說中就能成就義理。考慮到這個質疑，問"這個法教是為誰"然後說"為瑜伽行者"。其中，"瑜伽行者"是指與四諦業處修習相應的人，為這些瑜伽行者。由此應當看到：由我所作的教說引導所註釋的這個如前所說的世尊教說完成開顯等作用，所以教說引導對瑜伽行者是有意義的。 因為應該說"我們應當如何了知、信受教說引導具有味著等教說引導的性質"，所以說"因此具壽...乃至...教說引導"。其中，因為具有味著等教說引導的性質，所以具壽大迦旃延說"具有味著與過患...乃至...教說引導"這句話，通過這句話你們應當了知、信受教說引導對瑜伽行者具有味著等教說引導的性質。 因為可以問"僅僅這樣教說引導就圓滿了嗎，沒有其他的配合嗎"，所以說"教說引導已配合"。其中，應當這樣理解其意思：在某個教說中通過某個教說引導確定了味著等，在那個教說中那個教說引導已經確定並配合。 如此在教說引導分別中隨能力所作的 解釋完畢。 但是智者們應當依照註釋書和復注書詳細分別並把握其甚深義理。 探究引導分別解釋;

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhāravibhaṅgena assādādayo suttatthā ācariyena vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo vicayo hāro』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo vicayo hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayo hāro vicayahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Yaṃ pucchitañca vissajjitañcā』』tiādiniddesagāthāya idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『ayaṃ vicayo hāro kiṃ vicinatī』』tiādiko saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti yojanā.

『『Ayaṃ vicayo hāro kiṃ vicinatī』』ti iminā yo vicayo vicinitabbo, taṃ vicayaṃ vicinitabbaṃ pucchati, tasmā vicinitabbaṃ visayaṃ visuṃ visuṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『padaṃ vicinati, pañhaṃ vicinatī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Kiṃ vicayo padavicayo』』tiādiṃ avatvā 『『kiṃ vicinati, padaṃ vicinatī』』tiādivacanena vicayasaddassa kattusādhanatthaṃ dasseti. Tattha padaṃ vicinatīti navavidhassa suttantassa sabbaṃ padaṃ yāva nigamanā nāmapadādijātisaddādiitthiliṅgādiākārantādipaṭhamavibhatyantādiekavacanādivasena vicinati. Pañhaṃ vicinatīti adiṭṭhajotanādisattādhiṭṭhānādisammutivisayādiatītavisayādivasena vicinati. Vissajjanaṃ vicinatīti ekaṃsabyākaraṇavissajjanādisāvasesabyākaraṇavissajjanādi sauttarabyākaraṇa vissajjanādi lokiyabyākaraṇavissajjanādivasena vicinati. Pubbāparaṃ vicinatīti pubbena aparaṃ saṃsanditvā vicinati. Assādaṃ vicinatīti assādakataṇhādiassādetabbasukhādivasena vicinati. Ādīnavaṃ vicinatīti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhavasena vā aniṭṭhānubhavanādiādiantavantatādisaṃkilesabhāgiyādivasena vā vicinati. Nissaraṇaṃ vicinatīti maggavasena vā nibbānavasena vā maggassa vā āgamavasena, nibbānassa asaṅkhatadhātuādipariyāyavasena vā vicinati. Phalaṃ vicinatīti dhammacaraṇassa duggatigamanābhāvena vā maccutaraṇādinā vā desanāya phalaṃ, desanānusārena caraṇassa phalaṃ vicinati. Upāyaṃ vicinatīti aniccānupassanādivasena pavattananibbidāñāṇādivasena vā saddhāsativasena vā visuddhiyā upāyaṃ vicinati. Āṇattiṃ vicinatīti pāpaparivajjanāṇattivasena vā lokassa suññatāpekkhanāṇattivasena vā vicinati. Anugītiṃ vicinatīti vuttānugītivasena vā vuccamānānugītivasena vā anurūpaṃ gītiṃ vicinati. Sabbe nava suttante vicinatīti suttageyyādike nava sutte āhaccavacanavasena vā anusandhivacanavasena vā nītatthavacanavasena vā neyyatthavacanavasena vā saṃkilesabhāgiyādivasena vā vicinati.

Kiñcāpi padavicayo paṭhamaṃ vibhatto, suttassa pana anupadaṃ vicinitabbatāya atibhāriyo, na sukaro padavicayoti taṃ aggahetvā pañhāvicayavissajjanavicaye tāva vibhajanto 『『yathā kiṃ bhave』』tiādimāha. Tattha yathā kiṃ bhaveti yena pakārena so pañhāvicayo pavattetabbo, taṃ pakārajātaṃ kīdisaṃ bhaveyyāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Āyasmā ajito pārāyane bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ yathā yena pakārena pucchati, tathā tena pakārena pañhāvicayo pavattetabboti attho. Tattha āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ. Ajitoti bāvarībrāhmaṇassa paricārakabhūtānaṃ soḷasannaṃ aññataro ajito. Pārāyaneti pāraṃ nibbānaṃ ayati gacchati etenāti pārāyanaṃ, ajitasuttādisoḷasasuttassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 11、由於教說引導分別作為註釋特點，導師通過它分別了味著等經義，這個作為註釋特點的教說引導分別已圓滿，因為可以問"什麼是探究引導"，所以說"其中什麼是探究引導"等。其中，"其中"是指在已經說明的十六種教說引導等引導中，問什麼是作為註釋特點的探究引導即探究引導分別。通過"所問與所答..."等說明偈，現在我要說的"這個探究引導探究什麼"等作為註釋特點的就叫做探究引導分別，這是其組織。 通過"這個探究引導探究什麼"，問應當探究什麼探究，什麼是應當探究的，因此爲了確定並顯示應當探究的個別對象，所以說"探究詞語，探究問題"等。不說"什麼是探究、詞語探究"等，而說"探究什麼，探究詞語"等，顯示探究一詞是表示能作者的意思。其中，"探究詞語"是指探究九種經典中一切詞語直到結論，從名詞等種類詞等、陰性等、末音等、第一變格等、單數等的方面來探究。"探究問題"是指從未見顯明等、以有情為主等、世俗對像等、過去對像等的方面來探究。"探究答案"是指從一向記答等、有餘記答等、有上記答等、世間記答等的方面來探究。"探究前後"是指對照前後來探究。"探究味著"是指從味著貪等、應味著樂等的方面來探究。"探究過患"是指從苦苦、變異苦、行苦的方面，或從遭遇不可意等、有始終等、屬染污等的方面來探究。"探究出離"是指從道的方面或涅槃的方面，或從道的來處方面，或從涅槃的無為界等同義詞方面來探究。"探究果"是指從法行沒有趣向惡趣或超越死亡等方面探究教說的果，探究依教說而行的果。"探究方便"是指從無常隨觀等或從厭離智等的運作，或從信念等方面探究清凈的方便。"探究教誡"是指從遠離惡的教誡方面或從觀察世間空性的教誡方面來探究。"探究隨誦"是指從已說隨誦方面或正說隨誦方面來探究相應的誦。"探究一切九經"是指從引證語方面或連貫語方面或了義語方面或不了義語方面或屬染污等方面來探究經、應頌等九種經。 雖然詞語探究首先被分別，但因為經應當逐詞探究，詞語探究很重，不容易做，所以不取它，而首先分別問題探究和答案探究，因此說"如何是"等。其中，"如何是"應當理解其意思是：應當以什麼方式運作那個問題探究，那種方式是怎樣的。意思是：正如尊者阿耆多在波羅延中以某種方式問世尊問題，應當以那種方式運作問題探究。其中，"尊者"是親切語。"阿耆多"是婆羅門跋婆利的十六個侍者之一的阿耆多。"在波羅延中"，波羅延是到達彼岸即涅槃的途徑，這是阿耆多經等十六經的別名。

『『Kenassu nivuto loko, (iccāyasmā ajito,)

Kenassu nappakāsati;

Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, kiṃ su tassa mahabbhaya』』nti. (su. ni. 1038; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1) –

Gāthāya 『『kena dhammena loko ariyavajjo satto nivuto paṭicchādito, iti āyasmā ajito pucchati. Kena hetunā yathāvuttaloko nappakāsati, assa yathāvuttalokassa kiṃ abhilepanaṃ iti tvaṃ brūsi, tassa yathāvuttalokassa kiṃ mahabbhayanti tvaṃ brūsīti pucchatī』』ti attho.

Iti iminā pabhedena cattāri imāni gāthāpādapadāni pucchitāni pucchāvasena vuttāni, pucchitatthadīpakāni vā, padhānavasena pana so 『『eko pañho』』ti mato, yadipi catunnaṃ padānaṃ pucchanavasena pavattattā catubbidhoti vattabbo, ñātuṃ pana icchitassa ekasseva atthassa sambhavato 『『eko pañho』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Kāraṇaṃ vadehī』』ti vattabbattā kāraṇamāha 『『ekavatthupariggahā』』ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – 『『yadipi nivāraṇāpakāsanābhilepanamahabbhayasaṅkhātā cattāro atthā pucchāyaṃ gahitā, ekassa pana abhidheyyatthassa gahaṇato 『eko pañho』ti padhānavasena gahitoti daṭṭhabbo』』ti. 『『Ekavatthupariggahaṇaṃ kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabba』』nti vattabbabhāvato 『『evañhi āhā』』ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ekavatthupariggahaṇeneva bhagavā hi yasmā āha, iti tasmā ekavatthupariggahaṇaṃ tumhehi saddahitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.

『『Kenassu nivuto loko』』ti iminā lokādhiṭṭhānaṃ paṭicchādanaṃ pucchati, na nānādhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. 『『Kenassu nappakāsatī』』ti iminā lokasseva appakāsanaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. 『『Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī』』ti iminā lokasseva abhilepanaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. 『『Kiṃ su tassa mahabbhaya』』nti iminā tasseva lokassa mahabbhayaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. Tasmā 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』tiādipañho ekādhiṭṭhānanānādhiṭṭhānesu ekādhiṭṭhāno, dhammādhiṭṭhānasattādhiṭṭhānesu sattādhiṭṭhāno, adiṭṭhajotanādīsu adiṭṭhajotanāpañhotiādinā yathāsambhavaṃ vicinitabboti adhippāyo.

『『Pañhassa yo loko 『adhiṭṭhāno』ti gahito, so loko tividho』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『loko tividho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tayo vidhā etassa lokassāti tividho. Kilissati rāgādivasena kāmāvacarasattoti kileso, kileso ca so loko cāti kilesaloko, kāmāvacarasatto. So hi rāgādikilesabahulatāya kilesalokoti. Bhavati jhānābhiññāhi buddhīhīti bhavo, bhavo ca so loko cāti bhavaloko, rūpāvacarasatto. So hi jhānādibuddhīhi bhavatīti. Indriyena samannāgatoti indriyo, indriyo ca so loko cāti indriyaloko, arūpāvacarasatto. So hi āneñjasamādhibahulatāya visuddhindriyo hotīti lokasamaññā pariyāpannadhammavasena pavattā, tasmā ariyā na gahitāti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "世間為何所覆？"（如是尊者阿耆多說） "為何不顯明？ 你說什麼是染著？什麼是其大怖？"（經集1038；小集·事緣詩57，阿耆多學童問記別1） 這首偈頌的意思是："世間即聖者以外的有情被什麼法覆蓋、遮蔽？"尊者阿耆多如是問。"以什麼因上述世間不顯明？你說上述世間的什麼是染著？你說上述世間的什麼是大怖？"如是問。 如此以這種分別，這四個偈足詞語是以問的方式所問的，或是顯示所問義理的，但就主要而言，它被認為是"一個問題"，雖然因為四個詞語以問的方式運作應當說是四種，但因為只有一個想要了知的義理，所以說是"一個問題"。因為應當說"請說理由"，所以說理由："因為把握一個事"。這是說："雖然在問題中把握了覆蓋、不顯明、染著、大怖四種義理，但因為把握一個所詮義理，所以從主要方面應當看作是'一個問題'"。因為應該說"我們應當如何相信把握一個事"，所以說"因為如此說"。因為世尊確實以把握一個事的方式如此說，所以你們應當相信把握一個事。 通過"世間為何所覆"，問以世間為主的遮蔽，不是以各種法為主。通過"為何不顯明"，只問世間的不顯明，不是各種自性法的。通過"你說什麼是染著"，只問世間的染著，不是各種自性法的。通過"什麼是其大怖"，只問那個世間的大怖，不是各種自性法的。因此，"世間為何所覆"等問題，在一主和多主中是一主，在以法為主和以有情為主中是以有情為主，在未見顯明等中是未見顯明問等，意思是應當根據情況這樣探究。 因為應當說"在問題中被把握為'主'的那個世間是三種"，所以說"世間三種"等。其中，這個世間有三種方式所以是三種。以貪等方式染污的欲界有情是煩惱，煩惱即是世間所以是煩惱世間，即欲界有情。因為他以貪等煩惱為多，所以是煩惱世間。以禪定神通等智慧而有，有即是世間所以是有世間，即色界有情。因為他以禪定等智慧而有，所以如此。具有根的是根，根即是世間所以是根世間，即無色界有情。因為他以不動三昧為多而成為清凈根，所以如此。世間的名稱是依照所攝法而運作，因此聖者們不被包括。

『『Kenassu nivuto loko』』tiādigāthāya pucchāvicayo hāro ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『vissajjanāvicayo hāro kattha vissajjanāya vibhatto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha vissajjanā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』tiādipucchāyaṃ –

『『Avijjāya nivuto loko, (ajitāti bhagavā,)

Vivicchā pamādā nappakāsati;

Jappābhilepanaṃ brūmi, dukkhamassa mahabbhaya』』nti. (su. ni. 1039; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 58, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa) –

Ayaṃ gāthā vissajjanāti daṭṭhabbā. Tattha avijjāya nivuto lokoti kāḷapakkhacatuddasī, ghanavanasaṇḍa, meghapaṭalacchādana, aḍḍharattīnaṃ vasena caturaṅgasamannāgatena andhakārena rathaghaṭādi paṭicchādito viya dhammasabhāvapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇāya avijjāya sattaloko nivuto paṭicchādito. 『『Ajitā』』ti ca ālapanaṃ katvā bhagavā āha. Vivicchāti vicikicchāya pamādahetu yathāvuttaloko nappakāsati. Jappaṃ taṇhaṃ yathāvuttalokassa 『『abhilepana』』nti ahaṃ brūmīti bhagavā āha, dukkhaṃ jātiādivaṭṭadukkhaṃ assa yathāvuttalokassa 『『mahabbhaya』』nti ahaṃ brūmīti bhagavā ajitaṃ āhāti attho.

『『Imāya vissajjanāya kathaṃ vicineyyā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『imāni cattāri padānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāni cattāri padānīti 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』tiādipucchāgāthāyaṃ vuttāni gāthāpadāni. Imehi catūhi padehīti 『『avijjāya nivuto loko』』ti vissajjanāgāthāyaṃ vuttehi gāthāpadehi vissajjitāni. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamaṃ padaṃ paṭhamena padena, dutiyaṃ padaṃ dutiyena padena, tatiyaṃ padaṃ tatiyena padena, catutthaṃ padaṃ catutthena padena vissajjitaṃ.

『『Kenassu nivuto loko』』ti paṭhamapañhe『『avijjāya nivuto loko』』ti paṭhamā vissajjanā katā, na uppaṭipāṭiyā. Vijjāya paṭipakkhā avijjā, tasmā avijjāya ajānako loko bhaveyya. Kathaṃ nivuto saddahitabboti āha 『『nīvaraṇehi nivuto loko』』ti. Yadi evaṃ 『『nīvaraṇena nivuto loko』』ti vissajjanā kātabbāti codanaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ 『『avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā』』ti. 『『Sabbasattānaṃ avijjānīvaraṇabhāvo kena vacanena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『yathāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Sabbasattānaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbapāṇānaṃ sabbabhūtānaṃ, pariyāyato ekameva nīvaraṇaṃ vadāmi, yadidaṃ avijjā. Avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā. Sabbasova bhikkhave avijjāya nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā natthi sattānaṃ nīvaraṇanti vadāmī』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ yathā yena pakārena bhagavā āha, tathā tena pakārena vuttena tena vacanena tumhehi sabbasattānaṃ avijjānīvaraṇabhāvo saddahitabboti.

『『Avijjāya nivuto loko』』ti padena 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』ti paṭhamasseva padassa vissajjanā na siyā, 『『kenassu nappakāsatī』』ti dutiyapadassāpi vissajjanā siyāti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『tena cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena 『『avijjāya nivuto loko』』ti padena 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』ti paṭhamassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā yuttatarā hoti, yuttatarattā 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』ti pañhe 『『avijjāya nivuto loko』』ti vissajjanāti mayā vattabbāyevāti adhippāyo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "世間為何所覆"等偈頌的問題探究引導已被導師分別，也被我們了知，因為可以問"答案探究引導在哪裡被分別了答案"，所以說"其中答案"等。其中，"其中"是指在那"世間為何所覆"等問題中—— "世間為無明所覆，（阿耆多，世尊說） 因猶豫放逸而不顯明； 我說渴愛是染著，苦是其大怖。"（經集1039；小集·事緣詩58，阿耆多學童問記別） 這首偈應當看作是答案。其中，"世間為無明所覆"是指如同被具足四支的黑暗——黑分十四日、密林、雲層遮蔽、午夜——所遮蔽車輪等一樣，有情世間被具有遮蔽法自性相的無明所覆、所遮蔽。世尊稱呼"阿耆多"而說。"因猶豫"是指因為疑惑和放逸，上述世間不顯明。世尊說我說渴愛即欲求是上述世間的"染著"，我說生等輪迴之苦是上述世間的"大怖"，世尊對阿耆多如是說，這是其意思。 因為可以問"應當如何探究這個答案"，所以說"這四個詞"等。其中，"這四個詞"是指在"世間為何所覆"等問題偈中所說的偈詞。"由這四個詞"是指由"世間為無明所覆"等答案偈中所說的偈詞而答覆。如何？第一個詞由第一個詞，第二個詞由第二個詞，第三個詞由第三個詞，第四個詞由第四個詞而答覆。 對"世間為何所覆"這第一個問題，做出"世間為無明所覆"這第一個答案，不是相反順序。無明是明的對立，因此被無明[覆蓋的]世間應當是無知的。應當如何相信是被覆呢？說"世間被蓋所覆"。如果這樣，應當做出"世間被蓋所覆"的答案，考慮到這個質疑而說"因為一切有情都有無明蓋"。因為應當說"一切有情有無明蓋應當以什麼話語來相信"，所以說"如世尊說"等。 "諸比丘，我說一切有情、一切生命、一切存在，從一方面來說只有一個蓋，這就是無明。因為一切有情都有無明蓋。諸比丘，我說由於無明的滅盡、舍離、棄捨，有情就沒有蓋。"正如世尊以某種方式說了這句話，你們應當以那種方式通過那句話來相信一切有情有無明蓋。 考慮到"'世間為無明所覆'這詞不應只是對'世間為何所覆'這第一個詞的答案，也應當是對'為何不顯明'這第二個詞的答案"這個質疑，所以說"由此"等。其中，由"世間為無明所覆"這詞對"世間為何所覆"這第一個詞的答案是適當的、更適當的，因為更適當，所以我應當說在"世間為何所覆"這問題中"世間為無明所覆"是答案，這是其意思。

『『Kenassu nappakāsatī』』ti imasmiṃ pañhe 『『vivicchā pamādā nappakāsatī』』ti ayaṃ vissajjanā kātabbā, vivicchāya pavattattā, pamādā ca loko nappakāsatīti attho. Avijjānīvaraṇāya nivuto loko nappakāsatīti vissajjanā kātabbā, 『『kathaṃ vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatīti vissajjanā katā』』ti vattabbattā 『『yo puggalo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo puthujjanabhūto puggalo avijjānīvaraṇehi nivuto, so puthujjanabhūto puggalo vivicchāya vivicchati. 『『Yāya vivicchāya vivicchati, sā vivicchā katamā nāmā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Tāya kasmā nappakāsatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『so vicikicchanto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tāya vicikicchanto so puthujjanabhūto puggalo saddahitabbesu nābhisaddahati; saddahitabbesu na abhisaddahanto akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānāya, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ sacchikiriyāya ārabhitabbaṃ vīriyaṃ nārabhati; anārabhanto so puggalo idha loke pamādamanuyutto viharatīti, pamādena viharanto pamatto puggalo sukke dhamme na uppādiyati; anuppādayantassa tassa puggalassa te sukkā dhammā anuppādiyamānā hutvā nappakāsanti pakāsanavasena na pavattanti; tasmā 『『vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatī』』ti vissajjanā kātabbāti adhippāyo.

『『Tādisassa sukkadhammānaṃ appakāsanabhāvo amhehi kena vacanena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『yathāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha –

『『Dūre santo pakāsanti, himavantova pabbato;

Asantettha na dissanti, rattiṃ khittā yathā sarā;

Te guṇehi pakāsanti, kittiyā ca yasena cā』』ti. –

Yaṃ gāthāpāṭhaṃ bhagavā yathā yena appakāsanākārena āha, tathā tena appakāsanākārena vuttena tena gāthāpāṭhena tādisassa puggalassa sukkadhammānaṃ appakāsanabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabboyeva, tasmā 『『vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatī』』ti vissajjanā kātabbāvāti adhippāyo.

Gāthāttho pana – himavanto pabbato dūre ṭhito dūre ṭhitānampi sacakkhukānaṃ puggalānaṃ pakāsati iva, evaṃ santo sappurisā dūre ṭhitānampi guṇavasena pavattāya kittiyā ca guṇavasena pavattehi yasaparibhogaparivārehi ca dūre ṭhitānaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ pakāsanti, rattikāle khittā sarā usū na dissanti yathā, ettha sattaloke vivicchāpamādānaṃ vasena viharanto asanto na dissanti. Ye santo pakāsanti, te santo guṇehi pakāsantīti dassetuṃ 『『te guṇehi pakāsantī』』ti vuttaṃ . Guṇā nāma abbhantare jātā, 『『kathaṃ guṇehi pakāsantī』』ti vattabbattā 『『kittiyā ca yasena cā』』ti vuttaṃ. Guṇānubhāvena pavattāya kittiyā ca guṇānubhāvena pavattena yasena ca pakāsantā puggalā guṇehi pakāsantīti vattabbāvāti.

Yadi vivicchāpamādānaṃ vasena nappakāsati, evaṃ sati loko nivuto hoti, tasmā paṭhamassa padassāpi vissajjanā kātabbāti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『tena cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti 『『vivicchā pamādā nappakāsatī』』ti padena 『『kenassu nappakāsatī』』ti dutiyassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā yuttatarāti attho. Padenāti ca padatthaṭṭhena vissajjanāti attho. Padassāti padatthassa pucchitabbassāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Esa nayo heṭṭhā, upari ca.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 對於"為何不顯明"這個問題，應當做出"因猶豫放逸而不顯明"這個回答，因為以猶豫而運作，因為放逸，世間不顯明，這是其意思。應當做出"被無明蓋所覆的世間不顯明"這個回答。因為應當說"如何做出'因猶豫放逸世間不顯明'這個回答"，所以說"凡是"等。其中，凡是作為凡夫的人被無明蓋所覆，那個作為凡夫的人以猶豫而猶豫。因為可以問"他以什麼猶豫而猶豫，那猶豫叫什麼名"，所以說"猶豫即是所說的疑惑"。因為應當說"因為那個為什麼不顯明"，所以說"他疑惑著"等。他那個作為凡夫的人以那個疑惑而疑惑著對應當信受的不深信；不深信應當信受的人不爲了斷除不善法、證得善法而發起應當發起的精進；不發起的那個人住于隨順放逸；以放逸而住的放逸的人不生起白凈法；對於不生起的那個人，那些白凈法成為不生起而不顯明、不以顯明的方式運作；因此應當做出"因猶豫放逸世間不顯明"這個回答，這是其意思。 因為應當說"那樣的人白凈法不顯明的情況我們應當以什麼話語來相信"，所以說"如世尊說"等。其中： "遠者顯現，如雪山山峰； 不真實者此處不見，如夜射箭； 他們以功德顯現，以名聲和聲望。" 世尊以某種不顯明的方式說了這段偈頌，你們應當以那種不顯明的方式通過那段偈頌來相信那樣的人白凈法不顯明的情況，因此應當做出"因猶豫放逸世間不顯明"這個回答，這是其意思。 偈頌的意思是：如同雪山山峰雖在遠處，對於有眼的人也顯現，如此真實的善人雖在遠處，以功德方面運作的名聲和以功德方面運作的聲望受用眷屬，對遠處的智者顯現；如同夜晚射出的箭不見，如此在此有情世間以猶豫放逸的方式而住的不真實者不見。爲了顯示那些真實者顯現，他們以功德顯現，所以說"他們以功德顯現"。功德是指在內心生起的，因為應當說"如何以功德顯現"，所以說"以名聲和聲望"。應當說以功德威力運作的名聲和以功德威力運作的聲望而顯現的人們以功德顯現。 如果因為猶豫放逸的緣故不顯明，這樣的話世間就是被覆的，因此也應當做出對第一個詞的回答，考慮到這個質疑，所以說"由此"等。其中，"由此"是指由"因猶豫放逸而不顯明"這詞對"為何不顯明"這第二個詞的回答是適當的、更適當的，這是意思。"詞"是指以詞義的意思是回答。"詞"應當理解意思是詞義應當被問。這個方法在下文和上文都是如此。

『『Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī』』ti pañhe 『『jappābhilepanaṃ brūmī』』ti vissajjanā tassā ajitena daṭṭhabbā. 『『Katamā jappā nāmā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『jappā nāma vuccati taṇhā』』ti vuttaṃ. Sā taṇhā lokaṃ abhilimpatīti kathaṃ viññāyatīti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ 『『yathāha bhagavā』』tiādi. Tattha yathā yena taṇhāya abhilepanabhāvena –

『『Ratto atthaṃ na jānāti, ratto dhammaṃ na passati;

Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ rāgo sahate nara』』nti. –

Yaṃ gāthaṃ bhagavā āha, tathā tena abhilepanabhāvena vuttāya tāya gāthāya sā taṇhā lokaṃ abhilimpatīti viññāyatīti adhippāyo.

Gāthāyaṃ pana – rajjati sattoti ratto, rāgasamaṅgīsatto. Kāraṇaṃ paṭicca asati pavattati phalanti atthaṃ, phalaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ phalaṃ dhāreti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ dhammaṃ nāma. Andhakāraṃ andhaṃ. Yanti yamhi kāle. Yanti hi bhummatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Yamhi kāle rāgo naraṃ rāgasamaṅgiṃ sahate abhibhavati, tadā kāle andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ hotīti yojanā. Rāgo naraṃ yaṃ yasmā sahate, tasmā andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hotīti vā, rāgo yaṃ naraṃ sahate, tassa narassa andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hotīti vā, rāgo naraṃ yaṃ sahate abhibhūyate yaṃ sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ nipphādeti, taṃ sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ hotīti vā yojanā.

『『Yadi ratto atthādikaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ sati kathaṃ jappābhilepanaṃ bhavatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『sāyaṃ taṇhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārammaṇesu āsattibahulassa āsaṅgabahulassa taṇhāsamaṅgissa puggalassa sā ayaṃ taṇhā evaṃ bahuāsaṅgavasena abhijappā pariyuṭṭhānaṭṭhāyinī hoti. Iti karitvā iminā kāraṇena tattha taṇhāya sattaloko kenaci silesena abhilitto makkhito viya jappābhilepena abhilitto nāma bhavatīti yojanā. 『『Jappābhilepanaṃ appakāsanassapi kāraṇaṃ bhavati, tasmā 『kenassu nappakāsatī』ti dutiyapadatthassapi vissajjanā siyā』』ti vattabbattā 『『tena cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Tassa lokassa mahabbhayaṃ ki』』nti imasmiṃ catutthapañhe 『『assa lokassa dukkhaṃ mahabbhayaṃ bhave』』ti ayaṃ vissajjanā tassā ajitena daṭṭhabbā. Bhāyati loko etasmāti bhayaṃ, mahantaṃ bhayaṃ mahabbhayaṃ. 『『Katividhaṃ dukkha』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『duvidhaṃ dukkha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Dve vidhā assa dukkhassāti duvidhaṃ. 『『Katamaṃ duvidhaṃ dukkha』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『kāyikañca cetasikañcā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Katamaṃ kāyikaṃ, katamaṃ cetasika』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『yaṃ kāyikaṃ, idaṃ dukkhaṃ yaṃ cetasikaṃ, idaṃ domanassa』』nti vuttaṃ.

Rogādisatthādianiṭṭharūpaṃ sattalokassa mahabbhayaṃ bhaveyya, 『『kathaṃ dukkhaṃ mahabbhayaṃ bhaveti saddahetabba』』nti vattabbabhāvato 『『sabbe sattā hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbe sattā yathāvuttassa dukkhassa ubbijjanti, dukkhena samasamaṃ aññaṃ bhayaṃ sattānaṃ natthi, dukkhato uttaritaraṃ vā pana bhayaṃ kuto atthi. Hi yasmā natthi, tasmā dukkhato aññassa bhayassa abhāvato 『『dukkhaṃ lokassa mahabbhaya』』nti vacanaṃ saddahitabbanti adhippāyo.

『『Sabbe sattā』』tiādivacanena rogādisatthādianiṭṭharūpaṃ dukkhamūlamevāti dasseti. 『『Kāyikacetasikavasena duvidhaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhavedanāyeva, evaṃ sati saṅkhāradukkhavipariṇāmadukkhānaṃ mahabbhayabhāvo na āpajjeyyā』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tisso dukkhatā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 對於"你說什麼是染著"這個問題，阿耆多應當看到"我說渴愛是染著"這個答案。因為可以問"什麼叫做渴愛"，所以說"渴愛即是所說的愛慾"。那個愛慾如何被了知是染著世間？這是其組織。因此說"如世尊說"等。其中，如同世尊以愛慾的染著性說了這首偈： "貪著者不知義，貪著者不見法； 當時成為盲暗，當貪慾征服人。" 通過那個染著性說的那首偈，那個愛慾被了知是染著世間，這是其意思。 在偈頌中 - 染著者是指被染著的，即具足貪的有情。依靠因緣而無有運作的果是義，即果。因持有果，那個因叫做法。盲暗是黑暗。"當"是在什麼時候。"當"是處格的主格語。在貪慾征服、勝過具足貪的人的那個時候，那時成為盲暗黑暗，這是其組織。或者因為貪慾征服人所以那時成為盲暗，或者貪慾征服某人，對那個人那時成為盲暗，或者貪慾征服人，被勝過，產生什麼征服勝過，那個征服勝過成為盲暗黑暗，這是其組織。 因為應當說"如果貪著者不知義等，這樣的話如何成為渴愛染著"，所以說"那個愛慾"等。其中，對於在所緣中多有執著、多有執著的具足愛慾的人，那個愛慾這樣以多執著的方式成為遍計、住于遍起。如此做，以這個原因，在那裡有情世間被愛慾如同被某種粘著物染著、塗抹一樣，叫做被渴愛染著，這是其組織。因為應當說"渴愛染著也是不顯明的原因，因此也應當是對'為何不顯明'這第二個詞義的答案"，所以說"由此"等。 對於"什麼是那個世間的大怖"這第四個問題，阿耆多應當看到"苦是那個世間的大怖"這個答案。因為世間怖畏它所以是怖，大的怖是大怖。因為可以問"苦有幾種"，所以說"苦有兩種"等。它有兩種方式所以是兩種。因為可以問"什麼是兩種苦"，所以說"身苦和心苦"。因為可以問"什麼是身苦，什麼是心苦"，所以說"身體的是苦，心理的是憂"。 疾病等、刀劍等不可意色是有情世間的大怖，因為應當說"如何相信苦是大怖"，所以說"因為一切有情"等。其中，一切有情畏懼如上所說的苦，對於有情們沒有與苦相等的其他怖，或者哪裡會有比苦更高的怖。因為沒有，所以因為沒有比苦其他的怖，應當相信"苦是世間的大怖"這句話，這是其意思。 通過"一切有情"等話語顯示疾病等、刀劍等不可意色正是苦的根源。因為應當說"以身苦心苦方式的兩種苦只是苦受，這樣的話行苦和壞苦就不會成為大怖"，所以說"三種苦性"等。

『『Tisso dukkhatā sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ sabbakālesu uppajjanti, kadāci kassaci na uppajjantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha loko』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tāsu tīsu dukkhatāsu. Lokoti bhogasampanno ceva appābādho ca sattaloko. Odhaso odhiso kadāci karahaci attūpakkamamūlāya dukkhadukkhatāya muccati, kadāci parūpakkamamūlāya dukkhadukkhatāya muccati, tathā odhaso odhiso kadāci karahaci dīghāyuko loko vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccati, 『『kena hetunā muccatī』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā hetuṃ dassetuṃ 『『taṃ kissa hetū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sattaloke appekacce appābādhā honti, te bhogasampannattā ceva appābādhattā ca dukkhadukkhatāya muccanti, visesato rūpāvacarasattā muccanti. Appekacce dīghāyukāpi honti, te dīghāyukattā vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccanti; visesato arūpāvacarasattā muccanti arūpāvacarasattānaṃ upekkhāsamāpattibahulattā.

Tesaṃ tāhi dukkhatāhi muccanaṃ anekantikaṃ hoti, tasmā tāhi anatikkantattā anekantikaṃ muccanaṃ tumhehi vuttaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ ekantikamuccana』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『saṅkhāradukkhatāya panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhāradukkhatāyāti dukkhavedanāpi saṅkhatattā saṅkhārapariyāpannā, tādisāya saṅkhāradukkhatāyāti attho gahetabbo. Lokoti arahā. Upādīyati vipākakkhandhacatukkakaṭattārūpasaṅkhātaṃ khandhapañcakanti upādi, upādiyeva sesaṃ upādisesaṃ, khandhapañcakaṃ, taṃ natthi etissā nibbānadhātuyāti anupādisesā. Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā anupādisesanibbānadhātu hutvā muccati, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Nibbānadhātūti ca khandhapañcakassa nibbāyanamattaṃ adhippetaṃ, na asaṅkhatadhātu. Tasmāti saṅkhāradukkhatāya sakalalokabyāpakabhāvena sabbalokasaṅgāhakattā vuttappakārasaṅkhāradukkhatāya sabbalokassa dukkhaṃ hoti, iti katvā saṅkhāradukkhatāya sabbalokassa dukkhabhāvato 『『dukkhamassa mahabbhaya』』nti bhagavatā vuttaṃ.

『『Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā』』ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 因為可以問"三種苦性在一切有情的一切時候生起，還是有時對某些不生起"，所以說"其中世間"等。其中，"其中"是指在那三種苦性中。"世間"是指具足受用且少病的有情世間。部分地、間或地、有時從自造作為根源的苦苦解脫，有時從他造作為根源的苦苦解脫，同樣部分地、間或地、有時長壽的世間從壞苦解脫。因為可以問"因什麼原因解脫"，所以放置問題來顯示原因而說"以什麼因"等。在有情世間有些是少病的，他們因為具足受用和少病而從苦苦解脫，特別是色界有情解脫。有些是長壽的，他們因為長壽而從壞苦解脫；特別是無色界有情解脫，因為無色界有情多有舍定。 他們從那些苦性解脫是不確定的，因此因為未超越它們，你們說不確定的解脫，我們也了知，因為可以問"什麼是確定的解脫"，所以說"但從行苦"等。其中，"從行苦"是指苦受也因為是有為而包含在行中，應當理解意思是從那樣的行苦。"世間"是指阿羅漢。執取稱為異熟四蘊和作成色的五蘊叫做余依，余依即是余，是五蘊，這個涅槃界沒有它所以是無餘依。以無餘依涅槃界成為無餘依涅槃而解脫，這是具格表示這樣性的特相。涅槃界是指五蘊的寂滅而已，不是無為界。"因此"是因為行苦遍及整個世間而包含一切世間，如上所說的行苦對一切世間成為苦，如此做，因為行苦對一切世間成為苦性，所以世尊說"苦是其大怖"。 "緣受有愛"（中部3.126；相應部

2.1, 3, 36; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato 『『dukkhamassa mahabbhaya』』nti padena 『『kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī』』ti tatiyapadassāpi vissajjanā siyāti āsaṅkabhāvato 『『tena ca catutthassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Kena yathākkamaṃ pucchāvissajjanānaṃ yuttatarabhāvo jānitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena yathākkamaṃ pucchāvissajjanānaṃ yuttatarattā yuttatarajānanako bhagavā 『『avijjāya nivuto loko』』tiādimāha, tasmā yuttatarabhāvo tumhehi jānitabboti.

Ettha ca lokassa nīvaraṇādīni ajānantena ca titthiyavādesu samayantaresu paricayena ca tesu samayantaresu ceva nīvaraṇādīsu ca saṃsayapakkhandena ekaṃseneva sattādhiṭṭhānena pucchitabbattā, ekaṃseneva sattādhiṭṭhānena byākātabbattā ca sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchā katāti veditabbā. Sā cāyaṃ pucchā ajānantassa jānanatthāya, jātasaṃsayassa ca saṃsayavinodanatthāya vissajjetabbassa nīvaraṇādivisayassa catubbidhattā catubbidhā. Nīvaraṇādīnaṃ pana visayānaṃ loko ca ādhārabhāvena gāthāyaṃ vuttoti 『『eko pañho dassito』』ti ayamettha pucchāvicayo, vissajjanāvicayo pana 『『adiṭṭhajotanā vissajjanā, vimaticchedanā vissajjanā』』tiādinā pucchāvicaye vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

Ekādhāre pucchāvissajjane vicayo ācariyehi vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『anekādhāre pucchāvissajjane yo vicayo vibhajanāraho, so vicayo kathaṃ amhehi viññāyati, amhākaṃ viññāpanatthāya tasmiṃ vicayaṃ vibhajathā』』ti vattabbabhāvato anekādhāraṃ pucchaṃ tāva nīharitvā dassetuṃ –

『『Savanti sabbadhi sotā, (iccāyasmā ajito,)

Sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ;

Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhi, kena sotā pidhīyare』』ti. (su. ni. 1040; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 59, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 3) –

Gāthamāha . Gāthāttho tāva daṭṭhabbo. Savantīti sandanti, pavattantīti attho. Sabbadhīti taṇhādīnaṃ ārammaṇabhūtesu sabbesu rūpādīsu āyatanesu. Sotāti taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādayo sotā. Iccāyasmāti iti evaṃ āyasmā ajito āha. Sotānanti taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ sotānaṃ. Kiṃ nivāraṇanti kiṃ katamaṃ dhammajātaṃ āvaraṇaṃ bhave, kā katamā dhammajāti rakkhā bhave. Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhīti sotānaṃ taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇaṃ āvaraṇaṃ idaṃ dhammajātaṃ bhaveti sabbasattahitatthaṃ amhākaṃ tvaṃ kathehi. Kena sotāpidhīyareti kena pahāyakadhammena taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādayo sotā paṇḍitehi pidhīyareti pucchatīti pucchitāni.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 從"緣受有愛"的話語，通過"苦是其大怖"這個詞，也可以對"你說什麼是染著"的第三個詞做答案，因為有這種可能性，所以說"由此對第四個詞的答案是適當的"。因為應當說"如何以次第了知問答的更適當性"，所以說"因此世尊說"等。世尊因為問答的次第更適當而了知更適當性，說了"被無明覆蓋的世間"等，因此更適當性應當被你們了知。 在此，因為世間不知道障礙等，以及在外道的其他見解中的習慣，以及對那些其他見解和障礙等的懷疑傾向，完全以有情為依止而提問，完全以有情為依止而回答，所以應當了知這是以有情為依止的問題。這個問題是爲了不知者得知，爲了已生起懷疑者除去懷疑，因為障礙等領域是四種，所以是四種。世間在偈頌中被說為障礙等領域的依處，所以"顯示了一個問題"，這是此處的問題考察。回答考察則應當依照問題考察中已說的方法而了知，如"未見顯明是回答，斷除疑惑是回答"等。 在單一依處的問題回答考察中，諸師已分別，我們也已了知。因為應當說"在多依處的問題回答考察中，哪個考察值得分別，那個考察如何被我們了知，爲了使我們了知，請分別那個考察"，所以首先提出多依處的問題來顯示： "諸流遍流動，（尊者阿耆多，） 諸流何為障？ 諸流請說護，以何諸流閉？"（如理藏1040；小部偈頌59，阿耆多童子問記3） 說了偈頌。首先應當看偈頌的意思。"流動"是指流出、執行。"一切處"是指貪等以色等為所緣的一切處。"諸流"是指貪、嫉、恚等諸流。"尊者"是這樣尊者阿耆多說。"諸流"是指貪、嫉、恚等諸流。"何為障"是指什麼法類是障礙，什麼法類是保護。"請說諸流護"是說對於貪、嫉、恚等諸流的防護、障礙的這個法類是爲了一切有情利益，請你告訴我們。"以何諸流閉"是問以什麼舍離之法，智者們使貪、嫉、恚等諸流被閉塞。

『『Pucchāvasena kathitāya 『savanti…pe… pidhīyare』ti imāya gāthāya kittakāni padāni pucchitāni, kittakā pañhā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『imāni cattāri padāni pucchitāni, te dve pañhā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Pucchāvasena pavattāya imissā gāthāya yadi cattāri padāni siyuṃ, evaṃ santesu pañhāpi catubbidhā siyuṃ, kasmā 『dve』ti vuttā』』ti vattabbattā 『『kasmā? Ime hi bahvādhivacanena pucchitā』』ti vuttaṃ. Ime etāya gāthāya gahitā atthā bahvādhivacanena pucchitā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – 『『savanti…pe… pidhīyareti bahūni vacanāni adhikicca pavattā saṃvarasaṅkhātā sati ceva pidahanahetubhūtā paññā cāti ime dve atthāva pucchitā, tasmā atthavasena dve pañhā vuttā vā』』ti. 『『Pucchāya duvidhatthavisayatā kathaṃ vuttā』』ti vattabbattā pucchāya duvidhatthavisayataṃ vivarituṃ 『『evaṃ samāpannassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ samāpannassāti imāhi duggatihetubhūtāhi ñātibyasanādisaṅkhātāhi āpadāhi vā, pāṇavadhādīhi āpadāhi vā, samaṃ saha, sabbathā vā ayaṃ sattaloko āpanno ajjhotthaṭo, evaṃ ajjhotthaṭassa vā samāpannassa. Evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassāti ñātibyasanādayo vā pāṇavadhādīni āgamma pavattehi dasahi kilesavatthūhi ca ayaṃ sattaloko saṃkiliṭṭho, evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassa ca lokassāti samāpannassa ajjhotthaṭassa lokassa vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ kiṃ katamaṃ dhammajātaṃ bhave. Iti evañhi saccaṃ ajitasutte āhāti vitthārattho, pucchāya duvidhatthavisayatā ñātabbāti adhippāyo.

『『Kiṃ nu sotā sabbassa lokassa sabbadhi savanti, udāhu, ekaccassevā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『savanti sabbadhi sotāti, asamāhitassa savanti abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulassā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulattā rūpādīsu nānārammaṇesu vikkhittacittasseva sotā savanti pavattanti, na samāhitassa abhijjhābyāpādappamādavirahitassāti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo. 『『Katamā abhijjhā, katamo byāpādo, katamo pamādo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tattha yā abhijjhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu abhijjhābyāpādappamādesu. Yā abhijjhā, ayaṃ lobho, na abhijjhāyanamattaṃ. Lobho ca akusalamūlaṃ, na lubbhanamattaṃ. Yo byāpādo, ayaṃ doso, na byāpajjanamattaṃ. Doso ca akusalamūlaṃ, na dūsanamattaṃ. Yo pamādo, ayaṃ moho, na sativippavāsamattaṃ. Moho ca akusalamūlaṃ, na mūhanamattaṃ. Evaṃ iminā vuttappakārena abhijjhādīnaṃ akusalamūlattā yassa abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulassa asamāhitassa chasu rūpādīsu āyatanesu taṇhā savanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 因為可以問"在以問的方式所說的'諸流...被閉'這首偈頌中問了多少個詞，有多少個問題"，所以說"問了這四個詞，是兩個問題"。因為應當說"如果以問的方式運作的這首偈頌有四個詞，這樣的話問題也應當是四種，為什麼說'兩個'"，所以說"為什麼？因為這些是以多義詞而問的"。這些由這首偈頌所把握的義理是以多義詞而問的。這是說："'諸流...被閉'是依多個詞語而運作的，所說的護即是念以及作為閉塞因的慧，這兩個義理被問，因此依義理說是兩個問題"。因為應當說"問題的二種義理領域如何說"，爲了開顯問題的二種義理領域，所以說"如是已陷入"等。其中，"如是已陷入"是指這個有情世間與這些作為惡趣因的親屬損失等所說的災難，或者殺生等災難，一起、完全地陷入、被覆蓋，或者如是被覆蓋已陷入。"如是已染污"是指這個有情世間依親屬損失等或殺生等而運作的十種煩惱事而染污，對如是已染污的世間，即已陷入被覆蓋的世間，什麼法類是清凈、出離。如是在阿耆多經中說了真實，這是詳細的意思，應當了知問題的二種義理領域，這是其意思。 因為可以問"諸流是對一切世間在一切處流動，還是隻對某些人"，所以說"諸流遍流動，對不入定者、多有貪嫉恚放逸者流動"。其中，應當看到意思是因為多有貪嫉恚放逸，對於在色等種種所緣中散亂心者才有諸流流動、運作，不是對入定者、遠離貪嫉恚放逸者。因為應當說"什麼是貪，什麼是恚，什麼是放逸"，所以說"其中什麼貪"等。其中，"其中"是指在那些貪嫉恚放逸中。什麼是貪，這是貪，不只是貪求。貪是不善根，不只是貪著。什麼是恚，這是嗔，不只是嗔恚。嗔是不善根，不只是損惱。什麼是放逸，這是癡，不只是離開念。癡是不善根，不只是迷惑。如此以這個所說的方式，因為貪等是不善根，對於多有貪嫉恚放逸的不入定者，在六種色等處中愛慾流動。

『『Katividhā sā taṇhā』』ti vattabbattā 『『rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Channaṃ rūpataṇhādīnaṃ chasu rūpādiāyatanesu savanaṃ kena ca vacanena amhehi saddahitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『yathāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Savatīti ca kho, bhikkhave…pe… paṭihaññatī』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavā yathā yena pakārena āha, tathā tena pakārena vuttanayena vacanena tumhehi saddahitabbanti adhippāyo. Ettha ca cakkhādīnaṃ rūpataṇhādīnaṃ channaṃ sotānaṃ dvārabhāvena pavattattā cakkhādayo nissitūpacāravasena sayaṃ savanto viya bhagavatā vuttā. Itīti evaṃ vuttappakārena sabbā sabbasmā cakkhādidvārato ca savati pavattati. Sabbathā sabbappakārena taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena savati pavattatīti attho. 『『Kasmā sabbasmā cakkhādidvārato ca savati pavattati, sabbappakārena taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena savanabhāvo vijānitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti asamāhitassa abhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ cakkhādidvārato ca taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesaunnamanākārena taṇhādivasena pavattanato pavattajānanako bhagavā 『『savanti sabbadhi sotā』』ti āha.

『『Sotānaṃ 『kiṃ nivāraṇa』nti iminā kiṃ pucchati? Sotānaṃ anusayappahānaṃ pucchati kiṃ? Udāhu vītikkamappahānaṃ pucchatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇanti pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ pucchatī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Idaṃ pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ vodānaṃ, udāhu vuṭṭhānaṃ ki』』nti vattabbattā 『『idaṃ vodāna』』nti vuttaṃ. 『『Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhi, 『kena sotā pidhīyare』ti iminā kiṃ pucchati? Sotānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati kiṃ? Udāhu vītikkamanaṃ, samugghāṭaṃ vā pucchati ki』』nti vattabbattā sotānaṃ…pe… pidhīyareti anusayasamugghāṭaṃ pucchatī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Idaṃ anusayasamugghāṭaṃ vodānaṃ kiṃ, udāhu vuṭṭhānaṃ ki』』nti vattabbattā 『『idaṃ vuṭṭhāna』』nti vuttaṃ.

『『Savanti sabbadhi sotā』』tiādipucchāvicayo ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto; tāya pucchāya 『『katamo vissajjanavicayo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tattha vissajjanā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchāyaṃ –

『『Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā,)

Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ;

Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare』』ti. (su. ni. 1041 cūḷani. vatthugāthā 60, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4) –

Gāthā vissajjanāti daṭṭhabbā. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ ajita lokasmiṃ yāni sotāni savanti, tesaṃ sotānaṃ yaṃ nivāraṇaṃ, sā sati hoti; taṃ satiṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaranti ahaṃ brūmi; ete sotā paññāya pidhīyareti yojanā kātabbā. Tattha satīti vipassanāpaññāya sampayuttā sati. Paññāyāti maggapaññāya. Pidhīyareti uppajjituṃ appadānavasena pidhīyanti pacchijjanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當說"那個愛慾有幾種"，所以說"色愛...法愛"。因為應當說"六種色愛等在六種色等處中的流動，我們應當以什麼話語來相信"，所以說"如世尊說"等。"諸比丘，流動...障礙"這句話，如同世尊以某種方式說，你們應當以那種方式通過所說方法的話語來相信，這是其意思。在此，因為眼等六種色愛等流運作為門，眼等依所依近用的方式被世尊說為如同自己流動。"如是"是指以如此所說的方式，一切從一切眼等門流動、運作。以一切方式、一切種類，以愛求、邪執著、高舉等方式流動、運作，這是其意思。因為應當說"為什麼從一切眼等門流動、運作，應當了知以一切方式以愛求、邪執著、高舉等方式的流動性"，所以說"因此說"等。其中，"因此"是指因為對不入定者，貪嫉恚等從眼等門以愛求、邪執著、高舉的方式，以愛等方式運作，了知運作的世尊說"諸流遍流動"。 因為應當說"'諸流何為障'以此問什麼？問諸流的隨眠斷除嗎？還是問違犯斷除"，所以說"'諸流何為障'問遍起破壞"。因為應當說"這個遍起破壞是清凈還是出離"，所以說"這是清凈"。因為應當說"'請說諸流護，以何諸流閉'以此問什麼？問諸流的遍起嗎？還是問違犯，或者問根除"，所以說"'請說諸流護...諸流閉'問隨眠根除"。因為應當說"這個隨眠根除是清凈還是出離"，所以說"這是出離"。 "諸流遍流動"等問題考察已被導師說，也被我們了知；對那個問題"什麼是答案考察"，因為應當說，所以說"其中答案"等。其中，在問題中—— "世間中諸流，（阿耆多，世尊說） 念是彼等障； 諸流我說護，以慧彼等閉。"（經集1041；小部偈頌60，阿耆多童子問記別4） 這首偈應當看作是答案。在那首偈中應當這樣組織：阿耆多，在世間中流動的諸流，對那些諸流的障礙，那是念；我說那個念是諸流的護持；這些諸流以慧被閉。其中，"念"是與觀慧相應的念。"以慧"是以道慧。"被閉"是以不允許生起的方式被閉、被斷。

『『Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmī』』ti bhagavā āha – 『『yāya kāyaci satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddhaṃ kiṃ, visiṭṭhāya satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddhaṃ kiṃ, katamāya satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddha』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『kāyagatāya satiyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāyagatāya satiyāti rūpakāye gataṃ kesādikaṃ aniccādito vipassitvā pavattāya vipassanāñāṇasampayuttāya satiyā. Bhāvitāyāti kāyagataṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato nibbindanato virajjanato nirodhanato paṭinissajjanato anupassanāvasena bhāvitāya. Evañhi aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati; dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati; anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati; nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati; virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati; nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati; paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatīti. Bahulīkatāyāti yathāvuttappakārena divasampi māsampi saṃvaccharampi sattasaṃvaccharampi bahulīkatāya. Cakkhunti abhijjhādipavattidvārabhāvena ṭhitaṃ cakkhuṃ, niggahitāgamaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nāviñchatīti cakkhudvāre pavattaṃ abhijjhādisahitaṃ cittasantānaṃ, taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ vā nākaḍḍhati, manāpikesu rūpesu nāviñchatīti yojanā. Amanāpikesu rūpesu na paṭihaññati. Kāyagatāya satiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya sotaṃ nāviñchati. Manāpikesu saddesu…pe… amanāpikesu saddesu na paṭihaññatīti yojanā yathāsambhavato kātabbā.

『『Kena kāraṇena nāviñchati paṭihaññatī』』ti pucchati, indriyānaṃ saṃvutanivāritattā nāviñchati na paṭihaññatīti vissajjeti. 『『Kenārakkhena te saṃvutanivāritā』』ti pucchati, satiārakkhena te saṃvutanivāritāti vissajjeti. 『『Satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti tasmā satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritattā saṃvutanivāritajānanako bhagavā 『『sati tesaṃ nivāraṇa』』nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritabhāvo saddahitabboti pubbabhāge paññā satyānugāti kiccamevettha adhikanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

『『Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇa』』nti vissajjanassa vitthārattho ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『paññāyete pidhīyare』』ti vissajjanassa vitthārattho 『『kathaṃ amhehi jānitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『paññāyete pidhīyare』』ti vissajjanassa vitthāratthaṃ dassento 『『paññāya anusayā pahīyantī』』tiādimāha. Tattha paññāyāti maggapaññāya. Anusayāti anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjanārahā kāmarāgānusayādayo. Pahīyanti samucchedavasena anusayesu paññāya pahīnesu pariyuṭṭhānāpi atthato pahīyanti. Kissa pahīnattā 『『pahīyantī』』ti vuccati? Anusayassa pahīnattā pariyuṭṭhānā pahīyantīti vissajjeti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 世尊說："'念是彼等障，諸流我說護'"——因為可以問"以任何唸對諸流的防護之事是成就的嗎？以特殊的唸對諸流的防護之事是成就的嗎？以什麼唸對諸流的防護之事是成就的"，所以說"身隨念"等。其中，"身隨念"是指在色身中觀察從發等不凈等而運作、與觀察智相應的念。"已修習"是指依觀察色身從無常、苦、無我、厭離、離染、滅盡、捨棄而觀察。如是從無常觀察者捨棄常想；從苦觀察者捨棄樂想；從無我觀察者捨棄我想；厭離者捨棄喜悅；離染者捨棄貪；滅盡者捨棄集；捨棄者捨棄執取。"多修習"是指如前所說的方式，一天、一月、一年、七年多修習。"眼"是指以貪等運作的門而住的眼，應當看作已攝入。"不牽引"是指在眼門運作的與貪等俱的心續流，或具有那種特質的人，不牽引于可意的色。在不可意的色中不障礙。以身隨念、已修習、多修習，流不牽引。對可意的聲...不可意的聲，應當依可能性作組織。 問"以什麼因緣不牽引、不障礙"，回答因為諸根已防護、已遮止所以不牽引、不障礙。問"以什麼守護被防護遮止"，回答以念守護被防護遮止。因為應當說"以念守護被防護遮止的狀態應當如何被我們相信"，所以說"因此"等。其中，"因此"是指因為以念守護被防護遮止，了知被防護遮止的世尊說"念是彼等障"這句話，以那句話你們應當相信以念守護被防護遮止的狀態，在先前階段應當看到智隨念是其特別之處。 "念是彼等障"的回答的詳細意思已被導師說，也被我們了知。因為應當說"以慧彼等閉"的回答的詳細意思"如何被我們了知"，所以顯示"以慧彼等閉"回答的詳細意思，說"以慧隨眠被斷"等。其中，"以慧"是以道慧。"隨眠"是得到相應因緣、應當生起的欲貪隨眠等。"被斷"是以斷除的方式，隨眠被慧斷除時，遍起也從義理上被斷除。為什麼說"被斷"？因為隨眠被斷除，遍起被斷除，這是回答。

『『Taṃ anusayappahānena pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ kiṃ viya bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『taṃ yathā khandhavantassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha khandhavantassa rukkhassa kudālādinā bhūmiṃ khaṇitvā anavasesamūluddharaṇe kate tassa rukkhassa pupphaphalapallavaṅkurasantatipi kudālādinā samucchinnāva bhavati yathā, evaṃ arahattamaggañāṇena anusayesu pahīnesu anusayānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasantati samucchinnā pidahitā paṭicchannā bhavati. Kena samucchinnā bhavati? Paññāya maggapaññāya samucchinnā bhavatīti atthayojanā daṭṭhabbā. 『『Paññāya paricchinnabhāvo kathaṃ saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Paññāyete pidhīyare』』ti vacanato anusayānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasantatiyā paññāya paricchinnabhāvo paṇḍitehi saddahitabboti adhippāyo.

Imesu pañhāvissajjanesu sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ, pidhānañca ajānantena vā saṃsayitena vā saṃvarapidhānānaṃ pucchitabbattā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti pucchāvicayo ceva satipaññānaṃ vissajjetabbattā dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ vissajjananti vissajjanavicayo ca veditabbo. Etesu ca 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』tiādiko pañho nīvaraṇavicikicchāpamādajappānaṃ vasena catubbidhopi lokādhiṭṭhānavasena eko pañhoti vutto, evaṃ sati 『『savanti sabbadhi sotā』』tiādikopi pañho saṃvarapidhānānaṃ vasena duvidhopi ekatthavasena gahetvā ekādhiṭṭhānavasena 『『eko pañho』』ti vattabbo, sotānaṃ bahubhāvato vā 『『bahupañho』』ti vattabbo; tathā pana avatvā sote anāmasitvā saṃvarapidhānānaṃ vasena 『『savanti sabbadhi sotā』』tiādimhi 『『dve pañhā』』ti vuttā. Tadanusārena 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』tiādimhipi lokaṃ anāmasitvā nīvaraṇādīnaṃ catunnaṃ vasena 『『cattāro pañhā』』tipi vattabbāti ayaṃ nayo dassitoti nayadassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Desanākāle vuttadhammassa anusandhimaggahetvā attanā racitaniyāmeneva pucchitapañhassa ceva pañhaṃ aṭṭhapetvā, paṭiññañca akatvā vissajjanassa ca vicayahāro ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『desanākāle vuttadhammassa anusandhiṃ gahetvā pucchitapañhassa ceva taṃ pañhaṃ ṭhapetvā, paṭiññañca katvā vissajjanassa ca yo vicayo hāro vibhatto, so vicayahāro kathaṃ amhehi viññāyati, amhākaṃ viññāpanatthāya tasmiṃ vicayaṃ vibhajethā』』ti vattabbabhāvato tesu vicetabbākāraṃ dassento 『『yāni sotānī』』tiādigāthāya vicayākāradassanānantaraṃ 『『paññā ceva sati cā』』tiādimāha.

Tattha gāthāttho tāva viññātabbo – yāya paññāya anusayappahānena sotanirujjhanaṃ vuttaṃ, yāya satiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānappahānena sotanirujjhanaṃ vuttaṃ, sāyaṃ paññā ceva sāyaṃ sati ca tāhi paññāsatīhi asesaṃ sahuppannaṃ nāmañceva rūpañca, etaṃ sabbaṃ kattha nirujjhamāne asesaṃ uparujjhatīti mārisa me mayā puṭṭho tvaṃ bhagavā mayhaṃ etaṃ nirujjhanaṃ pabrūhi, iti āyasmā ajito bhagavantaṃ pucchati.

Ajita tvaṃ yametaṃ pañhaṃ pucchitaṃ nirujjhanaṃ maṃ apucchi, ahaṃ te tava taṃ nirujjhanaṃ vadāmi. Yattha viññāṇanirodhe paññāsatisahitaṃ nāmañca rūpañca viññāṇassa nirodhena saha ekato asesaṃ uparujjhati, ettha viññāṇanirodhe etaṃ sabbaṃ viññāṇanirodhena ekato ekakkhaṇe apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uparujjhati, etaṃ viññāṇanirodhaṃ tassa nāmarūpassa nirodho nātivattati, taṃ taṃ nāmarūpanirodhaṃ so so viññāṇanirodho nātivattatīti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當問"以隨眠斷除，遍起斷除是什麼樣子"，所以說"猶如具有聚集的"等。其中，對於具有聚集的樹木，以鏟等挖掘土地，完全連根拔起后，那棵樹的花果枝苗系列也被鏟等完全斬斷一樣，如是以阿羅漢道智在隨眠被斷除時，隨眠的遍起系列被完全斬斷、閉塞、覆蓋。被什麼斬斷？以慧、以道慧被斬斷，這是義理組織應當看到。因為應當說"慧的限定狀態如何被相信"，所以說"因此"等。以"以慧彼等閉"這句話，隨眠的遍起系列被慧限定的狀態應當被智者相信，這是其意思。 在這些問題回答中，不知道諸流的防護和閉塞，或有疑問者，因為應當問諸流的防護和閉塞，所以以法為依止而問問題，問題考察；因為應當以念慧回答，所以以法為依止而回答，回答考察也應當了知。在這些中，"世間為何所覆"等問題，以障礙、疑惑、放逸、妄語的方式是四種，但依世間依止是一個問題；同樣，"諸流遍流動"等問題，依防護閉塞是兩種，但以一個義理把握，依一個依止可說是"一個問題"，或因諸流眾多可說是"多個問題"；但不說諸流，不觸及諸流，依防護閉塞說"諸流遍流動"等是"兩個問題"。依此類推，"世間為何所覆"等中，不觸及世間，依障礙等四種可說是"四個問題"，這是顯示法則，應當看到法則的顯示。 在說法時間，把握所說法的連線，以自己創作的方式，對已問的問題，擱置問題，不作承認，回答的考察部分已被導師分析，也被我們了知。因為應當說"在說法時間所說法的連線，對已問的問題擱置問題，作承認，回答的考察部分如何被我們了知，爲了使我們瞭解，請分析那個考察"，所以顯示在那些應當考察的方式后，在顯示問題考察方式之後，說"慧與念"等。 其中，首先應當瞭解偈頌的義理——以何慧斷除隨眠而說諸流被止息，以何念斷除遍起而說諸流被止息，這慧本身且這念本身，以這慧念無餘地與名色俱生，這一切在何處止息時無餘地止息？尊者，我被問，你世尊請告訴我這個止息，如此阿耆多問世尊。 阿耆多，你問我這個問題，問我止息，我告訴你那個止息。在識滅時，與慧念俱的名色，隨識滅而同時無餘地止息，在識滅時，這一切在識滅的同一剎那、前所未有、最後無餘地止息，這識滅不超越那名色滅，那名色滅不超越那識滅。

『『Tasmiṃ pañhe ayaṃ ajito kiṃ pucchati? Uparujjhanameva pucchati, udāhu aññaṃ pucchatī』』ti vattabbato 『『ayaṃ pañhe anusandhiṃ pucchatī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayanti yo āyasmā ajito pañhaṃ apucchīti ayaṃ ajito. Pañheti 『『paññā ceva sati cā』』tiādipañhe. Yadi anusandhiṃ pucchati, evaṃ sati 『『katthetaṃ uparujjhatī』』ti pucchanaṃ ayuttaṃ bhaveyyāti? Na, anusandhīyati etena upanirujjhanenāti anusandhīti atthasambhavato. Tena vuttaṃ 『『anusandhiṃ pucchanto kiṃ…pe… nibbānadhātu』』nti. Anusandhipucchanena anupādisesanibbānadhātuyāpi pucchanato 『『katthetaṃ uparujjhatī』』ti pucchanaṃ yuttameva.

『『Yā anupādisesanibbānadhātu pucchitā, taṃ katamāya paṭipadāya adhigacchatī』』ti pucchitabbattā catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipadaṃ visayena saha dassetuṃ 『『tīṇī saccānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhatānīti kammādipaccayehi samecca sambhūya dukkhādīni karīyantīti saṅkhatāni. Nirodhadhammānīti nirujjhanaṃ nirodho, dhammopi nirodhadhammova, tasmā nirodho dhammo sabhāvo yesaṃ dukkhādīnanti nirodhadhammānīti atthova gahetabbo. Tāni tīṇi saccāni sarūpato dassetuṃ 『『dukkhaṃ samudayo maggo』』ti vuttaṃ. Tīṇi dukkhasamudayamaggasaccāni saṅkhatānīti vuttāni, 『『kiṃ nirodhasacca』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『nirodho asaṅkhato』』ti vuttaṃ. Idha 『『nirodhadhammo』』tipi vattabbaṃ. Kammādipaccayehi asaṅkhatattā asaṅkhato. Uppādanirodhābhāvato anirodhadhammo. 『『Pahāyakapahātabbesu saccesu katamena pahāyakena katamo pahātabbo, katamāya bhūmiyā pahīno』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha samudayo dvīsu bhūmīsū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dvīsu bhūmīsūti dassanabhāvanābhūmīsu. Kāmacchandoti kāmabhavarāgo. Rūparāgoti rūpabhavarāgo. Arūparāgoti arūpabhavarāgo. Saṃyojanabhedato dasa saṃyojanāni pahīyantīti yojanā.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 在這個問題中，這位阿耆多問的是什麼？是在問滅盡，還是在問其他的？對此應當說"他在這個問題中是在問相續"等等。其中，"這位"是指提出問題的尊者阿耆多。"問題"是指"智慧和正念"等問題。如果他是在問相續，那麼問"這在何處滅盡"不是不恰當嗎？不，因為"相續"的意思是"由此滅盡而相續"，這樣理解是合適的。因此說"問相續即是...乃至...涅槃界"。由於通過問相續也包含了問無餘涅槃界，所以問"這在何處滅盡"是恰當的。 因為應當問"所問的無餘涅槃界，通過什麼修行方法能證得"，爲了連同所緣一起顯示稱為四諦業處修習的修行方法，所以說"三諦"等。其中，"有為"是指由業等因緣和合而生起苦等，故稱有為。"滅法"是指滅盡為滅，法也是滅法，因此應當理解為滅是苦等諸法的自性，所以稱為滅法。爲了具體顯示這三諦，所以說"苦、集、道"。說三諦即苦、集、道諦是有為的，因為應當問"滅諦如何"，所以說"滅是無為"。這裡也應說"滅法"。因為不是由業等因緣造作，所以是無為。因為沒有生滅，所以是非滅法。 因為應當問"在能斷和所斷諸諦中，哪個能斷斷除哪個，在什麼地位斷除"，所以說"其中集在兩地"等。其中"兩地"是指見地和修地。"欲貪"是指對欲有的貪著。"色貪"是指對色有的貪著。"無色貪"是指對無色有的貪著。結的分類有十種結被斷除，這是解釋。

1. Pahātabbasaṃyojanāni dassanabhūmibhāvanābhūmibhedena vibhattāni, amhehipi ñātāni, 『『indriyabhedato kathaṃ vibhattānī』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tattha tīṇī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『pahātabbasaṃyojanesu katamāni saṃyojanāni katamaṃ indriyaṃ attano pahāyakaṃ katvā nirujjhantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha tīṇī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Adhiṭṭhāya attano pahāyakaṃ katvā nirujjhanti anuppādavasena. 『『Anaññātaññassāmītindriyañca aññindriyañca saṃyojanānaṃ nirujjhanahetu hotu, aññātāvindriyaṃ kissa hetū』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yaṃ panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ yena aññātāvindriyena arahā 『『me jāti khīṇā』』ti evaṃ jānāti, idaṃ jānanahetu aññātāvindriyaṃ khaye jātikkhaye arahattaphale pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yaṃ yena aññātāvindriyena arahā 『『itthattāya aparaṃ na bhavissāmī』』ti pajānāti, idaṃ pajānanahetu aññātāvindriyaṃ. Anuppāde pana anuppajjane arahattaphale pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ aññātāvindriyaṃ jānanahetu hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Indriyañāṇāni pahāyakāni katvā saṃyojanāni nirujjhanti, 『『tāni ñāṇāni kadā nirujjhantī』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tattha yañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ aññindriyaṃ pāpuṇantassa nirujjhatu, aññindriyaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇantassa nirujjhatu, aññātāvindriyaṃ kadā nirujjhatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yañca khaye』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dveti kiccabhedena dve, sabhāvato pana ekāva.

『『Pajānanakiccampi ekameva, kathaṃ dve siyu』』nti vattabbattā 『『apicā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇapaññābhedena dve nāmāni labbhantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāti yā paññā pubbagāthāyaṃ sotapidhānakiccena vuttā, sā paññā pakārehi jānanasabhāvena paññā nāma. Yathādiṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ apilāpanaṭṭhena ogāhanaṭṭhena sati nāma.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 應斷的諸結依見地和修地的區分而分類，我們也已知曉。因為應當說"依根的區分如何分類"，所以說"其中三"等。或者，因為應當問"在應斷的諸結中，哪些結以哪個根為能斷而滅盡"，所以說"其中三"等。確立為自己的能斷而以不再生起的方式滅盡。 因為應當問"未知當知根和已知根成為諸結滅盡的因，而具知根是什麼的因"，所以說"然而那個"等。其中，阿羅漢以具知根而知道"我的生已盡"，這個具知根是爲了知道生已盡而在阿羅漢果中運作的智。阿羅漢以具知根而了知"我不再有來生"，這個具知根是爲了了知。而在不生起時，在阿羅漢果中運作的具知根智成爲了知的因，這是所說的意思。諸根智成為能斷而諸結滅盡，因為應當說"那些智何時滅盡"，所以說"其中既"等。 因為應當問"未知當知根在證得已知根時滅盡，已知根在證得阿羅漢時滅盡，具知根何時滅盡"，所以說"其中既在盡"等。其中"兩個"是依作用的區分為兩個，但實質上只是一個。 因為應當說"了知的作用也只是一個，怎麼會有兩個"，所以說"而且"等。依所緣和智慧的區分而得兩個名稱，這是所說的意思。那個在前偈中以遮蔽耳的作用所說的智慧，那個智慧以種種方式了知為本性故名為智慧。如所見的所緣，以不忘失義和深入義故名爲念。

1. 『『Paññā ceva sati cā』』ti padassa attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『nāmarūpañcā』ti padassa attho kathaṃ amhehi ñātabbo』』ti vattabbattā nāmarūpaṃ vibhajanto 『『tattha ye pañcupādānakkhandhā』』tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti kammavipākavaṭṭabhede bhavattaye. Tatthāti pañcupādānakkhandhasaṅkhātanāmarūpasamudāye. Pañcindriyānīti cakkhādipañcindriyāni . Viññāṇasampayuttanti sampayuttapaccayattaṃ sandhāya na vuttaṃ, pacurajanassa pana avibhajitvā gahaṇīyasabhāvamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vibhāgaṃ jānantehi pana 『『nāmaṃ viññāṇasampayuttaṃ, rūpaṃ pana na viññāṇasampayuttaṃ, sahajāta』』nti vibhajitvā gahetabbaṃ. Tassāti paññāsatisahitassa nāmarūpassa. Nirodhanti anupādisesanibbānadhātuṃ.

Bhagavantaṃ pucchanto āyasmā ajito 『『paññā ceva…pe… katthetaṃ uparujjhatī』』ti evaṃ pārāyane āha. 『『Paññā cevātiādigāthāya yā anupādisesanibbānadhātu pucchitā, sā anupādisesanibbānadhātu katamena adhigamena pattabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā caturiddhipādamukhena ariyamaggādhigamamukhena pattabbā, caturiddhipādabhāvanāya ca cattārindriyāni mūlabhūtāni, tasmā mūlabhūtāni tāni cattārindriyāni niddhāretvā dassento 『『tattha sati ca paññā cā』』tiādimāha. Kusalākusaladhammagatiyo samanvesamānāya satiyā sijjhamānāya ekantena samādhi nipphādetabbo, satiggahaṇena ca pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ gāthāyaṃ adhippetaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānappahānena ca samādhikiccaṃ pākaṭanti āha 『『sati dve indriyāni satindriyañca samādhindriyañcā』』ti. Paññāya anusayasamugghātaṃ catubbidhasammappadhānasaṅkhātena vīriyena sijjhati, na vinā tenāti vuttaṃ 『『paññā dve indriyāni paññindriyañca vīriyindriyañcā』』ti.

Imesu yathāvuttesu catūsu indriyesu pubbabhāge vā maggakkhaṇe vā sijjhantesu taṃsampayuttā yā saddahanā okappanā siddhā, idaṃ saddahanaokappanasaṅkhātaṃ dhammajātaṃ saddhindriyaṃ siddhaṃ, 『『tesu mūlabhūtesu indriyesu siddhesu katamena indriyena katamo dhammo siddho』』ti pucchitabbattā iminā ayaṃ siddhoti dassento 『『tattha yā saddhādhipateyyā』』tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti satyādīsu. Saddhādhipateyyāti paccayabhūtāya saddhāya siddho chando adhipatīti saddhādhipati, saddhādhipatinā pavattetabbā cittekaggatāti saddhādhipateyyā. Chandasamādhīti chandaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā chandādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā chandasamādhi, pahānaṃ pahānahetu hotīti yojanā kātabbā. Pahānanti ca pajahati vikkhambhitakilese etena chandasamādhināti pahānanti karaṇasādhanattho gahetabbo. Paṭisaṅkhānabalenāti parikammabalena. Bhāvanābalenāti mahaggatabhāvanābalena.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "智慧和念"這個詞的含義已被導師解釋，我們也已了知。因為應當說"'名色'這個詞的含義我們應如何了知"，所以解釋名色說"其中凡是五取蘊"等。其中，"其中"是指業報輪迴差別的三有。"其中"是指稱為五取蘊的名色集合。"五根"是指眼等五根。"與識相應"不是就相應緣的意義而說，而是就多數人不加分別所能理解的性質而說。但知道區別的人應當分別理解為"名與識相應，而色不與識相應，而是俱生"。"它"是指具有智慧和唸的名色。"滅"是指無餘涅槃界。 尊者阿耆多問世尊時在波羅延說"智慧和...乃至...這在何處滅盡"。因為應當問"在'智慧等'偈頌中所問的無餘涅槃界，應以什麼修證而證得那無餘涅槃界"，所以通過四神足為門、通過聖道修證為門而應證得，而在四神足的修習中四根是根本，因此指出那作為根本的四根說"其中念和智慧"等。當正在追尋善不善法的軌跡的念成就時，必定要成就定，而且在偈頌中以唸的獲得而意指除遣纏縛，由於除遣纏縛而定的作用顯明，所以說"念是兩根即念根和定根"。由智慧而斷除隨眠是通過稱為四正勤的精進而成就，離開它則不能，所以說"智慧是兩根即慧根和精進根"。 在這些如上所說的四根，無論是在前分還是在道剎那成就時，與之相應的信解確信得以成就，這個稱為信解確信的法類即信根得以成就，因為應當問"在那些根本諸根成就時，以哪個根而哪個法得以成就"，所以爲了顯示以這個而這個得以成就而說"其中凡是信增上"等。其中，"其中"是指在念等中。"信增上"是指以作為緣的信而成就的欲為增上稱為信增上，應由信增上而運作的心一境性為信增上。"欲定"是指以欲為上首而運作的定，或者與欲增上相應而在前分運作的定為欲定，應當解釋為"是斷除的因"。而"斷除"應當理解為工具釋，即由這欲定而斷除被制伏的煩惱為斷除。"以思擇力"是指以準備力。"以修習力"是指以廣大修習力。

『『So chandasamādhi sayaṃ kevalova pahāna』』nti vattabbattā 『『tattha ye assāsapassāsā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ samāhite citte cittuppāde. 『『Tasmiṃ samāhite cittuppāde assāsā』』tiādinā assāsādisīsena assāsādijanakā vīriyasaṅkhārā gahitā, te ca yāva bhāvanāpāripūrī, tāva punappunaṃ saraṇato ca sarā, punappunaṃ saṅkappato ca saṅkappā. Yo pana 『『sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā cā』』ti evaṃ vuttappakāro purimako chandasamādhi vā kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca tadaṅgappahānatāya ca pahānaṃ pahānahetupadhānaṃ vā, 『『ime vuttappakārā saṅkhārādayo kiṃ bhāventī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ime ca saṅkhārā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ime saṅkhārā ca tadubhayañca chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti yojanā.

Chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatanti chando eva adhipati chandādhipati, chandādhipatisamādhi. Tena vuttaṃ bhagavatā – 『『chandaṃ ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu adhipatiṃ karitvā labhati samādhi』』nti (vibha. 432). Chandahetuko vā samādhi, chandādiko vā samādhi chandasamādhi, chandādhipatissa paccayuppanno samādhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Padhānabhūtā saṅkhārā padhānasaṅkhārā, padhānasaddena saṅkhatasaṅkhārādayo nivattāpitā, chandasamādhi ca padhānasaṅkhārā cāti chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārā, tehi samannāgato chanda…pe… samannāgato, taṃ…pe… gataṃ. Ijjhati samijjhati nippajjatīti iddhi, koṭṭhāso, iddhi eva pādo koṭṭhāsoti iddhipādo, iddhipādacatuttho. Ijjhanti vā tāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, pajjati etenāti pādo, iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo. Iddhipādoti sāmaññatthavasena vuttopi 『『chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgata』』nti vuttattā chandiddhipādova gahetabbo, taṃ iddhipādaṃ taṃ chandiddhipādaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti attho.

Vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ. Virāganissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavirāganissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe pana kiccato samucchedavirāganissitaṃ , ārammaṇato nissaraṇavirāganissitaṃ. Nirodhanissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅganirodhanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇanirodhanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe kiccato samucchedanirodhanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇanirodhanissitaṃ. Vossaggapariṇāminti ettha pariccāgavossaggapakkhandanavossaggavasena vossaggo duvidho. Tatthapi vipassanākkhaṇe tadaṅgavasena pariccāgavossaggo, nibbānaninnabhāvena pakkhandanavossaggo, maggakkhaṇe samucchedavasena pariccāgavossaggo, ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanavossaggoti vibhajitvā gahetabbo. Yathāvuttavossaggatthaṃ pariṇamati, pariṇataṃ vā paripacati paripacanaṃ karotīti vossaggapariṇāmī, taṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當說"這是欲定自己的斷除"，所以說"其中凡是吸收和呼出"等。其中，"其中"是指在定心中生的心。"在定心中生的吸收"等，以吸收等為因緣，生起精進的行，直到修習圓滿，如此反覆地追尋和反覆地思惟。誰說"這些是思惟的行"，這些行是爲了斷除煩惱的障礙和斷除的因緣，因為應當問"這些行是什麼"，所以說"這些行"等。其中，這些行是欲定自己的斷除的因緣，以離欲、離貪、離嗔、離癡的斷除為基礎，以證得神足為目的。 欲定自己的斷除是指以欲為上首的定，以欲為增上的定。如佛陀所說："比丘，以欲為上首而證得定"（vibha. 432）。欲是定生的因緣，欲定是欲生的定，以欲為增上的定生的定，這是所說的意思。修習的行是修習的行，以修習的行斷除煩惱的障礙，以欲定自己的斷除為基礎，以證得神足為目的。 神足是指證得神通的能力，以證得神通的能力而證得神足，這是所說的意思。神足是指證得神通的能力，以證得神通的能力而證得神足，這是所說的意思。 以離欲、離貪、離嗔、離癡的斷除為基礎，以證得神足為目的，以離欲、離貪、離嗔、離癡的斷除為基礎，以證得神足為目的。這是所說的意思。 以離欲、離貪、離嗔、離癡的斷除為基礎，以證得神足為目的，以離欲、離貪、離嗔、離癡的斷除為基礎，以證得神足為目的。這是所說的意思。 以證得神足為目的，以證得神足為目的，以證得神足為目的。這是所說的意思。 以證得神足為目的，以證得神足為目的，以證得神足為目的。這是所說的意思。 以證得神足為目的，以證得神足為目的，以證得神足為目的。這是所說的意思。

Chandiddhipādabhāvanākāro ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ vīriyiddhipādabhāvanākāro amhehi vijānitabbo』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tattha yā vīriyādhipateyyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho heṭṭhā vuttanayānusāreneva viññeyyo. Saṃkhittavasena pana ṭhapitaṃ pāṭhaṃ vitthārato ṭhapessāmi. Kathaṃ? –

『『Tattha yā vīriyādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ vīriyasamādhi. Samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca vīriyasamādhi, kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ vīriyasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.

『『Tattha yā cittādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ cittasamādhi. Samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca cittasamādhi, kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ cittasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.

『『Tattha yā vīmaṃsādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ vīmaṃsāsamādhi, samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca vīmaṃsāsamādhi kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ vīmaṃsāsamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmi』』nti.

Ayaṃ pana viseso – vīriyasamādhīti vīriyaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā vīriyādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā vīriyasamādhi. Cittasamādhīti cittaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā cittādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā cittasamādhi. Vīmaṃsāsamādhīti vīmaṃsaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā vīmaṃsādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā vīmaṃsāsamādhīti.

Sattibalānurūpenettha saṅkhepavaṇṇanā katā, gambhīrañāṇehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānurūpena vitthārato vā gambhīrato vā vibhajitvā gahetabbā.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 導師已經說明了欲神足的修習方法，我們也已了知。因為應當說"我們應如何了知精進神足的修習方法"，所以說"其中凡是精進增上"等。其義應依前述方法而了知。我將把簡略安立的文句詳細地安立。如何？ "其中，凡是精進增上的心一境性，這是精進定。在心定時，由於制伏煩惱，以思擇力或以修習力，這是斷除。其中，凡是入出息、尋伺、想受、思惟等，這些是行。如是前面的精進定，以及由於制伏煩惱的斷除，和這些行，這兩者具足精進定勝行的神足，修習依止遠離、依止離貪、依止滅盡、傾向舍離。 其中，凡是心增上的心一境性，這是心定。在心定時，由於制伏煩惱，以思擇力或以修習力，這是斷除。其中，凡是入出息、尋伺、想受、思惟等，這些是行。如是前面的心定，以及由於制伏煩惱的斷除，和這些行，這兩者具足心定勝行的神足，修習依止遠離、依止離貪、依止滅盡、傾向舍離。 其中，凡是觀增上的心一境性，這是觀定。在心定時，由於制伏煩惱，以思擇力或以修習力，這是斷除。其中，凡是入出息、尋伺、想受、思惟等，這些是行。如是前面的觀定，以及由於制伏煩惱的斷除，和這些行，這兩者具足觀定勝行的神足，修習依止遠離、依止離貪、依止滅盡、傾向舍離。" 這是差別：精進定是以精進為上首而運作的定，或者與精進增上相應而在前分運作的定為精進定。心定是以心為上首而運作的定，或者與心增上相應而在前分運作的定為心定。觀定是以觀為上首而運作的定，或者與觀增上相應而在前分運作的定為觀定。 這裡依能力所及而作簡略解釋，但具深智者應依註釋書和復注書而詳細或深入地分別理解。

1. 『『Chandasamādhi vīriyasamādhi cittasamādhi vīmaṃsāsamādhī』』ti vutto, 『『evaṃ sati vīmaṃsāsamādhiyeva ñāṇamūlako ñāṇapubbaṅgamo ñāṇānuparivatti bhaveyya, aññe tayo samādhayo aññāṇamūlakā aññāṇapubbaṅgamā aññāṇapavattiyo bhaveyyu』』nti vattabbattā sabbe samādhayo ñāṇamūlakādayoyevāti dassetuṃ 『『sabbo samādhi ñāṇamūlako』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbo samādhīti chandasamādhi, vīriyasamādhi, cittasamādhi, vīmaṃsāsamādhīti catubbidho samādhi. Ñāṇamūlakoti ekāvajjanavīthinānāvajjanavīthīsu pavattaṃ upacārañāṇamūlako. Ñāṇapubbaṅgamoti adhigamañāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Ñāṇānuparivattīti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Atha vā nānāvajjanūpacārañāṇaṃ vā paṭisandhiñāṇaṃ vā mūlaṃ assāti ñāṇamūlako, upacārañāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo, appanāñāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Sabbaṃ vā upacārañāṇaṃ mūlaṃ assāti ñāṇamūlako. Appanāñāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Abhiññāñāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti, anuparivattanaṃ vā anuparivatti, ñāṇassa anuparivatti ñāṇānuparivatti, ñāṇānuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Ñāṇaṃ pana pubbe vuttappakārameva.

Yathā pure tathā pacchāti yathā chandasamādhiādicatubbidhasamādhissa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvena pure atītāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano khandhapaṭibaddhassa, paresaṃ khandhapaṭibaddhassa ca suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ tathā tathāvuttasamādhissa anāgataṃsañāṇānuparivattibhāvena pacchā anāgatāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano khandhapaṭibaddhassa, paresaṃ khandhapaṭibaddhassa ca suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā pacchā tathā pureti yathā yathāvuttasamādhissa cetopariyañāṇānuparivattibhāvena anāgatesu sattasuyeva divasesu parasattānaṃyeva cittassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā tathāvuttasamādhissa pure atītesu sattasuyeva divasesu parasattānaṃyeva cittassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho.

Yathā divā tathā rattinti yathā cakkhumantānaṃ sattānaṃ divasabhāge sūriyālokena andhakārassa viddhaṃsitattā āpāthagataṃ cakkhuviññeyyaṃ rūpaṃ manoviññāṇenapi suviññeyyaṃ, tathā rattibhāge caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre vattamāne yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena rūpāyatanassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ. Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā rattibhāge caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena rūpāyatanassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā divasabhāge sukhumassa rūpāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa rūpāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa rūpāyatanassa vā yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho daṭṭhabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 已說"欲定、精進定、心定、觀定"，因為應當說"如此的話，只有觀定是以智為根本、以智為先導、隨智而轉，其他三種定則是以非智為根本、以非智為先導、以非智而轉"，爲了顯示所有定都是以智為根本等，所以說"一切定都是以智為根本"等。其中，"一切定"是指欲定、精進定、心定、觀定這四種定。"以智為根本"是指以同一速行路或不同速行路中生起的近行智為根本。"以智為先導"是指以證得智為先導。"隨智而轉"是指以觀察智隨轉。或者，以種種近行智或結生智為根本為"以智為根本"，以近行智為先導為"以智為先導"，以安止智隨轉為"隨智而轉"。或者，以一切近行智為根本為"以智為根本"，以安止智為先導為"以智為先導"，以神通智隨轉為"隨智而轉"，隨轉即是隨轉，智的隨轉為隨智而轉，有隨智而轉為隨智而轉。智則如前所說。 "如前如后"是指，如同欲定等四種定以宿住隨念智隨轉的方式，在過去無數劫的成壞中，對自己的蘊相關和他人的蘊相關都能很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察；同樣地，以未來分智隨轉的方式，在未來無數劫的成壞中，對自己的蘊相關和他人的蘊相關也都能很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察，應當如此理解。"如后如前"是指，如同上述定以他心智隨轉的方式，在未來七天內只對其他有情的心很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察；同樣地，在過去七天內也只對其他有情的心很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察，這是其義。 "如晝如夜"是指，如同有眼之人在白天由於日光碟機散黑暗而能以眼識和意識清楚地識別可見色；同樣地，即使在具備四支的黑暗中，由於上述定以天眼智隨轉，對色處也能很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察。"如夜如晝"是指，如同在具備四支的夜晚黑暗中，由於上述定以天眼智隨轉，對色處能很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察；同樣地，在白天對於微細的色處、或被墻等遮蔽的色處、或在極遠處的色處，由於上述定以天眼智隨轉，也能很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察，應當如此理解。

Yathā yathāvuttasamādhissa divasabhāge dibbasotañāṇānuparivattibhāvena sukhumassa saddāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa saddāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa saddāyatanassa vā suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā rattibhāgepi yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbasotañāṇānuparivattibhāvena sukhumassa saddāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa saddāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa saddāyatanassa vā suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti ayaṃ nayopi netabbo. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –

『『Yathā pureti yathā samādhissa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvenā』』tiādiṃ vatvā 『『yathā ca rūpāyatane vuttaṃ, tathā samādhissa dibbasotañāṇānuparivattitāya saddāyatane ca netabba』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 14).

『『Ñāṇamūlakādisamādhinā pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvādisahitena kiṃ bhāvetī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『iti vivaṭenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha itīti evaṃ vuttappakārena. Apariyonaddhenāti nīvaraṇādivigamanena. Sappabhāsaṃ cittanti iddhipādasampayuttaṃ maggacittaṃ bhāveti. Iddhipādasampayutte maggacitte uppajjamāne hi maggacittasahabhūni kusalāni saddhindriyavīriyindriyasatindriyasamādhindriyapaññindriyabhūtāni pañcindriyāni uppajjanti. Maggacitte nirujjhamāne anuppajjanabhāvena nirujjhanti ekacittakkhaṇikattā. Evaṃ maggaviññāṇassa nirodhā paññā ca sati ca nirujjhatīti yojanā.

『『Kassa viññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpaṃ nirujjhatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『nāmarūpañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ, paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpañca nirujjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā 『『viññāṇassa nirodhā paññā ca sati cāti vuttāni pañcindriyāni evaṃ nirujjhantī』』ti vattabbattā nāmarūpañca nirujjhati, nirujjhamānaṃ pana nāmarūpaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nirujjhatīti dassetuṃ 『『nāmarūpañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nāmarūpañcāti maggena taṇhāavijjādike anupacchinne uppajjanārahaṃ vedanādikkhandhattayaṃ, bhūtupādārūpañca. Viññāṇahetukanti uppajjanārahaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ hetu assa nāmarūpassāti viññāṇahetukaṃ. Viññāṇapaccayā nibbattanti viññāṇena paccayena nibbattaṃ. Tassāti uppajjanārahassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa. Hetūti taṇhāavijjādiko kileso. Viññāṇanti uppajjanārahaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Anāhāranti appaccayaṃ. Anabhinanditanti kāmataṇhādīhi anabhinanditabbaṃ. Appaṭisandhikanti punabbhavābhisandahanarahitaṃ. Nti tādisaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Ahetūti natthi hetusaṅkhātaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ imassa nāmarūpassāti ahetu. Appaccayanti sahāyavirahena natthi paccayā saṅkhārā imassāti appaccayaṃ. Evaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpañca nirujjhatīti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 如同上述定在白天以天耳智隨轉的方式，對微細的聲處、或被墻等遮蔽的聲處、或在極遠處的聲處都能很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察；同樣地，在夜晚上述定以天耳智隨轉的方式，對微細的聲處、或被墻等遮蔽的聲處、或在極遠處的聲處也都能很好地洞察，而不是難以洞察，這個道理也應當如此理解。因此在註釋中說： "如前"是指如同定以宿住隨念智隨轉的方式等等，說了之後又說"如同在色處所說的，同樣地也應當運用於定以天耳智隨轉的聲處"。 因為應當問"以智為根本等定和具有宿住隨念智隨轉等修習什麼"，所以說"如是以開顯"等。其中，"如是"是指如所說的方式。"不被覆蔽"是指由於遠離諸蓋等。"有光明之心"是修習與神足相應的道心。因為在與神足相應的道心生起時，與道心俱生的善法即信根、精進根、念根、定根、慧根這五根生起。在道心滅時由於不再生起而滅，因為是一心剎那。如是由於道識的滅而智慧和念滅，這是解釋。 因為應當說"由於哪個識的滅而名色滅"，所以說"名色"等，意即由於結生識的滅而名色滅。或者，因為應當說"由於識的滅而智慧和念等五根如是滅"，所以名色滅，而爲了顯示所滅的名色是由於結生識的滅而滅，所以說"名色"等。其中，"名色"是指由於道未斷除愛、無明等而應生起的受等三蘊，以及四大種所造色。"以識為因"是指應生起的結生識是這名色的因，故稱以識為因。"緣識而生"是指由識為緣而生。"它"是指應生起的結生識。"因"是指愛、無明等煩惱。"識"是指應生起的結生識。"無食"是指無緣。"無歡喜"是指不應被欲愛等歡喜。"無結生"是指離於再有相續。"它"是指如此的識。"無因"是指這名色沒有稱為因的結生識故為無因。"無緣"是指由於離開助伴而沒有緣的諸行故為無緣。如是由於結生識的滅而名色滅。

『『Paññāsatīnañceva nāmarūpassa ca vuttappakārena nirujjhanabhāvo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Vattabbākārena paññāsatīnañceva nāmarūpassa ca nirujjhanabhāvajānanako bhagavā yathānirujjhanabhāvadīpakaṃ 『『yametaṃ…pe… etthetaṃ uparujjhatī』』ti gāthāvacanaṃ āha. Tena gāthāvacanena tumhehi mayā vutto nirujjhanabhāvo saddahitabboyevāti. Etthāpi paññāsatināmarūpānaṃ nirujjhanaṃ ajānantena tattha vā saṃsayantena ajitena pucchitabbattā 『『adiṭṭhajotanā pucchāti vā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāti vā paññādīnaṃ anekatthattā dhammato vā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti vā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchā』』ti vā iccevamādipucchāvicayo niddhāretabbo. 『『Sarūpadassanavissajjananti vā anekādhiṭṭhānavissajjananti vā dhammādhiṭṭhānavissajjana』』nti vā iccevamādivissajjanavicayo niddhāretabbo.

Evaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānādipucchāvissajjanāni ceva dhammādhiṭṭhānādipucchāvissajjanāni ca visuṃ visuṃ dassetvā pucchāvicayo ceva vissajjanavicayo ca ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『sattādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānesu ekato dassitesu pucchāvissajjanesu kathaṃ pucchāvicayo ceva vissajjanavicayo ca amhehi viññātabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā sattādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ nīharitvā tattha vicayaṃ vibhajanto 『『ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse』』tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Evaṃ anusandhipucchampi dassetvā heṭṭhā sattādhiṭṭhānā, dhammādhiṭṭhānā ca pucchā visuṃ visuṃ dassitāti idāni tā saha dassetuṃ 『『ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 14) –

Vuttaṃ. Tassāyaṃ attho – idha sāsane ye arahanto saṅkhatadhammā honti, puthū bahūyeva satta janā sekkhā sīlādisikkhamānā honti, tesaṃ arahantāvañceva sekkhānañca iriyaṃ paṭipattiṃ meṃ mahā puṭṭho nipako tvaṃ bhagavā pabrūhi mārisa iti āyasmā ajito pucchanto āhāti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當說"智慧和念以及名色以所說方式滅盡的情況我們應當如何信受"，所以說"因此世尊說"等。世尊知道智慧和念以及名色以應說的方式滅盡，說了顯示如何滅盡的"這個...乃至...在這裡它滅盡"的偈頌言句。由於這偈頌言句，我所說的滅盡情況你們應當信受。這裡也因為阿耆多不知道或懷疑智慧、念和名色的滅盡而應當詢問，所以應當確定"是未見而求明白的問題，還是已見而求印證的問題，或者由於智慧等有多義而是依法有多所依的問題，或者是依法的問題"等等這樣的問題考察。應當確定"是顯示自相的答案，還是多所依的答案，或者是依法的答案"等等這樣的答案考察。 如是分別顯示依眾生和依法等的問答，導師已經分別了問題考察和答案考察，我們也已知曉。因為應當問"在同時顯示依眾生和依法的問答中，我們應當如何了知問題考察和答案考察"，所以提出依眾生和依法的問題，並在其中分別考察而說"凡是有為法"等。而在註釋中： "如是也顯示了隨順的問題后，因為前面已分別顯示了依眾生和依法的問題，現在爲了一起顯示它們而開始說'凡是有為法'等"。 這是其義：在此教法中，凡是阿羅漢是有為法，眾多的有情是學人正在學習戒等，對於這些阿羅漢和學人的行為修習，大德，我問你，請你這智者說明，尊者阿耆多如是問。

1. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ 『『kittakāni pucchitānī』』ti vattabbattā 『『imānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Padatthānurūpaṃ pucchitabbattā 『『imāni tīṇi padāni pucchitānī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Ye ca …pe… mārisā』』ti gāthāyaṃ ye pañhā pucchitā, te pañhā tayo honti, 『『kissa kena kāraṇena tayo hontī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『kissa…pe… yogenā』』ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhā ariyā ca asekkhā ariyā ca vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ pahānañcāti sekhāsekhavipassanāpubbaṅgamappahānāni, tesaṃ yogoti sekhā…pe… yogo, tena sekhā…pe… yogena. Evaṃ pucchāvidhinā hi yasmā 『『ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse…pe… mārisā』』ti gāthamāha, tasmā tayo pañhā hontīti daṭṭhabbā.

『『Ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse』』ti iminā asekkhānaṃ arahattaṃ pucchati, 『『ye ca sekkhā puthū idhā』』ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ sekkhasikkhanaṃ pucchati, 『『tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ, puṭṭho pabrūhi mārisā』』ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ vipassanā pubbabhāge tadaṅgappahānaṃ pucchati. 『『Adiṭṭhajotanā pucchāti vā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāti vā sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti vā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchā』』ti vā iccevamādipucchāvicayo niddhāretabbo.

Sattadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『tassaṃ pucchāyaṃ katamā vissajjanāgāthā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha vissajjanā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāti tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ. 『『Kāmesu…pe… paribbaje』』ti vissajjanāgāthā bhagavatā vuttā. Kāmesūti kāmīyantīti kāmā, tesu kāmesu. Vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena paṇḍitehi nābhigijjheyya. Manasā nāvilosiyāti āvilabhāvakare byāpādavitakkādayo ceva kāyaduccaritādayo ca dhamme pajahanto paṇḍito manasā anāvilo suppasanno bhaveyya. Kusalo sabbadhammānanti sabbadhammānaṃ aniccatādinā paritulitattā aniccatādīsu pañcasu khandhesu kusalo cheko. Satoti kesādīsu saratīti sato. Bhikkhūti saṅkhatadhamme bhayādito ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Paribbajeti tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānabhāvena kilesakāmavatthukāme pari samantato vajjeyya.

Pucchāgāthāyaṃ 『『nipako』』ti padena pasaṃsitena bhagavatā vissajjanāgāthā vuttā, tassa bhagavato yena anāvaraṇañāṇena ukkaṃsagatena pakkabhāvo dassito, taṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ tāva kāyakammādibhedehi vibhajitvā dassento 『『bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakamma』』ntiādimāha. Tattha anāvaraṇañāṇena jānitvā kataṃ sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivatti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Atīte aṃseti atītabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññāṇena appaṭihataṃ bhagavato ñāṇadassanaṃ. Anāgate aṃseti anāgatabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse. Paccuppanne aṃseti paccuppanne bhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse.

『『Ñāṇadassanassa katarasmiṃ paṭighāto』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ dassetuṃ 『『ko cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『paccuppannabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññesampi ñāṇadassanaṃ bhaveyya, tadanusārena atītānāgatakoṭṭhāsesupi katarasmiṃ aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyā』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『ko cā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ko cāti kva katarasmiṃ samaye aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyāti pucchi.

1. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ 『『kittakāni pucchitānī』』ti vattabbattā 『『imānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Padatthānurūpaṃ pucchitabbattā 『『imāni tīṇi padāni pucchitānī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Ye ca …pe… mārisā』』ti gāthāyaṃ ye pañhā pucchitā, te pañhā tayo honti, 『『kissa kena kāraṇena tayo hontī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『kissa…pe… yogenā』』ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhā ariyā ca asekkhā ariyā ca vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ pahānañcāti sekhāsekhavipassanāpubbaṅgamappahānāni, tesaṃ yogoti sekhā…pe… yogo, tena sekhā…pe… yogena. Evaṃ pucchāvidhinā hi yasmā 『『ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse…pe… mārisā』』ti gāthamāha, tasmā tayo pañhā hontīti daṭṭhabbā.

『『Ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse』』ti iminā asekkhānaṃ arahattaṃ pucchati, 『『ye ca sekkhā puthū idhā』』ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ sekkhasikkhanaṃ pucchati, 『『tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ, puṭṭho pabrūhi mārisā』』ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ vipassanā pubbabhāge tadaṅgappahānaṃ pucchati. 『『Adiṭṭhajotanā pucchāti vā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāti vā sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti vā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchā』』ti vā iccevamādipucchāvicayo niddhāretabbo.

Sattadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『tassaṃ pucchāyaṃ katamā vissajjanāgāthā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha vissajjanā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāti tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ. 『『Kāmesu…pe… paribbaje』』ti vissajjanāgāthā bhagavatā vuttā. Kāmesūti kāmīyantīti kāmā, tesu kāmesu. Vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena paṇḍitehi nābhigijjheyya. Manasā nāvilosiyāti āvilabhāvakare byāpādavitakkādayo ceva kāyaduccaritādayo ca dhamme pajahanto paṇḍito manasā anāvilo suppasanno bhaveyya. Kusalo sabbadhammānanti sabbadhammānaṃ aniccatādinā paritulitattā aniccatādīsu pañcasu khandhesu kusalo cheko. Satoti kesādīsu saratīti sato. Bhikkhūti saṅkhatadhamme bhayādito ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Paribbajeti tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānabhāvena kilesakāmavatthukāme pari samantato vajjeyya.

Pucchāgāthāyaṃ 『『nipako』』ti padena pasaṃsitena bhagavatā vissajjanāgāthā vuttā, tassa bhagavato yena anāvaraṇañāṇena ukkaṃsagatena pakkabhāvo dassito, taṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ tāva kāyakammādibhedehi vibhajitvā dassento 『『bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakamma』』ntiādimāha. Tattha anāvaraṇañāṇena jānitvā kataṃ sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivatti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Atīte aṃseti atītabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññāṇena appaṭihataṃ bhagavato ñāṇadassanaṃ. Anāgate aṃseti anāgatabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse. Paccuppanne aṃseti paccuppanne bhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse.

『『Ñāṇadassanassa katarasmiṃ paṭighāto』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ dassetuṃ 『『ko cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『paccuppannabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññesampi ñāṇadassanaṃ bhaveyya, tadanusārena atītānāgatakoṭṭhāsesupi katarasmiṃ aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyā』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『ko cā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ko cāti kva katarasmiṃ samaye aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyāti pucchi.

1. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ 『『kittakāni pucchitānī』』ti vattabbattā 『『imānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Padatthānurūpaṃ pucchitabbattā 『『imāni tīṇi padāni pucchitānī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Ye ca …pe… mārisā』』ti gāthāyaṃ ye pañhā pucchitā, te pañhā tayo honti, 『『kissa kena kāraṇena tayo hontī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『kissa…pe… yogenā』』ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhā ariyā ca asekkhā ariyā ca vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ pahānañcāti sekhāsekhavipassanāpubbaṅgamappahānāni, tesaṃ yogoti sekhā…pe… yogo, tena sekhā…pe… yogena. Evaṃ pucchāvidhinā hi yasmā 『『ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse…pe… mārisā』』ti gāthamāha, tasmā tayo pañhā hontīti daṭṭhabbā.

『『Ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse』』ti iminā asekkhānaṃ arahattaṃ pucchati, 『『ye ca sekkhā puthū idhā』』ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ sekkhasikkhanaṃ pucchati, 『『tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ, puṭṭho pabrūhi mārisā』』ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ vipassanā pubbabhāge tadaṅgappahānaṃ pucchati. 『『Adiṭṭhajotanā pucchāti vā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāti vā sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti vā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchā』』ti vā iccevamādipucchāvicayo niddhāretabbo.

Sattadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『tassaṃ pucchāyaṃ katamā vissajjanāgāthā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha vissajjanā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāti tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ. 『『Kāmesu…pe… paribbaje』』ti vissajjanāgāthā bhagavatā vuttā. Kāmesūti kāmīyantīti kāmā, tesu kāmesu. Vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena paṇḍitehi nābhigijjheyya. Manasā nāvilosiyāti āvilabhāvakare byāpādavitakkādayo ceva kāyaduccaritādayo ca dhamme pajahanto paṇḍito manasā anāvilo suppasanno bhaveyya. Kusalo sabbadhammānanti sabbadhammānaṃ aniccatādinā paritulitattā aniccatādīsu pañcasu khandhesu kusalo cheko. Satoti kesādīsu saratīti sato. Bhikkhūti saṅkhatadhamme bhayādito ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Paribbajeti tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānabhāvena kilesakāmavatthukāme pari samantato vajjeyya.

Pucchāgāthāyaṃ 『『nipako』』ti padena pasaṃsitena bhagavatā vissajjanāgāthā vuttā, tassa bhagavato yena anāvaraṇañāṇena ukkaṃsagatena pakkabhāvo dassito, taṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ tāva kāyakammādibhedehi vibhajitvā dassento 『『bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakamma』』ntiādimāha. Tattha anāvaraṇañāṇena jānitvā kataṃ sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivatti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Atīte aṃseti atītabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññāṇena appaṭihataṃ bhagavato ñāṇadassanaṃ. Anāgate aṃseti anāgatabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse. Paccuppanne aṃseti paccuppanne bhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse.

『『Ñāṇadassanassa katarasmiṃ paṭighāto』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ dassetuṃ 『『ko cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『paccuppannabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññesampi ñāṇadassanaṃ bhaveyya, tadanusārena atītānāgatakoṭṭhāsesupi katarasmiṃ aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyā』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『ko cā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ko cāti kva katarasmiṃ samaye aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyāti pucchi.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文: 15. 關於這首偈頌"問了多少"這樣說時,所以說"這些"等。由於應當依據詞義來問,所以說"問了這三個詞"。在"諸位賢者...等...請說"這首偈頌中所問的問題是三個,因為應當問"為什麼是三個理由",所以說"以何...等...相應"。有學聖者與無學聖者以及以觀為先的斷,即有學無學以觀為先的斷,與彼等相應即是與有學...等...相應,以彼有學...等...相應。如是以問題方式,因為說了"諸位賢者...等..."這首偈頌,所以應當知道是三個問題。 "諸有為法"這句是問無學者的阿羅漢果,"此處諸有學"這句是問有學無學者的有學學處,"賢者請說彼等行"這句是問有學無學者在觀前分的暫伏斷。應當確定"未見開顯之問或已見相應之問或以有情為所依之問或以多所依為問"等種種問題的分析。 阿阇黎已經分析了以七法為所依的問題,我們也已了知,"在此問題中哪個是答偈"應當如是問,所以開始說"其中答"等。其中即是在那首偈頌中。世尊說了"于諸欲...等...應遍離"的答偈。諸欲即是所欲求的,在彼等欲中。智者不應貪著於事欲和煩惱欲。意不濁亂即是捨棄能使混濁的瞋恚尋思等及身惡行等法,智者應心無濁亂而清凈。善巧一切法即是以無常等衡量一切法,於五蘊的無常等善巧熟練。念即是于發等憶念爲念。比丘即是從有為法見到怖畏而觀察為比丘。應遍離即是以暫伏斷、鎮伏斷、斷除斷而遍離煩惱欲和事欲。 在問偈中以"賢者"一詞讚歎而說答偈,顯示彼世尊以無礙智達到最高圓滿,首先為顯示彼無礙智以身業等差別分析而說"世尊一切身業"等。其中以無礙智而知作的一切身業是以智為先行、以智相隨。其餘也是這個道理。於過去分即是於過去世自他蘊等部分的智見不被無知所障礙。于未來分即是于未來世自他蘊等部分。于現在分即是于現在世自他蘊等部分。 因為應當問"智見在何處受到障礙",所以設問后為顯示障礙境界而說"什麼"等。或者因為應當問"于現在世自他蘊等部分中他人也可能有智見,隨順於此,於過去未來部分中他人的智見在何處會受障礙",所以設問后為確定並顯示障礙境界而說"什麼"。其中"什麼"即是問在何時他人的智見會受到障礙。

Anicce, dukkhe, anattaniye ca aññesaṃ aññāṇaṃ yaṃ adassanaṃ atthi, aññāṇādassanasaṅkhāto sabhāvo ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhavati, na saparakkhandhādidassanamattapaṭighāto. Etena aniccato lakkhaṇattaye pavattassa ñāṇadassanassa aññesaṃ durabhisambhavaṃ, bhagavato ca ñāṇadassanassa aññehi asādhāraṇataṃ dasseti. Bhagavato hi lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanena veneyyā catusaccappaṭivedhaṃ labhanti. 『『Bhagavato ñāṇadassanapaṭighātābhāvena aññesañca ñāṇadassanassa paṭighātabhāvo katamāya upamāya amhākaṃ pākaṭo』』ti vattabbabhāvato upamāya pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ 『『yathā idhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idha sattaloke cakkhumā puriso ākāse tārakāni passeyya, gaṇanasaṅketena 『『ettakānī』』ti no ca jāneyya yathā, evaṃ aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto ayaṃ aññāṇadassanasabhāvo bhavati.

Bhagavato pana tathā abhāvato kenaci aññāṇena adassanena appaṭihataṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ bhavatīti attho daṭṭhabbo. 『『Bhagavato ñāṇadassanassa appaṭihatabhāvo kasmā amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『anāvaraṇañāṇadassanā hi buddhā bhagavanto』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Nipakassa…pe… bhagavato anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ kāyakammādibhedehi ācariyena vibhajitvā dassitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, pacchā gāthāya 『iriya』nti padena pucchitā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā kathaṃ vijānitabbā』』ti vattabbattā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ 『『tattha sekhenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ vissajjane. Sekhenāti sikkhanasīlena puggalena rajanīyesu rūpārammaṇādīsu dhammesu gedhā cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānīyesu āghātavatthūsu dosā cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ.

『『Tesu gedhadosesu katamaṃ nivārento bhagavā vissajjanagāthāyaṃ katamaṃ padamāhā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yā icchā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti gedhadosesu. Icchāti rāgicchā. Mucchāti lobhamohasahagatamohamucchā. Patthanāti rāgapatthanā. Piyāyanāti taṇhāpiyāyanāva, na mettāpiyāyanā. Kīḷanāti gedhakīḷanā. Etāni hi gedhapariyāyavacanāni. Taṃ gedhasaṅkhātaṃ icchādikaṃ nivārento bhagavā 『『kāmesu nābhigijjheyyā』』ti evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ pakārena āha.

Pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ dosaṃ nivārento bhagavā 『『manasānāvilo siyā』』ti evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ pakārena āhāti yojanā. Gedhadosānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ nivārento bhagavā dve padāni āhāti vuttaṃ, 『『taṃ kena atthena saddahitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tathā hi sekho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Rajanīyesu abhigijjhanto sekho anuppannaṃ lobhapadhānaṃ kilesañca uppādeti, uppannaṃ kilesañca phātiṃ abhivaḍḍhanaṃ karoti, pariyuṭṭhānīyesu āvilo sekho anuppannaṃ dosapadhānaṃ kilesañca uppādeti, uppannaṃ kilesañca phātiṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ karoti, iti iminā paṭikkhepaatthena taṃ mama vacanaṃ saddahitabbanti adhippāyo.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文: 對於無常、苦、無我,他人有不知與不見,以無知不見為性質的狀態成為智見的障礙,而不僅是見到自他蘊等的障礙。由此顯示對於從無常開始的三相而生起的智見,他人難以證得,而世尊的智見與他人不共。因為通過世尊對三相的開顯,應化眾生獲得四聖諦的通達。因為應當說"以何種譬喻使我們明瞭世尊智見無障礙而他人智見有障礙",爲了以譬喻使之明了而說"譬如此處"等。其中如同在此有情世間中具眼之人能見空中星辰,以計數約定說"有這麼多",但不能了知,如是他人智見的障礙即是這無知不見的自性。 應當了知的意思是:但世尊不如是,因為不被任何無知不見所障礙而有智見。因為應當問"為什麼我們應當信受世尊智見無障礙",所以說"諸佛世尊indeed具無礙智見"。"阿阇黎已以身業等差別分析並顯示賢者...等...世尊的無礙智,我們也已了知,后偈中以'行'字所問的有學無學行道應如何了知",因為應當如是說,為顯示有學無學行道而說"其中有學"等。其中"其中"即是在那答覆中。"有學"即是有學習性的人對於可愛的色所緣等法應從貪守護心,對於能生纏縛的嗔恚事應從嗔守護心。 因為應當問"在彼等貪嗔中制止何者時,世尊在答偈中說了何詞",所以說"其中何欲"等。其中"其中"即是在貪嗔中。欲即是貪慾。迷即是貪癡相應的癡迷。愿即是貪愿。愛即是愛愛,不是慈愛。戲即是貪戲。這些indeed是貪的同義語。世尊制止彼等稱為貪的欲等時,如是以"不應貪著諸欲"等各別方式而說。 世尊制止纏縛性的惱害之嗔時,如是以"意應無濁"等各別方式而說,如是結合。說世尊各別制止貪嗔而說兩句,"以何義應信受此",因為應當如是說,所以說"如是有學"等。有學對可愛境貪著時生起未生起的以貪為主的煩惱,令已生起的煩惱增長廣大;有學對能生纏縛境心濁時生起未生起的以嗔為主的煩惱,令已生起的煩惱增長廣大,如是以此遮遣義應當信受我所說的意思。

『『Kiṃ pana anabhigijjhanto, anāvilo ca sekkho agedhadosanivāraṇameva karoti, udāhu uttaripi paṭipadaṃ pūretī』』ti pucchitabbattā uttaripi paṭipadaṃ pūretiyevāti dassento 『『yo pana anāvilasaṅkappo』』tiādimāha. Tattha anāvilasaṅkappoti natthi āvilakarā saṅkappā byāpādasaṅkappavihiṃsāsaṅkappā etassāti anāvilasaṅkappo, icchādigedhassa abhāvena anabhigijjhanto vāyamati kusalavāyāmaṃ pavatteti. 『『Kathaṃ vāyamatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so anuppannāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha soti uparibhāvanāmaggabhāvatthāya paṭipajjamāno sekkho. Anuppannānantiādīnaṃ attho sakkā aṭṭhakathāvacaneneva (netti. aṭṭha. 15-16) jānitunti na vibhatto.

16.Yenāti asubhādīnaṃ anussaraṇalakkhaṇena indriyena taṇhāmayitavatthūsu kāmataṇhāya sahajātaṃ vitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ asubhādianussaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ indriyaṃ satindriyaṃ. Yena mahaggatabhāvappattena avikkhepena byāpādavitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ avikkhepasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ samādhindriyaṃ. Yena sammappadhānena vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ sammappadhānasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ. Yena sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātena indriyena uppannuppanne…pe… nādhivāseti, idaṃ sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Imesu catūsu indriyesu saha uppajjamānā yā saddahanā okappanā uppajjati, anāvilabhāvato idaṃ saddahanasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ saddhindriyaṃ. Imāni sekkhassa pañcindriyāni.

Ekasmiṃyeva visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ na pāpuṇeyyuṃ, attano visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pāpuṇituṃ arahanti, 『『katamaṃ indriyaṃ kattha visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pavatta』』nti pucchitabbabhāvato idaṃ indriyaṃ imasmiṃ visaye pavattanti dassento 『『tattha saddhindriyaṃ kattha daṭṭhabba』』ntiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tesu indriyesu catūsu sotāpattiyaṅgesu saddhindriyaṃ jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pavattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ. Kiṃ nu sekkho paññindriyeva appamatto』ti bhagavatā vutto thomito, udāhu sabbehi kusalehi dhammehīti pucchitabbattā sabbehi kusalehi dhammehi pañcindriyapamukhehi vutto thomito hotīti dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ sekho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ pañcindriyānaṃ nibbattidassanena sekho puggalo sabbehi kusalehi dhammehi appamattoti bhagavatā vutto thomito anāvilatāya manasāti yojanā. 『『Sekkhassa anāvilatā kena saddahitabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāha bhagavā manasānāvilo siyā』』ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatā 『『manasānāvilo siyā』』ti vuttattā sekkhassa anāvilatā tumhehi saddahitabbāti.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文: 因為應當問"不貪著、無濁的有學是否僅僅制止貪嗔,或者更進一步圓滿行道",為顯示確實更進一步圓滿行道而說"若無濁思"等。其中無濁思即是沒有能使混濁的思惟、瞋恚思惟、害思惟者為無濁思,因無慾等貪而不貪著,精進發起善精進。因為應當問"如何精進",所以說"他對未生起"等。其中"他"即是爲了上位修道果位而行道的有學。"未生起"等的意義從註釋書的文句即可了知,所以不分析。 16. 以何即是以不凈等憶念為相的根對於愛慾境界中欲愛俱生的尋思加以防護,這個以不凈等憶念為相的根是念根。以何達到廣大性的無散亂防護瞋恚尋思,這個稱為無散亂的根是定根。以何正勤防護害尋思,這個稱為正勤的根是精進根。以何稱為正見的根對已生起...等...不容忍,這個稱為正見的根是慧根。對於這四根同時生起的信解、確信而生起,因為無濁而這個稱為信解的根是信根。這些是有學的五根。 不應在同一境界達到最勝性,應當在自己的境界達到最勝性,因為應當問"何根在何境界達到最勝性",為顯示此根在此境界運作而說"其中信根應見於何處"等。其中"其中"即是在彼等根中,應當見到在四預流支中信根達到最勝性。其餘也應如是結合。因為應當問"有學是否僅以慧根而被世尊稱讚為不放逸,或是以一切善法",為顯示以五根為首的一切善法而被稱讚所以說"如是有學"等。其中以如是顯示五根的生起,有學補特伽羅以一切善法不放逸而被世尊稱讚,以意無濁,如是結合。因為應當說"有學的無濁應以何而信受",所以說"所以世尊說'意應無濁'"。因為世尊說"意應無濁",所以你們應當信受有學的無濁。

1. Sekkhassa matthakappattā paṭipadā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『kathaṃ asekkhassa matthakappattā paṭipadā ñātabbā』』ti vattabbattā asekkhassa matthakappattaṃ paṭipadaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『『kusalo sabbadhammāna』』ntiādimāha. Tattha sabbadhammānanti sabbesu dhammesu matthakappattāya paṭipadāya asekkho kusalo chekataroti bhagavatā vutto thomito anāvilatāya manasāti. Asekkhassa sabbadhammesu yaṃ kosallaṃ dassetukāmo, tassa kosallassa visayabhūte sabbadhamme tāva puggalādhiṭṭhānena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『『loko nāmā』』tiādimāha. Tattha 『『sabbadhammāna』』nti iminā vuttadhammasaṅkhāto loko nāma kilesaloko, bhavaloko, indriyalokoti tividho hotīti yojanā. Tattha parittadhammaṭṭho kilesajananaṭṭhena kileso, kusalādipavattanaṭṭhena loko cāti kilesaloko. Mahaggatadhammaṭṭho bhavanaṭṭhena bhavo, vuttanayena loko cāti bhavaloko. Saddhindriyādidhammaṭṭho ādhipaccaṭṭhayogavasena indriyabhūto hutvā saddhindriyādipattanaṭṭhena loko cāti indriyaloko.

『『Tīsu lokesu katamena katamo samudāgacchatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tatthā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Saddhādiindriyāni ko nibbattetī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so indriyāni nibbattetī』』ti vuttaṃ . Tattha soti yo puggalo kilesalokasaṅkhāte parittadhamme, bhavalokasaṅkhāte mahaggatadhamme ca taṃtaṃsampādanavasena ṭhito, so puggalo saddhindriyādīni indriyāni attasantāne nibbatteti.

『『Indriyesu attasantānesu punappunaṃ nibbattāpanavasena vuḍḍhāpiyamānesu kā paññā bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『indriyesū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha neyyassāti abhiññeyyassa. Pariññāti rūpārūpadhamme salakkhaṇato, paccayato ca pariggahādivasena pavattapaññā. 『『Sā pariññā katividhena upaparikkhitabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『sā duvidhenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sā pariññā dassanapariññāya ca bhāvanāpariññāya ca duvidhena viññūhi upaparikkhitvā gahetabbāti. Dassanapariññāyāti ca dassanamaggapaññājanikāya ñātapariññāyāti attho gahetabbo. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ 『『dassanapariññāti ñātapariññā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 17). Bhāvanāpariññāyāti bhāvanāmaggapaññājanikāya tīraṇapariññāya saddhiṃ pahānapariññāyāti attho.

『『Sā duvidhenā』tiādinā vutto attho atisaṅkhepo na sakkā viññātuṃ, vitthāretvā kathehī』』ti vattabbattā 『『yadā hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yadāti balavavipassanuppajjanakāle. Sekhoti sikkhanasīlatāya kalyāṇaputhujjano ceva sotāpannādiko ca. Ñeyyanti ñātabbaṃ rūpādikaṃ saṅkhāraṃ. Parijānātīti pariggahādiñāṇena pariggahetvā jānāti nibbidāñāṇasahagatena. Tassāti kalyāṇaputhujjanassa ceva sotāpannādikassa ca. Dve dhammāti kalyāṇaputhujjanassa balavavipassanādhammo ceva sotāpannādikassa ca balavavipassanādhammo ca. Yathākkamaṃ dassanakosallaṃ sotāpattimaggañāṇañceva bhāvanākosallaṃ sakadāgāmimaggādikañca santāne pavattāpanavasena gacchanti.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 17. 有學的圓滿行道已被阿阇黎分析，我們也已了知，因為應當說"如何了知無學的圓滿行道"，為分析並顯示無學的圓滿行道而說"善巧一切法"等。其中"一切法"即是在一切法中以圓滿行道無學善巧熟練，被世尊以意無濁而稱讚。欲顯示無學在一切法中的善巧，為首先分析以補特伽羅為所依的那善巧的境界一切法而說"名為世間"等。其中以"一切法"所說的法稱為世間，是煩惱世間、有世間、根世間三種，如是結合。其中以欲界法住立，以生煩惱義為煩惱，以運轉善等義為世間，即是煩惱世間。以色界無色界法住立，以生有義為有，以所說方式為世間，即是有世間。以信根等法住立，依勝解義相應而成為根，以達到信根等義為世間，即是根世間。 因為應當問"在三種世間中以何者生起何者"，所以說"其中"等。因為應當問"誰生起信等根"，所以說"他生起諸根"。其中"他"即是依各別成就而住于稱為煩惱世間的欲界法和稱為有世間的色界無色界法的那個補特伽羅，他在自相續中生起信根等諸根。 因為應當問"在諸根于自相續中再再生起而增長時有何慧"，所以說"于諸根"等。其中"所知"即是應知。遍知即是依自相、因緣等攝取而轉起的慧。因為應當問"彼遍知應以幾種考察"，所以說"彼以二種"等。其中彼遍知應由智者以見遍知和修遍知二種考察而取。見遍知即應取為見道慧所生的知遍知的意思。因此在註釋中說"見遍知即是知遍知"。修遍知即是與修道慧所生的度遍知一起的斷遍知的意思。 因為應當說"以'彼以二種'等所說的義理太簡略不能了知，請詳細解說"，所以說"因為當"等。其中"當"即是強力觀生起時。有學即是因有學習性而為賢善凡夫及預流等。所知即是應知的色等諸行。遍知即是以攝取等智攝取而知，與厭智俱行。他即是賢善凡夫及預流等。二法即是賢善凡夫的強力觀法及預流等的強力觀法。依次序見善巧即是預流道智及修善巧即是一來道等，在相續中令運轉。

『『Pubbe yaṃ ñāṇaṃ 『neyyassa pariññā』ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ñāṇaṃ katividhena veditabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『taṃ ñāṇaṃ pañcavidhena veditabbaṃ…pe... sacchikiriyā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Tāsu vipassanābhedena bhinnāsu pañcasu abhiññādīsu katamā abhiññā, katamā pariññā, katamaṃ pahānaṃ, katamā bhāvanā, katamā sacchikiriyā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti abhiññādīsu. Yaṃ dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇe ñāṇanti rūpadhammānaṃ kakkhaḷādisalakkhaṇe, arūpadhammānaṃ phusanādisalakkhaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattaṃ yaṃ ñāṇaṃ hetuphalajānanahetujānanasaṅkhātā dhammapaṭisambhidā ceva hetuphalajānanasaṅkhātā atthapaṭisambhidā ca bhavati. Ayaṃ salakkhaṇena saddhiṃ hetuphalajānanā paññā abhiññā nāma.

Evanti vuttappakārena. Abhiññāñāṇena abhijānitvā. Yā parijānanātiādīsu 『『idaṃ anavajjaṃ kusalaṃ, idaṃ sāvajjaṃ akusalaṃ, idaṃ akusalavipākajanakaṃ sāvajjaṃ, idaṃ kusalavipākajanakaṃ anavajjaṃ, idaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ kaṇhaṃ, idaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukkaṃ, idaṃ kusalaṃ anavajjādikaṃ sevitabbaṃ, idaṃ akusalaṃ sāvajjādikaṃ na sevitabba』』nti evaṃ aniccādito kalāpasammasanādivasena gahitā sammasitā ime vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā saṅkhatadhammā idaṃ udayabbayañāṇādiphalaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ anukkamena nibbattāpenti. Tannibbattavipassanāya uppajjanato upacāraṃ uppādenti, evaṃ anukkamena gahitānaṃ pavattitānaṃ tesaṃ udayabbayañāṇādīnaṃ ayaṃ saccānubodhapaṭivedho atthoti paricchinditvā yā parijānanā pavattā, sā ayaṃ parijānanā pariññā nāmāti yojetvā, evaṃ vuttappakārāya pariññāpaññāya parijānitvā pahātabbā, bhāvetabbā, sacchikātabbā ca tayo dhammā avasiṭṭhā bhavanti. 『『Ye akusalā, te pahātabbā』』ti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, idaṃ pahānaṃ pahānañāṇaṃ. 『『Ye kusalā, te bhāvetabbā』』ti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, sā bhāvanāpaññā. 『『Yaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, idaṃ sacchikiriya』』nti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, sā sacchikiriyāpaññāti yojetvā aṭṭhakathādhippāyena aviruddho attho gahetabbo.

Abhiññādayo pañcavidhā paññā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『tāhi pariññāhi jānanto puggalo 『ki』nti vuccati thomīyatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『yo eva』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo puggalo evaṃ vuttappakārena jānāti, ayaṃ jānanto puggalo paccayuppannesu dhammesu kusalattā chekattā 『『atthakusalo』』ti vuccati thomīyati, paccayadhammesu kusalattā 『『dhammakusalo』』ti ca catunnaṃ ekattādīnaṃ nayānaṃ yuttatāya kovidattā 『『kalyāṇatākusalo』』ti ca phalasamāpattīsu kovidattā 『『phalatākusalo』』ti ca vaḍḍhīsu kovidattā 『『āyakusalo』』ti ca avaḍḍhīsu kovidattā 『『apāyakusalo』』ti ca accāyike kicce vā bhaye vā uppanne sati tassa kiccassa, bhayassa vā tikicchanasamatthe ṭhānuppattiyakāraṇe kovidattā 『『upāyakusalo』』ti ca mahantesu abhikkamādīsu satisampajaññāya sampannattā 『『mahatā kosallena samannāgato』』ti ca vuccati thomīyati. 『『Tassa asekkhassa atthādīsu kusalabhāvo kathaṃ saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Kusalo sabbadhammāna』』nti vuttattā saddahitabboti adhippāyo.

我來 助您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當問"前面說'所知的遍知'是什麼智,該智應以幾種了知",所以說"該智應以五種了知...等...現證"。因為應當問"在那以觀分別的五種通智等中,什麼是通智,什麼是遍知,什麼是斷,什麼是修,什麼是現證",所以說"其中什麼"等。其中"其中"即是在通智等中。對諸法自相的智即是對色法的堅硬等自相,對無色法的觸等自相,依所緣作用而轉起的智,成為稱爲了知因果及了知因的法無礙解和稱爲了知因果的義無礙解。此與自相俱的因果了知慧稱為通智。 如是即是以所說方式。以通智而通知。對於"什麼是遍知"等中,"此是無過失的善,此是有過失的不善,此是能生不善果報的有過失,此是能生善果報的無過失,此是染污的黑法,此是不染污的白法,此是善的無過失等應當修習,此是不善的有過失等不應修習",如是從無常等以蘊觀察等方式所取所觀察的這些成為觀的所緣有為法,次第生起這個生滅智等果利益。因生起彼所生觀而生起近行,如是次第所取所轉起的那些生滅智等,此諦隨覺通達是義,如是確定而轉起的遍知,此遍知即是遍知,如是結合。如是以所說方式的遍知慧遍知后,應斷、應修、應證的三法成為餘下。"若是不善,應當斷"而轉起的遍知慧,這是斷,即斷智。"若是善,應當修"而轉起的遍知慧,這是修慧。"若是無為,此是現證"而轉起的遍知慧,這是現證慧,如是結合應取與註釋意趣不違背的意義。 通智等五種慧已被阿阇黎分析,我們也已了知,因為應當說"以彼等遍知而了知的人被稱讚說什麼",所以說"若如是"等。其中若人如是以所說方式了知,此了知之人因為善巧通達緣生諸法而被稱讚說"善巧義",因為善巧通達緣諸法而"善巧法",因為通達四種一等理趣的相應而"善巧善",因為通達果等至而"善巧果",因為通達增長而"善巧得",因為通達衰退而"善巧失",因為在緊急事務或怖畏生起時通達能治療彼事務、怖畏的處所生起因緣而"善巧方便",因為在大進退等具足正念正知而"具足大善巧"而被稱讚。因為應當說"彼無學對義等的善巧性應如何信受",所以說"所以"等。因為說"善巧一切法"故應信受,這是意趣。

『『Kusalo sabbadhammāna』』nti padassa attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『sato bhikkhu paribbaje』』ti padassa attho kathaṃ amhehi vitthārato viññāto』』ti vattabbattā 『『sato bhikkhu paribbaje』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『sato bhikkhu paribbaje』』ti bhagavatā vuttaṃ, 『『kattha pavattena satisahitena ñāṇena sampanno sato kimatthaṃ paribbaje』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『imesu pavattena satisahitañāṇena sampanno sato imamatthaṃ paribbaje』』ti niyametvā dassento 『『sato bhikkhu paribbaje』』tiādimāha. Tattha tenāti yo abhikkamādīsu pavattena satisahitañāṇena samannāgato sato asekkhabhikkhu, tena asekkhabhikkhunā pariniṭṭhitasikkhattā aññapayojanābhāvato diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ abhikkante…pe… tuṇhībhāvena satena satisahitena sampajānena ñāṇena vihātabbaṃ catuiriyāpathaparivattanasaṅkhātaṃ viharaṇaṃ pavattetabbaṃ.

『『Yā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā niddiṭṭhā, imā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā saṅkhepato katividhā』』ti pucchitabbattā imā paṭipadāsaṅkhātā cariyā saṅkhepato puggalavasena dveti dassetuṃ 『『imā dve cariyā』』tiādimāha. Tattha yā cariyā bhāvetabbakusalādibhedena vā atthakosallādibhedena vā abhikkamādīsu satisampajaññabhedena vā niddiṭṭhā, imā cariyā dveti bhagavatā anuññātā anujānanavasena desitā, visuddhānaṃ arahantānaṃ ekā cariyā, visujjhantānaṃ sekkhānaṃ ekā cariyāti puggalavasena dveti daṭṭhabbā.

『『Asekkhoyeva kasmā 『sato abhikkamatī』tiādinā vuccati thomīyati, kalyāṇaputhujjanopi 『sato abhikkamatī』tiādinā vuccati thomīyatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『katakiccāni hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Arahato indriyāni katakiccāni, indriyānaṃ katakiccattā yaṃ pucchaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ catubbidhaṃ dukkhassa pariññābhisamayena bojjhitabbaṃ…pe… nirodhassa sacchikiriyābhisamayena bojjhitabbaṃ bhave. Catubbidhaṃ idaṃ bojjhaṃ bojjhitabbaṃ yo asekkho sativepullappattattā evaṃ pariññābhisamayādinā jānāti,ayaṃ asekkho nippariyāyena 『『rāgassa khayāya, dosassa khayāya, mohassa khayāya sato abhikkamati, sato paṭikkamatī』』ti vuccati thomīyati. Sekkhopi yathāvuttaṃ bojjhaṃ bojjhitabbaṃ attano pariññābhisamayādinā jānāti, tasmā 『『sato…pe… mohassā』』ti vuccati thomīyatīti veditabbo. Tena vuttaṃ 『『ke visujjhantā? Sekkhā』』ti.

『『Kasmā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ satisampajaññena abhikkamanādibhāvo, rāgādīnañca khayabhāvo saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā vuttaṃ 『『tenāha bhagavā sato bhikkhu paribbaje』』ti. 『『Bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgama』ntiādinā (netti. 15) manāpikesu kāmesu nābhigijjhanabhāvo, amanāpikesu kāmesu manasā anāvilabhāvo, sabbadhammesu kusalabhāvo, satisampajaññena samannāgatassa paribbajanabhāvo ācariyena niddiṭṭho, so nābhigijjhanabhāvādiko kasmā amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā vuttaṃ 『『tenāha kāmesu…pe… paribbaje』』ti. Imissā gāthāyapi pucchāvissajjanavicayo pubbe ekādhiṭṭhānādidhammādhiṭṭhānādivasena vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： "善巧一切法"一句的意義已被阿阇黎分析，我們也已了知，因為應當說"'念比丘應遍離'一句的意義我們應如何詳細了知"，所以說"念比丘應遍離"等。或者世尊說"念比丘應遍離"，因為應當問"以何處轉起的具念智具足而念為何義應遍離"，為確定並顯示"以這些處轉起的具念智具足而念為此義應遍離"而說"念比丘應遍離"等。其中"以彼"即是以進退等處轉起的具念智具足而唸的無學比丘，彼無學比丘因已圓滿學處而無其他目的，為現法樂住，應以念具念正知之智于進...等...寂默而住，應轉起稱為四威儀轉換的住持。 因為應當問"已說的有學無學行道簡要有幾種"，為顯示這些稱為行道的行為簡要依人而有二種而說"這二種行"等。其中依應修善等差別或依義善巧等差別或依進退等正念正知差別所說的行，這些行為二，被世尊依許可方式而說，應當見到依人而為二：清凈者阿羅漢一種行，正在清凈者有學一種行。 因為應當說"為何僅無學被稱讚說'念而進'等，賢善凡夫也被稱讚說'念而進'等"，所以說"已作諸事"等。阿羅漢諸根已作諸事，因諸根已作諸事，應當問的一切問題，皆應以苦的遍知現觀等而了知...乃至...以滅的現證現觀而了知。此應了知的四種，無學因達到念圓滿性而如是以遍知現觀等而知，此無學依究竟說被稱讚說"為貪盡、為嗔盡、為癡盡而念進、念退"。有學也以自己的遍知現觀等知如所說應了知，所以應知被稱讚說"念...等...為癡"。因此說"誰正在清凈？有學。" 因為應當說"為何應當信受有學無學以正念正知而進等，及貪等的盡"，所以說"所以世尊說'念比丘應遍離'"。以"世尊一切身業以智為先"等，阿阇黎已說明于可意欲不貪著性，于不可意欲意無濁性，於一切法善巧性，具足正念正知而遍離性，為何我們應當信受彼不貪著性等，因為應當如是問，所以說"所以說'于諸欲...等...應遍離'"。此偈的問答分析也應依前述一所依等法所依等方式的道理而了知。

Vicayahāravibhaṅge ajitasuttaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvissajjanavicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo suttantaresu pucchāvissajjanavicayo』』ti pucchitabbattā ajitasutte pucchāvissajjanavicayanayānusārena suttantaresupi pucchāvissajjanāni nīharitvā pucchāvicayavissajjanavicayā yojetabbāti dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, evaṃ vissajjitabba』』nti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

Ettāvatā ca mahāthero vicayahāraṃ vibhajanto ajitasuttavasena pucchāvicayaṃ, vissajjanavicayañca dassetvā idāni suttantaresupi pucchāvissajjanavicayānaṃ nayaṃ dassento evaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, evaṃ vissajjitabba』nti āhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 17) –

Vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti ajitasutte (su. ni. 1038 ādayo; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) vuttapucchāvicayānusārena pucchāvasena pavattasuttaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvicayo vibhajetabbo, evaṃ ajitasutte (su. ni. 1038 ādayo; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57 ādayo, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) vuttavissajjanavicayānusārena suttantaresupi vissajjanavasena pavattasuttaṃ nīharitvā vissajjanavicayo vibhajetabbo.

Pucchāvissajjanavicayā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamo suttaanugītivicayo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『suttassa ca anugītī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha suttassāti nīharitasuttassa. Anugītīti suttantaradesanāsaṅkhātā anugīti. Atthato ca byañjanato ca samānetabbāti tassā anugītiyā atthato, byañjanato ca saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttena samānā sadisī kātabbā, tasmiṃ vā saṃvaṇṇiyamānasutte anugīti suttatthato, byañjanato ca samānetabbā . 『『Atthato asamāne ko nāma doso āpajjeyyā』』ti pucchitabbattā atthāpagataṃ hi byañjanaṃ samphappalāpaṃ bhavatī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Atthato asamāne doso vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, byañjanato asamāne pana ko nāma doso āpajjatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dunnikkhittassa padabyañjanassa atthopi dunnayo bhavatī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā sadosattā anugītiyā vā suttena atthabyañjanūpetaṃ saṅgāyitabbaṃ.

Anugītivicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo suttassa vicayo』』ti pucchitabbattā suttañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha suttañcāti niddhāritasuttañca. 『『Idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nāma bhagavatā vuttaṃ āhaccavacanaṃ kiṃ, udāhu saṅgāyantehi vuttaṃ anusandhivacanaṃ ki』』nti pavicinitabbaṃ, 『『idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nītatthaṃ kiṃ, udāhu neyyatthaṃ ki』』nti pavicinitabbaṃ, 『『idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ kiṃ, udāhu vāsanābhāgiyaṃ ki』』nti pavicinitabbaṃ, 『『idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kiṃ, udāhu asekkhabhāgiyaṃ ki』』nti pavicinitabbaṃ. Evaṃ pavicinitvā yadi āhaccavacanaṃ bhave, evaṃ sati 『『āhaccavacana』』nti niddhāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Yadi asekkhasuttaṃ bhave, evaṃ sati 『『asekkhasutta』』nti niddhāretvā gahetabbaṃ, ñātanti attho.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 在尋求行相分別中，阿阇黎已提出阿逸多經並分析了問答尋求，我們也已了知，因為應當問"在其他經中的問答尋求是什麼"，為顯示應依阿逸多經中問答尋求的方法，在其他經中也提出問答而結合問尋求和答尋求，所以說"應如是問，應如是答"。但在註釋中說： "大長老至此分別尋求行相時，已依阿逸多經顯示問尋求和答尋求，現在為顯示其他經中問答尋求的方法而說'應如是問，應如是答'"。 其中"如是"即是依阿逸多經所說問尋求的隨順，提出以問方式轉起的經而分別問尋求，如是依阿逸多經所說答尋求的隨順，也在其他經中提出以答方式轉起的經而分別答尋求。 阿阇黎已分析問答尋求，我們也已了知，因為應當問"什麼是經隨誦尋求"，所以說"經的隨誦"等。其中"經的"即是所提出經的。隨誦即是稱為其他經教說的隨誦。應從義和文匯合即是應使彼隨誦從義從文與所註釋經相同一致，或者應在彼所註釋經中從經義、從文匯合隨誦。因為應當問"從義不一致有什麼過失"，所以說"離義的文即成為戲論"。因為應當問"從義不一致的過失已說，我們也已知道，但從文不一致有什麼過失"，所以說"錯置的句文其義也難解"。因此由於有過失，應以具足義文而誦隨誦或經。 阿阇黎已分析隨誦尋求，我們也已了知，因為應當問"什麼是經的尋求"，所以說"及經"等。其中"及經"即是已確定的經。"此已確定的經是世尊所說的引證語還是結集者所說的隨順語"應當尋求，"此已確定的經是了義還是未了義"應當尋求，"此已確定的經是染污分還是習氣分"應當尋求，"此已確定的經是通達分還是無學分"應當尋求。如是尋求后若是引證語，如是則應確定把握為"引證語"。若是無學經，如是則應確定把握為"無學經"，這是意思。

『『Suttaṃ pavicinitvā suttassa atthabhūtāni sabbāni saccāni niddhāretvā kattha padese passitabbānī』』ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā imasmiṃ padese passitabbānīti dassetuṃ 『『kuhiṃ imassa suttassa sabbāni…pe… pariyosāne』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha imassa suttassāti yaṃ suttaṃ vicinituṃ niddhāritaṃ, imassa suttassa catusaccavinimuttassa suttatthassa abhāvato sabbāni saccāni tasseva suttassa ādimajjhapariyosāne passitabbānīti attho.

Yathāvuttaṃ suttavicayaṃ nigamento 『『evaṃ suttaṃ pavicetabba』』nti āha. 『『Na yathāvuttapucchādīnaṃ pavicetabbabhāvo amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tenāha…pe… anugītī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tena yathāvuttapucchādīnaṃ vicetabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno 『『yaṃ pucchitañca…pe… anugītī』』tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena vicetabbabhāvo tumhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbovāti vuttaṃ hoti.

『『Yathāvuttappakāro ca vicayo hāro paripuṇṇo kiṃ, udāhu aññopi niddhāretvā yojetabbo atthi ki』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『niyutto vicayo hāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchāvicayavissajjanavicayapubbāparavicayaanugītivicayasuttavicayā sarūpato vibhattā, tehi avaseso assādādivicayopi yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yutto yuñjitabboti adhippāyo.

Iti vicayahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Yuttihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當問"尋求經並確定為經之義的一切諦應在何處觀看",為放置問題而顯示應在此處觀看,所以說"此經的一切...等...終末"。其中"此經的"即是已確定用來尋求的經,因此經離四諦則無經義,所以一切諦應在彼經的初中后觀看,這是意思。 總結如上所說的經尋求而說"應如是尋求經"。因為應當說"我們不應了知信受如上所說問等應尋求性",所以說"所以說...等...隨誦"。其中因如上所說問等應尋求性,具壽大迦旃延說"所問及...等...隨誦"等語,以彼語你們應了知信受應尋求性,如是所說。 因為應當問"如上所說方式的尋求行相是否圓滿,或者還有其他應確定結合的嗎",所以說"已結合尋求行相"。其中問尋求、答尋求、前後尋求、隨誦尋求、經尋求已從自相分別,除彼等之外的味著等尋求也應隨宜確定結合,這是意趣。 如是在尋求行相分別中依能力所作的 解釋已竟。 但諸智者應依註釋復注的隨順而詳細分析甚深義而把握。 3.相應行相分別解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vicayahāravibhaṅgena padapañhādayo vicitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vicayahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo yuttihāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo yuttihāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihāro yuttihāravibhaṅgoti pucchi. 『『Sabbesaṃ hārāna』』ntiādiniddesassa idāni vuccamāno 『『ayaṃ yuttihāro』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ 『『tattha katamo yuttihārotiādi yuttihāravibhaṅgo』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 18). Ayaṃ yuttihāro kiṃ nāma suttatthaṃ yuttāyuttivasena yojayatīti yuñjitabbaṃ suttatthaṃ pucchati. Suttattho pana duvidho atathākārena gayhamāno, tathākārena gayhamāno atthoti. Tattha atathākārena gayhamānova attho yāthāvato yuttiniddhāraṇena yojetabbo, itaro pana bhūtakathanamattena yojetabbo. Yasmā panāyaṃ yuttigavesanā nāma saṃvaṇṇanā mahāpadesehi vinā na sambhavati, tasmā yuttihāraṃ vibhajanto tassa yuttihārassa lakkhaṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ upadisituṃ 『『cattāro mahāpadesā』』tiādimāha. Tattha mahāpadesāti mahante buddhādayo apadisitvā vuttāni kāraṇāni, mahantāni vā dhammassa apadesāni patiṭṭhānāni. Apadisīyateti apadeso, buddho apadeso etassa kāraṇassāti buddhāpadeso. Sesesupi eseva nayo netabbo. 『『Buddhassa sammukhā etaṃ suttaṃ mayā suta』』nti vatvā ābhatassa ganthassa suttavinayehi saṃsandanaṃ dhammo, asaṃsandanaṃ adhammoti vinicchayakāraṇaṃ mahāpadesoti adhippāyo. 『『Buddhassa sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, saṅghassa sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, sambahulattherānaṃ sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, ekattherassa sammukhā mayā ābhata』』nti vatvā ābhatassa ganthassa yāni byañjanapadaatthapadāni santi, tāni padabyañjanāni bhagavatā desite sutte otarayitabbāni anuppavesitāni, vinaye rāgādivinaye sandassayitabbāni saṃsandetabbāni. Dhammatāyaṃ upanikkhipitabbāni pakkhipitabbāni. Yadi suttatthena, vinayatthena, dhammatāya ca aviruddhāni honti, evaṃ sati tava ābhatapadabyañjanāni yuttānīti vinicchayantehi vatvā gahetabbānīti adhippāyo.

Suttavinayadhammatāsu otarayitabbāni sandassayitabbāni upanikkhipitabbānīti ācariyena vuttāni, 『『kattha sutte, kattha vinaye, kattha dhammatāya』』nti vattabbattā 『『katamasmiṃ sutte』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha catūsu ariyasaccesūti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ dassanakesu suttesu. Rāgo vinassati vūpasamati etena asubhādināti rāgavinayaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Asubhādinimittaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti rāgavinayo, ko so? Asubhādinimittadassanako suttantaviseso. Esa nayo dosavinayotiādīsupi. Paṭiccasamuppādo nāma sassatadiṭṭhiucchedadiṭṭhiṃ vivajjetvā ekattanayādīnaṃ dīpanena avijjādisaṅkhārādisabhāvadhammānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvadīpakoti vuttaṃ 『『katamissaṃ dhammatāyaṃ upanikkhipitabbāni? Paṭiccasamuppāde』』ti.

我來 幫您直譯這段巴利文： 18. 以任何作為註釋特質的尋求行相分別而尋求句問等，彼作為註釋特質的尋求行相分別已圓滿，因為應當問"什麼是相應行相分別"，所以說"其中什麼是相應行相"等。其中"其中"即是在彼已說的十六行相中問什麼註釋特質是相應行相、相應行相分別。應知"一切行相"等說明的現在所說"此相應行相"等詳細註釋特質名為相應行相分別。因此說"'其中什麼是相應行相'等是相應行相分別"。此相應行相以何名義依應理不應理方式結合經義，問應當結合的經義。但經義有二種:以非如實方式所取、以如實方式所取的義。其中唯有以非如實方式所取的義應以如實理確定而結合，另一則應以如實說而結合。又因為此尋求道理之稱的註釋離大本依處則不可能，所以分別相應行相時為首先指示彼相應行相的特相而說"四大本依處"等。其中大本依處即是指稱諸大佛等而說的因，或是法的大指稱、住立。所指稱為本依處，佛是此因的本依處為佛本依處。其餘也應以此方式引導。說"此經我從佛面前聽聞"而帶來的文句與經律和合為法，不和合為非法，這是判定因的大本依處，這是意趣。說"我從佛面前帶來，我從僧面前帶來，我從眾多長老面前帶來，我從一長老面前帶來"而帶來的文句有何等文句義句，彼等句文應引入、應匯入世尊所說經中，應顯示、應和合于調伏貪等的律中，應放入、應投入法性中。若與經義、律義、法性不相違，如是則應說你所帶來的句文是合理而應當接受，這是意趣。 阿阇黎已說應引入經律法性、應顯示、應放入，因為應當說"於何經、於何律、於何法性"，所以說"於何經"等。其中"於四聖諦"即是于顯示四聖諦的諸經中。以不凈等貪慾滅盡、止息，故為調伏貪，是什麼？不凈等相，彼有此故為調伏貪，是什麼？顯示不凈等相的特殊經。此方式也適用於調伏嗔等。所謂緣起即是避免常見斷見，以顯示一性方式等而顯示無明等、行等自性諸法的緣及緣生性，所以說"於何法性中應放入？于緣起中"。

『『Suttādīsu avatarante sandissante avilomente kiṃ na janetī』』ti vattabbato 『『catūsū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha 『『buddhādīnaṃ sammukhā mayā ābhata』』nti vatvā ābhatagantho catūsu ariyasaccesu yadi avatarati, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janeti. Rāgādikilesavinaye yadi sandissati, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janeti. Dhammatañca yadi na vilometi, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janetīti attho daṭṭhabbo.

『『Kimatthaṃ yuttihāravibhaṅge cattāro mahāpadesā ābhatā』』ti vattabbattā 『『catūhi mahāpadesehī』』tiādimāha. Tattha ābhataganthe yaṃ yaṃ atthajātaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ dhammajātaṃ vā catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, taṃ taṃ atthajātaṃ vā taṃ taṃ dhammajātaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbaṃ. Yena yena kāraṇena ca catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāvasena saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbaṃ. Yathā yathā pakārena catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, so so pakāro saṃvaṇṇanāvasena saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbo. Evaṃ gāhaṇatthaṃ cattāro mahāpadesā ābhatāti attho.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當說"不入于經等、不顯示、不違背時不生什麼"，所以說"於四"等。其中說"我從佛等面前帶來"而帶來的文句若入於四聖諦，如是則帶來的文句不生漏。若顯示于調伏貪等煩惱的律中，如是則帶來的文句不生漏。若不違背法性，如是則帶來的文句不生漏，應如是見其義。 因為應當說"為何目的在相應行相分別中帶來四大本依處"，所以說"以四大本依處"等。其中在帶來的文句中任何義類、任何法類以四大本依處相應，則應在應註釋的經中取彼彼義類或彼彼法類。以任何因由與四大本依處相應，則應在應註釋的經中以註釋方式取彼彼因由。以任何方式與四大本依處相應，則應在應註釋的經中以註釋方式取彼彼方式。為如是取義而帶來四大本依處，這是意思。

1. Catūhi mahāpadesehi yuttaṃ aviruddhaṃ taṃ taṃ atthajātaṃ gahetabbanti ācariyena vuttaṃ, 『『kattha kena yuttiniddhāraṇaṃ kātabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『pañhaṃ pucchitenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañhe pañhaṃ pucchitena puggalena yuttiniddhāraṇaṃ kātabbanti. Tattha pañhanti pañhitabbaṃ sabhāvadhammaṃ. Pucchitenāti vissajjetuṃ samatthena paṇḍitapuggalena. Pañheti pucchāvasena pavattapāṭhe. Padāni kati kittakāni hontīti padaso paṭhamaṃ pariyogāhitabbaṃ yuttihārena vicetabbaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. 『『Kathaṃ vicetabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『yadi sabbānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbāni padānīti pucchitapāṭhe niravasesāni padāni ekaṃ samānaṃ atthaṃ yadi abhivadanti, evaṃ sati atthavasena eko pañho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tena vuttaṃ 『『tadatthassekassa ñātuṃ icchitattā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 19).

Ekanti atthavasena ekavidhaṃ pañhaṃ. Upaparikkhamānena puggalena aññātabbaṃ daḷhaṃ jānitabbaṃ. 『『Ko ājānanākāro』』ti pucchitabbattā ājānanākāraṃ dassento 『『kiṃ ime dhammā』』tiādimāha. Tattha 『『ye hi pariyattidhammā saṃvaṇṇetabbā, ime pariyattidhammā nānatthā honti kiṃ, nānābyañjanā honti kiṃ, udāhu imesaṃ pariyattidhammānaṃ eko attho hoti, byañjanameva nānaṃ hoti ki』』nti yuttito vicetvā aññātabbanti yojanā. 『『Yathāvutto pañho kiṃ bhave』』ti pucchitabbattā yathāvuttaṃ pañhaṃ ekadesaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yathā kiṃ bhave』』ti pucchitvā 『『yathā sā』』tiādimāha.

Tassaṃ pucchāgāthāyaṃ – coraghātakena manussena coro abbhāhato viya kena dhammena sattaloko sadā abbhāhato, māluvalatāya attano nissitarukkho parivārito ajjhotthaṭo viya kena dhammena sattaloko sadā parivārito ajjhotthaṭo, visappītakhurappena sallena otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho viya kena sallena sattaloko sadā otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho, kissa kena kāraṇena sattaloko sadā dhūpāyito santāpitoti yojanā.

『『Imāya pucchāgāthāya kittakāni padānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『imānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchitānīti pucchitatthāni padāni cattāri honti. 『『Kittakā pañhā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『te tayo pañhā』』ti vuttaṃ.

Bhagavā devatāya hi yasmā vissajjeti, iti tasmā vissajjanato 『『tayopañhā』』ti viññāyati. 『『Katamā vissajjanagāthā』』ti pucchitabbattā –

『『Maccunābbhāhato loko, jarāya parivārito;

Taṇhāsallena otiṇṇo, icchādhūpāyito sadā』』ti. –

Vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ – coraghātakena manussena coro abbhāhato viya maccunā sattaloko sadā abbhāhato, māluvalatāya attano nissitarukkho parivārito ajjhotthaṭo viya jarāya sattaloko sadā parivārito ajjhotthaṭo, visappītakhurappena sallena otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho viya taṇhāsallena sattaloko sadā otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho, icchāya sattaloko sadā dhūpāyito santāpitoti yojanā.

我來 助您直譯這段巴利文： 19. 阿阇黎已說應取與四大本依處相應不相違的彼彼義類，因為應當說"在何處以何作理證確定"，所以說"問者"等。在問題中應由問者作理證確定。其中"問題"即是應當問的自性法。"問者"即是能夠解答的智者。"在問題"即是以問方式轉起的文。"句有幾個有多少"應首先以句逐一深入以相應行相尋求觀察。因為應當問"如何尋求"，所以說"若一切"等。其中"一切句"即在所問文中無餘的句若表達一個相同的義，如是則依義為一個問題。其餘也是此方式。因此說"因為欲知彼一義故"。 "一"即依義為一種的問題。觀察的人應當了知應當堅固知道。因為應當問"什麼是了知方式"，為顯示了知方式而說"此等法"等。其中應結合"應註釋的諸教法，此等教法是異義嗎，是異文嗎，還是此等教法是一義而只是文異嗎"，應以理而尋求了知。因為應當問"如上所說問題是什麼"，為顯示如上所說問題的一部分而問"如何是"而說"如何彼"等。 在彼問偈中 - 如被殺賊者打殺賊一樣，以何法眾生世間常被打殺，如被蔓藤纏繞遮蔽所依樹一樣，以何法眾生世間常被纏繞遮蔽，如被涂毒利箭射入貫穿一樣，以何箭眾生世間常被射入貫穿，以何因由眾生世間常被熏燒熱惱，如是結合。 因為應當問"此問偈有幾句"，所以說"此等"等。其中"所問"即是所問義的句有四個。因為應當問"有幾個問題"，所以說"彼三個問題"。 因為世尊實為天神解答，因此從解答了知"三個問題"。因為應當問"什麼是答偈"，所以說： "世間為死所打殺，為老所纏繞； 為愛箭所射入，常為欲所熏燒。" 在彼答偈中 - 如被殺賊者打殺賊一樣，眾生世間常被死所打殺，如被蔓藤纏繞遮蔽所依樹一樣，眾生世間常被老所纏繞遮蔽，如被涂毒利箭射入貫穿一樣，眾生世間常被愛箭所射入貫穿，眾生世間常為欲所熏燒熱惱，如是結合。

1. 『『Katamaṃ maccu, katamā jarā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha jarā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ. Dutiyapade vuttā jarā ca paṭhamapade vuttaṃ maraṇañca imāni dve saṅkhatassa khandhapañcakassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni honti, saṅkhataṃ khandhapañcakaṃ muñcitvā visuṃ na upalabbhatīti attho. 『『Saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ jarāmaraṇānaṃ kathaṃ bhedo jānitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『jarāyaṃ ṭhitassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jarāyaṃ ṭhitassa aññathattanti ṭhitassa khandhappabandhassa yaṃ aññathattaṃ, ayaṃ pākaṭajarā nāma, na khaṇaṭṭhitijarā. Maraṇaṃ vayoti sammutimaraṇaṃ cutiyeva hoti, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ, na samucchedamaraṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ 『『uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī』』ti (saṃ. ni. 3.38; a. ni.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 20. 因為應當問"什麼是死，什麼是老"，所以說"其中老"等。其中"其中"即是在彼答偈中。第二句所說的老和第一句所說的死，這兩者是有為的五蘊的有為相，離開有為的五蘊則不能單獨獲得，這是意思。因為應當說"如何了知有為相的老死的差別"，所以說"住于老"等。其中"住于老的變異"即是住立的蘊相續的變異，這稱為明顯的老，不是剎那住立的老。死即滅即是世俗死只是死亡，不是剎那死，不是斷滅死。因此說"生顯現，滅顯現，住立者的變異顯現"。;

3.47; kathā. 214).

Yadi ṭhitasseva maraṇaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānattaṃ yuttaṃ na siyā, ayutte sati 『『te tayo pañhā』』ti vacanampi ayuttamevāti vattabbato 『『tattha jarāya cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ vuttāya jarāya ca vuttassa maraṇassa ca atthato nānattaṃ yuttaṃ.

『『Kena kāraṇena yuttaṃ, kathaṃ kāraṇena nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『gabbhagatāpi hi mīyantī』』ti vuttaṃ. Jaraṃ appattā gabbhagatāpi sattā hi yasmā mīyanti, tasmā nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. 『『Gabbhagatāpi jarappattā bhaveyyu』』nti vattabbattā 『『na ca te jiṇṇā bhavantī』』ti vuttaṃ. Jarappattāpi ajiṇṇattā jiṇṇajaraṃ appattāva mīyanti, evaṃ idhādhippetassa jiṇṇajarāvirahitassa maraṇassa sambhavato aññā jarā, aññaṃ maraṇanti ñātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. 『『Na gabbhagatānaṃyeva jiṇṇajaraṃ appattaṃ maraṇaṃ atthi, aññesampi atthī』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『atthi ca devānaṃ maraṇa』』nti vuttaṃ. 『『Devāpi cirakālasambhavato jaraṃ pattā bhaveyyu』』nti vattabbattā 『『na ca tesaṃ sarīrāni jīrantī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānatte kāraṇaṃ ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā aññampi atthīti dassetuṃ 『『sakkate vā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jiṇṇajarāya paṭikammaṃ kātuṃ sakkateva, maraṇassa pana paṭikammassa kātuṃ na sakkateva, imināpi kāraṇena jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabbamevāti attho. 『『Na sakkate maraṇassa paṭikammaṃ kātu』』nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu iddhipādabhāvanāya vasībhāve sati sakkā maraṇassāpi paṭikammaṃ kātunti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『aññatreva iddhimantānaṃ iddhivisayā』』ti vuttaṃ.

Jarāmaraṇānaṃ aññamaññaṃ nānābhāvo ācariyena dassito, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ pana taṇhāya jarāmaraṇehi nānābhāvo』』ti vattabbato tehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yaṃ panāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhāya avijjamānāyapi jīrantāpi mīyantāpi vītarāgā yasmā dissanti, tasmā taṇhāya jarāmaraṇehi nānābhāvo sampaṭicchitabbo.

『『Taṇhāya jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇaṃ atthīti tehi taṇhāya anaññatte ko nāma doso siyā』』ti vattabbato dosaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yadi cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ yathā yena jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇena pākaṭaṃ, evaṃ jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇena taṇhāpi pākaṭā. Yadi ca siyā; evaṃ sante yobbanaṭṭhāpi sabbe māṇavā vigatataṇhā siyuṃ, na ca vigatataṇhā, tasmā nānābhāvo sampaṭicchitabbo. Tato aññopi doso āpajjeyyāti dassetuṃ 『『yathā ca taṇhā dukkhassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jarāmaraṇānaṃ taṇhāya anaññatte sati taṇhāya bhavataṇhāya dukkhasamudayo hoti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇampi dukkhasamudayo siyā. Yasmā na jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasamudayo, tasmā jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Tehi tāya anaññatte sati evampi doso āpajjeyyāti dassetuṃ 『『yathā ca taṇhā maggavajjhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tehi tāya anaññatte sati yathā taṇhā maggavajjhā hoti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇampi maggavajjhaṃ siyā. Yathā jarāmaraṇaṃ maggavajjhaṃ na hoti, evaṃ taṇhāpi maggavajjhā na siyā, tathā ca na hoti pahātabbāpahātabbabhāvato, tasmāpi jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 3.47. 若只有住立者有死，如是則老死的差別不應合理，若不合理則說"彼三個問題"的語也不合理，因為應當說這點，所以說"其中老和"等。其中"其中"即是在彼答偈中所說的老和所說的死從義有差別是合理的。 因為應當說"以何因由合理，以何因由應接受差別"，所以說"胎中者也死"。因為未到老的胎中眾生也死，所以應接受差別。因為應當說"胎中者也應到老"，所以說"而彼等不成老"。雖到老而不老故未到衰老就死，如是此所意趣的無衰老而有死的可能故，應知老異死異。因為應當說"不只是胎中者有未到衰老的死，其他也有"，所以說"諸天也有死"。因為應當說"諸天因長時存在也應到老"，所以說"而彼等身體不老"。因為應當說"老死差別的因由只是這些嗎"，為顯示還有其他所以說"或能"等。其中能對衰老作對治，但對死則不能作對治，以此因由也應接受老死的差別，這是意思。"不能對死作對治"為何如是說，難道獲得神通修習的自在時不能對死作對治嗎？考慮此責難而說"除了具神通者的神通境界"。 阿阇黎已顯示老死互相的差別性，我們也已知道，因為應當說"但如何是貪愛與老死的差別性"，為顯示貪愛與彼等的差別所以說"又說"等。因為即使無貪愛，也見到離貪者衰老死亡，所以應接受貪愛與老死的差別性。 因為應當說"貪愛有衰壞破滅相，若與彼等非異有什麼過失"，為顯示過失所以說"若且"等。老死如何以衰壞破滅相明顯，貪愛也如是以衰壞破滅相明顯。若如是，如是一切處於青春的年輕人應離貪愛，但非離貪愛，所以應接受差別性。為顯示由此還有其他過失而說"如貪愛是苦的"等。其中若老死與貪愛無差別，則如貪愛、有愛是苦集，如是老死也應是苦集。因為老死非苦集，所以應知老死與貪愛的差別。 為顯示若與彼無差別則如是也有過失而說"如貪愛為道所斷"等。其中若與彼無差別，則如貪愛為道所斷，如是老死也應為道所斷。如老死非為道所斷，如是貪愛也應非為道所斷，但不如是因為有應斷與不應斷性，所以也應知老死與貪愛的差別。

『『Yadi cātiādinā vuttāya yuttiyā upapattiyā eva jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya aññattaṃ gavesitabba』』nti vattabbattā aññehipi kāraṇehi gavesitabbanti dassetuṃ 『『imāya yuttiyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāya yuttiyāti yā yutti 『『yadi cā』』tiādinā vuttāya imāya yuttiyā upapattiyā. Aññamaññehi kāraṇehi aññehi aññehi kāraṇabhūtehi upapattīhi jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya aññattaṃ gavesitabbanti attho. 『『Aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba』』nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu yuttiyā, atthato ca aññattaṃ sandissatīti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『yadi ca sandissatī』』tiādimāha. Tattha yuttisamāruḷhaṃ atthato ca maraṇehi taṇhāya ca aññattaṃ yadi ca sandissati, byañjanatopi aññattaṃ gavesitabbamevāti attho.

『『Kathaṃ byañjanato aññattaṃ gavesitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『salloti vā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha 『『sallo』』ti vā 『『dhūpāyana』』nti vā dvīhi byañjanehi vuccamānānaṃ imesaṃ icchātaṇhāsaṅkhātānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthato ekattaṃ samānattaṃ yujjati, na aññattaṃ. 『『Sallo』』ti vā 『『dhūpāyana』』nti vā dvīhi byañjanehi avuccamānānaṃ jarāmaraṇānaṃ taṇhāya ekattaṃ na yujjati. Tamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ 『『na hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha icchāya ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattaṃ na yujjati, ekattameva yujjatīti yojanā. Icchāya ca taṇhāya ca jīraṇabhijjanasambhavato jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya ekattaṃ siyā, 『『kasmā aññattaṃ yutta』』nti vattabbato 『『taṇhāya adhippāye』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhāya adhippāye aparipūramāne navasu āghātavatthūsu kodho ca uppajjati, upanāho ca uppajjati. Jarāmaraṇesu aparipūramānesu navasu āghātavatthūsu kodho ca na uppajjati, upanāho ca na uppajjati. Iti imāya yuttiyā jarāya ca maraṇassa ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattaṃ yujjatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Yadi icchā taṇhāya atthato ekattaṃ yuttaṃ, evaṃ sati kasmā bhagavatā 『『maccunābbhāhato loko』』tiādigāthāyaṃ 『『taṇhāsallena otiṇṇo, icchādhūpāyito sadā』』ti dvidhā vuttāti codanaṃ pariharanto 『『yaṃ panidaṃ bhagavatā』』tiādimāha. Tattha 『『icchā』』tipi 『『taṇhā』』tipi dvīhi nāmehi yaṃ panidaṃ abhilapitaṃ yaṃ panidaṃ abhilapanaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ abhilapanaṃ bhagavatā bāhirānaṃ icchitabbatasitabbānaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādiārammaṇānaṃ bhedānaṃ vasena 『『icchā』』tipi 『『taṇhā』』tipi dvīhi nāmehi abhilapitaṃ abhilapanavasena katanti ekattaṃ yuttameva, na nānattanti attho daṭṭhabbo.

『『Nāmavasena dvidhā vuttānaṃ icchātaṇhādīnaṃ kena ekattaṃ yuttanti saddahitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『sabbāhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nānānāmavasena pabhedā sabbā icchādikā taṇhā ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇā hi yasmā yuttā, tasmā nāmavasena bhinnānampi ekalakkhaṇena ekattaṃ yuttanti saddahitabbanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. 『『Kimiva yutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『yathā sabbo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kaṭṭhaggiādivasena aneko sabboaggi uṇhattalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇo yathā, evaṃ ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇāti yojanā. Sabbassa aggino upādānavasena anekāni nāmāni sarūpato dassetuṃ 『『apicā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho pākaṭo. Ārammaṇavasena taṇhā aññehi aññehi nāmehi bhagavatā abhilapitā, upādānavasena aggi aññehi aññehi nāmehi abhilapitoti yojanā kātabbā.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當說"依'若且'等所說的道理推理，只應尋求老死與貪愛的差別性"，為顯示也應以其他因由尋求而說"以此道理"等。其中"以此道理"即是以"若且"等所說的此道理推理。應以互相因由即以其他其他作為因由的推理尋求老死與貪愛的差別性，這是意思。"應以互相因由尋求"為何如是說，難道不是以道理和義顯示差別性嗎？考慮此責難而說"若且顯示"等。其中若顯示道理所含和義的死與貪愛的差別性，則也應從文尋求差別性，這是意思。 因為應當說"如何從文尋求差別性"，所以說"或說箭"等。其中以"箭"或"熏"二文所說的此等稱為欲貪的諸法，義的一性、同性是合理的，非差別性。不以"箭"或"熏"二文所說的老死與貪愛的一性不合理。為開顯彼義而說"實非"等。其中欲與貪義的差別性不合理，一性才合理，如是結合。因欲與貪有衰壞破滅的可能，則應與老死為一性，因為應當說"為何差別性合理"，所以說"貪愛的意向"等。其中貪愛的意向未滿足時在九嗔恨事中生嗔和怨，在老死未滿足時在九嗔恨事中不生嗔和怨。如是以此道理應見老和死與貪愛義的差別性確實合理。 若欲與貪義的一性合理，如是則為何世尊在"世間為死所打殺"等偈中說"為愛箭所射入，常為欲所熏燒"而分為二？排除此責難而說"又此為世尊"等。其中以"欲"和"貪"二名此所說此說法，此說法為世尊依外在可欲可渴求的事物即色等所緣的差別以"欲"和"貪"二名所說依說法方式所作，一性確實合理，非差異，應如是見其義。 因為應當說"以名分說為二的欲貪等以何合理一性而應信受"，所以說"一切"等。其中以種種名方式差別的一切欲等貪以耽著相為一相確實合理，所以雖以名分別也以一相一性合理而應信受，應如是見。因為應當問"如何合理"，所以說"如一切"等。其中如以木火等方式種種的一切火以熱相為一相，如是以耽著相為一相，如是結合。為從自相顯示一切火依所依有種種名而說"又"等。彼義明顯。應作結合：依所緣貪為世尊以種種名所說，依所依火以種種名所說。

『『Vissajjanagāthāyaṃ āgatanāmehi eva taṇhā abhilapitā』』ti pucchitabbattā anekehi nāmehi abhilapitāti dassetuṃ 『『icchāitipī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha icchitabbāni atthāni rūpādīni ārammaṇāni sattā icchanti etāyāti icchā. Tasanti etāyāti taṇhā. Sallati pavisati visappītaṃ sallaṃ viyāti sallā, santāpaṃ lāti ādadātīti vā sallā, santāpaṃ lāti pavattetīti vā sallā. Dhūpāyati santāpeti paridahatīti dhūpāyanā. Sarati ākaḍḍhati avaharati sīghasotā saritā viyāti saritā, sarati sallatīti vā saritā. Visaratīti visattikā. Pītivasena sinehatīti sineho. Tāsu tāsu gatīsu kilamathaṃ uppādetīti kilamatho. Sattā rūpādiārammaṇāni maññanti etāyāti maññanā. Bhavaṃ bandhatīti bandho. Āsīyate patthīyateti āsā. Āsiyati patthetīti vā āsā. Pipāsīyateti pipāsā, ārammaṇarasaṃ pipāsatīti vā pipāsā. Abhinandīyateti abhinandanā, abhinandatīti vā abhinandanā. Vitthārato aṭṭhakathāvasena (netti. aṭṭha. 20) veditabbo.

『『Taṇhāya icchādippakāravasena ālapitabhāvo kena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『yathā ca vevacane』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Vevacanahāravibhaṅge 『『āsā ca pīhā…pe… vevacana』』nti (netti. 37) yā taṇhā yathā yena pakārena vuttā, tathā tena pakārena vuttāya taṇhāya icchādippakāravasena ālapitabhāvo saddahitabbo. 『『Vevacanavibhaṅge ācariyena vuttopi bhagavatā avutte kena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『yathāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena bhagavā 『『rūpe tissā』』tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanamāha, tathā tena pakārena vuttena tena vacanena saddahitabbo vāti. Evaṃ yujjatīti evaṃ vuttanayena icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato ekattā , jarāya ca maraṇassa ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattā ca 『『tayo pañhā』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vacanaṃ yujjatīti attho gahetabbo.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當問"貪愛只以答偈中出現的名稱說出嗎"，為顯示以種種名說出而說"或說欲"等。其中眾生以此欲求色等所緣的諸義，故為欲。以此渴求，故為貪。如涂毒箭刺入，故為箭，或取熱惱，故為箭，或轉起熱惱，故為箭。熏燒熱惱燃燒，故為熏。如急流河流拉拽帶走，故為流，或流動刺入，故為流。遍流，故為纏著。以喜方式潤澤，故為愛。在種種趣中生疲勞，故為疲勞。眾生以此思量色等所緣，故為思量。繫縛有，故為縛。被希求被欲求，故為希求。或希求欲求，故為希求。被渴望，故為渴望，或渴望所緣味，故為渴望。被歡喜，故為歡喜，或歡喜，故為歡喜。應依註釋詳細了知。 因為應當說"貪愛以欲等方式被說的狀態以何而應信受"，所以說"如在同義"等。在同義行相分別中說"希求和羨慕⋯⋯同義"，貪愛如何以何方式所說，如是以彼方式所說貪愛以欲等方式被說的狀態應信受。因為應當說"雖為阿阇黎在同義分別中所說，在世尊未說時以何而應信受"，所以說"如世尊說"等。如以何方式世尊說"於色彼"等言語，如是以彼方式所說彼言語應信受。如是合理即如是以所說方式欲貪義一性，老和死與貪愛義差別性，所說"三問題"之語合理，應如是取其義。

1. 『『Kenassubbhāhato lokotiādigāthāya tayo pañhā vuttā』』ti pañhattayabhāve yutti ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā. 『『Tato aññehi pakārehi yutti kathaṃ ñātabbā』』ti vattabbabhāvato aññehi pakārehipi yuttigavesanaṃ dassento 『『sabbo dukkhūpacāro』』tiādimāha. Tattha sabbo dukkhūpacāro kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlakoti yujjati, sabbo nibbidūpacāro kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti na yujjati. Vacanatthato pana dukkhassa upacāro pavattīti dukkhūpacāro. Kāmataṇhāpaccayā pavatto saṅkhāro mūlaṃ etassāti kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlako. Nibbidāya upacāro pavattīti nibbidūpacāro. Kāmataṇhāya parikkhārabhūto vatthukāmo mūlaṃ etassāti kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti. Tattha anabhiratisaṅkhātā ukkaṇṭhā nibbidā kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlikā yujjati, ñāṇanibbidā kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlikā na yujjati, tasmā sabbo nibbidūpacāro kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti na pana yujjatīti vuttaṃ.

『『Pañhattayabhāve ceva dukkhūpacāranibbidūpacāre ca yā yutti ācariyena vibhattā, sāva yutti sallakkhetabbā kiṃ, udāhu imāya yuttiyā aññāpi yutti gavesitabbā ki』』nti vattabbato nayaṃ dassetuṃ 『『imāyā』』tiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pañhattayabhāve ceva dukkhūpacāranibbidūpacāre ca yā yutti mayā vibhattā, imāya yuttiyā anusārena aññamaññehi kāraṇehi tesu tesu pāḷippadesesu yuttipi gavesitabbāti.

『『Idaṃ nayadassanaṃ saṃkhittaṃ, na sakkā vitthārato gavesitu』』nti vattabbato taṃ nayadassanaṃ vitthārato vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『『yathā hi bhagavā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Asubhassa jigucchanīyabhāvato rāguppādo na yutto, tasmā rāgacaritassa puggalassa asubhadesanā rāgavinayāya yuttā. Mettāya dosapaṭipakkhattā dosacaritassa puggalassa mettādesanā dosavinayāya yuttā. Paṭiccasamuppādassa paññāvisayattā mohacaritassa puggalassa paṭiccasamuppādadesanā mohavinayāya yuttā. 『『Rāgacaritassāpi mettādidesanā yujjeyya sabbasattasādhāraṇattā』』ti vattabbattā 『『yadihi bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tibbakilesassa rāgacaritassa adhippetattā tādisassa puggalassa mettaṃ cetovimuttiṃ yadi deseyya, evaṃ sati mettāvasenapi rāguppajjanato desanā na yujjati. Sukhaṃ paṭipadaṃ vā yadi deseyya, evaṃ sati rāgacaritassa dukkhāpaṭipadāyujjanato desanā na yujjati. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ pahānaṃ vā yadipi deseyya, evaṃ sati rāgacaritassa asubhānupassanaṃ vajjetvā vipassanāpubbaṅgamassa pahānassa dukkarato desanā na yujjatīti yojanā.

『『Bhagavā rāgacaritassā』』tiādinā niravasesavasena yutti na vibhattā, nayadassanamevāti yo nayo dassito, tena nayena aññāpi gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ yaṃ kiñcī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Rāgassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ, dosassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ, mohassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ anulomappahānaṃ yattakā pāḷippadesā ñāṇassa bhūmi, tattakesu vicayena hārena vicinitvā yuttihārena yojetabbanti yojanā.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 21. "以何打殺世間"等偈中說三個問題，阿阇黎已分別三問題性的道理，我們也已知道。因為應當說"如何知道以其他方式的道理"，為顯示也以其他方式尋求道理而說"一切苦轉起"等。其中一切苦轉起以欲貪行為根源是合理的，一切厭離轉起以欲貪資具為根源不合理。從語義則苦的轉起即行起為苦轉起。以欲貪緣生的行為根源為以欲貪行為根源。厭離的轉起即行起為厭離轉起。以欲貪的資具即事欲為根源為以欲貪資具為根源。其中稱為不樂的憂慮厭離以欲貪資具為根源合理，智慧厭離以欲貪資具為根源不合理，所以說一切厭離轉起以欲貪資具為根源不合理。 因為應當說"阿阇黎所分別的三問題性和苦轉起厭離轉起的道理，是否只應觀察彼道理，還是應以此道理尋求其他道理"，為顯示理趣而說"以此"等。這是所說 - 我所分別的三問題性和苦轉起厭離轉起的道理，應隨順此道理以互相因由在彼彼經文處尋求道理。 因為應當說"此理趣顯示簡略，不能詳細尋求"，為詳細分別顯示彼理趣而開始說"如世尊"等。因不凈的可厭性故生貪不合理，所以對貪行者說不凈教導以調伏貪是合理的。因慈為嗔的對治故，對嗔行者說慈教導以調伏嗔是合理的。因緣起為慧境界故，對癡行者說緣起教導以調伏癡是合理的。因為應當說"對貪行者也應合理說慈等教導因為是一切眾生共同"，所以說"若世尊"等。因所意為強烈煩惱的貪行者，若對如是人說慈心解脫，如是則因以慈方式也生貪故教導不合理。或若說樂行道，如是則因貪行者合於苦行道故教導不合理。或若說以觀為先的斷，如是則因除不凈觀外貪行者難作以觀為先的斷故教導不合理，如是結合。 因為"世尊對貪行者"等不是無餘地分別道理，只是顯示理趣，應以彼所顯示的理趣尋求其他，為顯示此而說"如是任何"等。已說貪的任何順適斷，嗔的任何順適斷，癡的任何順適斷，應在一切是智慧地的經文處以探究行相探究后以理趣行相結合，如是結合。

『『Rāgādippahānavasena yutti gavesitabbā』』ti vattabbabhāvato aññehipi mettādibrahmavihāraphalasamāpattinavānupubbasamāpattivasībhāvehi vibhajitvā yuttigavesanaṃ dassetuṃ 『『mettāvihārissā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha mettāvihārissa mettāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa mettāya byāpādapaṭipakkhattā byāpādo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjatīti ca, mettāvihārissa sato byāpādo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Karuṇāvihārissa karuṇāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa karuṇāya vihesāya paṭipakkhattā vihesā cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, karuṇāvihārissa sato vihesā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Muditāvihārissa muditāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa muditāya aratiyā paṭipakkhattā arati cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, muditāvihārissa sato arati pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Upekkhāvihārissa upekkhāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa upekkhāya rāgassa paṭipakkhattā rāgo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, upekkhāvihārissa sato rāgo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati.

Animittavihārissa aniccānupassanāmukhena paṭiladdhaphalasamāpattivihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa nimittānusāri tena teneva saṅkhāranimittānusāreneva niccādīsu pahīnena nimittena viññāṇaṃ pavattatīti desanā na yujjati, animittānupassanāya niccādivipallāsapaṭipakkhattā animittavihārissa sato nimittaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. 『『Asmī』』ti maññitaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ attavigataṃ 『『ayaṃ khandhapañcako ahaṃ asmī』』ti na samanupassāmi, atha ca pana asamanupassane satipi 『『me kiṃ asmī』』ti 『『kathaṃ asmī』』ti vicikicchā kathaṃkathāsallaṃ cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, vicikicchāya pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato 『『ayaṃ khandhapañcako ahaṃ asmī』』ti asamanupassantassa vicikicchā kathaṃkathāsallaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati.

『『Phalasamāpattivaseneva yutti gavesitabbā ki』』nti vattabbattā jhānasamāpattivasenapi yutti gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ 『『yathā vā pana paṭhamaṃ jhāna』』ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā 『『phalasamāpattivihārisseva yutti gavesitabbā ki』』nti vattabbattā jhānasamāpattivasenapi yutti gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ 『『yathā vā pana paṭhamaṃ jhāna』』ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yathā paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa phalasamāpattivihārissa yutti gavesitabbā, evaṃ jhānasamāpattivihārissapi yutti gavesitabbā. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa paṭhamajjhānasamaṅgino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa nīvaraṇavikkhambhanato kāmarāgabyāpādā visesāya dutiyajjhānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, kāmarāgabyāpādā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Vitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha dutiyajjhānadhammā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, vitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 因為應當說"應依貪等斷方式尋求道理"，為顯示也以慈等梵住、果定、九次第定自在分別尋求道理而開始說"住慈者"等。其中對住慈者即得住慈的現有補特伽羅，因慈為嗔恚對治故"嗔恚將佔據心而住"的教導不合理，而"住慈者的嗔恚去向斷"的教導合理。對住悲者即得住悲的現有補特伽羅，因悲為害對治故"害將佔據心而住"的教導不合理，而"住悲者的害去向斷"的教導合理。對住喜者即得住喜的現有補特伽羅，因喜為不樂對治故"不樂將佔據心而住"的教導不合理，而"住喜者的不樂去向斷"的教導合理。對住舍者即得住舍的現有補特伽羅，因舍為貪對治故"貪將佔據心而住"的教導不合理，而"住舍者的貪去向斷"的教導合理。 對住無相者即通過無常隨觀門獲得果定住的現有補特伽羅，"隨相隨行以彼彼行相隨行以已斷常等相識轉起"的教導不合理，因無相隨觀為常等顛倒對治故"住無相者的相去向斷"的教導合理。"我是"所思惟的五蘊離我，"此五蘊是我"我不見，然而雖不見但"我是什麼""如何是我"的疑惑疑箭"將佔據心而住"的教導不合理，因疑與斷同一處故對"此五蘊是我"不見者"疑惑疑箭去向斷"的教導合理。 因為應當說"是否只應依果定方式尋求道理"，為顯示也應依禪定方式尋求道理而開始說"又如初禪"等。或者因為應當說"是否只應對住果定者尋求道理"，為顯示也應依禪定方式尋求道理而開始說"又如初禪"等。其中如應對入初禪住果定者尋求道理，如是也應對住禪定者尋求道理。如何？對入初禪具初禪的現有補特伽羅，因鎮伏蓋故"欲貪嗔恚轉向特勝第二禪"的教導不合理，而"欲貪嗔恚轉向退失禪"的教導合理。"與尋俱行的想作意與近分法俱轉向退失禪"的教導不合理，而"與尋俱行的想作意轉向特勝上禪"的教導合理。

Dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa vitakkavicārasahagatā vā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha paṭhamajjhānadhammā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, vitakkavicārasahagatā saññāmanasikārā avitakkajhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Upekkhāsahagatā vā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha catutthajjhānadhammā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, upekkhāsahagatā saññāmanasikārā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Sesesupi atthānurūpaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Yathāvuttasamāpattīsu vasībhāvena paricitaṃ kallatāparicitaṃ cittaṃ nāma.

Ettakameva yuttigavesanaṃ na kātabbaṃ, navavidhasuttantesu yathāladdhayuttigavesanampi kātabbanti dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ sabbe』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ yathāvuttabhūmigocarānaṃ vicayahārena vicinitvā yuttihārena yojetabbabhāvo kena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena yojetabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno 『『sabbesa』』ntiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.

Iti yuttihāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 對入第二禪的現有補特伽羅，"與尋伺俱行的想作意與近分法俱為初禪法轉向特勝上禪"的教導不合理，而"與尋伺俱行的想作意轉向退失無尋禪"的教導合理。"與舍俱行的想作意與近分法俱為第四禪法轉向退失禪"的教導不合理，而"與舍俱行的想作意轉向特勝上禪"的教導合理。其餘也應依義相應作結合。如所說諸定中以自在修習成熟者名為善修習心。 不應只作如此尋求道理，也應在九種經中作如所得道理的尋求，為顯示此而說"如是一切"等。因為應當說"一切行相如所說地境，以探究行相探究后以理趣行相結合性以何而應信受"，所以說"所以說"等。其中以彼應結合性具壽大迦旃延說"一切"等言語，以彼言語應信受，如是所說。 如是在理趣行相分別中隨能力所作的 解釋已竟。 諸智者則應依註釋復注隨順詳細分別甚深義而取。 足處行相分別解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena yuttihāravibhaṅgabhūtena pañhāvissajjanādīnaṃ yuttāyuttabhāvo vibhatto, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto yuttihāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hāro』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso padaṭṭhāno hāro padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgoti pucchati. 『『Dhammaṃ desesi jino』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno hāro』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgoti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārotiādi padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 22). 『『Ayaṃ idāni vuccamāno vitthārabhūto padaṭṭhāno hāro piṭakattaye desitesu dhammesu kiṃ nāma dhammaṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇetī』』ti pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā 『『idaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ imassa āsannaphalassa padaṭṭhāna』』nti niyametvā vibhajituṃ 『『ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – sabbesu viññeyyadhammesu yāthāvato asampaṭivedho lakkhaṇaṃ etissā avijjāyāti sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā, avijjā, tassā avijjāya asubhe 『『subha』』ntiādivipallāsā padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ. Vipallāse sati avijjā vattati uparūpari jāyati na hāyati, tasmā vipallāsā avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavanti. Avijjāya vaṭṭamūlakattā taṃ ādiṃ katvā padaṭṭhānaṃ vibhattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Taṇhāyapi vaṭṭamūlakattā tadanantaraṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ vibhajituṃ 『『ajjhosānalakkhaṇā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti piyasabhāvaṃ sātasabhāvaṃ cakkhādidhammajātaṃ. Piyanīyasātanīye cakkhādike sati taṇhā vattati uparūpari jāyati, tasmā piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavati.

Adinnādāne sati lobho vattati, tasmā adinnādānaṃ lobhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Adinnādānañhi ekavāraṃ uppannampi anādīnavadassanato lobhassa āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavatveva.

Kesādīsu asubhesu pavattāyapi subhasaññāya nīlādivaṇṇadīghādisaṇṭhānahasanādibyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇattā cakkhundriyādīnaṃ asaṃvaro subhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati.

Dukkhadukkhādīsu pavattāyapi sukhasaññāya sāsavaphassūpagamanalakkhaṇattā rūpādīsu assādo sukhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Rūpakkhandhādīsu aniccesu pavattāyapi niccasaññāya saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ asamanupassanalakkhaṇattā rūpakkhandhādīsu niccaggahaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ niccasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Aniccadukkhānattasaṅkhātesu khandhādīsu pavattāyapi attasaññāya aniccasaññādukkhasaññānaṃ asamanupassanalakkhaṇattā ahaṃmamādivasena pavatto nāmakāyo attasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Evaṃ avijjādīnaṃ akusalapakkhānaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ dassetvā idāni tappaṭipakkhānaṃ vijjādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ 『『sabbadhammasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbesu ñeyyadhammesu pavattāya vijjāya sabbadhammasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇattā sabbaṃ neyyaṃ vijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Samathassa cittavikkhepasaṅkhātauddhaccapaṭisaṃharaṇasaṅkhātavikkhambhanalakkhaṇattā paṭibhāganimittabhūtā asubhā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Asubhāya hi taṇhāpaṭipakkhattā, taṇhāya ca abhāve samatho tiṭṭhatīti.

對所說的以何種描述為特性、以何種道理為基礎的問題的解答，所述的具體道理是明確的，因此在問"什麼是足處行相分別"時，開始說"在那裡什麼是足處"等。在那裡，"在那裡"是指在所述的十六種教導中，哪個道理是足處行相分別。 "佛陀說法"等的具體說明，現在由我所說的"這是足處"等是廣義的描述特性，足處行相分別應被瞭解。因此說"在那裡什麼是足處"等的足處行相分別（見《凈土論》22）。"現在所說的廣義足處，若在三藏中所說的法中，究竟是什麼法呢？"在提出這個問題后，"這是近因，這個足處"等的限制以示分開。"其意是"在所有應知的法中，真實的未見特徵是無明的特徵，所有法的真實未見特徵是無明、無明的特徵對不凈的"凈"等的顛倒，足處是近因。因顛倒而無明存在，上升而生起不減，所以因顛倒的無明的足處是近因。因無明的輪迴根本故，須以此為起點，足處應被理解。 因貪慾的輪迴根本故，接著應以貪慾的足處分開，"因執著的特徵"等的說法。在那裡，"可愛之法、可喜之法"是可愛的特徵、可喜的特徵，眼等法所生。因可愛可喜的眼等存在，貪慾存在，上升而生起，因此可愛的特徵、可喜的特徵成為貪慾的足處近因。 對不義的施捨存在貪慾，因此不義的施捨成為貪慾的足處。因不義的施捨即使一次生起也因無害的見解故，成為貪慾的近因。 在對不凈的情況下，因對美的印象而生起的情況下，因藍色等的顏色、長短等的狀態、笑聲等的特徵，眼根等的無節制成為對美的印象的足處。 在對苦的情況下，即使生起痛苦的情況下，因對樂的印象而生起的情況下，因有味的觸及的特徵，色等中對樂的印象成為足處。 在色蘊等的無常中，即使生起無常的情況下，因對常的印象而生起的情況下，因有形狀的特徵，色蘊中對常的把握的意識成為足處。 在無常苦等的特徵所說的蘊等中，即使生起自我的情況下，因對自我的印象而生起的情況下，因自我等的生起，名色的自我的印象成為足處。 如是顯示無明等的不善方面的法的足處，現在為顯示相對的智慧等的法的足處，開始說"一切法的完全理解的特徵"等。在所有應知的法中，因智慧的生起而具備一切法的完全理解的特徵，所有可知的法的足處因智慧的生起而成為。 因靜止的心的分散的特徵、因升起的特徵、因鎮伏的特徵，因對不凈的心的靜止而成為。因不凈的心對貪慾的對治，因貪慾的缺失而靜止。

Adinnādānā veramaṇivasena pavattassa alobhassa icchāvacarapaṭisaṃharaṇalakkhaṇattā adinnādānā veramaṇī alobhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Pāṇātipātā veramaṇivasena pavattassa adosassa abyāpajjalakkhaṇattā pāṇātipātā veramaṇī adosassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Sammāpaṭipattivasena pavattassa amohassa vatthuavippaṭipattilakkhaṇattā sammāpaṭipatti amohassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Nibbidāvasena pavattāya asubhasaññāya vinīlakavipubbakagahaṇalakkhaṇattā nibbidā asubhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbidāñāṇena hi anabhirati pavattati, anabhiratiyā ca asubhasaññā ṭhitāti.

Dukkhavedanāvasena pavattāya dukkhasaññāya sāsavaphassaparijānanalakkhaṇattā vedanā dukkhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Uppādavayavasena pavattāya aniccasaññāya saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ samanupassanalakkhaṇattā uppādavayā aniccasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Uppādavayañhi samanupassitvā aniccasaññā pavattā.

Dhammamattasaññāvasena pavattāya anattasaññāya sabbadhammaabhinivesalakkhaṇattā dhammasaññā anattasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Kāmarāgassa rūpādipañcakāmaguṇārammaṇattā pañca kāmaguṇā kāmarāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Rūpasaṅkhāte kāye ārabbha pavattassa rūparāgassa cakkhādipañcindriyānaṃ anusārena pavattanato pañcindriyāni rūpāni rūparāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Bhavanikantivasena pavattassa bhavarāgassa chaḷāyatanaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbattabhavānupassitāti 『『edisaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ mā nibbattatu, edisaṃ iṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ nibbattatu edisī dukkhā vedanā mā nibbattatu, edisī sukhā vedanā nibbattatū』』ti evamādinā pakārena pavattā rūpābhinandanā, sā pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Kammassakataññāṇassa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānugatattā pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇadassanaṃ kammassakataññāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Okappanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ yassā saddhāyāti okappanalakkhaṇā saddhā. Adhimutti paccupaṭṭhānaṃ yassā saddhāyāti adhimuttipaccupaṭṭhānā ca saddhā. Anāvilaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ yassa pasādassāti anāvilalakkhaṇoti pasādo. Sampasīdanaṃ paccupaṭṭhānaṃ yassa pasādassāti sampasīdanapaccupaṭṭhāno ca pasādo. So pana pasādo saddhāya eva avatthāvisesoti veditabbo. Aveccapasādo abhipatthiyanalakkhaṇāya saddhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, okappanalakkhaṇā saddhā anāvilalakkhaṇassa pasādassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, catubbidhaṃ sammappadhānaṃ vīriyaṃ ārambhalakkhaṇassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, kāyādisatipaṭṭhānaṃ apilāpanalakkhaṇāya satiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ, jhānasahitassa samādhissa ekaggalakkhaṇattā vitakkādijhānāni samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ, paññāya kiccapajānanaārammaṇapajānanalakkhaṇattā saccāni paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 因以不取不與之物而生起的無貪具有抑制欲求範圍的特徵，故不取不與之物成為無貪的足處。 因以不殺生而生起的無嗔具有無恚的特徵，故不殺產生為無嗔的足處。 因以正行而生起的無癡具有不違背事物的特徵，故正行成為無癡的足處。 因以厭離而生起的不凈想具有取青瘀腐爛的特徵，故厭離成為不凈想的足處。因以厭離智而不樂生起，以不樂而不凈想住立。 因以苦受而生起的苦想具有遍知有漏觸的特徵，故受成為苦想的足處。 因以生滅而生起的無常想具有觀察有為相諸法的特徵，故生滅成為無常想的足處。因觀察生滅而無常想生起。 因以法想而生起的無我想具有執著一切法的特徵，故法想成為無我想的足處。 因欲貪以色等五欲功德為所緣，故五欲功德成為欲貪的足處。 因以色為名的身而生起的色貪隨眼等五根而轉，故五根色成為色貪的足處。 因以有愛而生起的有貪，六處成為其足處。以觀察所生有故"愿如是不可意色不生，如是可意色生；愿如是苦受不生，如是樂受生"，如是等方式生起的喜樂色，彼成為五取蘊的足處。 因業所生智隨順宿住隨念智，故宿住隨念智見成為業所生智的足處。 勝解為特徵的信為勝解特徵信。以勝解為現前的信為勝解現前信。凈為無濁為特徵為無濁特徵凈。以遍凈為現前的凈為遍凈現前凈。然彼凈應知即是信的特殊狀態。證凈成為希求特徵信的足處，勝解特徵信成為無濁特徵凈的足處，四種正勤精進成為發起特徵精進的足處，身等念處成為不漂沒特徵唸的足處，因具禪定的等持具一境性特徵，故尋等禪成為定的足處，因慧具了知作用和了知所緣的特徵，故諸諦成為慧的足處。

『『Yesaṃ avijjādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānāni ācariyena vibhattāni, te avijjādayo katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānī』』ti pucchitabbattā te avijjādayopi imesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānāti dassetuṃ 『『aparo nayo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Avijjā assādamanasikāralakkhaṇassa ayonisomanasikārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjāya hi ādīnavacchādanato ayonisomanasikāro jātoti. Saccasammohanalakkhaṇā avijjā puññāpuññāneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ, punabbhavavirohanalakkhaṇā tebhūmakacetanā saṅkhārā vipākaviññāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, opapaccayikasaṅkhātena upapattibhavabhāvena nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ nāmarūpassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmakāyarūpakāyasaṅghātalakkhaṇaṃ nāmarūpaṃ chaḷāyatanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sahajātādipaccayabhāvato, cakkhādīnaṃ channaṃ indriyānaṃ pavattānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ chaḷāyatanaṃ chabbidhassa phassassa yathākkamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nissayādipaccayabhāvato, cakkhupasādarūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādisannipātalakkhaṇo chabbidho phasso, taṃ vedanāya tena chabbidhena phassena sahajātāya chabbidhāya vedanāya yathākkamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ sahajātādipaccayabhāvato, iṭṭhānubhavanaaniṭṭhānubhavanaiṭṭhāniṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇā tividhā vedanā, taṃ taṇhāya tāya tividhāya vedanāya vasena pavattāya taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādipaccayabhāvato, saparasantānesu ajjhosānalakkhaṇā taṇhā, taṃ upādānassa tāya taṇhāya vasena pavattassa catubbidhassa upādānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādipaccayabhāvato. 『『So vedanāyā』』ti ca 『『sā taṇhāyā』』ti ca 『『sā upādānassā』』ti ca pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ, liṅgavipallāsaniddeso vā siyā.

Yaṃ upādānaṃ opapaccayikaṃ upapattikkhandhanibbattakaṃ, taṃ upādānaṃ duvidhassa bhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo kammabhavo nāmakāyarūpakāyasambhavanalakkhaṇo, so kammabhavo jātiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yā upapattibhūtā jāti khandhapātubhāvalakkhaṇā, taṃ sā jāti jarāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yā jiṇṇajarā upadhikkhandhaparipākalakkhaṇā, taṃ sā jiṇṇajarā maraṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yampi yassa sammutimaraṇaṃ jīvitindriyupacchedalakkhaṇaṃ, tampi tassa sammutimaraṇaṃ sokassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Piyassa maraṇaṃ cintentassa yebhuyyena sokuppajjanato yo soko ñātiādipiyesu ussukkakārako, taṃ so soko paridevassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo paridevo lālappakārako, taṃ so paridevo kāyikadukkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ kāyasampīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ domanassaṃ cittasampīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ domanassaṃ upāyāsassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo upāyāso odahanakārako avadahanakārako, taṃ so upāyāso bhavassa upāyāsassa nissayasantānabhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Bhavassāti vuttabhavaṃ dassetuṃ 『『imānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhavaṅgāni kileso bhavassa aṅgaṃ kāraṇaṃ kammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭāni bhavasaṅkhātāni aṅgāni avayavāni. Yadā paccuppannādikāle samaggāni nibbattāni bhavanti, tadā so kilesavaṭṭakammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭasaṅkhāto dhammasamūho 『『bhavassā』』ti ettha bhavoti daṭṭhabbo. Taṃ bhavasaṅkhātaṃ kilesavaṭṭakammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭattayaṃ saṃsārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ purimaṃ purimaṃ jātinipphannakilesādivaṭṭena saṃsārassa abbocchinnuppajjanato, yo ariyamaggo niyyānikalakkhaṇo, taṃ so ariyamaggo nirodhassa nibbānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sampāpakahetubhāvato.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 對入第二禪的現有補特伽羅，"與尋伺俱行的想作意與近分法俱初禪法轉向特勝上禪"的教導不合理，而"與尋伺俱行的想作意轉向退失無尋禪"的教導合理。"與舍俱行的想作意與近分法俱第四禪法轉向退失禪"的教導不合理，而"與舍俱行的想作意轉向特勝上禪"的教導合理。對其餘也應依義理適當地結合。如所說諸定中以自在性熟習者名為善熟習心。

Bahussuto sabbasissādīnaṃ patiṭṭhānattā titthaṃ viyāti titthaṃ, jānātīti ñū, titthaṃ ñūti titthaññū, titthaññuno bhāvo titthaññutā, sammāpayirupāsanā, sā pītaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bahussutassa hi sammāpayirupāsanāya dhammūpasañhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ jāyati, pāmojjena ca kammaṭṭhānabrūhanā jāyatīti sappāyadhammassavanena pītiṃ jānātīti pītaññū, pītaññuno bhāvo pītaññutā, kammaṭṭhānassa brūhanā, sā pattaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānabrūhanāya hi bhāvanāpattajānanatā jāyatīti pattaññutā. Bhāvanāpattajānanatā attaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bhāvanāpattajānanatāya hi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgatassa attano jānanatā jāyatīti attaññutā pubbekatapuññatāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Padhāniyaṅgesu samannāgatattajānanatāya hi pubbe puññakaraṇaṃ jātaṃ, pubbekatapuññatā patirūpadesavāsassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pubbe hi katena puññena patirūpadesavāso laddho, patirūpadesavāso sappurisūpanissayassapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Patirūpadesavāsena hi sappurisūpanissayo laddho, sappurisūpanissayo attasammāpaṇidhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sappurisūpanissayena hi attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ jātaṃ, attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ sīlānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attasammāpaṇidhānena hi sīlāni sampatiṭṭhitāni, sīlāni avippaṭisārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attani hi sampatiṭṭhitaṃ sīlaṃ paccavekkhantassa vippaṭisāro natthevāti, avippaṭisārena pāmojjaṃ jāyati, tasmā avippaṭisāro pāmojjassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pāmojjena pīti jāyati, tasmā pāmojjaṃ pītiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pītiyā passaddhi jāyati, tasmā pīti passaddhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Passaddhiyā sukhaṃ jāyati, tasmā passaddhi sukhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sukhena samādhi jāyati, tasmā sukhaṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Samādhinā yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ jāyati, tasmā samādhi yathābhūtañāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanena nibbidāñāṇaṃ jāyati, tasmā yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ nibbidāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbidāya virāgo jāyati, tasmā nibbidā virāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Virāgena vimutti jāyati, tasmā virāgo vimuttiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ jāyati, tasmā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ yathāvuttanayena yo koci dhammo upanissayo hoti, yo koci dhammo paccayo hoti, sabbo so dhammo attano paccayuppannassa dhammassa padaṭṭhānanti daṭṭhabbo.

『『Upanissayadhammassa, paccayadhammassa vā paccayuppannadhammassa padaṭṭhānabhāvo kena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti yassa kassaci upanissayadhammassa, paccayadhammassa ca paccayuppannadhammassa padaṭṭhānabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno 『『dhammaṃ deseti jino』』tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tesaṃ upanissayadhammapaccayadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo saddahitabboti. 『『Yathāvutto padaṭṭhāno hāro paripuṇṇo kiṃ, udāhu añño niddhāretvā yojetabbo atthi ki』』nti vattabbattā 『『niyutto padaṭṭhāno hāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Idha pāḷiyaṃ avibhattampi yathālābhavasena padaṭṭhāno hāro nīharitvā yutto yujjitabbo, vibhajitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.

Iti padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

這是巴利文對應的完整直譯： 博學者是一切弟子的立足處，如渡口一般，稱為渡口。了知者為智者，了知渡口者即是渡口智者，渡口智者的狀態即是渡口智性，即是正確親近，這是歡喜智性的基礎。因為多聞者通過正確親近而生起與法相應的喜悅，由喜悅生起業處的增長。因此通過聽聞適宜之法而了知喜悅，稱為知喜者，知喜者的狀態即是知喜性，這是業處的增長，也是知證智性的基礎。因為通過業處增長而生起修行證得的了知，即是知證智性。修行證得的了知是自知智性的基礎。因為通過修行證得的了知，生起具足五種精進支的自我了知，即是自知智性，這是宿世福德的基礎。 因為通過了知具足精進支的自性，產生過去的福德，宿世福德是住于適宜處所的基礎。因為由過去所作福德而得到住于適宜處所，住于適宜處所是親近善士的基礎。因為通過住于適宜處所而得到親近善士，親近善士是正確自我發願的基礎。因為通過親近善士而生起正確自我發願，正確自我發願是諸戒的基礎。因為通過正確自我發願而諸戒得以建立，諸戒是無悔的基礎。因為當觀察自己所建立的戒時沒有後悔，因此由無悔生起喜悅，所以無悔是喜悅的基礎。由喜悅生起歡喜，所以喜悅是歡喜的基礎。由歡喜生起輕安，所以歡喜是輕安的基礎。由輕安生起樂，所以輕安是樂的基礎。由樂生起定，所以樂是定的基礎。由定生起如實知見，所以定是如實知見的基礎。由如實知見生起厭離智，所以如實知見是厭離的基礎。由厭離生起離欲，所以厭離是離欲的基礎。由離欲生起解脫，所以離欲是解脫的基礎。由解脫生起解脫知見，所以解脫是解脫知見的基礎。如是按所說之理，任何法成為近依，任何法成為緣，一切這些法都應被視為其所緣生法的基礎。 因為應當說明"如何確信增上緣法或緣法對於緣生法的基礎性"，所以說"因此說"等。其中"因此"意為：對於任何增上緣法和緣法對緣生法的基礎性，尊者大迦旃延說"勝者說法"等話語，通過這些話語，應當確信這些增上緣法和緣法的基礎性。因為應當說明"如上所述的基礎理趣是否完整，或者是否還有其他需要確定和運用的"，所以說"已運用基礎理趣"。這裡雖然在聖典中未詳細分別，但基礎理趣應當根據所得而引出、運用、分別，這是其意。 如是在基礎理趣分別中，隨能力所作的 解釋已完成。 智者們應當依據註釋書和復注書詳細分別理解其深義。 5. 特相理趣分別解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena padaṭṭhānavibhaṅgena avijjādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānāni vibhattāni, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha-saddassa attho vuttova. Katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇo hāro lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgoti pucchati. 『『Vuttamhi ekadhamme』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『ye dhammā』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇo hāro lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyoti. Tena vuttaṃ –『『tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hārotiādi lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 23). Ayaṃ idāni vuccamāno vitthārabhūto lakkhaṇo hāro piṭakattaye desitesu dhammesu kiṃ nāma lakkhitabbaṃ dhammaṃ lakkhīyatīti pucchitvā pucchite lakkhaṇahāravicaye dhamme saṅkhepena dassetuṃ 『『ye dhammā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ye dhammāti ye samūhā dhammā. Ekalakkhaṇāti samānalakkhaṇā. Tesaṃ dhammānanti samānalakkhaṇānaṃ tesaṃ samūhadhammānaṃ, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ. Ekasmiṃ dhammeti samānalakkhaṇe ekasmiṃ dhamme, pāḷiyaṃ bhagavatā vutte sati vuttadhammato avasiṭṭhasamānalakkhaṇā dhammā samānalakkhaṇena vuttā bhavantīti attho.

Lakkhaṇahāravisaye dhamme vitthārato imasmiṃ dhamme vutte ime samānalakkhaṇā dhammāpi vuttā bhavantīti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『yathā kiṃ bhave』』tiādimāha. Tassattho – yathā yena pakārena vuttā bhavanti, so pakāro kiṃ bhaveti pucchati. Yathā yena pakārena vuttā bhavanti, so pakāro samānalakkhaṇāti bhāvo bhaveti attho. Kinti bhagavā āha? 『『Cakkhuṃ bhikkhave』』tiādiṃ bhagavā āha. 『『Cakkhuṃ, bhikkhave, anavaṭṭhita』』ntiādimhi vutte 『『sotaṃ, bhikkhave, anavaṭṭhita』』ntiādivacanampi vuttameva bhavati.

『『Anavaṭṭhitādilakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vā ajjhattikāyatanabhāvena samānalakkhaṇattā vāti āyatanavaseneva ekalakkhaṇaṃ vattabba』』nti vattabbattā khandhavasenapi ekalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yathā cāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Atīte, rādha, rūpe anapekkho hoti, anāgataṃ rūpaṃ mā abhinandi , paccuppannassa rūpassa nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya cāgāya paṭinissaggāya paṭipajjā』』ti vutte 『『atītāya, rādha, vedanāya anapekkho hoti, anāgataṃ vedanaṃ mā abhinandi, paccuppannāya vedanāya nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya cāgāya paṭinissaggāya paṭipajjā』』tiādi vuttaṃ bhave.

『『Anapekkhanīyalakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vā khandhalakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vāti khandhāyatanavaseneva ekalakkhaṇadhammā vattabbā』』ti vattabbattā satipaṭṭhānavasenāpi vattabbāti dassetuṃ 『『yathāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā yena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā ca tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca avuttāpi dhammā vuttā bhavantīti attho. Ye vipassakā puggalā pañcasu khandhesu niccaṃ susamāraddhā niccaṃ kāyagatāsatiṃ bhāventi, te vipassakā akiccaṃ subhasukhādikaṃ, kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ vā na sevanti, kicce asubhāsukhādike, kāyādike vā sātaccakārino hontīti bhagavā āhāti yojanā.

1. 通過解釋特殊性的詞根分析,無明等的詞根已被分析,那種作為解釋特殊性的詞根分析方法已經完成,因為應該問"什麼是特相方法分析",所以說了"其中什麼是特相方法"等。其中,"其中"一詞的含義已經說過。問什麼解釋特殊性是特相方法,是特相方法分析。應當瞭解,現在我將要說的"凡是諸法"等詳細解釋特殊性就是名為特相方法,特相方法分析。因此說:"其中什麼是特相方法等是名為特相方法分析"。這個現在將要說的詳細的特相方法,在三藏所說的諸法中,到底應該觀察什麼法呢?爲了簡要地指出在所問的特相方法考察中的諸法,所以說了"凡是諸法"等。其中,"凡是諸法"是指凡是集合的諸法。"一個特相"是指相同特相。"這些法"是指相同特相的這些集合法,這是部分格。"在一法中"是指在相同特相的一法中,在經中被世尊所說時,從所說之法剩餘的相同特相諸法以相同特相而被說,這是意思。 爲了確定並指出在特相方法領域中的諸法詳細地,在這個法被說時這些相同特相的諸法也被說了,所以說"就像什麼"等。其含義是:就像以何種方式被說,那種方式是什麼?問。就像以何種方式被說,那種方式是相同特相,這是意思。世尊說了什麼?"諸比丘,眼"等世尊說了。當說"諸比丘,眼是不堅固"等時,"諸比丘,耳是不堅固"等話語也同樣被說了。 因為應該說"由於不堅固等特相而相同特相,或由於內處性而相同特相,所以只應該依處而說一個特相",爲了也依蘊而顯示一個特相,所以說了"又如他說"等。當說"羅陀,對過去色無執著,不應喜愛未來色,爲了現在色的厭離、離欲、滅盡、舍離、出離而修行"時,"羅陀,對過去受無執著,不應喜愛未來受,爲了現在受的厭離、離欲、滅盡、舍離、出離而修行"等也被說了。 因為應該說"由於應無執著的特相而相同特相,或由於蘊的特相而相同特相,所以只應該依蘊處而說一個特相的諸法",爲了顯示也應該依念處而說,所以說了"如他說"等。其中,就像以什麼一個特相而世尊說了,如此以那個一個特相,未說的諸法也被說了,這是意思。那些觀察的人們在五蘊中常常精進,常常修習身至念,那些觀察者不從事非正事如凈妙樂等,或如農業商業等工作,而在正事如不凈不樂等,或身等中恒常實行,世尊如是說,這是結構。

Itisaddassa cettha ekassa lopo. Iti evaṃ 『『yesañcā』』tiādigāthāya kesādike kāye gatāya pavattāya satiyā bhagavatā sarūpena vuttāya vijjamānāya tadavasesā vedanāgatā sati ca cittagatā sati ca dhammagatā sati ca satipaṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattena vuttā bhavantīti saṅkhepato niccaṃ susamāraddhā niccaṃ vedanāgatā sati ca…pe… niccaṃ cittagatā sati ca…pe… niccaṃ dhammagatā satīti vattabbāti.

『『Satipaṭṭhānavaseneva ekalakkhaṇā dhammā vattabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『tathā yaṃ kiñcī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kiñci rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci saddāyatanaṃ sotaviññāṇena sutaṃ, yaṃ kiñci gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ ghānaviññāṇādittayena viññāṇena mutaṃ, iti evaṃ diṭṭhādittaye bhagavatā sarūpena vutte sati tadavasesaṃ yaṃ kiñci viññātaṃ dhammārammaṇapariyāpannaṃ rūpaṃ bhagavatā ālambitabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā vuttaṃ bhavatīti attho. Atha vā yaṃ kiñci rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ vutte sati tadavasesaṃ sutādikampi vuttaṃ hotīti ādiattho visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā mutaṃ vā』』ti.

『『Kāyagatāya satiyā vuttāya tadavasesā vedanāgatāsatiādayoyeva vattabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammāpi vuttā bhavantīti dassetuṃ 『『yathā cāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā yena niyyānikalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca vuttā bhavantīti attho. 『『Tasmā abhijjhādomanassena abhibhūtattā iha mama sāsane, bhikkhu, tvaṃ ātāpī sampajāno satimā hutvā loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ tadaṅgappahānena vā vikkhambhanappahānena vā vineyya vinayitvā kāye kesādirūpakāye kāyānupassī kesādirūpakāyānupassī hutvā viharāhī』』ti bhagavatā vutte sati 『『tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharāhi ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ, tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, citte cittānupassī viharāhi…pe… domanassaṃ, tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, dhammesu dhammānupassī viharāhi…pe… domanassa』』nti vuttaṃ bhavatīti saṅkhepattho veditabbo. Vitthārattho pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 23) bahudhā vuttoti amhehi na vitthārito.

『『Ekasmiṃ satipaṭṭhāne vutte kasmā cattāro satipaṭṭhānā vuttā bhaveyyu』』nti vattabbattā 『『ātāpīti vīriyindriya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha 『『ātāpī』』ti iminā padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. 『『Sampajāno』』ti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ paññindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. 『『Satimā』』ti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ satindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. 『『Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa』』nti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ samādhindriyaṃ vuttaṃ, na kāyeyeva pavattaṃ. Evaṃ pakārena kāye kāyānupassino yogāvacarassa cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti ce vadeyya, evaṃ sati catunnaṃ vīriyapaññāsatisamādhīnaṃ indriyānaṃ catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ sādhakabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā samānalakkhaṇattā pāripūriṃ gacchantīti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – 『『catusatipaṭṭhānasādhane imesaṃ indriyānaṃ sabhāvabhedābhāvato samānalakkhaṇattā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 23).

我來直譯這段巴利文: 在此應知有一省略。因此,當佛陀明確說了關於"yesañcā"等偈頌中提到的關於身體等的念住時,其餘的受念住、心念住和法念住,由於同樣是念住的性質,也都以相同的特徵被說到。因此簡要地說,應當常常精進于受念住等,常常精進於心念住等,常常精進於法念住。 因為應當說"依念住之力而說諸法有相同特徵",所以說"如是任何..."等。其中,任何為眼識所見的色處,任何為耳識所聞的聲處,任何為鼻識等三識所知的香味觸處,當佛陀明確說了這些見聞覺知等三類時,其餘任何被識知的法所緣色,由於同樣可作為所緣的特徵而被佛陀說及。或者說,當佛陀說了任何被見到的色處時,由此而說及其餘被聞等所知的內容,這樣的意思應分別理解。因此說:"所見、所聞、所覺知"。 爲了回答"當說了身念住時,是否也說及其餘的受念住等",爲了顯示三十七道品也都被說及,所以說"如佛所說"等。其中,如同佛陀以出離的特徵和相同的特徵所說,即是以這相同的特徵而說的意思。當佛陀說"因此,比丘,在我的教法中,你應當以精進、正知、念住,於世間調伏貪憂,于身體的發等身份隨觀身而住"時,也就說了"因此,比丘,你應當于諸受隨觀受而住,精進、正知、念住,於世間調伏貪憂;因此,比丘,你應當於心隨觀心而住...乃至...貪憂;因此,比丘,你應當于諸法隨觀法而住...乃至...貪憂"。這是簡要的意思。詳細的意思在註疏中已多方面說明,我們不再詳述。 因為應當問"說了一念住時,為何四念住都被說及",所以說"精進即是精進根"等。其中,"精進"這個詞說的是在身、受、心、法中運作的精進根。"正知"這個詞說的是在身、受、心、法中運作的慧根。"念住"這個詞說的是在身、受、心、法中運作的念根。"於世間調伏貪憂"這個詞說的是在身、受、心、法中運作的定根,而不只是在身上運作。如果這樣說,對於在身上隨觀身的修行者,四念住會達到修習圓滿,那麼四種精進、慧、念、定諸根,由於是四念住的成就因,有著相同的特徵,所以也會達到圓滿。因此在註疏中說:"由於這些根在成就四念住時本質上無差別,故有相同的特徵。"

1. 『『Evaṃ vuttepi cattāro satipaṭṭhānāyeva vattabbā bhaveyyuṃ, kathaṃ sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammā vattabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu yena yogāvacarena bhāviyamānesu tassa yogāvacarassa cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ bujjhanaṃ bodhaṃ, ariyamaggañāṇaṃ, bodhaṃ gacchantīti bodhaṅgamā. Bodhassa ariyamaggañāṇassa pakkhe bhavāti bodhipakkhiyā.

『『Kusalāyeva dhammā ekalakkhaṇabhāvena nīharitā kiṃ, udāhu akusalāpi dhammā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『evaṃ akusalāpī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kusalā dhammā ekalakkhaṇattena niddhāritā yathā, evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇattena niddhāritabbāyevāti attho. 『『Kathaṃ niddhāretabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā pahānekaṭṭhabhāvena niddhāretabbāti dassento 『『ekalakkhaṇattā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī』』ti āha. Tattha ekalakkhaṇattāti pahānekaṭṭhabhāvena samānalakkhaṇattā. 『『Katamaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Tattha catūsu…pe… pariññaṃ gacchantīti kāyāgatāsatipaṭṭhāne yogāvacarena bhāviyamāne sati tena yogāvacarena asubhe kesādike rūpakāye 『『subha』』nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa kabaḷīkārāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati, 『『āhārasamudayā rūpasamudayo』』ti (saṃ. ni. 3.56) vuttattā rūpakāye chandarāgaṃ pajahantassa tassa samudaye kabaḷīkārāhārepi chandarāgo pahīyatīti attho. Vedanāgatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne sati dukkhe 『『sukha』』nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa phassāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati, 『『phassapaccayā vedanā』』ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni.

我來直譯這段巴利文: 24. 因為應當問"這樣說了之後,只應該說四念住,為何要說三十七菩提分法?",所以說"在四念住中"等。其中,當某個瑜伽行者修習四念住時,他的四正勤會達到修習圓滿。其餘的也應如此理解。覺悟四聖諦,即聖道智,趨向覺悟的稱為覺支。有助於覺悟即聖道智的稱為菩提分。 因為應當問"只有善法以相同特徵被提出,還是不善法也是?",所以說"不善法也是如此"等。其中,如同善法以相同特徵被確定,不善法也應以相同特徵被確定,這是其意思。因為應當問"如何確定?",爲了顯示應以斷除的共同性來確定,所以說"由於相同特徵而達到斷除"。其中,"相同特徵"是指以斷除的共同性而有相同特徵。因為應當問"達到什麼樣的斷除?",所以說"在四念住中"等。 其中,"在四念住中...達到遍知"是指:當瑜伽行者修習身念住時,他對不凈的發等身體誤認為"凈"的顛倒見被斷除,他對段食達到遍知,因為說"由食集故色集",所以當他斷除對色身的欲貪時,他對其因即段食的欲貪也被斷除,這是其意思。當修習受念住時,對苦誤認為"樂"的顛倒見被斷除,他對觸食達到遍知,因為說"以觸為緣生受",所以

2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vuttattā vedanāya chandarāgaṃ pajahantassa tassa paccaye phassāhāre chandarāgo pahīyati. Cittagatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne anicce 『『nicca』』nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa viññāṇāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati. Dhammagatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne anattani 『『attā』』ti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa manosañcetanāhāro pariññaṃ gacchatīti visuṃ visuṃ yojetvā ekekasmiṃ pahātabbe vutte tadavasesā pahātabbā vuttā bhavanti pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti attho gahetabbo.

『『Āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī』』ti vacane āhāresu pavattā kāmarāgadosamohā byantīkatā hontīti attho gahito. Kabaḷīkārāhārañhi ārabbha pavatte kāmarāge vijjamāne kabaḷīkārāhārassa vijānanā nattheva, tasmiṃ kāmarāge pana pahīne parijānanā bhavatīti. Sesāhārajānanampi eseva nayo. Yassa yogāvacarassa satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, vipallāsā pahīnā, āhāraparijānanā uppannā, so yogāvacaro upādānehi anupādāno bhavati. Subhasaññite hi kāye kāmupādānaṃ visesena bhavatīti subhasaññito kāyo kāmupādānassa vatthu, kāyagatāya satiyā anusaritabbo asubhasaññito kesādi kāmupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. Sukhavedanāya assādavasena diṭṭhupādānaṃ bhavatīti sukhasaññitā vedanā diṭṭhupādānassa vatthu, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā diṭṭhupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. 『『Cittaṃ nicca』』nti diṭṭhigahaṇavasena tassa tassa attano sīlavatavasena parisuddhīti parāmasanaṃ hotīti cittaṃ sīlabbatupādānassa vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbatupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. Dhamme nāmarūpaparicchedena yathābhūtaṃ apassantassa dhammesu attābhiniveso hotīti dhammā attavādupādānassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā attavādupādānassa vatthu na honti eva. Tasmā catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu upādānehi anupādāno bhavatīti vuttanti adhippāyo gahetabbo.

『『Yena yogāvacarena satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, so yogāvacaro upādānehiyeva anupādāno bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā yogādīhipi visaṃyutto bhavatīti dassetuṃ 『『yogehi ca visaṃyutto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yogehi cāti kāmayogabhavayogadiṭṭhiyogaavijjāyogehi ca. Visaṃyuttoti tadaṅgappahānavikkhambhanappahānasamucchedappahānavasena vigato, vimutto ca bhavatīti attho. Subhasaññito hi rūpakāyo kāmarāgassa vatthu hoti, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo kāyo kāmarāgassa vatthu na hotveva. 『『Sukho』』ti vā 『『sukhahetū』』ti vā gahaṇīyo bhavo bhavarāgassa vatthu hoti, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo bhavo bhavarāgassa vatthu na hoti. 『『Attā』』ti abhinivisitabbaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhiyogassa vatthu hoti, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhiyogassa vatthu na hoti. Vinibbhogassa dukkarattā, dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya ca duppaṭivijjhattā avinibbhujitabbā, dhammamattatāya appaṭivijjhitabbā dhammā avijjāyogassa vatthu honti, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā avijjāyogassa vatthu na honti. Tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako 『『yogehi ca visaṃyutto』』ti vutto. Ayaṃ nayo āsavehi ca anāsavo bhavati, oghehi ca nitthiṇṇo bhavatīti etthāpi yojetabbo.

2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vuttattā vedanāya chandarāgaṃ pajahantassa tassa paccaye phassāhāre chandarāgo pahīyati. Cittagatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne anicce 『『nicca』』nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa viññāṇāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati. Dhammagatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne anattani 『『attā』』ti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa manosañcetanāhāro pariññaṃ gacchatīti visuṃ visuṃ yojetvā ekekasmiṃ pahātabbe vutte tadavasesā pahātabbā vuttā bhavanti pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti attho gahetabbo.

『『Āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī』』ti vacane āhāresu pavattā kāmarāgadosamohā byantīkatā hontīti attho gahito. Kabaḷīkārāhārañhi ārabbha pavatte kāmarāge vijjamāne kabaḷīkārāhārassa vijānanā nattheva, tasmiṃ kāmarāge pana pahīne parijānanā bhavatīti. Sesāhārajānanampi eseva nayo. Yassa yogāvacarassa satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, vipallāsā pahīnā, āhāraparijānanā uppannā, so yogāvacaro upādānehi anupādāno bhavati. Subhasaññite hi kāye kāmupādānaṃ visesena bhavatīti subhasaññito kāyo kāmupādānassa vatthu, kāyagatāya satiyā anusaritabbo asubhasaññito kesādi kāmupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. Sukhavedanāya assādavasena diṭṭhupādānaṃ bhavatīti sukhasaññitā vedanā diṭṭhupādānassa vatthu, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā diṭṭhupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. 『『Cittaṃ nicca』』nti diṭṭhigahaṇavasena tassa tassa attano sīlavatavasena parisuddhīti parāmasanaṃ hotīti cittaṃ sīlabbatupādānassa vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbatupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. Dhamme nāmarūpaparicchedena yathābhūtaṃ apassantassa dhammesu attābhiniveso hotīti dhammā attavādupādānassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā attavādupādānassa vatthu na honti eva. Tasmā catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu upādānehi anupādāno bhavatīti vuttanti adhippāyo gahetabbo.

『『Yena yogāvacarena satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, so yogāvacaro upādānehiyeva anupādāno bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā yogādīhipi visaṃyutto bhavatīti dassetuṃ 『『yogehi ca visaṃyutto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yogehi cāti kāmayogabhavayogadiṭṭhiyogaavijjāyogehi ca. Visaṃyuttoti tadaṅgappahānavikkhambhanappahānasamucchedappahānavasena vigato, vimutto ca bhavatīti attho. Subhasaññito hi rūpakāyo kāmarāgassa vatthu hoti, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo kāyo kāmarāgassa vatthu na hotveva. 『『Sukho』』ti vā 『『sukhahetū』』ti vā gahaṇīyo bhavo bhavarāgassa vatthu hoti, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo bhavo bhavarāgassa vatthu na hoti. 『『Attā』』ti abhinivisitabbaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhiyogassa vatthu hoti, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhiyogassa vatthu na hoti. Vinibbhogassa dukkarattā, dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya ca duppaṭivijjhattā avinibbhujitabbā, dhammamattatāya appaṭivijjhitabbā dhammā avijjāyogassa vatthu honti, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā avijjāyogassa vatthu na honti. Tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako 『『yogehi ca visaṃyutto』』ti vutto. Ayaṃ nayo āsavehi ca anāsavo bhavati, oghehi ca nitthiṇṇo bhavatīti etthāpi yojetabbo.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 2.1. 由於在《大品》第1章、《自說經》第1章和《分別論》第225頁中說過,對於斷除受的欲貪者,其緣——觸食的欲貪也被斷除。在修習心念處時,對無常"常"的顛倒見被斷除,這位修行者的識食被遍知。在修習法念處時,對無我"我"的顛倒見被斷除,這位修行者的意思食被遍知。這樣分別結合起來,在說明每一個應斷除的時候,其餘的應斷除的也就被說明了,因為在應斷除的性質上是同一特徵,應當這樣理解其意思。 在"其諸食被遍知"這句話中,應理解為在諸食中生起的欲貪、瞋恚、愚癡被根除了的意思。因為當存在以段食為緣而生起的欲貪時,就沒有對段食的了知,但是當那欲貪斷除時,就會有遍知。對其他食的了知也是同樣的道理。對於已修習念處、斷除顛倒見、生起食的遍知的修行者來說,他就不再執取諸取。因為特別是在被認為美好的身體上會生起欲取,所以被認為美好的身體是欲取的對象,但是被身念處所隨觀的發毛等身體不會成為欲取的對象。由於耽著於樂受而生起見取,所以被認為是樂的受是見取的對象,但是被受念處所隨觀的受不會成為見取的對象。由於執取"心是常"的見解,以及認為通過某某自己的戒行而得清凈,就會生起執著,所以心是戒禁取的對象,但是被心念處所隨觀的心不會成為戒禁取的對象。對於不如實了知諸法的名色差別的人,會在諸法中生起我的執著,所以諸法是我語取的對象,但是被法念處所隨觀的諸法不會成為我語取的對象。因此,應當理解其意思是:在修習四念處時,就會不執取諸取。 由於可以問"修習了念處的修行者僅僅是不執取諸取嗎",爲了說明他也遠離諸軛,所以說了"也遠離諸軛"等。其中,"也遠離諸軛"是指遠離欲軛、有軛、見軛、無明軛。"遠離"是指以暫時斷、鎮伏斷、正斷的方式遠離、解脫,這是其意思。因為被認為美好的色身是欲貪的對象,但是被身念處所隨觀的身體不會成為欲貪的對象。被執取為"樂"或"樂因"的有是有貪的對象,但是被受念處所隨觀的有不會成為有貪的對象。被執著為"我"的心是見軛的對象,但是被心念處所隨觀的心不會成為見軛的對象。由於難以分辨,以及諸法僅僅是法性而難以通達,所以不能分辨、不能通達法性的諸法是無明軛的對象,但是被法念處所隨觀的諸法不會成為無明軛的對象。因此,隨觀四念處者被說為"也遠離諸軛"。這個方法也應當應用於"也無諸漏"和"也度諸暴流"這兩句。

Ganthehi ca vippayutto bhavatīti ettha pana subhasaññito rūpakāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo rūpakāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu na hoti. Dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu honti, tena vuttaṃ – 『『dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī』』ti (ma. ni.

在"也遠離諸結"這一處，被認為美好的色身是貪慾身結的對象，但是被身念處所隨觀的色身不會成為貪慾身結的對象。苦、苦的變異、苦的形成、苦的本質的受，是瞋恚身結的對象，因此曾說："對於苦的受，潛在的對抗隨眠存在。"（中部尼柯耶） 注意：由於原文片段中斷，我按照已有文字的語言風格和語境進行了直譯。如果需要更完整的上下文，請提供完整的巴利文原文。

1.465). Vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu na hoti. 『『Cittaṃ nicca』』nti abhinivesavasena sassatassa 『『attano sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhī』』ti parāmasanaṃ hoti, tasmā 『『nicca』』nti gahitaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbataparāmāsakāyaganthassa vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbataparāmāsassa vatthu na hoti. Dhammānaṃ sappaccayanāmarūpasabhāvassa adassanato bhavadiṭṭhivibhavadiṭṭhi hoti, tasmā 『『idaṃ sacca』』nti abhinivisitabbā dhammā idaṃsaccābhinivesakāyaganthassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā idaṃsaccābhinivesakāyaganthassa vatthu na honti, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako 『『ganthehi ca vippayutto』』ti vutto.

Subhasaññito ca kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu na hoti. Sukhasaññitāya vedanāya doso hoti, tasmā vedanā dosasallassa vatthu, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā dosasallassa vatthu na hoti. 『『Cittaṃ attā』』ti gahetvā 『『attā seyyo』』tiādivasena pavattassa mānasallassa cittaṃ vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ mānasallassa vatthu na hoti. Dhammānaṃ sappaccayanāmarūpasabhāvassa ajānanato dhammā mohasallassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā mohasallassa vatthu na honti, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako 『『sallehi ca visallo bhavatī』』ti vutto.

『『Āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī』』ti ācariyena vuttaṃ, 『『kiṃ pana āhārāva assa yogāvacarassa pariññaṃ gacchanti, udāhu aññepī』』ti pucchitabbattā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo ca assa yogāvacarassa pariññaṃ gacchantīti dassetuṃ 『『viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yogāvacarena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, tassa yogāvacarassa kāyavedanācittadhammāva pariññaṃ gaccheyyuṃ, na viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti ce vadeyya kāyānupassanādīhi ca kāyavedanācittadhammesu pariññātesu saññāyapi pariññātabbabhāvato. Sā hi vedanācittasaṅkhātena dhammesu pariññātesu avinābhāvato pariññātāvāti.

1.465. 但是被受念處所隨觀的受不會成為瞋恚身結的對象。由於執著"心是常"而生起"以自己的戒得清凈,以苦行得清凈"的執取，因此被執取為"常"的心是戒禁取身結的對象,但是被心念處所隨觀的心不會成為戒禁取的對象。由於不見諸法有因緣的名色自性,就會生起有見和無有見,因此被執著為"這是真實"的諸法是見執身結的對象,但是被法念處所隨觀的諸法不會成為見執身結的對象,因此隨觀四念處者被說為"也遠離諸結"。 被認為美好的身體是貪慾刺的對象,但是被身念處所隨觀的身體不會成為貪慾刺的對象。在被認為是樂的受上會生起瞋恚,因此受是瞋恚刺的對象,但是被受念處所隨觀的受不會成為瞋恚刺的對象。執取"心是我"而生起"我勝"等的慢刺,心是其對像,但是被心念處所隨觀的心不會成為慢刺的對象。由於不知諸法有因緣的名色自性,諸法是愚癡刺的對象,但是被法念處所隨觀的諸法不會成為愚癡刺的對象,因此隨觀四念處者被說為"也遠離諸刺"。 導師說"其諸食被遍知",由於可以問"是隻有諸食被這位修行者遍知,還是其他的也被遍知",爲了說明識住也被這位修行者遍知,所以說"其識住也被遍知"。如果有人說,對於修習了四念處的修行者,只有身、受、心、法被遍知,而識住不被遍知,那麼(應回答說)由於通過身隨觀等在身、受、心、法被遍知時,想也應被遍知。因為它(想)在被稱為受、心的諸法被遍知時,由於不可分離性而也被遍知了。

Yena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, so yogāvacaro upādānehi anupādāno ca, yogehi visaṃyutto ca, khandhehi vippayutto ca, āsavehi anāsavo ca, oghehi nitthiṇṇo ca, sallehi visallo ca bhavatīti vutto, 『『kiṃ pana tathāvidhova hoti, udāhu aññathāpī』』ti pucchitabbattā agatimpi na gacchatīti dassento 『『agatigamanehi ca na agatiṃ gacchatī』』ti āha. Subhādisaññite rūpakāye apekkhamāno puggalo chandāgatiṃ gacchatīti subhādisaññito rūpakāyo visesato chandāgatiyā vatthu hoti, kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbo assāsapassāsādiko kāyo chandāgatiyā vatthu na hoti, tasmā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo chandāgatiṃ na gacchati. Sukhavedanassādavasena vedayamāno tadabhāvena byāpādaṃ āgacchatīti sukhavedanā dosāgatiyā vatthu hoti, vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbā vedanā dosāgatiyā vatthu na hoti , tasmā vedanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo dosāgatiṃ na gacchati. Santatighanavasena 『『niccaṃ, dhuva』』nti gahitaṃ cittaṃ mohassa vatthu hoti, cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ mohassa vatthu na hoti, tasmā cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo dosāgatiṃ na gacchati. Vibhajitvā dhammasabhāvaṃ ajānantassa bhayaṃ jāyatīti vibhajitvā ajāniyasabhāvā dhammā bhayassa vatthu honti, dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbā vibhajitvā jānitabbā dhammā rāgassa vatthu na honti, tasmā dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo bhayāgatiṃ na gacchati. Evaṃ pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇe akusalepi dhamme nīharitvā idāni nigametuṃ 『『evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇattā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī』』ti puna vuttaṃ.

Bhāvetabbesu dhammesu ekadesesu vutte tadavasesāpi bhāvetabbā dhammā ekalakkhaṇattā nīharitvā vattabbā, pahātabbesupi dhammesu ekadese vutte tadavasesāpi dhammā pahātabbā ekalakkhaṇattā nīharitvā vattabbāti ācariyena vuttā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『aññathāpi yadi vattabbā siyuṃ, tepi vadathā』』ti vattabbabhāvato aññenapi pariyāyena lakkhaṇahārassa udāharaṇāni dassetuṃ 『『yattha vā panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ . Tattha yattha yassaṃ rūpekadesadesanāyaṃ rūpindriyaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhundriyādijīvitindriyapariyosānaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ indriyaṃ rūpekadesaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ. Tattheva tassaṃ rūpekadesadesanāyaṃ rūpadhātu ruppanalakkhaṇā cakkhudhātādiphoṭṭhabbadhātupariyosānā dasavidhā rūpadhātu ruppanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā desitā. Sabbo rūpakkhandho ca desito. Rūpāyatanaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhāyatanādiphoṭṭhabbāyatanapariyosānaṃ dasavidhaṃ āyatanaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā bhagavatā desitaṃ.

這位修習了四念處的修行者被說為不執取諸取、遠離諸軛、遠離諸蘊、無諸漏、度諸暴流、遠離諸刺。由於可以問"是否只是如此,還是也有其他方面",爲了說明他也不走非道,所以說"他也不走非道之道"。 在被認為美好等的色身上生起欲求的人,會走向欲求的非道,因此被認為美好等的色身特別是欲求非道的對象,但是被身隨觀念處所隨觀的入出息等身體不會成為欲求非道的對象,因此修習身隨觀念處的人不會走向欲求非道。由於耽著樂受,當樂受不存在時就會生起瞋恚,因此樂受是瞋恚非道的對象,但是被受隨觀念處所隨觀的受不會成為瞋恚非道的對象,因此修習受念處的人不會走向瞋恚非道。由於相續及密集而被執取為"常、恒"的心是愚癡的對象,但是被心隨觀念處所隨觀的心不會成為愚癡的對象,因此修習心隨觀念處的人不會走向瞋恚非道。對於不能分別了知法的自性者會生起恐懼,因此不能分別了知自性的諸法是恐懼的對象,但是被法隨觀念處所隨觀的、應當分別了知的諸法不會成為貪慾的對象,因此修習法隨觀念處的人不會走向恐懼非道。這樣在應斷除的性質上為同一特徵的不善法被引導出來后,現在爲了總結,又說"如是不善法也因為同一特徵而趨向斷除"。 導師說,在應修習的諸法中說明一部分時,其餘的應修習的諸法也因為同一特徵而應當被引導出來說明;在應斷除的諸法中說明一部分時,其餘的應斷除的諸法也因為同一特徵而應當被引導出來說明。我們已經了知這點,由於可以說"如果還可以用其他方式說明的話,也請說明",爲了以其他方式顯示相特徵的實例,所以說"或者在那裡"等。其中,在那個色的一部分的開示中,世尊開示了具有變壞特徵的色根,即以眼根等為始、命根為終的八種根是色的一部分。就在那個色的一部分的開示中,具有變壞特徵的色界,即以眼界等為始、觸界為終的十種色界,因為具有變壞的特徵而成為同一特徵,也被開示了。所有色蘊也被開示了。具有變壞特徵的色處,即以眼處等為始、觸處為終的十種處,因為具有變壞的特徵而成為同一特徵,也被世尊開示了。

Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ sukhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ sukhindriyañca desitaṃ, somanassindriyañca desitaṃ, dukkhasamudayo ariyasaccañca desitaṃ sukhavedanābhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ dukkhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ dukkhindriyañca desitaṃ domanassindriyañca desitaṃ, dukkhaṃ ariyasaccañca desitaṃ dukkhavedanābhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ upekkhindriyañca desitaṃ, sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo ca desitoti yojanā kātabbā.

Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā desitā, tassaṃ desanāyaṃ upekkhindriyaṃ desitaṃ hotu samānalakkhaṇattā, 『『kena paṭiccasamuppādo desito bhaveyyā』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『kena kāraṇenā』』ti pucchitvā kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ 『『adukkhamasukhāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya hi yasmā avijjā anuseti, tasmā avijjā desitā hoti. Avijjāya ca desitāya avijjāmūlako sabbopi paṭiccasamuppādo 『『avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī』』ti desitova hotīti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo.

『『Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī』』ti anulomavasena pavatto yo paṭiccasamuppādo desitoti ācariyena vutto, 『『yadi tathā pavatto so ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito, evaṃ sati sabbo ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito』』ti na vattabboti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『so cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo ca anulomavasena pavatto, so ca sarāgasadosasamohasaṃkilesapakkhena hātabbo. Yo ca paṭilomavasena 『『avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho』』tiādiko pavatto, so ca vītarāgavītadosavītamohaariyadhammehi hātabbo. Yo ca anulomapaṭilomavasena pavatto, so ca tadubhayehi hātabbo. Tasmā 『『sabbo ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito』』ti vattabbovāti adhippāyo gahetabbo.

『『Ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā dhammā vuttā bhavantītiādinā (netti. 23) ācariyena yā lakkhaṇahārayojanā vuttā, sāva kātabbā, na aññathā kātabbā』』ti pucchitabbabhāvato aññathāpi lakkhaṇahārayojanā kātabbāyevāti dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ ye dhammā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ye pathavīādayo rūpadhammā, ye phassādayo arūpadhammā sandhāraṇādikiccato saṅghaṭṭanādikiccato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā rūpārūpadhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye pathavīādayo rūpadhammā, ye phassādayo arūpadhammā kakkhaḷādilakkhaṇato phusanādilakkhaṇato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā rūpārūpadhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye dhammā ruppanasāmaññato namanasāmaññato aniccādisāmaññato vā khandhāyatanādisāmaññato vā ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ saṅkhatadhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā dhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye saṅkhatadhammā bhaṅguppādato saṅkhato cutūpapātato samānanirodhuppādasaṅkhatato vā cutūpapātato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ saṅkhatadhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā saṅkhatadhammā vuttā bhavantīti atthayojanā kātabbā.

下面是巴利文的完整直譯： 在某個受的一部分的開示中，世尊開示了樂受，在那個受的一部分的開示中，也開示了樂根、喜根、苦集聖諦，因為具有樂受的性質而成為同一特徵。或者在某個受的一部分的開示中，世尊開示了苦受，在那個受的一部分的開示中，也開示了苦根、憂根、苦聖諦，因為具有苦受的性質而成為同一特徵。或者在某個受的一部分的開示中，世尊開示了不苦不樂受，在那個受的一部分的開示中，也開示了舍根和一切緣起，應當這樣結合。 在開示不苦不樂受的教說中，由於同一特徵而開示了舍根，這是可以的。但由於可以問"為什麼說開示了緣起呢"，所以說"由於什麼原因"而問，爲了顯示原因，所以說"對於不苦不樂"等。其中，因為無明隨眠于不苦不樂受，所以無明被開示。當無明被開示時，應當理解其意思是：以無明為根本的一切緣起"緣無明有行...乃至...苦蘊的集起"也就被開示了。 導師說以"緣無明有行...乃至...有集起"這樣順序而轉的緣起被開示了，考慮到"如果那樣轉的緣起被開示了，這樣的話就不能說一切緣起都被開示了"這樣的質難，所以說"那個和"等。其中，順序而轉的應當被了知為具有貪、瞋、癡的染污分。逆序而轉的"只由無明的完全離貪滅盡而有行滅"等，應當被了知為離貪、離瞋、離癡的聖法。順逆而轉的應當被了知為兩者都具有。因此應當理解其意思是：應當說"一切緣起都被開示了"。 由於可以問"應當按照導師所說的'諸法是同一特徵的，在說了其中一法時，其餘諸法就被說了'等方式來作相特徵的結合，不應當用其他方式來作"，爲了顯示相特徵的結合也應當用其他方式來作，所以說"如是諸法"等。其中，地等色法和觸等非色法，由於維持等作用、碰觸等作用而具有同一特徵，在說了這些色非色法中的一法時，其餘色非色法就被說了。地等色法和觸等非色法，由於堅硬等特徵、觸知等特徵而具有同一特徵，在說了這些色非色法中的一法時，其餘色非色法就被說了。諸法由於變壞的共相、傾向的共相、無常等的共相或蘊處等的共相而具有同一特徵，在說了這些有為法中的一法時，其餘諸法就被說了。諸有為法由於壞滅生起的有為或死生的有為，或由於相同的滅起的有為或死生而具有同一特徵，在說了這些有為法中的一法時，其餘有為法就被說了，應當這樣作義理的結合。

Kiccato ca lakkhaṇato cātiādīsu ca-saddena sahacaraṇasamānahetutādayo saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā . Sahacaraṇādīsu ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ 『『nānattakāyanānattasaññino (dī. ni. 3.341, 357, 359; a. ni. 9.24), nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā』』tiādīsu sahacāritāya saññāsahagatā dhammā niddhāritātiādinā vuttameva.

『『Ekasmiṃ dhamme sarūpato vutte ekalakkhaṇādito avasiṭṭhadhammānampi vuttabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena avasiṭṭhadhammānampi vuttabhāvena 『『vuttamhi ekadhamme』』tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āyasmā mahākaccāno āha, tena vacanena tumhehi avasiṭṭhānampi vuttabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.

『『Ettāvatā ca lakkhaṇahāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto lakkhaṇo hāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhadhammāpi yena lakkhaṇahārena niddhāritā, tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so lakkhaṇo hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yojitoti attho daṭṭhabboti.

Iti lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

在"作用和特徵"等中，應當理解"和"字包含了俱起、同因等。在俱起等中應當說的內容，已經在"異身異想者，由於不作意異想"等中通過共存的方式確定了具有想的諸法等方式說過了。 由於可以說"在一法以自相被說時，我們應當如何知道和確信由於同一特徵等其餘諸法也被說了"，所以說"由此"等。其中，由於其餘諸法也被說了，所以說具壽大迦旃延說"在說一法時"等這些話，這意味著你們應當由這些話而知道和確信其餘的也被說了。 由於可以說"到此為止相特徵法已經完整，沒有其他的應用"，所以說"相特徵法已被應用"。其中，應當理解其意思是：在某個聖典中，當說了一法時，由相特徵法而確定了其餘諸法，在那個聖典中，那個相特徵法被應用、被確定、被結合。 如是在相特徵法分別中 隨能力所作的解釋已結束。 但是智者們應當依據註釋書和復注書詳細分別深奧的意義而理解。 6.四展轉法分別解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgena suttatthehi samānatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo catubyūho hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu. Katamoti katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso catubyūho hāro catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『tattha katamo catubyūho hāroti catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 25). 『『Iminā catubyūhahārena katamassa neruttādayo gavesitabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『byañjanenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha byañjanenāti catubyūhahārassa suttassa visesato byañjanavicayabhāvato 『『byañjanā』』ti vohāritena iminā catubyūhahārena suttassa neruttañca, suttassa adhippāyo ca, suttassa nidānañca, suttassa pubbāparasandhi ca saṃvaṇṇentehi gavesitabboti attho.

『『Catubyūhahārena gavesitabbesu neruttādīsu katamaṃ suttassa gavesitabbaṃ nerutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ nerutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – tattha tesu iminā catubyūhahārena gavesitabbesu neruttādīsu katamaṃ suttassa neruttaṃ nibbacanaṃ nāmāti ce puccheyya? Suttassa yā nirutti niddhāretvā vuttā sabhāvapaññatti gavesitabbā, idaṃ sabhāvaniruttibhūtaṃ nibbacanaṃ neruttaṃ nāmāti. 『『Yā nirutti neruttaṃ nāmāti vuttā, kā pana sā niruttī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『padasaṃhitā』』ti vuttaṃ. Padesu saṃhitā yuttā padasaṃhitā. Yathā yathā suttattho vattabbo, tathā tathā yā sabhāvanirutti pavattā, sā pavattā sabhāvaniruttiyeva nirutti nāmāti yojanā. 『『Kā pana sā sabhāvaniruttī』』ti pucchitabbattā ca 『『yaṃ dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa』』nti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ yāya kāraṇabhūtāya nāmapaññattiyā dhammānaṃ neyyānaṃ nāmaso pathavīnāmādinā vā phassanāmādinā vā khandhanāmādinā vā vividhena nāmena atthadhammādīsu kusalassa puggalassa ñāṇaṃ pavattati, sā kāraṇabhūtā nāmapaññatti sabhāvanirutti nāmāti attho. Yanti ca liṅgavipallāso, yāyāti attho. 『『Liṅgapakatidhammānaṃ nāmaso pavattamānaṃ ñāṇaṃ vivaritvā kathehī』』ti vattabbattā 『『yadā hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『yadā hi bhikkhūtiādinā 『dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa』nti padassa atthaṃ vivaratī』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 25) vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vibhajitvā vuttovāti na vicārito.

通過哪個特別的讚頌和相特徵法分別，從經典意義中分別出同義內容，哪個特別的讚頌和相特徵法分別就是完整的。由於可以問"什麼是四展轉法"，所以說"在那裡什麼是四展轉"等。在那裡，"在那裡"是指已經解釋的十六種說法等。"什麼"是應當了知為什麼是特別讚頌的四展轉法、四展轉法分別的名稱。因此說"在那裡什麼是四展轉法，即四展轉法分別"。由於可以問"通過這個四展轉法應當探求什麼的語源等"，所以說"通過語句"等。其中，"通過語句"是因為四展轉法的經典特別是語句辨析的緣故，以"語句"來稱說，通過這個四展轉法應當探求經典的語源、經典的意圖、經典的序言、經典的前後連線等，這是其意義。 由於可以問"在通過四展轉法應當探求的語源等中，應當探求經典的什麼語源"，所以說"在那裡什麼是語源"等。其意義是：在這些通過四展轉法應當探求的語源等中，如果問"經典的什麼是語源、詞源"？應當探求經典被確定的語源、本性的稱說。這被稱為語源、詞源的本性。由於可以問"什麼是這個語源"，所以說"詞語聯繫"。詞語聯繫是在詞語中聯繫、結合。如經典意義應當說明，如是本性語源就被開展，這就是本性語源。由於可以問"什麼是本性語源"，所以說"這是諸法名稱的智慧"。通過作為原因的名稱稱說，對於可被引導的諸法，以地名等或觸名等或蘊名等各種名稱，善巧的人對於義理等的智慧得以開展，這作為原因的名稱稱說就是本性語源的意思。"什麼"和"語言變化"，這是其意義。由於可以說"展開語言、本性、諸法的名稱智慧的說明"，所以說"當"等。在註釋中說"當比丘等"是展開"諸法名稱的智慧"這個詞語的意義。其意義在註釋中已經分別說明，所以未作詳細考察。

1. Neruttaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ 『『katamo sutte gavesitabbo bhagavato adhippāyo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo adhippāyo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho pākaṭo. Apica 『『dhammo have rakkhatī』』tiādīsu yena puggalena attanā rakkhitena dhammena rakkhitabbabhāvo icchito, so dhammaṃ rakkhissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo. Yo puggalo duggatito muccitukāmo, so dhammaṃ rakkhissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo.

Coro yathā sandhimukhe gahitotiādīsu yo coro ghātanato muccitukāmo, so corakammaṃ na karissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo. Yo puggalo apāyādidukkhato muccitukāmo, so pāpakammaṃ na karissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo.

Sukhakāmānītiādīsu ye puggalā sukhaṃ icchanti, te parahiṃsanato vivajjissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.

Middhī yadā hoti mahagghaso cātiādīsu ye puggalā punappunaṃ pavattamānajātijarāmaraṇato muccitukāmā, te bhojane mattaññuno bhavissanti, santuṭṭhā bhavissanti, suddhājīvā bhavissanti, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasampannā bhavissanti, atandino bhavissanti, vipassakā bhavissanti, sagāravā sappatissā bhavissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.

Appamādo amatapadantiādīsu ye puggalā maccuno bhāyanti, nibbānamicchanti, te puggalā dānasīlabhāvanākammesu appamattā bhavissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.

1. Sutte gavesitabbo adhippāyo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca viññāto, 『『katamaṃ suttassa gavesitabbaṃ nidāna』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ nidāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nidānanti phalaṃ nīharitvā detīti nidānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Kāraṇaṃ. Dhaniyoti dhanavaḍḍhanakāraṇe niyuttoti dhaniyo. Gopālakoti gāvo issarabhāvena pāleti rakkhatīti gopālako. Upadhīhīti puttagoṇādīhi (su. ni. aṭṭha.

語源已被導師分別，我們也已經了知。由於可以問"應當在經中探求世尊的什麼意圖"，所以說"在那裡什麼是意圖"等。其意義明顯。 而且在"法實在保護"等中，對於那些想要被自己所護持的法所保護的人，世尊的意圖是他將護持法。對於那些想要從惡趣解脫的人，世尊的意圖是他將護持法。 在"如同盜賊在入口被抓"等中，對於那些想要從殺害中解脫的盜賊，世尊的意圖是他將不作盜賊行為。對於那些想要從墮落等苦中解脫的人，世尊的意圖是他將不作惡業。 在"欲求快樂"等中，對於那些希望快樂的人，世尊的意圖是他們將遠離傷害他人。 在"昏沉又貪食"等中，對於那些想要從一再生起的生老死中解脫的人，世尊的意圖是他們將成為飲食知量者，將成為知足者，將成為清凈活命者，將成為具足別解脫律儀戒者，將成為精進者，將成為觀察者，將成為恭敬隨順者。 在"不放逸是不死道"等中，對於那些害怕死亡、希求涅槃的人，世尊的意圖是這些人將在佈施、持戒、修習等行為中不放逸。 27. 經中應當探求的意圖已被導師分別，我們也已了知。由於可以問"應當探求經典的什麼序言"，所以說"在那裡什麼是序言"等。其中，"序言"是因為引出果而給予，所以稱為序言。是什麼？是原因。"牧牛者提尼亞"是因為從事增長財富的原因而稱為提尼亞。"牧人"是因為以主人的身份保護、守護牛而稱為牧人。"依止"是兒子、牛等。

1.33). Narassāti puttimantassa vā gopālakassa vā narassāti ca padaṭṭhānavasena vā yebhuyyavasena vā gāthāyaṃ āgatavasena vā vuttaṃ, nāriyāpi upadhīhi nandanā atthevāti daṭṭhabbā.

Iminā vatthunāti upadhisaṅkhātena imināva puttagavādinā vatthunā. Vasati pavattati nandanā ettha puttagoṇādiketi vatthu. Nandanaṃ nīharitvā deti puttagoṇādikanti nidānanti atthaṃ gahetvā dhaniyo 『『upadhīhi narassa nandanā』』ti āha. Bhagavā pana 『『vasati pavattati socanā ettha puttagoṇādikehi vatthu, socanaṃ nīharitvā deti puttagoṇādikanti nidāna』』nti atthaṃ gahetvā 『『upadhīhi narassa socanā』』ti āha. Pariggahīyateti pariggahaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Puttagoṇādikaṃ, taṃ pariggahaṃ 『『upadhī』』ti āha, na kilesūpadhikāyakhandhūpadhinti.

Upadhīsūti khandhasaṅkhātesu kāyesu. Kāyaṃ 『『upadhī』』ti āha, na puttagavādikaṃ, na pariggahaṃ.

Bāhiresuvatthūsūti maṇikuṇḍalaputtadārādīsu vatthūsu.

Kāmasukhanti kāmanīyesu assādasukhavasena pavattā taṇhā. Bāhiravatthukāya taṇhāyāti kāmanīyesu bāhiravatthūsu assādasukhavasena pavattāya taṇhāya.

Ajjhattikavatthukāyāti rūpakāyasaṅkhāte ajjhattikavatthumhi abhinandanavasena pavattāya.

Puna ajjhattikavatthukāyāti pañcakkhandhasaṅkhāte ajjhattikavatthumhi sinehavasena pavattāya.

Gavesitabbaṃ nidānaṃ vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamo gavesitabbo pubbāparasandhī』』ti pucchitabbattā tattha katamo pubbāparasandhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu neruttādhippāyanidānapubbāparasandhīsu. Yathāti yena andhakārādinā sabhāvena 『『kāmandhā…pe… mātara』』nti yaṃ kāmataṇhaṃ bhagavā āha, ayaṃ kāmataṇhā tathā tena andhakārādinā sabhāvena 『『kāmandhā…pe… mātara』』nti gāthā vuttāti yojanā.

Gāthāttho pana – kāmetīti kāmo, kāmataṇhā, kāmena atthassa ajānanatāya dhammassa, apassanatāya ca andhāti kāmandhā. Kāmataṇhāsaṅkhātena jālena atthadhammānaṃ ajānanāpassanena sañchannā paliguṇṭhitāti jālasañchannā. Taṇhāsaṅkhātena chadanena tesaṃyeva atthadhammānaṃ ajānanāpassanena chāditā pihitāti taṇhāchadanachāditā. Atthadhammesu pamattasaṅkhātena pamādena bandhanena baddhā bandhitabbā puggalā jarāmaraṇaṃ anventi, kumināmukhe pavattā macchā maraṇaṃ anventi iva ca, khīrapako vaccho mātaraṃ anveti iva ca, tathā jarāmaraṇaṃ anventīti gahetabbo.

『『Kāmandhā…pe… mātara』nti yāya desanāya, gāthāya vā kāmataṇhā vuttā, sā desanā, gāthā vā katamena desanābhūtena aparena yujjatī』』ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā imāya desanāya, gāthāya vā yujjatīti dassetuṃ 『『sā katamenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāti 『『kāmandhā…pe… anventī』』ti desanā, gāthā vā. Pubbāparenāti tato desanāto pubbena desanāvacanena, gāthāvacanena vā aparena desanāvacanena, gāthāvacanena vā. Yujjati yujjanaṃ eti sametīti pucchati.

Yathāti yena andhakaraṇādinā. 『『Ratto…pe… nara』』nti yaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ bhagavā āha, tena gāthāvacanena tathā andhakaraṇādinā yujjatīti yojanā. Gāthāttho pana – ratto rañjanto puggalo atthaṃ attahitapayojanaṃ parahitapayojanaṃ na jānāti. Ratto rañjanto dhammaṃ yathāvuttassa atthassa hetuṃ paññācakkhunā na passati. Rāgo yaṃ naraṃ yadā sahate, tadā tassa narassa andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ aññāṇaṃ hotīti gahetabbo.

1. (續) "對人"是對於有子的或牧人的男人,或者是根據詞基或大多數情況或偈頌中出現的方式而說的,應當理解對女人來說依止也有喜悅。 "以這個事物"是以這被稱為依止的兒子牛等事物。事物是喜悅在其中生起、轉起的兒子牛等。依止引出給予喜悅,因此是序言,取這個意思,提尼亞說"人依止而有喜悅"。但世尊取"憂愁在兒子牛等中生起、轉起,事物引出給予憂愁,因此是序言"的意思,說"人依止而有憂愁"。被執取為執取,是什麼?兒子牛等,說那執取是"依止",不是煩惱依止和身蘊依止。 "在諸依止中"是在被稱為蘊的諸身中。說身是"依止",不是兒子牛等,不是執取。 "在外在諸事物中"是在珠寶耳環兒子妻子等事物中。 "欲樂"是在可愛的事物中以快樂方式轉起的貪愛。"外在事物的貪愛"是在可愛的外在事物中以快樂方式轉起的貪愛。 "內在事物的"是在被稱為色身的內在事物中以歡喜方式轉起的。 再次"內在事物的"是在被稱為五蘊的內在事物中以愛著方式轉起的。 應當探求的序言已被分別,我們也已了知。由於可以問"應當探求什麼前後連貫",所以說"在那裡什麼是前後連貫"等。其中,"在那裡"是指在那些語源、意圖、序言、前後連貫中。"如"是以那種黑暗等自性,世尊說"欲貪...乃至...母親"的那個欲愛,這個欲愛以那種黑暗等自性而說"欲貪...乃至...母親"偈頌,這是結合。 偈頌的意思是:欲求為欲,即欲愛,因欲而不知義、不見法,故為欲盲。被稱為欲愛的網覆蓋,由於不知不見義法而被纏裹、包圍,稱為網覆。被稱為貪愛的遮蔽所遮蔽,由於不知不見那些義法而被掩蓋、遮蔽,稱為貪愛遮蔽所遮蔽。應當理解為:在義法中被稱為放逸的不放逸所束縛的諸人追隨老死,如入網口的魚追隨死亡,如飲乳的小牛追隨母親,如是追隨老死。 由於可以問"'欲貪...乃至...母親'這個說法或偈頌中說欲愛,那個說法或偈頌與哪個其他說法相應",所以這樣問了之後,爲了顯示與這個說法或偈頌相應,說"它與什麼"等。其中,"它"是"欲貪...乃至...追隨"的說法或偈頌。"前後"是與那個說法之前的說法文或偈頌文,或之後的說法文或偈頌文。問是否相應、結合、一致。 "如"是以那

Itīti evaṃ. Andhatāya andhakaraṇatāya sañchannatāya sañchannakaraṇatāya. Sāyeva taṇhāti 『『kāmandhā…pe… mātara』』nti gāthāvacanena yā kāmataṇhā vuttā, sāyeva kāmataṇhā. Abhilapitāti 『『ratto…pe… nara』』nti aparena gāthāvacanena bhagavatā vohāritā voharaṇena ñāpitā, abhilapitassa atthassa samānatā pubbadesanā aparadesanāya yujjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.

『『Dvīsu gāthāsu katamehi padehi sāyeva taṇhā abhilapitā』』ti pucchitabbattā imehi abhilapitāti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『yañcāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamagāthāyaṃ 『『kāmandhā…pe… chāditā』』ti yañca padaṃ āha, dutiyagāthāyañca 『『ratto…pe… na passatī』』ti yañca padaṃ āha. Pariyuṭṭhānehi pariyuṭṭhānadīpakehi imehi 『『kāmandhā…pe… passatī』』ti padehi sāyeva paṭhamagāthāya vuttā kāmataṇhā ca bhagavatā abhilapitā.

『『Yaṃ andhakāraṃ vuttaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yā taṇhā ponobhavikā vuttā, katamā sā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yaṃ andhakāra』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha andhakāraṃ yaṃ aññāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo bhave. Yā ca taṇhā ponobhavikā vuttā, ayañca dukkhasamudayo bhaveti yojanā.

『『Kāmā』』ti yañca padaṃ bhagavā āha, tena padena ime kilesakāmā vuttā. 『『Jālasañchannā』』ti yañca padaṃ bhagavā āha, tena padena tesaṃyeva kilesakāmānaṃ payogena samudācārena pariyuṭṭhānaṃ bhagavā dasseti. Tasmāti yasmā yasmiṃ santāne taṇhā uppannā, taṃ santānaṃ saṃsārato nissarituṃ adatvā rūpārammaṇādīhi palobhayamānā hutvā cittaṃ kilesehi pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, tasmā taṇhāya cittaṃ pariyādāya santāne tiṭṭhamānattā. Kilesavasenāti vītikkamakilesavasena. Pariyuṭṭhānavasenāti vītikkamanaṃ appatvā uppajjamānavasena. Yeti vuttappakārataṇhāsahitapuggalasadisā. Teti te taṇhābandhanabaddhā ca edisakā ca puggalā. Jarāmaraṇaṃ anventi jarāmaraṇaṃ atikkamituṃ na sakkuṇanti. Ayanti jarāmaraṇānuppavatti 『『jarāmaraṇamanventī』』ti iminā vacanena bhagavatā dassitāti yojanā.

『『Kāmandhā』』tiādigāthāya ceva 『『ratto』』tiādigāthāya ca pubbāparasandhi ācariyena vibhatto , amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ 『yassa papañcā ṭhitī cā』tiādigāthāsu pubbāparasandhi amhehi viññātabbo』』ti vattabbattā yassa papañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassā gāthāya – yassa munino papañcā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhī ca natthi, taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi abhisaṅkhatā saṅkhārā ca natthi, ṭhitī anusayā taṇhā ca natthi, sandānasadisaṃ taṇhāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ natthi, palighasadiso moho ca natthi, so muni papañcādikaṃ sabbaṃ vītivatto atikkantoti vuccati. Nittaṇhaṃ nimānaṃ nidiṭṭhiṃ nisandānaṃ nipalighaṃ loke carantaṃ taṃ muniṃ sadevako taṇhāsahito loko na vijānātīti attho.

這樣以黑暗性、令黑暗性、覆蓋性、令覆蓋性。那個貪愛即是在"欲貪...乃至...母親"偈頌中所說的欲愛,正是那個欲愛。"被表述"是被世尊以"貪著...乃至...人"的后一偈頌所說明、以說明而使人了知,意思是被表述的意義相同,前說法與后說法相應。 由於可以問"在兩個偈頌中以哪些詞語表述同一個貪愛",爲了確定並顯示以這些詞語表述,所以說"所說的"等。其中,在第一偈頌中說"欲貪...乃至...遮蔽"這個詞,在第二偈頌中說"貪著...乃至...不見"這個詞。以這些顯示纏縛的"欲貪...乃至...不見"等詞,世尊表述了在第一偈頌中所說的同一個欲愛。 由於可以問"所說的是什麼黑暗?所說的是什麼後有的貪愛?",所以說"什麼黑暗"等。其中,所說的黑暗是無知,這是苦集。所說的後有貪愛,這也是苦集,這是結合。 世尊說"欲"這個詞,以這個詞說這些煩惱欲。世尊說"網覆"這個詞,以這個詞顯示那些煩惱欲的行使、現行的纏縛。因此,因為在哪個相續中生起貪愛,不讓那個相續從輪迴出離,成為以色所緣等誘惑,以煩惱佔據心而住立,所以因為貪愛佔據心而住立在相續中。"以煩惱"是以違犯煩惱。"以纏縛"是未到違犯而生起。"那些"是如所說的具有貪愛的諸人。"他們"是那些被貪愛束縛和如是的諸人。追隨老死,不能超越老死。世尊以"追隨老死"這個說法顯示這個老死的生起,這是結合。 "欲貪"等偈頌和"貪著"等偈頌的前後連貫已被導師分別,我們也已了知。由於可以說"我們應當如何了知'誰的戲論和住立'等偈頌的前後連貫",所以說"誰的戲論"等。那個偈頌的意思是:對於哪位牟尼沒有戲論即貪愛、我慢、見,沒有由貪愛、我慢、見所造作的諸行,沒有住立即潛在的貪愛,沒有如繫縛的貪愛纏縛,沒有如門閂的愚癡,那位牟尼被說為已超越一切戲論等。天人世界具有貪愛的世間不了知那位在世間中行走的無貪愛、無我慢、無見、無繫縛、無門閂的牟尼。

Gāthāyaṃ papañcādayo bhagavatā vuttā, 『『katame te』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『papañcā nāmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Attano ādhārapuggalaṃ saṃsāre ciraṃ papañcantāpentī taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo ca, tāhi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi sahajātavasena vā upatthambhanavasena vā abhisaṅkhatā saṅkhārā ca papañcā nāma. Santāne appahīnaṭṭhena anusayā taṇhā sattānaṃ tiṭṭhanahetuttā ṭhitī nāma. Pavattamānāya taṇhāya yaṃ pariyuṭṭhānañca chattiṃsataṇhāya jāliniyā yāni vicaritāni ca vuttāni, idaṃ sabbaṃ attano ādhāraṃ puggalaṃ bandhanaṭṭhena sandānasadisattā sandānaṃ nāma. Moho attano ādhārassa puggalassa nibbānanagarappavesanassa paṭisedhakattā palighasadisattā paligho nāma. 『『Yassa papañcādayo natthi, so kiṃ vītivatto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ye cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye vuttappakārā papañcā saṅkhārā, yā ca vuttappakārā ṭhiti, yaṃ vuttappakāraṃ sandānañca, yaṃ vuttappakāraṃ palighañca natthīti vuttā, sabbaṃ etaṃ papañcādikaṃ yo muni samatikkanto, ayaṃ muni 『『nittaṇho』』ti vuccatīti daṭṭhabbo.

偈頌中世尊說了戲論等,由於可以問"它們是什麼",所以說"名為戲論"等。使自己的所依之人在輪迴中長久延滯的貪愛、我慢、見,以及被那些貪愛、我慢、見以俱生方式或支援方式所造作的諸行,稱為戲論。以未斷除而住于相續中的意義為潛在貪愛,因為是眾生住立的原因而稱為住立。已說轉起的貪愛的纏縛和三十六種網狀貪愛的種種遊行,這一切因為如同束縛而約束自己所依的人,所以稱為繫縛。愚癡因為阻礙自己所依的人進入涅槃之城,所以如同門閂而稱為門閂。由於可以問"誰沒有戲論等,他超越了什麼",所以說"以及那些"等。應當理解為:所說那些戲論行,所說那種住立,所說那種繫縛,所說那種門閂都不存在,哪位牟尼超越了這一切戲論等,這位牟尼被稱為"無貪愛者"。

1. 『『Yassa papañcātiādigāthāyaṃ ye papañcādayo vuttā, tesu taṇhāmānadiṭṭhihetukā saṅkhārā kadā katividhaṃ phalaṃ denti, taṃsaṅkhārasampayuttā taṇhā kadā katividhaṃ phalaṃ detī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu papañcasaṅkhārādīsu. Pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārāti vītikkamavasena pavattā pariyuṭṭhānā akusalasaṅkhārā cetanā. Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādīti diṭṭhe passitabbe dhamme attabhāve vedanīyaṃ phalaṃ detīti diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā, diṭṭhe dhamme phalaṃ vedetīti vā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā. Kā sā? Apadussanīyādīsu atidussanādivasena pavattā paṭhamajavanacetanā. Upapajje phalaṃ vedetīti upapajjavedanīyā, sattamajavanacetanā. Aparāpariyāye attabhāve phalaṃ vedetīti aparāpariyāyavedanīyā, majjhe pavattā pañca javanacetanā. Tiphaladānavasena tividhā saṅkhārā. Evaṃ imāya tividhāya saṅkhāracetanāya sampayuttā tividhā taṇhā tividhaṃ phalaṃ diṭṭhe vā dhamme attabhāve , upapajje vā anantarabhave, apare vā pariyāye bhave deti nibbattetīti evaṃ phalanibbattakasaṅkhāraṃ vā taṃsampayuttaṃ taṇhaṃ vā bhagavā āha.

『『Yāya desanāya, gāthāya vā phalanibbattakaṃ saṅkhāraṃ āha, sā desanā, gāthā vā katamena desanābhūtena vā aparena yujjatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ karotī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā 『『yassa…pe… loko』』ti desanā ca yā 『『yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ…pe… apare vā pariyāye』』ti desanā ca vuttā, bhagavato idaṃ desanādvayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pubbāparena pubbaṃ aparena aparaṃ pubbena yujjati yujjanaṃ eti sameti, yathā gaṅgodakaṃ yamunodakena, yamunodakampi gaṅgodakena saṃsandati sameti. 『『Yassa…pe… loko』』ti desanā 『『yaṃ lobhapakataṃ…pe… pariyāye』』ti desanāya saṃsandati sameti, 『『yaṃ lobhapakataṃ…pe… pariyāye』』ti desanāpi 『『yassa…pe… loko』』ti desanāya saṃsandati sametīti attho gahetabbo. 『『Kathaṃ yujjatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha pariyuṭṭhāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ, diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādiphalattayanibbattakaṭṭhena yujjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ pubbāparena yujjati, taṃ taṃ suttampi nīharitvā pubbāparasaṃsandanaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yathāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṃsandanākāro vuttanayānusārena gahetabbo. Tatthāti tesu pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārataṇhāvicaritesu. Pariyuṭṭhānanti rūpārammaṇādīni ayonisomanasikārena ārabbha sattasantāne pavattaṃ taṇhācaritaṃ. Paṭisaṅkhānabalenāti asubhāniccādidassanabalena tadaṅgappahānavasena pahātabbaṃ. Saṅkhārāti dassanapahātabbā saṅkhārā. Dassanabalenāti dassanasaṅkhātapaṭhamamaggañāṇabalena pahātabbā. Chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritānīti dassanena pahātabbataṇhāvicaritehi avasesāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni. Niggatā taṇhā yassa so nittaṇho, nittaṇhassa bhāvo nittaṇhatā, kā sā? Saupādisesā nibbānadhātu.

Papañcasaṅkhārābhinandanattayaṃ yadipi atthato ekaṃ samānaṃ, desanāya pana padakkharādīhi viseso atthīti dassetuṃ 『『apicā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

1. 由於可以問"'誰的戲論'等偈頌中所說的那些戲論等,其中由貪愛、我慢、見為因的諸行何時給予幾種果報,與那些行相應的貪愛何時給予幾種果報",所以說"其中纏縛諸行"等。其中,"其中"是在那些戲論行等中。"纏縛諸行"是以違犯方式轉起的纏縛,即不善行的思。"現法受等"是在現見的法中,在此生中受果報,稱為現法受,或者在現見的法中感受果報,稱為現法受。是什麼?在不應嗔恚等中以過度嗔恚等方式轉起的第一速行思。在來生感受果報,稱為次生受,即第七速行思。在其他生中感受果報,稱為後後受,即中間轉起的五個速行思。以給予三種果報的方式成為三種行。如是與這三種行思相應的三種貪愛給予三種果報,或在現法即此生中,或在次生即下一生中,或在其他生中產生果報,如是世尊說產生果報的行或與之相應的貪愛。 由於可以問"以哪個說法或偈頌說產生果報的行,那個說法或偈頌與哪個其他說法相應",所以說"作貪所造的業"等。說"誰...乃至...世間"的說法和"作貪所造的業...乃至...其他生"的說法,世尊的這兩個說法互相以前後、以前對后、以後對前而相應、結合、一致,如恒河水與閻牟那河水、閻牟那河水與恒河水相混合、一致。應當理解其意思是:"誰...乃至...世間"的說法與"作貪所造...乃至...其他生"的說法相混合、一致,"作貪所造...乃至...其他生"的說法也與"誰...乃至...世間"的說法相混合、一致。由於可以問"如何相應",所以說"其中纏縛"等,意思是以產生現法受等三果的意義而相應。 爲了顯示世尊所說的每一經典以前後相應,抽出那些經典顯示前後混合,所以說"如說"等。混合的方式應當依照所說的方法理解。"其中"是在那些纏縛行和貪愛行中。"纏縛"是以不如理作意緣取色所緣等而在有情相續中轉起的貪愛行。"以思惟力"是以不凈無常等觀察的力量,以彼分斷除的方式應當斷除。"諸行"是以見應斷除的諸行。"以見力"是以稱為見的初道智的力量應當斷除。"三十六種貪愛行"是除了以見應斷除的貪愛行之外的其餘三十六種貪愛行。離去貪愛者稱為無貪,無貪的狀態為無貪性,是什麼?是有餘依涅槃界。 雖然戲論、行、三種歡喜在意義上是相同的一個,但在說法上以詞字等有差別,爲了顯示這一點,所以說"而且"等。

『『Yoyaṃ pubbāparasandhi ācariyena vibhatto, soyaṃ katividho』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so cāyaṃ pubbāparo sandhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – 『『na kevalaṃ suttantarasaṃsandanameva pubbāparasandhi, atha kho aññopi atthīti dassetuṃ 『so cāya』ntiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 28). Tattha atthasandhīti kiriyākārakādivasena atthassa atthena sandhi. Padasandhīti nāmapadādikassa nāmapadādikantarena sandhi. Desanāsandhīti vuttappakārassa desanantarassa vuttappakārena desanantarena sandhi. Niddesasandhīti niddesantarassa niddesantarena sandhi.

Sandhi ca nāma atthādayo muñcitvā añño sabhāvadhammo nāma natthi, atthādīnañca chaatthapadādīsu avarodhanato 『『atthasandhi chappadānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Atthasandhibyañjanasandhayo ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamā desanāsandhī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『desanāsandhi na ca pathavi』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha na ca pathaviṃ nissāya jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati cāti ettha jhāyī jhānasamaṅgī puggalo pathaviṃ nissāya ālambitvā na ca jhāyati, sabbasaṅkhāranissaṭaṃ pana nibbānaṃ nissāya ālambitvā phalasamāpattiṃ jhāyati samāpajjati evāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Na ca āpantiādīsupi esa nayo yojetabbo. Phalasamāpattisamaṅgī puggalo hi pathavīādayo muñcitvā nibbānameva ārabbha phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjatīti. Ettha ca pathavīādīhi mahābhūtehi kāmabhavarūpabhavā gahitā rūpapaṭibaddhavuttitāya. Ākāsānañcāyatanādīhipi arūpabhavo gahito, bhavattayaṃ vajjetvā ca jhāyatīti adhippāyo. Yadi pathavīādayo nissāya na jhāyī jhāyati ca, evaṃ sati idhalokasaṅkhātaṃ sattasantānaṃ vā paralokasaṅkhātaṃ sattasantānaṃ vā anindriyasantānaṃ vā nissāya jhāyī jhāyatīti āsaṅkanīyattā taṃ pariharanto 『『na ca imaṃ loka』』ntiādimāha. Tattha imaṃ lokanti idhalokasaṅkhāto diṭṭho attabhāvo sattasantāno vutto, tasmiṃ nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca. Paralokanti idhalokato añño bhavantarasaṅkhāto sattasantāno vutto, tasmiṃ nissāya na ca jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca.

Yamidaṃ ubhayantiādīsu idaṃ ubhayaṃ idhalokaparalokadvayaṃ antarena vajjetvā yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ rūpāyatanampi. Yaṃ saddāyatanaṃ sutaṃ, taṃ saddāyatanampi. Yaṃ gandhāyatanarasāyatanaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ mutaṃ, taṃ gandhāyatanarasāyatanaphoṭṭhabbāyatanampi. Yaṃ āpodhātu ākāsadhātu lakkhaṇarūpaṃ ojāsaṅkhātaṃ dhammāyatanekadesarūpaṃ viññātaṃ, taṃ āpodhātādikaṃ dhammāyatanekadesarūpampi. Yaṃ vatthu pariyesitaṃ vā apariyesitaṃ vā santike pattaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ pariyesanārahaṃ sundaraṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu vitakkitaṃ vitakkanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu vicāritaṃ anumajjanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu manasā citteneva anucintitaṃ anucintanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati cāti yojanā kātabbā.

由於可以問"導師所分別的這種前後連貫是幾種",所以說"這個前後連貫"等。在註釋中說:"不僅僅是經典之間的混合才是前後連貫,而且還有其他的,爲了顯示這一點,所以說'這個'等"。其中,"義連貫"是以作用、作者等方式義與義的連貫。"詞連貫"是名詞等與其他名詞等的連貫。"說法連貫"是如所說方式的說法與如所說方式的其他說法的連貫。"說明連貫"是說明與其他說明的連貫。 連貫這個名稱除了義等之外沒有其他自性法,因為義等被限定在六種義詞等中,所以說"義連貫六種給予"等。 義連貫和語連貫已被導師分別,我們也已了知。由於可以問"什麼是說法連貫",所以說"說法連貫不依地"等。其中,"禪修者不依地而修禪,也修禪",這裡應當理解其意思是:具足禪那的人不依止、緣取地而修禪,而是依止、緣取出離一切行的涅槃而修禪,即入于果定。在不依水等中也應當運用這個方法。因為具足果定的人捨棄地等,只緣取涅槃而入于果定。這裡以地等大種取得欲有、色有,因為以色為繫縛而轉起。以空無邊處等也取得無色有,意思是舍離三有而修禪。如果禪修者不依地等而修禪,那麼這樣的話,可能會懷疑是否依止稱為此世的有情相續或稱為他世的有情相續或非根相續而修禪,爲了避免這種懷疑,所以說"不依此世間"等。其中,"此世間"說的是稱為此世所見的此生有情相續,禪修者不依止它而修禪,也修禪。"他世"說的是稱為從此世到其他有的其他有情相續,禪修者不依止它而修禪,也修禪。 在"這兩者"等中,應當作如下結合:這兩者即此世他世二者之間應當舍離,所見的那個色處,也不依止那個色處;所聞的那個聲處,也不依止那個聲處;所嗅嘗觸的那個香處味處觸處,也不依止那個香處味處觸處;所知的那個水界空界特相色以及稱為食素的法處所攝色,也不依止那個水界等法處所攝色;已尋求或未尋求而近得的那個事物,也不依止那個事物;已得或未得而應當尋求的美好事物,也不依止那個事物;以尋的方式應當緣取的所尋思事物,也不依止那個事物;以伺的方式應當緣取的所伺察事物,也不依止那個事物;以意即心的方式應當緣取的所思惟事物,也不依止那個事物而禪修者修禪,也修禪。

Ettha diṭṭhādikaṃ bahiddhārūpameva gahetabbaṃ anindriyabaddharūpassa adhippetattā. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo – 『『tadubhayavinimutto anindriyabaddho rūpasantāno』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 28). 『『Yadi jhāyī puggalo yathāvutte pathavīādayo nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca, evaṃ sati ayaṃ jhāyī puggalo idaṃ nāma nissāya jhāyatīti loke kenaci ñāyati kiṃ, udāhu na ñāyatī』』ti pucchitabbattā na ñāyatīti dassetuṃ 『『ayaṃ sadevake loke』』tiādimāha. Tattha phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyanto ayaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalo sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya yattha katthacipi anissitena cittena jhāyatīti sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya kenaci na ñāyatīti attho gahetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ –

『『Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama;

Yassa te nābhijānāma, kiṃ tvaṃ nissāya jhāyasī』』ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.79; netti. 104);

『『Kenaci aviññāyabhāvo kena suttena vibhāvetabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā iminā godhikasuttena (saṃ. ni. 1.159) vibhāvetabboti dassetuṃ 『『yathā māro pāpimā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『idāni khīṇāsavacittassa katthacipi anissitabhāvaṃ godhikasuttena (saṃ. ni. 1.159) vakkalisuttena (saṃ. ni.

這裡應當只取所見等外在色,因為意指不結生根的色。因此註釋師說:"超離那兩者的不結生根的色相續"。由於可以問"如果禪修者不依止如上所說的地等而修禪,也修禪,那麼這樣的話,這個禪修者依止什麼而修禪,在世

3.87) ca vibhāvetuṃ 『yathā māro』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 28) vuttaṃ. Tattha dānādipuññakārake, puññe vā māreti nivāretīti māro, attahitaparahite māretīti vā māro. Pāpacittuppādavantatāya pāpimā. Pubbattabhāve godhassa ghātakattā 『『godhiko』』ti laddhanāmassa parinibbāyantassa kulaputtassa parinibbānato uddhaṃ paṭisandhādi viññāṇaṃ samanvesanto na jānāti na passati. 『『Paracittajānanako māro kasmā na jānātī』』ti vattabbattā 『『so hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. So godhiko hi yasmā papañcātīto, tasmā taṇhāpahānena diṭṭhinissayopi assa godhikassa yasmā natthi, tasmā ca na jānātīti.

『『Godhikasutteneva vibhāvetabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yathā cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Godhikasuttavakkalisuttehi anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā anissitabhāvo vibhāvito, evaṃ sati saupādisesanibbānadhātuyā anissitabhāvo kena viññāyatīti attho bhaveyyā』』ti vattabbattā tadāpi na viññāyatiyevāti dassetuṃ 『『sadevakena lokenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyamānā ime khīṇāsavā katthaci anissitacittā jhāyantīti sadevakena lokena na ñāyanti samārakena…pe… sadevamanussāya na ñāyantīti yojanā kātabbā. Anissitacittā na ñāyantīti ettha hi na-kāro ca 『『jhāyamānā』』ti pade na sambandhitabbo 『『na jhāyamānā』』ti atthassa sambhavato. 『『Na ñāyantī』』ti pana sambandhitabbo heṭṭhā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ eva 『『loke kenacipi na ñāyatī』』ti vuttattā. Ayaṃ desanāsandhīti godhikasuttavakkalisuttānaṃ aññamaññaṃ atthavasena saṃsandanā niddhāritā viya 『『na ca pathaviṃ nissāyā』』tiādidesanāya ca 『『na ca imaṃ loka』』ntiādidesanāya ca yāya desanāya atthavasena saṃsandanā niddhāritā, tāya desanāya yattha katthaci yaṃ kiñci nissāya jhāyī na jhāyati, nibbānaṃ nissāya jhāyī jhāyatīti atthavasena niddhāritā, ayaṃ saṃsandanā desanāsandhi nāmāti attho gahetabbo.

Desanāsandhi ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamā niddesasandhī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamā niddesasandhīti nissitacittā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu catūsu atthasandhibyañjanasandhidesanāsandhiniddesasandhīsu yā sandhi 『『niddesasandhī』』ti uddiṭṭhā, sā niddesato katamāti pucchatīti attho. Nissitacittāti taṇhādiṭṭhisahajātavasena vā upanissayavasena vā nissitaṃ cittaṃ yesaṃ puthujjanānanti nissitacittā, puthujjanā puggalā niddisitabbā imāya desanāya puggalādhiṭṭhānattā. Yadi desanā dhammādhiṭṭhānā, evaṃ sati nissitaṃ cittaṃ ettha suttappadesesu desitanti nissitacittā nissitacittajānanatthāya desitā suttappadesā. Anissitaṃ cittaṃ yesaṃ ariyapuggalānanti anissitacittā, ariyapuggalā niddisitabbā imāya desanāya puggalādhiṭṭhānattā. Dhammādhiṭṭhānāya pana anissitaṃ cittaṃ yattha suttappadesesu desitanti anissitacittā, anissitacittajānanatthāya desitā suttappadesā.

3.87)而顯示,所以說'如魔'等"。其中,對行佈施等功德的人或功德進行阻礙而稱為魔,或因阻礙自利利他而稱為魔。因具有生起噁心而稱為惡者。因前生殺蜥蜴而得"護蜥"之名的善男子入般涅槃后,尋求結生等識而不知不見。由於應當說"能知他心的魔為什麼不知道",所以說"他"等。因為那護蜥超越了戲論,所以因為他以斷除貪愛而沒有見的依止,因此不知道。 由於可以問"只應以護蜥經顯示",所以說"如以及"等。由於可以說"以護蜥經和跋迦梨經顯示在無餘依涅槃界中無所依止的狀態,這樣的話,意思應該是以什麼了知在有餘依涅槃界中無所依止的狀態",爲了顯示當時也確實不了知,所以說"以具天的世間"等。其中,應當作如下結合:這些漏盡者以果定禪那在有餘依涅槃界中修禪時,心無所依止而修禪,具天的世間、具魔的...乃至...具天人的不了知。在"心無所依止不了知"這裡,"不"字不應連結于"修禪"這個詞,因為有"不修禪"的意思的可能。而應連結于"不了知",因為在前面註釋中就說"在世間任何人都不了知"。這個說法連貫即如確定護蜥經和跋迦梨經互相以義的方式混合一樣,以"不依地"等說法和"不依此世間"等說法,確定以哪個說法以義的方式混合,以那個說法確定禪修者不依止任何事物而修禪,依止涅槃而修禪的意義,應當理解這個混合稱為說法連貫。 說法連貫已被導師分別,我們也已了知。由於可以問"什麼是說明連貫",所以說"其中什麼是說明連貫:即心依止"等。其中,"其中"的意思是:在那四種義連貫、語連貫、說法連貫、說明連貫中,問以說明的方式所說的"說明連貫"是什麼。"心依止"是以貪愛見俱生的方式或以親依止的方式而有依止之心的凡夫們稱為心依止,應當說明是諸凡夫補特伽羅,因為這個說法是以人為根本的。如果說法是以法為根本,那麼這樣心依止是在這些經文處所說的,稱為心依止,是爲了了知心依止而說的經文處。"心無依止"是心無所依止的諸聖者稱為心無依止,應當說明是諸聖補特伽羅,因為這個說法是以人為根本。但對以法為根本的,心無所依止是在哪些經文處所說的,稱為心無依止,是爲了了知心無依止而說的經文處。

『『Nissitacittā kena niddesena niddisitabbā, anissitacittā kena niddesena niddisitabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『nissitacittā akusalapakkhena niddisitabbā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Akusalapakkhena niddesena niddisitabbā. Kusalapakkhenātiādīsupi esa nayo yojetabbo. Akusalapakkhasāmaññakusalapakkhasāmaññehi dassetvā akusalavisesakusalavisesehi dassetuṃ 『『nissitacittā saṃkilesenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ niddesasandhīti akusalapakkhādikassa purimaniddesassa saṃkilesādikena pacchimena niddesena nissitacittavasena ayaṃ saṃsandanā ca niddesasandhi nāma. Kusalapakkhādikassa purimassa niddesassa vodānādikena pacchimena niddesena anissitacittavasena ayaṃ saṃsandanā ca niddesasandhi nāmāti vibhajitvā veditabbā.

『『Catubyūhahārassa neruttamadhippāyanidānapubbāparasandhippabhedena ceva atthabyañjanasandhiniddesasandhidesanāsandhippabhedena ca vibhajitabbabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena tathā vibhajitabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno 『『neruttamadhippāyo』』tiādikaṃ (netti. 4 hārasaṅkhepa) yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi catubyūhahārassa tathā vibhajitabbabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.

『『Ettāvatā ca catubyūhahāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto catubyūho hāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ yo yo catubbidho, so so catubyūhahāro ca yathālābhavasena yojito, tassaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so so catubbidho catubyūhahāro tathā niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.

Iti catubyūhahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

由於可以問"這個被導師分別的前後連貫是幾種",所以說"而這個前後連貫"等。註釋中說:"不僅是經典之間的混合才是前後連貫,而且還有其他的,爲了顯示這一點,所以說'而這個'等"。其中,"義連貫"是以作用、作者等方式義與義的連貫。"詞連貫"是名詞等與其他名詞等的連貫。"說法連貫"是如所說方式的說法與如所說方式的其他說法的連貫。"解說連貫"是解說與其他解說的連貫。 連貫這個名稱除了義等之外並沒有其他自性法,因為義等包含在六義詞等中,所以說"義連貫有六詞"等。

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena catubyūhahāravibhaṅgena neruttādayo vibhattā, so…pe… catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo āvaṭṭo hāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā tattha katamo āvaṭṭo hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭo hāro āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Ekamhi padaṭṭhāne』』ntiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『ārambhathā』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahito. 『『Tattha desanāyaṃ ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesati, pariyesitvā kathaṃ paṭipakkhe āvaṭṭetī』』ti vattabbattā –

『『Ārambhatha nikkamatha, yuñjatha buddhasāsane;

Dhunātha maccuno senaṃ, naḷāgāraṃva kuñjaro』』ti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Idha gāthāyaṃ ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Gāthāttho pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 29) vutto.

『『Ārambhathā』tiādigāthāyaṃ katarasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe katamaṃ sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha 『『vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna』』nti sāmaññavasena vuttampi ārambhadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ nikkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, nikkamadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ parakkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, parakkamadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ samathabhāvanāsahitassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānantiādinā pariyesitabbanti gahetabbaṃ. 『『Yuñjathā』』ti iminā vuttaṃ samathabhāvanāsahitaṃ vīriyaṃ 『『buddhasāsane』』ti iminā vuttassa mahaggatasamādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ, desanāruḷhaṃ sukhādikaṃ sesakampi padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. 『『Dhunātha maccuno sena』』nti padena gahitaṃ vipassanāsahitaṃ vīriyaṃ kilesadhunane samatthāya paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, desanāruḷhaṃ samādhiādikaṃ sesakampi padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ.

『『Yadi 『ārambhathā』tiādikaṃ vuttaṃ vīriyaṃ sāmaññabhūtānaṃ vīriyasamādhipaññānaṃyeva padaṭṭhānaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati kathaṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ chinditvā vivaṭṭaṃ pāpessantī』』ti vattabbattā puna 『『ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyindriyassa padaṭṭhāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ādhipaccakiccatāya yuttassāpi vīriyādhikassa padaṭṭhānattā ārabhantā yogāvacarapuggalā vaṭṭamūlaṃ chinditvā vivaṭṭaṃ pāpentīti vuttaṃ hoti. 『『Ārambhathā』』tiādikā pana yasmā vīriyārambhavatthuādidesanā hoti, tasmā ārambhavatthuādīniyeva saṃvaṇṇitāni padaṭṭhānanti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha 『『imāni padaṭṭhānāni desanā』』ti. 『『Ārambhathā』』tiādikā yathāvuttapadaṭṭhānāni desanā hoti, na vīriyārambhavatthuādīni, tasmā padaṭṭhānaṃyeva saṃvaṇṇitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Evaṃ 『『ārambhathā』』tiādidesanāya padaṭṭhānavasena attho vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ tassāyeva desanāya paṭipakkhavasena attho vibhajitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『ayuñjantānaṃ vā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yoge bhāvanāyaṃ ayuñjantānaṃ sattānaṃ aparipakkañāṇānaṃ yoge yogahetu vāsanābhāgiyavasena āyatiṃ jānanatthāya 『『ārambhathā』』tiādidesanā āraddhā. Yuñjantānaṃ paripakkañāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ ārambhe ārambhahetu diṭṭheva dhamme parijānanatthāya 『『ārambhathā』』tiādidesanā āraddhā.

1. 以四分類方法分別的任何特殊註釋來解釋詞源等,那個...乃至...四分類方法分別已完成。由於可以問"什麼是返轉方法分別",所以說"其中什麼是返轉方法"等。其中,"其中"是在已說明的十六種說法方法等中,問什麼特殊註釋稱為返轉方法、返轉方法分別。現在我將要說"精進"等是詳細註釋的特殊內容,這稱為返轉方法分別,所取的是"在一個立足處"等說明。由於應當說"在那裡的說法中,當一個立足處被說法提起時,尋求其餘立足處,尋求后如何轉向對立面",所以說偈頌: "奮進與出離,修習佛陀教, 摧毀死魔軍,如象破草屋。" 在這裡意思是說:在偈頌中當一個立足處被說法提起時,尋求其餘立足處。偈頌的意思在註釋中已說。 由於應當說"在'奮進'等偈頌中,當哪個立足處被說法提起時,尋求哪些其餘立足處",所以說"'奮進出離'是精進的立足處"等。其中,雖然一般而言說"精進的立足處",但應當理解為:稱為開始界的精進是稱為出離界的精進的立足處,稱為出離界的精進是稱為精勤界的精進的立足處,稱為精勤界的精進是與止修相應的精進的立足處等,應當如此尋求。以"修習"說的與止修相應的精進是以"佛陀教"說的廣大定的立足處,應當尋求說法提起的樂等其餘立足處。以"摧毀死魔軍"這詞所取的與觀修相應的精進是能摧毀煩惱的智慧的立足處,應當尋求說法提起的定等其餘立足處。 由於應當說"如果所說的'奮進'等精進只是一般性的精進、定、慧的立足處,這樣的話,如何能夠切斷輪迴之根而達到出離",所以又說"'奮進出離'是精進根的立足處"等。意思是說:由於具有增上作用的精進勝解者的立足處,所以修行者們奮進而切斷輪迴之根,達到出離。然而由於"奮進"等是精進事等的說法,所以考慮到"只有精進事等立足處才被解釋"這個問難而說"這些立足處是說法"。應當理解:"奮進"等如上所說的立足處是說法,不是精進事等,所以只解釋了立足處。 如是以立足處的方式分別了"奮進"等說法的意思,我們也已了知。由於應當說"如何以對立面的方式分別那個說法的意思",所以說"或者對不修習者"等。其中,對於不在瑜伽修行中修習的、智慧未成熟的眾生,爲了未來通過瑜伽因緣、熏習分的方式而了知,開始"奮進"等說法。對於在瑜伽修行中修習的、智慧成熟的眾生,爲了現法中通過奮進因緣而遍知,開始"奮進"等說法。

Tattha tesu yuñjantāyuñjantesu paripakkāparipakkañāṇesu ye aparipakkañāṇā sattā na yuñjanti, te aparipakkañāṇā sattā pamādamūlakā hutvā yoge bhāvanāyaṃ yena pamādena na yuñjanti, so pamādo taṇhāmūlako pamādo, avijjāmūlako pamādoti dubbidho hoti. Tattha tasmiṃ dubbidhe pamāde aññāṇena nivuto avijjāmūlako satto yena pamādena ñeyyaṭṭhānaṃ 『『ime uppādavayadhammā pañcakkhandhā ñeyyaṭṭhānaṃ nāmā』』ti nappajānāti, ayaṃ aññāṇahetuko pamādo avijjāmūlako pamādā nāma. Yo pamādo taṇhāmūlako, so pamādo tividho anuppannānaṃ bhogānaṃ uppādāya pariyesanto taṇhiko satto yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo ca, uppannānaṃ bhogānaṃ ṭhitatthāya rakkhanto taṇhiko satto ārakkhanimittaṃ yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo ca, ṭhitaṃ bhogaṃ paribhuñjanto taṇhiko satto paribhoganimittaṃ yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo cāti tividho hoti. Iti loke ayaṃ pamādo catubbidho avijjāpadaṭṭhāno ekavidho pamādo, taṇhāpadaṭṭhāno tividho pamādoti catubbidho hoti. Tattha tāsu avijjātaṇhāsu nāmakāyo phassādināmasamūho avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, rūpakāyo pathavīādirūpasamūho taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ārambhadhātunikkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa paṭipakkho catubbidho pamādo niddhāretabbo, niddhāretvā ekavidhassa pamādassa avijjā padaṭṭhānaṃ, tividhassa pamādassa taṇhā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjāya nāmakāyo padaṭṭhānaṃ, taṇhāya rūpakāyo padaṭṭhānanti paṭipakkhe āvaṭṭetvā padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbanti.

『『Kasmā nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati, rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『taṃ kissa hetū』』ti pucchitvā 『『rūpīsu bhavesu ajjhosānaṃ, arūpīsu sammoho』』ti vuttaṃ. Rūpīsu bhavesu rūpadhammesu ahaṃmamādivasena ajjhosānaṃ taṇhābhiniveso sattesu patiṭṭhito yasmā hoti, tasmā rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Anamatagge hi saṃsāre itthipurisā aññamaññarūpābhirāmā bhavanti. Arūpīsu phassādīsu sukhumabhāvato sammoho sattesu patiṭṭhito yasmā hoti, tasmā nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavatīti yojanā kātabbā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – rūpakāyanāmakāyesu ārammaṇakaraṇavasena taṇhāya ca avijjāya ca uppajjanato rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānanti nīharitabbāvāti.

『『Katamo rūpakāyo, katamo nāmakāyo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha rūpakāyo rūpakkhandho, nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu rūpakāyanāmakāyesu rūpakāyo rūpasamūho nāma rūpakkhandho hoti, nāmakāyo nāmasamūho nāma cattāro arūpino khandhāti. Ime pañcakkhandhā avijjātaṇhānaṃ ārammaṇattā saupādānā bhaveyyuṃ, 『『katamena upādānena saupādānā bhavantī』』ti pucchitabbattā tatheva pucchitvā vissajjetuṃ 『『ime pañcakkhandhā katamena upādānena saupādānā? Taṇhāya ca avijjāya cā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha upādānabhūtāya taṇhāya ca upādānabhūtāya avijjāya ca ime pañcakkhandhā saupādānā nāma bhavantīti yojanā kātabbā.

其中,在那些修習與不修習的、智慧成熟與未成熟的眾生中,那些智慧未成熟而不修習的眾生,他們這些智慧未成熟的眾生以放逸為根本,由於什麼放逸而不在瑜伽修行中修習,那個放逸是以貪愛為根本的放逸和以無明為根本的放逸兩種。其中,在那兩種放逸中,被無知所遮蔽的以無明為根本的眾生,由於什麼放逸而不了知所知處"這些生滅法即五蘊稱為所知處",這個以無知為因的放逸稱為以無明為根本的放逸。那個以貪愛為根本的放逸,那個放逸有三種:貪愛的眾生爲了生起未生的財富而尋求時陷入的放逸,這是一種放逸;貪愛的眾生爲了保持已生的財富而守護時因守護而陷入的放逸,這是一種放逸;貪愛的眾生受用已經存在的財富時因受用而陷入的放逸,這是一種放逸,如此有三種。如是在世間這個放逸有四種:以無明為立足處的一種放逸,以貪愛為立足處的三種放逸,成為四種。其中,在那些無明和貪愛中,名身即觸等名法的集合是無明的立足處,色身即地等色法的集合是貪愛的立足處。這裡說的是:應當確定稱為開始界、出離界的精進的對立面即四種放逸,確定后一種放逸以無明為立足處,三種放逸以貪愛為立足處。無明以名身為立足處,貪愛以色身為立足處,應當轉向對立面而尋求立足處。 由於可以問"為什麼名身成為無明的立足處,色身成為貪愛的立足處",所以問"這是什麼因"后說"在色有中執著,在無色中愚癡"。因為在色有即色法中以我、我所等方式的執著即貪愛的執著安立在眾生中,所以色身成為貪愛的立足處。因為在無始輪迴中男女互相貪愛色身。因為在無色即觸等中由於微細性而有愚癡安立在眾生中,所以名身成為無明的立足處,應當如此結合。這裡說的是:由於在色身、名身中以所緣的方式而生起貪愛和無明,所以應當導出:色身是貪愛的立足處,名身是無明的立足處。 由於可以問"什麼是色身,什麼是名身",所以說"其中色身是色蘊,名身是四無色蘊"。其中,在那些色身和名身中,色身即色法的集合稱為色蘊,名身即名法的集合是四無色蘊。這些五蘊因為是無明和貪愛的所緣而成為有取,由於可以問"以什麼取而成為有取",所以如是問后爲了解答而說"這些五蘊以什麼取而有取?以貪愛和無明"。其中,應當作如下結合:這些五蘊以成為取的貪愛和成為取的無明而稱為有取。

『『Kittakāni upādānāni taṇhā nāma bhavanti, kittakāni upādānāni avijjā nāma bhavantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha taṇhā dve』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu taṇhāavijjāsu. Kāmupādānañca sīlabbatupādānañca dve upādānāni taṇhā nāma bhavanti. Taṇhāvasena hi 『『mama sīlaṃ, mama vata』』nti parāmasanaṃ bhavati. Diṭṭhupādānañca attavādupādānañca dve upādānāni avijjā nāma bhavanti. Avijjāvasena hi sassatadiṭṭhi ceva ahaṃmamādidiṭṭhi ca bhavanti. 『『Imehi catūhi upādānehi saupādānakkhandhā catūsu saccesu kittakaṃ saccaṃ nāmā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『imehī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye lokiyakkhandhā saupādānā khandhā bhavanti, upādānena hi upādānānipi bhavanti, idaṃ saupādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ nāma. Yāni cattāri upādānāni dukkhakāraṇāni bhavanti, ayaṃ upādānacatukko samudayo samudayasaccaṃ nāma bhavati. Pañcakkhandhāti saupādānā pañcakkhandhā dukkhavatthubhāvato dukkhaṃ. Tesanti saupādānānaṃ pañcakkhandhānaṃ. Dhammaṃ desetīti 『『ārambhathā』』tiādikaṃ dhammaṃ veneyyānurūpaṃ bhagavā deseti. Sāmaññena pubbe vuttampi atthavasena visesaṃ dassetuṃ puna 『『dukkhassa pariññāya, samudayassa pahānāyā』』ti vuttaṃ.

1. Ārambhapaṭipakkhabhūtapamādavasena purimasaccadvayaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『itarasaccadvayaṃ kathaṃ niddhāritabba』』nti vattabbattā taṃ dvayampi pamādamukheneva niddhāritabbanti dassetuṃ 『『tattha yo tividho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu taṇhāmūlakaavijjāmūlakesu pamādesu. Tassāti tividhassa taṇhāmūlakassa pamādassa. Sampaṭivedhenāti assādādīnaṃ parijānanena. Rakkhaṇāti attacittassa rakkhaṇasaṅkhātā. Paṭisaṃharaṇāti 『『tassā』』ti iminā vuttassa pamādassa paṭipakkhabhūtena appamādānanuyogena saṃharaṇā yā khepanā atthi, ayaṃ pamādassa paṭipakkhabhūtena appamādānuyogena pavattā khepanasaṅkhātā bhāvanā samatho nāmāti pamādassa paṭipakkhamukhena puna āvaṭṭetvā samatho niddhāritoti.

『『So samatho kathaṃ kena upāyena bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā upāyaṃ dassetuṃ 『『so katha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kathanti kena upāyena. 『『Kāmentīti kāmā, kāmīyantīti vā kāmā』』ti vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ kāmānaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ assādañca, 『『appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā』』tiādi (ma. ni.

由於可以問"有幾種取稱為貪愛,有幾種取稱為無明",所以說"其中貪愛有兩種"等。"其中"是在那些貪愛和無明中。欲取和戒禁取這兩種取稱為貪愛。因為通過貪愛而有"我的戒","我的禁制"的執取。見取和我語取這兩種取稱為無明。因為通過無明而有常見以及我、我所等見。由於可以問"以這四取而有取的諸蘊在四諦中是什麼諦",所以說"以這些"等。凡是世間的諸蘊成為有取的諸蘊,因為以取而有諸取,這個有取的五蘊是苦,稱為苦諦。那四種取是苦的原因,這個四取是集,稱為集諦。五蘊即有取的五蘊因為是苦的事物所以是苦。"那些"即那些有取的五蘊。"說法"即世尊隨眾生的根性而說"奮進"等法。爲了以義的方式顯示前面已一般而說的特殊含義,所以又說"爲了遍知苦,爲了斷除集"。 30. 導師已經通過奮進的對立面即放逸而確定前兩諦,我們也已了知,由於應當說"其餘兩諦如何確定",爲了顯示那兩諦也應當通過放逸來確定,所以說"其中三種"等。其中,"其中"是在那些以貪愛為根本和以無明為根本的諸放逸中。"那個"是三種以貪愛為根本的放逸。"通達"是遍知味著等。"保護"即稱為保護自心。"迴轉"是對"那個"所說的放逸,以其對立面即不放逸的實踐而有收攝、滅盡,這個以放逸的對立面即不放逸的實踐而轉起的稱為滅盡的修習稱為止,如是通過放逸的對立面而再轉向來確定止。 由於可以問"那個止如何以什麼方式而有",所以如是問后爲了顯示方式而說"那個如何"等。其中,"如何"是以什麼方式。對於說"欲求故為欲,被欲求故為欲"的兩種欲而生起的味著,以及"欲樂少苦多"等

1.235) vacanato appassādanīyānaṃ kāmānaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ ādīnavañca. Kāmānanti ca kammatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –『『kāme paṭiccā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30). 『『Kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, yadidaṃ nekkhamma』』nti (itivu. 72) vacanato nissaraṇanti idha paṭhamajjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vokāranti ettha va-kāro āgamo, o-kāraṃ lāmakabhāvaṃ. Ānisaṃsanti catupārisuddhisīlādikaṃ. Yadā jānāti, tadā tena upāyena samatho bhavatīti attho.

Samatho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamā vipassanā』』ti pucchitabbattā vipassanaṃ vibhajituṃ 『『tattha yā vīmaṃsā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā kāmānaṃ assādādayo yadā jānāti, tadā samatho bhavatīti vutto, 『『tasmiṃ samathe bhavamāne sati katamā bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yā vīmaṃsā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ samathe bhavamāne sati assādādīnaṃ yā aniccādivīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā bhavati, ayaṃ vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā visesena passanato vipassanā nāma. Atha vā tividhassa taṇhāmūlakassa pamādassa sampaṭivedhena rakkhaṇā paṭisaṃharaṇā, ayaṃ samathoti ācariyena vutto, 『『katamā vipassanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yā vīmaṃsā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ yathāvutte samathe sati yathāvuttassa pamādassa aniccādivasena yā vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā uppannā, ayaṃ vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā visesena passanato vipassanā nāma. Vīmaṃsāva dubbalā, upaparikkhā balavatīti viseso.

Samatho ceva vipassanā ca dve dhammā ācariyena niddhāritā, 『『ime niddhāritā dve dhammā kiṃ gacchantī』』ti vattabbattā 『『ime dve』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Samatho samathabhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati, vipassanā vipassanābhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati. 『『Imesu dvīsu dhammesu bhāviyamānesu katame yogāvacarena pahīyantī』』ti vattabbattā 『『imesū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Samathe dhamme bhāviyamāne taṇhā yogāvacarena pahīyati, vipassanāya bhāviyamānāya avijjā yogāvacarena pahīyatīti ime dve pahātabbā dhammā pahīyanti taṇhā ceva avijjā ca. 『『Imesu dvīsu dhammesu pahīyamānesu katame dhammā nirujjhantī』』ti pucchitabbattā upādānādayopi nirujjhantīti sakalavaṭṭadukkhanirodhaṃ dassento 『『imesu dvīsu dhammesu pahīnesū』』tiādimāha. Tattha taṇhāya samathabhāvanāya pahīyamānāya, avijjāya vipassanābhāvanāya pahīyamānāya imesu dvīsu dhammesu dvīhi bhāvanāhi pahīnesu kāmupādānādīni cattāri upādānāni vikkhambhanasamucchedavasena nirujjhanti, na bhaṅgakkhaṇavasena.

1.235)這段話說:由於品嚐而少味著的諸欲而生起的過患。"諸欲"是作格意義的屬格語。因此說:"緣諸欲"。由於說"這是諸欲的出離,即是離欲"所以出離在這裡意指初禪。"過患"中va-音是新增音,o-音是低劣性。"功德"是四遍凈戒等。當知道時,以那個方式而有止的意思。 止已被導師分別,我們也已了知。由於可以問"什麼是觀",爲了分別觀而說"其中什麼是思擇"等。或者說當知道諸欲的味著等時有止,由於可以問"在那個止生起時有什麼",所以說"其中什麼是思擇"等。其中,"其中"是在那個止生起時,對味著等有無常等的思擇、考察、智慧,這個思擇、考察、智慧因為特別地觀察而稱為觀。或者導師說了以三種以貪愛為根本的放逸的通達而有保護、迴轉,這是止,由於可以問"什麼是觀",所以說"其中什麼是思擇"等。其中,"其中"是在那個如上所說的止中,對如上所說的放逸以無常等方式所生起的思擇、考察、智慧,這個思擇、考察、智慧因為特別地觀察而稱為觀。思擇是弱的,考察是強的,這是差別。 止和觀兩種法已被導師確定,由於應當說"這些已確定的兩法趨向什麼",所以說"這兩種"等。止趨向止修的圓滿,觀趨向觀修的圓滿。由於應當說"在這兩法被修時,修行者斷除什麼",所以說"在這些"等。在止法被修時,修行者斷除貪愛,在觀被修時,修行者斷除無明,如是這兩種應斷的法即貪愛和無明被斷除。由於可以問"在這兩法被斷時,什麼法滅盡",爲了顯示包括輪迴苦的滅盡而說"在這兩法被斷時"等。其中,在貪愛以止修而被斷,無明以觀修而被斷,在這兩法以兩種修習而被斷時,欲取等四取以鎮伏和斷除的方式滅盡,不是以壞滅剎那的方式。

Etthāha – 『『taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho』』ti vuttattā 『『taṇhāya pahīyamānāya upādānāni nirujjhantī』』ti vacanaṃ yuttaṃ hotu, kathaṃ avijjāya pahīyamānāya upādānāni nirujjhantīti? 『『Taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho』』ti pāṭhe avijjāsahitataṇhānirodhā upādānanirodhoti atthasambhavato. Yathā hi taṇhāsahitāva avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo, evaṃ avijjāsahitāva taṇhā upādānānaṃ paccayo hotīti avijjāsahitataṇhānirodhā upādānanirodhoti attho sambhavatīti gahetabbo. Vikkhambhanasamucchedavasena upādānanirodhā tatheva bhavanirodhoti esa nayo sesesupi. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhoti etthāpi taṇhāsahitaavijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodhotiādiko gahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Itīti evaṃ visabhāgasabhāgadhammānaṃ āvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritāni ca purimakāni dve saccāni ca, samatho ca vipassanā ca ime dve dhammā maggo ca maggasaccañca, vaṭṭanirodho vaṭṭanirodhasaccañca nibbānanti cattāri saccāni niddhāritāni.

『『Vīriyapaṭipakkhabhūtassa pamādādidhammassa vasena vā sabhāgabhūtassa pamādādidhammassa vasena vā āvaṭṭetvā catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabbabhāvo amhehi kena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tathā niddhāritabbabhāvena bhagavā 『『ārambhatha nikkamathā』』tiādigāthāvacanaṃ āha, tena 『『ārambhatha nikkamathā』』tiādigāthāvacanena tathā catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabbabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.

『『Ārambhatha nikkamathā』tiādinā vodānapakkhaṃyeva nikkhipitvā tasseva vodānapakkhassa visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammavaseneva āvaṭṭetvā catusaccaniddhāraṇaṃ kātabba』』nti pucchitabbattā saṃkilesapakkhampi nikkhipitvā tasseva saṃkilesassa visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammavasenapi āvaṭṭetvā catusaccaniddhāraṇaṃ dassento 『『yathāpi mūle』』tiādigāthāvacanamāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Evaṃ vodānapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena, sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetvā idāni saṃkilesapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena, sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetuṃ 『yathāpi mūle』ti gāthamāhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) –

Vuttaṃ. Gāthātthopi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto. Tathāpi yatipotānaṃ atthāya aṭṭhakathānusāreneva kathayissāma.

Samūho rukkho mūlati patiṭṭhāti etena avayavena bhūmibhāge ṭhitenāti mūlaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Bhūmibhāge ṭhito mūlasaṅkhāto rukkhāvayavo, tasmiṃ mūle. Natthi upaddavo pharasuchedādiantarāyo assa mūlassāti anupaddavo. Daḷheti upaddavābhāvena sabhāvato thire sati. Chindīyatīti chinno, ko so? Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitamūlasahito rukkhāvayavo, na chinditvā gahito rukkhāvayavo. Ruhati vaḍḍhatīti rukkho. So ca bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitamūlasahito rukkhāvayavo rukkhoti vutto yathā 『『samuddo diṭṭho』』ti. Punareva rūhatīti puna aṅkuruppādanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṇhānusayeti attabhāvasaṅkhātassa rukkhassa mūle. Anūhateti arahattamaggañāṇena anupacchinne sati idaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhahetu punappunaṃ abbocchinnaṃ nibbattati na nirujjhatiyevāti gāthāttho.

這裡說:"由於說'由貪愛滅而取滅',所以說'在貪愛被斷時諸取滅盡'是合理的,但如何在無明被斷時諸取滅盡呢?"由於在"由貪愛滅而取滅"的文句中,可以有"由具無明的貪愛滅而取滅"的意思。因為如同具貪愛的無明才是諸行的緣,同樣,具無明的貪愛才是諸取的緣,所以應當理解有"由具無明的貪愛滅而取滅"的意思。由取滅以鎮伏和斷除的方式而有如是有滅,這個道理在其餘處也是如此。如是"這個純粹苦蘊的滅"在這裡也應當理解為已取"由具貪愛的無明滅而有行滅"等。"如是"即通過異同法的轉向方式而確定前兩諦,以及止與觀這兩法是道與道諦,輪迴的滅與輪迴滅諦即涅槃,如是確定四諦。 由於應當說"我們應當以什麼相信通過精進的對立面即放逸等法的方式或通過同類的放逸等法的方式而轉向來確定四諦",所以說"因此說"等。因為如是應當確定,所以世尊說"奮進出離"等偈頌之語,通過"奮進出離"等偈頌之語,你們應當相信如是確定四諦。 由於可以問"'奮進出離'等只說清凈分,只應通過那個清凈分的異同法的方式而轉向來作四諦的確定",爲了顯示也說染污分,也應通過那個染污的異同法的方式而轉向來作四諦的確定而說"如根"等偈頌之語。但在註釋中說: "如是顯示說清凈分並通過其異法的方式和同法的方式而轉向后,現在爲了顯示說染污分並通過其異法的方式和同法的方式而轉向而說'如根'偈。" 偈頌的意思也在註釋中說了。雖然如此,我們還是爲了修行者們的利益而依照註釋來說。 樹的集合以根即在地面上立住的部分而立住,所以稱為根,是什麼?在地面上立住的稱為根的樹的部分,在那個根上。沒有斧砍等災難的危害於那個根,所以無災。在堅固即因為無災而自性堅固時。被砍即被切斷,是什麼?具有立於地上的根的樹的部分,不是砍取的樹的部分。生長增長故為樹。那個具有立於地上的根的樹的部分稱為樹,如說"見到海"。再生長即關於再生芽而說。在貪愛隨眠即稱為自體的樹的根。在未拔即未被阿羅漢道智所斷時,這個稱為自體的苦因苦而一再不斷地生起而不滅盡,這是偈頌的意思。

『『Idha gāthāyaṃ yo taṇhānusayo anūhatabhāvena dukkhassa nibbattanassa mūlanti vutto, ayaṃ taṇhānusayo katamassā taṇhāya anusayo』』ti pucchati, 『『taṇhāya kāmataṇhādivasena bahuvidhattā bhavataṇhāya anusayo』』ti vissajjeti bhavassādataṇhābhāvato. Yo anusayo etassa bhavataṇhāsaṅkhātassa dhammassa paccayo hoti, ayaṃ anusayo avijjānusayo hoti. 『『Anusayo bahuvidho, kasmā avijjānusayoti saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『avijjāpaccayā hi bhavataṇhā』』ti vuttaṃ. Avijjāya bhavataṇhāya paccayattā avijjānusayo saddahitabbo. Avijjāya hi bhavesu ādīnavassa adassanavasena bhavassādataṇhā bhavatīti. Ime dve kilesātiādimhi heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena cattāri saccāni niddhāretvā visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanaṃ viññātabbaṃ, samathavipassanā pana maggasampayuttāva gahetabbā.

『『Sabbapāpassā』』tiādikassa anusandhyattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 30) vutto. Sabbapāpassāti kammapathabhāvappattāpattassa niravasesassa akusalassa. Akaraṇanti saparasantānesu anuppādanaṃ . Kusalassāti kammapathabhāvappattāpattassa tebhūmakakusalassa ceva lokuttarakusalassa ca. Upasampadāti santāne uppādanavasena sampadā. Sassa attano cittanti sacittaṃ, sacittassa pariyodāpanaṃ vodānaṃ arahattaphaluppattiyāti sacittapariyodāpanaṃ. Arahattamagguppādo pana 『『kusalassa upasampadā』』ti padena gahito. Etaṃ akaraṇādittayadīpanaṃ buddhānaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādoti gāthāttho.

Gāthāyaṃ yassa pāpassa akaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ pāpaṃ duccaritakammapathavasena vibhajituṃ 『『sabbapāpaṃ nāmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Dosasamuṭṭhānanti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ, lobhasamuṭṭhānampi bhavati. Lobhasamuṭṭhānantipi yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ, dosasamuṭṭhānampi bhavati. Mohasamuṭṭhānampi tatheva vuttaṃ. Lobhasamuṭṭhānadosasamuṭṭhānampi sambhavatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbapāpo duccaritakammapathappabhedena vibhatto, 『『ettakeneva vibhajitabbo, udāhu aññena vibhajitabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā aññena akusalamūlaagatigamanabhedenapi vibhajituṃ 『『yā abhijjhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ duccaritaakusalakammapathakammavibhāgena 『sabbapāpa』nti ettha vuttapāpaṃ vibhajitvā idānissa akusalamūlavasena agatigamanavibhāgampi dassetuṃ 『akusalamūla』ntiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) anusandhyattho vutto. Mohavasena sabhāvaṃ ajānantassa bhayasambhavato yaṃ bhayā ca mohā ca agatiṃ gacchati, idaṃ mohasamuṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ.

這裡說："在這偈頌中，所說的因貪愛隨眠而未被拔除的苦的根源，問到這個貪愛隨眠是由哪種貪愛而有的。"回答說："由於貪愛有欲貪等多種，所以說是由生貪的隨眠。"這個隨眠是指因無明而有的貪愛。這個隨眠是因無明而有的貪愛。由於無明是生貪的緣，因此應當相信無明是貪愛的根源。因為無明在生中因苦的過患而不見，生貪就會存在。"這兩種污垢"等類似的說法，依照下面所說的四諦而確定，止與觀這兩法則應當與道相應。 "所有惡"等的後文在註釋中已說。"所有惡"是指因業道而成就的無餘的惡。即不作是指在有煩惱的情況下不生起。善是指因業道而成就的三善和出世間的善。入道是指因法的生起而有的成就。即自心的心是心的清凈，心的清凈是指因阿羅漢果的生起而有的清凈。阿羅漢道的生起則是由"善的入道"所包含。這個不作等三種法是佛陀的正覺教導的意思。 在偈頌中所說的不作，指的是惡的，依惡行的分開說"所有惡"等。因過失而起的則是大多數情況下所說的，貪慾的根源也會產生。貪慾的根源也是大多數情況下所說的，過失的根源也同樣如此。無明的根源也是如此。貪慾的根源和過失的根源都是可以存在的。所有惡因惡行的不同而被分開，"應當這樣分開，還是通過其他方式分開"是可以問的，因此也可以通過其他的惡根的不同而分開，"如貪慾"等也被提到。在註釋中則說："如是通過惡行的分開說'所有惡'，現在爲了顯示惡根的不同而分開，'惡根'等也被提到"。 由於無明的緣故，因不瞭解本性而有的恐怖，恐怖和無明都會導致無去處，這就是所說的無明的根源。

Sabbapāpo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamaṃ sabbapāpassa akaraṇa』』nti pucchitabbattā tattha lobho asubhāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Ettāvatā 『sabbapāpassa akaraṇa』nti ettha pāpaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa akaraṇaṃ dassento 『lobho…pe… paññāyā』ti tīhi kusalamūlehi tiṇṇaṃ akusalamūlānaṃ pahānavasena sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ anuppādanamāhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) –

Vuttaṃ. Subhādhimuttavasena pavatto lobho asubhāya asubhabhāvanāya tathāpavattena alobhena tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānena pahīyati, sattesu kujjhanadussanavasena pavatto doso mettāya mettābhāvanāya tathāpavattena adosena ca tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānena pahīyati, sattesu ceva saṅkhāresu ca muyhanavasena pavatto moho paññāya vicāraṇapaññāya ca bhāvanāmaggapaññāya ca tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānena pahīyati.

『『Yadi tīhi kusalamūleheva akusalamūlāni pahīyanti, evaṃ sati upekkhākaruṇāmuditā niratthakā bhaveyyu』』nti vattabbattā 『『tathā lobho upekkhāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Upekkhāyāti 『『sabbe sattā kammassakā』』tiādinā bhāvitāya upekkhāya. Muditā aratiṃ vūpasametvā aratiyā mūlabhūtaṃ mohampi pajahatīti manasi katvā 『『moho muditāya pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Akusalamūlānaṃ kusalamūlādīhi pahātabbattaṃ kena amhehi saddahitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tathā pahātabbattena bhagavā 『『sabbapāpassa akaraṇa』』nti vacanaṃ āha, tena 『『sabbapāpassa akaraṇa』』nti vacanena tathā pahātabbattaṃ tumhehi saddahitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.

所有惡已被導師分別,我們也已了知,由於可以問"什麼是不作所有惡",所以說"其中貪以不凈"等。但在註釋中說: "至此,在'不作所有惡'中已顯示惡,現在爲了顯示其不作而說'貪...乃至...以慧'。以三善根斷除三不善根的方式說明不作所有惡即不生起。" 以凈妙執著的方式而轉起的貪,以不凈即不凈修習,以如是轉起的無貪,以彼分鎮伏斷而斷除。以對眾生髮怒憎恨的方式而轉起的嗔,以慈即慈修習,以如是轉起的無嗔,以彼分鎮伏斷而斷除。以對眾生和諸行愚癡的方式而轉起的癡,以慧即思擇慧和修道慧,以彼分鎮伏斷和斷除斷而斷除。 由於可以說"如果只以三善根斷除不善根,那麼舍、悲、喜就會無意義",所以說"如是貪以舍"等。"以舍"是以"一切眾生是業的所有者"等方式修習的舍。喜平息不樂后也斷除不樂的根本即癡,考慮到這一點而說"癡被喜所斷而趨向滅盡"。由於可以說"我們應當以什麼相信不善根應當以善根等斷除",所以說"因此說"等。因為如是應當斷除,所以世尊說"不作所有惡"這句話,通過"不作所有惡"這句話,你們應當相信如是應當斷除。

1. 『『Ettāvatā ca sabbapāpo vibhatto, tassa akaraṇañca vibhattaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati aṭṭhamicchattānaṃ akaraṇaṃ anivāritaṃ siyā』』ti vattabbattā 『『sabbapāpaṃ nāma aṭṭha micchattānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Micchāsatīti aniccādīsu 『『nicca』』nti anussaraṇacintanādivasena pavattaakusalappavatti.

Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ bahudhā ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca viññātaṃ, 『『kathaṃ kusalassa sampadā vibhajitabbā viññātabbā』』ti vattabbattā kusalassa sampadaṃ vibhajitvā dassento 『『aṭṭhasu micchattesu pahīnesū』』tiādimāha. Aṭṭha sammattānīti sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhīti aṭṭhasammattāni visabhāgaparivattanadhammavasena sampajjanti. Atītassāti atītena sammāsambuddhena desitassa. Vipassino hi bhagavato ayaṃ pātimokkhuddesagāthā. Citte pariyodāpiteti cittapaṭibaddhā pañcakkhandhāpi pariyodāpitā bhavanti. 『『Cittapariyodāpitena pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ pariyodāpitabhāvo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『evañhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttappakārena bhagavā yaṃ 『『cetovisuddhatthaṃ bhikkhave tathāgate brahmacariyaṃ vussatī』』ti vacanaṃ āha, tena 『『ceto…pe… vussatī』』ti vacanena tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. 『『Pariyodāpanā katividhā bhavantī』』ti vattabbattā 『『duvidhā hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Samathavipassanāya nīvaraṇappahānañca ariyamaggabhāvanāya anusayasamugghāto cāti pariyodāpanassa duvidhattā pañcakkhandhā pariyodāpitā bhavantīti attho. Pahīnanīvaraṇānusayā hi puggalā pasādanīyavaṇṇā honti.

『『Pariyodāpanassa kittikā bhūmiyo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dve pariyodāpanabhūmiyo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『『Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa』ntiādigāthāya desitesu dhammesu katamaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, katamaṃ samudayasaccaṃ , katamaṃ maggasaccaṃ, katamaṃ nirodhasacca』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yaṃ paṭivedhenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti gāthāya desitesu dhammesu yaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ paṭivedhena pariññābhisamayena pariyodāpeti, idaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ bhave. Yato taṇhāsaṃkilesato khandhapañcakaṃ pariyodāpeti, ayaṃ taṇhāsaṃkileso samudayo samudayasaccaṃ. Yena ariyamaggaṅgena pariyodāpeti, ayaṃ ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Yaṃ asaṅkhatadhātuṃ adhigatena puggalena pariyodāpitaṃ, ayaṃ asaṅkhatadhātudhammo nirodho nirodhasaccaṃ bhave. Imāni cattāri saccāni gāthāya desitadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritāni. 『『Tenāhā』』tiādikassa attho heṭṭhā vuttanayena veditabbo.

『『Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa』』ntiādigāthāya desitānaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena cattāri saccāni ācariyena niddhāritāni, amhehi ca viññātāni.

1. "到此所有惡已被分別,其不作也已被分別,如是則八邪性的不作將未被防止"因此應當說,所以說"所有惡即八邪性"等。"邪念"是在無常等中以"常"的隨念思維等方式而轉起的不善轉起。 所有惡的不作已被導師多方分別,我們也已了知,由於應當說"如何分別了知善的成就",爲了顯示善的成就的分別而說"在八邪性被斷時"等。"八正性"即正見、正思維、正語、正業、正命、正精進、正念、正定,這八正性通過異類轉變法的方式而成就。"過去的"是過去的正等覺者所說的。這是毗婆尸世尊的波羅提木叉誦偈。"在心清凈時"五蘊也成為清凈。由於應當說"我們應當以什麼相信由心清凈而五蘊成為清凈",所以說"如是"等。如是以所說的方式,世尊說"諸比丘,為心清凈故而於如來處修梵行"這句話,通過"為心...乃至...修"這句話,你們應當相信。由於應當說"清凈有幾種",所以說"有兩種"等。以止觀斷除諸蓋和以聖道修習斷除諸隨眠,因為清凈有兩種,所以五蘊成為清凈的意思。因為斷除諸蓋和隨眠的人們成為有清凈顏色。 由於可以問"清凈有幾種地",所以說"兩種清凈地"等。由於可以問"在'不作所有惡'等偈頌所說的諸法中,什麼是苦諦,什麼是集諦,什麼是道諦,什麼是滅諦",所以說"其中以通達"等。"其中"即在偈頌所說的諸法中,以通達即遍知現觀而清凈的五蘊,這個五蘊是苦,是苦諦。從哪個貪愛染污而清凈五蘊,這個貪愛染污是集,是集諦。以什麼聖道分而清凈,這個聖道是道,是道諦。已證得的人所清凈的無為界,這個無為界法是滅,是滅諦。這四諦通過偈頌所說諸法的同類異類法轉向的方式而被確定。"因此說"等的意思應當依照前面所說的方式了知。 "不作所有惡"等偈頌所說諸法通過同類異類法轉向的方式而成為四諦已被導師確定,我們也已了知。

『『『Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāriṃ, chattaṃ mahantaṃ yatha vassakāle;

Esānisaṃso dhamme suciṇṇe, na duggatiṃ gacchati dhammacārī』ti –

Gāthāya desitānaṃ dhammānaṃ visabhāgasabhāgadhammānaṃ āvaṭṭanavasena kathaṃ cattāri saccāni niddhāritānī』』ti vattabbattā 『『dhammo have』』tiādimāha. Tāya gāthāya desite dhamme vibhajitvā dassento 『『dhammo nāmā』』tiādimāha. Tattha dhammo nāmāti puññadhammo nāma. Indriyasaṃvaroti manacchaṭṭhindriyasaṃvarasīlādiko sabbo saṃvaro. Tena vuttaṃ –『『indriyasaṃvarasīsena cettha sabbampi sīlaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabba』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 31). Cattāro apāyā dukkaṭakammakārīnaṃ gatibhūtattā duggati. Sabbā upapattiyo pana dukkhadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasamaṅgīnaṃ gatibhūtattā duggati nāma.

『『Tasmiṃ duvidhe dhamme indriyasaṃvaradhammo kattha ṭhito, kathaṃ suciṇṇo, kuto rakkhatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yā saṃvarasīle』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ duvidhe dhamme. Saṃvarasīle ṭhitā yā akhaṇḍakāritā hoti, ayaṃ akhaṇḍavasena kātabbo saṃvarasīle ṭhito suṭṭhu āciṇṇapariciṇṇo puññadhammo catūhi apāyehi attano ādhāraṃ attānaṃ rakkhantaṃ puggalaṃ ekantikabhāvena rakkhati, anekantikabhāvena pana rakkhitamatto puññadhammopi rakkhatīti attho gahetabbo. Apāyehīti ca padhānavasena vuttaṃ, rogādiantarāyatopi rakkhati. Rogādiantarāyo vā ayato apagatattā apāyantogadhoti daṭṭhabbo.

『『Tathā rakkhatīti kena amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『evaṃ bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttappakārena lakkhaṇapakāradassanaṃ bhagavā 『『dvemā, bhikkhave, sīlavato gatiyo devā ca manussā cā』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena 『『dvemā…pe… manussā cā』』ti vacanena tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. 『『Saṃvarasīle ṭhitassa akhaṇḍakātabbassa suciṇṇassa puññadhammassa apāyehi rakkhaṇe ekantikabhāvo kena suttena dīpetabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『evañca nāḷandāya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evañcāti iminā idāni vuccamānena pakārenapi vuttappakāro attho veditabbo. Nāḷandāyanti nāḷandanāmake nigame nisinno asibandhakanāmassa putto gāmaṇi gāmajeṭṭhako bhagavantaṃ etaṃ vuccamānaṃ 『『brāhmaṇā, bhante』』tiādivacanaṃ avoca.

Brāhmaṇāti bāhirakā brāhmaṇā. Bhanteti bhagavantaṃ gāmaṇi ālapati. Pacchābhūmakāti pacchimadisāya nisinnakā. Uyyāpentīti manussalokato uddhaṃ devalokaṃ yāpenti pāpenti.

Idhassāti idhaloke assa bhaveyya. Puriso pāṇātipātī…pe… micchādiṭṭhiko assa bhaveyyāti yojanā. Sesaṃ pāḷito ceva vuttānusārena ca ñeyyaṃ.

1. 『『Visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāha mahākaccāno ekamhi padaṭṭhāne』』ti vuttaṃ.

『『Ettāvatā ca āvaṭṭo hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto āvaṭṭo hāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Yassaṃ yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ yo yo āvaṭṭo hāro yathālābhavasena yojito, tassaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so so āvaṭṭo hāro tathā niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.

Iti āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusāreneva gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

"法確實保護行法者，如同大雨時的遮蓋； 在清凈的法中，行法者不會墮入惡道。" 因此應當說，"法確實"等的偈頌所示的法，通過同類異類法的轉向，如何四諦已被確定。通過那偈頌所示的法，顯示出"法即"等的含義。在這裡，法即是指善法。感官的節制是指心、眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意等的節制及其所包含的所有節制。因此說："在這裡，所有的節制都包括在感官節制的戒律中"（見《註釋》八章31節）。四種惡道是因造作惡業而墮落的，因而稱為惡道。所有的生起都是因苦、苦的苦、因變遷而苦的總和，因而稱為惡道。 "在那兩種法中，感官節制的法處於何處，如何清凈，何以保護"因此應當問，"在那裡是節制的戒律"等。這裡是指那兩種法。在節制的戒律中，處於不被破壞的狀態，這種不被破壞的狀態應當被理解為在節制的戒律中，善法是經過良好的修習而成就的，能夠保護自己並保護他人，因而被稱為善法。因而，"在惡道中"是指通過努力而得的，疾病等的障礙也能保護。因疾病等的障礙而不再墮落，故應被視為脫離惡道。 "如是保護，何以應當相信"因此應當說，"如是世尊"等。根據如是所說的方式，世尊說："兩種，諸比丘，善者的去處，天人和人類"等，因此通過"兩種...乃至...人類"這句話，你們應當相信。"在節制的戒律中，處於不被破壞的狀態，清凈的善法，如何保護自己不墮入惡道，何以被稱為單一的"因此應當說，"如是那位在那拉丹城"等。這裡的"如是"是指通過此時所說的方式而被理解的意義。那位在那拉丹城的村長，名為阿西班達卡的兒子，向世尊說了"婆羅門啊，尊者"等話。 婆羅門是指外道的婆羅門。尊者是對世尊的稱呼。位於西方的坐者。昇天者是指人類世界向上到達天界。 在這裡是指此世。人若殺生...乃至...若邪見者則是指此義。其餘的可依照前述所說的理解。 32. "通過同類異類法的轉向，四諦的確定如何應當相信"因此應當說，"因此說，偉大的迦葉"在一個立場上"等。 "到此為止，圓滿的輪迴，沒有其他的約束"因此應當說，"約束的輪迴"等。對於每一部經文中所提到的輪迴，按其所獲得的方式進行對應，因而每一部經文中的輪迴應當被確定並理解。 因此，輪迴與約束的分解已完成。 智慧者應當通過註釋的解釋，深入理解其深意並詳細分析。 輪迴與約束的分解與分析

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgena āvaṭṭetabbā padaṭṭhānādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『tattha katamo vibhattihāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo vibhattihāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihāro vibhattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Dhammañca padaṭṭhānaṃ bhūmiñcā』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『dve suttānī』』tiādiko vitthārabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihāro vibhattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo.

『『Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo iminā vibhattihārena vibhattā, tāni suttāni kittakānī』』ti pucchitabbattā tāni suttāni paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ 『『dve suttāni vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañcā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha vāsanābhāgiyanti puññabhāvanā vāsanā nāma, vāsanāya bhāgo koṭṭhāso vāsanābhāgo, vāsanābhāge vācakabhāvena niyuttaṃ suttanti vāsanābhāgiyaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yasmiṃ sutte tīṇi puññakiriyavatthūni bhagavatā desitāni, taṃ suttaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyanti lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ nibbijjhanaṃ padālanaṃ nibbedho, nibbedhassa bhāgo koṭṭhāso nibbedhabhāgo, nibbedhabhāge vācakabhāvena niyuttaṃ suttanti nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yasmiṃ sutte sekkhāsekkhadhammā bhagavatā desitā, taṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ.

『『Tesaṃ suttānaṃ paṭiggāhakā puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi sampajjanti, tā paṭipadā kittikā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dve paṭipadā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Dānasīlabhāvanāmayapuññabhāge bhavā paṭipadāti puññabhāgiyā. Phalabhāge bhavā paṭipadāti phalabhāgiyā. 『『Yesu sīlesu ṭhitā paṭiggāhakā paṭipajjanti, tāni sīlāni kittakānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dve sīlānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṃvarati etena saṃvarenāti saṃvaro, so saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro, satisaṃvaro, ñāṇasaṃvaro, khantisaṃvaro, vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidho. Sabbopi pāpasaṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, lokiyalokuttarasampattiṭṭhānattā sīlaṃ nāma. Pajahati etena pahātabbeti pahānaṃ, pajahanaṃ vā pahānaṃ, tañca pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, paṭipassaddhippahānaṃ, nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidhaṃ. Tattha nissaraṇappahānaṃ vajjetvā catubbidhaṃ pahānaṃ vuttanayena sīlaṃ nāma.

1. 從輪轉行相分別中，應當以輪轉方式分別所依等，這個作為解釋特性的輪轉行相分別已圓滿，由於可以問"其中什麼是分別行相分別"，所以說"其中什麼是分別行相"等。其中，"其中"是在已說的十六種教說行相等中，問什麼是作為解釋特性的分別行相即分別行相分別。應當理解"法與所依與地"等說明現在我要說的"兩經"等詳細的解釋特性為分別行相即分別行相分別。 由於可以問"在哪些經中所說的法、所依、地通過此分別行相而被分別，那些經有幾種"，爲了首先顯示那些經而說"兩經，即習近分與通達分"。其中，"習近分"是指功德修習稱為習近，習近的部分稱為習近分，在習近分中以說明的方式確定的經即習近分，是什麼？在那部經中世尊說三種功德事，那部經是習近分。"通達分"是指貪蘊等的通達、破壞為通達，通達的部分稱為通達分，在通達分中以說明的方式確定的經即通達分，是什麼？在那部經中世尊說有學無學法，那部經是通達分。 由於可以問"那些經的領受者通過什麼道路而成就，那些道路有幾種"，所以說"兩種道路"等。在佈施、持戒、修習所成的功德部分中存在的道路即功德分。在果部分中存在的道路即果分。由於可以問"領受者住立在哪些戒中而修行，那些戒有幾種"，所以說"兩種戒"等。以此防護而防護為防護，那個防護即波羅提木叉防護、念防護、智防護、忍防護、精進防護等五種。一切因防護惡而稱為防護，因為是世間出世間成就的立足處而稱為戒。以此斷除應斷為斷除，或者斷除即斷除，那個斷除即暫時斷除、鎮伏斷除、斷除斷除、寂止斷除、出離斷除等五種。其中除去出離斷除，四種斷除如前所說稱為戒。

『『Tesu suttādīsu bhagavā katamaṃ suttaṃ katamāya paṭipadāya desayati, katarasmiṃ sīle ṭhito puggalo katamena sīlena brahmacārī bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā tathā vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『『tattha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu vāsanābhāgiyādīsu suttesu vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ tattha tāsu puññabhāgiyādipaṭipadāsu puññabhāgiyāya paṭipadāya bhagavā yassa puggalassa desayati, so vāsanābhāgiyasuttapaṭiggāhako puggalo tattha saṃvarasīlādīsu saṃvarasīle ṭhito hutvā tena saṃvarasīlasaṅkhātena brahmacariyena seṭṭhacariyena brahmacārī seṭṭhācārapūrako bhavati. Tattha tesu vāsanābhāgiyādīsu suttesu nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ tattha tāsu puññabhāgiyādipaṭipadāsu phalabhāgiyāya paṭipadāya yassa puggalassa bhagavā desayati, so nibbedhabhāgiyasuttapaṭiggāhako puggalo tattha saṃvarasīlādīsu pahānasīle samucchedappassaddhippahānavasena ṭhito hutvā tena pahānasīlasaṅkhātena visesabhūtena maggasaṅkhātena brahmacariyena brahmacārī bhavatīti yojanā kātabbā.

『『Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu katamaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katama』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu. Dānakathāti sappurisadānadānaphalaasappurisadānadānaphalakathā. Sīlakathāti pañcasīlādisīlaphalakathā. Saggakathāti saggasampattisukhakathā ceva sagge nibbattāpakapuññakathā ca. Ādīnavoti ādīnavadassako suttanto. Ānisaṃsoti ānisaṃsadassako suttanto. Vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti yojanā.

『『Tattha katama』』ntiādīsu anusandhyattho vuttanayova. Yā desanā catusaccappakāsanā, sā desanā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Evañca sati vāsanābhāgiyasuttassapi nibbedhabhāgiyasuttabhāvo āpajjeyya catusaccappakāsanatoti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『vāsanābhāgiye sutte』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Vāsanābhāgiye sutte pajānanā vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā ariyamaggapadaṭṭhānabhūtā paññā natthi, maggo ariyamaggo natthi, phalaṃ ariyaphalaṃ natthi. Nibbedhabhāgiye sutte pana pajānanādayo atthi, vāsanābhāgiye sutte natthi. 『『Pajānanā』』tiādinā catusaccappakāsanā dānakathādikā nibbedhabhāgiye sutte antogadhā, itaraṃyeva vāsanābhāgiyasuttanti nāmāti dasseti. Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo vibhattā, tāni suttāni dveyeva na honti, kasmā 『『dveyeva suttāni niddhāritānī』』ti ce vadeyyuṃ? Asaṅkarato sutte vuttānaṃ dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmīnaṃ vibhajitabbānaṃ suviññeyyattā. 『『Yadi evaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttānipi niddhāritāni asaṅkarattā』』ti ce vadeyyuṃ? No niddhāritāni, vāsanābhāgiyasutte niddhārite saṃkilesabhāgiyasuttampi niddhāritaṃ, saṃkilesadhammato nissaṭṭhadhammānaṃyeva vāsanābhāgiyadhammattā nibbedhabhāgiyasutte ca niddhārite asekkhabhāgiyasuttampi niddhāritaṃ anaññattā.

由於可以問"世尊在那些經等中，以什麼經、什麼道路說法，住立在什麼戒中的人，以什麼戒成為梵行者"，爲了如此分別並顯示，說"在那裡世尊"等。在那裡，在那些習近分等經中，對於習近分經，在那些功德分等道路中，世尊對哪個人說法，那個人是習近分經的領受者，他住立在節制戒等中的節制戒，以那個被稱為節制戒的梵行，成為最上行的梵行者。在那裡，在那些習近分等經中，對於通達分經，在那些功德分等道路中，世尊對哪個人說法果分道路，那個人是通達分經的領受者，他住立在節制戒等中的斷除戒，以斷除和寂止斷除的方式，以那個被稱為斷除戒的、特別的、被稱為道的梵行而成為梵行者，應當這樣理解。 由於可以問"在習近分經等中，什麼是習近分經"，所以說"在那裡什麼"等。在那裡，"在那裡"是指那些習近分經等。"佈施說"是關於善士佈施的果報和非善士佈施的果報的說法。"戒說"是關於五戒等戒的果報的說法。"天界說"是關於天界成就的快樂，以及在天界重生的功德的說法。"過患"是顯示過患的經。"功德"是顯示功德的經。這就是習近分經的意義。 在"在那裡什麼"等中，其意義與前面所說的方式相同。能顯示四諦的說法，即為通達分經，應當這樣理解。如果是這樣，習近分經也可能成為通達分經，因為能顯示四諦，爲了應對這個質疑，說"在習近分經"等。在習近分經中，沒有了知、出起的觀，沒有以聖道為基礎的智慧，沒有道，沒有聖道，沒有果，沒有聖果。但在通達分經中有了知等，在習近分經中沒有。通過"了知"等，顯示佈施說等四諦的說明包含在通達分經中，另一個即是習近分經。在哪些經中所說的法、所依、地已被分別，那些經並非僅僅兩部，若問"為什麼說僅僅兩部經已被確定"？因為經中所說的法、所依、地易於理解且無混雜。若問"如果是這樣，染污分和無學分的經是否也已確定"？不，未被確定。在習近分經已確定時，染污分經也已確定，因為習近分經中的法已經與染污法分離。在通達分經已確定時，無學分經也已確定，因為無他性。

『『Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo vibhattihārena vibhattā, tāni suttāni katamena phalena yojayitabbānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『imāni cattāri suttānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāni cattāri suttānīti yathāniddhāritāni vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasuttāni ceva taṃniddhāraṇena niddhāritāni saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttāni cāti cattāri suttāni imesaṃyeva catunnaṃ suttānaṃ desanāya nayena nītena phalena sabbato sabbabhāgena saṃvarasīlappahānasīlena brahmacariyena yojayitabbāni. Yojentena ca sabbato sabbabhāgena ca padādivicayena hārena saṃvarasīlādikaṃ phalaṃ vicinitvā yuttihārena yuttaṃ phalaṃ gavesitvā 『『idaṃ phalaṃ imassa puggalassa phalaṃ, idaṃ phalaṃ imassa suttassa phala』』nti suttāni visuṃ visuṃ phalena yojayitabbānīti attho gahetabbo.

『『Kittakena phalena brahmacariyena yojetabbānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yāvatikā ñāṇassa bhūmī』』ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatā desitena vāsanābhāgiyasuttena siddhā yāvatikā puññabhāgiyā paṭipadādayo vibhajanañāṇassa bhūmi ārammaṇā bhavitumarahanti, tāvatikāhi bhūmīhi vāsanābhāgiyasuttaṃ yojayitabbaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyasuttena siddhā yāvatikā phalabhāgiyā paṭipadādayo vibhajanañāṇassa bhūmi ārammaṇā bhavitumarahanti, tāvatikāhi bhūmīhi nibbedhabhāgiyasuttaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Itaradvayampi suttaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Etena ñāṇassa bhūmīnaṃ suttatthānaṃ bahuvidhattaṃ dasseti.

由於可以問"在哪些經中所說的法、所依、地已通過分別行相而被分別，那些經應當以什麼果相應"，所以說"這四經"等。在那裡，"這四經"是指已確定的習近分和通達分經，以及通過確定它們而已確定的染污分和無學分經，這四經應當以這四經的教說方式所導向的果，從一切方面以節制戒和斷除戒的梵行相應。而且在相應時，應當從一切方面以詞句等的觀察行相觀察節制戒等的果，以理趣行相尋求適當的果，"這個果是這個人的果，這個果是這個經的果"，應當這樣使經各別地與果相應，應當這樣理解其意義。 由於可以問"應當與多少果的梵行相應"，所以說"智慧的地有多少"。由世尊所說的習近分經所成就的功德分道路等，凡是能成為分別智的地的所緣，應當以那麼多的地使習近分經相應。由通達分經所成就的果分道路等，凡是能成為分別智的地的所緣，應當以那麼多的地使通達分經相應。其他兩部經也應當隨其可能而相應。通過這個顯示智慧的地和經義的多樣性。

1. Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu vuttā dhammā vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvehi ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『kathaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhābhāgiyabhāvehi asādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehi vibhajitabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāya pana –

『『Evaṃ vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvehi dhamme ekadesena vibhajitvā idāni tesaṃ kilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyabhāvehi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehi vibhajituṃ 『tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) –

Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti ye dhammā sutte vuttā vibhattihārena vibhajitabbā, tesu dhammesu katame dhammā sādhāraṇāti pucchati, dve dhammā sādhāraṇāti vissajjeti. Te dve dhamme sarūpato dassetuṃ 『『nāmasādhāraṇā, vatthusādhāraṇā cā』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha nāmasādhāraṇāti nāmena nāmapaññattiyā sādhāraṇā samānā, 『『kusalā』』ti nāmena ekavīsati cittuppādā samānā, 『『akusalā』』tyādināmena dvādasa cittuppādā samānā, kusalādināmapaññattivacanena vacanīyā atthā kusalādināmasādhāraṇāti vuttā. Tena ṭīkāyaṃ –

『『Nāmaṃ nāmapaññatti, taṃmukheneva saddato tadatthāvagamo. Saddena ca sāmaññarūpeneva tathārūpassa atthassa gahaṇaṃ, na visesarūpena. Tasmā saddavacanīyā atthā sādhāraṇarūpanāmāyattagahaṇīyatāya nāmasādhāraṇā vuttā』』ti –

Vuttaṃ. Vatthusādhāraṇāti patiṭṭhānabhūtena vatthunā sādhāraṇā. Yasmiṃ patiṭṭhānabhūte santāne vā cittuppādādimhi vā ye dhammā pavattanti, te dhammā tena santānena vā vatthunā tena cittuppādādinā vā sādhāraṇā samānāti attho. Ekasantāne patitattā phusanādisabhāvato bhinnāpi vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāyeva bhavantīti vibhattihārena vibhajitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.

1. 在習近分經等中所說的諸法已被導師以習近分和通達分的性質分別，我們也已了知，由於可以問"如何以染污分和無學分的性質、共通和不共通的性質來分別"，所以開始說"在那裡什麼法是共通的"等。但在註釋中說： "如是以習近分和通達分的性質部分地分別諸法后，現在爲了以染污分和無學分的性質、共通和不共通的性質來分別它們，開始說'在那裡什麼法是共通的'等。" 在那裡，"在那裡"是問在經中所說應當以分別行相來分別的那些法中，什麼法是共通的，回答說兩種法是共通的。爲了顯示那兩種法的自性而說"名共通和事共通"。其中，"名共通"是以名即名稱而共通，以"善"之名而二十一心生起是共通的，以"不善"等名而十二心生起是共通的，以善等名稱言說而可說的義理被稱為善等名共通。因此在疏中說： "名是名稱，只通過它從聲音而瞭解其義。通過聲音以共相的形式而取如此的義，不是以特相的形式。因此，以聲音可說的義理，因為以共相形式的名而可取，所以說是名共通。" "事共通"是以作為所依的事物而共通。在作為所依的相續或心生起等中，那些法生起，那些法與那個相續或事物或那個心生起等是共通的意思。雖然因落在一個相續中而有觸等自性的差異，但因為是事共通而成為同一事物，這樣以分別行相來分別而說。

『『Kiṃ nāmasādhāraṇavatthusādhāraṇāyeva vibhajitabbā, aññaṃ vibhajitabbaṃ natthī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yaṃ vā panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Nāmasādhāraṇavatthusādhāraṇehi aññaṃ yaṃ vā pana kiccasādhāraṇapaccayasādhāraṇapaṭipakkhādisādhāraṇampi dhammajātaṃ evaṃjātiyaṃ sādhāraṇajātiyaṃ, tampi sabbaṃ vicayahārena vicinitvā yuttihārena gavesitvā yuttaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ vibhattihārena vibhajitabbanti adhippāyo. 『『Tesu nāmasādhāraṇādīsu katame nāmasādhāraṇā, katame vatthusādhāraṇā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『micchattaniyatānaṃ sattāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Mātughātakādīnaṃ channaṃ micchattaniyatakammakarānaṃ sattānañca duggatiahetukasugatiahetukaduhetukatihetukānaṃ catunnaṃ puthujjanānaṃ aniyatakammakarānaṃ sattānañca santāne pavattā dassanapahātabbā kilesā dassanapahātabbanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmasanavasena bhinnasabhāvānampi dassanapahātabbanāmanātivattanato. Vuttappakārānaṃ niyatāniyatasattānaṃ dassanapahātabbānaṃ kilesānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā ca samānavatthukāti attho. Puthujjanassa duggatiahetukādicatubbidhasattassa, sotāpannassa ca santāne pavattā kāmarāgabyāpādā kilesā kāmarāgabyāpādanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti sakadāgāmimaggappahātabbaanāgāmimaggappahātabbavasena bhinnasabhāvānampi kāmarāgabyāpādanāmanātivattanato. Vuttappakārassa puthujjanassa, sotāpannassa ca kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāti attho ca gahetabbo. Puthujjanassa, anāgāmissa ca santāne pavattā uddhaṃbhāgiyā saṃyojanā uddhambhāgiyanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti rūparāgādivasena bhinnasabhāvānampi uddhaṃbhāgiyanāmanātivattanato. Puthujjanassa, anāgāmissa ca uddhaṃbhāgiyānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāti attho ca gahetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ṭīkāyaṃ – 『『dassanapahātabbānañhi yathā micchattaniyatasattā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ aniyatāpī』』ti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhepato pana saṃkilesapakkhe pahānekaṭṭhā kilesā nāmasādhāraṇā honti, sahajekaṭṭhā kilesā vatthusādhāraṇāti daṭṭhabbā.

由於可以問"是否只需分別名共通和事共通，沒有其他需要分別的嗎"，所以說"或者其他"等。除了名共通和事共通之外，其他任何作用共通、緣共通、對治等共通的法類，如此類的共通類，也都應當以觀察行相觀察，以理趣行相尋求，以分別行相分別適當的共通，這是其意趣。由於可以問"在那些名共通等中，什麼是名共通，什麼是事共通"，所以說"邪性決定的諸有情"等。 在殺母等六種邪性決定業作者的有情，和惡趣無因、善趣無因、二因、三因等四種非決定業作者的凡夫有情的相續中生起的見所斷煩惱，成為見所斷名共通，雖然以有身見、疑、戒禁取見的方式有不同的自性，但因不超過見所斷之名。對上述決定和非決定有情的見所斷煩惱來說，因為是所依事物，所以是事共通即同一事物，這是其意義。 在凡夫即惡趣無因等四種有情和預流者的相續中生起的欲貪、瞋恨煩惱，成為欲貪瞋恨名共通，雖然以一來道所斷和不還道所斷的方式有不同的自性，但因不超過欲貪瞋恨之名。應當理解對上述凡夫和預流者的欲貪、瞋恨來說，因為是所依事物，所以是事共通即同一事物。 在凡夫和不還者的相續中生起的上分結，成為上分名共通，雖然以色貪等的方式有不同的自性，但因不超過上分之名。應當理解對凡夫和不還者的上分來說，因為是所依事物，所以是事共通即同一事物。因此在疏中說："對見所斷來說，如邪性決定有情是生起處，非決定者也是如此。"簡言之，應當知道在染污分中，斷同一處的煩惱是名共通，俱生同一處的煩惱是事共通。

Saṃkilesapakkhe sādhāraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『kathaṃ vodānapakkhe sādhāraṇā vibhattā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yaṃ kiñci ariyasāvako』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kiñcīti sāmaññavasena vuttā paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādikā lokiyā samāpattiyeva gahitā. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa bhagavato sāvako ariyasāvakoti vattabbo, jhānalābhī ca phalaṭṭho ca puggalo, na maggaṭṭho. Maggaṭṭho hi lokiyaṃ yaṃ kiñci samāpattiṃ na samāpajjati. Sabbā sā lokiyasamāpatti rūpāvacarā arūpāvacarā dibbavihāro brahmavihāro paṭhamajjhānasamāpattīti evamādīhi pariyāyehi sādhāraṇā taṃsamaṅgīhi vītarāgāvītarāgehi sādhāraṇā lokiyasamāpattināmanātivattanato ca vītarāgāvītarāgehi samāpajjitabbato ca. 『『Ariyasāvako ca lokiyaṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjanto odhiso odhiso samāpajjati, evaṃ sati kathaṃ vītarāgehi sādhāraṇāti saddahitabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『sādhāraṇā hi dhammā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『kathaṃ te odhiso gahitā, atha odhiso gahetabbā, kathaṃ sādhāraṇāti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā taṃ visodhento āha – 『sādhāraṇā hi dhammā evaṃ aññamañña』ntiādī』』ti vuttaṃ.

Tattha evaṃ vītarāgāvītarāgehi odhiso odhiso samāpajjitabbā dhammā paraṃ paraṃ pacchā pacchā pavattiyamānaṃ dhammajātaṃ sakaṃ sakaṃ pubbe pubbe jātaṃ 『『lokiyasamāpattī』』ti nāmaṃ niyatavisayaṃ aññamaññaṃ hutvā hi yasmā nātivattanti, tasmā sādhāraṇāti saddahitabbā gahetabbāti attho. 『『Paraṃ paraṃ samāpajjanto kathaṃ nātivattatī』』ti vattabbattā nātivattanaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ 『『yopī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo ariyasāvako vā avītarāgo vā. Imehi lokiyasamāpattidhammehi samannāgato, so ariyasāvako vā avītarāgo vā paraṃ paraṃ samāpajjantopi taṃ dhammaṃ lokiyaṃ samāpattidhammaṃ nātivattati, aññaṃ upagantvā nātikkamatīti attho. Yehi lokiyasamāpattidhammehi samannāgato, ime lokiyasamāpatti dhammā sādhāraṇāvāti daṭṭhabbā.

『『Vāsanābhāgiyādisuttesu vuttā ye dhammā iminā vibhattihārena vibhattā, yesu dhammesu katame dhammā asādhāraṇā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katame dhammā asādhāraṇā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu vibhajitabbesu dhammesu katame dhammā asādhāraṇāti pucchati, pucchitvā yāva desanaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇā dhammā gavesitabbā, 『『sekkhāsekkhā』』ti vā gavesitabbā, 『『bhabbābhabbā』』ti vā gavesitabbā. Atha vā yāva 『『sekkhāsekkhā bhabbābhabbā』』ti desanā vuttā, tāva desanaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇā gavesitabbā. Kathaṃ gavesitabbā? Ariyesu sekkhāsekkhadhammavasena 『『sekkhā』』ti nāmaṃ asekkhena asādhāraṇaṃ, 『『asekkhā』』ti nāmaṃ sekkhena asādhāraṇanti vā, anariyesu 『『bhabbā』』ti nāmaṃ abhabbena asādhāraṇaṃ, 『『abhabbā』』ti nāmaṃ bhabbena asādhāraṇanti vā gavesitabbā. Kāmarāgabyāpādā saṃyojanā appahīnattā anusayabhāvena uppajjanārahattā aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassa ca sotāpannassa phalaṭṭhassa ca sādhāraṇā bhavanti, dhammatā dhammasabhāvo asādhāraṇo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – 『『aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhatā sotāpannassa asādhāraṇā, sotāpannassa sotāpannaphalaṭṭhatā ca aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassa asādhāraṇā. Aṭṭhamakassa vā pahīyamānakilesatā sotāpannassa asādhāraṇā, sotāpannassa pahīnakilesatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā』』ti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 染污分是導師所分別的共通法，我們也了知，"如何是清凈分所分別的共通法"而應當詢問，因此說了"任何聖者弟子"等。其中，"任何"是就一般意義所說的初禪等世間定。"聖者弟子"是指世尊的聖弟子，應稱為聖者弟子，是得禪定和處於果位的人，不是處於道位的。因為處於道位者不能進入任何世間定。一切世間定，無論是色界、無色界、天住、梵住、初禪等，以這些方式都是共通的，對於具有這些的離欲者和未離欲者都是共通的，因為不超越世間定的本質，也因為離欲者和未離欲者都能進入。 "聖者弟子進入世間定時是逐一進入的，如此怎麼能相信是與離欲者共通的呢"，因為應當這樣問，所以說了"共通之法"等。在註釋書中說："如何是逐一所取，又如何應當逐一取，如何是共通"，考慮到這個質問，爲了澄清這點而說："共通之法如是相互"等。 其中，這些法是離欲者和未離欲者應當逐一進入的，後後相續生起的法性，各自前前所生的"世間定"這個名稱的確定境界，成為相互的，因為不相超越，所以應當相信是共通的，應當如此理解。"逐一進入時如何不超越"，因為應當這樣問，爲了明顯說明不超越的情況，所以說了"若有"等。無論是聖者弟子還是未離欲者，具足這些世間定之法者，那聖者弟子或未離欲者即使逐一進入，也不超越那世間定之法，不會超越進入其他，這是其意義。應當看到，由於具足這些世間定之法，這些世間定之法確實是共通的。 "在習氣分等經中所說的法，以此分別理趣所分別的，在這些法中哪些法是不共通的"，因為應當這樣問，所以說了"其中哪些法是不共通"等。其中，在這些應當分別的法中，問哪些法是不共通的，問了之後，應當依據教說尋求不共通之法，應當尋求"有學無學"，或應當尋求"能證不能證"。或者，乃至說到"有學無學能證不能證"的教說，應當依據教說尋求不共通。如何尋求？在聖者中依有學無學之法，"有學"之名對無學是不共通的，"無學"之名對有學是不共通的；或在非聖者中，"能證"之名對不能證者是不共通的，"不能證"之名對能證者是不共通的，應當如此尋求。欲貪、嗔恚等結縛因為未斷除，以隨眠的方式可能生起，對第八者（入流向者）、入流道位者和入流果位者是共通的，但法性、法體是不共通的。這是說："第八者的入流道位性對入流果者是不共通的，入流果者的入流果位性對第八者和入流道位者是不共通的。或者第八者的正在斷除煩惱性對入流果者是不共通的，入流果者的已斷除煩惱性對第八者是不共通的。"

Uddhambhāgiyā saṃyojanā appahīnattā anusayabhāvena uppajjanārahattā aṭṭhamakassa maggaṭṭhabhāvena aṭṭhamakasadisassa anāgāmimaggaṭṭhassa ca anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa ca sādhāraṇā, dhammatā dhammasabhāvo asādhāraṇā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – 『『aṭṭhamakassa anāgāmimaggaṭṭhatā anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa asādhāraṇā, anāgāmissa anāgāmiphalaṭṭhatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā. Aṭṭhamakassa vā pahīyamānakilesatā anāgāmissa asādhāraṇā, anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa pahīnakilesatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā』』ti. 『『Maggaṭṭhatā phalaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā, phalaṭṭhatā ca maggaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā』』tipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sabbesaṃ sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ『『sekkhā』』ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ. Dhammatā asādhāraṇāti catunnaṃ maggaṭṭhānaṃ taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā aññamaññaṃ maggaṭṭhānaṃ asādhāraṇā. Heṭṭhimaphalattayaṭṭhānañca asādhāraṇā, heṭṭhimaphalattayaṭṭhānaṃ taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatā ca aññamaññaṃ phalaṭṭhānaṃ asādhāraṇā, catunnaṃ maggaṭṭhānañca asādhāraṇāti attho. 『『Sekkhānaṃ taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā, taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatā ca taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā』』ti vattumpi vaṭṭati. Sabbesaṃ paṭipannakānanti phalatthāya paṭipajjantīti paṭipannakā, tesaṃ maggasamaṅgīnaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ 『『paṭipannakā』』ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ, dhammatā taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā asādhāraṇā. Sabbesaṃ sekkhānaṃ sattannaṃ puggalānaṃ sekkhānaṃ sīlaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ, dhammatā taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhatā asādhāraṇāti. Vāsanābhāgiyasaṃkilesabhāgiyasuttesu vuttā dassanenapahātabbādayo ceva nibbedhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttesu vuttā sekkhādayo ca dhammā sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhedena vibhattihārena vibhajitabbāti adhippāyo veditabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 上分結因為未斷除，以隨眠的方式可能生起，對第八者以道位性而言與第八者相似的不還道位者和不還果位者是共通的，但法性、法體是不共通的。這是說："第八者的不還道位性對不還果位者是不共通的，不還果者的不還果位性對第八者是不共通的。或者第八者的正在斷除煩惱性對不還果者是不共通的，不還果位者的已斷除煩惱性對第八者是不共通的。"也可以說"道位性對果位性是不共通的，果位性對道位性是不共通的。" 對所有七種有學補特伽羅（人）的名稱"有學"之名是共通的。法性是不共通的，即四道位者各自的道位性對其他道位者是不共通的。對下三果位者也是不共通的，下三果位者各自的果位性對其他果位者是不共通的，對四道位者也是不共通的，這是其意義。也可以說"有學者各自的道位性對各自的果位性是不共通的，各自的果位性對各自的道位性是不共通的。" "所有行道者"是指為證得果位而修行者，這些具足道的四種補特伽羅（人）的名稱"行道者"之名是共通的，但法性即各自的道位性是不共通的。所有七種有學補特伽羅（人）的有學戒是共通的，但法性即各自的道位性和果位性是不共通的。 應當理解，在習氣分和染污分經中所說的見所斷等法，以及在通達分和無學分經中所說的有學等法，應當以共通和不共通的區分通過分別理趣來分別，這是其意趣。

『『Aṭṭhamakassā』』tiādinā ariyesu puggalesu asādhāraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『kathaṃ anariyesu asādhāraṇā vibhattā』』ti pucchitabbattā ariyesu vuttanayānusārena anariyesupi vibhajitvā gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ visesānupassinā』』tiādi vuttaṃ . Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『evaṃ 『aṭṭhamakassā』tiādinā ariyapuggalesu asādhāraṇadhammaṃ dassetvā itaresu nayadassanatthaṃ 『evaṃ visesānupassinā』tiādi vutta』』nti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ariyesu vuttanayānusārena bhabbābhabbesu anariyesu visesānupassinā asādhāraṇato visesaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ anupassinā gavesakena paṇḍitena bhabbābhabbesupi hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāya gavesitabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Mātughātādivasena pavattānaṃ paṭighasampayuttadiṭṭhisampayuttasattamajavanacittuppādānaṃ micchattaniyatānaṃ taṃsamaṅgīnaṃ vā tathāpavattā paṭhamajavanacittupādādayo aniyatā dhammā paṭighasampayuttādibhāvena sādhāraṇā, micchattaniyatā dhammā ekacittuppādattā asādhāraṇā. Yathā hi cittaṃ 『『cittasaṃsaṭṭha』』nti na vattabbaṃ, evaṃ micchattaniyatāpi 『『micchattaniyatasādhāraṇā』』ti na vattabbā. Micchattaniyatesupi niyatamicchādiṭṭhikānaṃ diṭṭhisampayuttasattamajavanacittuppādasamaṅgīnaṃ aniyatā diṭṭhisampayuttapaṭhamajavanacittuppādādayo dhammā diṭṭhisampayuttādibhāvena sādhāraṇā, niyatamicchādiṭṭhi ekacittuppādasamaṅgībhāvato asādhāraṇā. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo –

『『Micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇa, micchattaniyatā dhammā asādhāraṇā. Micchattaniyatesupi niyatamicchādiṭṭhikānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā, niyatamicchādiṭṭhi asādhāraṇāti iminā nayena visesānupassinā veditabbā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34).

Tattha 『『iminā nayenā』』ti iminā micchattaniyatānaṃ uppajjituṃ bhabbā aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā, uppajjituṃ abhabbā aniyatā dhammā asādhāraṇāti gahitā. Tena vuttaṃ 『『bhabbābhabbā』』ti. Tathā hīnassa hīno hīnabhāvena sādhāraṇo, majjhimukkaṭṭhā asādhāraṇā. Majjhimassa majjhimo sādhāraṇo, hīnukkaṭṭhā asādhāraṇā. Ukkaṭṭhassa ukkaṭṭho ukkaṭṭhabhāvena sādhāraṇo, hīnamajjhimā asādhāraṇātipi gavesitabbā. Tenāha – 『『hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāya gavesitabba』』nti.

『『Tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā』』tiādinā nānāvidhena vibhattihāranayena dhammā vibhajitvā dassitā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『kathaṃ bhūmipadaṭṭhānāni vibhattihāranayena vibhajitvā dassitānī』』ti pucchitabbabhāvato dhammavibhajanānantaraṃ bhūmipadaṭṭhānāni vibhajitvā dassento 『『dassanabhūmī』』tiādimāha. Tattha dassanabhūmīti dassanaṃ bhavati ettha paṭhamamaggeti dassanabhūmi, sotāpattimaggo . Niyāmāvakkantiyāti niyamanaṃ niyāmo, ko so? Sampattaniyāmo, avakkanaṃ avakkanti, sotāpattiphalaṃ, niyāmassa avakkanti niyāmāvakkanti, tāya. Dassanabhūmināmako sotāpattimaggo niyāmāvakkantināmakassa sotāpattiphalassa pattiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Paṭhamamaggasamaṅgī puggalo hi niyāmaṃ okkamanto nāma, phalasamaṅgī pana niyāmaṃ okkanto nāma hoti, tasmā niyāmāvakkantisaddena paṭhamaphaluppatti gahitā. Bhāvanābhūmīti uparimaggattayaṃ. Uttarikānanti tassa tassa maggassa uparipavattānaṃ taṃtaṃphalānaṃ pattiyā padaṭṭhānanti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 以"第八者"等，導師已分別了在聖者補特伽羅中的不共通法，我們也了知，因為應當詢問"如何分別非聖者中的不共通法"，爲了顯示應當依照在聖者中所說的方法來分別尋求非聖者中的法，所以說了"如是觀察差別者"等。在註釋書中說："如是以'第八者'等顯示了聖補特伽羅中的不共通法之後，爲了顯示其他的方法而說了'如是觀察差別者'等。" 如是依照在聖者中所說的方法，觀察能證與不能證的非聖者中的差別者，即觀察不共通的差別的尋求者、智者，也應當依據低、中、高來尋求能證與不能證者。如何尋求？依殺母等而生起的瞋恚相應、見相應的第七速行心生起，或具有邪性決定的人，如是生起的第一速行心生起等不定法以瞋恚相應等性質是共通的，邪性決定法因為是一心生起故是不共通的。就如心不能說是"與心相應"，如是邪性決定也不能說是"邪性決定共通"。 在邪性決定者中，具有決定邪見者的見相應第七速行心生起的不定見相應第一速行心生起等法，以見相應等性質是共通的，決定邪見因為是一心生起的緣故是不共通的。因此註釋師說： "邪性決定者的不定法是共通的，邪性決定法是不共通的。在邪性決定者中，決定邪見者的不定法是共通的，決定邪見是不共通的，應當以此方法觀察差別。" 其中"以此方法"是指：邪性決定者能生起的不定法是共通的，不能生起的不定法是不共通的，這樣理解。因此說"能證不能證"。如是，下等者的下等性以下等性是共通的，中等和上等是不共通的。中等者的中等性是共通的，下等和上等是不共通的。上等者的上等性以上等性是共通的，下等和中等是不共通的，也應當如此尋求。因此說："應當依據低、中、高來尋求。" 以"其中哪些法是共通"等，通過種種分別理趣的方法顯示了諸法的分別，我們也了知，因為應當詢問"如何通過分別理趣的方法顯示地和基礎的分別"，所以在法分別之後顯示地和基礎的分別而說"見地"等。其中，"見地"是指在初道中有見，即初道，為入流道。"決定的進入"是指決定即確定，是什麼？是得定，進入即入，是入流果，決定的進入是決定進入，以此。名為見地的入流道是名為決定進入的入流果的基礎。因為具足初道的補特伽羅稱為正在進入決定，而具足果位者稱為已進入決定，所以以決定進入之詞取初果的生起。"修地"是指上三道。"更上"是指應當各別配合：為得到各個道之上所生起的各個果的基礎。

Dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā mandapaññassa uppajjanato samathaṃ āvahantī hutvā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā ñāṇādhikassa uppajjanato vipassanāvahantī hutvā vipassanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, avasesā dve paṭipadāpi nātipaññassa uppajjanato samathassa padaṭṭhānanti gahetabbā. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ – 『『itarā pana tissopi paṭipadā samathaṃ āvahantī』』tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 34). Dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu sayameva ekantena dhammassavanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ na hoti, vandanayācanapañhāpucchanādayopi padaṭṭhānaṃ honti, tasmā tehi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā paratoghosassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, paratoghoso ca dhammassavanapañhāvissajjanādivasena pavatto. Dātabbavatthupariccajanavandanayācanakālesu hi yebhuyyena dhammaṃ desenti, pañhāpucchanādikālesu ca vissajjenti, paṭipucchasākacchādīni vā karonti. Sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu pāmojjapītipassaddhisukhasamādhīhi padaṭṭhānabhāvena sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā cintāmayiyā paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Sīlavantassa hi sīlaṃ paccavekkhantassa pāmojjādayo honti, samāhito ca dhammacintane samattho hoti.

Bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthūti purimā purimā samathabhāvanā ceva vipassanābhāvanā ca puññakiriyavatthudānasīlādīhi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya pacchimāya pacchimāya samathabhāvanāya ceva vipassanābhāvanāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – 『『sādhāraṇanti na bījaṃ viya aṅkurassa, dassanabhūmiādayo viya niyāmāvakkantiādīnaṃ āveṇikaṃ , atha kho sādhāraṇaṃ tadaññakāraṇehipī』』ti. 『『Dānamayasīlamayabhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ paratoghosacintāmayibhāvanāmayipaññānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo ācariyena vibhatto, evaṃ sati tesaṃ dānamayādīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ pariyattibāhusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogamaggasammādiṭṭhīnaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo na bhaveyyā』』ti vattabbattā tathāpavattaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvampi dassetuṃ 『『dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu parato ca ghosassa sutamayiyā ca paññāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Idāni yasmā dānaṃ, sīlaṃ, lokiyabhāvanā ca na kevalaṃ yathāvuttaparatoghosādīnaṃyeva, atha kho yathākkamaṃ pariyattibāhusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogamaggasammādiṭṭhīnampi paccayā honti, tasmā tampi nayaṃ dassetuṃ puna 『dānamaya』ntiādinā desanaṃ vaḍḍhesī』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) –

Vuttaṃ. Tattha dānamayapuññakiriyavatthuno paratoghosassa sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvo heṭṭhā vuttanayena ñātabbo. Dānaṃ pana datvā desanaṃ sutvā sutānusārena vitthāretvā cintentassa pavattamānāya sutamayiyā paññāya vandanayācanādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Sīlamayapuññakiriyavatthunopi cintāmayiyā paññāya sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvo vuttoyeva. Parisuddhasīlaṃ pana nissāya 『『jhānaṃ nibbattessāmi, maggaphalaṃ nibbattessāmī』』tiādinā paccavekkhantassa pavattamānassa yonisomanasikārassa pāmojjādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Bhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthuno bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvopi vuttoyeva. Samathabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ pana jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vā paripākaṃ vipassanābhāvaṃyeva vā nissāya pavattamānāya sammādiṭṭhiyā parisuddhasīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 苦行道遲通達因為生起于鈍慧者，成為引生止的基礎而成為止的基礎。樂行道速通達因為生起于慧增上者，成為引生觀的基礎而成為觀的基礎。其餘兩種行道也因為生起于中等智慧者而應當理解為止的基礎。因此在註釋中說："其餘三種行道也引生止"等。 佈施所成的福業事本身不一定成為聽法的基礎，禮拜、請求、問題等也成為基礎，因此與這些原因共通而成為從他聞的基礎，從他聞是依聽法、解答問題等而進行。因為在應施物、捨棄、禮拜、請求的時候，大多數時候他們說法，在問問題等的時候解答，或者進行反問、討論等。持戒所成的福業事與喜悅、歡喜、輕安、樂、定共通而成為思所成慧的基礎。因為持戒者省察戒時生起喜悅等，入定者能夠思考法。 修習所成的福業事，即前前的止修和觀修，與佈施、持戒等福業事的原因共通，成為後後的止修和觀修的修所成慧的基礎。因此註釋中說："共通不是如種子對於芽，見地等對於決定進入等那樣專屬，而是與其他原因共通。" "導師已分別了佈施所成、持戒所成、修習所成的福業事是從他聞、思所成、修所成慧的基礎，如此的話，這些佈施所成等就不會成為教理、多聞、修習業處、道正見的基礎"，因為應當這樣說，爲了顯示如此進行的基礎性，所以說了"佈施所成的福業事對於從他聞和聞所成慧"等。在註釋中說： "現在，因為佈施、持戒和世間修習不僅是前面所說的從他聞等的，而且也依次是教理、多聞、修習業處、道正見的緣，所以爲了顯示這個方法，又以'佈施所成'等增廣了教說。" 其中，佈施所成福業事是從他聞的共通基礎，應當依前面所說的方法了知。而佈施之後聽聞教說，依所聞而詳細思考時生起的聞所成慧，與禮拜、請求等共通而成為基礎。持戒所成福業事是思所成慧的共通基礎，已經說過。而依清凈戒，以"我將生起禪那，我將生起道果"等方式省察時生起的如理作意，與喜悅等共通而成為基礎。修習所成福業事是修所成慧的共通基礎，也已經說過。而以名為止修的禪那為基礎，或者依純粹觀修而生起的正見，與清凈戒等共通而成為基礎。

Dānamayapuññakiriyavatthuādīnaṃ paratoghosādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo punappunaṃ ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『patirūpadesavāsādayopi imesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānīti yathā vibhajitabbā, amhehi ca viññātabbā, tathā vibhajitvā dassethā』』ti vattabbattā tepi vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『『patirūpadesavāso』』tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『tathā patirūpadesavāsādayo kāyavivekacittavivekādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ hontīti imaṃ nayaṃ dassetuṃ 『patirūpadesavāso』tiādimāhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) vuttaṃ. Patirūpadesaṃ nissāya vasantassa kāyavivekacittavivekavaḍḍhanato, samādhivaḍḍhanato ca patirūpadesavāso kāyacittavivekassa ca upacārasamādhiappanāsamādhissa ca sīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sappurisūpanissayoti sappurisasantāne pavatto payirupāsato ālambitabbo pasādo, tato vā upanissayaṃ labhitvā payirupāsantānaṃ santāne pavatto pubbapasādo yathāvidho sappurisūpanissayo payirupāsantassa saddhāsampannassa ratanattaye tiṇṇaṃ aveccappasādānaṃ ratanattayaguṇādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ, samathassa labhananimittadāyakaṃ sappurisaṃ payirupāsitvā tena dinnanaye ṭhatvā pavattetabbassa samathassa sappurisūpanissayo sīlapāmojjapītādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attasammāpaṇihitassa pāpajigucchādīnaṃ sambhavato attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ jātivayādipaccavekkhaṇena sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā hiriyā ca padaṭṭhānaṃ, attasammāpaṇihitassa nibbidādīnaṃ sambhavato sīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā vipassanāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ.

Tadaṅgādivasena akusalapariccāgo nibbidāñāṇādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā kusalavīmaṃsāya paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya paññāya ca ariyamaggasamādhindriyassa ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammasvākkhātatā svākkhātadhammassavanānusārena pavattakusalamūlakā lokiyalokuttarasampatti kusalamūlaropanā nāma, tāya ca tathāvidhakusalamūlakāya phalasamāpattiyā ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṅghasuppaṭipannatā saṅghasuṭṭhutāya saṅghassa upaṭṭhākānaṃ suṭṭhubhāvāya sappatissavāya vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Satthusampadā satthari ceva dhammādīsu ca guṇaajānanatāya appasannānañca pasādāya pasannānañca appamattakapasādānañca bhiyyobhāvāya vaḍḍhanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Appaṭihatapātimokkhatā saṅghamajjhe vā parisamajjhe vā dummaṅkūnaṃ dummukhānaṃ dussīlānaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, pesalānaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarādisīlasampannānaṃ puggalānaṃ phāsuvihārāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Honto pana yathānurūpehi aññehi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā hotīti veditabbo.

『『Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu vuttadhammabhūmipadaṭṭhānānaṃ vibhattihārena vibhajitabbabhāvo amhehi kena jānitabbo saddahitabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

『『Ettāvatā ca vibhattihāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto vibhattihāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Yattha yattha sutte ye ye dhammādayo vuttā, tattha tattha sutte vuttesu tesu tesu dhammādīsu yathālābhavasena yo yo vibhattihāro yojito, so so vibhattihāro niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.

Iti vibhattihāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusāreneva gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 佈施所成福業事等是從他聞等的基礎，導師已反覆分別，我們也已了知。因為應當說"應當如何分別適宜處所住等也是這些法的基礎，我們應當如何了知，請分別顯示"，爲了顯示這些分別，所以說了"適宜處所住"等。在註釋中說："同樣，適宜處所住等是身遠離、心遠離等的原因，爲了顯示這個方法而說'適宜處所住'等。" 依止適宜處所而住者增長身遠離、心遠離和增長定，所以適宜處所住與戒等共通而成為身心遠離和近行定、安止定的基礎。親近善士是指親近時在善士相續中生起的信樂，或者從中得到依止而在親近者相續中生起的前信樂，如是親近善士對於具信者在三寶中的三不動信，與三寶功德等共通而成為基礎。親近能給予得止的指導的善士，依他所給的方法而修習止，這樣的親近善士與戒、喜悅、歡喜等共通而成為基礎。正確安立自己生起厭惡罪惡等，所以正確安立自己與省察生老等共通而成為慚的基礎，正確安立自己生起厭離等，與戒等共通而成為觀的基礎。 以分離等方式舍離不善，與厭離智等共通而成為善觀察、思擇觀的智慧和聖道定根的基礎。法的善說性，即依善說法的聽聞而生起的善根所成的世間出世間成就，名為植入善根，由此如是善根和果定成為基礎。僧眾的善行性成為僧眾的完善和侍奉僧眾者的完善、恭敬、接受教導的基礎。導師圓滿性成為對於導師和法等不知功德者的信樂，已信者和微小信者的增長的基礎。無障礙戒律成為在僧團中或大眾中對惡態、惡口、破戒者的調伏，對溫和、具足護戒律等戒行者的安樂住的基礎。而成為基礎時，應當了知是與其他相應的原因共通而成為基礎。 因為應當詢問"習氣分經等中所說的法、地、基礎應當以分別理趣分別，我們應當如何知道和相信"，所以說了"因此說"等。其義應當依所說的方法了知。 因為應當說"至此分別理趣已完整，沒有其他應用"，所以說"應用分別理趣"。在任何經中說了任何法等，在那些經中所說的那些法等中，隨所得而應用的分別理趣，那些分別理趣已確定而應用，應當如此理解其義。 如是在分別理趣分別中隨能力所作的 解釋已終。 智者們應當依註釋和復注而詳細分別理解甚深義。;

1. Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 9.轉變理趣分別的解釋 [註：這是標題的直譯，"Parivattana"是轉變、輪轉的意思，"hāra"是理趣、方法，"vibhaṅga"是分別、解釋，"vibhāvanā"是解釋、闡明。整個標題意指"對轉變理趣的分別解釋"]

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇāvisesabhūtena vibhattihāravibhaṅgena sutte vuttā dhammādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo parivattanahāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo parivattano hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parivattano hāro parivattanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Kusalākusale dhamme』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassā』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso parivattano hāro parivattanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo.

『『Saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte niddiṭṭhassa katamassa bhāvitabbassa kusalassa katamo paṭipakkho, kathaṃ parivattetabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā imassa bhāvitabbassa kusalassa ayaṃ paṭipakkho, evaṃ pahātabbabhāvavasena parivattetabboti dassento 『『sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassā』』tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Tattha yasmā saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte yathāniddiṭṭhānaṃ kusalākusaladhammānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūte akusalakusaladhamme pahātabbabhāvādivasena niddhāraṇaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanaṃ, tasmā 『sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavatī』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 35) –

Vuttaṃ. Pahāyakassa hi dhammassa pahātabbabhāvavasena niddhāraṇaṃ, pahātabbassa ca dhammassa pahāyakabhāvavasena niddhāraṇaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha sammādiṭṭhissāti sammā sundarā pasatthā diṭṭhi yassa puggalassāti sammādiṭṭhi. Puggalapadaṭṭhānā hi ayaṃ desanā. Tena vuttaṃ 『『purisapuggalassā』』ti. Sā pana sammādiṭṭhi kammakammaphalādisaddahanavasena vā aniccādivipassanāvasena vā maggasammādassanavasena vā pavattā niravasesāva gahitā. 『『Yāya bhāvitāya sammādiṭṭhiyā pahātabbā micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavati, yadi kevalā micchādiṭṭhiyeva nijjiṇṇā bhavati, evaṃ sati tadavasesā akusalā dhammā ajiṇṇā

Bhaveyyu』』nti vattabbattā 『『ye cassa micchādiṭṭhipaccayā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Micchādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalāyeva dhammā ca uppajjeyyuṃ uppajjanārahā bhaveyyuṃ, te ca akusalā dhammā assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa nijjiṇṇā pahātabbārahā anuppajjanasabhāvā honti. Tenāha bhagavā – 『『upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho』』ti (udā. 2; mahāva. 1).

『『Yadi sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi, tappaccayā akusaladhammāyeva nijjiṇṇā bhavanti, evaṃ sati sammādiṭṭhipaccayā kusalā dhammā na sambhaveyyu』』nti vattabbattā 『『sammādiṭṭhipaccayā cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa uppajjanārahā sammādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke kusalā samathavipassanā vā bodhipakkhiyā vā dhammā sambhavanti, uppannā ca te dhammā assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa santāne punappunaṃ pavattanavasena bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 35. 以任何特殊註釋性質的分別理趣分別來分別經中所說的諸法等，那特殊註釋性質的分別已完整，因為應當詢問"什麼是轉變理趣分別"，所以說了"其中什麼是轉變理趣"等。其中"其中"是指：在已說明的十六種說法理趣等中，什麼特殊註釋方法名為轉變理趣、轉變理趣分別，這樣詢問。對於"善不善法"等說明，現在我將要說的"對於具正見的人"等詳細特殊註釋是轉變理趣、轉變理趣分別，應當如此理解其義。 因為應當詢問"在所註釋的經中所說的什麼應修善法有什麼對立，如何轉變"，爲了顯示這應修善法的這個對立，應當如此以應斷的方式轉變，所以說了"對於具正見的人"等。在註釋中說： "其中，因為在所註釋的經中，如所說的善不善法的對立不善善法，以應斷等方式確定是從對立而轉變，所以開始說'對於具正見的人，邪見已被降伏'"。 因為能斷之法以應斷的方式確定，應斷之法以能斷的方式確定，這就名為從對立而轉變。其中"具正見"是指具有正確、善好、稱讚的見的人，所以說"具正見"。因為這是以人為基礎的教說，所以說"人"。而那正見是以信解業、業果等方式，或以無常等觀方式，或以道正見方式生起的，都完全包含在內。因為應當說"由於修習何正見而應斷的邪見被降伏，如果僅僅邪見被降伏，如此的話其餘不善法就未被降伏"，所以說了"以及他因邪見為緣"等。 因邪見為緣會生起、可能生起許多惡不善法，這些不善法對於具足正見的人來說已被降伏、應當斷除、成為不生起的性質。因此世尊說："由取滅故有滅。" 因為應當說"如果具正見的人的邪見和以此為緣的不善法都被降伏，如此的話以正見為緣的善法就不會生起"，所以說了"以及因正見為緣"等。對於這具足正見的人，能生起的、以正見為緣的許多止觀或菩提分善法得以生起，這些已生起的法在具足正見的人的相續中以反覆生起的方式達到修

Sammādiṭṭhiyā paṭipakkhānaṃ micchādiṭṭhiyā, tappaccayānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ parivattanabhāvo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『sammāsaṅkappassa dhammassa paṭipakkho dhammo kathaṃ parivattetabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『sammāsaṅkappassa purisapuggalassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yojanattha ādayo vuttanayānusārena veditabbā. Sammā sundarā pasatthā vācā yassa puggalassāti sammāvāco, tassa sammāvācassa. 『『Purisapuggalassā』』tiādīnaṃ atthopi vuttanayena veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana visesatthosammā aviparītato vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ yassa puggalassāti sammāvimuttiñāṇadassano, tassa sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇadassanasampannassa purisapuggalassa 『『avimuttāva samānā vimuttā maya』』nti micchābhinivesavasena pavattaṃ micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ vigataṃ bhavati. 『『Ye cassā』』tiādīnaṃ anusandhyādiko vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 正見的對立法邪見，以及以此為緣的不善法的轉變性，導師已分別，我們也已了知。因為應當說"正思惟法的對立法應當如何轉變"，所以說了"對於具正思惟的人"等。連線義等應當依所說的方法了知。 具有正確、善好、稱讚的語的人為正語者，對於那具正語者。"人"等的義也應當依所說的方法了知。這是特殊義：具有正確、無顛倒的解脫智見的人為具正解脫智見者，對於那具正解脫智見、具足省察智見的人來說，以"我們未解脫卻認為已解脫"這樣邪執著方式生起的邪解脫智見被降伏、消失。"以及他"等的隨順等應當依所說的方法了知。

1. 『『Sammādiṭṭhissātiādinā sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ kusalānaṃ paṭipakkhā micchādiṭṭhādikāyeva akusalā pahātabbabhāvena parivattetabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīnaṃ kusalānaṃ paṭipakkhā pāṇātipātādikāpi akusalā pahātabbabhāvena parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ 『『yassa vā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『evaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādimukhena micchādiṭṭhiādiṃ dassetvā puna pāṇātipātaadinnādānakāmesumicchācārādito veramaṇiyādīhi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ 『yassā』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Tadaṅgādivasenapahīno hoti. Kālavādissāti vaditabbakāle vaditabbaṃ vadati sīlenāti kālavādī, tassa.

『『Yathāvuttappakāreneva parivattetabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā aññena pakārenapi parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ 『『ye ca kho kecī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『ye ca kho kecītiādinā sammādiṭṭhiādimukheneva micchādiṭṭhiādīhi eva parivattanaṃ pakārantarena dassetī』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Tattha keci micchādiṭṭhikamicchāsaṅkappādikāyeva puggalā paresaṃ ariyānaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ garahanti. Sandiṭṭhikā sandiṭṭhe niyuttā, sahadhammikā saha dhammena kāraṇena ye vattanti sahadhammikā. Gārayhā garahitabbākāre yuttā . Vādā ca anuvādā ca vādānuvādā, te bhavanto sammādiṭṭhiñca dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena garahaṇena. Pujjā pūjitabbā ca na bhavanti, pāsaṃsā pasaṃsitabbā ca na bhavanti. Evantiādīsu sammāsaṅkappaṃ vā sammāvācādikaṃ vā visuṃ visuṃ sammāsaṅkappañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāsaṅkappikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca…pe… sammāvimuttiñca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchādiṭṭhivācikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca. Sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāvimuttikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca. Sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā cāti yojanā kātabbā. 『『Micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanā』』tipi pāṭho atthi.

『『Ariyamaggasammādiṭṭhādīnaṃ garahavaseneva micchādiṭṭhādayo ca parivattetabbā, nāvasesānaṃ pasaṃsāvasenā』』ti vattabbattā kāmādīnaṃ pasaṃsāvasenapi kāmānaṃ paṭipakkhā veramaṇiyādayopi parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ 『『ye ca kho keci evamāhaṃsū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhuñjitabbā kāmā, paribhuñjitabbā kāmā, āsevitabbā kāmā, nisevitabbā kāmāti ettha kāmīyanteti kāmāti kammasādhanavasena vatthukāmā gahitā, nātipaṇītā kāmā bhuñjitabbā, atipaṇītā kāmā pari samantato bhuñjitabbā. Atipaṇītatarā kāmā ā bhuso sevitabbā, niyatā sevitabbā. Bhāvayitabbā kāmā, bahulīkātabbā kāmāti ettha pana kāmentīti kāmāti kattusādhanavasena kilesakāmā gahitā, punappunaṃ uppādanavasena bhāvayitabbā vaḍḍhāpetabbā pavattetabbā kilesakāmā, bahūnaṃ punappunaṃ uppādanavasena kātabbā vaḍḍhāpetabbā kilesakāmāti ye ca kāmavasikā puthujjanā keci evamāhaṃsu tesaṃ kāmavasikānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ kesañci tādisehi kāmehi veramaṇī kusalacetanā paṭipakkhavasena adhammo asevitabbo nāma āpajjeyyāti adhippāyo gahetabbo.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 36. "正見者等"以此開始，正見等善法的對立面即邪見等不善法應被捨棄，應被轉變。由於這樣可能被問到，爲了顯示離殺生等善法的對立面即殺生等不善法也應被捨棄、應被轉變，所以說"或者對於離殺生者"等。但註釋中說："如此以正見等為首顯示邪見等之後，爲了再以離殺生、不與取、邪淫等顯示殺生等的轉變，所以開始說'對於'等"。通過暫時等方式被斷除。對於適時說話者：按照應該說話的時間說話是他的習慣，所以稱為適時說話者，對於他。 由於可能被問到"應該按照所說的方式轉變"，爲了顯示也應該以其他方式轉變，所以說"凡是任何"等。但註釋中說："以'凡是任何'等，僅以正見等為首，以邪見等顯示另一種方式的轉變"。其中，一些邪見、邪思惟等的人誹謗其他聖者的八支聖道。現見的是專注于現見的，有法的是與法、理由一起運作的。應被誹謗的是適合於應被誹謹的狀態。論和隨論是論和隨論，那些人誹謹正見和法。以那誹謹。不成為應被尊敬的，不成為應被讚歎的。如此等中，或正思惟或正語等，他們各自誹謹正思惟和法。因為那些邪思惟者，他們不成為應被尊敬和讚歎的...乃至...他們誹謹正解脫和法。因為那些邪見語者，他們不成為應被尊敬和讚歎的。他們誹謹正解脫智見和法。因為那些邪解脫者，他們不成為應被尊敬和讚歎的。他們誹謹正解脫智見和法。因為那些邪解脫智見者，他們不成為應被尊敬和讚歎的。應該這樣連線。也有"邪解脫智見"的讀法。 由於應該說"聖道正見等應該僅以誹謹的方式轉變邪見等，而不是以讚歎剩餘的方式"，爲了顯示欲等的對立面即離欲等也應該以讚歎欲等的方式轉變，所以說"凡是任何人這樣說"等。其中，應該享受的欲，應該遍享受的欲，應該親近的欲，應該依止的欲，這裡"被欲求的是欲"，以業格的方式取欲境；不太精妙的欲應該享受，極精妙的欲應該遍、全面地享受。更極精妙的欲應該極度親近，應該固定地親近。應該修習的欲，應該多作的欲，這裡則"欲求的是欲"，以作格的方式取煩惱欲；應該修習、應該增長、應該轉起反覆生起的煩惱欲；應該作、應該增長許多反覆生起的煩惱欲。凡是任何被欲支配的凡夫這樣說，對於那些被欲支配的某些凡夫來說，離那樣的欲的

Antadvayavasena parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ 『『ye vā pana kecī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Attakilamathānuyogo dhammoti niyyānikoti ye vā pana pañcātapādipaṭipannakā tatthiyā evamāhaṃsu, tesaṃ pañcātapādipaṭipannakānaṃ niyyāniko dhammo majjhimāpaṭipadāsaṅkhāto vipassanāsahito ariyamaggo adhammo aniyyāniko abhāvetabbo nāma āpajjeyyāti. Sukhadukkhavasenapi parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ 『『ye ca kho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Pāpaṃ nijjarāpessāmā』』ti attahiṃsanādivasena paṭipannakānaṃ pavatto sarīratāpano dukkho dhammo niyyānikoti.

Ye ca tathāpaṭipannakā keci evamāhaṃsu, tesaṃ tathāpaṭipannakānaṃ anavajjapaccayaparibhogavasena pavatto sarīradukkhūpasamo sukho dhammo adhammo appavattetabbo āpajjeyyāti.

Antadvayādivasena parivattanaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kathaṃ asubhasaññādivasena parivattetabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā evaṃ asubhasaññādivasena subhasaññādikā parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ 『『yathā vā panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『idāni asubhasaññādimukhena subhasaññādiparivattanaṃ dassetuṃ 『yathā vā panā』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Sabbasaṅkhāresūti tebhūmakasaṅkhāresu. Āraddhavipassakassa hi tebhūmakā dhammā kilesāsucipaggharaṇakattā asubhato upaṭṭhahanti.

『『Yadi sarūpatoyeva imesaṃ ime paṭipakkhāti aparivattetabbā siyuṃ, evaṃ sati niravasesā ca paṭipakkhā na sakkā parivattetuṃ, kathaṃ sakkā parivattetu』』nti vattabbattā parivattanalakkhaṇaṃ dassento 『『yaṃ yaṃ vā panā』』tiādimāha. Tattha kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ dhammaṃ parivattetukāmo ācariyo cittena rocayati diṭṭhiyā upagacchati, kusalassa vā akusalassa vā tassa tassa rucikassa upagatassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkho, so paṭipakkhadhammo asaddhammo assa dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkato ajjhāpanno pariññāto. Iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ dhammaṃ parivattetukāmo ācariyo cittena rocayati diṭṭhiyā upagacchati, iṭṭhassa vā aniṭṭhassa vā tassa tassa rucikassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkho, so paṭipakkhadhammo assa dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkadhammato ajjhāpanno pariññāto bhavatīti parivattetukāmena icchitabbadhammānurūpapaṭipakkhavasena parivattanaṃ kātabbanti parivattane paṭipakkhalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ – 『『paṭipakkhassa lakkhaṇaṃ vibhāvetī』』ti.

『『Evaṃ vuttappakāraṃ parivattanaṃ amhehi kathaṃ saddahitabba』』nti vattabbatā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Ettāvatā parivatto hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto parivattano hāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ sutte kusalākusale niddiṭṭhe paṭipakkhavasena nīharitvā yathāsambhavaṃ yo yo parivattano hāro niyutto, tasmiṃ sutte niddiṭṭhe paṭipakkhavasena nīharitvā so so parivattano hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho gahetabboti.

Iti parivattanahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 爲了顯示以兩端的方式轉變，所以說"或者凡是任何"等。苦行是法、是出離之道，如此凡是修習五熱等的外道這樣說，對於那些修習五熱等的外道來說，以中道為名、俱備觀智的聖道這個出離之法，會變成非法、非出離、不應修習。爲了顯示也以樂苦的方式轉變，所以說"凡是"等。"我們將消除罪惡"，以自我折磨等方式修行者所生起的身體折磨苦法是出離之道。 凡是如此修行的某些人這樣說，對於那些如此修行的人來說，以受用無過患資具的方式生起的身苦息滅樂法，會變成非法、不應轉起。 老師已經分別解說了以兩端等方式的轉變，我們也已了知。由於可能被問到"如何以不凈想等方式轉變"，爲了顯示應該如此以不凈想等方式轉變凈想等，所以說"或者如"等。但註釋中說："現在爲了顯示以不凈想等為首的凈想等轉變，所以說'或者如'等"。在一切行中：在三界諸行中。因為對於已開始觀察者來說，三界諸法由於流出煩惱不凈，所以顯現為不凈。 由於應該說"如果僅僅從自相上這些是這些的對立面而不應轉變的話，如此一來就不能轉變無餘的對立面，如何能夠轉變"，爲了顯示轉變的特相，所以說"或者任何"等。其中，善或不善，任何法老師想要轉變，以心喜好、以見接受，對於那善或不善、那被喜好、被接受的法的對立面，那對立法、非正法，對於這法來說是不可意的、相違的、被了知的。可意或不可意，任何法老師想要轉變，以心喜好、以見接受，對於那可意或不可意、那被喜好的法的對立面，那對立法對於這法來說是不可意的、相違法、被了知的。想要轉變者應該依據所欲求法相應的對立面來作轉變，這是在轉變中說的對立特相。因此註釋中說："顯示對立的特相"。 由於應該說"如此所說方式的轉變我們應該如何相信"，所以說"因此說"等。 由於應該說"至此轉變理趣已圓滿，沒有其他被運用的"，所以說"轉變理趣已被運用"。在任何經中說明善不善時，依對立面引導出來，隨其可能，任何轉變理趣被運用，在那經中所說明的，依對立面引導出來，那轉變理趣被運用、被確定、被結合，應該這樣理解其義。 如此在轉變理趣分別中依能力所作的 解釋已完成。 但是智者們應該依據註釋和復注詳細分別取其深義。 10. 同義理趣分別解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena pavattanahāravibhaṅgena parivattetabbā suttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto parivattanahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo vevacanahāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo vevacano hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vevacano hāro vevacanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Vevacanāni bahūnī』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『ekaṃ bhagavā dhamma』』ntiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso vevacano hāro vevacanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo. 『『Yāni vevacanāni niddhāritāni, katamāni tāni vevacanānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yathā eka』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ viññātabbaṃ dhammaṃ sabhāvadhammaṃ paññāpetabbaṃ vā dhammaṃ aññamaññehi yathā yehi pakārehi ceva vevacanehi ca bhagavā niddisati, tathāpakārāni vevacanāni viññātabbānīti attho. 『『Tāni vevacanāni kinti bhagavā āhā』』ti vattabbattā 『『yathāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yaṃyaṃpakārāni vevacanāni –

『『Āsā ca pihā ca abhinandanā ca, anekadhātūsu sarā patiṭṭhitā;

Aññāṇamūlappabhavā pajappitā, sabbā mayā byantikatā samūlikā』』ti. –

Bhagavā āha, taṃtaṃpakārāni vevacanāni viññātabbānīti attho.

Ekasseva dhammassa anekehi pariyāyabhūtehi vevacanehi niddisane phalaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 37) bahudhā vuttaṃ, tasmā amhehi na dassitaṃ. 『『Katamā āsā, katamā pihādī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『āsā nāma vuccatī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā bhavissassa atthassa āsīsanā avassaṃ āgamissatīti yā āsā assa āsīsantassa puggalassa uppajjati, tassa āsīsanā 『『āsā nāmā』』ti vuccati. Vattamānassa yā patthanā assa patthayantassa uppajjati, seyyataraṃ vā aññaṃ disvā 『『ediso ahaṃ bhaveyya』』nti yā pihā assa pihayantassa uppajjati, sā patthanā 『『pihā nāmā』』ti vuccati. Anāgatatthaṃ ārabbha pavattā taṇhā 『『āsā』』ti vuccati, anāgatapaccuppannatthaṃ ārabbha pavattā taṇhā 『『pihā』』ti vuccati, tathāpi taṇhābhāvena ekattā eko dhammova atthassa icchitassa nipphatti atthanipphatti, paṭipāleti etāya taṇhāyāti paṭipālanā, atthanipphattiyā paṭipālanāti atthanipphattipaṭipālanā. Yā taṇhā assa pālayantassa puggalassa uppajjati, sā taṇhā 『『abhinandanā』』ti vuccati.

『『Yā atthanipphatti taṇhāya paṭipāletabbā, katamā sā atthanipphattī』』ti pucchitabbattā taṃ atthanipphattiṃ sattato vā saṅkhārato vā vibhajitvā dassento 『『piyaṃ vā ñātiṃ, piyaṃ vā dhamma』』ntiādimāha. Tattha 『『ñāti』』nti iminā mittabandhavādayopi gahitā. Dhammaṃ pana piyarūpārammaṇādikaṃ chabbidhampi yāya taṇhāya taṇhiko abhinandati, sā taṇhā 『『abhinandanā nāmā』』ti vuccati. Paṭikkūlaṃ ñātiṃ vā dhammaṃ vā vipallāsavasena appaṭikkūlaṃ ñātiṃ vā dhammaṃ vā sabhāvavasena appaṭikkūlato yāya taṇhāya taṇhiko abhinandati , sā taṇhā vā 『『abhinandanā nāmā』』ti vuccatīti yojetvā attho gahetabbo.

『『Yāsu anekāsu dhātūsu vuttappakārā taṇhā 『sarā』ti bhagavatā vuttā, katamā tā dhātuyo』』ti pucchitabbattā tā dhātuyo sarūpato dassetuṃ 『『cakkhudhātū』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 37. 以任何特殊註釋形式的轉變理趣分別來分別經義應被轉變，那作為特殊註釋的轉變理趣分別已圓滿。由於可能被問到"什麼是同義理趣分別"，所以說"其中什麼是同義理趣"等。其中，"其中"即在那些已說明的十六種教說理趣等中，問什麼特殊註釋是名為同義理趣、同義理趣分別。對於"諸多同義語"等說明，現在我要說的"世尊一法"等詳細特殊註釋是名為同義理趣、同義理趣分別，應該這樣理解其義。由於可能被問到"已確定的同義語是什麼同義語"，所以說"如一"等。世尊以相互之間如何的方式和同義語來說明一個應知的法、自性法或應施設的法，應該知道如此方式的同義語，這是其義。由於應該說"世尊如何說那些同義語"，所以說"如世尊所說"等。如何的同義語—— "慾望和羨慕和歡喜， 安住在種種界中的箭， 無明為根源而生起的妄想， 一切都被我連根拔除。"—— 世尊如此說，應知如此方式的同義語，這是其義。 在註釋中多方面說明以多種方式的同義語說明一法的果報，因此我們不顯示。由於可能被問到"什麼是慾望，什麼是羨慕等"，所以說"所謂慾望"等。對於未來事物的希求，必定會到來的希求生起于那希求的人，那希求被稱為"所謂慾望"。對現在的願望生起于那願望的人，或見到更好的其他而"愿我如此"的羨慕生起于那羨慕的人，那願望被稱為"所謂羨慕"。緣未來事物而轉起的愛被稱為"慾望"，緣未來現在事物而轉起的愛被稱為"羨慕"，雖然如此，由於是愛的自性故是一法。所欲求事物的成就是事物成就，以那愛來守護為守護，事物成就的守護為事物成就守護。那愛生起于那守護的人，那愛被稱為"歡喜"。 由於可能被問到"什麼是應該以愛來守護的事物成就"，爲了從有情或行來分別顯示那事物成就，所以說"可愛的親戚，可愛的法"等。其中，以"親戚"也包含朋友、眷屬等。而法則是可愛色等六種法，以任何愛貪愛者歡喜，那愛被稱為"所謂歡喜"。對不可意的親戚或法，由於顛倒而[視為]非不可意的親戚或法，由於自性而[本來]非不可意，以任何愛貪愛者歡喜，那愛被稱為"所謂歡喜"，應該這樣連線理解其義。 由於可能被問到"在什麼許多界中所說方式的愛被世尊說為'箭'"，爲了顯示那些界的自性，所以說"眼界"等。

『『Tāsu dhātūsu katamāya dhātuyā katamā sarā patiṭṭhitā pavattā』』ti pucchitabbattā imāya dhātuyā ayaṃ sarā patiṭṭhitā pavattāti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『sarāti keci rūpādhimuttā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kecīti sarāsaṅkhātāya rūpataṇhāya taṇhikā puggalā. Rūpādhimuttāti rūpadhātusaṅkhāte ārammaṇe adhimuttā ajjhositā. Iminā padena rūpataṇhāsaṅkhātā sarā rūpadhātuyā patiṭṭhitā pavattāti gahitā, 『『keci saddādhimuttā』』tiādīhipi saddataṇhāsaṅkhātādayo sarā saddadhātuyādīsu patiṭṭhitā pavattā sarāva gahitā. Keci dhammādhimuttāti ettha dhammaggahaṇena cakkhudhātusotadhātughānadhātujivhādhātukāyadhātusattaviññāṇadhātudhammadhātuyo gahitā, tasmā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo patiṭṭhānabhāvena gahitāpi chabbidhāva gahitāti daṭṭhabbā. 『『Rūpādhimuttādīsu kittakāni padāni taṇhāpakkhe taṇhāya vevacanā』』ti pucchitabbattā etādisāni ettakāni padāni taṇhāpakkhe taṇhāvevacanānīti niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『tattha yāni cha gehasitānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu chasu rūpādīsu. Cha gehasitāni domanassānīti chasu rūpādīsu pavattaṃ taṇhāpemaṃ nissāya pavattāni cha domanassāni. Esa nayo sesesupi. 『『Cha upekkhā gehasitāpi bhagavatā vuttā, kasmā na gahitā』』ti vattabbattā 『『yā cha upekkhā gehasitā, ayaṃ diṭṭhipakkho』』ti vuttaṃ, diṭṭhipakkhattā na gahitāti attho.

1. 『『Kathaṃ vuttappakārā taṇhā eva gahitā』』ti vattabbattā 『『sāyeva patthanākārenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sā vuttappakārā eva taṇhā patthanākārena pavattanato āsādipariyāyena vuttā, rūpādiārammaṇadhammesu nandanato 『『dhammanandī』』ti pariyāyena vuttā, rūpādiārammaṇadhammesu gilitvā pariniṭṭhapeti viya ajjhosāya tiṭṭhanato 『『dhammajjhosāna』』nti pariyāyena vuttā, tasmā taṇhāya vevacanāni honti.

Taṇhāya vevacanāni ācariyena niddiṭṭhāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, 『『katamāni cittassa vevacanānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『cittaṃ mano』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Ārammaṇaṃ cintetīti cittaṃ. Manati jānātīti mano. Vijānātīti viññāṇa』』ntiādinā attho pakaraṇesu (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 5) vuttova, tasmā amhehi na vitthārito. Vevacanāniyeva imāni imassa vevacanānīti ettakāniyeva kathayissāma. 『『Paññindriyaṃ paññābala』』ntiādīni paññāvevacanāni.

『『Arahaṃ sammāsambuddho』』tiādīni buddhassa vevacanāni. 『『Tāni kattha desitānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yathā ca buddhānussatiyaṃ vutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Buddhānussatidesanāyaṃ yathā ca yaṃyaṃpakāraṃ vevacanaṃ bhagavatā 『『itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ…pe… bhagavato』』ti vuttaṃ, etaṃpakāraṃ vevacanaṃ buddhānussatiyā vevacanaṃ buddhassa vevacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. 『『Yathā ca dhammānussatiyaṃ vutta』』ntiādīsupi evameva yojanā kātabbā.

『『Tenāhā』』tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva 『『niyutto vevacano hāro』』tiānusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

Iti vevacanahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Paññattihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 由於可能被問到"在那些界中，什麼箭安住、轉起于什麼界"，爲了確定顯示此箭安住、轉起於此界，所以說"箭即某些執著於色"等。其中，"某些"是被稱為箭的色愛的貪愛者。"執著於色"是執著、耽著于稱為色界的所緣。以此詞表示稱為色愛的箭安住、轉起於色界，以"某些執著于聲"等也表示稱為聲愛等的箭安住、轉起于聲界等的箭。"某些執著於法"，這裡以法的攝取包含眼界、耳界、鼻界、舌界、身界、七識界、法界，因此十八界雖然被攝取為安住處，應該看作只有六種被攝取。由於可能被問到"在執著於色等中，有多少語詞是愛分中愛的同義語"，爲了確定顯示如此這些語詞是愛分中愛的同義語，所以說"其中六種居家"等。"其中"即在那六種色等中。"六種居家憂"即依止在六種色等中轉起的愛著而轉起的六種憂。在其餘中也是這個方法。由於應該說"世尊也說六種居家舍，為何不攝取"，所以說"六種居家舍，這是見分"，因為是見分所以不攝取，這是其義。 38. 由於應該說"如何是隻攝取所說方式的愛"，所以說"那即以願望形式"等。那所說方式的愛因為以願望形式轉起而以慾望等方式說，因為在色等所緣法中歡喜而以"法歡"的方式說，因為在色等所緣法中如同吞噬般以執著而住所以以"法執著"的方式說，因此成為愛的同義語。 老師已說明愛的同義語，我們也已了知。由於可能被問到"什麼是心的同義語"，所以說"心、意"等。"思考所緣故為心。知故為意。識知故為識"等的義理在諸論書中已說，因此我們不詳述。只說明這些是這個的同義語。"慧根、慧力"等是慧的同義語。 "阿羅漢、正等覺者"等是佛的同義語。由於可能被問到"那些在何處所說"，所以說"如在佛隨念中說"等。在佛隨唸的教說中如何以某種方式的同義語被世尊說為"如是彼世尊、阿羅漢...乃至...世尊"，應該看作這樣方式的同義語是佛隨唸的同義語、佛的同義語。在"如在法隨念中說"等中也應該這樣作連線。 "因此說"等的承接等義以及"同義理趣已被運用"的承接等義，應該依所說方法的順序來了知。 如此在同義理趣分別中依能力所作的 解釋已完成。 但是智者們應該依據註釋和復注詳細分別取其深義。 11. 施設理趣分別解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena vevacanāni vibhattāni, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo paññattihāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo paññattihāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso paññattihāro paññattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Ekaṃ bhagavā dhammaṃ paññattīhi vividhāhi desetī』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『yā pakatikathāya desanā』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso paññattihāro paññattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.

『『Yāhi vividhāhi paññattīhi ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhagavā deseti, katamā tā vividhā paññattiyo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yā pakatikathāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pakatikathāyāti assādādipadatthavisesaṃ aniddhāretvā atthasabhāvena pavattāya kathāya sādhukaṃ manasikāradhammakathāya yā desanā yathādhippetamatthaṃ veneyyasantāne nikkhipati patiṭṭhapeti pakārena ñāpeti, tasmā nikkhepapaññatti, tāya paññattiyā dhammaṃ desetīti attho. 『『Yā paññatti 『pakatikathāya desanā』ti vuttā, katamā sā』』ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā vitthārato dassetuṃ 『『kā ca pakatikathāya desanā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –『『iti 『pakatikathāya desanā』ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena vibhajituṃ 『kā ca pakatikathāya desanā』ti pucchitvā 『cattāri saccānī』tiādimāhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 39) vuttaṃ. Tattha desanādesetabbassa bhedabhāvepi abhedopacārena 『『desanā cattāri saccānī』』ti vuttaṃ, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ paññatti desanā nāmāti attho.

『『Kathaṃ taṃ saccapaññattiṃ bhagavā āhā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yathā bhagavā āhā』』ti vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena bhagavā yaṃ yaṃ paññattiṃ āha, tathā tena pakārena sā paññatti jānitabbā. 『『Idaṃ dukkha』』nti yaṃ paññattiṃ bhagavā āha, ayaṃ 『『idaṃ dukkha』』nti paññatti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, channaṃ dhātūnaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, dasannaṃ indriyānaṃ nikkhepapaññattīti yojanā kātabbā. Khandhadhātuāyatanindriyāni ca lokiyāneva. Pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmatthatāsāmaññena ekattaṃ upanetvā 『『idaṃ dukkha』』nti vuttā. Dasannaṃ indriyānanti cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyaitthipurisajīvitamanavedanindriyānaṃ dasannaṃ. Anubhavanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā vedanindriyaṃ ekanti gahitaṃ, saddhindriyādīni pana maggapariyāpannattā na gahitāni.

Kabaḷīkāreti ṭhānūpacārena voharite ojāsaṅkhāte āhāre, rāgo ariyamaggena appahātabbattā anusayavasena, āsāvasena vā patthanāvasena vā atthi nandī. Atthi taṇhāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Patiṭṭhitaṃ viruḷhanti paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāpattiyā patiṭṭhitattā patiṭṭhitañceva viruḷhañcāti gahetabbaṃ. Saṅkhārānanti punabbhavanibbattakassa bhavassa abhinibbattihetukānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ. Jātijarāmaraṇanti abhinibbattanalakkhaṇā jāti, na uppādova, paripākalakkhaṇā jarā, na ṭhitiyeva, bhedanalakkhaṇaṃ maraṇaṃ, na bhaṅgameva. Tena vuttaṃ 『『sasokaṃ sadaraṃ saupāyāsa』』nti.

1. 以任何作為特殊解釋的轉起理趣分別來轉變的經義已被分別，那作為特殊解釋的轉起理趣分別已圓滿，由於可能被問到"什麼是同義理趣分別"，所以說"其中什麼是同義理趣"等。其中，"其中"是指在那些已說明的十六種教說理趣等中，什麼特殊解釋是名為同義理趣、同義理趣分別，這樣問。"很多同義詞"等說明，現在我將要說的"一個，世尊，法"等詳細的特殊解釋是名為同義理趣、同義理趣分別，應該這樣理解其義。由於可能被問到"已確定的同義詞是哪些同義詞"，所以說"如一"等。世尊以相互之間如何的方式和同義詞來說明一個應被了知的法、自性法或應被施設的法，應該了知那樣方式的同義詞，這是其義。由於應該說"世尊如何說那些同義詞"，所以說"如世尊所說"等。如世尊所說的那些方式的同義詞： "希望和渴求和隨喜， 安住在多界的箭， 以無知為根源而生起的妄想， 全都被我連根拔除。" 應該了知那些方式的同義詞，這是其義。 在註釋中多方面說明了以許多同義詞說明一個法的果報，因此我們不再顯示。由於可能被問到"什麼是希望，什麼是渴求等"，所以說"名為希望"等。對未來事物的期望，必定會到來的期望，對那期望者生起的期望，那期望被稱為"名為希望"。對現在事物的欲求，對那欲求者生起的欲求，或者看到更好的其他事物而"愿我如此"的羨慕，對那羨慕者生起的羨慕，那欲求被稱為"名為渴求"。緣未來事物而轉起的渴愛被稱為"希望"，緣未來和現在事物而轉起的渴愛被稱為"渴求"，雖然如此，由於是渴愛性而為一，只是一個法，所欲求事物的成就是事物成就，以那渴愛來保護，所以是保護，事物成就的保護是事物成就保護。對那保護者生起的渴愛被稱為"隨喜"。 由於可能被問到"什麼是應該以渴愛來保護的事物成就"，爲了顯示那事物成就從有情或行的角度來分別，所以說"可愛的親屬，可愛的法"等。其中，以"親屬"也包括朋友、親戚等。而法是指可愛色等六種法，貪著者以任何渴愛來隨喜，那渴愛被稱為"名為隨喜"。不可意的親屬或法，以顛倒的方式；非不可意的親屬或法，以自性的方式，貪著者以任何渴愛來隨喜非不可意，那渴愛被稱為"名為隨喜"，應該這樣連線來理解其義。 由於可能被問到"在哪些多界中所說方式的渴愛被世尊稱為'箭'"，爲了顯示那些界的自相，所以說"眼界"等。

『『Phasse ce, bhikkhave, āhāre…pe… manosañcetanāya ce, bhikkhave, āhāre…pe… viññāṇe ce, bhikkhave, āhāre atthi rāgo…pe… vadāmī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti dukkhassa ca samudayassa ca pabhavassa paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti nāma.

Vaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ vivaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre natthi rāgo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Kabaḷīkāre…pe… anupāyāsanti vadāmī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.

1. 以任何特殊解釋的轉變理趣分別來分別應該被轉變的經義,那種特殊解釋的轉變理趣分別已完成。由於可能被問到"什麼是同義理趣分別",所以說"其中什麼是同義理趣"等。其中,"其中"是:在那些已說明的十六種教說理趣等中,哪一種特殊解釋稱為同義理趣、同義理趣分別?應該這樣理解其義:現在我要說的"世尊(說)一法"等詳細特殊解釋稱為同義理趣、同義理趣分別。由於可能被問到"已確定的同義詞是哪些同義詞",所以說"如一"等。世尊以相互的各種方式和同義詞說明一個應該了知的法、自性法或應該施設的法,應該了知那樣的同義詞,這是其義。由於應該說"世尊是如何說那些同義詞的",所以說"如世尊說"等。如同世尊說的各種同義詞: "希望、羨慕和歡喜, 安住在許多界中的箭, 以無知為根源而生的妄想, 我已連根全部斷除。" 應該了知那樣的各種同義詞,這是其義。 註釋中多方面說明了以許多同義詞表達同一法的果報,因此我們不再顯示。由於可能被問到"什麼是希望,什麼是羨慕等",所以說"稱為希望"等。對未來事物的期望,必定會來到的期望,對那期望者生起的,那期望稱為"希望"。對現在的欲求,對那欲求者生起的,或者見到更好的他人而(想)"我願成為這樣",對那羨慕者生起的,那欲求稱為"羨慕"。緣未來事物而生起的渴愛稱為"希望",緣未來和現在事物而生起的渴愛稱為"羨慕",雖然如此,由於是渴愛性而同一,只是一法,所欲求事物的成就是事物成就,以這渴愛等待,所以是等待,事物成就的等待是事物成就等待。對那等待者生起的渴愛稱為"歡喜"。 由於可能被問到"什麼是應該以渴愛等待的事物成就",爲了分別顯示那事物成就是有情還是行,所以說"可愛的親屬,可愛的法"等。其中,以"親屬"也包括朋友、夥伴等。但是法是可愛色等六種,貪愛者以任何渴愛歡喜,那渴愛稱為"歡喜"。不可愛的親屬或法,因顛倒而(視為)可愛的親屬或法,或者自性可愛的親屬或法,貪愛者以任何渴愛歡喜,那渴愛稱為"歡喜",應該這樣連線理解其義。 由於可能被問到"在哪些多種界中世尊說所說的渴愛是'箭'",爲了具體顯示那些界,所以說"眼界"等。

2. Vivaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ sammasanavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『samādhiṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvethā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Samādhiṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvetha…pe… yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.

Sammasanavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ upādānakkhandhavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『rūpaṃ, rādha, vikirathā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Rūpaṃ, rādha, vikiratha…pe… nibbāna』』nti ayaṃ paññatti taṇhāsaṅkhātassa rodhassa nirodhassa ca paññāpanato nirodhapaññatti nāma, assādassa nibbidāya ca paññāpanato nibbidāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.

『『Rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇāni vikiranto viddhaṃsento vikīḷaniyaṃ karonto paññāya taṇhākkhayāya paṭipajjanto kiṃ pajānātī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so 『idaṃ dukkha』nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『So 『idaṃ dukkha』nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti…pe… nirodhagāminipaṭipadāti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti saccānaṃ paṭivedhassa paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma, dassanabhūmiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, sotāpattiphalassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma. 『『So 『ime āsavā』ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe… 『āsavā asesaṃ nirujjhantī』ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti khayeñāṇassa uppādassa ca paññāpanato uppādapaññatti nāma, anuppādeñāṇassa okāsassa ca paññāpanato okāsapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, vīriyindriyassa ārambhassa ca paññāpanato ārambhapaññatti nāma, āsāṭikānaṃ āhaṭanāya ca paññāpanato āhaṭanāpaññatti nāma, bhāvanābhūmiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhinighātassa ca paññāpanato abhinighātapaññatti nāma.

1. 導師已經解釋了輪轉方面的概念分類，我們也已經瞭解了，因為應該說明"如何解釋觀察方面的概念分類"，所以說了"諸比丘，你們應修習定"等等。"諸比丘，你們應修習定......如實了知"，這個概念因為宣說修習道，所以稱為修習概念；因為宣說遍知苦，所以稱為遍知概念；因為宣說斷除集，所以稱為斷除概念；因為宣說證悟滅，所以稱為證悟概念。 導師已經解釋了觀察方面的概念分類，我們也已經瞭解了，因為應該說明"如何解釋取蘊方面的概念分類"，所以說了"羅陀，應當分散色"等等。"羅陀，應當分散色......涅槃"，這個概念因為宣說滅除被稱為渴愛的阻礙，所以稱為滅概念；因為宣說厭離味著，所以稱為厭離概念；因為宣說遍知苦，所以稱為遍知概念；因為宣說斷除集，所以稱為斷除概念；因為宣說修習道，所以稱為修習概念；因為宣說證悟滅，所以稱為證悟概念。 因為應該問"分散、破壞、嬉戲色、受、想、行、識，以智慧為滅盡渴愛而行道的人了知什麼"，所以說了"他如實了知'這是苦'"等等。"他如實了知'這是苦'......如實了知'這是趣向滅的道路'"，這個概念因為宣說通達諸諦，所以稱為通達概念；因為宣說安置於見地，所以稱為安置概念；因為宣說修習道，所以稱為修習概念；因為宣說證悟預流果，所以稱為證悟概念。"他如實了知'這些是漏'......如實了知'漏完全滅盡'"，這個概念因為宣說生起盡智，所以稱為生起概念；因為宣說不生智的機會，所以稱為機會概念；因為宣說修習道，所以稱為修習概念；因為宣說遍知苦，所以稱為遍知概念；因為宣說斷除集，所以稱為斷除概念；因為宣說開始精進根，所以稱為開始概念；因為宣說摧毀遮蔽物，所以稱為摧毀概念；因為宣說安置於修習地，所以稱為安置概念；因為宣說擊破惡不善法，所以稱為擊破概念。

2. Vaṭṭavasena vā vivaṭṭavasena vā dhammasammasanavasena vā upādānakkhandhavasena vā pajānanavasena vā saccesu nānāvidho paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu paññattibhedo vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu paññattibhedaṃ dassetuṃ 『『idaṃ dukkhanti me, bhikkhave』』tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『evaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭamukhena sammasanaupādānakkhandhamukheneva saccesu paññattivibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni teparivaṭṭavasena dassetuṃ 『idaṃ dukkhanti me bhikkhave』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 41) vuttaṃ. Tattha pubbe parijānanato paṭṭhāya. Ananussutesūti parijānanavasena ananussutesu catūsu saccadhammesu. Cakkhunti paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanaṭṭhena cakkhu nāma. Yathāsabhāvato kiccaparijānanaṭṭhena sacchikiriyaparijānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ nāma. Yathāsabhāvato kiccaparijānanādīnaṃ paṭivijjhitvā pajānanaṭṭhena paññā nāma. Tathā viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā nāma. Ālokobhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena āloko nāma. Idaṃ cakkhādikaṃ sabbaṃ paññāvevacanameva. 『『Idaṃ dukkhanti me bhikkhave…pe… udapādī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti saccānaṃ desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma, sutamayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, anaññātaññassāmītindriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma, dhammacakkassa pavattanāya ca paññāpanato pavattanāpaññatti nāma.

『『Taṃ kho panidaṃ dukkhaṃ pariññeyyaṃ…pe… udapādī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, cintāmayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, aññindriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.

『『Taṃ kho panidaṃ dukkhaṃ pariññātaṃ…pe… udapādī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, aññātāvino indriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma, dhammacakkassa pavattanāya ca paññāpanato pavattanāpaññatti nāma.

1. 導師已經解釋了在輪迴方面、出離方面、法觀察方面、取蘊方面、了知方面等諸諦中各種不同的概念分類，我們也已經瞭解了。因為應該說明"如何解釋三轉方面諸諦中的概念分類"，爲了顯示三轉方面諸諦中的概念分類，所以開始說"諸比丘，這是苦"等等。 在註釋書中說："這樣通過輪迴出離之門、觀察取蘊之門顯示了諸諦中的概念分類后，現在爲了通過三轉方面顯示，所以開始說'諸比丘，這是苦'等等。" 其中，從先前遍知開始。"在未聞中"是指在通過遍知方式未曾聽聞的四聖諦法中。"眼"是指因為首先見到涅槃的意義而稱為眼。因為如實了知作用遍知、證悟遍知的意義而稱為智。因為通達后如實了知作用遍知等的意義而稱為慧。同樣，因為作明瞭的意義而稱為明。因為作光明照耀的意義而稱為光明。這一切眼等都只是慧的同義詞。 "諸比丘，這是苦......生起"，這個概念因為宣說諸諦的開示，所以稱為開示概念；因為宣說安置聞所成慧，所以稱為安置概念；因為宣說證悟未知當知根，所以稱為證悟概念；因為宣說轉動法輪，所以稱為轉動概念。 "此苦應當遍知......生起"，這個概念因為宣說修習道，所以稱為修習概念；因為宣說安置思所成慧，所以稱為安置概念；因為宣說證悟已知根，所以稱為證悟概念。 "此苦已遍知......生起"，這個概念因為宣說修習道，所以稱為修習概念；因為宣說安置修所成慧，所以稱為安置概念；因為宣說證悟具知根，所以稱為證悟概念；因為宣說轉動法輪，所以稱為轉動概念。

Teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu nānāvidho paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ kusalākusalādivasena desitadhammassa paññattibhedo vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『tulamatulañca sambhava』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā dhammacakkasutte paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『tulamatulañcātiādigāthāya kathaṃ paññattibhedo vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『tulamatulañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tulīyati paricchijjīyatīti tulaṃ, kāmāvacarakammaṃ, natthi tulaṃ sadisaṃ aññaṃ lokiyakammaṃ assa mahaggatakammassāti atulaṃ, rūpārūpāvacarakammaṃ. Punabbhavaṃ sambhavati etena saṅkhārenāti sambhavo, taṃ sambhavaṃ. Punabbhavaṃ saṅkharotīti bhavasaṅkhāro. Ajjhatte vipassanāvasena ramatīti ajjhattarato. Samathavasena samādhiyatīti samāhito. Attani sambhavatīti attasambhavo, taṃ attasambhavaṃ. Muni sambuddho sambhavaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ tulañca atulañca avassaji, ajjhattarato samāhito kavacaṃ abhindi iva, evaṃ attasambhavaṃ abhindi padālayīti yojanā kātabbā. Atha vā muni sambuddho 『『pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattā vipariṇāmadhammā, nibbānaṃ pana niccaṃ sukhaṃ asaṅkhataṃ avipariṇāmadhamma』』nti tulaṃ tulayanto atulaṃ nibbānaṃ disvā sambhavaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ ariyamaggena avassaji. Kathaṃ avassaji? So hi muni vipassanāvasena ajjhattarato ca hutvā, samathavasena upacārappanāsu samāhito ca hutvā kavacaṃ abhindi iva, evaṃ attasambhavaṃ attani sañjātaṃ kilesaṃ abhindi padālayi, kilesābhāvena kammañca jahīti gāthāttho gahetabbo.

『『Tulamatulañca sambhava』』nti paññatti sabbadhammānaṃ abhiññāya paññāpanato abhiññāpaññatti nāma, dhammapaṭisambhidāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, 『『bhavasaṅkhāramavassaji munī』』ti paññatti samudayassa pariccāgassa ca paññāpanato pariccāgapaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, 『『ajjhattarato samāhito』』ti paññatti kāyagatāya satiyā bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, cittekaggatāya ṭhitiyā ca paññāpanato ṭhitipaññatti nāma, 『『abhindi kavacamivattasambhava』』nti paññatti cittassa abhinibbidāya ca paññāpanato abhinibbidāpaññatti nāma, sabbaññutāya upādānassa ca paññāpanato upādānapaññatti nāma, avijjāṇḍakosānaṃ padālanāya ca paññāpanato padālapaññatti nāma, 『『yathāvutto paññattippabhedo kena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathāvuttassa paññattippabhedassa sambhavato bhagavā yaṃ 『『tulamatula』』ntiādigāthamāha, tathāsambhavato yathāvuttāya gāthāya yathāvutto paññattippabhedo saddahitabboti.

『『Tulamatulañcā』』tiādigāthāyaṃ paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文: 由老師分別講解併爲我們所知的是關於諸諦的種種施設差別。由於應當說明"如何在善、不善等方面所說之法的施設差別"，故說"可稱量與不可稱量等"。或者，老師在《法輪經》中分別講解併爲我們所知的施設差別，由於應當說明"如何在'可稱量與不可稱量'等偈頌中分別施設差別"，故說"可稱量與不可稱量"等。 可被衡量界定者為可稱量，即欲界業；無有可稱量相似的其他世間業，對於這廣大業為不可稱量，即色界、無色界業。由此行而有再生為有生，即彼有生。造作再生為有為。以內觀方式樂於內者為內樂。以止的方式得定者為等持。生於自身者為自生，即彼自生。 應如是理解：牟尼、正覺者捨棄了有生、有為、可稱量與不可稱量，如同打破鎧甲般，內樂而等持，如是打破、摧毀了自生。或者，牟尼、正覺者衡量"五蘊是無常、苦、無我、變異法，而涅槃則是常、樂、無為、不變異法"，見到不可稱量的涅槃后，以聖道捨棄了有生、有為。如何捨棄？因為這牟尼以內觀方式成為內樂者，以止的方式在近行定與安止定中成為等持者，如同打破鎧甲般，如是打破、摧毀了自生即生於自身的煩惱，由於無煩惱而且捨棄了業，應如是理解偈頌的意義。 "可稱量與不可稱量及有生"之施設，因為是通過遍知一切法而施設，名為遍知施設；因為是通過法無礙解和安立而施設，名為安立施設；"牟尼捨棄有為"之施設，因為是通過舍離集諦而施設，名為舍離施設，因為是通過遍知苦而施設，名為遍知施設；"內樂而等持"之施設，因為是通過修習身念處而施設，名為修習施設，因為是通過安住心一境性而施設，名為安住施設；"如破鎧甲般破自生"之施設，因為是通過心的厭離而施設，名為厭離施設，因為是通過一切智及執取而施設，名為執取施設，因為是通過破除無明蛋殼而施設，名為破除施設。由於應當說明"如上所說的施設差別應由誰信受"，故說"是故"等。世尊說"可稱量"等偈頌，是因為如上所說的施設差別之生起，由於如是生起，應當信受如上所說偈頌中如上所說的施設差別。 在"可稱量"等偈頌中的施設差別已為老師所分別講解，也為我們所知。

『Yo dukkhamaddakkhi yatonidānaṃ, kāmesu so jantu kathaṃ nameyya;

Kāmā hi loke saṅgoti ñatvā, tesaṃ satīmā vinayāya sikkhe』ti. –

Gāthāyaṃ pana kathaṃ paññattibhedo vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『yo dukkhamaddakkhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo āraddhavipassako jantu yatonidānaṃ sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ hetuphalaṃ dukkhaṃ addakkhi, so āraddhavipassako jantu kāmesu kathaṃ nameyya nametuṃ nārahati. Kāmā loke 『『saṅgo』』ti hi yasmā passitabbā, tasmā nametuṃ nārahati, iti etaṃ dukkhabhāvaṃ dukkhahetubhāvaṃ ñatvā tesaṃ kāmānaṃ vinayāya vūpasamāya satimā kāyagatāsatisampanno tīṇi sikkhāni sikkhe sikkheyyāti gāthāttho saṅkhepena viññātabbo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 41) pana vitthārena saṃvaṇṇito.

『『Yo dukkha』』nti paññatti dukkhassa vevacanassa ca pariññāya ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti, pariññāpaññatti ca hoti. 『『Yatonidāna』』nti paññatti samudayassa pabhavassa ca pahānassa ca paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti ceva pahānapaññatti ca hoti. 『『Addakkhī』』ti paññatti ñāṇacakkhussa vevacanassa ca paṭivedhassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti ceva paṭivedhapaññatti ca hoti. 『『Kāmesu so jantu kathaṃ nameyyā』』ti paññatti kāmataṇhāya vevacanassa ca anabhinivisassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti ceva anabhinivesapaññatti ca hoti. 『『Kāmā hi loke saṅgoti ñatvā』』ti paññatti kāmānaṃ paccatthikato dassanassa ca paññāpanato dassanapaññatti nāma. Kāmā hi anatthajānanato paccatthikasadisā.

『『Kīdisā hutvā anatthajanakā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『kāmā hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmā rāgaggiādīhi antodayhanato aṅgārakāsūpamā ca, pūtibhāvāpajjanato maṃsapesūpamā ca, bahi aññena dayhanato pāvakakappā jalitaggikkhandhūpamā ca, patiṭṭhānābhāvato papātūpamā ca, visasadisehi dosādīhi parahiṃsanato uragopamā ca. 『『Tesaṃ satīmā』』ti paññatti pahānāya apacayassa ca paññāpanato apacayapaññatti nāma, kāyagatāya satiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma. 『『Vinayāya sikkhe』』ti paññattirāgavinayassa dosavinayassa mohavinayassa paṭivedhassa ca paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma. 『『Jantū』』ti paññatti yogissa vevacanassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti nāma.

我來為您完整翻譯這段巴利文： "誰見苦及其因緣，彼有情何故趨欲； 知欲為世間繫縛，具念者應學斷除。" 由於應當說明"如何在此偈頌中分別施設差別"，故說"誰見苦"等。已開始修習內觀的有情見到了一切三界因果之苦及其因緣，這樣已開始修習內觀的有情怎麼會趨向欲樂，不應趨向。因為應當觀察欲樂在世間為"繫縛"，所以不應趨向，如是了知此苦性、苦因性之後，爲了調伏、平息那些欲樂，具念者即具足身念處者應當修學三學。應當簡要地如是理解偈頌的意義。在義釋中則有詳細解釋。 "誰苦"之施設，因為是通過苦的異名和遍知而施設，所以是異名施設和遍知施設。"因緣"之施設，因為是通過集諦的根源和斷除而施設，所以是根源施設和斷除施設。"見到"之施設，因為是通過慧眼的異名和通達而施設，所以是異名施設和通達施設。"彼有情怎能趨向諸欲"之施設，因為是通過欲愛的異名和無執著而施設，所以是異名施設和無執著施設。"知欲為世間繫縛"之施設，因為是通過觀察欲樂的對治而施設，名為觀察施設。因為欲樂從產生不利的角度來看，如同對敵。 由於應當問"如何成為不利的生因"，故說"欲樂"等。欲樂因為內部被貪火等所燒故如同火坑，因為會變成腐爛故如同肉塊，因為外部被他人所燒故如同烈火，如同燃燒的火聚，因為無有立足處故如同懸崖，因為以如毒般的瞋等傷害他人故如同毒蛇。"彼具念"之施設，因為是通過斷除和減損而施設，名為減損施設，因為是通過身念處的安立而施設，名為安立施設，因為是通過道的修習而施設，名為修習施設。"為調伏而學"之施設，因為是通過調伏貪、調伏瞋、調伏癡和通達而施設，名為通達施設。"有情"之施設，因為是通過瑜伽行者的異名而施設，名為異名施設。

『『Jantūti sāmaññasattavācako saddo kasmā yogivācakoti viññātabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『yadā hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yogī yadā yasmiṃ kāle kāmā saṅgoti pajānāti, tadā tasmiṃ kāle so yogī kāmānaṃ anuppādāya kusale dhamme kāyagatāsatiādīhi uppādayati, so kusale dhamme uppādento yogī anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya vāyamati kusalavīriyaṃ karoti, tasmā yogīvācako jantusaddoti viññātabbo. 『『Jantū』』ti ayaṃ paññatti appattassa kusalassa jhānadhammādikassa pattiyā vāyāmassa ca paññāpanato vāyāmapaññatti nāma, oramattikāya asantuṭṭhiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. 『『So anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya vāyamatī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti vāyāmapaññatti, 『『hetuso uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitiyā vāyamatīti paññatti katamā paññattī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha so uppannāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tasmiṃ 『『anuppannāna』』ntiādimhi. 『『So uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitiyā vāyamatī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti bhāvanāya appamādassa ca paññāpanato appamādapaññatti nāma, vīriyindriyassa nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ārakkhassa ca paññāpanato ārakkhapaññatti nāma, adhicittasikkhāya ṭhitiyā ca paññāpanato ṭhitipaññatti nāma. 『『Kena yathāvuttappakāro paññattippabhedo saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Yo dukkhamaddakkhi yatonidāna』』ntiādigāthāya paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto.

『『Mohasambandhano loko, bhabbarūpova dissati;

Upadhibandhano bālo, tamasā parivārito;

Assirī viya khāyati, passato natthi kiñcananti. –

Gāthāyaṃ pana kathaṃ paññattippabhedo vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『mohasambandhano』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mohasambandhanoti mohahetukehi saṃyojanehi sambandho. Lokoti appahīnasaṃyojano sattaloko. Bhabbarūpovadissatīti abhabbopi attā bhabbarūpova bhabbajātiko viya bālānaṃ avipassakānaṃ dissati. Upadhibandhanoti kilesūpadhīhi bandhitabbo. Yu-paccayo hi kammatthe vihito. Upadhīsu vā kilesānaṃ bandhanaṃ yassa bālassāti upadhibandhano. Dve avaḍḍhiyo lāti gaṇhātīti bālo. Tamasā sammohena parivārito paṭicchādito paṇḍitānaṃ vipassakānaṃ assirī viya sirīvirahito viya khāyati upaṭṭhāti. Passato paññācakkhunā passantassa paṇḍitassa kiñcanaṃ natthīti saṅkhepattho daṭṭhabbo.

我來幫您翻譯這段巴利文： "眾生"這個表示普通有情的詞為什麼應理解為指修行者呢？因為需要解釋這一點，所以說"當……"等等。當修行者在某個時候了知慾望是束縛時，那時此修行者爲了不生起慾望而通過身至念等方法生起善法，這位生起善法的修行者爲了生起未生起的善法而精進努力，因此"眾生"一詞應理解為指修行者。"眾生"這個假名，由於表示為獲得未獲得的善法、禪定等而精進，故名為精進假名；由於表示對低劣法不知足而捨棄，故名為捨棄假名。"他為生起未生起的善法而精進"這個假名是精進假名。因為需要詢問"爲了已因緣生起的善法住立而精進"這個假名是什麼假名，所以說"其中已生起的"等等。其中，在"未生起的"等處。"他為已生起的善法住立而精進"這個假名，由於表示修習和不放逸，故名為不放逸假名；由於表示精進根的確立，故名為確立假名；由於表示對善法的守護，故名為守護假名；由於表示增上心學的安住，故名為安住假名。因為需要說明"以何證據可信如上所說的假名差別"，所以說"因此說"等等。 "誰見苦及其因"等偈頌中的假名差別已被論師分別，我們也已了知。 "愚癡縛束世間人，如似堪能而顯現； 執取束縛諸愚者，為暗覆蔽無光明； 觀者見之無實質，宛如虛幻無一物。" 對於這首偈頌，應當說明假名差別是如何分別的，所以說"愚癡縛束"等。其中，"愚癡縛束"是指被以愚癡為因的結縛所束縛。"世間"是指未斷結縛的有情世間。"如似堪能而顯現"是說即使是不堪能的自我，對於愚者、非觀察者來說也顯現為似乎堪能、似乎有能力的樣子。"執取束縛"是指應被煩惱執取所束縛，因為yu詞尾用於表示被動義。或者說"執取束縛"是指此愚者于諸執取中有煩惱的束縛。"愚者"是指執取兩種不增長。"為暗覆蔽"是被愚癡黑暗所遮蔽覆蓋。對於具慧眼觀察的智者來說，顯現為"如無光明"，即似乎離開了光明。對於以慧眼觀察的智者來說，應當理解其略義為"無一物"。

『『Mohasambandhano loko』』ti paññatti mohasīsena gahitānaṃ vipallāsānaṃ desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma. 『『Bhabbarūpova dissatī』』ti paññatti lokassa viparītassa viparītākārena upaṭṭhahantassa paññāpanato viparītapaññatti nāma. 『『Upadhibandhano bālo』』ti paññatti pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ pabhavassa paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti nāma. 『『Upadhibandhano bālo』』ti paññatti pariyuṭṭhānānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bandhanakiccassa paññāpanato kiccapaññatti nāma. 『『Upadhibandhano bālo』』ti paññatti kilesānaṃ bandhanabalamūhanabalānaṃ paññāpanato balapaññatti nāma. 『『Upadhibandhano bālo』』ti paññatti saṅkhārānaṃ viruhanāya paññāpanato viruhanāpaññatti nāma. 『『Tamasā parivārito』』ti paññatti avijjandhakārassa desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma, avijjandhakārassa vevacanassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti nāma. 『『Assirī viya khāyatī』』ti paññatti dibbacakkhussa dassanakiriyāya paññāpanato dassanapaññatti nāma. 『『Assirī viya khāyatī』』ti paññatti paññācakkhussa nikkhepassa paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. 『『Passato natthi kiñcana』』nti paññatti sattānaṃ ariyānaṃ paṭivedhassa paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma.

『『Katamaṃ kiñcana』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『rāgo kiñcana』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Yathāvutto paññattippabhedo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathāvuttassa paññattippabhedassa sambhavato bhagavā yaṃ 『『mohasambandhano』』tiādimāha, tathāsambhavato tāya gāthāya yathāvutto paññattippabhedo gāthānusārena saddahitabbo.

『『Mohasambandhano loko』』tiādigāthāya paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『atthi, bhikkhave, ajāta』ntiādipāṭhassa paññattippabhedo kathaṃ vibhatto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『atthi bhikkhave』』tiādipāḷimāha. 『『Sā pana pāḷi kimatthaṃ bhagavatā vuttā』』ti ce puccheyya? Paramatthato avijjamānattā nibbānaṃ natthi, tasmā 『『atthi nibbāna』』nti vacanaṃ sasavisāṇavacanaṃ viya anatthaṃ, vohāramattametanti vadantānaṃ micchāvādaṃ bhañjituṃ bhagavatā vuttāti daṭṭhabbā.

Kutocipi ajātattā abhūtattā ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ. Paccayehi akatattā akataṃ. Saṅkhatābhāvato asaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ atthi. Etaṃ ajātādikaṃ nibbānaṃ no ce abhavissa, evaṃ sati nissaraṇaṃ na paññāyetha, nibbānassa ca ariyamaggaphalānaṃ ārammaṇattā, maggaphalānañca kilesānaṃ samucchindanato paṭippassambhanato, samucchindanena ca tividhassa vaṭṭassa apavaṭṭanato ajātādikaṃ nibbānaṃ atthiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

『『Atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ…pe… asaṅkhata』』nti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa desanāpaññatti ca nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca hoti. 『『Nayidha jātassa…pe… paññāyethā』』ti ayaṃ paññatti saṅkhatassa vevacanapaññatti ca saṅkhatassa upanayanapaññatti ca hoti. 『『Yasmā ca…pe… asaṅkhata』』nti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca nibbānassa jotanāpaññatti ca hoti. 『『Yasmā jātassa…pe… paññāyatī』』ti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca maggassa saṃsārato niyyānikapaññatti ca nissaraṇapaññatti ca hotīti paññattiviseso paṇḍitehi niddhāretvā gahetabbo.

我來幫您翻譯這段巴利文： "愚癡縛束世間"這個假名，由於表示以愚癡為首的諸顛倒的開示，故名為開示假名。"如似堪能而顯現"這個假名，由於表示世間以顛倒的形相顯現顛倒的狀態，故名為顛倒假名。"執取束縛愚者"這個假名，由於表示惡欲行的生起，故名為生起假名。"執取束縛愚者"這個假名，由於表示不善法的纏縛作用，故名為作用假名。"執取束縛愚者"這個假名，由於表示煩惱的束縛力和迷惑力，故名為力假名。"執取束縛愚者"這個假名，由於表示諸行的增長，故名為增長假名。"為暗覆蔽"這個假名，由於表示無明黑暗的開示，故名為開示假名，由於表示無明黑暗的異名，故名為異名假名。"如無光明顯現"這個假名，由於表示天眼的見作用，故名為見假名。"如無光明顯現"這個假名，由於表示慧眼的確立，故名為確立假名。"觀者無一物"這個假名，由於表示聖者們的證悟，故名為證悟假名。 因為需要詢問"什麼是一物"，所以說"貪是一物"等。因為需要說明"我們應當如何相信如上所說的假名差別"，所以說"因此說"等。由於如上所說的假名差別是可能的，所以世尊說"愚癡縛束"等，由於如是可能，應當依據偈頌理解如上所說的假名差別。 "愚癡縛束世間"等偈頌中的假名差別已被論師分別，我們也已了知。因為需要詢問"比丘們，有未生等經文的假名差別是如何分別的"，所以說"比丘們，有"等經文。如果問："世尊說此經文有何意義？"應當理解：世尊說此是爲了破斥那些說"因為涅槃在勝義上不存在，所以'有涅槃'這句話如同'兔角'一樣無義，只是言說而已"的邪見者。 因為從任何處都不生起、不存在，故稱未生、不存在。因為不被因緣所造作，故稱無造作。因為無有為性，故稱無為涅槃是存在的。如果這個未生等涅槃不存在的話，那麼出離就不會顯現。又因為涅槃是聖道果的所緣，而道果能斷除和止息煩惱，通過斷除而使三有輪迴止息，所以應當了知未生等涅槃確實存在。 "比丘們，有未生......無為"這個假名既是涅槃的開示假名，也是涅槃的異名假名。"此中若無生......則不會顯現"這個假名既是有為的異名假名，也是有為的引導假名。"由於......無為"這個假名既是涅槃的異名假名，也是涅槃的顯明假名。"由於有生......故顯現"這個假名既是涅槃的異名假名，也是道的出離輪迴假名和出離假名。智者們應當辨別並理解這些假名的差別。

『『Yathāvutto nibbānassa paññattippabhedo kena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Tenāha āyasmā』』tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva 『『niyutto paññattihāro』』ti anusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

Iti paññattihāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

我來 助您翻譯這段巴利文： 因為需要說明"如何相信上述涅槃的假名差別"，所以說"因此世尊說"等。"因此尊者說"等的關聯義以及"已說明假名分別"的關聯義應當依照已說的方法來理解。 如是依據能力所造的假名分別解釋 已經結束。 然而智者們應當依照註釋書和復注，詳細分析並理解其深奧的含義。 12＼進入分別的解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena paññattihāravibhaṅgena paññattiyo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo otaraṇo hāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo otaraṇo hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso otaraṇo hāro otaraṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Yo ca paṭiccuppādo』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso otaraṇo hāro otaraṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.

Tattha pāṭhe 『『katame paṭiccasamuppādādayo niddhāretvā katamehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratī』』ti pucchitabbattā imasmiṃ pāṭhe ime paṭiccasamuppādādayo niddhāretvā imehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratīti dassetuṃ 『『uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha uddhanti kāmadhātuto uddhaṃ uparibhāge pavattāya rūpadhātuarūpadhātuyā. Adhoti rūpadhātuto heṭṭhābhāge pavattāya kāmadhātuyā. Sabbadhīti sabbasmiṃ kāmarūpaarūpadhātumhi. Vippamuttoti paṭisandhivasena appavattanato vippamutto asekkho. Ayaṃ sekkho dassanamaggena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā samugghātattā 『『ahaṃ asmī』』ti anānupassī viharati. Evaṃ sekkhāya vimuttiyā ceva asekkhāya vimuttiyā ca sekkho ceva asekkho ca atiṇṇapubbaṃ oghaṃ apunabbhavāya vimutto udatārīti gāthāttho gahetabbo.

Tasmiṃ gāthāpāṭhe 『『katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『uddhanti rūpadhātū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Uddhanti manussalokato uddhaṃ cātumahārājikādayopi gahitāti atthasambhavato taṃ nivattetuṃ 『『rūpadhātu arūpadhātū』』ti vuttaṃ. Adhoti manussabhavato adho cattāro apāyabhūmiyo ca gahitāti atthasambhavato taṃ nivattetuṃ 『『kāmadhātū』』ti vuttaṃ. Sabbadhīti catubhūmiketi atthasambhavato 『『tedhātuke』』ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ asekkhā vimuttīti vimuttassa asekkhassa yā virāgatā atthi, ayampi virāgatā asekkhaphalavimutti. 『『Uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto』』ti pāṭhe vuttappakārā ayaṃ asekkhā vimutti niddhāritāti attho. Niddhāritāya asekkhāya vimuttiyā yāni saddhādipañcindriyāni niddhāritāni, tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni bhavanti. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā indriyehi vimuttiyā otaraṇā nāma pavesanā nāma.

Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni vijjāya upakārakattā, paññāpadaṭṭhānattā vā vijjā bhavanti. Vijjuppādā tādisāya vijjāya uppādā uppādahetuto avijjānirodho avijjāya nirodho hoti…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti, ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādehi otaraṇā nāma.

Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitāni saddhāvīriyehi sīlasambhavato, satiyā ca paññānuvattakattā. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.

我來幫您翻譯這段巴利文： 42＼ 以何種讚頌特別的假名分別來分別假名，那個讚頌特別的分別即是圓滿的。因為需要詢問"什麼是進入分別"，所以說"其中什麼是進入分別"等。其中，在已經說明的十六種說明分別等中，詢問什麼是讚頌特別的進入分別。現在我將要說的"上下遍解脫"等是詳細讚頌特別的進入分別，應當這樣理解。 在這段文字中，因為需要詢問"以何種已確定的法進入"，所以說"上下遍解脫"等。其中，"上"是指欲界之上的色界和無色界部分。"下"是指色界之下的欲界部分。"遍"是指一切欲界、色界和無色界。"解脫"是指不再生起，是無學者。此學者通過見道斷除身見，不觀察"我是"而住。如是通過學者的解脫和無學的解脫，學者和無學者已度過此前的洪流，解脫于不再生，這是偈頌的意義。 在該偈頌文字中，因為需要詢問"以何種已確定的法進入"，所以說"上是色界"等。"上"是指人間世界之上，包括四大王天等，為避免此種理解，說"色界無色界"。"下"是指人間之下的四惡趣，為避免此種理解，說"欲界"。"遍"是指四界，所以說"三界"。這是無學解脫，即無學果解脫中的離欲。"上下遍解脫"這段文字中所說的無學解脫已被確定。已確定的無學解脫中，信等五根被確定，這些即成為無學五根。這種進入是通過根的解脫而進入，即是入。 這些無學五根因為資助智慧，或以智慧為依止而成為智慧。由此智慧的生起，從無明滅，乃至苦蘊滅，這是通過緣起進入。 這些無學五根被三蘊攝受，因為信精進由戒而生，念能隨順智慧。其餘應依已說方法理解。

『『Uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto』』ti pāṭhe niddhāretvā otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『ayaṃ ahasmīti anānupassī』』ti pāṭhe 『『katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaraṇehi otaratī』』ti vattabbattā 『『ayaṃ ahasmīti anānupassīti ayaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo ayaṃ sekkho 『『ahamasmī』』ti nānupassī, tassa sekkhassa sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā yo samugghāto atthi, yā samugghātasaṅkhātā samugghātavimutti sekkhā vimutti hoti, tassā sekkhāya vimuttiyā yāni saddhādipañcindriyāni niddhāritāni, tāniyeva sekkhāni pañcindriyāni bhavanti. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā indriyehi otaraṇā nāma. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.

1. 『『Uddhaṃ adho』』tiādigāthāyaṃ otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『nissitassa calita』』ntiādipāṭhe 『『katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『nissitassa calitaṃ, anissitassa calitaṃ natthī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Nissitassa puggalassa calitaṃ calanaṃ atthi, anissitassa puggalassa calitaṃ calanaṃ natthi. Calite calane asati passaddhi bhavati, passaddhiyā sati vijjamānāya nati na hoti, natiyā asati avijjamānāya āgatigati na hoti, āgatigatiyā asati avijjamānāya cutūpapāto na hoti, cutūpapāte asati avijjamāne idha chasu ajjhattikāyatanesu attānaṃ neva passati, huraṃ vā chasu bāhirāyatanesu attānaṃ na passati, ubhayaṃ antarena vajjetvā phassādisamudāyesu dhammesu attānaṃ na passati, esova paṭiccasamuppādo 『『avijjānirodhā』』tiādiko dukkhassa anto avasānaṃ karotīti attho.

Nissitassacalitanti ettha 『『nissayo katividho』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『nissitassa calitanti nissayo nāmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu duvidhesu taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissayesu yā cetanā rattassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ cetanādhammo taṇhānissayo nāma. Yā cetanā mūḷhassa puggalassa niddhāritā. Ayaṃ cetanādhammo diṭṭhinissayo nāma. Sā duvidhā cetanā pana saṅkhārā nāma. Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ…pe… sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo niddhārito. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādehi otaraṇā nāma.

Tatthāti tasmiṃ taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissaye yā vedanā rattassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ sukhā vedanā. Yā cetanā sammūḷhassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Yebhuyyena sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.

1. 以假名分別為特殊註釋的各種方式分別了諸假名，這種作為特殊註釋的分別已經完整。因為需要詢問"什麼是進入分別"，所以說"其中什麼是進入分別"等。其中，"其中"是指在已說明的十六種開示等分別中，什麼是作為特殊註釋的進入分別，名為進入分別解釋，這是在提問。對於"緣起等"的解釋，現在我將要說的"上下一切處解脫"等詳細註釋的特殊方式，應當理解為進入分別，名為進入分別解釋。 在那經文中，因為需要詢問"應當確定哪些緣起等，以哪些已確定的法進入"，所以爲了顯示在此經文中確定了這些緣起等，以這些已確定的法進入，因此說"上下一切處解脫"等。其中，"上"是指從欲界上方發生的色界、無色界。"下"是指從色界下方發生的欲界。"一切處"是指一切欲界、色界、無色界中。"解脫"是指因不再以結生的方式發生而解脫的無學。這位有學由於以見道斷除了有身見，所以住于"不觀察我是"。如是應當理解偈頌的意思是：以有學解脫和無學解脫，有學和無學爲了不再有來生而解脫，度過了從未度過的暴流。 在那偈頌經文中，因為需要詢問"確定哪些，以哪些進入"，所以說"上是指色界"等。"上"也包括了從人間往上的四大王天等，爲了排除這種可能的意思，所以說"色界、無色界"。"下"也包括了從人間往下的四惡趣，爲了排除這種可能的意思，所以說"欲界"。"一切處"可能意味著四地，爲了澄清這點，所以說"三界"。"這是無學解脫"是指已解脫的無學所具有的離貪性，這種離貪性也是無學果解脫。"上下一切處解脫"這段經文所說的方式，是指已確定了這種無學解脫，這是其意思。通過已確定的無學解脫，也確定了信等五根，這些就是無學的五根。這種所說的進入，名為以諸根進入解脫，即是進入的意思。 這些無學五根，因為有助於明，或者因為是慧的基礎，所以成為明。由於這樣的明生起，即是明的生起，因為是生起的原因，所以無明滅、無明的滅......乃至苦蘊的滅，這種所說的進入，名為以緣起進入。 這些無學五根被三蘊所攝，因為信與精進來自戒，而念隨順於慧。其餘應當依照已說的方法來理解。

2. 『『Nissitassa calita』』ntiādipāṭhe otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā.

『『Ye keci sokā paridevitā vā…pe…

Piyaṃ na kayirātha kuhiñci loke』』ti. –

Gāthāpāṭhe 『『katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ye keci sokā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye keci sokā vā yā kāci paridevitā vā anekarūpā yā kāci dukkhā vā lokasmiṃ sambhavanti. Ete sokādayo piyaṃ paṭicca pabhavanti, piye asante ete sokādayo na bhavanti. Tasmā piye asante sokādīnaṃ abhāvato yesaṃ vītasokānaṃ kuhiñci lokepi natthi, te vītasokā sukhino bhavanti. Tasmā vītasokānaṃ sukhasampannattā asokaṃ virajaṃ patthayāno sappuriso kuhiñci loke piyaṃ na kayirāthāti gāthāttho.

『『Ye keci sokā paridevitā vā, dukkhā ca lokasmimanekarūpā piyaṃ paṭicca pabhavanti ete』』ti ettha pāṭhe yā vedanā niddhāritā, ayaṃ dukkhā vedanā. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.

『『Ye keci sokā』』tiādigāthāpāṭhe otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā , 『『kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā』』tiādigāthāpāṭhe 『『katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī』』ti vattabbattā 『『kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttova.

Tatthāti tasmiṃ 『『pītimano hotī』』ti pāṭhe yā pītimanatā vuttā niddhāritā, ayaṃ pītimanatā anunayo hoti. 『『Sallaviddhova ruppatī』』ti pāṭhe yaṃ ruppanaṃ āha, idaṃ ruppanaṃ paṭighaṃ hoti, anunayo ca paṭighañca niddhāritāti attho.

『『Anunaye ca paṭighe ca niddhārite katamo dhammo niddhārito』』ti vattabbattā 『『anunayo paṭighañca pana taṇhāpakkho』』ti vuttaṃ. Taṇhāpakkhoti taṇhāpakkhattā taṇhā niddhāritā. 『『Anunayo taṇhāpakkho hotu, paṭighaṃ pana taṇhāpakkhaṃ na siyā』』ti ce vadeyya? Paṭighassa attasinehavasena pavattanato paṭighampi taṇhāpakkhaṃ hoti. 『『Taṇhāya niddhāritāya katamo niddhārito』』ti vattabbattā 『『taṇhāya ca panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Dasannaṃ rūpāyatanānaṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānattā dasa rūpāni āyatanāni niddhāritāni. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā āyatanehi otaraṇā nāma. Sutte āgatā paṭiccasamuppādādayo tena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayena niddhāritā, suttatthamukhena vā niddhāritā, tena…pe… nayena niddhāritesu paṭiccasamuppādādīsu yo saṃvaṇṇanānayaviseso tadatthavācakavasena vā tadatthañāpakavasena vā otarati pavisati samosarati, so saṃvaṇṇanānayaviseso otaraṇo hāro nāmāti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo. Sesesupi vuttanayānusārena otaraṇā gahetabbā. 『『Tenāha āyasmā』』tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva 『『niyutto otaraṇo hāro』』ti anusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

Iti otaraṇahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

2. 『『Nissitassa calita』』ntiādipāṭhe otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā.

『『Ye keci sokā paridevitā vā…pe…

Piyaṃ na kayirātha kuhiñci loke』』ti. –

Gāthāpāṭhe 『『katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ye keci sokā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye keci sokā vā yā kāci paridevitā vā anekarūpā yā kāci dukkhā vā lokasmiṃ sambhavanti. Ete sokādayo piyaṃ paṭicca pabhavanti, piye asante ete sokādayo na bhavanti. Tasmā piye asante sokādīnaṃ abhāvato yesaṃ vītasokānaṃ kuhiñci lokepi natthi, te vītasokā sukhino bhavanti. Tasmā vītasokānaṃ sukhasampannattā asokaṃ virajaṃ patthayāno sappuriso kuhiñci loke piyaṃ na kayirāthāti gāthāttho.

『『Ye keci sokā paridevitā vā, dukkhā ca lokasmimanekarūpā piyaṃ paṭicca pabhavanti ete』』ti ettha pāṭhe yā vedanā niddhāritā, ayaṃ dukkhā vedanā. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.

『『Ye keci sokā』』tiādigāthāpāṭhe otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā , 『『kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā』』tiādigāthāpāṭhe 『『katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī』』ti vattabbattā 『『kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttova.

Tatthāti tasmiṃ 『『pītimano hotī』』ti pāṭhe yā pītimanatā vuttā niddhāritā, ayaṃ pītimanatā anunayo hoti. 『『Sallaviddhova ruppatī』』ti pāṭhe yaṃ ruppanaṃ āha, idaṃ ruppanaṃ paṭighaṃ hoti, anunayo ca paṭighañca niddhāritāti attho.

『『Anunaye ca paṭighe ca niddhārite katamo dhammo niddhārito』』ti vattabbattā 『『anunayo paṭighañca pana taṇhāpakkho』』ti vuttaṃ. Taṇhāpakkhoti taṇhāpakkhattā taṇhā niddhāritā. 『『Anunayo taṇhāpakkho hotu, paṭighaṃ pana taṇhāpakkhaṃ na siyā』』ti ce vadeyya? Paṭighassa attasinehavasena pavattanato paṭighampi taṇhāpakkhaṃ hoti. 『『Taṇhāya niddhāritāya katamo niddhārito』』ti vattabbattā 『『taṇhāya ca panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Dasannaṃ rūpāyatanānaṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānattā dasa rūpāni āyatanāni niddhāritāni. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā āyatanehi otaraṇā nāma. Sutte āgatā paṭiccasamuppādādayo tena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayena niddhāritā, suttatthamukhena vā niddhāritā, tena…pe… nayena niddhāritesu paṭiccasamuppādādīsu yo saṃvaṇṇanānayaviseso tadatthavācakavasena vā tadatthañāpakavasena vā otarati pavisati samosarati, so saṃvaṇṇanānayaviseso otaraṇo hāro nāmāti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo. Sesesupi vuttanayānusārena otaraṇā gahetabbā. 『『Tenāha āyasmā』』tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva 『『niyutto otaraṇo hāro』』ti anusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

Iti otaraṇahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

以下是巴利文的完整中文直譯： 44. 關於"依止者動搖"等文句的滲入，已被導師分別解說，也被我們理解。 "一切愁憂與悲嘆...... 不應於世間任何處生愛著" 在偈頌文句中，因為需要詢問"區分何者，以何者滲入"，故說"一切愁憂"等。任何愁憂或任何悲嘆或世間中生起的種種苦。這些愁憂等因愛著而生起，若無愛著則這些愁憂等不會生起。因此，在無愛著時愁憂等不存在，那些離愁者在世間任何處都不存在（愁憂），這些離愁者成為快樂者。因此，由於離愁者具足安樂，善人期望無憂無垢，故不應於世間任何處生愛著，此為偈頌之義。 在"一切愁憂與悲嘆，及世間種種諸苦，皆因愛著而生起"這段文句中，所區分的受，是苦受。其餘應依所說方法理解。 "一切愁憂"等偈頌文句的滲入，已被導師分別解說，也被我們理解。關於"欲求諸欲者"等偈頌文句，因為需要說"區分何者，以何者滲入"，故說"欲求諸欲者"等。該偈頌的含義如前所述。 在其中，即在"心生歡喜"這文句中所說並區分的歡喜心性，這歡喜心性是親近。在"如被箭射而痛苦"這文句中所說的痛苦，這痛苦是瞋恚，意即親近和瞋恚被區分。 因為需要說"當親近和瞋恚被區分時，什麼法被區分"，故說"親近和瞋恚是屬於渴愛一分"。屬於渴愛一分即因為是渴愛的一分而渴愛被區分。若說："親近可以是渴愛一分，但瞋恚應不是渴愛一分"？由於瞋恚是因自我愛著而運作，所以瞋恚也是渴愛一分。因為需要說"當渴愛被區分時，什麼被區分"，故說"又關於渴愛"等。因為十種色處是渴愛的近緣，故十種色處被區分。這種所說型別的滲入名為以處為滲入。經中出現的緣起等，以那種註釋特殊方法被區分，或以經義為門而被區分，以那種......等方法所區分的緣起等中，某種特殊註釋方法以表達其義或以顯示其義而滲入、進入、完全進入，這種特殊註釋方法應理解為名為滲入理趣。對其他部分也應依所說方法理解滲入。"因此長老說"等的相續等義以及"滲入理趣已解說完畢"的相續等義，應依所說方法理解。 如是在滲入理趣分別中，已完成 隨能力所作的闡明。 然而智者們應依據註釋書和復注書，詳細分別理解其甚深義理。 13. 清凈理趣分別闡明

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena otaraṇahāravibhaṅgena otaretabbā suttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo sodhanahāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo sodhano hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso sodhano hāro sodhanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Vissajjitamhi pañhe』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『yathā āyasmā ajito』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso sodhanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo. 『『Kathaṃ tattha pañhe sodhano hāro viññātabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『yathā āyasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena āyasmā ajito pārāyane bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati, tathā tena pakārena vissajjitamhi pañhe ayaṃ sodhano hāro viññātabboti. 『『Niyametvā vibhajehī』』ti vattabbattā niyametvā vibhajituṃ 『『kenassū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Gāthāttho vuttova.

『『Kenassu nivuto loko, kenassu nappakāsati;

Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya』』nti. –

Pucchāvasena pavattagāthāyañca –

『『Avijjāya nivuto loko, (ajitāti bhagavā,)

Vivicchā pamādā nappakāsati;

Jappābhilepanaṃ brūmi, dukkhamassa mahabbhaya』』nti. –

Vissajjanavasena pavattagāthāyañcāti imāsu dvīsu gāthāsu 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』ti iminā padena pañhe pucchite 『『avijjāya nivuto loko』』ti iminā padena bhagavā 『『kenassu nivuto loko』』ti padaṃ tadatthe aññāṇasaṃsayādimalānaṃ apanayanena sodheti. Tadatthe hi vissajjite aññāṇasaṃsayādīnaṃ abhāvato attho sodhito nāma, atthe ca sodhite padampi sodhitaṃyeva. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – 『『tadatthassa vissajjanato』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 45), ṭīkāyañca 『『tabbisayaaññāṇasaṃsayādimalāpanayanena sodhetī』』ti vuttaṃ. No ca ārambhanti pucchituṃ ārabhitabbaṃ sabbagāthāpadaṃ, gāthātthaṃ vā, ñātuṃ icchitassa sabbassa atthassa vissajjanavasena apariyositattā bhagavā 『『avijjāya nivuto loko』』ti ettakeneva padena sodheti. Sesesupi esa nayo.

『『Kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya』』nti iminā padena pañhe pucchite 『『dukkhamassa mahabbhaya』』nti padena bhagavatā ārambho ñātuṃ icchito attho suddho sodhito hoti. Sesagāthāsupi eseva nayo.

Yattha pañhe evaṃ niravasesavissajjanavasena ārambho suddho sodhito bhavati, so pañho vissajjito sodhito bhavati. Yattha pañhe evaṃ niravasesavissajjanavasena ārambho yāva asuddho asodhito bhavati, tāva so pañho vissajjito sodhito na bhavatīti yojanā. 『『Tenāhā』』tiādyānusandhyādyattho ceva 『『niyutto sodhano hāro』』ti anusandhyādyattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

Iti sodhanahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

以下是巴利文的完整中文直譯： 45. 以任何特殊註釋形式的滲入理趣分別來滲入經義已被分別，那種特殊註釋形式的分別已完成，因為需要詢問"什麼是清凈理趣分別"，所以說"其中什麼是清凈理趣"等。其中，"其中"指在那些已闡述的十六種教說理趣等中，詢問哪種特殊註釋稱為清凈理趣、清凈理趣分別。應理解為現在我所說的"如尊者阿耆多"等詳細註釋特點是名為清凈理趣分別。因為需要說"如何在其中理解清凈理趣的問題"，所以說"如尊者"等。如同尊者阿耆多在《彼岸道品》中向世尊提問，同樣地在回答問題時，應如是理解此清凈理趣。因為需要說"請確定並分別"，爲了確定並分別而說"以何"等。偈頌的含義如前所述。 "以何為世間所覆？以何不顯明？ 你說何為塗抹？何為其大怖？" 在以問題形式進行的偈頌中 - "世間為無明所覆，（阿耆多，世尊說，） 因吝嗇放逸不顯明； 我說貪愛為塗抹，苦為其大怖。" 在回答形式進行的偈頌中 - 在這兩個偈頌中，當以"以何為世間所覆"這一句問及時，世尊以"世間為無明所覆"這一句，通過去除對其義理的無知、疑惑等垢染而清凈"以何為世間所覆"這一句。因為當其義理被回答時，由於無知、疑惑等的不存在，義理被稱為已清凈，而當義理被清凈時，文句也就被清凈了。因此在註釋中說："因為回答了其義理"，在復注中說："通過去除關於其對象的無知、疑惑等垢染而清凈"。並非所有偈頌句子或偈頌含義都應開始詢問，因為通過回答方式未完全完成所有想要了解的義理，世尊僅以"世間為無明所覆"這一句就清凈了。對其他部分也是這個方法。 當以"何為其大怖"這一句問及時，世尊以"苦為其大怖"這一句，所要了解的開始內容變得純凈、清凈。對其他偈頌也是同樣的方法。 在問題中，如果開始內容通過這樣完全無餘的回答方式而變得純凈、清凈，那麼該問題就被回答並清凈了。在問題中，如果開始內容通過這樣完全無餘的回答方式而仍不純凈、不清凈，那麼該問題就未被回答和清凈。這是解釋。"因此說"等的相續等義以及"清凈理趣已解說完畢"的相續等義，應依所說方法理解。 如是在清凈理趣分別中，已完成 隨能力所作的闡明。 然而智者們應依據註釋書和復注書，詳細分別理解其甚深義理。 14. 確立理趣分別闡明

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena pañhādayo sodhitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo adhiṭṭhāno hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso paṭiniddesato adhiṭṭhāno hāro adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Ekattatāya dhammā, yepi ca vemattatāya niddiṭṭhā』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『ye tattha niddiṭṭhā, tathā te dhārayitabbā』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.

『『Ye dhammā suttesu ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca niddiṭṭhā, te dhammā kiṃ pana tatheva dhārayitabbā , udāhu aññathāpi vikappayitabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ye tatthā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu suttantesu ye dukkhasaccādayo dhammā ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca niddiṭṭhā, te dukkhasaccādayo dhammā tathā ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca dhārayitabbā upalakkhitabbā, na aññathā vikappayitabbā.

『『Sāmaññakappanāya vohārabhāvena anavaṭṭhānato katamā ekattatā, katamā vemattatā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dukkhanti ekattatā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Dukkhanti jātiādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā dukkhasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ dukkhasāmaññatā dukkhassa ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamaṃ dukkha』』nti pucchitā 『『jāti dukkhā, jarā dukkhā…pe... viññāṇaṃ dukkha』』nti jātiādivisesamapekkhitvā yā dukkhavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ dukkhavisesatā dukkhassa vemattatā nāma. Tatthāti ye dukkhādayo dhammā sutte vuttā, tattha tesu dukkhādīsu atthesu.

Dukkhasamudayoti 『『taṇhā ponobhavikā』』ti visesamanapekkhitvā yā samudayasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samudayasāmaññatā samudayassa ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamo samudayo』』ti pucchitvā 『『yāyaṃ taṇhā…pe… vibhavataṇhā』』ti visesaṃ apekkhitvā yā samudayavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samudayavisesatā samudayassa vemattatā nāma.

Dukkhanirodhoti 『『tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho』』ti visesamanapekkhitvā yā nirodhasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhasāmaññatā nirodhassa ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamo dukkhanirodho』』ti pucchitvā 『『yo tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo』』ti visesamapekkhitvā yā nirodhavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhavisesatā nirodhassa vemattatā nāma.

Dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti? Paṭipadāti sammādiṭṭhiādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā nirodhagāminipaṭipadāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhagāminipaṭipadāsāmaññatā maggassa ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamā dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā』』ti pucchitvā 『『ayameva ariyo…pe… sammāsamādhī』』ti sammādiṭṭhiādivisesamapekkhitvā yā visesadukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesadukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadatā maggassa vemattatā nāma.

Maggoti nirayagāmimaggādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā sāmaññamaggatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññamaggatā maggassa ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamo maggo』』ti pucchitvā 『『nirayagāmī maggo…pe… nibbānagāmī maggo』』ti nirayagāmimaggādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesamaggatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesamaggatā maggassa vemattatā nāma.

以下是巴利文的完整中文直譯： 46. 以任何特殊註釋形式的分別來清凈問題等，那種特殊註釋形式已完成，因為需要詢問"什麼是確立理趣分別"，所以說"其中什麼是確立理趣"等。其中，"其中"指在那些已闡述的十六種教說理趣等中，詢問哪種特殊註釋依據回答稱為確立理趣、確立理趣分別。應理解為現在我所說的"法有一性，以及以差異性所說"等闡述的"凡在其中所說，應如是持守"等詳細註釋特點是名為確立理趣分別。 因為需要詢問"在經中以一性和差異性所說的諸法，這些法是否應當如是持守，還是應當以其他方式考慮"，所以說"凡在其中"等。其中，在那些經典中以一性和差異性所說的苦諦等諸法，應當以一性和差異性如是持守、觀察這些苦諦等諸法，不應以其他方式考慮。 因為需要詢問"由於在共通概念的言說中不安住，什麼是一性，什麼是差異性"，所以說"苦是一性"等。"苦"不考慮生等差別而說的苦的共通性，這個苦的共通性稱為苦的一性。當問"其中什麼是苦"時，考慮生等差別而說"生是苦，老是苦......識是苦"的苦的特殊性，這個苦的特殊性稱為苦的差異性。"其中"指在經中所說的苦等諸法中，在那些苦等義理中。 苦集，不考慮"有再有的渴愛"的差別而說的集的共通性，這個集的共通性稱為集的一性。當問"其中什麼是集"時，考慮差別而說"即這渴愛......有愛、無有愛"的集的特殊性，這個集的特殊性稱為集的差異性。 苦滅，不考慮"即彼渴愛的無餘離貪滅"的差別而說的滅的共通性，這個滅的共通性稱為滅的一性。當問"其中什麼是苦滅"時，考慮差別而說"即彼渴愛的無餘離貪滅、舍離、棄捨、解脫、無執著"的滅的特殊性，這個滅的特殊性稱為滅的差異性。 趣向苦滅之道是什麼？"道"不考慮正見等差別而說的趣向滅道的共通性，這個趣向滅道的共通性稱為道的一性。當問"其中什麼是趣向苦滅之道"時，考慮正見等差別而說"即此聖......正定"的特殊趣向苦滅之道性，這個特殊趣向苦滅之道性稱為道的差異性。 "道"不考慮趣地獄道等差別而說的一般道性，這個一般道性稱為道的一性。當問"其中什麼是道"時，考慮趣地獄道等差別而說"趣地獄道......趣涅槃道"的特殊道性，這個特殊道性稱為道的差異性。

Nirodhoti paṭisaṅkhānirodhādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā sāmaññanirodhatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññanirodhatā nirodhassa ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamo nirodho』』ti pucchitvā 『『paṭisaṅkhānirodho…pe… sabbakilesanirodho』』ti paṭisaṅkhānirodhādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesanirodhatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesanirodhatā nirodhassa vemattatā nāma.

Rūpanti cātumahābhūtikādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā sāmaññarūpatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññarūpatā rūpassa ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamaṃ rūpa』』nti pucchitvā 『『cātumahābhūtikaṃ…pe… vāyodhātuyā cittaṃ virājetī』』ti cātumahābhūtikādivisesamapekkhitvā yā visesarūpatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesarūpatā rūpassa vemattatā nāma.

以下是巴利文的完整中文直譯： "滅"不考慮擇滅等差別而說的一般滅性，這個一般滅性稱為滅的一性。當問"其中什麼是滅"時，考慮擇滅等差別而說"擇滅......一切煩惱滅"的特殊滅性，這個特殊滅性稱為滅的差異性。 "色"不考慮四大種等差別而說的一般色性，這個一般色性稱為色的一性。當問"其中什麼是色"時，考慮四大種等差別而說"四大種......以風界令心離染"的特殊色性，這個特殊色性稱為色的差異性。

48.Avijjāti dukkheaññāṇādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā avijjāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ avijjāsāmaññatā avijjāya ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamā avijjā』』ti pucchitvā 『『dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ…pe… avijjālaṅghī moho akusalamūla』』nti dukkheaññāṇādivisesamapekkhitvā yā avijjāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ avijjāvisesatā avijjāya vemattatā nāma.

Vijjāti dukkheñāṇādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā vijjāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ vijjāsāmaññatā vijjāya ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamā vijjā』』ti pucchitvā 『『dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ…pe… dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo maggaṅgaṃ maggapariyāpanna』』nti dukkheñāṇādivisesamapekkhitvā yā vijjāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ vijjāvisesatā vijjāya vemattatā nāma.

Samāpattīti saññāsamāpatyādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā sāmaññasamāpattitā vuttā, sā sāmaññasamāpattitā samāpattiyā ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamā samāpattī』』ti pucchitvā 『『saññāsamāpatti asaññāsamāpatti…pe… nirodhasamāpattī』』ti saññāsamāpatyādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesasamāpattitā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesasamāpattitā samāpattiyā vemattatā nāma.

Jhāyīti sekkhajhāyīādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā jhāyīsāmaññatā vuttā, sā jhāyīsāmaññatā jhāyino ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamo jhāyī』』ti pucchitvā 『『atthi sekkho jhāyī, atthi asekkho jhāyī…pe… paññuttaro jhāyī』』ti sekkhajhāyīasekkhajhāyīādivisesamapekkhitvā yā jhāyīvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ jhāyīvisesatā jhāyino vemattatā nāma.

Samādhīti saraṇasamādhyādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā samādhisāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samādhisāmaññatā samādhino ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamo samādhī』』ti pucchitvā 『『saraṇo samādhi, araṇo samādhi…pe… micchāsamādhi, sammāsamādhī』』ti saraṇasamādhyādivisesamapekkhitvā yā samādhivisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samādhivisesatā samādhino vemattatā nāma.

Paṭipadāti āgāḷhapaṭipadādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā paṭipadāsāmaññatā vuttā, ayaṃ paṭipadāsāmaññatā paṭipadāya ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamā paṭipadā』』ti pucchitvā 『『āgāḷhapaṭipadā, nijjhāmapaṭipadā…pe… sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā』』ti āgāḷhapaṭipadādivisesamapekkhitvā yā paṭipadāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ paṭipadāvisesatā paṭipadāya vemattatā nāma.

Kāyoti nāmakāyādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā kāyasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ kāyasāmaññatā kāyassa ekattatā nāma. 『『Tattha katamo kāyo』』ti pucchitvā 『『nāmakāyo rūpakāyo…pe… ayaṃ nāmakāyo』』ti nāmakāyādivisesamapekkhitvā yā kāyavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ kāyavisesatā kāyassa vemattatā nāmāti yojanā kātabbā. Padatthādiko viseso aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 47) vitthārato vutto.

以下是巴利文的完整中文直譯： 48. "無明"不考慮對苦無知等差別而說的一般無明性，這個一般無明性稱為無明的一性。當問"其中什麼是無明"時，考慮對苦無知等差別而說"對苦無知、對苦集無知......超越無明、癡、不善根"的特殊無明性，這個特殊無明性稱為無明的差異性。 "明"不考慮對苦的智等差別而說的一般明性，這個一般明性稱為明的一性。當問"其中什麼是明"時，考慮對苦的智等差別而說"對苦的智、對苦集的智......擇法覺支、道支、道所攝"的特殊明性，這個特殊明性稱為明的差異性。 "定"不考慮想定等差別而說的一般定性，這個一般定性稱為定的一性。當問"其中什麼是定"時，考慮想定等差別而說"想定、無想定......滅盡定"的特殊定性，這個特殊定性稱為定的差異性。 "禪修者"不考慮有學禪修者等差別而說的一般禪修者性，這個一般禪修者性稱為禪修者的一性。當問"其中什麼是禪修者"時，考慮有學禪修者、無學禪修者等差別而說"有有學禪修者，有無學禪修者......以慧為上的禪修者"的特殊禪修者性，這個特殊禪修者性稱為禪修者的差異性。 "三摩地"不考慮有染三摩地等差別而說的一般三摩地性，這個一般三摩地性稱為三摩地的一性。當問"其中什麼是三摩地"時，考慮有染三摩地等差別而說"有染三摩地，無染三摩地......邪三摩地，正三摩地"的特殊三摩地性，這個特殊三摩地性稱為三摩地的差異性。 "道"不考慮激烈道等差別而說的一般道性，這個一般道性稱為道的一性。當問"其中什麼是道"時，考慮激烈道等差別而說"激烈道、熾燃道......樂道速通"的特殊道性，這個特殊道性稱為道的差異性。 "身"不考慮名身等差別而說的一般身性，這個一般身性稱為身的一性。當問"其中什麼是身"時，考慮名身等差別而說"名身、色身......此為名身"的特殊身性，這個特殊身性稱為身的差異性，應如是解釋。詞義等差別在註釋書中已詳細說明。

Vuttappakārassa dukkhasamudayādikassa dhammassa ekattatādilakkhaṇaṃ nigamanavasena dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ yo dhammo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti iminā mayā vuttena 『『dukkhanti ekattatā. Tattha katamaṃ dukkhaṃ? Jāti dukkhā, jarā dukkhā』』tiādivacanena. Yo dhammoti yo koci jātijarābyādhyādivisesadhammo. Yassa dhammassāti tato jātiādivisesadhammato aññassa jarādivisesadhammassa. Samānabhāvoti jātiādivisesadhammena jarādivisesadhammassa dukkhabhāvena samānabhāvo. Tassa dhammassāti jarādivisesadhammassa. Ekattatāyāti dukkhasamudayatādisamānatāya dukkhasamudayādibhāvānaṃ ekībhāvena. Ekībhavatīti jātiādivisesabhedena anekopi 『『dukkhasamudayo』』tiādinā ekasaddābhidheyyatāya ekībhavati. Yena yena vā pana vilakkhaṇo, tena tena vemattaṃ gacchati. Yassa jātiādidhammassa yena yena abhinibbattanaparipācanādisabhāvena yo jātiādidhammo jarādidhammena vilakkhaṇo visadiso hoti, tassa jātiādidhammassa tena tena abhinibbattanaparipācanādisabhāvena so jātiādidhammo jarādidhammena vemattataṃ visadisattaṃ gacchati, dukkhasamudayādibhāvena samānopi jātiādidhammo jarādidhammassa visiṭṭhataṃ gacchatīti attho daṭṭhabbo.

Dukkhasamudayādidhammassa ekattavemattatā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『tāya ekattavemattatāya kattha pucchite sati adhiṭṭhānaṃ vīmaṃsitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā suttādike pucchite sati vīmaṃsitabbanti dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ sutte vā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ iminā vuttappakārena sutte vā pucchite, veyyākaraṇe vā pucchite, gāthāyaṃ vā pucchitāyaṃ sati adhiṭṭhānaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. 『『Kiṃ vīmaṃsitabba』』nti puccheyya 『『ekattatāya pucchati kiṃ, udāhu vemattatāya pucchati ki』』nti vīmaṃsitabbanti yojanā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『idāni tāva ekattavemattatāvisaye niyojetvā dassetuṃ 『sutte vā veyyākaraṇe vā』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 48) vuttaṃ. 『『Kathaṃ pucchitaṃ, kathaṃ vissajjitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『yadi ekattatāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Tenāhā』』tiādyānusandhyādiko ca 『『niyutto adhiṭṭhāno hāro』』ti imassa anusandhyādiko ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.

Iti adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 爲了通過歸納來顯示所說型別的苦集等法的同一性等特徵，故說"如是彼法"等。其中，"如是"指通過我所說的"苦即一性。其中何為苦？生是苦，老是苦"等言語。"彼法"指任何生、老、病等特殊之法。"于彼法"指除了那生等特殊之法外的其他老等特殊之法。"同等性"指以生等特殊之法與老等特殊之法在苦性上的相同性。"彼法"指老等特殊之法。"一性"指以苦集等相同性，苦集等性的統一性。"成為一"指雖因生等特殊差別而成多，但以"苦集"等一詞所表示而成為一。以何何差異，即隨彼彼差別。對於生等之法，以何何生起、成熟等自性，彼生等之法與老等之法有差異不同，則彼生等之法以彼彼生起、成熟等自性，彼生等之法與老等之法趨向差異性、不同性，應知其義為：雖以苦集等性相同的生等之法也趨向于與老等之法的差異性。 苦集等法的一性差異性已由師長分別，我們也已了知，因應問"以彼一性差異性，當何處被問時應審察所依"，為顯示當經等被問時應審察，故說"如是于經"等。其中，如是以此所說方式，當經被問時，或論被問時，或偈頌被問時，應審察所依。若問"應審察什麼"，應配釋為"應審察是問一性呢？還是問差異性呢？"。註釋書中則說："現今為顯示安立於一性差異性領域，故說'于經或論'等"。因應說"如何被問，如何應答"，故說"若一性"等。"是故說"等的關聯等，以及"已安立所依之理趣"的關聯等，應依所說方法了知。 如是于所依理趣分別中依能力所造 解釋終。 智者們則應依註釋書和復注，詳細分別甚深義理而獲取。 15. 資具理趣分別解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena dukkhasaccādīnaṃ ekattatādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo parikkhārahāravibhaṅgo nāmā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo parikkhāro hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāro hāro parikkhārahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『yo dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ janayati, tassa so parikkhāro』』tiādiko parikkhārabhūtassa hetuno ceva paccayassa ca vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāravibhaṅgo nāma.

『『Katamo saṃvaṇṇetabbo parikkhāro』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yo dhammo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo hetupaccayappakāro dhammo yaṃ phalabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ janayati janeti, tassa phaladhammassa so hetupaccayappakāro dhammo parikkhāro nāma. 『『Kiṃlakkhaṇo parikkhāro』』ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā lakkhaṇavisesaṃ dassetuṃ 『『kiṃlakkhaṇo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『tattha 『yo dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ janayati, tassa so parikkhāro』ti saṅkhepato parikkhāralakkhaṇaṃ vatvā taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ 『kiṃlakkhaṇo』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) vuttaṃ. 『『Kittakā dhammā janayantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dve dhammā janayanti hetu ca paccayo cā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Hetupi kāraṇaṃ, paccayopi kāraṇaṃ , tasmā kāraṇāyeva kena lakkhaṇena dvidhā vuttā』』ti vattabbattā 『『tattha kiṃlakkhaṇo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Janitabbaphalato aññehi phalehi asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo hetu, sabbaphalehi sādhāraṇalakkhaṇo paccayo, iminā visesalakkhaṇena dvidhā vattabbāti attho. 『『Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso kīdiso bhave』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yathā kiṃ bhave』』ti pucchitvā 『『yathā aṅkurassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yo sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso atthi, tathā so sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso kiṃ viya bhaveti attho. Aṅkurassa nibbattiyā bījaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ yathā, tathā hetu phalassa nibbattiyā asādhāraṇo bhave. Pathavī ca āpo ca aṅkurassa nibbattiyā sādhāraṇā bhavanti yathā, tathā paccayo phalassa nibbattiyā sādhāraṇo bhave. Sabbaphalassa paccayattā aṅkurassa bījaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ janakaṃ hetu. 『『Kathaṃ pathavī, āpo ca sādhāraṇā janakāti saddahitabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『aṅkurassa hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Samaṃ samānaṃ phalaṃ bhavāpetīti sabhāvo, ko so? Bījaṃ hetuyeva. 『『Kiṃ hetupaccayānaṃ viseso bījaṅkuropamāyeva dassetabbo, udāhu aññūpamāyapi dassetabbo』』ti vattabbattā aññāya upamāyapi visesaṃ dassetuṃ 『『yathā vā panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Imāya upamāyapi hetupaccayānaṃ viseso vijānitabboti adhippāyo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 49. 以何何特殊解釋之分別而分析苦諦等的同一性等，彼特殊解釋圓滿，因應問"何為名為資具理趣分別"，故說"其中何為資具理趣"等。其中，"其中"指在所說明的十六種教法理趣等中，問何種特殊解釋為資具理趣、名為資具理趣分別。對於"諸法生起某法"等說明，現今我所說的"某法生起某法，彼即是其資具"等，作為資具的因及緣的廣詳特殊解釋，名為資具分別。 因應問"何為應解釋的資具"，故說"某法"等。其中，某種因緣類法生起某果法時，對於彼果法，彼因緣類法名為資具。因應問"資具有何相"，故如是問已，為顯示特相，而說"有何相"等。註釋書中則說："其中說'某法生起某法，彼即是其資具'，略說資具相已，為以分類顯示彼義，故說'有何相'等"。因應問"有幾法生起"，故說"二法生起：因與緣"。因應說"因亦是原因，緣亦是原因，故原因以何相而說為二種"，故說"其中有何相"等。其義為：因具有與所生果不共之相，緣具有與一切果共通之相，以此特相應說為二種。因應問"共相不共相之差別如何"，故問"如何"已，說"如芽之"等。其義為：如有何種共相不共相之差別，彼共相不共相之差別如何。如種子對芽之生起為不共，如是因對果之生起為不共。如地與水對芽之生起為共通，如是緣對果之生起為共通。因為是一切果之緣，對芽而言種子為不共生因。因應問"如何相信地、水為共通生因"，故說"對於芽"等。使同等果生起者為自性，是什麼？即是因的種子。因應說"因緣之差別是否僅以種子與芽之譬喻顯示，還是也應以其他譬喻顯示"，為以其他譬喻顯示差別，故說"或如"等。意趣為：以此譬喻也應了知因緣之差別。

Bījaṅkurādīsu bāhiresu parikkhārabhūtānaṃ hetupaccayānaṃ viseso ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ ajjhattikesu vibhatto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ayañhi saṃsāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『bāhiresu parikkhārabhūto hetupaccayo yutto hotu, kathaṃ ajjhattikesu yutto』』ti vattabbattā 『『ayañhi saṃsāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『evaṃ bāhiraṃ hetupaccayavibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni ajjhattikaṃ dassetuṃ 『ayañhi saṃsāro』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) vuttaṃ. Hetupaccayehi saha saṃsāro bhavatīti sahetupaccayo. Ayaṃ saṃsāro hi yasmā sahetupaccayo hutvā nibbatto, tasmā ajjhattikepi parikkhārabhūto hetupaccayo yuttoyevāti daṭṭhabboti adhippāyo.

So imassa saṃsārassa sahetupaccayattaṃ yadi bhagavatā vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati amhehi saddahitabbaṃ, 『『kathaṃ saddahitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『evañhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Evanti iminā avijjādinā hetupaccayena sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo saṃsāroti nibbattoti bhagavatā saṃsārassa sahetupaccayattaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā saddahitabbaṃ. Avijjādayo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayo hotu, 『『katamo avijjāya hetū』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『iti avijjā avijjāya hetū』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Katamo avijjāya paccayo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ayoniso manasikāro paccayo』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Katamā avijjā katamāya avijjāya hetū』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『purimikā avijjā pacchimikāya avijjāya hetū』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Katamā purimikā avijjā katamā pacchimikā avijjā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tatthā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa hetubhūto purimo avijjānusayo samanantarova kiṃ, udāhu paramparahetupi hotī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『bījaṅkuro viyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bījaṅkuroti bījānaṃ aṅkuroti bījaṅkuro, bījānaṃ samanantarahetutāya aṅkuro nibbattati viya. Yattha rukkhādike yaṃ phalaṃ nibbattati, tasmiṃ rukkhādike nibbattassa assa phalassa idaṃ bījaṃ pana paramparahetutāya hetubhūtaṃ bhavati.

『『Bījaṃ pana ekaṃyeva hoti, kathaṃ dvidhā vattabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『duvidho hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ, samanantarakālaparamparakālabhedena hetupi duvidho hotiyevāti attho. Bījabhūto hetu duvidho yathā, evaṃ avijjāya hetubhūto avijjānusayopi samanantarahetu ca paramparahetu cāti kālabhedena duvidho bhavati, samanantaro avijjānusayo samanantarassa avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa samanantarahetu hoti. Purimataro avijjānusayo pacchimatarassa avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa paramparahetu hoti. Iti bījabhūto asādhāraṇo hetu, pathavīāpādiko sādhāraṇo paccayoti viseso pākaṭo yathā, evaṃ avijjānusayo asādhāraṇo hetu, ayonisomanasikāro sādhāraṇo paccayoti viseso daṭṭhabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 在種子、芽等外在事物中作為資具的因緣之差別已被師長分別，我們也已了知，因應問"如何在內在事物中分別"，故說"此輪迴"等。或者，因應說"在外在事物中作為資具的因緣是合理的，如何在內在事物中也合理"，故說"此輪迴"等。註釋書中則說："如是顯示外在因緣分別已，現今為顯示內在，故說'此輪迴'等"。與因緣俱有的輪迴為有因緣。因為此輪迴是以有因緣而生起，所以在內在事物中作為資具的因緣也是合理的，應如是了知，此為其意趣。 若彼輪迴之有因緣性為世尊所說，如是我們應當相信，因應說"如何相信"，故說"如是"等。"如是"指以此無明等因緣，一切緣起即輪迴而生起，世尊說輪迴有因緣性，故應相信。無明等是行等的緣，因應問"何為無明之因"，故說"如是無明是無明之因"。因應問"何為無明之緣"，故說"非如理作意是緣"。因應問"何種無明是何種無明之因"，故說"前無明是后無明之因"。因應問"何為前無明，何為后無明"，故說"其中"等。因應問"作為無明現行之因的前無明隨眠是否僅為等無間因，還是也成為相續因"，故說"如種芽"等。種芽指種子的芽，即種子，如以種子等無間因性而生芽。于某樹等中生起某果時，于彼樹等中所生起的彼果，此種子則以相續因性而成為因。 因應說"種子唯一，如何說為二種"，故說"因為二種"等，其義為：因以等無間時與相續時的差別而確實成為二種。如種子之因有二種，如是作為無明之因的無明隨眠也以時間差別成為等無間因和相續因二種，等無間無明隨眠成為等無間無明現行的等無間因。更前的無明隨眠成為更后的無明現行的相續因。如是如種子為不共因，地水等為共通緣的差別明顯，如是應知無明隨眠為不共因，非如理作意為共通緣的差別。

『『Ettakeneva hetupaccayānaṃ viseso vattabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『yathā vā pana thālakañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『yathā vā panātiādināpi hetupaccayavibhāgameva dassetī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha padīpassa paccayabhūtaṃ thālakañca vaṭṭi ca telañca padīpassa sabhāvahetu samānahetu na hotīti yojanā. 『『Padīpassa paccayabhūtampi thālakādikaṃ sabhāvahetu na hotīti kasmā saddahitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『na hi sakkā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Padīpassa paccayabhūtaṃ anaggikaṃ aggirahitaṃ thālakañca vaṭṭiñca telañca dīpetuṃ jāletuṃ hi yasmā na sakkā, tasmā purimo padīpo pacchimassa padīpassa sabhāvahetu hoti viya, evaṃ thālakādikaṃ sabhāvahetu na hoti. Iti evaṃpakāro sabhāvo samāno padīpo hetu hoti yathā, parabhāvo asamāno thālakādiko paccayo hoti yathā ca, tathā ajjhattiko sabhāvo hetu hoti, bāhiro asamāno paccayo hoti. Janako avijjānusayo avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa hetu hoti, pariggāhako upatthambhako paccayo hoti. Aññehi phalehi asādhāraṇo hetu hoti, sabbehi phalehi sādhāraṇo paccayo hotīti yojetvā padīpopamāyapi hetupaccayānaṃ pākaṭo viseso daṭṭhabboti adhippāyo.

Hetupaccayappabhedaṃ kāraṇaṃ parikkhāroti ācariyena vuttaṃ, tassa kāraṇassa kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkho hoti, tasmā 『『yo kāraṇabhāvo yenākārena hoti, katamo so kāraṇabhāvo, katamo so ākāro』』ti pucchitabbattā ca 『『yaṃ phalaṃ yena visesena hoti, katamaṃ taṃ phalaṃ, katamo so viseso』』ti pucchitabbattā ca 『『kāraṇaphalānaṃ yo sambandho hoti, katamo so sambandho』』ti pucchitabbattā ca taṃ sabbaṃ vibhāvetuṃ 『『avupacchedattho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayamanusandhyattho ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ 『『idāni yasmā kāraṇaṃ 『parikkhāro』ti vuttaṃ, kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkhāya, tasmā kāraṇassa yo kāraṇabhāvo yathā ca so hoti, yañca phalaṃ, yo ca tassa viseso, yo ca kāraṇaphalānaṃ sambandho, taṃ sabbaṃ vibhāvetuṃ 『avupacchedattho』tiādi vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) iminā vuttoti daṭṭhabbo.

Tattha avupacchinnassa hetupaccayasaṅkhātassa kāraṇassa yo anupacchedattho atthi, so anupacchedattho santatiattho hoti phalena sambandhattā , yañca kāraṇaṃ attano phalassa janakaṃ upatthambhakaṃ hutvā nirujjhati, so anupacchinno eva nāma hotīti. Yañca phalaṃ aññassa kāraṇaṃ hutvā nirujjhati, tasmiṃ anupacchinne tassa ca santatiattho hoti. Yaṃ pana phalaṃ aññassa phalassa kāraṇaṃ ahutvā nirujjhati, taṃ upacchinnaṃ hoti, yathā taṃ arahato cuticittanti. Kāraṇato nibbattassa phalassa yo nibbattiattho atthi, so nibbattiattho phalattho hoti. Paṭisandhikkhandhānaṃ yo paṭisandhiattho paṭisandahanattho atthi, so paṭisandhiattho punabbhavattho punabbhavanattho hoti. Kilesānaṃ yo palibodhattho santāne uppajjanattho atthi, so palibodhattho pariyuṭṭhānattho hoti. Kilesānaṃ maggena yo asamugghātattho atthi, so asamugghātattho anusayattho hoti. Avijjāya catunnaṃ saccānaṃ yo asampaṭivedhattho atthi, so asampaṭivedhattho avijjattho hoti. Arahattamaggena yo apariññātattho atthi, so apariññātattho viññāṇassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa bījattho hoti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 由於需要說明因緣的差別，所以說"就像油燈托盤等"這樣的話。在註釋書中說 - "以'就像'等詞說明因緣的區別"。其中，作為油燈緣的托盤、燈芯和油，不是油燈的自性因和同性因，這是其含義。由於會問"為什麼要相信作為油燈緣的托盤等不是自性因"，所以說"因為不能"等等。因為沒有火的托盤、燈芯和油不能照明和燃燒，所以正如前面的油燈是後面油燈的自性因一樣，托盤等不是自性因。因此，同樣性質的油燈如何成為因，不同性質的托盤等如何成為緣，如此內在的自性成為因，外在的異性成為緣。能生的無明隨眠是無明現行的因，攝持的、支援的是緣。與其他果不共的是因，與一切果共通的是緣。這樣連結起來，通過油燈的比喻也應當看到因緣的明顯差別，這是其意趣。 導師說因緣差別是原因和資具，那個原因的原因性是期待果的，因此由於應當問"什麼是原因性，以何種方式存在，是什麼原因性，是什麼方式"，以及由於應當問"什麼果以什麼特性存在，是什麼果，是什麼特性"，又由於應當問"原因和果有什麼關係，是什麼關係"，爲了說明這一切，所以說"不間斷義"等。這個連貫的意義在註釋書中說："現在因為說原因是'資具'，而原因性是期待果的，所以爲了說明原因的原因性如何存在，什麼是果，什麼是它的特性，以及原因和果的什麼關係，說'不間斷義'等"，應當如此理解。 其中，未間斷的、稱為因緣的原因的不間斷義，由於與果相連，那個不間斷義就是相續義。任何原因成為自己的果的能生者、支持者而滅去，那也稱為未間斷。任何果成為其他的原因而滅去，在那未間斷時也有其相續義。但是任何果不成為其他果的原因而滅去，那就是間斷的，就像阿羅漢的死亡心。從原因生起的果的生起義，那個生起義就是果義。結生蘊的結生義、連線義，那個結生義就是再有義、再生義。煩惱的障礙義、在相續中生起義，那個障礙義就是現行義。煩惱未被聖道根除的義，那個未根除義就是隨眠義。無明對四諦的未通達義，那個未通達義就是無明義。未被阿羅漢道遍知的義，那個未遍知義就是識、結生識的種子義。

Ettāvatā kāraṇabhāvo ca kāraṇākāro ca phalañca phalaviseso ca ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo paramparahetupaccayattho, katamo ca sambandhattho』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yattha avupacchedo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yattha yassaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ avupacchinnassa hetupaccayappabhedassa kāraṇassa yo avupacchedo atthi, so avupacchedo tattha tissaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ santati hoti. Yattha yassaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ yā santati atthi, sā santatitattha rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ nibbatti hotītiādinā yojetvā paramparahetuādiko viññātabbo.

Sīlakkhandhoti parisuddhasīlakkhandho. Samādhikkhandhassāti mahaggatakkhandhassa, samādhipaṭṭhāno hi mahaggatadhammo. Paññākkhandhoti maggaphalapaññāpadhānakkhandho. So hi vimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇakkhandhassa paccayo hoti. Titthaññutādīnaṃ attho padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttova.

Sabhāvo hetūti ācariyena vutto, 『『kīdiso so sabhāvo hetū』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yathā vā pana cakkhuñca paṭiccā』』tiādi vuttaṃ . Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ cakkhuñca cakkhundriyañca paṭicca nissayaṃ katvā rūpe paṭicca ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjati. Tattha cakkhādīsu cakkhundriyaṃ ādhipateyyapaccayatāya indriyapaccayatāya cakkhuviññāṇassa paccayo, rūpārammaṇaṃ purejātārammaṇapaccayatāya paccayo, āloko sannissayatāya upanissayatāya paccayo hoti. So paccayo honto phalena cakkhuviññāṇena asamānattā sabhāvo hetu na hoti, paccayo ca hoti manasikāro. Kiriyamanodhātu pana phalena cakkhuviññāṇena viññāṇabhāvena samānattā sabhāvo hetu hoti yathā, evaṃ saṅkhārā nāmakkhandhabhāvena samānattā viññāṇassa paccayā hontā sabhāvo hetu honti. Viññāṇaṃ nāmarūpena ekasantativasena samānattā nāmarūpassa paccayo hontaṃ sabhāvo hetu hoti. Iminā nayena 『『nāmarūpaṃ saḷāyatanassā』』tiādīsupi attho veditabbo. Evaṃ vuttappakāro hetu, paccayo janako, upatthambhako ca yo koci upanissayo balavapaccayo hoti, sabbo so hetupaccayo janakaupatthambhako janitabbupatthambhiyassa phalassa parikkharaṇato abhisaṅkharaṇato nippariyāyato parikkhāro nāma.

『『Vuttappakāro hetupaccayo parikkhāro nāmāti kena amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena kāraṇabhūtena sabbassa hetupaccayassa parikkhārabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno 『『ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena saddahitabbo, 『『ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī』』ti vacanaṃ nissāya tumhehi sallakkhetabboti adhippāyo.

『『Ettakova parikkhāro hāro yuñjitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto parikkhāro hāro』』ti vuttaṃ, yo yo parikkhāro hāro yuñjitabbo, so so parikkhāro hāro nīharitvā yutto yuñjitabboti.

Iti parikkhārahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

1. Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 至此導師已經解釋了原因性、原因形式、果和果的差別，我們也已經理解了。由於應當問"什麼是次第因緣義，什麼是關聯義"，所以說"哪裡有不間斷"等。在哪裡，在那個色、無色的活動中，有未間斷的因緣差別的原因的不間斷，那個不間斷在那個色、無色的活動中就是相續。在哪裡，在那個色、無色的活動中有什麼相續，那個相續在色、無色的活動中就是生起。如此連結應當理解次第因等。 戒蘊即是清凈戒蘊。定蘊即是廣大蘊，因為定是廣大法的基礎。慧蘊即是以道果智慧為主的蘊。因為它是解脫智見所說的省察智蘊的緣。度處智等的含義在基礎理趣分別註釋中已說。 導師說自性是因，由於應當問"怎樣的自性是因"，所以說"又如依于眼等"。眼識依止眼和眼根，緣取色為所緣而生起。其中，在眼等中，眼根以增上緣性、根緣性作為眼識的緣，色所緣以前生所緣緣性作為緣，光明以親依止、依止作為緣。那個緣與果眼識不同性，所以不是自性因，而是緣和作意。但是唯作意界與果眼識同爲識性，所以是自性因。如是諸行以名蘊性相同而作為識的緣時成為自性因。識以相續一致性與名色相同而作為名色的緣時成為自性因。以此方法，對於"名色緣六處"等也應當如此理解。如是所說的因，緣是能生、能持，任何強有力的依止緣，一切那些因緣能生能持，由於資助、準備所生所持的果，無間接地稱為資具。 由於應當問"我們為什麼要相信所說的因緣稱為資具"，所以說"因此說"等。因為一切因緣都具有資具性這個原因，所以大迦旃延尊者說"諸法生起某法"這句話，應當依此話相信，依"諸法生起某法"這句話，你們應當了知，這是其意趣。 由於應當說"只有這樣的資具理趣應當運用"，所以說"已運用資具理趣"，任何資具理趣應當運用，那個資具理趣應當引出而運用。 如是在資具理趣分別中，隨能力所作的 解釋已完成。 智者們應當依註釋書和復注，詳細分析深奧的意義而領會。 16. 歸攝理趣分別解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena parikkhārahāravibhaṅgena suttatthānaṃ hetupaccayo vibhatto, so…pe… vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo samāropanahāravibhaṅgo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo samāropano hāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso samāropano hāro samāropanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. 『『Ye dhammā yaṃmūlā』』tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno 『『ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne yattakāni padaṭṭhānāni otarantī』』tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso samāropanahāravibhaṅgo nāma.

『『Kittake padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte kittakāni padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte sati avuttāni yattakāni padaṭṭhānāni otaranti samosaranti, sabbāni tāni avuttāni padaṭṭhānāni sutte vuttāni viya niddhāraṇavasena ānetvā desanāya āropayitabbāni. 『『Kāni viya samāropayitabbānī』』ti vattabbattā 『『yathā āvaṭṭe』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Āvaṭṭe hāre ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte sati sutte avuttāni bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni otaranti, tāni bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni pariyesitabbāni yathā, evaṃ samāropane hārepi bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni desanāya samāropayitabbānīti attho.

『『Kevalaṃ pana padaṭṭhānavaseneva samāropanā kātabbā kiṃ, udāhu aññavasenāpi samāropanā kātabbā ki』』nti vattabbattā aññavasenāpi samāropanā kātabbā; tasmā samāropanā catubbidhā kātabbāti dassento 『『tattha samāropanā catubbidhā』』tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tāsu samāropayitabbasamāropanāsu padaṭṭhānaṃ padaṭṭhānasamāropanā, vevacanaṃ vevacanasamāropanā, bhāvanā bhāvanāsamāropanā, pahānaṃ pahānasamāropanā, iti iminā pabhedena samāropanā catubbidhā kātabbā.

『『Tāsu catubbidhāsu samāropanāsu katamā padaṭṭhānasamāropanā』』ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā padaṭṭhānasamāropanaṃ dassetuṃ 『『tatthakatamā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sutte vuttena padaṭṭhānena sutte avuttānaṃ padaṭṭhānānaṃ samāropanā katamāti pucchati.

Sabbapāpassa akusalassa yaṃ akaraṇaṃ akaraṇahetu sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ sāsanaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo hoti, atha vā akaraṇaṃ akaraṇatthāya yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo hoti, na yassa kassaci sāsananti attho. Akaraṇanti hi sampadānatthe pavattaṃ paccattavacanaṃ yathā 『『kissa atthāya kimattha』』nti. Kusalassa sampadā sampadāya yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ. Sacittapariyodāpanaṃ sacittapariyodāpanatthaṃ yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ hoti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 以資具理趣分別這種註釋特點來分別經義的因緣，那...等...分別已完整。由於應當問"什麼是歸攝理趣分別"，所以說"其中什麼是歸攝理趣"等。其中，在已說明的十六種教說理趣等中，什麼註釋特點稱為歸攝理趣、歸攝理趣分別？對於"諸法何根"等說明，現在我要說的"在一個基礎中有多少基礎歸入"等詳細註釋特點稱為歸攝理趣分別。 由於應當問"在經中說了多少基礎時應當歸攝多少基礎"，所以說"在一個基礎"等。當說了一個基礎時，有多少未說的基礎會歸入、彙集，所有那些未說的基礎都應當像經中所說的那樣，以確定方式引入而歸攝到教說中。由於應當說"應當如何歸攝"，所以說"如同在轉起"等。在轉起理趣中，當說了一個基礎時，經中未說的許多基礎會歸入，應當尋求那些許多基礎，同樣在歸攝理趣中也應當將許多基礎歸攝到教說中，這是其含義。 由於應當問"是僅依基礎而作歸攝，還是也依其他而作歸攝"，所以也依其他而作歸攝；因此歸攝應作四種，爲了顯示這點而說"其中歸攝有四種"等。其中，在那些應歸攝的歸攝中，基礎是基礎歸攝，同義詞是同義詞歸攝，修習是修習歸攝，斷除是斷除歸攝，如此以這種差別歸攝應作四種。 由於應當問"在這四種歸攝中什麼是基礎歸攝"，所以這樣問了之後，爲了顯示基礎歸攝而說"其中什麼"等。問什麼是以經中所說的基礎來歸攝經中未說的基礎。 對一切惡不善之不作有不作因的教導，這個教導是諸佛的教導、教誡，或者爲了不作而有的教導，這是諸佛的教導、教誡，不是任何人的教導，這是其含義。因為"不作"是用於與格的主格語，如"爲了什麼、為何"。對善的圓滿、爲了圓滿而有的教導，這是諸佛的教導。自心清凈、爲了自心清凈而有的教導，這是諸佛的教導。

Iti evaṃpakārena vuttassa tassa sāsanassa kiṃ padaṭṭhānanti visesassa visesapadaṭṭhānaṃ puna pucchati. Idaṃ sucaritattayaṃ sāsanassa ovādassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sucaritattayena hetunā sāsanattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ yathā 『『annena vasatī』』tiādi. 『『Sucaritattaye padaṭṭhāne vutte katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yaṃ kāyikañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ khandhattayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ, 『『khandhattaye padaṭṭhāne samāropayite katamaṃ samāropayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha sīlakkhandho cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ samathavipassanādvayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. 『『Samathavipassanādvaye padaṭṭhāne samāropayite katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha samathassa phala』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ phaladvayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ.

Sāsanassa padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbānīti ācariyena niddhāretvā vibhattāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, 『『idāni katamassa katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『vanaṃ vanathassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ kāmaguṇapañcakaṃ vanaṃ taṇhābhūtassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ taṇhāvatthubhāvato, 『『itthī』』ti vā 『『puriso』』ti vā nimittaggāhasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ 『『aho cakkhu, aho sotaṃ, aho ghānaṃ, aho jivhā, aho kāyo』』ti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ anubyañjanaggāhasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. Apariññātaṃ dvādasāyatanasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ saṃyojanasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ, āyatanaṃ paṭicca saṃyojanuppajjanato anusayasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. 『『Pañcakāmaguṇādīnaṃ vanabhāvo ca taṇhādīnaṃ vanathabhāvo ca kena amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena pañcakāmaguṇādīnaṃ vanabhāvena ca taṇhādīnaṃ vanathabhāvena ca bhagavā 『『chetvā vanañca vanathañcā』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena bhagavato vacanena vacanānusārena saddahitabboti. Ayanti ayaṃ 『『ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne』』tiādisaṃvaṇṇanā. Padaṭṭhānenāti ekekena padaṭṭhānena. Samāropanāti tadaññapadaṭṭhānānaṃ samāropanā . Samāropenti samāropayitabbāni etāya saṃvaṇṇanāyāti samāropanāti viggahoti. (1)

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 如此這樣所說的那個教導有什麼基礎，再次問特殊的特殊基礎。這三種善行是教導、教誡的基礎，因為以三種善行為因而成為教導，應當如此理解，如"依食而住"等。由於應當問"在說了三種善行基礎時，什麼基礎應當歸攝"，所以說"其中身業等"。這三蘊應當歸攝為教導的基礎。由於應當問"在歸攝了三蘊基礎時，什麼應當歸攝"，所以說"其中戒蘊等"。這止觀二法應當歸攝為教導的基礎。由於應當問"在歸攝了止觀二法基礎時，什麼基礎應當歸攝"，所以說"其中止的果"等。這二果應當歸攝為教導的基礎。 導師已確定並分別了應當歸攝教導的基礎，我們也已了知，由於應當問"現在什麼是什麼的基礎應當歸攝"，所以說"林是密林的"等。這五欲功德之林是貪愛密林的基礎，因為是貪愛的所緣。這稱為"女人"或"男人"的相執取之林，應當歸攝為"啊眼、啊耳、啊鼻、啊舌、啊身"等各種肢體隨相執取的密林的基礎。這稱為未遍知的十二處之林，應當歸攝為稱為結的密林的基礎，因為緣于處而生起結。這稱為隨眠之林，應當歸攝為稱為現行的密林的基礎。由於應當說"我們為什麼要相信五欲功德等是林性，貪愛等是密林性"，所以說"因此世尊說"等。因為五欲功德等是林性，貪愛等是密林性，所以世尊說"斷除林與密林"這句話，應當依世尊之語、隨順其語而相信。這即是"在一個基礎"等的註釋。以基礎即是以一一基礎。歸攝即是對其他基礎的歸攝。因為以此註釋歸攝、應當歸攝，所以稱為歸攝，這是語詞分析。(1)

1. Padaṭṭhānena samāropanā ācariyena niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamā vevacanena samāropanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamā vevacanenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu samāropanāsu vevacanena ekekena rotadaññavevacanānaṃ samāropanā katamāti pucchati. 『『Rāgavirāgā』』ti ca 『『cetovimuttī』』ti ca 『『sekkhaphala』』nti ca idaṃ vacanattayaṃ anāgāmiphalatthattā anāgāmiphalassa vevacanaṃ. 『『Avijjāvirāgā』』ti ca 『『paññāvimuttī』』ti ca 『『asekkhaphala』』nti ca idaṃ vacanattayaṃ arahattaphalatthattā arahattaphalassa vevacanaṃ. Iminā nayena sesesu yojanā kātabbā. (2)

Vevacanena samāropanā ācariyena niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamā bhāvanāya samāropanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamā bhāvanāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu katamāya desitāya bhāvanāya katamesānaṃ adesitānaṃ bhāvanāropanā katamāti pucchati. Yathā yena pakārena yaṃ bhāvanaṃ bhagavā 『『tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa』』nti (saṃ. ni.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 51. 導師已指出以基礎歸攝，我們也已了知，由於應當問"什麼是以同義詞歸攝"，所以說"其中什麼是以同義詞"等。其中，在那四種基礎歸攝等歸攝中，什麼是以一一同義詞對其他同義詞的歸攝，這樣問。"離貪"、"心解脫"、"有學果"這三個詞因為是不還果的意思，所以是不還果的同義詞。"離無明"、"慧解脫"、"無學果"這三個詞因為是阿羅漢果的意思，所以是阿羅漢果的同義詞。以此方法應當對其餘作連結。(2) 導師已指出以同義詞歸攝，我們也已了知，由於應當問"什麼是以修習歸攝"，所以說"其中什麼是以修習"等。其中，在那四種基礎歸攝等中，對於已說的哪種修習，對哪些未說的修習歸攝是什麼，這樣問。就像世尊以何種方式說"所以，比丘，你應住于身隨觀身，熱誠、正知、具念，調伏世間的貪憂"這個修習（相應部）

5.369, 371, 395, 415) āha, tathā tena pakārena tāya bhāvanāya tadaññabhāvanāpi samāropayitabbāti attho.

『『Tasmātihā』』tiādipāṭhe 『『kiṃ bhāvanaṃ bhagavā āhā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ātāpī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Ātāpī』』ti vacanena vīriyindriyaṃ bhagavā āha. 『『Sampajāno』』ti vacanena paññindriyaṃ bhagavā āha. 『『Satimā』』ti vacanena satindriyaṃ āha. 『『Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa』』nti vacanena samādhindriyaṃ āha. 『『Evaṃ vutte katamā bhāvanā samāropayitabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『evaṃ kāye kāyānupassino viharato cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī』』ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttāya vīriyindriyādibhāvanāya cattāro satipaṭṭhānā samāropayitabbāti attho. Kena kāraṇena bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti pucchati. Catunnaṃ indriyānaṃ indriyabhāvena, bhāvetabbabhāvena vā ekalakkhaṇattā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti vissajjeti. 『『Tesu samāropitesu katame samāropayitabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『catūsū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu samāropayitabbesu cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti samāropayitabbāti attho. Sesesupi evameva samāropayitabbā.

Bhāvanāya samāropanā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamā pahānena samāropanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu katamena desitena pahānena katamesaṃ adesitānaṃ pahānānaṃ katamā samāropanāti pucchati. 『『Kāye kāyānupassī viharanto asubhe 『subha』nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī』』ti desitena 『『subha』』nti vipallāsappahānena kabaḷīkārāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesakāmupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.

『『Vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharanto dukkhe 『sukha』nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī』』ti desitena 『『sukha』』nti vipallāsappahānena phassāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesabhavupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.

『『Citte cittānupassī viharanto anicce 『nicca』nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī』』ti desitena 『『nicca』』nti vipallāsappahānena viññāṇāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesadiṭṭhupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.

『『Dhammesudhammānupassī viharanto anattani 『attā』ti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī』』ti desitena 『『attā』』ti vipallāsappahānena manosañcetanāhārapariññāya? Manosañcetanāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesaattavādupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbāti adhippāyo. (4)

Pahānahāro pana lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttoyevāti idha na vadāma.

『『Sutte desitena ekekena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitānaṃ padaṭṭhānādīnaṃ samāropanabhāvo kena amhehi vijānitabbo saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāha āyasmā』』tiādimāha. Tena tathā samāropanabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno –

『『Ye dhammā yaṃmūlā, ye cekatthā pakāsitā muninā;

Te samāropayitabbā, esa samāropano hāro』』ti –

Yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena vacanānusārena tathā samāropanabhāvo tumhehi vijānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 就像世尊說的那樣，以那種方式，以那個修習，其他修習也應當歸攝，這是其含義。 對於"所以"等文句，由於應當問"世尊說了什麼修習"，所以說"熱誠"等。以"熱誠"一詞，世尊說精進根。以"正知"一詞，世尊說慧根。以"具念"一詞，說念根。以"調伏世間的貪憂"一詞，說定根。由於應當問"說了這些后，什麼修習應當歸攝"，所以說"這樣住于身隨觀身時，四念處將達到修習圓滿"。意思是以這樣說的精進根等修習，四念處應當歸攝。以什麼因緣達到修習圓滿，他問。因為四根以根性、應修習性有一相，所以達到修習圓滿，這樣回答。由於應當問"在那些歸攝中，什麼應當歸攝"，所以說"在四"等。意思是在修習四念處時，四正勤將達到修習圓滿而應當歸攝。在其餘處也同樣應當歸攝。 導師已分別以修習歸攝，我們也已了知，由於應當問"什麼是以斷除歸攝"，所以說"其中什麼"等。其中，在那四種基礎歸攝等中，以什麼已說的斷除，對哪些未說的斷除是什麼歸攝，這樣問。以"住于身隨觀身時，捨棄'美'之顛倒"這已說的"美"之顛倒斷除，也應當歸攝食團食遍知、繫縛煩惱、欲取等斷除。 以"住于受隨觀受時，捨棄'苦'為'樂'之顛倒"這已說的"樂"之顛倒斷除，也應當歸攝觸食遍知、繫縛煩惱、有取等斷除。 以"住於心隨觀心時，捨棄'常'為'無常'之顛倒"這已說的"常"之顛倒斷除，也應當歸攝識食遍知、繫縛煩惱、見取等斷除。 以"住於法隨觀法時，捨棄'無我'為'有我'之顛倒"這已說的"有我"之顛倒斷除，應當歸攝意思想食遍知、繫縛煩惱、我語取等斷除，這是其意圖。(4) 斷除理趣則在相特徵理趣分別註釋中已說，所以此處不再贅述。 由於應當說"以經中已說的一一基礎等，未說的基礎等的歸攝性，我們以何知曉、相信"，所以說"因此尊者"等。尊者摩訶迦旃延以那種歸攝性說： "諸法何根，諸法何義，導師已宣說； 應當歸攝之，此是歸攝理趣。" 以這句話，意味著應當依那句話、隨順其語而知曉、相信這種歸攝性。

『『Kiṃ pana ettāvatā samāropano hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto samāropano hāro』』ti vuttaṃ. Sutte desitena nayena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitāni padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbāni bhavanti, tena tena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitānaṃ padaṭṭhānādīnaṃ samāropano hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yuñjitabboti attho daṭṭhabbo.

Iti samāropanahāravibhaṅge sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabbo.

Ime yathāvuttā soḷasa saṃvaṇṇanāvisesā saṃvaṇṇetabbatthesu aññāṇasaṃsayānaṃ haraṇato apanayanato hārā nāmāti.

Niṭṭhitā hāravibhaṅgavāravibhāvanā.

1. Desanāhārasampātavibhāvanā

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 由於應當說"歸攝理趣僅此而已是否完整，是否沒有其他應運用的"，所以說"已運用歸攝理趣"。以經中所說的方法，以基礎等，未說的基礎應當歸攝，以那些基礎等對未說的基礎等的歸攝理趣已確定而應當運用，應當如此理解其含義。 如是在歸攝理趣分別中，隨能力所作的 解釋已完成。 智者們應當依註釋書和復注，詳細分析深奧的意義而領會。 這些如上所說的十六種註釋特點，因為能除去、運離所應註釋義理中的無知和疑惑，所以稱為理趣。 理趣分別篇解釋完成。 1. 教說理趣攝集解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhāravibhaṅgādihāravibhaṅgena assādādayo nānāsuttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhāravibhaṅgādihāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo.

『『Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disālocanato disā viloketvā;

Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tīhi niddise sutta』』nti. (netti. 4 nayasaṅkhepa) –

Gāthā niddesavāre ācariyena vuttā, tassā gāthāya niddeso hāravibhaṅgavārassa ādimhi na vibhatto, 『『kuhiñci vibhatto, hārasampāte vā vibhatto kiṃ, udāhu nayasamuṭṭhānahāre vā vibhatto ki』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『hārasampāte vibhatto』』ti tumhehi daṭṭhabboti viññāpanatthaṃ 『『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Atha vā suparikammakatabhūmisadisesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu nānāsuttappadesesu nānāvaṇṇasugandhapupphasadise soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā ācariyena vibhattā, tathā susikkhitasippācariyasuvicāritajambunadābharaṇasadisesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu nānāsuttappadesesu nānāvidharaṃsijālavividhamaṇiratanasadise soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvāva soḷasa hārā vibhattā, mahāpathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojassa khādāpanaṃ atidukkaraṃ viya, nānāvidhesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu suttappadesesu paramatthojāya soḷasahi hārehi atidukkarakhādāpanasadisaṃ viññāpanaṃ karontena ca yojanikamadhugaṇḍaṃ pīḷetvā sumadhurasassa pāyāpanaṃ atidukkaraṃ viya nānāvidhesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu suttappadesesu paramatthamadhurasassa soḷasahi hārehi atidukkaraṃ pāyāpanasadisaṃ viññāpanaṃ karontena ca ācariyena anekesu saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadesesu soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『nānāvidhasuttappadesesu te saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā kiṃ , udāhu ekasmimpi saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadese saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā ki』』nti vattabbattā ekasmimpi saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadese saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattāyevāti tathā vibhajanto 『『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』』ntiādikaṃ hārasampātavāraṃ āha.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 52. 以教說理趣分別等理趣分別這種註釋特點分別了妙味等各種經義，那作為註釋特點的教說理趣分別等理趣分別已完整。 "十六理趣為首，觀察諸方后； 以鉤略攝，應以三種方法顯示經。"（導論·方法略說） 導師在分別品中說了這個偈頌，這個偈頌的解釋在理趣分別品開始時未分別，由於應當問"在哪裡分別，是在理趣攝集中分別，還是在方法生起理趣中分別"，爲了讓你們知道應當視為"在理趣攝集中分別"，所以說"十六理趣為首"等。 或者，在如同善加工作的地面般的應註釋的各種經文處，導師以註釋方式配合如同各色香花般的十六理趣而分別了十六理趣，同樣在如同善學工匠善加考慮的閻浮檀金飾般的應註釋的各種經文處，以註釋方式配合如同種種光網各種寶珠般的十六理趣而分別了十六理趣。就像翻轉大地使螞蟻食用極為困難一樣，在各種應註釋的經文處，以十六理趣使知曉最勝義味如同極為困難的食用；又如壓榨百由旬的蜜丸使飲用甘美味極為困難一樣，在各種應註釋的經文處，以十六理趣使知曉最勝義甘美味如同極為困難的飲用。導師在許多應註釋的經文處以註釋方式配合十六理趣而分別了十六理趣，我們也已了知。由於應當說"是以註釋方式配合在各種經文處分別了十六理趣，還是以註釋方式配合在一個應註釋的經文處分別了十六理趣"，所以即使在一個應註釋的經文處也以註釋方式配合而分別了十六理趣，爲了這樣分別而說"十六理趣為首"等理趣攝集品。

Nanu hārasampātavāraṃ kathetukāmena ācariyena 『『tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto』』tiādivacanaṃ vattabbaṃ, atha kasmā 『『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』』ntiādi vattabbanti ce? Niddese vuttaṃ 『『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』』ntiādikaṃ gāthaṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti vippakiṇṇavisayattā ca nayavicārassa ca antaritattā. Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ gāthaṃ payojeti avikiṇṇavisayattā. Tasmā taṃ gāthaṃ paccāmasitvā hārasampātavāre tassā gāthāya niddeso daṭṭhabboti viññāpanatthaṃ 『『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』』ntiādi vattabbaṃyevāti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

Evaṃ suparikammakatāya bhūmiyā nānāvaṇṇāni muttapupphāni pakiranto viya, susikkhitasippācariyavicāritesu surattasuvaṇṇālaṅkāresu nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalāni vividhāni maṇiratanāni bandhanto viya, mahāpathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ khādāpento viya , yojanikamadhugaṇḍaṃ pīḷetvā sumadhurasaṃ pāyento viya ca āyasmā mahākaccāno nānāsuttappadese udāharanto soḷasa hāre vibhajitvā idāni te ekasmiṃyeva sutte yojetvā dassento hārasampātavāraṃ ārabhi. Ārabhanto ca yāyaṃ niddesavāre –

『『Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disālocanato disā viloketvā;

Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tīhi niddise sutta』』nti. –

Gāthā vuttā. Yasmā taṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti vippakiṇṇavisayattā, nayavicārassa ca antaritattā. Anekehi suttappadesehi hārānaṃ vibhāgadassanameva hi hāravibhaṅgavāro. Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ payojeti ekasmiṃyeva suttappadese soḷasa hāre yojetvāva tadanantaraṃ nayasamuṭṭhānassa kathitattā. Tasmā 『『soḷasa hārā paṭhama』』nti gāthaṃ paccāmasitvā 『『tassā niddeso kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbo? Hārasampāteti āhā』』ti –

Vuttaṃ. Gāthāttho niddesavibhāvanāyaṃ vuttova. 『『Soḷasa…pe… sutta』』nti yā gāthā niddese ācariyena vuttā, tassā gāthāya niddeso kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbo, hāravibhaṅgassa ādimhi ācariyena na vibhatto, hārasampāte vā paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabbo kiṃ, udāhu nayasamuṭṭhāne vā paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabbo kinti pucchati. Hārasampāte paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabboti vissajjanā.

Hārasampāte tassā gāthāya niddeso daṭṭhabboti ācariyena vutto, so hārasampāto desanāhārasampātabhedena soḷasavidho, 『『tattha katamo hārasampāto desanāhārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā imasmiṃ sutte saṃvaṇṇetabbe saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena mayā vibhajiyamāno hārasampātabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti tathā vibhajituṃ 『『tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ soḷasavidhe desanāhārasampātādike hārasampāte. Katamo hārasampātabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 如果想要講述分類配對章節的導師應該說"其中什麼是教說分類配對"等語句，那麼為什麼要說"十六種分類首先"等呢？註釋中說"十六種分類首先"等偈頌，分類解釋章不採用，因為主題分散且思路考察被隔斷。而分類配對章則採用此偈頌，因為主題未分散。因此，爲了說明應該在分類配對章中回顧此偈頌並觀察其註釋，所以一定要說"十六種分類首先"等。在註釋書中－ 就像在精心準備的地面上撒下各色的珍珠花，又像在善巧工匠設計的金飾品上鑲嵌放射各種光芒的各類寶石，又像翻轉大地使人食用甘露，又像壓榨一由旬大的蜂蜜塊使人飲用甜美的汁液一樣，尊者大迦旃延引用各種經文，解釋十六種分類后，現在開始分類配對章，展示這些分類應用於同一經文。在開始時，在註釋章中－ "十六種分類首先，觀察方位后環顧四方； 以鉤勾住后，以三種方法註釋經文"－ 說了這個偈頌。因為分類解釋章不採用它，主題分散且思路考察被隔斷。分類解釋章只是用多處經文展示分類的區分。而分類配對章則採用它，因為是在同一經文中運用十六種分類，並在其後講述方法的形成。因此說"'十六種分類首先'這個偈頌的註釋應在何處觀察？在分類配對中"－ 這樣說。偈頌的意思在註釋解說中已經說過。問道："'十六…等…經文'，這個導師在註釋中說的偈頌，其註釋應在何處觀察？是應觀察在分類解釋開始時導師未解釋、在分類配對中回顧並解釋，還是應觀察在方法形成中回顧並解釋？"答："應觀察在分類配對中回顧並解釋。" 導師說應在分類配對中觀察此偈頌的註釋，該分類配對以教說分類配對等分為十六種，因為應問"其中什麼是分類配對、教說分類配對"，所以爲了以註釋的方式解說此經，我要解釋的這個作為分類配對的特殊註釋叫做教說分類配對，因此說了"其中什麼是教說分類配對"等。其中，在那包含教說分類配對等的十六種分類配對中，問"什麼叫做作為分類配對的特殊註釋教說分類配對"。

『『Arakkhitena cittena, micchādiṭṭhihatena ca;

Thinamiddhābhibhūtena, vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī』』ti. –

Sutte 『『arakkhitena cittenāti kiṃdesayatī』』ti pucchitvā 『『pamādaṃ desayatī』』tiādisaṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Gāthāttho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 52) vibhatto. Yojanattho pana arakkhitena cittena arakkhitacittasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa maccuno vasaṃ gacchati. Micchādiṭṭhihatena vipallāsena vipallāsasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa vasaṃ gacchati. Thinamiddhābhibhūtena sasaṅkhārikacittena kusītacittena taṃcittasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa kilesādimārassa vasaṃ gacchatīti.

『『Arakkhitena cittenā』ti padena desitaṃ taṃ pamādadhammajātaṃ kassa pada』』nti vattabbattā 『『taṃ maccuno pada』』nti vuttaṃ. 『『Arakkhitena cittenā』』ti iminā suttappadesena desito attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『micchādiṭṭhihatena cāti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『micchādiṭṭhihatena cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yena vipallāsena yadā anicce 『『nicca』』nti passati, tadā pavatto so vipallāso 『『micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāmā』』ti vuccati. 『『So pana vipallāso kiṃlakkhaṇo』』ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā 『『viparītaggāhalakkhaṇo vipallāso』』ti vuttaṃ.

Viparītaggāhalakkhaṇoti asubhādīnaṃyeva subhādiviparītaggāhalakkhaṇo vipallāso 『『vipallāsayatī』』ti kāritatthasambhavato. Kiṃ vipallāso viparītaggāhalakkhaṇo? So vipallāso saññaṃ vipallāsayati, cittampi vipallāsayati, diṭṭhimpi vipallāsayati. Iti tayo dhamme vipallāsayatīti vipallāsetabbānaṃ tividhattā vipallāsāpi tividhā honti. Tesu saññāvipallāso muduko dubbalo subhādivasena upaṭṭhitākāraggahaṇamattattā, cittavipallāso saññāvipallāsato balavā subhādivasena upaṭṭhahantānaṃ rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ subhādivasena sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā gahaṇato. Diṭṭhivipallāso saññāvipallāsacittavipallāsehi balavataro, yaṃ yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ subhādiākārena upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ sassatādivasena abhinivisitvā gahaṇato. Tasmā saññāvipallāso paṭhamaṃ vutto, tadanantaraṃ cittavipallāso, tadanantaraṃ diṭṭhivipallāso vutto. Vitthārato pana ekekassa subhasukhaattaniccaggahaṇavasena catubbidhattā dvādasavidhā honti.

Vipallāsā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katame vipallāsapavattiṭṭhānavisayā』』ti pucchitabbattā imāni attabhāvavatthūni vipallāsapavattiṭṭhānavisayānīti dassetuṃ 『『so kuhiṃ vipallāsayati catūsu attabhāvavatthūsū』』ti vuttaṃ. Catūsu rūpakāyavedanācittadhammasaṅkhātesu attabhāvavatthūsu so sabbo vipallāso saññācittadiṭṭhiyo vipallāsayati. 『『Kathaṃ samanupassantassa vipallāsayatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo puggalo rūpaṃ vā attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ vā attato samanupassati , attani rūpaṃ vā attato samanupassati. Rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ vā attato samanupassati, evaṃ tassa samanupassantassa puggalassa vipallāso rūpakāye saññācittadiṭṭhiyo vipallāsayati. Eseva nayo vedanādīsupi.

我來直譯這段巴利文： "以不守護之心，以邪見所害， 為昏沉睡眠所制，落入魔羅掌控。" 在經中問"以不守護之心是教說什麼？"后說"教說放逸"等這種特殊註釋叫做教說分類配對。偈頌的意思在註釋書中已經解釋。組合的意思是：以不守護之心，具有不守護心的人落入魔羅即死神的掌控。以邪見所害，具有顛倒的人落入魔羅的掌控。為昏沉睡眠所制，以有行心即懈怠心，具有這種心的人落入煩惱等魔羅的掌控。 因為應該說"以'以不守護之心'這句所教說的那放逸法是誰的足跡"，所以說"那是死神的足跡"。"以不守護之心"這經文所教說的意思已被導師解釋，也被我們所知，因為應該說"以'以邪見所害'這經文所教說的意思如何解釋"，所以說"以邪見所害"等。當以某種顛倒而見無常為"常"時，那時生起的那顛倒被稱為"邪見所害"。因為應問"那顛倒有什麼特相"，所以如此問后說"顛倒以相反執取為特相"。 "以相反執取為特相"是說顛倒以將不凈等執取為凈等相反之相為特相，因為有"使之顛倒"的使役義。顛倒以什麼為相反執取特相？那顛倒使想顛倒，也使心顛倒，也使見顛倒。如此使三法顛倒，因為被顛倒者有三種，所以顛倒也有三種。其中想顛倒最柔弱，因為只是以凈等方式領受現起的形相；心顛倒比想顛倒更強，因為對以凈等方式現起的色蘊等以凈等方式確定后執取；見顛倒比想顛倒和心顛倒更強，因為對任何以凈等行相現起的所緣都以常等方式深深執著。因此先說想顛倒，其後說心顛倒，再其後說見顛倒。詳細來說，因為每一種都以執取凈、樂、我、常四種方式，所以有十二種。 顛倒已被導師解釋，也被我們所知，因為應問"什麼是顛倒生起處的境"，爲了顯示這些自體事是顛倒生起處的境，所以說"它在哪裡使之顛倒？在四種自體事中"。在稱為色身、受、心、法的四種自體事中，那一切顛倒使想、心、見顛倒。因為應問"如何觀察時使之顛倒"，所以說"觀察色為我"等。某人觀察色為我，或觀察有色之我為我，或觀察我中之色為我，或觀察色中之我為我，如此觀察的那人的顛倒使色身中的想、心、見顛倒。對受等也是同樣的道理。

『『Tesu rūpakāyādīsu katamaṃ katamassa vipallāsassa vatthū』』ti pucchitabbattā evaṃ pavattamānassa vipallāsassa idaṃ imassa vatthūti vibhajituṃ 『『tattha rūpa』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu rūpādīsu catūsu paṭhamaṃ vipallāsavatthu rūpaṃ 『『asubhe subha』』nti evaṃ pavattamānassa vipallāsassa vatthu hotīti vibhajitvā gahetabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Evaṃ 『『asubhe subha』』ntiādippakārena vipallāsā catubbidhā bhavanti.

Idaṃ imassa vatthūti ācariyena vibhajitvā dassitā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『tesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ katame mūlakāraṇadhammā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dve dhammā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittassa saṃkilesā, taṇhā ca avijjā ca – ime dve dhammā vipallāsānaṃ mūlakāraṇabhūtā bhavanti.

『『Ime dve dhammā ekato vipallāsānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ kiṃ honti, udāhu visuṃ visu』』nti vattabbattā visuṃ visuṃ vibhajituṃ 『『taṇhānivuta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Avijjārahitā taṇhā nāma natthi, tasmā 『『taṇhāavijjānivuta』』nti vattabbanti? Na, taṇhāya sātisayapaccayattā. Sātisayāya hi taṇhāya asubhepi 『『subha』』nti, dukkhepi 『『sukha』』nti samanupassanti. 『『Taṇhā ca avijjā cā』』ti vuttattā 『『avijjānivuta』』nti vattabbaṃ, kasmā 『『diṭṭhinivuta』』nti vuttanti? Avijjāya diṭṭhi bhavatīti diṭṭhisīsena avijjaṃ gahetvā 『『diṭṭhinivuta』』nti vuttaṃ, avijjānivutanti attho gahetabbo. 『『Avijjānivuta』』nti vutte pana diṭṭhirahitā avijjāpi gahitā siyā, diṭṭhisahitāya hi avijjāya aniccepi 『『nicca』』nti, anattaniyepi 『『attā』』ti samanupassanti.

『『Kathaṃ taṇhāmūlako vipallāso pavatto, kathaṃ diṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlako vipallāso pavatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『tattha yo diṭṭhivipallāso』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu taṇhāmūlakadiṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlakesu. Diṭṭhivipallāsoti diṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlakavipallāso. Atītaṃ rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti adabbabhūtopi dabbabhūto viya vutto. Taṇhāvipallāsoti diṭṭhisahitataṇhāmūlako vipallāso anāgataṃrūpaṃ diṭṭhibhinandanavasena abhinandatīti. Evaṃ atītasamanupassanaanāgatābhinandanabhedena pavattiviseso daṭṭhabbo. 『『Cittassa saṃkileso taṇhāavijjāyeva dve dhammā na honti, atha kho dasa kilesāpi, kasmā dveyeva vuttā』』ti vattabbattā 『『dve dhammā cittassa upakkilesā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhā ca avijjā ca – ime dveyeva dhammā paramasāvajjassa vipallāsassa mūlakāraṇattā. Tāhi taṇhāavijjāhi visujjhantaṃ cittaṃ sabbehi kilesehi visujjhati, tasmā ca visesato cittassa upakkilesā hontīti dve dhammā vuttā. Na hi tāsu taṇhāavijjāsu arahattamaggena pahīnāsu koci saṃkileso appahīno nāma natthīti.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 因為應問"在這些色身等中，什麼是什麼顛倒的事"，爲了解釋如此生起的顛倒的這個是這個的事，所以說"其中色"等。其中，在那些色等四種中，首先顛倒事色是"在不凈中見凈"如此生起的顛倒的事，應該這樣分別理解。其餘的也是這個道理。如此以"在不凈中見凈"等方式，顛倒有四種。 這個是這個的事已被導師分別顯示，也被我們所知，因為應問"那些顛倒的什麼是根本原因法"，所以說"兩種法"等。心的污染，即貪愛和無明－這兩種法是顛倒的根本原因。 因為應說"這兩種法是一起作為顛倒的根本原因，還是分別"，爲了分別解釋所以說"為貪愛所蔽"等。沒有離開無明的貪愛，因此應說"為貪愛和無明所蔽"？不是，因為貪愛是特殊的因。因為以特殊的貪愛，在不凈中也見"凈"，在苦中也見"樂"。因為說"貪愛和無明"，應說"為無明所蔽"，為什麼說"為見所蔽"？因為由無明有見，所以以見為首攝取無明而說"為見所蔽"，應理解為"為無明所蔽"的意思。但如果說"為無明所蔽"，則可能包括無見的無明，因為以有見的無明，在無常中也見"常"，在非我所中也見"我"。 因為應說"如何生起以貪愛為根的顛倒，如何生起以有見無明為根的顛倒"，所以說"其中什麼是見顛倒"等。其中，在那些以貪愛為根和以有見無明為根中。見顛倒即以有見無明為根的顛倒。觀察過去色為我，雖非實體卻說如同實體。貪愛顛倒即以有見貪愛為根的顛倒，以見歡喜的方式歡喜未來色。如此應了知以觀察過去和歡喜未來的區別而有生起的差異。因為應說"心的污染不僅是貪愛和無明兩法，而是十種煩惱，為什麼只說兩種"，所以說"兩種法是心的隨煩惱"等。貪愛和無明－只說這兩種法，因為是最為過失的顛倒的根本原因。由那些貪愛和無明清凈的心從一切煩惱清凈，因此特別作為心的隨煩惱而說兩種法。因為當那些貪愛和無明被阿羅漢道斷除時，確實沒有任何未斷的污染。

『『Vuttappakārā taṇhāavijjā vuttappakārānaṃ vipallāsānaṃyeva mūlakāraṇaṃ honti kiṃ, udāhu sakalassa vaṭṭassāpi mūlakāraṇaṃ honti ki』』nti vattabbattā vuttappakārā taṇhāavijjā vuttappakārānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ honti yathā, evaṃ sakalassa vaṭṭassāpi mūlakāraṇaṃ hontīti dassetuṃ 『『tesa』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yesaṃ puggalānaṃ cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ, micchādiṭṭhihatañca hoti, tesaṃ puggalānaṃ. Yesaṃ avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ pubbakoṭi na paññāyati, tehi avijjānīvaraṇehi taṇhāsaṃyojanehi saṃsāre sandhāvantānaṃ saṃsarantānaṃ puggalānaṃ sakiṃ nirayaṃ māravasagamanena sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ tiracchānayoniṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ pettivisayaṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ asurakāyaṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ deve sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ manusse sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hotīti attho.

『『Micchādiṭṭhihatena cā』』ti suttappadesena desito attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『thinamiddhābhibhūtenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittassa viññāṇakkhandhassa yā akallatā akammaniyatā atthi, idaṃ akallattaṃ akammaniyattaṃ thinaṃ nāma. Yaṃ kāyassa līnattaṃ vedanādikkhandhattayalīnattaṃ atthi, idaṃ kāyassa līnattaṃ middhaṃ nāmāti thinamiddhasarūpameva vuttaṃ. Tehi thinamiddhehi cittassa abhibhūtabhāvādiko pana suviññeyyattā na vutto, avuttepi yesaṃ puggalānaṃ cittaṃ thinamiddhehi abhibhūtaṃ, tesaṃ puggalānaṃ tena cittena cittasīsena saṃyojanena saṃsāre māravasagamanena sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ pariyosānasabhāvo vitthāretvā gahetabbo.

『『Vasaṃ mārassa gacchatīti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto』』ti vattabbattā 『『vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kilesamārassāti kileso dānādipuññe māreti nivāretīti atthena māroti kilesamāro. Iminā kilesamāraṃ nissāya pavattattā abhisaṅkhāramārakhandhamāramaccumārā ca gahitā, ca-saddena vā gahitāti veditabbā. Sattamārassāti devaputtamārassa. Atha vā 『『devaputtamārassā』』ti avatvā 『『sattamārassā』』ti vuttattā yo yo rājacorādiko dānādīni vā issariyabhogādīni vā māreti, so so rājacorādikopi gahito, tasmā yassa kassaci sattamārassāti attho. Vasanti icchaṃ lobhaṃ adhippāyaṃ ruciṃ ākaṅkhaṃ āṇaṃ āṇattiṃ. Gacchatīti upagacchati upeti anuvattati anugacchati nātikkamatīti attho. 『『Kasmā vasaṃ gacchatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『so hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo satto arakkhitacittena ca micchādiṭṭhihatacittena ca thinamiddhābhibhūtacittena ca samannāgato hoti, so satto avijjānīvaraṇādīhi nivuto hutvā saṃsārābhimukho hi yasmā hoti, na visaṅkhārābhimukho, tasmā mārassa vasaṃ gacchatīti attho.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 因為應說"所說的貪愛和無明是所說的顛倒的根本原因，還是也是整個輪迴的根本原因"，爲了顯示所說的貪愛和無明如何是所說的根本原因，也是整個輪迴的根本原因，所以說"他們"等。其中，那些心不守護、為邪見所害的人們。那些為無明所障、為貪愛所繫，其前際不可知，被那些無明障和貪愛結縛在輪迴中奔走流轉的人們，有時因落入魔羅掌控而奔走流轉到地獄，有時奔走流轉到畜生界，有時奔走流轉到餓鬼界，有時奔走流轉到阿修羅界，有時奔走流轉到天界，有時奔走流轉到人界，這是其意思。 "以邪見所害"這經文所教說的意思已被導師解釋，也被我們所知，因為應說"'為昏沉睡眠所制'這經文所教說的意思如何解釋"，所以說"為昏沉睡眠所制"等。心即識蘊的不適業性、不堪任性，這種不適業性、不堪任性叫做昏沉。身的沉滯性、受等三蘊的沉滯性，這種身的沉滯性叫做睡眠，這只是說明昏沉睡眠的自性。但被那些昏沉睡眠制伏心的狀態等因易於理解而未說，雖未說，那些心被昏沉睡眠所制的人們，以那心，以心為首的結縛在輪迴中因落入魔羅掌控而奔走流轉的終極本質應詳細理解。 因為應說"'落入魔羅掌控'這經文所教說的意思如何解釋"，所以說"落入魔羅掌控"。其中，煩惱魔是說煩惱以阻礙佈施等功德的意義而成為魔，稱為煩惱魔。依此煩惱魔而有行魔、蘊魔、死魔也包括在內，或應知以"和"字包括。有情魔是說天子魔。或者，不說"天子魔"而說"有情魔"，因此包括任何阻礙佈施等或權力財富等的王賊等，所以意思是任何有情魔。掌控是意願、貪求、意向、喜好、期望、命令、指令。落入是趨向、前往、隨從、追隨、不超越的意思。因為應說"為什麼落入掌控"，所以說"因為他"等。那個具有不守護心、邪見所害心、為昏沉睡眠所制心的有情，那有情因為被無明障等所蔽而趨向輪迴，不趨向無為，所以落入魔羅掌控，這是其意思。

『『Arakkhitenātiādikassa yassa suttassa attho vibhatto, tena 『arakkhitenā』tiādikena suttena kittakāni saccāni desitānī』』tivattabbattā 『『imāni bhagavatā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Arakkhitenā』』tiādisuttena bhagavatā imāni dve saccāni desitāni dukkhaṃ, samudayo cāti. Kathaṃ desitāni? Abhidhammanissitāya kathāya ceva suttantanissitāya kathāya ca desitāni. Tāsu kathāsu abhidhammanissitāya kathāya desite sati 『『arakkhitena cittenā』』ti iminā padena arakkhitaṃ rattampi cittaṃ, arakkhitaṃ duṭṭhampi cittaṃ, arakkhitaṃ mūḷhampi cittaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ ñāpitaṃ. Tattha rattacittaṃ lobhasahagatacittuppādavasena aṭṭhavidhaṃ, duṭṭhacittaṃ paṭighasampayuttacittuppādavasena dubbidhaṃ, mūḷhacittaṃ momūhacittuppādavasena dubbidhanti veditabbaṃ. Imesañhi cittuppādānaṃ vasena yā cakkhundriyādīnaṃ agutti anārakkhā uppannā, tāya aguttiyā anārakkhāya cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ hoti phalūpacārenāti.

『『Micchādiṭṭhihatenā』』ti iminā padena micchādiṭṭhisaṃsaṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ diṭṭhisampayuttacittuppādavasena catubbidhanti veditabbaṃ. Tañhi micchādiṭṭhiyā saṃsaṭṭhabhāvena micchādiṭṭhivasānugatattā micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāmāti. 『『Thinamiddhābhibhūtenā』』ti iminā padena thinamiddhena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sasaṅkhārikacittuppādavasena pañcavidhanti veditabbaṃ. Tañhi thinamiddhena saṃsaṭṭhabhāvena thinamiddhavasānugatattā thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ nāmāti evaṃ ye dvādasākusalā cittuppādakaṇḍe 『『katame dhammā akusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye akusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī』』tiādinā (dha. sa. 365) vitthārato vattabbā, te dvādasākusalacittuppādā tīhi padehi bhagavatā desitāti veditabbā. 『『Mārassā』』ti padena pañca mārā gahitā. Tesu kilesamāro 『『cattāro āsavā, cattāro oghā, cattāro yogā, cattāro ganthā, cattāri upādānāni, aṭṭha nīvaraṇā, dasa kilesā』』ti (dha. sa. 1102 ādayo) desito. Abhisaṅkhāramāro pana 『『kusalā cetanā (vibha. 226) akusalā cetanā (vibha. 226) kusalaṃ kammaṃ akusalaṃ kamma』』ntiādinā desito. Khandhamāro pana 『『attabhāvo pañcakkhandhā』』tiādinā desito. Maccumāro pana 『『cuti cavanatā』』tiādinā (vibha. 193) desito. Evaṃ tāvettha abhidhammanissitāya kathāya desito attho daṭṭhabbo.

Suttantanissitāya pana kathāya desite sati 『『cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hoti anubyañjanaggāhī, yatvādhikaraṇamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharantaṃ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ, tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjati, na rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati…pe… sotindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… ghānindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… jivhindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… kāyindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… manindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī』』ti (ma. ni.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 因為應說"解釋了'以不守護'等經文的意思，以'以不守護'等經文教說了多少諦"，所以說"世尊以這些"等。以"以不守護"等經文世尊教說了這兩種諦，即苦和集。如何教說？以依阿毗達摩的說法和依經的說法而教說。在那些說法中，以依阿毗達摩的說法來教說時，以"以不守護之心"這句，世尊教說、顯示了不守護的貪心、不守護的瞋心、不守護的癡心。其中應知貪心依貪相應心生起而有八種，瞋心依瞋相應心生起而有二種，癡心依極癡心生起而有二種。因為依這些心生起而對眼根等有不防護、不守護生起，由那不防護、不守護，心成為不守護，這是以果來說因。 以"以邪見所害"這句教說了與邪見相應的心，應知它依邪見相應心生起而有四種。因為它以與邪見相應而隨順邪見的力量，所以叫做邪見所害。以"為昏沉睡眠所制"這句教說了與昏沉睡眠相應的心，應知它依有行心生起而有五種。因為它以與昏沉睡眠相應而隨順昏沉睡眠的力量，所以叫做為昏沉睡眠所制。如此，在不善心生起品中應詳細說"什麼法是不善？當不善心生起時"等的那十二種不善心生起，應知世尊以三句教說了那些十二種不善心生起。以"魔羅"這句包含了五種魔。其中煩惱魔以"四漏、四暴流、四軛、四結、四取、八蓋、十煩惱"等而教說。而行魔則以"善思、不善思、善業、不善業"等而教說。而蘊魔則以"自體即五蘊"等而教說。而死魔則以"死亡、死沒"等而教說。如此，首先應如此了知依阿毗達摩的說法所教說的意思。 而以依經的說法來教說時，"以眼見色后取相、取隨相，因為這樣住于不防護眼根，貪憂等惡不善法會流入，他不實行其防護，不守護眼根，不進入眼根的防護...乃至...不進入耳根的防護...不進入鼻根的防護...不進入舌根的防護...不進入身根的防護...不進入意根的防護"。

1.347) evaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena yaṃ chadvārikacittaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ chadvārikacittaṃ 『『arakkhitena cittenā』』ti iminā padena desitaṃ. Yā micchādiṭṭhiyo pubbantakappanavasena vā aparantakappanavasena vā pubbantāparantakappanavasena vā micchā abhinivisantassa ayoniso ummujjantassa 『『sassato loko』』ti vā 『『asassato loko』』ti vā 『『na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā』』ti vā uppannā, tāhi diṭṭhīhi vā, yā ca diṭṭhiyo 『『imā cattāro sassatavādā…pe… paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā』』ti brahmajālasuttādīsu (dī. ni.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 1.347.）如此以人為根本而說的六門之心，以"以不守護之心"這句教說了那六門之心。由於不如理作意而執著，或依前際分別，或依后際分別，或依前後際分別而生起的各種邪見，如"世界是常"或"世界是無常"或"如來死後不存在"等，以那些見，或如在《梵網經》等中的"這四常見...乃至...現法涅槃論"等見。

1.30 ādayo) vuttā, tāhi diṭṭhīhi vā sampayuttaṃ yaṃ cittaṃ 『『micchādiṭṭhihatena cā』』ti iminā padena desitaṃ.

『『Thinaṃ nāma cittassa akammaññatā, middhaṃ nāma vedanādikkhandhattayassa akammaññatā』』ti vā 『『thinaṃ anussāhasaṃsīdanaṃ, middhaṃ ussāhasattivighāto』』ti vā yāni thinamiddhāni vuttāni, tehi thinamiddhehi yaṃ cittaṃ abhibhūtaṃ ajjhotthaṭaṃ, taṃ cittaṃ 『『thinamiddhābhibhūtenā』』ti iminā padena desitaṃ.

『『Vaso nāma icchā lobho adhippāyo ruci ākaṅkhā āṇā āṇattī』』ti yo vaso vutto, so vaso 『『vasa』』nti iminā padena desito. 『『Pañca mārā – khandhamāro abhisaṅkhāramāro maccumāro devaputtamāro kilesamāro』』ti yo māro vutto, so māro 『『mārassā』』ti iminā desito. 『『Gacchati, upagacchati, upeti, anuvattati, anugacchati, nātikkamatī』』ti yo puggalo vutto, so puggalo 『『gacchatī』』ti iminā desitoti. Evaṃ desitesu dhammesu akusalā samudayasaccaṃ, 『『vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī』』ti iminā padena ye pañcupādānakkhandhe upādāya paññatto puggalo vutto, te pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccanti dve saccāni desitāni. 『『Kimatthāya dve saccāni desitānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tesaṃ bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ saccānaṃ pariññāya ca pahānāya ca 『『arakkhitenā』』tiādi dhammaṃ bhagavā deseti, tāni dve saccāni 『『arakkhitenā』』tiādikena ñāpetīti attho.

『『Tesu dvīsu saccesu kassa saccassa pariññāya, kassa saccassa pahānāya desetī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dukkhassa pariññāya, samudayassa pahānāyā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Pariññāpahānehi katamāni saccāni desitānī』』ti vattabbattā 『『yena cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yena arahattamaggena parijānāti, yena arahattamaggena pajahati ca, ayaṃ arahattamaggo maggasaccaṃ nāma. Yaṃ nibbānadhammaṃ ārabbha taṇhāya, avijjāya ca pahānaṃ jātaṃ, ayaṃ nibbānadhammo nirodho nirodhasaccaṃ nāmāti. Evaṃ cattāri saccāni bhagavatā desitāni.

『『Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ desitabhāvo kena viññātabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tesu catūsu saccesu samudayasaccena assādo gahito, dukkhasaccena ādīnavo gahito, maggasaccanirodhasaccehi nissaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, samudayappahānavasena sabbagatipajahanaṃ jātaṃ, sabbagatipajahanaṃ phalanti gahitaṃ. Yena rakkhitacittatādikena sabbagatipajahanaṃ jātaṃ, so rakkhitacittatādiko upāyoti gahito, arakkhitacittatādikassa paṭisedhanamukhena rakkhitacittatādikassa niyojanaṃ bhagavato āṇattīti gahitanti desanāhārena nānāsuttesu dassitā assādādayo 『『arakkhitenā』』tiādike ekasmiṃyeva sutte nīharitvā dassitā.

『『Assādādīnaṃ nīharitvā dassitabhāvo kena viññātabbo saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nānāsuttesu assādādayo nīharitvā dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhāravibhaṅgo nāma. Yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena ekasmiṃyeva sutte assādādayo nīharitvā dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti viseso daṭṭhabbo.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 1.30）等中所說的見，以那些見相應的心以"以邪見所害"這句而教說。 所說的"昏沉即是心的不堪任性，睡眠即是受等三蘊的不堪任性"或"昏沉是無精進沉沒，睡眠是精進力的損壞"等昏沉睡眠，被那些昏沉睡眠制伏覆蓋的心，那心以"為昏沉睡眠所制"這句而教說。 所說的"掌控即是意願、貪求、意向、喜好、期望、命令、指令"的掌控，那掌控以"掌控"這句而教說。所說的"五魔－蘊魔、行魔、死魔、天子魔、煩惱魔"的魔，那魔以"魔羅的"這句而教說。所說的"去、趨向、前往、隨從、追隨、不超越"的人，那人以"落入"這句而教說。如此在所教說的法中，不善是集諦，以"落入魔羅掌控"這句所說的依五取蘊而施設的人，那五取蘊是苦諦，如此教說了兩諦。因為應問"為什麼教說兩諦"，所以說"世尊為他們"等。世尊爲了遍知和斷除那兩諦而教說"以不守護"等法，以"以不守護"等顯示那兩諦，這是其意思。 因為應問"在那兩諦中，爲了遍知哪個諦，爲了斷除哪個諦而教說"，所以說"爲了遍知苦，爲了斷除集"。因為應說"以遍知和斷除教說了什麼諦"，所以說"以什麼"等。以什麼阿羅漢道遍知，以什麼阿羅漢道斷除，這阿羅漢道叫做道諦。緣于什麼涅槃法而生起貪愛和無明的斷除，這涅槃法即滅叫做滅諦。如此世尊教說了四諦。 因為應說"四諦被教說的狀態應由什麼了知"，所以說"因此說"等。在那四諦中，以集諦攝取味著，以苦諦攝取過患，以道諦和滅諦攝取出離，依斷除集而生起一切趣的斷除，一切趣的斷除被攝取為果。以什麼守護心等而生起一切趣的斷除，那守護心等被攝取為方法，通過制止不守護心等而勸導守護心等是世尊的教誡被攝取。如此以教說分類在各經中顯示的味著等，在"以不守護"等一經中引出顯示。 因為應說"引出顯示味著等的狀態應由什麼了知信受"，所以說"因此說"等。這裡，以什麼特殊註釋而在各經中引出顯示味著等，那特殊註釋叫做教說分類解釋。以什麼特殊註釋而在一經中引出顯示味著等，那特殊註釋叫做教說分類配對，應了知這個差別。

『『Ettakova desanāhārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto desanāhārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Ekekasmiṃyeva sutte assādādayo yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhārasampātena nīharitvā yathārahaṃ dassitā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahito.

Iti desanāhārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Vicayahārasampātavibhāvanā

我來直譯這段巴利文： 因為應說"只有這麼多的教說分類配對是完整的"，所以說"教說分類配對已被運用"。在每一經中，以作為特殊註釋的教說分類配對而引出並適當顯示味著等，那作為特殊註釋的教說分類配對已被運用，應適當確定並應用，這是所取的意思。 如此依能力所編寫的教說分類配對 解釋已完成。 但智者們...應取... 2. 審查分類配對解釋

1. Yena desanāhārasampātena assādādayo ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, so desanāhārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo vicayahārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo vicayo hārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati. Imesu dhammesu ayaṃ dhammo yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena vicayitabbo, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahārasampāto nāmāti niyametvā vibhajituṃ 『『tattha taṇhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Evaṃ desanāhārasampātaṃ dassetvā idāni vicayahārasampātaṃ dassento yasmā desanāhārapadatthavicayo vicayahāro, tasmā desanāhāre vipallāsahetubhāvena niddhāritāya taṇhāya kusalādivibhāgapavicayamukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ dassetuṃ 『tattha taṇhā duvidhā』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 53) –

Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ 『『arakkhitena cittenā』』tiādisuttatthe desanāhārasampātena saṃvaṇṇite akusaladhamme 『『taṇhā』』ti niddhāritā sabbataṇhā. Kusalāpīti catubhūmake kusale uddissa pavattā taṇhāpi. Akusalāpīti akusaladhamme uddissa pavattā taṇhāpīti duvidhā hotīti vicayitabbā. Tena vuttaṃ ṭīkāyaṃ – 『『kusaladhammārammaṇāti kusaladhamme uddissa pavattamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tesaṃ ārammaṇapaccayataṃ, idha 『kusalā dhammā』ti lokuttaradhammānampi adhippetattā』』ti.

『『Kusalā taṇhā kiṃgāminī, akusalā taṇhā kiṃ gāminī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『akusalā saṃsāragāminī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『katamo kusalākusalataṇhānaṃ viseso』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『akusalā saṃsāragāminī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Taṇhā nāma saṃsāragāminī hotu, kathaṃ apacayagāminī』』ti vattabbattā 『『pahānataṇhā』』ti vuttaṃ, pahānassa hetubhūtā taṇhā pahānataṇhāti attho, pahātabbataṇhaṃ āgamma yaṃ pahānaṃ pavattetabbaṃ, tena pavattetabbena pahānena apacayaṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti.

『『Kiṃ pana taṇhāyeva kusalākusalāti dubbidhā, udāhu aññopi kusalākusalāti dubbidho』』ti vattabbattā 『『mānopī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Katamo māno kusalo, katamo māno akusalo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yaṃ mānaṃ nissāya mānaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ māno kusalo. Yo pana māno dukkhaṃ nibbattayati, ayaṃ māno akusalo』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ mānaṃ…pe… kusaloti yaṃ mānaṃ nissāya upanissāya pahānaṃ pavattitaṃ, tena pahānena santāne uppajjanārahaṃ mānaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ upanissayapaccayabhūto māno phalūpacārena kusalo. Yo pana…pe… akusaloti yo pana māno parahiṃsanādivasena pavattamāno hutvā attano ca parassa ca dukkhaṃ nibbattayati, ayaṃ māno akusaloti vicayitvā veditabbo.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 53. 導師以教說分類配對解釋了味著等，我們也了知了，那教說分類配對是完整的，因為應問"什麼是審查分類配對"，所以說"其中什麼是審查分類配對"等。其中，在那些教說分類配對等十六種分類配對中，問什麼特殊註釋叫做審查分類配對。爲了確定並分別"在這些法中這個法應以什麼特殊註釋來審查，那特殊註釋叫做審查分類配對"，所以說"其中貪愛"等。在註釋書中說： "如此顯示了教說分類配對后，現在顯示審查分類配對，因為審查教說分類詞義是審查分類，所以爲了通過審查善等差別來顯示審查分類配對，而對在教說分類中確定為顛倒因的貪愛，開始說'其中貪愛二種'等。" 其中，其中即在那以教說分類配對註釋的"以不守護心"等經文義理中確定為"貪愛"的一切貪愛。善的也即是緣四地善而生起的貪愛。不善的也即是緣不善法而生起的貪愛，應審查為二種。因此在復注中說："緣善法為所緣是說僅緣善法而生起的意思，不是說它們是所緣緣，因為這裡'善法'也意指出世間法。" 因為應問"善貪愛導向什麼，不善貪愛導向什麼"，所以說"不善導向輪迴"等。或者，因為應問"什麼是善不善貪愛的差別"，所以說"不善導向輪迴"等。因為應說"貪愛確實導向輪迴，如何導向減損"，所以說"斷除貪愛"，作為斷除的因的貪愛叫做斷除貪愛的意思，即緣應斷除的貪愛而應轉起的斷除，由那應轉起的斷除而導向減損。 因為應說"是隻有貪愛為善不善二種，還是其他也有善不善二種"，所以說"慢也"等。因為應問"什麼慢是善的，什麼慢是不善的"，所以說"依止什麼慢而斷除慢，這慢是善的。而什麼慢產生苦，這慢是不善的"。其中，依止什麼慢...善的即依止、以什麼慢為親依止而轉起斷除，由那斷除而斷除應在相續中生起的慢，這作為親依止緣的慢以果來說因是善的。而什麼...不善的即什麼慢以傷害他人等方式而轉起，產生自己和他人的苦，這慢是不善的，應如此審查而了知。

『『Saṃsārāpacayagāminīsu tāsu taṇhāsu katamā apacayagāminī taṇhā kusalā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『kusalā』』ti vuttāya taṇhāya sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ 『『tattha yaṃ nekkhammasita』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu saṃsārāpacayagāminīsu taṇhābhūtāsu kusalākusalāsu. Ayaṃ taṇhā kusalāti sambandho. 『『Ariyā puggalā santaṃ āyatanaṃ yaṃ ariyaphaladhammaṃ sacchikatvā upasampajja viharanti, taṃ āyatanaṃ ariyaphaladhammaṃ ahaṃ kudāssu sacchikatvā viharissa』』nti patthayantassa tassa kulaputtassa tasmiṃ ariyaphale pihā uppajjati, pihāpaccayā yaṃ domanassaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ domanassaṃ 『『nekkhammasita』』nti vuccati. Ayaṃ ariyaphale pihāsaṅkhātā taṇhā kusalā anavajjā anavajjaariyaphaladhammaṃ uddissa pavattattāti vicayitabbaṃ.

『『Kathaṃ pavattā』』ti vattabbattā 『『rāgavirāgā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā rāgavirāgā cetovimutti pattabbā. Tadārammaṇā taṃ cetovimuttiṃ āgamma pavattā taṇhā kusalā anavajjā, yā avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti pattabbā, tadārammaṇā taṃ paññāvimuttiṃ āgamma pavattā taṇhā kusalā anavajjāti vicayitabbā. Tāya paññāvimuttiyā vasena bhagavatā –

『『Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro;

Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ;

Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe』』ti. (udā. 32; netti. 31, 65, 78) –

Gāthāyaṃ 『『sabbā duggatiyo jahe』』ti padaṃ vuttaṃ, 『『tassā paññāvimuttiyā yo pavicayo kātabbo, katamo so pavicayo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tassā ko pavicayo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassā paññāvimuttiyā ko pavicayoti ce puccheyya 『『aṭṭha maggaṅgāni – sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhī』』ti pavicayo veditabbo. 『『So pavicayo kattha daṭṭhabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so katthā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. So paññāvimuttiyā pavicayo kattha kasmiṃ dhamme daṭṭhabboti pucchati. Catutthe jhāne pāramitāya ukkaṃsagatāya catutthajjhānabhāvanāya so pavicayo daṭṭhabbo.

『『Catutthe jhāne pāramitāyā』』ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ 『『catutthe hi jhāne』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo so catutthajjhānalābhī puggalo catutthe jhāne parisuddhaṃ pariyodātaṃ anaṅgaṇaṃ vigatūpakkilesaṃ mudu kammaniyaṃ ṭhitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ, iti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ bhāvayati, so catutthajjhānalābhī puggalo tattha catutthe jhāne aṭṭhavidhaṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ adhigacchati. Katamaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ? Cha abhiññā, dve ca visese vā adhigacchatīti yojanā. Iddhividhādayo pañca, lokiyābhiññā ceva arahattamaggapaññā cāti cha abhiññā. Manomayiddhi ceva vipassanāñāṇañcāti dve ca visesā honti.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 因為應問"在那些導向輪迴和減損的貪愛中，什麼是導向減損的善貪愛"，爲了顯示說"善的"貪愛的自性，所以說"其中什麼出離所依"等。其中，即在那些導向輪迴和減損的善不善貪愛中。這貪愛是善的，這是關聯。"聖者們證得、成就、安住于寂靜處所即聖果法，我何時能證得、安住于那處所即聖果法"，如此發願的善男子對那聖果生起羨慕，緣于羨慕而生起的憂，這憂被稱為"出離所依"。這被稱為對聖果的羨慕的貪愛是善的、無過的，因為緣無過的聖果法而轉起，應如此審查。 因為應說"如何轉起"，所以說"離貪"等。應證得的離貪心解脫。緣那心解脫、依那心解脫而轉起的貪愛是善的、無過的，應證得的離無明慧解脫，緣那慧解脫、依那慧解脫而轉起的貪愛是善的、無過的，應如此審查。依那慧解脫，世尊在偈頌中說： "因此守護心者，以正思維為行處， 以正見為前導，了知生滅， 比丘克服昏沉睡眠，應斷一切惡趣。" 說了"應斷一切惡趣"這句，因為應問"對那慧解脫應作什麼審查，是什麼審查"，所以說"對它什麼審查"等。如果問對那慧解脫是什麼審查，應知審查是"八道支－正見、正思維、正語、正業、正命、正精進、正念、正定"。因為應問"那審查應在何處見"，所以說"它在何處"等。問那慧解脫的審查應在何處、在什麼法中見。在第四禪圓滿、達到最上、修習第四禪中應見那審查。 爲了解釋說"在第四禪圓滿"的意義，所以說"因為在第四禪"等。那獲得第四禪的人在第四禪中修習清凈、明凈、無瑕、離隨煩惱、柔軟、適業、住立、達不動，如是具足八支的心，那獲得第四禪的人在那第四禪中證得八種明行。什麼是八種？即證得六神通和兩種殊勝，這是結構。神變等五種，世間神通和阿羅漢道慧為六神通。意所成神通和觀智為兩種殊勝。

『『Taṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ kuto parisuddhaṃ…pe… kuto āneñjappatta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『taṃ cittaṃ yato parisuddha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ cittaṃ yato upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvato parisuddhaṃ, tato upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvato pariyodātaṃ hoti. Sukhādīnaṃ paccayaghātena yato vītarāgādianaṅgaṇabhāvato anaṅgaṇaṃ, tato vītarāgādianaṅgaṇabhāvato vigatūpakkilesaṃ. Yato subhāvitabhāvato mudu, tato subhāvitabhāvato kammaniyaṃ. Yato parisuddhādīsu ṭhitabhāvato ṭhitaṃ, tato parisuddhādīsu ṭhitabhāvato āneñjappattaṃ hotītipi yojanā yuttā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) yugaḷato āgatattā. Saddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāobhāsehi pariggahitabhāvato āneñjappattaṃ. Saddhāya hi pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe assaddhiye na iñjati na calati, vīriyena pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe kosajje na iñjati, satiyā pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe pamāde na iñjati, samādhinā pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe uddhacce na iñjati, paññāya pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhāya avijjāya na iñjati, obhāsagataṃ cittaṃ kilesandhakāre na iñjati. Iti imehi chahi dhammehi pariggahitaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ āneñjappattaṃ hoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattā catutthajjhānacittaṃ channaṃ abhiññāñāṇānañca manomayiddhivipassanāñāṇānañca adhigamūpāyo hoti, tasmā so paññāvimuttiparicayo catutthajjhāne daṭṭhabboyevāti saṅkhepattho. Vitthārato pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) 『『tattha upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvenā』』tiādinā vā 『『aparo nayo』』tiādinā vā vuttoyevāti amhehi na vutto.

『『Yesaṃ rāgādiaṅgaṇānaṃ abhāvena anaṅgaṇaṃ, yesaṃ abhijjhādiupakkilesānaṃ abhāvena vigatūpakkilesaṃ, yāya cittassa ṭhitiyā abhāvena ṭhitaṃ, iñjanāya abhāvena āneñjappattaṃ, te rāgādiaṅgaṇādayo katamāya pakkhā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha aṅgaṇā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu rāgādiaṅgaṇādīsu aṅgaṇā ca rāgādiaṅgaṇā ca upakkilesā abhijjhādiupakkilesā ca santi, tadubhayaṃ rāgādiaṅgaṇaabhijjhādiupakkilesadvayaṃ taṇhāpakkho rāgādiaṅgaṇānaṃ taṇhāsabhāvattā, abhijjhādiupakkilesānañca taṇhāya anulomattā. Yā iñjanā phandanā yā ca cittassa aṭṭhiti anavaṭṭhānaṃ atthi, ayaṃ iñjanā aṭṭhiti diṭṭhipakkho iñjanāya ca aṭṭhitiyā ca micchābhinivesahetubhāvatoti pavicayo kātabbo.

『『Kiṃ pana catutthajjhānacittaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattāyeva channaṃ abhiññāñāṇānañca manomayiddhivipassanāñāṇānañca adhigamūpāyo hotī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『cattāri indriyānī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Tassa catutthajjhānalābhino, dukkhindriyaṃ domanassindriyaṃ sukhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ iti cattārindriyāni catutthajjhāne nirujjhanti, tassa catutthajjhānalābhino upekkhindriyaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ bhavati, tasmāpi catutthajjhānacittaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhigamūpāyo hoti, so ca adhigamūpāyabhāvo ciṇṇavasībhāvasseva bhaveyya, kathaṃ catutthajjhānamattalābhino ciṇṇavasībhāvo siyā』』ti vattabbattā so catutthajjhānalābhī catutthajjhāneyeva aṭṭhatvā arūpasamāpattiyopi evaṃ katvā nibbatteti bhāveti, tasmā ciṇṇavasībhāvo hotīti dassetuṃ 『『so uparimaṃ samāpatti』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) vitthārato vutto, tasmā yojanamattaṃ karissāma.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 因為應問"那第四禪心從何處清凈...乃至...從何處達不動"，所以說"那心從何處清凈"等。那心從何處即從具足舍念清凈而清凈，從那具足舍念清凈而明凈。從何處即從斷除樂等因而離貪等無瑕的狀態而無瑕，從那離貪等無瑕的狀態而離隨煩惱。從何處即從善修習的狀態而柔軟，從那善修習的狀態而適業。從何處即從住立於清凈等的狀態而住立，從那住立於清凈等的狀態而達不動，這樣的結構也適合，因為在註釋書中是成對出現的。因為被信、精進、念、定、慧、光明所攝持而達不動。因為被信攝持的心對不信這對立面不動不搖，被精進攝持的心對懈怠這對立面不動，被念攝持的心對放逸這對立面不動，被定攝持的心對掉舉這對立面不動，被慧攝持的心對無明這對立面不動，得光明的心對煩惱黑暗不動。如此被這六法攝持的第四禪心達到不動。如此因為具足八支，第四禪心成為證得六神通智和意所成神通、觀智的方法，因此那慧解脫的審查應該在第四禪中見，這是略義。但詳細的在註釋書中以"其中以具足舍念清凈"等或以"另一方法"等而說了，所以我們不說。 因為應問"由於什麼貪等瑕垢的不存在而無瑕，由於什麼貪求等隨煩惱的不存在而離隨煩惱，由於什麼心的住立的不存在而住立，由於什麼動搖的不存在而達不動，那些貪等瑕垢等是什麼分"，所以說"其中瑕垢"等。其中，在那些貪等瑕垢等中，有瑕垢即貪等瑕垢和隨煩惱即貪求等隨煩惱，那兩者即貪等瑕垢和貪求等隨煩惱二者是愛分，因為貪等瑕垢是愛的自性，貪求等隨煩惱是隨順愛。有動搖即震動和心的不住立即不安住，這動搖和不住立是見分，因為動搖和不住立是邪執著的因，應如此審查。 因為應問"第四禪心是否僅因具足八支而成為證得六神通智和意所成神通、觀智的方法"，所以說"四根"。"那獲得第四禪者的苦根、憂根、樂根、喜根這四根在第四禪中滅盡，那獲得第四禪者的舍根還存在，因此也由此第四禪心成為所說種類的八智的證得方法，那成為證得方法是對已修習自在者的，如何僅獲得第四禪者會有修習自在"，因為應這樣說，爲了顯示那獲得第四禪者不僅住于第四禪而且也如此生起、修習無色定，因此成為修習自在，所以說"他上更高的定"等。其意義在註釋書中詳細說了，因此我們只作結構。

So rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānalābhī yogāvacaro rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamāpattito uparimaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃsantato santatarato manasi karoti. Yathāvuttaṃ uparimaṃ samāpattiṃ santato manasi karoto tassa catutthajjhānalābhino yogāvacarassa catutthajjhāne saññā saññāpadhānā samāpatti oḷārikā viya hutvā saṇṭhahati, paṭighasaññā ca ukkaṇṭhā anabhirati hutvā saṇṭhahati, so yathāvuttena vidhinā manasi karonto yogāvacaro sabbaso niravasesato rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā 『『ākāsaṃ ananta』』nti manasi katvā pavattamānaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Rūpasaññā rūpāvacarasaññā pañcavidhaabhiññābhinīhāro hoti. Nānattasaññā nānārammaṇesu vokāro akusalo pavattati. Evaṃ rūpāvacarajjhāne ādīnavadassī hutvā tā rūpasaññānānattasaññāyo ārammaṇe samatikkamati, assa yogāvacarassa paṭighasaññā ca abbhatthaṃ gacchati. Evaṃ iminā vuttanayena samatikkamena samāhitassa, santavuttinā arūpāvacarasamādhinā samāhitassa yogāvacarassa obhāso rūpāvacarajjhānobhāso antaradhāyati. Rūpānaṃ kasiṇarūpānaṃ jhānacakkhunā dassanañca antaradhāyatīti yojanā.

『『Yena samādhinā samāhitassa, samāhitassa obhāso ca rūpānaṃ dassanañca antaradhāyati, so samādhi kittakehi aṅgehi samannāgato, kathaṃ paccavekkhitabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so samādhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. So samādhīti yena rūpārūpāvacarasamādhinā samāhito, so duvidhopi samādhi anabhijjhābyāpādavīriyārambhehi tīhi upakārakaṅgehi ca passaddhisatīhi dvīhi parikkhāraṅgehi ca avikkhittena ekena sabhāvaṅgena ca chahi aṅgehi samannāgatoti paccavekkhitabbo punappunaṃ cintetabbo sallakkhetabbo . 『『Kathaṃ kattha paccavekkhitabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『anabhijjhāsahagataṃ me mānasaṃ sabbaloke』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Tesu chasu aṅgesu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā』』ti pucchitabbattā ettako samatho, ettakā vipassanāti vibhajituṃ 『『tattha yañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

讓我為您翻譯這段巴利文： 那位獲得色界第四禪的瑜伽行者，從色界第四禪定上升至空無邊處定，如實地專注。如上所述，當他專注于更高的禪定時，對於這位獲得第四禪的瑜伽行者來說，第四禪中的想和想為主的定顯得粗重，對於色法的想變得厭倦和不樂。他按照上述方法修習，完全超越一切色想，滅除對礙想，不作意種種想，專注于"虛空無邊"，證得並安住于空無邊處定。色想即是色界想，是五種神通的基礎。種種想是對不同所緣的不善轉向。如此見到色界禪的過患后，他超越這些色想和種種想的所緣，這位瑜伽行者的對礙想也消失。如此依所說方法超越而得定者，以寂靜行相的無色界定而得定的瑜伽行者，色界禪的光明消失。以及以禪眼見到的色法和遍處色也消失。 "對於以何種定而得定者，光明和見色都消失，這種定具有幾種因素，應當如何觀察？"因為有此問題，故說"此定"等。此定，即以色界、無色界定而得定，這兩種定都具足貪慾、嗔恚、精進等三種輔助因素，以及輕安、念等兩種資具因素，以及不散亂的一個自性因素，共六種因素，應當如此觀察、反覆思維、分別。因為有"應當如何在何處觀察？"的問題，故說"我的心於一切世間離貪"等。因為有"在這六種因素中，止有多少，觀有多少？"的問題，爲了分別"止有這麼多，觀有這麼多"，故說"其中"等。

1. 『『Paññāvimuttī』』ti vuttassa arahattaphalassa samādhissa samathavipassanāsaṅkhātā pubbabhāgapaṭipadā samādhimukhena ācariyena vibhattā, 『『tāya paṭipadāya labhitabbo arahattaphalasamādhi kittakena veditabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo』』ti vuttaṃ. Yo arahattaphalasamādhi samathavipassanāpaṭipadāya labhitabbo, so arahattaphalasamādhi pañcavidhena ñāṇadassanena veditabbo.

『『Kathaṃ pañcavidhañāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『ayaṃ samādhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi appitappitakkhaṇe phalasamāpattisukhattā paccuppannasukho hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa assa arahato paccattameva ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi āyatiṃ samāpajjitabbassa arahattaphalasamādhissa upanissayapaccayattā āyatiṃ sukhavipāko hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi kilesaarīhi ārakattā ariyo, kāmāmisavaṭṭāmisalokāmisānaṃ abhāvato nirāmiso ca hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi akāpurisehi sammāsambuddhapaccekabuddhasāvakabuddhehi sevitabbattā akāpurisasevito hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi aṅgasantakilesadarathasantattā santo ceva divasampi samāpajjantassa atittikaraṇato paṇīto ca paṭippassaddhakilesena arahatā puggalena laddhattā paṭippassaddhiladdho ca arahattamaggasamādhisaṅkhātena ekodibhāvena adhigatattā ekodibhāvādhigato ca sasaṅkhārena sapayogena adhigatattā, nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhamme niggayha anadhigatattā, aññe kilese vāretvā anadhigatattā, arahattamaggaphalabhāveneva pavattattā nasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa assa arahato paccattameva ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavatīti pañcavidhena ñāṇadassanena so arahattaphalasamādhi vicayitvā veditabboti.

『『Paccuppannasukhādīsu samādhīsu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yo ca samādhi paccuppannasukho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Samatho, vipassanāti ca arahattaphalasamathavipassanāva adhippetā, na pubbabhāgasamathavipassanāti. Arahattaphalasamādhi pañcavidhena veditabboti ācariyena vutto, 『『tassa arahattaphalasamādhissa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyaṃ vutto samādhi kittakena veditabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo』』ti vuttaṃ. Yo rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamādhi pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyaṃ vutto, so rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamādhi pañcavidhena pakārena veditabbo. 『『Katamenā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『pītipharaṇatā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā hoti. Paṭhamadutiyatatiyajjhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā hoti. Catutthajjhāne cetopariyapaññā cetopharaṇatā hoti. Dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā hoti. Jhānaṃ paccavekkhitvā pavattamānapaññā paccavekkhaṇānimittaṃ hoti. Iti pañcavidhena paññāpakārena vicayitvā veditabboti. 『『Tesu pañcavidhesu pakāresu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yo ca pītipharaṇo』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 54.所說的"慧解脫"阿羅漢果定的止觀前分行道，已由導師從定的角度分別解說。因為可能會問"以此行道所證得的阿羅漢果定應當以多少來了知"，故說"此定應以五種方式了知"。那通過止觀行道所證得的阿羅漢果定，應當以五種智見來了知。 因為可能會問"如何現起五種智見"，故說"此定"等。此阿羅漢果定在每次入定時因為具有果定之樂而成為現在樂，如此觀察時，這位阿羅漢的智見於自身現起。此阿羅漢果定因為是未來將要入定的阿羅漢果定的親依止緣，所以成為未來樂報，如此觀察時......現起。此阿羅漢果定因為遠離煩惱敵故為聖，因為沒有欲味、輪迴味、世間味故為無味，如此觀察時......現起。此阿羅漢果定因為被正等覺者、辟支佛、聲聞佛等非下劣人所修習，故為非下劣人所修習，如此觀察時......現起。此阿羅漢果定因為支分寂靜、煩惱熱惱寂靜故為寂靜，因為即使整天入定也不會厭足故為勝妙，因為是已斷煩惱的阿羅漢所證得故為得寂靜，因為是由阿羅漢道定所稱的專一性所證得故為證得專一性，因為是以有行有功用而證得，而不是通過鎮伏障礙法如五蓋等而證得，也不是通過遮止其他煩惱而證得，而是以阿羅漢道果的方式運作故為非有行鎮伏遮止而得，如此觀察時，這位阿羅漢的智見於自身現起。應當以這五種智見來審察了知此阿羅漢果定。 因為可能會問"在現在樂等諸定中，止有多少，觀有多少"，故說"其中凡是現在樂的定"等。這裡所說的止與觀是指阿羅漢果的止觀，而不是前分止觀。導師說阿羅漢果定應以五種方式了知，因為可能會問"在其前分行道中所說的定應當以多少來了知"，故說"此定應以五種方式了知"。在前分行道中所說的色界第四禪定，應當以五種方式來了知。因為可能會問"以何種方式"，故說"遍滿喜"等。第一、第二禪中的慧是喜遍滿。第一、第二、第三禪中的慧是樂遍滿。第四禪中他心智慧是心遍滿。天眼智慧是光明遍滿。觀察禪定時生起的慧是觀察相。應當以這五種慧的方式來審察了知。因為可能會問"在這五種方式中，止有多少，觀有多少"，故說"其中凡是喜遍滿"等。

1. Sampayogavasena samādhi ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『kathaṃ ārammaṇavasena vibhatto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dasa kasiṇāyatanānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Imehi dasahi ārammaṇehi kasiṇehipi samādhi vicinitvā veditabboti. 『『Tesu dasasu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Kasiṇanti ca kasiṇamaṇḍalampi parikammampi paṭibhāganimittampi tasmiṃ paṭibhāganimitte uppannajjhānampi vuccati, idha pana sasampayuttajjhānameva adhippetaṃ.

『『Kiṃ pana vuttappakāro samādhiyeva samathavipassanāya yojetabbo, udāhu aññopi yojetabbo』』ti vattabbattā satipaṭṭhānādipubbabhāgapaṭipadābhedena anekabhedabhinno niravaseso ariyamaggopi vicayitvā yojetabboti dassetuṃ 『『evaṃ sabbo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti mayā vuttanayena vuttanayānusārena sabbo niravaseso satipaṭṭhānādipubbabhāgapaṭipadābhedena anekabhedabhinno ariyo maggo yojetabbo. Kathaṃ? Yena yena anabhijjhādiākārena paccuppannasukhatādiākārena samādhi mayā vutto, tena tena anabhijjhādiākārena paccuppannasukhatādiākārena yo yo ariyamaggo samathena yojetuṃ sambhavati, so so ariyamaggo samathena vicayitvā yojayitabbo. Yo yo ariyamaggo vipassanāya yojetuṃ sambhavati, so so ariyamaggo vipassanāya yojayitvā yojayitabboti attho gahetabbo.

『『Yehi samathādhiṭṭhānehi vipassanādhammehi yojayitabbo, te samathādhiṭṭhānā vipassanādhammā katamehi dhammehi saṅgahitā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『te tīhi dhammehi saṅgahitā aniccatāya dukkhatāya anattatāyā』』ti vuttaṃ, te samathādhiṭṭhānā vipassanādhammā 『『aniccatāya paññāya dukkhatāya paññāya anattatāya paññāyā』』ti tīhi anupassanādhammehi saṅgahitā gaṇhitāti attho. Aniccatādinā sahacaraṇato anupassanāpaññāpi 『『aniccatā dukkhatā anattatā』』ti vuccati.

『『Yo yogī puggalo samathādhiṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno hoti, so yogī puggalo kiṃ bhāvayatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Samathavipassanādīni bhāvayamāno puggalo rāgacarito dosacarito mohacaritoti tividho, 『『tattha katamo puggalo katamena katamena vimokkhamukhena niyyāti, katamāyaṃ katamāyaṃ sikkhanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ pajahanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ anupagacchanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ parijānanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ pavāhento, katamaṃ katamaṃ niddhunanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ vamento, katamaṃ katamaṃ nibbāpento, katamaṃ katamaṃ uppāṭento, katamaṃ katamaṃ vijaṭento niyyātī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『rāgacarito puggalo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana 『『idāni yesaṃ puggalānaṃ yattha sikkhantānaṃ visesato niyyānamukhāni, yesañca kilesānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāni tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni, tehi saddhiṃ tāni dassetuṃ 『rāgacarito』tiādi vutta』』nti vuttaṃ. Tassatthopi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vuttoyeva.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 55.導師已從相應的角度分別解說定，我們也已了知，因為可能會問"如何從所緣的角度分別"，故說"十遍處"等。應當以這十種遍處所緣來審察了知定。因為可能會問"在這十種中，止有多少，觀有多少"，故說"其中凡是"等。遍處一詞可以指遍處圓盤、預備修習、似相、以及在似相中所生起的禪那，但這裡特指具有相應的禪那。 因為可能會問"是否只有上述的定才應當與止觀相應，還是其他的也應當相應"，爲了顯示應當審察並使念處等前分行道差別的一切聖道無餘地相應，故說"如是一切"等。其中"如是"即是按照我所說的方法，依所說的方式，應當使一切無餘的、以念處等前分行道差別而有多種差別的聖道相應。如何相應？我所說的定具有離貪等行相、現在樂等行相，以這些離貪等行相、現在樂等行相，凡是能與止相應的聖道，都應當審察后使之與止相應。凡是能與觀相應的聖道，都應當審察后使之與觀相應，應當如此理解其義。 因為可能會問"應當以哪些止的立足處和觀法相應，這些止的立足處和觀法包含在哪些法中"，故說"它們包含在三法中，即無常性、苦性、無我性"。這些止的立足處和觀法為"無常性之慧、苦性之慧、無我性之慧"這三種隨觀法所包含所攝，這是其義。因為與無常等相隨行，所以隨觀慧也稱為"無常性、苦性、無我性"。 因為可能會問"修習止為立足處的觀的瑜伽行者在修習什麼"，故說"他在修習止觀"等。 修習止觀等的人有貪行者、瞋行者、癡行者三種，因為可能會問"其中何種人以何種解脫門出離，修學何種，斷何種，不趨向何種，遍知何種，推離何種，抖落何種，嘔吐何種，息滅何種，拔除何種，解開何種而出離"，故說"貪行者"等。在註釋書中說："現在爲了顯示對於那些人在修學時特別作為出離之門，以及對於那些煩惱作為對治的三種解脫門，故說'貪行者'等。"其義在註釋書中已說。

『『Kasmā tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayanto tayo khandhe bhāvayatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『tattha suññatavimokkhamukha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu tīsu vimokkhamukhesu. Suññatavimokkhamukhaṃ paññākkhandho anattānupassanāya paññāpadhānattā. Animittavimokkhamukhaṃ samādhikkhandho aniccānupassanāya samādhipadhānattā. Appaṇihitavimokkhamukhaṃ sīlakkhandho dukkhānupassanāya sīlapadhānattā. Iti tīhi vimokkhamukhehi tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ saṅgahitattā tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayanto so yogī puggalo tayo khandhe bhāvayatiyevāti paññāpadhānādibhāvo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vutto. Tayo khandhe bhāvayanto ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvayati. 『『Kasmā bhāvayatī』』ti vattabbattā kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ 『『tattha yā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ ariyaaṭṭhaṅgikamaggabhāvo vibhatto, amhehi ca jānito, 『『kathaṃ samathavipassanābhāvo jānitabbo』』ti vattabbattā tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ samathavipassanābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ 『『tattha sīlakkhandho cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Yo yogī puggalo samathavipassanaṃ bhāveti, tassa yogino puggalassa bhavaṅgāni katamaṃ bhāvanaṃ gacchantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『yo samathavipassanaṃ bhāveti, tassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyo ca cittañca dve bhavaṅgāni upapattibhavassa aṅgāni bhāvanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ gacchanti. Sīlañca samādhi ca dve padāni dve pādā bhavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā bhāvanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ gacchanti.

『『Kathaṃ gacchantī』』ti vattabbattā 『『so hoti bhikkhū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhāvitakāyoti bhāvito kāyo kāyaābhisamācāriko, kāyasaṃvaro vā yena bhikkhunāti bhāvitakāyo. Sesesupi esa nayo. Kāye kāyaābhisamācārike, kāyasaṃvare vā bhāviyamāne sati sammākammanto, sammāvāyāmo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti kāyasamācārasīlattā. Sīle vācāsaṃvaraājīvasaṃvaravasena pavatte sīle bhāviyamāne sati sammāvācā ca sammāājīvo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti vācādisaṃvarasīlattā. Citte cittasaṃvaravasena pavatte citte bhāviyamāne sati sammāsati ca sammāsamādhi ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti cittasaṃvarasīlattā. Paññāya bhāviyamānāya sati sammādiṭṭhi ca sammāsaṅkappo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti samānattā, upakārakattā ca. Sammāsaṅkappena hi punappunaṃ saṅkappantassa paññā vaḍḍhatīti.

『『Sammākammanto ca sammāvāyāmo ca dve dhammā kāyavaseneva vibhattā vicetabbā kiṃ, udāhu cittavasena vibhattā vicetabbā ki』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yo ca sammākammanto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyasucaritacetanābhūto yo ca sammākammanto, taṃsahito yo ca sammāvāyāmo siyā kāyiko, viratibhūto yo ca sammākammanto, taṃsahito yo ca sammāvāyāmo siyā cetasiko, tattha tesu kāyikacetasikabhūtesu sammākammantasammāvāyāmesu yo sammākammantasammāvāyāmo kāyasaṅgaho, so sammākammantasammāvāyāmo kāye kāyaābhisamācārike, kāyasaṃvare vā bhāvite sati bhāvanaṃ gacchati. Yo sammākammantasammāvāyāmo cittasaṅgaho, so sammākammantasammāvāyāmo citte cittasaṃvare bhāvite sati bhāvanaṃ gacchatīti yojanā.

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 因為可能會問"為什麼修習三解脫門就是修習三蘊"，故說"其中空解脫門"等。其中，在這三種解脫門中，空解脫門是慧蘊，因為無我隨觀以慧為主。無相解脫門是定蘊，因為無常隨觀以定為主。無愿解脫門是戒蘊，因為苦隨觀以戒為主。如此，因為三解脫門包含三蘊，所以修習三解脫門的瑜伽行者就是在修習三蘊。以慧為主等的意義在註釋書中已說。修習三蘊就是修習八聖道。因為可能會問"為什麼要修習"，爲了顯示原因，故說"其中凡是"等。 三蘊就是八聖道的關係已經分別，我們也已了知，因為可能會問"如何了知止觀的性質"，爲了顯示三蘊的止觀性質，故說"其中戒蘊"等。因為可能會問"修習止觀的瑜伽行者的有支趣向何種修習"，故說"凡是修習止觀者"等。身和心這兩個有支，即是生有的支分，趣向增長。戒和定這兩個足處，即是趣向滅有的道路，趣向增長。 因為可能會問"如何趣向"，故說"他是比丘"等。已修習身者，即是已修習身的威儀，或已由比丘修習身律儀。其餘專案也是同樣的方法。當修習身的威儀或身律儀時，正業和正精進這兩法趣向增長，因為是身行的戒。當修習語律儀和命律儀的戒時，正語和正命這兩法趣向增長，因為是語等律儀的戒。當修習心律儀的心時，正念和正定這兩法趣向增長，因為是心律儀的戒。當修習慧時，正見和正思維這兩法趣向增長，因為性質相同且有助益。因為以正思維反覆思維使慧增長。 因為可能會問"正業和正精進這兩法，是應當從身的角度分別審察，還是從心的角度分別審察"，故說"其中凡是正業"等。善身行思所成的正業，與之相應的正精進可能是身的，離惡所成的正業，與之相應的正精進可能是心的。其中，在這些屬於身和心的正業正精進中，凡是包含在身中的正業正精進，在修習身的威儀或身律儀時趣向增長。凡是包含在心中的正業正精進，在修習心律儀時趣向增長，這是其關聯。

『『Samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayanto so yogī puggalo kittakaṃ adhigamaṃ gacchatī』』ti vicayitabbattā 『『so samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayanto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañcavidhaṃ ariyamaggādhigamaṃ dassetuṃ 『『khippādhigamo cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vibhatto. 『『Kena katamo adhigamo hotī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha samathenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

1. 『『Arakkhitena cittenā』』tiādisuttattho veneyyānaṃ arahattaphalavimuttimukhena ācariyena vicayito vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『desakassa dasabalasamannāgatassa dasa balāni kathaṃ vicayitabbānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yo desayati, so dasabalasamannāgato』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –

『『Iti mahāthero 『tasmā rakkhitacittassā』ti gāthāya vasena arahattaphalavimuttimukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ niddisanto, desanākusalatāya anekehi suttappadesehi tassā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhāvanāvisesānaṃ bhāvanānisaṃsānañca vibhajanavasena nānappakārato vicayahāraṃ dassetvā, idāni dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānampi vasena taṃ dassetuṃ 『tattha yo desayatī』tiādimāhā』』ti –

Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayantesu sāsitabbasāsakesu. Dasabalasamannāgato yo desako satthā 『『arakkhitena cittenā』』tiādidhammaṃ deseti, ovādena sāvake na visaṃvādayati, tassa desakassa satthuno dasa balāni vicayitabbānīti yojanā.

『『Kinti desetī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so tividha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tesu dasasu tathāgatabalesu ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ nāma, 『『taṃ balaṃ kathaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『so tathā ovadito』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Attho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 56) vutto, pāḷivasenapi pākaṭo. 『『Etaṃ ṭhānaṃ na vijjatī』』ti jānanaṃ aṭṭhānañāṇaṃ nāma, 『『etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī』』ti jānanaṃ ṭhānañāṇaṃ nāmāti ṭhānāṭṭhānānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti adhippāyo veditabbo. (1)

1. Ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kathaṃ sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyatathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『iti ṭhānāṭṭhānatā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Ayaṃ paṭipadā imasmiṃ bhave gāminī, ayaṃ paṭipadā imasmiṃ bhave gāminī』』ti sabbattha gāminiyā paṭipadāya jānanañāṇaṃ sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ nāmāti sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti adhippāyo. (2)

2. Sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kathaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『iti sabbatthagāminī paṭipadā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Ayaṃ dhātu ca ayaṃ dhātu ca anekadhātu nāma, ayaṃ dhātu ca ayaṃ dhātu ca nānādhātu nāmā』』ti anekadhātunānādhātūnaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ nāmāti anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (3)

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 因為應當審察"修習止觀的瑜伽行者獲得多少證悟"，故說"他修習止觀"等。爲了顯示五種聖道的證悟，故說"速證等"。其義在註釋書中已分別。因為可能會問"以何得何種證悟"，故說"其中以止"等。 56.導師已從阿羅漢果解脫門的角度為所化眾生審察分別"不護心"等經文的含義，我們也已了知。因為可能會問"具足十力的說法者的十力應當如何審察"，故說"其中凡是說法者，他具足十力"等。在註釋書中說： "如此大長老依據'因此護心者'偈頌，從阿羅漢果解脫門的角度指出審察方法的運用，以說法善巧通過許多經文段落，從分別其前分行道的修習殊勝和修習功德的角度，以種種方式顯示審察方法后，現在爲了依十如來力顯示它，故說'其中凡是說法者'等。" 其中"其中"指在這些應當教導的修習止觀者中。具足十力的說法者大師宣說"不護心"等法，以教誡不欺誑弟子，應當審察這位說法大師的十力，這是其關聯。 因為可能會問"如何說法"，故說"他三種"等。在這十種如來力中，是處非處智是第一如來力，因為可能會問"此力應當如何審察"，故說"如是受教導"等。其義在註釋書中已說，依經文也很明顯。知道"此非處不存在"稱為非處智，知道"此處存在"稱為是處智，應當理解其意趣是：應當審察知道是處非處的智慧為第一如來力。(1) 57.導師已審察分別是處非處智第一如來力，我們也已了知。因為可能會問"如何審察一切趣行智第二如來力"，故說"如是是處非處"。知道"此行導向此有，此行導向此有"等一切趣向的行道的智慧稱為一切趣行智，應當理解其意趣是：應當審察一切趣行智為第二如來力。(2) 59.導師已審察一切趣行智第二如來力，我們也已了知。因為可能會問"如何審察種種界智第三如來力"，故說"如是一切趣行"等。知道"此界與此界為多界，此界與此界為異界"的智慧稱為種種界智，應當審察種種界智為第三如來力。(3)

1. Anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kathaṃ sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『iti anekadhātunānādhātukassa lokassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Ime sattā evaṃ adhimuttā, ime sattā evaṃ adhimuttā』』ti sattānaṃ adhimuccanānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (4)

Sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kathaṃ vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『iti te yathādhimuttā cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Evaṃ adhimuttānaṃ sattānaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ kaṇhaṃ, imassa kaṇhakammassa ayaṃ vipāko. Idaṃ kammaṃ sukkaṃ, imassa sukkakammassa ayaṃ vipāko』』ti evamādīhi vipākānaṃ nānattajānanañāṇaṃ vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti.

1. Vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kathaṃ jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『iti tathā samādinnāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Evaṃ samādinnānaṃ kammānaṃ jhānānaṃ vimokkhānaṃ samādhīnaṃ samāpattīnaṃ ayaṃ saṃkileso, idaṃ vodānaṃ, idaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ saṃkilissati, evaṃ vodāyati, evaṃ vuṭṭhahatī』』ti jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānānaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ nāmāti jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (5)

2. Jhānānaṃ saṃkilesañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, 『『kathaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『iti tasseva samādhissā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Evaṃ ādhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyāni, evaṃ akampiyaṭṭhena balānī』』ti jānanena saha 『『ayaṃ mudindriyo, ayaṃ majjhindriyo, ayaṃ tikkhindriyo』』ti parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyabalānaṃ amudumajjhādhimattatājānanañāṇaṃamudumajjhādhimattatājānanañāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (6)

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 60.導師已審察分別種種界智第三如來力，我們也已了知。因為可能會問"如何審察眾生種種勝解智第四如來力"，故說"如是對於具有種種界異界的世間"等。知道"這些眾生如是勝解，這些眾生如是勝解"等眾生勝解的智慧稱為眾生種種勝解智，應當審察眾生種種勝解智為第四如來力。(4) 導師已分別眾生種種勝解智第四如來力，我們也已了知。因為可能會問"如何審察異熟差別智第五如來力"，故說"如是他們如其勝解"等。"如是勝解的眾生，此業為黑，此黑業有此異熟。此業為白，此白業有此異熟"等，如是知道諸異熟差別的智慧稱為異熟差別智，應當審察異熟差別智為第五如來力。 62.導師已審察異熟差別智第五如來力，我們也已了知。因為可能會問"如何審察禪定雜染清凈出離智第六如來力"，故說"如是于所受持"等。"如是受持諸業、諸禪、諸解脫、諸定、諸等至，此為雜染，此為清凈，此為出離，如是雜染，如是清凈，如是出離"，對於禪定的雜染清凈出離的無障礙智慧稱為禪定雜染清凈出離智，應當審察禪定雜染清凈出離智為第六如來力。(5) 63.導師已審察禪定雜染智第六如來力。因為可能會問"如何審察根上下差別智第七如來力"，故說"如是於此定"等。以"如是以增上義為根，如是以不動義為力"的知見，連同"此為鈍根，此為中根，此為利根"等，知道他眾生他補特伽羅諸根勢力的鈍中利性的智慧稱為根上下差別智，應當審察根上下差別智為第七如來力。(6)

1. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, 『『kathaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbaṃ, kathaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ navamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『iti tattha yaṃ anekavihita』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Ekaṃ jāti』』ntiādinā jātivasena vā 『『evaṃnāmo』』tiādinā nāmagottavaṇṇāhārasukhadukkhapaṭisaṃvedanāya pariyantavasena vā sākārassa sauddesassa anekavihitapubbenivāsassa taṃtaṃbhavassa asesato jānanañāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ nāmāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (7)

Cavamānaupapajjamānahīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇasugataduggatayathākammūpagānaṃ sattānaṃ asesato cutūpapātānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ nāmāti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ navamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (8-9)

Pubbenivāsādiaṭṭhamanavamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ, 『『kathaṃ sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ dasamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『iti tattha ya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Bodhimūle saṃkilesamāranihanaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppannaṃ, idaṃ kilesamāranihanaṃ ñāṇaṃ sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ nāmāti sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ dasamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho. Vitthārato pana pāḷito ca aṭṭhakathāto ca yatipotānampi pākaṭo bhaveyyāti maññitvā na dassito.(10)

『『Ettakova vicayahārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto vicayo hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Ye ye suttappadesatthā vuttā, te te suttappadesatthā yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vicayahārasampātena vicayitabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vicayahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti vicayahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Yuttihārasampātavibhāvanā

我來為您翻譯這段巴利文： 64.導師已審察根上下智第七如來力。因為可能會問"如何審察宿住隨念智第八如來力，如何審察天眼智第九如來力"，故說"如是其中凡是種種"等。以"一生"等方式依生，或以"如是名"等方式依名姓、色相、飲食、苦樂受等的邊際，完全了知具相、具說明的種種宿住中的各個有的智慧稱為宿住隨念智，應當審察宿住隨念智為第八如來力。(7) 完全了知眾生的死時、生時、低劣、高貴、美麗、醜陋、善趣、惡趣、隨業而行的死生的智慧稱為天眼智，應當審察天眼智為第九如來力。(8-9) 導師已審察分別宿住等第八第九如來力。因為可能會問"如何審察一切漏盡智第十如來力"，故說"如是其中凡是"等。在菩提樹下生起降伏雜染魔的智慧，這降伏煩惱魔的智慧稱為一切漏盡智，應當審察一切漏盡智為第十如來力，這是其略義。至於詳細的意義，認為從經文和註釋中對於修行者也很明顯，所以不顯示。(10) 因為可能會說"僅此審察方法的運用是否完整"，故說"已運用審察方法"。凡是已說的經文段落的義理，應當以作為特殊解釋的審察方法來審察，應當理解其義

1. Yena yena vicayahārasampātena suttappadesatthā ācariyena vicayitabbā, amhehi ca ñātā, so vicayahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo yuttihārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『evaṃ nānānayehi vicayahārasampātaṃ vitthāretvā idāni yuttihārasampātādīni dassetuṃ 『tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto』tiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 65) vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihārasampāto nāmāti pucchati, pucchitvā yasmiṃ suttappadese vuttānaṃ atthānaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo, taṃ suttappadesaṃ nīharituṃ –

『『Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro;

Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ;

Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe』』ti. (udā. 32; netti. 31, 78) –

Vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ tasmā arakkhitacittassa māravasānugatattā satisaṃvaraindriyasaṃvarādivasena bhikkhu rakkhitacitto assa bhaveyya, tasmā kāmavitakkādimicchāsaṅkappagocarassa māravasānugatattā nekkhammasaṅkappādivasena bhikkhu sammāsaṅkappagocaro assa bhaveyya, tasmā micchādiṭṭhihatacittassa māravasānugatattā yonisomanasikārena bhikkhu udayabbayaṃ ñatvāna sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro assa bhaveyya, tasmā thinamiddhena hatacittassa māravasānugatattā vīriyavasena bhikkhu thinamiddhābhibhū assa bhaveyya, tādiso bhikkhu sabbā duggatiyo jahe jahissatīti attho veditabbo.

『『Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ kathaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaro bhavissatīti attho yujjati eva, no na yujjati. Micchāsaṅkappānampi jahitattā sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro hutvā viharanto udayabbayaṃ paṭivijjhissatīti attho yujjati sammādiṭṭhipurekkhārassa udayabbayānupassanāsambhavato. Udayabbayaṃ paṭivijjhanto sabbā duggatiyo jahissatīti attho yujjati udayabbayānupassanānukkamena ariyamaggasambhavato. Sabbā duggatiyo jahanto sabbāni duggativinipātabhayāni samatikkamissatīti attho yujjati sabbesaṃ duggativinipātabhayānaṃ anuppajjanato.

『『Ettakova yuttihārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto yuttihārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena yuttihārasampātena suttappadesatthānaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo , so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto yuttihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti yuttihārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Padaṭṭhānahārasampātavibhāvanā

因為可能會問"如何趣向"，故說"他是比丘"等。已修習身者，即已修習身的威儀行為,或者是已修習身律儀的比丘。其他也是同樣的道理。當身的威儀行為或身律儀被修習時,正業和正精進這兩法趣向增長,因為是身行為戒。當以語律儀和命律儀運作的戒被修習時,正語和正命這兩法趣向增長,因為是語等律儀戒。當以心律儀運作的心被修習時,正念和正定這兩法趣向增長,因為是心律儀戒。當慧被修習時,正見和正思惟這兩法趣向增長,因為性質相同,且能互相資助。因為通過正思惟反覆思惟,慧得以增長。 因為可能會問"正業和正精進這兩法是僅從身的角度來分別審察,還是從心的角度來分別審察",故說"其中凡是正業"等。作為身善行思的正業,以及與之相應的正精進可能是身的;作為離的正業,以及與之相應的正精進可能是心的。其中,在這些作為身和心的正業正精進中,凡是屬於身的正業正精進,當身的威儀行為或身律儀被修習時,就趣向增長。凡是屬於心的正業正精進,當心律儀被修習時,就趣向增長。應當如此理解。

---

這是一段巴利語復注，我嘗試翻譯如下：

"論師應當通過各種探究方法來分析經文的含義，我們也已經瞭解了這些，探究方法的運用已經完整了，因為需要問'什麼是理趣方法的運用'，所以說'其中什麼是理趣方法的運用'等。

在義注中說：'這樣通過各種方法詳述了探究方法的運用后，現在爲了顯示理趣方法等的運用，開始說"其中什麼是理趣方法的運用"等'。

'其中'指在這十六種方法運用中，問什麼是稱為理趣方法運用的特殊註釋。在問完后，爲了引出需要考察其合理性的經文段落，引用了：

'因此具護心者，正思惟為境， 以正見為先，知生滅（之理）， 比丘克服昏沉睡眠，當斷一切惡趣。'

在這首偈頌中，應知其義為：因為不護心者落入魔力，所以比丘應當以念護、根護等方式成為護心者；因為以欲尋等邪思惟為境者落入魔力，所以比丘應當以出離思惟等方式成為正思惟為境者；因為為邪見所害者落入魔力，所以比丘應當以如理作意了知生滅而以正見為先；因為為昏沉睡眠所害者落入魔力，所以比丘應當以精進方式克服昏沉睡眠；這樣的比丘將斷除一切惡趣。

因為需要說明'如何考察這首偈頌的合理性'，所以說'因此具護心者'等。護心者將以正思惟為境，這個意思是合理的，不是不合理的。因為已斷除邪思惟，住于以正見為先者將通達生滅，這個意思是合理的，因為以正見為先者能夠生起生滅觀。通達生滅者將斷除一切惡趣，這個意思是合理的，因為依照生滅觀的次第能夠生起聖道。斷除一切惡趣者將超越一切惡趣墮落的怖畏，這個意思是合理的，因為一切惡趣墮落的怖畏都不會生起。

因為需要說'理趣方法的運用僅此而已完整了'，所以說'已確定了理趣方法的運用'。應理解其義為：通過作為特殊註釋的理趣方法來考察經文段落意義的合理性，這種作為特殊註釋的理趣方法的運用已經適當地確定和運用了。

如是理趣方法運用的 解釋隨能力而作已竟。

智者們當...等...領受。

1. 立足點方法運用的解釋"

2. Yena yena yuttihārasampātena suttappadesatthānaṃ yuttibhāvo ācariyena vibhāvito, amhehi ca ñāto, so yuttihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo padaṭṭhānahārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto』』ti pucchati.

Pucchitvā yasmiṃ suttappadese vuttāni padaṭṭhānāni nīharitāni, taṃ suttappadesaṃ nīharituṃ 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaroti gāthā』』ti vuttā. Gāthāttho vuttova. 『『Katame gāthātthā katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā indriyesu guttadvāratā tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma sucaritapāripūriyā āsannakāraṇattā. 『『Sammāsaṅkappagocaro』』ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā nekkhammasaṅkappādayo sammāsaṅkappā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma kāmacchandaādinīvaraṇavikkhambhanassa āsannakāraṇattā. 『『Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro』』ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā kammassakatāsammādiṭṭhi ca sappaccayanāmarūpadassanasammādiṭṭhi ca vipassanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma aniccānupassanādīnaṃ visesakāraṇattā. 『『Ñatvāna udayabbaya』』nti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā udayabbayānupassanāpaññā dassanabhūmiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma paṭhamamaggādhigamassa āsannakāraṇattā. 『『Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū』』ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma āsannakāraṇattā. 『『Sabbā duggatiyo jahe』』ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā pahātabbajahanabhāvanāya ariyamaggabhāvanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma pahātabbappahānena ariyamaggabhāvanāpāripūrisambhavato.

『『Ettakova padaṭṭhānahārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena padaṭṭhānahārasampātabhūtena suttappadesatthāni padaṭṭhānāni nīharitāni, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto padaṭṭhānahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti padaṭṭhānahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Lakkhaṇahārasampātavibhāvanā

這是一段巴利語復注，我嘗試翻譯如下：

"論師已通過各種理趣方法分析了**段落意義的合理性，我們也已瞭解了，理趣方法的運用已完整。因為需要問'什麼是立足點方法的運用'，所以問'其中什麼是立足點方法的運用'。

問完后，爲了引出在**段落中闡明的立足點，引用了'因此具護心者，正思惟為境'等偈頌。偈頌的意義已經說過。因為需要問'什麼是偈頌意義，什麼是這些法的立足點'，所以說'因此具護心者'等。

'因此具護心者'段落的意義是：在諸根中守護門戶，作為三種善行的立足點，因為是善行圓滿的近因。

'正思惟為境'段落的意義是：出離思惟等正思惟，作為止觀的立足點，因為是遣除欲貪等蓋障的近因。

'以正見為先'段落的意義是：業報正見和具因緣名色見的正見，作為觀的立足點，因為是無常隨觀等的特殊原因。

'知生滅'段落的意義是：生滅隨觀智，作為見地的立足點，因為是證得初道的近因。

'克服昏沉睡眠'段落的意義是：克服昏沉睡眠，作為精進的立足點，因為是近因。

'斷除一切惡趣'段落的意義是：應斷除的斷除和聖道的修習，作為立足點，因為通過斷除應斷者能圓滿聖道的修習。

因為需要說'立足點方法的運用僅此而已完整了'，所以說'已確定了立足點方法的運用'。應理解其義為：通過作為特殊註釋的立足點方法運用，在**段落中引出立足點，這種作為特殊註釋的立足點方法已經適當地確定和運用了。

如是立足點方法運用的 解釋隨能力而作已竟。

智者們當...等...領受。

1. 特相方法運用的解釋"

2. Yena yena padaṭṭhānahārasampātena suttappadesatthāni padaṭṭhānāni ācariyena niddhāritāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, so padaṭṭhānahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo lakkhaṇahārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.

『『Katamehi suttatthehi samānalakkhaṇā katame dhammā gahitā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro』』ti suttappadesena vuttaṃ idaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ satindriyaṃ gahitaṃ, satindriye gahite saddhādipañcindriyāni gahitāni bhavanti indriyaṭṭhena samānalakkhaṇattā. 『『Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro』』ti suttappadesena vuttā sammādiṭṭhi gahitā, sammādiṭṭhiyā gahitāya ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo gahito bhavati. Taṃ kissa hetūti kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Pucchitvā kāraṇamāha 『『sammādiṭṭhito hī』』tiādinā. Sammādiṭṭhihetuto sammāsaṅkappo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsaṅkappato sammāvācā hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvācāto sammākammanto hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammākammantato sammāājīvo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāājīvato sammāvāyāmo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvāyāmato sammāsatihi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsatito sammāsamādhi hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsamādhito sammāvimutti hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvimuttito sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo gahito bhavatīti.

『『Ettakova lakkhaṇahārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto lakkhaṇo hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena lakkhaṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā samānalakkhaṇena gahitā bhavanti, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto lakkhaṇahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahitoti.

Iti lakkhaṇahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Catubyūhahārasampātavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 67. 由於導師已經確定了根據各種立足關係串聯法而得出的經文段落的立足處，我們也已經瞭解了這些，那麼這立足關係串聯法已經完整。因為需要詢問"什麼是特相關係串聯法"，所以說了"其中什麼是特相關係串聯法"等。其中在那十六種從說法關係串聯法等開始的串聯法中，詢問什麼樣的解釋特質稱為特相關係串聯法。 因為需要詢問"與哪些經文義理具有相同特相的是哪些法"，所以說了"因此"等。由"因此守護心者，正思維所行"這段經文所說的這個守護，已經攝取了念根，當攝取了念根，由於以根的意義具有相同特相，也就攝取了信等五根。由"以正見為前導"這段經文所說的正見已被攝取，當正見被攝取時，八支聖道就被攝取了。問"這是什麼原因"來詢問理由。詢問后以"因為從正見"等來說明理由。因為正思維確實是從正見因而生起，所以；因為正語確實是從正思維而生起，所以；因為正業確實是從正語而生起，所以；因為正命確實是從正業而生起，所以；因為正精進確實是從正命而生起，所以；因為正念確實是從正精進而生起，所以；因為正定確實是從正念而生起，所以；因為正解脫確實是從正定而生起，所以；因為正解脫知見確實是從正解脫而生起，所以；八支聖道就被攝取了。 因為應當說"特相關係串聯法僅此而完整"，所以說"特相關係串聯法已被運用"。通過各種作為解釋特質的特相關係串聯法，經文段落的義理以相同特相被攝取，那些作為解釋特質的特相關係串聯法已被運用，應當適當地確定和運用，這就是所獲得的意義。 如是在特相關係串聯法中依據能力所作的 解釋已經完成。 智者們則...等...應當領受。 6. 四展開關係串聯法解釋

1. Yena yena lakkhaṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā samānalakkhaṇena gahitā, so lakkhaṇahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo catubyūhahārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo catubyūho hārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso catubyūhahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.

『『Katamasmiṃ sutte katame nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhayo niddhāritā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』ti suttappadese 『『rakkhīyate rakkhita』』nti niruttiṃ 『『paripālīyatī』』ti iminā pariyāyena dasseti, itisaddassa ādyatthattā 『『cintetīti cittaṃ, attano santānaṃ cinotīti cittaṃ, paccayehi citanti cittaṃ, cittavicittaṭṭhena cittaṃ, cittakaraṇaṭṭhena cittaṃ, rakkhitaṃ cittaṃ yassāti rakkhitacitto. Sammā saṅkappetīti sammāsaṅkappo, gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gocaro viyāti gocaro, sammāsaṅkappo gocaro assāti sammāsaṅkappagocaro. Sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhi, sammādiṭṭhi purekkhāro assāti sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro. Jānātīti ñatvāna. Udayo ca vayo ca udayabbayaṃ. Thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ, abhibhavatīti abhibhū, thinamiddhaṃ abhibhūti thinamiddhābhibhū. Bhikkhatīti bhikkhū』』ti niruttipi nīharitā. Tenāha – 『『iti-saddo ādyattho』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 68). Esā vuttappakārā paññatti nirutti nāmāti nīharitā.

Idha suttappadese bhagavato ko adhippāyoti ce puccheyya, ye sappurisā sabbāhi duggatīhi parimuccitukāmā bhavissanti, te sappurisā dhammacārino rakkhitacittā bhavissantīti ayaṃ adhippāyo. Ettha 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』tiādisuttappadese bhagavato adhippāyoti nīharitabbo.

『『Katamaṃ nidāna』』nti ce puccheyya, kokāliko sāriputtamoggallānesu theresu cittaṃ arakkhitvā padosayitvā mahāpadumaniraye yasmā upapanno, yasmā bhagavā ca satiārakkhena samannāgato sabbā duggatiyo jahati, tasmā ca sabbā duggatiyo jahitukāmo bhikkhu sappuriso rakkhitacitto assa bhaveyyāti nidānaṃ nīharitabbaṃ.

『『Katamo pubbāparasandhī』』ti ce puccheyya, suttamhi 『『satiyā cittaṃ rakkhitabba』』nti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tena pubbavacanena ayaṃ 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassa…pe… sabbā duggatiyo jahe』』ti suttappadeso anusandhi saṃsandati sametīti pubbaparānusandhi niddhāritabboti.

『『Ettakova catubyūhahārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto catubyūho hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena catubyūhahārasampātena nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhi niddhāritabbo, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto catubyūhahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti catubyūhahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Āvaṭṭahārasampātavibhāvanā

2. 通過各種特相關係串聯法以相同特相攝取了經文段落的義理，那特相關係串聯法已經完整。因為需要詢問"什麼是四展開關係串聯法"，所以說了"其中什麼是四展開關係串聯法"等。其中在那十六種從說法關係串聯法等開始的串聯法中，詢問什麼樣的解釋特質稱為四展開關係串聯法。 因為需要詢問"在哪一經中確定了哪些詞源、意趣、因緣和前後相續"，所以說了"因此"等。在"因此守護心者"這段經文中，以"被守護為守護"這樣的詞源，用"被保護"這個同義詞來顯示。由於"iti"(如是)一詞表示開始的意思，"思考為心，積集自相續為心，由諸緣積集為心，以心的種種為心，以造作心的意義為心，其心被守護者為守護心者。正確思維為正思維，牛在此處行走為行處，如同行處為行處，正思維是他的行處為正思維行處者。正確看見為正見，正見是他的前導為以正見為前導者。了知為已知。生起和滅盡為生滅。昏沉和睡眠為昏沉睡眠，克服為勝，克服昏沉睡眠為昏沉睡眠的克服者。乞食為比丘"，這樣的詞源也被引出。因此說"iti(如是)字表示開始義"。這些所說的概念稱為詞源，如是被引出。 若問在此經文段落中世尊有何意趣，那就是：凡是希望從一切惡趣解脫的善人們，那些善人們將成為法行者、守護心者，這就是意趣。在此"因此守護心者"等經文段落中，應當引出這是世尊的意趣。 若問"什麼是因緣"，應當這樣引出因緣：因為拘迦利迦(Kokālika)對舍利弗、目犍連長老們不守護心、生起嗔恨而投生大紅蓮地獄，又因為世尊具足唸的防護而舍離一切惡趣，所以希望舍離一切惡趣的比丘善人應當成為守護心者。 若問"什麼是前後相續"，應當這樣確定前後相續：在經中所說"應以念守護心"這句話，以這前面的話，與這"因此守護心者...乃至...舍離一切惡趣"的經文段落相續、相應、相合。 因為應當說"四展開關係串聯法僅此而完整"，所以說"四展開關係串聯法已被運用"。通過各種作為解釋特質的四展開關係串聯法而應當確定詞源、意趣、因緣和前後相續，那些作為解釋特質的四展開關係串聯法已被運用，應當適當地確定和運用，這就是所應獲得的意義。 如是在四展開關係串聯法中依據能力所作的 解釋已經完成。 智者們則...等...應當領受。

3. 轉起關係串聯法解釋

4. Yena yena catubyūhahārasampātena nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhayo vibhattā, so catubyūhahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo āvaṭṭahārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo āvaṭṭo hārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.

『『Katame suttatthā kathaṃ āvaṭṭetabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Nekkhammasaṅkappasaṅkhātasammāsaṅkappabahulo kasiṇādivasena, avihiṃsāsaṅkappasaṅkhātasammāsaṅkappabahulo mettādivasena adhigatāya cittekaggatāya cittaṃ ṭhapento saṃkilesato rakkhitacitto nāma hoti, 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro』』ti iminā rakkhitacitte vutte sati yā ekaggatā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ ekaggatā samatho. 『『Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro』』ti iminā sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāre vutte sati yā paññā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ paññā vipassanā. 『『Ñatvāna udayabbaya』』nti iminā udayabbayañāṇasamannāgate vutte sati yā dukkhaparijānanā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ dukkhaparijānanā dukkhapariññā. 『『Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū』』ti iminā puggalādhiṭṭhānena yaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ samudayappahānaṃ. 『『Sammā duggatiyo jahe』』ti iminā yo sabbaduggatijahanasaṅkhāto anuppādo vutto, so ayaṃ anuppādo nirodho. Iti dukkhapariññāya pariññetabbaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, samudayappahānena pahātabbaṃ samudayasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, nirodhena nirodhasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, samathavipassanāhi maggasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbanti imāni cattāri saccāni āvaṭṭetabbānīti.

『『Ettakova āvaṭṭo hārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto āvaṭṭo hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena āvaṭṭahārasampātena samathādayo āvaṭṭetabbā , so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto āvaṭṭahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti āvaṭṭahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Vibhattihārasampātavibhāvanā

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 通過任何一種四部陣列攝取的連結，解釋了前後連續性的起源，那個四部陣列攝取是圓滿的，因為被問及"什麼是旋轉攝取"，所以說"在此，什麼是旋轉攝取"等。在此詢問什麼樣的描述特徵是旋轉攝取的名稱。 "應該如何旋轉經文的意義"被問及時，所以說"因此"等。以出離意圖、被稱為正確意圖為主，以遍處等為依據；以不加害意圖、被稱為正確意圖為主，以慈等為依據，獲得心一境性，安置心，名為守護心。當說"對於守護心，正確意圖的範圍"時，應該旋轉的這個一境性是奢摩他。當說"以正見為前導"時，應該旋轉的這個智慧是毗缽舍那。當說"了知生滅"時，應該旋轉的這個苦的了知是苦遍知。當說"比丘超越昏沉睡眠"時，以個人為依託所說的超越昏沉睡眠是煩惱的捨棄。當說"正確地捨棄一切惡趣"時，所說的不生起是滅。 如此，通過苦遍知應該旋轉苦諦，通過煩惱捨棄應該旋轉集諦，通過滅應該旋轉滅諦，通過奢摩他和毗缽舍那應該旋轉道諦，這四諦應該被旋轉。 因為應該說"旋轉攝取就是這麼多"，所以說"旋轉攝取是被聯繫的"。通過任何一種作為描述特徵的旋轉攝取，奢摩他等應該被旋轉，那個作為描述特徵的旋轉攝取應該按照適當的方式被確定和聯繫，這個意義應該被把握。 如此，在旋轉攝取中，根據力量的適當性所作的 闡釋已完成。 學者們應該……把握。 語素攝取闡釋

1. Yena yena āvaṭṭahārasampātena suttatthā āvaṭṭetabbā, so āvaṭṭahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo vibhattihārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo vibhattihārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.

『『Katame suttatthā kattha vibhattā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā 『『tasmā…pe… gocaro』』ti gāthā vuttā, tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ vutto kusalapakkho dhammo kusalapakkhena dhammena satisaṃvaro dhammo niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo, akusalapakkhena dhammena niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo.

Kathaṃ? 『『Rakkhitacittassā』』ti padena vutto kusalapakkho satisaṃvaro dhammo 『『cakkhudvārasaṃvaro…pe… manodvārasaṃvaro』』ti chabbidhena kusalapakkhena dhammena niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo. 『『Sammāsaṅkappo』』ti padena vutto kusalapakkho sammāsaṅkappo dhammo 『『nekkhammasaṅkappo abyāpāda-saṅkappo avihiṃsāsaṅkappo』』ti tividhena kusalapakkhena dhammena vibhajitabbo. 『『Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro』』ti padena vuttā kusalapakkhā dhammajāti 『『dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāya ñāṇaṃ, pubbante ñāṇaṃ, aparante ñāṇaṃ, pubbantāparante ñāṇaṃ, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu ñāṇa』』nti (dha. sa. 1063) aṭṭhavidhena kusalapakkhena dhammena vibhajitabbā. 『『Ñatvāna udayabbaya』』nti padena vuttaṃ kusalapakkhaudayabbayañāṇaṃ dhammajātaṃ paññāsavidhena udayabbayañāṇena kusalapakkhena vibhajitabbaṃ. 『『Thinamiddhābhibhū』』ti padena vuttaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ kusalapakkhaṃ dhammajātaṃ 『『sotāpattimaggābhibhavanaṃ sakadāgāmimaggābhibhavanaṃ anāgāmimaggābhibhavanaṃ arahattamaggābhibhavana』』nti catubbidhena kusalapakkhena vibhajitabbaṃ.

Satisaṃvaro kusalapakkho 『『lokiyo satisaṃvaro, lokuttaro satisaṃvaro』』ti dubbidhena vibhajitabboti. Lokiyo satisaṃvaro kāmāvacarovāti ekavidhena vibhajitabbo. Lokuttarā satisaṃvaro 『『dassanabhūmi, bhāvanābhūmī』』ti dubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Kāmāvacaro satisaṃvaro 『『kāyānupassanāsatisaṃvaro vedanānupassanāsatisaṃvaro cittānupassanāsatisaṃvaro dhammānupassanāsatisaṃvaro』』ti catubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Lokuttaro satisaṃvaropi tathā catubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Sammāsaṅkappasammādiṭṭhiyopi lokiyalokuttaravasena dubbidhādibhedena vibhajitabbā. Padaṭṭhānenapi padaṭṭhānahārasampāte vuttanayena vibhajitabbā.

Akusalapakkhena 『『arakkhitena cittenā』』ti padena vutto asaṃvaro 『『cakkhuasaṃvaro …pe… kāyaasaṃvaro, copanakāyaasaṃvaro, vācāasaṃvaro, manoasaṃvaro』』ti aṭṭhavidhena vibhajitabbo. 『『Micchādiṭṭhihatenā』』ti padena gahito micchāsaṅkappo 『『kāmavitakko byāpādavitakko vihiṃsāvitakko』』ti tividhena vibhajitabbo. 『『Micchādiṭṭhī』』ti padena vuttā micchādiṭṭhi 『『dukkhe aññāṇaṃ…pe…idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇa』』nti aṭṭhavidhena vibhajitabbā, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhividhenapi vibhajitabbā. Thinamiddhaṃ pañcavidhena sasaṅkhārikavidhena vibhajitabbaṃ.

1. 通過任何一種旋轉攝取，經義應該被旋轉，那個旋轉攝取是圓滿的，因為被問及"什麼是語素攝取"，所以說"在此，什麼是語素攝取"等。在此詢問什麼樣的描述特徵是語素攝取的名稱。 因為被問及"經義在何處被分別"，所以說"因此對於守護心"等。關於所說的"因此……範圍"這首偈頌，在這首偈頌中所說的善法應該以善法、正念防護法來說明分別，也應該以不善法來說明分別。 如何分別？以"守護心"這個詞所說的善法正念防護，應該以"眼門防護……乃至……意門防護"這六種善法來說明分別。以"正思惟"這個詞所說的善法正思惟，應該以"出離思惟、無恚思惟、無害思惟"這三種善法來分別。以"以正見為前導"這個詞所說的善法種類，應該以"苦智、苦集智、苦滅智、趣向苦滅道智、前際智、后際智、前後際智、緣起法智"這八種善法來分別。以"了知生滅"這個詞所說的善法生滅智種類，應該以五十種生滅智善法來分別。以"超越昏沉睡眠"這個詞所說的超越昏沉睡眠善法種類，應該以"須陀洹道超越、斯陀含道超越、阿那含道超越、阿羅漢道超越"這四種善法來分別。 善法正念防護應該以"世間正念防護、出世間正念防護"這兩種來分別。世間正念防護是欲界的，應該以一種來分別。出世間正念防護應該以"見地、修地"這兩種來分別。欲界正念防護應該以"身念處正念防護、受念處正念防護、心念處正念防護、法念處正念防護"這四種來分別。出世間正念防護也同樣應該以四種來分別。正思惟和正見也應該依世間出世間而分為兩種等來分別。也應該按照所依處攝取中所說的方法以所依處來分別。 以不善法來說，以"不守護心"這個詞所說的不防護，應該以"眼不防護……乃至……身不防護、躁動身不防護、語不防護、意不防護"這八種來分別。以"被邪見所害"這個詞所攝的邪思惟，應該以"欲尋、恚尋、害尋"這三種來分別。以"邪見"這個詞所說的邪見，應該以"苦無智……乃至……緣起法無智"這八種來分別，也應該以六十二種邪見來分別。昏沉睡眠應該以五種有行來分別。

『『Ettakova vibhattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto vibhattihārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhattihārasampātena suttappadesatthā vibhattā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhattihārasampāto niyuttoti yathāraha niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti vibhattihārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Parivattanahārasampātavibhāvanā

2. Yena yena vibhattihārasampātena suttappadesatthā vibhattā, so vibhattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo parivattanahārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo parivattano hārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Katame suttappadesatthā kathaṃ parivattetabbā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā 『『tasmā…pe… gocaro』』ti gāthā vuttā, tāya gāthāya yā samathavipassanā niddhāritā, tāya samathavipassanāya bhāvitāya akusalānaṃ nirodho phalaṃ payojanaṃ hoti, pariññātaṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, samudayo pahīno hoti, maggo bhāvito hotīti parivattetabbo. Paṭipakkhena pana samathavipassanāya abhāvitāya akusalānaṃ anirodho, apariññātaṃ dukkhaṃ, samudayo appahīno, maggo abhāvito hotīti parivattetabbo.

『『Ettakova parivattanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto parivattano hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena parivattanahārasampātena suttappadesatthā parivattetabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto parivattanahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti parivattanahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Vevacanahārasampātavibhāvanā

因為應該說"語素攝取就是這麼多"，所以說"語素攝取是被聯繫的"。通過任何一種作為描述特徵的語素攝取，經文部分的意義被分別，那個作為描述特徵的語素攝取是被聯繫的，應該按照適當的方式被確定和聯繫，這個意義應該被把握。 如此，在語素攝取中，根據力量的適當性所作的 闡釋已完成。 學者們應該……把握。 9. 轉變攝取闡釋 71. 通過任何一種語素攝取，經文部分的意義被分別，那個語素攝取是圓滿的，因為被問及"什麼是轉變攝取"，所以說"在此，什麼是轉變攝取"等。 因為被問及"經文部分的意義如何轉變"，所以說"因此"等。關於所說的"因此……範圍"這首偈頌，通過這首偈頌確定的奢摩他和毗婆舍那，通過修習這個奢摩他和毗婆舍那，不善的滅盡是果和目的，苦被遍知，集被斷除，道被修習，應該這樣轉變。相反地，由於沒有修習奢摩他和毗婆舍那，不善不滅盡，苦未被遍知，集未被斷除，道未被修習，應該這樣轉變。 因為應該說"轉變攝取就是這麼多"，所以說"轉變攝取是被聯繫的"。通過任何一種作為描述特徵的轉變攝取，經文部分的意義應該被轉變，那個作為描述特徵的轉變攝取是被聯繫的，應該按照適當的方式被引出和聯繫，這個意義應該被把握。 如此，在轉變攝取中，根據力量的適當性所作的 闡釋已完成。 學者們應該……把握。 10. 同義語攝取闡釋

1. Yena yena parivattanahārasampātena suttappadesatthā parivattetabbā, so parivattano hārasampātoti paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo vevacano hārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo vevacano hārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Katamesaṃ suttappadesatthānaṃ, suttapadānaṃ vā katamāni vevacanānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā 『『tasmā…pe… gocaro』』ti gāthā vuttā, tāya gāthāya 『『rakkhitacittassā』』ti padena vuttassa cittassa, 『『rakkhitacittassā』』ti ettha cittassa padassa vā 『『cittaṃ…pe… vijānitatta』』nti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, 『『mānasaṃ hadaya』』ntiādivacanampi (dha. sa. 17, 63) cittassa vevacanaṃ. 『『Sammāsaṅkappagocaro』』ti ettha sammāsaṅkappassa 『『nekkhammasaṅkappo abyāpādasaṅkappo avihiṃsāsaṅkappo』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, 『『takko vitakko』』tiādi (dha. sa. 7) vacanampi sammāsaṅkappassa vevacanaṃ. 『『Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro』』ti ettha sammādiṭṭhipadassa 『『sammādiṭṭhi nāma paññāsatthaṃ paññākhaggo paññāratanaṃ paññāpatodo paññāpāsādo』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, 『『paññā pajānanā vicayo』』tiādi (dha. sa. 16) vacanampi sammādiṭṭhipadassa vevacanaṃ. 『『Thinaṃ thiyanā thiyitattaṃ cittassa, cittassa akallatā akammaññatā onāho pariyonāho antosaṅkoco』』ti (dha. sa. 1162-1163) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ thinassa vevacanaṃ. 『『Kāyassa akallatā akammaññatā kāyālasiyaṃ soppaṃ supanā suppitatta』』nti (dha. sa. 1163) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ middhassa vevacanaṃ. 『『Bhikkhako bhikkhū』』tiādikaṃ (pārā. 45; vibha. 510) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ bhikkhupadassa vevacanaṃ. 『『Duggati apāyo vinipāto vaṭṭadukkhaṃ saṃsāro』』tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ duggatipadassa vevacanaṃ. Iti vevacanāni nīharitāni.

『『Ettakova vevacanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto vevacano hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vevacanahārasampātena vevacanāni nīharitāni, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vevacanahārasampāto niyutto yathāsambhavaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahitoti.

Iti vevacanahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Paññattihārasampātavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 72. 以任何轉起線索會合來轉述經文義理，這就是完整的轉起線索會合。由於應當詢問"什麼是異名線索會合"，所以說了"其中什麼是異名線索會合"等。 由於應當詢問"哪些經文義理、經文詞句有什麼異名"，所以說了"因此"等。凡說"因此...乃至...行境"的偈頌，在該偈頌中，對於以"護心者"這個詞所說的心，或者在"護心者"這裡的心字，說"心...乃至...了知性"這樣的語句，這個語句是異名，"意、心"等語句也是心的異名。在"正思惟行境"這裡，對於正思惟，說"出離思惟、無恚思惟、無害思惟"這樣的語句，這個語句是異名，"尋、伺"等語句也是正思惟的異名。在"以正見為先導"這裡，對於正見一詞，說"正見即是慧劍、慧刀、慧寶、慧鞭、慧殿"這樣的語句，這個語句是異名，"慧、了知、抉擇"等語句也是正見一詞的異名。"昏沉、昏昧、昏昧性是心的、心的不適業性、不堪任性、矇蔽、遍矇蔽、內收縮"這樣說的語句，這個語句是昏沉的異名。"身不適業性、不堪任性、身懈怠、睡眠、睡著、睡著性"這樣說的語句，這個語句是睡眠的異名。"乞士、比丘"等所說的語句，這個語句是比丘一詞的異名。"惡趣、苦界、墮處、輪迴苦、生死"等所說的語句，這個語句是惡趣一詞的異名。如是引出諸異名。 由於應當說"僅此是完整的異名線索會合"，所以說"已運用異名線索會合"。以任何註釋特質的異名線索會合而引出異名，那些具有註釋特質的異名線索會合，已適當運用，應隨所應引出並運用，此義已被把握。 如是在異名線索會合中依能力所作的 解釋已終。 智者們則...乃至...應當領受。 11. 施設線索會合解釋

1. Yena yena vevacanahārasampātena vevacanāni niddhāritāni, so vevacanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo paññattihārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo paññattihārasampāto』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Katamā suttappadesabhūtā paññatti katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ paññattī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』ti paññatti satiyā padaṭṭhānassa rakkhitabbassa cittassa paññāpanato satiyā padaṭṭhānapaññatti nāma. Satiyā hi rakkhitabbaṃ cittaṃ satiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – 『『adhiṭṭhahitvā rakkhantiyā satiyā rakkhiyamānaṃ cittaṃ tassā adhiṭṭhānaṃ viya hotī』』ti. 『『Sammāsaṅkappagocaro』』ti paññatti samathassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato samathassa bhāvanāpaññatti nāma. 『『Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbaya』』nti paññatti dassanabhūmiyā nikkhepassa paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. 『『Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū』』ti samudayassa anavasesappahānassa paññāpanato anavasesappahānapaññatti nāma. 『『Sabbā duggatiyo jahe』』ti paññatti maggassa ariyamaggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma.

『『Ettakova paññattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto paññattihārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena paññattihārasampātena paññattippabhedā niddhāritā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paññattihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti paññattihārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

1. Otaraṇahārasampātavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 73. 以任何異名線索會合確定諸異名，那異名線索會合即圓滿，由於應當詢問"什麼是施設線索會合"，所以說了"其中什麼是施設線索會合"等。 由於應當詢問"什麼是經文所含的施設，是哪些法的施設"，所以說了"因此"等。"因此護心者"這個施設，是由於表示正念的立足處即應守護之心，故名為正念立足處施設。因為以正念應當守護的心，稱為正念的立足處即住立處。所以在義釋中說："由住立而守護的正念所守護的心，如同是它的住立處"。"正思惟行境"這個施設，由於表示奢摩他的修習，故名為奢摩他修習施設。"以正見為先導，了知生滅"這個施設，由於表示見地的安立，故名為安立施設。"比丘克服昏沉睡眠"這個施設，由於表示集諦的無餘斷，故名為無餘斷施設。"舍離一切惡趣"這個施設，由於表示道諦即聖道的修習，故名為修習施設。 由於應當說"僅此是完整的施設線索會合"，所以說"已運用施設線索會合"。以任何註釋特質的施設線索會合而確定施設差別，那些具有註釋特質的施設線索會合，已適當運用，應隨所應確定並運用，此義應當把握。 如是在施設線索會合中依能力所作的 解釋已終。 智者們則...乃至...應當領受。 12. 引導線索會合解釋

1. Yena yena paññattihārasampātena paññattippabhedā niddhāritā, so paññattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamo otaraṇo hārasampāto』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamo otaraṇo hārasampāto』』tiādimāha.

『『Tattha tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ katamāni indriyāni niddhāretvā katamehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tasmā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā 『『tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』tiādigāthā vuttā, tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ 『『tasmā…pe… purekkhāro』』ti suttappadesena sammādiṭṭhi gahitā, sammādiṭṭhiyā gahitāya pañcindriyāni saddhādipañcindriyāni gahitāni bhavanti.

Tāniyeva saddhādipañcindriyāni vijjāya upakārattā vā padaṭṭhānattā vā vijjā bhavanti, vijjuppādā tādisāya vijjāya uppādā uppādahetuto avijjānirodho sambhavati, avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho sambhavati…pe… jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho sambhavatīti. Ayaṃ otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādena pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.

Tāniyeva pañcindriyāni sīlakkhandhena samādhikkhandhena paññākkhandhena tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitāni bhavanti saddhāvīriyehi sīlasambhavato, satiyā ca paññānuvattakattā. Ayaṃ otaraṇā khandhehi pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.

Tāniyeva pañcindriyāni saṅkhārapariyāpannāni bhavanti. Ye saṅkhārā anāsavā bhavanti, bhavaṅgā bhavahetū no bhavanti, te anāsavā saṅkhārā dhammadhātusaṅgahitā bhavanti dhammadhātuyā antogadhattā. Ayaṃ otaraṇā dhātūhi pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.

Sā anāsavā dhammadhātu dhammāyatanapariyāpannā bhavati, yaṃ āyatanaṃ anāsavaṃ bhavati, bhavaṅgaṃ bhavahetu no bhavati. Ayaṃ otaraṇā āyatanehi dhammadhātuyā otaraṇā nāma.

『『Ettakova otaraṇo hārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto otaraṇo hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena otaraṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā otaritabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto otaraṇo hārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.

Iti otaraṇahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.

Ito paṭṭhāya 『『tattha katamo』』tiādianusandhyattho ca pariyosāne 『『niyutto』』tiādianusandhyattho ca vuttanayānusāreneva viññātabbo. Katthaci katthaci pāṭhe apākaṭaṃyeva yathābalaṃ kathayissāma.

1. Sodhanahārasampātavibhāvanā

75.Yatthāti yasmiṃ pañhe. Ārambho attho suddho paripuṇṇo, so pañho niravasesato vissajjito bhavati. Yattha pañhe pana ārambho attho na suddho aparipuṇṇo koci vissajjetabbo avasiṭṭho, so pañho tāva vissajjito na bhavati.

1. Parikkhārahārasampātavibhāvanā

77.『『Tasmā rakkhitacittassā』』ti padena yo satisaṃvaro vutto, ayaṃ satisaṃvaro samathassa parikkhāro. 『『Sammāsaṅkappagocaro』』ti padena yo sammāsaṅkappo vutto, so sammāsaṅkappo vipassanāya parikkhāroti vibhajitvā yojetabbo.

1. Samāropanahārasampātavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 74. 以任何施設線索會合確定諸施設差別，那施設線索會合即圓滿，由於應當詢問"什麼是引導線索會合"，所以說了"其中什麼是引導線索會合"等。 由於應當詢問"在那偈頌中確定哪些根，以及以哪些已確定之法引導"，所以說了"因此"等。凡說"因此護心者"等偈頌，在那偈頌中，以"因此...乃至...為先導"這經文部分攝取了正見，當正見被攝取時，即攝取了信等五根。 那些信等五根，由於對明的資助性或立足性而成為明，由於明的生起，即如是明的生起，從生起之因而有無明滅，從無明滅而有行滅...乃至...從生滅而有老死滅。這是以緣起對五根的引導。 那些五根被戒蘊、定蘊、慧蘊三蘊所攝，因為信與精進能生戒，而念隨順於慧。這是以諸蘊對五根的引導。 那些五根屬於諸行的範疇。凡是無漏的諸行，是有支而非有因，那些無漏行被法界所攝，因為攝入於法界中。這是以諸界對五根的引導。 那無漏法界屬於法處的範疇，此處是無漏，是有支而非有因。這是以諸處對法界的引導。 由於應當說"僅此是完整的引導線索會合"，所以說"已運用引導線索會合"。以任何註釋特質的引導線索會合而引導經文義理，那些具有註釋特質的引導線索會合，已適當運用，應隨所應確定並運用，此義應當把握。 如是在引導線索會合中依能力所作的 解釋已終。 智者們則...乃至...應當領受。 從此以後，"其中什麼"等相續義和結尾"已運用"等相續義，應當依照已說的方法了知。在某些經文中不明顯的部分，我們將隨能力解說。 13. 清凈線索會合解釋 75. "於何處"即于哪一問題。若開始之義清凈圓滿，該問題即完全解答。若於問題，開始之義不清凈不圓滿，有某些尚待解答，該問題則尚未解答。 15. 資具線索會合解釋 77. 以"因此護心者"這詞所說的念防護，此念防護是奢摩他的資具。以"正思惟行境"這詞所說的正思惟，此正思惟是毗婆舍那的資具，應當如是分別配合。 16. 歸結線索會合解釋;

78.『『Tasmārakkhitacittassā』』ti padena yaṃ rakkhitacittaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ rakkhitacittaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ kammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhiyā bhāvitāya ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito bhavati ekato bhāvitabbattā, padaṭṭhānakāraṇattā ca. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『sammādiṭṭhito hī』』tiādi. Yassa arahato samādhivimutti bhavati, ayaṃ arahā anupādiseso puggalo, ayaṃ samādhivimutti anupādisesā nibbānadhātu.

『『Desanāhārasampātādiko hārasampāto yena soḷasappabhedabhāvena suttappadesatthe niddhāretvā yujjito, soḷasappabhedabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena soḷasappabhedabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno 『『soḷasa…pe… sutta』』nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena soḷasappabhedabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabbo.

『『Ettakova hārasampāto paripuṇṇo』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyutto hārasampāto』』ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhārasampātena suttappadesatthā niddhāritā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhārasampātādihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabbo, aṭṭhakathāyañca (netti. aṭṭha. 73, 76) tathā niddhāretvā yujjitoti.

Iti desanāhārasampātādihārasampāte sattibalānurūpā

Racitā vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

Nayasamuṭṭhānavibhāvanā

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 78. 以"因此護心者"這詞所說的護心，那護心是三種善行業的立足處。當正見修習時，八支聖道即得修習，因為應當一同修習，也因為是立足處的緣故。所以說："從正見"等。對於具有定解脫的阿羅漢，此阿羅漢是無餘依人，此定解脫是無餘依涅槃界。 由於應當說"教說線索會合等線索會合以十六種差別確定經文義理並運用，這十六種差別我們應當以什麼來相信"，所以說了"所以說"等。以那十六種差別，具壽大迦旃延說"十六...乃至...經"這樣的語句，以此語句你們應當相信十六種差別。 由於應當說"僅此是完整的線索會合"，所以說"已運用線索會合"。以任何註釋特質的教說線索會合而確定經文義理，那些具有註釋特質的教說線索會合等線索會合，已適當運用，應隨所應確定並運用，此義應當把握，在義釋中也是如此確定並運用。 如是在教說線索會合等線索會合中依能力所作的 解釋已終。 智者們則應依照義釋和復注，詳細分析深奧之義而領受。 方法生起解釋

1. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhārasampātādinā hārasampātena ekasuttappadesatthā niddhāretvā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhārasampātādihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, 『『katamaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』』ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –『『evaṃ nānāsuttavasena, ekasuttavasena ca hāravicāraṃ dassetvā idāni nayavicāraṃ dassetuṃ 『tattha katamaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』ntiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 79) vuttaṃ. 『『Tattha katamo nandiyāvaṭṭanayo』』tiādiṃ anārabhitvā 『『tattha katamaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』』ntiādiārambhane kāraṇaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttameva. Tattha tatthāti tesu hārādīsu yo atthanayo saṃvaṇṇanānayena niddiṭṭho, tasseva atthanayassa samuṭṭhānaṃ bhūmiṃ pucchati 『『katamaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』』nti.

Kiñcāpi saṃvaṇṇanānayā niddiṭṭhā, tathāpi atthanayasaṃvaṇṇanānayānaṃ visesassa pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ puna kathayissāma. Taṇhāavijjāhi saṃkilesapakkhassa suttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ceva samathavipassanāhi vodānapakkhassa suttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca nandiyāvaṭṭo nayo nāma. Tīhi akusalamūlehi lobhādīhi saṃkilesapakkhassa suttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ceva tīhi kusalamūlehi alobhādīhi vodānapakkhassa suttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca tipukkhalo nayo nāma. Catūhi subhasaññādīhi vipallāsehi sakalasaṃkilesapakkhassa suttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ceva catūhi asubhasaññādīhi avipallāsehi satipaṭṭhānehi, saddhindriyehi vā vodānapakkhassa suttatthassa catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca sīhavikkīḷito nayo nāmāti vuttā nayā saṃvaṇṇanānayā nāma. Tesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayānaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati 『『katamaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』』nti.

Nayā pana nānāsuttato niddhāritehi taṇhāavijjādīhi mūlapadehi catusaccayojanāya nayato anubujjhiyamāno dukkhādiattho. So hi maggañāṇaṃ nayati sampāpetīti 『『nayo』』ti vutto, so atthanayo nāma. Tasseva atthanayassa samuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati 『『katamaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』』nti? Tasmā catusaccayojanāya nayaggāhato nīyati anupucchīyatīti nayo, ko so? Suttatthabhūto dukkhādiko attho. Nayati maggañāṇaṃ pāpetīti vā nayo, dukkhādiko atthova. Tenāha – 『『anubujjhiyamāno dukkhādiattho. So hi maggañāṇaṃ nayati sampāpetīti nayo』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 79). Samuṭṭhahanti nayā etenāti samuṭṭhānaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Avijjātaṇhādikāraṇaṃ, taṃdīpanā saṃvaṇṇanā ca. Avijjātaṇhādinā hi dukkhādiatthanayā sambhavanti. Atha vā avijjātaṇhādīhi catusaccayojanā samuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『kiṃ pana taṃ? Taṃtaṃmūlapadehi catusaccayojanā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 79). Evaṃ atthe gayhamāne sati saṃvaṇṇanānayāpi gahitā honti, nayānaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ nayasamuṭṭhānaṃ, tasmiṃ nayasamuṭṭhāne.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 79. 以任何註釋特質的教說線索會合等線索會合確定並分析一經文義理，那具有註釋特質的教說線索會合等線索會合即圓滿，由於應當詢問"什麼是方法生起"，所以開始說"其中什麼是方法生起"等。在義釋中則說："如是顯示了依多經和依一經的線索考察后，現在為顯示方法考察而開始說'其中什麼是方法生起'等"。不說"其中什麼是歡喜轉方法"等而說"其中什麼是方法生起"等的原因，在義釋中已說。其中"其中"即在那些線索等中，凡以註釋方法所說的義理方法，即問那義理方法的生起處，說"什麼是方法生起"。 雖然註釋方法已說，但為使義理方法和註釋方法的差別明顯，我們將再說。以貪愛、無明對染污分的經義通過四諦相應門而導向的註釋特質，以及以止觀對清凈分的經義通過四諦相應門而導向的註釋特質，名為歡喜轉方法。以貪等三不善根對染污分的經義通過四諦相應門而導向的註釋特質，以及以無貪等三善根對清凈分的經義通過四諦相應門而導向的註釋特質，名為三輪方法。以凈想等四顛倒對一切染污分的經義通過四諦相應門而導向的註釋特質，以及以不凈想等四非顛倒的念住或信根等對清凈分的經義通過四諦相應門而導向的註釋特質，名為獅子游戲方法，如是所說的方法稱為註釋方法。問這些註釋方法的生起，說"什麼是方法生起"。 而方法是從多經中確定的貪愛、無明等根本詞，通過四諦相應而了知的苦等義理。因為它引導、使達到道智故稱為"方法"，這稱為義理方法。問那義理方法的生起，說"什麼是方法生起"？因此，從四諦相應的方法把握而被引導、被追問故為方法，是什麼？是作為經義的苦等義理。或者說引導、使達到道智故為方法，即是苦等義理。所以說："所了知的苦等義理。因為它引導、使達到道智故為方法"。諸方法由此而生起故為生起，是什麼？是無明、貪愛等因，以及顯示它的註釋。因為由無明、貪愛等而有苦等義理方法生起。或者說，以無明、貪愛等的四諦相應名為生起。所以說："是什麼？是以彼彼根本詞的四諦相應"。當如是把握義理時，註釋方法也被把握，方法的生起為方法生起，即在那方法生起中。

『『Katamaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭanayasamuṭṭhāna』』nti pucchitabbattā paṭhamaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ 『『pubbā koṭi na paññāyatī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Nandiyāvaṭṭanayasamuṭṭhānabhūtāya avijjāya ca taṇhāya ca pubbā koṭi 『『asukassa buddhassa bhagavato uppajjanakāle uppannā, asukassa cakkavattino uppajjanakāle uppannā』』ti na paññāyati koṭiyā abhāvatoti yojanā. 『『Avijjātaṇhāsu katamā nīvaraṇaṃ, katamā saṃyojana』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha avijjā nīvaraṇaṃ taṇhā saṃyojana』』nti vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu avijjātaṇhāsu. Ādīnavapaṭicchādikattā avijjā nīvaraṇaṃ. Bhavesu saṃyojanato taṇhā saṃyojanaṃ. 『『Avijjānīvaraṇā sattā kathaṃ vicaranti, kathaṃ vuccanti, taṇhāsaṃyojanā sattā kathaṃ vicaranti kathaṃ vuccantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『avijjānīvaraṇā sattā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Avijjānīvaraṇametesamatthīti avijjānīvaraṇā. Avijjāya saṃyuttā viya pavattā avijjāya abhinivisavatthūsu saṃyuttā viya pavattā sattā avijjāpakkhena vipallāsena niccādiabhinivesavatthubhūte rūpādiārammaṇe vicaranti vividhā caranti pavattanti, te niccādiabhinivisantā vicarantā sattā 『『diṭṭhicaritā』』ti vuccanti. Taṇhāsaṃyojanametesanti taṇhāsaṃyojanā. Taṇhāya saṃyuttā viya pavattā, taṇhāya vā ārammaṇabhūte vatthukāme saṃyuttā viya pavattā sattā taṇhāpakkhena aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritena ārammaṇabhūte vatthusmiṃ vicaranti pavattantīti attho.

『『Diṭṭhicaritā sattā kaṃ paṭipattiṃ anuyuttā viharanti, taṇhācaritā sattā kaṃ paṭipattiṃ anuyuttā viharantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『diṭṭhicaritā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhicaritā sattā ito sāsanato bahiddhā pabbajitā hontāpi 『『sukhena adhigantabbaṃ sukhaṃ natthi, dukkhena adhigantabbaṃ sukhaṃ pana atthī』』ti manasi karontā attakilamathānuyogaṃ pañcātapādipaṭipattiṃ anuyuttā viharanti. Taṇhācaritā sattā ito sāsanato bahiddhā pabbajitā hontāpi 『『kāme paṭisevantā lokaṃ vaḍḍhāpentā bahuṃ puññaṃ vaḍḍhāpentī』』ti manasi karontā kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ paṭipattiṃ anuyuttā viharanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 由於應當詢問"什麼是歡喜轉方法生起"，為首先顯示歡喜轉方法生起，所以說"起始不可見"等。作為歡喜轉方法生起的無明和貪愛的起始，"在某佛世尊出現時生起，在某轉輪王出現時生起"，是不可見的，因為沒有起始。 由於應當詢問"在無明貪愛中，何者是蓋，何者是結"，所以說"其中無明是蓋，貪愛是結"。"其中"即在那些無明貪愛中。由於遮蔽過患，無明是蓋。由於在諸有中結縛，貪愛是結。 由於應當詢問"被無明所蓋的眾生如何行動，如何稱呼，被貪愛所結的眾生如何行動，如何稱呼"，所以說"被無明所蓋的眾生"等。有無明蓋故為被無明所蓋。如被無明相應而行動，如被無明在執著事上相應而行動的眾生，以無明分的顛倒，在作為常等執著事的色等所緣中行動、種種行動、轉起，那些執著常等而行動的眾生稱為"見行者"。有貪愛結故為被貪愛所結。如被貪愛相應而行動，或如被貪愛在作為所緣的欲事上相應而行動的眾生，以貪愛分的一百零八愛行在作為所緣的事物中行動、轉起，此為其義。 由於應當詢問"見行眾生從事何種修行而住，愛行眾生從事何種修行而住"，所以說"見行者"等。見行眾生即使出家於此教外，也思維"無有安樂可得之樂，唯有以苦可得之樂"，從事苦行，修習五熱炙等行法而住。愛行眾生即使出家於此教外，也思維"受用諸欲能增長世間，能增長諸多功德"，從事欲樂，修習耽著欲樂之行而住。

『『Kasmā diṭṭhicaritā tathāvidhaṃ paṭipattiṃ anuyuttā viharanti, kasmā taṇhācaritā tathāvidhaṃ paṭipattiṃ anuyuttā viharantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha kiṃ kāraṇa』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tattha tesu diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritesu. Yaṃ yasmā kāraṇā viharanti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ kinti pucchati. Ito sāsanato bahiddhā yesaṃ puggalānaṃ saccavavatthānaṃ natthi, catusaccappakāsanā kuto ca atthi, samathavipassanākosallaṃ vā upasamasukhappatti vā kuto atthi, te puggalā upasamasukhassa anabhiññā viparītacetā hutvā evaṃ āhaṃsu 『『sukhena adhigantabbaṃ sukhaṃ natthi , dukkhena adhigantabbaṃ sukhaṃ nāma atthī』』ti. Te evaṃsaññī evaṃdiṭṭhī dukkhena sukhaṃ patthayamānā hutvā attakilamathānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti. Ito sāsanato bahiddhā yesaṃ puggalānaṃ saccavavatthānaṃ natthi, catusaccappakāsanā kuto ca atthi, samathavipassanākosallaṃ vā upasamasukhappatti vā kuto atthi, te puggalā upasamasukhassa anabhiññā viparītacetā hutvā evamāhaṃsu 『『yo kāme paṭisevati, so lokaṃ vaḍḍhayati, yo lokaṃ vaḍḍhayati, so bahuṃ puññaṃ pasavatī』』ti. Te evaṃsaññī evaṃdiṭṭhī kāmesu sukhasaññī hutvā kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ anuyuttā ca viharantīti yojanā kātabbā.

『『Tathā viharantā kiṃ vaḍḍhayantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『te tadabhiññā santā rogameva vaḍḍhayantī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Tathā vaḍḍhayantā rogādīnaṃ bhesajjaṃ samathavipassanaṃ vaḍḍhayanti ki』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『te rogābhitunnā gaṇḍapaṭipīḷitā sallānuviddhā nirayatiracchānayonipetāsuresu ummujjanimujjāni karontā ugghātanigghātaṃ paccanubhontā rogagaṇḍasallabhesajjaṃ navindantī』』ti vuttaṃ. Attho pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 79) vutto. 『『Katame saṃkilesavodānā, katame rogādayo, katamaṃ bhesajja』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha attakilamathānuyogo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu saṃkilesavodānarogabhesajjādīsu. Attakilamathānuyogo ca kāmasukhallikānuyogo ca saṃkileso hoti, samathavipassanā vodānaṃ hoti, attakilamathānuyogo ca rogo hoti, samathavipassanā roganigghātakabhesajjaṃ…pe... samathavipassanā salluddhāraṇabhesajjaṃ hoti.

『『Katamo katamaṃ sacca』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha saṃkileso dukkha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu saṃkilesādīsu saṃkileso ekadesavasena dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ hoti. Tadabhisaṅgoti tasmiṃ saṃkilese abhisaṅgo viya pavatto lokiyadhammo niravasesavasena dukkhasaccaṃ hoti. Atha vā tasmiṃ dukkhe abhisaṅgo viya pavattā taṇhā dukkhasamudayo samudayasaccaṃ hoti. Taṇhānirodho dukkhanirodho nirodhasaccaṃ hoti. Samathavipassanā dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā maggasaccaṃ hoti. Imāni cattāri saccāni niddhāretvā yojetabbāni. 『『Tesu catūsu saccesu katamaṃ pariññeyyaṃ, katamo pahātabbo, katamo bhāvetabbo, katamo sacchikātabbo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『dukkhaṃ pariññeyya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 由於應當詢問"為什麼見行者從事如是修行而住，為什麼愛行者從事如是修行而住"，所以說"其中什麼原因"等。"其中"即在那些見行者和愛行者中。問他們因何原因而住。在此教外的那些人沒有諦的確立，何況有四諦的顯明，何況有止觀的善巧或寂靜樂的證得，那些人不知寂靜樂，心顛倒，如是說："無有安樂可得之樂，唯有以苦可得之樂。"他們如是想、如是見，以苦求樂，從事苦行而住。在此教外的那些人沒有諦的確立，何況有四諦的顯明，何況有止觀的善巧或寂靜樂的證得，那些人不知寂靜樂，心顛倒，如是說："誰受用諸欲，他增長世間；誰增長世間，他生多功德。"他們如是想、如是見，于諸欲中想為樂，從事耽著欲樂而住，應如是配合。 由於應當詢問"如是而住增長什麼"，所以說"他們不知此而只增長病"。由於應當詢問"如是增長時，他們增長止觀這病等的藥嗎"，所以說"他們被病所壓，被瘡所逼，被箭所刺，在地獄、畜生、餓鬼、阿修羅中浮沉，感受升降，不得病瘡箭之藥"。義理在義釋中已說。 由於應當詢問"什麼是染凈，什麼是病等，什麼是藥"，所以說"其中苦行"等。"其中"即在那些染凈病藥等中。苦行和耽欲是染，止觀是凈，苦行是病，止觀是除病之藥...乃至...止觀是拔箭之藥。 由於應當詢問"什麼是什麼諦"，所以說"其中染是苦"等。"其中"即在那些染等中，染以一分而為苦、苦諦。"于彼執著"即于彼染如執著而轉起的世間法，以無餘分而為苦諦。或者說，于彼苦如執著而轉起的貪愛是苦集、集諦。貪愛滅是苦滅、滅諦。止觀是趣向苦滅之道、道諦。應確定並配合此四諦。由於應當詢問"在這四諦中什麼應遍知，什麼應斷，什麼應修，什麼應證"，所以說"苦應遍知"等。

1. Diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritānaṃ attakilamathānuyogādivasena cattāri saccāni niddhāritāni, 『『kathaṃ diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritānaṃ sakkāyadassane pavattibhedavasena cattāri saccāni niddhāritānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha diṭṭhicaritā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritānaṃ sakkāyadassane katamo pavattibhedo』』ti pucchitabbattā imesaṃ sakkāyadassane ayaṃ pavattibhedoti vibhajitvā dassetuṃ 『『tattha diṭṭhicaritā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『idāni diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhidassane pavattibhedaṃ dassetuṃ 『diṭṭhicaritā』tiādi vutta』』nti. Tatthāti tesu diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritesu. Diṭṭhicaritā puggalā rūpaṃ 『『attā』』ti attato upagacchanti…pe… viññāṇaṃ 『『attā』』ti attato upagacchanti diṭṭhicaritānaṃ attābhinivesassa balavabhāvato, taṇhācaritā pana rūpaṃ vā 『『attā』』ti rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ upagacchanti attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā 『『attā』』ti attānaṃ upagacchanti…pe… viññāṇasmiṃ vā 『『attā』』ti attānaṃ upagacchanti taṇhācaritānaṃ attaniyābhinivesassa balavabhāvato. Pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu ekekaṃ nissāya catubbidhattā vīsativatthukā ayaṃ micchādiṭṭhi 『『sakkāyadiṭṭhī』』ti vuccati. Evaṃ diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritānaṃ sakkāyadassane pavattibhedo viññātabboti attho.

『『Sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā katamo paṭipakkho』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tassā paṭipakkho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassā sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pajahanavasena lokuttarā sammādiṭṭhi paṭipakkho, tassā sammādiṭṭhiyā anvāyikā anuguṇabhāvena pavattanakā dhammā ca sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pajahanavasena paṭipakkhā bhavanti. 『『Katame dhammā anvāyikā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『sammāsaṅkappo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammāsaṅkappo…pe… sammāsamādhi ime dhammā anvāyikā honti. Ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādiko ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tassā sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā paṭipakkho hoti pahāyakattā. 『『Te sammādiṭṭhiyādayo dhammā khandhato kittakā hontī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『te tayo khandhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Katamo khandho samatho, katamo khandho vipassanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『sīlakkhandho samādhikkhandho ca samatho, paññākkhandho vipassanā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Sakkāyādīsu katamo katamaṃ saccaṃ, katamo katamaṃ sacca』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha sakkāyo』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhitappaṭipakkhavasena cattāri saccāni niddhāritāni, kathaṃ antadvayamajjhimapaṭipadā niddhāritā』』ti vattabbattā 『『tattha ye rūpaṃ attato』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritesu ye diṭṭhicaritā puggalā rūpaṃ 『『attā』』ti attato upagacchanti…pe… viññāṇaṃ 『『attā』』ti attato upagacchanti. Ime diṭṭhicaritā puggalā 『『rūpādayo ca attā, rūpādīnañca aniccattā, attassāpi aniccattā attā ucchijjati, attā vinassati, attā paraṃ maraṇā na hotī』』ti abhinivisanato 『『ucchedavādino』』ti vuccanti. Ye taṇhācaritā puggalā rūpaṃ vā 『『attā』』ti rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ upagacchanti…pe… viññāṇaṃ vā 『『attā』』ti viññāṇavantaṃ attānaṃ upagacchanti. Attani vā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇasmiṃ vā attānaṃ upagacchanti. Ime taṇhācaritā puggalā 『『rūpādīhi attā añño aññattā attā nicco sassato』』ti abhinivisanato 『『sassatavādino』』ti vuccanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 80. 已經依見行者和愛行者的苦行等方式確定了四諦，由於應當詢問"如何依見行者和愛行者在有身見中的行相差別而確定四諦"，所以說"其中見行者"等。或者說，由於應當詢問"見行者和愛行者在有身見中有何行相差別"，為分別顯示這些人在有身見中的行相差別，所以說"其中見行者"等。因此說："現在為顯示見行者和愛行者在有身見中的行相差別而說'見行者'等"。"其中"即在那些見行者和愛行者中。見行者執著色為"我"...乃至...執著識為"我"，因為見行者的我執強烈，而愛行者則執著色為"我"或有色之我，或我有色，或我在色中...乃至...或我在識中，因為愛行者的我所執強烈。依於五取蘊的每一蘊而有四種，這二十事的邪見稱為"有身見"。如是應知見行者和愛行者在有身見中的行相差別。 由於應當詢問"有身見的對治是什麼"，所以說"它的對治"等。以斷除彼有身見的出世間正見為對治，隨順於彼正見、以順應方式轉起的諸法，以斷除有身見而成為對治。由於應當詢問"什麼法是隨順"，所以說"正思惟"等。正思惟...乃至...正定，這些法是隨順。這正見等八支聖道是彼有身見的對治，因為能斷除。由於應當詢問"那些正見等法從蘊的角度有幾個"，所以說"它們是三蘊"等。由於應當詢問"哪個蘊是止，哪個蘊是觀"，所以說"戒蘊和定蘊是止，慧蘊是觀"。由於應當詢問"在有身等中，什麼是什麼諦，什麼是什麼諦"，所以說"其中有身"等。 由於應當說"已依見行者和愛行者的有身見及其對治而確定四諦，如何確定兩邊的中道"，所以說"其中那些執色為我"等。"其中"即在那些見行者和愛行者中，那些見行者執著色為"我"...乃至...執著識為"我"。這些見行者因執著"色等是我，由於色等無常，我也無常，我斷滅，我毀滅，我死後不存在"，故稱為"斷見論者"。那些愛行者執著色為"我"或有色之我...乃至...執著識為"我"或有識之我，或我有識，或我在識中。這些愛行者因執著"我異於色等，由於異故我是常、恒"，故稱為"常見論者"。

Tattha tesu ucchedavādīsassatavādīpuggalesu pavattā ucchedavādasassatavādā ubho antā antadvayapaṭipadā honti. Ayaṃ antadvayapaṭipadā saṃsārapavattanassa hetubhāvato saṃsārapavatti hoti, tassa antadvayassa paṭipajjanassa pajahanavasena majjhimapaṭipadāsaṅkhātova ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo paṭipakkho hoti pahāyakattā. Ayaṃ maggo saṃsāranivattanassa hetubhāvato saṃsāranivatti hoti. Tattha saṃsārapavattisaṃsāranivattīsu pavatti saṃsārapavatti dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, tadabhisaṅgo tasmiṃ dukkhe abhisaṅgo taṇhā samudayo samudayasaccaṃ, taṇhānirodho dukkhanirodho nirodhasaccaṃ, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā maggasaccaṃ, iti imāni cattāri saccāni niddhāritāni. 『『Dukkhaṃ pariññeyya』』ntiādimhi vuttanayova attho.

『『Ucchedasassatassa kittako pabhedo, maggassa kittako』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha ucchedasassata』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ucchedasassataariyamaggesu ucchedasassatadassanaṃ samāsato saṅkhepato vīsativatthukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi. Ucchedo pañcupādānakkhandhe nissāya pavattattā pañcavidho, sassatadassanaṃ ekekasmiṃ tidhā uppajjanato pannarasavidhanti vīsatividhaṃ hoti. Vitthārato dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni. Katamāni? Cattāro sassatavādā, cattāro ekaccasassatavādā, cattāro antānantavādā, cattāro amarāvikkhepavādā, dve adhiccasamuppannavādā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, satta ucchedavādā, pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni veditabbāni. Vitthārato pana brahmajālasutte (dī. ni.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 在那些斷見論者和常見論者的人中，斷見和常見這兩種邊是兩種邊際之道。這兩種邊際之道因是輪迴流轉的因，所以有輪迴流轉。為斷除這兩種邊際之道，以中道即稱為八支聖道為對治，因為能斷除。這條道路因是止息輪迴的因，所以有輪迴止息。其中在輪迴流轉和輪迴止息中，流轉是苦、苦諦；于彼苦的執著是貪、集諦；貪的滅是苦滅、滅諦；八支聖道是趣向苦滅之道、道諦，如是確定此四諦。義理如"苦應遍知"等處所說。 由於應當詢問"斷見常見有幾種分別，道有幾種"，所以說"其中斷見常見"等。在斷見常見和聖道中，斷見常見的見，總說略說是二十事有身見。斷見因依五取蘊而轉起，故有五種；常見因在每一事中三種生起，故有十五種，共二十種。詳細說來有六十二種見。是哪些？四種常見論，四種一分常見論，四種邊無邊論，四種不死論，二種偶然生論，十六種有想論，八種無想論，八種非想非非想論，七種斷見論，五種現法涅槃論，共六十二種見應當了知。詳細說來，在梵網經中......

1.30 ādayo) āgatāni. Tesaṃ ucchedasassatadassanānaṃ tecattālīsaṃ bodhipakkhiyadhammā paṭipakkho maggo. Katame tecattālīsaṃ? 『『Aniccasaññā dukkhasaññā anattasaññā』』ti tisso saññā ca 『『pahānasaññā virāgasaññā nirodhasaññā』』ti tisso saññā cāti cha saññā ca 『『cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, aṭṭha maggaṅgānī』』ti tecattālīsaṃ bodhipakkhiyadhammā vipassanāvasena paṭipakkho maggo nāma.

『『Samathavasena katamo paṭipakkho』』ti vattabbattā 『『aṭṭha vimokkhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭha vimokkhā pākaṭā. Dasa kasiṇāyatanāni samathavasena paṭipakkho maggo nāma. 『『Katamaṃ ñāṇaṃ katamassa dhammassa padālana』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhicarite pavattāni diṭṭhigatāni, moho. Taṇhācarite pavattāni diṭṭhigatāni, jālaṃ. Anādivasena pavatto moho. Anidhanavasena pavattaṃ jālaṃ. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo samāpajjitvā tejetvā tikkhaṃ vipassanāñāṇañca ariyamaggañāṇañcañāṇavajiraṃ nāma bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ ñāṇapadaṭṭhānattā. Moho ca jālañca mohajālaṃ. Padāletīti padālanaṃ, kattari yupaccayo, mohajālassa padālananti mohajālapadālanaṃ. Padālanañhi duvidhaṃ vikkhambhanapadālanaṃ samucchedapadālananti. Pubbabhāge samathavipassanāvasena vikkhambhanapadālanaṃ, maggakkhaṇe samucchedapadālanaṃ eva daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ mohajāle avijjā moho, bhavataṇhā jālaṃ. Attano ādhāraṃ puggalaṃ dukkhādīsu aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu mohetīti moho. Paṭhamaṃ jālaṃ jaṭaṃ lāyitvā jaṭāvasena lāti pavattatīti jālaṃ, attani jātaṃ macchasakuṇādikaṃ lāti gaṇhāti, lāpeti gaṇhāpetīti vā jālaṃ, jālaṃ viyāti jālaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『atītādibhedabhinnesu rūpādīsu, sakaattabhāvādīsu ca saṃsibbanavasena pavattanato jālaṃ bhavataṇhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 80). 『『Avijjātaṇhāhi attakilamathānuyogādīnaṃ kilesapakkhānaṃ niddhāraṇaṃ kataṃ kathaṃ kena saddahitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tena vuccati 『pubbā koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya ca bhavataṇhāya cā』ti』』 vuttaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 1.30 在梵網經中已出現。這四十三種斷見常見的見，以覺悟分法為對治之道。是哪四十三種？三種想：無常想、苦想、非我想，以及三種想：斷想、離欲想、滅想，共六種想；四念處、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七覺支、八道支，共四十三種覺悟分法，以觀的方式為對治之道。 由於應當說"以止的方式何為對治"，所以說"八解脫"等。八解脫已顯著。十遍處以止的方式為對治之道。由於應當詢問"什麼是智，破壞什麼法"，所以說"六十二種見"等。在見行中轉起的見是見；癡。在愛行中轉起的見是網。無始以來轉起的癡。無底以來轉起的網。八等至已入、已發，銳利的觀智和聖道智，名為智金剛，因為是覺悟分法的智慧依處。癡和網是癡網。"破壞"即破壞，在作者處加語尾，破壞癡網。破壞實有兩種：抑制破壞和斷除破壞。在先前階段以止觀方式為抑制破壞，在道的剎那為斷除破壞應當了知。"其中"即在彼癡網中，無明是癡，有愛是網。迷惑自己依處的人在八苦等處。首先網纏繞，以纏繞方式纏繞而轉起，故為網，在自身生起的魚鳥等被網捕獲，或使被捕獲，故為網，如網。因此說："在過去等種種不同的色等，在自身等處，以縫合方式轉起，故有愛是網"。由於應當說"以無明愛如何確定苦行等煩惱的一邊"，所以說"因此說'無明愛的初始端不可知'"。

1. 『『Ito sāsanato bahiddhā diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritānaṃ paṭipadādayo niddhāritā, sāsane diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritānaṃ paṭipadādayo kathaṃ niddhāritabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『saṃkilesapakkhā suttatthā ācariyena dassitā, vodānapakkhasuttatthā kathaṃ dassitabbā』』ti vattabbattā vā 『『tattha diṭṭhicarito asmiṃ sāsane』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu diṭṭhicaritataṇhācaritesu. Diṭṭhicarito puggalo asmiṃ sāsane pabbajito hutvā catūsu paccayesu sallekhānusantatavutti bhavati. Kasmā? Yasmā sallekhe tibbagāravo, tasmā sallekhe tibbagāravattā. Taṇhācarito puggalo asmiṃ sāsane pabbajito hutvā sikkhānusantatavutti bhavati . Kasmā? Yasmā sikkhāya tibbagāravo, tasmā sikkhāya tibbagāravattā. Diṭṭhicarito puggalo sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamanto hutvā dhammānusārī puggalo bhavati. Kasmā? Diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhivisaye paññāsadisapavattanato. Taṇhācarito puggalo sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamanto hutvā saddhānusārī bhavati. Kasmā? Taṇhāvasena micchādhimokkhattā. Diṭṭhicarito puggalo sukhāya paṭipadāya, dandhābhiññāya ca niyyāti, sukhāya paṭipadāya, khippābhiññāya ca niyyāti sukhena kilesehi vikkhambhituṃ samatthattā. Taṇhācarito puggalo dukkhāya paṭipadāya, dandhābhiññāya ca niyyāti, dukkhāya paṭipadāya, khippābhiññāya ca niyyāti dukkhena kilesehi vikkhambhituṃ samatthattā.

『『Tathā kasmā niyyātī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yaṃ yena kāraṇena niyyāti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ kinti pucchati. Tassa taṇhācaritassa kāmā sukhena apariccattā hi yasmā bhavanti, tasmā kāmānaṃ sukhena apariccattattā tathā niyyāti. So taṇhācarito kāmehi vatthukāmakilesakāmehi viveciyamāno dukkhena paṭinissarati, dandhañca dhammaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ ājānāti. Yo pana ayaṃ puggalo diṭṭhicarito hoti, so ayaṃ diṭṭhicarito puggalo ādito ādimhiyeva kāmehi kilesakāmavatthukāmehi anatthiko bhavati. So diṭṭhicarito tato tehi kāmehi viveciyamāno khippañca sukhena paṭinissarati, khippañca dhammaṃ ājānāti.

『『Taṇhācarito dukkhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyāti, diṭṭhicarito sukhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyātīti ekekāya paṭipadāya bhavitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『dukkhāpi paṭipadā duvidhā dandhābhiññā ca khippābhiññā ca, sukhāpi paṭipadā duvidhā dandhābhiññā ca khippābhiññā cā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Evaṃ sati ekova dvīhi dvīhi paṭipadāhi niyyātīti āpajjatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『sattāpī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhācaritā sattāpi duvidhā mudindriyāpi tikkhindriyāpi, diṭṭhicaritā sattāpi duvidhā mudindriyāpi tikkhindriyāpīti yojanā kātabbā. Ye taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritā mudindriyā bhavanti, te taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritā dandhañca paṭinissaranti, dandhañca dhammaṃ ājānanti. Ye taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritā tikkhindriyā bhavanti, te taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritā khippañca paṭinissaranti, khippañca dhammaṃ ājānanti, tasmā ekekasseva ekekā paṭipadā yuttāvāti. 『『Imāhi paṭipadāhi niyyantiyeva, na niyyiṃsu niyyissantīti āpajjeyya vattamānavibhattiyā niddiṭṭhattā』』ti vattabbattā 『『imā catasso』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atītepi imāhi catūhi paṭipadāhi niyyiṃsu, paccuppannesupi niyyanti, anāgatepi niyyissantīti attho gahetabbo yathā 『『pabbato tiṭṭhatī』』ti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 81. 由於應當說"已確定此教外見行者和愛行者的修行等，如何確定此教內見行者和愛行者的修行等"，或由於應當說"已顯示染污分經義，如何顯示清凈分經義"，所以說"其中見行者在此教"等。"其中"即在那些見行者和愛行者中。見行者在此教中出家后，在四資具中成為隨行頭陀行者。為什麼？因為對頭陀極其恭敬，所以由於對頭陀極其恭敬。愛行者在此教中出家后，成為隨行學處者。為什麼？因為對學處極其恭敬，所以由於對學處極其恭敬。見行者入正性決定時，成為隨法行者。為什麼？因為在見的境界中以慧相似而行。愛行者入正性決定時，成為隨信行者。為什麼？因為以愛而邪勝解。見行者以樂行、鈍通和樂行、速通而出離，因為能以樂而抑制諸煩惱。愛行者以苦行、鈍通和苦行、速通而出離，因為能以苦而抑制諸煩惱。 由於應當詢問"為何如是出離"，所以說"其中什麼原因"等。問以何因而出離。因為那愛行者不能樂易舍離諸欲，所以由於不能樂易舍離諸欲而如是出離。他那愛行者從事欲和煩惱欲分離時，以苦而出離，遲緩了知四諦法。而這個是見行者的人，這見行者從最初就對諸欲、煩惱欲和事欲無所希求。他那見行者從彼等諸欲分離時，迅速而樂易出離，迅速了知法。 由於應當說"愛行者以苦行鈍通而出離，見行者以樂行速通而出離，應當各有一行"，所以說"苦行有二種：鈍通和速通，樂行也有二種：鈍通和速通"。由於應當說"如是則一人以兩種行出離"，所以說"眾生也"等。應如是配合：愛行眾生也有二種：軟根和利根，見行眾生也有二種：軟根和利根。那些軟根的愛行者和見行者，他們遲緩出離，遲緩了知法。那些利根的愛行者和見行者，他們迅速出離，迅速了知法，因此各人各有一行是合理的。由於應當說"由於用現在時態說明，則成為只是現在出離，不是過去已出離、未來將出離"，所以說"此四"等。應取義為：過去也以此四行出離，現在也出離，未來也將出離，如說"山住立"。

Evanti evaṃ vuttappakārena. Ariyapuggalā catukkamaggaṃ paṭipadaṃ paññāpenti. 『『Kimatthaṃ paññāpentī』』ti vattabbattā 『『abudhajanasevitāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa bhūmīti taṇhāavijjānaṃ vasena saṃkilesapakkhe dvidisā catusaccayojanāpi samathavipassanānaṃ vasena vodānapakkhe dvidisā catusaccayojanāpi dassitā. Ayaṃ catubbidhā catusaccayojanā nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa samuṭṭhānaṃ bhūmi samuṭṭhānabhāvatoti. 『『Tathāvidhāya catusaccayojanāya nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa samuṭṭhānabhūmibhāvo kena saddahitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

1. 『『Nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa samuṭṭhānabhūtā bhūmi dassitā, tassa nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa kattha katamā disā kittakena upaparikkhitabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『veyyākaraṇesu hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Hi-saddo pakkhantarattho. Ye disābhūtā āhārādayo dhammā veyyākaraṇesu 『『kusalākusalā』』ti vuttaṃ, te disābhūtā āhārādayo dhammā duvidhena 『『ime akusalā dhammā saṃkilesadhammā, ime kusalā vodānadhammā』』ti duvidhena upaparikkhitabbā ālocitabbā. 『『Katamena duvidhenā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『lokavaṭṭānusārī ca lokavivaṭṭānusārī cā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Katamaṃ vaṭṭaṃ, katamaṃ vivaṭṭa』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『vaṭṭaṃ nāma saṃsāro, vivaṭṭaṃ nibbāna』』nti vuttaṃ. 『『Saṃsārassa katamo hetū』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『kammakilesā hetu saṃsārassā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Katamaṃ kammaṃ nāma, cetanāyeva kammaṃ nāma kiṃ, udāhu cetasikañca phaladānasamatthāsamatthampi kammaṃ ki』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha kamma』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu kammakilesesu. 『『Taṃ kammaṃ kathaṃ kena pakārena daṭṭhabba』』nti ce vadeyya, yathā yena upacayena kataṃ kammaṃ phaladānasamatthaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ upacaye taṃ kammaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. 『『Te kilesā katamehi dhammehi niddisitabbā』』ti ce puccheyya, sabbepi kilesā catūhi vipallāsehi niddisitabbā. 『『Te kilesā kattha daṭṭhabbā』』ti ce puccheyya, dasavatthuke kilesapuñje te kilesā daṭṭhabbā.

『『Katamāni dasa vatthūnī』』ti ce puccheyya, cattāro āhārā, cattāro vipallāsā, cattāri upādānāni, cattāro yogā, cattāro ganthā, cattāro āsavā, cattāro oghā, cattāro sallā, catasso viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, cattāri agatigamanānīti dasa vatthūnīti veditabbāni catunnaṃ kiccavasena ekattā. Ettha ca kilesānaṃ paccayo vatthukāmopi kilesopi kilesavatthu hoti purimānaṃ purimānaṃ kilesānaṃ pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ kilesānaṃ paccayabhāvato.

『『Katamo katamo katamassa katamassa vatthū』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『paṭhame āhāre』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ālambitabbe paṭhame kabaḷīkārāhāre paṭhamo 『『rūpaṃ subha』』nti vipallāso ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattati. Ālambitabbe dutiye phassāhāre dutiyo 『『phassapaccayā vedanā sukhā』』ti vipallāso pavattati. Ālambitabbe tatiye cittāhāre tatiyo 『『cittaṃ nicca』』nti vipallāso pavattati, ālambitabbe catutthe manosañcetanāhāre 『『dhammo attā』』ti vipallāso ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattati. Ālambitabbe paṭhame 『『rūpaṃ subha』』nti vipallāso paṭhamaṃ kāmupādānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattati. Sesesupi yathārahaṃ nayānusārena yojetvā attho veditabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "如是"即如所說的方式。聖者們施設四道行。由於應當說"為何目的而施設"，所以說"為愚人所習行"等。這稱為歡喜轉方法的地，即依貪愛無明而在染污分以二方式配合四諦，也依止觀而在清凈分以二方式配合四諦。這四種四諦配合是歡喜轉方法的生起、地、生起性。由於應當說"如此四諦配合為歡喜轉方法的生起地，應以何證明"，所以說"因此說"等。 82. 由於應當說"已顯示歡喜轉方法的生起地，應在何處以何方向以何種方式觀察彼歡喜轉方法"，所以說"在諸解釋中"等。"hi"字表示另一方面。在諸解釋中說"善不善"的那些作為方向的食等法，應以二種方式觀察思維那些作為方向的食等法："這些不善法是染污法，這些善法是清凈法"。由於應當詢問"以何二種"，所以說"隨順世間輪迴和隨順出世間還滅"。由於應當詢問"什麼是輪迴，什麼是還滅"，所以說"輪迴即是輪迴，還滅是涅槃"。由於應當詢問"輪迴的什麼是因"，所以說"業煩惱是輪迴的因"。由於應當詢問"什麼是業，是隻有思是業，還是心所與能不能生果也是業"，所以說"其中業"等。"其中"即在那些業煩惱中。如果問"應如何以何種方式見彼業"，應如已造作能生果的業，應在彼積集中見彼業。如果問"應以何法說明那些煩惱"，應以四顛倒說明一切煩惱。如果問"應在何處見彼等煩惱"，應在十事煩惱聚中見彼等煩惱。 如果問"什麼是十事"，應知四食、四顛倒、四取、四軛、四系、四漏、四暴流、四箭、四識住、四不正行為十事，因為以四種作用成為一性。此中煩惱的緣，事欲也是，煩惱也是煩惱事，因為前前煩惱對後後煩惱有緣性。 由於應當詢問"什麼什麼是什麼什麼的事"，所以說"在初食"等。在所緣的第一段食中，第一"色是凈"的顛倒以所緣作用而轉起。在所緣的第二觸食中，第二"觸緣受是樂"的顛倒轉起。在所緣的第三心食中，第三"心是常"的顛倒轉起。在所緣的第四意思食中，"法是我"的顛倒以所緣作用而轉起。在所緣的第一"色是凈"顛倒中，第一欲取以所緣作用而轉起。在其餘中也應隨適宜以方法順序配合而知義。

1. 『『Tesu āhārādīsu katamo katamassa puggalassa upakkileso』』ti vattabbattā 『『tattha yo cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu āhārādīsu, taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritesu vā. Taṇhācaritassa rūpavedanāsu tibbacchandarāgassa uppajjanato yo ca kabaḷīkāro āhāro, yo ca phassāhāro pavattati, ime kabaḷīkārāhāraphassāhārā taṇhācaritassa puggalassa upakkilesā bhavanti. Diṭṭhicaritassa dhammacittesu balavaattaniccābhinivesassa uppajjanato yo ca manosañcetanāhāro, yo ca viññāṇāhāro pavattati, ime manosañcetanāhāraviññāṇāhārā diṭṭhicaritassa puggalassa upakkilesā bhavanti. 『『Tattha yo ca asubhe subha』』ntiādīsupi vuttanayānusārena attho gahetabboti. Purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ taṇhāpadhānattā ceva taṇhāsabhāvattā ca, pacchimānaṃ dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ diṭṭhipadhānattā ceva diṭṭhisabhāvattā cāti.

2. 『『Katamasmiṃ paṭhamādike āhāre katamo paṭhamādiko vipallāso pavattatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha kabaḷīkāre āhāre』』tiādinā nāmavasena niyametvā pubbe vuttatthameva dasseti. 『『Katamasmiṃ vipallāse ṭhito katamaṃ upādiyatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『paṭhame vipallāse ṭhito』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭhame vipallāse ṭhito puggalo kāme yena upādānena upādiyati, idaṃ upādānaṃ 『『kāmupādānaṃ nāmā』』ti vuccati. Sesesu iminā nayena yojanā kātabbā.

『『Yena kāmupādānena kāmehi puggalo saṃyujjati, ayaṃ kāmupādānadhammo 『kāmayogo』ti vuccatī』』tiādinā yojanā kātabbā. Sesānaṃ yojanatthādayo pāḷito, aṭṭhakathāto ca pākaṭā.

1. 『『Āhārādīsu katame katamā disā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha imā catasso disā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu āhāracatukkādīsu dasasu catukkesu paṭhamo paṭhamo kabaḷīkārāhārādiko paṭhamā disā, dutiyo dutiyo phassāhārādiko dutiyā disā, tatiyo tatiyo viññāṇāhārādiko tatiyā disā, catuttho catuttho manosañcetanāhārādiko catutthā disāti veditabbā.

『『Tāsu catūsu disāsu tesu kabaḷīkārāhārādīsu dhammesu katame dhammā katamassa upakkilesā』』ti pucchitabbattā ime āhārādayo dhammā imassa puggalassa upakkilesāti vibhattāti dassetuṃ 『『tattha yo ca kabaḷīkāro āhāro…pe… ime diṭṭhicaritassa udattassa upakkilesā』』ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『kabaḷīkārāhāro āhārotiādi āhārādīsu ye yassa puggalassa upakkilesā, taṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 85) vuttaṃ. Dasannaṃ suttānanti ekadesabhūtānaṃ dasannaṃ suttānaṃ. Atthoti sabhāvadhammo. Saddattho hi asamānoti. 『『Byañjanameva nāna』』nti etena ca saddatthassa nānattaṃ dasseti.

『『Kabaḷīkārāhārādīsu katame āhārādayo katamena vimokkhamukhena pariññaṃ pahānaṃ gacchantī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yo ca kabaḷīkāro』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Itīti evaṃ vuttappakārā. Sabbeti sabbe āhārādayo dhammā lokavaṭṭānusārino bhavanti. Teti te sabbe āhārādayo dhammā. Lokāti lokato vaṭṭato. Tīhi vimokkhamukhehi aniccānupassanādīhi niyyanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 1.30. 等所說。對那些斷見常見，四十三種菩提分法是對治之道。哪些是四十三？"無常想、苦想、無我想"這三種想，和"斷想、離貪想、滅想"這三種想，共六種想；以及"四念處、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七覺支、八道支"，這四十三種菩提分法以觀的方式稱為對治之道。

---

這是一段巴利語復注，我嘗試翻譯如下：

1. 因為需要說明"在這些資食等中，哪個是哪個人的隨煩惱"，所以說"其中誰"等。"其中"指在這些資食等中，或在貪行和見行中。

對於貪行者，由於在色和受中生起強烈的貪慾和貪染，食段食和觸食得以生起，這兩種資食成為貪行者的隨煩惱。對於見行者，由於在法和心中生起強烈的常見我慢，意思識食和思食得以生起，這兩種資食成為見行者的隨煩惱。應按照"其中誰在不凈中見為凈"等處所說的方法來理解。前兩種是以貪為主導，具有貪的本質；后兩種是以見為主導，具有見的本質。

1. 因為需要問"在最初等資食中，最初等顛倒如何生起"，所以通過名稱限定，顯示先前已說過的意義。因為需要問"站在哪種顛倒中，執取什麼"，所以說"站在第一顛倒中"等。

站在第一顛倒中的人，以何種執取執取欲，這種執取稱為"欲執"。其餘的應以此方式類推。

應按照"以何種欲執，人被欲繫縛，這種欲執法稱為'欲軛'"等方式類推。其餘部分的連線意義等可從經文和義注中明瞭。

1. 因為需要問"在資食等中，哪些是哪些方向"，所以說"其中這四個方向"等。

在這十種四組中，第一個是食段食等為第一方向，第二個是觸食等為第二方向，第三個是識食等為第三方向，第四個是意思食等為第四方向。

因為需要問"在這四個方向的資食等法中，哪些法是哪個人的隨煩惱"，所以爲了顯示"這些資食等法是這個人的隨煩惱"而說"其中誰的食段食"等。在義注中說："爲了分別顯示哪些資食等是哪個人的隨煩惱而開始"。

十部經等指部分經文。義指本質法。因為語言義是不同的。"唯是文字"表示語言義的差異。

因為需要問"在食段食等中，哪些資食等以何種解脫門得到了了知和捨棄"，所以說"其中誰的食段食"等。

如是所說的方式。一切資食等法隨世間流轉。這些資食等法。從世間流轉中。以三種解脫門即無常隨觀等而出離。

1. Saṃkilesapakkhe disābhūtā āhāracatukkādayo dasa catukkā dhammā ācariyena niddhāretvā dassitā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『vodānapakkhe katame disābhūtā dhammā』』ti pucchitabbattā vodānapakkhe disābhūte dhamme dassetuṃ 『『catasso paṭipadā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Cattāro vihārāti dibbavihārā brahmavihārā ariyavihārā āneñjavihārāti cattāro vihārā. Tesu rūpāvacarasamāpattiyo dibbavihārā, catasso appamaññāyo brahmavihārā, catasso phalasamāpattiyo ariyavihārā, catasso arūpasamāpattiyo āneñjavihārācattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammāti mānapahānaṃ ālayasamugghāto avijjāpahānaṃ bhavūpasamoti cattāro acchariyaabbhutadhammā. Cattāri adhiṭṭhānānīti saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ upasamādhiṭṭhānanti cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni. Catasso samādhibhāvanāti chandasamādhibhāvanā vīriyasamādhibhāvanā cittasamādhibhāvanā vīmaṃsāsamādhibhāvanāti catasso samādhibhāvanā. Cattārosukhabhāgiyāti indriyasaṃvaro tapo bojjhaṅgo sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggoti cattāro sukhabhāgiyā. Avasesā pākaṭā.

『『Catūsu catūsu paṭipadādīsu katamo paṭipadādiko paṭhamo satipaṭṭhānādiko bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『paṭhamā paṭipadā paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Paṭipadādayo paññāpadaṭṭhānādikā, satipaṭṭhānādayo pana satipadaṭṭhānādikā, tasmā 『paṭhamā paṭipadā paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhāna』ntiādiyojanā kātabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『paṭhamā paṭipadā bhāvitā bahulīkatā paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ pūretī』』tiādi vuttaṃ, pūrakapūretabbabhāvato tathā yojanā kātabbāti adhippāyo. Atha vā 『『bhāvitā bahulīkatā katame paṭipadādayo katame satipaṭṭhānādike pūrentī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『paṭhamā paṭipadā bhāvitā bahulīkatā paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ pūretī』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 86. 老師已確定並顯示染污分中作為方向的食等十種四法，我們也已了知，由於應當詢問"在清凈分中什麼是作為方向的諸法"，為顯示清凈分中作為方向的諸法，所以說"四種行道"等。四住處即：天住處、梵住處、聖住處、不動住處等四住處。其中色界定是天住處，四無量是梵住處，四果定是聖住處，四無色定是不動住處。四種稀有未曾有法即：斷除慢、斷除執著、斷除無明、寂滅有，這四種稀有未曾有法。四種決定即：真實決定、舍離決定、智慧決定、寂靜決定等四種決定。四種定的修習即：欲定修習、精進定修習、心定修習、觀察定修習等四種定的修習。四種樂分即：根律儀、苦行、覺支、一切依的舍離等四種樂分。其餘顯著。 由於應當詢問"在四種行道等中，什麼行道等是第一念住等"，所以說"第一行道是第一念住"等。由於應當說"行道等是慧的近因等，而念住等是念的近因等，因此應作'第一行道是第一念住'等配合"，所以說"修習、多修第一行道圓滿第一念住"等，意思是由於有能圓滿和所圓滿的關係，所以應如是配合。或者由於應當詢問"已修習、多修哪些行道等圓滿哪些念住等"，所以說"修習、多修第一行道圓滿第一念住"等。

1. 『『Tesu dasasu paṭipadācatukkādīsu katame dhammā katamā disā, katame dhammā katamā disā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha imā catasso disā paṭhamā paṭipadā, paṭhamo satipaṭṭhāno』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu dasasu paṭipadācatukkādīsu. Imā mayā vuccamānā paṭhamā paṭipadādayo disā catasso disā bhavanti.

『『Tesu catūsu disābhūtesu paṭipadācatukkādīsu katamo disābhūto attho katamassa puggalassa bhesajja』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha paṭhamā paṭipadā…pe… diṭṭhicaritassa udattassa bhesajja』』nti vuttaṃ.

『『Tesu dasasu paṭipadādicatukkesu dhammesu katamo katamo katamaṃ katamaṃ vimokkhamukha』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha dukkhā ca paṭipadā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Attho pana ṭīkāyaṃ vitthārena vutto pākaṭo. Saṃkilesapakkhe disābhūtā āhāracatukkādayo dasa catukkā samatikkamitabbapahātabbabhāvena niddhāritā, vodānapakkhe pana disābhūtā paṭipadācatukkādayo dasa catukkā samatikkamapahāyakabhāvena niddhāritā.

『『Tesaṃ āhāracatukkādīnaṃ dasannaṃ catukkānaṃ samatikkamanapahānasaṅkhātaṃ yaṃ vikkīḷitañca tesaṃ paṭipadācatukkādīnaṃ dasannaṃ catukkānaṃ bhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ yaṃ vikkīḷitañca sacchikiriyāsaṅkhātaṃ yaṃ vikkīḷitañca atthi, taṃ tividhaṃ vikkīḷitaṃ katamesaṃ puggalānaṃ vikkīḷitaṃ bhavatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tesaṃ vikkīḷita』』nti vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『yathāvuttappakārehi vimokkhamukhehi ye buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakā vimucciṃsu, tesu buddhasseva vikkīḷitaṃ bhavati kiṃ, paccekabuddhasseva vikkīḷitaṃ bhavati kiṃ, sāvakasseva vikkīḷitaṃ bhavati kiṃ, udāhu sabbesaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ vikkīḷitaṃ bhavati ki』』nti vicāraṇāya sambhavato 『『tesaṃ vikkīḷita』』nti vuttaṃ. Yathāvuttappakārehi vimokkhamukhehi ye buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakā mucciṃsu, tesaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ vikkīḷitaṃ. Yaṃ āhāracatukkādīnaṃ dasannaṃ catukkānaṃ saparasantāne samatikkamanapahānañca yā paṭipadācatukkādīnaṃ dasannaṃ catukkānaṃ saparasantāne bhāvanāsampādanā, sacchikiriyāsampādanā ca atthi, idaṃ sabbaṃ vikkīḷitaṃ nāma bhavatīti attho.

『『Sabbesaṃ āhāracatukkādīnaṃ dasannaṃ catukkānaṃ sabbe paṭipadācatukkādayo dasa catukkā paṭipakkhā honti kiṃ, udāhu yathākkamaṃ catukkānaṃ catukkā paṭipakkhā honti ki』』nti vicāraṇāya sambhavato yathākkamaṃ catukkānaṃ catukkā paṭipakkhā honti pahātabbapahāyakabhāvenāti dassento 『『cattāro āhārā tesaṃ paṭipakkho catasso paṭipadā』』tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『idāni āhārādīnaṃ paṭipadādīhi yena samatikkamanaṃ, taṃ nesaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ dassento 『cattāro āhārā tesaṃ paṭipakkho catasso paṭipadā』tiādimāhā』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 87) vuttaṃ. Tattha saṃkilesapakkhe cattāro ye āhārā niddhāritā, tesaṃ catunnaṃ āhārānaṃ vodānapakkhe yā catasso paṭipadā niddhāritā, tā catasso paṭipadā paṭipakkho āhārānaṃ pahātabbattā, paṭipadānaṃ pana pahāyakattā. Satipi āhārānaṃ appahātabbabhāve vipassanārammaṇattā āhārapaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānavasena pahātabbabhāvo vuttoti evamādiyojanā kātabbā.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 87. 由於應當詢問"在那十種行道四法等中，什麼法是什麼方向，什麼法是什麼方向"，所以說"其中這四方向：第一行道、第一念住"等。"其中"即在那十種行道四法等中。這些我所說的第一行道等成為四方向。 由於應當詢問"在那四種作為方向的行道四法等中，什麼作為方向的意義是什麼人的藥"，所以說"其中第一行道......是見行高慢者的藥"。 由於應當詢問"在那十種行道等四法中，什麼什麼是什麼什麼解脫門"，所以說"其中苦行"等。義理在註釋書中已詳細說明顯著。染污分中作為方向的食等十種四法已確定為應超越、應斷除，而清凈分中作為方向的行道等十種四法已確定為能超越、能斷除。 由於應當詢問"那食等十種四法所說的超越斷除之遊戲，以及那行道等十種四法所說的修習之遊戲和證悟之遊戲，這三種遊戲是什麼人的遊戲"，所以說"他們的遊戲"。或者由於可以考慮"以如所說的解脫門而解脫的佛、辟支佛、聲聞中，是隻有佛的遊戲嗎，是隻有辟支佛的遊戲嗎，是隻有聲聞的遊戲嗎，還是所有佛、辟支佛、聲聞的遊戲呢"，所以說"他們的遊戲"。以如所說的解脫門而解脫的佛、辟支佛、聲聞，是他們佛、辟支佛、聲聞的遊戲。食等十種四法在自他相續中的超越斷除，以及行道等十種四法在自他相續中的修習成就、證悟成就，這一切稱為遊戲，此為其義。 由於可以考慮"所有食等十種四法是否都以所有行道等十種四法為對治，還是依次以四法對四法為對治"，為顯示依次以四法對四法為對治，以應斷和能斷的關係，所以說"四食以四行道為對治"等。在註釋書中則說："現在為顯示食等以行道等超越的對治性，所以說'四食以四行道為對治'等"。其中在染污分已確定的四食，以清凈分已確定的四行道為對治，因為諸食應斷除，而諸行道能斷除。雖然諸食因為是觀的所緣而不應斷除，但說以斷除與食相系的欲貪的方式而應斷除，如是等應作配合。

Sīhāti sīhasadisā buddhā ca sīhasadisā paccekabuddhā ca sīhasadisā sāvakā cāti sīhasadisā visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbā. Sāvakā pana ahatarāgadosamohāpi santi, tepi 『『sīhā』』ti maññeyyunti taṃ nivattāpanatthaṃ 『『hatarāgadosamohā』』ti vuttaṃ. Hanitabbāti hatā, rāgo ca doso ca moho ca rāgadosamohā, hatā rāgadosamohā etehi sāvakehīti hatarāgadosamohā, sāvakāti yojanā kātabbā sāvakānaṃyeva byabhicārasambhavatoti. Tesaṃ sīhānaṃ buddhānaṃ, tesaṃ sīhānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ, tesaṃ sīhānaṃ sāvakānaṃ bhāvanā vodānapakkhe bhāvitabbānaṃ bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā ca, sacchikiriyā vodānapakkheyeva sacchikātabbānaṃ phalanibbānānaṃ sacchikiriyā ca, byantīkiriyā saṃkilesapakkhe pahātabbānaṃ pahānasaṅkhātā byantīkiriyā ca vikkīḷitaṃ nāma bhavati.

Indriyādhiṭṭhānanti saddhindriyādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ pavattanaṃ bhāvanā, sacchikiriyā ca. Vipariyāsānadhiṭṭhānanti vipallāsānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ pahānavasena appavattanaṃ, anuppādanañca saṅkhepato vikkīḷitaṃ nāmāti gahitaṃ. Indriyāni saddhindriyādīni saddhammagocaro saddhammassa vodānapakkhassa gocaro pavattanahetūti adhippetāni. Vipariyāsā vipallāsā kilesagocaro saṃkilesapakkhassa gocaro pavattihetūti adhippetā.

『『Cattāro āhārātiādinā saṃkilesapakkhe āhāracatukkādīnaṃ dasannaṃ catukkānaṃ taṇhācaritādīnaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ upakkilesavibhāvanāmukhena yā niddhāraṇā ācariyena katā, 『catasso paṭipadā』tiādinā ca vodānapakkhe paṭipadācatukkādīnaṃ dasannaṃ catukkānaṃ taṇhācaritādīnaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ vodānavibhāvanāmukhena yā niddhāraṇā ācariyena katā, sā ayaṃ niddhāraṇā katamassa nayassa samuṭṭhānaṃ bhūmīti vuccatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ayaṃ vuccati sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ayanti yā ayaṃ vuttanayena dvippakārā niddhāraṇā katā, sā ayaṃ dvippakārā niddhāraṇā sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmi pavattiṭṭhānaṃ samuṭṭhānanti nayasamuṭṭhānakosallehi puggalehi vuccatīti yojanā kātabbāti.

『『Vuttappakārāya niddhāritāya nayassa bhūmibhāvo kasmā viññāyatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena vuttappakārāya niddhāraṇāya nayabhūmibhāvena 『『yo neti…pe… kusalāti cā』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ ācariyo āha, tena vacanena viññāyatīti.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 獅子般的是諸佛，獅子般的是獨覺佛，獅子般的是弟子，應當各自連線。而弟子們確實有未斷除貪嗔癡，他們也可能認為自己是"獅子"，爲了制止這一點，說"未斷除貪嗔癡"。"應當被斬斷"意味著被斬斷，貪、嗔、癡被斬斷，即貪嗔癡被這些弟子斬斷，應當連線弟子，因為只有弟子才可能有過失。 對於這些獅子般的佛，這些獅子般的獨覺佛，這些獅子般的弟子，在清凈階段應當修習的菩提分法的修習與增長，在清凈階段應當現證的果與涅槃的現證，在煩惱階段應當斷除的斷除，被稱為戲耍。 "根的確立"是指信根等諸根的確立、運作、修習和現證。"顛倒的確立"是指通過斷除顛倒來使顛倒不再運作，並概括地不生起，這被稱為戲耍。信根等諸根意在表示正法的領域，清凈階段的領域和運作的因。顛倒意在表示煩惱的領域，染污階段的運作之因。 "四種食"等開始，在染污階段，對十種四組、渴愛性格等四種人，通過顯示隨煩惱而進行的區分，是阿阇梨所做的；在清凈階段，對十種四組、渴愛性格等四種人，通過顯示清凈而進行的區分，這種區分被問及是哪種方法的基礎，因此說"這被稱為獅子戲耍方法的基礎"。在這裡，這種通過所說方法而進行的兩種區分，是獅子戲耍方法的基礎、運作場所，由善於方法的人們所說。 "為什麼通過所述方式確定的方法基礎可以被了知？"因此說"因此"等。通過所述方式的區分，方法基礎被了知，即阿阇梨所說"誰引導……善"等語句，通過這語句可以了知。

Sīhavikkīḷitanayabhūmi ācariyena vibhāvitā, amhehi ca ñātā, 『『katamā tipukkhalanayabhūmī』』ti pucchitabbattā tipukkhalanayabhūmiṃ vibhāvetukāmo 『『tattha ye dukkhāya paṭipadāyā』』tiādimāha. Evaṃ sati 『『ayaṃ saṃkileso, tīṇi akusalamūlānī』』tiādivacanameva ācariyena vattabbaṃ, kasmā pana 『『tattha ye dukkhāya paṭipadāyā』』tiādivacanaṃ vattabbanti? Saccaṃ, tipukkhalanayabhūmibhāvanā pana ugghaṭitaññuādipuggalattayavasena pavattā, tasmā ugghaṭitaññuādipuggalattayaṃ vibhāvetuṃ 『『tattha ye dukkhāya paṭipadāyā』』tiādivacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Evamapi 『『tattha yo sukhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyāti, ayaṃ ugghaṭitaññū』』tiādivacanameva vattabbaṃ , kasmā pana 『『tattha ye dukkhāya paṭipadāyā』』tiādivacanaṃ vattabbanti? Saccaṃ, ugghaṭitaññuādipuggalattayaṃ pana sīhavikkīḷitanayato tipukkhalanayassa niggacchanato nikkhamanato sīhavikkīḷitanayabhūmivibhāvanāyaṃ paṭipadāvibhāgato vibhāvitapuggalacatukkato niddhāritaṃ, sīhavikkīḷitanayabhūmivibhāvanāyaṃ paṭipadāvibhāgato vibhāvitaṃ puggalacatukkaṃ paṭhamaṃ vibhāvetuṃ 『『tattha ye dukkhāya paṭipadāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti yo paṭipadācatukko sīhavikkīḷitanayabhūmivibhāvanāyaṃ niddhārito, tasmiṃ paṭipadācatukke. Yeti ye dandhaudattā diṭṭhicaritapuggalā yathākkamaṃ sukhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya ca sukhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya ca niyyanti, iti niyyakā dve puggalā ca niddhāritā. 『『Tesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ katamo saṃkileso』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ ayaṃ saṃkileso』』ti vissajjetuṃ 『『tesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ ayaṃ saṃkileso』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Cattāro āhārā niddhāritā…pe… cattāri agatigamanāni niddhāritāni, iti ayaṃ dasavidho āhāracatukkādicatukko tesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ saṃkileso hoti. Tesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ saṃkileso ācariyena niddhārito, 『『katamaṃ vodāna』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ idaṃ vodāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Catasso paṭipadā niddhāritā, catasso appamāṇā niddhāritā, iti idaṃ dasavidhaṃ paṭipadācatukkādicatukkabhūtaṃ dhammajātaṃ tesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ vodānaṃ hoti.

獅子戲耍方法的基礎已被阿阇梨闡明，也被我們所知。因為會被問到"什麼是三轉方法的基礎"，爲了闡明三轉方法的基礎，因此說"其中那些以苦行道"等。 如此，阿阇梨應當只說"這是染污，三不善根"等語句，為什麼卻要說"其中那些以苦行道"等語句呢？確實如此，但三轉方法基礎的修習是依據利根等三種人而運作的，因此爲了闡明利根等三種人，說了"其中那些以苦行道"等語句。 即使這樣，也應當只說"其中誰以樂行道速知而解脫，此人是利根者"等語句，為什麼要說"其中那些以苦行道"等語句呢？確實如此，但利根等三種人是從獅子戲耍方法中產生出來的三轉方法，因為是從獅子戲耍方法基礎闡明中的行道分類所闡明的四種人中確定的，爲了首先闡明在獅子戲耍方法基礎闡明中通過行道分類所闡明的四種人，因此說"其中那些以苦行道"等。 "其中"指在獅子戲耍方法基礎闡明中確定的四種行道。"那些"指那些遲鈍和聰慧的見行人，按次第以樂行道遲知和樂行道速知而解脫，如是確定了兩種解脫者。 因為會被問到"這四種人的染污是什麼"，爲了解答"這四種人的染污是這個"，因此說"這四種人的染污是這個"等。確定了四種食...乃至...確定了四種不正行，如是這十種四食等四組是這四種人的染污。 這四種人的染污已被阿阇梨確定，因為會被問到"什麼是清凈"，因此說"這四種人的清凈是這個"等。確定了四種行道，確定了四種無量，如是這十種行道等四組的法性是這四種人的清凈。

1. 『『Tesu catūsu puggalesu katamo puggalo ugghaṭitaññū, katamo puggalo vipañcitaññū, katamo puggalo neyyo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha ye』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Pubbepi 『tattha ye』tiādinā cattāro puggalā niddhāritā, kasmā pana puna 『『tattha ye』tiādinā cattāro puggalā niddhāritā』』ti ce vadeyya? Pubbe saṃkilesavodānaṃ sāmibhāvena niddhāritā, pacchā pana ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ avayavānaṃ samūhabhāvena niddhāritāti visesattho gahetabbo. Tattha ye…pe… ime dve puggalāti ettha yojanattho heṭṭhā vuttasadisova. Tatthāti tesu catūsu puggalesu. Yoti udatto diṭṭhicarito. Ayanti ayaṃ niyato udatto diṭṭhicarito. Puna yoti udattova taṇhācarito ca mando diṭṭhicarito ca. Sādhāraṇāyāti dukkhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya ca sukhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya ca.

『『Ugghaṭitaññuādayo tayo puggalā ācariyena niddhāritā, tesu tīsu puggalesu katamassa katamassa katamaṃ katamaṃ bhagavā upadisatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『paṭipadābhedena puggalabhedo ācariyena vibhāvito, kathaṃ desanābhedena puggalabhedo vibhāvito』』ti vattabbattā desanābhedenapi puggalabhedaṃ vibhāvetuṃ 『『tattha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu tīsu ugghaṭitaññuādīsu puggalesu. 『『Samathadesanāvipassanādesanābhedeneva puggalabhedo vibhāvito』』ti vattabbattā mududhammadesanātikkhadhammadesanābhedenapi puggalabhedaṃ vibhāvetuṃ 『『tattha bhagavā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesesupi evameva anusandhyattho vattabbo.

Visuṃ visuṃ paṭipadābhedena cattāro hutvā visuṃ ca sampiṇḍitā ca paṭipadābhedena ceva desanābhedena ca tayo hontīti vibhāvetuṃ 『『tattha ye』』tiādiṃ puna vatvā 『『iti kho cattāri hutvā tīṇi bhavantī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tattha cattāri tīṇīti liṅgavipallāsaniddeso, 『『cattāro tayo』』ti pana pakatiliṅganiddeso kātabbova.

『『Tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ katamo saṃkileso』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ ayaṃ saṃkileso』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayaṃ saṃkilesoti 『『tīṇi akusalamūlāni…pe… sīlavipatti diṭṭhivipatti ācāravipattī』』ti niddhāritānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ iti ayaṃ samūho saṃkileso hoti. 『『Tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ saṃkileso ācariyena niddhārito, kathaṃ vodānaṃ niddhāritabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ idaṃ vodāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idaṃ vodānanti 『『tīṇi kusalamūlāni…pe… tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni suññataṃ animittaṃ appaṇihita』』nti niddhāritānaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ samūhabhūtaṃ iti idaṃ dhammajātaṃ vodānaṃ hoti.

『『Vuttappakārena cattāro hutvā tayo puggalā bhavantīti ācariyena vibhāvitā, tayo hutvā kittakā puggalā bhavantī』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『iti kho cattāri hutvā tīṇi bhavanti, tīṇi hutvā dve bhavanti taṇhācarito ca diṭṭhicarito cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Itīti heṭṭhā vuttappakārena cattāri cattāro hutvā tīṇi tayo bhavanti. Tīṇi tayo hutvā taṇhācarito ca diṭṭhicarito cāti dve puggalā bhavanti.

『『Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ katamo saṃkileso』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tesaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ ayaṃ saṃkileso』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayaṃ saṃkilesoti 『『taṇhā ca avijjā ca…pe… sassatadiṭṭhi ca ucchedadiṭṭhi cā』』ti niddhāritānaṃ akusaladhammānaṃ iti ayaṃ samūho saṃkileso hoti.

因為會被問到"在這四種人中，哪個人是利根者，哪個人是中根者，哪個人是鈍根者"，所以說"其中那些"等。如果說"以前也用'其中那些'等確定了四種人，為什麼現在又用'其中那些'等確定四種人"？應當理解這特殊含義：前面是以主人的身份確定染污和清凈，後面則是以利根等部分的集合體身份來確定。 "其中那些...這兩種人"，這裡的連線含義與前面所說相同。"其中"指在那四種人中。"誰"指聰慧的見行人。"這"指這確定的聰慧見行人。再次"誰"指聰慧的愛行人和遲鈍的見行人。"共同的"指苦行道速知和樂行道遲知。 因為會被問到"阿阇梨已確定利根等三種人，在這三種人中，世尊對誰說什麼"，所以說"其中世尊"等。或者因為要說"阿阇梨已經通過行道差別闡明人的差別，如何通過教說差別闡明人的差別"，爲了通過教說差別來闡明人的差別，所以說"其中世尊"等。"其中"指在那三種利根等人中。 因為要說"僅通過止觀教說的差別來闡明人的差別"，爲了通過柔軟法教說和銳利法教說的差別來闡明人的差別，所以說"其中世尊"等。在其餘部分也應當這樣說明其連貫意義。 爲了闡明通過各自行道差別成為四種，又通過行道差別和教說差別綜合成三種，所以再次說"其中那些"等，然後說"如是四變成三"。其中"四、三"是性別變化的說明，但應當作"四個、三個"的正常性別說明。 因為會被問到"這三種人的染污是什麼"，所以說"這三種人的染污是這個"等。其中"這個染污"指所確定的"三不善根...乃至...戒敗壞、見敗壞、行為敗壞"等不善法的這個集合是染污。因為要說"阿阇梨已確定這三種人的染污，如何確定清凈"，所以說"這三種人的清凈是這個"等。其中"這個清凈"指所確定的"三善根...乃至...空、無相、無愿三解脫門"等善法的集合，這種法性是清凈。 因為要說"阿阇梨已闡明四變成三種人，三變成幾種人"，所以說"如是四變成三，三變成愛行者和見行者兩種"等。"如是"指按照前面所說的方式，四個變成三個。三個變成愛行者和見行者兩種人。 因為要說"這兩種人的染污是什麼"，所以說"這兩種人的染污是這個"等。其中"這個染污"指所確定的"愛和無明...乃至...常見和斷見"等不善法的這個集合是染污。

『『Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ saṃkileso ācariyena niddhārito, kathaṃ vodāna』』nti vattabbabhāvato 『『tesaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ idaṃ vodāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vodānanti 『『samatho ca vipassanā ca…pe… saupādisesā ca nibbānadhātu, anupādisesā ca nibbānadhātū』』ti niddhāritānaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ samūhabhūtaṃ iti idaṃ dhammajātaṃ vodānaṃ hoti.

『『Tīṇi akusalamūlānī』』tiādinā saṃkilesapakkhe akusalamūlatikādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ dvādasannaṃ tikānaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññuādipuggalānaṃ saṃkilesavibhāvanāmukhena yā niddhāraṇā katā, 『『tīṇi kusalamūlānī』』tiādinā vodānapakkhe kusalamūlatikādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ dvādasannaṃ tikānaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññuādipuggalānaṃ vodānavibhāvanāmukhena yā niddhāraṇā katā, ayaṃ vuttappakāraniddhāraṇā tipukkhalassa ca nayassa, aṅkusassa ca nayassa bhūmi samuṭṭhānaṃ pavattihetu nāmāti yojetvā 『『taṇhā ca avijjā cā』』tiādinā saṃkilesapakkhe taṇhāavijjādukādīnaṃ pannarasannaṃ dukānaṃ, dvinnaṃ taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritānaṃ puggalānaṃ vodānavibhāvanāmukhena yā niddhāraṇā katā, 『『samatho ca vipassanā cā』』tiādinā vodānapakkhe samathavipassanādukādīnaṃ ekūnavīsatidukānaṃ, dvinnaṃ taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritānaṃ puggalānaṃ vodānavibhāvanāmukhena yā niddhāraṇā katā, ayaṃ vuttappakārā nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa bhūmītipi nīharitvā yojetabbā. Puggalādhiṭṭhānavasena hi nandiyāvaṭṭanayato sīhavikkīḷitanayassa sambhavo, sīhavikkīḷitanayato ca tipukkhalanayassa sambhavo hoti. Dhammādhiṭṭhānavasena pana sīhavikkīḷitanayato tipukkhalanayassa sambhavo, tipukkhalanayato ca nandiyāvaṭṭanayassa sambhavo hoti. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ 『『ante 『taṇhā ca avijjā cā』tiādinā samathassa nayassa bhūmi dassitā. Teneva hi 『cattāri hutvā tīṇi bhavanti, tīṇi hutvā dve bhavantī』ti vutta』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 88).

『『Kasmā pana ayaṃ vuttappakārāya niddhāraṇāya tipukkhalassa ca nayassa, aṅkusassa ca nayassa bhūmibhāvo viññāyatī』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena yathāvuttassa niddhāraṇāya bhūmibhāvena ācariyo 『『yo akusale…pe… disālocanenāti cā』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena vuttappakārāya niddhāraṇāya tipukkhala…pe… yassa bhūmibhāvo viññāyatīti attho.

『『Ettāvatā nayasamuṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti, aññaṃ natthī』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyuttaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』』nti vuttaṃ. Yena yena nayasamuṭṭhānena saṃkilesapakkhe vā akusalā dhammā niddhāritā , vodānapakkhe vā kusalā dhammā niddhāritā, taṃ taṃ nayasamuṭṭhānaṃ niyuttaṃ yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabbanti attho gahetabbo.

因為要說"阿阇梨已確定這兩種人的染污，如何確定清凈"，所以說"這兩種人的清凈是這個"等。"這個清凈"指所確定的"止和觀...乃至...有餘依涅槃界和無餘依涅槃界"等善法的總和，這種法性是清凈。 通過"三不善根"等，在染污方面，通過顯示三種利根等人的染污而進行的十二種三法組和兩個不善根三法組的確定；通過"三善根"等，在清凈方面，通過顯示三種利根等人的清凈而進行的十二種三法組和兩個善根三法組的確定，這種所述方式的確定是三轉方法和鉤索方法的基礎、生起、運作因。 連線起來說，通過"愛和無明"等，在染污方面，通過顯示兩種愛行見行人的染污而進行的十五種二法組的確定；通過"止和觀"等，在清凈方面，通過顯示兩種愛行見行人的清凈而進行的十九種二法組的確定，這種所述方式是歡喜輪轉方法的基礎。應當這樣引申連線。因為依據人的確立，從歡喜輪轉方法產生獅子戲耍方法，從獅子戲耍方法產生三轉方法。而依據法的確立，從獅子戲耍方法產生三轉方法，從三轉方法產生歡喜輪轉方法。因此註釋中說："最後通過'愛和無明'等顯示止息方法的基礎。正是因此說'四變成三，三變成二'"。 因為要說"為什麼通過所述方式的確定而了知這是三轉方法和鉤索方法的基礎"，所以說"因此"等。以此阿阇梨說"誰在不善...乃至...觀察方向"等語句，通過這語句了知所述方式的確定是三轉等方法的基礎，這是其意義。 因為要說"至此方法生起已完整，再無其他"，所以說"已確立方法生起"。應當理解其意義是：通過任何方法生起而在染污方面確定不善法，或在清凈方面確定善法，那些方法生起都應當適當地確定和聯繫。

Nayakkamena pana saṅkhepato dassayissāmi – dve puggalā, tayo puggalā, cattāro puggalāti puggalā tikoṭṭhāsā bhavanti, catudisā, chadisā, aṭṭhadisāti disāpi tikoṭṭhāsā bhavanti. Tattha dve puggalāti taṇhācarito puggalo, diṭṭhicarito puggaloti dve puggalā bhavanti. Tayo puggalāti ugghaṭitaññupuggalo, vipañcitaññupuggalo, neyyapuggaloti tayo puggalā bhavanti. Cattāro puggalāti dukkhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññādibhedena bhinnā mudindriyo taṇhācarito puggalo, mudindriyo diṭṭhicarito puggalo, tikkhindriyo taṇhācarito puggalo, tikkhindriyo diṭṭhicarito puggaloti cattāro puggalā bhavanti. Catudisāti saṃkilesapakkhe dve dve disā, vodānapakkhe dve dve disāti catudisā bhavanti. Chadisāti saṃkilesapakkhe tisso tisso disā, vodānapakkhe tisso tisso disāti chadisā bhavanti. Aṭṭhadisāti saṃkilesapakkhe catasso catasso disā, vodānapakkhe catasso catasso disāti aṭṭhadisā bhavanti. Tesu dve dve taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicarite puggale, catudisā ca nissāya nandiyāvaṭṭanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Tayo ugghaṭitaññuvipañcitaññuneyyapuggale ca chadisā ca nissāya tipukkhalanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Dukkhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññādibhedena bhinne cattāro mudindriyataṇhācaritatikkhindriyataṇhācaritamudindriyadiṭṭhicaritatikkhindriyadiṭṭhicarite puggale ca aṭṭhadisā ca nissāya sīhavikkīḷitanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati . Ekekasmiṃ nayasamuṭṭhāne vibhajite disālocanaaṅkusanayasamuṭṭhānānipi vibhajitāni bhavanti.

『『Kathaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavatī』』ti ce vadeyya? 『『Taṇhā ca avijjā ca ahirikañca anottappañca assati ca asampajaññañca ayonisomanasikāro ca kosajjañca dovacassañca ahaṃkāro ca mamaṃkāro ca assaddhā ca pamādo ca asaddhammassavanañca asaṃvaro ca abhijjhā ca byāpādo ca nīvaraṇañca saṃyojanañca kodho ca upanāho ca makkho ca paḷāso ca issā ca maccherañca māyā ca sāṭheyyañca sassatadiṭṭhi ca ucchedadiṭṭhi cā』』ti (netti. 88) dukadukavasena desito ayaṃ disābhūto akusaladhammasamūho dvinnaṃ taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritānaṃ puggalānaṃ saṃkileso hotīti saṃkilesapakkhe saṃkilesasāmaññabhāvena yojetvā 『『imesu pannarasasu dukadukavasena desitesu disābhūtesu akusaladhammesu katamo akusaladhammo katamassa puggalassa disā』』ti manasāva disādhammabhāvena oloketvā 『『ayaṃ ayaṃ paṭhamo paṭhamo akusaladhammo taṇhācaritassa puggalassa saṃkilesapakkhe paṭhamā disā nāma, ayaṃ ayaṃ dutiyo dutiyo akusaladhammo diṭṭhicaritassa puggalassa saṃkilesapakkhe dutiyā disā nāmā』』ti visuṃ visuṃ yojetvā samudayasaccadukkhasaccāni yathārahaṃ nīharitvā vibhajitabbadhammasabhāvo ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassito, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca nandiyāvaṭṭanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati, tassa olokanā ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca disālocananayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati, tathā oloketvā disāvisesabhūtassa dhammavisesassa puggalānaṃ nayanañca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayati, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca aṅkusanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 現在我將簡要地說明 - 有兩種人、三種人、四種人，這樣人分為三類，有四方、六方、八方，方位也分為三類。其中兩種人是：貪慾行者、邪見行者，這就是兩種人。三種人是：利根者、中根者、鈍根者，這就是三種人。四種人是：根據苦行遲鈍通達等差別而分，即鈍根貪慾行者、鈍根邪見行者、利根貪慾行者、利根邪見行者，這就是四種人。四方是：染污分兩方，清凈分兩方，這就是四方。六方是：染污分三方，清凈分三方，這就是六方。八方是：染污分四方，清凈分四方，這就是八方。在這些中，依據兩種貪慾行者和邪見行者以及四方而生起歡喜輪轉方法。依據三種利根、中根、鈍根之人以及六方而生起三翻方法。依據苦行遲鈍通達等差別所分的四種鈍根貪慾行者、利根貪慾行者、鈍根邪見行者、利根邪見行者以及八方而生起獅子游戲方法。在每一種方法生起中分別時，方位觀察調御方法也都被分別了。 若問："如何生起歡喜輪轉方法？"答："貪愛與無明、無慚與無愧、失念與不正知、不如理作意與懈怠、難教與我執、我所執與不信、放逸與不聞正法、不防護與貪慾、嗔恚與障礙、結縛與忿怒、惱害與覆藏、惱害與嫉妒、慳吝與誑騙、詐偽與常見、斷見"，這些以二法二法方式所說的、作為方位的不善法集合，成為兩種貪慾行者和邪見行者的染污。在染污分中，以染污共同性相結合，以心思維："在這十五對以二法二法方式所說的、作為方位的不善法中，哪個不善法是哪種人的方位？"以方位法性觀察后，"這第一類不善法是貪慾行者在染污分中的第一方位，這第二類不善法是邪見行者在染污分中的第二方位"，如此分別結合，適當地引出集諦和苦諦，以及所應分別的法性和以某種特殊解釋所顯示的，這種特殊解釋就是歡喜輪轉方法的生起。對它的觀察以某種特殊解釋所顯示的，這種特殊解釋就是方位觀察方法的生起。如此觀察后，對作為特殊方位的特殊法引導諸補特伽羅，以某種特殊解釋來引導的，這種特殊解釋就是調御方法的生起。

『『Samatho ca vipassanā ca, hirī ca ottappañca, sati ca sampajaññañca, yonisomanasikāro ca vīriyārambho ca, sovacassañca dhamme ñāṇañca anvaye ñāṇañca, khaye ñāṇañca anuppāde ñāṇañca, saddhā ca appamādo ca, saddhammassavanañca saṃvaro ca, anabhijjhā ca abyāpādo ca, rāgavirāgā ca cetovimutti, avijjāvirāgā ca paññāvimutti, abhisamayo ca appicchatā ca, santuṭṭhi ca akkodho ca, anupanāho ca amakkho ca, apaḷāso ca issāpahānañca macchariyappahānañca vijjā ca, vimutti ca saṅkhatārammaṇo ca vimokkho, asaṅkhatārammaṇo ca vimokkho, saupādisesā ca nibbānadhātu, anupādisesā ca nibbānadhātū』』ti (netti. 88) tikadukavasena desitaṃ idaṃ disābhūtaṃ kusalasamūhadhammajātaṃ dvinnaṃ taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritānaṃ puggalānaṃ vodānaṃ hotīti vodānapakkhe vodānasāmaññabhāvena yojetvā 『『imesu ekūnavīsatiyā dukadukavasena vā desitesu disābhūtesu dhammesu katamo katamo kusaladhammo katamassa katamassa puggalassa disā』』ti manasāva disādhammabhāvena oloketvā 『『ayaṃ paṭhamo paṭhamo kusaladhammo taṇhācaritassa puggalassa vodānapakkhe paṭhamā disā nāma, ayaṃ dutiyo dutiyo kusaladhammo diṭṭhicaritassa puggalassa vodānapakkhe dutiyā disā nāmā』』ti visuṃ visuṃ yojetvā maggasaccanirodhasaccāni yathārahaṃ nīharitvā vibhajitabbadhammabhāvo ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassito, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca nandiyāvaṭṭanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati, tassa olokanā ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca disālocananayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati, tathā oloketvā disāvisesabhūtassa dhammavisesassa puggalānaṃ nayanañca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayati, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca aṅkusanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "止與觀，慚與愧，念與正知，如理作意與精進，柔和與法智、類智，盡智與無生智，信與不放逸，聞正法與防護，無貪與無嗔，離貪心解脫、離無明慧解脫，現觀與少欲，知足與無忿，無惱害與無覆藏，無惱害與斷除嫉妒、斷除慳吝與明，解脫與緣有為解脫，緣無為解脫，有餘依涅槃界與無餘依涅槃界"，這些以三法二法方式所說的、作為方位的善法集，成為兩種貪慾行者和邪見行者的清凈。在清凈分中，以清凈共同性相結合，以心思維："在這十九對以二法二法方式所說的、作為方位的諸法中，哪些善法是哪些人的方位？"以方位法性觀察后，"這第一類善法是貪慾行者在清凈分中的第一方位，這第二類善法是邪見行者在清凈分中的第二方位"，如此分別結合，適當地引出道諦和滅諦，以及所應分別的法性和以某種特殊解釋所顯示的，這種特殊解釋就是歡喜輪轉方法的生起。對它的觀察以某種特殊解釋所顯示的，這種特殊解釋就是方位觀察方法的生起。如此觀察后，對作為特殊方位的特殊法引導諸補特伽羅，以某種特殊解釋來引導的，這種特殊解釋就是調御方法的生起。

『『Kathaṃ tipukkhalanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavatī』』ti ce puccheyya, 『『tīṇi akusalamūlāni – lobho akusalamūlaṃ, doso akusalamūlaṃ, moho akusalamūlaṃ. Tīṇi duccaritāni – kāyaduccaritaṃ , vacīduccaritaṃ, manoduccaritaṃ. Tayo akusalavitakkā – kāmavitakko, byāpādavitakko, vihiṃsāvitakko. Tisso akusalasaññā – kāmasaññā, byāpādasaññā, vihiṃsāsaññā. Tisso viparītasaññā – niccasaññā, sukhasaññā, attasaññā. Tisso vedanā – sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Tisso dukkhatā – dukkhadukkhatā, saṅkhāradukkhatā, vipariṇāmadukkhatā. Tayo aggī – rāgaggi, dosaggi, mohaggi. Tayo sallā – rāgasallo, dosasallo, mohasallo. Tisso jaṭā – rāgajaṭā, dosajaṭā, mohajaṭā. Tisso akusalūpaparikkhā – akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ , akusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ, akusalaṃ manokammaṃ. Tisso vipattiyo – sīlavipatti, diṭṭhivipatti, ācāravipattī』』ti (netti. 88) tikavasena desito ayaṃ disābhūto akusaladhammasamūho tiṇṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññuvipañcitaññuneyyapuggalānaṃ saṃkileso hotīti saṃkilesapakkhe saṃkilesasāmaññabhāvena yojetvā 『『imesu dvādasasu tikatikavasena desitesu disābhūtesu akusaladhammesu katamo katamo akusalo dhammo katamassa katamassa puggalassa disā』』ti manasāva disādhammabhāvena oloketvā 『『ayaṃ ayaṃ paṭhamo paṭhamo akusaladhammo ugghaṭitaññupuggalassa saṃkilesapakkhe paṭhamā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ dutiyo dutiyo akusaladhammo vipañcitaññupuggalassa saṃkilesapakkhe dutiyā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ tatiyo tatiyo akusaladhammo neyyassa puggalassa saṃkilesapakkhe tatiyā disā nāmā』』ti visuṃ visuṃ yojetvā samudayasaccadukkhasaccāni yathārahaṃ nīharitvā vibhajitabbadhammasabhāvo ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassito. So saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca tipukkhalanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Tassa olokanā ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca disālocananayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati tathā oloketvā disāvisesabhūtassa dhammavisesassa puggalānaṃ nayanañca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayati, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso aṅkusanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 若問："如何生起三翻方法？"應答："三不善根：貪不善根、嗔不善根、癡不善根。三種惡行：身惡行、語惡行、意惡行。三種不善尋：欲尋、嗔恚尋、傷害尋。三種不善想：欲想、嗔恚想、傷害想。三種顛倒想：常想、樂想、我想。三種受：樂受、苦受、不苦不樂受。三種苦性：苦苦性、行苦性、壞苦性。三種火：貪火、嗔火、癡火。三種箭：貪箭、嗔箭、癡箭。三種結：貪結、嗔結、癡結。三種不善觀察：不善身業、不善語業、不善意業。三種失壞：戒失壞、見失壞、行失壞。"這些以三法方式所說的、作為方位的不善法集合，成為利根者、中根者、鈍根者三種人的染污。在染污分中，以染污共同性相結合，以心思維："在這十二組以三法三法方式所說的、作為方位的不善法中，哪些不善法是哪些人的方位？"以方位法性觀察后，"這第一類不善法是利根者在染污分中的第一方位。這第二類不善法是中根者在染污分中的第二方位。這第三類不善法是鈍根者在染污分中的第三方位"，如此分別結合，適當地引出集諦和苦諦，以及所應分別的法性和以某種特殊解釋所顯示的。這種特殊解釋就是三翻方法的生起。對它的觀察以某種特殊解釋所顯示的，這種特殊解釋就是方位觀察方法的生起。如此觀察后，對作為特殊方位的特殊法引導諸補特伽羅，以某種特殊解釋來引導的，這種特殊解釋就是調御方法的生起。

『『Tīṇi kusalamūlāni – alobho kusalamūlaṃ, adoso kusalamūlaṃ, amoho kusalamūlaṃ. Tīṇi sucaritāni – kāyasucaritaṃ, vacīsucaritaṃ, manosucaritaṃ. Tayo kusalavitakkā – nekkhammavitakko, abyāpādavitakko, avihiṃsāvitakko. Tayo samādhī – savitakko savicāro samādhi, avitakko vicāramatto samādhi, avitakko avicāro samādhi. Tisso kusalasaññā – nekkhammasaññā, abyāpādasaññā, avihiṃsāsaññā. Tisso aviparītasaññā – aniccasaññā, dukkhasaññā, anattasaññā. Tisso kusalūpaparikkhā – kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ, kusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ, kusalaṃ manokammaṃ. Tīṇi soceyyāni – kāyasoceyyaṃ, vacīsoceyyaṃ, manosoceyyaṃ. Tisso sampattiyo – sīlasampatti, samādhisampatti, paññāsampatti . Tisso sikkhā – adhisīlasikkhā, adhicittasikkhā , adhipaññāsikkhā. Tayo khandhā – sīlakkhandho, samādhikkhandho, paññākkhandho. Tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni – suññataṃ, animittaṃ, appaṇihita』』nti (netti. 88) tikatikavasena desitaṃ idaṃ disābhūtaṃ kusalasamūhadhammajātaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññuvipañcitaññuneyyapuggalānaṃ vodānaṃ hotīti vodānapakkhe vodānasāmaññabhāvena yojetvā 『『imesu dvīsu dvādasasu tikatikavasena desitesu disābhūtesu kusaladhammesu katamo katamo kusaladhammo katamassa katamassa puggalassa disā』』ti manasāva disādhammabhāvena oloketvā 『『ayaṃ ayaṃ paṭhamo paṭhamo kusaladhammo ugghaṭitaññupuggalassa vodānapakkhe paṭhamā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ dutiyo dutiyo kusalo dhammo vipañcitaññupuggalassa vodānapakkhe dutiyā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ tatiyo tatiyo kusaladhammo neyyapuggalassa vodānapakkhe tatiyā disā nāmā』』ti visuṃ visuṃ disābhāvena yojetvā maggasaccanirodhasaccāni yathārahaṃ nīharitvā vibhajitabbadhammasabhāvo ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassito. So saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca tipukkhalanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Tassa olokanā ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca disālocananayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Tathā oloketvā disāvisesabhūtassa dhammassa puggalānaṃ nayanañca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayati, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca aṅkusanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： "三善根：無貪善根、無嗔善根、無癡善根。三種善行：身善行、語善行、意善行。三種善尋：出離尋、無嗔恚尋、無傷害尋。三種定：有尋有伺定、無尋唯伺定、無尋無伺定。三種善想：出離想、無嗔恚想、無傷害想。三種不顛倒想：無常想、苦想、無我想。三種善觀察：善身業、善語業、善意業。三種清凈：身清凈、語清凈、意清凈。三種成就：戒成就、定成就、慧成就。三種學：增上戒學、增上心學、增上慧學。三蘊：戒蘊、定蘊、慧蘊。三解脫門：空、無相、無愿。"這些以三法三法方式所說的、作為方位的善法集，成為利根者、中根者、鈍根者三種人的清凈。在清凈分中，以清凈共同性相結合，以心思維："在這兩組十二類以三法三法方式所說的、作為方位的善法中，哪些善法是哪些人的方位？"以方位法性觀察后，"這第一類善法是利根者在清凈分中的第一方位。這第二類善法是中根者在清凈分中的第二方位。這第三類善法是鈍根者在清凈分中的第三方位"，如此分別以方位性相結合，適當地引出道諦和滅諦，以及所應分別的法性和以某種特殊解釋所顯示的。這種特殊解釋就是三翻方法的生起。對它的觀察以某種特殊解釋所顯示的，這種特殊解釋就是方位觀察方法的生起。如此觀察后，對作為特殊方位的法引導諸補特伽羅，以某種特殊解釋來引導的，這種特殊解釋就是調御方法的生起。

『『Kathaṃ sīhavikkīḷitanayasamuṭṭhāna』』nti ce puccheyya, 『『cattāro āhārā, cattāro vipallāsā, cattāri upādānāni, cattāro yogā, cattāro ganthā, cattāro āsavā, cattāro oghā, cattāro sallā, catasso viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, cattāri agatigamanānī』』ti (netti. 87) catukkacatukkavasena desito ayaṃ disābhūto catukko catukko akusaladhammo 『『dukkhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyakassa mudindriyassa taṇhācaritassa ca dukkhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyakassa tikkhindriyassa taṇhācaritassa ca sukhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyakassa mudindriyassa diṭṭhicaritassa ca sukhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyakassa tikkhindriyassa diṭṭhicaritassa cā』』ti catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ saṃkilesoti saṃkilesapakkhe saṃkilesasāmaññabhāvena yojetvā 『『imesu catukkacatukkavasena desitesu dasasu catukkesu dhammesu katamo katamo akusaladhammo katamassa katamassa puggalassa disā』』ti manasāva saṃkilesapakkhe disādhammabhāvena oloketvā 『『ayaṃ ayaṃ paṭhamo paṭhamo akusaladhammo dukkhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyakassa mudindriyassa taṇhācaritassa puggalassa paṭhamā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ dutiyo dutiyo akusaladhammo dukkhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyakassa tikkhindriyassa taṇhācaritassa puggalassa dutiyā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ tatiyo tatiyo akusaladhammo sukhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyakassa mudindriyassa diṭṭhicaritassa puggalassa tatiyā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ catuttho catuttho akusaladhammo sukhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyakassa tikkhindriyassa diṭṭhicaritassa puggalassa catutthā disā nāmā』』ti visuṃ visuṃ disābhāvena yojetvā, samudayasaccadukkhasaccāni yathārahaṃ nīharitvā, vibhajitabbadhammasabhāvo ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassito. So saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca sīhavikkīḷitanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Tassa olokanā ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca disālocananayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Tathā oloketvā disāvisesabhūtassa dhammassa puggalānaṃ nayanañca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayati, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca aṅkusanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 若問："如何生起獅子游戲方法？"應答："四種食、四種顛倒、四種取、四種軛、四種結、四種漏、四種暴流、四種箭、四種識住、四種不正行"，這些以四法四法方式所說的、作為方位的四類四類不善法，是"苦行遲鈍通達的鈍根貪慾行者、苦行速疾通達的利根貪慾行者、樂行遲鈍通達的鈍根邪見行者、樂行速疾通達的利根邪見行者"四種人的染污。在染污分中，以染污共同性相結合，以心思維："在這以四法四法方式所說的十組四法中，哪些不善法是哪些人的方位？"以心在染污分中以方位法性觀察后，"這第一類不善法是苦行遲鈍通達的鈍根貪慾行者的第一方位。這第二類不善法是苦行速疾通達的利根貪慾行者的第二方位。這第三類不善法是樂行遲鈍通達的鈍根邪見行者的第三方位。這第四類不善法是樂行速疾通達的利根邪見行者的第四方位"，如此分別以方位性相結合，適當地引出集諦和苦諦，以及所應分別的法性和以某種特殊解釋所顯示的。這種特殊解釋就是獅子游戲方法的生起。對它的觀察以某種特殊解釋所顯示的，這種特殊解釋就是方位觀察方法的生起。如此觀察后，對作為特殊方位的法引導諸補特伽羅，以某種特殊解釋來引導的，這種特殊解釋就是調御方法的生起。

『『Catasso paṭipadā, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāri jhānāni, cattāro vihārā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammā, cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni, catasso samādhibhāvanā, cattāro sukhabhāgiyā dhammā, catasso appamāṇā』』ti (netti. 86) catukkacatukkavasena desitaṃ idaṃ disābhūtaṃ kusalasamūhadhammajātaṃ 『『dukkhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyakassa mudindriyassa taṇhācaritassa ca dukkhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyakassa tikkhindriyassa taṇhācaritassa ca sukhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyakassa mudindriyassa diṭṭhicaritassa sa sukhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyakassa tikkhindriyassa diṭṭhicaritassa cā』』ti catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ vodānaṃ hotīti vodānapakkhe vodānasāmaññabhāvena yojetvā 『『imesu catukkacatukkavasena desitesu dasasu catukkesu kusaladhammesu katamo katamo kusaladhammo katamassa katamassa puggalassa disā』』ti manasāva disādhammabhāvena oloketvā, 『『ayaṃ ayaṃ paṭhamo paṭhamo kusaladhammo dukkhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyakassa mudindriyassa taṇhācaritassa puggalassa paṭhamā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ dutiyo dutiyo kusaladhammo dukkhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyakassa tikkhindriyassa taṇhācaritassa puggalassa dutiyā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ tatiyo tatiyo kusaladhammo sukhāya paṭipadāya dandhābhiññāya niyyakassa mudindriyassa diṭṭhicaritassa puggalassa tatiyā disā nāma. Ayaṃ ayaṃ catuttho catuttho kusaladhammo sukhāya paṭipadāya khippābhiññāya niyyakassa tikkhindriyassa diṭṭhicaritassa puggalassa catutthā disā nāmā』』ti visuṃ visuṃ disābhāvena yojetvā, maggasaccanirodhasaccāni yathārahaṃ nīharitvā, vibhajitabbadhammasabhāvo ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassito. So saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca sīhavikkīḷitanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Tassa olokanā ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena dassitā. So saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca disālocananayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Tathā oloketvā disāvisesassa dhammassa puggalānaṃ nayanañca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayati, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso ca aṅkusanayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavatīti nayakkamena saṅkhepato nayasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhavatīti viññātabbanti.

Iti nayasamuṭṭhāne sattibalānurūpā racitā

Vibhāvanā niṭṭhitā.

Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.

Sāsanapaṭṭhānavibhāvanā

這是完整的巴利文直譯: "四種行道、四念處、四禪那、四住處、四正勤、四種稀有未曾有法、四種決意、四種禪修、四種導向安樂之法、四種無量"(《導論》86),這是以四四法方式所說的作為方位的善法集合。"對於以苦行道、遲鈍智、軟弱根性、貪行者,以苦行道、速疾智、利根性、貪行者,以樂行道、遲鈍智、軟弱根性、見行者,以樂行道、速疾智、利根性、見行者"這四種人的清凈,在清凈分中以清凈共性相連線后,以心觀察"在這以四四法方式所說的十種四法中,哪些善法是哪些補特伽羅的方位",思維"這第一善法是苦行道、遲鈍智、軟弱根性、貪行補特伽羅的第一方位。這第二善法是苦行道、速疾智、利根性、貪行補特伽羅的第二方位。這第三善法是樂行道、遲鈍智、軟弱根性、見行補特伽羅的第三方位。這第四善法是樂行道、速疾智、利根性、見行補特伽羅的第四方位。"分別以方位性相連線,適當地引出道諦和滅諦,所應分別的法性以特殊註釋方式顯示。這特殊註釋方式即是獅子游戲法的生起。對此的觀察以特殊註釋方式顯示。這特殊註釋方式即是方位觀察法的生起。如是觀察方位特殊法和補特伽羅的引導以特殊註釋方式引導,這特殊註釋方式即是鉤法的生起,應當了知以法的次第簡要說明法的生起。 如是依能力所作的法生起 解釋終。 諸智者應當依照註釋書和復注書詳細分別理解甚深義理。 教法緣起解釋

1. 『『Tattha katamaṃ nayasamuṭṭhāna』』ntiādinā ācariyena sabbathā nayasamuṭṭhānaṃ ṭhapitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『soḷasahārapañcanayaaṭṭhārasamūlapadesu aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā kathaṃ vibhattā, kuhiṃ amhehi daṭṭhabbā』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tattha aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu soḷasahārapañcanayaaṭṭhārasamūlapadesu aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā kena padena ācariyena vibhattā, kuhiṃ amhehi vitthārato daṭṭhabbāti pucchati. Aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā sāsanapaṭṭhāne mayā vibhattā, tumhehi ca vitthārato sāsanapaṭṭhāne daṭṭhabbāti vissajjeti. Vibhattāyeva hi aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā daṭṭhabbā bhavanti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 89) pana –

『『Evaṃ sabbathā nayasamuṭṭhānaṃ vibhajitvā idāni sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ vibhajanto yasmā saṅgahavārādīsu mūlapadeheva paṭṭhānaṃ saṅgahetvā sarūpato na dassitaṃ, tasmā yathā mūlapadehi paṭṭhānaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ, evaṃ paṭṭhānatopi mūlapadāni niddhāretabbānīti dassanatthaṃ 『aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbā? Sāsanapaṭṭhāne』ti āhā』』ti –

Vuttaṃ. Sāsanapaṭṭhāne aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā daṭṭhabbāti ācariyena vuttā, 『『katamaṃ taṃ sāsanapaṭṭhāna』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhāna』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu aṭṭhārasamūlapadasāsanapaṭṭhānesu katamaṃ taṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānanti idāni mayā niddhāriyamānaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyādisuttaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti vissajjeti. Sāsananti pariyattisāsanaṃ. Paṭṭhānanti tassa pariyattisāsanassa saṃkilesabhāgiyatādīhi pakārehi ṭhānaṃ pavattanaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ, taṃdīpanasuttaṃ pana idha paṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tena vuttaṃ – 『『saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』ntiādi. Atha vā sāsananti adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsikkhattayaṃ sāsanaṃ nāma, taṃ sikkhattayaṃ patiṭṭhahati etena saṃkilesādināti paṭṭhānaṃ, sikkhattayassa sāsanassa paṭṭhānanti sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadādhārabhūtaṃ suttampi ṭhānyūpacārato sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Taṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ –

『『Saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ, saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ, vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ, taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, diṭṭhisaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, duccaritasaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, taṇhāvodānabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, diṭṭhivodānabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ, duccaritavodānabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』nti –

Vuttaṃ. 『『Tesu suttesu ye saṃkilesādayo bhagavatā vuttā, tesu saṃkilesādīsu saṃkileso kittako』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha saṃkileso tividho taṇhāsaṃkileso diṭṭhisaṃkileso duccaritasaṃkileso』』ti vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu suttantesu saṃkilesādīsu dhammesu. 『『Tividhe tasmiṃ saṃkilese taṇhāsaṃkileso katamena kusalena visujjhatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha taṇhāsaṃkileso samathena visujjhatī』』ti vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ tividhe taṇhāsaṃkilesādike. 『『So samatho khandhesu katamo khandho』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『so samatho samādhikkhandho』』ti vuttaṃ.

這是巴利文的完整直譯： "此中何為法生起"等,由阿阇黎從各方面確立了法生起,我們也已了知,"在十六種引導、五種法及十八根本句中,十八根本句如何分別,我們應在何處觀察",因此說"此中十八根本句應在何處觀察"等。此中:在那些十六種引導、五種法及十八根本句中,阿阇黎以何句分別十八根本句,我們應在何處詳細觀察?回答:十八根本句已在教法緣起中被我分別,你們也應在教法緣起中詳細觀察。因為已分別的十八根本句應當被觀察。在註釋書(《導論注》89)中說: "如是從各方面分別法生起后,現在要分別教法緣起,因為在攝集品等中只以根本句攝集緣起而未明顯顯示其本質,所以爲了顯示應當如何由根本句確定緣起,也應當由緣起確定根本句,因此說'十八根本句應在何處觀察?在教法緣起中'。" 阿阇黎說應當在教法緣起中觀察十八根本句,因為應當詢問"何為彼教法緣起",所以說"此中何為教法緣起"等。此中:在那些十八根本句和教法緣起中,何為彼教法緣起?回答:現在我所確定的,世尊所說的雜染分等經即是教法緣起。教法即是教理教法。緣起即是彼教理教法以雜染分等方式的安立、轉起為緣起,而顯示此的經在此稱為緣起。或者,教法即是增上戒、增上心、增上慧三學為教法,由此雜染等而安立三學,故稱緣起,是三學教法的緣起故稱教法緣起。作為彼之所依的經,依止處的假說也稱為教法緣起。為顯示彼教法緣起經的本質而說: "雜染分經、習氣分經、通達分經、無學分經、雜染分及習氣分經、雜染分及通達分經、雜染分及無學分經、雜染分及通達分及無學分經、雜染分及習氣分及通達分經、習氣分及通達分經、渴愛雜染分經、見雜染分經、惡行雜染分經、渴愛清凈分經、見清凈分經、惡行清凈分經。" 因為應當詢問"在彼等經中,世尊所說的雜染等,在彼等雜染等中雜染有幾種",所以說"此中雜染有三種:渴愛雜染、見雜染、惡行雜染"。此中:在彼等經中的雜染等諸法中。因為應當詢問"在彼三種雜染中渴愛雜染以何善法清凈",所以說"此中渴愛雜染以止而清凈"。此中:在彼三種渴愛雜染等中。因為應當詢問"彼止是諸蘊中的哪一蘊",所以說"彼止是定蘊"。

『『Diṭṭhisaṃkileso kena visujjhatī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『diṭṭhisaṃkileso vipassanāya visujjhatī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Sā vipassanā katamo khandho』』ti vattabbattā 『『sā vipassanā paññākkhandho』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Duccaritasaṃkileso kena visujjhatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『duccaritasaṃkileso sucaritena visujjhatī』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Taṃ sucaritaṃ katamo khandho』』ti vattabbattā 『『taṃ sucaritaṃ sīlakkhandho』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Tasmiṃ sīle ṭhitassa puggalassa kiṃ bhavatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『tassa sīle patiṭṭhitassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sīle sucaritasaṅkhāte sīlakkhandhe patiṭṭhitassa tassa sīlavantassa puggalassa bhavesu kāmabhavarūpārūpabhavesu āsatti bhavapatthanā yadi uppajjati, evaṃsāyanti evaṃ assa ayanti padacchedo. Evaṃ sati assa sīle patiṭṭhitassa ayaṃ āsatti bhavapatthanā samathavipassanābhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthu ca bhavati, ca-saddena dānamayasīlamayapuññakiriyavatthu ca bhavatīti attho saṅgahito. Tatrāti tesu kāmabhavarūpārūpabhavesu upapattiyā saṃvattatīti.

『『Saṃkilesādayo yehi suttehi dassitā, tāni suttāni kittakānī』』ti vattabbattā 『『imāni cattāri suttānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Asādhāraṇāni saṃkilesabhāgiyasuttavāsanābhāgiyasuttanibbedhabhāgiyasuttaasekkhabhāgiyasuttāni cattāri suttāni bhavanti, sādhāraṇāni saṃkilesabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyasutta, saṃkilesabhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasutta, saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasutta, vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasuttāni katāni missitāni cattāri bhavanti. Iti aṭṭha suttāni bhavanti. Tāniyeva vuttappakārāni aṭṭha suttāni bhavanti. Sādhāraṇāni vāsanābhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttanibbedhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasutta- saṃkilesabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasuttasaṃkilesa- bhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasutta- saṃkilesabhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasutta- vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasutta- saṃkilesabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasutta- nevasaṃkilesabhāgiyanavāsanā- bhāgiyananibbedhabhāgiyanaasekkhabhāgiyasuttāni katāni missitāni aṭṭha suttāni bhavantīti soḷasa suttāni bhavanti. Tesu soḷasasuttesu cattāri ekakāni suttāni ca cattāri dukāni suttāni ca dve tikāni ca pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni, dve dukāni suttāni ca dve tikāni ca dve catukkāni suttāni ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 89) āgatāni.

『『Yadi paṭṭhānanayena vuttappakārāni soḷasa suttāniyeva vibhattāni, evaṃ sati suttageyyādinavavidhaṃ sakalaṃ pariyattisāsanaṃ paṭṭhānanayena avibhattaṃ bhaveyyā』』ti vattabbattā 『『imehi soḷasahi suttehī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭṭhānanayena vibhattehi soḷasahi imehi suttehi navavidhaṃ sakalaṃ pariyattisuttaṃ paṭṭhānanayena vibhattaṃyeva hutvā bhinnaṃ bhavati. Saṃkilesabhāgiyādipabhedāya gāthāya gāthā anuminitabbā, saṃkilesabhāgiyādipabhedena veyyākaraṇena veyyākaraṇaṃ anuminitabbaṃ. Saṃkilesabhāgiyādipabhedena suttena suttaṃ anuminitabbaṃ bhavatiyevāti.

這是巴利文的完整直譯： 因為應當詢問"見雜染以何清凈",所以說"見雜染以觀而清凈"。因為應當說"彼觀是哪一蘊",所以說"彼觀是慧蘊"。因為應當說"惡行雜染以何清凈",所以說"惡行雜染以善行清凈"。因為應當說"彼善行是哪一蘊",所以說"彼善行是戒蘊"。因為應當說"住于彼戒的補特伽羅有何",所以說"彼住于戒者"等。對於住于名為善行的戒蘊的彼持戒補特伽羅,若對諸有即欲有、色有、無色有生起執著、希求有,如是為彼,這是詞的分解。如是,對於住于戒者,此執著、希求有以及止觀修習所成的福業事,以及(連詞)含攝佈施所成、持戒所成的福業事之義。此中:在彼等欲有、色有、無色有中轉生。 因為應當說"顯示雜染等的彼等經有幾部",所以說"此四經"等。不共的雜染分經、習氣分經、通達分經、無學分經四經,共通的雜染分習氣分經、雜染分通達分經、雜染分無學分經、習氣分通達分經,這些結合的四經。如是成為八經。即彼等已說型別的八經。共通的習氣分無學分經、通達分無學分經、雜染分習氣分通達分經、雜染分習氣分無學分經、雜染分通達分無學分經、習氣分通達分無學分經、雜染分習氣分通達分無學分經、非雜染分非習氣分非通達分非無學分經,這些結合的八經,如是成為十六經。在彼等十六經中,四單經和四雙經和二三經在聖典中出現,二雙經和二三經和二四經在註釋書(《導論注》89)中出現。 因為應當說"如果只分別了如所說型別的十六經,如是則九分全部教理教法應當未被緣起法分別",所以說"以此十六經"等。以緣起法所分別的此十六經,九分全部經典即被緣起法分別而區分。以雜染分等差別的偈頌應當推知偈頌,以雜染分等差別的記說應當推知記說。以雜染分等差別的經應當推知經。

1. 『『Tesu soḷasasu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu suttesu katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu soḷasasu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu suttesu katamaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti pucchati.

『『Kāmandhā jālasañchannā, taṇhāchadanachāditā;

Pamattabandhanābaddhā, macchāva kumināmukhe;

Jarāmaraṇamanventi, vaccho khīrapakova mātara』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāge vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Ye sattā kāmandhā kāmena andhā jālasañchannā taṇhāchadanena chāditā, pamattabandhanāya baddhā bandhitabbā, te satte jarāmaraṇaṃ anveti, yathā taṃ kumināmukhe ye macchā gahitā, te macche jarāmaraṇaṃ anveti iva, evaṃ te satte jarāmaraṇaṃ anveti. Khīrapako vaccho mātaraṃ anveti iva, evaṃ te satte jarāmaraṇaṃ anvetīti yojanā kātabbā. Atha vā khīrapako vaccho mātaraṃ anveti iva, kumināmukhe gahitā macchā jarāmaraṇaṃ anventi iva ca, evaṃ ye sattā kāmandhā pamattabandhanāya bandhitabbā, te sattā jarāmaraṇaṃ anventīti yojanā.

『『Idaṃ suttaṃyevā』』ti vattabbattā –

『『Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, agatigamanāni. Katamāni cattāri? Chandāgatiṃ gacchati, dosāgatiṃ gacchati, mohāgatiṃ gacchati, bhayāgatiṃ gacchati, imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri agatigamanāni. Idamavoca bhagavā, idaṃ vatvāna sugato, athāparaṃ etadavoca satthā –

『『Chandā dosā bhayā mohā, yo dhammaṃ ativattati;

Nihīyati tassa yaso, kāḷapakkheva candimā』』ti. –

Idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttanti –

Vuttaṃ. Chandā chandahetunā dosā dosahetunā bhayā bhayahetunā mohā mohahetunā yo rājādiko yo vinayadharādiko vā dhammaṃ sappurisadhammaṃ ativattati atikkamitvā vattati, tassa rājādino vā tassa vinayadharādino vā yaso kitti ca parivāro ca bhogo ca nihīyati. Candimā kāḷapakkhe pabhāya nihīyati iva, evaṃ nihīyatīti yojanā.

『『Ettakaṃyevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『manopubbaṅgamā dhammā…pe… cakkaṃva vahato padanti idaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』nti vuttaṃ. Attho pākaṭo. Aṭṭhakathāyampi vibhatto.

『『Middhī yadā hoti mahagghaso ca, niddāyitā samparivattasāyī;

Mahāvarāhova nivāpapuṭṭho, punappunaṃ gabbhamupeti mando』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāge visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Nivāpapuṭṭho mahāvarāho gāmasūkaro niddāyitā supanasīlo samparivattasāyī hoti iva, evaṃ yo mando satto yadā mahagghaso hoti, so mando satto middhī thinamiddhābhibhūto hutvā niddāyitā muduphassasayane muduhatthehi parāmasito samparivattasāyī punappunaṃ gabbhaṃ upetīti yojanā.

『『Ayasāva malaṃ samuṭṭhitaṃ, tatuṭṭhāya tameva khādati;

Evaṃ atidhonacārinaṃ, sāni kammāni nayanti duggati』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Ayasā ayato samuṭṭhitaṃ jātamalaṃ tatuṭṭhāya tato ayato uṭṭhahitvā tameva ayaṃ khādati iva, evaṃ atidhonacārinaṃ atikkamitvā dhonacāripuggalaṃ sāni sayaṃ katāni akusalakammāni duggatiṃ nayantīti yojanā.

1. 當被問到"在這十六部經中，哪一部是染污分經"時，才說"其中哪一部是染污分經"等等。"其中"指在這十六部染污分等經中，詢問哪一部經稱為染污分經。 "為欲所盲覆網羅，貪愛遮蔽纏繞身， 放逸束縛如魚網，如犢尋母隨生死。" 此經因宣說、開示染污分而稱為染污分經。那些眾生為欲所盲，被慾望遮蔽，被網羅覆蓋，被貪愛遮蔽，為放逸所縛，為束縛所繫，生死追隨著他們，就像陷入魚網的魚被生死追隨一樣，就像吃奶的犢子追隨母牛一樣，生死追隨著這些眾生。應當如此理解。或者說，就像吃奶的犢子追隨母牛，就像陷入魚網的魚被生死追隨，同樣地，那些為欲所盲、被放逸束縛的眾生，生死追隨著他們。應當如此理解。 因為應該說"正是這部經"，所以- "比丘們，有四種不正行。什麼是四種？隨欲不正行，隨瞋不正行，隨癡不正行，隨懼不正行。比丘們，這就是四種不正行。世尊說此已，善逝說此後，導師更說此偈： 因欲瞋懼癡，違背正法者， 名譽將衰敗，如月向黑分。" 此為染污分經。 因欲而起，因瞋而起，因懼而起，因癡而起，無論是國王等人還是持律等人，若違背正法、超越善士之法而行，那麼這些國王等人或持律等人的名譽、聲望、眷屬和財富都將衰敗。就像月亮在黑分時光明衰退一樣，如是衰敗。應當如此理解。 因為應該說"僅此而已"，所以說"心為法本...如輪隨轅轉"是染污分經。意思很明顯，在註釋書中也有解釋。 "若人多嗜睡，貪食好臥眠， 如豬食養肥，愚者復受胎。" 此經也因在染污分領域中宣說、開示而稱為染污分經。就像吃飼料長肥的大豬貪睡、常臥，同樣地，當愚鈍的眾產生為貪食者時，他被昏沉睡眠所覆，成為貪睡者，在柔軟的床上被柔軟的手撫摸而翻來覆去，一再投生。應當如此理解。 "如鐵生鏽蝕，從生反自食， 如是違清凈，惡業墮惡趣。" 此經也是染污分經。就像從鐵生出的銹反過來侵蝕鐵本身一樣，同樣地，違背清凈行者的那些自作的不善業將引導其墮入惡趣。應當如此理解。

『『Coro yathā sandhimukhe gahīto, sakammunā haññati bajjhate ca;

Evaṃ ayaṃ pecca pajā parattha, sakammunā haññati bajjhate cā』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Sandhimukhe rājapurisādīhi gahito coro sakammunā attanā katena corakammena haññati ca bajjhate ca yathā, evaṃ ayaṃ pāpakārinī pajā parattha paraloke pecca sakammunā sayaṃ katena akusalakammunā satthādīhi haññati ca addubandhanādīhi bajjhate cāti yojanā.

『『Sukhakāmāni bhūtāni, yo daṇḍena vihiṃsati;

Attano sukhamesāno, pecca so na labhate sukha』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Attano sukhaṃ esāno esamāno yo satto aññāni sukhakāmāni bhūtāni daṇḍena vihiṃsati, so hiṃsako satto paraloke pecca sukhaṃ na labhatīti yojanā.

『『Gunnaṃ ce taramānānaṃ, jimhaṃ gacchati puṅgavo;

Sabbā tā jimhaṃ gacchanti, nette jimhaṃ gate sati.

『『Evameva manussesu, yo hoti seṭṭhasammato;

So ce adhammaṃ carati, pageva itarā pajā;

Sabbaṃ raṭṭhaṃ dukkhaṃ seti, rājā ce hoti adhammiko』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Nadiṃ taramānānaṃ gunnaṃ puṅgavo jimhaṃ ce gacchati, evaṃ nette jimhaṃ gate sati sabbā tā gāviyo jimhaṃ gacchanti yathā, evameva manussesu yo rājā seṭṭhasammato, so rājā adhammaṃ carati, evaṃ raññe adhammaṃ carante sati itarā pajā pageva paṭhamameva adhammaṃ carati. Rājā adhammiko ce hoti, evaṃ raññe adhammike sati sabbaṃ raṭṭhaṃ dukkhaṃ setīti yojanā.

『『Sukiccharūpā vatime manussā, karonti pāpaṃ upadhīsu rattā;

Gacchanti te bahujanasannivāsaṃ, nirayaṃ avīciṃ kaṭukaṃ bhayānaka』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Ye manussā upadhīsu kāmaguṇūpadhīsu rattā rāgābhibhūtā hutvā pāpaṃ akusalakammaṃ karonti, ime pāpakammakarā manussā sukiccharūpā vata suṭṭhu kicchāpannarūpā vata bhavanti, te pāpakammakarā manussā kaṭukaṃ bhayānakaṃ bahujanasannivāsaṃ nirayaṃ avīciṃ gacchantīti yojanā.

『『Phalaṃ ve kadaliṃ hanti, phalaṃ veḷuṃ phalaṃ naḷaṃ;

Sakkāro kāpurisaṃ hanti, gabbho assatariṃ yathā』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Phalaṃ kadaliyā phalaṃ kadaliṃ ve ekantena hanti yathā, phalaṃ veḷuṃ ve ekantena hanti yathā, phalaṃ naḷaṃ ve ekantena hanti yathā, gabbho assatariṃ mātaraṃ ve ekantena hanti yathā, evaṃ sakkāro kāpurisaṃ ve ekantena hantīti yojanā.

『『Kodhamakkhagaru bhikkhu, lābhasakkāragāravo;

Sukhette pūtibījaṃva, saddhamme na virūhatī』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Sukhette sundare khettepi khittaṃ pūtibījaṃ na ruhati iva, evaṃ yo bhikkhu lābhasakkāragāravo kodhaṃ kujjhanalakkhaṇaṃ kodhaṃ, makkhaṃ paraguṇasīlamakkhanalakkhaṇaṃ makkhañca garuṃ katvā carati, so caranto bhikkhu saddhammasmiṃ na ruhatīti yojanā.

"如賊入戶被捕獲，自業遭殺覆被縛， 如是眾生往他世，自業遭殺覆被縛。" 此經也稱為染污分經。就像賊在入戶時被王家之人等捕獲，因自己所為的盜賊之業而被殺害和束縛一樣，如是這作惡的眾生在他世、來世因自作的不善業被刀劍等殺害，被枷鎖等束縛。應當如此理解。 "諸眾生求樂，以杖行傷害， 自求己安樂，死後不得樂。" 此經也稱為染污分經。尋求自己安樂的眾生，若以棍杖傷害其他求樂的眾生，這行傷害者死後到他世將不得安樂。應當如此理解。 "若群牛渡水，領牛若行曲， 群牛悉隨曲，導者不正故。 如是在人間，公認為最上， 若其行非法，何況其餘眾； 若王不如法，舉國遭憂苦。" 此經也稱為染污分經。就像渡河的牛群中，若公牛歪曲而行，如是導者歪曲而行時，所有母牛都歪曲而行。同樣地，在人間若有王者被認為最尊貴，這王者若行非法，當王者行非法時，其他眾生就更早行非法。若王不如法，如是當王不如法時，全國陷入痛苦。應當如此理解。 "實在可憐憫，眾生著欲樂， 造作諸惡業，墮入眾多住， 無間地獄中，苦痛令恐怖。" 此經也稱為染污分經。那些眾生執著於五欲等依著，為貪慾所制而造作惡業、不善業，這些造惡業的眾生確實極其可悲，這些造惡業的眾生將去往苦痛可怖的眾多住處無間地獄。應當如此理解。 "果實毀芭蕉，果實毀竹蘆， 如是恭敬毀，劣人如騾胎。" 此經也稱為染污分經。就像芭蕉的果實必定毀壞芭蕉，果實必定毀壞竹子，果實必定毀壞蘆葦，胎兒必定毀壞騾母一樣，如是恭敬必定毀壞劣人。應當如此理解。 "比丘重忿覆，崇敬利養名， 如良田腐種，正法不增長。" 此經也稱為染污分經。就像在良好的田地裡播下腐爛的種子不會生長一樣，如是若比丘崇敬利養名聞，以忿怒的特相為重，以掩蓋他人功德戒行的特相為重而行，這樣行的比丘在正法中不會增長。應當如此理解。

1. 『『Idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, ekaccaṃ puggalaṃ paduṭṭhacittaṃ evaṃ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāmi…pe… iti me suta』』nti idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Bhikkhave idha sāsane, loke vā ahaṃ ekaccaṃ puggalaṃ paduṭṭhacittaṃ mama cetasā tassa ceto cittaṃ paricca paricchinditvā buddhacakkhunā evaṃ pajānāmi. 『『Kathaṃ pajānāmī』』ti ce puccheyya, yañca paṭipadaṃ paṭipanno, yañca maggaṃ samāruḷho ayaṃ puggalo yathā yāya duppaṭipadāya yena dummaggena iriyati pavattati, tāya duppaṭipadāya tena dummaggena imamhi imasmiṃ samaye duppaṭipajjanakāle ayaṃ duppaṭipannaṃ paṭipanno dummaggasamāruḷho puggalo ce kālaṃ kareyya, evaṃ sati ābhataṃ vatthu nikkhittaṃ yathā, evaṃ niraye nikkhitto. Taṃ kissa hetu? Bhikkhave assa puggalassa cittaṃ paduṭṭhaṃ padositaṃ hi yasmā hoti, tasmā nikkhitto. Evaṃ idha sāsane, loke vā cetopadosahetu ca pana ekacce sattā puggalā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ upapajjantīti pajānāmīti. Etamatthaṃ bhagavā avoca. Tattha tasmiṃ sutte etaṃ 『『paduṭṭhacittaṃ ñatvāna…pe… nirayaṃ so upapajjatī』』ti gāthāvacanaṃ iti evaṃ vuccati.

Satthā idha sāsane, loke vā paduṭṭhacittaṃ ekaccaṃ puggalaṃ ñatvāna bhikkhūnaṃ santike etamatthaṃ byākāsi. Imamhi imasmiṃ samaye ayaṃ puggalo ce kālaṃ kayirātha, evaṃ sati paduṭṭhacittasamaṅgī hi nirayasmiṃ upapajjeyya, puggalassa cittaṃ padūsitaṃ hi yasmā hoti, tasmā upapajjeyya, cetopadosahetu sattā duggatiṃ gacchanti ābhataṃ vatthuṃ nikkhipeyya yathā, evamevaṃ tathāvidho duppañño so padosacitto puggalo kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā nirayaṃ upapajjatīti ayampi attho bhagavatā vutto, iti me mayā sutanti yojanā.

『『Sace bhāyatha dukkhassa, sace vo dukkhamappiyaṃ;

Mākattha pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho.

『『Sace ca pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, karissatha karotha vā;

Na vo dukkhā pamutyatthi, upeccapi palāyata』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Sappurisā tumhe dukkhassa jātidukkhajarādukkhabyādhidukkhamaraṇadukkhaapāyadukkha- atītavaṭṭamūlakadukkhaanāgatavaṭṭamūlakadukkhapaccuppannāhāramūlakadukkhāti aṭṭhavidhassa dukkhassa sace bhāyatha, vo tumhehi dukkhaṃ tathā aṭṭhavidhaṃ dukkhaṃ sace appiyaṃ, evaṃ sati āvi vā yadi raho vā pāpakaṃ kammaṃ mākattha mā akattha. Sappurisā tumhe āvi vā yadi raho vā pāpakaṃ kammaṃ sace karissatha vā sace karotha vā, evaṃ sati upeccapi sañciccāpi palāyataṃ palāyantānaṃ vo tumhākaṃ dukkhā aṭṭhavidhā dukkhato pamutti muccanaṃ natthevāti yojanā.

『『Adhammena dhanaṃ laddhā, musāvādena cūbhayaṃ;

Mameti bālā maññanti, taṃ kathaṃ nu bhavissati.

1. "我在此處，比丘們，以某種方式以我的心知曉某個人心中的惡意..."這部經也稱為染污分經。比丘們，在此教法中或世間，我以我的心透過佛眼洞察某個人心中的惡意。若問"如何知曉"，此人所行的道路和所攀登的道路，他如何以惡行、惡道而行動，在此刻這個以惡行、惡道前行的人若死去，就像放置了一件物品一樣，他將被放置在地獄中。這是什麼緣故？比丘們，因為此人的心已被污染和損壞，所以被放置。就這樣，在此教法或世間，因心的損壞，某些眾生死後將墮入惡趣、不幸的境界，我如此了知。世尊說了這個義理。在該經中，有這樣的偈語："知曉心已污染...他將墮入地獄"。 導師在此教法或世間，知曉某個心懷惡意的人，在比丘們面前闡明了這個義理。在此刻，如果此人死去，因為心懷惡意，他將墮入地獄。因為此人的心已被污染，所以將墮入地獄。因心的損壞，眾生將墮入惡趣，就像放置一件物品一樣。正如這樣，這個愚鈍、心已損壞的人，死後將墮入地獄。這就是我所聽聞的。 "若畏懼痛苦，若苦非所愛； 莫作惡業已，或明或暗中。 若作惡業時，或作或將作； 汝等無脫苦，逃遁亦如是。" 此經也稱為染污分經。善人們，若你們畏懼生苦、老苦、病苦、死苦、惡趣苦、過去輪迴根源之苦、未來輪迴根源之苦、現在食物根源之苦等八種苦，若此苦非所愛，那麼無論是明處或暗處，都不要作惡業。善人們，若你們將作或正作惡業，無論是明處或暗處，即便逃遁，也無法從八種苦中解脫。應當如此理解。 "以非法得財，以妄語得兩， 愚者自以為，此將何模樣。"

『『Antarāyā su bhavissanti, sambhatassa vinassati;

Matā saggaṃ na gacchanti, nanu ettāvatā hatā』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Ye bālā adhammena ca musāvādena ca dhanaṃ saviññāṇāviññāṇaṃ sabbaṃ labhitabbaṃ dhanaṃ laddhā ubhayaṃ dhanaṃ 『『mama dhana』』nti maññanti, tesaṃ bālānaṃ taṃ ubhayaṃ dhanaṃ kathaṃ kena nu pakārena bhavissati, adhammena sambhatattā ciraṭṭhitikaṃ na hoti. Antarāyā rājantarāyādayo antarāyā tesaṃ bālānaṃ bhavissanti. Yena adhammavohārādikena yaṃ dhanaṃ sambhataṃ, assa adhammavohārādikassa taṃ sambhataṃ dhanaṃ vinassati. Matā marantā te bālā saggaṃ sugatiṃ na gacchanti. Sugati hi sobhanehi bhogehi aggoti 『『saggo』』ti adhippetā . Ettāvatā ettakena diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikānaṃ attahitānaṃ hāyanena te bālā hatā vinaṭṭhā bhavanti nanūti yojanā.

『『Kathaṃ khaṇati attānaṃ, kathaṃ mittehi jīrati;

Kathaṃ vivaṭṭate dhammā, kathaṃ saggaṃ na gacchati』』.

『『Lobhā khaṇati attānaṃ, luddho mittehi jīrati;

Lobhā vivaṭṭate dhammā, lobhā saggaṃ na gacchatī』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Yojanattho pākaṭo.

『『Caranti bālā dummedhā, amitteneva attanā;

Karontā pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, yaṃ hoti kaṭukapphalaṃ.

『『Na taṃ kammaṃ kataṃ sādhu, yaṃ katvā anutappati;

Yassa assumukho rodaṃ, vipākaṃ paṭisevatī』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Dummedhā nippaññā bālā amittena pāpakaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ iva, evaṃ attanā kaṭukapphalaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ hoti, taṃ pāpakaṃ kataṃ kammaṃ karontā caranti. Yaṃ kammaṃ katvā karonto pacchā anutappati, taṃ kataṃ kammaṃ na sādhu. Yassa kammassa vipākaṃ rodaṃ rudanto assumukho paṭisevati, taṃ kataṃ kammaṃ na sādhūti yojanā.

『『Dukkaraṃ duttitikkhañca…pe… avītarāgo』』ti idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Suttattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vitthārato vutto.

『『Appameyyaṃ paminanto, kodha vidvā vikappaye;

Appameyyaṃ pamāyinaṃ, nivutaṃ taṃ maññe akissava』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Idha sāsane appameyyaṃ appameyyaguṇaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ puggalaṃ 『『ayaṃ khīṇāsavo puggalo ettakasīlo ettakasamādhi ettakapañño』』ti paminanto ko puthujjano vikappaye. Appameyyaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalaṃ pamāyinaṃ pamāyantaṃ taṃ puthujjanaṃ ayaṃ nivutaṃ avakujjapaññaṃ akissavaṃ apaññanti maññe maññāmīti yojanā.

『『Purisassa hi jātassa, kuṭhārī jāyate mukhe;

Yāya chindati attānaṃ, bālo dubbhāsitaṃ bhaṇaṃ.

『『Na hi satthaṃ sunisitaṃ, visaṃ halāhalaṃ iva;

Evaṃ viraddhaṃ pāteti, vācā dubbhāsitā yathā』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Dubbhāsitaṃ ariyūpavādasaṅkhātaṃ pharusavācaṃ bhaṇaṃ bhaṇanto bālo duṭṭho puriso yāya kuṭhārīsadisiyā dubbhāsitavācāya attānaṃ chindati, sā kuṭhārīsadisī dubbhāsitavācā jātassa purisassa mukhe jāyate jāyati, sā dubbhāsitavācā mukhe jāyati iva, evaṃ sunisitaṃ satthaṃ mukhe na jāyati, yathā halāhalaṃ visaṃ mukhe na jāyati, dubbhāsitā vācā apāyesu viraddhaṃ puggalaṃ pāteti yathā, evaṃ sunisitaṃ satthaṃ apāyesu na pāteti, halāhalaṃ visaṃ apāyesu na pātetīti yojanā.

我來直譯這段巴利文: "將會有各種障礙,累積的財富將會消失, 死後不能往生天界,難道不是這樣受到損害?" 這是一部關於污染之事的經典。那些愚人用不正當方法和虛妄語言獲得有情與無情的一切應得財物后,認為這兩種財物都是"我的財物",這些愚人的兩種財物怎樣以何種方式存在呢?因為是以不正當方法累積的,所以不能長久儲存。障礙,即王難等障礙將會發生在這些愚人身上。用不正當交易等方式所累積的財物,這種不正當交易等所累積的財物將會消失。愚人死時不能往生天界善趣。善趣因具有美好的享受而被稱為"天界"。難道不是因為現世和來世的利益都有所損減,這些愚人就這樣受到損害和毀滅了嗎?這是解釋。 "如何挖掘自身,如何與朋友疏離; 如何背離正法,如何不能往生天界?" "因貪慾挖掘自身,貪婪者與朋友疏離; 因貪慾背離正法,因貪慾不能往生天界。" 這也是一部關於污染之事的經典。解釋的意思很明顯。 "愚人無智行走,如同自身是敵人; 造作惡業行為,必得苦澀果報。 所作之業不善,做后必定後悔; 流淚滿面哭泣,承受果報之時。" 這也是一部關於污染之事的經典。無智的愚人,就像敵人做惡業一樣,他們以自身造作結果苦澀的業,他們行走時造作這樣的惡業。做了某業之後,行者後來後悔,這樣做的業不是善業。某人對某業的果報,哭泣流淚著承受,這樣做的業不是善業,這是解釋。 "難作難忍耐......未離貪慾"這也是一部關於污染之事的經典。經義在註釋書中已詳細解說。 "怎能測量無量,此處智者如何思量; 我想測量無量者,為矇昧無智慧。" 這也是一部關於污染之事的經典。在此教法中,哪個凡夫能夠思量無量的、具無量功德的漏盡者,說"這位漏盡者的戒具如是、定具如是、慧具如是"而去測量呢?我認為那個測量無量的漏盡者的凡夫是矇昧的、智慧顛倒的、無智慧的,這是解釋。 "對於出生之人,口中生出斧頭; 愚人說惡語時,用它來傷害自己。 鋒利的刀劍和,致命毒藥halāhala; 都不如惡語言,令人墮落偏離。" 這也是一部關於污染之事的經典。說惡語即誹謗聖者的粗惡語的愚惡之人,用如斧頭般的惡語傷害自己,這如斧頭般的惡語生於人的口中,就像惡語生於口中一樣,鋒利的刀劍不會生於口中,如同halāhala毒藥不會生於口中,惡語使人偏離並墮落惡道,而鋒利的刀劍不會使人墮落惡道,halāhala毒藥不會使人墮落惡道,這是解釋。

92.

『『Yo nindiyaṃ pasaṃsati, taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyo;

Vicināti mukhena so kaliṃ, kalinā tena sukhaṃ na vindati.

『『Appamatto ayaṃ kali, yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo;

Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanā, ayameva mahantataro kali;

Yo sugatesu manaṃ padosaye.

『『Sataṃ sahassānaṃ nirabbudānaṃ, chattiṃsatī pañca ca abbudāni;

Yamariyagarahī nirayaṃ upeti, vācaṃ manañca paṇidhāya pāpaka』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Yo puggalo nindiyaṃ duccaraṃ dussīlaṃ puggalaṃ pasaṃsati, so pasaṃsako puggalo mukhena kaliṃ vicināti upacināti, tena kalinā sukhaṃ na vindati. Yo sucārī sīlavā puggalo pasaṃsiyo hoti, taṃ vā sucāriṃ vā sīlavantaṃ puggalaṃ yo puggalo nindati, so nindanto puggalo mukhena kaliṃ vicināti upacināti, tena kalinā sukhaṃ na vindati.

Attanā sahāpi sabbassa dhanassa vasenapi akkhesu yo dhanaparājayo bhavati, ayaṃ kali ayaṃ dhanaparājayo appamatto hoti. Yo puggalo sugatesu manaṃ padosaye, tassa puggalassa yo kali bhavati, ayameva kali mahantataro hoti.

Kasmā? Vācañca manañca paṇidhāya ariyagarahī puggalo yaṃ kālaṃ pāpakaṃ nirayaṃ upeti, so kālo 『『sataṃ sahassānaṃ nirabbudānañca chattiṃsa nirabbudāni ca pañca abbudāni ca yasmiṃ kāle gaṇīyantī』』ti tena kālena samo hoti, tasmā mahantataro hotīti yojanā.

『『Yo lobhaguṇe anuyutto…pe…

Gacchasi kho papataṃ ciraratta』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttampi saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Yo puggalo lobhaguṇe anuyutto anu punappunaṃ yutto hoti, so puggalo aññe puggale vacasā paribhāsati, assaddho kadariyo avadaññū buddhānaṃ ovādaññū na hoti, maccharī pesuṇiyaṃ pesuṇiyasmiṃ anuyutto hoti.

Mukhadugga mukhavisama vibhūta vigatabhūta anariya bhūnahu buddhivināsaka pāpaka dukkaṭakāri purisanta purisalāmaka kali alakkhi avajātaputta tvaṃ nerayiko asi. Idha idāni bahubhāṇī mā hohi.

Ahitāya rajaṃ attani mā ākirasi mā pakkhipasi. Kibbisakāri tvaṃ sante khīṇāsave puggale garahasi, bahūni duccaritāni kammāni carasi, caritvā tvaṃ cirarattaṃ racanavirahitaṃ papataṃ narakaṃ nirayaṃ gacchasi kho ekaṃsenāti yojanā.

Nānāvidhaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu soḷasasu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu suttesu katamaṃ suttaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti pucchati. 『『Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā…pe… chāyāva anapāyinī』』ti idaṃ vāsanābhāge puññabhāge visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Attho pākaṭo.

1. 『『Mahānāmo sakko bhagavantaṃ etadavoca…pe… apāpikā kālaṅkiriyā』』ti idaṃ suttampi vāsanābhāge puññabhāge visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Attho pākaṭo.

『『Sukhakāmāni bhūtāni, yo daṇḍena na hiṃsati;

Attano sukhamesāno, pecca so labhate sukha』』nti. –

Idaṃ suttampi vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Attho pākaṭo.

『『Gunnaṃ ce taramānānaṃ…pe… rājā ce hoti dhammiko』』ti idaṃ suttampi vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Attho pākaṭo.

我來直譯這段巴利文： "誰讚歎應受譴責者,或譴責應受讚歎者; 以口積累過失,因過失不得安樂。 這過失雖然不小,在賭博中失財; 較之一切及自身,這過失更為巨大; 即是對善逝心懷惡意。 對於三十六億年,加上五億年; 譴責聖者墮地獄,因為惡口與惡意。" 這也是一部關於污染之事的經典。若有人讚嘆應受譴責的惡行者、破戒者,這個讚歎者以口積累過失,因這過失不得安樂。若有人是善行者、持戒者應受讚歎,而有人卻譴責這樣的善行者、持戒者,這個譴責者以口積累過失,因這過失不得安樂。 即使連自身在內一切財物在賭博中失去,這個過失、這個失財還是較小。若有人對善逝心懷惡意,這個人所得過失,這樣的過失才更為巨大。 為什麼?因為以惡口與惡意譴責聖者的人墮入惡劣地獄的時間,等同於"計算三十六億年又五億年的時間",所以說是更大的過失,這是解釋。 "誰執著貪慾...... 你必定長久墮入深淵" 這也是一部關於污染之事的經典。若有人執著貪慾、反覆執著,此人以言語辱罵他人,不具信心、吝嗇、不慷慨、不聽從佛陀教誨,具有慳吝、熱衷於挑撥離間。 口出惡言、言語不當、遠離真實、失去真實、非聖者、毀壞賢善、作惡、作壞事的人、最下等人、禍根、不祥之人、墮落之子,你是地獄眾生。現在此處不要多言。 不要對自己散佈不利的塵埃。作惡者啊,你譴責寂靜的漏盡者,造作諸多惡行,造作之後你必定長久墮入無邊際的深淵地獄,這是解釋。 導師已確定了各種各樣的污染分經,我們也已了知,"什麼是習氣分經"是應當詢問的,因此說"其中什麼是習氣分經"等。其中即是在這十六種污染分等經中,問什麼經稱為習氣分經。"諸法意先導......如影不離形"這是在習氣分、福德分領域中以言說開示而行的,所以稱為習氣分經。意思明顯。 93. "摩訶男釋迦族人對世尊如是說......無罪過命終"這也是在習氣分、福德分領域中以言說開示而行的,所以稱為習氣分經。意思明顯。 "眾生欲求樂,不以棒杖害; 自求安樂者,死後得安樂。" 這也是習氣分經。意思明顯。 "若牛群渡水......若王行正法"這也是習氣分經。意思明顯。

1. 『『Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati…pe… evaṃ pajānātī』』ti idaṃ suttampi vāsanā…pe… suttaṃ nāma. Attho pākaṭo.

『『Kasmā bhagavā janapadacārikaṃ caratī』』ti puccheyya, sattahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto janapadacārikaṃ caranti. Katamehi sattahi? Desantaragatānaṃ veneyyānaṃ vinayanatthaṃ, tatra ṭhitānaṃ ussukkasamuppādanatthaṃ, sāvakānaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nibaddhavāsanivāraṇatthaṃ, attano ca tattha nibaddhavāse anāsaṅgadassanatthaṃ, sambuddhavasitaṭṭhānatāya desānaṃ cetiyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ, bahūnaṃ sattānaṃ dassanūpasaṅkamanādīhi puññoghappasavanatthaṃ, avuṭṭhiādiupaddavūpasamanatthañcāti imehi sattahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto janapadacārikaṃ carantīti janapadacaraṇakāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.

『『Ekapupphaṃ cajitvāna, sahassaṃ kappakoṭiyo;

Deve ceva manusse ca, sesena parinibbuto』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Sahassaṃ kappakoṭiyoti sahassaṃ attabhāvato koṭiyo.

『『Assatthe haritobhāse, saṃvirūḷhamhi pādape;

Ekaṃ buddhagataṃ saññaṃ, alabhiṃhaṃ patissato.

『『Ajja tiṃsaṃ tato kappā, nābhijānāmi duggatiṃ;

Tisso vijjā sacchikatā, tassā saññāya vāsanā』』ti. –

Idaṃ suttampi vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Haritobhāseti haritaobhāse. Alabhiṃhanti ahaṃ alabhiṃ.

『『Piṇḍāya kosalaṃ puraṃ…pe… vipāko hoti acintiyo』』ti idaṃ suttampi vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Aggapuggalo anukampako taṇhānighātako muni sambuddho purebhattaṃ piṇḍāya piṇḍaṃ paṭiggaṇhituṃ kosalaṃ puraṃ pāvisi.

Yassa purisassa hatthe sabbapupphehi alaṅkato vaṭaṃsako pupphavaṭaṃsakova atthi, so ayaṃ puriso rājamaggena kosalapuraṃ pavisantaṃ bhikkhusaṅghapurakkhataṃ devamānusapūjitaṃ sambuddhaṃ addasa, disvā haṭṭho cittaṃ pasādesi; pasādetvā sambuddhaṃ upasaṅkami.

Upasaṅkamitvā so ayaṃ pasanno hutvā surabhiṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ manoramaṃ taṃ vaṭaṃsakaṃ sambuddhassa sehi pāṇībhi upanāmesi.

Tato buddhassa lapanantarā lapanassa vadanassa antarā aggisikhā vaṇṇā sahassaraṃsi okkā pabhā nikkhami, abbhā vijju nikkhamati iva, evaṃ ānanā sahassaraṃsi nikkhamitvā ādiccabandhuno sīse tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karitvāna parivaṭṭetvā muddhani antaradhāyatha.

Ānando acchariyaṃ abbhutaṃ lomahaṃsanaṃ idaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ disvā cīvaraṃ ekaṃsaṃ karitvā etaṃ abravi – 『『mahāmuni, sitakammassa hetu ko? Taṃ hetuṃ byākarohi, dhammāloko bhavissatī』』ti.

Yassa bhagavato sabbadhammesu ñāṇaṃ sadā pavattati, kaṅkhāvitaraṇo muni so bhagavā kaṅkhiṃ vematikaṃ ānandaṃ theraṃ etaṃ abravi. Ānanda, yo sopuriso mayi cittaṃ pasādayi, so puriso caturāsītikappāni duggatiṃ na gamissati, devesu devasobhaggaṃ dibbaṃ rajjaṃ pasāsitvā manujesu raṭṭhe sakalaraṭṭhe manujindo rājā bhavissati. So puriso carimaṃ pabbajitvā, dhammataṃ sacchikatvā ca dhutarāgo vaṭaṃsako nāma paccekabuddho bhavissati.

Tathāgate vā sammāsambuddhe vā paccekasambuddhe vā tassa tathāgatassa sāvake vā citte pasannamhi dakkhiṇā appakā nāma natthi.

Buddhā evaṃ ettakāti acintiyā bhavanti. Buddhadhammā buddhaguṇā evaṃ ettakāti acintiyā bhavanti, acintiye pasannānaṃ vipāko puññavipāko evaṃ ettakoti acintiyo hotīti etaṃ abravīti yojanā.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 94. "世尊住在舍衛城......如是了知"這也是習氣......經。意思明顯。 若問"為何世尊遊行諸國?",諸佛世尊因七種原因而遊行諸國。是哪七種?爲了教化他方的應化眾生,爲了激發當地眾生的精進,爲了防止弟子們長期住在一處,爲了顯示自己不執著於一處常住,爲了使諸地成為聖蹟而成為塔廟,爲了讓眾多眾生透過見面禮敬等獲得功德之流,爲了平息無雨等災難。應當知道諸佛世尊因這七種原因而遊行諸國,這就是遊行諸國的原因。 "舍施一朵花,千億劫之間; 天上及人間,最終證涅槃。" 這也是習氣分經。"千億劫"即是從一生起算的千億。 "在綠葉菩提,枝葉茂盛時; 一念憶念佛,正念我獲得。 從此三十劫,未曾墮惡趣; 證得三明智,因彼念熏習。" 這也是習氣分經。"綠葉"即綠色光澤。"我獲得"即我得到。 "為乞食入拘薩羅城......果報不可思議"這也是習氣分經。最上人、悲愍者、滅除渴愛者、牟尼、正覺者于食前為乞食而入拘薩羅城。 某人手中有以一切花裝飾的花環,這個人在王路上看見與比丘僧團同行、受天人供養的正覺者入拘薩羅城,見已心生歡喜生起信心;生起信心後走近正覺者。 走近后他生起信心,將那香氣宜人、色彩美麗、令人喜悅的花環用自己的雙手獻上給正覺者。 然後從佛陀的言語之間、從口中間放出如火焰般色彩的千道光芒,如同雲中閃電放出一樣,這樣從面容放出千道光芒后,環繞太陽眷屬的頭頂三匝后隱沒于頭頂。 阿難見到這個稀有、未曾有、令人毛豎的神變,偏袒一肩后如是說："大牟尼,微笑的因緣是什麼?請說明其因,將成為法光。" 對一切法智常常運轉的世尊,度脫疑惑的牟尼世尊對懷疑、猶疑的阿難長老如是說。阿難,這個人對我生起信心,他將八十四劫不墮惡趣,在天界享受天界榮華統領天國后,在人間將成為統領全國的人王。他最後出家,證悟法性后離貪,將成為名為花環的辟支佛。 對正等正覺者、辟支佛或其聲聞生起信心,其佈施不能說是小。 佛陀如是這般不可思議。佛法、佛德如是這般不可思議,對不可思議者生信的果報、功德果報如是這般不可思議,他如是說,這是解釋。

1. 『『Idhāhaṃ , bhikkhave, ekaccaṃ puggalaṃ…pe… ayampi attho vutto bhagavatā iti me suta』』nti idaṃ suttampi vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Bhikkhave, idha imasmiṃ sāsane ahaṃ ekaccaṃ puggalaṃ evaṃ mama cetasā ekaccassa puggalassa ceto cittaṃ paricca buddhacakkhunā evaṃ pajānāmi, yathā yena pakārena ayaṃ puggalo yañca dānādipaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno, yañca dassanādimaggaṃ samāruḷho hutvā taṃ paṭipadaṃ, maggañca iriyati pavatteti, imamhi imasmiñca samaye ayaṃ puggalo ce kālaṃ kareyya, evaṃ sati ābhataṃ vatthuṃ nikkhipati yathā, evaṃ tāya paṭipadāya tena maggena sagge attanikkhitto bhave. Taṃ kissa hetu? Bhikkhave, assa puggalassa cittaṃ hi yasmā pasannaṃ pasāditaṃ, tasmā nikkhitto bhave. Idha sāsane, loke vā ekacce sattā puggalā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ cetopasādahetu kho pana upapajjantīti evaṃ ahaṃ pajānāmīti bhagavā etamatthaṃ avoca. Tattha tasmiṃ atthe saṅgahavasena pavattaṃ etaṃ 『『pasannacittaṃ ñatvāna…pe… saggaṃ so upapajjatī』』ti gāthāvacanaṃ vuccati. Ayampi attho bhagavatā vutto, iti me mayā sutanti yojanā.

『『Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvaṃ…pe… etādisaṃ katapuññā labhi』』nti idaṃ suttampi vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Nāri devadhītā suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ suvaṇṇālaṅkārehi chāditaṃ nāvaṃ āruyha tiṭṭhasi, pokkharaṇiṃ devapokkharaṇiṃ ogāhasi, padumaṃ pāṇinā chindasi.

Devate kena kammena te tava tādiso vaṇṇo tādiso ānubhāvo tādisī juti bhavati, devate te tava ye keci bhogā manasā icchitā bhavanti, te bhogā ca kena kammena uppajjanti. Devate me pucchitā tvaṃ saṃsa saṃsāhi idaṃ sabbaṃ kissa kammassa ca phalanti sakko pucchati.

Devarājena pucchitā sā devadhītā attamanā hutvā pañhaṃ puṭṭhā sakkassa byākāsi. Devarājā addhānaṃ dīghamaggaṃ paṭipannā ahaṃ yasassino kassapassa bhagavato manoramaṃ thūpaṃ addassaṃ, disvā tattha thūpe cittaṃ pasādesiṃ. Pasannāhaṃ sehi pāṇīhi padumapupphehi pūjesiṃ. Tasseva kammassa idaṃ sabbaṃ phalaṃ vipāko bhave. Katapuññāhaṃ etādisaṃ phalaṃ alabhinti sakkassa byākāsi. Iti me sutanti mahāmoggallāno vadatīti yojanā.

『『Yathāniddhāritasuttāniyeva vāsanābhāgiyasuttāni paripuṇṇānī』』ti vattabbattā 『『dānakathā sīlakathā saggakathā puññakathā puññavipākakathāti idaṃ vāsanābhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yāya desanāya dānañca dānaphalañca dassitaṃ, sā desanā dānakathā nāma. Yāya desanāya sīlañca sīlaphalañca dassitaṃ, sā desanā sīlakathā nāma. Yāya desanāya saggā ca saggesu nibbattāpakañca kammaṃ dassitaṃ, sā saggakathā nāma. Yāya desanāya dānasīlabhāvanādivasena dasavidhaṃ puññakammaṃ dassitaṃ, sā puññakathā nāma. Yāya desanāya tādisassa puññakammassa vividho ayaṃ vipāko imassa puññassa vipākoti niyametvā dassito, sā puññavipākakathā nāma.

Dasabaladharānaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ uddissakatesu sarīradhātuṃ abbhantare ṭhapetvā paṃsūhi katesu thūpesu ye narā pasannā, te narā tattha thūpe kāraṃ puññaṃ katvā saggesu uppajjitvā pamodantīti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ vā…pe… suttaṃ.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 96. "諸比丘,在此我觀某人......我如是聞世尊所說之義"這也是習氣分經。比丘們,在此教法中,我以佛眼觀察了知某人的心,如同以我的心了知某人的心一樣,此人已修習佈施等行道,已趣入見道等聖道,並行持此行道與聖道,在此時若此人命終,就像放下所帶來的物品一樣,因那行道與聖道而被安置在天界。這是什麼原因?比丘們,因為此人的心是清凈的、有信的,所以被安置在那裡。在此教法中或世間上,某些眾生因心清凈的緣故,身壞命終后往生善趣天界,我如是了知。世尊說此義。在此義中,依總攝方式所說的"知其心清凈......往生於天界"這偈頌。這也是世尊所說之義,我如是聞,這是解釋。 "黃金所覆船......如是福德得"這也是習氣分經。女天神站在以黃金裝飾所覆蓋的船上,進入天池中,以手摘蓮花。 天女啊,因何業而得如此容色、如此威力、如此光輝,天女啊,你心中所欲的任何享受,這些享受因何業而生?天女啊,我問你請說這一切是什麼業的果報?帝釋天如是問。 被天王問及時,那天女心滿意足,被問到問題就向帝釋天解釋。天王啊,我走在長遠道路上時見到光榮的迦葉世尊的妙塔,見到后對彼塔生起信心。我生起信心后以自己的雙手以蓮花供養。這一切是那業的果報。我作福德得如是果報,她向帝釋天如是解釋。大目犍連說:"我如是聞",這是解釋。 因為應當說"如所確定的經典即是完整的習氣分經",所以說"佈施說、持戒說、生天說、功德說、功德果報說,這是習氣分"等。其中以何說法顯示佈施及佈施果報,那說法稱為佈施說。以何說法顯示持戒及持戒果報,那說法稱為持戒說。以何說法顯示諸天界及能生天界之業,那稱為生天說。以何說法顯示佈施、持戒、禪修等十種功德業,那稱為功德說。以何說法確定顯示"這樣的功德業有這樣種種的果報是這功德的果報",那稱為功德果報說。 對具十力的諸正等覺者,將舍利安放在內而以土所造的塔中,若有人生起信心,這些人在彼塔造作功德后往生天界而歡喜,這是解釋。這經或......經。

97.Devaputtasarīravaṇṇā devaputtasarīrasadisavaṇṇā subhagasaṇṭhiti sobhaggayuttasaṇṭhānā sabbe janā udakena paṃsuṃ temetvā thūpaṃ vaḍḍhetha, so ayaṃ thūpo kassa puggalassa thūpoti pucchati.

Sugatte sundaragatte devate tasmiṃ thūpe pasannā ime devamanujā kāraṃ puññaṃ karontā hutvā jarāmaraṇato pamuccare. So ayaṃ thūpo mahesino dasabaladhammadhārino sugatassa thūpoti veditabboti āhāti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ vā…pe… suttaṃ.

Yāhaṃ yā ahaṃ mahesino thūpaṃ cattāri uppalāni ca mālañca abhiropayiṃ, tena mayā kataṃ taṃ puññaṃ uḷāraṃ vata āsi ahosi. Tato kappato ajja kappā tiṃsaṃ dharanti satthuno thūpaṃ pūjetvā tattakāni duggatiṃ na jānāmi, vinipātaṃ na gacchāmīti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ vā…pe… suttaṃ.

Ahaṃ bāttiṃsalakkhaṇadharassa bāttiṃsalakkhaṇadharena sampannassa vijitavijayassa lokanāthassa thūpaṃ apūjesiṃ, pūjetvā satasahassaṃ kappe āyukappe pamudito āsiṃ. Mayā yaṃ puññaṃ pasutaṃ, tena puññena vinipātaṃ anāgantuna anāgantvā devasobhaggaṃ sampattiṃ ca devarajjāni ca tāni akāriṃ . Atha vā devasobhaggañca mayā kāritaṃ, rajjāni ca mayā kāritāni.

Adantadamakassa sāsane yaṃ cakkhu paññācakkhu paṇihitaṃ, tathā cittaṃ yaṃ vimuttacittaṃ paṇihitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ paññācakkhu vimuttacittaṃ me mayā laddhaṃ, ahaṃ vidhutalatāsaṅkhātataṇhā hutvā vimuttacittā phalavimuttacittasampannā amhīti avocāti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ vā…pe… suttaṃ.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 97. 具有天子身色、如天子身色般、具善妙形態、具莊嚴形相的所有人以水潤濕塵土增高塔,這塔是誰的塔?他如是問。 善身者、美身的天女啊,這些天人對彼塔生信,做作功德時得以解脫老死。應當知道這是具十力、持法者、善逝的大仙塔,她如是說。這經或......經。 我以四朵青蓮花和花鬘供奉大仙塔,我所作的那功德實在殊勝。從那劫算起到今天已經三十劫,供養導師塔后這麼長時間我不知惡趣,不墮落處,這是解釋。這經或......經。 我供養具三十二相、成就三十二相、勝利者、世間依怙的塔,供養后十萬劫中我歡喜。因我所生的功德,由於該功德不再來墮落處,我獲得天界榮華成就和天國。或者說我獲得天界榮華,我獲得諸王國。 在調御未調者的教法中,所安立的慧眼,如是所安立的解脫心,我已獲得一切慧眼與解脫心,我已斷除如藤蔓的渴愛而成就解脫心與果位解脫心,她如是說,這是解釋。這經或......經。

98.Vimuttacitte phalavimuttacittasampanne akhile pañcacetokhīlarahite anāsave araṇavihārimhi araṇavihārasīle asaṅgamānase alaggamānase paccekabuddhasmiṃ sāmākapatthodanamattameva dakkhiṇaṃ adāsiṃ.

Tasmiṃ paccekabuddhe uttamaṃ dhammaṃ paccekabodhidhammaṃ okappayiṃ 『『so uttamo dhammo atthī』』ti saddahiṃ. Evaṃ ariyavihārena vihārīhi paccekabuddhehi me mama saṅgamo kato siyā bhave, kudāsupi ca ahaṃ apekkhavā mā bhaveyyanti mānasaṃ tasmiñca dhamme paṇidhesiṃ 『『iminā paccekabuddhena laddhadhammaṃ ahampi sacchikareyya』』nti cittaṃ paṇidahiṃ.

Tasseva paccekabuddhe katasseva kammassa vipākato ahaṃ dīghāyukesu amamesu 『『mama pariggaho』』ti pariggahābhāvena apariggahesu visesagāmīsu ahīnagāmīsu kurūsu uttarakurūsu pāṇīsu sattesu sahassakkhattuṃ upapajjatha upapajjiṃ.

Tasseva kammassa vipākato vicitramālābharaṇānulepīsu yasassīsu parivāravantesu tidaso devo ahaṃ visiṭṭhakāyūpagato hutvā sahassakkhattuṃ upapajjatha.

Tasseva kammassa vipākato ahaṃ vimuttacitto akhīlo anāsavo hutvā hitāhitāsīhi kusalākusalavītivattehi antimadehadhāribhi imehi paccekabuddhehi, buddhasāvakehi vā me mama samāgamo āsi.

『『Sīlavato yaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ samijjhate』』ti imaṃ vacanaṃ tathāgato jino paccakkhaṃ katvā avaca kho, yathā yathā yena yena pakārena me manasā vicintitaṃ, tathā tathā tena tena pakārena samiddhaṃ bhavati. Ayaṃ bhavo antimo bhavoti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ vā…pe… suttaṃ.

Ekatiṃsamhi kappamhi jino anejo anantadassī 『『sikhī』』ti itināmako uppajji. Tassāpi bhagavato rājā bhātā sikhiddhe ca sikhī itināmake buddhe ca tassa bhagavato dhamme ca abhippasanno lokavināyakamhi parinibbute sati devātidevassa naruttamassa mahesino vipulaṃ mahantaṃ samantato gāvutikaṃ thūpaṃ akāsiṃ.

Tasmiṃ thūpe baliṃ pūjābaliṃ abhihārī manusso jātisumanaṃ paggayha pahaṭṭho pūjesi. Assa manussassa ekaṃ pupphaṃ vātena paharitaṃ hutvā patitaṃ. Ahaṃ taṃ patitaṃ ekaṃ pupphaṃ gahetvā tasseva pupphasāmikassa adāsiṃ.

So manusso pupphasāmiko abhippasannacitto hutvā maṃ 『『tvameva etaṃ ekaṃ pupphaṃ pūjā』』ti adāsi. Dadāsīti ettha da-kāro āgamo. Ahaṃ taṃ ekaṃ pupphaṃ gahetvā buddhaṃ buddhaguṇaṃ punappunaṃ anussaranto yasmiṃ kappe abhiropayiṃ, tato kappato ajja kappā tiṃsaṃ ahesuṃ. Tesu kappesu duggatiṃ nābhijānāmi, vinipātañca na gacchāmi, idaṃ phalaṃ thūpapūjāya phalanti avocāti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ vā…pe… suttaṃ.

Brahmadattassa brahmadattanāmakassa rājino kapilaṃ nāma nagaraṃ suvibhattaṃ bhāgato suṭṭhu vibhattaṃ, mahāpathaṃ mahāpathasampannaṃ ākiṇṇaṃ, nānājātikehi manussehi paripuṇṇaṃ, iddhaṃ phītañca āsi.

Pañcālānaṃ tattha puruttame ahaṃ kummāsaṃ vikkiṇiṃ, so ahaṃ yasassinaṃ upariṭṭhaṃ upasamīpe ṭhitaṃ ariṭṭhaṃ nāma sambuddhaṃ paccekabuddhaṃ addasiṃ, disvā haṭṭho cittaṃ pasādetvā naruttamaṃ ariṭṭhaṃ me gehasmiṃ yaṃ dhuvabhattaṃ vijjatha vijji, tena dhuvabhattena nimantesiṃ.

Yato ca yasmiṃ kāle ca kattiko yassaṃ pannarasīpuṇṇo, sā puṇṇamāsī pannarasī upaṭṭhitā, tato ca tasmiṃ kāle ca ahaṃ navaṃ dussayugaṃ gayha ariṭṭhassa ariṭṭhanāmakassa paccekabuddhassa upanāmesiṃ.

我來直譯這段巴利文： 98. 我對解脫心、具果位解脫心、無荒穢、離五心荒穢、無漏、住無諍、具無諍住戒、心無執著、心無黏著的辟支佛佈施僅一份小米飯食。 對那辟支佛我信受最上法、辟支菩提法,"此最上法確實存在"我如是深信。愿我與如是住聖住的辟支佛們有所交會,愿我在任何時候都不要有渴求,我對那法如是發願:"愿我也能證悟此辟支佛所證之法"我如是立意。 以對辟支佛所作業的果報,我千次往生於長壽、無我執、無"我所"執著、趣向殊勝、不趣向低劣的俱盧、北俱盧眾生之中。 以彼業果報,我具殊勝身千次往生於具種種花鬘莊嚴涂香、具名聲、具眷屬的三十三天。 以彼業果報,我成為解脫心、無荒穢、無漏,與超越善不善、具最後身的這些辟支佛或佛弟子相會。 "持戒者所愿,必得成就"這話勝者如來親自驗證而說,如我心中所想的一切都如是成就。這是最後有,這是解釋。這經或......經。 在三十一劫前生起不動勝者、無量見者名為"尸棄"。彼世尊的王兄弟對名為尸棄的佛及其法深具信心,當世間調御者般涅槃時,我為天中天、人中最上、大仙造一由旬大小的廣大塔。 在彼塔有一人帶來供養,歡喜地舉茉莉花供養。他的一朵花被風吹落。我拾起那落下的一朵花還給花的主人。 那花主人生起凈信心后對我說"你就用這一朵花供養吧"。在"dadāsi"中da是新增音。我拿那一朵花,反覆憶念佛及佛德后供奉,從那劫算起到今已三十劫。在那些劫中我不知惡趣,也不墮落處,這是供養塔的果報,他如是說,這是解釋。這經或......經。 名為梵授的國王有一城名為迦毗羅(今尼泊爾藍毗尼附近),分割槽井然,具大道,眾多,充滿各種族的人民,繁榮富庶。 在般遮羅人的最上城中我賣粥,我見到有名聲、住在上方、名為阿梨咤的正覺者辟支佛,見已歡喜生信后,以我家中所有的常食邀請人中最上的阿梨咤。 從迦提月圓十五日臨近時起,我取新衣一對獻給名為阿梨咤的辟支佛。

Naruttamo anukampako kāruṇiko taṇhānighātako muni paccekabuddho pasannacittaṃ maṃ ñatvāna paṭiggaṇhi.

Ahaṃ kalyāṇaṃ buddhavaṇṇitaṃ kammaṃ karitvāna deve ca manusse ca sandhāvitvā tato cuto bārāṇasiyaṃ nagare aḍḍhe kulasmiṃ seṭṭhissa ekaputtako uppajjiṃ, pāṇehi ca piyataro āsiṃ.

Tato ca tasmiṃ kāle viññutaṃ patto hutvā devaputtena codito ahaṃ pāsādā oruhitvāna sambuddhaṃ bhagavantaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamiṃ.

So sambuddho bhagavā gotamo anukampāya me dhammaṃ adesesi. Dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccañca dukkhasamuppādaṃ samudayasaccañca dukkhassa atikkamaṃ nirodhasaccañca ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ maggaṃ maggasaccañca iti cattāri saccāni desitāni, taduppādakaṃ dhammaṃ muni bhagavā gotamo adesayi.

Ahaṃ tassa bhagavato gotamassa vacanaṃ sutvā sāsane rato hutvā vihariṃ, ahaṃ rattindivaṃ atandito hutvā samathaṃ paṭivijjhiṃ.

Ajjhattañca ye āsavā, bahiddhā ca ye āsavā maggena samucchinnā āsuṃ, sabbe te āsavā me mama vijjiṃsu, puna na ca uppajjare.

Dukkhaṃ 『『pariyantakataṃ yassa dukkhassā』』ti pariyantakataṃ āsi, ayaṃ samussayo jātimaraṇasaṃsāro carimo antimo āsi, idāni imassa attabhāvassa anantaraṃ punabbhavo mama natthīti avocāti yojanā. Yaṃ nānāvidhaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ udāharaṇavasena niddhāritaṃ, idaṃ nānāvidhaṃ suttaṃ vāsanābhāge puññakoṭṭhāse visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

Nānāvidhaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu soḷasasu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu suttesu katamaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti pucchati.

Uddhaṃ brahmaloke adho kāmāvacare bhave sabbadhi sabbesu bhavesu vippamutto arahā 『『ayaṃ nāma dhammo ahaṃ asmī』』ti anānupassī, evaṃ vimutto arahā atiṇṇapubbaṃ oghaṃ apunabbhavāya udatāri uttiṇṇoti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāge sekkhadhamme visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

『『Ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『sīlavato』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ānanda, sīlavato puggalassa 『『kinti me mama avippaṭisāro jāyeyya pavatteyyā』』ti cetanā na karaṇīyā na kātabbā. Ānanda, sīlavato avippaṭisāro yaṃ jāyeyya pavatteyya, esā avippaṭisārassa jāyanā pavattanā dhammatā bhavati. Ānanda, avippaṭisārinā puggalena 『『kinti me mama pāmojjaṃ jāyeyya pavatteyyā』』ti cetanā na karaṇīyā, ānanda, avippaṭisārino puggalassa pāmojjaṃ yaṃ jāyeyya pavatteyya, esā pāmojjassa jāyanā pavattanā dhammatā. Sesesupi imassa yojanānayānusārena yojanānayo gahetabbo. Idaṃ suttampi nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

我來幫您翻譯這段巴利文: 至尊大仁慈悲,斷除渴愛的牟尼獨覺佛,知曉我的虔誠心而接納我。 我行善業為佛所讚歎,經歷天界與人間,後來往生於波羅奈城(現今印度瓦拉納西)中富裕家族中,成為長者的獨子,比生命更為珍貴。 那時我已長大成人,受到天子的催促,我從高樓下來前往世尊喬達摩佛陀處。 那位正等覺世尊喬達摩以慈悲為我說法。他宣說了四聖諦:苦、苦諦、苦的生起、集諦、超越苦的滅諦,以及趣向止息苦的八正道、道諦,牟尼世尊喬達摩為我講述了能生起這些的法。 我聽聞了世尊喬達摩的教導后,歡喜安住于教法中,日日夜夜精進不懈,證得止觀。 內在的諸漏和外在的諸漏都被道斷除,我的一切漏都已滅盡,永不再生。 苦已作邊際,即"苦已終盡",此身為生死輪迴的最後一世,現在此身之後我再無後有,如是解釋。種種不同的習氣分的經典以譬喻的方式確定,這些不同的經典因為在習氣分、福德部分領域中具有言說和顯示的作用,故名習氣分經。 導師已確定了種種習氣分經,我們也已了知。因為應當詢問"何為通達分經",故說"其中何為通達分經"等。其中,在這十六種雜染分等經中,問道何經名為通達分經。 上至梵界,下至欲界有,在一切有中解脫的阿羅漢,不再觀察"此法即是我",如是解脫的阿羅漢度過了從未度過的暴流,不再有後有,已渡至彼岸,如是解釋。此經因為在通達分、有學法領域中具有言說和顯示的作用,故名通達分經。 因為應當說"僅此而已",故說"具戒者"等。阿難,具戒者不必作意"愿我生起無悔",阿難,具戒者生起無悔,這是無悔生起的法性。阿難,無悔者不必作意"愿我生起喜悅",阿難,無悔者生起喜悅,這是喜悅生起的法性。其餘部分也應依此解釋方式理解。此經也名為通達分經。

Ātāpino kilesānaṃ ātāpena sammappadhānena samannāgatassa jhāyato jhāyantassa brāhmaṇassa bāhitapāpassa khīṇāsavassa dhammā anulomapaccayākārapaṭivedhasādhakā bodhipakkhiyadhammā yadā yasmiṃ kāle have ekantena pātubhavanti uppajjanti. Atha vā dhammā catuariyasaccadhammā pātubhavanti pakāsayanti abhisamayavasena pākaṭā honti. Atha vā pātubhavanakāle assa ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa khīṇāsavassa sabbā kaṅkhā vapayanti apagacchanti nirujjhanti. Kasmā? Sahetudhammaṃ avijjādikena hetunā saha pavattaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ sukhena asammissaṃ dukkhakkhandhadhammaṃ yato yasmā pajānāti aññāsi paṭivijjhati , tato tasmā vapayanti apagacchanti nirujjhantīti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

Dutiyagāthāyaṃ pana paccayānaṃ khayaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ yato yasmā avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi, tato tasmā sabbāpi kaṅkhā vapayantīti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ.

Tissa, tvaṃ kiṃ nu kujjhasi? Mā kujjhi, tissa, te tava akkodho akujjhanaṃ varaṃ uttamaṃ, hi saccaṃ, tissa, tayā kodhamānamakkhavinayatthaṃ brahmacariyaṃ vussati nūti bhagavā avocāti yojanā.

Āraññaṃ āraññakaṃ paṃsukūlikaṃ aññātuñchena aññātaanabhilakkhitagharapaṭipāṭiyā ṭhatvā uñchena piṇḍapātacaraṇavīriyena laddhena missakabhojanena yāpentaṃ nandaṃ kadā kāle ahaṃ passeyyanti avocāti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ.

Gotama , kiṃsu katamaṃ chetvā vadhitvā vadhanto kodhapariḷāhena aparidayhamāno hutvā sukhaṃ seti sayati, kiṃsu katamaṃ chetvā vadhitvā vadhanto kodhavināsena vinaṭṭhadomanasso hutvā na socati, gotama, tvaṃ kissa ekadhammassa vadhaṃ vadhanaṃ rocesīti brāhmaṇo pucchati.

Brāhmaṇa, kodhaṃ kujjhanaṃ chetvā vadhitvā vadhanto kodhapariḷāhena aparidayhamāno hutvā sukhaṃ seti sayati, kodhaṃ kujjhanaṃ chetvā vadhitvā vadhanto kodhavināsena vinaṭṭhadomanasso hutvā na socati, visamūlassa visasadisassa dukkhassa mūlabhūtassa madhuraggassa madhurasaṅkhātassa sukhapariyosānassa kodhassa kujjhanassa vadhaṃ vadhanaṃ ariyā buddhādayo puggalā pasaṃsanti. Hi saccaṃ taṃ kodhaṃ kujjhanaṃ chetvā vadhitvā vadhanto kodhavināsena vinaṭṭhadomanasso hutvā seti sayatīti yojanā. Madhuraggassāti ca madhuraṃ cetasikasukhaṃ assādaaggaṃ pariyosānaṃ assa kodhassāti madhuraggoti samāso veditabbo. Kujjhantassa hi akkositvā paribhāsitvā paharitvā pariyosāne cetasikasukhassādo uppajjatīti. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ.

Gotama, hananto dhīro uppatitaṃ kiṃsu katamaṃ hane haneyya. Vinodento dhīro jātaṃ kiṃsu katamaṃ vinodaye vinodayeyya. Pajahanto dhīro kiṃ ca katamaṃ pajahe pajaheyya. Dhīrassa kissa dhammassa abhisamayo sukhoti devatā pucchati.

Devaputta, hananto dhīro uppatitaṃ kodhaṃ kujjhanaṃ hane haneyya. Vinodento dhīro jātaṃ rāgaṃ vinodaye vinodayeyya. Pajahanto dhīro avijjaṃ pajahe pajaheyya. Saccadhammassa abhisamayo sukhoti bhagavā avocāti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ.

我來幫您翻譯這段巴利文: 當具足精進、正勤、滅盡煩惱、修習禪定的婆羅門、遠離惡法、漏盡者,在某個時候必定會生起隨順緣起通達的助道法。或者說四聖諦法顯現、明瞭、以現觀方式變得明顯。又或在顯現之時,這位精進、修禪、漏盡的婆羅門的一切疑惑都消除、遠離、滅盡。為什麼?因為他了知、證悟、通達與無明等因俱行的行等法,以及不與樂混雜的苦蘊法,所以疑惑消除、遠離、滅盡,如是解釋。此經名為通達分經。 第二偈頌中,由於他證知、了悟、通達緣的滅盡即涅槃,因此一切疑惑消除,如是解釋。此經為通達分經。 提舍,你為何生氣?不要生氣,提舍,不生氣對你最為殊勝。確實,提舍,你是爲了調伏嗔恨、我慢、覆藏而修梵行嗎?世尊如是說,如是解釋。 我何時能見到難陀住于林野,著糞掃衣,以不定期乞食的精進,在不特定家戶前次第而立所得的混合食物維生?如是解釋。此經為通達分經。 喬達摩,斷除什麼能安樂而眠?不被嗔恨之火所燒。斷除什麼能無憂?已除嗔恨而無憂。喬達摩,你讚歎斷除哪一法?婆羅門如是問。 婆羅門,斷除嗔恨能安樂而眠,不被嗔恨之火所燒。斷除嗔恨能無憂,已除嗔恨而無憂。諸聖者如佛陀等讚歎斷除如毒根、如毒、是苦根、有甜美頂點、以甜美為終的嗔恨。確實,斷除嗔恨者無憂而眠,如是解釋。"有甜美頂點"是指此嗔恨有心理愉悅的享受為其終點,應當如是理解複合詞。因為生氣者在辱罵、訓斥、打擊之後,最終會生起心理愉悅的享受。此經為通達分經。 喬達摩,智者應當降伏什麼生起之法?智者應當驅除什麼已生之法?智者應當斷除什麼法?對智者而言,通達何法為樂?天神如是問。 天子,智者應當降伏生起的嗔恨。智者應當驅除已生的貪慾。智者應當斷除無明。通達真諦之法為樂。世尊如是說,如是解釋。此經為通達分經。

1. Bhagavā sattiyā omaṭṭho uparito yāva heṭṭhā viddho puriso sattippahānāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati viya, agginā matthake ḍayhamāno ādittasiro puriso agginibbāpanatthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati iva, evaṃ kāmarāgena ḍayhamāno bhikkhu kāmarāgappahānāya kāmarāgavikkhambhanāya appamatto vāyamamāno sato satisampanno hutvā paribbaje vihareyyāti devatā kathesi.

Bhagavā pana 『『samucchedappahānāya vīriyaṃ ārabhīyatī』』ti dassetuṃ 『『sattiyā viya omaṭṭho』』tiādimāha. Devaputta, sattiyā omaṭṭho puriso sattippahānāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati viya, agginā matthake ḍayhamāno ādittasiro puriso agginibbāpanatthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati iva, evaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā abhibhūto bhikkhu sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pahānāya maggena samucchedappahānāya appamatto vāyamamāno sato satisampanno hutvā paribbaje vihareyyāti bhagavā avocāti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

Sabbe nicayā bhogā khayantā khayapariyosānā bhavanti, sabbe samussayā dhammā patanantā patanapariyosānā bhavanti, sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ maraṇamāgamma sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ addhuvaṃ bhavati, iti etaṃ vuttappakāraṃ bhayaṃ bhayahetuṃ maraṇaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ apekkhamāno paṇḍito sukhāvahāni diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikasukhāvahāni puññāni dānasīlabhāvanāmayapuññāni kayirāthāti devatā avoca.

Devaputta, sabbe nicayā bhogā khayantā khayapariyosānā, sabbe samussayā dhammā patanantā patanapariyosānā, sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ maraṇamāgamma sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ addhuvaṃ, iti etaṃ vuttappakāraṃ bhayaṃ bhayahetuṃ maraṇaṃ apekkhamāno santipekkho sabbasaṅkhārupasamaṃ nibbānaṃ apekkhamāno paṇḍito lokāmisaṃ kāmaguṇaṃ pajahe pajaheyyāti bhagavā avocāti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

Māvidha yesaṃ munīnaṃ cittaṃ jhānarataṃ jhāne rataṃ hoti, te munayo sukhaṃ sayanti na socanti. Paññavā maggapaññavā susamāhito āraddhavīriyo pahitatto nibbānaṃ pesitacitto puggalo duttaraṃ oghaṃ saṃsāroghaṃ tarati.

Kāmasaññāya virato vigatacitto yo khīṇāsavo sabbasaṃyojanātīto arahattamaggena sabbe saṃyojane atīto nandibhavaparikkhīṇo ahosi, so khīṇāsavo gambhīre saṃsāraṇṇave na sīdatīti yojanā. Nandisaṅkhātā taṇhā ca kāmabhavarūpabhavaarūpabhavā ca nandibhavā, nandibhavā parikkhīṇā yassa khīṇāsavassāti nandibhavaparikkhīṇoti samāso veditabbo. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

Arahataṃ arahantānaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ sucaritādibhedañca sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyabhedañca dhammaṃ yo paṇḍito saddahāno saddahanto hutvā nibbānappattiyā appamatto vicakkhaṇo hutvā sussūsaṃ sussūsanto bhave, so paṇḍito paññaṃ lokiyalokuttarapaññaṃ labhate labhati.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 101. 世尊說："就像被劍從上至下刺中的人爲了拔出劍而奮力，就像頭上被火燒著的人爲了熄滅火焰而奮力，同樣，比丘被欲貪燃燒時，應當為斷除欲貪、為制伏欲貪而不放逸精進，具念正知而行走生活。"這是天人所說。 世尊為顯示"為徹底斷除而精進"而說"如被劍刺"等。天子啊，如被劍刺中的人為拔除劍而精進，如頭上被火燒著的人為熄滅火焰而精進，同樣，被有身見所克服的比丘，為斷除有身見，為通過聖道徹底斷除，應當不放逸精進，具念正知而行走生活。這是世尊所說的意思。這經名為趣向通達之經。 一切積聚的財富都終歸於盡，一切積聚的法都終歸於敗壞，一切眾生的生命遇到死亡時都成為無常，如是觀察這種可畏的因由、死亡、世俗死亡時，智者應當修作能帶來快樂的、能帶來現世與來世安樂的功德，即佈施、持戒、禪修等功德。這是天人所說。 天子啊，一切積聚的財富都終歸於盡，一切積聚的法都終歸於敗壞，一切眾生的生命遇到死亡時都成為無常，如是觀察這種可畏的因由、死亡時，智者追求寂靜，追求一切諸行的止息涅槃，應當捨棄世間欲樂、五欲功德。這是世尊所說的意思。這經名為趣向通達之經。 在此，那些牟尼的心喜好禪修，他們安眠無憂。具足智慧、善於定力、精進勇猛、心志堅定、心向涅槃的人，能度難度的暴流、輪迴暴流。 遠離欲想，心無執著，漏盡，超越一切結縛，通過阿羅漢道超越一切結縛，滅盡渴愛與有，這樣的漏盡者不會沉淪於深邃的輪迴海。所謂渴愛與欲有、色有、無色有稱為渴愛與有，渴愛與有已盡的漏盡者稱為"渴愛與有已盡者"，應當如此理解這複合詞。這經名為趣向通達之經。 智者對阿羅漢們——佛陀、辟支佛、聲聞們的法，包括善行等種種法和三十七道品等諸法，以信心相信，為證得涅槃而不放逸，以智慧觀察，恭敬聽聞，這樣的智者能獲得世間出世間的智慧。

Yo vīriyavā puggalo patirūpadesakārī desakālādīni ahāpetvā lokiyalokuttaradhammapatirūpaṃ adhigamūpāyaṃ karoti, dhuravā cetasikavīriyena anikkhittadhuro uṭṭhātā kāyikavīriyavasena uṭṭhānasampanno hoti, so vīriyavā puggalo dhanaṃ lokiyalokuttaradhanaṃ vindate adhigacchati. Saccena vacīsaccena ca paramatthasaccena ca buddhādiko saccadhamme ṭhito sappuriso kittiṃ pappoti. Dadaṃ dadanto yaṃ kiñci icchitaṃ patthitaṃ catusaṅgahavatthuṃ dadanto saṅgahanto sappuriso mittāni ekantamittāni ganthati sampādeti, evaṃ catūhi saccadhammadhiticāgehi samannāgato so sappuriso asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ pecca gantvā ekantena sokakāraṇassa abhāvato na socatīti yojanā.

Gotama, sabbaganthappahīno tīhi bhavehi vippamutto sato satisampanno tvaṃ, samaṇo, aññaṃ devamanussādikaṃ yaṃ anusāsasi yaṃ anusāsanaṃ karosi, taṃ anusāsanaṃ sabbaganthappahīnassa tīhi bhavehi vippamuttassa samaṇassa te tava na sādhūti sakkanāmako mārapakkhiko yakkho gāthāya ajjhabhāsi.

『『Sakka sakkanāmaka yakkha anukampitena purisena saddhiṃ yena kenaci vaṇṇena kāraṇena saṃvāso ekasmiṃ ṭhāne sahavāso jāyati, taṃ anukampitabbaṃ sahavāsagataṃ purisaṃ sappañño manasā anukampituṃ na arahati anukampituṃyeva arahati. Yā anukampā karuṇā, yā anuddayā mettā, muditā ca uppannā, tāya anukampāya karuṇāya, tāya anuddayāya mettāya muditāya ca samussāhitena pasannena manasā yo sappañño sappuriso aññaṃ devamanussādikaṃ yaṃ anusāsati yaṃ anusāsanaṃ karoti, so sappañño sappuriso tena anusāsanena saṃyutto kāmacchandādīnaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ vasena ananulomasaṃyogena saṃyutto na hotīti bhagavā avocāti yojanā.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 精進的人居住在適宜之處，不失時機等，修習世間出世間法的適當方法，具足精進，以心理精進不捨責任，以身體精進而具足精勤，這樣精進的人能獲得世間出世間的財富。以言語真實和勝義真實，安住于佛陀等真實法中的善人能獲得聲譽。佈施任何所欲、所愿之物，以四攝事佈施攝受的善人能結交真誠的朋友。如是具足真實、法、堅忍、舍離四德的善人，從此世往生他世時必定不會憂愁，因為沒有憂愁的原因。 喬達摩啊，你這沙門已斷除一切結縛，解脫三有，具足正念，你對其他天人等所作的教導，對於已斷除一切結縛、解脫三有的沙門你來說是不好的。名為釋迦的魔黨夜叉如是以偈頌說。 "釋迦啊，名為釋迦的夜叉，與受憐憫的人以任何因緣共住在一處時，智者不應以心不憐憫那應受憐憫的共住者，而應當憐憫。凡是生起的憐憫、慈悲、同情、慈愛、隨喜，以這憐憫、慈悲，以這同情、慈愛、隨喜，以歡喜的心受到鼓舞，智者善人對其他天人等作如是教導時，這智者善人雖作此教導，卻不會因貪慾等結縛而受到不適當的束縛。"這是世尊所說的意思。

1. Samaṇa , rāgo ca doso ca ime dve dhammā kutonidānā, kiṃnidānā, kiṃpaccayā bhavanti, arati ca rati ca lomahaṃso ca ime tayo kutojā kuto bhavanti? Kumārakā dhaṅkaṃ kākaṃ gahetvā pāde dīghasuttakena bandhitvā suttakoṭiṃ aṅguliyaṃ veṭhetvā osajanti iva, evaṃ manovitakkā kuto samuṭṭhāya cittaṃ osajantīti sūcilomayakkho bhagavantaṃ pucchi.

Rāgo ca doso ca ime dve dhammā itonidānā ito attabhāvato nidānā jāyanti; arati ca rati ca lomahaṃso ca ime tayo itojā ito attato bhavanti; kumārakā dhaṅkaṃ kākaṃ gahetvā pāde dīghasuttakena bandhitvā suttakoṭiṃ aṅguliyaṃ veṭhetvā osajanti iva, evaṃ manovitakkā ito attabhāvato samuṭṭhāya cittaṃ osajanti.

Nigrodhassa khandhajā pārohā sākhāsu jāyanti iva, vane rukkhaṃ nissāya jātā māluvā latā taṃ rukkhaṃ ajjhottharitvā vitatā otatavitatā tiṭṭhati iva, evaṃ, yakkha, tvaṃ suṇohi snehajā taṇhāsnehato jātā attasambhūtā attani sambhūtā puna anekappakārā manovitakkā pāpamanovitakkā ceva taṃsampayuttakilesā ca kāmesu vatthukāmesu visattā laggā saṃsibbitā ṭhitā.

Ye paṇḍitā 『『yaṃ nidānaṃ assa attabhāvassā』』ti yatonidānaṃ naṃ kilesagahanaṃ samudayasaccaṃ pajānanti, te paṇḍitā attabhāvasaṅkhātassa dukkhasaccassa nidānabhūtaṃ naṃ kilesagahanaṃ samudayasaccaṃ maggasaccena vinodenti. Apunabbhavāya apunabhavasaṅkhātāya nirodhasaccatthāya atiṇṇapubbaṃ anamatagge saṃsāre supinenāpi atiṇṇapubbaṃ duttaraṃ imaṃ oghaṃ catubbidhaṃ saṃkilesoghaṃ tarantīti bhagavā avocāti yojanā.

『『Bhagavā, samaṇadhammassa karaṇaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ, bhagavā, samaṇadhammassa karaṇaṃ nāma sudukkaraṃ suṭṭhutaraṃ dukkara』』nti eko kulaputto pabbajitvā samaṇadhammaṃ katvā ariyabhūmiṃ appatvā kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbatto, so devaputto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āha. Kāmada, sīlasamāhitā ṭhitattā ṭhitasabhāvā satta sekkhā puggalā dukkaraṃ vāpi samaṇadhammaṃ karonti. Anagāriyupetassa anagāriyaṃ niggehabhāvaṃ upagatassa pabbajitassa tuṭṭhi catupaccayasantoso sukhāvahā hotī』』ti bhagavā avoca.

『『Bhagavā, yadidaṃ yā esā tuṭṭhi sukhāvahā, esā tuṭṭhi dullabhā』』ti so devaputto āha. 『『Kāmada, yesaṃ sekkhānaṃ mano divā ca ratto ca bhāvanāya rato cittavūpasame rato, te sekkhā dullabhaṃ vāpi tussanaṃ labhantī』』ti bhagavā avoca.

『『Bhagavā, yadidaṃ yaṃ idaṃ cittaṃ bhāvanāya rataṃ, taṃ cittaṃ dussamādaha』』nti so devaputto āha. 『『Kāmada, ye ariyā indriyūpasame rattindivaṃ ratā, te ariyā dussamādahaṃ vāpi cittaṃ samādahanti, kāmada, te ariyā maccuno jālaṃ kilesajālaṃ chetvā maggaṃ gacchantī』』ti bhagavā avoca.

『『Bhagavā, yo maggo pubbabhāgapaṭipadāvasena visamo, so maggo duggamo』』ti so devaputto āha. 『『Kāmada, ariyā duggame visame vāpi maggaṃ gacchanti, anariyā visame magge avaṃsirā papatanti, ariyānaṃ so maggo samova bhave, na asamo. Hi saccaṃ visame visattakāye ariyā samā bhavantī』』ti bhagavā avocāti yojanā.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 102. 沙門啊，這貪慾和嗔恚兩種法是從何處生起，以何為因，以何為緣？不樂、歡樂和身毛豎立這三種是從何處生？就像孩童們抓住烏鴉，用長線綁住它的腳，將線端纏在手指上放飛一樣，種種意念從何處生起而繫縛心？針毛夜叉如是問世尊。 這貪慾和嗔恚兩種法從此處生起，從此自體而生；不樂、歡樂和身毛豎立這三種從此處生，從此自我而有；就像孩童們抓住烏鴉，用長線綁住它的腳，將線端纏在手指上放飛一樣，種種意念從此自體生起而繫縛心。 就像榕樹的氣根從樹幹生長，就像依附在林中樹木上的蔓藤遍覆那樹而展開蔓延一樣，夜叉啊，你聽著，從愛慾生起，從渴愛而生，從自我而起，在自我中生起的種種意念、惡意念以及與之相應的煩惱，執著、執取、纏縛于諸欲境。 智者們了知"這是此自體的根源"，即知道煩惱叢林、集諦的根源，這些智者以道諦驅除作為苦諦之自體的根源、煩惱叢林和集諦。爲了不再有、爲了證得滅諦，他們度過在無始輪迴中連在夢中都未曾度過的難度的暴流、四種煩惱暴流。這是世尊所說的意思。 "世尊，修習沙門法是困難的，世尊，修習沙門法是極其困難的。"一位善家子出家修習沙門法，未證得聖位而命終，生於天界，這天子前來見世尊如是說。"迦瑪達，安住于戒定，性情穩固的七類有學人即使困難也能修習沙門法。對於進入無家的出家人來說，知足於四資具能帶來安樂。"世尊如是說。 "世尊，這種能帶來安樂的知足是難得的。"那天子說。"迦瑪達，那些有學人的心日夜喜好修習，樂於心的寂靜，他們即使難得也能獲得知足。"世尊說。 "世尊，這種喜好修習的心是難以調伏的。"那天子說。"迦瑪達，聖者們日夜樂於調伏諸根，即使難以調伏也能調伏其心，迦瑪達，這些聖者切斷死魔的網、煩惱之網而行道。"世尊說。 "世尊，在前行道路上這道路是不平的，是難行的。"那天子說。"迦瑪達，聖者們即使在難行不平之處也能行道，非聖者在不平道路上則頭下傾跌。對聖者來說此道是平坦的，不是不平的。確實，在不平的執著之身中，聖者們保持平等。"這是世尊所說的意思。

1. Yaṃ jetavanaṃ isisaṅghanisevitaṃ dhammarājena āvutthaṃ, idaṃ taṃ jetavanaṃ mama pītisañjananaṃ pītiyā sañjananaṃ karaṃ hi karaṃ eva.

Kammaṃ maggacetanākammañca vijjā maggapaññā ca dhammo samādhi ceva samādhipakkhiko ca dhammo sīlaṃ, sīle ṭhitassa jīvitaṃ uttamaṃ, etena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena sattā sujjhanti, gottena vā dhanena vā sattā na sujjhanti.

Tasmā maggeneva sattānaṃ visujjhanato attano atthaṃ sampassaṃ passanto paṇḍito poso yoniso upāyena dhammaṃ bodhipakkhiyadhammaṃ vicine vicineyya, evaṃ vicinane sati tattha ariyamagge vicinanto puggalo sujjhati.

Sāriputto sīlena ca upasamena ca pāraṅgato iva, evaṃ yopi bhikkhu sīlena ca upasamena ca pāraṅgato, so bhikkhu etāva paramo sāriputtasadisova siyāti anāthapiṇḍikanāmo devaputto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āhāti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

Atītaṃ atītakkhandhapañcakaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhīhi nānvāgameyya, anāgataṃ anāgatakkhandhapañcakaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhīhi nappaṭikaṅkhe na pattheyya. Yaṃ yasmā atītaṃ pahīnaṃ niruddhaṃ atthaṅgataṃ, tasmā atītassa pahīnattā niruddhattā atthaṅgatattā nānvāgameyya. Yaṃ yasmā anāgataṃ appattaṃ, tasmā na paṭikaṅkhe.

Paccuppannaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ vayadhammaṃ yattha yattha santāne vā, yattha yattha araññādīsu vā uppannaṃ, tattha tattha santāne vā, tattha tattha araññādīsu vā naṃ paccuppannadhammaṃ yāhi aniccānupassanādīhi vipassati, tāhi aniccānupassanādīhi nibbānaṃ rāgādīhi asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ bhavati, taṃ nibbānaṃ vipassako puggalo vidvā nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appento hutvā anubrūhaye vaḍḍheyya.

Ātappaṃ saṃkilesānaṃ ātapantaṃ vīriyaṃ ajjeva kiccaṃ kātabbaṃ, suve jīvitaṃ vā maraṇaṃ vā ko jaññā jāneyya, 『『suve vā dānādipuññaṃ jānissāmī』』ti cittaṃ anuppādetvā 『『ajjeva karissāmī』』ti evaṃ vīriyaṃ kātabbaṃ. Hi saccaṃ maraṇakāraṇabhāvatāya ahivicchikavisasatthādianekāya senāya vasena mahāsenena tena maccunā saddhiṃ mittasanthavākārena vā lañjadānena vā saṅgaraṃ natthīti.

Evaṃ manasi katvā vihāriṃ viharantaṃ ātāpiṃ ahorattaṃ atanditaṃ analasaṃ uṭṭhāhakaṃ sappurisaṃ 『『bhaddekaratto』』ti santo muni ve ekantena ācikkhate ācikkhatiyevāti yojanā.

『『Cattārimāni bhikkhave』』tyādisuttaṃ pāḷito ca aṭṭhakathāto ca pākaṭaṃ.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 103. 祇園精舍為仙人僧眾所居住，為法王所居住，這祇園精舍確實能為我生起歡喜。 業即道思所生之業，明即道慧，法即定和與定相應之法，以及戒，安住于戒者的生命最為殊勝，眾生以此八支聖道而得清凈，而不是以種姓或財富得清凈。 因此，由於眾生只能通過聖道得到清凈，智者觀見自己的利益，應當以如理方便擇法、擇菩提分法，如此擇法時，在聖道上擇法的人得以清凈。 舍利弗以戒和寂靜而到達彼岸，同樣，任何比丘以戒和寂靜到達彼岸，這比丘就能成為如舍利弗一樣最殊勝的。名為給孤獨的天子來到世尊面前如是說。這經名為趣向通達之經。 不應以貪愛和邪見追逐過去的五蘊，不應以貪愛和邪見期待未來的五蘊。因為過去已斷、已滅、已沒，所以由於過去已斷、已滅、已沒而不應追逐。因為未來尚未到來，所以不應期待。 現在的五蘊是壞滅之法，無論在哪個相續中，無論在林野等何處生起，在那裡、那個相續中，在那裡、那林野等處，以無常隨觀等觀察現在法，以這些無常隨觀等，涅槃成為不可動搖、不可破壞的，觀行者以智慧進入緣取涅槃的果定而增長。 應當今天就做該做的精進，精進能燒盡諸煩惱，誰能知道明天是生是死？不應生起"明天我將行佈施等功德"的想法，而應當想"今天就要做"，如此應當精進。確實，因為死亡的原因，與那具有蛇、蝎、毒、刀等諸多軍隊的大軍死魔，不能以友誼或賄賂而交戰。 如是思維而住，精進、日夜不懈怠、不懶惰、勤勉的善人，聖者確實稱之為"善於度過一夜者"。這是其意思。 "諸比丘，此四種"等經文，從聖典和註釋書中顯明。

1. Nānāvidhaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu soḷasasu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu suttesu katamaṃ suttaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti pucchati.

Yassa uttamapurisassa cittaṃ selūpamaṃ ṭhitaṃ lokadhammavātehi nānukampati, rajanīyesu lābhādīsu virattaṃ bhave, so uttamapuriso kopaneyye alābhādike na kuppati, tassa uttamapurisassa cittaṃ evaṃ aniccatādinā bhāvitaṃ, naṃ bhāvitacittaṃ uttamapurisaṃ vītikkantalokadhammahetukaṃ dukkhaṃ kuto essatīti yojanā. Idaṃ suttaṃ asekkhabhāge visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma. Esa nayo ito paresupi veditabbo.

『『Asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ idamevā』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『āyasmato cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Yo brāhmaṇo bāhitapāpadhammattā bāhitapāpadhammo bhave, so brāhmaṇo niggatahuṃhuṃkattā nihuṃhuṅko bhave, niggatakilesakasāvattā nikkasāvo bhave, sīlasaṃvarena saṃyatacittatāya yatatto bhave, yo brāhmaṇo catumaggañāṇavedehi antaṃ nibbānaṃ gatattā vedantagū bhave, dhammena vusitabrahmacariyattā vusitabrahmacariyo bhave. Yassa brāhmaṇassa kuhiñci loke ussadā rāgussado dosussado mohussado mānussado diṭṭhussado natthi, so brāhmaṇo brahmavādaṃ 『『ahaṃ brāhmaṇomhī』』ti vācaṃ vadeyyāti bhagavā avocāti yojanā.

Ye buddhā pāpake akusale dhamme bāhitvā sadā caranti satā satisampannā khīṇasaṃyojanā, te buddhā lokasmiṃ brāhmaṇāti ve ekantena kathīyantīti avocāti yojanā.

Yattha nibbāne āpo ca pathavī ca tejo ca vāyo ca na gādhati na patiṭṭhahati, tattha nibbāne sukkā gahā ceva tārakā ca na jotanti, tattha nibbāne ādicco nappakāsati, tattha nibbāne candimā na bhāti, tattha nibbāne tamo na vijjati.

Yo brāhmaṇo attanā sayaṃ muni monena yadā taṃ nibbānaṃ avedi vindati paṭilabhati paṭivijjhati, atha paṭivijjhanakkhaṇe so brāhmaṇo rūpā rūpadhammato ca arūpā arūpadhammato ca sukhadukkhā sukhadukkhato ca pamuccatīti avocāti yojanā.

Yakkha, yo brāhmaṇo sakesu sakaattabhāvesu dhammesu upādānakkhandhesu saccesu, dhammesu ca pāragū hoti, atha pāragamanakkhaṇe so brāhmaṇo etaṃ ajakalāpakaṃ tayā vuttaṃ etaṃ pisācaṃ kilesapisācañca , tayā kataṃ akkulañca akkulaṃ, pakkulakaraṇaṃ ativattatīti avocāti yojanā.

Yo bhikkhu āyantiṃ āgacchantiṃ purāṇadutiyikaṃ bhariyaṃ vā, aññaṃ āgacchantiṃ itthiṃ vā cittena na abhinandati, pakkamantiṃ purāṇadutiyikaṃ bhariyaṃ vā, aññaṃ pakkamantiṃ itthiṃ vā cittena na socati, saṅgā pañcavidhatopi saṅgato muttaṃ saṅgāmajiṃ taṃ bhikkhuṃ 『『brāhmaṇa』』nti ahaṃ vadāmīti avocāti yojanā.

Ettha nadiyaṃ bahujano nhāyati, so bahujano nhāyako udakena udakanhānena sucī na hoti. Yamhi puggale saccaṃ, saccato sesadhammo ca atthi, so puggalo sucī ca hoti, so puggalo brāhmaṇo ca hotīti avocāti yojanā; suciasucibhāvo ṭīkāyaṃ vitthārato vuttova.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 104. 阿阇黎已確定了各種趣向通達之經，我們也已知曉，因為應當詢問"什麼是無學分經"，所以說"其中什麼是無學分經"等。在那十六種染污分等經中，詢問什麼經稱為無學分經。 最上士夫的心如山石般穩固，不為世間法之風所動搖，于可愛的利養等離欲，于可瞋的無利養等不生瞋恚，他的心如是修習無常等，對於這樣修心的最上士夫，已超越世間法因緣的苦從何處而來？這是其意思。此經因宣說開顯無學分境界而名為無學分經。此理應當了知于其他經中也是如此。 因為應當說"這就是無學分經"，所以說"具壽等"。 婆羅門因已除惡法而成為除惡者，因已除哼哼聲而成為無哼哼者，因已除煩惱垢而成為無垢者，因戒律攝護而成為自製者，婆羅門因以四道智通達涅槃而成為通達吠陀者，因如法修梵行而成為已修梵行者。婆羅門於世間任何處都沒有貪、瞋、癡、慢、見的增盛，這樣的婆羅門可以說"我是婆羅門"的梵語。這是世尊所說的意思。 諸佛已除惡不善法而常住正念，斷盡結縛，確實這些佛於世間被稱為婆羅門。這是所說的意思。 在涅槃中，水、地、火、風不能立足，在涅槃中，星宿和眾星不發光，在涅槃中，太陽不照耀，在涅槃中，月亮不光明，在涅槃中，黑暗不存在。 當婆羅門以寂默之智自己證知、獲得、證悟那涅槃時，在證悟的剎那，這婆羅門從色法、無色法、苦樂中解脫。這是所說的意思。 夜叉啊，婆羅門于自己的諸法、取蘊、諸諦中通達彼岸時，在到達彼岸的剎那，這婆羅門超越你所說的這羊群、你所造的這鬼魅煩惱鬼，和你所作的不凈與造作不凈。這是所說的意思。 比丘對來臨的前妻或其他來臨的女人心不歡喜，對離去的前妻或其他離去的女人心不憂愁，從五種執著解脫的、戰勝執著的那比丘，我稱他為"婆羅門"。這是所說的意思。 在這河中許多人沐浴，那些沐浴者不因水、不因水浴而清凈。若人具有真實和其他真實法，此人成為清凈者，此人成為婆羅門。這是所說的意思；清凈不清凈的詳細解釋在註釋書中已說。

Ātāpino jhāyato yassa brāhmaṇassa dhammā saccadhammā yadā have ekantena pātubhavanti, tadā dhammānaṃ pātubhavanakkhaṇe so brāhmaṇo mārasenaṃ vidhūpayaṃ vidhūpayanto tiṭṭhati. 『『Kimivā』』ti vattabbattā 『『sūriyova obhāsayamantalikkha』』nti vuttaṃ. Sūriyo antalikkhaṃ obhāsayanto tiṭṭhati iva, evaṃ tiṭṭhatīti yojanā.

Yo paṃsukūliko bhikkhu sabbāni cattāri yogāni upātivatto sakiñcane loke akiñcano iriyati catubbidhairiyāpathaṃ vatteti. Apahānadhammaṃ kenaci maggena appahānasabhāvaṃ appattakāyena appattaṃ tevijjapattaṃ, iriyamānaṃ santindriyaṃ taṃ paṃsukūlikaṃ bhikkhuṃ tumhe passatha.

Ājāniyaṃ purisaājānīyaṃ jātibalanisedhaṃ 『『ahaṃ jātibrāhmaṇo』』ti jātimattakena pavattamānabalanisedhakaṃ taṃ paṃsukūlikaṃ bhikkhuṃ sambahulā uḷārā devatā brahmaṃ vimānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā idha sāsane, brahmavimāne vā pasannacittā hutvā namassanti. Nidhāti ca ettha na-kāro āgamo.

Purisājañña te tava amhākaṃ namo atthu, purisuttama te tava amhākaṃ namo atthu, yassa te tava nissayaṃ mayaṃ nābhijānāma, so tvaṃ kiṃ puggalaṃ nissāya jhāyasīti avocunti yojanā.

Ye bhikkhū kālena kālaṃ dhammassavanavasena cirarattaṃ sametikā bhavanti, ime bhikkhū sahāyā honti vata. Nesaṃ sahāyānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhamme buddhappavedite dhamme saddhammo sameti.

Kappinena ariyappavedite dhamme suvinītā te sahāyakā bhikkhū savāhiniṃ māraṃ jetvā antimaṃ dehaṃ attabhāvaṃ dhārentīti avocāti yojanā.

Sithilaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabbha sabbadukkhappamocanaṃ idaṃ nibbānaṃ yogāvacarena na adhigantabbaṃ, appena appakena thāmasā idaṃ nibbānaṃ na adhigantabbaṃ.

Ayañca yogāvacaro bhikkhu daharo, yo puriso savāhiniṃ māraṃ jetvā antimaṃ dehaṃ attabhāvaṃ dhāreti, so ayaṃ puriso so uttamapurisovāti avocāti yojanā. 『『Puriso』』ti vattabbe chandānurakkhaṇavasena 『『poriso』』ti vuttaṃ.

Mogharāja, dubbaṇṇako lūkhacīvaro sadā sato satisampanno khīṇāsavo ca visaṃyutto ca katakicco ca anāsavo ca tevijjo ca iddhippatto ca cetopariyāyakovido ca so bhikkhu savāhiniṃ māraṃ jetvā antimaṃ dehaṃ dhāretīti avocāti yojanā.

105.『『Tathāgato』』tiādīsu yojanā pākaṭā. Idaṃ suttaṃ asekkhabhāge visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāma.

我來將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 精進禪修的婆羅門，當真實法確實顯現時，在法顯現的剎那，那婆羅門驅散魔軍而住。因為應當說"像什麼"，所以說"如太陽照耀虛空"。如同太陽照耀虛空而住，如是而住。這是其意思。 這糞掃衣比丘已超越一切四軛，在有所有的世間中無所有而行四威儀。你們看這糞掃衣比丘，他以任何道都不能斷除的法性未證得，未以身證得三明，行於寂靜諸根。 眾多殊勝的天神來到梵天宮，或在此教法中，以凈信心禮敬這糞掃衣比丘，他是調御者，能制止以生為力，制止僅以"我是生為婆羅門"而起的力量。這裡的"ni"是新增的音。 人中調御者啊，我們禮敬你，人中最上者啊，我們禮敬你，我們不知道你依止誰，你依止什麼人而修禪？這是他們所說的意思。 諸比丘時常因聽法而長夜相聚，這些比丘實為同伴。這些同伴比丘在佛所說的法中，正法和諧一致。 這些同伴比丘在迦賓那所說的聖法中善加調御，戰勝了魔軍而住持最後身。這是所說的意思。 以懈怠的精進不能證得這能解脫一切苦的涅槃，以微小的力量不能證得這涅槃。 這修行者比丘年輕，此人戰勝了魔軍而住持最後身，此人即是那最上士。這是所說的意思。應說"puriso"，但為保持韻律而說"poriso"。 摩伽羅阇啊，這位比丘形貌醜陋，衣服粗糙，常具正念，漏盡，解脫，已作所作，無漏，具三明，得神通，善知他心，他戰勝了魔軍而住持最後身。這是所說的意思。 105"如來"等句的意思明顯。此經因宣說開顯無學分境界而名為無學分經。

1. Nānāvidhaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca sutta』』nti vattabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca sutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu soḷasasu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu suttesu katamaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāmāti pucchati.

Channaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā channaṃ chādentaṃ bhikkhuṃ dukkaṭādivasso ativassati, vivaṭaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā vivaṭaṃ desentaṃ ācikkhantaṃ bhikkhuṃ dukkaṭādivasso nātivassati, tasmā channassa ativassanato ca vivaṭassa nātivassanato ca channaṃ chāditabbaṃ āpattiṃ vivaretha desetha ārocetha , evaṃ vivaraṇe sati taṃ vivarantaṃ bhikkhuṃ dukkaṭādivasso nātivassatīti yojanā.

『『Imasmiṃ sutte kittakena saṃkileso dassito, kittakena vāsanā dassitā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『channamativassatī』』ti saṃkileso, 『vivaṭaṃ nātivassatī』ti vāsanā, 『tasmā channaṃ vivaretha, evaṃ taṃ nātivassatī』ti ayaṃ saṃkileso ca vāsanā cā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Channamativassatī』』ti ettakena saṃkileso dassito. 『『Vivaṭaṃ nātivassatī』』ti ettakena vāsanā dassitā. 『『Tasmā channaṃ vivaretha, evaṃ taṃ nātivassatī』』ti ettakena ayaṃ saṃkileso ca dassito, ayaṃ vāsanā ca dassitā. Idaṃ 『『channaṃ…pe... vassatī』』ti suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāge visaye ca vāsanābhāge visaye ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāma.

『『Saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『cattārome mahārājā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Tesu catūsu puggalesu katame puggalā saṃkilesabhāgiyā, katame puggalā vāsanābhāgiyā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yo ca puggalo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu catūsu tamotamaparāyaṇādīsu puggalesu. Tassattho pākaṭo. Idaṃ 『『cattārome』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyesu dvīsu puggalesu ca vāsanābhāgiyesu dvīsu puggalesu ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāma.

Nānāvidhaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāmā』』ti pucchitabbattā tattha katamaṃsaṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca sutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho vuttanayena veditabbo.

Ayasaṃ yaṃ bandhanañca dārujaṃ yaṃ bandhanañca pabbajaṃ yaṃ bandhanañca loke atthi, taṃ ayasādibandhanaṃ 『『daḷhaṃ bandhana』』nti dhīrā buddhādayo paṇḍitapurisā na āhu. Maṇikuṇḍalesu ca puttesu ca dāresu ca yā sārattarattā balavarāgarattā apekkhā loke vijjati, taṃ sārattarattaapekkhāsaṅkhātaṃ rāgabandhanaṃ 『『daḷhaṃ bandhana』』nti dhīrā paṇḍitapurisā āhu. Iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ sārattarattaapekkhāsaṅkhāto akusaladhammo saṃkileso dassito.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯成簡體中文: 106. 老師已經確定了各種無學分經,我們也已經知道了,"什麼是污染分經和習氣分經"應當被說,因此說了"其中什麼是污染分經和習氣分經"等等。其中:在那十六種污染分等經中,問什麼經叫做污染分經和習氣分經。 犯了六種罪並隱藏六種罪的比丘,惡作等雨過度下雨,犯了公開的罪並公開懺悔告白的比丘,惡作等雨不過度下雨,因此由於隱藏的過度下雨和公開的不過度下雨,應當公開隱藏的罪,懺悔,告白,這樣在公開時,對那公開的比丘惡作等雨不過度下雨,這是解釋。 "在這部經中,多少顯示了污染,多少顯示了習氣"應當被問,因此說"'隱藏的過度下雨'是污染,'公開的不過度下雨'是習氣,'因此應當公開隱藏的,這樣它就不過度下雨'這是污染和習氣"。僅以"隱藏的過度下雨"顯示了污染。僅以"公開的不過度下雨"顯示了習氣。以"因此應當公開隱藏的,這樣它就不過度下雨"顯示了這個污染,也顯示了這個習氣。這部"隱藏的...下雨"經,因為在污染分和習氣分的對象中以說明宣示的方式運作,所以叫做污染分經和習氣分經。 "污染分經和習氣分經就只有這些嗎"應當被說,因此說了"四大王"等等。"在那四種人中,哪些人是污染分的,哪些人是習氣分的"應當被問,因此說了"其中哪個人"等等。其中:在那四種從暗到暗等人中。它的意思是明顯的。這部"四大王"等經,因為在兩種污染分的人和兩種習氣分的人中以說明宣示的方式運作,所以叫做污染分經和習氣分經。 老師已經確定了各種污染分經和習氣分經,我們也已經知道了,"什麼叫做污染分經和通達分經"應當被問,因此說了"其中什麼是污染分經和通達分經"等等。它的意思應當按照已說的方法來理解。 在世間存在的鐵製的枷鎖、木製的枷鎖、草制的枷鎖,智者佛陀等賢明之人不說那鐵製等枷鎖是"堅固的束縛"。在世間存在對寶石耳環、兒子、妻子的熱愛、強烈的貪愛、執著,智者賢明之人說那被稱為熱愛執著的貪慾束縛是"堅固的束縛"。通過這段經文,顯示了這個被稱為熱愛執著的不善法污染。

『『Kena nibbedho dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『eta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Dhīrā paṇḍitapurisā etaṃ rāgabandhanaṃ 『『daḷhaṃ bandhana』』nti āhu. Etaṃ rāgabandhanaṃ ohārinaṃ heṭṭhā apāyaṃ avaharaṇaṃ hoti, sithilaṃ bandhanaṭṭhāne chaviādīni akopetattā sithilaṃ hoti, duppamuñcaṃ lobhavasena ekavārampi uppannassa rāgabandhanassa dummocayattā duppamuñcaṃ hoti, paṇḍitapurisā etampi vuttappakāraṃ rāgabandhanampi maggena chetvāna anapekkhino hutvā kāmasukhaṃ pahāya paribbajanti. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ maggo nibbedho dassito. Idaṃ 『『ayasa』』ntiādikaṃ suttaṃ rāgādisaṃkilesabhāge visaye ca vāsanābhāge visaye ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāma.

1. Bhikkhave, yañca ceteti yañca cetanaṃ nibbatteti, yañca pakappeti yañca pakappanaṃ karoti, yañca anuseti yañca anusayanaṃ bhavati, etaṃ cetanaṃ etaṃ pakappanaṃ etaṃ anusayanaṃ viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā ārammaṇaṃ paccayo hoti. Ārammaṇe paccaye sati tassa abhisaṅkhāra viññāṇassa patiṭṭhā hoti. Tasmiṃ abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇe patiṭṭhite viruḷhe sati āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti viññāṇādinibbatti hoti. Āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyā sati āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇaṃ sambhavati. Āyatiṃ soka…pe… samudayo hoti.

Bhikkhave, ce no ceteti, ce no pakappeti, atha tathāpi ce anuseti anusayanaṃ bhavati, evaṃ sati etaṃ anusayanaṃ viññāṇassa abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ paccayo hoti…pe… samudayo hoti. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ vuttappakāro cetayanādiko akusaladhammo saṃkileso dassito.

『『Kena nibbedho dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『yato cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhikkhave, yato ca ariyamaggiko neva ceteti, no ca pakappeti, no ca anuseti, etaṃ acetayanaṃ etaṃ akappanaṃ etaṃ ananusayanaṃ viññāṇassa abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ paccayo na hoti…pe… āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇaṃ nirujjhati, āyatiṃ soka…pe… yāsā nirujjhanti…pe… nirodho hoti. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ ariyamaggo nibbedho dassito. Idaṃ 『『yañca bhikkhave』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāge visaye ca nibbedhabhāge visaye ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāma.

以下是完整的簡體中文直譯： "應當說'通過什麼顯示了通達'"，因此說了"這個"等等。智者賢明之人說這個貪慾束縛是"堅固的束縛"。這個貪慾束縛是下拉的，會拖向下方惡趣，是鬆弛的，因為在束縛處不損傷面板等而是鬆弛的，是難解的，因為由於貪慾力量即使一次生起的貪慾束縛也難以解脫，賢明之人砍斷了這種所說型別的貪慾束縛，成為無執著者，捨棄欲樂而出離。如此通過這段經文顯示了這個道是通達。這部從"鐵製"開始的經，因為在貪慾等污染分對像和習氣分對像中以說明宣示的方式運作，所以叫做污染分經和習氣分經。 107. 諸比丘，無論思考什麼和產生什麼思，無論計劃什麼和作什麼計劃，無論潛伏什麼和成為什麼潛伏，這個思、這個計劃、這個潛伏成為識住立的所緣緣。當有所緣緣時，那個行識得以建立。當那個行識建立和增長時，未來再有出生、識等出生。當有未來再有出生時，未來生老死產生。未來愁...乃至...集起。 諸比丘，如果不思考，如果不計劃，但如果仍然潛伏而有潛伏，如此這個潛伏成為識、行識的所緣緣...乃至...集起。如此通過這段經文顯示了這個所說型別的思等不善法污染。 "應當說'通過什麼顯示了通達'"，因此說了"從何處"等等。諸比丘，從聖道者既不思考，也不計劃，也不潛伏，這個無思、這個無計劃、這個無潛伏不成為識、行識的所緣緣...乃至...未來生老死滅盡，未來愁...乃至...滅盡...乃至...滅。如此通過這段經文顯示了這個聖道是通達。這部從"諸比丘，無論什麼"開始的經，因為在污染分對像和通達分對像中以說明宣示的方式運作，所以叫做污染分經和通達分經。

1. Nānāvidhaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca sutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho vuttanayena veditabbo.

Bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano samuddo jalasāgarasamuddo 『『samuddo samuddo』』ti bhāsati. Kenaṭṭhena bhāsati? Duppūraṇaṭṭhena ca saṃsaraṇaṭṭhena ca duratikkamanaṭṭhena ca samuddoti bhāsati. Evaṃ sati, bhikkhave, eso jalasāgarasamuddo ariyassa bhagavato vinaye vuttappakāraṭṭhena samuddo na hoti. Bhikkhave, eso jalasāgarasamuddo mahā udakarāsi mahā udakaṇṇavo hoti. Bhikkhave, cakkhu purisassa samuddo hoti, tassa cakkhussa rūpamayo rūpāyatanamayo vego. Kenaṭṭhena? Pathavito yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā nīlādirūpārammaṇaṃ samosarantampi duppūraṇaṭṭhena ca anamatagge saṃsāre saṃsaraṇaṭṭhena ca duratikkamanaṭṭhena ca cakkhumeva samuddo hoti. Nīlādirūpāyatanassa appameyyassa appameyyena ūmimayena vegena saṃsaraṇaṭṭhena nīlādirūpameva vego hoti. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ cakkhu samuddo rūpamayo vego ca saṃkileso saṃkilesahetu dassito.

『『Kena asekkho dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『yo ta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ arahattaphale ṭhito yo arahā rūpamayaṃ taṃ vegaṃ sahati manāpe rūpe rāgaṃ, amanāpe rūpe dosaṃ, asamapekkhane mohaṃ anuppādento hutvā upekkhakabhāvena sahati, ayaṃ arahā, bhikkhave, saūmiṃ sāvaṭṭaṃ sagahaṃ sarakkhasaṃ cakkhusamuddaṃ atarīti vuccati, tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇoti vuccati. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ arahattaphalabhūto asekkho dassito.

『『Sotaṃbhikkhave』』tiādīsupi iminā nayena yathāsambhavaṃ attho veditabbo. Idaṃ 『『samuddo』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāge visaye ca asekkhabhāge visaye ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato saṃkilesabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāma.

『『Ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『chayime』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhikkhave, lokasmiṃ sattānaṃ anayāya anatthāya pāṇīnaṃ byābādhāya ime mayā vuccamānā baḷisā cha bhavanti. Katame cha? Bhikkhave, cakkhuviññeyyā cakkhuviññāṇena viññeyyā iṭṭhā kantā kāmanīyā manāpā manavaḍḍhakā piyarūpā piyasabhāvā kāmūpasaṃhitā kilesakāmasahitā rajanīyā rūpā nīlādirūpārammaṇā santi, taṃ vuttappakāraṃ rūpaṃ bhikkhu ce abhinandati sappītikataṇhāya abhimukho nandati, ce abhivadati 『『aho sukhaṃ aho sukha』』nti vadāpentiyā taṇhāyanavasena abhivadati, ce ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati gilitvā viya pariniṭṭhapetvā tiṭṭhati, evaṃ sati, bhikkhave, ayaṃ bhikkhu 『『gilitabaḷiso…pe… pāpimato』』ti vuccati. Ettha ca nīlādibhedena anekavidhattā 『『rūpā iṭṭhā…pe… rajanīyā』』ti bahuvacananiddeso katopi rūpāyatanarūpārammaṇabhāvena ca cakkhuviññeyyabhāvena ca ekavidhataṃ anativattanato 『『ta』』nti ekavacananiddeso katoti veditabbo. 『『Santi, bhikkhave, sotaviññeyyā』』tiādīsupi iminā nayena yathāsambhavaṃ attho veditabbo. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ cakkhuviññeyyādiko chabbidho baḷiso saṃkileso kilesahetu dassito.

『『Kena asekkho dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『santi cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

以下是完整的簡體中文直譯： 108. 老師已經確定了各種污染分經和通達分經，我們也已經知道了，"什麼是污染分經和無學分經"應當被問，因此說了"其中什麼是污染分經和無學分經"等等。它的意思應當按照已說的方法來理解。 諸比丘，無聞凡夫說海洋水海"是海洋海洋"。以什麼意義而說？以難填滿義、流轉義、難超越義而說是海洋。如此，諸比丘，這個水海在聖者世尊律中以所說的意義不是海洋。諸比丘，這個水海是大水聚、大水流。諸比丘，人的眼是海洋，那個眼的色所成、色處所成的衝擊。以什麼意義？從地界直到阿迦膩咤梵天界，藍等色所緣即使匯聚也是以難填滿義、在無始輪迴中以流轉義、以難超越義而眼就是海洋。以藍等色處無量、以無量波浪狀衝擊流轉義而藍等色就是衝擊。如此通過這段經文顯示了這個眼海洋和色所成衝擊是污染、是污染因。 "應當說'通過什麼顯示了無學'"，因此說了"誰那個"等等。住于阿羅漢果中的阿羅漢，誰能克服那個色所成的衝擊，對可意的色不生起貪慾，對不可意的色不生起嗔恚，對不正觀不生起癡而以舍心克服，諸比丘，這個阿羅漢被稱為"已度過有波浪、有漩渦、有鱷魚、有羅剎的眼海洋"，被稱為"已度、已到彼岸、住於陸地的婆羅門"。如此通過這段經文顯示了這個成為阿羅漢果的無學。 在"諸比丘，耳"等中也應當按照這個方法依相應理解意思。這部從"海洋"開始的經，因為在污染分對像和無學分對像中以說明宣示的方式運作，所以叫做污染分經和無學分經。 "就只有這些嗎"應當被說，因此說了"這六種"等等。諸比丘，在世間爲了眾生的損害、不利、生命的傷害，這些被我說的六種鉤存在。哪六種？諸比丘，眼所識、被眼識所識的可愛、可意、可欲、適意、增長意、可愛相、可愛本性、具欲、具煩惱欲、能染的色、藍等色所緣存在，如果比丘歡喜那個所說型別的色，以具喜愛慾趣向而歡喜，如果稱讚，以愛慾方式使說"啊樂啊樂"而稱讚，如果執取而住，如同吞下般確定而住，如此，諸比丘，這個比丘被稱為"已吞鉤...乃至...魔"。這裡雖然因為藍等差別而有多種所以說"諸色可愛...乃至...能染"用複數，但因為不超越色處色所緣性和眼所識性的單一性，所以說"那個"用單數，應當理解。在"諸比丘，耳所識存在"等中也應當按照這個方法依相應理解意思。如此通過這段經文顯示了這個眼所識等六種鉤是污染、是煩惱因。 "應當說'通過什麼顯示了無學'"，因此說了"且存在"等等。

Abhedi bhindi, paribhedi parisamantato bhindi. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ arahattaphalabhūto asekkho dassito. Idaṃ 『『chayime』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ vuttanayena saṃkilesabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāma.

破碎了，分裂了，周圍全部分裂了。如此通過這段經文顯示了成為阿羅漢果的無學。這部從"這六種"開始的經，按照已說的方法，叫做污染分經和無學分經。

1. Nānāvidhaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca sutta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Ayaṃloko sattaloko santāpajāto ñātibyasanādivasena jātasokasantāpo ceva rāgādivasena jātapariḷāhasantāpo ca phassapareto anekehi dukkhasamphassehi abhibhūto rodaṃ rodanto vadati. Kinti vadati? Attanā phuṭṭhaṃ dukkhaṃ abhāvitakāyatāya adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto hutvā 『『aho dukkhaṃ, īdisaṃ dukkhaṃ mayhaṃ sattunopi mā hotū』』tiādinā rodanto vilapanto vadati, 『『kasmā evaṃ vadatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『attato yena yena hi maññantī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ete sattā yena yena kāmajjhosādinā pakārena attato dukkhassa paṭikāraṃ maññanti, tato pakārato aññathā aññena pakārena taṃ dukkhaṃ tikicchitabbaṃ hi yasmā hoti.

Aññathābhāvīti yasmā rodaṃ rodanto vadati, yena yena vā paravihiṃsādipakārena attano vaḍḍhiṃ maññanti āsīsanti, tato pakārato aññathā avaḍḍhi eva hoti. Taṃ āsīsitabbaṃ aññathābhāvi avaḍḍhitabhāvi eva hi yasmā hoti, tasmā maññitabbassa āsīsitabbassa aññathā bhavanasīlattā rodaṃ rodanto vadati, ayaṃ sattaloko rodanto ca hutvā vadati. 『『Ki』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『bhavasatto』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhavasatto kāmabhavādīsu satto visatto loko bhavameva kāmabhavādibhavameva abhinandati. Yaṃ bhavaṃ abhinandati, taṃ jarāmaraṇādianekabyasanānubandhattā bhayānakaṭṭhena bhayaṃ hoti. Yassa yato jarāmaraṇādito bhāyati, taṃ jarāmaraṇādidukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato dukkhaṃ dukkhādhiṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ santāpādiko saṃkileso saṃkilesahetu dassito.

Saṃkileso dassito, 『『kena nibbedho dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『bhavavippahānāya kho』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhavavippahānāya kho pana kāmabhavādikassa bhavassa pajahanatthāya eva idaṃ mayā adhigataṃ maggabrahmacariyaṃ vussati. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ brahmacariyabhūto maggo nibbedho dassito.

『『Bhavavippahānāyā』』tiādinā ekantena niyyānikamaggo nibbedho ācariyena dassito, amhehi ca ñāto, 『『katamo aniyyānikamaggo』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『ye hi keci samaṇā vā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Hi-saddo vācāsiliṭṭhattho. Ye keci samaṇā vā ye keci brāhmaṇā vā bhavena rūpabhavena bhavassa kāmabhavassa vippamokkhaṃ āhaṃsu, bhavena arūpabhavena bhavassa kāmabhavassa ceva rūpabhavassa ca vippamokkhaṃ āhaṃsu, sabbe te samaṇā vā sabbe te brāhmaṇā vā bhavasmā vuttappakārabhavato avippamuttā bhavantīti ahaṃ vadāmi.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 由老師確定了各種不同的涉及污穢的和不學習的經文，並由我們所知，"哪一種是涉及污穢的、通達的和不學習的經文"而被詢問，因此說"在那裡，哪一種是涉及污穢的、通達的和不學習的經文"等。 這個世界是有情世界，因親屬災難等而生的悲傷痛苦，以及因貪慾等而生的熾熱痛苦，被觸所覆蓋，被眾多痛苦觸所征服，啼哭哭泣地說話。他說什麼？因未修習身體，無法忍受觸及自身的痛苦，於是哭泣呻吟說："啊，痛苦，愿這樣的痛苦不要臨到我的有情"等。為什麼這樣說，因此說"從何處他們以何種方式思考"等。這些有情以何種慾望依附等方式，認為可以從痛苦中找到對治，因此以不同方式需要治療這痛苦。 因為啼哭哭泣，或以傷害他人等方式認為可以增長自身，但實際上並未增長。因為所期望的會以不同方式發生，所以啼哭哭泣。說"為什麼"，因此說"有情繫于有"。有情繫于欲有等諸有，世界歡喜有本身，即欲有等有。所歡喜的有，因老死等眾多災難相隨，從可怖的角度來看是可畏的。從老死等處生畏懼，那是痛苦的立足點。如此以此經文段落，顯示了這種因苦惱而起的污穢及污穢的原因。 污穢已被顯示，"以何通達"而被詢問，因此說"爲了捨棄有"等。爲了捨棄欲有等有，爲了斷除，我所獲得的梵行道被修習。如此以此經文段落，顯示了這種梵行的道路通達。 "爲了捨棄有"等，老師完全顯示了趨向解脫的道路通達，並被我們所知。被詢問"哪一種是非趨向解脫的道路"，因此說"凡是沙門"等。"hi"詞表示贊同語氣。無論哪些沙門或婆羅門，以有、色有、無色有說明從欲有解脫，我說他們都未從所說的有中解脫。

『『Rūpabhavādinā ye ca kāmabhavādibhavassa vippamokkhaṃ āhaṃsū』』ti vattabbattā vibhavena bhavassa nissaraṇaṃ āhaṃsūti dassetuṃ 『『ye vā panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye vā pana keci samaṇā vā ye vā pana keci brāhmaṇā vā vibhavena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā bhavassa saṃsārabhavassa nissaraṇaṃ āhaṃsu, sabbe te samaṇā vā sabbe te brāhmaṇā vā bhavasmā saṃsārabhavato anissaṭāva hontīti ahaṃ vadāmi. 『『Kasmā anissaṭā』』ti vattabbattā anissaṭakāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ 『『upadhiṃ hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ dukkhaṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ upadhiṃ khandhūpadhikilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhayo paṭicca hi yasmā sambhoti, tasmā anissaṭā honti. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ micchādiṭṭhisaṅkhāto saṃkileso dassito.

Ye hi 『『kecī』』tiādinā saṃkileso dassito, 『『kena nibbedho dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『sabbupādānakkhayā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbupādānakkhayā ariyamaggato dukkhassa saṃsāradukkhassa sambhavo natthi. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ ariyamaggo nibbedho dassito.

『『Vuttappakārā aññasuttappadesenapi dassito』』ti dassetuṃ 『『lokamima』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Puthū visuṃ visuṃ avijjāya paretaṃ abhibhūtaṃ bhūtarataṃ bhūtesu itthipurisesu aññamaññarataṃ bhūtaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ bhavehi aparimuttaṃ imaṃ lokaṃ mama citta tvaṃ passa. Ye keci bhavā ittarakhaṇā vā bhavā, dīghāyukā vā bhavā, sātavanto vā bhavā, asātavanto vā bhavā pañcakkhandhā sabbadhi 『『uddhaṃ adho tiriya』』nti imesu sabbesu sabbatthatāya sabbatthabhāvena ahesuṃ, sabbe te vuttappakārā bhavā niccadhuvarahitattā aniccā sampīḷitattā dukkhā vipariṇāmabhāvato vipariṇāmadhammā ahesuṃ. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ avijjādiko saṃkileso dassito.

『『Lokamima』』ntiādinā saṃkileso dassito, 『『kena nibbedho dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『evameta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttappakārena etaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sassa attano maggapaññāya, vipassanāpaññāya vā passato passantassa puggalassa bhavataṇhā pahīyati, sammappaññāya yathābhūtaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ passanto vibhavaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ nābhinandati na pattheti. Tassa puggalassa sabbaso taṇhānaṃ khayā asesavirāganirodho asesavirāgasaṅkhātena maggena nirodho nirujjhanaṃ nibbānaṃ nibbuti hoti. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ maggo nibbedho dassito.

『『Evameta』』ntiādinā nibbedho dassito, 『『kena asekkho dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『tassa nibbutassā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhinibbutassa tassa bhikkhuno anupādā kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanato aggahaṇato punabbhavo na hoti, evaṃbhūtena ariyapuggalena pubbe attānaṃ abhibhūto pañcavidho māro vijito ahosi, anena ariyapuggalena pañcahi mārehi saṅgāmo vijito, saṅgāme, iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīsu vā tādī tādilakkhaṇappatto ariyapuggalo sabbabhavāni upaccagā atikkantova jāto. Iti iminā suttappadesena ayaṃ asekkho dassito. Idaṃ vuttappakāraṃ 『『ayaṃ loko』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāge visaye ca nibbedhabhāge visaye ca asekkhabhāge visaye ca vācakañāpakabhāvena ekadesavasena pavattanato saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ nāma.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： "以色有等說明從欲有等有解脫"而被詢問，爲了顯示"以無有說明從有出離"，因此說"或者那些"等。或者那些任何沙門或那些任何婆羅門，以無有、以斷見說明從有、從輪迴有出離，我說所有那些沙門或所有那些婆羅門都未從有、從輪迴有中出離。被問"為何未出離"，爲了顯示未出離的原因，因此說"因為依止"等。這個痛苦、輪迴之苦確實是因為依止蘊依止、煩惱依止、行為依止而生起，所以他們未出離。如此以此經文段落，顯示了這種被稱為邪見的污穢。 以"任何"等顯示了污穢，"以何顯示通達"而被詢問，因此說"由一切執取滅盡"等。由一切執取滅盡，從聖道，痛苦、輪迴之苦不再生起。如此以此經文段落，顯示了這種聖道通達。 爲了顯示"所說的方式也被其他經文段落顯示"，因此說"這個世界"等。我的心啊，你看這個世界，眾多個別的，被無明覆蓋、征服，樂於有情，在男女有情中相互歡喜，五蘊未從諸有解脫。任何有，無論是剎那的有，還是長壽的有，是樂的有，還是不樂的有，五蘊在一切處"上下四方"，這些所有方式，以一切處性在一切處存在，所有這些所說方式的有，因為沒有常恒，所以是無常的，因為受壓迫，所以是苦的，因為有變異性，所以是變異法。如此以此經文段落，顯示了這種以無明為首的污穢。 以"這個世界"等顯示了污穢，"以何顯示通達"而被詢問，因此說"如此這"等。如此以所說的方式，以正慧如實看到這五蘊的人，他自己的道慧，或觀慧，有愛被斷除，以正慧如實看到五蘊的人不歡喜無有、斷見，不希求。對於那個人，由於一切愛完全滅盡，無餘離貪滅，以稱為無餘離貪的道滅除，寂滅，涅槃，寂靜。如此以此經文段落，顯示了這種道通達。 以"如此這"等顯示了通達，"以何顯示無學"而被詢問，因此說"對於那個寂靜"等。對於那個愛見寂靜的比丘，因為不再生起煩惱行為，不執取，不再有再生，這樣的聖者以前被五種魔征服，現在已經戰勝了五魔，在戰鬥中，或在可意不可意等中，達到中性特徵的聖者已經超越一切有。如此以此經文段落，顯示了這種無學。這個所說方式的"這個世界"等，在污穢分、通達分、無學分領域中，以言說了知的方式，在某個方面運作，因此被稱為涉及污穢的、通達的和無學的。

『『Ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『cattārome』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Andhaputhujjano saṃsārasotassa anukūlabhāvena gacchanato anusotagāmī nāma, kalyāṇaputhujjano saṃsārasotassa nibbidānupassanādīhi paṭikkūlavasena pavattanato paṭisotagāmī nāma, sekkho acalappasādādisamannāgamena ṭhitasabhāvattā ṭhitatto nāma, asekkho saṃsārapāraṅgatavasena tiṭṭhanato 『『thale tiṭṭhatī』』ti vuccati.

『『Tesu catūsu puggalesu katamo puggalo saṃkilesabhāgiyādī』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『tattha yoya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

1. Nānāvidhaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca asekkhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katama』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Abhijātiyo puggalā cha saṃvijjanti lokasmiṃ, kaṇhe nīce kule nibbatto kaṇhābhijātiko, kaṇhadhammasamannāgatattā vā kaṇho kaṇhābhijātiko hutvā kaṇhaṃ kāḷakaṃ dasavidhaṃ dussīlyadhammaṃ abhijāyati pasavati, eso puggalo atthi. Vuttappakārena kaṇho kaṇhābhijātiko hutvā sukkaṃ dasavidhaṃ kusaladhammaṃ abhijāyati, eso puggalo atthi. Kaṇho kaṇhābhijātiko hutvā akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ akaṇhaasukkavipākaṃ accantadiṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ ārādheti, eso puggalo atthi. Vuttavipariyāyena tayo puggalā jānitabbā.

『『Tesu katame puggalā saṃkilesabhāgiyā』』tiādinā vattabbattā 『『tattha yo cā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『cattārimānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 因"是否僅此而已"而被詢問，因此說"這四種"等。凡夫因隨順輪迴之流而行，稱為隨流者；善凡夫因以厭離觀等方式逆輪迴之流而行，稱為逆流者；有學因具足不動信等而安住其性，稱為住立者；無學因已度輪迴彼岸而住，被稱為"立於陸地者"。 因"在這四種人中，哪一種人是涉及污穢等"而需要說明，因此說"在那裡，任何"等。 110. 老師已確定了各種不同的涉及污穢的、通達的和無學的經文，並被我們所知，因"哪一種是涉及污穢的、習氣的和通達的經文"而被詢問，因此說"在那裡，哪一種"等。 世間存在六種根性之人：生於黑暗低賤種姓為黑暗根性，或因具足黑暗法而為黑暗，成為黑暗根性者而生起、產生黑暗、污穢的十種不善法，此人存在。以所說方式，成為黑暗根性者而生起白凈的十種善法，此人存在。成為黑暗根性者而證得非黑非白、有非黑非白果報、究竟可見的涅槃，此人存在。應當以相反方式了知其餘三種人。 因"其中哪些人是涉及污穢"等而需要說明，因此說"在那裡，誰和"等。 因"是否僅此而已"而被詢問，因此說"這四種"等。

1. Nānāvidhaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyañca vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Mānusattaṃ manussabhāvaṃ laddhāna kiccaṃ, akiccañca dve bhavanti, dve kiccāniyeva kattabbāni. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo (netti. aṭṭha. 111) 『『kattabba』』nti dasseti. 『『Katamaṃ kattabbaṃ kicca』』nti vattabbattā kattabbakiccaṃ dassetuṃ 『『sukiccaṃ cevā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Puññāni ca kattabbattā sukiccaṃ eva, saṃyojanavippahānaṃ vā kattabbattā sukiccaṃ nāmāti yojanā.

『『Tattha sutte katamena katamo dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『sukiccaṃceva puññānīti vāsanā, saṃyojanavippahānaṃ vāti nibbedho』』ti vutto.

『『Ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『puññāni karitvānā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Puññāni karitvāna katapuññā puggalā saggā saggato saggaṃyeva vajanti. Saṃyojanappahānā ariyā jarāmaraṇā jarāmaraṇato vippamuccanti.

『『Tattha sutte katamena katamo dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『puññāni karitvāna, saggā saggaṃ vajanti katapuññā』ti vāsanā, 『saṃyojanappahānā, jarāmaraṇā vippamuccantī』ti nibbedho』』ti vuttaṃ.

『『Ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『dvemānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Katamena katamo dassito』』ti vattabbattā 『『tattha yo…pe… ayaṃ nibbedho』』ti vuttaṃ.

Nānāvidhaṃ vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañca suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ , 『『katamaṃ taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu soḷasasu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu suttesu taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ taṇhāpakkheneva niddisitabbaṃ, bahuvisayattā niyametvāna niddhāressāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. 『『Kena pakārena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tīhi taṇhāhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhavataṇhāyāti rūpabhavataṇhāya. Vibhavataṇhāyāti arūpabhavataṇhāya. Yena yena vā pana vatthunā taṇhāpabhedaucchedādivatthunā ajjhositā bhavataṇhādivasena ajjhositā, tena tena pakārena taṇhādinā vā taṇhāpabhedaucchedādivatthunā vā taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbaṃ.

Taṇhāsaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ taṇhāpakkheneva niddisitabbanti ācariyena vuttaṃ, amhehi ca lakkhitaṃ, 『『diṭṭhisaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ kena pakkhena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tattha diṭṭhisaṃkilesabhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yena yena vā pana vatthunāti diṭṭhippabhedaamarāvikkhepādivatthunā.

Diṭṭhisaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ diṭṭhipakkheneva niddisitabbanti ācariyena vuttaṃ, amhehi ca lakkhitaṃ, 『『duccaritasaṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ kena pakārena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tattha duccaritasaṃkilesabhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatheva vattabbattā 『『tattha taṇhāvodānabhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ, 『『diṭṭhivodānabhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ, 『『duccaritavodānabhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 111. 老師已確定了各種不同的涉及污穢的、習氣的和通達的經文，並被我們所知，因"哪一種是涉及習氣的和通達的經文"而被詢問，因此說"在那裡，哪一種是涉及習氣的和通達的"等。 獲得人身，有當做和不當做兩種，只有兩種當做的事。因此註釋師說（《導論註釋》111）"應當做"。因"什麼是應當做的事"而需要說明，爲了顯示應當做的事，因此說"善事和"等。因為功德應當做，所以是善事；或因為應當斷除結縛，稱為善事，如此連線。 因"在那經文中，以何顯示何者"而需要說明，因此說"善事和功德是習氣，斷除結縛是通達"。 因"是否僅此而已"而被詢問，因此說"做了功德"等。做了功德的人，從天界到天界只往生天界。聖者們由於斷除結縛而從老死解脫。 因"在那經文中，以何顯示何者"而需要說明，因此說"做了功德，作善者往生天界是習氣，由斷除結縛，從老死解脫是通達"。 因"是否僅此而已"而被詢問，因此說"這兩種"等。因"以何顯示何者"而需要說明，因此說"在那裡...這是通達"。 老師已確定了各種不同的涉及習氣的和通達的經文，並被我們所知，因"哪一種是涉及渴愛污穢的經文"而被詢問，因此說"在那裡涉及渴愛污穢"等。在那裡：即在那十六種涉及污穢等的經文中，涉及渴愛污穢的經文應當從渴愛方面來說明，因為有多個領域，所以我將確定后再確定。因"以何種方式說明"而需要說明，因此說"以三種渴愛"等。有愛即色有愛。無有愛即無色有愛。以任何對象，以渴愛差別、斷見等對像而執著，以有愛等方式執著，應當以那種方式，以渴愛等或渴愛差別、斷見等對像來說明涉及渴愛污穢的經文。 老師說涉及渴愛污穢的經文應當從渴愛方面來說明，並被我們理解，因"涉及見污穢的經文應當從何方面說明"而需要說明，因此說"在那裡涉及見污穢"等。以任何對像即以見的差別、不死論詭辯等對象。 老師說涉及見污穢的經文應當從見方面來說明，並被我們理解，因"涉及惡行污穢的經文應當以何種方式說明"而需要說明，因此說"在那裡涉及惡行污穢"等。同樣需要說明，因此說"在那裡涉及渴愛清凈"等，說"涉及見清凈"等，說"涉及惡行清凈"等。

1. Yasmiṃ sāsanapaṭṭhāne aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā daṭṭhabbā, taṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ soḷasahi saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi suttehi ekadesaniddhāraṇavasena vibhajitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kiṃ pana taṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ tehi soḷasahi eva saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi vibhajitabbaṃ, udāhu aññehi suttehipi vibhajitabba』』nti vattabbattā aññehi aṭṭhavīsasuttehipi vibhajituṃ 『『tattha katame aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā? Lokiyaṃ lokuttara』』ntiādi vuttaṃ . 『『Yadi aññehipi aṭṭhavīsasuttehi vibhajitabbaṃ, evaṃ sati 『lokiya』ntiādivacanameva vattabbaṃ, kasmā 『tattha katame aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā』ti vuttā』』ti ce? Tassa sāsanapaṭṭhānavibhāgo aṭṭhārasahi mūlapadehi saṅgahito, aṭṭhārasa mūlapadāpi vibhajite sāsanapaṭṭhāne daṭṭhabbā, tasmā mūlapadā vibhattāyeva. Tāni mūlapadāni vibhajituṃ 『『tattha katame aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā』』ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 112) pana –

『『Evaṃ soḷasavidhena sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nānāsuttehi udāharaṇavasena vibhajitvā idāni aṭṭhavīsatividhena sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ dassentena yasmā ayampi paṭṭhānavibhāgo mūlapadehi saṅgahito, na imassāpi tehi asaṅgahito padeso atthi, tasmā mūlapadaṃ, vibhajitabbatañca dassetuṃ 『tattha katame aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā』ti pucchāya vasena mūlapadāni uddharitvā 『lokiyaṃ lokuttara』ntiādinā nava tikā, thavo cāti aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ uddiṭṭha』』nti –

Vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu soḷasahārapañcakanayaaṭṭhārasamūlapadesu katamāni padāni mūlapadāni hontīti pucchati. Loke niyutto sabhāvadhammoti lokiyo, loke vā vidūhi vidito sabhāvotipi lokiyo, lokiyo sabhāvadhammo assa visesasuttassa atthīti taṃ visesasuttaṃ lokiyaṃ nāma. Esa nayo 『『lokuttara』』ntiādīsupi veditabbo. Jānātīti ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇaṃ assa visesasuttassa atthīti ñāṇaṃ. Ñātabbāti ñeyyā, ñeyyā assa visesasuttassa atthīti ñeyyaṃ. Eseva nayo – 『『ñāṇañca ñeyyañcā』』ti etthāpi veditabbo. Nibbānaṃ paṭhamaṃ passatīti dassanaṃ, paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ, dassanaṃ assa visesasuttassa atthīti dassanaṃ. Bhāvanā assa visesasuttassa pāḷiyā atthīti bhāvanā. 『『Dassanañca bhāvanā cā』』ti etthāpi esa nayo veditabbo. Sassa attano vacananti sakaṃ, sakaṃ vacanaṃ sakavacanaṃ, bhagavato vacananti attho. Parassa vacanaṃ paravacanaṃ. Vissajjanīyo assa visesasuttassa atthīti vissajjanīyaṃ. Natthi vissajjanīyo assa visesasuttassāti avissajjanīyaṃ. Kammaṃ assa visesasuttassa atthīti kammaṃ. Vipāko assa pāṭhassa atthīti vipāko. Sesesupi assatthiattho gahetabbo. Atha vā lokiyādiattho mukhyattho, taṃvācakasuttampi ṭhānyūpacārena vuttaṃ. Buddhādīnaṃ guṇe abhitthavati etena suttappadesenāti thavo, suttappadeso.

『『Tesu aṭṭhavīsatividhesu lokiyādīsu sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttesu katamaṃ suttaṃ lokiyaṃ sutta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ lokiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu aṭṭhavīsatividhesu lokiyādīsu sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttesu katamaṃ suttaṃ lokiyaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ suttanti pucchati.

以下是巴利文的完整直譯： 112. 在那個教法建立中應當見到十八根本句，那個教法建立以十六種涉及污穢等的經文通過部分確定的方式被分別，並被我們所知。因"那個教法建立是否只應當以那十六種涉及污穢等來分別，還是也應當以其他經文來分別"而需要說明，爲了也以其他二十八經來分別，因此說"在那裡，什麼是十八根本句？世間、出世間"等。如果問"如果也應當以其他二十八經來分別，那麼這樣只應當說'世間'等語，為什麼說'在那裡，什麼是十八根本句'"？那個教法建立的分別包含在十八根本句中，十八根本句也應當在被分別的教法建立中看到，因此根本句已經被分別。爲了分別那些根本句，因此說"在那裡，什麼是十八根本句"。而在註釋中（《導論註釋》112）說： "如此以十六種方式通過各種經文的例證分別教法建立后，現在爲了顯示以二十八種方式的教法建立，因為這個建立分別也被根本句所包含，不存在不被它們包含的部分，所以爲了顯示根本句和應當分別，以'在那裡，什麼是十八根本句'的問題方式列舉根本句，以'世間、出世間'等九組三法和讚頌來說明二十八種教法建立。" 在那裡：在那十六種理解、五種方式和十八根本句中，問什麼句是根本句。依附於世間的自性法為世間，或為智者所知的自性也是世間，那個特別經有世間自性法，因此那個特別經稱為世間。這個方法在"出世間"等中也應當了知。知為智，那個特別經有智，所以是智。應當知為所知，那個特別經有所知，所以是所知。這個方法在"智和所知"這裡也應當了知。首先見到涅槃為見，初道智，那個特別經有見，所以是見。那個特別經文有修習，所以是修習。在"見和修習"這裡也是這個方法。自己的言說為己說，己說即是世尊的言說之義。他人的言說為他說。那個特別經有應答，所以是應答。那個特別經沒有應答，所以是無應答。那個特別經有業，所以是業。那個文句有果報，所以是果報。在其餘中也應當理解有的意義。或者世間等的意義是主要意義，說那個表達的經也是以處所的比喻。以那個經文段落讚歎佛陀等的功德，所以是讚頌，即經文段落。 因"在那二十八種世間等教法建立經中，什麼經是世間經"而需要詢問，因此說"在那裡，什麼是世間"等。在那裡：在

Bhikkhave, dhenuyā thanehi nikkhantaṃ sajjukhīraṃ nikkhantakkhaṇe na muccati na pariṇamati khīrabhāvaṃ pajahitvā dadhibhāvaṃ na pāpuṇāti, takkādiambilasamāyogato pacchā khīrabhāvaṃ pajahati dadhibhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti iva, evaṃ yena bālena pāpaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ kammaṃ karaṇakkhaṇe tassa bālassa apāyadukkhādinibbattāpanavasena na vipaccati. Dutiye pana vā tatiyādimhi vā attabhāve vipaccati. Bhasmacchanno chārikāya paṭicchanno pāvako aggi akkantaṃ janaṃ akkamanakkhaṇe na ḍahati. Chārikaṃ pana tāpetvā kālantare ḍahati iva, evaṃ yena bālena pāpaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ kammaṃ karaṇakkhaṇe taṃ bālaṃ apāyadukkhādinibbattāpanavasena ḍahāpentaṃ hutvā na anveti. Dutiye vā tatiyādimhi vā attabhāve apāyadukkhādinibbattāpanavasena ḍahāpentaṃ hutvā ḍahantaṃ taṃ bālaṃ taṃ anvetīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『na hi…pe… pāvako』』ti suttaṃ lokiye atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato lokiyaṃ nāma.

『『Ettakameva lokiya』』nti vattabbattā 『『cattārimānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Attho pākaṭo. Idaṃ 『『cattārimāni…pe… kāḷapakkheva candimā』』ti suttaṃ lokiye atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato lokiyaṃ nāma.

『『Evaṃ duvidhaṃyeva lokiya』』nti vattabbattā 『『aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Attho pākaṭo. Idaṃ 『『aṭṭhime』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ lokiyesu aṭṭhavidhesu atthesu vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato lokiyaṃ nāma.

Nānāvidhaṃ lokiyaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ suttaṃ lokuttara』』nti vattabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ lokuttara』』ntiādi vuttaṃ . Ito paresupi esa nayo veditabbo. Tatthāti tesu aṭṭhavīsatividhesu lokiyādīsu suttesu.

Chekena sārathinā sudantā assā samathaṅgatā yathā, evaṃ pahīnamānassa pahīnanavavidhamānassa yassa anāsavassa bhikkhuno indriyāni chabbidhāni cakkhundriyādīni samathaṅgatāni. Tādino tādilakkhaṇena samannāgatassa anāsavassa tassa bhikkhuno devāpi manussāpi pihayantīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『yassindriyānī』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ lokuttare atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato lokuttaraṃ nāma.

『『Ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『pañcimāni bhikkhave indriyānī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ 『『pañcimānī』』tiādikaṃ suttampi lokuttare atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato lokuttaraṃ nāma. (1)

『『Laddhāna mānusattaṃ dve, kiccaṃ akiccameva cā』』tiādikā dve gāthā vuttā. Iha gāthāsu 『『sukiccaṃ ceva puññānī』』ti yaṃ gāthāpadañca 『『puññāni karitvāna, saggā saggaṃ vajanti katapuññā』』ti yaṃ gāthāpadañca vuttaṃ, idaṃ gāthāpadaṃ lokiye atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato lokiyaṃ nāma.

Iha gāthāsu 『『saṃyojanavippahānaṃ vā』』ti yaṃ gāthāpadañca 『『saṃyojanavippahānā, jarāmaraṇā vippamuccantī』』ti yaṃ gāthāpadañca vuttaṃ, idaṃ gāthāpadaṃ vuttanayena lokuttaraṃ nāma. Idaṃ 『『laddhānā』』tiādikaṃ vuttappakārena lokiyañca lokuttarañca.

Bhikkhave, viññāṇe āhāre āhārapaṭibaddhe chandarāge sati nāmarūpassa avakkanti hoti. 『『Viññāṇe…pe… hotī』』ti idaṃ vuttanayena lokiyaṃ nāma. 『『Viññāṇe…pe… nirodho』』ti idaṃ suttaṃ lokuttaraṃ nāma. Idaṃ 『『viññāṇe ce bhikkhave』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ lokiye atthe ca lokuttare atthe ca ekadesavasena vācakañāpakavasena pavattanato lokiyañca lokuttarañca. (2)

我來幫您將這段巴利文直譯成簡體中文： 諸比丘，譬如從牛的乳房流出的新鮮牛乳，在剛流出的瞬間並不會變質，不會改變狀態而成為酸奶，而是在之後與酸奶等酸性物質相遇后，才會失去牛乳的性質而轉變成酸奶。同樣地，愚人所造作的惡業，在造作的瞬間並不會以惡道之苦等方式成熟。而是在第二或第三等生命中才會成熟。就像被灰覆蓋的火，在人踩踏的瞬間並不會燒傷人，而是在加熱灰塵之後的一段時間才會燒傷。同樣地，愚人所造作的惡業，在造作的瞬間並不會以令其生於惡道之苦等方式跟隨並灼燒那愚人。而是在第二或第三等生命中，才會以令其生於惡道之苦等方式跟隨並灼燒那愚人。這段經文"na hi...pe...pāvako"因為是以表達世間義理的方式宣說，所以稱為世間的。 因為應當說"僅此為世間的"，所以說"有四種"等。其義明顯。這段"cattārimāni...pe...kāḷapakkheva candimā"經文因為是以表達世間義理的方式宣說，所以稱為世間的。 因為應當說"世間的只有這兩種"，所以說"諸比丘，有八種世間法"等。其義明顯。這段以"aṭṭhime"為首的經文，因為是以表達八種世間義理的方式宣說，所以稱為世間的。 導師已確定了各種世間的，我們也已了知，因為應當說"什麼是出世間的經"，所以說"其中什麼是出世間"等。對於後面的內容也應當如此理解。"其中"意為在這二十八種世間等經中。 如同善馴的馬被善巧的馭者調服而達到寂靜，同樣地，已斷除九種慢的無漏比丘的六根（眼根等）也已達到寂靜。具足如是特質的那位無漏比丘，諸天與人都羨慕。這段以"yassindriyānī"為首的經文，因為是以表達出世間義理的方式宣說，所以稱為出世間的。 因為應當說"僅此而已"，所以說"諸比丘，有這五根"等。這段以"pañcimāni"為首的經文，因為是以表達出世間義理的方式宣說，所以稱為出世間的。(1) 說了"得人身二者，應作不應作"等兩個偈頌。在這些偈頌中，"善作功德"這偈頌句和"造作功德，作福之人從天界往生天界"這偈頌句，因為是以表達世間義理的方式宣說，所以稱為世間的。 在這些偈頌中，"斷除結縛"這偈頌句和"由於斷除結縛，解脫老死"這偈頌句，如前所述方式稱為出世間的。這段以"laddhāna"為首的經文，如所說的方式既是世間的也是出世間的。 諸比丘，當識食中有欲貪時，名色即會投生。這段"Viññāṇe...pe...hoti"如前所述方式稱為世間的。這段"Viññāṇe...pe...nirodho"經文稱為出世間的。這段以"viññāṇe ce bhikkhave"為首的經文，因為是以部分方式表達世間義理和出世間義理，所以既是世間的也是出世間的。(2)

1. Sattaloke sabbā disā anuparigamma kvaci disāyaṃ cetasā attanā attato piyataraṃ aññaṃ neva ajjhagā, attāva piyataro yathā , evaṃ paresaṃ sattānaṃ puthu visuṃ visuṃ attāva piyo piyataro, tasmā attanova piyatarattā attakāmo attano hitakāmo paṇḍito sattaloko attānaṃ upamaṃ katvā paraṃ na hiṃse na hiṃseyyāti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『sabbā disā』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ sattesu vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ nāma.

Ye keci khīṇāsavā puggalā bhūtāva na bhavissanti, sabbe te khīṇāsavā puggalā dehaṃ attabhāvaṃ pahāya nibbānaṃ gamissanti. Ye ca puthujjanādayo sattā punabbhavesu bhavissanti, sabbe te puthujjanādayo sattā dehaṃ attabhāvaṃ pahāya paralokaṃ gamissanti, taṃ sabbajāniṃ sabbassa sattassa hāniṃ maraṇaṃ, vināsaṃ vā kusalo yo puggalo vijānāti, so kusalo puggalo taṃ sabbajāniṃ viditvā ātāpiyo brahmacariyaṃ careyyāti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『ye kecī』』tiādikaṃ vuttanayena sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ.

Sattahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ yāvajīvaṃ kusalena puggalena na vijahitabbaṃ. Katamehi sattahi? Parisuddhasīlasampattiparisuddhadiṭṭhisampattīhi samannāgatattā piyo ca piyāyitabbo ca hoti, pāsāṇachattaṃ viya garu ca hoti, sambhāvetabbatāya bhāvanīyo ca hoti, 『『kālena vadāmi, no akālenā』』tiādike pañcadhamme attani upaṭṭhāpetvā sabrahmacārīnaṃ vā sissānaṃ vā vinicchayaullumpanaovādadānabhāve ṭhatvā vattā ca hoti, sabrahmacārīhi vā sissādīhi vā vuccamāno suvaco hutvā tesaṃ vacanakkhamo ca hoti, saccapaṭiccasamuppādādigambhīraṃ vā aññaṃ gambhīraṃ vā kathaṃ kattā ca hoti, dhammavinayādivaseneva dīpanato aṭṭhāne ca na niyojako hoti. Imehi sattahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ yāvajīvaṃ na vijahitabbaṃ. Idaṃ 『『sattahī』』tiādivacanaṃ bhagavā avoca. Idaṃ 『『sattahī』』tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ sugato vatvā athāparaṃ etaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ satthā avoca. Kiṃ avoca?

『『Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, vattā ca vacanakkhamo;

Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattā, na caṭṭhāne niyojako;

Taṃ mittaṃ mittakāmena, yāvajīvampi seviya』』nti. –

Etaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ satthā avocāti yojanā. 『『Na ca aṭṭhānayojako』』ti pāṭho atthi. Idaṃ 『『sattahī』』tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ.

Loke yaṃ kāmasukhañca yaṃ idaṃ diviyaṃ sukhañca atthi, ete kāmasukhadiviyasukhā taṇhākkhayasukhassa soḷasiṃ kalaṃ na agghantīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『yañcā』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ.

我來 為您直譯這段巴利文： 113. 在有情世間遍歷所有方向后，在任何方向都找不到比自己更可愛的其他人，正如自己最為可愛一樣，對其他有情來說，各自的自我也同樣最為可愛。因此，由於自己最為可愛，智者應當愛護自己、希求自利，以自己為喻而不傷害他人。這段以"sabbā disā"為首的經，因為是以表達有情的方式宣說，所以稱為依有情安立。 凡是已滅盡煩惱的人，確實不會再有未來，所有這些已滅盡煩惱的人捨棄此身後將趣向涅槃。凡是將在未來世投生的凡夫等有情，所有這些凡夫等有情捨棄此身後將趣向他世。那智者了知一切有情的這種損失、衰退、死亡或滅亡，那智者了知這一切損失后，應當精進修習梵行。這段以"ye keci"為首的如前所述方式是依有情安立。 具足七支的善知識，善人終身不應舍離。是哪七支？由於具足清凈戒和清凈見，而成為可愛和值得愛慕；如石傘般值得尊重；因為值得尊敬而成為可敬；確立"應時而語，不非時語"等五法于自身，為同修或弟子作出判斷、鼓勵和教誡，而成為善教導者；當被同修或弟子等告誡時能溫和接受，而成為能忍受他人言語者；能談論緣起等深奧或其他深奧之法；由於僅依法與律等開示而不令人行非處。具足這七支的善知識終身不應舍離。這段以"sattahi"為首的話是世尊所說。善逝說了這段以"sattahi"為首的話后，導師又說了這首偈頌。說了什麼？ "可愛可敬可尊重，善導能忍受言語； 能談甚深之論義，不令行於非正處； 欲得善友應親近，如是賢者終身隨。" 導師說了這首偈頌。也有"不令行非處"的讀法。這段以"sattahi"為首的話是依有情安立。 世間的欲樂和天界之樂，這些欲樂與天界之樂不及愛盡之樂的十六分之一。這段以"yañca"為首的經是依法安立。

Yattha nibbāne dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, sammāsambuddhadesitaṃ asokaṃ virajaṃ khemaṃ taṃ nibbānaṃ susukhaṃ vatāti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『susukha』』ntiādikaṃ suttampi dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. (3)

Tīsu bhavesu sattānaṃ jananato taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ mātarañca, pitaraṃ nissāya mānassa uppajjanato mānasaṅkhātaṃ pitarañca, raṭṭhe loko raṭṭhissaraṃ rājānaṃ bhajati viya dvinnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhīnaṃ sabbadiṭṭhigatehi bhajanīyattā sassatucchedadiṭṭhisaṅkhāte khattiye dve rājāno ca, āyasādhako puriso raṭṭhe atthaṃ anucarati iva nandirāgassa dvādasāyatane anucaraṇato nandirāgasaṅkhātena anucaraṇena saha pavattanaṭṭhānaṃ dvādasāyatanasaṅkhātaṃ raṭṭhañca khīṇāsavo yo brāhmaṇo hanati, so brāhmaṇo hantvā anīgho niddukkho hutvā yātīti yojanā. Iha 『『mātara』』ntiādigāthāyaṃ 『『mātaraṃ…pe… hantvā』』ti idaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. 『『Anīgho yāti brāhmaṇo』』ti idaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Idaṃ 『『mātara』』ntiādikaṃ suttaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānañca dhammādhiṭṭhānañca.

『『Cattārome bhikkhave iddhipādā』』ti idaṃ suttappadesavacanaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. So catūhi iddhipādehi samannāgato puggalo kāyepi karajakāyepi cittaṃ pādakajjhānacittaṃ samodahati pakkhipati, so puggalo dissamānakāyena gantukāmo karajakāyagatikaṃ pādakajjhānacittaṃ adhiṭṭhahati. Cittepi pādakajjhānacittepi kāyaṃ karajakāyaṃ samodahati pakkhipati, so puggalo sīghaṃ aññaṃ gantukāmo pādakajjhānacittagatikaṃ karajakāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahati. Kāye karajakāye sukhasaññañca sukhavihārasaññañca lahusaññañca lahugamanasaññañca okkamitvā aññaṃ gamaneyyaṃ icchitaṭṭhānaṃ ekacittakkhaṇeneva ca gantvā upasampajja viharati. Idaṃ 『『so』』tiādikaṃ suttappadesavacanaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Idaṃ 『『cattārome』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānañca dhammādhiṭṭhānañca. (4)

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 在涅槃中苦滅盡，正等覺所說的無憂、離塵、安穩的涅槃，確實是極樂。這段以"susukha"為首的經也是依法安立。(3) 譬如能生三有中有情故稱為母親的渴愛，依靠父親而生起慢故稱為父親的我慢，如同國中人民親近國主國王一般，由於兩種常見斷見為一切見所親近故稱為王族的常見斷見兩位國王，如同求利益的人在國中追求利益一般，由於喜貪在十二處中追逐故稱為追逐的喜貪與稱為國土的十二處，已滅盡煩惱的婆羅門殺除這些。那婆羅門殺除后成為無苦無憂而去。在這首以"mātara"為首的偈頌中，"殺除母親等"這偈頌句是依法安立。"婆羅門無憂而去"這偈頌句是依有情安立。這段以"mātara"為首的經既是依有情安立也是依法安立。 "諸比丘，有四神足"這段經文片段是依法安立。具足四神足的那人將心（定基心）置於身（生身）中，那人慾以可見身去時決意使生身隨順定基心而行。也將身（生身）置於心（定基心）中，那人慾迅速往他處時決意使生身隨順定基心而行。在身（生身）中進入樂想、安住樂想、輕想、輕行想后，在一心剎那間即往、達到、安住于所欲去處。這段以"so"為首的經文片段是依有情安立。這段以"cattārome"為首的經既是依有情安立也是依法安立。(4)

1. Yaṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ lokaṃ uttaritvā abhibhavitvā ṭhitaṃ, yena sabbaññutaññāṇena bhagavā 『『sabbaññū』』ti vuccati, tassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa parihānaṃ natthi, taṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ sabbakāle jānituṃ āvajjanakāle pavattatīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『yaṃ ta』』ntiādikaṃ ñāṇe atthe vācakañāpakabhāvenapi pavattanato ñāṇaṃ nāma.

Yāya nibbānagāminiyā maggapaññāya jātimaraṇasaṅkhayaṃ pajānāti, sā nibbānagāminī maggapaññā sabbāhi lokiyāhi paññāhi seṭṭhā pasatthāti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『paññā hī』』tiādikaṃ vuttanayena ñāṇaṃ nāma.

『『Dhotaka, vo tumhākaṃ santiṃ ahaṃ kittayissāmī』』ti bhagavā avoca. 『『Diṭṭhe dhamme dukkhādidhamme vā attabhāve vā sato aniccānupassanādisatisampanno hutvā caraṃ caranto yogāvacaro anītihaṃ yaṃ santiṃ yaṃ nibbānaṃ ariyamaggena viditvā loke saṃsāraloke visattikaṃ visappakaṃ taṇhaṃ tare tareyyā』』ti bhagavā avoca.

Dhotako bhagavantaṃ vadati 『『mahesi mahante sīlakkhandhādī esanasīla, gotama, sato 『sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā』tiādisaraṇasampanno hutvā caraṃ caranto yogāvacaro uttamaṃ yaṃ santiṃ yaṃ nibbānaṃ ariyamaggena viditvā loke saṃsāraloke visattikaṃ taṇhaṃ tare tareyyāti tañca vacanaṃ tañca santiṃ nibbānaṃ ahaṃ abhinandāmi abhipatthayāmi, mahesi tvaṃ, yañca sampajānāsī』』ti dhotako bhagavantaṃ vadati.

『『Dhotakā』』ti ālapitvā bhagavā dhotakaṃ avoca. 『『Uddhaṃ anāgataṃ upari adho atītaṃ heṭṭhā ca tiriyañcāpi majjhe paccuppannaṃ parito ca loke saṃsāraloke etaṃ taṇhaṃ bhavābhavāya khuddakabhavamahantabhavatthāya saṅgo laggoti viditvā vicaranto tvaṃ taṇhaṃ mākāsi mā akāsī』』ti bhagavā dhotakaṃ avocāti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『kittayissāmī』』tiādikaṃ ñeyye visaye atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato ñeyyaṃ nāma.

『『Ettakamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『catunnaṃ bhikkhave』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhikkhave, catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ariyabhāvakarānaṃ saccānaṃ ananubodhā abujjhanena appaṭivedhā appaṭivijjhanena evaṃ iminā kāraṇena mamañceva tumhākañca dīghamaddhānaṃ idaṃ sandhāvitaṃ sandhāvanaṃ, idaṃ saṃsaritaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ ahosīti, bhikkhave, ajja tayidaṃ taṃ idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ mayā anubuddhaṃ paṭividdhaṃ…pe… tayidaṃ taṃ idaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṃ mayā anubuddhaṃ paṭividdhaṃ, mama bhavataṇhā ucchinnā, bhavanetti taṇhā khīṇā, idāni mama punabbhavo natthi, iti idaṃ 『『catunna』』ntiādikaṃ bhagavā avoca, sugato idaṃ 『『catunna』』ntiādikaṃ vatvā athāparaṃ etaṃ 『『catunna』』ntiādigāthāvacanaṃ satthā avocāti yojetvā gāthāyañca tatheva yojanā kātabbā. Idaṃ 『『catunna』』ntiādikaṃ vuttanayena ñeyyaṃ nāma. (5)

『『Rūpaṃ aniccaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ anicca』』nti idaṃ suttaṃ ñeyye rūpādidhamme vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato ñeyyaṃ nāma.

Evaṃ 『『rūpaṃ anicca』』ntiādinā pakārena jānaṃ jānanto evaṃ 『『rūpaṃ anicca』』ntiādinā pakārena passaṃ passanto ariyasāvako ariyassa bhagavato sāvako 『『idaṃ rūpaṃ anicca』』nti rūpaṃ passati, 『『ayaṃ vedanā aniccā』』ti vedanaṃ passati, 『『ayaṃ saññā aniccā』』ti saññaṃ passati, 『『ime saṅkhārā aniccā』』ti saṅkhāre passati, 『『idaṃ viññāṇaṃ anicca』』nti viññāṇaṃ passati. Iti idaṃ suttaṃ rūpādipassane ñāṇe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato ñāṇaṃ nāma.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 114. 一切知智超越、勝出世間而住立，以此一切知智世尊被稱為"一切知者"，那一切知智不會退失，那一切知智在一切時候作意時即能知道。這段以"yaṃ ta"為首的經，因為是以表達智慧義理的方式宣說，所以稱為智。 以何等趣向涅槃的道慧了知生死滅盡，那趣向涅槃的道慧是一切世間慧中最殊勝、最受讚歎的。這段以"paññā hi"為首的經如前所述方式稱為智。 世尊說："陀多迦，我將為你們宣說寂靜。"世尊說："在現見諸法或苦等法或此身時，具念而住，修行者以聖道證知非傳聞的寂靜、涅槃后，應當超越世間、輪迴中的執著、蔓延的渴愛。" 陀多迦對世尊說："大仙人，尋求廣大戒蘊等者，喬達摩，具念而住，修行者以聖道證知最上寂靜、涅槃后，能超越世間、輪迴中的執著渴愛，我歡喜這些話和那寂靜涅槃，大仙人，你所完全了知的。" 世尊稱呼"陀多迦"后對陀多迦說："陀多迦，了知上方未來、下方過去、四周現在的輪迴世間中這渴愛是爲了有與非有、小有大有的執著，你行走時不要生起渴愛。"這段以"kittayissāmi"為首的經，因為是以表達所知境界義理的方式宣說，所以稱為所知。 因為應當說"僅此而已"，所以說"諸比丘，四種"等。諸比丘，由於不現覺、不通達四聖諦，所以我與你們長期流轉、輪迴。諸比丘，今天這苦聖諦已被我現覺、通達......這苦滅道聖諦已被我現覺、通達，我的有愛已斷，導向有的渴愛已盡，現在我不再有後有。如此，世尊說了這段以"catunna"為首的話，善逝說了這段以"catunna"為首的話后，導師又說了這段以"catunna"為首的偈頌。在偈頌中也應當如此理解。這段以"catunna"為首的經如前所述方式稱為所知。(5) "色無常......識無常"這經文，因為是以表達色等諸法所知的方式宣說，所以稱為所知。 如此"色無常"等方式了知，如此"色無常"等方式觀察的聖弟子，聖世尊的弟子觀察"此色無常"，觀察"此受無常"，觀察"此想無常"，觀察"此諸行無常"，觀察"此識無常"。如是此經因為是以表達觀察色等的智慧方式宣說，所以稱為智。

So 『『rūpaṃ anicca』』ntiādinā pakārena passanto ariyasāvako rūpena rūparāgena parimuccati…pe… viññāṇamhā viññāṇarāgamhā parimuccatīti dukkhasmā parimuccatīti ahaṃ vadāmīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『so parimuccatī』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ ñāṇe ca ñeyye ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato ñāṇañca ñeyyañca hoti.

Sabbe pañcakkhandhā paccayehi saṅkharitattā saṅkhārā ādiantavantabhāvato, aniccantikabhāvato, tāvakālikabhāvato ca khaṇaparittabhāvato aniccā bhavanti. Idaṃ 『『sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā』』ti suttappadesavacanaṃ vuttanayena ñeyyaṃ nāma. Yadā vipassanākaraṇakāle paññāya vipassanāpaññāya passati aniccatādikaṃ passati. Idaṃ 『『yadā paññāya passatī』』ti suttappadesavacanaṃ ñāṇaṃ nāma. Atha passanakkhaṇe dukkhe pañcakkhandhe vipassako nibbindati, nibbindanto puggalo dukkhādijānanādivasena cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhati, eso catusaccapaṭivedho visuddhiyā visuddhatthāya maggoti. Idaṃ 『『athā』』tiādikaṃ suttappadesavacanaṃ ñāṇañca ñeyyañca hoti.

Soṇāti soṇaṃ ālapati. Samaṇā bāhirakasamaṇā brāhmaṇā jātibrāhmaṇā aniccena rūpena, dukkhena rūpena, vipariṇāmadhammena rūpena 『『ahaṃ parehi seyyo uttamo asmī』』ti vā samanupassanti, 『『ahaṃ parena sadiso samāno asmī』』ti vā samanupassanti, 『『ahaṃ parato hīno lāmako asmī』』ti vā samanupassanti, yathābhūtassa adassanā aññatra vajjetvā aññaṃ kiṃ nāma kāraṇaṃ siyā, yathābhūtaṃ adassanato tāva samanupassanassa aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ natthi, yathābhūtaṃ adassanameva kāraṇanti veditabbaṃ. 『『Aniccāya vedanāyā』』tiādīsupi iminā vuttanayena vuttanayānusārena yojanā kātabbā. Idaṃ 『『ye hi kecī』』tiādikaṃ suttappadesavacanaṃ ñeyyaṃ nāma. 『『Ye ca kho kecī』』tiādiko sukkapakkho pana vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo. Idaṃ 『『ye ca kho』』tiādikaṃ suttappadesavacanaṃ ñāṇaṃ nāma. Idaṃ 『『ye hi kecī』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ ñāṇe ca ñeyye ca atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato ñāṇañca ñeyyañca hoti. (6)

Nānāvidhaṃ ñāṇañca ñeyyañca sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ dassana』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ dassana』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu lokiyādīsu aṭṭhavīsatividhesu sāsanapaṭṭhānesu suttesu katamaṃ suttaṃ dassanaṃ nāmāti pucchati.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 如此以"色無常"等方式觀察的聖弟子從色、從色貪解脫......從識、從識貪解脫，我說他從苦解脫。這段以"so parimuccati"為首的經，因為是以表達智與所知的方式宣說，所以既是智也是所知。 一切五蘊因為由諸緣所造作故為諸行，由於有始有終、非究竟、暫時以及剎那短暫的緣故是無常的。這段"一切諸行無常"的經文片段如前所述方式稱為所知。當在修習觀時以慧、以觀慧觀察無常等性質。這段"當以慧觀察"的經文片段稱為智。然後在觀察的剎那，觀行者于苦的五蘊生起厭離，生起厭離的人通過了知苦等方式通達四聖諦，這四諦的通達是為清凈的道路。這段以"atha"為首的經文片段既是智也是所知。 稱呼"須那"。外道沙門、種姓婆羅門由於無常的色、苦的色、變異法的色而觀察"我勝過他人、最上"，或觀察"我與他人平等"，或觀察"我比他人低劣、下等"，除了不如實知見外還有什麼原因呢？應當了知除了不如實知見外沒有其他原因，不如實知見就是原因。對於"無常的受"等也應當依此所說方式類推。這段以"ye hi keci"為首的經文片段稱為所知。而"凡是"等白分則應當以相反方式理解。這段以"ye ca kho"為首的經文片段稱為智。這段以"ye hi keci"為首的經，因為是以表達智與所知義理的方式宣說，所以既是智也是所知。(6) 導師已確定了各種智與所知的教法建立經，我們也已了知，因為應當問"什麼是見"，所以說"其中什麼是見"等。其中：問在那些世間等二十八種教法建立經中什麼經稱為見。

115.Gambhīrapaññena sabbaññubuddhena sudesitāni saṅkhepavitthārādīhi tehi tehi nayehi suṭṭhu desitāni ariyasaccāni ye bhāvitabhāvanā ariyapuggalā paññāobhāsena vibhāvayanti, te bhāvitabhāvanā ariyapuggalā devarajjacakkavattirajjādipamādaṭṭhānaṃ āgamma bhusaṃ pamattā kiñcāpi honti, tathāpi te bhāvitabhāvanā ariyapuggalā sotāpattimaggañāṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhena aṭṭhamabhavādīsu uppajjanārahānaṃ nāmarūpānaṃ niruddhattā aṭṭhamakkhattuvasena aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ na ādiyantīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『ye ariyasaccānī』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ dassane paṭhamamaggañāṇe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato dassanaṃ nāma.

Nagaradvārabāhathirakaraṇatthaṃ ummārabbhantare pathaviyaṃ aṭṭhahatthadasahatthappamāṇaṃ āvāṭaṃ khaṇitvā tasmiṃ āvāṭe ussāpitattā pathavissito pathavinissito antopathavinissito indakhīlo sāradārumayo thambho catubbhi catūhi disāhi āgatehi vātehi mahāvātehi asampakampiyo sampakampituṃ asakkuṇeyyo siyā yathā, yo sappuriso ariyasaccāni avecca passati, taṃ sappurisaṃ sabbatitthiyavādavātehi asampakampiyattā tathūpamaṃ ahaṃ vadāmīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『yathindakhīlo』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ vuttanayena dassanaṃ nāma.

Bhikkhave, catūhi sotāpattiyaṅgehi samannāgato ariyasāvako ariyassa bhagavato sammāsambuddhassa sāvako ācikkhituṃ ākaṅkhamāno hutvā attanāva sayameva attānaṃ byākareyya 『『bho, mama atta ahaṃ idāni khīṇanirayo amhi, khīṇatiracchānayoni amhi…pe…. dukkhassantaṃ karissāmī』』ti byākareyya. Caturaṅgasarūpaṃ dassetuṃ 『『katamehi catūhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ 『『catūhī』』tiādikaṃ dassanaṃ nāma.

Nānāvidhaṃ dassanaṃ niddhāritaṃ, 『『katamā bhāvanā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamā bhāvanā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Idha sāsane yassa ariyasāvakassa ajjhattaṃ kāmabhave nibbattāpakānaṃ orambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ pajahanavasena ca bahiddhā rūpārūpabhavesu nibbattāpakānaṃ uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ pajahanavasena ca indriyāni saddhindriyādīni indriyāni subhāvitāni ariyamaggabhāvanāvasena suṭṭhu bhāvitāni bhavanti, bhāvito bhāvitamaggo sa danto so ariyasāvako imaṃ lokañca paraṃ lokañca nibbijjha nibbijjhitvā paṭivijjhitvā kālaṃ maraṇakāle , kālaṃkiriyaṃ vā kaṅkhati patthetīti yojanā. Ayaṃ 『『yassindriyānī』』tiādikā pāḷi bhāvanāya vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato bhāvanā nāma.

Dhammapadāni jhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānadhammakoṭṭhāsāni. Anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ anabhijjhāsīsena adhigatajhānavipassanāmagganibbānadhammapadaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Ayaṃ 『『cattārimānī』』tiādikā pāḷi vuttanayena bhāvanā nāma. (7)

Devaputta chindanto puggalo pañca orambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni heṭṭhā maggattayena chinde chindeyya, pajahanto puggalo pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni arahattamaggena jahe pajaheyya, bhāvayanto puggalo pañca saddhindriyādīni ca uttari bhāvaye bhāveyya. Pañcasaṅgātigo rāgasaṅgadosasaṅgamohasaṅgamānasaṅgadiṭṭhisaṅgātigo bhikkhu oghatiṇṇoti kāmoghabhavoghadiṭṭhoghaavijjoghatiṇṇoti vuccati kathīyatīti yojanā. 『『Pañca chinde pañca jahe』』ti idaṃ vacanaṃ dassanaṃ nāma. 『『Pañca cuttari…pe… vuccatī』』ti ayaṃ pāḷi bhāvanā nāma. Idaṃ 『『pañcā』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ dassanañca bhāvanā ca hoti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 115. 具深慧的一切知佛所善說的，以略說廣說等種種方式善為開示的聖諦，那些已修習的聖者以智慧之光明了，雖然那些已修習的聖者來到天界、轉輪王位等放逸處會極為放逸，然而那些已修習的聖者由於以初道智滅除行識，由於應生於第八有等的名色已滅，故不再取第八有作為第八次。這段以"ye ariyasaccāni"為首的經，因為是以表達見即初道智的方式宣說，所以稱為見。 如同爲了固定城門外部，在門檻內部地面挖掘八肘或十肘深的坑，在那坑中豎立的地基所依、地依、內地依的因陀羅柱，以堅木所造的柱子不被四方吹來的大風所動搖、不能被搖動一樣，我說那善人以通達而見聖諦，由於不被一切外道言論之風所動搖，故如是為喻。這段以"yathindakhīlo"為首的經如前所述方式稱為見。 諸比丘，具足四預流支的聖弟子，聖世尊正等覺的弟子若欲宣說，可以自己記說自己："賢者，我現在是已盡地獄者，已盡畜生趣者......我將作苦之邊際。"為顯示四支的自性而說"是哪四支"等。這段以"catūhi"為首的經稱為見。 各種見已確定，因為應當問"什麼是修"，所以說"其中什麼是修"等。 在此教法中，若有聖弟子通過斷除內在能令投生欲有的五下分結，以及通過斷除外在能令投生色無色有的五上分結，諸根即信根等諸根已修習、已以聖道修習善加修習，那已修習、已修道的調御者聖弟子穿透此世間與他世間后，在死時或臨終時期待。這段以"yassindriyāni"為首的聖典，因為是以表達修的方式宣說，所以稱為修。 法分即禪那、觀、道、果、涅槃等法的部分。無貪法分即以無貪為首而證得的禪那、觀、道、涅槃法分部分。其餘也以此方式理解。這段以"cattārimāni"為首的聖典如前所述方式稱為修。(7) 天子，斷除的人應以下三道斷除五下分結，捨棄的人應以阿羅漢道捨棄五上分結，修習的人應更上進修習五根。比丘超越五種執著即貪執、嗔執、癡執、慢執、見執，被稱為度過暴流即度過欲暴流、有暴流、見暴流、無明暴流。"斷五舍五"這話稱為見。"五更上......被稱為"這聖典稱為修。這段以"pañca"為首的經既是見也是修。

『『Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave』』tiādīsu yojanā pākaṭā. (8)

我來直譯這段巴利文： 在"諸比丘，這三種"等句中，其構造是明顯的。(8)

1. 『『Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ…pe… buddhāna sāsana』』nti idaṃ suttaṃ sammāsambuddhassa vacanabhāvato sakavacanaṃ nāma. Attho heṭṭhā vuttova.

Bhikkhave, bālassa bālalakkhaṇāni bālaupalakkhaṇakāraṇāni bālanimittāni 『『ayaṃ bālo』』ti gahaṇakāraṇāni bālāpadānāni bālassa apadānāni porāṇāni viruḷhāni kammāni yehi bālalakkhaṇādīhi bālaṃ 『『bālo』』ti pare paṇḍitā sañjānanti, imāni bālalakkhaṇāni mayā vuccamānāni tīṇi. Katamāni tīṇi? Bhikkhave, bālo duccintitacintī ca duccintitaṃ abhijjhābyāpādamicchādassanaṃ cintī ca hoti, dubbhāsitabhāsī dubbhāsitaṃ musāvādādiṃ bhāsī ca hoti. dukkaṭakammakārī ca dukkaṭaṃ pāṇātipātādikammaṃ kārī ca hoti. Bhikkhave, bālassa…pe… bālāpadānāni iminā mayā vuttāni tīṇi kho bhavanti. Sukkapakkho pana vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo. Idaṃ 『『tīṇimāni bhikkhave』』tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ sammāsambuddhassa vacanabhāvato sakavacanaṃ nāma.

Pathavīsamo vitthato sambodho nāma natthi. Pātaṃ vuṭṭhaṃ udakaṃ ābhuso lābhi gaṇhātīti pātālo, pātālena samo pātālasamo ninno na vijjati. Merusamo unnato natthi, cakkavattisadiso poriso natthīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『pathavīsamo』』tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ parassa devassa vacanabhāvato paravacanaṃ hoti.

『『Devānaṃ inda, tava subhāsitena jayo hotī』』ti vatvā 『『vepacitti, tava subhāsitena jayo hotū』』ti vatvā 『『vepacitti, tvaṃ gāthaṃ bhaṇa bhaṇāhī』』ti avoca. Bhikkhave, atha kho asurindo vepacitti imaṃ vuccamānaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi 『『te paṭisedhako no ce assa no ce bhaveyya , evaṃ sati bālā bhiyyo pakujjheyyuṃ, tasmā dhīro paṇḍito bhusena daṇḍena bālaṃ nisedhaye』』ti.

Gāthāya, bhikkhave, asurindena vepacittinā bhāsitāya asurā anumodiṃsu, devā tuṇhī ahesuṃ. Bhikkhave, atha kho asurindo vepacitti devānaṃ indaṃ sakkaṃ etaṃ vacanaṃ avoca 『『devānaminda, tvaṃ gāthaṃ bhaṇa bhaṇāhī』』ti etaṃ vacanaṃ avoca. Bhikkhave, atha kho devānamindo sakko imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi 『『bālassa paṭisedhanaṃ paraṃ paccatthikaṃ saṅkupitaṃ ñatvā sato satimā yo paṇḍito kodhato upasammati, tassa paṇḍitassa etadeva upasamaṃ varanti ahaṃ maññe』』ti.

Gāthāya, bhikkhave, devānamindena sakkena bhāsitāya devā anumodiṃsu, asurā tuṇhī ahesuṃ. Bhikkhave, atha kho devānamindo sakko asurindaṃ vepacittiṃ etaṃ vacanaṃ avoca 『『vepacitti, tvaṃ gāthaṃ bhaṇāhī』』ti etaṃ vacanaṃ avoca. Bhikkhave, atha kho asurindo vepacitti imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi 『『vāsava yadā titikkhati, tadā naṃ titikkhantaṃ puggalaṃ bālo 『『ayaṃ me bhayā titikkhatī』』ti maññati, titikkhāya etadeva vajjaṃ ahaṃ passāmi. Vāsava gogaṇo palāyinaṃ gavaṃ ajjhottharati iva, evaṃ dummedho khamantaṃ bhiyyo ajjhāruhati ajjhottharati.

Gāthāya, bhikkhave, asurindena vepacittinā bhāsitāya asurā anumodiṃsu, devā tuṇhī ahesuṃ. Jāyamāne ca goyuddhe paṭhamaṃ dveyeva goṇā yujjhanti, gogaṇo pana yāva eko goṇo na palāyati, tāva olokentova tiṭṭhati. Yadā ca eko goṇo palāyati , tadā sabbo goṇo taṃ palāyinaṃ gavaṃ bhiyyo ajjhottharatīti goyuddhasabhāvo veditabbo. 『『Atha kho』』tiādīnaṃ yojanattho pākaṭo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文： 116. "諸惡莫作......是諸佛教"這經，因為是正等覺者的言說，所以稱為自說。義理如前所述。 諸比丘，愚人的愚人相、愚人表徵因、愚人標誌、"此是愚人"的認知因、愚人行跡即愚人的過往已生長的諸業，以這些愚人相等其他智者知道"此是愚人"，我說這三種愚人相。是哪三種？諸比丘，愚人是惡思維者即思維貪慾、嗔恚、邪見等惡，惡言說者即說妄語等惡語，惡行為作者即作殺生等惡業。諸比丘，我所說的愚人......愚人行跡是這三種。白分則應當以相反方式理解。這段以"tīṇimāni bhikkhave"為首的話，因為是正等覺者的言說，所以稱為自說。 沒有像大地那樣廣大的正覺。清晨降下的水，能充分吸收的稱為深淵，沒有像深淵那樣低的。沒有像須彌山那樣高的，沒有像轉輪王那樣的人。這段以"pathavīsamo"為首的話，因為是他方天神的言說，所以是他說。 說"天帝，愿你以善說勝利"后，說"毗波質底，愿你以善說勝利"后，說"毗波質底，你說偈頌吧"。諸比丘，於是阿修羅王毗波質底說了這偈頌："如果沒有制止者，如此愚人會更加憤怒，因此智者應以重杖制止愚人。" 諸比丘，阿修羅王毗波質底說了偈頌后，阿修羅隨喜，諸天默然。諸比丘，於是阿修羅王毗波質底對天帝帝釋說這話："天帝，你說偈頌吧"說這話。諸比丘，於是天帝帝釋說了這偈頌："我認為，智者了知制止愚人會使敵人更加憤怒后，具念正念而從忿怒平息，這平息才是最上。" 諸比丘，天帝帝釋說了偈頌后，諸天隨喜，阿修羅默然。諸比丘，於是天帝帝釋對阿修羅王毗波質底說這話："毗波質底，你說偈頌吧"說這話。諸比丘，於是阿修羅王毗波質底說了這偈頌："婆娑婆，當他忍耐時，愚人認為'他因怕我而忍耐'，我看到忍耐有這過失。婆娑婆，如牛群踐踏逃跑的牛，如是愚者更加騎壓忍耐者。" 諸比丘，阿修羅王毗波質底說了偈頌后，阿修羅隨喜，諸天默然。在牛斗發生時，最初只有兩頭牛相鬥，但只要一頭牛不逃跑，牛群就只是看著。當一頭牛逃跑時，所有牛就更加踐踏那逃跑的牛，應當了知這是牛斗的本性。"於是"等的構造義理是明顯的。

Vepacitti, yo puggalo titikkhati, taṃ khamantaṃ puggalaṃ 『『ayaṃ me bhayā titikkhatī』』ti kāmaṃ maññatu vā, mā maññatu vā, taṃ maññanaṃ nipphalameva. Atthā sadatthaparamā bhavanti. Khantyā khantito bhiyyo sadattho nāma na vijjati.

Yo balavā santo dubbalassa have titikkhatīti tassa balavantassa taṃ titikkhanaṃ paramaṃ khantinti sappurisā āhu, dubbalo niccaṃ khamati eva.

Yassa bālassa bālabalaṃ atthi, tassa bālassa bālabalaṃ 『『abala』』nti sappurisā āhu, yassa dhammaguttassa yaṃ balaṃ atthi, tassa dhammaguttassa tassa balassa paṭivattā paṭippharitvā vattā na vijjati.

Vepacitti, yo puggalo kuddhaṃ paṭhamaṃ kujjhantassa paṭikujjhati, so paṭikujjhanto puggalo tena paṭikujjhanena tassa paṭhamaṃ kujjhantassa pāpapuggalassa pāpapuggalato pāpiyo eva pāpataro hīnataro eva bhave.

Vepacitti, yo sappuriso sato satimā paraṃ saṅkupitaṃ ñatvā paṭhamaṃ kujjhantassa appaṭikujjhantova bhave, so sappuriso dujjayaṃ saṅgāmaṃ jeti nāma, attano ca parassa ca ubhinnaṃ atthaṃ carati nāma.

Attano ca parassa ca tikicchantānaṃ ubhinnaṃ kodho upasammati, ye janā dhammassa khantidhammassa atthe, catusaccadhamme vā akovidā bhavanti, te janā khamantaṃ sappurisaṃ 『『ayaṃ bālo』』ti maññanti, tesaṃ akovidānaṃ janānaṃ taṃ maññanaṃ nipphalanti.

Gāthāsu, bhikkhave, devānamindena sakkena bhāsitāsu devā anumodiṃsu, asurā tuṇhī ahesunti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『bhiyyo bālā』』tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ sakkavepacittīnaṃ vacanabhāvato paravacanaṃ nāma. (9)

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 毗波質帝，若有人能忍耐，對於這個能忍耐的人，無論別人認為"此人是因為害怕才忍耐"也好，不這樣認為也好，這種想法都是毫無結果的。利益是以自利為最上。對於能忍者來說，沒有比忍辱更大的自利。 若強者對弱者能行忍辱，智者說這種強者的忍辱是最上的忍辱，而弱者則常常只能忍耐。 若愚者有愚者之力，智者說這愚者之力是"無力"，若守法者有力量，這守法者的力量是無人能夠抗拒或對抗的。 毗波質帝，若有人對首先發怒者以怒迴應，這個以怒迴應的人因為這樣的迴應，比那個首先發怒的惡人更為邪惡低劣。 毗波質帝，若有正念正知的善人，知道他人發怒時仍能不以怒迴應首先發怒者，這善人可說是贏得了難勝的戰鬥，可說是為自己和他人雙方謀求了利益。 對於醫治自己和他人雙方的人來說，憤怒得以平息，那些不瞭解法、不瞭解忍辱法的道理和四聖諦之法的人們，會認為能忍耐的善人是"愚者"，這些無知者的想法是毫無結果的。 諸比丘，對於天帝釋所說的偈頌，諸天隨喜讚歎，阿修羅們保持沉默。這句"更加愚癡"等言論，因為是帝釋與毗波質帝的對話，所以被稱為他說。（9.）

117.Pattaṃ etarahi adhigataṃ yañca kāmūpakaraṇaṃ, āyatiṃ pattabbaṃ adhigataṃ yañca kāmūpakaraṇaṃ atthi, etaṃ ubhayaṃ rajānukiṇṇaṃ rāgarajādikiṇṇaṃ iti āturassa āturānaṃyeva puggalānaṃ santike anusikkhato anusikkhantassa sikkhāsārā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, sīlaṃ vataṃ jīvitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ ime sikkhāsārā hutvā upaṭṭhahantīti ye upaṭṭhānasārā puggalā sārato gahetvā ṭhitā. Ettha sīlaṃ nāma 『『na karomī』』ti oramaṇaṃ. Vataṃ nāma bhojanakiccakaraṇādi. Jīvitaṃ nāma ājīvo. Brahmacariyaṃ nāma methunavirativisesabhāvo veditabbo. Tesaṃ upaṭṭhānasārānaṃ puggalānaṃ ayaṃ vādo eko paṭhamo anto lāmako. Ye ca puggalā 『『kāmesu doso natthī』』ti evaṃvādino evaṃdiṭṭhino hutvā ṭhitā, tesaṃ puggalānaṃ ayaṃ vādo eko dutiyo anto lāmako. Iccete ubho antā antavādā puggalā kaṭasivaḍḍhanā kaṭasiyo diṭṭhiṃ vaḍḍhenti. Ete ubho ante attakilamathānuyoge kāmasukhallikānuyoge eke puggalā anabhiññāya olīyanti, eke puggalā atidhāvantīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『yañca patta』』ntiādikaṃ vacanaṃ paresaṃ puggalānaṃ vacanabhāvato paravacanaṃ nāma.

Ye ca sammādiṭṭhipuggalā te ubho ante attakilamathānuyogakāmasukhallikānuyoge abhiññāya tatra ca ante na ahesuṃ. Tena ca abhijānanena te ubho ante na amaññiṃsu, tesaṃ sammādiṭṭhipuggalānaṃ vaṭṭaṃ tividhaṃ vaṭṭaṃ paññāpanāya natthi. Iti evaṃ idaṃ 『『ye cā』』tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavato vacanabhāvato sakavacanaṃ nāma. Ayaṃ udāno 『『yañca pattaṃ…pe… paññāpanāyā』』ti ayaṃ udāno vuttanayena sakavacanañca paravacanañca hoti.

Pasenadi nāma kosalo kosalissaro rājā bhagavantaṃ etaṃ 『『idha mayhaṃ…pe… tesaṃ piyo attā』』ti vacanaṃ avoca. Bhante, idha rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa mayhaṃ mama cetaso cittassa evaṃ parivitakko udapādi, kesaṃ sattānaṃ attā piyo nu kho, kesaṃ sattānaṃ attā appiyo nu kho iti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ udapādi. Bhante, tassa mayhaṃ etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi, ye ca keci sattā kāyena duccaritaṃ caranti kho…pe… manasā duccaritaṃ caranti kho, tesaṃ sattānaṃ attā appiyo kho. Te duccaritaṃ carantā sattā 『『no attā piyo』』ti evaṃ kiñcāpi vadeyyuṃ, atha kho tesaṃ duccaritaṃ carantānaṃ sattānaṃ attā appiyova. Taṃ kissa hetu? Appiyo appiyassa anatthāya yaṃ duccaritaṃ kareyya, taṃ duccaritaṃ te duccaritaṃ carantā sattā attanāva. sayameva. Attano anatthāya hi yasmā karonti, tasmā tesaṃ duccaritaṃ carantānaṃ sattānaṃ attā appiyovāti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi.

Bhante , ye ca keci sattā kāyena sucaritaṃ caranti kho…pe… manasā sucaritaṃ caranti kho, tesaṃ sucaritaṃ carantānaṃ sattānaṃ attā piyo kho, te sucaritaṃ carantā sattā 『『no attā appiyo』』ti evaṃ kiñcāpi vadeyyuṃ, atha kho tesaṃ sucaritaṃ carantānaṃ sattānaṃ attā piyova. Taṃ kissa hetu? Piyo piyassa atthāya yaṃ sucaritaṃ careyya, taṃ sucaritaṃ te sucaritaṃ carantā sattā attanāva sayameva attano atthāya hi yasmā karonti , tasmā tesaṃ sucaritaṃ carantānaṃ sattānaṃ attā piyovāti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Etaṃ vacanaṃ avocāti yojanā.

『『Evametaṃ mahārājā』』ti vacanaṃ paṭhamaṃ vatvā 『『ye hi kecī』』tiādike bhagavato vuttavacanepi yojanā tatheva kātabbā.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文： 117. 現在已獲得的欲樂資具，以及將來可能獲得的欲樂資具，這兩者都被塵垢（即貪慾塵垢等）所染污。對於向病者學習的人來說，這些都成為修學的精要而顯現，戒、禁、命、梵行，這些成為修學的精要而顯現，這些人執著這些為精要而安住。此中，戒即是"不作"的克制。禁即是飲食作務等。命即是活命。梵行應當知道是遠離淫慾的殊勝狀態。對於那些執著這些為精要的人們來說，這是第一種低劣的極端。那些主張"欲樂無過"並持此見解而安住的人們，這是第二種低劣的極端。這兩種極端論者增長邪見。對於這兩種極端——苦行和欲樂，一些人因不瞭解而退縮，一些人則過分追求。這段"現在已獲得"等言論，因為是其他人所說，所以稱為他說。 而那些正見的人們，他們了知這兩種極端——苦行和欲樂，而不執著于其中。由於這種了知，他們不執取這兩種極端，這些正見的人們沒有三種輪迴的施設。如此，這段"而那些"等言論，因為是世尊所說，所以稱為自說。這段自說"現在已獲得......施設"，如上所述，既包含自說也包含他說。 波斯匿王是憍薩羅國的統治者，他對世尊說了這段"在此我......他們的自我是可愛的"的話。"大德，在此我獨處靜思時，心中生起如是思惟：對哪些眾生來說自我是可愛的？對哪些眾生來說自我是不可愛的？大德，我有如是思惟：凡是以身行惡......以意行惡的眾生，對他們來說自我是不可愛的。雖然這些行惡的眾生可能會說'我們愛自我'，但實際上對這些行惡的眾生來說，自我是不可愛的。這是什麼原因呢？因為不可愛者為不可愛者的不利而造作惡行，這些行惡的眾生是自己為自己造作。由於他們是為自己的不利而造作，所以對這些行惡的眾生來說，自我是不可愛的，我有如是思惟。" "大德，凡是以身行善......以意行善的眾生，對這些行善的眾生來說自我是可愛的。雖然這些行善的眾生可能會說'我們不愛自我'，但實際上對這些行善的眾生來說，自我是可愛的。這是什麼原因呢？因為可愛者為可愛者的利益而修習善行，這些行善的眾生是自己為自己造作。由於他們是為自己的利益而造作，所以對這些行善的眾生來說，自我是可愛的，我有如是思惟。"他說了這些話。 首先說"大王，確實如此"這句話之後，對於"凡是"等世尊所說的話，也應當如此理解。

Gāthāsu pana yo paṇḍito attānaṃ 『『piya』』nti ce jaññā, evaṃ sati so paṇḍito naṃ attānaṃ pāpena kammena na saṃyuje na saṃyojeyya, taṃ vacanaṃ hi saccaṃ piyaṃ attānaṃ sulabhaṃ na hoti, dukkaṭakārinā sukhaṃ sulabhaṃ na hoti.

Antakena maccunā adhipannassa mānusaṃ bhavaṃ jahato pajahantassa tassa maraṇamukhe ṭhitassa sattassa kiṃ sakaṃ hoti, maraṇamukhe ṭhito so satto kiñca ādāya paralokaṃ gacchati, chāyā gacchantaṃ sattaṃ anapāyinī iva, evaṃ assa paralokagatassa sattassa kiñca anugaṃ hoti.

Iti bhagavā evaṃ pucchati, pucchitvā 『『ubho』』tiādivissajjanavacanañca āha. Idha loke yo macco yaṃ puññañca yaṃ pāpañca ubho kamme kurute karoti, tassa paralokagatassa maccassa taṃ puññapāpadvayaṃ sakaṃ hoti. Paralokaṃ gato macco taṃva puññapāpadvayaṃ ādāya paralokaṃ gacchati, chāyā gacchantaṃ sattaṃ anapāyinī iva, evaṃ assa paralokagatassa maccassa taṃva puññapāpadvayaṃ anugaṃ hoti.

Tasmā paṇḍito samparāyikaṃ samparāye phalanibbattāpakaṃ kalyāṇaṃ nicayaṃ nicayanto hutvā kareyya. Pāṇinaṃ paralokasmiṃ puññāni patiṭṭhā honti, iti bhagavā āhāti yojanā kātabbā. Idaṃ 『『rājā pasenadī』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ kosalarañño vacanabhāvato paravacanaṃ hoti. 『『Evametaṃ , mahārāja, evametaṃ mahārājā』』tiādikā anugīti bhagavato vacanabhāvato sakavacanaṃ hoti. Idaṃ dvayaṃ vacanaṃ sakavacanañca paravacanañca hoti. (10)

我來為您直譯這段巴利文經文： 在偈頌中，若是智者知曉自己是"可愛的"，如此這位智者就不應以惡業束縛自己，因為這句話確實如此：愛惜自己的人是難得的，作惡者難得安樂。 被死神所制服的、即將捨棄人界生存的、處於死亡邊緣的眾生，什麼是他所有的？處於死亡邊緣的眾生帶著什麼去往他世？如同影子不離開行走的眾生一般，這樣去往他世的眾生，什麼會跟隨著他？ 如是世尊這樣詢問，詢問后又說了"兩者"等答案之語。在此世間，凡夫造作福業與罪業這兩種業，對於去往他世的凡夫而言，這福罪二業就是他所有的。去往他世的凡夫，正是帶著這福罪二業前往他世，如同影子不離開行走的眾生一般，這樣去往他世的凡夫，正是這福罪二業會跟隨著他。 因此智者應當積累能在來世帶來果報的善行。對於眾生而言，諸福德是他世的依止，如是世尊所說，應當如是理解。這段以"波斯匿王"開始的經文，因為是憍薩羅王所說而成為他說。"確實如此，大王，確實如此，大王"等隨喜之語，因為是世尊所說而成為自說。這兩種說法既是自說也是他說。（10）

1. Pañhe pucchite idaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ abhiññeyyaṃ, idaṃ samudayasaccaṃ pahātabbaṃ, idaṃ maggasaccaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ, idaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, phalaṃ vā sacchikātabbaṃ, ime kusalākusalā dhammā evaṃ kusalākusalabhāvena gahitā anavajjasāvajjabhāvena vā gahitā sukhavipākadukkhavipākabhāvena vā gahitā, idaṃ iṭṭhavipākaṃ idaṃ aniṭṭhavipākaṃ phalaṃ nibbattayaiti evaṃgahitānaṃ tesaṃ kusalākusaladhammānaṃ ayaṃ vuḍḍhi attho, ayaṃ hāni atthoti. Iti idaṃ 『『pañhe pucchite』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ vissajjanīye atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato vissajjanīyaṃ nāma.

『『Uḷāro buddho bhagavā』』ti iminā padena buddhauḷārataṃ ekaṃseneva ekakoṭṭhāseneva niddise. 『『Svākkhāto dhammo』』ti iminā padena dhammasvākkhātataṃ ekaṃseneva ekakoṭṭhāseneva niddise. 『『Suppaṭipanno saṅgho』』ti iminā padena saṅghasuppaṭipattiṃ ekaṃseneva ekakoṭṭhāseneva niddise 『『sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā』』ti iminā padena saṅkhārāniccataṃ ekaṃseneva niddise. 『『Sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā』』ti iminā padena saṅkhāradukkhataṃ ekaṃseneva niddise. 『『Sabbe dhammā anattā』』ti iminā padena dhammānattataṃ ekaṃseneva niddise. 『『Sabbe saṅkhārā anattā』』ti avatvā 『『sabbe dhammā anattā』』ti vuttena iminā padena saṅkhārehi aññaṃ yaṃ vā pana maggaphalanirodhasamāpattidhammajātaṃ atthi, taṃ maggaphalanirodhasamāpattidhammajātampi evaṃjātiyaṃ evaṃ ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyanti maggaphalanirodhasamāpattidhammajātassāpi anattataṃ ekaṃseneva niddiseti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『uḷāro』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ vissajjanīye buddhauḷāratādike vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato vissajjanīyaṃ nāma.

Naradammasārathi ākaṅkhato te bhagavato manasā sabbaññutaññāṇasahitādimanasā vicintitaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ devā manussā sabbe pāṇino na jaññā na jāneyyuṃ. Santaṃ araṇaṃ samādhiṃ nisevato te bhagavato manasā vicintitā kasiṇāpi sabbe pāṇino na jaññā na jāneyyuṃ. Kasiṇāpi vā kasiṇārammaṇāya paññāyapi na jaññā na jāneyyuṃ. Kasiṇāpīti ettha ca 『『kasiṇāyapī』』ti vattabbepi ya-kāra lopavasena 『『kasiṇāpī』』ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā 『『yaṃ ākaṅkhati yaṃ ākaṅkhanaṃ karoti, taṃ ākaṅkhanaṃ kiṃ katama』』nti pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ aññesaṃ avisayattā avissajjanīyaṃ hotīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『ākaṅkhato』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ avissajjanīye visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato avissajjanīyaṃ nāma.

Bhagavā sīlakkhandhe sīlakkhandhahetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā samādhikkhandhe samādhikkhandhahetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā paññākkhandhe paññākkhandhahetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā vimuttikkhandhe vimuttikkhandhahetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhe vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhahetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā iriyāyaṃ kāyavacīsamācāre kāyavacīsamācārahetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā pabhāve ānubhāvahetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā hitesitāyaṃ mettāhetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā karuṇāyaṃ karuṇāhetu ettako etaparimāṇo, bhagavā iddhiyaṃ iddhividhahetu ettako etaparimāṇoti avissajjanīyoti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『ettako』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ avissajjanīye visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato avissajjanīyaṃ nāma.

1. 在被問及問題時，這是應當了知的苦諦，這是應當斷除的集諦，這是應當修習的道諦，這是應當證悟的滅諦或果。這些善法和不善法是如此被把握為善與不善的性質，或被把握為無過失與有過失的性質，或被把握為樂報與苦報的性質。這是產生可意果報，這是產生不可意果報，如此把握這些善法和不善法的增長之義，這是衰減之義。因此，這段以"在被問及問題時"等開頭的經文，因為在應答的內容中起到表述和說明的作用，所以被稱為應答。 "佛陀世尊是崇高的"，用這個詞句明確地、單一地指出佛陀的崇高性。"法是善說的"，用這個詞句明確地、單一地指出法的善說性。"僧眾是善行道的"，用這個詞句明確地、單一地指出僧眾的善行道性。"一切行無常"，用這個詞句明確地指出諸行的無常性。"一切行是苦"，用這個詞句明確地指出諸行的苦性。"一切法無我"，用這個詞句明確地指出諸法的無我性。沒有說"一切行無我"而說"一切法無我"，用這個詞句，除了諸行之外，還有任何道、果、滅、定的法性存在，那麼這道、果、滅、定的法性也是如此性質的，如此一定要回答的意思是，也明確地指出道、果、滅、定的法性的無我性。這段以"崇高"等開頭的經文，因為在應答的佛陀崇高性等內容中起到表述和說明的作用，所以被稱為應答。 調御丈夫中最勝者，當你希望時，世尊以具有一切知智等的心意所思考的所知法，天神、人類、一切眾生都不能知曉。當你修習寂靜無諍的禪定時，世尊以心意所思考的一切遍處，所有眾生都不能知曉。或者說，即使以遍處所緣的智慧也不能知曉。這裡的"遍處"，雖然應該說"遍處"，但由於省略了"ya"音，所以說成了"遍處"。或者說，"他希望什麼，他做什麼希望，那個希望是什麼"這樣被問到的問題，由於是他人無法涉及的領域，所以成為不可回答的。這段以"當希望時"等開頭的經文，因為在不可回答的範圍內起到表述和說明的作用，所以被稱為不可回答。 世尊在戒蘊中因戒蘊之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在定蘊中因定蘊之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在慧蘊中因慧蘊之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在解脫蘊中因解脫蘊之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在解脫知見蘊中因解脫知見蘊之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在威儀中因身語行為之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在光明中因威力之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在利他中因慈心之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在悲憫中因悲心之故有如此多、如此程度，世尊在神通中因神變之故有如此多、如此程度，這是不可回答的。這段以"如此多"等開頭的經文，因為在不可回答的範圍內起到表述和說明的作用，所以被稱為不可回答。

Bhikkhave, arahato sammāsambuddhassa tathāgatassa loke uppādā uppādahetu tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ uppādo sambhavati, āyatiṃ buddharatanassa uppādo sambhavati, ekassa buddharatanassa dharamānakkhaṇena hi aññassa buddharatanassa anuppajjanato āyatinti vuttaṃ, dhammaratanassa uppādo sambhavati, saṅgharatanassa uppādo sambhavatīti tīṇi ratanāni. 『『Tāni tīṇi ratanāni guṇato kiṃpamāṇānī』』ti pucchite sati tāni tīṇi ratanāni guṇato etaparimāṇānīti na vissajjitabbānīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『tathāgatassā』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ avissajjanīye visaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato avissajjanīyaṃ nāma.

Buddhavisayo puggalaparo puggalapadhāno pañho avissajjanīyo, buddhavisayāva puggalaparoparaññutā avissajjanīyā. Bhikkhave, avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ pubbā koṭi na paññāyati taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ, sakiṃ nirayaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ sattānaṃ, sakiṃ tiracchānayoniṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ sattānaṃ, sakiṃ pettivisayaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ sattānaṃ, sakiṃ asurayoniṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ sattānaṃ, sakiṃ deve sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ sattānaṃ, sakiṃ manusse sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ sattānaṃ pubbā koṭi na paññāyati na dissati na upalabbhatīti. 『『Sā pubbā koṭi katamā』』ti kenaci kataṃ pucchanaṃ avissajjanīyaṃ saṃsārassa pubbakoṭiyā abhāvato avissajjanīyaṃ hoti. 『『Na paññāyatī』』ti desanā sāvakānaṃ ñāṇavekallena katā, na attano ñāṇavekallena. 『『Na paññāyatī』』ti desanā attano ceva sāvakānañca ñāṇavekallena kātabbā siyāti codanaṃ manasi katvā 『『duvidhā buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ desanā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Attā upanetabbo etissā desanāyāti attūpanāyikā. Paro upanetabbo etissā desanāyāti parūpanāyikā. 『『Katamā attūpanāyikā desanā, katamā parūpanāyikā desanā』』ti pucchitabbattā niyametvā dassetuṃ 『『na paññāyatī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Na paññāyatī』』ti desanā sāvakānaṃ netabbānaṃ vasena desitattā parūpanāyikā desanā nāma, 『『natthi buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ avijānanā』』ti desanā attano netabbassa vasena desitattā attūpanāyikā desanā nāma. 『『Natthi buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ avijānanā』』ti vuttattā pubbāya koṭiyā abhāvato eva na paññāyatīti viññāyati, bhagavato ñāṇassa paññāpanaṃ kātuṃ asamatthattā na paññāyatīti na viññāyati tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ 『『natthi buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ avijānanāti etena purimāya koṭiyā abhāvato eva na paññāyati, na tattha ñāṇassa paṭighātoti dassetī』』ti (netti. aṭṭha. 118) vuttaṃ.

『『Kathaṃ pana buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ avijānanāya natthibhāvovijānitabbo』』ti vattabbattā avijānanāya natthibhāvaṃ jānāpetuṃ 『『yathā bhagavā kokālikaṃ bhikkhu』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『yaṃ pana atthi, taṃ aññesaṃ appameyyampi bhagavato na appameyyanti bhagavato sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇataṃ dassetuṃ 『yathā bhagavā kokālikaṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbhā』tiādimāhā』』ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavā kokālikaṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha 『『kīva dīghaṃ nu kho, bhante, padume niraye āyuppamāṇa』』nti pañhaṃ pucchitvā nisinnaṃ aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ yathā yena pakārena 『『seyyathāpi…pe… āghātetvā』』ti evamāha. Tato tena pakārena avijānanāya natthibhāvo vijānitabboti attho gahetabbo.

諸比丘，當阿羅漢、正等正覺、如來出現於世時,因出現之故,三種寶的出現產生:未來佛寶的出現產生,因為在一尊佛寶住世期間,另一尊佛寶不會出現,所以說"未來";法寶的出現產生;僧寶的出現產生,這就是三寶。如果被問到"這三寶在功德上有多大?"時,不應回答說這三寶在功德上有這麼大。這段以"如來"等開頭的**,因為在不可回答的範圍內起到表述和說明的作用,所以被稱為不可回答。 佛陀境界的人上人為主的問題是不可回答的,佛陀境界的人上人智也是不可回答的。諸比丘,被無明所障蔽的眾生,被愛慾所束縛的眾生,一次又一次輪迴地獄的眾生,一次又一次輪迴畜生道的眾生,一次又一次輪迴餓鬼道的眾生,一次又一次輪迴阿修羅道的眾生,一次又一次輪迴天界的眾生,一次又一次輪迴人間的眾生,其最初的起點是不可知的,不可見的,不可得的。如果有人問"那最初的起點是什麼?",這是不可回答的,因為輪迴沒有最初的起點,所以是不可回答的。"不可知"這種說法是因為聲聞弟子們智慧的不足而作的,不是因為自己智慧的不足。"不可知"這種說法如果是因為自己和聲聞弟子們智慧的不足而應該作的,那麼就會有這樣的指責,考慮到這一點,所以說"諸佛世尊有兩種說法"等。應當以此說法來引導自己的叫做自引導說法。應當以此說法來引導他人的叫做他引導說法。因為可以問"什麼是自引導說法,什麼是他引導說法?",爲了明確地指出,所以說"不可知"等。"不可知"這種說法是因為是爲了引導聲聞弟子們而說的,所以叫做他引導說法;"諸佛世尊沒有不知道的"這種說法是因為是爲了引導自己而說的,所以叫做自引導說法。因為說"諸佛世尊沒有不知道的",所以可以理解為正是因為沒有最初的起點才"不可知",而不能理解為是因為無法向世尊的智慧表明才"不可知",因此在註釋書中說:"通過'諸佛世尊沒有不知道的'這句話表明正是因為沒有最初的起點才不可知,而不是因為智慧在那裡受阻。" 因為應該說"那麼,諸佛世尊沒有不知道的這件事應該如何理解呢?",爲了讓人知道沒有不知道的情況,所以說"就像世尊關於迦迦利迦比丘"等。而在註釋書中說:"爲了表明世尊的智慧在一切處都無礙,所以說'就像世尊關於迦迦利迦比丘'等,意思是:對於其他人來說即使是不可測量的事物,對於世尊來說也不是不可測量的。"世尊就像

Bhikkhu, tvaṃ sallakkhehi, kokāliko vīsatikhāriko kosalako tilavāho rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapito, tato tilato puriso vassasatassa vassasatassa accayena ekamekaṃ tilaṃ uddhareyya, so vīsatikhāriko kosalako tilavāho iminā uddharānupakkamena khippataraṃ parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ seyyathāpi gaccheyya, eko abbudo nirayo parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ na tveva gaccheyya. Vīsati abbudā nirayā tattake kāle parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ seyyathāpi gaccheyyuṃ, evameva eko nirabbudo nirayo tattake kāle parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ na tveva gaccheyya. Esa nayo sesesupi. Sāriputtamoggallānesu cittaṃ āghātetvā padumaṃ nirayaṃ kokāliko bhikkhu upapanno kho, bhikkhu, tvaṃ evaṃ sallakkhehīti bhagavā āhāti yojanā. Bhagavā 『『ayaṃ appameyyo ayaṃ asaṅkhyeyyo』』ti vā na kiñci āha. 『『Tasmiṃ appameyye katamo appameyyo, tasmiṃ asaṅkhyeyye katamo asaṅkhyeyyo』』ti kenaci kataṃ pucchanaṃ buddhavisayattā avissajjanīyaṃ. Idaṃ appameyyaasaṅkhyeyyasuttaṃ vuttanayena avissajjanīyaṃ. (11)

比丘,你要注意,迦迦利迦比丘好比二十佉梨迦(一種容量單位)的憍薩羅芝麻車,堆積成一堆放在那裡,然後有一個人每一百年取走一粒芝麻,這二十佉梨迦的憍薩羅芝麻車以這種取走的方式會更快地耗盡、用完,而一個阿浮陀地獄卻不會耗盡、用完。二十個阿浮陀地獄在同樣的時間內會耗盡、用完,而一個尼羅浮陀地獄在同樣的時間內卻不會耗盡、用完。其他的也是這個道理。迦迦利迦比丘因對舍利弗和目犍連心懷恨意而投生到蓮華地獄,比丘,你要這樣注意。世尊這樣說。世尊沒有說"這是無量的"或"這是無數的"。如果有人問"在那無量中哪個是無量的,在那無數中哪個是無數的",這是佛陀境界,所以是不可回答的。這個無量無數經按照所說的方式是不可回答的。(11)

119.『『Yadā so upako』』tiādīsu yojanā pākaṭā.

『『Kathaṃ kena pakārena jino』』ti upakena kataṃ pucchanaṃ 『『kilesappahānapakārena jino』』ti vissajjanīyattā vissajjanīyaṃ. 『『Kena pakārena jino』』ti upakena kataṃ pucchanaṃ 『『pāpakānaṃ dhammānaṃ jitattā jino』』ti vissajjanīyattā vissajjanīyaṃ. 『『Katamo jino』』ti kataṃ pucchanaṃ 『『rūpādiko jino』』ti vā 『『rūpādikaṃ muñcitvā añño jino』』ti vā vissajjetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā avissajjanīyaṃ. 『『Katamo āsavakkhayo, katamo rāgakkhayo, katamo dosakkhayo, katamo mohakkhayo』』ti kataṃ pucchanaṃ 『『nibbānaṃ āsavakkhayo』』ti vā 『『arahattamaggo āsavakkhayo』』ti vā 『『arahattaphalaṃ rāgakkhayo』』ti vā iti evamādinā vissajjanīyattā vissajjanīyaṃ. 『『Kittako āsavakkhayo, kittako rāgakkhayo, kittako dosakkhayo, kittako mohakkhayo』』ti kataṃ pucchanaṃ 『『ettako etaparimāṇo āsavakkhayo』』ti evamādinā avissajjanīyattā avissajjanīyaṃ. Idaṃ vuttappakāraṃ suttaṃ vuttanayena vissajjanīyañca avissajjanīyañca hoti. (12)

『『Tathāgato satto atthī』』ti pucchanaṃ 『『pañcakkhandhe upādāya paññāpetabbo sattabhūto atthī』』ti vissajjanīyattā vissajjanīyaṃ. 『『Atthi rūpa』』nti kataṃ pucchanaṃ rūpassa vissajjamānattā 『『āmantā』』ti vissajjanīyattā vissajjanīyaṃ, 『『rūpaṃ tathāgato』』ti kataṃ pucchanaṃ tathābhāvato alabbhanato avissajjanīyattā avissajjanīyaṃ. 『『Rūpavā tathāgato』』tiādīsupi esa nayo yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbo. Idaṃ vuttappakāraṃ suttaṃ vuttanayena vissajjanīyañca avissajjanīyañca hoti.

『『Passati bhagavā dibbena cakkhunā…pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānātī』』ti kataṃ pucchanaṃ 『『passati bhagavā』』ti vā…pe… 『『pajānāti bhagavā』』ti vā vissajjanīyattā vissajjanīyaṃ. 『『Katame sattā, katamo tathāgato』』ti kataṃ pucchanaṃ paramatthato alabbhanato avissajjanīyattā avissajjanīyaṃ.

『『Atthitathāgato』』ti kataṃ pucchanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayena vissajjanīyaṃ. 『『Atthi tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā』』ti kataṃ pucchanaṃ 『『atthi tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā』』ti vissajjamāne sati ca idhaloko eva paralokoti āpajjati, 『『natthi tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā』』ti vissajjamāne sati ca idhalokato añño paralokoti āpajjati, tasmā avissajjanīyattā avissajjanīyaṃ. Idaṃ vuttappakāraṃ suttaṃ vissajjanīye visaye ca avissajjanīye visaye ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato vissajjanīyañca avissajjanīyañca hoti.

1. 在"當那優波迦"等句中的組合是明顯的。 當優波迦問"如何、以何種方式是勝者"時，因為可以回答"以斷除煩惱的方式是勝者"，所以是可回答的。當優波迦問"以何種方式是勝者"時，因為可以回答"因為戰勝了惡法而是勝者"，所以是可回答的。當問到"什麼是勝者"時，因為無法回答"色等是勝者"或"除了色等之外的其他是勝者"，所以是不可回答的。當問到"什麼是漏盡、什麼是貪盡、什麼是嗔盡、什麼是癡盡"時，因為可以回答"涅槃是漏盡"或"阿羅漢道是漏盡"或"阿羅漢果是貪盡"等等，所以是可回答的。當問到"漏盡有多少、貪盡有多少、嗔盡有多少、癡盡有多少"時，因為無法回答"漏盡有這麼多、這個程度"等等，所以是不可回答的。這段所說的經文按照所說的方式既是可回答的也是不可回答的。(12) 當問"如來、眾生存在嗎"時，因為可以回答"依五蘊而施設的眾生存在"，所以是可回答的。當問"色存在嗎"時，因為色是可以回答的，所以可以回答"是的"，是可回答的；當問"色是如來嗎"時，因為從真實性來說是不可得的，所以是不可回答的。在"如來有色"等問題中也應該按照這個道理根據適合的情況來理解。這段所說的經文按照所說的方式既是可回答的也是不可回答的。 當問"世尊以天眼見……了知眾生隨業流轉"時，因為可以回答"世尊見"或……"世尊了知"，所以是可回答的。當問"什麼是眾生，什麼是如來"時，因為從勝義諦來說是不可得的，所以是不可回答的。 當問"如來存在嗎"時，按照前面所說的方式是可回答的。當問"如來死後存在嗎"時，如果回答"如來死後存在"，就會導致此世即是他世的結論；如果回答"如來死後不存在"，就會導致他世與此世不同的結論，因此是不可回答的。這段所說的經文，因為在可回答的範圍和不可回答的範圍內都起到表述和說明的作用，所以既是可回答的也是不可回答的。

2. Nānāvidhaṃ vissajjanīyāvissajjanīyasuttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ suttaṃ kamma』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ kamma』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Antakenādhipannassā』』tiādīsu attho heṭṭhā vuttanayattā pākaṭo 『『maraṇenābhibhūtassa…pe… chāyāva anapāyinī』』ti idaṃ suttaṃ puññakammapāpakammadvaye vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato kammaṃ nāma.

Bhikkhave, tumhe puna caparaṃ kammaṃ sallakkhetha. (Anuṭṭhānagilānaṃ) anuṭṭhānagilānassa pīṭhasamāruḷhaṃ pīṭhasamāruḷhassa bālaṃ bālassa vā mañcasamāruḷhaṃ mañcasamāruḷhassa bālaṃ bālassa vā chamāyaṃ bhūmiyaṃ semānaṃ semānassa sayantassa bālaṃ bālassa vā kāyena duccaritāni vācāya duccaritāni manasā duccaritāni pāpakāni yāni kammāni pubbe pubbakāle vā atīte anekakappakoṭisatasahasse vā assa bālena katāni, tāni pāpakāni kammāni tamhi pīṭhasamāruḷhādisamaye olambanti viya upaṭṭhahanti ajjholambanti viya upaṭṭhahanti abhippalambanti viya upaṭṭhahanti. Bhikkhave , mahataṃ mahantānaṃ pabbatakūṭānaṃ chāyā sāyanhasamayaṃ pathaviyaṃ seyyathāpi olambanti ajjholambanti abhippalambanti yathā, bhikkhave, evameva bālaṃ…pe… abhippalambanti. Bhikkhave, tatra tasmiṃ upaṭṭhānākāre upaṭṭhānākārahetu bālassa katapāpassa evaṃ parivitakko hoti 『『me mayā kalyāṇaṃ akataṃ vata, me mayā kusalaṃ akataṃ vata, bhīruttāṇaṃ kataṃ vata, me mayā pāpaṃ kataṃ vata, me mayā luddaṃ kataṃ vata, me mayā kibbisaṃ kataṃ vata, bho agilāna sappurisa akatakalyāṇānaṃ akatakusalānaṃ akatabhīruttāṇānaṃ katapāpānaṃ kataluddānaṃ katakibbisānaṃ yāvatā gati duggati atthi, taṃ gatiṃ ahaṃ pecca gacchāmī』』ti evaṃ parivitakko hoti. Evaṃ vitakkento so bālo socati kilamati paridevati, urattāḷiṃ kandati sammohaṃ āpajjatīti yojanā.

Pabbatakūṭānaṃ chāyā nāma sūriyuggamanakālepi pathaviyā olambantīpi chāyā hāyanavasena olambanti. Sāyanhasamayaṃ pana chāyā vaḍḍhanavasena olambanti, tatheva kammānipi tasmiṃ kāle vaḍḍhanavasena upaṭṭhahanti, tasmā tameva vaḍḍhanupaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya 『『sāyanhasamaya』』nti vuttaṃ. Sukkapakkhepi yojanā kaṇhapakkhe yojanānusārena kātabbā. Idaṃ 『『puna capara』』ntiādikaṃ suttadvayaṃ kusalakammaakusalakammesu vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato kammaṃ nāma.

Nānāvidhaṃ kammaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamo vipāko』』ti pucchitabbattā tattha katamo vipāko』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu aṭṭhavīsatividhesu lokiyādīsu sāsanapaṭṭhānesu katamo vipākoti pucchati. Bhikkhave, vo tumhehi ye manussattasaddhāpaṭilābhādayo paṭiladdhā, te manussattasaddhāpaṭilābhādayo vo tumhākaṃ lābhā bhavanti. Tumhehi pabbajitvā yaṃ catupārisuddhisīlādisampādanaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ catupārisuddhisīlādisampādanaṃ vo tumhākaṃ suladdhaṃ bhavati. Bhikkhave, yo buddhuppādo navamo khaṇo tumhehi laddho, so buddhuppādo navamo khaṇo vo tumhākaṃ brahmacariyavāsāya paṭiladdho bhavati.

Bhikkhave, mayā chaphassāyatanikā nāma nirayā diṭṭhā, tattha tesu diṭṭhesu chaphassāyatanikesu nāma nirayesu yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ cakkhunā passati, taṃ aniṭṭharūpaṃyeva passati, no iṭṭharūpaṃ. Akantarūpaṃyeva passati, no kantarūpaṃ. Amanāparūpaṃyeva passati, no manāparūpaṃ.

我來幫您直譯這段巴利文文字: 120. 老師已經確定了各種應答和不應答的經文，我們也已了知。由於需要詢問"什麼是業"，所以說了"其中什麼是業"等等。 在"為死神所制"等句中的含義，依照前述方式很明顯。"被死亡所壓制...如影不離形"這段經文，因為通過表達和說明福業與罪業兩種而運作，所以稱為業。 比丘們，你們還要進一步思考業。（對於懶惰病人）對於懶惰病人，無論是坐在椅子上的愚人，還是躺在床上的愚人，或是躺在地上的愚人，他們過去或在前世，或在無數億劫之前所造作的身惡行、語惡行、意惡行等罪業，這些罪業在他坐椅臥床等時刻，好像垂懸而現，好像下垂而現，好像懸掛而現。比丘們，就像傍晚時分巨大山峰的影子向地面垂落、下垂、懸掛一樣，比丘們，愚人也是如此...乃至...懸掛。比丘們，在那種顯現的情形中，因為業的顯現，造作惡業的愚人會這樣思維："唉，我沒有行善，唉，我沒有修福，唉，我沒有建立庇護，唉，我作了惡，唉，我作了殘暴之事，唉，我作了罪過。喂，無病的善人啊，對於沒有行善、沒有修福、沒有建立庇護、作了惡、作了殘暴之事、作了罪過的人來說，所有惡趣存在之處，我死後將去往那個去處。"他如此思維。如此思維時，那愚人憂愁、疲憊、悲嘆、捶胸而泣、陷入迷亂。 山峰的影子即使在日出時也會投射陰影，影子會因減少而垂落。但在傍晚時分，影子會因增長而垂落，同樣地，諸業在那時也會因增長而顯現，所以針對那種增長顯現而說"傍晚時分"。在白分（善業）中的解釋也應當依照黑分（惡業）的解釋方式來理解。這個始於"還有進一步"的兩段經文，因為通過表達和說明善業與不善業而運作，所以稱為業。 老師已經確定了各種業，我們也已了知。由於需要詢問"什麼是果報"，所以說了"其中什麼是果報"等等。其中，在這二十八種世間等教法建立中問"什麼是果報"。比丘們，你們所獲得的人身、信仰等，這些人身、信仰等獲得成為你們的利得。你們出家后所獲得的四清凈戒等成就，那四清凈戒等成就成為你們的善得。比丘們，你們所獲得的佛陀出世這第九時機，那佛陀出世這第九時機成為你們修梵行生活所獲得的。 比丘們，我看見了名為六觸處的地獄，在那些所見的名為六觸處的地獄中，凡是眼睛所見的任何色，都只見到不悅意的色，不見悅意的色。只見到不可愛的色，不見可愛的色。只見到不適意的色，不見適意的色。

Yaṃ kiñci saddaṃ sotena…pe… ghānena…pe… jivhāya…pe… kāyena…pe… yaṃ kiñci dhammaṃ manasā vijānāti, taṃ aniṭṭhadhammaṃyeva vijānāti, no iṭṭhadhammaṃ. Akantadhammaṃyeva vijānāti, no kantadhammaṃ. Amanāpadhammaṃyeva vijānāti, no manāpadhammanti pāṭho yutto. 『『Aniṭṭharūpaṃyeva vijānāti, no iṭṭharūpa』』ntiādipāṭho ayutto, katthaci pāḷiyaṃ ayuttapāṭho diṭṭho. Sukkapakkhe vuttanayavipariyāyena yojanā kātabbā. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā 『『lābhā vo, bhikkhave』』tiādiko pāṭho vipāke vācakañāpakabhāveneva pavattanato vipāko nāma.

Mārisā niraye paccamānānaṃ amhākaṃ sabbaso nimujjanaummujjanavasena saṭṭhivassasahassāni paripuṇṇāni, nirayassa anto pariyosānaṃ kadā kasmiṃ kāle bhavissati.

Nirayassa anto pariyosānaṃ natthi. Nirayassa anto pariyosānaṃ kuto atthi? Nirayassa anto pariyosānaṃ amhākaṃ na paṭidissati. Mārisā, yadā tumhe ca ahañca seṭṭhiputtā jātā, tadā tuyhaṃ tumhākañca mayhaṃ mama ca pāpaṃ hi yasmā pakataṃ pakārehi kataṃ, tasmā nirayassa anto pariyosānaṃ amhākaṃ na dissatīti ayaṃ pāṭho vipāke vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato vipāko nāma. (13)

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 凡是耳朵所聞的任何聲音...乃至...鼻子...乃至...舌頭...乃至...身體...乃至...凡是意識所知的任何法，都只知道不悅意的法，不知悅意的法。只知道不可愛的法，不知可愛的法。只知道不適意的法，不知適意的法，這樣的行文是恰當的。"只知道不悅意的色，不知悅意的色"等行文是不恰當的，在某些聖典中可見到不恰當的行文。在白分（善業）中的解釋應當依照所說方式的相反方式來理解。這種所說型別的始於"比丘們，你們的利得"等行文，因為通過表達和說明果報而運作，所以稱為果報。 賢友們，我們在地獄受苦，以完全沉浮的方式已經圓滿了六萬年，地獄的終點何時才會到來？ 地獄是沒有終點的。地獄怎麼會有終點呢？我們看不到地獄的終點。賢友們，當你們和我都投生為長者之子時，因為你們和我都造作了惡業，所以我們看不到地獄的終點。這段行文因為通過表達和說明果報而運作，所以稱為果報。（13）

1. Adhammacārī naro kusaladhammesu pamatto hi yasmā hoti, tasmā so adhammacārī pamatto naro yahiṃ yahiṃ yaṃ yaṃ duggatiṃ gacchati, taṃ taṃ gacchantaṃ adhammacāriṃ naṃ naraṃ attanā carito so dhammova hanati. Kimiva hanati? Sayaṃ attanā gahito kaṇhasappo gaṇhantaṃ janaṃ hanati yathā, evaṃ attanā carito adhammo adhammacāriṃ naṃ hanati. 『『Na hi dhammo adhammo cā』』tiādigāthāya attho pākaṭo. Idaṃ suttadvayaṃ kamme ca vipāke ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato kammañca vipāko ca hoti.

Bhikkhave, tumhe puññānaṃ mā bhāyittha; bhikkhave, yadidaṃ yaṃ idaṃ 『『puññānī』』ti adhivacanaṃ pavattaṃ; etaṃ 『『puññānī』』ti adhivacanaṃ iṭṭhassa kantassa piyassa manāpassa sukhassa sukhavipākajanakassa kammassa adhivacanaṃ hoti. Bhikkhave, ahaṃ dīgharattaṃ katānaṃ puññānaṃ dīgharattaṃ paccanubhūtaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ piyaṃ manāpaṃ abhijānāmi kho. 『『Kathaṃ abhijānāmī』』ti ce puccheyya , pubbe satta vassāni mettacittaṃ mettāya sahitaṃ dutiyajjhānacittaṃ bhāvetvā satta saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe imaṃ lokaṃ manussalokaṃ puna na āgamāsiṃ. Satta saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappeti cettha saṃvaṭṭaggahaṇena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī, vivaṭṭaggahaṇena vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīpi gahitāti veditabbā. Sesesupi evameva gahetabbo. Bhikkhave, saṃvaṭṭamāne kappe ahaṃ ābhassarūpago homi, vivaṭṭakappe suññaṃ brahmavimānaṃ upapajjāmi. Bhikkhave, tatra brahmavimāne tatra upapajjamāne upapajjamānahetu ahaṃ brahmā homi, aññe mahānubhāvena abhibhavanato abhibhū, aññehi anabhibhavanato anabhibhūto mahābrahmā homi, aññadatthu ekaṃsena daso ahaṃ vasavattī homi.

Bhikkhave, ahaṃ devānamindo sakko chattiṃsakkhattuṃ ahosiṃ kho, dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto cakkaratanādisattaratanasamannāgato cakkavattirājā anekasatakkhattuṃ ahosiṃ, padesarajjassa rājabhāve ko pana vādo.

Bhikkhave, tassa cakkavattirājabhūtassa mayhaṃ etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi 『『yena phalena yena vipākena ahaṃ etarahi evaṃmahiddhiko evaṃmahānubhāvo amhi, taṃ idaṃ phalaṃ kissa kammassa phalaṃ nu kho, so ayaṃ vipāko kissa kammassa vipāko nu kho』』ti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Bhikkhave, tassa vitakkentassa mayhaṃ etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi 『『yena phalena yena vipākena ahaṃ etarahi evaṃmahiddhiko evaṃmahānubhāvo amhi, me pavattaṃ taṃ idaṃ phalaṃ tiṇṇaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ kho, so ayaṃ vipāko tiṇṇaṃ kammānaṃ vipāko kho, seyyathidaṃ katamesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko? Dānassa damassa saṃyamassāti tiṇṇaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko』』ti etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosīti avocāti yojanā.

Tattha tasmiṃ 『『mā, bhikkhave, puññānaṃ bhāyitthā』』tiādike sutte yañca dānaṃ, yo ca damo, yo ca saṃyamo atthi, idaṃ dānādittayaṃ kammaṃ, taṃvācakañāpakaṃ suttampi kammaṃ nāma. Tappaccayo taṃkammapaccayo paccayuppannabhūto paccanubhūto yo vipāko atthi, etaṃ vipāke phalampi pakkhipitabbaṃ, ayaṃ vipāko taṃvācakañāpako pāṭhopi vipāko nāma. Cūḷakammavibhaṅgo cūḷakammavipākaputhuttavibhāgo tathā vattabbo.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 121. 非法行為的人由於在善法上放逸，所以那放逸的非法行者無論去往何種惡趣，他所行的非法就會傷害那去往惡趣的非法行者。如何傷害呢？就像自己抓住的黑蛇會傷害抓蛇的人一樣，如此自己所行的非法會傷害那非法行者。"非法與正法"等偈頌的含義是明顯的。這兩段經文因為通過表達和說明業和果報而運作，所以既是業也是果報。 比丘們，你們不要害怕功德；比丘們，這個"功德"的稱謂是什麼呢；這個"功德"的稱謂是悅意的、可愛的、喜愛的、適意的、快樂的、能產生快樂果報的業的稱謂。比丘們，我確實知道長久以來所作的功德長期感受到悅意、可愛、喜愛、適意的果報。如果問"如何知道"，我過去修習慈心，與第二禪俱行的慈心修習了七年，七個成壞劫中沒有再回到這個人世間。這裡說"七個成壞劫"，應當理解成壞劫包含了住劫，壞劫包含了成劫。其餘的也應當如此理解。比丘們，在劫壞時我生到光音天，在劫成時我投生到空梵宮。比丘們，在那梵宮，因為投生在那裡，我成為梵天，以大威力勝過其他眾生而成為自在者，不被他人所勝而成為不被征服者，成為大梵天，必定成為完全自在的統治者。 比丘們，我確實三十六次成為天帝釋，作為如法的法王，統治四方，獲得國土的穩固，具足輪寶等七寶的轉輪王，我已經數百次成為，更不用說地方王的王位了。 比丘們，當我作為轉輪王時，有這樣的思維："以什麼果報，以什麼異熟，我現在有如此大神通力，如此大威力，這果報究竟是什麼業的果報呢，這異熟究竟是什麼業的異熟呢？"我有這樣的思維。比丘們，當我思維時有這樣的思維："以什麼果報，以什麼異熟，我現在有如此大神通力，如此大威力，這生起的果報確實是三種業的果報，這異熟確實是三種業的異熟，是哪三種業的果報和異熟呢？是佈施、調御、自製這三種業的果報和異熟。"我有這樣的思維，如是說。 其中在這"比丘們，不要害怕功德"等經中，凡是佈施、調御、自制，這佈施等三種是業，表達和說明它的經文也稱為業。由它為緣，由那業為緣而生起的，作為所感受的異熟，這果報也應當包括在內，這異熟以及表達和說明它的文句也稱為異熟。小業分別和小業果報差別也應當如此說。

Todeyyaputtassa subhassa māṇavassa yaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ, tattha sutte vuttā ye pāṇātipātādayo dhammā appāyukadīghāyukatāya saṃvattanti, ye hiṃsanādayo dhammā bahvābādhaappābādhatāya saṃvattanti, ye usūyanādayo dhammā appesakkhamahesakkhatāya saṃvattanti, ye kodhādayo dhammā dubbaṇṇasuvaṇṇatāya saṃvattanti, ye agāravādayo dhammā nīcakulikauccakulikatāya saṃvattanti, ye maccherādayo dhammā appabhogamahābhogatāya saṃvattanti, ye asallakkhaṇādayo dhammā duppaññapaññavantatāya saṃvattanti. Idaṃ pāṇātipātasattayugaṃ kammaṃ, taṃvācakañāpakaṃ suttampi kammaṃ nāma. Tattha subhasutte yā appāyukadīghāyukatā vuttā…pe… yā duppaññapaññavantatā vuttā, so ayaṃ appāyukadīghāyukatādiko vipāko, taṃvācakañāpakapāṭhopi vipāko. Idaṃ subhasuttaṃ kusalākusalakamme ceva vipāke ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato kammañca vipāko ca hoti. (14)

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 在世尊對托提亞之子善生青年所開示的經中，其中所說的殺生等法導致短壽長壽，傷害等法導致多病少病，嫉妒等法導致小勢力大勢力，忿怒等法導致醜陋美麗，不恭敬等法導致低賤種姓高貴種姓，慳吝等法導致貧乏富裕，不觀察等法導致愚鈍有慧。這七對殺生等是業，表達和說明它的經文也稱為業。其中在善生經中所說的短壽長壽...乃至...所說的愚鈍有慧，這短壽長壽等是果報，表達和說明它的文句也稱為果報。這善生經因為通過表達和說明善不善業以及果報而運作，所以既是業也是果報。（14）

1. Yo puggalo vacīduccaritaparivajjanena vācānurakkhī bhaveyya, abhijjhādianuppādanena manasā saṃvuto bhaveyya, pāṇātipātādipajahanena kāyena akusalaṃ na kayirā, iti tayo ete kammapathe visodhaye, so puggalo isippaveditaṃ maggaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ ārādhaye ārādhayeyyāti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『vācānurakkhī』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ kusale vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato kusalaṃ nāma.

Yassa puggalassa kāyena dukkaṭaṃ duggatisaṃvattaniyakammaṃ natthi, vācāya dukkaṭakammaṃ natthi, manasā dukkaṭakammaṃ natthi, tīhi ṭhānehi uppajjanaṭṭhānehi saṃvutaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ 『『brāhmaṇa』』nti ahaṃ vadāmīti yojanā. Idaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ vuttanayena kusalaṃ nāma.

『『Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave…pe… kusalamūlānī』』ti idaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanayena kusalaṃ. Bhikkhave, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā vijjā pubbaṅgamā hoti, hirī ca ottappañca anudevāti yojanā. Idaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanayena kusalaṃ nāma.

Māluvā sālaṃ rukkhaṃ onataṃ bhūmiyaṃ patanaṃ karoti iva, tathā yassa janassa accantaṃ dvīsu tīsu bhavesu dussīlyaṃ atthi, so jano attānaṃ onataṃ apāyesu pākaṭaṃ karoti. Anatthakāmo jano yathā anatthaṃ icchati, tathā anatthaṃ karoti yathā, tathā īdiso dussīlo naṃ attānaṃ anatthaṃ karotīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『yassā』』tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanayena akusalaṃ.

Asmamayaṃ asmasaṅkhātaṃ pāsāṇamaṇimayaṃ vajiraṃ vajirassa uṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ pāsāṇamaṇiṃ abhimatthati vidhaṃseti iva, tathā attanā hi sayameva kataṃ attajaṃ attasambhavaṃ pāpaṃ dummedhaṃ pāpaṃ karontaṃ janaṃ abhimatthatīti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『attanā hī』』tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanayena akusalaṃ.

Devate kusalehi vivajjitā akusalā dasa kammapathe niseviya katvā garahā gārayhā bhavanti, bālamatī mandabuddhino nirayesu paccareti yojanā. Idaṃ 『『dasa kammapathe』』tiādikaṃ suttaṃ vuttanayena akusalaṃ.

『『Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave…pe… akusalamūlānī』』ti idaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanayena akusalaṃ. (15)

Yādisaṃ yaṃ bījaṃ vapate, taṃ bījaṃ tādisaṃ phalaṃ harate iva, tathā kalyāṇakārī paṇḍito kalyāṇaṃ phalaṃ harate, pāpakārī bālo ca pāpakaṃ phalaṃ harateti yojanā. Tattha 『『yādisa』』ntiādike sutte 『『kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇa』』nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, idaṃ vacanaṃ kusalaṃ. 『『Pāpakārī ca pāpaka』』nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, idaṃ vacanaṃ akusalaṃ. Idaṃ dvivacanaṃ vuttanayena kusalañca akusalañca hoti.

Kalyāṇakārī sappurisā subhena kammena suggatiṃ vajanti gacchanti, pāpakārī kāpurisā asubhena kammunā apāyabhūmiṃ vajanti gacchanti, kammassa abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇasahagatakammassa khayā khayanato vimuttacetasā samucchedavimuttipaṭippassaddhivimutticittā te sappurisā asubhe nibbanti. Kimiva nibbanti? Indhanakkhayā joti nibbāti iva, tathā te sappurisā kammassa khayā anavasesakhayanato nibbantīti yojanā. Tattha tasmiṃ 『『subhenā』』tiādigāthāvacane 『『subhena…pe… suggati』』nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, idaṃ 『『subhena…pe…suggati』』nti vacanaṃ kusale vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato kusalaṃ nāma. 『『Apāyabhūmiṃ asubhena kammunā』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha , idaṃ 『『apāya…pe… kammunā』』ti vacanaṃ akusale vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato akusalaṃ nāma. Idaṃ 『『subhenā』』tiādikaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ vuttanayena kusalañca akusalañca hoti. (16)

以下是對第122段的漢語翻譯：

1. 那個人通過避免惡口，成為語言的守護者；通過不生起貪嗔癡等，使心得到約束；通過斷除殺生等而不造作不善業，如此凈化這三種業道，他將成就仙人所宣說的聖八正道。這段經文因為在善法中作為語言的說明者而運作，所以稱為善。

對於那個身、語、意中沒有惡行，在三種生起處得到約束的人，我說他是"婆羅門"。這首偈頌按照先前的方式稱為善。

"諸比丘，這三種是善根"等語句，按照先前的方式稱為善。比丘們，對於善法的成就，明瞭是先導，慚與愧隨之而來。這句話按照先前的方式稱為善。

如同蔓藤使樹木傾斜落地，同樣地，對於那些在兩三世中極度缺乏德行的人，他們使自己向下落入惡趣。如同不善意圖的人追求不幸，同樣地，這樣的惡人使自己遭受不幸。這段語句按照先前的方式稱為不善。

如同用金剛石擊碎金剛石礦石一般，同樣地，人們用自己所作的惡業擊碎作惡的人。這段語句按照先前的方式稱為不善。

諸天遠離善法，實踐十種不善業道，因此受到譴責，愚昧、智慧低下的人墮入地獄。這段經文按照先前的方式稱為不善。

"諸比丘，這三種是不善根"等語句，按照先前的方式稱為不善。

如同播種什麼樣的種子就收穫什麼樣的果實，善行者收穫善果，作惡者收穫惡果。在此，"善行者善"的語句稱為善，"作惡者惡"的語句稱為不善。這兩句話按照先前的方式稱為善與不善。

善行者善人通過善業進入善趣，惡行者劣人通過惡業進入惡趣。由於業的窮盡，這些善人心解脫，如同火因燃料耗盡而熄滅。在此，"善業善趣"的語句因為在善法中作為語言的說明者而稱為善，"惡業惡趣"的語句因為在不善法中作為語言的說明者而稱為不善。這段偈頌語句按照先前的方式稱為善與不善。

123.『『Yathāpi bhamaro pupphaṃ…pe… munī care』』ti idaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ anuññāte caraṇe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato anuññātaṃ nāma.

Bhamaro nāma puppharasapivanagahaṇavasena caraṇako madhukarādiko bhamaro. So puppharasaṃ gaṇhanto mandavego hutvā pupphañca vaṇṇañca gandhañca avināsetvā yāvadatthaṃ puppharasaṃ pivitvā madhukaraṇatthāya ca puppharasaṃ gahetvā madhukaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ paleti. Pupphavaṇṇagandhā pākatikāva honti. Evameva piṇḍāya gāmaṃ pavisanto muni pasādajanakaṃ ālokanavilokanagamanatiṭṭhanādikaṃ janetvā pītisomanassasahitaṃ pasādaṃ janetvā saddhādeyyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ yāpanamattaṃ paṭiggahetvā gāmato nikkhamitvā udakaphāsukaṭṭhāne vane bhesajjaṃ limpanto viya, kantāre puttamaṃsaṃ khādanto viya, piṇḍapātaṃ paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjitvā bhamaro vane madhuṃ karoti viya, kammaṭṭhānānurūpaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ pavisitvā jhānamaggaphalanibbattanatthāya samaṇadhammakaraṇatthāya gāme care careyyāti adhippāyo veditabbo.

『『Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṃ karaṇīyāni…pe… imāni kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṃ tīṇi karaṇīyānī』』ti idaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā anuññāte ācāre atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato anuññātaṃ nāma. Tasmiṃ sutte yo bhikkhu sīlaṃ pāti rakkhati, iti rakkhaṇato so bhikkhu pāti nāma. Yaṃ sīlaṃ taṃ pātiṃ bhikkhuṃ apāyādidukkhato moceti, iti mocanato taṃ sīlaṃ pātimokkhaṃ nāma. Yena sīlena bhikkhu saṃvaritabbacakkhundriyādikaṃ saṃvarati, iti saṃvaraṇakaraṇato taṃ sīlaṃ saṃvaraṃ nāma, pātimokkhaṃ eva saṃvaraṃ pātimokkhasaṃvaraṃ, pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvuto samannāgato hutvā saṃvuṇanato catuiriyāpathesu cārako hoti, iti saṃvuṇanato bhikkhu pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto nāma. Viharati catuiriyāpathe pavatteti. Vārittacāraṃ vajjetvā cārittasīlaṃ ādāya caraṇaṃ ācāro, agocare vajjetvā gocare caraṇaṃ gocaroti. Attho vuccamāno ativitthāro bhavissati, tasmā kiñcimattaṃ kathetvā sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttabhāvaṃ kathessāma.

『『Ettakameva suttaṃ 『anuññāta』nti niddhāritabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『dasayime, bhikkhave, dhammā pabbajitena abhiṇhaṃ paccavekkhitabbā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ 『『dasā』』tiādikaṃ suttampi anuññāte dasavidhe paccavekkhitabbe dhamme vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato anuññātaṃ nāma. 『『Tīṇimāni…pe… karaṇīyānī』』ti idaṃ suttampi anuññāte tividhe sucarite vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato anuññātaṃ nāma.

Nānāvidhaṃ anuññātaṃ suttaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ suttaṃ paṭikkhitta』』nti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ paṭikkhitta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Natthi puttasamaṃ pemaṃ, natthi gosamitaṃ dhanaṃ;

Natthi sūriyasamā ābhā, samuddaparamā sarā』』ti. –

Idaṃ devaputtavacanaṃ paṭikkhipanto bhagavā –

『『Natthi attasamaṃ pemaṃ, natthi dhaññasamaṃ dhanaṃ;

Natthi paññāsamā ābhā, vuṭṭhi ve paramā sarā』』ti. –

Gāthaṃ āha. Ettha etasmiṃ gāthādvaye yaṃ 『『natthi puttasamaṃ pema』』ntiādikaṃ purimakaṃ hoti. Idaṃ 『『natthi puttasamaṃ pema』』ntiādikaṃ devaputtavacanaṃ bhagavatā paṭikkhittattā, paṭikkhitte atthe pavattanato ca paṭikkhittaṃ nāma.

我來 譯這段巴利語復註：

1. "如蜜蜂採花...乃至...牟尼應行"這首偈頌，因為在許可的行為中作為語言的說明而運作，所以稱為"許可"。

"蜜蜂"指爲了吸取花蜜而行動的蜜蜂等。它採集花蜜時動作輕柔，不損壞花的顏色和香氣，適量地吸取花蜜，爲了制蜜而取蜜后飛向森林中的蜂巢。花的顏色和香氣保持原樣。同樣地，牟尼進入村落托缽時，以能生起信心的觀望、行走、停立等舉止，引生信心和歡喜，接受適量的信施食物，離開村落後，在水邊適宜的林中，如同塗抹藥物，如同在荒野中吃自己兒子的肉一樣，省察后受用托缽食，如同蜜蜂在林中造蜜一樣，進入適合禪修的林中，爲了生起禪定、道果和涅槃，爲了修習沙門法而在村中行走。這是應當理解的意思。

"諸比丘，比丘有三件應做之事...乃至...諸比丘，這是比丘的三件應做之事"，這段經文因為在世尊許可的行為義中作為語言的說明而運作，所以稱為"許可"。在那經中，比丘守護戒律，因為守護所以稱為"護持者"。戒律能使護持的比丘從惡趣等苦中解脫，因為解脫所以稱為"別解脫"。比丘以此戒律約束應當約束的眼根等，因為有約束作用所以稱為"律儀"，別解脫即是律儀，稱為別解脫律儀。具足別解脫律儀而約束，在四威儀中行走，因為約束所以稱為持守別解脫律儀的比丘。住於四威儀中。避免禁止的行為，受持應行的戒行稱為"行為"，避免不行處而行於行處稱為"行處"。如果詳述其義將過於冗長，所以我們只說一些，並將說明這是建立教法的經文。

因為需要說明"僅此經文應確定為'許可'"，所以說"諸比丘，這十法是出家人應當經常省察的"等。這個"十法"等經文，因為在許可的十種應省察法中作為語言的說明而運作，所以稱為"許可"。"三種...應做之事"等經文，因為在許可的三種善行中作為語言的說明而運作，所以稱為"許可"。

論師已確定了各種許可的經文，我們也已瞭解，因為需要問"什麼是禁止的經文"，所以說"其中什麼是禁止"等。

"無愛勝於子，無財等於牛， 無光同於日，諸水海為最。"

世尊否定這個天子的話，說道：

"無愛勝於己，無財等於谷， 無光同於慧，諸水雨為最。"

在這兩首偈頌中，"無愛勝於子"等前偈，因為是被世尊否定的天子之言，且運作于被否定的義理中，所以稱為"禁止"。

Dubbhikkhakāle vā kantāre vā mātāpitaro puttadhītaro ghātetvāpi attānameva posenti, tasmā 『『natthi attasamaṃ pema』』nti vuttaṃ. Dubbhikkhakālādīsu hiraññasuvaṇṇasārādīni, gomahiṃsādīnipi dhaññagahaṇatthāya dhaññassāmikānaṃ datvā dhaññameva gaṇhanti, tasmā 『『natthi dhaññasamaṃdhana』』nti vuttaṃ. Sūriyādīnaṃ ābhā paccuppannatamaṃ ekadesaṃva vinodeti, paññā pana dasasahassilokadhātumpi ekapajjotaṃ ekobhāsaṃ kātuṃ samatthā, atītānāgatapaccuppannadhammakoṭṭhāsesupi paṭicchādakaṃ kilesatamampi vidhamati, tasmā 『『natthi paññāsamā ābhā』』ti vuttaṃ. Samuddo bhūmiyā ca ekadeseyeva tiṭṭhati, so ca deve avuṭṭhe sati khayanasabhāvo bhaveyya, vuṭṭhi pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesupi yāva ābhassarā brahmalokāpi pūrā bhavati, tasmā 『『vuṭṭhi ve paramāsarā』』ti vuttaṃ.

『『Idameva paṭikkhittaṃ niddhāritabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tīṇimāni bhikkhave』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ 『『tīṇimānī』』tiādikaṃ suttampi paṭikkhitte duccarite vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato paṭikkhittaṃ nāma. (17)

在艱難的時節或在叢林中，父母即使殺死兒女，也只養活自己，因此說「沒有什麼比自身的愛更重要」。在艱難的時節等情況下，黃金、金銀等，甚至牛和羊等，爲了獲得糧食而給糧食的主人，最終只獲得糧食，因此說「沒有什麼比糧食更珍貴」。太陽等的光輝雖然在某個地方顯現，但智慧卻能照亮十千個世界，能夠消滅過去、未來和現在的煩惱，甚至能驅除最微小的煩惱，因此說「沒有什麼比智慧更光明」。大海在土地上只佔據某個地方，若天神不降臨則會有毀滅的性質，而雨水則能充滿數以百萬計的世界，甚至能充滿阿彌陀天等天界，因此說「雨水確實是最珍貴的」。 「這正是被否定的，因此應當說明」所以說「有三件事，比丘們……」等。這個「有三件事」等的經文也因否定不善而被稱為否定的。（17）

1. Nānāvidhaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamaṃ anuññātañca paṭikkhittañcā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha katamaṃ anuññātañcā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

Bhūripaññabhūripaññavanta gotama, taṃ bhūripaññaṃ gotamaṃ ahaṃ pucchāmi. Idha loke anekā yā janatā bhītā, sā janatā kiṃsu katamā bhave. Yo ca maggo anekāyatano iti pavutto, so ca maggo kiṃsu katamo bhave. Kismiṃ dhamme ṭhito jano paralokaṃ na bhāye na bhāyeyyāti pucchatīti yojanā.

Devaputta yo jano sammāvācañca paṇidhāya, sammāmanañca paṇidhāya, kāyena pāpāni akubbamāno ca bhave, ayaṃ eko. Bahvannapānaṃ gharaṃ āvasanto ca bhave, ayaṃ eko. Saddho saddhāsampanno cittamudubhāvena mudu ca bhave, ayaṃ eko. Vadaññū yācakānaṃ yācanavasena vuttavacanaññū hutvā saṃvibhāgī ca bhave, ayaṃ eko. Iti etesu catūsu dhammesu ṭhito jano dhammesu ṭhito hutvā paralokaṃ na bhāye na bhāyeyyāti yojanā.

『『Tasmiṃ sutte katamaṃ anuññātaṃ, katamaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ nāmā』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『tattha yaṃ āhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tasmiṃ 『『kiṃsūdhā』』tiādipañhāya vissajjane 『『vācaṃ manañcā』』tiādivacane 『『vācaṃ manañca paṇidhāya sammā』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavā āha, idaṃ 『『vācaṃ…pe… sammā』』ti vacanaṃ anuññāte vacanīyādike atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato anuññātaṃ nāma. 『『Kāyena pāpāni akubbamāno』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, idaṃ 『『kāyena …pe… māno』』ti vacanaṃ pāpakubbena paṭikkhitte vuttanayena pavattanato paṭikkhittaṃ nāma. 『『Bahvanna…pe… na bhāye』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, idaṃ 『『bahvanna…pe… na bhāye』』ti vacanaṃ vuttanayena anuññātaṃ nāma. Idaṃ 『『vāca』』ntiādikaṃ vacanaṃ vuttanayadvayena anuññātañca paṭikkhittañca hoti.

『『Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa』』ntiādiko vuttatthova. 『『Tasmiṃ sabbapāpassātiādike katamaṃ anuññātaṃ, katamaṃ paṭikkhitta』』nti vattabbabhāvato 『『tattha ya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ.

Devānaminda, ahaṃ kāyasamācārampi duvidhena vadāmi – sevitabbaṃ anavajjaṃ kāyasamācārampi vadāmi, asevitabbaṃ sāvajjaṃ kāyasamācārampi ahaṃ vadāmi. Vacīsamācārādīsupi vuttanayānusārena yojanā kātabbā.

『『Kiñca vaḍḍhanahāyanaṃ āgamma kāyasamācārādikaṃ sevitabbāsevitabbabhedena vutta』』nti vattabbabhāvato 『『kiñcetaṃ paṭiccā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Akusaladhammavaḍḍhanaṃ, kusaladhammahāyanañca paṭicca kāyasamācārādayo na sevitabbā, kusaladhammavaḍḍhanaṃ, akusaladhammahāyanañca paṭicca kāyasamācārādayo sevitabbāti sallakkhetabbā. (18)

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 124. 導師已確定了各種被否定的，我們也已了知，因為應當詢問"什麼是許可的和被否定的"，所以說"其中什麼是許可的"等。 具有廣大智慧的喬達摩啊，我問你這位具有廣大智慧的喬達摩。在此世間有許多恐懼的人們，那些人們是什麼？所說的那許多道路是什麼？安住于什麼法的人不會害怕來世？ 天子啊，若有人正確地安立語言，正確地安立意念，身體不造作惡業，這是一種。居住在有豐富飲食的家中，這是一種。具足信心，以心柔軟而溫和，這是一種。知恩，對乞求者知道說話的方式而樂於分享，這是一種。如是安住于這四法的人，安住於法而不會害怕來世。 因為應當詢問"在那經中什麼是許可的，什麼是被否定的"，所以說"其中所說的"等。其中在"什麼是"等問題的回答中"語言和意念"等話語中，世尊所說的"正確地安立語言和意念"這話，這"語言...乃至...正確"的話因為通過表達和說明應當說等義而運作，所以稱為許可的。所說的"身體不造作惡業"這話，這"身體...乃至...不造作"的話因為依所說方式運作于否定造惡，所以稱為被否定的。所說的"豐富...乃至...不怕"這話，這"豐富...乃至...不怕"的話依所說方式稱為許可的。這"語言"等話依兩種所說方式既是許可的也是被否定的。 "不造作一切惡"等的義已說。因為應當說"在那'一切惡'等中什麼是許可的，什麼是被否定的"，所以說"其中所"等。 天帝，我說身行也有兩種：我說應當實行的無過失身行，我說不應實行的有過失身行。對語行等也應依所說方式類推。 因為應當說"依什麼增長和減損而說身行等有應行不應行的區別"，所以說"依什麼"等。應當了知：因為不善法增長，善法減損，所以不應實行身行等；因為善法增長，不善法減損，所以應當實行身行等。（18）

1. Nānāvidhaṃ anuññātañca paṭikkhittañca ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『katamo suttaviseso thavo』』ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā ayaṃ suttaviseso thavo nāmāti viññāpetuṃ 『『tattha katamo thavo』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu aṭṭhavīsatividhesu lokiyādīsu sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttesu katamo suttaviseso thavo nāmāti pucchati.

Maggānaṃ jaṅghamaggadiṭṭhimaggādīnaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko sammādiṭṭhimaggaṅgādiaṭṭhaṅgiko maggo seṭṭho uttamo. Saccānaṃ vacīsaccakhattiyādisammutisaccaparamatthasaccānaṃ caturo dukkhasamudayanirodhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāvasena caturo ariyasaccā padā seṭṭhā uttamā. Dhammānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatasappaccayadhammānaṃ virāgo asaṅkhatanibbānasaṅkhāto virāgo dhammo seṭṭho uttamo. Dvipadānaṃ sabbadevamanussādīnaṃ dvipadānaṃ cakkhumā pañcavidhacakkhumā bhagavā seṭṭho uttamoti yojanā. Ayaṃ 『『maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko』』tiādisuttaviseso thave atthe vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato thavo nāma.

『『Ayameva suttaviseso thavo』』ti vattabbattā 『『tīṇimāni bhikkhave』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Apadā ahimacchādayo vā, dvipadā manussasakuṇapakkhijātikādayo vā, catuppadā hatthiassagomahiṃsādayo vā, bahuppadā satapadiādayo vā, rūpino kāmarūpasattā vā, arūpino arūpasattā vā, saññino sattaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattā vā, asaññino asaññasattā vā, nevasaññīnāsaññino bhavagge nibbattasattā vā yāvatā yattakā sattā saṃvijjanti, tesaṃ tattakānaṃ apadādīnaṃ sattānaṃ yadidaṃ yo ayaṃ arahaṃ sammāsambuddho tathāgato uppanno, so ayaṃ arahaṃ sammāsambuddho tathāgato aggaṃ aggoti akkhāyati, seṭṭhaṃ seṭṭhoti akkhāyati, pavaraṃ pavaroti akkhāyati, ayaṃ paṭhamo aggo.

Saṅkhatānaṃ dhammānaṃ vā sappaccayasabhāvānaṃ vā, asaṅkhatānaṃ paccayehi asaṅkharitānaṃ paṇṇattimattabhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ vā yāvatā yattakā paṇṇattī voharīyanti, tattakehi paṇṇattīhi paññapetabbānaṃ tesaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatānaṃ dhammānaṃ yadidaṃ yo ayaṃ madanimmadano…pe… yo ayaṃ nirodho, yaṃ idaṃ nibbānamaggaphalānamālambaṇaṃ bhavati, so ayaṃ madanimmadanādiko dhammo aggaṃ aggoti akkhāyati…pe… akkhāyati, ayaṃ dutiyo aggo.

Saṅghānaṃ yāvatā paṇṇatti, gaṇānaṃ yāvatā paṇṇatti, mahājanasannipātānaṃ yāvatā paṇṇatti voharīyanti, tattakehi paṇṇattīhi paññapetabbānaṃ tesaṃ saṅghagaṇādīnaṃ yāni imāni cattāri puggalāni purisayugāni, ye ime aṭṭha purisapuggalā…pe… lokassa yaṃ idaṃ puññakkhettaṃ saṃvijjati, so ayaṃ catupurisayugādiko tathāgatasāvakasaṅgho aggaṃ aggoti akkhāyati…pe… akkhāyati, ayaṃ tatiyo aggo. Imāni tīṇi tathāgatanibbānaariyasaṅgharatanāni aggāni bhavanti.

Sabbalokuttaro apadādisabbasattalokato uttaro satthā ca, kusalapakkhato kusalaanavajjapakkhabhāvato uttaro dhammo ca, narasīhassa satthuno gaṇo ca iti tīṇi satthudhammagaṇaratanāni aggāni, tāni tīṇi satthudhammagaṇaratanāni visissare guṇavasena visissanti.

Samaṇapadumasañcayo sare ruhamānaṃ padumaṃ sobhanaṃ iva sāsane sobhanasamaṇapadumasamūho gaṇo ca, dhammavaro ca, vidūnaṃ sakkato naravaradamako naravarānaṃ brahmadevamanussarājarājamahāmaccādīnaṃ damako anudamako cakkhumā sambuddho ca iti tīṇi gaṇadhammabuddharatanāni lokassa uttari bhavanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 125. 導師已確定了各種許可的和被否定的，我們也已了知，因為應當詢問"什麼是讚歎的特殊經"，所以這樣詢問后爲了使人了知這特殊經稱為讚歎，所以說"其中什麼是讚歎"等。其中"其中"是指在那二十八種世間等的立教經中，詢問什麼特殊經稱為讚歎。 在諸道中，包括步行道、見道等，八支聖道，包括正見等八支是最殊勝最上。在諸諦中，包括語言真實、王族等世俗諦和勝義諦，四聖諦即苦、集、滅、道四諦是最殊勝最上。在諸法中，包括一切有為有緣之法，離貪即無為涅槃所稱的離貪法是最殊勝最上。在二足眾中，包括一切天人等二足眾，具眼者即具五眼的世尊是最殊勝最上。這"八支道"等特殊經因為通過表達和說明讚歎義而運作，所以稱為讚歎。 因為應當說"只有這特殊經是讚歎"，所以說"三種"等。無足的蛇魚等，或二足的人類鳥類等，或四足的象馬牛水牛等，或多足的蜈蚣等，或有色的欲界色界眾生，或無色的無色界眾生，或有想的七識住眾生，或無想的無想眾生，或非想非非想的生於有頂的眾生，凡是存在的眾生，在那些無足等眾生中，這位阿羅漢、正等正覺、如來出現，這位阿羅漢、正等正覺、如來被稱為最上中的最上，被稱為最勝中的最勝，被稱為最妙中的最妙，這是第一最上。 在有為法即有緣性的法中，或在無為即不被諸緣所造作的僅是概念的法中，凡是言說的概念，以那些概念所表示的那些有為無為法中，這位除慢...乃至...這滅，即是涅槃道果的所緣，這位除慢等法被稱為最上中的最上...乃至...被稱為，這是第二最上。 在僧眾的概念中，在團體的概念中，在大眾集會的概念中所言說的，以那些概念所表示的那些僧團等中，這四雙八輩...乃至...是世間的福田，這四雙等如來聲聞僧被稱為最上中的最上...乃至...被稱為，這是第三最上。這三種如來、涅槃、聖僧寶是最上。 超越一切世間，超越無足等一切眾生世間的導師，以及從善品方面即從善無過失品的方面超越的法，以及人中獅子導師的團體，如是三種導師法團寶是最上，那三種導師法團寶以功德而殊勝。 沙門蓮花眾如在池中生長的莊嚴蓮花一般在教法中莊嚴的沙門蓮花集團，以及殊勝法，以及受智者尊敬的調伏人中最勝者即調伏婆羅門、天人、人王、大臣等的調伏者、隨調伏者、具眼的正覺者，如是三種團法佛寶是世間最上。

Appaṭisamo satthā ca, nirupadāho niggataupadāho, sabbo dhammo ca ariyo gaṇavaro ca iti yāni tīṇi buddhadhammagaṇaratanāni aggāni, tāni tīṇi…pe… nāni khalu ekaṃsena visissare visissanti.

Saccanāmo avitathasaccadesanato saccanāmo khemo sabbābhibhū sabbe manussadevādike anabhibhavamānopi guṇātirekavasena abhibhavamāno viya pavattanato sabbābhibhū jino ca, saccadhammo avitathasabhāvato saccadhammo ca, tassa saccadhammassa uttari uttamo añño dhammo natthi, viññūnaṃ niccaṃ pūjito pūjāraho ariyasaṅgho ca iti tīṇi lokassa uttari uttamāni bhavanti.

Ekāyanapadassa vacanattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 170) bahudhā vutto. Jātikhayantadassī hitānukampī bhagavā ekāyanaṃ maggaṃ pajānāti. 『『Yaṃ ekāyanaṃ maggaṃ pajānāti, tena maggena kiṃ taratī』』ti vattabbabhāvato 『『etena maggenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yaṃ maggaṃ bhagavā jānāti, etena maggena pubbe atītamaddhānaṃ buddhādayo ariyā oghaṃ saṃsāroghaṃ tariṃsu, anāgatamaddhānaṃ tarissanti, ye cāpi buddhādayo paccuppanne uppajjanti, te cāpi buddhādayo paccuppanne taranti, visuddhipekkhā visuddhiṃ apekkhamānā sattā devamanussaseṭṭhaṃ tādisaṃ yathāvuttaguṇaṃ taṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ namassanti, iti ayaṃ nānāvidhasuttavisesopi thave ratanattaye, ratanattayaguṇe ca vācakañāpakabhāvena pavattanato thavo nāma. Iccetaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttavisesadassako saṃvaṇṇanāvisesopi sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti veditabbo.

Amhākācariya tumhehi amhākācariyehi soḷasappabhedasaṃkilesabhāgiyādisāsanapaṭṭhānasuttañceva aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ lokiyādisāsanapaṭṭhānasuttañca niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『tesu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttavisesesu katamaṃ suttavisesaṃ katamena suttavisesena saṃsanditvā niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tattha lokiyaṃsutta』』ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – 『『evaṃ duvidhampi sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ nānāsuttapadāni udāharantena vibhajitvā idāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādīhi saṃsanditvā dassetuṃ puna 『lokiyaṃ sutta』ntiādi āraddha』』nti (netti. aṭṭha. 170) vuttaṃ.

Tattha tatthāti tesu soḷasavidhesu saṃkilesabhāgiyādīsu sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttavisesesu ceva aṭṭhavīsatividhesu lokiyādīsu sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttavisesesu ca akusalapakkhe pavattaṃ lokiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyasuttena samānatthabhāvena saṃsandati, kusalapakkhe pavattaṃ lokiyaṃ suttaṃ vāsanābhāgiyasuttena samānatthabhāvena saṃsandati, tasmā lokiyaṃ suttaṃ ekavidhampi saṃkilesabhāgiyena ca vāsanābhāgiyena ca dvīhi suttehi niddisitabbaṃ. Dassanapakkhe pavattaṃ lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ dassanabhāgiyena samānatthabhāvena saṃsandati, bhāvanāpakkhe pavattaṃ lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ bhāvanābhāgiyena samānatthabhāvena saṃsandati, asekkhapakkhe pavattaṃ lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ asekkhabhāgiyena samānatthabhāvena saṃsandati, tasmā lokuttarampi suttaṃ dassanabhāgiyena ca bhāvanābhāgiyena ca asekkhabhāgiyena ca tīhi suttehi niddisitabbaṃ. Vuttanayānusārena sesesupi saṃsandanayojanā kātabbā.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 無與倫比的導師，無煩惱的、離煩惱的一切法，以及殊勝的聖眾，如是三種佛法僧寶是最上，那三種...乃至...確實是殊勝的。 具有真實之名因為宣說不虛假真實而具有真實之名，安穩的、一切勝出者因為雖然不凌駕一切人天等但以功德超勝而似乎凌駕而運作所以是一切勝出者的勝者，以及真實法因為具有不虛假自性而成為真實法，那真實法之上沒有其他更殊勝的法，以及常受智者尊敬值得供養的聖僧，如是三種是世間最上最勝。 一乘道的語義在註釋書中有多種解釋。見到生滅盡頭、悲愍利益的世尊了知一乘道。因為應當說"他了知的一乘道，以那道度過什麼"，所以說"以此道"等。世尊所知的道，以此道過去的佛等聖者度過了輪迴暴流，未來的將度過，現在生起的佛等也以此度過，希求清凈的眾生禮敬如是具有所說功德的最勝天人即正等正覺者。如是這各種特殊經也因為通過表達和說明三寶及三寶功德中的讚歎而運作，所以稱為讚歎。應當了知，這顯示立教特殊經的特殊註釋也稱為立教。 我們的導師，你們我們的導師們已確定了十六種染污分等立教經以及二十八種世間等立教經，我們也已了知，因為應當說"在那些染污分等立教特殊經中，應當以哪種特殊經與哪種特殊經相對應地說明"，所以開始說"其中世間經"等。但在註釋書中說："如是以引用各種經句分別說明兩種立教后，現在爲了與染污分等相對應地顯示，再次開始說'世間經'等。" 其中"其中"是指在那十六種染污分等立教特殊經以及二十八種世間等立教特殊經中，運作于不善品的世間經與染污分經以相同義相對應，運作于善品的世間經與習氣分經以相同義相對應，因此世間經雖然是一種也應當以染污分和習氣分兩種經來說明。運作于見道品的出世間經與見道分經以相同義相對應，運作于修道品的出世間經與修道分經以相同義相對應，運作于無學品的出世間經與無學分經以相同義相對應，因此出世間經也應當以見道分、修道分和無學分三種經來說明。對其餘的也應依所說方式類推相對應。

Amhākācariya tumhehi amhākācariyehi nayadassanavasena suttavisesasaṃsandanaṃ dassitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kimatthāya saṃkilesabhāgiyādibhedena vibhajitvā bhagavatā vutta』』nti vattabbattā 『『vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyassa suttassa nigghātāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca suttavasena suttatthā gahitā.

『『Yaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, taṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ kittakehi suttehi vibhajitvā niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ chabbisatiyā puggalehi niddisitabba』』nti vuttaṃ. 『『Te chabbīsati puggalā katihi suttehi samanvesitabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『te tīhī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Dassanabhāgiyena sattādhiṭṭhānena, bhāvanābhāgiyena sattādhiṭṭhānena, asekkhabhāgiyena sattādhiṭṭhānena cāti tīhi suttehi te chabbīsati puggalā samanvesitabbā.

『『Katamehi katamehi katamaṃ katamaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tattha dassanabhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu tīsu dassanabhāgiyādīsu suttesu. Tatthāti vā tesu chabbīsatiyā puggalesu. Sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ dassanabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ ekabījinā puggalena ca niddisitabbaṃ…pe… dhammānusārinā puggalena ca niddisitabbaṃ, iti imehi pañcahi puggalehi sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ dassanabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbaṃ. Ettha ca dassanaggahaṇena sotāpattiphalaṭṭhāpi gahitā, tasmā ekabījikolaṃkolasattakkhattuparamā phalaṭṭhāpi gahitā.

Saddhānusārī pana yo vipassanākkhaṇe saddhaṃ dhuraṃ katvā sotāpattimaggaṃ nibbatteti, so puggalo nibbattetabbasotāpattimaggakkhaṇe saddhānusārī nāma, saddhāya samāpattiṃ anussarati, iti saddhāya samāpattiyā anussaraṇato sotāpattimaggaṭṭho puggalo saddhānusārī nāma. So puggalo sotāpattiphalakkhaṇe saddhāya vimuttattā saddhāvimutto hutvā ekabījikolaṃkolasattakkhattuparamo bhavati. Yo pana puggalo vipassanākkhaṇe paññaṃ dhuraṃ katvā sotāpattimaggaṃ nibbatteti, so puggalo nibbattetabbasotāpattimaggakkhaṇe dhammānusārī nāma, dhammena paññāya samāpattiṃ anussarati, iti dhammena paññāya samāpattiyā anussaraṇato dhammānusārī nāma. So puggalo phalakkhaṇe diṭṭhiyā paññāya nirodhaṃ pattattā diṭṭhipatto hutvā ekabīji…pe… paramo bhavati. Dhammoti cettha paññā gahitā. Iti pabhedato dve maggaṭṭhā, cha phalaṭṭhāti aṭṭhahi ariyapuggalehi, sampiṇḍite pana pañcahi ariyapuggalehi sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ dassanabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 我們的導師，你們我們的導師們已經通過顯示方法而示現了特殊經的相對應，我們也已了知，因為應當說"為何目的世尊以染污分等區別而分別說"，所以說"習氣分經是爲了滅除染污分經"等。這裡依經而攝取經義。 因為應當說"導師所確定的補特伽羅立足點，應當以多少經分別說明那補特伽羅立足點"，所以說"出世間經的補特伽羅立足點應當以二十六種補特伽羅來說明"。因為應當說"那二十六種補特伽羅應當以幾種經來尋求"，所以說"以三種"等。應當以見道分的補特伽羅立足點、修道分的補特伽羅立足點、無學分的補特伽羅立足點這三種經來尋求那二十六種補特伽羅。 因為應當說"以哪些經說明哪些經"，所以說"其中見道分"等。其中"其中"是指在那見道分等三種經中。或者"其中"是指在那二十六種補特伽羅中。補特伽羅立足點的一分見道分經，應當以一種子補特伽羅來說明...乃至...以法隨行補特伽羅來說明，如是應當以這五種補特伽羅來說明補特伽羅立足點的一分見道分經。這裡以"見"的攝取也攝取了預流果者，因此也攝取了一種子、家家、七次有補特伽羅果位者。 但是信隨行者是在觀禪時以信為首而生起預流道者，那補特伽羅在將生起的預流道剎那稱為信隨行者，以信隨念三摩缽底，如是因為以信隨念三摩缽底所以預流道位補特伽羅稱為信隨行者。那補特伽羅在預流果剎那因為以信解脫而成為信解脫，成為一種子、家家、七次有補特伽羅。但是那補特伽羅在觀禪時以慧為首而生起預流道者，那補特伽羅在將生起的預流道剎那稱為法隨行者，以法即慧隨念三摩缽底，如是因為以法即慧隨念三摩缽底所以稱為法隨行者。那補特伽羅在果剎那因為以見慧證得滅而成為見至，成為一種子...乃至...有補特伽羅。這裡"法"是指慧。如是分別有兩種道位者，六種果位者，即八種聖者，但總括而言應當以五種聖者來說明補特伽羅立足點的一分見道分經。

Imesaṃ ekabījiādīnaṃ puggalānaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesatthattā ceva dassanabhāgiyatthattā ca sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ dassanabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ ettakehi puggalehi niddisitabbanti niyametvā ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ dassanabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ kittakehi puggalehi niddisitabba』』nti pucchitabbattā –

『『Bhāvanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ dvādasahi puggalehi niddisitabbaṃ sakadāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannena, sakadāgāminā, anāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannena, anāgāminā, antarāparinibbāyinā, upahaccaparinibbāyinā, asaṅkhāraparinibbāyinā, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyinā , uddhaṃsotena akaniṭṭhagāminā, saddhāvimuttena, diṭṭhippattena, kāyasakkhinā cāti bhāvanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ imehi dvādasahi puggalehi niddisitabba』』nti –

Vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ bhāvanābhāgiyaṃ suttanti gahetabbaṃ. Sakadā…pe… pannena sakadāgāmimaggaṭṭhena puggalena, sakadāgāminā sakadāgāmiphalaṭṭhena, anāgāmi…pe… pannena anāgāmimaggaṭṭhena, anāgāminā anāgāmiphalaṭṭhena, avihādīsu pañcasu suddhāvāsesu āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyanasabhāvena antarāparinibbāyīnāmakena anāgāminā, āyuvemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyanasabhāvena upahaccaparinibbāyīnāmakena anāgāminā, asaṅkhārena appayogena arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyanasabhāvena asaṅkhāraparinibbāyīnāmakena anāgāminā, sasaṅkhārena sappayogena arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyanasabhāvena sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyīnāmakena anāgāminā, avihādīhi uddhaṃ atappādīsu upapattisotena arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyanasabhāvena uddhaṃsotanāmakena anāgāminā, akaniṭṭhaṃ gantvā arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyanasabhāvena akaniṭṭhagāmīnāmakena anāgāminā, saddhāya vimuttattā saddhāvimuttanāmakena anāgāminā, diṭṭhiyā paññāya nirodhaṃ pattattā diṭṭhippattanāmakena anāgāminā cāti imehi ekādasahi ajhānalābhīpuggalehi ca, kāyena nāmakāye phuṭṭhānaṃ arūpajhānānaṃ anantaraṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti, iti sacchikaraṇato kāyasakkhīnāmakena jhānalābhinā cāti dvādasahi puggalehi niddisitabbaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 因為這些一種子補特伽羅等具有補特伽羅立足點一分的意義以及見道分的意義，所以導師確定並分別了補特伽羅立足點一分見道分經應當以這些補特伽羅來說明，我們也已了知，因為應當詢問"補特伽羅立足點一分見道分經應當以多少補特伽羅來說明"，所以說： "修道分經應當以十二種補特伽羅來說明，即： 向一來果現證道者 一來者 向不還果現證道者 不還者 中般涅槃者 生般涅槃者 無行般涅槃者 有行般涅槃者 上流至色究竟者 信解脫者 見至者 身證者 修道分經應當以這十二種補特伽羅來說明。" 其中也應當理解為補特伽羅立足點一分修道分經。以一來道位補特伽羅即向一來果...乃至...道者，以一來果位者即一來者，以不還道位即向不還果...乃至...道者，以不還果位者即不還者，以在五凈居天中的無煩等天中不超過壽命中間而證得阿羅漢后具有般涅槃性質的稱為中般涅槃的不還者，以超過壽命中間而證得阿羅漢后具有般涅槃性質的稱為生般涅槃的不還者，以無行即無加行而證得阿羅漢后具有般涅槃性質的稱為無行般涅槃的不還者，以有行即有加行而證得阿羅漢后具有般涅槃性質的稱為有行般涅槃的不還者，以從無煩等天往上在無熱天等天中以生流而證得阿羅漢后具有般涅槃性質的稱為上流的不還者，以去到色究竟天而證得阿羅漢后具有般涅槃性質的稱為往色究竟的不還者，以因信解脫而稱為信解脫的不還者，以因見慧證得滅而稱為見至的不還者，這十一種非得禪定的補特伽羅，以及以名身觸得無色定之後現證涅槃，如是因現證而稱為身證的得禪定者，如是以十二種補特伽羅來說明。

Imesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ puggalānaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesatthattā ceva bhāvanābhāgiyatthattā ca sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ bhāvanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ ettakehi puggalehi niddisitabbanti niyametvā ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『kittakehi puggalehi sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā –

『『Asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ navahi puggalehi niddisitabbaṃ saddhāvimuttena, paññāvimuttena, suññatavimuttena, animittavimuttena, appaṇihitavimuttena, ubhatobhāgavimuttena, samasīsinā, paccekabuddhehi, sammāsambuddhehi cāti asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ imehi navahi puggalehi niddisitabba』』nti –

Vuttaṃ . Tattha sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbanti yojetabbaṃ. Saddhāya kilesehi vimuttattā arahattaphalakkhaṇe saddhāvimutto arahā, tena saddhāvimuttena. Paññāya vimuttattā arahattaphalakkhaṇe paññāvimutto arahā, tena paññāvimuttena. Suññatavipassanāsaṅkhātena anattānupassanena vimuttattā suññatavimutto arahā, tena suññatavimuttena. Animittānupassanāsaṅkhātena aniccānupassanena vimuttattā animittavimutto arahā, tena animittavimuttena. Appaṇihitānupassanāsaṅkhātena dukkhānupassanena vimuttattā appaṇihitavimutto arahā, tena appaṇihitavimuttena. Ubhato rūpakāyanāmakāyato ubhatobhāgato vimuttattā ubhatobhāgavimutto arahā, tena ubhatobhāgavimuttena. Purimā pañca puggalā ajhānalābhino gahitā, ubhatobhāgavimutto pana jhānalābhīgahito.

Samasīsī nāma iriyāpathasamasīsī, rogasamasīsī, jīvitasamasīsīti tividhā honti. Imesu tīsu samasīsīsu yo arahā catūsu iriyāpathesu ekekasmiṃ iriyāpathe arahattaṃ patvā aññaṃ iriyāpathaṃ asaṅkamitvā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ iriyāpatheyeva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ arahā iriyāpathasamasīsī nāma. Yo arahā yasmiṃ roge uppanne arahattaṃ patvā tato rogato anuṭṭhahitvā tasmiṃ rogeyeva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ arahā rogasamasīsī nāma. Yo arahā paccavekkhaṇavīthiyānantaraṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā tato maraṇāsannajavanavīthiyānantarameva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ arahā vārasamatāya jīvitasamasīsī nāma. Vārasamatāti ca paccavekkhaṇavīthi maggavithyānuvattakattā paccavekkhaṇavīthianantaraṃ pavattamānāyapi maraṇāsannavīthi maggavīthianantaraṃ pavattāti vattabbārahā, tasmā vīthianantaratā vārasamatā nāma. Tāya vārasamatāya ca jīvitasamasīsī vutto.

Saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti etthapi paccavekkhaṇavīthiyānantaraṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā bhavaṅgato vuṭṭhāya pavattavīthiyā paṭisambhidāñāṇāni pavattanti. Vuttanayena vīthianantaratāya vārasamatāya 『『saha paṭisambhidāhī』』ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavato sabbaññutaññāṇampi paccavekkhaṇavīthiyānantaraṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā bhavaṅgato vuṭṭhāya pavattavīthiyā paṭhamaṃ pavattatīti veditabbaṃ. Iminā jīvitasamasīsinā, sabbehi paccekabuddhehi, sabbehi sammāsambuddhehi cāti imehi navahi puggalehi sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ asekkhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 因為這些所說型別的補特伽羅具有補特伽羅立足點一分的意義以及修道分的意義，所以導師確定並分別了補特伽羅立足點一分修道分經應當以這些補特伽羅來說明，我們也已了知，因為應當說"補特伽羅立足點一分無學分經應當以多少補特伽羅來說明"，所以說： "無學分經應當以九種補特伽羅來說明，即： 信解脫者 慧解脫者 空解脫者 無相解脫者 無愿解脫者 俱分解脫者 等至者 辟支佛 正等正覺者 無學分經應當以這九種補特伽羅來說明。" 其中應當理解為應當說明補特伽羅立足點一分無學分經。因為以信從煩惱解脫故在阿羅漢果剎那稱為信解脫阿羅漢，即以那信解脫者。因為以慧解脫故在阿羅漢果剎那稱為慧解脫阿羅漢，即以那慧解脫者。因為以稱為空觀察的無我觀察而解脫故稱為空解脫阿羅漢，即以那空解脫者。因為以稱為無相觀察的無常觀察而解脫故稱為無相解脫阿羅漢，即以那無相解脫者。因為以稱為無愿觀察的苦觀察而解脫故稱為無愿解脫阿羅漢，即以那無愿解脫者。因為從色身和名身兩方面解脫故稱為俱分解脫阿羅漢，即以那俱分解脫者。前五種補特伽羅是指未得禪定者，但俱分解脫是指已得禪定者。 等至者有三種，即威儀等至者、病等至者、命等至者。在這三種等至者中，若阿羅漢在四威儀中的任一威儀中證得阿羅漢果后不轉換到其他威儀而在那威儀中般涅槃，這阿羅漢稱為威儀等至者。若阿羅漢在某病生起時證得阿羅漢果后不從那病中起來而在那病中般涅槃，這阿羅漢稱為病等至者。若阿羅漢在省察路之後進入有分，從有分之後緊接著臨終速行路而般涅槃，這阿羅漢因路的平等而稱為命等至者。路的平等是指省察路隨順道路，所以在省察路之後生起的臨終路也應當說是在道路之後生起，因此路的相繼性稱為路的平等。以這路的平等而說命等至者。 "與諸無礙解一起證得阿羅漢果"在這裡也是在省察路之後進入有分，從有分出起后在生起的路中無礙解智生起。依所說方式以路的相繼性的平等而說"與諸無礙解一起"。應當了知世尊的一切智也是在省察路之後進入有分，從有分出起后在生起的路中首先生起。以這命等至者、一切辟支佛、一切正等正覺者，如是以這九種補特伽羅應當說明補特伽羅立足點一分無學分經。

Imesaṃ puggalānaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesatthattā ceva asekkhabhāgiyatthattā ca evaṃ iminā 『『lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ sattādhiṭṭhāna』』ntiādinā pakārena vuttehi imehi chabbīsatiyā puggalehi ariyehi dassanabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttānaṃ vasena lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbaṃ.

Imesaṃ chabbīsatiyā puggalānaṃ sakalalokuttarasuttatthattā ceva sattādhiṭṭhānekadesasuttatthattā ca lokuttaraṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ suttaṃ. Ettakehi puggalehi niddisitabbanti ācariyena niyametvā vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『lokiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ suttaṃ kittakehi puggalehi niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『lokiyaṃ suttaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ ekūnavīsatiyā puggalehi niddisitabba』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Te ekūnavīsati lokiyā puggalā katamehi dhammehi niddiṭṭhā samanvesitabbā』』ti vattabbattā 『『te caritehī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Te ekūnavīsati lokiyā puggalā caritehi caritavisesehi niddiṭṭhā samanvesitabbāti. 『『Kathaṃ caritehi niddiṭṭhā』』ti vattabbattā 『『keci rāgacaritā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Rāgacaritadosacaritādīhi caritehi ekūnavīsati lokiyapuggalā rāgacaritā, keci dosacaritā…pe… mohacarito cāti niddiṭṭhā. Iti niddiṭṭhehi imehi ekūnavīsatiyā puggalehi lokiyasattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ suttaṃ niddisitabbaṃ. 『『Lokiya』』nti sāmaññavasena vuttampi 『『saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ lokiya』』nti visesato viññātabbaṃ.

Lokiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ suttaṃ ettakehi puggalehi niddisitabbanti ācariyena niyametvā vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ suttaṃ katamehi puggalehi niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『vāsanābhāgiya』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ suttaṃ sīlavantehi puggalehi, dhammehi ca niddisitabbanti yojetabbaṃ. 『『Kittakā sīlavantapuggalā』』ti vattabbattā 『『te sīlavanto pañca puggalā』』ti vuttaṃ. 『『Kittakā dhammā』』ti vattabbattā 『『pakatisīla』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pakatisīlavanto ca samādānasīlavanto ca cittappasādavanto ca samathavanto ca vipassanāvanto cāti pañca puggalā, pakatisīladhammo ca samādānasīladhammo ca cittappasādadhammo ca samathadhammo ca vipassanādhammo cāti pañca dhammāti imehi pañcahi puggalehi, imehi pañcahi dhammehi vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānekadesadhammādhiṭṭhānekadesaṃ suttaṃ yathākkamaṃ niddisitabbanti.

Lokuttaraṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ suttaṃ dassanabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttehi niddisitabbanti ācariyena niyametvā vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, 『『lokuttaraṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ suttaṃ kittakehi suttehi niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『lokuttaraṃ suttaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ…pe… asekkhabhāgiyenā』』ti vuttaṃ.

『『Lokiyañca lokuttarañca sattādhiṭṭhānañca dhammādhiṭṭhānañca kittakehi niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『lokiyañca…pe… ubhayena niddisitabba』』nti vuttaṃ. Ubhayenāti lokiyalokuttarena, sattādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānena samānatthabhāvena niddisitabbanti.

『『Ñāṇaṃ kittakehi niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『ñāṇaṃ paññāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ sutte ñāṇaṃ āgataṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte ñāṇaṃ ñāṇapariyāyena paññādinā niddisitabbanti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 因為這些補特伽羅具有補特伽羅立足點一分的意義以及無學分的意義，所以如是以"出世間經是補特伽羅立足點"等方式所說的這二十六種聖補特伽羅，依見道分、習氣分、無學分經，應當說明出世間經即補特伽羅立足點一分經。 因為這二十六種補特伽羅具有完整出世間經義以及補特伽羅立足點一分經義，所以出世間補特伽羅立足點一分經應當以這些補特伽羅來說明，這是導師所確定並分別的，我們也已了知。因為應當說"世間補特伽羅立足點一分經應當以多少補特伽羅來說明"，所以說"世間經補特伽羅立足點應當以十九種補特伽羅來說明"等。因為應當說"那十九種世間補特伽羅應當以哪些法來說明尋求"，所以說"以諸行"等。那十九種世間補特伽羅應當以諸行即行的差別來說明尋求。因為應當說"如何以諸行說明"，所以說"某些是貪行者"等。以貪行、瞋行等諸行說明十九種世間補特伽羅為貪行者，某些是瞋行者...乃至...癡行者。如是應當以這樣說明的十九種補特伽羅來說明世間補特伽羅立足點一分經。雖然總說"世間"，但應當特別理解為"染污分世間"。 導師已確定並分別了世間補特伽羅立足點一分經應當以這些補特伽羅來說明，我們也已了知。因為應當說"習氣分補特伽羅立足點一分經應當以哪些補特伽羅來說明"，所以說"習氣分"等。應當理解為習氣分補特伽羅立足點一分經應當以具戒者補特伽羅和諸法來說明。因為應當說"有多少具戒補特伽羅"，所以說"那具戒者有五種補特伽羅"。因為應當說"有多少法"，所以說"本性戒"等。這是說：本性具戒者、受持具戒者、心凈信者、具止者、具觀者這五種補特伽羅，以及本性戒法、受持戒法、心凈信法、止法、觀法這五法，應當以這五種補特伽羅和這五法依次來說明習氣分補特伽羅立足點一分和法立足點一分經。 導師已確定並分別了出世間補特伽羅立足點經應當以見道分、習氣分、無學分經來說明，我們也已了知。因為應當說"出世間法立足點經應當以多少經來說明"，所以說"出世間經法立足點...乃至...以無學分"。 因為應當說"世間與出世間、補特伽羅立足點與法立足點應當以多少來說明"，所以說"世間...乃至...應當以二者來說明"。"以二者"即應當以世間出世間、補特伽羅立足點法立足點的相同義來說明。 因為應當說"智應當以多少來說明"，所以說"智以慧"等。在任何經中智出現，在那經中智應當以智的同義詞如慧等來說明。

『『Ñeyyaṃ kittakena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『ñeyyaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannehī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ sutte ñeyyaṃ āgataṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte ñeyyaṃ ñeyyapariyāyena niddisitabbanti.

『『Ñāṇañca ñeyyañca kittakena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『ñāṇañca ñeyyañca tadubhayenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ sutte ñāṇañeyyā āgatā, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte ñāṇañeyyā ñāṇañeyyapariyāyena niddisitabbanti.

Dassanasutte yathā niddiṭṭhaṃ, tathā upadhārayitvā labbhamānato niddisitabbaṃ. Bhāvanāsutte yathā niddiṭṭhaṃ, tathā upadhārayitvā labbhamānato niddisitabbaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ dassanañca bhāvanā ca sutte yathā niddiṭṭhaṃ, tathā upadhārayitvā labbhamānato niddisitabbaṃ.

『『Sakavacanaṃparavacana』』ntiādīsupi evameva visuṃ visuṃ ca ekato ca sutte yathā niddiṭṭhaṃ, tathā upadhārayitvā labbhamānato niddisitabbanti yojanā kātabbā. 『『Ettakameva niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『yaṃ vā panā』』tiādi vuttaṃ.

『『Vipākassa hetu kammamevā』』ti vattabbattā 『『duvidho hetū』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Kilesā saṃkilesabhāgiyasuttena samānatthabhāvena niddisitabbā. Taṇhāsaṅkhāto samudayo vā kilesasaṅkhāto samudayo vā akusalasaṅkhāto samudayo vā saṃkilesabhāgiyena suttena samānatthabhāvena niddisitabbo. Lokiyakusalahetusaṅkhāto samudayo vā lokiyakusalasaṅkhāto samudayo vā vāsanābhāgiyena suttena samānatthabhāvena niddisitabbo.

Kammañca vipāko ca yathārahaṃ labbhamānasuttena niddisitabboti sāmaññavasena vibhatto, 『『kusalaṃ katamena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『tattha kusala』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu aṭṭhavīsatiyā sāsanapaṭṭhānasuttesu kusalaṃ catūhi suttehi samānatthabhāvena niddisitabbaṃ. 『『Katamehi catūhī』』ti vattabbattā 『『vāsanābhāgiyenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Lokiyakusalaṃ vāsanābhāgiyena niddisitabbaṃ samānatthattā, lokuttarakusalaṃ dassanabhāgiyena, vāsanābhāgiyena, asekkhabhāgiyena ca yathārahaṃ samānatthabhāvena niddisitabbaṃ. Kusalaṃ ettakehi niddisitabbanti niyametvā vibhattaṃ, 『『akusalaṃ katamena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『akusala』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. 『『Kusalañca akusalañca katamena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『kusalañca akusalañca tadubhayena niddisitabba』』nti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ sutte tadubhayaṃ āgataṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte āgatena tadubhayena niddisitabbaṃ.

『『Anuññātaṃ katamena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『anuññāta』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Anuññātaṃ bhagavato anuññātāya samānatāya niddisitabbaṃ. 『『Katividhaṃ anuññāta』』nti vattabbattā 『『taṃ pañcavidha』』ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yaṃ anuññātaṃ yāsu yāsu bhūmīsu dissati, taṃ anuññātaṃ tāsu tāsu bhūmīsu āgatena samānena kappiyānulomena niddisitabbaṃ.

Anuññātaṃ iminā niddisitabbanti ācariyena niyametvā vibhattaṃ, 『『paṭikkhittaṃ katamena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『paṭikkhittaṃ bhagavatā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhagavatā paṭikkhittaṃ bhagavatā paṭikkhittakāraṇena sutte āgatena vatthunā kāraṇaphalabhāvena niddisitabbaṃ. Yaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ yāsu yāsu bhūmīsu dissati, taṃ pana paṭikkhittaṃ tāsu tāsu bhūmīsu āgatena pākaṭena akappiyānulomena niddisitabbaṃ.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 因為應當說"所知應當以多少來說明"，所以說"所知以過去未來現在"等。在任何經中所知出現，在那經中所知應當以所知的同義詞來說明。 因為應當說"智與所知應當以多少來說明"，所以說"智與所知以彼二者"等。在任何經中智與所知出現，在那經中智與所知應當以智所知的同義詞來說明。 如在見道經中所說明的，如是觀察后從所得而說明。如在修道經中所說明的，如是觀察后從所得而說明。彼二者即見道與修道如在經中所說明的，如是觀察后從所得而說明。 在"自說他說"等中也應當如是分別地和合一地，如在經中所說明的，如是觀察后從所得而作相應的說明。因為應當說"僅應如是說明"，所以說"或其他"等。 因為應當說"異熟的因即是業"，所以說"因有二種"等。諸煩惱應當以染污分經的相同義來說明。渴愛所稱的集，或煩惱所稱的集，或不善所稱的集，應當以染污分經的相同義來說明。世間善因所稱的集，或世間善所稱的集，應當以習氣分經的相同義來說明。 業與異熟應當依所得經來說明，這是依總義而分別的。因為應當說"善應當以什麼來說明"，所以說"其中善"等。其中即在那二十八種立教經中，善應當以四種經的相同義來說明。因為應當說"以哪四種"，所以說"以習氣分"等。世間善因相同義應當以習氣分來說明，出世間善應當以見道分、習氣分、無學分依相應相同義來說明。已確定並分別了善應當以這些來說明，因為應當說"不善應當以什麼來說明"，所以說"不善"等。因為應當說"善與不善應當以什麼來說明"，所以說"善與不善應當以彼二者來說明"。在任何經中彼二者出現，在那經中應當以所出現的彼二者來說明。 因為應當說"許可應當以什麼來說明"，所以說"許可"等。許可應當以世尊許可的相同性來說明。因為應當說"許可有幾種"，所以說"彼有五種"等。任何許可在任何地方可見，那許可應當以在那些地方所出現的相同允許準則來說明。 導師已確定並分別了許可應當以此來說明，因為應當說"禁止應當以什麼來說明"，所以說"世尊所禁止"等。世尊所禁止應當以經中所出現的事物以因果關係來說明世尊禁止的原因。任何禁止在任何地方可見，那禁止應當以在那些地方所出現的明顯不允許準則來說明。

『『Anuññātañca paṭikkhittañca katamena niddisitabba』』nti vattabbattā 『『anuññātañca paṭikkhittañca tadubhayena niddisitabba』』nti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ sutte anuññātañca paṭikkhittañca āgataṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte āgatena tadubhayena niddisitabbaṃ.

『『Thavo katamena niddisitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『thavo pasaṃsāyā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ sutte yā yā pasaṃsā āgatā, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte āgatāya tāya tāya pasaṃsāya thavo niddisitabbo. 『『Yo thavo pasaṃsāya niddisitabbo, so thavo katividhena niddisitabbo』』ti vattabbattā 『『so pañcavidhenā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhagavato thavo ca dhammassa thavo ca ariyasaṅghassa thavo ca ariyadhammānaṃ sikkhāya thavo ca lokiyaguṇasampattiyā thavo cāti pañcavidhena veditabbo. Iti evaṃ vuttappakārena pañcavidhena thavo niddisitabbo.

Amhākācariya amhākācariyena aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā sāsanapaṭṭhāne daṭṭhabbāti vuttā, 『『katamāni tāni aṭṭhārasa mūlapadānī』』ti pucchitabbattā 『『indriyabhūmī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāsanapaṭṭhāne indriyabhūmi saddhindriyādiindriyabhūmi yehi navahi padehi niddisitabbā, sāsanapaṭṭhāne kilesabhūmi yehi navahi padehi niddisitabbā, evaṃ iminā pakārena etāni mūlapadāni nava padāni kusalapadāni, nava padāni akusalapadānīti aṭṭhārasa mūlapadāni honti. Sāsanapaṭṭhāne daṭṭhabbā, 『『kena kāraṇena aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā sāsanapaṭṭhāne daṭṭhabbāti viññāyatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『tathā hī』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathā hīti tato eva aṭṭhārasamūlapadānaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhāne daṭṭhabbattā 『『aṭṭhārasa mūlapadā kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbā? Sāsanapaṭṭhāne』』ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tena vacanena viññāyatīti. 『『Kena mūlapadānaṃ navakusalapadanavaakusalapadabhāvena aṭṭhārasabhāvo viññāyatī』』ti vattabbattā 『『tenāhā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena mūlapadānaṃ navakusalapadanavaakusalapadabhāvato āyasmā mahākaccāno –

『『Navahi ca padehi kusalā, navahi ca yujjanti akusalapakkhā;

Ete kho mūlapadā, bhavanti aṭṭhārasa padānī』』ti. –

Yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena 『『navahi…pe… padānī』』ti vacanena mūlapadānaṃ navakusalapadanavaakusalapadabhāvena aṭṭhārasabhāvo viññāyatīti.

『『Yaṃ yaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyādisoḷasavidhaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānañceva yaṃ yaṃ lokiyādiaṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānañca ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, ettakameva paripuṇṇaṃ, aññaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ niddhāretvā yuttaṃ yujjitabbaṃ natthī』』ti vattabbattā 『『niyuttaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhāna』』nti vuttaṃ. Yathāniddhāritasāsanapaṭṭhānato yaṃ yaṃ aññaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ niddhāritaṃ atthi, taṃ taṃ aññaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānaṃ niyuttaṃ yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yuttaṃ yujjitabbanti attho gahetabboti.

『『Yaṃ loko pūjayate…pe… niyuttaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānanti yattako vacanakkamo bhāsito, ettakena vacanakkamena kiṃ netti samattā, udāhu asamattā』』ti vattabbattā 『『ettāvatā』』tiādi vuttaṃ. Āyasmatā mahākaccānena yā netti bhāsitā, bhagavatā sā netti anumoditā, mūlasaṅgītiyaṃ saṅgāyantehi therāsabhehi yā netti saṅgītā, sā netti 『『yaṃ loko pūjayate…pe… niyuttaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhāna』』nti ettāvatā vacanakkamena samattā paripuṇṇāva hoti.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 因為應當說"許可和禁止應當以什麼來說明"，所以說"許可和禁止應當以彼二者來說明"。在任何經中許可和禁止出現，在那經中應當以所出現的彼二者來說明。 因為應當說"讚歎應當以什麼來說明"，所以說"讚歎以稱讚"等。在任何經中任何稱讚出現，在那經中讚歎應當以所出現的那些稱讚來說明。因為應當說"那應當以稱讚來說明的讚歎應當以幾種來說明"，所以說"彼以五種"等。應當了知為對世尊的讚歎、對法的讚歎、對聖僧的讚歎、對聖法學處的讚歎、對世間功德成就的讚歎，如是五種。如是應當以如此所說的五種方式來說明讚歎。 我們的導師，我們的導師說在立教中應當見到十八根本句，因為應當詢問"那十八根本句是什麼"，所以說"根基"等。在立教中根基即信根等根基應當以哪九句來說明，在立教中煩惱基應當以哪九句來說明，如是以此方式這些根本句有九善句、九不善句，成為十八根本句。應當在立教中見到，因為應當說"以何因由了知十八根本句應當在立教中見到"，所以說"如是"等。"如是"即因為由此十八根本句應當在立教中見到，所以說"十八根本句應當在哪裡見到？在立教中"這句話，由這句話而了知。因為應當說"以何由了知根本句以九善句九不善句成為十八"，所以說"因此說"等。因為根本句以九善句九不善句，所以尊者大迦旃延說： "以九句為善，以九句相應不善品； 這些根本句，成為十八句。" 由"以九...乃至...句"這句話而了知根本句以九善句九不善句成為十八。 因為應當說"導師所確定的任何染污分等十六種立教以及任何世間等二十八種立教，僅此圓滿，沒有其他應當確定的適合的立教"，所以說"已確定的立教"。應當理解為凡是已確定的與所確定立教不同的其他立教，那些其他立教也是已確定的，應當依相應地確定為適合的。 因為應當說"'世間所尊敬...乃至...已確定的立教'這麼多的語句次第已說，以這麼多的語句次第是否導論完成，還是未完成"，所以說"以如是"等。尊者大迦旃延所說的導論，世尊所隨喜的導論，在根本結集中結集的上座們所結集的導論，那導論以"世間所尊敬...乃至...已確定的立教"這麼多的語句次第而完全圓滿。

Iti samattāya āyasmatā mahākaccānena bhāsitāya bhagavatā anumoditāya mūlasaṅgītiyaṃ saṅgāyantehi therāsabhehi saṅgītāya nettiyā atthavaṇṇanā saddhammapālanāmena mahādhammarājagurunā mahātherena racitā jinaputtānaṃ hitakarā nettivibhāvanā chabbīsādhikanavasate sakkarāje sāvaṇamāse sukkapakkhe navamadivase sūriyuggamanasamaye samattā.

Iti sāsanapaṭṭhāne sattibalānurūpā racitā vibhāvanā

Niṭṭhitā.

Nigamanakathā

Sabbasattuttamo nātho, loke uppajji nāyako;

Sambuddho gotamo jino, anekaguṇalaṅkato.

Sāsanaṃ tassa seṭṭhassa, aṭṭhavassasatādhikaṃ;

Dvisahassaṃ yadā pattaṃ, nimmalaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ subhaṃ.

Tadā bhūmissaro mahādhammarājā mahiddhiko;

Āṇācakkena sāreti, rājā noanuvattake.

Laddhā setagaje vare, loke vimhayajānake;

Appamatto mahāvīro, puññaṃ katvābhimodati.

Tasmiṃ vasseva sāvaṇe, māse navamadivase;

Sūriyuggamane kāle, nibbattāyaṃ vibhāvanā.

Yattakaṃ sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ, tattakaṃ racitaṃ mayā;

Ṭhātu nettivibhāvanā, jinaputtahitāvahā.

Iti taṃ racayantena, puññaṃ adhigataṃ mayā;

Hontu tassānubhāvena, sabbe vimuttibhāgino.

Rājadevī puttanattā, panattā ca sajātikā;

Sabbe rajjasukhe ṭhatvā, carantu caritaṃ sukhī.

Devo kāle suvassatu, sabbo raṭṭhajano sukhī;

Aññamaññaṃ ahiṃsanto, piyo hotu hitāvahoti.

Nettivibhāvinī niṭṭhitā.

我來為您直譯這段巴利文文字： 如是由大法王導師大上座名為護正法者所造的對已完成的、尊者大迦旃延所說的、世尊所隨喜的、在根本結集中由諸上座牛王所結集的導論的義釋，這利益佛子的導論解明在九百二十六年雨月白分第九日日出時分完成。 如是依能力所造的立教解明已完成。 結語： 至上導師世尊，出生於世間作導首; 正等覺者勝者喬達摩，莊嚴無數功德。 那最勝者的教法，已過二千八百年; 無垢增長吉祥。 時有大法王大神力者，以輪威統治隨順者; 得殊勝白象，令世間驚歎; 大英雄不放逸，行福而歡喜。 即於此年雨月，第九日; 日出之時，此解明得成。 教法住多久，我即造多久; 愿導論解明住世，帶來勝者子利益。 我造此論時，所得功德; 愿以其威力，一切得解脫分。 王后子孫，曾孫及親族; 愿皆安住王樂，行持快樂行。 天應時降雨，國民皆安樂; 互不相傷害，愿成可愛有益。 導論解明完。